kiri

‘ Secrétaire général Generalsekretär Secretary General NOT-RID-22043 03.11.2022 Original: FR DE EN TO THE MEMBER STATES AND ASSOCIATED MEMBERS OF OTIF AND TO REGIONAL ORGANISATIONS WHICH HAVE ACCEDED TO COTIF Depositary Notification Entry into force of the modifications to RID (Annex to Appendix C of the Convention) adopted by the 57th session of the RID Committee of Experts  2 In his capacity as depositary, the Secretary General of the Intergovernmental Organisation for International Carriage by Rail (OTIF) notifies the following: The modifications to RID (Annex to Appendix C to the Convention) adopted by the Committee of Experts on the Transport of Dangerous Goods (RID Committee of Experts) at its 57th session were notified by the Secretary General on 1 July 2022 (NOT-RID-22035). By 1 November 2022, the Secretary General had not received any objections to the above-men- tioned modifications in accordance with Article 35 § 3 of COTIF from those Member States which, in accordance with the first sentence of Article 42 § 1 of COTIF, have not made a dec- laration not to apply Appendix C (RID). Consequently, the above-mentioned modifications will enter into force on 1 January 2023 for all Member States that have not made a declaration not to apply Appendix C (RID) in accordance with the first sentence of Article 42 § 1 of COTIF. The texts are published on OTIF’s website under “Activities > Dangerous Goods > Notifica- tions”. Yours faithfully (Wolfgang Küpper) Secretary General  R I D Convention concerning International Carriage by Rail (COTIF) Appendix C – Regulations concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Rail (RID) With e ffect from 1 January 20 2 3 This text replaces the requirements of 1 January 20 21 . Note by the Secretariat of OTIF : The following are RID Contracting States (as at 1 July 20 2 2 ): Afghanistan, Albania, Algeria, Armenia, Austria, Azerbaijan, Belgium, Bosnia and Herzegovina, Bulgaria, Croatia, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Georgia, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iran, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Monaco, Montenegro, Morocco, Netherlands, North Macedonia, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Tunisia, Türkiye , United Kingdom, Ukraine. Until international traffic is resumed, Iraq's , Lebanon's and Syria's membership of OTIF is suspended. Convention concerning International Carriage by Rail (COTIF) Appendix C Regulations concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Rail (RID) Article 1 Scope § 1 This Regulation shall apply a) to the international carriage of dangerous goods by rail on the territory of the RID Contracting States , b) to carriage complementary to carriage by rail to which the CIM Uniform Rules are applicable, subject to the international prescriptions governing carriage by another mode of transport, as well as the activities referred to by the Annex to this Regulation. § 2 Dangerous goods barred from carriage by the Annex must not be accepted for international carriage. Article 1bis Definitions For the purpose of this Regulation and its Annex, “RID Contracting State” means a Member State of the Organisation which has not made a declaration in respect of this Regulation in accordance with Article 42 § 1, fir st sentence, of the Convention. Article 2 Exemptions This Regulation shall not apply, in whole or in part, to the carriage of dangerous goods for which an exemption is provided in the Annex. Exemptions may only be provided when the quantity or the nature of the exempted carriage of goods or the packaging would guarantee the safety of the carriage. Article 3 Restrictions Each RID Contracting State shall retain the right to regulate or prohibit, for reasons other than safety during carriage, the international carriage of dangerous goods on its territory. Article 4 Other prescriptions The carriage to which this Regulation applies shall remain subject to the national or international prescriptions applicable in general to the carriage of goods by rail. Article 5 Type of trains allowed. Carriage as hand luggage, registered luggage or in or on board vehicles § 1 Dangerous goods may only be carried in freight trains, except a) dangerous goods which are acceptable for carriage in accordance with the Annex complying with the relevant maximum quantities and the special conditions of carriage in trains other than freight trains; b) dangerous goods which are carried, under the special conditions of the Annex, as hand luggage, registered luggage or in or on board vehicles within the meaning of Article 12 of the CIV Uniform Rules. § 2 Dangerous goods may only be taken as hand luggage or carried or be handed over for carriage as registered luggage or in or on board vehicles if they meet the special conditions of the Annex. Article 6 Annex The Annex shall form an integral part of this Regulation. * * * The text of the Annex will be that drawn up by the Expert Committee for the Carriage of Dangerous Goods, at the time of entry into force of the Protocol of 3 June 1999 modifying the Convention concerning International Carriage by Rail (COTIF) of 9 May 1980, in accordance with Article 19 § 4 of the latter. Note by the Secretariat of OTIF: In the text that follows, " RID " refers to the Annex to Appendix C of COTIF in accordance with Article 6. In certain exceptional cases where the text of Appendix C reproduced above is referred to, referenc e will be made specifically to " Appendix C of COTIF " (e.g. in 1.1.2, 1.5.1.3). Table of Contents Part 1 General requirements 1.1 Scope and applicability 1.1.1 Structure 1.1.2 Scope 1.1.3 Exemptions 1.1.3.1 Exemptions related to the nature of the transport operation 1.1.3.2 Exemptions related to the carriage of gases 1.1.3.3 Exemptions related to the carriage of liquid fuels 1.1.3.4 Exemptions related to special provisions or to dangerous goods packed in limited or excepted quantities 1.1.3.5 Exemptions related to empty uncleaned packagings 1.1.3.6 Total maximum permissible quantity per wagon or large container 1.1.3.7 Exemptions related to the carriage of electric energy storage and production systems 1.1.3.8 Application of exemptions in carriage of dangerous goods as hand luggage, registered luggage or in or on board vehicles 1.1.3.9 Exemptions related to dangerous goods used as a coolant or conditioner during carriage 1.1.3.10 Exemptions related to the carriage of lamps containing dangerous goods 1.1.4 Applicability of other regulations 1.1.4.1 General 1.1.4.2 Carriage in a transport chain including maritime or air carriage 1.1.4.3 Use of IMO type portable tanks approved for maritime transport 1.1.4.4 Piggyback transport 1.1.4.5 Carriage other than by rail 1.1.4.6 Consignments into or through the territory of an SMGS Contracting State 1.1.4.7 Refillable pressure receptacles authorised by the United States of America Department of Transportation 1.1.5 Application of standards 1.2 Definitions, units of measurement and abbreviations 1.2.1 Definitions 1.2.2 Units of measurement 1.2.3 List of abbreviations 1.3 Training of persons involved in the carriage of dangerous goods 1.3.1 Scope and applicability 1.3.2 Nature of the training 1.3.2.1 General awareness training 1.3.2.2 Function-specific training 1.3.2.3 Safety training 1.3.3 Documentation 1.4 Safety obligations of the participants 1.4.1 General safety measures 1.4.2 Obligations of the main participants 1.4.2.1 Consignor 1.4.2.2 Carrier 1.4.2.3 Consignee 1.4.3 Obligations of the other participants 1.4.3.1 Loader 1.4.3.2 Packer 1.4.3.3 Filler 1.4.3.4 Tank-container/portable tank operator 1.4.3.5 Tank-wagon operator 1.4.3.6 Railway infrastructure manager 1.4.3.7 Unloader 1.4.3.8 Entity in charge of maintenance (ECM) 1.5 Derogations 1.5.1 Temporary derogations 1.5.2 Military consignments 1.6 Transitional measures 1.6.1 General 1.6.2 Pressure receptacles and r eceptacles for Class 2 1.6.3 Tank-wagons and battery-wagons 1.6.4 Tank-containers , portable tanks and MEGCs 1.6.5 (Reserved) 1.6.6 Class 7 1.6.6.1 Packages not requiring competent authority approval of design under the 1985, 1985 (as amended 1990), 1996, 1996 (revised), 1996 (as amended 2003), 2005, 2009 or 2012 editions of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material 1.6.6.2 Package designs approved under the 1985, 1985 (as amended 1990), 1996, 1996 (revised), 1996 (as amended 2003), 2005, 2009 or 2012 editions of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material 1.6.6.3 Packages excepted from the requirements for fissile materials under the 2011 and 2013 editions of RID (2009 edition of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material) 1.6.6.4 Special form radioactive material approved under the 1985, 1985 (as amended 1990), 1996, 1996 (revised), 1996 (as amended 2003), 2005, 2009 or 2012 editions of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material 1.7 General provisions concerning radioactive material 1.7.1 Scope and application 1.7.2 Radiation protection programme 1.7.3 Management system 1.7.4 Special arrangement 1.7.5 Radioactive material possessing other dangerous properties 1.7.6 Non-compliance 1.8 Checks and other support measures to ensure compliance with safety requirements 1.8.1 Administrative controls of dangerous goods 1.8.2 Mutual administrative support 1.8.3 Safety adviser 1.8.4 List of competent authorities and bodies designated by them 1.8.5 Notifications of occurrences involving dangerous goods 1.8.6 Administrative controls for the activities described in 1.8.7 and 1.8.8 1.8.7 Procedures for conformity assessment, type approval certificate issue and inspections 1.8.8 Procedures for conformity assessment of gas cartridges 1.9 Restrictions on carriage imposed by the competent authorities 1.10 Security provisions 1.10.1 General provisions 1.10.2 Security training 1.10.3 Provisions for high consequence dangerous goods 1.11 Internal emergency plans for marshalling yards Part 2 Classification 2.1 General provisions 2.1.1 Introduction 2.1.2 Principles of classification 2.1.3 Classification of substances, including solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes), not mentioned by name 2.1.4 Classification of samples 2.1.5 Classification of articles as articles containing dangerous goods, n.o.s . 2.1.6 Classification of packagings , discarded, empty, uncleaned 2.2 Class specific provisions 2.2.1 Class 1: Explosive substances and articles 2.2.1.1 Criteria 2.2.1.2 Substances and articles not accepted for carriage 2.2.1.3 List of collective entries 2.2.1.4 Glossary of names 2.2.2 Class 2: Gases 2.2.2.1 Criteria 2.2.2.2 Gases not accepted for carriage 2.2.2.3 List of collective entries 2.2.3 Class 3: Flammable liquids 2.2.3.1 Criteria 2.2.3.2 Substances not accepted for carriage 2.2.3.3 List of collective entries 2.2.41 Class 4.1: Flammable solids, self-reactive substances, polymerizing substances and solid desensitized explosives 2.2.41.1 Criteria 2.2.41.2 Substances not accepted for carriage 2.2.41.3 List of collective entries 2.2.41.4 List of currently assigned self-reactive substances in packagings 2.2.42 Class 4.2: Substances liable to spontaneous combustion 2.2.42.1 Criteria 2.2.42.2 Substances not accepted for carriage 2.2.42.3 List of collective entries 2.2.43 Class 4.3: Substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases 2.2.43.1 Criteria 2.2.43.2 Substances not accepted for carriage 2.2.43.3 List of collective entries 2.2.51 Class 5.1: Oxidizing substances 2.2.51.1 Criteria 2.2.51.2 Substances not accepted for carriage 2.2.51.3 List of collective entries 2.2.52 Class 5.2: Organic peroxides 2.2.52.1 Criteria 2.2.52.2 Substances not accepted for carriage 2.2.52.3 List of collective entries 2.2.52.4 List of currently assigned organic peroxides in packagings 2.2.61 Class 6.1: Toxic substances 2.2.61.1 Criteria 2.2.61.2 Substances not accepted for carriage 2.2.61.3 List of collective entries 2.2.62 Class 6.2: Infectious substances 2.2.62.1 Criteria 2.2.62.2 Substances not accepted for carriage 2.2.62.3 List of collective entries 2.2.7 Class 7: Radioactive material 2.2.7.1 Definitions 2.2.7.2 Classification 2.2.7.2.1 General provisions 2.2.7.2.2 Determination of basic radionuclide values 2.2.7.2.3 Determination of other material characteristics 2.2.7.2.4 Classification of packages or unpacked material 2.2.7.2.5 Special arrangements 2.2.8 Class 8: Corrosive substances 2.2.8.1 Definition, general provisions and criteria 2.2.8.2 Substances not accepted for carriage 2.2.8.3 List of collective entries 2.2.9 Class 9: Miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles 2.2.9.1 Criteria 2.2.9.2 Substances and articles not accepted for carriage 2.2.9.3 List of entries 2.3 Test methods 2.3.0 General 2.3.1 Exudation test for blasting explosives of Type A 2.3.2 Tests relating to nitrated cellulose mixtures of Class 1 and Class 4.1 2.3.3 Tests relating to flammable liquids of Classes 3, 6.1 and 8 2.3.3.1 Determination of flash-point 2.3.3.2 Determination of initial boiling point 2.3.3.3 Test for determining peroxide content 2.3.4 Test for determining fluidity 2.3.5 Classification of organometallic substances in classes 4.2 and 4.3 Part 3 Dangerous goods lists, special provisions and exemptions related to limited and excepted quantities 3.1 General 3.1.1 Introduction 3.1.2 Proper shipping name 3.1.3 Solutions or mixtures 3.2 Dangerous goods lists 3.2.1 Table A: List of dangerous goods in UN number order 3.2.2 Table B: Alphabetical list of dangerous goods 3.3 Special provisions applicable to certain articles or substances 3.4 D angerous goods packed in limited quantities 3.5 Dangerous goods packed in excepted quantities 3.5.1 Excepted quantities 3.5.2 Packagings 3.5.3 Tests for packages 3.5.4 Marking of packages 3.5.5 Maximum number of packages in any wagon or container 3.5.6 Documentation Part 4 Packing and tank provisions 4.1 Use of packagings , including intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) and large packagings 4.1.1 General requirements for the packing of dangerous goods in packagings , including IBCs and large packagings 4.1.2 Additional general provisions for the use of IBCs 4.1.3 General provisions concerning packing instructions 4.1.4 List of packing instructions 4.1.4.1 Packing instructions concerning the use of packagings (except IBCs and large packagings ) 4.1.4.2 Packing instructions concerning the use of IBCs 4.1.4.3 Packing instructions concerning the use of large packagings 4.1.5 Special packing provisions for goods of Class 1 4.1.6 Special packing provisions for goods of Class 2 and goods of other classes assigned to packing instruction P200 4.1.7 Special packing provisions for organic peroxides of Class 5.2 and self-reactive substances of Class 4.1 4.1.7.1 Use of packagings (except IBCs) 4.1.7.2 Use of intermediate bulk containers 4.1.8 Special packing provisions for infectious substances of Class 6.2 4.1.9 Special packing provisions for radioactive material 4.1.9.1 General 4.1.9.2 Requirements and controls for carriage of LSA material and SCO 4.1.9.3 Packages containing fissile material 4.1.10 Special provisions for mixed packing 4.2 Use of portable tanks and UN multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) 4.2.1 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for the carriage of substances of Classes 1 and 3 to 9 4.2.2 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for the carriage of non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure 4.2.3 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases 4.2.4 General provisions for the use of UN multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) 4.2.5 Portable tank instructions and special provisions 4.2.5.1 General 4.2.5.2 Portable tank instructions 4.2.5.3 Portable tank special provisions 4.3 Use of tank-wagons, demountable tanks, tank- containers and tank swap bodies with shells made of metallic materials, and battery-wagons and multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) 4.3.1 Scope 4.3.2 Provisions applicable to all classes 4.3.2.1 Use 4.3.2.2 Degree of filling 4.3.2.3 Operation 4.3.2.4 Empty tanks, battery-wagons and MEGCs, uncleaned 4.3.3 Special provisions applicable to Class 2 4.3.3.1 Coding and hierarchy of tanks 4.3.3.2 Filling conditions and test pressures 4.3.3.3 Operation 4.3.3.4 Provisions for the filling of liquid gas tank-wagons 4.3.4 Special provisions applicable to Classes 3 to 9 4.3.4.1 Coding, rationalized approach and hierarchy of tanks 4.3.4.2 General provisions 4.3.5 Special provisions 4.4 (Deleted) 4.5 Use of vacuum-operated waste tanks 4.5.1 Use 4.5.2 Operation Part 5 Consignment procedures 5.1 General provisions 5.1.1 Application and general provisions 5.1.2 Use of overpacks 5.1.3 Empty uncleaned packagings (including IBCs and large packagings ), tanks, wagons and containers for carriage in bulk 5.1.4 Mixed packing 5.1.5 General provisions for Class 7 5.1.5.1 Approval of shipments and notification 5.1.5.2 Certificates issued by the competent authority 5.1.5.3 Determination of transport index (TI) and criticality safety index (CSI) 5.1.5.4 Specific provisions for excepted packages of radioactive material of Class 7 5.1.5.5 Summary of approval and prior notification requirements 5.2 Marking and labelling 5.2.1 Marking of pa ckages 5.2.2 Labelling of packages 5.2.2.1 Labelling provisions 5.2.2.2 Provisions for labels 5.3 Placarding and marking 5.3.1 Placarding 5.3.1.1 General provisions 5.3.1.2 Placarding of large containers, bulk containers, MEGCs, tank-containers and portable tanks 5.3.1.3 Placarding of wagons carrying large containers, bulk containers, MEGCs, tank-containers or portable tanks 5.3.1.4 Placarding of wagons for carriage in bulk, tank-wagons, battery- wagons and wagons with demountable tanks 5.3.1.5 Placarding of wagons carrying packages only 5.3.1.6 Placarding of empty tank-wagons, battery-wagons, MEGCs, tank-containers, portable tanks and empty wagons and large containers for carriage in bulk 5.3.1.7 Specifications for placards 5.3.2 Orange-coloured plate marking 5.3.2.1 General orange-coloured plate marking provisions 5.3.2.2 Specifications for the orange-coloured plates 5.3.2.3 Meaning of hazard identification numbers 5.3.3 Elevated temperature substance mark 5.3.4 Shunting labels conforming to Models 13 and 15 5.3.4.1 General provisions 5.3.4.2 Description of shunting labels conforming to Models 13 and 15 5.3.5 Orange band 5. 3.6 Environmentally hazardous substance mark 5.4 Documentation 5.4.0 General 5.4.1 Dangerous goods transport document and related information 5.4.1.1 General information required in the transport document 5.4.1.2 Additional or special information required for certain classes 5.4.1.3 (Reserved) 5.4.1.4 Format and language to be used 5.4.1.5 Non-dangerous goods 5.4.2 Container/vehicle packing certificate 5.4.3 Instructions in writing 5.4.4 Retention of dangerous goods transport information 5.4.5 Example of a multimodal dangerous goods form 5.5 Special provisions 5.5.1 (Deleted) 5.5.2 Special provisions applicable to fumigated cargo transport units (UN 3359) 5.5.2.1 General 5.5.2.2 Training 5.5.2.3 Marking and placarding 5.5.2.4 Documentation 5.5.3 Special provisions applicable to the carriage of dry ice (UN 1845) and to packages and wagons and containers containing substances presenting a risk of asphyxiation when used for cooling or conditioning purposes (such as dry ice (UN 1845) or nitrogen, refrigerated liquid (UN 1977) or argon, refrigerated liquid (UN 1951) or nitrogen ) 5.5.3.1 Scope 5.5.3.2 General 5.5.3.3 Packages containing dry ice (UN 1845) or a coolant or conditioner 5.5.3.4 Marking of packages containing dry ice (UN 1845) or a coolant or conditioner 5.5.3.5 Wagons and containers containing unpackaged dry ice 5.5.3.6 Marking of wagons and containers 5.5.3.7 Documentation 5.5.4 Dangerous goods contained in equipment in use or intended for use during carriage, attached to or placed in packages, overpacks, containers or load compartments Part 6 Requirements for the construction and testing of packagings , intermediate bulk containers (IBCs), large packagings , tanks and bulk containers 6.1 Requirements for the construction and testing of packagings 6.1.1 General 6.1.2 Code for designating types of packagings 6.1.3 Marking 6.1.4 Requirements for packagings 6.1.4.0 General requirements 6.1.4.1 Steel drums 6.1.4.2 Aluminium drums 6.1.4.3 Drums of metal other than aluminium or steel 6.1.4.4 Steel or aluminium jerricans 6.1.4.5 Plywood drums 6.1.4.6 (Deleted) 6.1.4.7 Fibre drums 6.1.4.8 Plastics drums and jerricans 6.1.4.9 Boxes of natural wood 6.1.4.10 Plywood boxes 6.1.4.11 Reconstituted wood boxes 6.1.4.12 Fibreboard boxes 6.1.4.13 Plastics boxes 6.1.4.14 Steel, aluminium or other metal boxes 6.1.4.15 Textile bags 6.1.4.16 Woven plastics bags 6.1.4.17 Plastics film bags 6.1.4.18 Paper bags 6.1.4.19 Composite packagings (plastics material) 6.1.4.20 Composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware) 6.1.4.21 Combination packagings 6.1.4.22 Light-gauge metal packagings 6.1.5 Test requirements for packagings 6.1.5.1 Performance and frequency of tests 6.1.5.2 Preparation of packagings for testing 6.1.5.3 Drop test 6.1.5.4 Leakproofness test 6.1.5.5 Internal pressure (hydraulic) test 6.1.5.6 Stacking test 6.1.5.7 Supplementary permeability test for plastics drums and jerricans in accordance with 6.1.4.8 and for composite packagings (plastics material) in accordance with 6.1.4.19 intended for the carriage of liquids having a flash-point 60 °C, other than 6HA1 packagings 6.1.5.8 Test Report 6.1.6 Standard liquids for verifying the chemical compatibility testing of polyethylene packagings , including IBCs, in accordance with 6.1.5.2.6 and 6.5.6.3.5, respectively 6.2 Requirements for the construction and testing of pressure receptacles, aerosol dispensers, small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) and fuel cell cartridges containing liquefied flammable gas 6.2.1 General requirements 6.2.1.1 Design and construction 6.2.1.2 Materials 6.2.1.3 Service equipment 6.2.1.4 Approval of pressure receptacles 6.2.1.5 Initial inspection and test 6.2.1.6 Periodic inspection and test 6.2.1.7 Requirements for manufacturers 6.2.1.8 Requirements for inspection bodies 6.2.2 Requirements for UN pressure receptacles 6.2.2.1 Design, construction and initial inspection and test 6.2.2.2 Materials 6.2.2.3 Closures and their protection 6.2.2.4 Periodic inspection and test 6.2.2.5 Conformity assessment system and approval for manufacture of pressure receptacles 6.2.2.6 Approval system for periodic inspection and test of pressure receptacles 6.2.2.7 Marking of refillable UN pressure receptacles 6.2.2.8 Marking of non-refillable UN cylinders 6.2.2.9 Marking of UN metal hydride storage systems 6.2.2.10 Marking of UN bundles of cylinders 6.2.2.11 Marking of closures for refillable UN pressure receptacles 6.2.2.12 Equivalent procedures for conformity assessment and periodic inspection and test 6.2.3 General requirement s for non-UN pressure receptacles 6.2.3.1 Design and construction 6.2.3.2 (Reserved) 6.2.3.3 Service equipment 6.2.3.4 Initial inspection and test 6.2.3.5 Periodic inspection and test 6.2.3.6 Approval of pressure receptacles 6.2.3.7 Requirements for manufacturers 6.2.3.8 Requirements for inspection bodies 6.2.3.9 Marking of refillable pressure receptacles 6.2.3.10 Marking of non-refillable cylinders 6.2.3.11 Salvage pressure receptacles 6.2.4 Requirements for non-UN pressure receptacles designed, constructed and tested according to referenced standards 6.2.4.1 Design, construction and initial inspection and test 6.2.4.2 Periodic inspection and test 6.2.5 Requirements for non-UN pressure receptacles not designed, constructed and tested according to referenced standards 6.2.5 .1 Materials 6.2.5.2 Service equipment 6.2.5.3 Metal cylinders, tubes, pressure drums and bundles of cylinders 6.2.5.4 Additional provisions relating to aluminium-alloy pressure receptacles for compressed gases, liquefied gases, dissolved gases and non pressurized gases subject to special requirements (gas samples) as well as articles containing gas under pressure other than aerosol dispensers and small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) 6.2.5.5 Pressure receptacles in composite materials 6.2.5.6 Closed cryogenic receptacles 6.2.6 General requirements for aerosol dispensers, small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) and fuel cell cartridges containing liquefied flammable gas 6.2.6.1 Design and construction 6.2.6.2 Hydraulic pressure test 6.2.6.3 Tightness ( leakproofness ) test 6.2.6.4 Reference to standards 6.3 Requirements for the construction and testing of packagings for class 6.2 infectious substances of Category A (UN Nos. 2814 and 2900) 6.3.1 General 6.3.2 R equirements for packagings 6.3.3 Code for designating types of packagings 6.3.4 Marking 6.3.5 Test requirements for packagings 6.4 Requirements for the construction, testing and approval of packages for radioactive material and for the approval of such material 6.4.1 (Reserved) 6.4.2 General requirements 6.4.3 (Reserved) 6.4.4 Requirements for excepted packages 6.4.5 Requirements for Industrial packages 6.4.6 Requirements for packages containing uranium hexafluoride 6.4.7 Requirements for Type A packages 6.4.8 Requirements for Type B(U) packages 6.4.9 Requirements for Type B(M) packages 6.4.10 Requirements for Type C packages 6.4.11 Requirements for packages containing fissile material 6.4.12 Test procedures and demonstration of compliance 6.4.13 Testing the integrity of the containment system and shielding and evaluating criticality safety 6.4.14 Target for drop tests 6.4.15 Tests for demonstrating ability to withstand normal conditions of carriage 6.4.16 Additional tests for Type A packages designed for liquids and gases 6.4.17 Tests for demonstrating ability to withstand accident conditions in carriage 6.4.18 Enhanced water immersion test for Type B(U) and Type B(M) packages containing more than 10 5 A 2 and Type C packages 6.4.19 Water leakage test for packages containing fissile material 6.4.20 Tests for Type C packages 6.4.21 Inspections for packagings designed to contain 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride 6.4.22 Approvals of package designs and materials 6.4.23 Applications and approvals for radioactive material carriage 6.5 Requirements for the construction and testing of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) 6.5.1 General requirements 6.5.1.1 Scope 6.5.1.2 (Reserved) 6.5.1.3 (Reserved) 6.5.1.4 Designatory code system for IBCs 6.5.2 Marking 6.5.2.1 Primary marking 6.5.2.2 Additional marking 6.5.2.3 Conformity to design type 6.5.2.4 Marking of remanufactured composite IBCs (31HZ1) 6.5.3 Construction requirements 6.5.3.1 General requirements 6.5.4 Testing, certification and inspection 6.5.5 Specific requirements for IBCs 6.5.5.1 Specific requirements for metal IBCs 6.5.5.2 Specific requirements for flexible IBCs 6.5.5.3 Specific requirements for rigid plastics IBCs 6.5.5.4 Specific requirements for composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacles 6.5.5.5 Specific requirements for fibreboard IBCs 6.5.5.6 Specific requirements for wooden IBCs 6.5.6 Test requirements for IBCs 6.5.6.1 Performance and frequency of tests 6.5.6.2 Design type tests 6.5.6.3 Preparation of IBCs for testing 6.5.6.4 Bottom lift test 6.5.6.5 Top lift test 6.5.6.6 Stacking test 6.5.6.7 Leakproofness test 6.5.6.8 Internal pressure (hydraulic) test 6.5.6.9 Drop test 6.5.6.10 Tear test 6.5.6.11 Topple test 6.5.6.12 Righting test 6.5.6.13 Vibration test 6.5.6.14 Test report 6.6 Requirements for the construction and testing of large packagings 6.6.1 General 6.6.2 Code for designating types of large packagings 6.6.3 Marking 6.6.3.1 Primary marking 6.6.3.2 Examples of the marking 6.6.4 Specific requirements for large packagings 6.6.4.1 S pecific requirements for metal large packagings 6.6.4.2 S pecific requirements for flexible material large packagings 6.6.4.3 S pecific requirements for plastics large packagings 6.6.4.4 Specific requirements for fibreboard large packagings 6.6.4.5 S pecific requirements for wooden large packagings 6.6.5 Test requirements for large packagings 6.6.5.1 Performance and frequency of test 6.6.5.2 Preparation for testing 6.6.5.3 Test requirements 6.6.5.4 Certification and test report 6.7 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks and UN multiple element gas containers (MEGCs) 6.7.1 Application and general requirements 6.7.2 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks intended for the carriage of substances of Class 1 and Classes 3 to 9 6.7.2.1 Definitions 6.7.2.2 General design and construction requirements 6.7.2.3 Design criteria 6.7.2.4 Minimum shell thickness 6.7.2.5 Service equipment 6.7.2.6 Bottom openings 6.7.2.7 Safety-relief devices 6.7.2.8 Pressure-relief devices 6.7.2.9 Setting of pressure relief devices 6.7.2.10 Fusible elements 6.7.2.11 Frangible discs 6.7.2.12 Capacity of pressure relief devices 6.7.2.13 Marking of pressure-relief devices 6.7.2.14 Connections to pressure-relief devices 6.7.2.15 Siting of pressure-relief devices 6.7.2.16 Gauging devices 6.7.2.17 Portable tank supports, frameworks, lifting and tie-down attachments 6.7.2.18 Design approval 6.7.2.19 Inspection and testing 6.7.2.20 Marking 6.7.3 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks intended for the carriage of non-refrigerated liquefied gases 6.7.3.1 Definitions 6.7.3.2 General design and construction requirements 6.7.3.3 Design criteria 6.7.3.4 Minimum shell thickness 6.7.3.5 Service equipment 6.7.3.6 Bottom openings 6.7.3.7 Pressure-relief devices 6.7.3.8 Capacity of relief devices 6.7.3.9 Marking of pressure-relief devices 6.7.3.10 Connections to pressure-relief devices 6.7.3.11 Siting of pressure-relief devices 6.7.3.12 Gauging devices 6.7.3.13 Portable tank supports, frameworks, lifting and tie-down attachments 6.7.3.14 Design approval 6.7.3.15 Inspection and testing 6.7.3.16 Marking 6.7.4 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks intended for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases 6.7.4.1 Definitions 6.7.4.2 General design and construction requirements 6.7.4.3 Design criteria 6.7.4.4 Minimum shell thickness 6.7.4.5 Service equipment 6.7.4.6 Pressure-relief devices 6.7.4.7 Capacity and setting of pressure-relief devices 6.7.4.8 Marking of pressure-relief devices 6.7.4.9 Connections to pressure-relief devices 6.7.4.10 Siting of pressure-relief devices 6.7.4.11 Gauging devices 6.7.4.12 Portable tank supports, frameworks, lifting and tie-down attachments 6.7.4.13 Design approval 6.7.4.14 Inspection and testing 6.7.4.15 Marking 6.7.5 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and testing of UN multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) intended for the carriage of non-refrigerated gases 6.7.5.1 Definitions 6.7.5.2 General design and construction requirements 6.7.5.3 Service equipment 6.7.5.4 Pressure-relief devices 6.7.5.5 Capacity of pressure relief devices 6.7.5.6 Marking of pressure-relief devices 6.7.5.7 Connections to pressure-relief devices 6.7.5.8 Siting of pressure-relief devices 6.7.5.9 Gauging devices 6.7.5.10 MEGC supports, frameworks, lifting and tie-down attachments 6.7.5.11 Design approval 6.7.5.12 Inspection and testing 6.7.5.13 Marking 6.8 Requirements for the construction, equipment, type approval, inspections and tests, and marking of tank-wagons, demountable tanks and tank-containers and tank swap bodies, with shells made of metallic materials, and battery-wagons and multiple element gas containers (MEGCs) 6.8.1 Scope and general provisions 6.8.2 Requirements applicable to all classes 6.8.2.1 Construction 6.8.2.2 Items of equipment 6.8.2.3 Type examination and type approval 6.8.2.4 Inspections and tests 6.8.2.5 Marking 6.8.2.6 Requirements for tanks which are designed, constructed , inspected and tested according to referenced standards 6.8.2.7 Requirements for tanks which are not designed, constructed , inspected and tested according to referenced standards 6.8.3 Special requirements applicable to Class 2 6.8.3.1 Construction of shells 6.8.3.2 Items of equipment 6.8.3.3 Type examination and type approval 6.8.3.4 Inspections and tests 6.8.3.5 Marking 6.8.3.6 Requirements for battery-wagons and MEGCs which are designed, constructed , inspected and tested according to referenced standards 6.8.3.7 Requirements for battery-wagons and MEGCs which are not designed, constructed , inspected and tested according to referenced standards 6.8.4 Special provisions 6.8.5 Requirements concerning the materials and construction of shells of tank-wagons and tank-containers for which a test pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10 bar) is required, and of shells of tank-wagons and tank-containers intended for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases of Class 2 6.8.5.1 Materials and shells 6.8.5.2 Test requirements 6.8.5.3 Impact-strength tests 6.8.5.4 Reference to standards 6.9 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks with shells made of fibre -reinforced plastics (FRP) materials 6.9.1 Application and general requirements 6.9.2 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and testing of FRP portable tanks 6.9.2.1 Definitions 6.9.2.2 General design and construction requirements 6.9.2.3 Design criteria 6.9.2.4 Minimum wall thickness of the shell 6.9.2.5 Equipment components for portable tanks with FRP shell 6.9.2.6 Design approval 6.9.2.7 Additional provisions applicable to FRP portable tanks 6.9.2.8 Inspection and testing 6.9.2.9 Retention of samples 6.9.2.10 Marking 6.10 Requirements for the construction, equipment, type approval, inspection and marking of vacuum-operated waste tanks 6.10.1 General 6.10.2 Construction 6.10.3 Items of equipment 6.10.4 Inspection 6.11 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and testing of bulk containers 6.11.1 (Reserved) 6.11.2 Application and general requirements 6.11.3 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and testing of containers conforming to the CSC used as BK1 or BK2 bulk containers 6.11.4 Requirements for the design, construction and approval of BK1 and BK2 bulk containers other than containers conforming to the CSC 6.11.5 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and testing of BK 3 flexible bulk containers Part 7 Provisions concerning the conditions of carriage, loading, unloading and handling 7.1 General provisions 7.2 Provisions concerning carriage in packages 7.3 Provisions concerning carriage in bulk 7.3.1 General provisions 7.3.2 Provisions for the carriage in bulk when the provisions of 7.3.1.1 (a) are applied 7.3.3 Provisions for carriage in bulk when the provisions of 7.3.1.1 (b) are applied 7.4 Provisions concerning carriage in tanks 7.5 Provisions concerning loading, unloading and handling 7.5.1 General provisions 7.5.2 Mixed loading prohibition 7.5.3 Protective distance 7.5.4 Precautions with respect to foodstuffs, other articles of consumption and animal feeds 7.5.5 (Reserved) 7.5.6 (Reserved) 7.5.7 Handling and stowage 7.5.8 Cleaning after unloading 7.5.9 (Reserved) 7.5.10 (Reserved) 7.5.11 Additional provisions applicable to certain classes or specific goods 7.6 Provisions for carriage as colis express (express parcels) 7.7 Piggyback transport in mixed trains (combined passenger and freight transport) Unofficial part of RID Requirements for the testing of plastics receptacles Part 1 General requirements Chapter 1.1 Scope and applicability 1.1.1 Structure RID is grouped into seven parts. Each part is subdivided into chapters and each chapter into sections and sub-sections (see table of contents). Within each part the number of the part is included with the numbers of the chapters, sections and sub-sections, for example Part 4, Chapter 2, Section 1 is numbered "4.2.1". 1.1.2 Scope 1.1.2.1 For the purposes of Article 1 of Appendix C, RID specifies : (a) dangerous goods which are barred from international carriage; (b) dangerous goods which are authorized for international carriage and the conditions attaching to them (including exemptions) particularly with regard to : – classification of goods, including classification criteria and relevant test methods; – use of packagings (including mixed packing ); – use of tanks (including filling ); – consignment procedures (including marking and labelling of packages and means of transport as well as documentation and information required ); – requirements concerning the construction, testing and approval of packagings and tanks; – use of means of transport (including loading, mixed loading and unloading). For carriage within the meaning of RID, in addition to Appendix C, the relevant provisions of the other Appendices to COTIF shall apply, in particular those of Appendix B for carriage performed on the basis of a contract of carriage. 1.1.2.2 For the carriage of dangerous goods in trains other than freight trains in accordance with Article 5 § 1 a) of Appendix C, the provisions of Chapter s 7.6 and 7.7 shall apply. 1.1.2.3 For the carriage of dangerous goods as hand luggage, registered luggage or in or on board vehicles in accordance with Article 5 § 1b) of Appendix C, only the provisions of 1.1.3.8 shall apply. 1.1.2.4 (Deleted) 1.1.3 Exemptions 1.1.3.1 Exemptions related to the nature of the transport operation The provisions laid down in RID do not apply to: (a) the carriage of dangerous goods by private individuals where the goods in question are packaged for retail sale and are intended for their personal or domestic use or for their leisure or sporting activities , provided that measures have been taken to prevent any leakage of contents in normal conditions of carriage. When these goods are flammable liquids carried in refillable receptacles filled by, or for, a private individual, the total quantity shall not exceed 60 litres per receptacle. Dangerous goods in IBCs, large packagings or tanks are not considered to be packaged for retail sale; (b) (Deleted) (c) the carriage undertaken by enterprises which is ancillary to their main activity, such as deliveries to or returns from building or civil engineering sites, or in relation to surveying, repairs and maintenance, in quantities of not more than 450 litres per packaging , including intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) and large packagings , and within the maximum quantities specified in 1.1.3.6. Measures shall be taken to prevent any leakage of contents in normal conditions of carriage. These exemptions do not apply to Class 7. Carriage undertaken by such enterprises for their supply or external or internal distribution does not fall within the scope of this exemption; (d) the carriage undertaken by the competent authorities for the emergency response or under their supervision, insofar as such carriage is necessary in relation to the emergency response, in particular carriage undertaken to contain and recover the dangerous goods involved in an incident or accident and move them to the nearest appropriate safe place; (e) emergency transport intended to save human lives or protect the environment , provided that all measures are taken to ensure that such transport is carried out in complete safety ; (f) the carriage of uncleaned empty static storage vessels which have contained gases of Class 2 , groups A, O or F, substances of Class 3 or Class 9 belonging to packing group II or III or pesticides of Class 6.1 belonging to packing group II or III, subject to the following conditions: – A ll openings with the exception of pressure relief devices (when fitted) are hermetically closed; – M easures have been taken to prevent any leakage of contents in normal conditions of carriage; and – T he load is fixed in cradles or crates or other handling devices or to the wagon or container in such a way that they will not become loose or shift during normal conditions of carriage. This exemption does not apply to static storage vessels which have contained desensitized explosives or substances the carriage of which is prohibited by RID. NOTE: For radioactive material see also 1.7.1.4 . 1.1.3.2 Exemptions related to the carriage of gases The provisions laid down in RID do not apply to the carriage of: (a) gases contained in the fuel tanks or cylinders of railway vehicles performing a transport operation and destined for their propulsion or for the operation of any of their equipment used or intended for use during carriage ( e.g. refrigerating equipment); NOTE: A container fitted with equipment for use during carriage, secured on a railway vehicle, is considered as an integral part of the railway vehicle and benefits from the same exemptions with regard to the fuel necessary to operate the equipment. (b) (Deleted) (c) gases of Groups A and O (according to 2.2.2.1), if the pressure of the gas in the receptacle or tank at a temperature of 20 C does not exceed 200 kPa (2 bar) and if the gas is not a liquefied or a refrigerated liquefied gas . This includes every kind of receptacle or tank, e.g. also parts of machinery and apparatus; NOTE: This exemption does not apply to lamps. For lamps see 1.1.3.10. (d) gases contained in the equipment used for the operation of the vehicle ( e.g. fire extinguishers ) , including in spare parts (e.g. inflated pneumatic tyres); this exemption also applies to inflated pneumatic tyres carried as a load ; (e) gases contained in the special equipment of wagons or vehicles carried as a load and necessary for the operation of this special equipment during transport (cooling systems, fish-tanks, heaters, etc.) as well as spare receptacles for such equipment or uncleaned empty exchange receptacles, transported in the same wagon or vehicle; (f) gases contained in foodstuffs (except UN 1950), including carbonated beverages; and (g) g ases contained in balls intended for use in sports. (h) (Deleted) 1.1.3.3 Exemptions related to the carriage of liquid fuels The requirements of RID do not apply to the carriage of: (a) Fuel contained in the tanks of railway vehicles performing a transport operation and destined for their propulsion or for the operation of any of their equipment used or intended for use during carriage ( e.g. refrigerating equipment). NOTE: A container fitted with equipment for use during carriage, secured on a railway vehicle, is considered as an integral part of the railway vehicle and benefits from the same exemptions with regard to the fuel necessary to operate the equipment. (b) (Deleted) (c) (Deleted) 1.1.3.4 Exemptions related to special provisions or to dangerous goods packed in limited or excepted quantities NOTE: For radioactive material see also 1.7.1.4. 1.1.3.4.1 Certain special provisions of Chapter 3.3 exempt partially or totally the carriage of specific dangerous goods from the requirements of RID. The exemption applies when the special provision is referred to in Column (6) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 against the d angerous goods entry concerned. 1.1.3.4.2 Certain dangerous goods may be subject to exemptions , provided that the conditions of Chapter 3.4 are met. 1.1.3.4.3 Certain dangerous goods may be subject to exemptions , provided that the conditions of Chapter 3.5 are met. 1.1.3.5 Exemptions related to empty uncleaned packagings Empty uncleaned packagings (including IBCs and large packagings ) which have contained substances of Classes 2, 3, 4.1, 5.1, 6.1, 8 and 9 are not subject to the conditions of RID if adequate measures have been taken to nullify any hazard. Hazards are nullified if adequate measures have been taken to nullify all hazards of Classes 1 to 9. 1.1.3.6 Total maximum permissible quantity per wagon or large container 1.1.3.6.1 (Reserved) 1.1.3.6.2 (Reserved) 1.1.3.6.3 Where , in accordance with 1.1.3.1 (c), dangerous goods of the same transport category are carried in the same wagon or large container, the maximum total quantity is indicated in column (3) of the table below: Transport category Substances or articles packing group or classification code/group or UN No. Maximum total quantity per wagon or large container 0 Cla ss 1: 1.1 L, 1.2 L, 1.3 L and UN No. 0190 Class 3: UN No. 3343 Class 4.2: Substances belonging to packing group I Class 4.3: UN Nos. 1183, 1242, 1295, 1340, 1390, 1403, 1928, 2813, 2965, 2968, 2988, 3129, 3130, 3131, 3132, 3134, 3148, 3396, 3398 and 3399 Class 5.1: UN No. 2426 Class 6.1: UN Nos. 1051, 1600, 1613, 1614, 2312, 3250 a nd 3294 Class 6.2: UN Nos. 2814, 2900 and 3549 Class 7: UN Nos. 2912 to 2919, 2977, 2978 and 3321 to 3333 Class 8: UN No. 2215 (MALEIC ANHYDRIDE, MOLTEN) Class 9: UN Nos. 2315, 3151, 3152 and 3432 and articles containing such substances or mixtures and empty uncleaned packagings , except those classified under UN No. 2908, having contained substances classified in this transport category 0 1 Substances and articles belonging to packing group I and not classified in transport category 0 and substances and articles of the following classes: Class 1: 1.1 B to 1.1 J (a) , 1.2 B to 1.2 J, 1.3 C, 1.3 G, 1.3 H, 1.3 J, 1.5 D (a) Class 2: groups T, TC (a) , TO, TF, TOC (a) and TFC aerosols: groups C, CO, FC, T, TF, TC, TO, TFC and TOC chemicals under pressure: UN Nos. 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505 Class 4.1: UN Nos. 3221 to 3224 Class 5.2: UN Nos. 3101 to 3104 20 2 Substances belonging to packing group II and not classified in transport categories 0, 1 or 4 and substances and articles of the following classes: Class 1: 1.4B to 1.4G and 1.6N Class 2: group F aerosols: group F chemicals under pressure: UN No. 3501 Class 4.1: UN Nos. 3225 to 3230 , 3531 and 3532 Class 4.3: UN No. 3292 Class 5.1: UN No. 3356 Class 5.2: UN Nos. 3105 to 3110 Class 6.1: UN Nos. 1700, 2016 and 2017 and substances belonging to packing group III Class 6.2: UN 3291 Class 9: UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3245, 3480, 3481 and 3536 333 Transport category Substances or articles packing group or classification code/group or UN No. Maximum total quantity per wagon or large container 3 Substances belonging to packing group III and not classified in transport categories 0, 2 or 4 and substances and articles of the following classes: Class 2: groups A and O aerosols: groups A and O chemicals under pressure: UN No. 3500 Class 3: UN No. 3473 Class 4.3: UN No. 3476 Class 8: UN Nos. 2794, 2795, 2800 , 3028 , 3477 and 3506 Class 9: UN Nos. 2990 and 3072 1000 4 Class 1: 1.4S Class 2: UN Nos. 3537 to 3539 Class 3: UN No. 3540 Class 4.1: UN Nos. 1331, 1345, 1944, 1945, 2254, 2623 and 3541 Class 4.2: UN Nos. 1361 and 1362 packing group III and UN No. 3542 Class 4.3: UN No. 3543 Class 5.1: UN No. 3544 Class 5.2: UN No. 3545 Class 6.1: UN No. 3546 Class 7: UN Nos. 2908 to 2911 Class 8: UN No. 3547 Clas s 9: UN Nos. 3268, 3499, 3508, 3509 and 3548 and empty, uncleaned packagings having contained dangerous goods, except for those classified in transport category 0 unlimited (a) For UN Nos. 0081, 0082, 0084, 0241, 0331, 0332, 0482, 1005 and 1017, the total maximum quantity per wagon or large container shall be 50 kg. In the above table, "maximum total quantity per wagon or large container " means: – for articles, total mass in kilograms of the articles without their packagings (for articles of Class 1, net mass in kilograms of the explosive substance ; for dangerous goods in machinery and equipment specified in RID, the total quantity of dangerous goods contained therein in kilograms or litres as appropriate ); – for solids, liquefied gases, refrigerated liquefied gases and dissolved gases, net mass in kilograms; – for liquids, the total quantity of dangerous goods contained in litres; – for compressed gases , adsorbed gases and chemicals under pressure, the water capacity of the receptacle in litres. 1.1.3.6.4 Where dangerous goods of different transport categories are carried in the same wagon or large container , the sum of – the quantity of substances and articles of transport category 1 multiplied by "50", – the quantity of substances and articles of transport category 1 referred to in Note a to the table in 1.1.3.6.3 multiplied by "20 "; – the quantity of substances and articles of transport category 2 multiplied by "3", and – the quantity of substances and articles of transport category 3 shall not exceed a calculated value of "1 000". 1.1.3.6.5 For the purposes of this sub-section, dangerous goods exempted in accordance with 1.1.3.1 (a) and (d) to (f), 1.1.3.2 to 1.1.3.5, 1.1.3.7, 1.1.3.8, 1.1.3.9 and 1.1.3.10 shall not be taken into account . 1.1.3.7 Exemptions related to the carriage of electric energy storage and production systems The provisions laid down in RID do not apply to electric energy storage and production systems ( e.g. lithium batteries, electric capacitors, asymmetric capacitors, metal hydride storage systems and fuel cells): (a) installed in a railway vehicle , performing a transport operation and destined for its propulsion or for the operation of any of its equipment; (b) contained in equipment for the operation of this equipment used or intended for use during carriage ( e.g. a laptop) , except for equipment such as data loggers and cargo tracking devices attached to or placed in packages, overpacks, containers or load compartments which are only subject to the requirements in 5.5.4 ; (c) (Deleted) 1.1.3.8 Application of exemptions in the carriage of dangerous goods as hand luggage, registered luggage or in or on board vehicles NOTE 1: Further restrictions in the carriers' conditions of carriage under private law are not affected by the following requirements. 2: For piggyback transport in mixed trains (combined passenger and freight transport) see Chapter 7.7. For the carriage of dangerous goods as hand luggage, registered luggage or in or on board vehicles, the exemptions in accordance with 1.1.3.1, 1.1.3.2 (c) to (g), 1.1.3.4, 1.1.3.5, 1.1.3.7 and 1.1.3.10 shall apply. 1.1.3.9 Exemptions related to dangerous goods used as a coolant or conditioner during carriage When used in wagons or containers for cooling or conditioning purposes, dangerous goods that are only asphyxiant (which dilute or replace the oxygen normally in the atmosphere) are only subject to the provisions of section 5.5.3. 1.1.3.10 Exemptions related to the carriage of lamps containing dangerous goods The following lamps are not subject to RID provided that they do not contain radioactive material and do not contain mercury in quantities above those specified in special provision 366 of Chapter 3.3: (a) Lamps that are collected directly from individuals and households when carried to a col lection or recycling facility; NOTE: This also includes lamps brought by individuals to a first collection point, and then carried to another collection point, intermediate processing or recycling facility. (b) Lamps each containing not more than 1 g of dangerous goods and packaged so that there is not more than 30 g of dangerous goods per package, provided that: ( i ) the lamps are manufactured according to a certified quality management system; NOTE: ISO 9001 may be used for this purpose. and (ii) each lamp is either individually packed in inner packagings , separated by dividers, or surrounded with cushioning material to protect the lamps and packed into strong outer packagings meeting the general provisions of 4.1.1.1 and capable of passing a 1.2 m drop test; (c) Used, damaged or defective lamps each containing not more than 1 g of dangerous goods with not more than 30 g of dangerous goods per package when carried from a collection or recycling facility. The lamps shall be packed in strong outer packagings sufficient for preventing release of the contents under normal conditions of carriage meeting the general provisions of 4.1.1.1 and that are capable of passing a drop test of not less than 1.2 m; (d) Lamps containing only gases of Groups A and O (according to 2.2.2.1) provided they are packaged so that the projectile effects of any rupture of the lamp will be contained within the package. NOTE: Lamps containing radioactive material are addressed in 2.2.7.2.2.2 (b). 1.1.4 App licability of other regulations 1.1.4.1 General 1.1.4.1.1 International carriage on the territory of a n RID Contracting State may be subject to regulations or prohibitions imposed in accordance with Article 3 of Appendix C for reasons other than safety during carriage. Such regulations or prohibitions shall be published in an appropriate form. 1.1.4.1.2 (Reserved) 1.1.4.1.3 (Reserved) 1.1.4.2 Carriage in a transport chain including maritime or air carriage 1.1.4.2.1 Packages, containers, bulk containers, portable tanks , tank-containers and MEGCs and wagons containing a full load made up of packages containing one and the same substance or article , which do not entirely meet the requirements for packing, mixed packing, marking, labelling of packages or placarding and orange plate marking, of RID , but are in conformity with the requirements of the IMDG Code or the ICAO Technical Instructions shall be accepted for carriage in a transport chain including maritime or air carriage subject to the following conditions: (a) If the packages are not marked and labelled in accordance with RID, they shall bear marks and danger labels in accordance with the requirements of the IMDG Code or the ICAO Technical Instructions; (b) The requirements of the IMDG Code or the IC AO Technical Instructions shall be applicable to mixed packing within a package; (c) For carriage in a transport chain including maritime carriage, if the containers, bulk containers, portable tanks , tank-containers or MEGCs or wagons containing a full load made up of packages containing one and the same substance or article are not marked and placarded in accordance with Chapter 5.3 of RID, they shall be marked and placarded in accordance with Chapter 5.3 of the IMDG Code. For empty, uncleaned portable tanks , tank-containers and MEGCs , this requirement shall apply up to and including the subsequent transfer to a cleaning station. This derogation does not apply in the case of goods classified as dangerous goods in classes 1 to 9 of RID and considered as non-dangerous goods according to the applicable requirements of the IMDG Code or the IC AO Technical Instructions. 1.1.4.2.2 (Reserved) 1.1.4.2. 3 (Reserved) NOTE: For carriage in accordance with 1.1.4.2.1, see also 5.4.1.1.7. For carriage in containers, see also 5.4.2. 1.1.4.3 Use of IMO type portable tanks approved for maritime transport IMO type portable tanks (types 1, 2, 5 and 7) which do not meet the requirements of Chapters 6.7 or 6.8, but which were built and approved before 1 January 2003 in accordance with the provisions of the IMDG Code ( Amdt . 29-98) may continue to be used provided that they meet the applicable periodic inspection and test provisions of the IMDG Code . In addition, they shall meet the provisions corresponding to the instructions set out in columns (10) and (11) of Table A in Chapter 3.2 and the provisions of Chapter 4.2 of RID. See also 4.2.0.1 of the IMDG Code. 1.1.4.4 Piggyback transport 1.1.4.4.1 Dangerous goods may also be carried in piggyback transport under the following conditions: Road vehicles and their contents handed over for transport in piggyback transport shall meet the provisions of ADR. The following shall not be permitted: – explosives of Class 1, compatibility group A (UN Nos. 0074, 0113, 0114, 0129, 0130, 0135, 0224 and 0473); – self-reactive substances of Class 4.1 requiring temperature control (UN Nos. 3231 to 3240); – polymerizing substances of Class 4.1 requiring temperature control (UN Nos. 3533 and 3534); – polymerizing substances of classes 1 to 8 in packagings or IBCs with a self-accelerating decomposition temperature (SAPT) ≤ 50°C and polymerizing substances in tanks with an SAPT ≤ 45 °C, therefore requiring temperature control; – organic peroxides of Class 5.2 requiring temperature control (UN Nos. 3111 to 3120); – sulphur trioxide of Class 8 at least 99.95% pure, without inhibitor, carried in tanks (UN No. 1829). 1.1.4.4.2 Placards, marks or orange-coloured plates on wagons carrying road vehicles It is not necessary to affix placards, marks or orange-coloured plates to carrying wagons in the following cases: (a) when road vehicles bear the placards, marks or orange-coloured plates in accordance with chapters 5.3 or 3.4 of ADR; (b) when placards, marks or orange-coloured plates are not required for road vehicles (e.g. in accordance with 1.1.3.6 or the Note to 5.3.2.1.5 of ADR). 1.1.4.4.3 Carriage of trailers carrying packages If a trailer becomes separated from its tractor unit, the orange-coloured plate in accordance with 5.3.2 of ADR and the mark in accordance with Chapter 3.4 of ADR affixed at the rear of the trailer shall also be affixed to its front. However, the orange-coloured plate need not be affixed to the front of the trailer if the corresponding placards are affixed to both sides. 1.1.4.4.4 Repetition of placards, marks or orange-coloured plates on wagons carrying road vehicles If the affixed placards, mark s or orange-coloured plates in accordance with 1.1.4.4.2 are not visible from outside the carrying wagon, they shall be affixed to both sides of the carrying wagon. 1.1.4.4.5 Information in the transport document For carriage in piggyback transport in accordance with this sub-section, the following shall be entered in the transport document: " CARRIAGE IN ACCOR DANCE WITH 1.1.4.4. " For the carriage of tanks or dangerous goods in bulk for which ADR prescribes an orange-coloured plate with th e hazard identification number, the hazard identification number shall be entered in the transport document before the letters "UN" preceding the UN number (see 5.4.1.1.1 (a)). 1.1.4.4.6 All the other provisions of RID remain unaffected. 1.1.4.5 Carriage other than by rail 1.1.4.5.1 If the wagon carrying out a transport operation subject to the requirements of RID is conveyed over a section of the journey otherwise than by rail haulage, then any national or international regulations which, on the said section, govern the carriage of dangerous goods by the mode of transport used for conveying the wagon shall alone be applicable to the said section of the journey. 1.1.4.5.2 Unless this would contravene the international Conventions governing the carriage of dangerous goods by the mode of transport used for conveying the wagon on the said section of the journey, the RID Contracting States may agree to apply the requirements of RID to this section of the journey, supplemented, if they consider it necessary, by additional requirements. These agreements shall be notified to the Secretariat of OTIF by the RID Contracting State that initiated the agreement. The Secretariat of OTIF shall bring them to the attention of all RID Contracting States . 1.1.4.6 Consignments into or through the territory of an SMGS Contracting State If carriage in accordance with SMGS Annex 2 follows carriage in accordance with RID, the provisions of SMGS Annex 2 shall apply to this section of the journey. In this case, the marks for packages, overpacks, tank-wagons and tank-containers prescribed in RID and the information in the transport document and in the documents attached to the transport document prescribed in RID shall also, in addition to the languages prescribed in RID, be in Chinese or Russian, unless any agreements concluded between the countries concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise. 1.1.4.7 Refillable pressure receptacles authorised by the United States of America Department of Transportation NOTE: For carriage in accordance with 1.1.4.7, see also 5.4.1.1.24. 1.1.4.7.1 Import of gases Refillable pressure receptacles authorised by the United States of America Department of Transportation and constructed and tested in accordance with standards listed in Part 178, Specifications for Packagings of Title 49, Transportation, of the Code of Federal Regulations accepted for carriage in a transport chain in accordance with 1.1.4.2 may be carried from the location of the temporary storage at the end point of the transport chain to the end user. 1.1.4.7.2 Export of gases and empty uncleaned pressure receptacles Refillable pressure receptacles authorised by the United States of America Department of Transportation and constructed in accordance with standards listed in Part 178, Specifications for Packagings of Title 49, Transportation, of the Code of Federal Regulations may be filled and carried only for the purpose of exporting to countries which are not RID Contracting States provided the following provisions are met: (a) The filling of the pressure receptacle is in accordance with the relevant requirements of the Code of Federal Regulations of the United States of America; (b) The pressure receptacles shall be marked and labelled in accordance with Chapter 5.2; (c) The provisions of 4.1.6.12 and 4.1.6.13 shall apply to pressure receptacles. Pressure receptacles shall not be filled after they become due for periodic inspection but may be carried after the expiry of the time-limit for purposes of performing inspection, including the intermediate carriage operations. 1.1.5 Application of standards Where the application of a standard is required and there is any conflict between the standard and the provisions of RID, the provisions of RID take precedence. The requirements of the standard that do not conflict with RID shall be applied as specified, including the requirements of any other standard, or part of a standard, referenced within that standard as normative. NOTE: A standard provides details on how to meet the provisions of RID and may include requirements in addition to those set out in RID. Chapter 1.2 Definitions , units of measurement and abbreviations 1.2.1 Definitions NOTE 1: This section contains all general or specific definitions. 2: Terms contained within a definition in this section which are defined separately are printed in italics. For the purposes of RID : A "Aerosol or aerosol dispenser" means an article consisting of any non-refillable receptacle meeting the requirements of 6.2. 6 , made of metal, glass or plastics and containing a gas , compressed, liquefied or dissolved under pressure , with or without a liquid , paste or powder, and fitted with a release device allowing the contents to be ejected as solid or liquid particles in suspension in a gas , as a foam, paste or powder or in a liquid state or in a gaseous state; "Animal material" means animal carcasses, animal body parts, foodstuffs or feedstuffs derived from animals ; " Approval" "Multilateral approval" , for the carriage of radioactive material , means approval by the relevant competent authority of the country of origin of the design or shipment, as applicable, and by the competent authority of each country through or into which the consignment is to be carried. "Unilateral approval" , for the carriage of radioactive material , means an approval of a design which is required to be given by the competent authority of the country of origin of the design only. If the country of origin is not a n RID Contracting State , the approval shall require validation by the competent authority of an RID Contracting State (see 6.4.22. 8 ); B "Bag" means a flexible packaging made of paper, plastics film, textiles, woven material or other suitable material; "Battery -wagon " means a wagon containing elements which are linked to each other by a manifold and permanently fixed to this wagon . The following elements are considered to be elements of a battery- wagon : cylinders , tubes , bundles of cylinders (also known as frames), pressure drums as well as tanks destined for the carriage of gases as defined in 2.2.2.1.1 with a capacity of more than 450 litres; "Body" (for all categories of IBC other than composite IBCs ) means the receptacle proper, including openings and closures, but does not include service equipment ; "Box" means a packaging with complete rectangular or polygonal faces, made of metal, wood, plywood, reconstituted wood, fibreboard, plastics or other suitable material. Small holes for purposes of ease of handling or opening or to meet classification requirements, are permitted as long as they do not compromise the integrity of the packaging during carriage ; "Bulk container" means a containment system (including any liner or coating) intended for the carriage of solid substances which are in direct contact with the containment system. Packagings , intermediate bulk containers (IBCs), large packagings and tanks are not included. A bulk container is : – of a permanent character and accordingly strong enough to be suitable for repeated use, – specially designed to facilitate the carriage of goods by one or more means of transport without intermediate reloading, – fitted with devices permitting its ready handling, – of a capacity of not less than 1.0 m 3 . Examples of bulk containers are containers , offshore bulk containers , skips, bulk bins, swap bodies , trough-shaped containers , roller containers , load compartments of wagons ; NOTE: This definition only applies to bulk containers meeting the requirements of Chapter 6.11. "Closed bulk container" means a totally closed bulk container having a rigid roof, sidewalls, end walls and floor (including hopper-type bottoms). The term includes bulk containers with an opening roof, side or end wall that can be closed during carriage . Closed bulk containers may be equipped with openings to allow for the exchange of vapours and gases with air and which under normal conditions of carriage prevent the release of solid contents as well as the penetration of rain and splash water; "Flexible bulk container" means a flexible container with a capacity not exceeding 15 m 3 and includes liners and attached handling devices and service equipment; "Sheeted bulk container" means an open top bulk container with rigid bottom (including hopper-type bottom), side and end walls and a non-rigid covering; "Bundle of cylinders" means a pressure receptacle comprising an assembly of cylinders or cylinder shells that are fastened together and which are interconnected by a manifold and carried as a unit. The total water capacity shall not exceed 3 000 litres except that bundles intended for the carriage of toxic gases of Class 2 (groups starting with letter T according to 2.2.2.1.3) shall be limited to 1 000 litres water capacity; C "Calculation pressure" means a theoretical pressure at least equal to the test pressure which, according to the degree of danger exhibited by the substance being carried, may to a greater or lesser degree exceed the working pressure. It is used solely to determine the thickness of the walls of the shell , independently of any external or internal reinforcing device (see also "Discharge pressure", "Filling pressure", "Maximum working pressure (gauge pressure)" and "Test pressure" ); NOTE: For portable tanks , see Chapter 6.7. " Capacity of shell or shell compartment " for tanks , means the total inner volume of the shell or shell compartment expressed in litres or cubic metres. When it is impossible to completely fill the shell or the shell compartment because of its shape or construction, this reduced capacity shall be used for the determination of the degree of filling and for the marking of the tank ; "Cargo transport unit" means a road vehicle , a wagon , a container , a tank-container , a portable tank or an MEGC ; "Carriage" means the change of place of dangerous goods , including stops made necessary by transport conditions and including any period spent by the dangerous goods in wagons , tanks and containers made necessary by traffic conditions before, during and after the change of place. This definition also covers the intermediate temporary storage of dangerous goods in order to change the mode or means of transport ( transshipment ). This shall apply , provided that transport documents showing the place of dispatch and the place of reception are presented on request and provided that packages and tanks are not opened during intermediate storage, except to be checked by the competent authorities ; "Carriage in bulk" means the carriage of unpackaged solids or articles in wagons , containers or bulk containers . The term does not apply to packaged goods nor to substances carried in tanks ; "Carrier" means the enterprise which carries out the transport operation with or without a transport contract; "Closed bulk container" , see "Bulk container" ; "Closed container" , see "Container" ; "Closed cryogenic receptacle" means a thermally insulated pressure receptacle for refrigerated liquefied gases of a water capacity of not more than 1 000 litres; "Closed wagon " means a wagon with fixed or movable sides or roof ; "Closure" means a device which closes an opening in a receptacle ; NOTE: For pressure receptacles, closures are, for example, valves, pressure relief devices, pressure gauges or level indicators. "Collective entry" means an entry for a defined group of substances or articles (see 2.1.1.2, B, C and D); "Combination packaging" means a combination of packagings for carriage purposes, consisting of one or more inner packagings secured in an outer packaging in accordance with 4.1. 1 . 5 ; NOTE : The term " inner packaging " used for combination packagings shall not be confused with the term " inner receptacle " used for composite packagings . "Competent authority" means the authority or authorities or any other body or bodies designated as such in each State and in each specific case in accordance with domestic law; "Compliance assurance" (radioactive material) means a systematic programme of measures applied by a competent authority which is aimed at ensuring that the requirements of RID are met in practice; "Composite IBC with plastics inner receptacle" means an IBC comprising structural equipment in the form of a rigid outer casing encasing a plastics inner receptacle together with any service or other structural equipment . It is so constructed that the inner receptacle and outer casing once assembled form, and are used as, an integrated single unit to be filled, stored, transported or emptied as such; NOTE: "Plastics material", when used in connection with inner receptacles for composite IBCs, is taken to include other polymeric materials such as rubber. "Composite packaging" means a packaging consisting of an outer packaging and an inner receptacle so constructed that the inner receptacle and the outer packaging form an integral packaging. Once assembled it remains thereafter an integrated single unit; it is filled, stored, carried and emptied as such; NOTE: The term " inner receptacle " used for composite packagings shall not be confused with the term " inner packaging " used for combination packagings . For example, the inner of a 6HA1 composite packaging (plastics material) is such an inner receptacle since it is normally not designed to perform a containment function without its outer packaging and is not therefore an inner packaging . Where a material is mentioned in brackets after the term " composite packaging ", it refers to the inner receptacle . "Compressed Natural Gas (CNG)" means a compressed gas composed of natural gas with a high methane content assigned to UN No. 1971; " Confinement system" , for the carriage of radioactive material , means the assembly of fissile material and packaging components specified by the designer and agreed to by the competent authority as intended to preserve criticality safety; "Conformity assessment" means the process of verifying the conformity of a product according to the provisions of sections 1.8.6 and 1.8.7 related to type examination , supervision of manufacture and initial inspection and testing; "Consignee" means the consignee according to the contract for carriage . If the consignee designates a third party in accordance with the provisions applicable to the contract for carriage, this person shall be deemed to be the consignee within the meaning of RID . If the transport operation takes place without a contract for carriage , the enterprise which takes charge of the dangerous goods on arrival shall be deemed to be the consignee . "Consignment" means any package or packages , or load of dangerous goods , presented by a consignor for carriage ; "Consignor" means the enterprise which consigns dangerous goods either on its own behalf or for a third party. If the transport operation is carried out under a contract for carriage , consignor means the consignor according to the contract for carriage ; "Container" means an article of transport equipment (lift van or other similar structure): – of a permanent character and accordingly strong enough to be suitable for repeated use; – specially designed to facilitate the carriage of goods, by one or more means of transport, without breakage of load; – fitted with devices permitting its ready stowage and handling, particularly when being transloaded from one means of transport to another; so designed as to be easy to fill and empty having an internal volume of not less than 1 m 3 , except for containers for the carriage of radioactive material. A swap body is a container which, in accordance with European Standard EN 283:1991 has the following characteristics: – from the point of view of mechanical strength, it is only built for carriage on a wagon or a vehicle on land or by roll-on roll-of ship; – it cannot be stacked; – it can be removed from vehicles by means of equipment on board the vehicle and on its own supports, and can be reloaded; NOTE: The term "container" does not cover conventional packagings , IBCs , tank-containers or wagons . Nevertheless, a container may be used as a packaging for the carriage of radioactive material. In addition: "Closed container" means a totally enclosed container having a rigid roof, rigid side walls, rigid end walls and a floor. The term includes containers with an opening roof where the roof can be closed during transport; "Large container" means (a) a container which does not meet the definition of a small container ; (b) in the meaning of the CSC , a container of a size such that the area enclosed by the four outer bottom corners is either ( i ) at least 14 m 2 (150 square feet) or (ii) at least 7 m 2 (75 square feet) if fitted with top corner fittings; "Open container" means an open top container or a platform based container ; "Sheeted container" means an open container equipped with a sheet to protect the goods loaded; "Small container" means a container which has an internal volume of not more than 3 m 3 ; " Containment system" , for the carriage of radioactive material , means the assembly of components of the packaging specified by the designer as intended to retain the radioactive material during carriage ; "Control temperature" means the maximum temperatur e at which the organic peroxide, the self-reactive substance or the polymerizing substance can be safely carried; " Conveyance" means, for carriage by road or by rail, a road vehicle or a wagon ; "Crate" means an outer packaging with incomplete surfaces; " Criticality safety index (CSI)" assigned to a package, overpack or container containing fissile material, for the carriage of radioactive material , means a number which is used to provide control over the accumulation of packages , overpacks or containers containing fissile material; "Critical temperature" means the temperature above which the substance cannot exist in the liquid state; "Cylinder" means a pressure receptacle of a water capacity not exceeding 150 litres (see also "Bundle of cylinders" ); D "Dangerous goods" means those substances and articles the carriage of which is prohibited by RID , or authorized only under the conditions prescribed therein ; "Dangerous reaction" means: (a) combustion or evolution of considerable heat; (b) evolution of flammable, asphyxiant, oxidizing or toxic gases ; (c) the formation of corrosive substances; (d) the formation of unstable substances; or (e) dangerous rise in pressure (for tanks only); "Demountable tank " means a tank designed to fit the special apparatus of the wagon but which can only be removed from it after dismantling their means of attachment ; " Design" , for the carriage of radioactive material , means the description of fissile material excepted under 2.2.7.2.3.5 (f), special form radioactive material, low dispersible radioactive material, package or packaging which enables such an item to be fully identified. The description may include specifications, engineering drawings, reports demonstrating compliance with regulatory requirements, and other relevant documentation; "Design life" , for composite cylinders and tubes, means the maximum life (in number of years) for which the cylinder or tube is designed and approved in accordance with the applicable standard; "Diameter" (for shells of tanks ) means the internal diameter of the shell ; "Discharge pressure" means the maximum pressure actually built up in the tank when it is being discharged under pressure (see also "Calculation pressure", "Filling pressure", "Maximum working pressure (gauge pressure)" and "Test pressure" ); "Dose rate" means the ambient dose equivalent or the directional dose equivalent, as appropriate, per unit time, measured at the point of interest. "Drum" means a flat-ended or convex-ended cylindrical packaging made out of metal, fibreboard, plastics, plywood or other suitable materials. This definition also includes packagings of other shapes, e.g. round, taper-necked packagings or pail-shaped packagings . Wooden barrels and jerricans are not covered by this definition; E "Emergency temperature" means the temperature at which emergency procedures shall be implemented in the event of loss of temperature control; "Enterprise" means any natural person, any legal person, whether profit-making or not, any association or group of persons without legal personality, whether profit-making or not, or any official body, whether it has legal personality itself or is dependent upon an authority that has such personality; "Entity in charge of maintenance (ECM)" means the entity in accordance with the Uniform Rules concerning the Technical Admission of Railway Material used in International Traffic (ATMF – Appendix G to COTIF) and certified in accordance with Annex A thereto, that is in charge of the maintenance of a wagon ; " Exclusive use" , for the carriage of radioactive material , means the sole use, by a single consignor , of a wagon or of a large container , in respect of which all initial, intermediate and final loading , shipment and unloading are carried out in accordance with the directions of the consignor or consignee , where so required by RID ; F "Fibreboard IBC" means a fibreboard body with or without separate top and bottom caps, if necessary an inner liner (but no inner packagings ), and appropriate service and structural equipment ; "Fibre-reinforced plastics" means material consisting of fibrous and/or particulate reinforcement contained within a thermoset or thermoplastic polymer (matrix); "Filler" means any enterprise which fills dangerous goods into a tank ( tank- wagon , wagon with demountable tank , portable tank or tank-container ) and/or into a wagon , large container or small container for carriage in bulk , or into a battery- wagon or MEGC ; " Filling pressure" means the maximum pressure actually built up in the tank when it is being filled under pressure (see also "Calculation pressure", "Discharge pressure", "Maximum working pressure (gauge pressure)" and "Test pressure" ); "Filling ratio" means the ratio of the mass of ga s to the mass of water at 15 °C that would fill completely a pressure receptacle fitted ready for use; "Fixed tank" means a tank having a capacity of more than 1 000 litres which is permanently attached to a wagon (which then becomes a tank- wagon ) or is an integral part of the frame of such wagon ; " Flammable component " (for aerosols ) means flammable liquids , flammable solids or flammable gases and gas mixtures as defined in Notes 1 to 3 of sub-section 31.1.3 of Part III of the Manual of Tests and Criteria . This designation does not cover pyrophoric, self-heating or water-reactive substances. The chemical heat of combustion shall be determined by one of the following methods ASTM D 240, ISO/FDIS 13943: 1999 (E/F) 86.1 to 86.3 or NFPA 30B. "Flash-point" means the lowest temperature of a liquid at which its vapours form a flammable mixture with air; "Flexible bulk container" , see "Bulk container" ; "Flexible IBC" means a body constituted of film, woven fabric or any other flexible material or combinations thereof, and if necessary, an inner coating or liner , together with any appropriate service equipment and handling devices ; " Fuel cell" means an electrochemical device that converts the chemical energy of a fuel to electrical energy, heat and reaction products; " Fuel cell engine" means a device used to power equipment and which consists of a fuel cell and its fuel supply, whether integrated with or separate from the fuel cell , and includes all appurtenances necessary to fulfil its function; "Full load" means any load originating from one consignor for which the use of a wagon or large container is exclusively reserved and all operations for the loading and unloading of which are carried out in conformity with the instructions of the consignor or of the consignee ; NOTE 1 : The corresponding term for radioactive material is "exclusive use" . 2: This definition covers the term "wagon load" used in the other Appendices to COTIF and in other railway regulations. G "Gas" means a substance which: (a) at 50 °C has a vapour pressure greater than 300 kPa (3 bar); or (b) is completely gaseous at 20 °C under standard pressure of 101.3 kPa; "Gas cartridge" , see "Small receptacle containing gas" ; " Globally Harmonized System of Classification and Labelling of Chemicals" means the ninth revised edition of the United Nations publication bearing this title (ST/SG/AC.10/30/Rev.9); H "Handling device" (for flexible IBCs ) means any sling, loop, eye or frame attached to the body of the IBC or formed from the continuation of the IBC body material; "Hermetically closed tank" means a tank that: – is not equipped with safety valves , bursting discs, other similar safety devices or vacuum valves or self-operating ventilation valves ; or – is equipped with safety valves preceded by a bursting disc according to 6.8.2.2.10, but is not equipped with vacuum valves or self-operating ventilation valves . A tank intended for the carriage of liquid substances with a calculation pressure of at least 4 bar or intended for the carriage of solid substances (powdery or granular) regardless of its calculation pressure is also considered hermetically closed if it: – is equipped with safety valves preceded by a bursting disc according to 6.8.2.2.10 and vacuum valves or self-operating ventilation valves , in accordance with the requirements of 6.8.2.2.3; or, – is not equipped with safety valves , bursting discs or other similar safety devices, but is equipped with vacuum valves or self-operating ventilation valves , in accordance with the requirements of 6.8.2.2.3. "Holding time" means the time that will elapse from the establishment of the initial filling condition until the pressure has risen due to heat influx to the lowest set pressure of the pressure limiting device(s) of tanks intended for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases ; NOTE: For portable tanks , see 6.7.4.1. I " IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material " means one of the editions of those Regulations, as follows: (a) For the 1985 and 1985 (as amended 1990) editions: IAEA Safety Series No. 6; (b) For the 1996 edition: IAEA Safety Series No. ST-1; (c) For the 1996 (revised) edition: IAEA Safety Series No. TS-R-1 (ST-1, Revised); (d) For the 1996 (as amended 2003), 2005 and 2009 editions: IAEA Safety Standards Series No. TS-R-1; (e) For the 2012 edition: IAEA Safety Standards Series No. SSR-6; (f) For the 2018 edition: IAEA Safety Standards Series No. SSR–6 (Rev.1). "ICAO Technical Instructions" means the Technical Instructions for the Safe Transport of Dangerous Goods by Air, which complement Annex 18 to the Chicago Convention on International Civil Aviation (Chicago 1944), published by the International Civil Aviation Organization ( ICAO ) in Montreal; "IMDG Code" means the International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code, for the implementation of Chapter VII, Part A, of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974 (SOLAS Convention), published by the International Maritime Organization ( IMO ), London; "Inner packaging" means a packaging for which an outer packaging is required for carriage ; "Inner receptacle" means a receptacle which requires an outer packaging in order to perform its containment function; "Inner vessel" , for a closed cryogenic receptacle , means the pressure vessel intended to contain the refrigerated liquefied gas ; "Inspection body" means an independent inspection and testing body approved by the competent authority ; "Intermediate bulk container" (IBC) means a rigid, or flexible portable packaging , other than those speci fied in Chapter 6.1, that: (a) has a capacity of: ( i ) not more than 3 .0 m 3 for solids and liquids of packing groups II and III; (ii) not more than 1.5 m 3 for solids of packing group I when packed in flexible , rigid plastics , composite , fibreboard and wooden IBCs ; (iii) not more than 3.0 m 3 for solids of packing group I when packed in metal IBCs ; (iv) not more than 3.0 m 3 for radioactive material of Class 7; (b) is designed for mechanical handling; (c) is resistant to the stresses produced in handling and transport as determined by the tests specified in Chapter 6.5 (see also "Composite IBC with plastics inner receptacle", "Fibreboard IBC", "Flexible IBC", "Metal IBC", "Rigid plastics IBC" and "Wooden IBC" ); NOTE 1 : Portable tanks or tank-containers that meet the requirements of Chapter 6.7 or 6.8 respectively are not considered to be intermediate bulk containers ( IBCs ). 2 : Intermediate bulk containers ( IBCs ) which meet the requirements of Chapter 6.5 are not considered to be containers for the purposes of RID. " Remanufactured IBC" means a metal , rigid plastics or composite IBC that: (a) is produced as a UN type from a non-UN type; or (b) is converted from one UN design type to another UN design type. Remanufactured IBCs are subject to the same requirements of RID that apply to new IBCs of the same type (see also design type definition in 6.5. 6 .1.1); "Repaired IBC" means a metal , rigid plastics or composite IBC that, as a result of impact or for any other cause (e.g. corrosion, embrittlement or other evidence of reduced strength as compared to the design type) is restored so as to conform to the design type and to be able to withstand the design type tests. For the purposes of RID , the replacement of the rigid inner receptacle of a composite IBC with a receptacle conforming to the original design type from the same manufacturer is considered repair. However, routine maintenance of rigid IBCs is not considered repair. The bodies of rigid plastics IBCs and the inner receptacles of composite IBCs are not repairable. Flexible IBCs are not repairable unless approved by the competent authority ; " Routine maintenance of flexible IBCs " means the routine performance on plastics or textile flexible IBCs of operations, such as: (a) Cleaning; or (b) Replacement of non-integral components, such as non-integral liners and closure ties, with components conforming to the manufacturer's original specificatio n ; provided that these operations do not adversely affect the containment function of the flexible IBC or alter the design type; "Routine maintenance of rigid IBCs" means the routine performance on metal, rigid plastics or composite IBCs of operations such as: (a) Cleaning; (b) Removal and reinstallation or replacement of body closures (including associated gaskets), or of service equipment , conforming to the original manufacturer’s specifications, provided that the leaktightness of the IBC is verified; or (c) Restoration of structural equipment not directly performing a dangerous goods containment or discharge pressure retention function so as to conform to the design type (e.g. the straightening of legs or lifting attachments) , provided that the containment function of the IBC is not affected; "Intermediate packaging" means a packaging placed between inner packagings or articles, and an outer packaging ; J "Jerrican" means a metal or plastics packaging of rectangular or polygonal cross-section with one or more orifices; L "Large container" , see "Container" ; "Large packaging" means a packaging consisting of an outer packaging which contains articles or inner packagings and which (a) is designed for mechanical handling; (b) exceeds 400 kg net mass or 450 litres capacity bu t has a volume of not more than 3 .0 m 3 ; "Remanufactured large packaging" means a metal or rigid plastics large packaging that: (a) Is produced as a UN type from a non-UN type; or (b) Is converted from one UN design type to another UN design type. Remanufactured large packagings are subject to the same requirements of RID that apply to new large packagings of the same type (see also design type definition in 6.6.5.1.2); "Reused large packaging" means a large packaging to be refilled which has been examined and found free of defects affecting the ability to withstand the performance tests; the term includes those which are refilled with the same or similar compatible contents and are carried within distribution chains controlled by the consignor of the product; "Large salvage packaging" means a special packaging which (a) is designed for mechanical handling; and (b) exceeds 400 kg net mass or 450 litres capacity but has a volume of not more than 3 m 3 ; into which damaged, defective , leaking or non-conforming dangerous goods packages , or dangerous goods that have spilled or leaked are placed for purposes of carriage for recovery or disposal; " Leakproofness test" means a test to determine the leakproofness of a tank , a packaging or an IBC and of the equipment and closure devices; NOTE: For portable tanks , see Chapter 6.7. "Light-gauge metal packaging" means a packaging of circular, elliptical, rectangular or polygonal cross-section (also conical) and taper-necked and pail-shaped packaging made of metal, having a wall thickness of less than 0.5 mm (e.g. tinplate), flat or convex bottomed and with one or more orifices, which is not covered by the definitions for drums or jerricans ; "Liner" means a tube or bag inserted into a packaging , including large packagings or IBCs , but not forming an integral part of it, including the closures of its openings; "Liquefied Natural Gas (LNG)" means a refrigerated liquefied gas composed of natural gas with a high methane content assigned to UN No. 1972; "Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG)" means a low pressure liquefied gas composed of one or more light hydrocarbons which are assigned to UN Nos. 1011, 1075, 1965, 1969 or 1978 only and which consists mainly of propane, propene , butane, butane isomers, butene with traces of other hydrocarbon gases; NOTE 1: Flammable gases assigned to other UN numbers shall not be regarded as LPG. 2: For UN No. 1075 see NOTE 2 under 2F, UN No. 1965, in the table for liquefied gases in 2.2.2.3. "Liquid" means a substance which at 50 °C has a vapour pressure of not more than 300 kPa (3 bar), which is not completely gaseous at 20 °C and 101.3 kPa, and which (a) has a melting point or initial melting point of 20 °C or less at a pressure of 101.3 kPa, or (b) is liquid according to the ASTM D 4359-90 test method or (c) is not pasty according to the criteria applicable to the test for determining fluidity (penetrometer test) described in 2.3.4; NOTE: " Carriage in the liquid state", for the purpose of tank requirements, means: – Carriage of liquids according to the above definition, or – Solids handed over for carriage in the molten state. "Loader" means any enterprise which: (a) Loads packaged dangerous goods , small containers or portable tanks into or onto a wagon or a container ; or (b) Loads a container , bulk-container , MEGC , tank-container , portable tank or road vehicle onto a wagon ; "Loading" means all actions carried out by the loader , in accordance with the definition of loader ; M "Management system" , for the carriage of radioactive material, means a set of interrelated or interacting elements (system) for establishing policies and objectives and enabling the objectives to be achieved in an efficient and effective manner; "Manual of Tests and Criteria" means the seventh revised edition of the United Nations publication bearing this title (ST/SG/AC.10/11/Rev.7 and Amend.1); "Mass of package" means gross mass of the package unless otherwise stated; "Maximum capacity" means the maximum inner volume of receptacles or packagings including intermediate bulk containers ( IBCs ) and large packagings expressed in cubic metres or litres; "Maximum net mass" means the maximum net mass of contents in a single packaging or maximum combined mass of inner packagings and the contents thereof expressed in kilograms; " Maximum normal operating pressure" , for the carriage of radioactive material , means the maximum pressure above atmospheric pressure at mean sea-level that would develop in the containment system in a period of one year under the conditions of temperature and solar radiation corresponding to environmental conditions in the absence of venting, external cooling by an ancillary system, or operational controls during carriage ; "Maximum permissible gross mass" (a) ( for IBCs) means the mass of the IBC and any service or structural equipment together with the maximum net mass; (b) (for tanks ) means the tare of the tank and the heaviest load authorized for carriage ; NOTE: For portable tanks , see Chapter 6.7. "Maximum working pressure (gauge pressure)" means the highest of the following three pressures that may occur at the top of the tank in the operating position: (a) the highest effective pressure allowed in the tank during filling (maximum filling pressure allowed); (b) the highest effective pressure allowed in the tank during discharge (maximum discharge pressure allowed); and (c) the effective gauge pressure to which the tank is subjected by its contents (including such extraneous gases as it may contain) at the maximum working temperature. Unless the special requirements prescribed in Chapter 4.3 provide otherwise, the numerical value of this working pressure (gauge pressure) shall not be lower than the vapour pressure (absolute pressure) of the filling substance at 50 °C. For tanks equipped with safety valves (with or without bursting disc ) other than tanks for the carriage of compressed, liquefied or dissolved gases of Class 2. , the maximum working pressure (gauge pressure) shall however be equal to the prescribed opening pressure of such safety valves (see also "Calculation pressure" , "Discharge pressure", "Filling pressure" and "Test pressure" ); NOTE 1: Maximum working pressure is not applicable to gravity-discharge tanks according to 6.8.2.1.14 (a). 2 : For portable tanks , see Chapter 6.7. 3 : For closed cryogenic receptacles, see Note to 6.2.1.3. 6 .5. "Metal hydride storage system" means a single complete hydrogen storage system, including a pressure receptacle shell , metal hydride, pressure relief device, shut-off valve, service equipment and internal components used for the carriage of hydrogen only; "Metal IBC" means a metal body together with appropriate service and structural equipment ; "Mild steel" means a steel having a minimum tensile strength between 360 N/mm 2 and 440 N/mm 2 ; NOTE: For portable tanks , see Chapter 6.7. "Multiple-element gas container (MEGC) " means a unit containing elements which are linked to each other by a manifold and mounted on a frame. The following elements are considered to be elements of a multiple-element gas container : cylinders , tubes , pressure drums and bundles of cylinders as well as tanks for the carriage of gases as defined in 2.2.2.1.1 having a capacity of more than 450 litres; NOTE: For UN MEGCs, see Chapter 6.7. N "Net explosive mass (NEM)" means the total mass of the explosive substances, without the packagings , casings, etc. (Net explosive quantity (NEQ) , net explosive contents (NEC) , net explosive weight (NEW) or net mass of explosive contents are often used to convey the same meaning.); "Neutron radiation detector " means a device that detects neutron radiation. In such a device, a gas may be contained in a hermetically sealed electron tube transducer that converts neutron radiation into a measureable electric signal; "N.O.S. entry (not otherwise specified entry)" means a collective entry to which substances, mixtures, solutions or articles may be assigned if they: (a) are not mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2, and (b) exhibit chemical, physical and/or dangerous properties corresponding to the Class, classification code, packing group and the name and description of the n.o.s . entry ; O "Offshore bulk container" means a bulk container specially designed for repeated use for carriage to , from and between offshore facilities. An offshore bulk container is designed and constructed in accordance with the guidelines for the approval of offshore containers handled in open seas specified by the International Maritime Organization ( IMO ) in document MSC/Circ.860; "Open container" , see "Container" ; "Open cryogenic receptacle" means a transportable thermally insulated receptacle for refrigerated liquefied gases maintained at atmospheric pressure by continuous venting of the refrigerated liquefied gas ; "Open wagon " means a wagon with or without side boards and tailboards , the loading surfaces of which are open; "Outer packaging" means the outer protection of the composite or combination packaging together with any absorbent materials, cushioning and any other components necessary to contain and protect inner receptacles or inner packagings ; "Over-moulded cylinder" means a cylinder intended for the carriage of LPG with a water capacity not exceeding 13 litres made of a coated welded steel inner cylinder shell with an over-moulded protective case made from cellular plastic, which is non-removable and bonded to the outer surface of the steel cylinder shell wall; "Overpack" means an enclosure used ( by a single consignor in the case of radioactive material ) to contain one or more packages , consolidated into a single unit easier to handle and stow during carriage . Examples of overpacks : (a) a loading tray such as a pallet, on which several packages are placed or stacked and secured by a plastic s strip, shrink or stretch wrapping or other appropriate means; or (b) an outer protective packaging such as a box or a crate ; P "Package" means the complete product of the packing operation, consisting of the packaging or large packaging or IBC and its contents prepared for dispatch. The term includes pressure receptacles for gases as defined in this section as well as articles which, because of their size, mass or configuration may be carried unpackaged or carried in cradles, crates or handling devices. Except for the carriage of radioactive material, the term does not apply to goods which are carried in bulk , nor to substances carried in tanks . NOTE: For radioactive material, see 2.2.7.2 , 4.1.9.1.1 and Chapter 6.4 . "Packaging" means one or more receptacles and any other components or materials necessary for the receptacles to perform their containment and other safety functions (see also "Combination packaging", "Composite packaging" , "Inner packaging", "Intermediate bulk container (IBC)", "Intermediate packaging", "Large packaging", "Light-gauge metal packaging", "Outer packaging", "Reconditioned packaging", "Remanufactured packaging", "Reused packaging", "Salvage packaging" and "Sift-proof packaging") ; "Packer" means any enterprise which puts dangerous goods into packagings , including large packagings and intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) and, where necessary, prepares packages for carriage ; "Packing group" means a group to which, for packing purposes, certain substances may be assigned in accordance with their degree of danger. The packing groups have the following meanings which are explained more fully in Part 2: Packing group I: Substances presenting high danger; Packing group II: Substances presenting medium danger; and Packing group III: Substances presenting low danger; " Piggyback transport " means the carriage of road vehicles in combined road/rail transport. This definition also includes the rolling road (loading of road vehicles (accompanied or unaccompanied) onto wagons desig ned for this type of transport); "Portable tank" means a multimodal tank having, when used for the carriage of gases as defined in 2.2.2.1.1 , a capacity of more than 450 litres in accordance with the definitions in Chapter 6.7 or the IMDG Code and indicated by a portable tank instruction (T-Code) in Column (10) of Table A of Chapter 3.2; "Pressure drum" means a welded pressure receptacle of a water capacity exceeding 150 litres and of not more than 1 000 litres, (e.g. cylindrical receptacles equipped with rolling hoops, spheres on skids);" " Pressure receptacle" means a transportable receptacle intended for holding substances under pressure including its closure (s) and other service equipment and is a collective term that includes cylinders , tubes , pressure drums , closed cryogenic receptacles , metal hydride storage systems , bundles of cylinders and salvage pressure receptacles ; "Pressure receptacle shell" means a cylinder , a tube , a pressure drum or a salvage pressure receptacle without its closures or other service equipment , but including any permanently attached device(s) (e.g. neck ring, foot ring); NOTE: The terms "cylinder shell", "pressure drum shell" and "tube shell" are also used. "Pressurized gas cartridge" , see "Aerosol or aerosol dispenser" ; "Protected IBC" (for metal IBCs ) means an IBC provided with additional protection against impact, the protection taking the form of, for example, a multi-layer (sandwich) or double-wall construction, or a frame with a metal lattice-work casing; "Protective lining" (for tanks ) means a lining or coating protecting the metallic tank material against the substances to be carried; NOTE: This definition does not apply to a lining or coating used only to protect the substance to be carried. Q "Quality assurance" means a systematic programme of controls and inspections applied by any organization or body which is aimed at providing confidence that the safety prescriptions in RID are met in practice; R "Radiation detection system " means an apparatus that contains radiation detectors as components; " Radioactive contents" , for the carriage of radioactive material , mean the radioactive material together with any contaminated or activated solids , liquids , and gases within the packaging ; "Railway infrastructure" means all tracks and fixed equipment necessary for the movement of rail traffic and transport safety; "Railway infrastructure m anager" means any public body or undertaking responsible in particular for establishing or maintaining the railway infrastructure , and for managing the control and safety systems; "Railway vehicle" means a vehicle suitable to circulate on its own wheels on railway lines with or without traction; "Receptacle" (Class 1) includes boxes , bottles, cans, drums , jars and tubes , including any means of closure used in the inner or intermediate packaging ; "Receptacle" means a containment vessel for receiving and holding substances or articles, including any means of closing. This definition does not apply to shells (see also "Closed cryogenic receptacle" , "Open cryogenic receptacles" , "Inner receptacle", "Pressure receptacle", "Rigid inner receptacle" and "Gas cartridge" ); "Reconditioned packaging" means in particular (a) metal drums that are: ( i ) cleaned to original materials of construction, with all former contents, internal and external corrosion, and external coatings and labels removed; (ii) restored to original shape and contour, with chimes (if any) straightened and sealed and all non-integral gaskets replaced; and (iii) inspected after cleaning but before painting, with rejection of packagings with visible pitting, significant reduction in the material thickness, metal fatigue, damaged threads or closures or other significant defects; (b) plastics drums and jerricans that: ( i ) are cleaned to original materials of construction, with all former contents, external coatings and labels removed; (ii) have all non-integral gaskets replaced; and (iii) are inspected after cleaning with rejection of packagings with visible damage such as tears, creases or cracks, or damaged threads or closures or other significant defects; "Recycled plastics material" means material recovered from used industrial packagings that has been cleaned and prepared for processing into new packagings . The specific properties of the recycled material used for production of new packagings shall be assured and documented regularly as part of a quality assurance programme recognized by the competent authority. The quality assurance programme shall include a record of proper pre-sorting and verification that each batch of recycled plastics material has the proper melt flow rate, density, and tensile yield strength, consistent with that of the design type manufactured from such recycled material. This necessarily includes knowledge about the packaging material from which the recycled plastics have been derived, as well as awareness of the prior contents of those packagings if those prior contents might reduce the capability of new packagings produced using that material. In addition, the packaging manufacturer's quality assurance programme under 6.1.1.4 shall include performance of the mechanical design type test in 6.1.5 on packagings manufactured from each batch of recycled plastics material. In this testing, stacking performance may be verified by appropriate dynamic compression testing rather than static load testing; NOTE : ISO 16103:2005 "Packaging – Transport packages for dangerous goods – Recycled plastics material", provides additional guidance on procedures to be followed in approving the use of recycled plastics material. These guidelines have been developed based on the experience of the manufacturing of drums and jerricans from recycled plastics material and as such may need to be adapted for other types of packagings , IBCs and large packagings made of recycled plastics material. "Reel" (Class 1) means a device made of plastics, wood, fibreboard, metal or other suitable material comprising a central spindle with, or without, side walls at each end of the spindle. Articles and substances can be wound onto the spindle and may be retained by side walls; "Reference steel" means a steel with a tensile strength of 370 N/mm 2 and an elongation at fracture of 27%; " Remanufactured IBC" , see "Intermediate Bulk Container ( IBC)" ; "Remanufactured large packaging" , see "Large packaging" ; "Remanufactured packaging" means in particular (a) metal drums that: ( i ) are produced as a UN type complying with the requirements of Chapter 6.1 from a non-UN type; (ii) are converted from one UN type complying with the requirements of Chapter 6.1 to another UN type; or (iii) undergo the replacement of integral structural components (such as non-removable heads); (b) plastics drums that: ( i ) are converted from one UN type to another UN type (e.g. 1H1 to 1H2); or (ii) undergo the replacement of integral structural components. Remanufactured drums are subject to the requirements of Chapter 6.1 which apply to new drums of the same type; " Repaired IBC" , see "Intermediate Bulk Container ( IBC)" ; "Reused large packaging" , see "Large packaging" ; "Reused packaging" means a packaging which has been examined and found free of defects affecting the ability to withstand the performance tests. The term includes those which are refilled with the same or similar compatible contents and are carried within distribution chains controlled by the consignor of the product; "Rigid inner receptacle" (for composite IBCs ) means a receptacle which retains its general shape when empty without its closures in place and without benefit of the outer casing. Any inner receptacle that is not "rigid" is considered to be "flexible"; "Rigid plastics IBC" means a rigid plastics body , which may have structural equipment together with appropriate service equipment ; "Road vehicle" means motor vehicle, articulated vehicle, trailer or semi-trailer within the meaning of ADR , by means of which dangerous goods are carried ; " Routine maintenance of flexible IBC " , see Intermediate Bulk Container (IBC)" ; " Routine maintenance of rigid IBCs" , see "Intermediate Bulk Container ( IBC)" ; S "Safety valve" means a spring-loaded device which is activated automatically by pressure the purpose of which is to protect the tank against unacceptable excess internal pressure; "Salvage packaging" means a special packaging into which damaged, defective , leaking or non-conforming dangerous goods packages , or dangerous goods that have spilled or leaked are placed for purposes of carriage for recovery or disposal; " Salvage pressure receptacle " means a pressure receptacle with a water capacity not exceeding 3 000 litres into which are placed damaged, defective, leaking or non-conforming pressure receptacle(s) for the purpose of carriage e.g. for recovery or disposal; "Self-accelerating decomposition temperature (SADT)" means the lowest temperature at which self-accelerating decomposition may occur in a substance in the packaging , IBC or tank as offered for carriage. The SADT shall be determined in accordance with the test procedures given in Part II, Section 28 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria ; "Self-accelerating polymerization temperature (SAPT)" means the lowest temperature at which self-accelerating polymerization may occur with a substance in the packaging , IBC or tank as offered for carriage. The SAPT shall be determined in accordance with the test procedures established for the self-accelerating decomposition temperature for self-reactive substances in accordance with Part II, section 28 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria; "Self-operating ventilation valve” means a venting device on shells with bottom discharge which is connected to the bottom valve and in normal operation is only opened during loading or unloading for the ventilation of shells . "Service equipment" (a) of the tank means filling and discharge , breather , safety, heating and heat insulating devices and measuring instruments; NOTE: For portable tanks , see Chapter 6.7. (b) of the elements of a battery- wagon or of a MEGC means filling and discharge devices, including the manifold, safety devices and measuring instruments; (c) of an IBC means the filling and discharge devices and any pressure-relief or venting, safety, heating and heat insulating devices and measuring instruments; (d) o f a pressure receptacle , means closures , manifolds, piping, porous, absorbent or adsorbent material and any structural devices, e.g. for handling; "Service life" , for composite cylinders and tubes, means the number of years the cylinder or tube is permitted to be in service; "Settled pressure" means the pressure of the contents of a pressure receptacle in thermal and diffusive equilibrium; "Sheeted bulk container" , see "Bulk container" ; "Sheeted container" , see "Container" ; "Sheeted wagon" means an open wagon provided with a sheet to protect the load; " Shell" (for tanks) means the part of the tank which retains the substance intended for carriage , including openings and their closures, but does not include service equipment or external structural equipment ; NOTE: For portable tanks, see Chapter 6.7. "Sift-proof packaging" means a packaging impermeable to dry contents, including fine solid material produced during carriage ; "Small container" , see "Container" ; "Small receptacle containing gas (gas cartridge)" means a non-refillable receptacle having a water capacity not exceeding 1000 ml for receptacles made of metal and not exceeding 500 ml for receptacles made of synthetic material or glass, containing, under pressure, a gas or a mixture of gases . It may be fitted with a valve; "Solid" means: (a) a substance with a melting point or initia l melting point of more than 20 °C at a pressure of 101.3 kPa, or (b) a substance which is not liquid according to the ASTM D 4359-90 test method or which is pasty according to the criteria applicable to the test for determining fluidity (penetrometer test) described in 2.3.4; "Structural equipment" (a) for tanks of a tank- wagon , means the external or internal reinforcing, fastening or protective members of the shell ; (b) for tanks of a tank-container , means the external or internal reinforcing, fastening, protective or stabilizing members of the shell ; NOTE: For portable tanks , see Chapter 6.7. (c) for elements of a battery- wagon or an MEGC means the external or internal reinforcing, fastening, protective or stabilizing members of the shell or receptacle ; (d) for IBCs other than flexible IBCs means the reinforcing, fastening, handling, protective or stabilizing members of the body (including the base pallet for composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle ); "Swap body" , see "Container" ; T "Tank" means a shell , including its service and structural equipment . When used alone, the term tank means a tank-container , portable tank , tank-wagon , and demountable tank as defined in this Section , including tanks forming elements of battery-wagons or MEGCs ; "Tank-container" means an article of transport equipment meeting the definition of a container , and comprising a shell and items of equipment, including the equipment to facilitate movement of the tank-container without significant change of attitude, used for the carriage of gases , liquid , powdery or granular substances and, when used for the carriage of gases as defined in 2.2.2.1.1 , having a capacity of more than 0.45 m 3 (450 litres); NOTE: IBCs which meet the requirements of Chapter 6.5 are not considered to be tank-containers . In addition: " Extra-large tank-container " means a tank-container with a capacity of more than 40 000 litres. "Tank-container or portable tank operator" means any enterprise in whose name the tank-container or portable tank is operated; " Tank record " means a file containing all the important technical information concerning a tank , a battery-wagon or a MEGC , such as certificates referred to in 6.8.2.3, 6.8.2.4 and 6.8.3.4; "Tank swap body" is considered to be a tank-container ; "Tank-wagon " means a wagon intended for the carriage of liquids , gases , powdery or granular substances, comprising a superstructure, consisting of one or more tanks and an underframe fitted with its own items of equipment (running gear, suspension, buffing, traction, braking gear and inscriptions); NOTE: Tank-wagon also includes wagons with demountable tanks . "Tank-wagon operator" means any enterprise in whose name the tank-wagon is registered or approved for transport; " Technical name" means a recognized chemical name, if relevant a biological name, or other name currently used in scientific and technical handbooks, journals and texts (see 3.1.2.8.1.1); "Test pressure" means the required pressure applied during a pressure test for initial or periodic inspection (see also "Calculation pressure" , "Discharge pressure" , "Filling pressure" and "Maximum working pressure (gauge pressure)" ); NOTE: For portable tanks , see Chapter 6.7. "Through or into" , for the carriage of radioactive material , means through or into the countries in which a consignment is carried but specifically excludes countries "over" which a consignment is carried by air provided that there are no scheduled stops in those countries; " Transport document " means t he consignment note in accordance with the Contract of Carriage (see CIM ), the wagon note in accordance with the General Contract of Use for Wagons ( GCU ) or another transport document meeting the provisions of section 5.4.1; " Transport index (TI)" assigned to a package, overpack or container, or to unpackaged LSA-I or SCO-I or SCO-III , for the carriage of radioactive material , means a number which is used to provide control over radiation exposure; "Tray" (Class 1) means a sheet of metal, plastics, fibreboard or other suitable material which is placed in the inner , intermediate or outer packaging and achieves a close-fit in such packaging . The surface of the tray may be shaped so that packagings or articles can be inserted, held secure and separated from each other; "Tube" (Class 2) means a pressure receptacle of seamless or composite construction having a water capacity exceeding 150 litres and of not more than 3 000 litres; U "Unloading" means all actions carried out by the unloader , in accordance with the definition of unloader ; "Undertaking" , see "Enterprise" ; "Unloader" means any enterprise which: (a) Removes a container , bulk-container , MEGC , tank-container , portable tank or road vehicle from a wagon ; or (b) Unloads packaged dangerous goods , small containers or portable tanks out of or from a wagon or a container ; or (c) Discharges dangerous goods from a tank ( tank-wagon , demountable tank , portable tank or tank-container ) or from a battery-wagon or MEGC or from a wagon , large container or small container for carriage in bulk or a bulk-container . "UN Model Regulations" means the Model Regulations annexed to the twenty- second revised edition of the Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods published by the United Nations (ST/SG/AC.10/1/Rev. 2 2 ); "UN number" means the four-figure identification number of the substance or article taken from the UN Model Regulations ; "UN Regulation" means a regulation annexed to the Agreement concerning the adoption of uniform technical prescriptions for wheeled vehicles, equipment and parts which can be fitted and or used on wheeled vehicles and the conditions for reciprocal recognition of approvals granted on the basis of these prescriptions (1958 Agreement, as amended); V "Vacuum-operated waste tank" means a tank-container or tank swap body primarily used for the carriage of dangerous wastes , with special constructional features and/or equipment to facilitate the filling and discharging of wastes as specified in Chapter 6.10. A tank which fully complies with the requirements of Chapter 6.7 or 6.8 is not considered to be a vacuum-operated waste tank ; "Vacuum valve" means a spring-loaded device which is activated automatically by pressure the purpose of which is to protect the tank against unacceptable negative internal pressure; W "Wagon" means a railway vehicle, not provided with a means of traction, which is intended to carry goods (see also battery-wagon , closed wagon , open wagon , sheeted wagon and tank-wagon ) ; "Wastes" means substances, solutions, mixtures or articles for which no direct use is envisaged but which are carried for reprocessing, dumping, elimination by incineration or other methods of disposal; "Wooden barrel" means a packaging made of natural wood, of round cross-section, having convex walls, consisting of staves and heads and fitted with hoops; "Wooden IBC" means a rigid or collapsible wooden body , together with an inner liner (but no inner packaging ) and appropriate service and structural equipment ; "Working pressure" (a) For a compressed gas , means the settled pressure at a reference temperature of 15 °C in a full pressure receptacle ; (b) For UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved, means the calculated settled pressure at a uniform reference temperature of 15 °C in an acetylene cylinder containing the specified solvent content and the maximum acetylene content; (c) For UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free, means the working pressure which was calculated for the equivalent cylinder for UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved ; NOTE: For tanks , see "Maximum working pressure (gauge pressure)". "Woven plastics" (for flexible IBCs ) means a material made from stretch tapes or monofilaments of suitable plastics material. 1.2.2 Units of measurement 1.2.2.1 The following units of measurement are applicable in RID : Measurement of SI Unit Acceptable Relationship alternative unit between units L ength m (metre) – – Area m 2 (square metre) – – Volume m 3 ( cubic metre ) l (litre) 1 l = 10 -3 m 3 Time s (second) min (minute) 1 min = 60 s h (hour) 1 h = 3 600 s d (day) 1 d = 86 400 s Mass kg ( kilogram ) g ( gramme ) 1g = 10 -3 kg t (ton) 1 t = 10 3 kg Mass density kg/m 3 kg/l 1 kg/l = 10 3 kg/m 3 Temperature K (kelvin) ° C (degree Celsius) 0 °C = 273.15 K Temperature difference K (kelvin) °C (degree Celsius) 1 °C = 1 K Force N (newton) – 1 N = 1 kg · m /s 2 Pressure Pa (pascal) 1 Pa = 1 N/ m 2 bar (bar) 1 bar = 10 5 Pa Stress N/m 2 N/mm 2 1 N/mm 2 = 1 M P a Work J (joule) kWh (kilowatt hours) 1 kWh = 3.6 MJ Ener gy J (joule) 1 J = 1 N·m = 1 W· s Quantity of heat J (joule) eV ( electronvolt ) 1 eV = 0.1602· 10 -18 J Pow er W (watt) – 1 W = 1 J/s = 1 N· m /s Electrical resistance Ω (ohm) – 1 Ω = 1 kg · m 2 / s 3 / A 2 Kinematic viscosity m 2 /s mm 2 /s 1 mm 2 /s = 10 -6 m 2 /s Dynamic viscosity Pa·s mPa·s 1 mPa· s = 10 -3 Pa· s Activity Bq (becquerel) Dose equivalent Sv (sievert) The decimal multiples and sub-multiples of a unit may be formed by prefixes or symbols, having the following meanings, placed before the name or symbol of the unit: Factor Prefix Symbol 1 000 000 000 000 000 000 1 000 000 000 000 000 1 000 000 000 000 1 000 000 000 1 000 000 1 000 100 10 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.000 001 0.000 000 001 0.000 000 000 001 0.000 000 000 000 001 0.000 000 000 000 000 001 = 10 18 = 10 15 = 10 12 = 10 9 = 10 6 = 10 3 = 10 2 = 10 1 = 10 -1 = 10 -2 = 10 -3 = 10 -6 = 10 -9 = 10 -12 = 10 -15 = 10 -18 quintillion quadrillion trillion billion million thousand hundred ten tenth hundredth thousandth millionth billionth trillionth quadrillionth quintillionth exa exa peta peta tera tera giga giga mega mega kilo kilo hecto hecto deca deca deci deci centi centi milli milli micro micro nano nano pico pico femto femto atto atto E P T G M k h da d c m n p f a NOTE: 10 9 b illion is United Nations usage in English. By analogy, so is 10 9 = 1 billionth. 1.2.2.2 Unless expressly stated otherwise, the sign "%" in RID represents: (a) In the case of mixtures of solids or of liquids, and also in the case of solutions and of solids wetted by a liquid, a percentage mass based on the total mass of the mixture, the solution or the wetted solid; (b) In the case of mixtures of compressed gases, when filled by pressure, the proportion of the volume indicated as a percentage of the total volume of the gaseous mixture, or, when filled by mass, the proportion of the mass indicated as a percentage of the total mass of the mixture; (c) In the case of mixtures of liquefied gases and dissolved gases, the proportion of the mass indicated as a percentage of the total mass of the mixture. 1.2.2.3 Pressures of all kinds relating to receptacles (such as test pressure, internal pressure, safety valve opening pressure) are always indicated in gauge pressure (pressure in excess of atmospheric pressure); however, the vapour pressure of substances is always expressed in absolute pressure. 1.2.2.4 Where RID specifies a degree of filling for receptacles, this is always related to a reference temp erature of the substances of 15 °C, unless some other temperature is indicated. 1.2.3 List of abbreviations In RID, abbreviations, acronyms and abbreviated designations of regulatory texts are used, with the following meaning: A "ADN" means the European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Inland Waterways; "ADR" means the Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road, including all special agreements signed by those states involved in the transport operation; "ASTM" means the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA, 19428-2959, United States of America), www.astm.org; C "CGA" means the Compressed Gas Association, 8484 Westpark Drive, Suite 220, McLean, Virginia 22102, United States of America, www.cganet.com; "CIM" means the Uniform Rules Concerning the Contract of International Carriage of Goods by Rail (Appendix B to the Convention concerning International Carriage by Rail (COTIF)), as amended; "CMR" means the Convention on the Contract for the International Carriage of Goods by Road (Geneva, 19 May 1956), as amended; "CNG" means compressed natural gas (see 1.2.1); "CSC" means the International Convention for Safe Containers (Geneva, 1972) as amended and published by the International Maritime Organization ( IMO ), London; "CSI" means criticality safety index (see 1.2.1); E "ECM" means entity in charge of maintenance (see 1.2.1); "EIGA" means European Industrial Gas Association, 30 Avenue de l'Astronomie, 1210 Brussels ( Belgium ), www.eiga.eu; "EN" (standard) means a European standard published by the European Committee for Standardization ( CEN) (CEN, Avenue Marnix 17, 1 000 Brussels, Belgium), www.cen.eu; F "FRP" means fibre-reinforced plastics (see 1.2.1); G "GHS" means Globally Harmonized System of Classification and Labelling of Chemicals (see 1.2.1); I "IAEA" means the International Atomic Energy Agency, P.O. Box 100, 1400 Vienna, Austria, www.iaea.org; "IBC" means intermediate bulk container (see 1.2.1); "ICAO" means the International Civil Aviation Organization, 999 University Street, Montreal, Quebec H3C 5H7, Canada, www.icao.org; "IMDG" see definition of “IMDG Code” in 1.2.1; "IMO" means the International Maritime Organization, 4 Albert Embankment, London SE1 7SR, United Kingdom, www.imo.org; "ISO" (standard) means an international standard published by the International Organization for Standardization, 1, rue de Varembé , 1204 Geneva 20, Switzerland, www.iso.org; L "LNG" means liquefied natural gas (see 1.2.1); "LPG" means liquefied petroleum gas (see 1.2.1); "LSA" (material) means low specific activity material (see 2.2.7.1.3); M " MEGC " means multiple-element gas container (see 1.2.1); N "N.O.S." means not otherwise specified entry (see 1.2.1); O "OTIF" means the Intergovernmental Organisation for International Carriage by Rail, Gryphenhübeliweg 30, 3006 Bern, Switzerland, www.otif.org; S "SADT" means self-accelerating decomposition temperature (see 1.2.1); "SAPT" means self-accelerating polymerization temperature (see 1.2.1); "SCO" means surface contaminated object (see 2.2.7.1.3); "SMGS" means the Agreement concerning International Goods Transport by Rail of the Organisation for Cooperation between Railways (OSJD) (OSJD, ul . Hoza , 63/67 00-681 Warsaw, Poland), www.en.osjd.org; "SMGS Annex 2" means provisions for the carriage of dangerous goods as Annex 2 to SMGS; T "TI" means transport index (see 1.2.1); U "UIC" means the International Union of Railways, 16 rue Jean Rey, 75015 Paris, France, www.uic.org; "UNECE" means the United Nations Economic Commission for Europe, Palais des Nations, 8-14 avenue de la Paix , 1211 Geneva 10, Switzerland, www.unece.org. Chapter 1.3 Training of persons involved in the carriage of dangerous goods 1.3.1 Scope and applicability Persons employed by the participants referred to in Chapter 1.4, whose duties concern the carriage of dangerous goods, shall be trained in the requirements governing the carriage of such goods appropriate to their responsibilities and duties. Employees shall be trained in accordance with 1.3.2 before assuming responsibilities and shall only perform functions, for which required training has not yet been provided, under the direct supervision of a trained person. Training requirements specific to security of dangerous goods in Chapter 1.10 shall also be addressed. NOTE 1 : With regard to the training for the safety adviser, see 1.8.3 instead of this section . 2: (Reserved) 3: For training with regard to Class 7, see also 1.7.2.5. 1.3.2 Nature of the training The training shall take the following form, appropriate to the responsibility and duties of the individual concerned. 1.3.2.1 General awareness training Personnel shall be familiar with the general requirements of the provisions for the carriage of dangerous goods. 1.3.2.2 Function-specific training Personnel shall be trained , commensurate directly with their duties and responsibilities in the requirements of the regulations concerning the carriage of dangerous goods. Where the carriage of dangerous goods involves a multimodal transport operation, the personnel shall be aware of the requirements concerning other transport modes. The carrier's and railway infrastructure manager's personnel shall also be trained in matters specific to rail transport. This training shall be in the form of basic training and specialized training. (a) Basic training for all personnel: All personnel shall be trained in the meaning of the danger labels and of the orange-coloured plates . In addition, personnel shall be aware of the procedure for reporting irregularities. (b) Specialized training for operational personnel directly involved in the carriage of dangerous goods: In addition to the basic training described under (a), personnel shall be trained commensurate with their duties. Personnel shall be trained on the subjects covered by the specialized training, which are divided into three categories in 1.3.2.2.2, on the basis of the groups in 1.3.2.2.1. 1.3.2.2.1 The following Table sets out the groups of personnel for the individual categories: Category Description of category Personnel 1 Operations personnel involved directly in the transport of dangerous goods Drivers and marshalling staff or personnel with an equivalent function 2 Personnel responsible for the technical control of wagons used for the transport of dangerous goods Rolling stock technician or personnel with an equivalent function 3 Personnel responsible for guiding and controlling rail and marshalling services and management personnel of the railway infrastructure manager Controllers, signallers, control centre personnel or personnel with an equivalent function 1.3.2.2.2 Special subjects to be covered by the specializ ed training shall be, at least: (a) D river s or personnel with an equivalent function of category 1: – how to access the necessary information concerning the composition of the train, the presence of dangerous goods and where they are situated in the train; – types of irregularity; – dealing in critical situations with irregularities, taking measures relating to the protection of their own train and nearby traffic. Marshallers or personnel with an equivalent function of category 1: – meaning of the shunting labels in accordance with Models 13 and 15 (see 5.3.4.2); – protective distances for goods of Class 1 in accordance with 7.5.3; – types of irregularity. Wagon technician or personnel with an equivalent function of category 2: – performance of inspections in accordance with Appendix 9 of the General Contract of Use for Wagons (GCU) – Conditions for the technical transfer inspection of wagons; – carrying out the checks described in 1.4.2.2.1 (only for personnel who perform the checks described in 1.4.2.2.1); – recognition of irregularities. (c) Traffic controller, signal box personnel, control centre personnel or personnel with an equivalent function of category 3: – dealing with critical situations in the event of irregularities; – internal emergency plans for marshalling yards in accordance with Chapter 1.11. 1.3.2.3 Safety training Commensurate with the degree of risk of injury or exposure arising from an incident involving the carriage of dangerous goods, including loading and unloading, personnel shall be trained in the hazards and dangers presented by dangerous goods. The training provided shall aim to make personnel aware of the safe handling and emergency response procedures. 1.3.2.4 The training shall be periodically supplemented with refresher training to take account of changes in regulations. 1.3.3 Documentation Records of training received according to this Chapter shall be kept by the employer and made available to the employee or competent authority, upon request. Records shall be kept by the employer for a period of time established by the competent authority. Records of training shall be verified upon commencing a new employment. Chapter 1.4 Safety obligations of the participants 1.4.1 General safety measures 1.4.1.1 The participants in the carriage of dangerous goods shall take appropriate measures according to the nature and the extent of foreseeable dangers, so as to avoid damage or injury and, if necessary, to minimize their effects. They shall, in all events, comply with the requirements of RID in their respective fields. 1.4.1.2 When there is an immediate risk that public safety may be jeopardized, the participants shall immediately notify the emergency services and shall make available to them the information they require to take action. 1.4.1.3 RID may specify certain of the obligations falling to the various participants. If a n RID Contracting State considers that no lessening of safety is involved, it may in its domestic legislation transfer the obligations falling to a specific participant to one or several other participants, provided that the obligations of 1.4.2 and 1.4.3 are met. These derogations shall be communicated by the RID Contracting State to the Secretariat of OTIF which will bring them to the attention of the other RID Contracting States . The requirements of 1.2.1, 1.4.2 and 1.4.3 concerning the definitions of participants and their respective obligations shall not affect the provisions of domestic law concerning the legal consequences (criminal nature, liability, etc.) stemming from the fact that the participant in question is e.g. a legal entity, a self-employed worker, an employer or an employee. 1.4.2 Obligations of the main participants NOTE 1 : Several participants to which safety obligations are assigned in this section may be one and the same enterprise. Also, the activities and the corresponding safety obligations of a participant can be assumed by several enterprises. 2: For radioactive materials see also 1.7.6. 1.4.2.1 Consignor 1.4.2.1.1 The consignor of dangerous goods is required to hand over for carriage only consignments which conform to the requirements of RID . In the context of 1.4.1, he shall in particular: (a) ascertain that the dangerous goods are classified and authorized for carriage in accordance with RID ; (b) furnish the carrier with information and data in a traceable form and, if necessary, the required transport documents and accompanying documents (authorizations, approvals, notifications, certificates, etc.), taking into account in particular the requirements of Chapter 5.4 and of Table A of Chapter 3.2 (c) use only packagings , large packagings , intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) and tanks (tank- wagons , wagons with demountable tanks, battery- wagons , MEGCs, portable tanks and tank-containers) approved for and suited to the carriage of the substances concerned and bearing the marks prescribed by RID ; (d) comply with the requirements on the means of dispatch and on forwarding restrictions; (e) ensure that even empty uncleaned and not degassed tanks (tank- wagons , wagons with demountable tanks, battery- wagons , MEGCs, portable tanks and tank-containers) or empty uncleaned wagons and containers for carriage in bulk are placarded , marked and labelled in accordance with Chapter 5.3 and that empty uncleaned tanks are closed and present the same degree of leakproofness as if they were full . 1.4.2.1.2 If the consignor uses the services of other participants (packer, loader, filler, etc.), he shall take appropriate measures to ensure that the consignment meets the requirements of RID. He may, however, in the case of 1.4.2.1.1 (a), (b), (c) and (e), rely on the information and data made available to him by other participants. 1.4.2.1.3 When the consignor acts on behalf of a third party, the latter shall inform the consignor in writing that dangerous goods are involved and make available to him all the information and documents he needs to perform his obligations. 1.4.2.2 Carrier 1.4.2.2.1 In the context of 1.4.1, the carrier who takes over the dangerous goods at the point of departure shall in particular: (a) ascertain that the dangerous goods to be carried are authorized for carriage in accordance with RID ; (b) a scertain that all information prescribed in RID related to the dangerous goods to be carried has been provided by the consignor before carriage, that the prescribed documentation is attached to the transport document or if electronic data processing (EDP) or if electronic data interchange (EDI) techniques are used instead of paper documentation, that data is available during transport in a manner at least equivalent to that of paper documentation; (c) ascertain visually that the wagons and loads have no obvious defects, leakages or cracks, missing equipment, etc.; (d) ascertain that the date specified for the next inspection for tank- wagons , battery- wagons , wagons with demountable tanks, portable tanks, tank-containers and MEGCs has not expired; NOTE: Tanks, battery-wagons and MEGCs may however be carried after the expiry of this deadline under the conditions of 4.1.6.10 (in the case of battery-wagons and MEGCs containing pressure receptacles as elements), 4.2.4.4, 4.3.2.3.7, 4.3.2.4.4, 6.7.2.19.6, 6.7.3.15.6 or 6.7.4.14.6. (e) verify that the wagons are not overloaded; (f) ascertain that the placards, marks and orange-coloured plates prescribed for the wagons in Chapter 5.3 have been affixed; (g) ascertain that the equipment prescribed in the instructions in writing is in the driver’s cab. This shall be done on the basis of the transport documents and accompanying documents, by a visual inspection of the wagon or the containers and, where appropriate, the load. The requirements of this paragraph are considered to have been complied with if Section 5 of IRS 40471-3 (Inspections of dangerous goods consignments) published by UIC is applied. 1.4.2.2.2 The carrier may, however, in the case of 1.4.2.2.1 (a), (b), (d), (e) and (f), rely on information and data made available to him by other participants. In the case of 1.4.2.2.1 (c) he may rely on what is certified in the "container/vehicle packing certificate" provided in accordance with 5.4.2. 1.4.2.2.3 If the carrier observes an infringement of the requirements of RID , in accordance with 1.4.2.2.1, he shall not forward the consignment until the matter has been rectified. 1.4.2.2.4 If, during the journey, an infringement which could jeopardize the safety of the operation is observed, the consignment shall be halted as soon as possible bearing in mind the requirements of traffic safety, of the safe immobilisation of the con signment, and of public safety. The transport operation may only be continued once the consignment complies with applicable regulations. The competent authority( ies ) concerned by the rest of the journey may grant an authorization to pursue the transport operation. In case the required compliance cannot be achieved and no authorization is granted for the rest of the journey, the competent authority( ies ) shall provide the carrier with the necessary administrative assistance. The same shall apply in case the carrier informs this/these competent authority( ies ) that the dangerous nature of the goods carried was not communicated to him by the consignor and that he wishes, by virtue of the law applicable in particular to the contract of carriage, to unload, destroy or render the goods harmless. 1.4.2.2.5 The carrier shall ensure that the manager of the railway infrastructure being used is able to obtain at any time during carriage rapid and unrestricted access to the information allowing him to meet the requirements of 1.4.3.6 (b). NOTE: The arrangements by which the data are provided shall be laid down in the rules for using the railway infrastructure. 1.4.2.2.6 The carrier shall provide the driver with the instructions in writing as prescribed in 5.4.3. 1.4.2.2.7 The carrier shall inform the driver of the dangerous goods on board and their position on the train before the train starts its journey. The requirements of this paragraph are considered to have been complied with if appendices A and B of UIC Leaflet 472 ("Braking sheet and consist list for international freight trains") are applied. 1.4.2.2.8 The carrier shall ensure that the information to be made available to the entity in charge of maintenance (ECM) , either directly or via the operator of the tank-wagon, as defined in Article 15 § 3 of Appendix G to COTIF (ATMF) and in Annex A to ATMF also covers the tank and its equipment. 1.4.2.3 Consignee 1.4.2.3.1 The consignee has the obligation not to defer acceptance of the goods without compelling reasons and to verify, after unloading, that the requirements of RID concerning him have been complied with. 1.4.2.3.2 A wagon or container may only be returned or reused once the requirements of RID concerning the unloading have been complied with. 1.4.2.3.3 If the consignee makes use of the services of other participants (unloader, cleaner, decontamination facility, etc.) he shall take appropriate measures to ensure that the requirements of 1.4.2.3.1 and 1.4.2.3.2 of RID have been complied with. 1.4.3 Obligations of the other participants A non-exhaustive list of the other participants and their respective obligations is given below. The obligations of the other participants flow from section 1.4.1 above insofar as they know or should have known that their duties are performed as part of a transport operation subject to RID . 1.4.3.1 Loader 1.4.3.1.1 In the context of 1.4.1, the loader has the following obligations in particular: (a) he shall hand the dangerous goods over to the carrier only if they are authorized for carriage in accordance with RID ; (b) he shall, when handing over for carriage packed dangerous goods or uncleaned empty packagings , check whether the packaging is damaged. He shall not hand over a package the packaging of which is damaged, especially if it is not leakproof, and there are leakages or the possibility of leakages of the dangerous substance, until the damage has been repaired; this obligation also applies to empty uncleaned packagings ; (c) he shall comply with the special requirements concerning loading and handling; (d) he shall, when he hands dangerous goods over for carriage directly, comply with the requirements concerning placarding , marking and orange-coloured plates on the wagon or large container conforming to Chapter 5.3 ; (e) he shall, when loading packages, comply with the prohibitions on mixed loading taking into account dangerous goods already in the wagon or large container and requirements concerning the separation of foodstuffs, other articles of consumption or animal feedstuffs. 1.4.3.1.2 The loader may, however, in the case of 1.4.3.1.1 (a), (d) and (e), rely on information and data made available to him by other participants. 1.4.3.2 Packer In the context of 1.4.1, the packer shall comply with in particular: (a) the requirements concerning packing conditions, or mixed packing conditions and, (b) when he prepares packages for carriage, the requirements concerning marking and labelling of the packages. 1.4.3.3 Filler In the context of 1.4.1, the filler has the following obligations in particular: (a) he shall ascertain prior to the filling of tanks that both they and their equipment are technically in a satisfactory condition; (b) he shall ascertain that the date specified for the next inspection for tank- wagons, battery-wagons, wagons with demountable tanks, portable tanks, tank-containers and MEGCs has not expired; (c) he shall only fill tanks with the dangerous goods authorized for carriage in those tanks; (d) he shall, in filling the tank, comply with the requirements concerning dangerous goods in adjoining compartments; (e) he shall, during the filling of the tank, observe the permissible degree of filling or the permissible mass of contents per litre of capacity for the substance being filled; (f) he shall, after filling the tank, ensure that all closures are in a closed position and that there is no leakage; (g) he shall ensure that no dangerous residue of the filling substance adheres to the outside of the tanks filled by him; (h) he shall, in preparing the dangerous goods for carriage, ensure that the placards, marks, orange-coloured plates and labels as well as shunting labels are affixed on the tanks, on the wagons and on the containers in accordance with Chapter 5.3; ( i ) he shall, before and after filling tank-wagons with a liquefied gas, observe the applicable special checking requirements ; (j) he shall, when filling wagons or containers with dangerous goods in bulk, ascertain that the relevant provisions of Chapter 7.3 are complied with. NOTE: The filler shall establish procedures to ensure that he fulfils all his obligations. Guidelines in the form of checklists for tank-wagons for liquids and gases are available on the OTIF website (http://otif.org/en/?page_id=1103) to help the filler of tank-wagons for liquids and gases fulfil his safety obligations, particularly with respect to the leaktightness of tank-wagons. 1.4.3.4 Tank-container/portable tank operator In the context of 1.4.1, the tank-container/portable tank operator shall in particular: (a) ensure compliance with the requirements for construction, equipment, inspections and tests and marking; (b) ensure that the maintenance of shells and their equipment is carried out in such a way as to ensure that, under normal operating conditions, the tank-container/portable tank satisfies the requirements of RID until the next inspection; (c) have an exceptional inspection made when the safety of the shell or its equipment is liable to be impaired by a repair, an alteration or an accident. 1.4.3.5 Tank-wagon operator In the context of 1.4.1, the tank- wagon operator shall in particular : (a) ensure compliance with the requirements for construction, equipment, inspections and tests and marking; ( b ) have an exceptional inspection made when the safety of the shell or its equipment is liable to be impaired by a repai r, an alteration or an accident; (c) ensure that the results of the activities as required in (a) and (b) are recorded in the tank record; (d) ensure that the entity in charge of maintenance (ECM) assigned to the tank-wagon holds a valid certificate covering tank-wagons for dangerous goods; (e) ensure that the information made available to the ECM as defined in Article 15 § 3 of Appendix G to COTIF (ATMF) and in Annex A to ATMF also covers the tank and its equipment. 1.4.3.6 Railway i nfrastructure m anager In the context of 1.4.1, the railway infrastructure manager has in particular the following obligations. The railway infrastructure manager (a) shall ensure that internal emergency plans for marshalling yards are prepared in accordance with Chapter 1.11 ; (b) shall ensure that he has rapid and unrestricted access to the following information at any time during carriage: – composition of the train by indicating the number of each wagon and the wagon type if this is not included in the wagon number, – UN numbers of the dangerous goods being carried in or on each wagon insofar as they are required to be shown in the transport document, or if only dangerous goods packed in limited quantities in accordance with Chapter 3.4 are being carried, information indicating their presence when marking of the wagon or large container in accordance with Chapter 3.4 is required, – position of each wagon in the train (wagon order). This information shall only be disclosed to those parties that require it for safety, security or emergency response purposes. NOTE: The arrangements by which the data are provided shall be laid down in the rules for using the railway infrastructure. 1.4.3.7 Unloader 1.4.3.7.1 In the context of 1.4.1, the unloader shall in particular: (a) a scertain that the correct goods are unloaded by comparing the relevant information on the transport document with the information on the package, container, tank, MEGC or wagon ; (b) b efore and during unloading, check whether the packagings , the tank, the wagon or container have been damaged to an extent which would endanger the unloading operation. If this is the case, ascertain that unloading is not carried out until appropriate measures have been taken; (c) c omply with all relevant requirements concerning unloading and handling ; (d) i mmediately following the unloading of the tank, wagon or container: ( i ) r emove any dangerous residues which have adhered to the outside of the tank, wagon or container during the process of unloading; and (ii) e nsure the closure of valves and inspection openings; (e) e nsure that the prescribed cleaning and decontamination of the wagons or containers is carried out; and (f) e nsure that the wagons and containers once completely unloaded, cleaned, degassed and decontaminated, no longer display placards, marks and orange-coloured plates that had been displayed in accordance with Chapter 5.3. NOTE: The unloader shall establish procedures to ensure that he fulfils all his obligations. Guidelines in the form of checklists for tank-wagons for liquids and gases are available on the OTIF website (http://otif.org/en/?page_id=1103) to help the unloader of tank-wagons for liquids and gases fulfil his safety obligations, particularly with respect to the leaktightness of tank-wagons. 1.4.3.7.2 If the unloader makes use of the services of other participants (cleaner, decontamination facility, etc.) he shall take appropriate measures to ensure that the requirements of RID have been complied with. 1.4.3.8 Entity in charge of maintenance (ECM) In the context of 1.4.1, the entity in charge of maintenance (ECM) shall in particular ensure that: (a) the maintenance of tanks and their equipment is carried out in such a way as to ensure that, under normal operating conditions, the tank-wagon satisfies the requirements of RID; (b) the information as defined in Article 15 § 3 of Appendix G to COTIF (ATMF) and in Annex A to ATMF also covers the tank and its equipment; (c) the maintenance activities concerning the tank and its equipment are recorded in the maintenance file. Chapter 1.5 Derogations 1.5.1 Temporary derogations 1.5.1.1 T he competent authorities of the RID Contracting States may agree directly among themselves to authorize certain transport operations in their territories by temporary derogation from the requirements of RID , provided that safety is not compromised thereby. The authority which has taken the initiative with respect to the temporary derogation shall notify such derogations to the Secretariat of OTIF which shall bring them to the attention of the RID Contracting States . NOTE: "Special arrangement" in accordance with 1.7.4 is not considered to be a temporary derogation in accordance with this section. 1.5.1.2 The period of validity of the temporary derogation shall not be more than five years from the date of its entry into force. The temporary derogation shall automatically cease as from the date of the entry into force of a relevant amendment to RID . 1.5.1.3 Transport operations on the basis of temporary derogations shall constitute transport operations in the sense of Appendix C of COTIF. 1.5.2 Military consignments Derogations apply to military consignments, i.e. consignments with substances or articles of Class 1 belonging to the armed forces or for which the armed forces are responsible (see 5.2.1.5, sub-sections 5.2.2.1.8, 5.3.1.1.2 and 5.4.1.2.1(f) a nd 7.2.4, special requirement W 2) . Chapter 1.6 Transitional measures 1.6.1 General 1.6.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, the substances and articles of RID may be carried until 30 June 20 2 3 in accordance with the requirements of RID applicable up to 31 December 20 2 2 . NOTE: For the information in the transport document , see 5.4.1.1.12. 1.6.1.2 (Deleted) 1.6.1.3 Substances and articles of Class 1, belonging to the armed forces of a n RID Contracting State , that were packaged prior to 1 January 1990 in accordance with the requirements of RID in effect at that time may be carried after 31 December 1989 provided the packagings maintain their integrity and are declared in the transport document as mil itary goods packaged prior to 1 January 1990. The other requirements applicable as from 1 January 1990 for this class shall be complied with. 1.6.1.4 Substances and articles of Class 1 that were packaged between 1 January 1990 and 31 December 1996 in accordance with the requirements of RID in effect at that time may be carried after 31 December 1996, provided the packagings maintain their integrity and are declared in the transport document as goods of Class 1 packaged between 1 January 1990 and 31 December 1996. 1.6.1.5 IBCs built in accordance with the requirements of marg. 405 (5) and 555 (3) in force before 1 January 1999, but which do not meet the requirements of marg. 405 (5) and 555 (3) in force after 1 January 1999, may still be used. 1.6.1.6 Intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) manufactured before 1 January 2003 in accordance with the requirements of marginal 1612 (1) applicable up to 30 June 2001 and which do not conform to the requirements of 6.5.2.1.1 regarding the height of letters, numerals and symbols applicable as from 1 July 2001 may continue to be used. 1.6.1.7 Type approvals for drums, jerricans and composite packagings made of high or medium molecular mass polyethylene issued before 1 July 2005 in accordance with the requirements of 6.1.5.2.6 in force up to 31 December 2004, but which are not in accordance with the requirements of 4.1.1. 21 , continue to be valid until 31 December 2009. Any such packagings manufactured and marked on the basis of these type approvals may be used until the end of their period of use determined in 4.1.1.15. 1.6.1.8 Existing orange-coloured plates which meet the requirements of 5.3.2.2 applicable up to 31 December 2004 may continue to be used , provided that the requirements of 5.3.2.2.1 and 5.3.2.2.2 that the plate, numbers and letters shall remain affixed irrespective of the orientation of the wagon are met . 1.6.1.9 (Reserved) 1.6.1.10 (Deleted) 1.6.1.11 Type approvals for drums, jerricans and composite packagings made of high or medium molecular mass polyethylene, and for high molecular mass polyethylene IBCs, issued before 1 July 2007 in accordance with the requirements of 6.1.6 (a) in force up to 31 December 2006, but which are not in accordance with the requirements of 6.1.6.1 (a) applicable as from 1 January 2007, continue to be valid. 1.6.1.12 (Reserved) 1.6.1.13 (Deleted) 1.6.1.14 IBCs manufactured before 1 January 2011 and conforming to a design type which has not passed the vibration test of 6.5.6.13 or which was not required to meet the criteria of 6.5.6.9.5 (d) at the time it was subjected to the drop test, may still be used. 1.6.1.15 IBCs manufactured, remanufactured or repaired before 1 January 2011 need not be marked with the maximum permitted stacking load in accordance with 6.5.2.2.2. Such IBCs, not marked in accordance with 6.5.2.2.2, may still be used after 31 December 2010 but must be marked in accordance with 6.5.2.2.2 if they are remanufactured or repaired after that date. IBCs manufactured, remanufactured or repaired between 1 January 2011 and 31 December 2016 and marked with the maximum permitted stacking load in accordance with 6.5.2.2.2 in force up to 31 December 2014 may continue to be used. 1.6.1.16 (Deleted) 1.6.1.17 (Deleted) 1.6.1.18 (Deleted) 1.6.1.19 (Deleted) 1.6.1.20 (Deleted) 1.6.1.21 (Reserved) 1.6.1.22 (Deleted) 1.6.1.23 (Reserved) 1.6.1.24 (Deleted) 1.6.1.25 (Deleted) 1.6.1.26 Large packagings manufactured or remanufactured before 1 January 2014 and which do not conform to the requirements of 6.6.3.1 regarding the height of letters, numerals and symbols applicable as from 1 January 2013 may continue to be used. Those manufactured or remanufactured before 1 January 2015 need not be marked with the maximum permitted stacking load in accordance with 6.6.3.3. Such large packagings not marked in accordance with 6.6.3.3 may still be used after 31 December 2014 but must be marked in accordance with 6.6.3.3 if they are remanufactured after that date. Large packagings manufactured or remanufactured between 1 January 2011 and 31 December 2016 and marked with the maximum permitted stacking load in accordance with 6.6.3.3 in force up to 31 December 2014 may continue to be used. 1.6.1.27 Means of containment integral to equipment or machinery containing liquid fuels of UN Nos. 1202, 1203, 1223, 1268, 1863 and 3475 constructed before 1 July 2013, which do not conform to the requirements of paragraph (a) of special provision 363 of Chapter 3.3 applicable as from 1 January 2013, may still be used. 1.6.1.28 (Deleted) 1.6.1.29 Lithium cells and batteries manufactured according to a type meeting the requirements of sub-section 38.3 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Revision 3, Amendment 1 or any subsequent revision and amendment applicable at the date of the type testing may continue to be carried, unless otherwise provided in RID. Lithium cells and batteries manufactured before 1 July 2003 meeting the requirements of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Revision 3, may continue to be carried if all other applicable requirements are fulfilled. 1.6.1.30 (Deleted) 1.6.1.31 (Deleted) 1.6.1.32 (Deleted) 1.6.1.33 Electric double layer capacitors of UN No. 3499, manufactured before 1 January 2014, need not be marked with the energy storage capacity in Wh as required by paragraph (e) of special provision 361 of Chapter 3.3. 1.6.1.34 Asymmetric capacitors of UN No. 3508, manufactured before 1 January 2016, need not be marked with the energy storage capacity in Wh as required by paragraph (c) of special provision 372 of Chapter 3.3. 1.6.1.35 (Reserved) 1.6.1.36 (Reserved) 1.6.1.37 (Deleted) 1.6.1.38 Contracting States may continue to issue training certificates for dangerous goods safety advisers conforming to the model applicable until 31 December 2016, instead of those conforming to the requirements of 1.8.3.18 applicable from 1 January 2017, until 31 December 2018. Such certificates may continue in use to the end of their five year validity." 1.6.1.39 (Deleted) 1.6.1.40 (Deleted) 1.6.1.41 (Deleted) 1.6.1.42 (Deleted) 1.6.1.43 Vehicles registered or brought into service before 1 July 2017, as defined in special provisions 388 and 669 of Chapter 3.3, and their equipment intended for use during carriage, which conform to the requirements of RID applicable until 31 December 2016 but containing lithium cells and batteries which do not conform to the provisions of 2.2.9.1.7 may continue to be carried as a load in accordance with the requirements of special provision 666 of Chapter 3.3. 1.6.1.44 (Deleted) 1.6.1.45 Contracting States may, until 31 December 2020, continue to issue training certificates for dangerous goods safety advisers conforming to the model applicable until 31 December 2018, instead of those conforming to the requirements of 1.8.3.18 applicable from 1 January 2019. Such certificates may continue in use to the end of their five-year validity. 1.6.1.46 (Deleted) 1.6.1.47 (Deleted) 1.6.1.48 (Reserved) 1.6.1.49 The mark shown in Figure 5.2.1.9.2 applicable until 31 December 2022, may continue to be applied until 31 December 2026. 1.6.1.50 For articles that meet the definition for "DETONATORS, ELECTRONIC" as described in 2.2.1.4 Glossary of names, and assigned to UN Nos. 0511, 0512 and 0513, the entries for "DETONATORS, ELECTRIC" (UN Nos. 0030, 0255 and 0456) may continue to be used until 30 June 2025. 1.6.1.51 Adhesives, paint and paint related materials, printing inks and printing ink related materials and resin solutions assigned to UN 3082 environmentally hazardous substance, liquid, n.o.s ., packing group III in accordance with 2.2.9.1.10.6 as a consequence of 2.2.9.1.10.5 containing 0.025 % or more of the following substances, on their own or in combination: – 4,5-dichloro-2-octyl-2H-isothiazol-3-one (DCOIT); – octhilinone (OIT); and – zinc pyrithione ( ZnPT ); may be carried until 30 June 2025 in steel, aluminium, other metal or plastic packagings , which do not meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3, when carried in quantities of 30 litres or less per packaging as follows: (a) In palletized loads, a pallet box or unit load device, e.g. individual packagings placed or stacked and secured by strapping, shrink or stretch-wrapping or other suitable means to a pallet; or (b) As inner packagings of combination packagings with a maximum net mass of 40 kg. 1.6.1.52 Inner receptacles of composite IBCs manufactured before 1 July 2021 in accordance with the requirements of 6.5.2.2.4 in force up to 31 December 2020 and which are not in accordance with the requirements of 6.5.2.2.4 regarding the marks on the inner receptacles that are not readily accessible for inspection due to the design of the outer casing applicable as from 1 January 2021 may continue be used until the end of their period of use determined in 4.1.1.15. 1.6.1.53 High consequence dangerous goods of Class 1 carried in packages in a wagon or large container in quantities not exceeding those of 1.1.3.6.3 which, in accordance with 1.10.4 in force until 31 December 2022, could be carried without applying the requirements of Chapter 1.10 may still be carried without applying the requirements of Chapter 1.10 until 31 December 2024. 1.6.2 Pressure receptacles and r eceptacles for Class 2 1.6.2.1 Receptacles built before 1 January 1997 and which do not conform to the requirements of RID applicable as from 1 January 1997, but the carriage of which was permitted under the requirements of RID applicable up to 31 December 1996, may continue to be transported after that date if the periodic test requirements in packing instructions P200 and P203 are complied with. 1.6.2.2 (Deleted) 1.6.2.3 Receptacles intended for the carriage of Class 2 substances constructed before 1 January 2003, may continue to bear, after 1 January 2003, the marks conforming to the requirements applicable until 31 December 2002. 1.6.2.4 Pressure receptacles designed and constructed in accordance with technical codes no longer recognized according to 6.2. 5 may still be used. 1.6.2.5 Pressure receptacles and their closures designed and constructed in accordance with standards applicable at the time of their construction (see 6.2.4) according to the provisions of RID which were applicable at that time may still be used unless restricted by a specific transitional measure. 1.6.2.6 Pressure receptacles for substances other than those of Class 2, built before 1 July 2009 in accordance with the requirements of 4.1.4.4 in force up to 31 December 2008, but which do not conform to the requirements of 4.1.3.6 applicable as from 1 January 2009, may continue to be used , provided that the requirements of 4.1.4.4 in force up to 31 December 2008 are complied with. 1.6.2.7 (Deleted) 1.6.2.8 (Deleted) 1.6.2.9 The provisions of packing instruction P 200 (10), special packing provision v of 4.1.4.1 applicable until 31 December 2010 may be applied by RID Contracting States to cylinders constructed before 1 January 2015. 1.6.2.10 Refillable welded steel cylinders for the carriage of gases of UN Nos. 1011, 1075, 1965, 1969 or 1978, granted 15 year intervals for periodic inspection in accordance with packing instruction P 200 (10), special packing provision v of 4.1.4.1 as applicable until 31 December 2010 by the competent authority of the country (countries) of carriage, may continue to be periodically inspected according to those provisions. 1.6.2.11 Gas cartridges constructed and prepared for carriage before 1 January 2013 for which the requirements of 1.8.6, 1.8.7 or 1.8.8 for the conformity assessment of gas cartridges have not been applied may still be carried after this date, provided all the other applicable provisions of RID are met. 1.6.2.12 Salvage pressure receptacles may continue to be constructed and approved according to national regulations up to 31 December 2013. Salvage pressure receptacles constructed and approved in accordance with national regulations before 1 January 2014 may continue to be used with the approval of the competent authorities of the countries of use. 1.6.2.13 Bundles of cylinders manufactured before 1 July 2013 which are not marked in accordance with 6.2.3.9.7.2 and 6.2.3.9.7.3 applicable from 1 January 2013 or 6.2.3.9.7.2 applicable from 1 January 2015 may be used until the next periodic inspection after 1 July 2015. 1.6.2.14 Cylinders constructed before 1 January 2016 in accordance with 6.2.3 and a specification approved by the competent authorities of the countries of transport and use, but not in accordance with ISO 11513:2011 or ISO 9809-1:2010 as required in 4.1.4.1, packing instruction P 208 (1), may be used for the carriage of adsorbed gases provided the general packing requirements of 4.1.6.1 are met. 1.6.2.15 Bundles of cylinders periodically inspected before 1 July 2015 which are not marked in accordance with 6.2.3.9.7.3 applicable from 1 January 2015 may be used until the next periodic inspection after 1 July 2015. 1.6.2.16 (Deleted) 1.6.2.17 The requirements of Note 3 of 6.2.1.6.1 applicable until 31 December 2022 may continue to be applied until 31 December 2024. 1.6.2.18 Closed cryogenic receptacles constructed before 1 July 2023 which were subject to the initial inspection and test requirements of 6.2.1.5.2 applicable until 31 December 2022 but which do not however conform to the requirements of 6.2.1.5.2 relating to the initial inspection and test applicable as from 1 January 2023, may continue to be used. 1.6.2.19 Acetylene cylinders constructed before 1 July 2023 which are not marked in accordance with 6.2.2.7.3 (k) or (l) applicable from 1 January 2023 may continue to be used until the next periodic inspection and test after 1 July 2023. 1.6.2.20 Closures of refillable pressure receptacles constructed before 1 July 2023 which are not marked in accordance with 6.2.2.11 or 6.2.3.9.8 applicable from 1 January 2023 may continue to be used. 1.6.2.21 Standard EN 14912:2005 referenced in packing instruction P 200 (12) 3.4 of 4.1.4.1 in force up to 31 December 2022 may continue to be used for valve refurbishing or inspection until 31 December 2024. 1.6.2.22 Standard EN ISO 22434:2011 referenced in packing instruction P 200 (13) 3.4 of 4.1.4.1 in force up to 31 December 2022 may continue to be used for valve refurbishing or inspection until 31 December 2024. 1.6.3 Tank-wagons and battery-wagons 1.6.3.1 (Deleted) 1.6.3.2 (Deleted) 1.6.3.3 Tank-wagons whose shells were built before the entry into force of the requirements applicable as from 1 October 1978 may still be used if their wall thickness and items of equipment meet the requirements of Chapter 6.8. 1.6.3.3.1 (Deleted) 1.6.3.3.2 (Deleted) 1.6.3.3.3 (Deleted) 1.6.3.3.4 Tank-wagons which are intended for the carriage of gases of Class 2 and whose shells were built between 1 January 1971 and 31 December 1975 may still be used until 31 December 2025 if their items of equipment but not their wall thickness meet the requirements of Chapter 6.8. 1.6.3.3.5 Tank-wagons which are intended for the carriage of gases of Class 2 and whose shells were built between 1 January 1976 and 30 September 1978 may still be used until 31 December 2029 if their items of equipment but not their wall thickness meet the requirements of Chapter 6.8. 1.6.3.4 Tank-wagons constructed before 1 January 1988 in accordance with the requirements applicable up to 31 December 1987 and which do not conform to the requirements applicable from 1 January 1988 may still be used. This also applies to tank-wagons which do not bear the inscription of the shell materials in accordance with Appendix XI, 1.6.1, required from 1 January 1988. 1.6.3.5 Tank-wagons , constructed before 1 January 1993 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 1992 but which do not conform to the requirements applicable as from 1 January 1993 may still be used. 1.6.3.6 Tank-wagons constructed before 1 January 1995 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 1994 but which do not conform to the requirements applicable as from 1 January 1995 may still be used. 1.6.3.7 Tank-wagons intended for the carriage of flammable liquids with a flash-point from 55 °C to 6 0 °C constructed before 1 January 1997 in accordance with the requirements of Appendix XI, paragraphs 1.2.7, 1.3.8 and 3.3.3 applicable up to 31 December 1996 which do not conform to the requirements of those paragraphs in force from 1 January 1997 may continue to be used. 1.6.3.8 When, because of amendments to RID, some proper shipping names of gases have been modified, it is not necessary to modify the names on the plate or on the shell itself (see 6.8.3.5.2 or 6.8.3.5.3), provided that the names of the gases on the tank wagons, battery-wagons and wagons with demountable tanks or on the plates (see 6.8.3.5.6 (b) or (c)) are adapted at the first periodic inspection thereafter. 1.6.3.9 (Reserved) 1.6.3.10 (Reserved) 1.6.3.11 Tank-wagons constructed before 1 January 1997 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 1996 but which do not, however, conform to the requirements of Appendix XI, 3.3.3 and 3.3.4 applicable as from 1 January 1997, may still be used. 1.6.3.12 (Deleted) 1.6.3.13 (Deleted) 1.6.3.14 Tank-wagons constructed before 1 January 1999 in accordance with the requirements of Appendix XI, 5.3.6.3 in force up to 31 December 1998 and which do not conform to the requirements of Appendix XI, 5.3.6.3 applicable as from 1 January 1999, may still be used. 1.6.3.15 (Deleted) 1.6.3.16 For tank-wagons and battery-wagons constructed before 1 January 2007 which do not conform to the requirements of 4.3.2, 6.8.2.3, 6.8.2.4 and 6.8.3.4 concerning the tank record, the retention of files for the tank record shall start at the latest at the first periodic inspection after 30 June 2007 . 1.6.3.17 (Deleted) 1.6.3.18 Tank-wagons and battery-wagons constructed before 1 January 2003 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 30 June 2001, but which do not, however, conform to the re quirements applicable as from 1 July 2001, may still be used. However, they shall be marked with the relevant tank code and if applicable the relevant alphanumeric codes of special provisions TC and TE in accordance with 6.8.4. 1.6.3.19 (Reserved) 1.6.3.20 Tank-wagons constructed before 1 July 2003 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 2002 but which do not, however, conform to the requirements of 6.8.2.1.7 applicable as from 1 January 2003 and special provision TE15 of 6.8.4 (b) applicable from 1 January 2003 to 31 December 2006 may still be used. 1.6.3.21 (Deleted) 1.6.3.22 Tank-wagons whose shells are made of aluminium alloys, constructed before 1 January 2003 in accordance with the requirements in force until 31 December 2002 and which do not comply with the requirements in force from 1 January 2003, may still be used. 1.6.3.23 (Deleted) 1.6.3.24 Tank-wagons intended for the carriage of gases of UN Nos. 1052, 1790 and 2073, constructed before 1 January 2003 in accordance with the requirements in force until 31 December 2002 and which do not comply with the requirements of 6.8.5.1.1 (b) in force from 1 January 2003, may still be used. 1.6.3.25 (Deleted) 1.6.3.26 Tank-wagons constructed before 1 January 2007 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 2006 but which do not, however, conform to the requirements applicable as from 1 January 2007 regarding the marking of the external design pressure in accordance with 6.8.2.5.1, may still be used. 1.6.3.27 ( a) For t ank-wagons and battery-wagons not fitted with automatic couplers – for gases of Class 2 with classification codes containing the letter(s) T, TF, TC, TO, TFC or TOC, and – for substances of classes 3 to 8 carried in the liquid state and to which tank code L15CH, L15DH or L21DH is assigned in column (12) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, constructed before 1 January 2005 the devices defined in special pro vision TE 22 of 6.8.4 need to be capable of absorbing at least 500 kJ of energy at each end of the wagon. ( b) Tank - wagons and battery - wagons not fitted with automatic couplers – for gases of Class 2 with classification codes containing only the letter F, and – for substances of classes 3 to 8 carried in the liquid state and to which tank code L10BH, L10CH or L10DH is assigned in column (12) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, constructed before 1 January 2007 and which do not conform to the applicable requirements of s pecial p rovision TE 22 of 6.8.4 in force from 1 January 2007, may still be used. Tank-wagons and battery-wagons for the carriage of these gases and substances fitted with automatic couplers, constructed before 1 July 2015 and which do not conform to the applicable requirements of special provision TE 22 of 6.8.4 in force from 1 January 2015, may still be used. 1.6.3.28 Tank-wagon s constructed before 1 January 2005 in accordance with the requirements applicable up to 31 December 2004 and which do not conform to the requirements of the second paragraph of 6.8.2.2.1, shall be refitted at the latest at the time of the next refurbishment or the next repair, where this is practicable and where the work carried out requires the attachments to be dismantled. 1.6.3.29 Tank-wagon s constructed before 1 January 2005 and which do not conform to the requirements of 6.8.2.2.4 in force from 1 January 2005, may still be used. 1.6.3.30 (Reserved) 1.6.3.31 Tank-wagons and tanks forming element s of battery-wagons designed and constructed in accordance with a technical code which was recognized at the time of their construction according to the provisions of 6.8.2.7 which were applicable at that time may still be used. 1.6.3.32 Tank-wagons – for gases of Class 2 with classification codes containing the letter(s) T, TF, TC, TO, TFC or TOC, and – for liquids of classes 3 to 8 to which tank code L15CH, L15DH or L21DH is assigned in column (12) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, constructed before 1 January 2007 and which do not conform to the applicable requirements of special provision TE 25 of 6.8.4 (b) in force from 1 January 2007 may still be used. Tank-wagons for the carriage of gases UN 1017 chlorine, UN 1749 chlorine trifluoride, UN 2189 dichlorosilane , UN 2901 bromine chloride and UN 3057 trifluoroacetyl chloride, whose wall thickness of the ends does not meet the requirements of special provision TE 25 (b), shall however be fitted with devices in accordance with special provision TE 25 (a), (c) or (d). 1.6.3.33 Tank-wagons and battery-wagons for gases of Class 2 constructed before 1 January 1986 in accordance with the requirements applicable up to 31 December 1985 and which do not conform to the requirements of 6.8.3.1.6 concerning the buffers, may still be used. 1.6.3.34 (Reserved) 1.6.3.35 (Deleted) 1.6.3.36 Tank-wagons constructed before 1 January 2011 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 2010, but which do not conform to the requirements of 6.8.2.1.29 applicable as from 1 January 2011, may still be used. 1.6.3.37 (Deleted) 1.6.3.38 Tank-wagons and battery- wagons designed and constructed in accordance with standards applicable at the time of their construction (see 6.8.2.6 and 6.8.3.6) according to the provisions of RID which were applicable at that time may still be used unless restricted by a specific transitional measure. 1.6.3.39 Tank-wagons constructed before 1 July 2011 in accordance with the requirements of 6.8.2.2.3 in force up to 31 December 2010 but which do not, however, conform to the requirements of 6.8.2.2.3, third paragraph, concerning the position of the flame trap or flame arrester may still be used. 1.6.3.40 (Deleted) 1.6.3.41 Tank-wagons constructed before 1 July 2013 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 2012, but which do not, however, meet the marking provisions of 6.8.2.5.2 or 6.8.3.5.6 applicable as from 1 January 2013, may continue to be marked in accordance with the requirements applicable up to 31 December 2012 until the next periodic inspection after 1 July 2013. 1.6.3.42 (Deleted) 1.6.3.43 Tank-wagons constructed before 1 January 2012 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 2012, but which do not however conform to the requirements of 6.8.2.6 relating to standards EN 14432:2006 and EN 14433:2006 applicable as from 1 January 2011, may still be used. 1.6.3.44 (Reserved) 1.6.3.45 Tank-wagons for refrigerated liquefied gases constructed before 1 July 2017 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 2016 but which do not conform to the requirements of 6.8.3.4.10, 6.8.3.4.11 and 6.8.3.5.4 applicable from 1 January 2017 may continue to be used until the next inspection after 1 July 2017. Until this time, to meet the requirements of 4.3.3.5 and 5.4.1.2.2 (d), the actual holding times may be estimated without recourse to the reference holding time. 1.6.3.46 Tank-wagons constructed before 1 July 2017 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 2016 but which do not however conform to the requirements of 6.8.2.1.23 applicable as from 1 January 2017 may still be used. 1.6.3.47 Tank-wagons constructed before 1 July 2019, fitted with safety valves meeting the requirements in force up to 31 December 2018 but which do not meet the requirements of 6.8.3.2.9 last sub-paragraph concerning their design or protection applicable from 1 January 2019 may continue to be used until the next intermediate or periodic inspection after 1 January 2021. 1.6.3.48 Notwithstanding the requirements of special provision TU 42 of 4.3.5 applicable from 1 January 2019, tank-wagons with a shell constructed of aluminium alloy, including those with protective lining, which were used before 1 January 2019 for the carriage of substances with a pH value less than 5.0 or more than 8.0, may continue to be used for the carriage of such substances until 31 December 2026. 1.6.3.49 Tank-wagons constructed before 1 July 2019 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 2018 but which do not conform to the requirements of 6.8.2.2.10 concerning the burst pressure of the bursting disc applicable as from 1 January 2019 may continue to be used. 1.6.3.50 Tank-wagons constructed before 1 July 2019 in accordance with the requirements of 6.8.2.2.3 in force up to 31 December 2018 but which however do not conform to the requirements of 6.8.2.2.3 last but one paragraph concerning the flame arresters on breather devices applicable from 1 January 2019 may continue to be used. 1.6.3.51 Tank-wagons constructed before 1 July 2019 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 2018 but which do not however conform to the requirements of 6.8.2.1.23 concerning the check of the welds in the knuckle area of the tank ends applicable as from 1 January 2019 may continue to be used. 1.6.3.52 Tank-wagons constructed before 1 July 2019 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 2018 but which however do not conform to the requirements of 6.8.2.2.11 applicable from 1 January 2019 may continue to be used. 1.6.3.53 Type approval certificates issued for tank-wagons and battery-wagons before 1 July 2019 in accordance with the requirements of 6.8.2.3.1 in force up to 31 December 2018 but which do not, however, conform to the requirements of 6.8.2.3.1 to show the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic of the state whose territory the approval was granted and a registration number applicable as from 1 January 2019 may continue to be used. 1.6.3.54 Procedures used by the competent authority for the approval of experts performing activities concerning tanks-wagons intended for the carriage of substances other than those for which TA 4 and TT 9 of 6.8.4 apply which conform to the requirements of Chapter 6.8 in force up to 31 December 2022 but which do not conform to the requirements of 1.8.6 applicable to inspection bodies from 1 January 2023 may continue to be used until 31 December 2032. NOTE: The term "expert" has been replaced by the term "inspection body". 1.6.3.55 Type approval certificates issued for tank-wagons intended for the carriage of substances other than those for which TA 4 and TT 9 of 6.8.4 apply, issued before 1 July 2023 in compliance with Chapter 6.8 which not comply with 1.8.7 as applicable from 1 January 2023 may continue to be used until the end of their validity. 1.6.3.56 (Reserved) 1.6.3.57 Tank-wagons constructed before 1 January 2024 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 2022 but which do not, however, conform to the requirements applicable as from 1 January 2023 regarding the fitting of safety valves in accordance with 6.8.3.2.9, may still be used. 1.6.3.58 Procedures used by the competent authority for the approval of experts, the performance of inspections concerning tank-wagons and the mutual recognition of such inspections in accordance with the requirements of 6.8.2.4.6 in force up to 31 December 2022, but which do not, however, conform to the requirements applicable as from 1 January 2023, may continue to be used until 31 December 2032. NOTE: During this period the Secretariat of OTIF shall continue to publish a list of recognised experts for performing tests and inspections on the tanks of tank-wagons in accordance with the requirements of 6.8.2.4.6 applicable up to 31 December 2022 separate to the list in accordance with 1.8.6.2.4 applicable as from 1 January 2023. 1.6.3.59 Tank-wagons constructed before 1 July 2023 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 2022, but which do not, however, meet the requirements of special provision TE 26 of 6.8.4 (b) applicable as from 1 January 2023 may continue to be used. 1.6.3.60 Tank-wagons that are already fitted with safety valves meeting the requirements of 6.8.3.2.9 as applicable from 1 January 2023 do not need to display the marks in accordance with 6.8.3.2.9.6 until the next intermediate or periodic inspection after 31 December 2023. 1.6.4 Tank-containers , portable tanks and MEGCs 1.6.4.1 Tank-containers constructed before 1 January 1988 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 1987 but which do not, however, conform to the requirements applicable as from 1 January 1988, may still be used. 1.6.4.2 Tank-containers constructed before 1 January 1993 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 1992 but which do not, however, conform to the requirements applicable as from 1 January 1993, may still be used. 1.6.4.3 Tank-containers constructed before 1 January 1995 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 1994 but which do not, however, conform to the requirements applicable as from 1 January 1995, may still be used. 1.6.4.4 Tank-containers intended for the carriage of flammable liquids with a flash-point from 55 °C to 6 0 °C constructed before 1 January 1997 in accordance with the requirements of Appendix X, paragraphs 1.2.7, 1.3.8 and 3.3.3 applicable up to 31 December 1996 which do not conform to the requirements of those paragraphs in force from 1 January 1997 may continue to be used. 1.6.4.5 When, because of amendments to RID , some proper shipping names of gases have been modified, it is not necessary to modify the names on the plate or on the shell itself (see 6.8.3.5.2 or 6.8.3.5.3), provided that the names of the gases on the tank-contain ers and MEGCs or on the plates ( see 6.8.3.5.6 (b) or (c) ) are adapted at the first periodic inspection thereafter. 1.6.4.6 Tank-containers constructed before 1 January 2007 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 2006 but which do not, however, conform to the requirements applicable as from 1 January 2007 regarding the marking of the external design pressure in accordance with 6.8.2.5.1, may still be used. 1.6.4.7 Tank-containers constructed before 1 January 1997 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 1996 but which do not, however, conform to the requirements of Appendix X, 3.3.3 and 3.3.4 applicable as from 1 January 1997, may still be used. 1.6.4.8 Tank-containers constructed before 1 January 1999 in accordance with the requirements of Appendix X, 5.3.6.3 applicable up to 31 December 1998 and which do not conform to the requirements of Appendix X, 5.3.6.3 in force from 1 January 1999, may still be used. 1.6.4.9 Tank-containers and MEGCs designed and constructed in accordance with a technical code which was recognized at the time of their construction according to the provisions of 6.8.2.7 which were applicable at that time may still be used. 1.6.4.10 (Deleted) 1.6.4.11 (R eserved) 1.6.4.12 Tank-containers and MEGCs constructed before 1 January 2003 in accordance with the requirements applicable up to 30 June 2001, but which do not, however, conform to the requirements applicable as from 1 July 2001, may still be used. However, they shall be marked with the relevant tank code and if applicable the relevant alphanumeric codes of special provisions TC and TE in accordance with 6.8.4. 1.6.4.13 Tank-containers constructed before 1 July 2003 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 2002 but which do not, however, conform to the requirements of 6.8.2.1.7 applicable as from 1 January 2003 and special provision TE15 of 6.8.4 (b) applicable from 1 January 2003 to 31 De c ember 2006 may still be used. 1.6.4.14 Tank-containers intended for the carriage of gases of UN Nos. 1052, 1790 and 2073, constructed before 1 January 2003 in accordance with the requirements in force until 31 December 2002 and which do not comply with the requirements of 6.8.5.1.1 (b) in force from 1 January 2003, may still be used. 1.6.4.15 (Deleted) 1.6.4.16 (Deleted) 1.6.4.17 (Deleted) 1.6.4.18 For tank-containers and MEGCs constructed before 1 January 2007 which do not conform to the requirements of 4.3.2, 6.8.2. 3, 6.8.2.4 and 6.8.3.4 concerning the tank record, the retention of files for the tank record shall start at the latest at the first periodic inspection after 30 June 2007 . 1.6.4.19 (Deleted) 1.6.4.20 Vacuum-operated waste tank-containers constructed before 1 July 2005 in accordance with the requirements applicable up to 31 December 2004 but which do not conform to the requirements of 6.10.3.9 applicable as from 1 January 2005, may still be used. 1.6.4.21 to 1.6.4.29 (Reserved) 1.6.4.30 P ortable tanks and UN MEGCs which do not meet the design requirements applicable as from 1 January 2007 but which have been constructed according to a design approval certificate which has been issued before 1 January 2008 may continue to be used. 1.6.4.31 (Deleted) 1.6.4.32 (Deleted) 1.6.4.33 Notwithstanding the provisions of 4.3.2.2.4, tank-containers intended for the carriage of liquefied gases or refrigerated liquefied gases, which meet the applicable construction requirements of RID but which were divided, before 1 July 2009, by partitions or surge plates into sections of more than 7 500 litres capacity may still be filled to more than 20% and less than 80% of their capacity. 1.6.4.34 (Deleted) 1.6.4.35 (Deleted) 1.6.4.36 (Deleted) 1.6.4.37 Portable tanks and MEGCs manufactured before 1 January 2012, that conform to the marking requirements of 6.7.2.20.1, 6.7.3.16.1, 6.7.4.15.1 or 6.7.5.13.1 applicable up to 31 December 2010, as relevant, may continue to be used if they comply with all other relevant requirements of RID applicable as from 1 January 2011 including, when applicable, the requirement of 6.7.2.20.1 (g) for marking the symbol "S" on the plate when the shell or the compartment is divided by surge plates into sections of not mo re than 7 500 litres capacity. 1.6.4.38 (Deleted) 1.6.4.39 Tank-containers and MEGCs designed and constructed in accordance with standards applicable at the time of their construction (see 6.8.2.6 and 6.8.3.6) according to the provisions of RID which were applicable at that time may still be used unless restricted by a specific transitional measure. 1.6.4.40 Tank-containers constructed before 1 July 2011 in accordance with the requirements of 6.8.2.2.3 in force up to 31 December 2010 but which do not, however, conform to the requirements of 6.8.2.2.3, third paragraph, concerning the position of the flame trap or flame arrester may still be used. 1.6.4.41 (Deleted) 1.6.4.42 Tank-containers constructed before 1 July 2013 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 2012, but which do not, however, meet the marking provisions of 6.8.2.5.2 or 6.8.3.5.6 applicable as from 1 January 2013, may continue to be marked in accordance with the requirements applicable up to 31 December 2012 until the next periodic inspection after 1 July 2013. 1.6.4.43 Portable tanks and MECGs manufactured before 1 January 2014 need not comply with the requirements of 6.7.2.13.1 (f), 6.7.3.9.1 (e), 6.7.4.8.1 (e) and 6.7.5.6.1 (d) concerning the marking of the pressure relief devices. 1.6.4.44 (Deleted) 1.6.4.45 (Deleted) 1.6.4.46 Tank-containers constructed before 1 January 2012 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 2012, but which do not however conform to the requirements of 6.8.2.6 relating to standards EN 14432:2006 and EN 14433:2006 applicable as from 1 January 2011, may still be used. 1.6.4.47 Tank-containers for refrigerated liquefied gases constructed before 1 July 2017 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 2016 but which do not conform to the requirements of 6.8.3.4.10, 6.8.3.4.11 and 6.8.3.5.4 applicable from 1 January 2017 may continue to be used until the next inspection after 1 July 2017. Until this time, to meet the requirements of 4.3.3.5 and 5.4.1.2.2 (d), the actual holding times may be estimated without recourse to the reference holding time. 1.6.4.48 Tank-containers constructed before 1 July 2017 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 2016 but which do not however conform to the requirements of 6.8.2.1.23 applicable as from 1 January 2017 may still be used. 1.6.4.49 Tank-containers constructed before 1 July 2019, fitted with safety valves meeting the requirements in force up to 31 December 2018 but which do not meet the requirements of 6.8.3.2.9 last sub-paragraph concerning their design or protection applicable from 1 January 2019 may continue to be used until the next intermediate or periodic inspection after 1 January 2021. 1.6.4.50 Notwithstanding the requirements of special provision TU 42 of 4.3.5 applicable from 1 January 2019, tank-containers with a shell constructed of aluminium alloy, including those with a protective lining, which were used before 1 January 2019 for the carriage of substances with a pH value less than 5.0 or more than 8.0, may continue to be used for the carriage of such substances until 31 December 2026. 1.6.4.51 Tank-containers constructed before 1 July 2019 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 2018 but which do not conform to the requirements of 6.8.2.2.10 concerning the burst pressure of the bursting disc applicable as from 1 January 2019 may continue to be used. 1.6.4.52 Tank-containers constructed before 1 July 2019 in accordance with the requirements of 6.8.2.2.3 in force up to 31 December 2018 but which however do not conform to the requirements of 6.8.2.2.3 last paragraph concerning the flame arresters on breather devices applicable from 1 January 2019 may continue to be used. 1.6.4.53 Tank-containers constructed before 1 July 2019 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 2018 but which do not however conform to the requirements of 6.8.2.1.23 concerning the check of the welds in the knuckle area of the tank ends applicable as from 1 January 2019 may continue to be used. 1.6.4.54 Tank-containers constructed before 1 July 2019 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 2018 but which however do not conform to the requirements of 6.8.2.2.11 applicable from 1 January 2019 may continue to be used. 1.6.4.55 F ibre-reinforced plastics tank-containers constructed before 1 July 2021 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 2020 but which do not, however, meet the requirements for the marking of the tank code of 6.9.6.1 applicable as from 1 January 2021 may continue to be marked in accordance with the requirements applicable up to 31 December 2020 until the next periodic inspection after 1 July 2021. 1.6.4.56 Tank-containers which do not comply with the requirements of 6.8.3.4.6 (b) applicable from 1 January 2023, may continue to be used if an intermediate inspection takes place at least six years after each periodic inspection performed after 1 July 2023. 1.6.4.57 Except in relation to 6.8.1.5, second paragraph, second indent, procedures used by the competent authority for the approval of experts performing activities concerning tank-containers intended for the carriage of substances other than those for which TA 4 and TT 9 of 6.8.4 apply which conform to the requirements of Chapter 6.8 in force up to 31 December 2022 but which do not conform to the requirements of 1.8.6 applicable to inspection bodies from 1 January 2023 may continue to be used until 31 December 2032. NOTE: The term "expert" has been replaced by the term "inspection body". 1.6.4.58 Type approval certificates issued for tank-containers intended for the carriage of substances other than those for which TA 4 and TT 9 of 6.8.4 apply, issued before 1 July 2023 in compliance with Chapter 6.8, but which do not comply with 1.8.7 as applicable from 1 January 2023, may continue to be used until the end of their validity. 1.6.4.59 Tank-containers constructed before 1 July 2033 in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 6.9 in force up to 31 December 2022, may still be used. 1.6.4.60 Tank-containers constructed before 1 January 2024 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 2022 but which do not, however, conform to the requirements applicable as from 1 January 2023 regarding the fitting of safety valves in accordance with 6.8.3.2.9, may still be used. 1.6.4.61 Tank-containers constructed before 1 July 2023 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 2022, but which do not meet the requirements of 6.8.2.2.4, second and third paragraph, applicable from 1 January 2023, may still be used. 1.6.4.62 Extra-large tank-containers constructed before 1 July 2023 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 2022, but which do not meet the requirements of 6.8.2.1.18, third paragraph, concerning the minimum thickness of the shell applicable as from 1 January 2023 may still be used. 1.6.4.63 Tank-containers constructed before 1 July 2023 in accordance with the requirements in force up to 31 December 2022, but which do not, however, meet the requirements of special provision TE 26 of 6.8.4 (b) applicable as from 1 January 2023 may continue to be used. 1.6.4.64 Tank-containers that are already fitted with safety valves meeting the requirements of 6.8.3.2.9 as applicable from 1 January 2023 do not need to display the marks in accordance with 6.8.3.2.9.6 until the next intermediate or periodic inspection after 31 December 2023. 1.6.5 (Reserved) 1.6.6 Class 7 1.6.6.1 Packages not requiring competent authority approval of design under the 1985, 1985 (as amended 1990), 1996, 1996 (revised), 1996 (as amended 2003), 2005, 2009 or 2012 editions of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material Packages not requiring competent authority approval of design (excepted packages, Type IP-1, Type IP-2, Type IP-3 and Type A packages) shall meet the requirements of RID in full, except that: (a) Packages that meet the requirements of the 1985 or 1985 (as amended 1990) editions of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material: ( i ) May continue to be carried provided that they were prepared for carriage prior to 31 December 2003 and are subject to the requirements of 1.6.6.2.3, if applicable; or (ii) May continue to be used, provided that all the following conditions are met: – They were not designed to contain uranium hexafluoride; – The applicable requirements of 1.7.3 are applied; – The activity limits and classification in 2.2.7 are applied; – The requirements and controls for carriage in Parts 1, 3, 4, 5 and 7 are applied; and – The packaging was not manufactured or modified after 31 December 2003; (b) Packages that meet the requirements of the 1996, 1996 (revised), 1996 (as amended 2003), 2005, 2009 or 2012 editions of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material: ( i ) May continue to be carried provided that they were prepared for carriage prior to 31 December 2025 and are subject to the requirements of 1.6.6.2.3, if applicable; or (ii) May continue to be used, provided that all the following conditions are met: – The applicable requirements of 1.7.3 are applied; – The activity limits and classification in 2.2.7 are applied; – The requirements and controls for carriage in Parts 1, 3, 4, 5 and 7 are applied; and – The packaging was not manufactured or modified after 31 December 2025. 1.6.6.2 Package designs approved under the 1985, 1985 (as amended 1990), 1996, 1996 (revised), 1996 (as amended 2003), 2005, 2009 or 2012 editions of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material 1.6.6.2.1 Packages requiring competent authority approval of the design shall meet the requirements of RID in full except that: (a) Packagings that were manufactured to a package design approved by the competent authority under the provisions of the 1985 or 1985 (as amended 1990) editions of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material may continue to be used provided that all of the following conditions are met: ( i ) The package design is subject to multilateral approval; (ii) The applicable requirements of 1.7.3 are applied; (iii) The activity limits and classification in 2.2.7 are applied; and (iv) The requirements and controls for carriage in Parts 1, 3, 4, 5 and 7 are applied; ( v) (Reserved) ; (b) Packagings that were manufactured to a package design approved by the competent authority under the provisions of the 1996, 1996 (revised), 1996 (as amended 2003), 2005, 2009 or 2012 editions of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material may continue to be used provided that all of the following conditions are met: ( i ) The package design is subject to multilateral approval after 31 December 2025; (ii) The applicable requirements of 1.7.3 are applied; (iii) The activity limits and material restrictions of 2.2.7 are applied; (iv) The requirements and controls for carriage in Parts 1, 3, 4, 5 and 7 are applied. 1.6.6.2.2 No new manufacture of packagings to a package design meeting the provisions of the 1985 and 1985 (as amended 1990) editions of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material shall be permitted to commence. 1.6.6.2.3 No new manufacture of packagings of a package design meeting the provisions of the 1996, 1996 (revised), 1996 (as amended 2003), 2005, 2009 or 2012 editions of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material shall be permitted to commence after 31 December 2028. 1.6.6.3 Packages excepted from the requirements for fissile materials under the 2011 and 2013 editions of RID (2009 edition of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material) Packages containing fissile material that is excepted from classification as "FISSILE" according to 2.2.7.2.3.5 (a) ( i ) or (iii) of the 2011 and 2013 editions of RID (paras. 417 (a) ( i ) or (iii) of the 2009 edition of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material) prepared for carriage before 31 December 2014 may continue in carriage and may continue to be classified as non-fissile or fissile-excepted except that the consignment limits in Table 2.2.7.2.3.5 of these editions shall apply to the wagon. The consignment shall be carried under exclusive use. 1.6.6.4 Special form radioactive material approved under the 1985, 1985 (as amended 1990), 1996, 1996 (revised), 1996 (as amended 2003), 2005, 2009 or 2012 editions of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material Special form radioactive material manufactured to a design that had received unilateral approval by the competent authority under the 1985, 1985 (as amended 1990), 1996, 1996 (revised), 1996 (as amended 2003), 2005, 2009 or 2012 editions of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material may continue to be used when in compliance with the mandatory management system in accordance with the applicable requirements of 1.7.3. There shall be no new manufacture of special form radioactive material to a design that had received unilateral approval by the competent authority under the 1985 or 1985 (as amended 1990) editions of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material. No new manufacture of special form radioactive material to a design that had received unilateral approval by the competent authority under the 1996, 1996 (revised), 1996 (as amended 2003), 2005, 2009 or 2012 editions of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material shall be permitted to commence after 31 December 2025. Chapter 1.7 General provisions concerning radioactive material 1.7.1 Scope and application NOTE 1: In the event of a nuclear or radiological emergency during the carriage of radioactive material, provisions as established by relevant national and/or international organizations, shall be observed to protect people , property and the environment. This includes arrangements for preparedness and response established in accordance with the national and/or international requirements and in a consistent and coordinated manner with the national and/or international emergency arrangements. 2: The arrangements for preparedness and response shall be based on the graded approach and take into consideration the identified hazards and their potential consequences, including the formation of other dangerous substances that may result from the reaction between the contents of a consignment and the environment in the event of a nuclear or radiological emergency. Guidance for the establishment of such arrangements is contained in "Preparedness and Response for a Nuclear or Radiological Emergency", IAEA Safety Standards Series No. GSR Part 7, IAEA, Vienna (2015); "Criteria for Use in Preparedness and Response for a Nuclear or Radiological Emergency", IAEA Safety Standards Series No. GSG-2, IAEA, Vienna (2011); "Arrangements for Preparedness for a Nuclear or Radiological Emergency", IAEA Safety Standards Series No. GS-G-2.1, IAEA, Vienna (2007), and "Arrangements for the Termination of a Nuclear or Radiological Emergency", IAEA Safety Standards Series No. GSG-11, IAEA, Vienna (2018). 1.7.1.1 RID establishes standards of safety which provide an acceptable level of control of the radiation, criticality and thermal hazards to people , property and the environment that are associated with the carriage of radioactive material. RID is based on the 2018 edition of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material . Explanatory material can be found in "Advisory Material for the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material (2018 Edition)", Safety Standard s Series No. SSG-26 (Rev.1), IAEA, Vienna (2019). 1.7.1.2 The objective of RID is to establish requirements that shall be satisfied to ensure safety and to protect people , property and the environment from harmful effects of ionizing radiation during the carriage of radioactive material. This protection is achieved by requiring: (a) Containment of the radioactive contents; (b) Control of external dose rate ; (c) Prevention of criticality; and (d) Prevention of damage caused by heat. These requirements are satisfied firstly by applying a graded approach to contents limits for packages and wagons and to performance standards applied to package designs depending upon the hazard of the radioactive contents. Secondly, they are satisfied by imposing conditions on the design and operation of packages and on the maintenance of packagings , including a consideration of the nature of the radioactive contents. Thirdly , they are satisfied by requiring administrative controls including, where appropriate, approval by competent authorities. Finally, further protection is provided by making arrangements for planning and preparing emergency response to protect people, property and the environment. 1.7.1.3 RID applies to the carriage of radioactive material by rail including carriage which is incidental to the use of the radioactive material. Carriage comprises all operations and conditions associated with and involved in the movement of radioactive material; these include the design, manufacture, maintenance and repair of packaging, and the preparation, consigning, loading, carriage including in-transit storage, unloading and receipt at the final destination of loads of radioactive material and packages. A graded approach is applied to the performance standards in RID that are characterized by three general severity levels: (a) Routine conditions of carriage (incident free); (b) Normal conditions of carriage (minor mishaps); (c) Accident conditions of carriage. 1.7.1.4 The provisions laid down in RID do not apply to any of the following: (a) Radioactive material that is an integral part of the means of transport; (b) Radioactive material moved within an establishment which is subject to appropriate safety regulations in force in the establishment and where the movement does not involve public roads or railways; (c) Radioactive material implanted or incorporated into a person or live animal for diagnosis or treatment; (d) Radioactive material in or on a person who is to be transported for medical treatment because the person has been subject to accidental or deliberate intake of radioactive material or to contamination; (e ) Radioactive material in consumer products which have received regulatory approval, following their sale to the end user; (f) Natural material and ores containing naturally occurring radionuclides (which may have been processed), provided the activity concentration of the material does not exceed 10 times the values specified in Table 2.2.7.2.2.1, or calculated in accordance with 2.2.7.2.2.2 (a) and 2.2.7.2.2.3 to 2.2.7.2.2.6. For natural materials and ores containing naturally occurring radionuclides that are not in secular equilibrium the calculation of the activity concentration shall be performed in accordance with 2.2.7.2.2.4; (g ) Non-radioactive solid objects with radioactive substances present on any surfaces in quantities not in excess of the limit set out in the definition for "contamination" in 2.2.7.1.2. 1.7.1.5 Specific provisions for the carriage of excepted packages 1.7.1.5.1 Excepted packages which may contain radioactive material in limited quantities, instruments, manufactured articles or empty packagings as specified in 2.2.7.2.4.1 shall be subject only to the following provisions of Parts 5 to 7: (a) The applicable provisions specified in 5.1.2.1, 5.1.3.2, 5.1.5.2.2, 5.1.5.2.3, 5.1.5.4, 5.2.1. 10 , 5.4.1.2.5.1 (f) ( i ) and (ii), 5.4.1.2.5.1 ( i ), 7.5.11 CW 33 (3.1), (4.3), (5.1) to (5.4) and (6); and (b) The requirements for excepted packages specified in 6.4.4. except when the radioactive material possesses other hazardous properties and has to be classified in a class other than Class 7 in accordance with special provision 290 or 369 of Chapter 3.3, where the provisions listed in (a) and (b) above apply only as relevant and in addition to those relating to the main class. 1.7.1.5.2 Excepted packages are subject to the relevant provisions of all other parts of RID. 1.7.2 Radiation protection programme 1.7.2.1 The carriage of radioactive material shall be subject to a r adiation protection programme which shall consist of systematic arrangements aimed at providing adequate consideration of radiation protection measures. 1.7.2.2 Doses to persons shall be below the relevant dose limits. Protection and safety shall be optimized in order that the magnitude of individual doses, the number of persons exposed and the likelihood of incurring exposure shall be kept as low as reasonably achievable, economic and social factors being taken into account within the restriction that the doses to individuals be subject to dose constraints. A structured and systematic approach shall be adopted and shall include consideration of the interfaces between carriage and other activities. 1.7.2.3 The nature and extent of the measures to be employed in the programme shall be related to the magnitude and likelihood of radiation exposures. The programme shall incorporate the requirements in 1.7.2.2, 1.7.2.4 , 1.7.2. 5 and 7.5.11 CW 33 (1.1) . Programme documents shall be available, on request, for inspection by the relevant competent authority. 1.7.2.4 For occupational exposures arising from transport activities, where it is assessed that the effective dose either: ( a ) is likely to be between 1 mSv and 6 mSv in a year, a dose assessment programme via work place monitoring or individual monitoring shall be conducted; or ( b ) is likely to exceed 6 mSv in a year, individual monitoring shall be conducted. When workplace monitoring or individual monitoring is conducted, app ropriate records shall be kept. NOTE: For occupational exposures arising from transport activities, where it is assessed that the effective dose is most unlikely to exceed 1 mSv in a year, no special work patterns, detailed monitoring, dose assessment programmes or individual record keeping need be required. 1.7.2.5 Workers (see 7.5.11, CW 33 Note 3) shall be appropriately trained in radiation protection including the precautions to be observed in order to restrict their occupational exposure and the exposure of other people who might be affected by their actions. 1.7.3 Management system A management system based on international, national or other standards acceptable to the competent authority shall be established and implemented for all activities within the scope of RID, as identified in 1.7.1.3, to ensure compliance with the relevant provisions of RID. Certification that the design specification has been fully implemented shall be available to the competent authority. The manufacturer, consignor or user shall be prepared: (a) To provide facilities for inspection during manufacture and use; and (b) To demonstrate compliance with RID to the competent authority. Where competent authority approval is required, such approval shall take into account and be contingent upon the adequacy of the management system. 1.7.4 Special arrangement 1.7.4.1 Special arrangement shall mean those provisions, approved by the competent authority, under which consignments which do not satisfy all the requirements of RID applicable to radioactive material may be carried . NOTE: Special arrangement is not considered to be a temporary derogation in accordance with 1.5.1. 1.7.4.2 Consignments for which conformity with any provision applicable to radioactive material is impracticable shall not be carried except under special arrangement. Provided the competent authority is satisfied that conformity with the radioactive material provisions of RID is impracticable and that the requisite standards of safety established by RID have been demonstrated through means alternative to the other provisions of RID, the competent authority may approve special arrangement transport operations for a single consignment or a planned series of multiple consignments . The overall level of safety in carriage shall be at least equivalent to that which would be provided if all the applicable requirements of RID had been met. For international consignments of this type, multilateral approval shall be required. 1.7.5 Radioactive material possessing other dangerous properties In addition to the radioactive and fissile properties, any subsidiary hazard of the contents of the package, such as explosiveness, flammability, pyrophoricity, chemical toxicity and corrosiveness, shall also be taken into account in the documentation, packing, labelling, marking, placarding, stowage, segregation and carriage, in order to be in compliance with all relevant provisions for dangerous goods of RID . 1.7.6 Non-compliance 1.7.6.1 In the event of non-compliance with any limit in RID applicable to dose rate or contamination, (a) The consignor, carrier, consignee and any organization involved during carriage who may be affected, as appropriate, shall be informed of the non-compliance by: ( i ) the carrier if the non-compliance is identified during carriage; or (ii) the consignee if the non-compliance is identified at receipt; (b) T he consignor, carrier or consignee , as appropriate shall: ( i ) take immediate steps to mitigate the consequences of the non-compliance; (ii) investigate the non-compliance and its causes, circumstances and consequences; (iii) take appropriate action to remedy the causes and circumstances that led to the non-compliance and to prevent a recurrence of the causes and circumstances similar to those that led to the non-compliance; and (iv) communicate to the competent authority( ies ) on the causes of the non-compliance and the corrective or preventive actions taken or to be taken; (c) The communication of the non-compliance to the consignor and competent authority( ies ), respectively, shall be made as soon as practicable and it shall be immediate whenever an emergency exposure situation has developed or is developing. Chapter 1.8 Checks and other support measures to ensure compliance with safety requirements 1.8.1 Administrative controls of dangerous goods 1.8.1.1 The competent authorities of the RID Contracting States may, on their national territory, at any time, conduct spot checks to verify whether the requirements concerning the carriage of dangerous goods have been met including, in accordance with 1.10.1.5, those concerning security measures . These checks shall, however, be made without endangering persons, property or the environment and without major disruption of rail s ervices. 1.8.1.2 Participants in the carriage of dangerous goods (Chapter 1.4) shall, without delay, in the context of their respective obligations, provide the competent authorities and their agents with the necessary information for carrying out the checks. 1.8.1.3 The competent authorities may also, for the purposes of carrying out checks on the premises of the enterprises participating in the carriage of dangerous goods (Chapter 1.4), make inspections, consult the necessary documents and remove samples of dangerous goods or packagings for examination, provided that safety is not jeopardized thereby. The participants in the carriage of dangerous goods (Chapter 1.4) shall also make the wagons or parts of wagons and the equipment and installations accessible for the purpose of checking where this is possible and reasonable. They may, if they deem necessary, designate a person from the enterprise to accompany the representative of the competent authority. 1.8.1.4 If the competent authorities observe that the requirements of RID have not been met, they may prohibit a consignment or interrupt a transport operation until the defects observed are rectified, or they may prescribe other appropriate measures. Immobilization may take place on the spot or at another place selected by the authorities for safety reasons. These measures shall not cause a major disruption in rail services. 1.8.2 Mutual administrative support 1.8.2.1 The RID Contracting States shall agree on mutual administrative support for the implementation of RID . 1.8.2.2 When a n RID Contracting State has reasons to observe that the safety of the carriage of dangerous goods on its territory is compromised as a result of very serious or repeated infringements by an enterprise which has its headquarters on the territory of another RID Contracting State , it shall notify the competent authorities of this RID Contracting State of such infringements. The competent authorities of the RID Contracting State on the territory of which the very serious or repeated infringements were observed may request the competent authorities of the RID Contracting State on the territory of which the enterprise has its headquarters to take appropriate measures against the offender(s). The transmission of data referring to persons shall not be permitted unless it is necessary for the prosecution of very serious or repeated infringements. 1.8.2.3 The authorities notified shall communicate to the competent authorities of the RID Contracting State on the territory of which the infringements were observed, the measures which have, if necessary, been taken with respect to the enterprise. 1.8.3 Safety adviser 1.8.3.1 Each undertaking, the activities of which include the consigning or the carriage of dangerous goods by rail, or the related packing, loading, filling or unloading shall appoint one or more safety advisers for the carriage of dangerous goods, responsible for helping to prevent the risks inherent in such activities with regard to persons, property and the environment. 1.8.3.2 The competent authorities of the RID Contracting States may provide that these requirements shall not apply to undertakings: (a) the activities of which include the carriage of dangerous goods in means of transport belonging to the armed forces or for which the armed forces are responsible, or (b) the activities of which concern quantities in each wagon not exceeding those referred to in 1.1.3.6, 1.7.1.4 and in Chapters 3.3 , 3.4 and 3.5 , or (c) the main or secondary activities of which are not the carriage or the related packing, filling, loading or unloading of dangerous goods but which occasionally engage in the national carriage or the related packing, filling, loading or unloading of dangerous goods posing little danger or risk of pollution. 1.8.3.3 The main task of the adviser shall be, under the responsibility of the head of the undertaking, to seek by all appropriate means and by all appropriate action, within the limits of the relevant activities of that undertaking, to facilitate the conduct of those activities in accordance with the requirements applicable and in the safest possible way. With regard to the undertaking’s activities, the adviser has the following duties in particular: – monitoring compliance with the requirements governing the carriage of dangerous goods; – advising his undertaking on the carriage of dangerous goods; – preparing an annual report to the management of his undertaking or a local public authority, as appropriate, on the undertaking's activities in the carriage of dangerous goods. Such annual reports shall be preserved for five years and made available to the national authorities at their request. The adviser's duties also include monitoring the following practices and procedures relating to the relevant activities of the undertaking: – the procedures for compliance with the requirements governing the identification of dangerous goods being transported; – the undertaking's practice in taking account, when purchasing means of transport, of any special requirements in connection with the dangerous goods being transported; – the procedures for checking the equipment used in connection with the carriage, packing, filling, loading or unloading of dangerous goods; – the proper training of the undertaking’s employees, including on the changes to the regulations, and the maintenance of records of such training; – the implementation of proper emergency procedures in the event of any accident or incident that may affect safety during the carriage, packing, filling, loading or unloading of dangerous goods; – investigating and, where appropriate, preparing reports on serious accidents, incidents or serious infringements recorded during the carriage, packing, filling, loading or unloading of dangerous goods; – the implementation of appropriate measures to avoid the recurrence of accidents, incidents or serious infringements; – the account taken of the legal prescriptions and special requirements associated with the carriage of dangerous goods in the choice and use of sub-contractors or third parties; – verification that employees involved in the consigning, carriage, packing, filling, loading or unloading of dangerous goods have detailed operational procedures and instructions, – the introduction of measures to increase awareness of the risks inherent in the carriage, packing, filling, loading and unloading of dangerous goods; – the implementation of verification procedures to ensure the presence on board means of transport of the documents and safety equipment which must accompany transport and the compliance of such documents and equipment with the regulations; – the implementation of verification procedures to ensure compliance with the requirements governing packing, filling, loading and unloading; – the existence of the security plan indicated in 1.10.3.2. 1.8.3.4 The adviser may also be the head of the undertaking, a person with other duties in the undertaking, or a person not directly employed by that undertaking, provided that that person is capable of performing the duties of adviser. 1.8.3.5 Each undertaking concerned shall, on request, inform the competent authority or the body designated for that purpose by each RID Contracting State of the identity of its adviser. 1.8.3.6 Whenever an accident affects persons, property or the environment or results in damage to property or the environment during carriage, packing, filling, loading or unloading carried out by the undertaking concerned, the adviser shall, after collecting all the relevant information, prepare an accident report to the management of the undertaking or to a local public authority, as appropriate. That report shall not replace any report by the management of the undertaking which might be required under any other international or national legislation. 1.8.3.7 An adviser shall hold a vocational training certificate, valid for transport by rail . That certificate shall be issued by the competent authority or the body designated for that purpose by each RID Contracting State . 1.8.3.8 To obtain a certificate, a candidate shall undergo training and pass an examination approved by the competent authority of the RID Contracting State . 1.8.3.9 The main aims of the training shall be to provide candidates with sufficient knowledge of the risks inherent in the carriage , packing, filling, loading or unloading of dangerous goods, of the applicable laws, regulations and administrative provisions and of the duties listed in 1.8.3.3. 1.8.3.10 The examination shall be organized by the competent authority or by an examining body designated by the competent authority. The examining body shall not be a training provider. The examining body shall be designated in writing. This approval may be of limited duration and shall be based on the following criteria: – competence of the examining body; – specifications of the form of the examinations the examining body is proposing , including, if necessary, the infrastructure and organisation of electronic examinations in accordance with 1.8.3.12.5, if these are to be carried out ; – measures intended to ensure that examinations are impartial; – independence of the body from all natural or legal persons employing safety advisers. 1.8.3.11 The aim of the examination is to ascertain whether candidates possess the necessary level of knowledge to carry out the duties incumbent upon a safety adviser as listed in 1.8.3.3, for the purpose of obtaining the certificate prescribed in sub-section 1.8.3.7, and it shall cover at least the following subjects: (a) Knowledge of the types of consequences which may be caused by an accident involving dangerous goods and knowledge of the main causes of accidents; (b) Requirements under national law, international conventions and agreements, with regard to the following in particular: – classification of dangerous goods (procedure for classifying solutions and mixtures, structure of the list of substances, classes of dangerous goods and principles for their classification, nature of dangerous goods transported, physical, chemical and toxicological properties of dangerous goods); – general packing provisions, provisions for tanks and tank-containers (types, code, marking, construction, initial and periodic inspection and testing); – marking and labelling, placarding and orange-coloured plate marking (marking and labelling of packages, placing and removal of placards and orange-coloured plates); – particulars in the transport document (information required); – method of consignment and forwarding restrictions ( full load, carriage in bulk, carriage in intermediate bulk containers, carriage in containers, carriage in fixed or demountable tanks ) ; – transport of passengers; – prohibitions and precautions relating to mixed loading; – segregation of goods; – limitation of the quantities carried and quantities exemptions; – handling and stowage ( packing, filling, loading and unloading – filling ratios – , stowage and segregation); – cleaning and/or degassing before packing, filling, loading and after unloading; – crews, vocational training; – documents to be carried on board ( transport document s , instructions in writing, copies of any derogations, other documents); – instructions in writing (implementation of the instructions and equipment for personal protection ); – operational discharges or accidental leaks of pollutants; – requirements relating to transport equipment. 1.8.3.12 Examinations 1.8.3.12.1 The examination shall consist of a written test which may be supplemented by an oral examination. 1.8.3.12.2 The competent authority or an examining body designated by the competent authority shall invigilate every examination. Any manipulation and deception shall be ruled out as far as possible. Authentication of the candidate shall be ensured. The use in the written test of documentation other than international or national regulations is not permitted. All examination documents shall be recorded and kept as a print-out or electronically as a file. 1.8.3.12.3 Electronic media may be used only if provided by the examining body. There shall be no means of a candidate introducing further data to the electronic media provided; the candidate may only answer the questions posed. 1.8.3.12.4 The written test shall consist of two parts: (a) Candidates shall receive a questionnaire. It shall include at least 20 open questions covering at least the subjects mentioned in the list in 1.8.3.11. However, multiple choice questions may be used. In this case, two multiple choice questions count as one open question. Amongst these subjects particular attention shall be paid to the following subjects: – general preventive and safety measures; – classification of dangerous goods; – general packing provisions, including tanks, tank-containers, tank- wagons , etc.; – danger marking, labelling and placarding; – information in the transport document ; – handling and stowage; – crew, vocational training; – documents to be carried on board and transport documents ; – instructions in writing; – requirements concerning transport equipment. (b) Candidates shall undertake a case study in keeping with the duties of the adviser referred to in 1.8.3.3, in order to demonstrate that they have the necessary qualifications to fulfil the task of adviser. 1.8.3.12.5 Written examinations may be performed, in whole or in part, as electronic examinations, where the answers are recorded and evaluated using electronic data processing (EDP) processes, provided the following conditions are met: (a) The hardware and software shall be checked and accepted by the competent authority or by an examining body designated by the competent authority; (b) Proper technical functioning shall be ensured. Arrangements as to whether and how the examination can be continued shall be made for a failure of the devices and applications. No aids shall be available on the input devices (e.g. electronic search function), the equipment provided according to 1.8.3.12.3 shall not allow the candidates to communicate with any other device during the examination; (c) Final inputs of each candidate shall be logged. The determination of the results shall be transparent. 1.8.3.13 The RID Contracting States may decide that candidates who intend working for undertakings specializing in the carriage of certain types of dangerous goods need only be questioned on the substances relating to their activities. These types of goods are: – Class 1; – Class 2; – Class 7; – Classes 3, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 6.2, 8 and 9; – UN Nos. 1202, 120 3 , 1223, 3475 and aviation fuel classified under UN Nos. 1268 or 1863 . The certificate prescribed in 1.8.3.7 shall clearly indicate that it is only valid for one type of the dangerous goods referred to in this sub-section and on which the adviser has been questioned under the conditions defined in 1.8.3.12. 1.8.3.14 The competent authority or the examining body shall keep a running list of the questions that have been included in the examination. 1.8.3.15 The certificate prescribed in 1.8.3.7 shall take the form laid down in 1.8.3.18 and shall be recognized by all RID Contracting States . 1.8.3.16 Validity and renewal of certificates 1.8.3.16.1 The certificate shall be valid for five years. The period of the validity of a certificate shall be extended from the date of its expiry for five years at a time where, during the year before its expiry, its holder has passed an examination. The examination shall be approved by the competent authority. 1.8.3.16.2 The aim of the examination is to ascertain that the holder has the necessary knowledge to carry out the duties set out in 1.8.3.3. The knowledge required is set out in 1.8.3.11 (b) and shall include the amendments to the regulations introduced since the award of the last certificate. The examination shall be held and supervised on the same basis as in 1.8.3.10 and 1.8.3.12 to 1.8.3.14. However, the holder need not undertake the case study specified in 1.8.3.12 .4 (b). 1.8.3.17 (Deleted) 1.8.3.18 Form of certificate Certificate of training as safety adviser for the transport of dangerous goods Certificate No: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………... Distinguishing sign of the State issuing the certificate: …………………………………………………………….. Surname: ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………... Forename(s): …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… Date and place of birth: ………………………………………………………………………………………………... Nationality: ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Signature of holder: ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. Valid until ....................... for undertakings which transport dangerous goods and for undertakings which carry out related consigning, packing, filling, loading or unloading: by road by rail by inland waterway Issued by: ......................................................................................................................................................... Date: ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………... Signature: ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 1.8.3.19 Extension of the certificate Where an adviser extends the scope of his certificate during its period of validity by meeting the requirements of 1.8.3.16.2, the period of validity of a new certificate shall remain that of the previous certificate. 1.8.4 List of competent authorities and bodies designated by them The RID Contracting States shall communicate to the Secretariat of OTIF the addresses of the authorities and bodies designated by them which are competent in accordance with national law to implement RID , referring in each case to the relevant requirement of RID and giving the addresses to which the relevant applications should be made. The Secretariat of OTIF shall establish a list on the basis of the information received and shall keep it up-to-date. It shall communicate this list and the amendments thereto to the RID Contracting States . 1.8.5 Notifications of occurrences involving dangerous goods 1.8.5.1 If a serious accident or incident takes place during loading, filling, carriage or unloading of dangerous goods on the territory of a n RID Contracting State , the loader, filler, carrier, unloader, consignee or if the case may be the railway infrastructure manager, respectively, shall ascertain that a report conforming to the model prescribed in 1.8.5.4 is made to the competent authority of the RID Contracting State concerned at the latest one month after the occurrence . 1.8.5.2 The RID Contracting State shall in turn, if necessary, make a report to the Secretariat of OTIF with a view to informing the other RID Contracting States . 1.8.5.3 An occurrence subject to report in accordance with 1.8.5.1 has occurred if dangerous goods were released or if there was an imminent risk of loss of product, if personal injury, material or environmental damage occurred, or if the authorities were involved and one or more of the following criteria has/have been met: Personal injury means an occurrence in which death or injury directly relating to the dangerous goods carried has occurred, and where the injury (a) requires intensive medical treatment, (b) requires a stay in hospital of at least one day, or (c) results in the inability to work for at least three consecutive days. Loss of product means the release of dangerous goods (a) of transport category 0 or 1 in quantities of 50 kg / 50 l or more, (b) of transport category 2 in quantities of 333 kg / 333 l or more, or (c) of transport category 3 or 4 in quantities of 1 000 kg / 1 000 l or more. The loss of product criterion also applies if there was an imminent risk of loss of product in the above-mentioned quantities. As a rule, this has to be assumed if, owing to structural damage, the means of containment is no longer suitable for further carriage or if, for any other reason, a sufficient level of safety is no longer ensured (e.g. owing to distortion of tanks or containers, overturning of a tank or fire in the immediate vicinity). If dangerous goods of Class 6.2 are involved, the obligation to report applies without quantity limitation. In occurrences involving radioactive material , the criteria for loss of product are: (a) Any release of radioactive material from the packages; (b) Exposure leading to a breach of the limits set out in the regulations for protection of workers and members of the public against ionizing radiation ("Radiation Protection and Safety of Radiation Sources: International Basic Safety Standards", IAEA Safety Standards Series No. GSR Part 3, IAEA, Vienna (2014)) ; or (c) Where there is reason to believe that there has been a significant degradation in any package safety function (containment, shielding, thermal protection or criticality) that may have rendered the package unsuitable for continued carriage without additional safety measures. NOTE: See the requirements of 7.5.11 C W 33 (6) for undeliverable consignments. Material damage or environmental damage means the release of dangerous goods, irrespective of the quantity, where the estimated amount of damage exceeds 50,000 Euros. Damage to any directly involved means of carriage containing dangerous goods and to the modal infrastructure shall not be taken into account for this purpose. Involvement of authorities means the direct involvement of the authorities or emergency services during the occurrence involving dangerous goods and the evacuation of persons or closure of public traffic routes (roads/railways) for at least three hours owing to the danger posed by the dangerous goods. If necessary, the competent authority may request further relevant information. 1.8.5.4 Model for report on occurrences during the carriage of dangerous goods Report on occurrences during the carriage of dangerous goods in accordance with RID/ADR section 1.8.5 Carrier/ Railway infrastructure operator: …………………………………………………………………………... Address: ……………………………………………………………………………………………………... Contact name: ................………….. Telephone: .................................Fax: ................................…… (The competent authority shall remove this cover sheet before forwarding the report) 1. Mode □ Rail Wagon number (optional): ........................................................................................ □ Road Vehicle registration (optional) : ……….............................................................................. 2. Date and location of occurrence Year : .............................. Month : ............................... Day : ............................. Time : ……......................... Rail □ Station □ Shunting/marshalling yard □ Loading/unloading/transhipment site Location / Country : ..…..................................................... or □ Open line Description of line: ……………......................................... Kilometres: ....................................................................... Road □ Built-up area □ Loading/unloading/transhipment site □ Open road Location / Country: …...................................................... 3. Topography □ Gradient/incline □ Tunnel □ Bridge/Underpass □ Crossing 4. Particular weather conditions □ Rain □ Snow □ Ice □ Fog □ Thunderstorm □ Storm Temperature: ... °C 5. Description of occurrence □ Derailment/Leaving the road □ Collision □ Overturning/Rolling over □ Fire □ Explosion □ Loss □ Technical fault Additional description of occurrence: …………………............................................................................................................................................................... …………………............................................................................................................................................................... …………………............................................................................................................................................................... …………………............................................................................................................................................................... …………………............................................................................................................................................................... …………………............................................................................................................................................................... …………………............................................................................................................................................................... …………………............................................................................................................................................................... 6. Dangerous goods involved UN Number (1) Class Packing Group Estimated quantity of loss of products (kg or l ) (2) Means of containment (3) Means of containment material Type of failure of means of containment (4) (1) For dangerous goods assigned to collective entries to which special provision 274 applies, also the technical name shall be indicated. (2) For Class 7, indicate values according to the criteria in 1.8.5.3. (3) Indicate the appropriate number 1 Packaging 2 IBC 3 Large packaging 4 Small container 5 Wagon 6 Vehicle 7 Tank-wagon 8 Tank-vehicle 9 Battery-wagon 10 Battery-vehicle 11 Wagon with demountable tanks 12 Demountable tank 13 Large container 14 Tank-container 15 MEGC 16 Portable tank 17 MEMU 18 Extra-large tank-container (4) Indicate the appropriate number 1 Loss 2 Fire 3 Explosion 4 Structural failure 7. Cause of occurrence (if clearly known) □ Technical fault □ Faulty load securing □ Operational cause (rail operation) □ Other: ……………………………............................................................................................................................ 8. Consequences of occurrence Personal injury in connection with the dangerous goods involved: □ Deaths (number: ......) □ Injured (number: ......) Loss of product: □ Yes □ No □ Imminent risk of loss of product Material/Environmental damage: □ Estimated level of damage 50,000 Euros □ Estimated level of damage > 50,000 Euros Involvement of authorities: □ Yes □ Evacuation of persons for a duration of at least three hours caused by the dangerous goods involved □ Closure of public traffic routes for a duration of at least three hours caused by the dangerous goods involved □ No If necessary, the competent authority may request further relevant information . 1.8.6 Administrative controls for the activities described in 1.8.7 and 1.8.8 NOTE 1: For the purpose of this section the terms: – "approved inspection body" means an inspection body approved by the competent authority to perform different activities according to 1.8.6.1; and – "recognized inspection body" means an approved inspection body recognized by another competent authority. 2: An inspection body may be designated by the competent authority to act as the competent authority (see the definition of competent authority in 1.2.1). 1.8.6.1 General rules The competent authority of an RID Contracting State may approve inspection bodies for the following activities: conformity assessments, periodic inspections, intermediate inspections, exceptional inspections, entry into service verifications and surveillance of the in-house inspection service as relevant in Chapters 6.2 and 6.8. 1.8.6.2 Obligations of the competent authority 1.8.6.2.1 When the competent authority approves an inspection body to perform the activities specified in 1.8.6.1, the accreditation of the inspection body shall be according to EN ISO/IEC 17020:2012 (except clause 8.1.3) type A requirements. When the competent authority approves an inspection body to perform periodic inspections of pressure receptacles according to Chapter 6.2, the accreditation of the inspection body shall be according to EN ISO/IEC 17020:2012 (except clause 8.1.3) type A requirements or type B requirements. The accreditation shall clearly cover the activities of the approval. When the competent authority does not approve inspection bodies, but performs these tasks itself, the competent authority shall comply with the provisions of 1.8.6.3. 1.8.6.2.2 Approval of inspection bodies 1.8.6.2.2.1 Type A inspection bodies shall be established under domestic law and be a legal entity in the RID Contracting State where the application for approval is made. Type B inspection bodies shall be established under domestic law and be part of a legal entity supplying gas in the RID Contracting State where the application for approval is made. 1.8.6.2.2.2 The competent authority shall ensure that the inspection body continuously meets the conditions for its approval and shall end it if these conditions are not met. However, in the case of suspension of the accreditation, the approval is only suspended during the suspension period of the accreditation. 1.8.6.2.2.3 An inspection body starting a new activity may be approved temporarily. Before temporary approval, the competent authority shall ensure that the inspection body meets the requirements of 1.8.6.3.1. The inspection body shall be accredited according to EN ISO/IEC 17020:2012 (except clause 8.1.3) in its first year of activity to be able to continue this new activity. 1.8.6.2.3 Monitoring of inspection bodies 1.8.6.2.3.1 Wherever the activities of an inspection body are performed, the competent authority that approved this body shall ensure the monitoring of the activities of this body, including on-site monitoring. The competent authority shall revoke or restrict the approval given if this body is no longer in compliance with the approval, the requirements of 1.8.6.3.1 or does not follow the procedures specified in the provisions of RID. NOTE: Monitoring of subcontractors as mentioned in 1.8.6.3.3 by the inspection body shall also be included in the monitoring of the inspection body. 1.8.6.2.3.2 If the approval of the inspection body is revoked or restricted or if the inspection body ceased activity, the competent authority shall take the appropriate steps to ensure that the files are either processed by another inspection body or kept available. 1.8.6.2.4 Information obligations 1.8.6.2.4.1 RID Contracting States shall publish their national procedures for the assessment, approval and monitoring of inspection bodies and of any changes to that information. 1.8.6.2.4.2 The competent authority of the RID Contracting State shall publish an up-to-date list of all the inspection bodies it has approved, including inspection bodies approved temporarily as described in 1.8.6.2.2.3. This list shall at least contain the following information: (a) Name, address(es) of the office(s) of the inspection body; (b) The scope of activities for which the inspection body is approved; (c) Confirmation that the inspection body is accredited according to EN ISO/IEC 17020:2012 (except clause 8.1.3) by the national accreditation body and that the accreditation covers the scope of activities for which the inspection body is approved; (d) The identity mark or stamp, as specified in Chapters 6.2 and 6.8, of the inspection body and the mark of any in-house inspection service authorized by the inspection body. A reference to this list shall be made on the OTIF website. 1.8.6.2.4.3 An inspection body approved by a competent authority may be recognized by another competent authority. Where a competent authority wishes to engage the services of an inspection body already approved by another competent authority to carry out activities related to conformity assessments and inspections on its behalf, then that competent authority shall add this inspection body, the scope of activities for which it is recognized, and the competent authority that approved the inspection body, to the list mentioned in 1.8.6.2.4.2 and inform the OTIF secretariat. If the approval is withdrawn or suspended, the recognition is no longer valid. NOTE: In that context, reciprocal recognition agreements between RID Contracting States shall be respected. 1.8.6.3 Obligations of the inspection bodies 1.8.6.3.1 General rules The inspection body shall: ( a) Have a staff with an organi s ational structure, capable, trained, competent and skilled, to satisfactorily perform its technical functions; (b) Have access to suitable and adequate facilities and equipment; (c) Operate in an impartial manner and be free from any influence which could prevent it from doing so; (d) Ensure commercial confidentiality of the commercial and proprietary activities of the manufacturer and other bodies; (e) Maintain clear demarcation between actual inspection body functions and unrelated functions; (f) Have a documented quality system, equivalent to that set out in EN ISO/IEC 17020:2012 (except clause 8.1.3); (g) Ensure that the tests and inspections specified in the relevant standards and in RID are performed; (h) Maintain an effective and appropriate report and record system in accordance with 1.8.7 and 1.8.8; ( i ) Be free from any commercial or financial pressure and not remunerate its personnel depending on the number of the inspections carried out or on the results of those inspections; (j) Have a liability insurance covering the risks in relation to the conducted activities; NOTE: This is not necessary if the RID Contracting State assumes liability in accordance with domestic law. (k) Have person(s) responsible for carrying out the inspections who shall: ( i ) Not be directly involved in the design, manufacture, supply, installation, purchase, ownership, use or maintenance of the product (pressure receptacle, tank, battery-wagon or MEGC) to be inspected; (ii) Have been trained in all aspects of the activities in relation to which the inspection body has been approved; (iii) Have appropriate knowledge, technical skills and understanding of the applicable requirements, of the applicable standards and of the relevant provisions of Parts 4 and 6; (iv) Have the ability to draw up certificates, records and reports demonstrating that assessments have been carried out; (v) Observe professional secrecy with regard to information obtained in carrying out their tasks or any provision of domestic law giving effect to it, except in relation to the competent authorities of the RID Contracting State in which its activities are carried out. At the request of other inspection bodies, information may be shared as far as necessary for the performance of inspections and tests. The inspection body shall additionally be accredited according to the standard EN ISO/IEC 1 7020:2012 (except clause 8.1.3). 1.8.6.3.2 Operational obligations 1.8.6.3.2.1 The competent authority or inspection body shall carry out conformity assessments, periodic inspections, intermediate inspections, exceptional inspections and entry into service verifications in a proportionate manner, avoiding unnecessary burdens. The competent authority or inspection body shall perform its activities taking into consideration the size, the sector and the structure of the undertakings involved, the relative complexity of the technology and the serial character of production. 1.8.6.3.2.2 The competent authority or inspection body shall respect the degree of rigour and the level of protection required for the compliance with the provisions of Parts 4 and 6 as applicable. 1.8.6.3.2.3 Where a competent authority or inspection body finds out that requirements laid down in Parts 4 or 6 have not been met by the manufacturer, it shall require the manufacturer to take appropriate corrective measures and it shall not issue any type approval certificate or initial inspection and test certificate until the appropriate corrective measures have been implemented. 1.8.6.3.3 Delegation of inspection tasks NOTE: The following provisions only apply to type A inspection bodies. Type B inspection bodies are not allowed to delegate the activities for which they are approved. For in-house inspection services see 1.8.7.7.2. 1.8.6.3.3.1 Where an inspection body uses the services of a subcontractor to carry out specific tasks connected with its activities, the subcontractor shall be assessed and monitored by the inspection body, or it shall be accredited separately. In the case of separate accreditation, the subcontractor shall be duly accredited according to EN ISO/IEC 17025:2017 (except clause 8.1.3) or EN ISO/IEC 17020:2012 (except clause 8.1.3) as an independent and impartial testing laboratory or inspection body in order to perform testing tasks in accordance with its accreditation. The inspection body shall ensure that this subcontractor meets the requirements set out for the tasks given to it with the same level of competence and safety as laid down for inspection bodies (see 1.8.6.3.1) and the inspection body shall monitor it. The inspection body shall inform the competent authority about the above-mentioned arrangements. 1.8.6.3.3.2 The inspection body shall take full responsibility for the tasks performed by such subcontractors wherever the tasks are performed by them. 1.8.6.3.3.3 The type A inspection body may delegate only a part of each of its activities. In any case, the assessment and the issue of certificates shall be carried out by the inspection body itself. 1.8.6.3.3.4 Activities shall not be delegated without the agreement of the manufacturer, owner or operator as appropriate. 1.8.6.3.3.5 The inspection body shall keep at the disposal of the competent authority the relevant documents concerning the assessment of the qualifications and the work carried out by the above-mentioned subcontractors. 1.8.6.3.4 Information obligations Any inspection body shall inform the competent authority, which had approved it, of the following: (a) Except when the provisions of 1.8.7.2.2.2 apply, any refusal, restriction, suspension or withdrawal of type approval certificates; (b) Any circumstance(s) affecting the scope of and conditions for the approval as granted by the competent authority; (c) Any refusal of inspection certificates; (d) Any request for information on activities performed which they have received from competent authorities monitoring compliance according to this section; (e) On request, all activities performed within the scope of their approval, including delegation of tasks (f) Any authorization or suspension or withdrawal of an in-house inspection service. 1.8.7 Procedures for conformity assessment, type approval certificate issue and inspections NOTE 1: In this section, "relevant body" means a body as assigned in Chapters 6.2 and 6.8. 2: In this section, "manufacturer" means the enterprise who is responsible to the competent authority for all aspects of the conformity assessment and for ensuring the conformity of construction whose name and mark appear in the approvals and on the markings. It is not essential that the enterprise is directly involved in all stages of the construction of the product (see 1.8.7.1.5) which is subject of the conformity assessment. 1.8.7.1 General provisions 1.8.7.1.1 The procedures in section 1.8.7 shall be applied as specified in Chapters 6.2 and 6.8. If the competent authority performs the tasks itself, the competent authority shall meet the provisions of this section. 1.8.7.1.2 Each application for (a) The type examination in accordance with 1.8.7.2.1; (b) The type approval certificate issue in accordance with 1.8.7.2.2; (c) The supervision of manufacture in accordance with 1.8.7.3; or (d) The initial inspection and tests in accordance with 1.8.7.4 shall be lodged by the manufacturer with a competent authority or an inspection body, as applicable, in conformity with Chapters 6.2 and 6.8. Each application for (e) The entry into service verification in accordance with 1.8.7.5; or (f) The periodic inspection, intermediate inspection and exceptional inspection in accordance with 1.8.7.6 shall be lodged by the owner or its authorized representative, or by the operator or its authorized representative, with a competent authority or an inspection body. When the in-house inspection service is authorized for (c), (d), or (f), it is not necessary to lodge an application for (c), (d), or (f). 1.8.7.1.3 The application shall include: (a ) The name and address of the applicant according to 1.8.7.1.2; (b) A written declaration that the same application has not been lodged with any other competent authority or inspection body; (c) The relevant technical documentation in 1.8.7.8; (d) A statement allowing the competent authority or the inspection body, as appropriate, access for conformity assessment or inspection purposes to the locations of manufacture, inspection, testing and storage and providing it with all necessary information to perform their tasks. 1.8.7.1.4 Where the manufacturer or an enterprise with a testing facility is allowed to establish an in-house inspection service according to 6.2.2.12, 6.2.3.6.1, 6.8.1.5.3 (b) or 6.8.1.5.4 (b), it shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the inspection body that the in-house inspection service is able to perform inspections and tests in conformity with 1.8.7. 1.8.7.1.5 Type approval certificates, inspection certificates and reports for the products (pressure receptacles, tanks, service equipment and the assembly of the elements, structural equipment and service equipment of battery-wagons or MEGCs), including the technical documentation, shall be kept: (a) By the manufacturer for a period of at least 20 years from the expiry date of the type approval; (b) By the issuing competent authority or the issuing inspection body, for a period of at least 20 years from the issuing date; (c) By the owner or operator for a period of at least 15 months after the product is taken out of service. 1.8.7.2 Type examination and type approval certificate issue 1.8.7.2.1 Type examination 1.8.7.2.1.1 The manufacturer shall: ( a) In the case of pressure receptacles, place at the disposal of the inspection body representative samples of the production envisaged. The inspection body may request further samples if required by the test programme ; (b) In the case of tanks, battery-wagons or MEGCs, give access to the prototype for type testing; (c) In the case of service equipment, place at the disposal of the inspection body representative samples of the production envisaged. The inspection body may request further samples if required by the test programme. NOTE: The results of assessments and tests according to other regulations or standards may be taken into account . 1.8.7.2.1.2 The inspection body shall: ( a) Examine the technical documentation specified in 1.8.7.8.1 to verify that the design is in accordance with the relevant provisions of RID, and the prototype or the prototype lot has been manufactured in conformity with the technical documentation and is representative of the design; (b) Perform the examinations and the tests, or perform the examinations and verify the test conditions and supervise the tests on site, as specified in RID, including the relevant standards, to determine that the provisions have been applied and fulfilled, and the procedures adopted by the manufacturer meet the requirements; (c) Check the material(s) certificate(s) issued by the manufacturer(s) of the materials against the relevant provisions of RID; (d) As applicable, approve the procedures for the permanent joining of parts or check that they have been previously approved, and verify that the staff undertaking the permanent joining of parts and the non-destructive tests are qualified or approved; (e) Agree with the manufacturer the location(s) where the examinations and necessary tests are to be carried out. The inspection body shall issue a report of the type examination to the manufacturer. 1.8.7.2.2 Type approval certificate issue Type approvals authorize the construction of products within the period of validity of that approval. 1.8.7.2.2.1 Where the type satisfies all applicable provisions, the competent authority or the inspection body, shall issue a type approval certificate to the manufacturer in conformity with Chapters 6.2 and 6.8 . This certificate shall contain: ( a) The name and address of the issuer; (b) The competent authority under whom the certificate is issued; (c) The name and address of the manufacturer; (d) A reference to the version of RID and standards used for the type examination; (e) Any requirements resulting from the type examination; (f) The data contained in the documents for the type-examination according to 1.8.7.8.1, necessary for the identification of the type and variation, as defined by the relevant standards. The documents, or a list identifying the documents, containing the data shall be included or annexed to the certificate; (g) The reference to the type examination report(s); (h) The maximum period of validity of the type approval; and ( i ) Any specific requirements in accordance with Chapters 6.2 and 6.8. 1.8.7.2.2.2 The type approval shall be valid for a maximum of ten years. If within that period the relevant technical requirements of RID have changed so that the approved type is no longer in conformity with them, then the type approval is no longer valid. If within that period, the withdrawal date according to column (3) of the tables in 6.2.2.1 and 6.2.2.3 or column (5) of the tables in 6.2.4.1, 6.8.2.6.1 and 6.8.3.6 applies, the type approval is also no longer valid. It shall then be withdrawn by the competent authority or the inspection body which issued the type approval certificate. NOTE: For the latest date for withdrawal of existing type approvals, see column (5) of the tables in 6.2.4.1 and 6.8.2.6.1 or 6.8.3.6 as appropriate. If a type approval has expired, or has been withdrawn, the manufacture of the products according to that typ e approval is no longer authori z ed. NOTE: The relevant provisions concerning the use, periodic inspection and intermediate inspection of products contained in a type approval which has expired or has been withdrawn shall continue to apply to the products constructed according to that type approval before its expiry or its withdrawal if they may continue to be used. Type approvals may be renewed on the basis of a new type examination . Results of the previous type examination tests shall be taken into account if these tests are still in accordance with the provisions of RID including the standards applicable at the date of renewal . Renewal is not permitted after a type approval has been withdrawn. NOTE: The type examination for renewal may be performed by an inspection body other than the one which issued the original type examination report. Interim amendments of an existing type approval (e.g. for pressure receptacles minor amendments such as the addition of further sizes or volumes not affecting conformity, or for tanks see 6.8.2.3.3) do not extend or modify the original validity of the certificate. 1.8.7.2.2.3 In the case of a modification of a product with a valid, expired or withdrawn type approval, the relevant type examination, testing, inspection and approval are limited to the parts of the product that have been modified. The modification shall meet the provisions of RID applicable at the time of the modification. For all parts of the product not affected by the modification, the documentation of the initial type approval remains valid. A modification may apply to one or more product(s) covered by the same type approval. Where the modified product satisfies all applicable provisions, a supplementary approval certificate for the modification shall be issued to the owner or operator by the competent authority or inspection body of any RID Contracting State in conformity with Chapters 6.2 and 6.8. For tanks, battery-wagons or MEGCs, a copy shall be kept as part of the tank record. 1.8.7.3 Supervision of manufacture 1.8.7.3.1 The manufacturer shall take all the necessary measures to ensure that the manufacturing process complies with the applicable provisions of RID and of the type approval certificate, the technical documentation according to 1.8.7.8.3 and reports . 1.8.7.3.2 The manufacturing process shall be subject to supervision by the relevant body. The relevant body shall: (a) Verify the conformity with the technical documentation specified in 1.8.7.8.3 and with the applicable provisions of RID and of the type approval certificate and reports; (b) Verify that the manufacturing process produces products in conformity with the requirements and the documentation which apply to it; (c) Verify the traceability of materials and check the material(s) certificate(s) against the specifications; (d) As applicable, verify that the personnel undertaking the permanent joining of parts and the non-destructive tests are qualified or approved; (e) Agree with the manufacturer on the location where the examinations and necessary tests are to be carried out; and (f) Provide a written report of the results of the supervision of manufacture. 1.8.7.4 Initial inspection and tests 1.8.7.4.1 The manufacturer shall: (a ) Affix the marks specified in RID; and (b ) Supply to the relevant body the technical documentation specified in 1.8.7.8.4. 1.8.7.4.2 The relevant body shall: (a) Perform the examinations and the tests, or perform the examinations and verify the test conditions and supervise the tests on site to ensure that the product is manufactured in accordance with the type approval and the relevant provisions; (b) Check the certificates supplied by the manufacturers of service equipment against the service equipment; (c) Issue an initial inspection and tests report relating to the detailed tests and verifications carried out and the verified technical documentation; (d) Issue an initial inspection and tests certificate and affix its mark when the manufacture satisfies the provisions; and (e) Check if the type approval remains valid after provisions of RID (including the referenced standards) relevant to the type approval have changed. If the type approval is no longer valid, the relevant body shall issue a refusal inspection report and inform the competent authority or the inspection body which issued the type approval certificate. The certificate in (d) and report in (c) may cover a number of products of the same type (group certificate or report). 1.8.7.4.3 The certificate in 1.8.7.4.2 (d) shall contain as a minimum: ( a) The name and address of the inspection body and the name and address of the in-house inspection service when applicable; (b) The name and address of the manufacturer; (c) The location of the initial inspection; (d) A reference to the version of RID and the standards used for the initial inspections and tests; (e) The results of the inspections and tests; (f) The data for identification of the inspected product(s), at least the serial number or for non refillable cylinders the batch number; (g) The type approval number; and (h) The reference to the certificate of authorization of the in-house inspection service when applicable. 1.8.7.5 Entry into service verification 1.8.7.5.1 If an entry into service verification is required by the competent authority under 6.8.1.5.5, the owner or operator shall engage a single inspection body to perform the entry into service verification and shall provide it with the type approval certificate and the technical documentation specified in 1.8.7.8.4. 1.8.7.5.2 The inspection body shall review the documentation and: ( a) Perform external checks (e.g. marking, condition); (b) Verify conformity with the type approval certificate; (c) Verify the validity of the approvals of the inspection bodies who performed the previous inspections and tests; (d) Verify that the transitional measures of 1.6.3 or 1.6.4 have been fulfilled. 1.8.7.5.3 The inspection body shall issue an entry into service verification report that contains the results of the assessment. The owner or operator shall present this report at the request of the competent authority requiring the entry into service verification, and to the inspection body( ies ) in charge of subsequent inspections and tests. In the event of a failed entry into service verification, the non-conformities shall be rectified and a new entry into service verification passed before the tank is used. The inspection body in charge of the entry into service verification shall, without delay, inform its competent authority of any refusal. 1.8.7.6 Periodic inspection, intermediate inspection and exceptional inspection 1.8.7.6.1 The relevant body shall: (a) Perform the identification and verify the conformity with the documentation; (b) Perform the inspections and the tests, or perform the inspections and verify the test conditions and supervise the tests on site in order to check that the requirements are met; (c) Issue reports and certificates, as appropriate, of the results of the inspections and tests, which may cover a number of products; and (d) Ensure that the required marks are applied. 1.8.7.6.2 Reports of periodic inspections and tests of pressure receptacles shall be retained by the owner or operator at least until the next periodic inspection. NOTE: For tanks, see provisions for tank records in 4.3.2.1.7. 1.8.7.7 Surveillance of the in-house inspection service 1.8.7.7.1 Where an in-house inspection service is used according to 6.2.2.12, 6.2.3.6.1, 6.8.1.5.3 (b) or 6.8.1.5.4 (b), the manufacturer or the testing facility shall: (a) Implement a quality system for the in-house inspection service, including technical procedures, for inspections and tests documented in 1.8.7.8.6 and subject to surveillance; (b) Fulfil the obligations arising out of the quality system as approved and ensure that it remains satisfactory and efficient in particular: ( i ) Authorize trained and competent personnel for the in-house inspection service; and (ii) Affix the identity mark or stamp, as specified in Chapters 6.2 and 6.8, of the inspection body, and the mark of the in-house inspection service where appropriate on the product to ensure traceability . 1.8.7.7.2 The inspection body shall carry out an initial audit at each site. If satisfactory the inspection body shall inform the competent authority of the authorization of the in-house inspection service and issue a certificate of authorization for a period not exceeding three years. The following provisions shall be met: ( a) This audit shall be undertaken at each site to confirm that the inspections and tests performed are in compliance with the requirements of RID; (b) The inspection body may authorize the in-house inspection service to affix the identity mark or stamp, as specified in Chapter 6.2 and 6.8, of the inspection body to each approved product; (c) The authorization may be renewed after a satisfactory audit at each site in the last year prior to the expiry. The new period of validity shall begin with the date of expiry of the authorization; (d) The inspectors of the inspection body undertaking the audits shall be competent to carry out the assessment of conformity of the product covered by the quality system and to assess the quality system itself; and (e) The in-house inspection service shall be engaged in activities at a frequency which ensures the necessary level of competence. The in-house inspection service may, in specific cases only, subcontract specific parts of its activities if approved by the inspection body which has authorized it. The subcontractor shall additionally be accredited according to EN ISO/IEC 17025:2017 (except clause 8.1.3) or EN ISO/IEC 17020:2012 (except clause 8.1.3) as an independent and impartial testing laboratory or inspection body in order to perform testing tasks in accordance with its accreditation. 1.8.7.7.3 The certificate of authorization shall contain as a minimum: (a) The name and address of the inspection body; (b) The name and address of the manufacturer or testing facility and addresses of all in-house inspection service sites; (c) A reference to the version of RID used for authorization of the in-house inspection service and standards or recognised technical codes according to 6.2.5 used for initial inspection and tests or periodic inspections; (d) The reference to the initial audit report; (e) As necessary, further information to define the scope of the in-house inspection service (e.g. type approvals of the products for initial inspection and tests); (f) The mark of the in-house inspection service, if applicable; and (g) The expiry date. 1.8.7.7.4 The inspection body shall carry out periodic audits at each site within the duration of the authorization to make sure that the in-house inspection service maintains and applies the quality system, including the technical procedures. The following provisions shall be met: (a) The audits shall be carried out no later than every six months; (b) The inspection body may require additional visits, training, technical changes, modifications of the quality system, restrict or prohibit the inspections and tests to be done by the in-house inspection service; (c) The inspection body shall assess any changes in the quality system and decide whether the modified quality system still satisfies the requirements of the initial audit or whether a full reassessment is required; (d) The inspectors of the inspection body undertaking the audits shall be competent to carry out the assessment of conformity of the product covered by the quality system and to assess the quality system itself; and (e) The inspection body shall provide the manufacturer or the testing facility, as applicable, and the in-house inspection service, with the report of the audit and, if tests have taken place, with a test report. 1.8.7.7.5 In cases of non-conformity with the relevant requirements the inspection body shall ensure that corrective measures are taken. If corrective measures are not taken in due time, the inspection body shall suspend or withdraw the permission for the in-house inspection service to carry out its activities. The notice of suspension or withdrawal shall be transmitted to the competent authority. A report shall be provided to the manufacturer or the testing facility, as applicable, and to the in-house inspection service giving detailed reasons for the decisions taken by the inspection body. 1.8.7.8 Documents The technical documentation shall enable an assessment to be made of conformity with the relevant requirements. 1.8.7.8.1 Documents for the type examination The manufacturer shall provide as appropriate: (a) The list of standards used for the design and manufacture; (b) A description of the type including all variations; (c) The instructions according to the relevant column of table A of Chapter 3.2 or a list of dangerous goods to be carried for dedicated products; (d) A general assembly drawing or drawings; (e) The detailed drawings, including the dimensions used for the calculations, of the product, the service equipment, the structural equipment, the marking and the labelling necessary to verify the conformity; (f) The calculation notes, results and conclusions; (g) The list of the service equipment with the relevant technical data and information on the safety devices including the calculation of the relief capacity if relevant; (h) The list of material requested in the standard for manufacture used for every part, sub-part, lining, service and structural equipment and the corresponding material specifications or the corresponding declaration of conformity to RID; ( i ) The approved qualification of permanent joining processes; (j) The description of the heat treatment process(es); and (k) The procedures, descriptions and records of all relevant tests listed in the standards or RID for the type approval and for the manufacture. 1.8.7.8.2 Documents for the type approval certificate issue The manufacturer shall provide as appropriate: ( a) The list of standards used for the design and manufacture; (b) A description of the type, including all variations; (c) The instructions according to the relevant column of table A of Chapter 3.2 or a list of dangerous goods to be carried for dedicated products; (d) A general assembly drawing or drawings; (e) The list of materials in contact with the dangerous goods; (f) The list of service equipment; (g) The type-examination report; and (h) Further documents mentioned under 1.8.7.8.1 on request of the competent authority or inspection body. 1.8.7.8.3 Documents for the supervision of manufacture The manufacturer shall provide as appropriate: (a) The documents listed in 1.8.7.8.1 and 1.8.7.8.2; (b) A copy of the type approval certificate; (c) The manufacturing procedures including test procedures; (d) The manufacturing records; (e) The approved qualifications of permanent joining operators; (f) The approved qualifications of the non-destructive test operators; (g) The reports of the destructive and non-destructive tests; (h) The heat treatment records; and ( i ) The calibration records . 1.8.7.8.4 Documents for initial inspection and tests , and for entry into service verification The manufacturer for initial inspection and tests, and the owner or operator for the entry into service verification shall provide as appropriate: ( a) The documents listed in 1.8.7.8.1, 1.8.7.8.2 and 1.8.7.8.3; (b) The material certificates of the product and any sub-parts including the service equipment; (c) The certificates of conformity of the service equipment; and (d) A declaration of conformity including the description of the product and all the variations adopted from the type approval. 1.8.7.8.5 Documents for periodic inspection, intermediate inspection and exceptional inspection The owner or operator, or its authorized representative shall provide as appropriate: (a) For pressure receptacles, the documents specifying special requirements when the manufacturing and periodic inspections and tests standards so require; (b) For tanks: ( i ) the tank record; and (ii) any relevant document mentioned in 1.8.7.8.1 to 1.8.7.8.4 if requested by the inspection body. 1.8.7.8.6 Documents for the surveillance of in-house inspection service The in-house inspection service shall provide the quality system documentation as appropriate: (a) The organizational structure and responsibilities; (b) The relevant inspection and test, quality control, quality assurance and process operation instructions, and systematic actions that will be used; (c) The quality records, such as inspection reports, test data, calibration data and certificates; (d) The management reviews to ensure the effective operation of the quality system arising from the on-site audits in accordance with 1.8.7.7; (e) The process describing how customer and regulation requirements are met; (f) The process for control of documents and their revision; (g) The procedures for dealing with non-conforming products; and (h) The training programmes and qualification procedures for relevant personnel. 1.8.8 Procedures for conformity assessment of gas cartridges When assessing the conformity of gas cartridges, one of the following procedures shall be applied: (a) T he procedure in section 1.8.7 for non-UN pressure receptacles, with the exception of 1.8.7.6 ; or (b) T he procedure in sub-sections 1.8.8.1 to 1.8.8.7. 1.8.8.1 General provisions 1.8.8.1.1 The supervision of manufacture shall be carried out by an Xa body and the tests as required in 6.2.6 shall be carried out either by that Xa body or by an IS authorized by that Xa body; for definition of Xa and IS see definitions in 6.2.3.6.1. Conformity assessment shall be carried out by the competent authority, its delegate or its approved inspection body of an RID Contracting State. 1.8.8.1.2 By the application of 1.8.8, the applicant shall demonstrate, ensure and declare on his sole responsibility the conformity of gas cartridges with the provisions of 6.2.6 and all further applicable provisions of RID. 1.8.8.1.3 The applicant shall (a) C arry out a design type examination of each type of gas cartridges (including materials to be used and variations of that type, e.g. volumes, pressures, drawings and closing and release devices) according to 1.8.8.2; (b) O perate an approved quality system for design, manufacture, inspection and testing according to 1.8.8.3; (c) O perate an approved testing regime according to 1.8.8.4 for the tests required in 6.2.6; (d) A pply for the approval of his quality system for supervision of manufacture and for testing to one Xa body of his choice of the RID Contracting State; if the applicant is not established in a n RID Contracting State he shall apply to one Xa body of a n RID Contracting State prior to first transport into a n RID Contracting State; (e) I f the gas cartridge is finally assembled from parts manufactured by the applicant by one or more other enterprise(s), provide written instructions how to assemble and fill the gas cartridges to meet the provisions of his type examination certificate. 1.8.8.1.4 Where the applicant and enterprises assembling or filling gas cartridges according to the instructions of the applicant, can demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Xa body conformity with the provisions of 1.8.7.7 excluding 1.8.7.7.1 (d) and 1.8.7.7.2 (b) , they may establish an in-house inspection service which may perform part or all of the inspections and tests specified in 6.2.6. 1.8.8.2 Design type examination 1.8.8.2.1 The applicant shall establish technical documentation for each type of gas cartridges including the technical standard(s) applied. If he chooses to apply a standard not referenced in 6.2.6, he shall add the standard applied to the documentation. 1.8.8.2.2 The applicant shall retain the technical documentation together with samples of that type at the disposal of the Xa body during production and afterwards for a period of minimum five years starting from the last date of production of gas cartridges according to that type examination certificate. 1.8.8.2.3 The applicant shall after careful examination issue a design type certificate which shall be valid for a maximum period of ten years; he shall add this certificate to the documentation. This certificate authorises him to produce gas cartridge s of that type for that period. 1.8.8.2.4 If within that period the relevant technical requirements of RID (including referenced standards) have changed so that the design type is no longer in conformity with them, the applicant shall withdraw his type examination certificate and inform the Xa body. 1.8.8.2.5 The applicant may after careful and complete review reissue the certificate for another period of maximum ten years. 1.8.8.3 Supervision of manufacture 1.8.8.3.1 The procedure of design type examination as well as the manufacturing process shall be subject to a survey by the Xa body to ensure the type certified by the applicant and the product as produced are in conformity with the provisions of the design type certificate and the applicable provisions of RID. If 1.8.8.1.3 (e) applies, the assembling and filling enterprises shall be included in that procedure. 1.8.8.3.2 The applicant shall take all the necessary measures to ensure that the manufacturing process complies with the applicable provisions of RID and of his design type certificate and its annexes. If 1.8.8.1.3 (e) applies, the assembling and filling enterprises shall be included in that procedure. 1.8.8.3.3 The Xa body shall: (a) V erify the conformity of the design type examination of the applicant and conformity of the type of gas cartridges with the technical documentation specified in 1.8.8.2; (b) V erify that the manufacturing process produces products in conformity with the requirements and the documentation which apply to it; if the gas cartridge is finally assembled from parts manufactured by the applicant by one or more enterprise(s), the Xa body shall also verify that the gas cartridges are in full conformity with all applicable provisions after final assembly and filling and that the instructions of the applicant are correctly applied; (c) V erify that the personnel undertaking the permanent joining of parts and the tests are qualified or approved; (d) R ecord the results of its surveys. 1.8.8.3.4 If the findings of the Xa body show non-conformity of the design type certificate of the applicant or the manufacturing process, he shall require appropriate corrective measures or withdrawal of the certificate from the applicant. 1.8.8.4 Leakproofness test 1.8.8.4.1 The applicant and enterprises finally assembling and filling gas cartridges according to the instructions of the applicant shall: (a) C arry out the tests required in 6.2.6; (b) R ecord the test results; (c) I ssue a certificate of conformity only for gas cartridges, which are in full compliance with the provisions of his design type examination and the applicable provisions of RID and have successfully passed the tests as required in 6.2.6; (d) R etain the documentation as specified in 1.8.8.7 during production and afterwards for a period of minimum five years from the last date of production of gas cartridges belonging to one type approval for inspection by the Xa body at random intervals; (e) A ffix a durable and legible mark identifying the type of gas cartridge, the applicant and the date of production or batch number; where due to limited available space the mark cannot be fully applied to the body of the gas cartridge, he shall affix a durable tag with this information to the gas cartridge or place it together with a gas cartridge in an inner packaging. 1.8.8.4.2 The Xa body shall: (a) P erform the necessary examinations and tests at random intervals, but at least shortly after starting of manufacture of a type of gas cartridges and thereafter at least once every three years, in order to verify that the procedure for design type examination of the applicant as well as that the manufacture and testing of the product are carried out in accordance with the design type certificate and the relevant provisions; (b) C heck the certificates supplied by the applicant; (c) C arry out the tests as required in 6.2.6 or approve the program of testing and the in-house inspection service to carry out the tests. 1.8.8.4.3 The certificate shall contain as a minimum: (a) The name and address of the applicant and, when the final assembly is not carried out by the applicant but by an enterprise or enterprises in accordance with the written instructions of the applicant, the name( s) and address(es) of these ent erprises; (b) A reference to the version of RID and the standard(s) used for manufacture and tests; (c) T he result of inspections and tests; (d) T he data for marking as required in 1.8.8.4.1 (e). 1.8.8.5 (Reserved) 1.8.8.6 Surveillance of the in-house inspection service When the applicant or enterprise assembling or filling gas cartridges has established an in-house inspection service, the provisions of 1.8.7.7 excluding 1.8.7.7.1 (d) and 1.8.7.7.2 (b) shall be applied. The enterprise assembling or filling gas cartridges shall comply with the provisions relevant to the applicant. 1.8.8.7 Documents The provisions of 1.8.7.8.1, 1.8.7.8.2, 1.8.7.8.3, 1.8.7.8.4 and 1.8.7.8.6 shall be applied. Chapter 1.9 Restrictions on carriage imposed by the competent authorities 1.9.1 A n RID Contracting State may apply to the international carriage of dangerous goods by rail on its territory certain additional provisions not included in RID, provided that these additional provisions – are in accordance with 1.9.2, – do not conflict with the provisions of 1.1.2 .1 (b), – are contained in the RID Contracting State’s domestic legislation applying equally to the domestic carriage of dangerous goods by rail on the territory of that RID Contracting State , – do not result in the prohibition of carriage by rail of the dangerous goods covered by these provisions in the whole territory of the RID Contracting State . 1.9.2 The additional provisions referred to in 1.9.1 are: (a) additional safety requirements or restrictions on carriage – using certain structures such as bridges or tunnels , – using combined transport installations such as transhipment installations, or – where the transport operation begins or ends in ports, railway stations or other transport terminals. (b) provisions according to which the carriage of certain dangerous goods on sections with special and local risks is prohibited, such as sections in residential areas, environmentally sensitive areas, economic centres or industrial zones containing hazardous installations, or to which special conditions, e.g. operational measures (reduced speed, specified journey times, prohibition on trains meeting each other, etc.) apply. Where possible, the c ompetent a uthorities shall establish alternative routes which may be used for each prohibited route or each route subject to special provisions. (c) exceptional provisions specifying the excluded or prescribed routeing or provisions to be observed for temporary storage resulting from extreme weather conditions, earthquake, accident, demonstrations, civil disorder or military hostilities. 1.9.3 Application of the additional provisions in accordance with 1.9.2 (a) and (b) presupposes that the competent authority provides evidence of the need for measures. 1.9.4 The competent authority of the RID Contracting State applying on its territory any additional provisions within the scope of 1.9.2 (a) and (b) above shall notify the Secretariat of OTIF , in general in advance, of the additional provisions. The Secretariat of OTIF shall bring them to the attention of the RID Contracting States . 1.9.5 Notwithstanding with preceding paragraphs, RID Contracting States may lay down specific safety requirements for the international carriage of dangerous goods by rail, in so far as RID does not cover that area, in particular as regards – the running of trains, – operating rules for operations ancillary to transport such as marshalling and stabling, – management of information concerning the dangerous goods transported, provided they are contained in its national legislation and are also applicable to the national carriage of dangerous goods by rail in the territory of the said RID Contracting State . These specific requirements shall not concern the areas covered by RID, in p articular those listed in 1.1.2 .1 (a) and 1.1.2 .1 (b). Chapter 1.10 Security provisions NOTE: For the purposes of this Chapter, security means measures or precautions to be taken to minimise theft or misuse of dangerous goods that may endanger persons, property or the environment. 1.10.1 General provisions 1.10.1.1 All persons engaged in the carriage of dangerous goods shall consider the security requirements set out in this Chapter commensurate with their responsibilities. 1.10.1.2 Dangerous goods shall only be offered for carriage to carriers that have been appropriately identified. 1.10.1.3 Areas within temporary storage terminals, temporary storage sites, vehicle depots, berthing areas and marshalling yards used for temporary storage during carriage of dangerous goods shall be properly secured, well lit and, where possible and appropriate, not accessible to the general public. 1.10.1.4 Each crew member of a train carrying dangerous goods shall carry with them means of identification, which includes their photograph, during carriage. 1.10.1.5 Safety inspections in accordance with 1.8.1 shall cover appropriate security measures. 1.10.1.6 (Reserved) 1.10.2 Security training 1.10.2.1 The training and the refresher training specified in Chapter 1.3 shall also include elements of security awareness. The security refresher training need not be linked to regulatory changes only. 1.10.2.2 Security awareness training shall address the nature of security risks, recognising security risks, methods to address and reduce such risks and actions to be taken in the event of a security breach. It shall include awareness of security plans (if appropriate) commensurate with the responsibilities and duties of individuals and their part in implementing security plans. 1.10.2.3 Such training shall be provided or verified upon employment in a position involving dangerous goods transport and shall be periodically supplemented with refresher training. 1.10.2.4 Records of all security training received shall be kept by the employer and made available to the employee or competent authority, upon request. Records shall be kept by the employer for a period of time established by the competent authority. 1.10.3 Provisions for high consequence dangerous goods NOTE: In addition to the security provisions of RID, competent authorities may implement further security provisions for reasons other than safety during carriage (see also Article 3 of Appendix C to COTIF). In order not to impede international and multimodal carriage by different explosives security marks, it is recommended that such marks be formatted consistent with an internationally harmonized standard (e.g. European Union Commission Directive 2008/43/EC). 1.10.3.1 Definition of high consequence dangerous goods 1.10.3.1.1 High consequence dangerous goods are those which have the potential for misuse in a terrorist event and which may, as a result, produce serious consequences such as mass casualties, mass destruction or, particularly for Class 7, mass socio-economic disruption. 1.10.3.1.2 High consequence dangerous goods in classes other than Class 7 are those listed in Table 1.10.3.1.2 below and carried in quantities greater than those indicated therein. Table 1.10.3.1.2: List of high consequence dangerous goods Class Division Substance or article Quantity Tank ( l ) (c) Bulk (kg) (d) Packages (kg) 1 1.1 Explosives (a) (a) 0 1.2 Explosives (a) (a) 0 1.3 Compatibility group C explosives (a) (a) 0 1.4 Explosives of UN Nos. 0104, 0237, 0255, 0267, 0289, 0361, 0365, 0366, 0440, 0441, 0455, 0456, 0500, 0512 and 0513 (a) (a) 0 1.5 Explosives 0 (a) 0 1.6 Explosives (a) (a) 0 Class Division Substance or article Quantity Tank ( l ) (c) Bulk (kg) (d) Packages (kg) 2 Flammable, non-toxic gases (classification codes including only letters F or FC) 3000 (a) (b) Toxic gases (classification codes including letters T, TF, TC, TO, TFC or TOC) excluding aerosols 0 (a) 0 3 Flammable liquids of packing groups I and II 3000 (a) (b) Desensitized explosives 0 (a) 0 4.1 Desensitized explosives (a) (a) 0 4.2 Packing group I substances 3000 (a) (b) 4.3 Packing group I substances 3000 (a) (b) 5.1 Oxidizing liquids of packing group I 3000 (a) (b) Perchlorates, ammonium nitrate, ammonium nitrate fertilisers and ammonium nitrate emulsions or suspensions or gels 3000 3000 (b) 6.1 Toxic substances of packing group I 0 (a) 0 6.2 Infectious substances of Category A (UN Nos. 2814 and 2900, except for animal material) and medical waste of Category A (UN No. 3549) (a) 0 0 8 Corrosive substances of packing group I 3000 (a) (b) (a) Not relevant (b) The provisions of 1.10.3 do not apply, whatever the quantity is. (c) A value indicated in this column is applicable only if carriage in tanks is authorized, in accordance with Chapter 3.2, Table A, column (10) or (12). For substances that are not authorized for carriage in tanks, the instruction in this column is not relevant. (d) A value indicated in this column is applicable only if carriage in bulk is authorized, in accordance with Chapter 3.2, Table A, column (10) or (17). For substances that are not authorized for carriage in bulk, the instruction in this column is not relevant. 1.10.3.1.3 For dangerous goods of Class 7, high consequence radioactive material is that with an activity equal to or greater than a transport security threshold of 3 000 A 2 per single package (see also 2.2.7.2.2.1) except for the following radionuclides where the transport security threshold is given in Table 1.10.3.1.3 below. Table 1.10.3.1.3: Transport security thresholds for specific radionuclides Element Radionuclide Transport security threshold ( TBq ) Americium Am-241 0.6 Gold Au-198 2 Cadmium Cd-109 200 Californium Cf-252 0.2 Curium Cm-244 0.5 Cobalt Co-57 7 Cobalt Co-60 0.3 Caesium Cs-137 1 Iron Fe-55 8000 Germanium Ge-68 7 Gadolinium Gd-153 10 Iridium Ir-192 0,8 Nickel Ni-63 600 Palladium Pd-103 900 Promethium Pm-147 400 Polonium Po-210 0.6 Plutonium Pu-238 0.6 Plutonium Pu-239 0.6 Radium Ra-226 0.4 Ruthenium Ru-106 3 Selenium Se-75 2 Strontium Sr-90 10 Thallium Tl-204 200 Thulium Tm-170 200 Ytterbium Yb-169 3 1.10.3.1.4 For mixtures of radionuclides, determination of whether or not the transport security threshold has been met or exceeded can be calculated by summing the ratios of activity present for each radionuclide divided by the transport security threshold for that radionuclide. If the sum of the fractions is less than 1, then the radioactivity threshold for the mixture has not been met or exceeded. This calculation can be made with the formula: Where: A i = activity of radionuclide i that is present in a package ( TBq ) T i = transport security threshold for radionuclide i ( TBq ). 1.10.3.1.5 When radioactive material possesses subsidiary hazards of other classes, the criteria of table 1.10.3.1.2 shall also be taken into account (see also 1.7.5). 1.10.3.2 Security plans 1.10.3.2.1 Carriers, consignors and other participants specified in 1.4.2 and 1.4.3 engaged in the carriage of high consequence dangerous goods (see Table 1.10.3.1.2) or high consequence radioactive material (see 1.10.3.1.3) shall adopt, implement and comply with a security plan that addresses at least the elements specified in 1.10.3.2.2. 1.10.3.2.2 The security plan shall comprise at least the following elements: (a) specific allocation of responsibilities for security to competent and qualified persons with appropriate authority to carry out their responsibilities; (b) records of dangerous goods or types of dangerous goods concerned; (c) review of current operations and assessment of security risks, including any stops necessary to the transport operation, the keeping of dangerous goods in the wagon, tank or container before, during and after the journey and the intermediate temporary storage of dangerous goods during the course of intermodal transfer or transshipment between units , as appropriate ; (d) clear statement of measures that are to be taken to reduce security risks, commensurate with the responsibilities and duties of the participant, including: – training; – security policies (e.g. response to higher threat conditions, new employee/employment verification, etc.); – operating practices (e.g. choice/use of routes where known, access to dangerous goods in intermediate temporary storage (as defined in (c)), proximity to vulnerable infrastructure etc.); – equipment and resources that are to be used to reduce security risks; (e) effective and up to date procedures for reporting and dealing with security threats, breaches of security or security incidents; (f) procedures for the evaluation and testing of security plans and procedures for periodic review and update of the plans; (g) measures to ensure the physical security of transport information contained in the security plan; and (h) measures to ensure that the distribution of information relating to the transport operation contained in the security plan is limited to those who need to have it. Such measures shall not preclude the provision of information required elsewhere in RID. NOTE: Carriers, consignors and consignees should co-operate with each other and with competent authorities to exchange threat information, apply appropriate security measures and respond to security incidents. 1.10.3.3 Devices, equipment or arrangements to prevent the theft of the train or wagon carrying high consequence dangerous goods (see Table 1.10.3.1.2) or high consequence radioactive material (see 1.10.3.1.3) and its cargo, shall be applied and measures taken to ensure that these are operational and effective at all times. The application of these protective measures shall not jeopardize emergency response. NOTE: When appropriate and already fitted, the use of transport telemetry or other tracking methods or devices should be used to monitor the movement of high consequence dangerous goods (see Table 1.10.3.1.2) or high consequence radioactive material (see 1.10.3.1.3) . 1.10.4 The provisions of 1.10.1, 1.10.2 and 1.10.3 do not apply when the quantities carried in packages in a wagon or large container do not exceed those referred to in 1.1.3.6.3, except for high consequence dangerous goods of Class 1 (in accordance with 1.10.3.1) and except for UN numbers 2910 and 2911 if the activity level exceeds the A ₂ value. In addition, the provisions of 1.10.1, 1.10.2 and 1.10.3 do not apply when the quantities carried in tanks or in bulk in a wagon or container do not exceed those referred to in 1.1.3.6.3. In addition the provisions of this Chapter do not apply to the carriage of UN No. 2912 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-I) and UN No. 2913 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, SURFACE CONTAMINATED OBJECTS (SCO-I). 1.10. 5 For radioactive material, the provisions of this Chapter are deemed to be complied with when the provisions of the Convention on Physical Protection of Nuclear Material (INFCIRC/274/Rev.1, IAEA, Vienna (1980)) and the IAEA circular on " Nuclear Security Recommendations on Physical Protection of Nuclear Material and Nuclear Facilities " (INFCIRC/225/Rev.5, IAEA, Vienna (2011)) are applied. Chapter 1.11 Internal emergency plans for marshalling yards Internal emergency plans shall be drawn up for the carriage of dangerous goods in marshalling yards. The aim of emergency plans shall be that in the event of an accident or incident in marshalling yards, all those involved shall co-operate in a co-ordinated way and the consequences of the accident or incident for human life or for the environment shall be minimised to the greatest possible extent. The requirements of this Chapter are considered to have been complied with if IRS 20201 (Carriage of dangerous goods – Emergency planning guidance for rail marshalling yards) published by UIC is applied. Part 2 Classification Chapter 2.1 General provisions 2.1.1 Introduction 2.1.1.1 The classes of dangerous goods according to RID are the following: Class 1 Explosive substances and articles Class 2 Gases Class 3 Flammable liquids Class 4.1 Flammable solids, self-reactive substances , polymerizing substances and solid desensitized explosives Class 4.2 Substances liable to spontaneous combustion Class 4.3 Substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases Class 5.1 Oxidizing substances Class 5.2 Organic peroxides Class 6.1 Toxic substances Class 6.2 Infectious substances Class 7 Radioactive material Class 8 Corrosive substances Class 9 Miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles 2.1.1.2 Each entry in the different classes has been assigned a UN number. The following types of entries are used: A. Single entries for well defined substances or articles including entries for substances covering several isomers, e.g.: UN No. 1090 ACETONE UN No. 1104 AMYL ACETATES UN No. 1194 ETHYL NITRITE SOLUTION B. Generic entries for a well defined group of substances or articles, which are not n.o.s. entries, e.g.: UN No. 1133 ADHESIVES UN No. 1266 PERFUMERY PRODUCTS UN No. 2757 CARBAMATE PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC UN No. 3101 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE B, LIQUID C. Specific n.o.s. entries covering a group of substances or articles of a particular chemical or technical nature, not otherwise specified, e.g.: UN No. 1477 NITRATES, INORGANIC, N.O.S. UN No. 1987 ALCOHOLS, N.O.S. D. General n.o.s. entries covering a group of substances or articles having one or more dangerous properties, not otherwise specified, e.g.: UN No. 1325 FLAMMABLE SOLID, ORGANIC, N.O.S. UN No. 1993 FLAMMABLE LIQUID, N.O.S. The entries defined under B., C. and D. are defined as collective entries. 2.1.1.3 For packing purposes, substances other than those of Classes 1, 2, 5.2, 6.2 and 7, and other than self-reactive substances of Class 4.1 are assigned to packing groups in accordance with the degree of danger they present: – Packing group I: Substances presenting high danger; – Packing group II: Substances presenting medium danger; – Packing group III: Substances presenting low danger. The packing group(s) to which a substance is assigned is (are) indicated in Table A of Chapter 3.2. Articles are not assigned to packing groups. For packing purposes any requirement for a specific packaging performance level is set out in the applicable packing instruction. 2.1.2 Principles of classification 2.1.2.1 The dangerous goods covered by the heading of a class are defined on the basis of their properties according to sub-section 2.2.x.1 of the relevant class. Assignment of dangerous goods to a class and a packing group is made according to the criteria mentioned in the same sub-section 2.2.x.1. Assignment of one or several subsidiary hazard(s) to a dangerous substance or article is made according to the criteria of the class or classes corresponding to those hazards, as mentioned in the appropriate sub-section(s) 2.2.x.1. 2.1.2.2 All dangerous goods entries are listed in Table A of Chapter 3.2 in the numerical order of their UN Number. This table contains relevant information on the goods listed, such as name, class, packing group(s), label(s) to be affixed, packing and carriage provisions. The substances listed by name in column (2) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 shall be carried according to their classification in Table A or under the conditions specified in 2.1.2.8. NOTE: An alphabetical list of these entries is given in table B of Chapter 3.2. 2.1.2.3 A substance may contain technical impurities (for example those deriving from the production process) or additives for stability or other purposes that do not affect their classification. However, a substance mentioned by name, i.e. listed as a single entry in Table A of Chapter 3.2, containing technical impurities or additives for stability or other purposes affecting its classification shall be considered a solution or mixture (see 2.1.3.3). 2.1.2.4 Dangerous goods which are listed or defined in sub-section 2.2.x.2 of each class are not to be accepted for carriage. 2.1.2.5 Goods not mentioned by name, i.e. goods not listed as single entries in Table A of Chapter 3.2 and not listed or defined in one of the above-mentioned sub-sections 2.2.x.2 shall be assigned to the relevant class in accordance with the procedure of section 2.1.3. In addition, the subsidiary hazard (if any) and the packing group (if any) shall be determined. Once the class, subsidiary hazard (if any) and packing group (if any) have been established the relevant UN number shall be determined. The decision trees in sub-sections 2.2.x.3 (list of collective entries) at the end of each class indicate the relevant parameters for selecting the relevant collective entry (UN number). In all cases the most specific collective entry covering the properties of the substance or article shall be selected, according to the hierarchy indicated in 2.1.1.2 by the letters B, C and D respectively. If the substance or article cannot be classified under entries of type B or C according to 2.1.1.2, then, and only then shall it be classified under an entry of type D. 2.1.2.6 On the basis of the test procedures of Chapter 2.3 and the criteria set out in sub-sections 2.2.x.1 of classes when it is so specified, it may be determined that a substance, solution or mixture of a certain class, mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2, does not meet the criteria of that class. In such a case, the substance, solution or mixture is deemed not to belong to that class. 2.1.2.7 For the purposes of classification, substances with a melting point or initial melting point of 20 °C or lower at a pressure of 101.3 kPa shall be considered to be liquids. A viscous substance for which a specific melting point cannot be determined shall be subjected to the ASTM D 4359-90 test or to the test for determining fluidity (penetrometer test) prescribed in 2.3.4. 2.1.2.8 A consignor who has identified, on the basis of test data, that a substance listed by name in column (2) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 meets classification criteria for a class that is not identified in column (3a) or (5) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, may, with the approval of the competent authority, consign the substance: – Under the most appropriate collective entry listed in sub-sections 2.2.x.3 reflecting all hazards; or – Under the same UN number and name but with additional hazard communication information as appropriate to reflect the additional subsidiary hazard(s) (documentation, label, placard) provided that the class remains unchanged and that any other carriage conditions (e.g. limited quantity, packaging and tank provisions) that would normally apply to substances possessing such a combination of hazards are the same as those applicable to the substance listed. NOTE 1: The competent authority granting the approval may be the competent authority of any RID Contracting State who may also recognize an approval granted by the competent authority of a country which is not an RID Contracting State provided that this approval has been granted in accordance with the procedures applicable according to RID, ADR, ADN, the IMDG Code or the ICAO Technical Instructions. 2: When a competent authority grants such approvals, it should inform the United Nations Sub-Committee of Experts on the Transport of Dangerous Goods accordingly and submit a relevant proposal of amendment to the Dangerous Goods List of the UN Model Regulations. Should the proposed amendment be rejected, the competent authority should withdraw its approval. 3: For carriage in accordance with 2.1.2.8, see also 5.4.1.1.20. 2.1.3 Classification of substances, including solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes), not mentioned by name 2.1.3.1 Substances including solutions and mixtures not mentioned by name shall be classified according to their degree of danger on the basis of the criteria mentioned in sub-section 2.2.x.1 of the various classes. The danger(s) presented by a substance shall be determined on the basis of its physical and chemical characteristics and physiological properties. Such characteristics and properties shall also be taken into account when such experience leads to a more stringent assignment. 2.1.3.2 A substance not mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 presenting a single hazard shall be classified in the relevant class under a collective entry listed in sub-section 2.2.x.3 of that class. 2.1.3.3 A solution or mixture meeting the classification criteria of RID composed of a single predominant substance mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 and one or more substances not subject to RID or traces of one or more substances mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2, shall be assigned the UN number and proper shipping name of the predominant substance mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 unless: (a) The solution or mixture is mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2; (b) The name and description of the substance mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 specifically indicate that they apply only to the pure substance; (c) The class, classification code, packing group, or physical state of the solution or mixture is different from that of the substance mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2; or (d) The hazard characteristics and properties of the solution or mixture necessitate emergency response measures that are different from those required for the substance mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2. In those other cases, except the one described in (a), the solution or mixture shall be classified as a substance not mentioned by name in the relevant class under a collective entry listed in sub section 2.2.x.3 of that class taking account of the subsidiary hazards presented by that solution or mixture, if any, unless the solution or mixture does not meet the criteria of any class, in which case it is not subject to RID. 2.1.3.4 Solutions and mixtures containing a substance belonging to one of the entries mentioned in 2.1.3.4.1 or 2.1.3.4.2 shall be classified in accordance with the provisions of these paragraphs. 2.1.3.4.1 Solutions and mixtures containing one of the following substances mentioned by name shall always be classified under the same entry as the substance they contain, provided they do not have the hazard characteristics as indicated in 2.1.3.5.3: – Class 3 UN 1921 PROPYLENEIMINE, STABILIZED UN 3064 NITROGLYCERIN SOLUTION IN ALCOHOL with more than 1% but not more than 5% nitroglycerin – Class 6.1 UN 1051 HYDROGEN CYANIDE, STABILIZED, containing less than 3% water UN 1185 ETHYLENEIMINE, STABILIZED UN 1259 NICKEL CARBONYL UN 1613 HYDROCYANIC ACID, AQUEOUS SOLUTION (HYDROGEN CYANIDE, AQUEOUS SOLUTION), with not more than 20% hydrogen cyanide UN 1614 HYDROGEN CYANIDE, STABILIZED, containing not more than 3% water and absorbed in a porous inert material UN 1994 IRON PENTACARBONYL UN 2480 METHYL ISOCYANATE UN 2481 ETHYL ISOCYANATE UN 3294 HYDROGEN CYANIDE, SOLUTION IN ALCOHOL, with not more than 45% hydrogen cyanide – Class 8 UN 1052 HYDROGEN FLUORIDE, ANHYDROUS UN 1744 BROMINE or UN 1744 BROMINE SOLUTION UN 1790 HYDROFLUORIC ACID with more than 85% hydrogen fluoride UN 2576 PHOSPHORUS OXYBROMIDE, MOLTEN 2.1.3.4.2 Solutions and mixtures containing a substance belonging to one of the following entries of Class 9: UN 2315 POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS, LIQUID; UN 3151 POLYHALOGENATED BIPHENYLS, LIQUID; UN 3151 halogenated monomethyldiphenylmethanes, liquid; UN 3151 POLYHALOGENATED TERPHENYLS, LIQUID; UN 3152 POLYHALOGENATED BIPHENYLS, SOLID; UN 3152 halogenated monomethyldiphenylmethanes , SOLID; UN 3152 POLYHALOGENATED TERPHENYLS, SOLID or UN 3432 POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS, SOLID shall always be classified under the same entry of Class 9, provided that: – they do not contain any additional dangerous component other than components of packing group III of classes 3, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 6.1 or 8; and – they do not have the hazard characteristics as indicated in 2.1.3.5.3. 2.1.3.4.3 Used articles, e.g. transformers and condensers, containing a solution or mixture mentioned in 2.1.3.4.2 shall always be classified under the same entry of Class 9, provided: (a) they do not contain any additional dangerous components, other than polyhalogenated dibenzodioxins and dibenzofurans of Class 6.1 or components of packing group III of Class 3, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 6.1 or 8; and (b) they do not have the hazard characteristics as indicated in 2.1.3.5.3 (a) to (g) and (i). 2.1.3.5 Substances not mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2, having more than one hazard characteristic and solutions or mixtures meeting the classification criteria of RID and containing several dangerous substances shall be classified under a collective entry (see 2.1.2.5) and packing group of the appropriate class in accordance with their hazard characteristics. Such classification according to the hazard characteristics shall be carried out as follows: 2.1.3.5.1 The physical and chemical characteristics and physiological properties shall be determined by measurement or calculation and the substance, solution or mixture shall be classified according to the criteria mentioned in sub-section 2.2.x.1 of the various classes. 2.1.3.5.2 If this determination is not possible without disproportionate cost or effort (as for some kinds of wastes), the substance, solution or mixture shall be classified in the class of the component presenting the major hazard. 2.1.3.5.3 If the hazard characteristics of the substance, solution or mixture fall within more than one class or group of substances listed below then the substance, solution or mixture shall be classified in the class or group of substances corresponding to the major hazard on the basis of the following order of precedence: (a) Material of Class 7 (apart from radioactive material in excepted packages for which, except for UN 3507 URANIUM HEXAFLUORIDE, RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE, special provision 290 of Chapter 3.3 applies, where the other hazardous properties take precedence); (b) Substances of Class 1; (c) Substances of Class 2; (d) Liquid desensitized explosives of Class 3; (e) Self-reactive substances and solid desensitized explosives of Class 4.1; (f) Pyrophoric substances of Class 4.2; (g) Substances of Class 5.2; (h) Substances of Class 6.1 meeting the inhalation toxicity criteria of packing group I (substances meeting the classification criteria of Class 8 and having an inhalation toxicity of dust and mist (LC 50 ) in the range of packing group I and a toxicity through oral ingestion or dermal contact only in the range of packing group III or less, shall be allocated to Class 8); (i) Infectious substances of Class 6.2. 2.1.3.5.4 If the hazard characteristics of the substance fall within more than one class or group of substances not listed in 2.1.3.5.3 above, the substance shall be classified in accordance with the same procedure but the relevant class shall be selected according to the precedence of hazards table in 2.1.3.10. 2.1.3.5.5 If the substance to be carried is a waste, with a composition that is not precisely known, its assignment to a UN number and packing group in accordance with 2.1.3.5.2 may be based on the consignor’s knowledge of the waste, including all available technical and safety data as requested by safety and environmental legislation in force . In case of doubt, the highest danger level shall be taken. If however, on the basis of the knowledge of the composition of the waste and the physical and chemical properties of the identified components, it is possible to demonstrate that the properties of the waste do not correspond to the properties of the packing group I level, the waste may be classified by default in the most appropriate n.o.s. entry of packing group II. However, if it is known that the waste possesses only environmentally hazardous properties, it may be assigned to packing group III under UN Nos. 3077 or 3082. This procedure may not be used for wastes containing substances mentioned in 2.1.3.5.3, substances of Class 4.3, substances of the case mentioned in 2.1.3.7 or substances which are not accepted for carriage in accordance with 2.2.x.2. 2.1.3.6 The most specific applicable collective entry (see 2.1.2.5) shall always be used, i.e. a general n.o.s. entry shall only be used if a generic entry or a specific n.o.s. entry cannot be used. 2.1.3.7 Solutions and mixtures of oxidizing substances or substances with an oxidizing subsidiary hazard may have explosive properties. In such a case they are not to be accepted for carriage unless they meet the requirements for Class 1. For solid ammonium nitrate based fertilizers, see also 2.2.51.2.2, thirteenth and fourteenth indent and Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, Section 39. 2.1.3.8 Substances of classes 1 to 6.2, 8 and 9, other than those assigned to UN Nos. 3077 and 3082, meeting the criteria of 2.2.9.1.10 are additionally to their hazards of classes 1 to 6.2, 8 and 9 considered to be environmentally hazardous substances. Other substances meeting the criteria of no other class or of no other substance of Class 9, but those of 2.2.9.1.10 are to be assigned to UN Nos. 3077 and 3082 as appropriate. 2.1.3.9 Wastes which do not meet the criteria for classification in classes 1 to 9 but are covered by the Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of Hazardous Wastes and their Disposal may be carried under UN Nos. 3077 or 3082. 2.1.3.10 Table of precedence of hazards Class and packing group 4.1 II 4.1 III 4.2 II 4.2 III 4.3, I 4.3 II 4.3 III 5.1 I 5.1 II 5.1 III 6.1 I DERMAL 6.1 I ORAL 6.1 II 6.1 III 8 I 8 II 8 III 9 3 I SOL LIQ 4.1 3 I SOL LIQ 4.1 3 I SOL LIQ 4.2 3 I SOL LIQ 4.2 3 I 4.3 I 4.3 I 4.3 I SOL LIQ 5.1 I 3 I SOL LIQ 5.1 I 3 I SOL LIQ 5.1 I 3 I 3 I 3 I 3 I 3 I 3 I 3 I 3 I 3 I 3 II SOL LIQ 4.1 3 II SOL LIQ 4.1 3 II SOL LIQ 4.2 3 II SOL LIQ 4.2 3 II 4.3 I 4.3 II 4.3 II SOL LIQ 5.1 I 3 I SOL LIQ 5.1 II 3 II SOL LIQ 5.1 II 3 II 3 I 3 I 3 II 3 II 8 I 3 II 3 II 3 II 3 III SOL LIQ 4.1 3 II SOL LIQ 4.1 3 III SOL LIQ 4.2 3 II SOL LIQ 4.2 3 III 4.3, I 4.3 II 4.3 III SOL LIQ 5.1 I 3 I SOL LIQ 5.1 II 3 II SOL LIQ 5.1 III 3 III 6.1 I 6.1 I 6.1 II 3 III *) 8 I 8 II 3 III 3 III 4.1 II 4.2 II 4.2 II 4.3 I 4.3 II 4.3 II 5.1 I 4.1 II 4.1 II 6.1 I 6.1 I SOL LIQ 4.1 II 6.1 II SOL LIQ 4.1 II 6.1II 8 I SOL LIQ 4.1 II 8 II SOL LIQ 4.1 II 8 II 4.1 II 4.1 III 4.2 II 4.2 III 4.3 I 4.3 II 4.3 III 5.1 I 4.1 II 4.1 III 6.1 I 6.1 I 6.1 II SOL LIQ 4.1III 6.1III 8 I 8 II SOL LIQ 4.1 III 8 III 4.1 III 4.2 II 4.3 I 4.3 II 4.3 II 5.1 I 4.2 II 4.2 II 6.1 I 6.1 I 4.2 II 4.2 II 8 I 4.2 II 4.2 II 4.2 II 4.2 III 4.3 I 4.3 II 4.3 III 5.1 I 5.1 II 4.2 III 6.1 I 6.1 I 6.1 II 4.2 III 8 I 8 II 4.2 III 4.2 III 4.3 I 5.1 I 4.3 I 4.3 I 6.1 I 4.3 I 4.3 I 4.3 I 4.3 I 4.3 I 4.3 I 4.3 I 4.3 II 5.1 I 4.3 II 4.3 II 6.1 I 4.3 I 4.3 II 4.3 II 8 I 4.3 II 4.3 II 4.3 II 4.3 III 5.1 I 5.1 II 4.3 III 6.1 I 6.1 I 6.1 II 4.3 III 8 I 8 II 4.3 III 4.3 III 5.1 I 5.1 I 5.1 I 5.1 I 5.1 I 5.1 I 5.1 I 5.1 I 5.1 I 5.1 II 6.1 I 5.1 I 5.1 II 5.1 II 8 I 5.1 II 5.1 II 5.1 II 5.1 III 6.1 I 6.1 I 6.1 II 5.1 III 8 I 8 II 5.1 III 5.1 III 6.1 I DERMAL SOL LIQ 6.1 I 8 I 6.1 I 6.1 I 6.1 I 6.1 I ORAL SOL LIQ 6.1 I 8 I 6.1 I 6.1 I 6.1 I 6.1 II INHAL SOL LIQ 6.1 I 8 I 6.1 II 6.1 II 6.1 II 6.1 II DERMAL SOL LIQ 6.1 I 8 I SOL LIQ 6.1 II 8 II 6.1 II 6.1 II 6.1 II ORAL SOL = Solid substances and mixtures LIQ = Liquid substances, mixtures and solutions DERMAL = Dermal toxicity ORAL = Oral toxicity INHAL = Inhalation toxicity *) Class 6.1 for pesticides 8 I SOL LIQ 6.1 II 8 II 6.1 II 6.1 II 6.1 III 8 I 8 II 8 III 6.1 III 8 I 8 I 8 II 8 II 8 III 8 III NOTE 1: Examples to explain the use of the table Classification of a single substance Description of the substance to be classified: An amine not mentioned by name meeting the criteria for Class 3, packing group II as well as those for Class 8, packing group I. Procedure: The intersection of line 3 II with column 8 I gives 8 I. This amine has therefore to be classified in Class 8 under UN No. 2734 AMINES, LIQUID, CORROSIVE, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. or UN No. 2734 POLYAMINES, LIQUID, CORROSIVE, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. , packing group I. Classification of a mixture Description of the mixture to be classified: Mixture consisting of a flammable liquid classified in Class 3, packing group III, a toxic substance in Class 6.1, packing group II and a corrosive substance in Class 8, packing group I. Procedure: The intersection of line 3 III with column 6.1 II gives 6.1 II. The intersection of line 6.1 II with column 8 I gives 8 I LIQ. This mixture not further defined has therefore to be classified in Class 8 under UN No. 2922 CORROSIVE LIQUID, TOXIC, N.O.S. , packing group I. 2: Examples for the classification of mixtures and solutions under a class and a packing group: A phenol solution of Class 6.1, (II), in benzene of Class 3, (II) is to be classified in Class 3, (II); this solution is to be classified under UN No. 1992 FLAMMABLE LIQUID, TOXIC, N.O.S., Class 3, (II), by virtue of the toxicity of the phenol. A solid mixture of sodium arsenate of Class 6.1, (II) and sodium hydroxide of Class 8, (II) is to be classified under UN No. 3290 TOXIC SOLID, CORROSIVE, INORGANIC, N.O.S., in Class 6.1 (II). A solution of crude or refined naphthalene of Class 4.1, (III) in petrol of Class 3, (II), is to be classified under UN No. 3295 HYDROCARBONS, LIQUID, N.O.S. in Class 3, (II). A mixture of hydrocarbons of Class 3, (III), and of polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB) of Class 9, (II), is to be classified under UN No. 2315 POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS, LIQUID or UN No. 3432 POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS, SOLID in Class 9, (II). A mixture of propyleneimine of Class 3, and polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB) of Class 9, (II), is to be classified under UN No. 1921 PROPYLENEIMINE, INHIBITED in Class 3. 2.1.4 Classification of samples 2.1.4.1 When the class of a substance is uncertain and it is being carried for further testing, a tentative class, proper shipping name and UN number shall be assigned on the basis of the consignor's knowledge of the substance and application of: (a) the classification criteria of Chapter 2.2; and (b) the requirements of this Chapter. The most severe packing group possible for the proper shipping name chosen shall be used. Where this provision is used the proper shipping name shall be supplemented with the word "SAMPLE" (e.g., "FLAMMABLE LIQUID, N.O.S., SAMPLE"). In certain instances, where a specific proper shipping name is provided for a sample of a substance considered to meet certain classification criteria (e.g., GAS SAMPLE, NON-PRESSURIZED, FLAMMABLE, UN No. 3167) that proper shipping name shall be used. When an N.O.S. entry is used to carry the sample, the proper shipping name need not be supplemented with the technical name as required by special provision 274 of Chapter 3.3. 2.1.4.2 Samples of the substance shall be carried in accordance with the requirements applicable to the tentative assigned proper shipping name provided: (a) The substance is not considered to be a substance not accepted for carriage by sub sections 2.2.x.2 of Chapter 2.2 or by Chapter 3.2; (b) The substance is not considered to meet the criteria for Class 1 or considered to be an infectious substance or a radioactive material; (c) The substance is in compliance with 2.2.41.1.15 or 2.2.52.1.9 if it is a self-reactive substance or an organic peroxide, respectively; (d) The sample is carried in a combination packaging with a net mass per package not exceeding 2.5 kg; and (e) The sample is not packed together with other goods. 2.1.4.3 Samples of energetic materials for testing purposes 2.1.4.3.1 Samples of organic substances carrying functional groups listed in Tables A6.1 and/or A6.3 in Appendix 6 (Screening Procedures) of the Manual of Tests and Criteria may be carried under UN No. 3224 (self-reactive solid type C) or UN No. 3223 (self-reactive liquid type C), as applicable, of Class 4.1 provided that: (a) The samples do not contain any: (i) Known explosives; (ii) Substances showing explosive effects in testing; (iii) Compounds designed with the view of producing a practical explosive or pyrotechnic effect; or (iv) Components consisting of synthetic precursors of intentional explosives; (b) For mixtures, complexes or salts of inorganic oxidizing substances of Class 5.1 with organic material(s), the concentration of the inorganic oxidizing substance is: (i) Less than 15%, by mass, if assigned to packing group I (high hazard) or II (medium hazard); or (ii) Less than 30%, by mass, if assigned to packing group III (low hazard); (c) Available data do not allow a more precise classification; (d) The sample is not packed together with other goods; and (e) The sample is packed in accordance with packing instruction P 520 and special packing provisions PP 94 or PP 95 of 4.1.4.1, as applicable. 2.1.5 Classification of articles as articles containing dangerous goods, n.o.s. NOTE: For articles which do not have a proper shipping name and which contain only dangerous goods within the permitted limited quantity amounts specified in Column (7a) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, UN No. 3363 and special provisions 301 and 672 of Chapter 3.3 may be applied. 2.1.5.1 Articles containing dangerous goods may be classified as otherwise provided by RID under the proper shipping name for the dangerous goods they contain or in accordance with this section. For the purposes of this section "article" means machinery, apparatus or other devices containing one or more dangerous goods (or residues thereof) that are an integral element of the article, necessary for its functioning and that cannot be removed for the purpose of carriage. An inner packaging shall not be an article. 2.1.5.2 Such articles may in addition contain batteries. Lithium batteries that are integral to the article shall be of a type proven to meet the testing requirements of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, sub-section 38.3, except when otherwise specified by RID (e.g. for pre-production prototype articles containing lithium batteries or for a small production run, consisting of not more than 100 such articles). 2.1.5.3 This section does not apply to articles for which a more specific proper shipping name already exists in Table A of Chapter 3.2. 2.1.5.4 This section does not apply to dangerous goods of Class 1, Class 6.2, Class 7 or radioactive material contained in articles. However, this section applies to articles containing explosives which are excluded from Class 1 in accordance with 2.2.1.1.8.2. 2.1.5.5 Articles containing dangerous goods shall be assigned to the appropriate Class determined by the hazards present using, where applicable, the Table of precedence of hazard in 2.1.3.10 for each of the dangerous goods contained in the article. If dangerous goods classified as Class 9 are contained within the article, all other dangerous goods present in the article shall be considered to present a higher hazard. 2.1.5.6 Subsidiary hazards shall be representative of the primary hazards posed by the other dangerous goods contained within the article. When only one item of dangerous goods is present in the article, the subsidiary hazard(s), if any, shall be the subsidiary hazard(s) identified by the subsidiary hazard label(s) in column (5) of Table A of Chapter 3.2. If the article contains more than one item of dangerous goods and these could react dangerously with one another during carriage, each of the dangerous goods shall be enclosed separately (see 4.1.1.6). 2.1.6 Classification of packagings, discarded, empty, uncleaned Empty uncleaned packagings, large packagings or IBCs, or parts thereof, carried for disposal, recycling or recovery of their material, other than reconditioning, repair, routine maintenance, remanufacturing or reuse, may be assigned to UN 3509 if they meet the requirements for this entry. Chapter 2.2 Class specific provisions 2.2.1 Class 1: Explosive substances and articles 2.2.1.1 Criteria 2.2.1.1.1 The heading of Class 1 covers: (a) Explosive substances: solid or liquid substances (or mixtures of substances) capable by chemical reaction of producing gases at such a temperature and pressure and at such a speed as to cause damage to the surroundings. Pyrotechnic substances: substances or mixtures of substances designed to produce an effect by heat, light, sound, gas or smoke or a combination of these as the result of non detonating self sustaining exothermic chemical reactions. NOTE 1: Substances which are not themselves explosive but which may form an explosive mixture of gas, vapour or dust are not substances of Class 1. 2: Also excluded from Class 1 are: water- or alcohol-wetted explosives of which the water or alcohol content exceeds the limits specified and those containing plasticizers – these explosives are assigned to Class 3 or Class 4.1 – and those explosives which, on the basis of their predominant hazard, are assigned to Class 5.2. (b) Explosive articles: articles containing one or more explosive or pyrotechnic substances. NOTE: Devices containing explosive or pyrotechnic substances in such small quantity or of such a character that their inadvertent or accidental ignition or initiation during carriage would not cause any manifestation external to the device by projection, fire, smoke, heat or loud noise are not subject to the requirements of Class 1. (c) Substances and articles not mentioned above which are manufactured with a view to producing a practical explosive or pyrotechnic effect. For the purposes of Class 1, the following definition applies: Phlegmatized means that a substance (or "phlegmatizer") has been added to an explosive to enhance its safety in handling and carriage. The phlegmatizer renders the explosive insensitive, or less sensitive, to the following actions: heat, shock, impact, percussion or friction. Typical phlegmatizing agents include, but are not limited to: wax, paper, water, polymers (such as chlorofluoropolymers), alcohol and oils (such as petroleum jelly and paraffin). 2.2.1.1.2 Any substance or article having or suspected of having explosive properties shall be considered for assignment to Class 1 in accordance with the tests, procedures and criteria prescribed in Part I, Manual of Tests and Criteria. A substance or article assigned to Class 1 can only be accepted for carriage when it has been assigned to a name or n.o.s. entry listed in Table A of Chapter 3.2 and meets the criteria of the Manual of Tests and Criteria. 2.2.1.1.3 The substances and articles of Class 1 shall be assigned to a UN Number and a name or n.o.s. entry listed in Table A of Chapter 3.2. Interpretation of the names of substances and articles in Table A of Chapter 3.2 shall be based upon the glossary in 2.2.1.4. Samples of new or existing explosive substances or articles carried for purposes including: testing, classification, research and development quality control, or as a commercial sample, other than initiating explosive, may be assigned to UN No. 0190 SAMPLES, EXPLOSIVE. The assignment of explosive substances and articles not mentioned by name as such in Table A of Chapter 3.2 to an n.o.s entry of Class 1 or UN No. 0190 SAMPLES, EXPLOSIVE as well as the assignment of certain substances the carriage of which is subject to a specific authorization by the competent authority according to the special provisions referred to in Column (6) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 shall be made by the competent authority of the country of origin. This competent authority shall also approve in writing the conditions of carriage of these substances and articles. If the country of origin is not an RID Contracting State , the classification and the conditions of carriage shall be recognized by the competent authority of the first RID Contracting State reached by the consignment. 2.2.1.1.4 Substances and articles of Class 1 shall have been assigned to a division in accordance with 2.2.1.1.5 and to a compatibility group in accordance with 2.2.1.1.6. The division shall be based on the results of the tests described in 2.3.0 and 2.3.1 applying the definitions in 2.2.1.1.5. The compatibility group shall be determined in accordance with the definitions in 2.2.1.1.6. The classification code shall consist of the division number and the compatibility group letter. 2.2.1.1.5 Definition of divisions Division 1.1 Substances and articles which have a mass explosion hazard (a mass explosion is an explosion which affects almost the entire load virtually instantaneously). Division 1.2 Substances and articles which have a projection hazard but not a mass explosion hazard. Division 1.3 Substances and articles which have a fire hazard and either a minor blast hazard or a minor projection hazard or both, but not a mass explosion hazard: (a) combustion of which gives rise to considerable radiant heat; or (b) which burn one after another, producing minor blast or projection effects or both. Division 1.4 Substances and articles which present only a slight hazard of explosion in the event of ignition or initiation during carriage. The effects are largely confined to the package and no projection of fragments of appreciable size or range is to be expected. An external fire shall not cause virtually instantaneous explosion of almost the entire contents of the package. Division 1.5 Very insensitive substances having a mass explosion hazard which are so insensitive that there is very little probability of initiation or of transition from burning to detonation under normal conditions of carriage. As a minimum requirement they must not explode in the external fire test. Division 1.6 Extremely insensitive articles which do not have a mass explosion hazard. The articles predominantly contain extremely insensitive substances and demonstrate a negligible probability of accidental initiation or propagation. NOTE: The hazard from articles of Division 1.6 is limited to the explosion of a single article. 2.2.1.1.6 Definition of compatibility groups of substances and articles A Primary explosive substance. B Article containing a primary explosive substance and not having two or more effective protective features. Some articles, such as detonators for blasting, detonator assemblies for blasting and primers, cap-type, are included, even though they do not contain primary explosives. C Propellant explosive substance or other deflagrating explosive substance or article containing such explosive substance. D Secondary detonating explosive substance or black powder or article containing a secondary detonating explosive substance, in each case without means of initiation and without a propelling charge, or article containing a primary explosive substance and having two or more effective protective features. E Article containing a secondary detonating explosive substance, without means of initiation, with a propelling charge (other than one containing a flammable liquid or gel or hypergolic liquids). F Article containing a secondary detonating explosive substance with its own means of initiation, with a propelling charge (other than one containing a flammable liquid or gel or hypergolic liquids) or without a propelling charge. G Pyrotechnic substance, or article containing a pyrotechnic substance, or article containing both an explosive substance and an illuminating, incendiary, tear or smoke producing substance (other than a water activated article or one which contains white phosphorus, phosphides, a pyrophoric substance, a flammable liquid or gel or hypergolic liquids). H Article containing both an explosive substance and white phosphorus. J Article containing both an explosive substance and a flammable liquid or gel. K Article containing both an explosive substance and a toxic chemical agent. L Explosive substance or article containing an explosive substance and presenting a special hazard (e.g. due to water activation or the presence of hypergolic liquids, phosphides or a pyrophoric substance) necessitating isolation of each type. N Articles predominantly containing extremely insensitive substances. S Substance or article so packed or designed that any hazardous effects arising from accidental functioning are confined within the package unless the package has been degraded by fire, in which case all blast or projection effects are limited to the extent that they do not significantly hinder or prevent fire fighting or other emergency response efforts in the immediate vicinity of the package. NOTE 1: Each substance or article, packed in a specified packaging, may be assigned to one compatibility group only. Since the criterion of compatibility group S is empirical, assignment to this group is necessarily linked to the tests for assignment of a classification code. 2: Articles of compatibility groups D and E may be fitted or packed together with their own means of initiation, provided that such means have at least two effective protective features designed to prevent an explosion in the event of accidental functioning of the means of initiation. Such articles and packages shall be assigned to compatibility groups D or E. 3: Articles of compatibility groups D and E may be packed together with their own means of initiation, which do not have two effective protective features (i.e. means of initiation assigned to compatibility group B), provided that they comply with mixed packing provision MP 21 of Section 4.1.10. Such packages shall be assigned to compatibility groups D or E. 4: Articles may be fitted or packed together with their own means of ignition, provided that the means of ignition cannot function during normal conditions of carriage. 5: Articles of compatibility groups C, D and E may be packed together. Such packages shall be assigned to compatibility group E. 2.2.1.1.7 Assignment of fireworks to divisions 2.2.1.1.7.1 Fireworks shall normally be assigned to divisions 1.1, 1.2, 1.3 and 1.4 on the basis of test data derived from Test Series 6 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria. However: (a) waterfalls containing flash composition (see Note 2 of 2.2.1.1.7.5) shall be classified as 1.1G regardless of the results of Test Series 6; (b) since the range of such articles is very extensive and the availability of test facilities may be limited, assignment to divisions may also be made in accordance with the procedure in 2.2.1.1.7.2. 2.2.1.1.7.2 Assignment of fireworks to UN No. 0333, 0334, 0335 or 0336 , and assignment of articles to UN No. 0431 for those used for theatrical effects meeting the definition for article type and the 1.4G specification in the default fireworks classification table in 2.2.1.1.7.5, may be made on the basis of analogy, without the need for Test Series 6 testing, in accordance with the default fireworks classification table in 2.2.1.1.7.5 . Such assignment shall be made with the agreement of the competent authority. Items not specified in the table shall be classified on the basis of test data derived from Test Series 6. NOTE 1: The addition of other types of fireworks to column 1 of the table in 2.2.1.1.7.5 shall only be made on the basis of full test data submitted to the UN Sub-Committee of Experts on the Transport of Dangerous Goods for consideration. 2: Test data derived by competent authorities which validates, or contradicts the assignment of fireworks specified in column 4 of the table in 2.2.1.1.7.5 to divisions in column 5 should be submitted to the UN Sub-Committee of Experts on the Transport of Dangerous Goods for information. 2.2.1.1.7.3 Where fireworks of more than one division are packed in the same package they shall be classified on the basis of the most dangerous division unless test data derived from Test Series 6 indicate otherwise. 2.2.1.1.7.4 The classification shown in the Table in 2.2.1.1.7.5 applies only for articles packed in fibreboard boxes (4G). 2.2.1.1.7.5 Default fireworks classification Table NOTE 1: References to percentages in the Table, unless otherwise stated, are to the mass of all pyrotechnic substances (e.g. rocket motors, lifting charge, bursting charge and effect charge). 2: "Flash composition" in this Table refers to pyrotechnic substances in powder form or as pyrotechnic units as presented in the fireworks that are used in waterfalls, or to produce an aural effect or used as a bursting charge, or propellant charge unless: (a) The time taken for the pressure rise in the HSL Flash Composition Test in Appendix 7 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria is demonstrated to be more than 6 ms for 0.5 g of pyrotechnic substance; or (b) The pyrotechnic substance gives a negative "-" result in the US Flash Composition Test in Appendix 7 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria. 3: Dimensions in mm refer to: (a) for spherical and peanut shells the diameter of the sphere of the shell; (b) for cylinder shells the length of the shell; (c) for a shell in mortar, Roman candle, shot tube firework or mine the inside diameter of the tube comprising or containing the firework; (d) for a bag mine or cylinder mine, the inside diameter of the mortar intended to contain the mine. Type Includes: / Synonym: Definition Specification Classi fication Shell, spherical or cylindrical Spherical display shell: aerial shell, colour shell, dye shell, multi-break shell, multi-effect shell, nautical shell, parachute shell, smoke shell, star shell; report shell: maroon, salute, sound shell, thunderclap, aerial shell kit Device with or without propellant charge, with delay fuse and bursting charge, pyrotechnic unit(s) or loose pyrotechnic substance and designed to be projected from a mortar All report shells 1.1G Colour shell: ≥ 180 mm 1.1G Colour shell: < 180 mm with > 25% flash composition, as loose powder and/ or report effects 1.1G Colour shell: < 180 mm with ≤ 25% flash composition, as loose powder and/ or report effects 1.3G Colour shell: ≤ 50 mm, or ≤ 60 g pyrotechnic substance, with ≤ 2% flash composition as loose powder and/ or report effects 1.4G Peanut shell Device with two or more spherical aerial shells in a common wrapper propelled by the same propellant charge with separate external delay fuses The most hazardous spherical aerial shell determines the classification Preloaded mortar, shell in mortar Assembly comprising a spherical or cylindrical shell inside a mortar from which the shell is designed to be projected All report shells 1.1G Colour shell: ≥ 180 mm 1.1G Colour shell: > 25% flash composition as loose powder and/or report effects 1.1G Colour shell: > 50 mm and < 180 mm 1.2G Colour shell: ≤ 50 mm , or ≤ 60 g pyrotechnic substance, with ≤ 25% flash composition as loose powder and/ or report effects 1.3G Shell of shells (spherical) (Reference to percentages for shell of shells are to the gross mass of the fireworks article) Device without propellant charge, with delay fuse and bursting charge, containing report shells and inert materials and designed to be projected from a mortar > 120 mm 1.1G Device without propellant charge, with delay fuse and bursting charge, containing report shells ≤ 25g flash composition per report unit, with ≤ 33% flash composition and 60% inert materials and designed to be projected from a mortar ≤ 120 mm 1.3G Device without propellant charge, with delay fuse and bursting charge, containing colour shells and/or pyrotechnic units and designed to be projected from a mortar > 300 mm 1.1G Device without propellant charge, with delay fuse and bursting charge, containing colour shells ≤ 70mm and/or pyrotechnic units, with ≤ 25% flash composition and ≤ 60% pyrotechnic substance and designed to be projected from a mortar > 200mm and ≤ 300 mm 1.3G Device with propellant charge, with delay fuse and bursting charge, containing colour shells ≤ 70 mm and/or pyrotechnic units, with ≤ 25% flash composition and ≤ 60% pyrotechnic substance and designed to be projected from a mortar ≤ 200 mm 1.3G Battery/ combination Barrage, bombardos, cakes, finale box, flowerbed, hybrid, multiple tubes, shell cakes , banger batteries, flash banger batteries Assembly including several elements either containing the same type or several types each corresponding to one of the types of fireworks listed in this table, with one or two points of ignition The most hazardous firework type determines the classification Roman candle Exhibition candle, candle, bombettes Tube containing a series of pyrotechnic units consisting of alternate pyrotechnic substance, propellant charge, and transmitting fuse ≥ 50 mm inner diameter, containing flash composition, or < 50 mm with >25% flash composition 1.1G ≥ 50 mm inner diameter, containing no flash composition 1.2G < 50 mm inner diameter and ≤ 25% flash composition 1.3G ≤ 30 mm inner diameter, each pyrotechnic unit ≤ 25 g and ≤ 5% flash composition 1.4G Shot tube Single shot Roman candle, small preloaded mortar Tube containing a pyrotechnic unit consisting of pyrotechnic substance, propellant charge with or without transmitting fuse ≤ 30 mm inner diameter and pyrotechnic unit > 25 g, or > 5% and ≤ 25% flash composition 1.3G ≤ 30 mm inner diameter, pyrotechnic unit ≤ 25 g and ≤ 5% flash composition 1.4G Rocket Avalanche rocket, signal rocket, whistling rocket, bottle rocket, sky rocket, missile type rocket, table rocket Tube containing pyrotechnic substance and/or pyrotechnic units, equipped with stick(s) or other means for stabilization of flight, and designed to be propelled into the air Flash composition effects only 1.1G Flash composition > 25% of the pyrotechnic substance 1.1G > 20 g pyrotechnic substance and flash composition ≤ 25% 1.3G ≤ 20 g pyrotechnic substance, black powder bursting charge and ≤ 0.13 g flash composition per report and ≤ 1 g in total 1.4G Mine Pot-a-feu, ground mine, bag mine, cylinder mine Tube containing propellant charge and pyrotechnic units and designed to be placed on the ground or to be fixed in the ground. The principal effect is ejection of all the pyrotechnic units in a single burst producing a widely dispersed visual and/or aural effect in the air or: Cloth or paper bag or cloth or paper cylinder containing propellant charge and pyrotechnic units, designed to be placed in a mortar and to function as a mine > 25% flash composition, as loose powder and/ or report effects 1.1G ≥ 180 mm and ≤ 25% flash composition, as loose powder and/ or report effects 1.1G < 180 mm and ≤ 25% flash composition, as loose powder and/ or report effects 1.3G ≤ 150 g pyrotechnic substance, containing ≤ 5% flash composition as loose powder and/ or report effects. Each pyrotechnic unit ≤ 25 g, each report effect < 2 g, each whistle, if any, ≤ 3 g 1.4G Fountain Volcanos, gerbs, lances, Bengal fire, flitter sparkle, cylindrical fountains, cone fountains, illuminating torch Non-metallic case containing pressed or consolidated pyrotechnic substance producing sparks and flame NOTE: Fountains intended to produce a vertical cascade or curtain of sparks are considered to be waterfalls (see row below). ≥ 1 kg pyrotechnic substance 1.3G < 1 kg pyrotechnic substance 1.4G Waterfall cascades, showers pyrotechnic fountain intended to produce a vertical cascade or curtain of sparks containing flash composition regardless of the results of Test Series 6 (see 2.2.1.1.7.1 (a)) 1.1G not containing flash composition 1.3G Sparkler Handheld sparklers, non-handheld sparklers, wire sparklers Rigid wire partially coated (along one end) with slow burning pyrotechnic substance with or without an ignition tip Perchlorate based sparklers: > 5 g per item or > 10 items per pack 1.3G Perchlorate based sparklers: ≤ 5 g per item and ≤ 10 items per pack; Nitrate based sparklers: ≤ 30 g per item 1.4G Bengal stick Dipped stick Non-metallic stick partially coated (along one end) with slow-burning pyrotechnic substance and designed to be held in the hand Perchlorate based items: > 5 g per item or > 10 items per pack 1.3G Perchlorate based items: ≤ 5 g per item and ≤ 10 items per pack; Nitrate based items: ≤ 30 g per item 1.4G Low hazard fireworks and novelties Table bombs, throwdowns, crackling granules, smokes, fog, snakes, glow worm, serpents, snaps, party poppers Device designed to produce very limited visible and/ or audible effect which contains small amounts of pyrotechnic substance and/or explosive composition. Throwdowns and snaps may contain up to 1.6 mg of silver fulminate; snaps and party poppers may contain up to 16 mg of potassium chlorate/ red phosphorous mixture; other articles may contain up to 5 g of pyrotechnic substance, but no flash composition 1.4G Spinner Aerial spinner, helicopter, chaser, ground spinner Non-metallic tube or tubes containing gas- or spark-producing pyrotechnic substance, with or without noise producing composition, with or without aerofoils attached Pyrotechnic substance per item > 20 g, containing ≤ 3% flash composition as report effects, or whistle composition ≤ 5 g 1.3G Pyrotechnic substance per item ≤ 20 g, containing ≤ 3% flash composition as report effects, or whistle composition ≤ 5 g 1.4G Wheels Catherine wheels, Saxon Assembly including drivers containing pyrotechnic substance and provided with a means of attaching it to a support so that it can rotate ≥ 1 kg total pyrotechnic substance, no report effect, each whistle (if any) ≤ 25 g and ≤ 50 g whistle composition per wheel 1.3G < 1 kg total pyrotechnic substance, no report effect, each whistle (if any) ≤ 5 g and ≤ 10 g whistle composition per wheel 1.4G Aerial wheel Flying Saxon, UFO's, rising crown Tubes containing propellant charges and sparks- flame- and/ or noise producing pyrotechnic substances, the tubes being fixed to a supporting ring > 200 g total pyrotechnic substance or > 60 g pyrotechnic substance per driver, ≤ 3% flash composition as report effects, each whistle (if any) ≤ 25 g and ≤ 50 g whistle composition per wheel 1.3G ≤ 200 g total pyrotechnic substance and ≤ 60 g pyrotechnic substance per driver, ≤ 3% flash composition as report effects, each whistle (if any) ≤ 5 g and ≤ 10 g whistle composition per wheel 1.4G Selection pack Display selection box, display selection pack, garden selection box, indoor selection box; assortment A pack of more than one type each corresponding to one of the types of fireworks listed in this table The most hazardous firework type determines the classification Firecracker Celebration cracker, celebration roll, string cracker Assembly of tubes (paper or cardboard) linked by a pyrotechnic fuse, each tube intended to produce an aural effect Each tube ≤ 140 mg of flash composition or ≤ 1 g black powder 1.4G Banger Salute, flash banger, lady cracker Non-metallic tube containing report composition intended to produce an aural effect > 2 g flash composition per item 1.1G ≤ 2 g flash composition per item and ≤ 10 g per inner packaging 1.3G ≤ 1 g flash composition per item and ≤ 10 g per inner packaging or ≤ 10 g black powder per item 1.4G 2.2.1.1.8 Exclusion from Class 1 2.2.1.1.8.1 An article or a substance may be excluded from Class 1 by virtue of test results and the Class 1 definition with the approval of the competent authority of any RID Contracting State who may also recognize an approval granted by the competent authority of a country which is not an RID Contracting State provided that this approval has been granted in accordance with the procedures applicable according to RID, ADR, ADN, the IMDG Code or the ICAO Technical Instructions. 2.2.1.1.8.2 With the approval of the competent authority in accordance with 2.2.1.1.8.1, an article may be excluded from Class 1 when three unpackaged articles, each individually activated by its own means of initiation or ignition or external means to function in the designed mode, meet the following test criteria: (a) No external surface shall have a temperature of more than 65 °C. A momentary spike in temperature up to 200 ºC is acceptable; (b) No rupture or fragmentation of the external casing or movement of the article or detached parts thereof of more than one metre in any direction; NOTE: Where the integrity of the article may be affected in the event of an external fire these criteria shall be examined by a fire test. One such method is described in ISO 14451-2 using a heating rate of 80 K/min. (c) No audible report exceeding 135 dB(C) peak at a distance of one metre; (d) No flash or flame capable of igniting a material such as a sheet of 80 ± 10 g/m² paper in contact with the article; and (e) No production of smoke, fumes or dust in such quantities that the visibility in a one cubic metre chamber equipped with appropriately sized blow out panels is reduced more than 50% as measured by a calibrated light (lux) meter or radiometer located one metre from a constant light source located at the midpoint on opposite walls. The general guidance on Optical Density Testing in ISO 5659-1 and the general guidance on the Photometric System described in Section 7.5 in ISO 5659-2 may be used or similar optical density measurement methods designed to accomplish the same purpose may also be employed. A suitable hood cover surrounding the back and sides of the light meter shall be used to minimize effects of scattered or leaking light not emitted directly from the source. NOTE 1: If during the tests addressing criteria (a), (b), (c) and (d) no or very little smoke is observed the test described in (e) may be waived. 2: The competent authority referred to in 2.2.1.1.8.1 may require testing in packaged form if it is determined that, as packaged for carriage, the article may pose a greater hazard . 2.2.1.1.9 Classification documentation 2.2.1.1.9.1 A competent authority assigning an article or substance to Class 1 shall confirm that classification with the applicant in writing. 2.2.1.1.9.2 A competent authority classification document may be in any form and may consist of more than one page, provided pages are numbered consecutively. The document shall have a unique reference. 2.2.1.1.9.3 The information provided shall be easy to identify, legible and durable. 2.2.1.1.9.4 Examples of the information that may be provided in the classification documents are as follows: (a) The name of the competent authority and the provisions in national legislation under which it is granted its authority; (b) The modal or national regulations for which the classification document is applicable; (c) Confirmation that the classification has been approved, made or agreed in accordance with the UN Model Regulations or the relevant modal regulations; (d) The name and address of the person in law to which the classification has been assigned and any company registration which uniquely identifies a company or other body corporate under national legislation; (e) The name under which the explosives will be placed onto the market or otherwise supplied for carriage; (f) The proper shipping name, UN number, class, division and corresponding compatibility group of the explosives; (g) Where appropriate, the maximum net explosive mass of the package or article; (h) The name, signature, stamp, seal or other identification of the person authorised by the competent authority to issue the classification document is clearly visible; (i) Where safety in carriage or the division is assessed as being dependent upon the packaging, the packaging mark or a description of the permitted inner packagings, intermediate packagings, outer packagings; (j) The classification document states the part number, stock number or other identifying reference under which the explosives will be placed onto the market or otherwise supplied for carriage; (k) The name and address of the person in law who manufactured the explosives and any company registration which uniquely identifies a company or other body corporate under national legislation; (l) Any additional information regarding the applicable packing instruction and special packing provisions where appropriate; (m) The basis for assigning the classification, i.e. whether on the basis of test results, default for fireworks, analogy with classified explosive, by definition from Table A of Chapter 3.2 etc.; (n) Any special conditions or limitations that the competent authority has identified as relevant to the safety for carriage of the explosives, the communication of the hazard and international carriage; (o) The expiry date of the classification document is given where the competent authority considers one to be appropriate. 2.2.1.2 Substances and articles not accepted for carriage 2.2.1.2.1 Explosive substances which are unduly sensitive according to the criteria of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part I, or are liable to spontaneous reaction, as well as explosive substances and articles which cannot be assigned to a name or n.o.s. entry listed in Table A of Chapter 3.2, shall not be accepted for carriage. 2.2.1.2.2 Substances of compatibility group A shall not be accepted for carriage by rail (1.1 A, UN Nos. 0074, 0113, 0114, 0129, 0130, 0135, 0224 and 0473). Articles of compatibility group K shall not be accepted for carriage (1.2 K, UN No. 0020 and 1.3 K, UN No. 0021). 2.2.1.3 List of collective entries Classification code (see 2.2.1.1.4) UN Name of the substance or article No. 1.1 A 0473 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. (not accepted for carriage by rail, see 2.2.1.2.2) 1.1 B 0461 COMPONENTS, EXPLOSIVE TRAIN, N.O.S. 1.1 C 0474 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 0497 PROPELLANT, LIQUID 0498 PROPELLANT, SOLID 0462 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.1 D 0475 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 0463 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.1 E 0464 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.1 F 0465 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.1 G 0476 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.1 L 0357 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 0354 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.2 B 0382 COMPONENTS, EXPLOSIVE TRAIN, N.O.S. 1.2 C 0466 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.2 D 0467 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.2 E 0468 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.2 F 0469 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.2 L 0358 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 0248 CONTRIVANCES, WATER-ACTIVATED with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge 0355 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.3 C 0132 DEFLAGRATING METAL SALTS OF AROMATIC NITRO-DERIVATIVES, N.O.S. 0477 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 0495 PROPELLANT, LIQUID 0499 PROPELLANT, SOLID 0470 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.3 G 0478 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.3 L 0359 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 0249 CONTRIVANCES, WATER-ACTIVATED with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge 0356 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.4 B 0350 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 0383 COMPONENTS, EXPLOSIVE TRAIN, N.O.S. 1.4 C 0479 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 0501 PROPELLANT, SOLID 0351 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.4 D 0480 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 0352 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.4 E 0471 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.4 F 0472 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.4 G 0485 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 0353 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 1.4 S 0481 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 0349 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S. 0384 COMPONENTS, EXPLOSIVE TRAIN, N.O.S. 1.5 D 0482 SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, VERY INSENSITIVE (SUBSTANCES, EVI) N.O.S. 1.6 N 0486 ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, EXTREMELY INSENSITIVE (ARTICLES, EEI ) 0190 SAMPLES, EXPLOSIVE other than initiating explosive NOTE: Division and compatibility group shall be defined as directed by the competent authority and according to the principles in 2.2.1.1.4. 2.2.1.4 Glossary of names NOTE 1: The descriptions in the glossary are not intended to replace the test procedures, nor to determine the hazard classification of a substance or article of Class 1. Assignment to the correct division and a decision on whether compatibility group S is appropriate shall be based on testing of the product in accordance with the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part I or by analogy with similar products which have already been tested and assigned in accordance with the procedures of the Manual of Tests and Criteria. 2: The figures given after the names refer to the relevant UN numbers (Column 1 of Table A of Chapter 3.2). For the classification code, see 2.2.1.1.4. AMMUNITION, ILLUMINATING , with or without burster, expelling charge or propelling charge: UN Nos. 0171, 0254, 0297 Ammunition designed to produce a single source of intense light for lighting up an area. The term includes illuminating cartridges, grenades and projectiles; and illuminating and target identification bombs. NOTE: The following articles: CARTRIDGES, SIGNAL; SIGNAL DEVICES HAND; SIGNALS, DISTRESS; FLARES, AERIAL; FLARES, SURFACE are not included in this definition. They are listed separately. AMMUNITION, INCENDIARY , liquid or gel, with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge: UN No. 0247 Ammunition containing liquid or gelatinous incendiary substance. Except when the incendiary substance is an explosive per se, it also contains one or more of the following: a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge; a fuze with burster or expelling charge. AMMUNITION, INCENDIARY, WHITE PHOSPHORUS with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge: UN Nos. 0243, 0244 Ammunition containing white phosphorus as incendiary substance. It also contains one or more of the following: a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge; a fuze with burster or expelling charge. AMMUNITION, INCENDIARY with or without burster, expelling charge or propelling charge: UN Nos. 0009, 0010, 0300 Ammunition containing incendiary composition. Except when the composition is an explosive per se, it also contains one or more of the following: a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge; a fuze with burster or expelling charge. AMMUNITION, PRACTICE : UN Nos. 0362, 0488 Ammunition without a main bursting charge, containing a burster or expelling charge. Normally it also contains a fuze and a propelling charge. NOTE: GRENADES, PRACTICE are not included in this definition. They are listed separately. AMMUNITION, PROOF : UN No. 0363 Ammunition containing pyrotechnic substances, used to test the performance or strength of new ammunition, weapon components or assemblies. AMMUNITION, SMOKE, WHITE PHOSPHORUS , with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge: UN Nos. 0245, 0246 Ammunition containing white phosphorus as a smoke producing substance. It also contains one or more of the following: a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge; a fuze with burster or expelling charge. The term includes grenades, smoke. AMMUNITION, SMOKE with or without burster, expelling charge or propelling charge: UN Nos. 0015, 0016, 0303 Ammunition containing a smoke-producing substance such as chlorosulphonic acid mixture or titanium tetrachloride; or a smoke-producing pyrotechnic composition based on hexachloroethane or red phosphorus. Except when the substance is an explosive per se, the ammunition also contains one or more of the following: a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge; a fuze with burster or expelling charge. The term includes grenades, smoke. NOTE: SIGNALS, SMOKE are not included in this definition. They are listed separately. AMMUNITION, TEAR PRODUCING , with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge: UN Nos. 0018, 0019, 0301 Ammunition containing a tear producing substance. It also contains one or more of the following: a pyrotechnic substance; a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge; a fuze with burster or expelling charge. ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, EXTREMELY INSENSITIVE (ARTICLES EEI) : UN No. 0486 Articles that predominantly contain extremely insensitive substances which demonstrate a negligible probability of accidental initiation or propagation under normal conditions of transport, and which have passed Test Series 7. ARTICLES, PYROPHORIC : UN No. 0380 Articles which contain a pyrophoric substance (capable of spontaneous ignition when exposed to air) and an explosive substance or component. The term excludes articles containing white phosphorus. ARTICLES, PYROTECHNIC , for technical purposes: UN Nos. 0428, 0429, 0430, 0431, 0432 Articles which contain pyrotechnic substances and are used for technical purposes such as heat generation, gas generation, theatrical effects, etc. NOTE: The following articles: all ammunition; CARTRIDGES, SIGNAL; CUTTERS, CABLE, EXPLOSIVE; FIREWORKS; FLARES, AERIAL; FLARES, SURFACE; RELEASE DEVICES, EXPLOSIVE; RIVETS, EXPLOSIVE; SIGNAL DEVICES, HAND; SIGNALS, DISTRESS; SIGNALS, RAILWAY TRACK, EXPLOSIVES; SIGNALS, SMOKE are not included in this definition. They are listed separately. BLACK POWDER (GUNPOWDER), COMPRESSED or BLACK POWDER (GUNPOWDER), IN PELLETS : UN No. 0028 Substance consisting of a pelletized form of black powder. BLACK POWDER (GUNPOWDER) , granular or as meal: UN No. 0027 Substance consisting of an intimate mixture of charcoal or other carbon and either potassium nitrate or sodium nitrate, with or without sulphur. BOMBS, WITH FLAMMABLE LIQUID , with bursting charge: UN Nos. 0399, 0400 Articles which are dropped from aircraft, consisting of a tank filled with flammable liquid and bursting charge. BOMBS, PHOTO FLASH : UN No. 0038 Explosive articles which are dropped from aircraft to provide brief, intense illumination for photography. They contain a charge of detonating explosive without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features. BOMBS, PHOTO FLASH : UN No. 0037 Explosive articles which are dropped from aircraft to provide brief, intense illumination for photography. They contain a charge of detonating explosive with means of initiation not containing two or more effective protective features. BOMBS, PHOTO FLASH : UN Nos. 0039, 0299 Explosive articles which are dropped from aircraft to provide brief, intense illumination for photography. They contain a photo flash composition. BOMBS with bursting charge: UN Nos. 0034; 0035 Explosive articles which are dropped from aircraft, without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features. BOMBS with bursting charge: UN Nos. 0033, 0291 Explosive articles which are dropped from aircraft, with means of initiation not containing two or more effective protective features. BOOSTERS WITH DETONATOR : UN Nos. 0225, 0268 Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive with means of initiation. They are used to increase the initiating power of detonators or detonating cord. BOOSTERS without detonator: UN Nos. 0042, 0283 Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive without means of initiation. They are used to increase the initiating power of detonators or detonating cord. BURSTERS , explosive: UN No. 0043 Articles consisting of a small charge of explosive used to open projectiles or other ammunition in order to disperse their contents. CARTRIDGES, FLASH : UN Nos. 0049, 0050 Articles consisting of a casing, a primer and flash powder, all assembled in one piece ready for firing. CARTRIDGES FOR TOOLS, BLANK : UN No. 0014 Article, used in tools, consisting of a closed cartridge case with a centre or rim fire primer with or without a charge of smokeless or black powder but with no projectile. CARTRIDGES FOR WEAPONS, BLANK : UN Nos. 0326, 0413, 0327, 0338, 0014 Ammunition consisting of a closed cartridge case with a centre or rim fire primer and a charge of smokeless or black powder but no projectile. It produces a loud noise and is used for training, saluting, propelling charge, starter pistols, etc. The term includes ammunition, blank. CARTRIDGES FOR WEAPONS, INERT PROJECTILE : UN Nos. 0328, 0417, 0339, 0012 Ammunition consisting of a projectile without bursting charge but with a propelling charge with or without a primer. The articles may include a tracer, provided that the predominant hazard is that of the propelling charge. CARTRIDGES FOR WEAPONS with bursting charge: UN Nos. 0006, 0321, 0412 Ammunition consisting of a projectile with a bursting charge without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features; and a propelling charge with or without a primer. The term includes fixed (assembled) ammunition, semi fixed (partially assembled) ammunition and separate loading ammunition when the components are packed together. CARTRIDGES FOR WEAPONS with bursting charge: UN Nos. 0005, 0007, 0348 Ammunition consisting of a projectile with a bursting charge with means of initiation not containing two or more effective protective features; and a propelling charge with or without a primer. The term includes fixed (assembled) ammunition, semi fixed (partially assembled) ammunition and separate loading ammunition when the components are packed together. CARTRIDGES, OIL WELL : UN Nos. 0277, 0278 Articles consisting of a thin casing of fibreboard, metal or other material containing only propellant powder which projects a hardened projectile to perforate an oil well casing. NOTE: CHARGES, SHAPED are not included in this definition. They are listed separately. CARTRIDGES, POWER DEVICE : UN Nos. 0275, 0276, 0323, 0381 Articles designed to accomplish mechanical actions. They consist of a casing with a charge of deflagrating explosive and a means of ignition. The gaseous products of the deflagration produce inflation, linear or rotary motion or activate diaphragms, valves or switches or project fastening devices or extinguishing agents. CARTRIDGES, SIGNAL : UN Nos. 0054, 0312, 0405 Articles designed to fire coloured flares or other signals from signal pistols, etc. CARTRIDGES, SMALL ARMS : UN Nos. 0417, 0339, 0012 Ammunition consisting of a cartridge case fitted with a centre or rim fire primer and containing both a propelling charge and solid projectile. They are designed to be fired in weapons of calibre not larger than 19.1 mm. Shot gun cartridges of any calibre are included in this description. NOTE: CARTRIDGES, SMALL ARMS, BLANK, are not included in this definition. They are listed separately. Some military small arms cartridges are not included in this definition. They are listed under CARTRIDGES FOR WEAPONS, INERT PROJECTILE. CARTRIDGES, SMALL ARMS, BLANK : UN Nos. 0014, 0327, 0338 Ammunition consisting of a closed cartridge case with a centre or rim fire primer and a charge of smokeless or black powder. The cartridge cases contain no projectiles. The cartridges are designed to be fired from weapons with a calibre of at most 19.1 mm and serve to produce a loud noise and are used for training, saluting, propelling charge, starter pistols, etc. CASES, CARTRIDGE, EMPTY, WITH PRIMER : UN Nos. 0379; 0055 Articles consisting of a cartridge case made from metal, plastics or other non inflammable material, in which the only explosive component is the primer. CASES, COMBUSTIBLE, EMPTY, WITHOUT PRIMER : UN Nos. 0447, 0446 Articles consisting of a cartridge case made partly or entirely from nitrocellulose. CHARGES, BURSTING, PLASTICS BONDED : UN Nos. 0457, 0458, 0459, 0460 Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive, plastics bonded, manufactured in a specific form without a casing and without means of initiation. They are designed as components of ammunition such as warheads. CHARGES, DEMOLITION : UN No. 0048 Articles containing a charge of a detonating explosive in a casing of fibreboard, plastics, metal or other material. The articles are without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features. NOTE: The following articles: BOMBS; MINES; PROJECTILES are not included in this definition. They are listed separately. CHARGES, DEPTH : UN No. 0056 Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive contained in a drum or projectile without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features. They are designed to detonate under water. CHARGES, EXPLOSIVE, COMMERCIAL without detonator: UN Nos. 0442, 0443, 0444, 0445 Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive without means of initiation, used for explosive welding, jointing, forming and other metallurgical processes. CHARGES, PROPELLING, FOR CANNON : UN Nos. 0242, 0279, 0414 Charges of propellant in any physical form for separate loading ammunition for cannon. CHARGES, PROPELLING : UN Nos. 0271, 0272, 0415, 0491 Articles consisting of a charge of a propellant charge in any physical form, with or without a casing, as a component of rocket motors or for reducing the drag of projectiles. CHARGES, SHAPED , without detonator: UN Nos. 0059, 0439, 0440, 0441 Articles consisting of a casing containing a charge of detonating explosive with a cavity lined with rigid material, without means of initiation. They are designed to produce a powerful, penetrating jet effect. CHARGES, SHAPED, FLEXIBLE, LINEAR : UN Nos. 0237, 0288 Articles consisting of a V shaped core of a detonating explosive clad by a flexible sheath. CHARGES, SUPPLEMENTARY, EXPLOSIVE : UN No. 0060 Articles consisting of a small removable booster placed in the cavity of a projectile between the fuze and the bursting charge. COMPONENTS, EXPLOSIVE TRAIN, N.O.S. : UN Nos. 0382, 0383, 0384, 0461 Articles containing an explosive designed to transmit detonation or deflagration within an explosive train. CONTRIVANCES, WATER ACTIVATED with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge: UN Nos. 0248, 0249 Articles whose functioning depends upon physico chemical reaction of their contents with water. CORD, DETONATING , flexible: UN Nos. 0065, 0289 Article consisting of a core of detonating explosive enclosed in spun fabric and a plastics or other covering. The covering is not necessary if the spun fabric is sift-proof. CORD (FUSE) DETONATING , metal clad: UN Nos. 0102, 0290 Article consisting of a core of detonating explosive clad by a soft metal tube with or without protective covering. CORD (FUSE) DETONATING, MILD EFFECT , metal clad: UN No. 0104 Article consisting of a core of detonating explosive clad by a soft metal tube with or without a protective covering. The quantity of explosive substance is so small that only a mild effect is manifested outside the cord. CORD, IGNITER : UN No. 0066 Article consisting of textile yarns covered with black powder or another fast burning pyrotechnic composition and of a flexible protective covering; or it consists of a core of black powder surrounded by a flexible woven fabric. It burns progressively along its length with an external flame and is used to transmit ignition from a device to a charge or primer. CUTTERS, CABLE, EXPLOSIVE : UN No. 0070 Articles consisting of a knife edged device which is driven by a small charge of deflagrating explosive into an anvil. DETONATOR ASSEMBLIES, NON ELECTRIC for blasting: UN Nos. 0360, 0361, 0500 Non electric detonators assembled with and activated by such means as safety fuse, shock tube, flash tube or detonating cord. They may be of instantaneous design or incorporate delay elements. Detonating relays incorporating detonating cord are included. DETONATORS, ELECTRIC for blasting: UN Nos. 0030, 0255, 0456 Articles specially designed for the initiation of blasting explosives. These detonators may be constructed to detonate instantaneously or may contain a delay element. Electric detonators are activated by an electric current. DETONATORS, ELECTRONIC programmable for blasting: UN Nos. 0511, 0512, 0513 Detonators with enhanced safety and security features, utilizing electronic components to transmit a firing signal with validated commands and secure communications. Detonators of this type cannot be initiated by other means. DETONATORS FOR AMMUNITION : UN Nos. 0073, 0364, 0365, 0366 Articles consisting of a small metal or plastics tube containing explosives such as lead azide, PETN or combinations of explosives. They are designed to start a detonation train. DETONATORS, NON ELECTRIC for blasting: UN Nos. 0029, 0267, 0455 Articles specially designed for the initiation of blasting explosives. These detonators may be constructed to detonate instantaneously or may contain a delay element. Non electric detonators are activated by such means as shock tube, flash tube, safety fuse, other igniferous device or flexible detonating cord. Detonating relays without detonating cord are included. EXPLOSIVE, BLASTING, TYPE A : UN No. 0081 Substances consisting of liquid organic nitrates such as nitroglycerine or a mixture of such ingredients with one or more of the following: nitrocellulose; ammonium nitrate or other inorganic nitrates; aromatic nitro derivatives, or combustible materials, such as wood meal and aluminium powder. They may contain inert components such as kieselguhr, and additives such as colouring agents and stabilizers. Such explosives shall be in powdery, gelatinous or elastic form. The term includes dynamite; gelatine, blasting and gelatine dynamites. EXPLOSIVE, BLASTING, TYPE B : UN Nos. 0082, 0331 Substances consisting of (a) a mixture of ammonium nitrate or other inorganic nitrates with an explosive such as trinitrotoluene, with or without other substances such as wood meal and aluminium powder; or (b) a mixture of ammonium nitrate or other inorganic nitrates with other combustible substances which are not explosive ingredients. In both cases they may contain inert components such as kieselguhr, and additives such as colouring agents and stabilizers. Such explosives must not contain nitroglycerine, similar liquid organic nitrates or chlorates. EXPLOSIVE, BLASTING, TYPE C : UN No. 0083 Substances consisting of a mixture of either potassium or sodium chlorate or potassium, sodium or ammonium perchlorate with organic nitro derivatives or combustible materials such as wood meal or aluminium powder or a hydrocarbon. They may contain inert components such as kieselguhr and additives such as colouring agents and stabilizers. Such explosives must not contain nitroglycerine or similar liquid organic nitrates. EXPLOSIVE, BLASTING, TYPE D : UN No. 0084 Substances consisting of a mixture of organic nitrated compounds and combustible materials such as hydrocarbons and aluminium powder. They may contain inert components such as kieselguhr and additives such as colouring agents and stabilizers. Such explosives must not contain nitroglycerine, similar liquid organic nitrates, chlorates and ammonium nitrate. The term generally includes plastic explosives. EXPLOSIVES, BLASTING, TYPE E : UN Nos. 0241, 0332 Substances consisting of water as an essential ingredient and high proportions of ammonium nitrate or other oxidizers, some or all of which are in solution. The other constituents may include nitro derivatives such as trinitrotoluene, hydrocarbons or aluminium powder. They may contain inert components such as kieselguhr and additives such as colouring agents and stabilizers. The term includes explosives, emulsion, explosives, slurry and explosives, watergel. FIREWORKS : UN Nos. 0333, 0334, 0335, 0336, 0337 Pyrotechnic articles designed for entertainment. FLARES, AERIAL : UN Nos. 0093, 0403, 0404, 0420, 0421; Articles containing pyrotechnic substances which are designed to be dropped from an aircraft to illuminate, identify, signal or warn. FLARES, SURFACE : UN Nos. 0092, 0418, 0419 Articles containing pyrotechnic substances which are designed for use on the surface to illuminate, identify, signal or warn. FLASH POWDER : UN Nos. 0094, 0305 Pyrotechnic substance which, when ignited, produces an intense light. FRACTURING DEVICES, EXPLOSIVE without detonator, for oil wells: UN No. 0099 Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive contained in a casing without means of initiation. They are used to fracture the rock around a drill shaft to assist the flow of crude oil from the rock. FUSE, IGNITER , tubular, metal clad: UN No. 0103 Article consisting of a metal tube with a core of deflagrating explosive. FUSE, NON DETONATING : UN No. 0101 Article consisting of cotton yarns impregnated with fine black powder (quickmatch). It burns with an external flame and is used in ignition trains for fireworks, etc. FUSE, SAFETY : UN No. 0105 Article consisting of a core of fine grained black powder surrounded by a flexible woven fabric with one or more protective outer coverings. When ignited, it burns at a predetermined rate without any external explosive effect. FUZES, DETONATING : UN Nos. 0106, 0107, 0257, 0367 Articles with explosive components designed to produce a detonation in ammunition. They incorporate mechanical, electrical, chemical or hydrostatic components to initiate the detonation. They generally incorporate protective features. FUZES, DETONATING with protective features: UN Nos. 0408, 0409, 0410 Articles with explosive components designed to produce a detonation in ammunition. They incorporate mechanical, electrical, chemical or hydrostatic components to initiate the detonation. The detonating fuze must incorporate two or more effective protective features. FUZES, IGNITING : UN Nos. 0316, 0317, 0368 Articles with primary explosive components designed to produce a deflagration in ammunition. They incorporate mechanical, electrical, chemical or hydrostatic components to start the deflagration. They generally incorporate protective features. GRENADES , hand or rifle, with bursting charge: UN Nos. 0284, 0285 Articles which are designed to be thrown by hand or to be projected by a rifle. They are without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features. GRENADES , hand or rifle, with bursting charge: UN Nos. 0292, 0293 Articles which are designed to be thrown by hand or to be projected by a rifle. They are with means of initiation not containing two or more effective protective features. GRENADES, PRACTICE , hand or rifle: UN Nos. 0110, 0372, 0318, 0452 Articles without a main bursting charge which are designed to be thrown by hand or to be projected by a rifle. They contain the priming device and may contain a spotting charge. HEXOTONAL : UN No. 0393 Substance consisting of an intimate mixture of cyclotrimethylene trinitramine (RDX), trinitrotoluene (TNT) and aluminium. HEXOLITE (HEXOTOL) , dry or wetted with less than 15% water, by mass: UN No. 0118 Substance consisting of an intimate mixture of cyclotrimethylene trinitramine (RDX) and trinitrotoluene (TNT). The term includes "Composition B". IGNITERS : UN Nos. 0121, 0314, 0315, 0325, 0454 Articles containing one or more explosive substances designed to produce a deflagration in an explosive train. They may be actuated chemically, electrically or mechanically. NOTE: The following articles: CORD, IGNITER; FUSE, IGNITER; FUSE, NON DETONATING; FUZES, IGNITING; LIGHTERS, FUSE; PRIMERS, CAP TYPE; PRIMERS, TUBULAR are not included in this definition. They are listed separately. JET PERFORATING GUNS, CHARGED , oil well, without detonator: UN Nos. 0124, 0494 Articles consisting of a steel tube or metallic strip, into which are inserted shaped charges connected by detonating cord, without means of initiation. LIGHTERS, FUSE : UN No. 0131 Articles of various design actuated by friction, percussion or electricity and used to ignite safety fuse. MINES with bursting charge: UN Nos. 0137, 0138 Articles consisting normally of metal or composition receptacles filled with a detonating explosive, without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features. They are designed to be operated by the passage of ships, vehicles or personnel. The term includes "Bangalore torpedoes". MINES with bursting charge: UN Nos. 0136, 0294 Articles consisting normally of metal or composition receptacles filled with a detonating explosive, with means of initiation not containing two or more effective protective features. They are designed to be operated by the passage of ships, vehicles or personnel. The term includes "Bangalore torpedoes". OCTOLITE (OCTOL) , dry or wetted with less than 15% water, by mass: UN No. 0266 Substance consisting of an intimate mixture of cyclotetramethylene tetranitramine (HMX) and trinitrotoluene (TNT). OCTONAL : UN No. 0496 Substance consisting of an intimate mixture of cyclotetramethylenetetranitramine (HMX), trinitrotoluene (TNT) and aluminium. PENTOLITE , dry or wetted with less than 15% water, by mass: UN No. 0151 Substance consisting of an intimate mixture of pentaerythrite tetranitrate (PETN) and trinitrotoluene (TNT). POWDER CAKE (POWDER PASTE), WETTED with not less than 17% alcohol, by mass; POWDER CAKE (POWDER PASTE), WETTED with not less than 25% water, by mass: UN Nos. 0433, 0159 Substance consisting of nitrocellulose impregnated with not more than 60% of nitroglycerine or other liquid organic nitrates or a mixture of these. POWDER, SMOKELESS : UN Nos. 0160, 0161, 0509 Substance based on nitrocellulose used as propellant. The term includes propellants with a single base (nitrocellulose (NC) alone), those with a double base (such as NC and nitroglycerine/(NG)) and those with a triple base (such as NC/NG/nitroguanidine). NOTE: Cast, pressed or bag charges of smokeless powder are listed under CHARGES, PROPELLING or CHARGES, PROPELLING, FOR CANON. PRIMERS, CAP TYPE : UN Nos. 0044, 0377, 0378 Articles consisting of a metal or plastics cap containing a small amount of primary explosive mixture that is readily ignited by impact. They serve as igniting elements in small arms cartridges and in percussion primers for propelling charges. PRIMERS, TUBULAR : UN Nos. 0319, 0320, 0376 Articles consisting of a primer for ignition and an auxiliary charge of deflagrating explosive such as black powder used to ignite the propelling charge in a cartridge case for cannon, etc. PROJECTILES , inert with tracer: UN Nos. 0345, 0424, 0425 Articles such as a shell or bullet, which are projected from a cannon or other gun, rifle or other small arm. PROJECTILES with burster or expelling charge: UN Nos. 0346, 0347 Articles such as a shell or bullet, which are projected from a cannon or other gun. They are without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features. They are used to scatter dyes for spotting or other inert materials. PROJECTILES with burster or expelling charge: UN Nos. 0426, 0427 Articles such as a shell or bullet, which are projected from a cannon or other gun. They are with means of initiation not containing two or more effective protective features. They are used to scatter dyes for spotting or other inert materials. PROJECTILES with burster or expelling charge: UN Nos. 0434, 0435 Articles such as a shell or bullet, which are projected from a cannon or other gun, rifle or other small arm. They are used to scatter dyes for spotting or other inert materials. PROJECTILES with bursting charge: UN Nos. 0168, 0169, 0344 Articles such as a shell or bullet, which are projected from a cannon or other gun. They are without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features. PROJECTILES with bursting charge: UN Nos. 0167, 0324 Articles such as a shell or bullet, which are projected from a cannon or other gun. They are with means of initiation not containing two or more effective protective features. PROPELLANT, LIQUID : UN Nos. 0495, 0497 Substance consisting of a deflagrating liquid explosive, used for propulsion. PROPELLANT, SOLID : UN Nos. 0498, 0499, 0501 Substance consisting of a deflagrating solid explosive, used for propulsion. RELEASE DEVICES, EXPLOSIVE : UN No. 0173 Articles consisting of a small charge of explosive with means of initiation and rods or links. They sever the rods or links to release equipment quickly. RIVETS, EXPLOSIVE : UN No. 0174 Articles consisting of a small charge of explosive inside a metallic rivet. ROCKET MOTORS : UN Nos. 0186, 0280, 0281 , 0510 Articles consisting of a charge of explosive, generally a solid propellant, contained in a cylinder fitted with one or more nozzles. They are designed to propel a rocket or a guided missile. ROCKET MOTORS, LIQUID FUELLED : UN Nos. 0395, 0396 Articles consisting of a liquid fuel within a cylinder fitted with one or more nozzles. They are designed to propel a rocket or a guided missile. ROCKET MOTORS WITH HYPERGOLIC LIQUIDS with or without expelling charge: UN Nos. 0322, 0250 Articles consisting of a hypergolic fuel contained in a cylinder fitted with one or more nozzles. They are designed to propel a rocket or a guided missile. ROCKETS, LINE THROWING : UN Nos. 0238, 0240, 0453 Articles consisting of a rocket motor which is designed to extend a line. ROCKETS, LIQUID FUELLED with bursting charge: UN Nos. 0397, 0398 Articles consisting of a liquid fuel within a cylinder fitted with one or more nozzles and fitted with a warhead. The term includes guided missiles. ROCKETS with bursting charge: UN Nos. 0181, 0182 Articles consisting of a rocket motor and a warhead without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features. The term includes guided missiles. ROCKETS with bursting charge: UN Nos. 0180, 0295 Articles consisting of a rocket motor and a warhead with means of initiation not containing two or more effective protective features. The term includes guided missiles. ROCKETS with expelling charge: UN Nos. 0436, 0437, 0438 Articles consisting of a rocket motor and a charge to expel the payload from a rocket head. The term includes guided missiles. ROCKETS with inert head: UN Nos. 0183, 0502 Articles consisting of a rocket motor and an inert head. The term includes guided missiles. SAFETY DEVICES, PYROTECHNIC : UN No. 0503 Articles which contain pyrotechnic substances or dangerous goods of other classes and are used in vehicles, vessels or aircraft to enhance safety to persons. Examples are: air bag inflators, air bag modules, seat-belt pretensioners and pyromechanical devices. These pyromechanical devices are assembled components for tasks such as but not limited to separation, locking, or occupant restraint. SAMPLES, EXPLOSIVE , other than initiating explosive UN No. 0190 New or existing explosive substances or articles, not yet assigned to a name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 and carried in conformity with the instructions of the competent authority and generally in small quantities, inter alia, for the purposes of testing, classification, research and development, or quality control, or as commercial samples. NOTE: Explosive substances or articles already assigned to another name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 are not included in this definition. SIGNAL DEVICES, HAND : UN Nos. 0191, 0373 Portable articles containing pyrotechnic substances which produce visual signals or warnings. The term includes small surface flares such as highway or railway flares and small distress flares. SIGNALS, DISTRESS , ship: UN Nos. 0194, 0195 , 0505, 0506 Articles containing pyrotechnic substances designed to produce signals by means of sound, flame or smoke or any combination thereof. SIGNALS, RAILWAY TRACK, EXPLOSIVE : UN Nos. 0192, 0193, 0492, 0493 Articles containing a pyrotechnic substance which explodes with a loud report when the article is crushed. They are designed to be placed on a rail. SIGNALS, SMOKE : UN Nos. 0196, 0197, 0313, 0487, 0507 Articles containing pyrotechnic substances which emit smoke. In addition they may contain devices for emitting audible signals. SOUNDING DEVICES, EXPLOSIVE : UN Nos. 0374, 0375 Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive, without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features. They are dropped from ships and function when they reach a predetermined depth or the sea bed. SOUNDING DEVICES, EXPLOSIVE : UN Nos. 0204, 0296 Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive with means of initiation not containing two or more effective protective features. They are dropped from ships and function when they reach a predetermined depth or the sea bed. SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, VERY INSENSITIVE (SUBSTANCES, EVI), N.O.S. : UN No. 0482 Substances presenting a mass explosion hazard but which are so insensitive that there is very little probability of initiation or of transition from burning to detonation under normal conditions of transport, and which have passed Test Series 5. TORPEDOES, LIQUID FUELLED with inert head: UN No. 0450 Articles consisting of a liquid explosive system to propel the torpedo through the water, with an inert head. TORPEDOES, LIQUID FUELLED with or without bursting charge: UN No. 0449 Articles consisting of either a liquid explosive system to propel the torpedo through the water, with or without a warhead; or a liquid non explosive system to propel the torpedo through the water, with a warhead. TORPEDOES with bursting charge: UN No. 0451 Articles consisting of a non explosive system to propel the torpedo through the water, and a warhead without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features. TORPEDOES with bursting charge: UN No. 0329 Articles consisting of an explosive system to propel the torpedo through the water, and a warhead without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features. TORPEDOES with bursting charge: UN No. 0330 Articles consisting of an explosive or non explosive system to propel the torpedo through the water, and a warhead with means of initiation not containing two or more effective protective features. TRACERS FOR AMMUNITION : UN Nos. 0212, 0306 Sealed articles containing pyrotechnic substances, designed to reveal the trajectory of a projectile. TRITONAL : UN No. 0390 Substance consisting of trinitrotoluene (TNT) mixed with aluminium. WARHEADS, ROCKET with burster or expelling charge: UN No. 0370 Articles consisting of an inert payload and a small charge of detonating or deflagrating explosive, without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features. They are designed to be fitted to a rocket motor to scatter inert material. The term includes warheads for guided missiles. WARHEADS, ROCKET with burster or expelling charge: UN No. 0371 Articles consisting of an inert payload and a small charge of detonating or deflagrating explosive, with means of initiation not containing two or more effective protective features. They are designed to be fitted to a rocket motor to scatter inert material. The term includes warheads for guided missiles. WARHEADS, ROCKET with bursting charge: UN Nos. 0286, 0287 Articles consisting of a detonating explosive, without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features. They are designed to be fitted to a rocket. The term includes warheads for guided missiles. WARHEADS, ROCKET with bursting charge: UN No. 0369 Articles consisting of a detonating explosive, with means of initiation not containing two or more effective protective features. They are designed to be fitted to a rocket. The term includes warheads for guided missiles. WARHEADS, TORPEDO with bursting charge: UN No. 0221 Articles consisting of a detonating explosive, without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features. They are designed to be fitted to a torpedo. 2.2.2 Class 2: Gases 2.2.2.1 Criteria 2.2.2.1.1 The heading of Class 2 covers pure gases, mixtures of gases, mixtures of one or more gases with one or more other substances and articles containing such substances. A gas is a substance which: (a) at 50 °C has a vapour pressure greater than 300 kPa (3 bar); or (b) is completely gaseous at 20 °C at the standard pressure of 101.3 kPa. NOTE 1: UN No. 1052 HYDROGEN FLUORIDE is nevertheless classified in Class 8. 2: A pure gas may contain other components deriving from its production process or added to preserve the stability of the product, provided that the level of these components does not change its classification or its conditions of carriage, such as filling ratio, filling pressure, test pressure. 3: N.O.S. entries in 2.2.2.3 may cover pure gases as well as mixtures. 2.2.2.1.2 The substances and articles of Class 2 are subdivided as follows: 1. Compressed gas: a gas which when packaged under pressure for carriage is entirely gaseous at -50 °C; this category includes all gases with a critical temperature less than or equal to -50 °C; 2. Liquefied gas: a gas which when packaged under pressure for carriage is partially liquid at temperatures above -50 °C. A distinction is made between: High pressure liquefied gas : a gas with a critical temperature above -50 °C and equal to or below +65 °C; and Low pressure liquefied gas: a gas with a critical temperature above +65 °C; 3. Refrigerated liquefied gas : a gas which when packaged for carriage is made partially liquid because of its low temperature; 4. Dissolved gas : a gas which when packaged under pressure for carriage is dissolved in a liquid phase solvent; 5. Aerosol dispensers and receptacles, small, containing gas (gas cartridges); 6. Other articles containing gas under pressure; 7. Non-pressurized gases subject to special requirements (gas samples); 8. Chemicals under pressure: liquids, pastes or powders, pressurized with a propellant that meets the definition of a compressed or liquefied gas and mixtures thereof ; 9. Adsorbed gas: a gas which when packaged for carriage is adsorbed onto a solid porous material resulting in an internal receptacle pressure of less than 101.3 kPa at 20 °C and less than 300 kPa at 50 °C. 2.2.2.1.3 Substances and articles (except aerosols and chemicals under pressure) of Class 2 are assigned to one of the following groups according to their hazardous properties, as follows: A asphyxiant; O oxidizing; F flammable; T toxic; TF toxic, flammable; TC toxic, corrosive; TO toxic, oxidizing; TFC toxic, flammable, corrosive; TOC toxic, oxidizing, corrosive. For gases and gas mixtures presenting hazardous properties associated with more than one group according to the criteria, the groups designated by letter T take precedence over all other groups. The groups designated by letter F take precedence over the groups designated by letters A or O. NOTE 1: In the UN Model Regulations, the IMDG Code and the ICAO Technical Instructions, gases are assigned to one of the following three divisions, based on the primary hazard: Division 2.1: flammable gases (corresponding to the groups designated by the capital letter F); Division 2.2: non-flammable, non-toxic gases (corresponding to the groups designated by the capital letters A or O); Division 2.3: toxic gases (corresponding to the groups designated by the capital letter T (i.e. T, TF, TC, TO, TFC and TOC). 2: Receptacles, small containing gas (UN No. 2037) shall be assigned to the groups A to TOC according to the hazard of the contents. For aerosols (UN No. 1950), see 2.2.2.1.6. For chemicals under pressure (UN Nos. 3500 to 3505), see 2.2.2.1.7. 3: Corrosive gases are considered to be toxic, and are therefore assigned to the group TC, TFC or TOC. 2.2.2.1.4 If a mixture of Class 2 mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 meets different criteria as mentioned in 2.2.2.1.2 and 2.2.2.1.5, this mixture shall be classified according to the criteria and assigned to an appropriate N.O.S. entry. 2.2.2.1.5 Substances and articles (except aerosols and chemicals under pressure) of Class 2 which are not mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 shall be classified under a collective entry listed in 2.2.2.3 in accordance with 2.2.2.1.2 and 2.2.2.1.3. The following criteria shall apply: Asphyxiant gases Gases which are non oxidizing, non flammable and non toxic and which dilute or replace oxygen normally in the atmosphere. Flammable gases Gases which at 20 °C and a standard pressure of 101.3 kPa: (a) are ignitable when in a mixture of 13% or less by volume with air; or (b) have a flammable range with air of at least 12 percentage points regardless of the lower flammable limit. Flammability shall be determined by tests or by calculation, in accordance with methods adopted by ISO (see ISO 10156:2017). Where insufficient data are available to use these methods, tests by a comparable method recognized by the competent authority of the country of origin may be used. If the country of origin is not an RID Contracting State these methods shall be recognized by the competent authority of the first RID Contracting State reached by the consignment. Oxidizing gases Gases, which may, generally by providing oxygen, cause or contribute to the combustion of other material more than air does. These are pure gases or gas mixtures with an oxidizing power greater than 23.5% as determined by a method specified in ISO 10156:2017 . Toxic gases NOTE: Gases meeting the criteria for toxicity in part or completely owing to their corrosivity are to be classified as toxic. See also the criteria under the heading "Corrosive gases" for a possible subsidiary corrosivity hazard. Gases which: (a) are known to be so toxic or corrosive to humans as to pose a hazard to health; or (b) are presumed to be toxic or corrosive to humans because they have a LC 50 value for acute toxicity equal to or less than 5 000 ml/m³ (ppm) when tested in accordance with 2.2.61.1. In the case of gas mixtures (including vapours of substances from other classes) the following formula may be used: where f i = mole fraction of the i th component substance of the mixture; T i = toxicity index of the i th component substance of the mixture. The T i equals the LC 50 value as found in packing instruction P200 of 4.1.4.1. When no LC 50 value is listed in packing instruction P200 of 4.1.4.1, a LC 50 value available in scientific literature shall be used. When the LC 50 value is unknown, the toxicity index is determined by using the lowest LC 50 value of substances of similar physiological and chemical effects, or through testing if this is the only practical possibility. Corrosive gases Gases or gas mixtures meeting the criteria for toxicity completely owing to their corrosivity are to be classified as toxic with a subsidiary corrosivity hazard. A gas mixture that is considered to be toxic due to the combined effects of corrosivity and toxicity has a subsidiary hazard of corrosivity when the mixture is known by human experience to be destructive to the skin, eyes or mucous membranes or when the LC 50 value of the corrosive components of the mixture is equal to or less than 5 000 ml/m 3 (ppm) when the LC 50 is calculated by the formula: where fc i = mole fraction of the i th corrosive component substance of the mixture; Tc i = toxicity index of the i th corrosive component substance of the mixture. The T ci equals the LC 50 value as found in packing instruction P200 of 4.1.4.1. When no LC 50 value is listed in packing instruction P200 of 4.1.4.1, a LC 50 value available in scientific literature shall be used. When the LC 50 value is unknown the toxicity index is determined by using the lowest LC 50 value of substances of similar physiological and chemical effects, or through testing if this is the only practical possibility. 2.2.2.1.6 Aerosols Aerosols (UN No. 1950) are assigned to one of the following groups according to their hazardous properties, as follows: A asphyxiant; O oxidizing; F flammable; T toxic; C corrosive; CO corrosive, oxidizing; FC flammable, corrosive; TF toxic, flammable; TC toxic, corrosive; TO toxic, oxidizing; TFC toxic, flammable, corrosive TOC toxic, oxidizing, corrosive. The classification depends on the nature of the contents of the aerosol dispenser. NOTE: Gases, which meet the definition of toxic gases according to 2.2.2.1.5 and gases identified as "Considered as pyrophoric" by table note c of Table 2 of packing instruction P 200 in 4.1.4.1, shall not be used as a propellant in an aerosol dispenser. Aerosols with contents meeting the criteria for packing group I for toxicity or corrosivity shall not be accepted for carriage (see also 2.2.2.2.2). The following criteria shall apply: (a) Assignment to group A shall apply when the contents do not meet the criteria for any other group according to sub-paragraphs (b) to (f) below; (b) Assignment to group O shall apply when the aerosol contains an oxidizing gas according to 2.2.2.1.5; (c) Assignment to group F shall apply if the contents include 85% by mass or more flammable components and the chemical heat of combustion is 30 kJ/g or more . It shall not apply if the contents contain 1% by mass or less flammable components and the heat of combustion is less than 20 kJ/g. Otherwise the aerosol shall be tested for flammability in accordance with the tests described in the Manual of Tests and Criteria , Part III, section 31. Extremely flammable and flammable aerosols shall be assigned to group F. NOTE: Flammable components are flammable liquids, flammable solids or flammable gases and gas mixtures as defined in Notes 1 to 3 of sub-section 31.1.3 of Part III of the Manual of Tests and Criteria. This designation does not cover pyrophoric, self-heating or water-reactive substances. The chemical heat of combustion shall be determined by one of the following methods: ASTM D 240, ISO/FDIS 13943:1999 (E/F) 86.1 to 86.3 or NFPA 30B; (d) Assignment to group T shall apply when the contents, other than the propellant of aerosol dispensers to be ejected, are classified as Class 6.1, packing groups II or III; (e) Assignment to group C shall apply when the contents, other than the propellant of aerosol dispensers to be ejected, meet the criteria for Class 8, packing groups II or III; (f) When the criteria for more than one group amongst groups O, F, T, and C are met, assignment to groups CO, FC, TF, TC TO, TFC or TOC shall apply, as relevant. 2.2.2.1.7 Chemicals under pressure Chemicals under pressure (UN Nos. 3500 to 3505) are assigned to one of the following groups according to their hazardous properties, as follows: A asphyxiant; F flammable; T toxic; C corrosive; FC flammable, corrosive; TF toxic, flammable. The classification depends on the hazard characteristics of the components in the different states: The propellant; The liquid; or The solid. NOTE 1: Gases, which meet the definition of toxic gases or of oxidizing gases according to 2.2.2.1.5 or gases identified as "Considered as pyrophoric" by table note c of Table 2 of packing instruction P 200 in 4.1.4.1, shall not be used as a propellant in chemicals under pressure. 2: Chemicals under pressure with contents meeting the criteria for packing group I for toxicity or corrosivity or with contents meeting both the criteria for packing group II or III for toxicity and for packing group II or III for corrosivity shall not be accepted for carriage under these UN numbers. 3: Chemicals under pressure with components meeting the properties of Class 1; liquid desensitized explosives of Class 3; self-reactive substances and solid desensitized explosives of Class 4.1; Class 4.2; Class 4.3; Class 5.1; Class 5.2; Class 6.2; or Class 7, shall not be used for carriage under these UN numbers. 4: A chemical under pressure in an aerosol dispenser shall be carried under UN No. 1950. The following criteria shall apply: (a) Assignment to group A shall apply when the contents do not meet the criteria for any other group according to sub-paragraphs (b) to (e) below; (b) Assignment to group F shall apply if one of the components, which can be a pure substance or a mixture, needs to be classified as flammable. Flammable components are flammable liquids and liquid mixtures, flammable solids and solid mixtures or flammable gases and gas mixtures meeting the following criteria: (i) A flammable liquid is a liquid having a flashpoint of not more than 93 °C; (ii) A flammable solid is a solid which meets the criteria in 2.2.41.1; (iii) A flammable gas is a gas which meets the criteria in 2.2.2.1.5; (c) Assignment to group T shall apply when the contents, other than the propellant, are classified as dangerous goods of Class 6.1, packing groups II or III; (d) Assignment to group C shall apply when the contents, other than the propellant, are classified as dangerous goods of Class 8, packing groups II or III; (e) When the criteria for two groups amongst groups F, T, and C are met, assignment to groups FC or TF shall apply, as relevant. 2.2.2.2 Gases not accepted for carriage 2.2.2.2.1 Chemically unstable gases of Class 2 shall not be accepted for carriage unless the necessary precautions have been taken to prevent the possibility of a dangerous decomposition or polymerization under normal conditions of carriage or unless carried in accordance with special packing provision (r) of packing instruction P 200 (10) of 4.1.4.1, as applicable. For the precautions necessary to prevent polymerization, see special provision 386 of Chapter 3.3. To this end particular care shall be taken to ensure that receptacles and tanks do not contain any substances liable to promote these reactions. If temperature control is required to prevent polymerization of a substance (i.e. for a substance in a packaging or IBC with an SAPT of 50 °C or less, or in a tank with an SAPT of 45 °C or less), the substance shall not be accepted for carriage. 2.2.2.2.2 The following substances and mixtures shall not be accepted for carriage: – UN No. 2186 HYDROGEN CHLORIDE, REFRIGERATED LIQUID; – UN No. 2421 NITROGEN TRIOXIDE; – UN No. 2455 METHYL NITRITE; – Refrigerated liquefied gases which cannot be assigned to classification codes 3A, 3O or 3F; – Dissolved gases which cannot be classified under UN Nos. 1001, 1043, 2073 or 3318. For UN No. 1043, see special provision 642; – Aerosols where gases which are toxic according to 2.2.2.1.5 or pyrophoric according to packing instruction P200 in 4.1.4.1 are used as propellants; – Aerosols with contents meeting the criteria for packing group I for toxicity or corrosivity (see 2.2.61 and 2.2.8); – Receptacles, small, containing gases which are very toxic (LC 50 lower than 200 ppm) or pyrophoric according to packing instruction P200 in 4.1.4.1. 2.2.2.3 List of collective entries Compressed gases C lassificationcode UN No. Name of the substance or article 1 A 1956 COMPRESSED GAS, N.O.S. 1 O 3156 COMPRESSED GAS, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 1 F 1964 HYDROCARBON GAS MIXTURE, COMPRESSED, N.O.S. 1954 COMPRESSED GAS, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 1T 1955 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, N.O.S. 1 TF 1953 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 1 TC 3304 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 1 TO 3303 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 1 TFC 3305 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 1 TOC 3306 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. Liquefied gases Classification code UN No. Name of the substance or article 2 A 1058 LIQUEFIED GASES, non flammable, charged with nitrogen, carbon dioxide or air 1078 REFRIGERANT GAS, N.O.S. such as mixtures of gases, Indicated by the letter R..., which as: Mixture F1, have a vapour pressure at 70 °C not exceeding 1.3 MPa (13 bar) and a density at 50 °C not lower than that of dichlorofluoromethane (1.30 kg/l); Mixture F2, have a vapour pressure at 70 °C not exceeding 1.9 MPa (19 bar) and a density at 50 °C not lower than that of dichlorodifluoromethane (1.21 kg/l); Mixture F3, have a vapour pressure at 70 °C not exceeding 3 MPa (30 bar) and a density at 50 °C not lower than that of chlorodifluoromethane (1.09 kg/l). NOTE: Trichlorofluoromethane (Refrigerant R 11), 1,1,2-trichloro-1,2,2-trifluoroethane (Refrigerant R 113), 1,1,1-trichloro-2,2,2-trifluoroethane (Refrigerant R 113a), 1-chloro-1,2,2-trifluoroethane (Refrigerant R 133) and 1-chloro-1,1,2-trifluoroethane (Refrigerant R 133b) are not substances of Class 2. They may, however, enter into the composition of mixtures F1 to F3. 1968 INSECTICIDE GAS, N.O.S. 3163 LIQUEFIED GAS, N.O.S. 2 O 3157 LIQUEFIED GAS, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 2 F 1010 BUTADIENES, STABILIZED or BUTADIENES AND HYDROCARBON MIXTURE, STABILIZED, containing more than 40% butadienes 1060 METHYLACETYLENE AND PROPADIENE MIXTURE, STABILIZED such as mixtures of methylacetylene and propadiene with hydrocarbons, which as: Mixture P1, contain not more than 63% methylacetylene and propadiene by volume and not more than 24% propane and propylene by volume, the percentage of C 4 saturated hydrocarbons being not less than 14% by volume; and as Mixture P2, contain not more than 48% methylacetylene and propadiene by volume and not more than 50% propane and propylene by volume, the percentage of C 4 saturated hydrocarbons being not less than 5% by volume, as well as mixtures of propadiene with 1 to 4% methylacetylene. Liquefied gases (cont'd) Classification code UN No. Name of the substance or article 2F (cont'd) 1965 HYDROCARBON GAS MIXTURE, LIQUEFIED, N.O.S such as mixtures, which as: Mixture A, have a vapour pressure at 70 °C not exceeding 1.1 MPa (11 bar) and a density at 50 °C not lower than 0.525 kg/l; Mixture A01, have a vapour pressure at 70 °C not exceeding 1.6 MPa (16 bar) and a relative density at 50 °C not lower than 0.516 kg/l; Mixture A02, have a vapour pressure at 70 °C not exceeding 1.6 MPa (16 bar) and a relative density at 50 °C not lower than 0.505 kg/l; Mixture A0, have a vapour pressure at 70 °C not exceeding 1.6 MPa (16 bar) and a density at 50 °C not lower than 0.495 kg/l; Mixture A1, have a vapour pressure at 70 °C not exceeding 2.1 MPa (21 bar) and a density at 50 °C not lower than 0.485 kg/l; Mixture B1 have a vapour pressure at 70 °C not exceeding 2.6 MPa (26 bar) and a relative density at 50 °C not lower than 0.474 kg/l; Mixture B2 have a vapour pressure at 70 °C not exceeding 2.6 MPa (26 bar) and a relative density at 50 °C not lower than 0.463 kg/l; Mixture B, have a vapour pressure at 70 °C not exceeding 2.6 MPa (26 bar) and a density at 50 °C not lower than 0.450 kg/l; Mixture C, have a vapour pressure at 70 °C not exceeding 3.1 MPa (31 bar) and a relative density at 50 °C not lower than 0.440 kg/l; NOTE 1: In the case of the foregoing mixtures, the use of the following names customary in the trade is permitted for describing these substances: for mixtures A, A01, A02 and A0: BUTANE; for mixture C: PROPANE. 2: UN No. 1075 PETROLEUM GASES, LIQUEFIED may be used as an alternative entry for UN No. 1965 HYDROCARBON GAS MIXTURE LIQUEFIED, N.O.S. for carriage prior to or following maritime or air carriage. 3354 INSECTICIDE GAS, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 3161 LIQUEFIED GAS, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 2 T 1967 INSECTICIDE GAS, TOXIC, N.O.S. 3162 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, N.O.S. 2 TF 3355 INSECTICIDE GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 3160 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 2 TC 3308 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 2 TO 3307 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 2 TFC 3309 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 2 TOC 3310 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. Refrigerated liquefied gases Classification code UN No. Name of the substance or article 3 A 3158 GAS, REFRIGERATED LIQUID, N.O.S. 3 O 3311 GAS, REFRIGERATED LIQUID, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 3 F 3312 GAS, REFRIGERATED LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. Dissolved gases Classification code UN No. Name of the substance or article 4 Only substances listed in Table A of Chapter 3.2 are to be accepted for carriage. Aerosols and receptacles, small, containing gas Classification code UN No. Name of the substance or article 5 1950 AEROSOLS 2037 RECEPTACLES, SMALL CONTAINING GAS (GAS CARTRIDGES) without a release device, non refillable Other articles containing gas under pressure Classification code UN No. Name of the substance or article 6A 2857 REFRIGERATING MACHINES containing non-flammable, non-toxic gases or ammonia solutions (UN 2672) 3164 ARTICLES, PRESSURIZED, PNEUMATIC (containing non-flammable gas) or 3164 ARTICLES, PRESSURIZED, HYDRAULIC (containing non-flammable gas) 3538 ARTICLES CONTAINING NON-FLAMMABLE, NON TOXIC GAS, N.O.S. 6F 3150 DEVICES, SMALL, HYDROCARBON GAS POWERED or 3150 HYDROCARBON GAS REFILLS FOR SMALL DEVICES, with release device 3358 REFRIGERATING MACHINES containing flammable, non-toxic, liquefied gas 3478 FUEL CELL CARTRIDGES, containing liquefied flammable gas or 3478 FUEL CELL CARTRIDGES CONTAINED IN EQUIPMENT, containing liquefied flammable gas or 3478 FUEL CELL CARTRIDGES PACKED WITH EQUIPMENT, containing liquefied flammable gas 3479 FUEL CELL CARTRIDGES, containing hydrogen in metal hydride or 3479 FUEL CELL CARTRIDGES CONTAINED IN EQUIPMENT, containing hydrogen in metal hydride or 3479 FUEL CELL CARTRIDGES PACKED WITH EQUIPMENT, containing hydrogen in metal hydride 3529 ENGINE, INTERNAL COMBUSTION, FLAMMABLE GAS POWERED or 3529 ENGINE, FUEL CELL, FLAMMABLE GAS POWERED or 3529 MACHINERY, INTERNAL COMBUSTION, FLAMMABLE GAS POWERED or 3529 MACHINERY, FUEL CELL, FLAMMABLE GAS POWERED 3537 ARTICLES CONTAINING FLAMMABLE GAS, N.O.S. 6T 3539 ARTICLES CONTAINING TOXIC GAS, N.O.S. Gas samples Classification code UN No. Name of the substance or article 7 F 3167 GAS SAMPLE, NON PRESSURIZED, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S., not refrigerated liquid 7 T 3169 GAS SAMPLE, NON PRESSURIZED, TOXIC, N.O.S., not refrigerated liquid 7 TF 3168 GAS SAMPLE, NON PRESSURIZED, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S., not refrigerated liquid Chemicals under pressure Classification code UN No. Name of the substance or article 8 A 3500 CHEMICAL UNDER PRESSURE, N.O.S. 8 F 3501 CHEMICAL UNDER PRESSURE, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 8 T 3502 CHEMICAL UNDER PRESSURE, TOXIC, N.O.S. 8 C 3503 CHEMICAL UNDER PRESSURE, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 8 TF 3504 CHEMICAL UNDER PRESSURE, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N.O.S. 8 FC 3505 CHEMICAL UNDER PRESSURE, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. Adsorbed gases Classification code UN No. Name of the substance or article 9 A 3511 ADSORBED GAS, N.O.S. 9 O 3513 ADSORBED GAS, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 9 F 3510 ADSORBED GAS, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 9 T 3512 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, N.O.S. 9 TF 3514 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 9 TC 3516 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 9 TO 3515 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 9 TFC 3517 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 9 TOC 3518 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 2.2.3 Class 3: Flammable liquids 2.2.3.1 Criteria 2.2.3.1.1 The heading of Class 3 covers substances and articles containing substances of this Class which: – are liquids according to subparagraph (a) of the definition for "liquid" in 1.2.1; – have at 50 °C a vapour pressure of not more than 300 kPa (3 bar) and are not completely gaseous at 20 °C and at standard pressure of 101.3 kPa; and – have a flash-point of not more than 60 °C (see 2.3.3.1 for the relevant test). The heading of Class 3 also covers liquid substances and molten solid substances with a flash-point of more than 60 °C and which are carried or handed over for carriage whilst heated at temperatures equal to or higher than their flash-point. These substances are assigned to UN No. 3256. The heading of Class 3 also covers liquid desensitized explosives. Liquid desensitized explosives are explosive substances which are dissolved or suspended in water or other liquid substances, to form an homogeneous liquid mixture to suppress their explosive properties. Such entries in Table A of Chapter 3.2 are UN Nos. 1204, 2059, 3064, 3343, 3357 and 3379. NOTE 1: Substances having a flash-point above 35 °C which do not sustain combustion according to the criteria of sub-section 32.2.5 of Part III of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, are not substances of Class 3; if, however, these substances are handed over for carriage and carried whilst heated at temperatures equal to or higher than their flash-point, they are substances of Class 3. 2: By derogation from paragraph 2.2.3.1.1 above, diesel fuel, gasoil, heating oil (light) including synthetically manufactured products having a flash-point above 60 °C and not more than 100 °C shall be deemed substances of Class 3, UN No. 1202. 3: Flammable liquids which are highly toxic by inhalation, as defined in 2.2.61.1.4 to 2.2.61.1.9, and toxic substances having a flash-point of 23 °C or above are substances of Class 6.1 (see 2.2.61.1). Liquids which are highly toxic by inhalation are indicated as "toxic by inhalation" in their proper shipping name in Column (2) or by special provision 354 in Column (6) of Table A of Chapter 3.2. 4: Flammable liquid substances and preparations used as pesticides, which are highly toxic, toxic or slightly toxic and have a flash-point of 23 °C or above are substances of Class 6.1 (see 2.2.61.1). 2.2.3.1.2 The substances and articles of Class 3 are subdivided as follows: F Flammable liquids, without subsidiary hazard and articles containing such substances: F1 Flammable liquids having a flash-point of or below 60 °C; F2 Flammable liquids having a flash-point above 60 °C which are carried or handed over for carriage at or above their flash-point (elevated temperature substances); F3 Articles containing flammable liquids; FT Flammable liquids, toxic: FT1 Flammable liquids, toxic; FT2 Pesticides; FC Flammable liquids, corrosive; FTC Flammable liquids, toxic, corrosive; D Liquid desensitized explosives. 2.2.3.1.3 Substances and articles classified in Class 3 are listed in Table A of Chapter 3.2. Substances not mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 shall be assigned to the relevant entry of 2.2.3.3 and the relevant packing group in accordance with the provisions of this section. Flammable liquids shall be assigned to one of the following packing groups according to the degree of danger they present for carriage: Packing group Flash-point (closed cup) Initial boiling point I ≤ 35 °C II (a) < 23 °C > 35 °C III (a) ≥ 23 °C and ≤ 60 °C > 35 °C (a) See also 2.2.3.1.4. For a liquid with (a) subsidiary hazard(s), the packing group determined in accordance with the table above and the packing group based on the severity of the subsidiary hazard(s) shall be considered; the classification and packing group shall then be determined in accordance with the table of precedence of hazards in 2.1.3. 10 . 2.2.3.1.4 Viscous flammable liquids such as paints, enamels, lacquers, varnishes, adhesives and polishes having a flash-point of less than 23 °C may be assigned to packing group III in conformity with the procedures prescribed in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 32.3, provided that: (a) The viscosity and flash-point are in accordance with the following Table: Kinematic viscosity (extrapolated) (at near-zero shear rate) mm 2 /s at 23°C Flow-time t in seconds Jet diameter (mm) Flash-point, closed-cup (°C) 20 < 80 20 < t 60 4 above 17 80 < 135 60 < t 100 4 above 10 135 < 220 20 < t 32 6 above 5 220 < 300 32 < t 44 6 above –1 300 < 700 44 < t 100 6 above –5 700 < 100 < t 6 no limit (b) Less than 3% of the clear solvent layer separates in the solvent separation test; (c) The mixture or any separated solvent does not meet the criteria for Class 6.1 or Class 8; (d) The substances are packed in receptacles of not more than 450 litre capacity. NOTE: These provisions also apply to mixtures containing no more than 20% nitrocellulose with a nitrogen content not exceeding 12.6% by dry mass. Mixtures containing more than 20% but not more than 55% nitrocellulose with a nitrogen content not exceeding 12.6% by dry mass are substances assigned to UN No. 2059. Mixtures having a flash-point below 23 °C and containing: – more than 55% nitrocellulose, whatever their nitrogen content; or – not more than 55% nitrocellulose with a nitrogen content above 12.6% by dry mass, are substances of Class 1 (UN Nos. 0340 or 0342) or of Class 4.1 (UN Nos. 2555, 2556 or 2557). 2.2.3.1.5 Viscous liquids 2.2.3.1.5.1 Except as provided for in 2.2.3.1.5.2, viscous liquids which: – have a flash-point of 23 °C or above and less than or equal to 60 °C; – are not toxic, corrosive or environmentally hazardous; – contain not more than 20% nitrocellulose provided the nitrocellulose contains not more than 12.6% nitrogen by dry mass; and – are packed in receptacles of not more than 450 litre capacity; are not subject to RID, if: (a) in the solvent separation test (see Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 32.5.1), the height of the separated layer of solvent is less than 3% of the total height; and (b) the flowtime in the viscosity test (see Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, sub -section 32.4.3), with a jet diameter of 6 mm is equal to or greater than: (i) 60 seconds; or (ii) 40 seconds if the viscous liquid contains not more than 60% of Class 3 substances. 2.2.3.1.5.2 Viscous liquids which are also environmentally hazardous, but meet all other criteria in 2.2.3.1.5.1, are not subject to any other provisions of RID when they are carried in single or combination packagings containing a net quantity per single or inner packaging of 5 litres or less, provided the packagings meet the general provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2 and 4.1.1.4 to 4.1.1.8. 2.2.3.1.6 If substances of Class 3, as a result of admixtures, come into categories of hazard different from those to which the substances mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 belong, these mixtures or solutions shall be assigned to the entries to which they belong on the basis of their actual degree of danger. NOTE: For the classification of solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes) see also 2.1.3. 2.2.3.1.7 On the basis of the test procedures in accordance with 2.3.3.1 and 2.3.4, and the criteria set out in 2.2.3.1.1, it may also be determined whether the nature of a solution or a mixture mentioned by name or containing a substance mentioned by name is such that the solution or mixture is not subject to the provisions for this Class (see also 2.1.3). 2.2.3.2 Substances not accepted for carriage 2.2.3.2.1 Substances of Class 3 which are liable to form peroxides easily (as happens with ethers or with certain heterocyclic oxygenated substances) shall not be accepted for carriage if their peroxide content, calculated as hydrogen peroxide (H 2 O 2 ), exceeds 0.3%. The peroxide content shall be determined as indicated in 2.3.3.3. 2.2.3.2.2 Chemically unstable substances of Class 3 shall not be accepted for carriage unless the necessary precautions have been taken to prevent the possibility of a dangerous decomposition or polymerization under normal conditions of carriage. For the precautions necessary to prevent polymerization, see special provision 386 of Chapter 3.3. To this end particular care shall be taken to ensure that receptacles and tanks do not contain any substances liable to promote these reactions. If temperature control is required to prevent polymerization of a substance (i.e. for a substance in a packaging or IBC with an SAPT of 50 °C or less, or in a tank with an SAPT of 45 °C or less), the substance shall not be accepted for carriage. 2.2.3.2.3 Liquid desensitized explosives other than those listed in Table A of Chapter 3.2 shall not be accepted for carriage as substances of Class 3. 2.2.3.3 List of collective entries Subsidiary hazard Classification code UN Name of the substance or article No. Flammable liquids and articles containing such substances 1133 ADHESIVES containing flammable liquid 1136 COAL TAR DISTILLATES, FLAMMABLE 1139 COATING SOLUTION (includes surface treatments or coatings used for industrial or other purposes such as vehicle undercoating, drum or barrel lining) 1197 EXTRACTS, LIQUID , for flavour or aroma 1210 PRINTING INK, flammable or 1210 PRINTING INK RELATED MATERIAL (including printing ink thinning or reducing compound), flammable 1263 PAINT (including paint, lacquer, enamel, stain, shellac, varnish, polish, liquid filler and liquid lacquer base) or 1263 PAINT RELATED MATERIAL (including paint thinning or reducing compound) 1266 PERFUMERY PRODUCTS with flammable solvents 1293 TINCTURES, MEDICINAL F1 1306 WOOD PRESERVATIVES, LIQUID 1866 RESIN SOLUTION, flammable 1999 TARS, LIQUID, including road oils, and cutback bitumens 3065 ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES 1224 KETONES, LIQUID, N.O.S. 1268 PETROLEUM DISTILLATES, N.O.S. or 1268 PETROLEUM PRODUCTS, N.O.S. 1987 ALCOHOLS, N.O.S. 1989 ALDEHYDES, N.O.S. 2319 TERPENE HYDROCARBONS, N.O.S. 3271 ETHERS, N.O.S. 3272 ESTERS, N.O.S. 3295 HYDROCARBONS, LIQUID, N.O.S. 3336 MERCAPTANS, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. or 3336 MERCAPTANS MIXTURE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 1993 FLAMMABLE LIQUID, N.O.S. whithout subsidiary hazard F2 elevated temperature 3256 ELEVATED TEMPERATURE LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S., with flash-point above 60 °C, at or above its flash-point F 3269 POLYESTER RESIN KIT , liquid base material 3473 FUEL CELL CARTRIDGES or F3 3473 FUEL CELL CARTRIDGES CONTAINED IN EQUIPMENT or articles 3473 FUEL CELL CARTRIDGES PACKED WITH EQUIPMENT 3528 ENGINE, INTERNAL COMBUSTION, FLAMMABLE LIQUID POWERED or 3528 ENGINE, FUEL CELL, FLAMMABLE LIQUID POWERED or 3528 MACHINERY, INTERNAL COMBUSTION, FLAMMABLE LIQUID POWERED or 3528 MACHINERY, FUEL CELL, FLAMMABLE LIQUID POWERED 3540 ARTICLES CONTAINING FLAMMABLE LIQUID, N.O.S. 1228 MERCAPTANS, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N.O.S. or 1228 MERCAPTAN MIXTURE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N.O.S. 1986 ALCOHOLS, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N.O.S. 1988 ALDEHYDES, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N.O.S. FT1 2478 ISOCYANATES, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N.O.S. or 2478 ISOCYANATE SOLUTION, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N.O.S. 3248 MEDICINE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N.O.S. 3273 NITRILES, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N.O.S. 1992 FLAMMABLE LIQUID, TOXIC, N.O.S. Toxic 2758 CARBAMATE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC FT 2760 ARSENICAL PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC 2762 ORGANOCHLORINE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC 2764 TRIAZINE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC 2772 THIOCARBAMATE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC 2776 COPPER BASED PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC 2778 MERCURY BASED PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC 2780 SUBSTITUTED NITROPHENOL PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC 2782 BIPYRIDILIUM PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC pesticide (flash point 2784 ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC below 2787 ORGANOTIN PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC 23 °C) FT2 3024 COUMARIN DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC 3346 PHENOXYACETIC ACID DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC 3350 PYRETHROID PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE TOXIC 3021 PESTICIDE, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC, N.O.S. NOTE: The classification of a pesticide under an entry shall be effected on the basis of the active ingredient, of the physical state of the pesticide and any subsidiary hazards it may exhibit. 3469 PAINT, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE (including paint, lacquer, enamel, stain, shellac, varnish, polish, liquid filler and liquid lacquer base) or 3469 PAINT RELATED MATERIAL, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE (including paint thinning and reducing compound) Corrosive FC 2733 AMINES, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. or 2733 POLYAMINES, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 2985 CHLOROSILANES, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 3274 ALCOHOLATES SOLUTION, N.O.S., in alcohol 2924 FLAMMABLE LIQUID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. Toxic, corrosive FTC 3286 FLAMMABLE LIQUID, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 3343 NITROGLYCERIN MIXTURE, DESENSITIZED, LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. with not more than 30% nitroglycerin by mass Liquid desensiti z ed 3357 NITROGLYCERIN MIXTURE, DESENSITIZED, LIQUID, N.O.S. with not more than 30% nitroglycerin by mass explosive D 3379 DESENSITIZED EXPLOSIVE, LIQUID, N.O.S. 2.2.41 Class 4.1: Flammable solids, self-reactive substances , polymerizing substances and solid desensitized explosives 2.2.41.1 Criteria 2.2.41.1.1 The heading of Class 4.1 covers flammable substances and articles, desensitized explosives which are solids according to subparagraph (a) of the definition "solid" in 1.2.1 , self-reactive liquids or solids and polymerizing substances . The following are assigned to Class 4.1: – readily flammable solid substances and articles (see paragraphs 2.2.41.1.3 to 2.2.41.1.8); – self-reactive solids or liquids (see paragraphs 2.2.41.1.9 to 2.2.41.1.1 6 ); – solid desensitized explosives (see 2.2.41.1.18); – substances related to self-reactive substances (see 2.2.41.1.19); – polymerizing substances (see 2.2.41.1.20). 2.2.41.1.2 The substances and articles of Class 4.1 are subdivided as follows: F Flammable solids, without subsidiary hazard: F1 Organic; F2 Organic, molten; F3 Inorganic; F4 Articles; FO Flammable solids, oxidizing; FT Flammable solids, toxic: FT1 Organic, toxic; FT2 Inorganic, toxic; FC Flammable solids, corrosive: FC1 Organic, corrosive; FC2 Inorganic, corrosive; D Solid desensitized explosives without subsidiary hazard; DT Solid desensitized explosives, toxic; SR Self-reactive substances: SR1 Not requiring temperature control; SR2 Requiring temperature control (not accepted for carriage by rail); PM Polymerizing substances: PM1 Not requiring temperature control; PM2 Requiring temperature control (not accepted for carriage by rail). Flammable solids Definition and properties 2.2.41.1.3 Flammable solids are readily combustible solids and solids which may cause fire through friction. Readily combustible solids are powdered, granular, or pasty substances which are dangerous if they can be easily ignited by brief contact with an ignition source, such as a burning match, and if the flame spreads rapidly. The danger may come not only from the fire but also from toxic combustion products. Metal powders are especially dangerous because of the difficulty of extinguishing a fire since normal extinguishing agents such as carbon dioxide or water can increase the hazard. Classification 2.2.41.1.4 Substances and articles classified as flammable solids of Class 4.1 are listed in Table A of Chapter 3.2. The assignment of organic substances and articles not mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 to the relevant entry of 2.2.41.3 in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2.1 can be based on experience or on the results of the test procedures in accordance with Part III, sub-section 33.2 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria. The assignment of inorganic substances not mentioned by name shall be based on the results of the test procedures in accordance with Part III, sub-section 33.2 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria; experience shall also be taken into account when it leads to a more stringent assignment. 2.2.41.1.5 When substances not mentioned by name are assigned to one of the entries listed in 2.2.41.3 on the basis of the test procedures in accordance with the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 33.2, the following criteria apply: (a) With the exception of metal powders or powders of metal alloys, powdery, granular or pasty substances shall be classified as readily flammable substances of Class 4.1 if they can be easily ignited by brief contact with an ignition source (e.g. a burning match), or if, in the event of ignition, the flame spreads rapidly, the burning time is less than 45 seconds for a measured distance of 100 mm or the rate of burning is greater than 2.2 mm/s. (b) Metal powders or powders of metal alloys shall be assigned to Class 4.1 if they can be ignited by a flame and the reaction spreads over the whole length of the sample in 10 minutes or less. Solids which may cause fire through friction shall be classified in Class 4.1 by analogy with existing entries (e.g. matches) or in accordance with any appropriate special provision. 2.2.41.1.6 On the basis of the test procedure in accordance with the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 33.2 and the criteria set out in 2.2.41.1.4 and 2.2.41.1.5, it may also be determined whether the nature of a substance mentioned by name is such that the substance is not subject to the provisions for this Class. 2.2.41.1.7 If substances of Class 4.1, as a result of admixtures, come into different categories of hazard from those to which the substances mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 belong, these mixtures shall be assigned to the entries to which they belong on the basis of their actual degree of danger. NOTE: For the classification of solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes), see also 2.1.3. Assignment of packing groups 2.2.41.1.8 Flammable solids classified under the various entries in Table A of Chapter 3.2 shall be assigned to packing groups II or III on the basis of test procedures of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 33.2, in accordance with the following criteria: (a) Readily flammable solids which, when tested, have a burning time of less than 45 seconds over a measured distance of 100 mm shall be assigned to: Packing group II: if the flame passes the wetted zone; Packing group III: if the wetted zone stops the flame for at least four minutes; (b) Metal powders or powders of metal alloys shall be assigned to: Packing group II: if, when tested, the reaction spreads over the whole length of the sample in five minutes or less; Packing group III: if, when tested, the reaction spreads over the whole length of the sample in more than five minutes. For solids which may cause fire through friction, the packing group shall be assigned by analogy with existing entries or in accordance with any special provision. Self-reactive substances Definitions 2.2.41.1.9 For the purposes of RID, self reactive substances are thermally unstable substances liable to undergo a strongly exothermic decomposition even without participation of oxygen (air). Substances are not considered to be self reactive substances of Class 4.1, if: (a) they are explosives according to the criteria of Class 1; (b) they are oxidizing substances according to the classification procedure for Class 5.1 (see 2.2.51.1) except that mixtures of oxidizing substances which contain 5% or more of combustible organic substances shall be subjected to the classification procedure defined in Note 2 ; (c) they are organic peroxides according to the criteria of Class 5.2 (see 2.2.52.1); (d) their heat of decomposition is less than 300 J/g; or (e) their self accelerating decomposition temperature (SADT) (see Note 3 below) is greater than 75 °C for a 50 kg package. NOTE 1: The heat of decomposition can be determined using any internationally recognised method e.g. differential scanning calorimetry and adiabatic calorimetry. 2: Mixtures of oxidizing substances meeting the criteria of Class 5.1 which contain 5% or more of combustible organic substances, which do not meet the criteria mentioned in (a), (c), (d) or (e) above, shall be subjected to the self-reactive substance classification procedure. A mixture showing the properties of a self-reactive substance, type B to F, shall be classified as a self-reactive substance of Class 4.1. A mixture showing the properties of a self-reactive substance, type G, according to the principle given in section 20.4.3 (g) of Part II of the Manual of Tests and Criteria shall be considered for classification as a substance of Class 5.1 (see 2.2.51.1). 3: The self-accelerating decomposition temperature (SADT) is the lowest temperature at which self-accelerating decomposition may occur with a substance in the packaging as used during carriage. Requirements for the determination of the SADT are given in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part II, Chapter 20 and section 28.4. 4: Any substance which shows the properties of a self reactive substance shall be classified as such, even if this substance gives a positive test result according to 2.2.42.1.5 for inclusion in Class 4.2. Properties 2.2.41.1.10 The decomposition of self-reactive substances can be initiated by heat, contact with catalytic impurities (e.g. acids, heavy-metal compounds, bases), friction or impact. The rate of decomposition increases with temperature and varies with the substance. Decomposition, particularly if no ignition occurs, may result in the evolution of toxic gases or vapours. For certain self-reactive substances, the temperature shall be controlled. Some self-reactive substances may decompose explosively, particularly if confined. This characteristic may be modified by the addition of diluents or by the use of appropriate packagings. Certain self-reactive substances burn vigorously. Self-reactive substances are, for example, some compounds of the types listed below: aliphatic azo compounds (-C-N=N-C-); organic azides (-C-N 3 ); diazonium salts (-CN 2 + Z – ); N-nitroso compounds (-N-N=O); and aromatic sulphonylhydrazides (-SO 2 -NH-NH 2 ). This list is not exhaustive and substances with other reactive groups and some mixtures of substances may have similar properties. Classification 2.2.41.1.11 Self-reactive substances are classified into seven types according to the degree of danger they present. The types of self-reactive substances range from type A, which is not accepted for carriage in the packaging in which it is tested, to type G, which is not subject to the provisions for self-reactive substances of Class 4.1. The classification of types B to F is directly related to the maximum quantity allowed in one packaging. The principles to be applied for classification as well as the applicable classification procedures, test methods and criteria and an example of a suitable test report are given in Part II of the Manual of Tests and Criteria. 2.2.41.1.12 Self-reactive substances which have already been classified and are already permitted for carriage in packagings are listed in 2.2.41.4, those already permitted for carriage in IBCs are listed in 4.1.4.2, packing instruction IBC520 and those already permitted for carriage in tanks according to Chapter 4.2 are listed in 4.2.5.2, portable tank instruction T23. Each permitted substance listed is assigned to a generic entry of Table A of Chapter 3.2 (UN Nos. 3221 to 3240) and appropriate subsidiary hazards and remarks providing relevant transport information are given. The collective entries specify: – self-reactive substances types B to F, see 2.2.41.1.11 above; – physical state (liquid/solid). The classification of the self-reactive substances listed in 2.2.41.4 is based on the technically pure substance (except where a concentration of less than 100% is specified). 2.2.41.1.13 Classification of self-reactive substances not listed in 2.2.41.4, 4.1.4.2, packing instruction IBC520 or 4.2.5.2, portable tank instruction T23 and assignment to a collective entry shall be made by the competent authority of the country of origin on the basis of a test report. The statement of approval shall contain the classification and the relevant conditions of carriage. If the country of origin is not an RID Contracting State, the classification and the conditions of carriage shall be recognized by the competent authority of the first RID Contracting State reached by the consignment. 2.2.41.1.14 Activators, such as zinc compounds, may be added to some self-reactive substances to change their reactivity. Depending on both the type and the concentration of the activator, this may result in a decrease in thermal stability and a change in explosive properties. If either of these properties is altered, the new formulation shall be assessed in accordance with the classification procedure. 2.2.41.1.15 Samples of self-reactive substances or formulations of self-reactive substances not listed in 2.2.41.4, for which a complete set of test results is not available and which are to be carried for further testing or evaluation, shall be assigned to one of the appropriate entries for self-reactive substances type C provided the following conditions are met: – the available data indicate that the sample would be no more dangerous than self-reactive substances type B; – the sample is packaged in accordance with packing method OP2 and the quantity per wagon is limited to 10 kg; Samples requiring temperature control shall not be accepted for carriage by rail. Desensitization 2.2.41.1.16 In order to ensure safety during carriage, self-reactive substances are in many cases desensitized by use of a diluent. Where a percentage of a substance is stipulated, this refers to the percentage by mass, rounded to the nearest whole number. If a diluent is used, the self-reactive substance shall be tested with the diluent present in the concentration and form used in carriage. Diluents which may allow a self-reactive substance to concentrate to a dangerous extent in the event of leakage from a packaging shall not be used. Any diluent shall be compatible with the self-reactive substance. In this regard, compatible diluents are those solids or liquids which have no detrimental influence on the thermal stability and hazard type of the self-reactive substance. 2.2.41.1.17 (Reserved) Solid desensitized explosives 2.2.41.1.18 Solid desensitized explosives are substances which are wetted with water or alcohols or are diluted with other substances to suppress their explosive properties. Such entries in Table A of Chapter 3.2 are: UN Nos. 1310, 1320, 1321, 1322, 1336, 1337, 1344, 1347, 1348, 1349, 1354, 1355, 1356, 1357, 1517, 1571, 2555, 2556, 2557, 2852, 2907, 3317, 3319, 3344, 3364, 3365, 3366, 3367, 3368, 3369, 3370, 3376, 3380 and 3474. Substances related to self-reactive substances 2.2.41.1.19 Substances that: (a) have been provisionally accepted into Class 1 according to Test Series 1 and 2 but exempted from Class 1 by Test Series 6; (b) are not self-reactive substances of Class 4.1; and (c) are not substances of Classes 5.1 or 5.2 are also assigned to Class 4.1. UN Nos. 2956, 3241, 3242 and 3251 are such entries. Polymerizing substances Definitions and properties 2.2.41.1.20 Polymerizing substances are substances which, without stabilization, are liable to undergo a strongly exothermic reaction resulting in the formation of larger molecules or resulting in the formation of polymers under conditions normally encountered in carriage. Such substances are considered to be polymerizing substances of Class 4.1 when: (a) Their self-accelerating polymerization temperature (SAPT) is 75 °C or less under the conditions (with or without chemical stabilization as offered for carriage) and in the packaging, IBC or tank in which the substance or mixture is to be carried; (b) They exhibit a heat of reaction of more than 300 J/g; and (c) They do not meet any other criteria for inclusion in classes 1 to 8. A mixture meeting the criteria of a polymerizing substance shall be classified as a polymerizing substance of Class 4.1. Temperature control requirements 2.2.41.1.21 (Reserved) 2.2.41.2 Substances not accepted for carriage 2.2.41.2.1 The chemically unstable substances of Class 4.1 shall not be accepted for carriage unless the necessary steps have been taken to prevent their dangerous decomposition or polymerization during carriage. To this end, it shall in particular be ensured that receptacles and tanks do not contain any substance liable to promote these reactions. 2.2.41.2.2 Flammable solids, oxidizing, assigned to UN No. 3097 shall not be accepted for carriage unless they meet the requirements for Class 1 (see also 2.1.3.7). 2.2.41.2.3 The following substances shall not be accepted for carriage: – Self-reactive substances of type A (see Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part II, paragraph 20.4.2 (a)); – Phosphorus sulphides which are not free from yellow and white phosphorus; – Solid densitized explosives other than those listed in Table A of Chapter 3.2; – Inorganic flammable substances in the molten form other than UN No. 2448 SULPHUR, MOLTEN . The following substances shall not be accepted for carriage by rail: – Barium azide with a water content less than 50% (mass); – Self-reactive substances with an SADT ≤ 55 °C, therefore requiring temperature control: UN 3231 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE B, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED; UN 3232 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE B, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED; UN 3233 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE C, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED; UN 3234 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE C, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED; UN 3235 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE D, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED; UN 3236 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE D, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED; UN 3237 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE E, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED; UN 3238 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE E, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED; UN 3239 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE F, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED; UN 3240 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE F, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED; – Polymerizing substances in packagings or IBCs with an SAPT ≤ 50 °C and polymerizing substances in tanks with an SAPT ≤ 45 °C, therefore requiring temperature control: UN 3533 POLYMERIZING SUBSTANCE, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED, N.O.S.; UN 3534 POLYMERIZING SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED, N.O.S. 2.2.41.3 List of collective entries Subsidiary hazard Classifi-cation code UN Name of the substance or article No. 3175 SOLIDS CONTAINING FLAMMABLE LIQUID, N.O.S. organic F1 1353 FIBRES IMPREGNATED WITH WEAKLY NITRATED NITROCELLULOSE, N.O.S. or 1353 FABRICS IMPREGNATED WITH WEAKLY NITRATED NITROCELLULOSE, N.O.S. 1325 FLAMMABLE SOLID, ORGANIC, N.O.S. organic molten F2 3176 FLAMMABLE SOLID, ORGANIC, MOLTEN, N.O.S. without 3089 METAL POWDER, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. (a),(b) subsidiary hazard inorganic F3 3181 METAL SALTS OF ORGANIC COMPOUNDS, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 3182 METAL HYDRIDES, FLAMMABLE,N.O.S. (c) 3178 FLAMMABLE SOLID, INORGANIC, N.O.S. articles F4 3527 POLYESTER RESIN KIT, solid base material 3541 ARTICLES CONTAINING FLAMMABLE SOLID, N.O.S. Flammable Solids Oxidizing FO 3097 FLAMMABLE SOLID, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. ( not accepted for carriage , see 2.2.41.2.2) F organic FT1 2926 FLAMMABLE SOLID, TOXIC, ORGANIC, N.O.S. toxic FT inorganic FT2 3179 FLAMMABLE SOLID, TOXIC, INORGANIC, N.O.S. corrosive organic FC1 2925 FLAMMABLE SOLID, CORROSIVE, ORGANIC, N.O.S. FC inorganic FC2 3180 FLAMMABLE SOLID, CORROSIVE, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 3319 NITROGLYCERIN MIXTURE, DESENSITIZED, SOLID, N.O.S. with more than 2% but not more than 10% nitroglycerin by mass Solid desensitized explosives without subsidiary hazard D 3344 PENTAERYTHRITE TETRANITRATE (PENTAERYTHRITOL TETRANITRATE, PETN) MIXTURE, DESENSITIZED, SOLID, N.O.S. with more than 10% but not more than 20% PETN by mass 3380 DESENSITIZED EXPLOSIVE, SOLID, N.O.S. toxic DT Only substances listed in Table A of Chapter 3.2 are to be accepted for carriage as substances of Class 4.1 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE A ( not accepted for carriage, see 2.2.41.2.3 ) SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE A ( not accepted for carriage, see 2.2.41.2.3 ) 3221 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE B 3222 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE B 3223 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE C 3224 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE C not requiring SR1 3225 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE D temperature control 3226 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE D 3227 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE E 3228 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE E 3229 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE F 3230 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE F SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE G (n ot subject to the provisions applicable to Class 4.1, see 2.2.41.1.11 ) Self-reactive substances SR SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE G ( not subject to the provisions applicable to Class 4.1, see 2.2.41.1.11 ) 3231 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE B, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED (not accepted for carriage by rail, see 2.2.41.2.3) 3232 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE B, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED (not accepted for carriage by rail, see 2.2.41.2.3) 3233 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE C, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED (not accepted for carriage by rail, see 2.2.41.2.3) requiring temperature control SR2 3234 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE C, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED (not accepted for carriage by rail, see 2.2.41.2.3) 3235 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE D, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED (not accepted for carriage by rail, see 2.2.41.2.3) 3236 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE D, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED (not accepted for carriage by rail, see 2.2.41.2.3) 3237 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE E, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED (not accepted for carriage by rail, see 2.2.41.2.3) 3238 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE E, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED (not accepted for carriage by rail, see 2.2.41.2.3) 3239 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE F, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED (not accepted for carriage by rail, see 2.2.41.2.3) 3240 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE F, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED (not accepted for carriage by rail, see 2.2.41.2.3) 3531 POLYMERIZING SUBSTANCE, SOLID, STABILIZED, N.O.S. Polymerizing substances not requiring temperature control PM1 3532 POLYMERIZING SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, STABILIZED, N.O.S. PM requiring temperature control PM2 3533 POLYMERIZING SUBSTANCE, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED, N.O.S. (not accepted for carriage by rail, see 2.2.41.2.3) 3534 POLYMERIZING SUBSTANCE, liquid, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED, N.O.S. (not accepted for carriage by rail, see 2.2.41.2.3) (a) Metals and metal alloys in powdered or other flammable form, liable to spontaneous combustion, are substances of Class 4.2. (b) Metals and metal alloys in powdered or other flammable form, which in contact with water, emit flammable gases, are substances of Class 4.3. (c) Metals hydrides which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases, are substances of Class 4.3. Aluminium borohydride or aluminium borohydride in devices are substances of Class 4.2, UN No. 2870. 2.2.41.4 List of currently assigned self-reactive substances in packagings In the column "Packing Method" , codes "OP1" to "OP8" refer to packing methods in 4.1.4.1, packing instruction P520 (see also 4.1.7.1). Self-reactive substances to be carried shall fulfil the classification as listed. For substances permitted in IBCs, see 4.1.4.2, packing instruction IBC520 and, for those permitted in tanks according to Chapter 4.2, see 4.2.5.2.6, portable tank instruction T23. The formulations not listed in this sub-section but listed in packing instruction IBC 520 of 4.1.4.2 and in portable tank instruction T 23 of 4.2.5.2.6 may also be carried packed in accordance with packing method OP8 of packing instruction P 520 of 4.1.4.1. NOTE: The classification given in this table is based on the technically pure substance (except where a concentration of less than 100% is specified). For other concentrations, the substance may be classified differently following the procedures given in Part II of the Manual of Tests and Criteria. Self-reactive substance Concen-tration (%) Packing method UN generic entry Remarks ACETONE-PYROGALLOL COPOLYMER 2-DIAZO-1-NAPHTHOL-5-SULPHONATE 100 OP8 3228 AZODICARBONAMIDE FORMULATION TYPE B, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED < 100 3232 prohibited AZODICARBONAMIDE FORMULATION TYPE C < 100 OP6 3224 (3) AZODICARBONAMIDE FORMULATION TYPE C, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED < 100 3234 prohibited AZODICARBONAMIDE FORMULATION TYPE D < 100 OP7 3226 (5) AZODICARBONAMIDE FORMULATION TYPE D, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED < 100 3236 prohibited 2,2'-AZODI(2,4-DIMETHYL-4- METHOXYVALERONITRILE) 100 3236 prohibited 2,2'-AZODI(2,4-DIMETHYLVALERONITRILE) 100 3236 prohibited 2,2'-AZODI(ETHYL-2-METHYLPROPIONATE) 100 3235 prohibited 1,1-AZODI(HEXAHYDROBENZONITRILE) 100 OP7 3226 2,2'-AZODI(ISOBUTYRONITRILE 100 3234 prohibited 2,2'-AZODI(ISOBUTYRONITRILE) as a water based paste 50 OP6 3224 2,2'-AZODI(2-METHYLBUTYRO-NITRILE) 100 3236 prohibited BENZENE-1,3-DISULPHONYL HYDRAZIDE, as a paste 52 OP7 3226 BENZENE SULPHONYL HYDRAZIDE 100 OP7 3226 4-(BENZYL(ETHYL)AMINO)-3-ETHOXY-BENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE 100 OP7 3226 4-(BENZYL(METHYL)AMINO)-3-ETHOXYBENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE 100 3236 prohibited 3-CHLORO-4-DIETHYLAMINOBENZENE-DIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE 100 OP7 3226 2-DIAZO-1-NAPHTHOL-4-SULPHONYL CHLORIDE 100 OP5 3222 (2) 2-DIAZO-1-NAPHTHOL-5-SULPHONYL CHLORIDE 100 OP5 3222 (2) Self-reactive substance Concen-tration (%) Packing method UN generic entry Remarks 2-DIAZO-1-NAPHTHOL SULPHONIC ACID ESTER MIXTURE, TYPE D < 100 OP7 3226 (9) 2,5-DIBUTOXY-4-(4-MORPHOLINYL)-BENZENEDIAZONIUM, TETRACHLOROZINCATE (2:1) 100 OP8 3228 2,5-DIETHOXY-4-MORPHOLINO-BENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE 67 – 100 3236 prohibited 2,5-DIETHOXY-4-MORPHOLINO-BENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE 66 3236 prohibited 2,5-DIETHOXY-4-MORPHOLINO-BENZENEDIAZONIUM TETRAFLUOROBORATE 100 3236 prohibited 2,5-DIETHOXY-4-(4-MORPHOLINYL)-BENZENEDIAZONIUM SULPHATE 100 OP7 3226 2,5-DIETHOXY-4-(PHENYLSULPHONYL)-BENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE 67 3236 prohibited DIETHYLENEGLYCOL BIS (ALLYL CARBONATE) + DI-ISOPROPYLPEROXYDICARBONATE 88 12 3237 prohibited 2,5-DIMETHOXY-4-(4-METHYL-PHENYLSULPHONYL)BENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE 79 3236 prohibited 4-(DIMETHYLAMINO)-BENZENEDIAZONIUM TRICHLOROZINCATE (-1) 100 OP8 3228 4-DIMETHYLAMINO-6-(2-DIMETHYL-AMINOETHOXY) TOLUENE-2-DIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE 100 3236 prohibited N,N'-DINITROSO-N,N'-DIMETHYL TEREPHTHALAMIDE, as a paste 72 OP6 3224 N,N'-DINITROSOPENTAMETHYLENE-TETRAMINE 82 OP6 3224 (7) DIPHENYLOXIDE-4,4'-DISULPHONYL HYDRAZIDE 100 OP7 3226 4-DIPROPYLAMINOBENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE 100 OP7 3226 2-(N,N-ETHOXYCARBONYL-PHENYLAMINO)-3-METHOXY-4-(N-METHYL-N-CYCLOHEXYLAMINO) BENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE 63 – 92 3236 prohibited 2-(N,N-ETHOXYCARBONYL-PHENYLAMINO)-3-METHOXY-4-(N-METHYL-N-CYCLOHEXYLAMINO) BENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE 62 3236 prohibited N-FORMYL-2-(NITROMETHYLENE)-1,3-PERHYDROTHIAZINE 100 3236 prohibited 2-(2-HYDROXYETHOXY)-1-(PYRROLIDIN-1-YL)BENZENE-4-DIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE 100 3236 prohibited Self-reactive substance Concen-tration (%) Packing method UN generic entry Remarks 3-(2-HYDROXYETHOXY)-4-(PYRROLIDIN-1-YL)BENZENE DIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE 100 3236 prohibited (7-METHOXY-5-METHYL-BENZOTHIOPHEN-2-YL) BORONIC ACID 88 – 100 OP7 3230 (11) 2-(N,N-METHYLAMINOETHYL-CARBONYL)-4-(3,4-DIMETHYL-PHENYLSULPHONYL)BENZENEDIAZONIUM HYDROGEN SULPHATE 96 3236 prohibited 4-METHYLBENZENESULPHONYL-HYDRAZIDE 100 OP7 3226 3-METHYL-4-(PYRROLIDIN-1YL) BENZENEDIAZONIUM TETRAFLUOROBORATE 95 3234 prohibited 4-NITROSOPHENOL 100 3236 prohibited Phosphorothioic acid, O-[(cyanophenyl methylene) azanyl] O,O-diethyl ester 82 – 91 (Z isomer) OP8 3227 (10) SODIUM 2-DIAZO-1-NAPHTHOL-4-SULPHONATE 100 OP7 3226 SODIUM 2-DIAZO-1-NAPHTHOL-5-SULPHONATE 100 OP7 3226 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID, SAMPLE OP2 3223 (8) SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID, SAMPLE, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 3233 prohibited SELF REACTIVE SOLID, SAMPLE OP2 3224 (8) SELF-REACTIVE SOLID, SAMPLE, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 3234 prohibited TETRAMINE PALLADIUM (II) NITRATE 100 3234 prohibited Remarks (1) (Reserved) (2) "EXPLOSIVE" subsidiary hazard label required (Model No. 1, see 5.2.2.2.2). (3) Azodicarbonamide formulations which fulfil the criteria of paragraph 20.4.2 (c) of the Manual of Tests and Criteria. (4) (Reserved) (5) Azodicarbonamide formulations which fulfil the criteria of paragraph 20.4.2 (d) of the Manual of Tests and Criteria. (6) (Reserved) (7) With a compatible diluent having a boiling point of not less than 150 °C. (8) See 2.2.41.1.15. (9) This entry applies to mixtures of esters of 2-diazo-1-naphthol-4-sulphonic acid and 2 diazo-1-naphthol-5-sulphonic acid which fulfil the criteria of paragraph 20.4.2 (d) of the Manual of Test and Criteria. (10) This entry applies to the technical mixture in n-butanol within the specified concentration limits of the (Z) isomer. (11) The technical compound with the specified concentration limits may contain up to 12 % water and up to 1 % organic impurities. 2.2.42 Class 4.2: Substances liable to spontaneous combustion 2.2.42.1 Criteria 2.2.42.1.1 The heading of Class 4.2 covers: – Pyrophoric substances which are substances, including mixtures and solutions (liquid or solid), which even in small quantities ignite on contact with air within five minutes. These are the Class 4.2 substances the most liable to spontaneous combustion; and – Self-heating substances and articles which are substances and articles, including mixtures and solutions, which, on contact with air, without energy supply, are liable to self-heating. These substances will ignite only in large amounts (kilogrammes) and after long periods of time (hours or days). 2.2.42.1.2 The substances and articles of Class 4.2 are subdivided as follows: S Substances liable to spontaneous combustion, without subsidiary hazard: S1 Organic, liquid; S2 Organic, solid; S3 Inorganic, liquid; S4 Inorganic, solid; S5 Organometallic S6 Articles SW Substances liable to spontaneous combustion, which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases; SO Substances liable to spontaneous combustion, oxidizing; ST Substances liable to spontaneous combustion, toxic: ST1 Organic, toxic, liquid; ST2 Organic, toxic, solid; ST3 Inorganic, toxic, liquid; ST4 Inorganic, toxic, solid; SC Substances liable to spontaneous combustion, corrosive: SC1 Organic, corrosive, liquid; SC2 Organic, corrosive, solid; SC3 Inorganic, corrosive, liquid; SC4 Inorganic, corrosive, solid. Properties 2.2.42.1.3 Self-heating of a substance is a process where the gradual reaction of that substance with oxygen (in air) generates heat. If the rate of heat production exceeds the rate of heat loss, then the temperature of the substance will rise which, after an induction time, may lead to self-ignition and combustion. Classification 2.2.42.1.4 Substances and articles classified in Class 4.2 are listed in Table A of Chapter 3.2. The assignment of substances and articles not mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 to the relevant specific n.o.s. entry of 2.2.42.3 in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2.1 can be based on experience or the results of the test procedures in accordance with the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 33.4. Assignment to general n.o.s. entries of Class 4.2 shall be based on the results of the test procedures in accordance with the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 33.4; experience shall also be taken into account when it leads to a more stringent assignment. 2.2.42.1.5 When substances or articles not mentioned by name are assigned to one of the entries listed in 2.2.42.3 on the basis of the test procedures in accordance with the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 33.4, the following criteria shall apply: (a) Solids liable to spontaneous combustion (pyrophoric) shall be assigned to Class 4.2 when they ignite on falling from a height of 1 m or within five minutes; (b) Liquids liable to spontaneous combustion (pyrophoric) shall be assigned to Class 4.2 when: (i) on being poured on an inert carrier, they ignite within five minutes, or (ii) in the event of a negative result of the test according to (i), when poured on a dry, indented filter paper (Whatman No. 3 filter), they ignite or carbonize it within five minutes; (c) Substances in which, in a 10 cm sample cube, at 140 °C test temperature, spontaneous combustion or a rise in temperature to over 200 °C is observed within 24 hours shall be assigned to Class 4.2. This criterion is based on the temperature of the spontaneous combustion of charcoal, which is at 50 °C for a sample cube of 27 m 3 . Substances with a temperature of spontaneous combustion higher than 50 °C for a volume of 27 m 3 are not to be assigned to Class 4.2. NOTE 1: Substances carried in packages with a volume of not more than 3 m 3 are exempted from Class 4.2 if, tested with a 10 cm sample cube at 120 °C, no spontaneous combustion nor a rise in temperature to over 180 °C is observed within 24 hours. 2: Substances carried in packages with a volume of not more than 450 litres are exempted from Class 4.2 if, tested with a 10 cm sample cube at 100 °C, no spontaneous combustion nor a rise in temperature to over 160 °C is observed within 24 hours. 3: Since organometallic substances can be classified in Class 4.2 or 4.3 with additional subsidiary hazards , depending on their properties, a specific classification flow chart for these substances is given in 2.3.5. 2.2.42.1.6 If substances of Class 4.2, as a result of admixtures, come into different categories of hazard from those to which the substances mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 belong, these mixtures shall be assigned to the entries to which they belong on the basis of their actual degree of danger. NOTE: For the classification of solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes), see also 2.1.3. 2.2.42.1.7 On the basis of the test procedure in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 33.4 and the criteria set out in 2.2.42.1.5, it may also be determined whether the nature of a substance mentioned by name is such that the substance is not subject to the provisions for this Class. Assignment of packing groups 2.2.42.1.8 Substances and articles classified under the various entries in Table A of Chapter 3.2 shall be assigned to packing groups I, II or III on the basis of test procedures of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 33.4, in accordance with the following criteria: (a) Substances liable to spontaneous combustion (pyrophoric) shall be assigned to packing group I; (b) Self heating substances and articles in which, in a 2.5 cm sample cube, at 140 °C test temperature, spontaneous combustion or a rise in temperature to over 200 °C is observed within 24 hours, shall be assigned to packing group II; Substances with a temperature of spontaneous combustion higher than 50 °C for a volume of 450 litres are not to be assigned to packing group II; (c) Slightly self heating substances in which, in a 2.5 cm sample cube, the phenomena referred to under (b) are not observed, in the given conditions, but in which in a 10 cm sample cube at 140 °C test temperature spontaneous combustion or a rise in temperature to over 200 °C is observed within 24 hours, shall be assigned to packing group III. 2.2.42.2 Substances not accepted for carriage The following substances shall not be accepted for carriage: – UN No. 3255 tert-BUTYL HYPOCHLORITE; and – Self heating solids, oxidizing, assigned to UN No. 3127 unless they meet the requirements for Class 1 (see 2.1.3.7). 2.2.42.3 List of collective entries Subsidiary hazard Classification code UN Name of the substance or article No. Substances liable to spontaneous combustion 2845 PYROPHORIC LIQUID, ORGANIC, N.O.S. liquid S1 3183 SELF HEATING LIQUID, ORGANIC, N.O.S. organic 1373 FIBRES or FABRICS, ANIMAL or VEGETABLE or SYNTHETIC, N.O.S. with oil solid S2 2006 PLASTICS, NITROCELLULOSE BASED, SELF HEATING, N.O.S. 3313 ORGANIC PIGMENTS, SELF HEATING 2846 PYROPHORIC SOLID, ORGANIC, N.O.S. Without 3088 SELF HEATING SOLID, ORGANIC, N.O.S. subsidiary hazard S Without subsidiary hazard S (cont'd) 3194 PYROPHORIC LIQUID, INORGANIC, N.O.S. liquid S3 3186 SELF HEATING LIQUID, INORGANIC, N.O.S. inorganic 1383 PYROPHORIC METAL, N.O.S. or 1383 PYROPHORIC ALLOY, N.O.S. 1378 METAL CATALYST, WETTED with a visible excess of liquid 2881 METAL CATALYST, DRY solid S4 3189 METAL POWDER, SELF HEATING, N.O.S. (a) 3205 ALKALINE EARTH METAL ALCOHOLATES, N.O.S. 3200 PYROPHORIC SOLID, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 3190 SELF HEATING SOLID, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 3391 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANCE, SOLID, PYROPHORIC Organo-metallic S5 3392 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, PYROPHORIC 3400 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANCE, SOLID, SELF-HEATING Articles S6 3542 ARTICLES CONTAINING A SUBSTANCE LIABLE TO SPONTANEOUS COMBUSTION, N.O.S. 3393 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANCE, SOLID, PYROPHORIC, WATER- REACTIVE Water-reactive SW 3394 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, PYROPHORIC, WATER- REACTIVE Oxidizing SO 3127 SELF-HEATING SOLID, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. (not accepted for carriage, see 2.2.42.2) liquid ST1 3184 SELF HEATING LIQUID, TOXIC, ORGANIC, N.O.S. organic solid ST2 3128 SELF HEATING SOLID, TOXIC, ORGANIC, N.O.S. Toxic ST liquid ST3 3187 SELF HEATING LIQUID, TOXIC, INORGANIC, N.O.S. inorganic solid ST4 3191 SELF HEATING SOLID, TOXIC, INORGANIC, N.O.S. liquid SC1 3185 SELF HEATING LIQUID, CORROSIVE, ORGANIC, N.O.S. Corrosive organic solid SC2 3126 SELF HEATING SOLID, CORROSIVE, ORGANIC, N.O.S. SC liquid SC3 3188 SELF HEATING LIQUID, CORROSIVE, INORGANIC, N.O.S. inorganic solid SC4 3206 ALKALI METAL ALCOHOLATES, SELF HEATING, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 3192 SELF HEATING SOLID, CORROSIVE, INORGANIC, N.O.S. Footnotes (a) Dust and powder of metals, non toxic in a non-spontaneous combustible form which nevertheless, in contact with water, emit flammable gases, are substances of Class 4.3. 2.2.43 Class 4.3: Substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases 2.2.43.1 Criteria 2.2.43.1.1 The heading of Class 4.3 covers substances which react with water to emit flammable gases liable to form explosive mixtures with air, and articles containing such substances. 2.2.43.1.2 Substances and articles of Class 4.3 are subdivided as follows: W Substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases, without subsidiary hazard, and articles containing such substances: W1 Liquid; W2 Solid; W3 Articles; WF1 Substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases, liquid, flammable; WF2 Substances which, in contact with water, emit flamma ble gases, solid, flammable; WS Substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases, solid, self-heating; WO Substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases, oxidizing, solid; WT Substances which, in contact with water, emit flamma ble gases, toxic: WT1 Liquid; WT2 Solid; WC Substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases, corrosive: WC1 Liquid; WC2 Solid; WFC Substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases, flammable, corrosive. Properties 2.2.43.1.3 Certain substances in contact with water may emit flammable gases that can form explosive mixtures with air. Such mixtures are easily ignited by all ordinary sources of ignition, for example naked lights, sparking handtools or unprotected lamps. The resulting blast wave and flames may endanger people and the environment. The test method referred to in 2.2.43.1.4 below is used to determine whether the reaction of a substance with water leads to the development of a dangerous amount of gases which may be flammable. This test method shall not be applied to pyrophoric substances. Classification 2.2.43.1.4 Substances and articles classified in Class 4.3 are listed in Table A of Chapter 3.2. The assignment of substances and articles not mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 to the relevant entry of 2.2.43.3 in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2.1 shall be based on the results of the test procedure in accordance with the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 33.5; experience shall also be taken into account when it leads to a more stringent assignment. 2.2.43.1.5 When substances not mentioned by name are assigned to one of the entries listed in 2.2.43.3 on the basis of the test procedure in accordance with the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 33.5, the following criteria shall apply: A substance shall be assigned to Class 4.3 if: (a) spontaneous ignition of the gas emitted takes place in any step of the test procedure; or (b) there is an evolution of flammable gas at a rate greater than 1 litre per kilogramme of the substance to be tested per hour. NOTE: Since organometallic substances can be classified in Class 4.2 or 4.3 with additional subsidiary hazards, depending on their properties, a specific classification flow chart for these substances is given in 2.3.5. 2.2.43.1.6 If substances of Class 4.3, as a result of admixtures, come into different categories of hazard from those to which the substances mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 belong, these mixtures shall be assigned to the entries to which they belong on the basis of their actual degree of danger. NOTE: For the classification of solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes) see also 2.1.3. 2.2.43.1.7 On the basis of the test procedures in accordance with the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 33.5, and the criteria set out in 2.2.43.1.5, it may also be determined whether the nature of a substance mentioned by name is such that the substance is not subject to the provisions for this Class. Assignment of packing groups 2.2.43.1.8 Substances and articles classified under the various entries in Table A of Chapter 3.2 shall be assigned to packing groups I, II or III on the basis of test procedures of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 33.5, in accordance with the following criteria: (a) Packing group I shall be assigned to any substance which reacts vigorously with water at ambient temperature and generally demonstrates a tendency for the gas produced to ignite spontaneously, or one which reacts readily with water at ambient temperatures such that the rate of evolution of flammable gas is equal to or greater than 10 litres per kilogramme of substance over any one minute period; (b) Packing group II shall be assigned to any substance which reacts readily with water at ambient temperature such that the maximum rate of evolution of flammable gas is equal to or greater than 20 litres per kilogramme of substance per hour, and which does not meet the criteria of packing group I; (c) Packing group III shall be assigned to any substance which reacts slowly with water at ambient temperature such that the maximum rate of evolution of flammable gas is greater than 1 litre per kilogramme of substance per hour, and which does not meet the criteria of packing groups I or II. 2.2.43.2 Substances not accepted for carriage Water reactive solids, oxidizing, assigned to UN No. 3133 shall not be accepted for carriage unless they meet the requirements for Class 1 (see also 2.1.3.7). 2.2.43.3 List of collective entries Subsidiary hazard Classification code UN Name of the substance or article No. Substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases 1389 ALKALI METAL AMALGAM, LIQUID 1391 ALKALI METAL DISPERSION or 1391 ALKALINE EARTH METAL DISPERSION liquid W1 1392 ALKALINE EARTH METAL AMALGAM, LIQUID 1420 POTASSIUM METAL ALLOYS, LIQUID 1422 POTASSIUM SODIUM ALLOYS, LIQUID 3398 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, WATER-REACTIVE 1421 ALKALI METAL ALLOY, LIQUID, N.O.S. 3148 WATER REACTIVE LIQUID, N.O.S. without subsidiary hazard 1390 ALKALI METAL AMIDES 3170 ALUMINIUM SMELTING BY-PRODUCTS or 3170 ALUMINIUM REMELTING BY-PRODUCTS W solid W2 (a) 3401 ALKALI METAL AMALGAM, SOLID 3402 ALKALINE EARTH METAL AMALGAM, SOLID 3403 POTASSIUM METAL ALLOYS, SOLID 3404 POTASSIUM SODIUM ALLOYS, SOLID 3395 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANCE, SOLID, WATER-REACTIVE 1393 ALKALINE EARTH METAL ALLOY, N.O.S. 1409 METAL HYDRIDES, WATER REACTIVE, N.O.S. 3208 METALLIC SUBSTANCE, WATER REACTIVE, N.O.S. 2813 WATER REACTIVE SOLID, N.O.S. Articles W3 3292 BATTERIES, CONTAINING SODIUM or 3292 CELLS, CONTAI NING SODIUM 3543 ARTICLES CONTAINING A SUBSTANCE WHICH IN CONTACT WITH WATER EMITS FLAMMABLE GASES, N.O.S. 3482 ALKALI METAL DISPERSION, FLAMMABLE or 3482 ALKALINE EARTH METAL DISPERSION, FLAMMABLE Liquid, flammable WF1 3399 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, WATER-REACTIVE, FLAMMABLE Solid, flammable WF2 3396 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANCE, SOLID, WATER-REACTIVE, FLAMMABLE 3132 WATER REACTIVE SOLID, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 3397 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANCE, SOLID, WATER-REACTIVE, SELF-HEATING Solid, self heating WS (b) 3209 METALLIC SUBSTANCE, WATER REACTIVE, SELF HEATING, N.O.S. 3135 WATER REACTIVE SOLID, SELF HEATING, N.O.S. Solid, oxidizing WO 3133 WATER REACTIVE SOLID, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. (not accepted for carriage, see 2.2.43.2) liquid WT1 3130 WATER REACTIVE LIQUID, TOXIC, N.O.S. Toxic solid WT2 3134 WATER REACTIVE SOLID, TOXIC, N.O.S. WT liquid WC1 3129 WATER REACTIVE LIQUID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. Corrosive solid WC2 3131 WATER REACTIVE SOLID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. WC Flammable, corrosive WFC (c) 2988 CHLOROSILANES, WATER REACTIVE, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, NO.S. (No other collective entry with this classification code available; if need be, classification under a collective entry with a classification code to be determined according to the table of precedence of hazard in 2.1.3.10.) Footnotes (a) Metals and metal alloys which, in contact with water, do not emit flammable gases and are not pyrophoric or self-heating, but which are readily flammable, are substances of Class 4.1. Alkaline-earth metals and alkaline-earth metal alloys in pyrophoric form are substances of Class 4.2 Dust and powders of metals in pyrophoric form are substances of Class 4.2. Metals and metal alloys in pyrophoric form are substances of Class 4.2. Compounds of phosphorus with heavy metals such as iron, copper, etc. are not subject to the provisions of RID . (b) Metals and metal alloys in pyrophoric form are substances of Class 4.2. (c) Chlorosilanes, having a flash-point of less than 23 °C and which, in contact with water, do not emit flammable gases, are substances of Class 3. Chlorosilanes, having a flash-point equal to or greater than 23 °C and which, in contact with water, do not emit flammable gases, are substances of Class 8. 2.2.51 Class 5.1: Oxidizing substances 2.2.51.1 Criteria 2.2.51.1.1 The heading of Class 5.1 covers substances which, while in themselves not necessarily combustible, may, generally by yielding oxygen, cause or contribute to the combustion of other material, and articles containing such substances. 2.2.51.1.2 The substances of Class 5.1 and articles containing such substances are subdivided as follows: O Oxidizing substances without subsidiary hazard or articles containing such substances: O1 Liquid; O2 Solid; O3 Articles; OF Oxidizing substances, solid, flammable; OS Oxidizing substances, solid, self-heating; OW Oxidizing substances, solid which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases; OT Oxidizing substances, toxic: OT1 Liquid; OT2 Solid; OC Oxidizing substances, corrosive: OC1 Liquid; OC2 Solid; OTC Oxidizing substances, toxic, corrosive. 2.2.51.1.3 Substances and articles classified in Class 5.1 are listed in Table A of Chapter 3.2. The assignment of substances and articles not mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 to the relevant entry of 2.2.51.3 in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2.1 can be based on the tests, methods and criteria in 2.2.51.1.6 to 2.2.51.1.10 below and the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, Section 34.4 or, for solid ammonium nitrate based fertilizers, Section 39 subject to the restrictions of 2.2.51.2.2, thirteenth and fourteenth indents. In the event of divergence between test results and known experience, judgement based on known experience shall take precedence over test results. 2.2.51.1.4 If substances of Class 5.1, as a result of admixtures, come into different categories of hazard from those to which the substances mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 belong, these mixtures or solutions shall be assigned to the entries to which they belong on the basis of their actual degree of danger. NOTE: For the classification of solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes), see also Section 2.1.3. 2.2.51.1.5 On the basis of the test procedures in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, Section 34.4 or, for solid ammonium nitrate based fertilizers, Section 39, and the criteria set out in 2.2.51.1.6 to 2.2.51.1.10 it may also be determined whether the nature of a substance mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 is such that the substance is not subject to the provisions for this class. Oxidizing solids Classification 2.2.51.1.6 When oxidizing solid substances not mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 are assigned to one of the entries listed in 2.2.51.3 on the basis of the test procedure in accordance with the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 34.4.1 (test O.1) or alternatively, sub section 34.4.3 (test O.3), the following criteria shall apply: (a) In the test O.1, a solid substance shall be assigned to Class 5.1 if, in the 4:1 or the 1:1 sample-to-cellulose ratio (by mass) tested, it ignites or burns or exhibits mean burning times equal to or less than that of a 3:7 mixture (by mass) of potassium bromate and cellulose; or (b) In the test O.3, a solid substance shall be assigned to Class 5.1 if, in the 4:1 or the 1:1 sample-to-cellulose ratio (by mass) tested, it exhibits a mean burning rate equal to or greater than the mean burning rate of a 1:2 mixture (by mass) of calcium peroxide and cellulose. 2.2.51.1.7 By exception, solid ammonium nitrate based fertilizers shall be classified in accordance with the procedure as set out in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, Section 39. Assignment of packing groups 2.2.51.1.8 Oxidizing solids classified under the various entries in Table A of Chapter 3.2 shall be assigned to packing groups I, II or III on the basis of test procedures of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 34.4.1 (test O.1) or sub-section 34.4.3 (test O.3), in accordance with the following criteria: (a) Test O.1: (i) Packing group I: any substance which, in the 4:1 or 1:1 sample-to-cellulose ratio (by mass) tested, exhibits a mean burning time less than the mean burning time of a 3:2 mixture, by mass, of potassium bromate and cellulose; (ii) Packing group II: any substance which, in the 4:1 or 1:1 sample-to-cellulose ratio (by mass) tested, exhibits a mean burning time equal to or less than the mean burning time of a 2:3 mixture (by mass) of potassium bromate and cellulose and the criteria for packing group I are not met; (iii) Packing group III: any substance which, in the 4:1 or 1:1 sample-to-cellulose ratio (by mass) tested, exhibits a mean burning time equal to or less than the mean burning time of a 3:7 mixture (by mass) of potassium bromate and cellulose and the criteria for packing groups I and II are not met; (b) Test O.3: (i) Packing group I: any substance which, in the 4:1 or 1:1 sample-to-cellulose ratio (by mass) tested, exhibits a mean burning rate greater than the mean burning rate of a 3:1 mixture (by mass) of calcium peroxide and cellulose; (ii) Packing group II: any substance which, in the 4:1 or 1:1 sample-to-cellulose ratio (by mass) tested, exhibits a mean burning rate equal to or greater than the mean burning rate of a 1:1 mixture (by mass) of calcium peroxide and cellulose, and the criteria for packing group I are not met; (iii) Packing group III: any substance which, in the 4:1 or 1:1 sample-to-cellulose ratio (by mass) tested, exhibits a mean burning rate equal to or greater than the mean burning rate of a 1:2 mixture (by mass) of calcium peroxide and cellulose, and the criteria for packing groups I and II are not met. Oxidizing liquids Classification 2.2.51.1.9 When oxidizing liquid substances not mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 are assigned to one of the entries listed in 2.2.51.3 on the basis of the test procedure in accordance with the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 34.4.2, the following criteria shall apply: A liquid substance shall be assigned to Class 5.1 if, in the 1:1 mixture, by mass, of substance and cellulose tested, it exhibits a pressure rise of 2070 kPa gauge or more and a mean pressure rise time equal to or less than the mean pressure rise time of a 1:1 mixture, by mass, of 65% aqueous nitric acid and cellulose. Assignment of packing groups 2.2.51.1.10 Oxidizing liquids classified under the various entries in Table A of Chapter 3.2 shall be assigned to packing groups I, II or III on the basis of test procedures of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, section 34.4.2, in accordance with the following criteria: (a) Packing group I: any substance which, in the 1:1 mixture, by mass, of substance and cellulose tested, spontaneously ignites; or the mean pressure rise time of a 1:1 mixture, by mass, of substance and cellulose is less than that of a 1:1 mixture, by mass, of 50% perchloric acid and cellulose; (b) Packing group II: any substance which, in the 1:1 mixture, by mass, of substance and cellulose tested, exhibits a mean pressure rise time less than or equal to the mean pressure rise time of a 1:1 mixture, by mass, of 40% aqueous sodium chlorate solution and cellulose; and the criteria for packing group I are not met; (c) Packing group III: any substance which, in the 1:1 mixture, by mass, of substance and cellulose tested, exhibits a mean pressure rise time less than or equal to the mean pressure rise time of a 1:1 mixture, by mass, of 65% aqueous nitric acid and cellulose; and the criteria for packing groups I and II are not met. 2.2.51.2 Substances not accepted for carriage 2.2.51.2.1 The chemically unstable substances of Class 5.1 shall not be accepted for carriage unless the necessary steps have been taken to prevent their dangerous decomposition or polymerization during carriage. To this end it shall in particular be ensured that receptacles and tanks do not contain any material liable to promote these reactions. 2.2.51.2.2 The following substances and mixtures shall not be accepted for carriage: – Oxidizing solids, self-heating, assigned to UN No. 3100, oxidizing solids, water-reactive, assigned to UN No. 3121 and oxidizing solids, flammable, assigned to UN No. 3137, unless they meet the requirements for Class 1 (see also 2.1.3.7); – Hydrogen peroxide, not stabilized or hydrogen peroxide, aqueous solutions, not stabilized containing more than 60% hydrogen peroxide; – Tetranitromethane not free from combustible impurities; – Perchloric acid solutions containing more than 72% (mass) acid, or mixtures of perchloric acid with any liquid other than water; – Chloric acid solution containing more than 10% chloric acid or mixtures of chloric acid with any liquid other than water; – Halogenated fluor compounds other than UN Nos. 1745 BROMINE PENTAFLUORIDE; 1746 BROMINE TRIFLUORIDE and 2495 IODINE PENTAFLUORIDE of Class 5.1 as well as UN Nos. 1749 CHLORINE TRIFLUORIDE and 2548 CHLORINE PENTAFLUORIDE of Class 2; – Ammonium chlorate and its aqueous solutions and mixtures of a chlorate with an ammonium salt ; – Ammonium chlorite and its aqueous solutions and mixtures of a chlorite with an ammonium salt; – Mixtures of a hypochlorite with an ammonium salt; – Ammonium bromate and its aqueous solutions and mixtures of a bromate with an ammonium salt; – Ammonium permanganate and its aqueous solutions and mixtures of a permanganate with an ammonium salt; – Ammonium nitrate containing more than 0.2% combustible substances (including any organic substance calculated as carbon) unless it is a constituent of a substance or article of Class 1; – Ammonium nitrate based fertilizers with compositions that lead to exit boxes 4, 6, 8, 15, 31, or 33 of the flowchart of paragraph 39.5.1 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, Section 39, unless they have been assigned a suitable UN number in Class 1; – Ammonium nitrate based fertilizers with compositions that lead to exit boxes 20, 23 or 39 of the flowchart of paragraph 39.5.1 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, Section 39, unless they have been assigned a suitable UN number in Class 1 or, provided that the suitability for carriage has been demonstrated and that this has been approved by the competent authority, in Class 5.1 other than UN No. 2067; NOTE: The term "competent authority" means the competent authority of the country of origin. If the country of origin is not an RID Contracting State, the classification and conditions of carriage shall be recognized by the competent authority of the first RID Contracting State reached by the consignment. – Ammonium nitrite and its aqueous solutions and mixtures of an inorganic nitrite with an ammonium salt; – Mixtures of potassium nitrate, sodium nitrite and an ammonium salt. 2.2.51.3 List of collective entries Subsidiary hazard Classification code UN Name of the substance or article No. Oxidizing substances and articles containing such substances 3210 CHLORATES, INORGANIC, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N.O.S. 3211 PERCHLORATES, INORGANIC, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N.O.S. 3213 BROMATES, INORGANIC, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N.O.S. 3214 PERMANGANATES, INORGANIC, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N.O.S. liquid O1 3216 PERSULPHATES, INORGANIC, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N.O.S. 3218 NITRATES, INORGANIC, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N.O.S. 3219 NITRITES, INORGANIC, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N.O.S. 3139 OXIDIZING LIQUID, N.O.S. 1450 BROMATES, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 1461 CHLORATES, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 1462 CHLORITES, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 1477 NITRATES, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 1481 PERCHLORATES, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 1482 PERMANGANATES, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 1483 PEROXIDES, INORGANIC, N.O.S. Without solid O2 2627 NITRITES, INORGANIC, N.O.S. subsidiary 3212 HYPOCHLORITES, INORGANIC, N.O.S. hazard 3215 PERSULPHATES, INORGANIC, N.O.S. O 1479 OXIDIZING SOLID, N.O.S. articles O3 3356 OXYGEN GENERATOR, CHEMICAL 3544 ARTICLES CONTAINING OXIDIZING SUBSTANCE, N.O.S. Solid, flammable OF 3137 OXIDIZING SOLID, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. (not accepted for carriage, see 2.2.51.2) Solid, self-heating OS 3100 OXIDIZING SOLID, SELF-HEATING, N.O.S. (not accepted for carriage, see 2.2.51.2) Solid, water reactive OW 3121 OXIDIZING SOLID, WATER REACTIVE, N.O.S. (not accepted for carriage, see 2.2.51.2) liquid OT1 3099 OXIDIZING LIQUID, TOXIC, N.O.S. Toxic OT solid OT2 3087 OXIDIZING SOLID, TOXIC, N.O.S. liquid OC1 3098 OXIDIZING LIQUID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. Corrosive OC solid OC2 3085 OXIDIZING SOLID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. Toxic, corrosive OTC (No collective entry with this classification code available; if need be, classification under a collective entry with a classification code to be determined according to the table of precedence of hazard in 2.1.3.10.) 2.2.52 Class 5.2: Organic peroxides 2.2.52.1 Criteria 2.2.52.1.1 The heading of Class 5.2 covers organic peroxides and formulations of organic peroxides. 2.2.52.1.2 The substances of Class 5.2 are subdivided as follows: P1 Organic peroxides, not requiring temperature control; P2 Organic peroxides, requiring temperature control (not accepted for carriage by rail). Definition 2.2.52.1.3 Organic peroxides are organic substances which contain the bivalent O O structure and may be considered derivatives of hydrogen peroxide, where one or both of the hydrogen atoms have been replaced by organic radicals. Properties 2.2.52.1.4 Organic peroxides are liable to exothermic decomposition at normal or elevated temperatures. The decomposition can be initiated by heat, contact with impurities (e.g. acids, heavy metal compounds, amines), friction or impact. The rate of decomposition increases with temperature and varies with the organic peroxide formulation. Decomposition may result in the evolution of harmful, or flammable, gases or vapours. Some organic peroxides may decompose explosively, particularly if confined. This characteristic may be modified by the addition of diluents or by the use of appropriate packagings. Many organic peroxides burn vigorously. Contact of organic peroxides with the eyes is to be avoided. Some organic peroxides will cause serious injury to the cornea, even after brief contact, or will be corrosive to the skin. NOTE: Test methods for determining the flammability of organic peroxides are set out in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 32.4. Because organic peroxides may react vigorously when heated, it is recommended to determine their flash-point using small sample sizes such as described in ISO 3679:1983. Classification 2.2.52.1.5 Any organic peroxide shall be considered for classification in Class 5.2 unless the organic peroxide formulation contains: (a) Not more than 1.0% available oxygen from the organic peroxides when containing not more than 1.0% hydrogen peroxide; (b) Not more than 0.5% available oxygen from the organic peroxides when containing more than 1.0% but not more than 7.0% hydrogen peroxide. NOTE: The available oxygen content (%) of an organic peroxide formulation is given by the formula 16 × (n i × c i /m i ) where: n i = number of peroxygen groups per molecule of organic peroxide i; c i = concentration (mass %) of organic peroxide i; and m i = molecular mass of organic peroxide i. 2.2.52.1.6 Organic peroxides are classified into seven types according to the degree of danger they present. The types of organic peroxide range from type A, which is not accepted for carriage in the packaging in which it is tested, to type G, which is not subject to the provisions of Class 5.2. The classification of types B to F is directly related to the maximum quantity allowed in one package. The principles to be applied to the classification of substances not listed in 2.2.52.4 are set out in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part II. 2.2.52.1.7 Organic peroxides which have already been classified and are already permitted for carriage in packagings are listed in 2.2.52.4, those already permitted for carriage in IBCs are listed in 4.1.4.2, packing instruction IBC520 and those already permitted for carriage in tanks in accordance with Chapters 4.2 and 4.3 are listed in 4.2.5.2, portable tank instruction T23. Each permitted substance listed is assigned to a generic entry of Table A of Chapter 3.2 (UN Nos. 3101 to 3120) and appropriate subsidiary hazards and remarks providing relevant transport information are given. These generic entries specify: – the type (B to F) of organic peroxide (see 2.2.52.1.6 above); – physical state (liquid/solid). Mixtures of these formulations may be classified as the same type of organic peroxide as that of the most dangerous component and be carried under the conditions of carriage given for this type. However, as two stable components can form a thermally less stable mixture, the self-accelerating decomposition temperature (SADT) of the mixture shall be determined. 2.2.52.1.8 Classification of organic peroxides not listed in 2.2.52.4, 4.1.4.2 , packing instruction IBC520 or 4.2.5.2, portable tank instruction T23, and assignment to a collective entry shall be made by the competent authority of the country of origin. The statement of approval shall contain the classification and the relevant conditions of carriage. If the country of origin is not an RID Contracting State, the classification and conditions of carriage shall be recognized by the competent authority of the first RID Contracting State reached by the consignment. 2.2.52.1.9 Samples of organic peroxides or formulations of organic peroxides not listed in 2.2.52.4, for which a complete set of test results is not available and which are to be carried for further testing or evaluation, shall be assigned to one of the appropriate entries for organic peroxides type C provided the following conditions are met: – the available data indicate that the sample would be no more dangerous than organic peroxides type B; – the sample is packaged in accordance with packing method OP2 and the quantity per wagon is limited to 10 kg. Samples requiring temperature control shall not be accepted for carriage by rail. Desensitization of organic peroxides 2.2.52.1.10 In order to ensure safety during carriage, organic peroxides are in many cases desensitized by organic liquids or solids, inorganic solids or water. Where a percentage of a substance is stipulated, this refers to the percentage by mass, rounded to the nearest whole number. In general, desensitization shall be such that, in case of spillage, the organic peroxide will not concentrate to a dangerous extent. 2.2.52.1.11 Unless otherwise stated for the individual organic peroxide formulation, the following definition(s) shall apply to diluents used for desensitization: – diluents type A are organic liquids which are compatible with the organic peroxide and which have a boiling point of not less than 150 °C. Type A diluents may be used for desensitizing all organic peroxides. – diluents type B are organic liquids which are compatible with the organic peroxide and which have a boiling point of less than 150 °C but not less than 60 °C and a flash point of not less than 5 °C. Type B diluents may be used for desensitization of all organic peroxides, provided that the boiling point of the liquid is at least 60 °C higher than the SADT in a 50 kg package. 2.2.52.1.12 Diluents, other than type A or type B, may be added to organic peroxide formulations as listed in 2.2.52.4, provided that they are compatible. However, replacement of all or part of a type A or type B diluent by another diluent with differing properties requires that the organic peroxide formulation be re-assessed in accordance with the normal acceptance procedure for Class 5.2. 2.2.52.1.13 Water may only be used for the desensitization of organic peroxides which are listed in 2.2.52.4 or in the competent authority decision according to 2.2.52.1.8 as being "with water" or "as a stable dispersion in water". Samples of organic peroxides or formulations of organic peroxides not listed in 2.2.52.4 may also be desensitized with water provided the requirements of 2.2.52.1.9 are met. 2.2.52.1.14 Organic and inorganic solids may be used for desensitization of organic peroxides, provided that they are compatible. Compatible liquids and solids are those which have no detrimental influence on the thermal stability and hazard type of the organic peroxide formulation. 2.2.52.1.15 – 2.2.52.1.16 (Reserved) 2.2.52.2 Substances not accepted for carriage The following organic peroxides shall not be accepted for carriage under the requirements of Class 5.2: – Organic peroxides, type A (see Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part II, paragraph 20.4.3 (a)). The following organic peroxides requiring temperature control are not to be accepted for carriage by rail: – Organic peroxides, types B and C with an SADT ≤ 50 °C: UN 3111 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE B, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED; UN 3112 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE B, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED; UN 3113 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE C, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED; UN 3114 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE C, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED; – Organic peroxides type D showing a violent or medium effect when heated under confinement with an SADT ≤ 50 °C or showing a low or no effect when heated under confinement with an SADT ≤ 45 °C: UN 3115 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE D, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED; UN 3116 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE D, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED; – Organic peroxides types E and F with an SADT ≤ 45 °C: UN 3117 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE E, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED; UN 3118 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE E, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED; UN 3119 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED; UN 3120 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 2.2.52.3 List of collective entries Classification code UN Name of the substance or article No. Organic peroxides ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE A, LIQUID ( not accepted for carriage, see 2.2.52.2 ) ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE A, SOLID ( not accepted for carriage, see 2.2.52.2 ) 3101 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE B, LIQUID 3102 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE B, SOLID 3103 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE C, LIQUID 3104 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE C, SOLID Not requiring P1 3105 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE D, LIQUID temperature control 3106 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE D, SOLID 3107 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE E, LIQUID 3108 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE E, SOLID 3109 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, LIQUID 3110 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, SOLID ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE G, LIQUID ( not subject to the provisions applicable to Class 5.2, see 2.2.52.1.6 ) ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE G, SOLID ( not subject to the provisions applicable to Class 5.2, see 2.2.52.1.6 ) 3545 ARTICLES CONTAINING ORGANIC PEROXIDE, N.O.S. 3111 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE B, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED ( not accepted for carriage by rail, see 2.2.52.2) 3112 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE B, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED ( not accepted for carriage by rail, see 2.2.52.2) 3113 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE C, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED ( not accepted for carriage by rail, see 2.2.52.2) 3114 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE C, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED ( not accepted for carriage by rail, see 2.2.52.2) Requiring temperature control P2 3115 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE D, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED ( not accepted for carriage by rail, see 2.2.52.2) 3116 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE D, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED ( not accepted for carriage by rail, see 2.2.52.2) 3117 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE E, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED ( not accepted for carriage by rail, see 2.2.52.2) 3118 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE E, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED ( not accepted for carriage by rail, see 2.2.52.2) 3119 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED ( not accepted for carriage by rail, see 2.2.52.2) 3120 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, SOLID, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED ( not accepted for carriage by rail, see 2.2.52.2) 2.2.52.4 List of currently assigned organic peroxides in packagings In the column "Packing Method", codes "OP1" to "OP8" refer to packing methods in 4.1.4.1 packing instruction P520 (see also 4.1.7.1). Organic peroxides to be carried shall fulfil the classification as listed. For substances permitted in IBCs, see 4.1.4.2, packing instruction IBC520 and, for those permitted in tanks according to Chapters 4.2 and 4.3, see 4.2.5.2.6 , portable tank instruction T23. The formulations not listed in this sub-section but listed in packing instruction IBC 520 of 4.1.4.2 and in portable tank instruction T 23 of 4.2.5.2.6 may also be carried packed in accordance with packing method OP8 of packing instruction P 520 of 4.1.4.1. Organic peroxide Concentration (%) Diluent type A (%) Diluent type B (%) 1 Inert solid (%) Water Packing method Number (generic entry) Subsidiary hazards and remarks ACETYL ACETONE PEROXIDE ≤ 42 ≥ 48 ≥ 8 OP7 3105 (2) " ≤ 32 as a paste OP7 3106 (20) " ≤ 35 ≥ 57 ≥ 8 OP8 3107 (32) ACETYL CYCLOHEXANESULPHONYL PEROXIDE ≤ 82 ≥ 12 3112 prohibited " ≤ 32 ≥ 68 3115 prohibited tert AMYL HYDROPEROXIDE ≤ 88 ≥ 6 ≥ 6 OP8 3107 tert-AMYL PEROXYACETATE ≤ 62 ≥ 38 OP7 3105 tert AMYL PEROXYBENZOATE ≤ 100 OP5 3103 tert AMYL PEROXY 2 ETHYLHEXANOATE ≤ 100 3115 prohibited tert-AMYL PEROXY-2-ETHYLHEXYL CARBONATE ≤ 100 OP7 3105 tert-AMYLPEROXY ISOPROPYL CARBONATE 77 23 OP5 3103 tert AMYL PEROXYNEODECANOATE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 3115 prohibited “ ≤ 47 53 3119 prohibited tert AMYL PEROXYPIVALATE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 3113 prohibited tert AMYLPEROXY 3,5,5 TRIMETHYLHEXANOATE ≤ 100 OP7 3105 tert BUTYL CUMYL PEROXIDE > 42 – 100 OP8 3109 " ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP8 3108 n BUTYL 4,4 DI (tert BUTYLPEROXY) VALERATE > 52 – 100 OP5 3103 " ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP8 3108 tert BUTYL HYDROPEROXIDE > 79 – 90 ≥ 10 OP5 3103 (13) " ≤ 80 ≥ 20 OP7 3105 (4) (13) " ≤ 79 > 14 OP8 3107 (13) (23) " ≤ 72 ≥ 28 OP8 3109 (13) tert BUTYL HYDROPEROXIDE + DI tert BUTYLPEROXIDE < 82 + > 9 ≥ 7 OP5 3103 (13) tert BUTYL MONOPEROXYMALEATE > 52 – 100 OP5 3102 (3) " ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP6 3103 " ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP8 3108 " ≤ 52 as a paste OP8 3108 tert BUTYL PEROXYACETATE > 52 – 77 ≥ 23 OP5 3101 (3) " > 32 – 52 ≥ 48 OP6 3103 " ≤ 32 ≥ 68 OP8 3109 tert BUTYL PEROXYBENZOATE > 77 – 100 OP5 3103 " > 52 – 77 ≥ 23 OP7 3105 " ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP7 3106 tert-BUTYL PEROXYBUTYL FUMARATE ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP7 3105 tert BUTYL PEROXYCROTONATE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP7 3105 tert BUTYL PEROXYDIETHYLACETATE ≤ 100 3113 prohibited tert BUTYL PEROXY 2 ETHYLHEXANOATE > 52 – 100 3113 prohibited " > 32 – 52 ≥ 48 3117 prohibited " ≤ 32 ≥ 48 3118 prohibited " ≤ 32 ≥ 68 3119 prohibited tert BUTYL PEROXY 2 ETHYLHEXANOATE + 2,2 DI (tert BUTYLPEROXY)BUTANE ≤ 12 + ≤ 14 ≥ 14 ≥ 60 OP7 3106 " ≤ 31 + ≤ 36 ≥ 33 3115 prohibited tert-BUTYL PEROXY-2-ETHYLHEXYLCARBONATE ≤ 100 OP7 3105 tert BUTYL PEROXYISOBUTYRATE > 52 – 77 ≥ 23 3111 prohibited " ≤ 52 ≥ 48 3115 prohibited tert BUTYLPEROXY ISOPROPYLCARBONATE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP5 3103 " ≤ 62 ≥ 38 OP7 3105 1-(2-tert-BUTYLPEROXY ISOPROPYL)-3- ISOPROPENYLBENZENE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP7 3105 " ≤ 42 ≥ 58 OP8 3108 tert-BUTYL PEROXY-2-METHYLBENZOATE ≤ 100 OP5 3103 tert BUTYL PEROXYNEODECANOATE > 77 – 100 3115 prohibited " ≤ 77 ≥ 23 3115 prohibited " ≤ 52 as a stable dispersion in water 3119 prohibited " ≤ 42 as a stable dispersion in water (frozen) 3118 prohibited " ≤ 32 ≥ 68 3119 prohibited tert-BUTYL PEROXYNEOHEPTANOATE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 3115 prohibited " 42 as a stable dispersion in water 3117 prohibited tert BUTYL PEROXYPIVALATE > 67 – 77 ≥ 23 3113 prohibited " > 27 – 67 ≥ 33 3115 prohibited " ≤ 27 ≥ 73 3119 prohibited tert BUTYL PEROXY STEARYLCARBONATE ≤ 100 OP7 3106 tert BUTYL PEROXY 3,5,5 TRIMETHYLHEXANOATE > 37 – 100 OP7 3105 “ ≤ 42 ≥ 58 OP7 3106 " ≤ 37 ≥ 63 OP8 3109 3 CHLOROPEROXYBENZOIC ACID > 57 – 86 ≥ 14 OP1 3102 (3) " ≤ 57 ≥ 3 ≥ 40 OP7 3106 " ≤ 77 ≥ 6 ≥ 17 OP7 3106 CUMYL HYDROPEROXIDE > 90 – 98 ≤ 10 OP8 3107 (13) " ≤ 90 ≥ 10 OP8 3109 (13) (18) CUMYL PEROXYNEODECANOATE ≤ 87 ≥ 13 3115 prohibited “ ≤ 77 ≥ 23 3115 prohibited " ≤ 52 as a stable dispersion in water 3119 prohibited CUMYL PEROXYNEOHEPTANOATE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 3115 prohibited CUMYL PEROXYPIVALATE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 3115 prohibited CYCLOHEXANONE PEROXIDE(S) ≤ 91 ≥ 9 OP6 3104 (13) " ≤ 72 ≥ 28 OP7 3105 (5) " ≤ 72 as a paste OP7 3106 (5) (20) " ≤ 32 ≥ 68 exempt (29) ([3R-(3R,5aS,6S,8aS,9R,10R,12S, 12aR**)]-DECAHYDRO-10-METHOXY-3,6,9-TRIMETHYL-3,12-EPOXY-12H-PYRANO[4,3-j]-1,2-BENZODIOXEPIN) ≤ 100 OP7 3106 DIACETONE ALCOHOL PEROXIDES ≤ 57 ≥ 26 ≥ 8 3115 prohibited DIACETYL PEROXIDE ≤ 27 ≥ 73 3115 prohibited DI tert AMYL PEROXIDE ≤ 100 OP8 3107 2,2-DI-(tert-AMYL PEROXY)-BUTANE ≤ 57 ≥ 43 OP7 3105 1,1-DI-(tert-AMYLPEROXY)CYCLOHEXANE ≤ 82 ≥ 18 OP6 3103 DIBENZOYL PEROXIDE > 52 – 100 ≤ 48 OP2 3102 (3) " > 77 – 94 ≥ 6 OP4 3102 (3) " ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP6 3104 " ≤ 62 ≥ 28 ≥ 10 OP7 3106 " > 52 – 62 as a paste OP7 3106 (20) " > 35 – 52 ≥ 48 OP7 3106 " > 36 – 42 ≥ 18 ≤ 40 OP8 3107 " ≤ 56.5 as a paste ≥ 15 OP8 3108 " ≤ 52 as a paste OP8 3108 (20) " ≤ 42 as a stable dispersion in water OP8 3109 " ≤ 35 ≥ 65 exempt (29) DI (4 tert BUTYLCYCLOHEXYL)-PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 100 3114 prohibited " ≤ 42 as a stable dispersion in water 3119 prohibited " ≤ 42 as a paste 3118 prohibited DI tert BUTYL PEROXIDE > 52 – 100 OP8 3107 " ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP8 3109 (25) DI-tert-BUTYL PEROXYAZELATE ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP7 3105 2,2 DI (tert BUTYLPEROXY)BUTANE ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP6 3103 1,6-Di-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY-CARBONYLOXY) HEXANE ≤ 72 ≥ 28 OP5 3103 1,1 DI (tert BUTYLPEROXY) CYCLOHEXANE > 80 – 100 OP5 3101 (3) “ ≤ 72 ≥ 28 OP5 3103 (30) " > 52 – 80 ≥ 20 OP5 3103 " > 42 – 52 ≥ 48 OP7 3105 " ≤ 42 ≥ 13 ≥ 45 OP7 3106 " ≤ 42 ≥ 58 OP8 3109 " ≤ 27 ≥ 25 OP8 3107 (21) " ≤ 13 ≥ 13 ≥ 74 OP8 3109 1,1 DI (tert BUTYLPEROXY) CYCLOHEXANE + tert-BUTYL PEROXY-2-ETHYLHEXANOATE ≤ 43 + ≤ 16 ≥ 41 OP7 3105 DI n BUTYL PEROXYDICARBONATE > 27 – 52 ≥ 48 3115 prohibited " ≤ 27 ≥ 73 3117 prohibited " ≤ 42 as a stable dispersion in water (frozen) 3118 prohibited DI sec BUTYL PEROXYDICARBONATE > 52 – 100 3113 prohibited " ≤ 52 ≥ 48 3115 prohibited DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXYISOPROPYL) BENZENE(S) > 42 – 100 ≤ 57 OP7 3106 " ≤ 42 ≥ 58 exempt (29) DI (tert BUTYLPEROXY) PHTHALATE > 42 – 52 ≥ 48 OP7 3105 " ≤ 52 as a paste OP7 3106 (20) " ≤ 42 ≥ 58 OP8 3107 2,2 DI (tert BUTYLPEROXY) PROPANE ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP7 3105 " ≤ 42 ≥ 13 ≥ 45 OP7 3106 1,1 DI (tert BUTYLPEROXY) 3,3,5 TRIMETHYLCYCLOHEXANE > 90 – 100 OP5 3101 (3) “ ≤ 90 ≥ 10 OP5 3103 (30) " > 57 – 90 ≥ 10 OP5 3103 " ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP5 3103 " ≤ 57 ≥ 43 OP8 3110 " ≤ 57 ≥ 43 OP8 3107 " ≤ 32 ≥ 26 ≥ 42 OP8 3107 DICETYL PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 100 3120 prohibited " ≤ 42 as a stable dispersion in water 3119 prohibited DI 4 CHLOROBENZOYL PEROXIDE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP5 3102 (3) " ≤ 52 as a paste OP7 3106 (20) " ≤ 32 ≥ 68 exempt (29) DICUMYL PEROXIDE > 52 – 100 OP8 3110 (12) " ≤ 52 ≥ 48 exempt (29) DICYCLOHEXYL PEROXYDICARBONATE > 91 – 100 3112 prohibited " ≤ 91 ≥ 9 3114 prohibited " ≤ 42 as a stable dispersion in water 3119 prohibited DIDECANOYL PEROXIDE ≤ 100 3114 prohibited 2,2 DI (4,4 DI (tert BUTYLPEROXY) CYCLOHEXYL) PROPANE ≤ 42 ≥ 58 OP7 3106 " ≤ 22 ≥ 78 OP8 3107 DI 2,4 DICHLOROBENZOYL PEROXIDE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP5 3102 (3) “ ≤ 52 as a paste 3118 prohibited " ≤ 52 as a paste with silicon oil OP7 3106 DI-(2-ETHOXYETHYL) PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 52 ≥ 48 3115 prohibited DI (2 ETHYLHEXYL) PEROXYDICARBONATE > 77 – 100 3113 prohibited " ≤ 77 ≥ 23 3115 prohibited " ≤ 62 as a stable dispersion in water 3119 prohibited " ≤ 52 as a stable dispersion in water (frozen) 3120 prohibited 2,2 DIHYDROPEROXYPROPANE ≤ 27 ≥ 73 OP5 3102 (3) DI (1 HYDROXYCYCLOHEXYL) PEROXIDE ≤ 100 OP7 3106 DIISOBUTYRYL PEROXIDE > 32 – 52 ≥ 48 3111 prohibited " ≤ 32 ≥ 68 3115 prohibited " ≤ 42 as a stable dispersion in water 3119 prohibited DI-ISOPROPYLBENZENE DIHYDROPEROXIDE ≤ 82 ≥ 5 ≥ 5 OP7 3106 (24) DIISOPROPYL PEROXYDICARBONATE > 52 – 100 3112 prohibited " ≤ 52 ≥ 48 3115 prohibited " ≤ 32 ≥ 68 3115 prohibited DILAUROYL PEROXIDE ≤ 100 OP7 3106 " ≤ 42 as a stable dispersion in water OP8 3109 DI-(3-METHOXYBUTYL) PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 52 ≥ 48 3115 prohibited DI (2 METHYLBENZOYL) PEROXIDE ≤ 87 ≥ 13 3112 prohibited DI-(4-METHYLBENZOYL) PEROXIDE  ≤ 52 as a paste with silicon oil OP7 3106 DI (3 METHYLBENZOYL) PEROXIDE + BENZOYL (3-METHYLBENZOYL) PEROXIDE + DIBENZOYL PEROXIDE ≤ 20 + ≤ 18 + ≤ 4 ≥ 58 3115 prohibited 2,5 DIMETHYL 2,5 DI (BENZOYLPEROXY) HEXANE > 82 – 100 OP5 3102 (3) " ≤ 82 ≥ 18 OP7 3106 " ≤ 82 ≥ 18 OP5 3104 2,5 DIMETHYL 2,5 DI (tert BUTYLPEROXY) HEXANE > 90 – 100 OP5 3103 " > 52 – 90  10 OP7 3105 " ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP8 3108 " ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP8 3109 " ≤ 47 as a paste OP8 3108 2,5 DIMETHYL 2,5 DI (tert BUTYLPEROXY) HEXYNE 3 > 86 – 100 OP5 3101 (3) " >52 – 86 ≥ 14 OP5 3103 (26) ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP7 3106 2,5 DIMETHYL 2,5 DI (2 ETHYLHEXANOYLPEROXY) HEXANE ≤ 100 3113 prohibited 2,5 DIMETHYL 2,5 DIHYDROPEROXYHEXANE  ≤ 82 ≥ 18 OP6 3104 2,5 DIMETHYL 2,5 DI (3,5,5 TRIMETHYLHEXANOYLPEROXY) HEXANE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP7 3105 1,1-DIMETHYL-3-HYDROXYBUTYLPEROXYNEOHEPTANOATE ≤ 52 ≥ 48 3117 prohibited DIMYRISTYL PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 100 3116 prohibited " ≤ 42 as a stable dispersion in water 3119 prohibited DI-(2-NEODECANOYLPEROXYISOPROPYL) BENZENE ≤ 52 ≥ 48 3115 prohibited DI n NONANOYL PEROXIDE ≤ 100 3116 prohibited DI n OCTANOYL PEROXIDE ≤ 100 3114 prohibited DI (2 PHENOXYETHYL) PEROXYDICARBONATE > 85 – 100 OP5 3102 (3) " ≤ 85 ≥ 15 OP7 3106 DIPROPIONYL PEROXIDE ≤ 27 ≥ 73 3117 prohibited DI n PROPYL PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 100 3113 prohibited " ≤ 77 ≥ 23 3113 prohibited DISUCCINIC ACID PEROXIDE > 72 – 100 OP4 3102 (3) (17) " ≤ 72 ≥ 28 3116 prohibited DI (3,5,5 TRIMETHYLHEXANOYL) PEROXIDE > 52 – 82 ≥ 18 3115 prohibited " > 38 – 52 ≥ 48 3119 prohibited " ≤ 52 as a stable dispersion in water 3119 prohibited " ≤ 38 ≥ 62 3119 prohibited ETHYL 3,3 DI (tert AMYLPEROXY) BUTYRATE ≤ 67 ≥ 33 OP7 3105 ETHYL 3,3 DI (tert BUTYLPEROXY) BUTYRATE > 77 – 100 OP5 3103 " ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP7 3105 " ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP7 3106 1-(2-ETHYLHEXANOYL-PEROXY)-1,3-DIMETHYLBUTYL PEROXYPIVALATE ≤ 52 ≥ 45 ≥ 10 3115 prohibited tert-HEXYL PEROXYNEODECANOATE ≤ 71 ≥ 29 3115 prohibited tert-HEXYL PEROXYPIVALATE ≤ 72 ≥ 28 3115 prohibited " (as a stable dispersion in water) ≤ 52 3117 prohibited 3-HYDROXY-1,1-DIMETHYLBUTYL PEROXYNEO DECANOATE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 3115 prohibited “ ≤ 52 as a stable dispersion in water 3119 prohibited “ ≤ 52 ≥ 48 3117 prohibited ISOPROPYL sec-BUTYL PEROXYDICARBONATE + DI-sec-BUTYL PEROXYDICARBONATE + DI-ISOPROPYL PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 32 + ≤ 15 – 18 + ≤ 12 – 15 ≥ 38 3115 prohibited " ≤ 52 + ≤ 28 + ≤ 22 3111 prohibited ISOPROPYLCUMYL HYDROPEROXIDE ≤ 72 ≥ 28 OP8 3109 (13) p MENTHYL HYDROPEROXIDE > 72 – 100 OP7 3105 (13) " ≤ 72 ≥ 28 OP8 3109 (27) METHYLCYCLOHEXANONE PEROXIDE(S) ≤ 67 ≥ 33 3115 prohibited METHYL ETHYL KETONE PEROXIDE(S) see remark (8) ≥ 48 OP5 3101 (3) (8) (13) " see remark (9) ≥ 55 OP7 3105 (9) " see remark (10) ≥ 60 OP8 3107 (10) METHYL ISOBUTYL KETONE PEROXIDE(S) ≤ 62 ≥ 19 OP7 3105 (22) METHYL ISOPROPYL KETONE PEROXIDE(S) see remark (31) ≥ 70 OP8 3109 (31) ORGANIC PEROXIDE, LIQUID, SAMPLE OP2 3103 (11) ORGANIC PEROXIDE, LIQUID, SAMPLE, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 3113 prohibited ORGANIC PEROXIDE, SOLID, SAMPLE OP2 3104 (11) ORGANIC PEROXIDE, SOLID, SAMPLE, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED 3114 prohibited 3,3,5,7,7-PENTA METHYL-1,2,4-TRIOXEPANE ≤ 100 OP8 3107 PEROXYACETIC ACID, TYPE D, stabilized ≤ 43 OP7 3105 (13) (14) (19) PEROXYACETIC ACID, TYPE E, stabilized ≤ 43 OP8 3107 (13) (15) (19) PEROXYACETIC ACID, TYPE F, stabilized ≤ 43 OP8 3109 (13) (16) (19) PEROXYLAURIC ACID ≤ 100 3118 prohibited 1-PHENYLETHYL HYDROPEROXIDE ≤ 38 ≥ 62 OP8 3109 PINANYL HYDROPEROXIDE > 56 – 100 OP7 3105 (13) " ≤ 56 ≥ 44 OP8 3109 POLYETHER POLY-tert-BUTYLPEROXYCARBONATE ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP8 3107 1,1,3,3 TETRAMETHYLBUTYL HYDROPEROXIDE ≤ 100 OP7 3105 1,1,3,3 TETRAMETHYLBUTYL PEROXY 2 ETHYLHEXANOATE ≤ 100 3115 prohibited 1,1,3,3- TETRAMETHYLBUTYL PEROXYNEODECANOATE ≤ 72 ≥ 28 3115 prohibited " ≤ 52 as a stable dispersion in water 3119 prohibited 1,1,3,3 TETRAMETHYL-BUTYL PEROXYPIVALATE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 3115 prohibited 3,6,9-TRIETHYL-3,6,9-TRIMETHYL-1,4,7 TRIPEROXONANE ≤ 42 ≥ 58 OP7 3105 (28) " ≤ 17 ≥ 18 ≥ 65 OP8 3110 Remarks (refer to the last column of the Table in 2.2.52.4): (1) Diluent type B may always be replaced by diluent type A. The boiling point of diluent type B shall be at least 60 °C higher than the SADT of the organic peroxide . (2) Available oxygen 4.7%. (3) "EXPLOSIVE" subsidiary hazard label required (Model No.1, see 5.2.2.2.2). (4) Diluent may be replaced by di tert butyl peroxide. (5) Available oxygen 9%. (6) (Reserved) (7) (Reserved) (8) Available oxygen > 10% and 10.7%, with or without water . (9) Available oxygen 10%, with or without water. (10) Available oxygen 8.2%, with or without water. (11) See 2.2.52.1.9. (12) Up to 2 000 kg per receptacle assigned to ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F on the basis of large scale trials. (13) "CORROSIVE" subsidiary hazard label required (Model No.8, see 5.2.2.2.2). (14) Peroxyacetic acid formulations which fulfil the criteria of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, paragraph 20.4.3 (d). (15) Peroxyacetic acid formulations which fulfil the criteria of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, paragraph 20.4.3 (e). (16) Peroxyacetic acid formulations which fulfil the criteria of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, paragraph 20.4.3 (f). (17) Addition of water to this organic peroxide will decrease its thermal stability. (18) No "CORROSIVE" subsidiary hazard label (Model No.8, see 5.2.2.2.2) required for concentrations below 80%. (19) Mixtures with hydrogen peroxide, water and acid(s). (20) With diluent type A, with or without water. (21) With 25% diluent type A by mass, and in addition ethylbenzene. (22) With 19% diluent type A by mass, and in addition methyl isobutyl ketone. (23) With < 6% di-tert-butyl peroxide. (24) With 8% 1-isopropylhydroperoxy-4-isopropylhydroxybenzene. (25) Diluent type B with boiling point > 110 °C. (26) With < 0.5% hydroperoxides content. (27) For concentrations more than 56%, "CORROSIVE" subsidiary hazard label required (Model No.8, see 5.2.2.2.2). (28) Available active oxygen 7.6% in diluent Type A having a 95% boil-off point in the range of 200 °C – 260 °C. (29) Not subject to the requirements of RID for Class 5.2. (30) Diluent type B with boiling point > 130 °C. (31) Active oxygen ≤ 6.7%. ( 32) Active oxygen ≤ 4.15% . 2.2.61 Class 6.1: Toxic substances 2.2.61.1 Criteria 2.2.61.1.1 The heading of Class 6.1 covers substances of which it is known by experience or regarding which it is presumed from experiments on animals that in relatively small quantities they are able by a single action or by action of short duration to cause damage to human health, or death, by inhalation, by cutaneous absorption or by ingestion. NOTE : Genetically modified microorganisms and organisms shall be assigned to this Class if they meet the conditions for this Class. 2.2.61.1.2 Substances of Class 6.1 are subdivided as follows: T Toxic substances without subsidiary hazard: T1 Organic, liquid; T2 Organic, solid; T3 Organometallic substances; T4 Inorganic, liquid; T5 Inorganic, solid; T6 Liquid, used as pesticides; T7 Solid, used as pesticides; T8 Samples; T9 Other toxic substances; T10 Articles TF Toxic substances, flammable: TF1 Liquid; TF2 Liquid, used as pesticides; TF3 Solid; TS Toxic substances, self-heating, solid; TW Toxic substances, which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases: TW1 Liquid; TW2 Solid; TO Toxic substances, oxidizing: TO1 Liquid; TO2 Solid; TC Toxic substances, corrosive: TC1 Organic, liquid; TC2 Organic, solid; TC3 Inorganic, liquid; TC4 Inorganic, solid; TFC Toxic substances, flammable, corrosive. TFW Toxic substances, flammable, which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases. Definitions 2.2.61.1.3 For the purposes of RID : LD 50 (median lethal dose) for acute oral toxicity is the statistically derived single dose of a substance that can be expected to cause death within 14 days in 50 per cent of young adult albino rats when administered by the oral route. The LD 50 value is expressed in terms of mass of test substance per mass of test animal (mg/kg); LD 50 for acute dermal toxicity is that dose of the substance which, administered by continuous contact for 24 hours with the bare skin of albino rabbits, is most likely to cause death within 14 days in one half of the animals tested. The number of animals tested shall be sufficient to give a statistically significant result and be in conformity with good pharmacological practice. The result is expressed in milligrams per kg body mass; LC 50 for acute toxicity on inhalation is that concentration of vapour, mist or dust which, administered by continuous inhalation to both male and female young adult albino rats for one hour, is most likely to cause death within 14 days in one half of the animals tested. A solid substance shall be tested if at least 10% (by mass) of its total mass is likely to be dust in a respirable range, e.g. the aerodynamic diameter of that particle-fraction is 10 μ m or less. A liquid substance shall be tested if a mist is likely to be generated in a leakage of the transport containment. Both for solid and liquid substances more than 90% (by mass) of a specimen prepared for inhalation toxicity shall be in the respirable range as defined above. The result is expressed in milligrams per litre of air for dusts and mists or in millilitres per cubic metre of air (parts per million) for vapours. Classification and assignment of packing groups 2.2.61.1.4 Substances of Class 6.1 shall be classified in three packing groups according to the degree of danger they present for carriage, as follows: Packing group I: highly toxic substances Packing group II: toxic substances Packing group III: slightly toxic substances. 2.2.61.1.5 Substances, mixtures, solutions and articles classified in Class 6.1 are listed in Table A of Chapter 3.2. The assignment of substances, mixtures and solutions not mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 to the relevant entry of 2.2.61.3 and to the relevant packing group in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2.1, shall be made according to the following criteria in 2.2.61.1.6 to 2.2.61.1.11. 2.2.61.1.6 To assess the degree of toxicity, account shall be taken of human experience of instances of accidental poisoning, as well as special properties possessed by any individual substances: liquid state, high volatility, any special likelihood of cutaneous absorption, and special biological effects. 2.2.61.1.7 In the absence of observations on humans, the degree of toxicity shall be assessed using the available data from animal experiments in accordance with the table below: Packing group Oral toxicity LD 50 (mg/kg) Dermal toxicity LD 50 (mg/kg) Inhalation toxicity by dusts and mists LC 50 (mg/l) Highly toxic I ≤ 5 ≤ 50 ≤ 0.2 Toxic II > 5 and ≤ 50 > 50 and ≤ 200 > 0.2 and ≤ 2 Slightly toxic III (a) > 50 and ≤ 300 > 200 and ≤ 1 000 > 2 and ≤ 4 (a) Tear gas substances shall be included in packing group II even if data concerning their toxicity correspond to packing group III criteria. 2.2.61.1.7.1 Where a substance exhibits different degrees of toxicity for two or more kinds of exposure, it shall be classified under the highest such degree of toxicity. 2.2.61.1.7.2 Substances meeting the criteria of Class 8 and with an inhalation toxicity of dusts and mists (LC 50 ) leading to packing group I shall only be accepted for an allocation to Class 6.1 if the toxicity through oral ingestion or dermal contact is at least in the range of packing groups I or II. Otherwise an assignment to Class 8 shall be made if appropriate (see 2.2.8.1.4.5). 2.2.61.1.7.3 The criteria for inhalation toxicity of dusts and mists are based on LC 50 data relating to 1 hour exposure, and where such information is available it shall be used. However, where only LC 50 data relating to 4-hour exposure are available, such figures can be multiplied by four and the product substituted in the above criteria, i.e. LC 50 value multiplied by four (4 hour) is considered the equivalent of LC 50 (1 hour). Inhalation toxicity of vapours 2.2.61.1.8 Liquids giving off toxic vapours shall be classified into the following groups where "V" is the saturated vapour concentration (in ml/m 3 of air) (volatility) at 20 °C and standard atmospheric pressure: Packing group Highly toxic I Where V ≥ 10 LC 50 and LC 50 ≤ 1 000 ml/m 3 Toxic II Where V ≥ LC 50 and LC 50 ≤ 3 000 ml/m 3 and the criteria for packing group I are not met Slightly toxic III (a) Where V ≥ 1/5 LC 50 and LC 50 ≤ 5 000 ml/m 3 and the criteria for packing groups I and II are not met (a) Tear gas substances shall be included in packing group II even if data concerning their toxicity correspond to packing group III criteria. These criteria for inhalation toxicity of vapours are based on LC 50 data relating to 1-hour exposure, and where such information is available, it shall be used. However, where only LC 50 data relating to 4-hour exposure to the vapours are available, such figures can be multiplied by two and the product substituted in the above criteria, i.e. LC 50 (4 hour) × 2 is considered the equivalent of LC 50 (1 hour). Group borderlines inhalation toxicity of vapours 4347210 3401060 Packing group I 0 0 Packing group I 4347210 2029459 Packing group II 0 0 Packing group II 4347210 1686560 Packing group III 0 0 Packing group III 2743200 545465 Not dangerous for transport 0 0 Not dangerous for transport 685800 3860165 LC 50 ml/m 3 0 0 LC 50 ml/m 3 1257300 4888865 Volatility ml/m 3 0 0 Volatility ml/m 3 In this figure, the criteria are expressed in graphical form, as an aid to easy classification. However, due to approximations inherent in the use of graphs, substances falling on or near group borderlines shall be checked using numerical criteria. Mixtures of liquids 2.2.61.1.9 Mixtures of liquids which are toxic on inhalation shall be assigned to packing groups according to the following criteria: 2.2.61.1.9.1 If LC 50 is known for each of the toxic substances constituting the mixture, the packing group may be determined as follows: (a) Calculation of the LC 50 of the mixture: LC 50 (mixture) = where f i = molar fraction of constituent i of the mixture; LC 50i = average lethal concentration of constituent i in ml/m 3 . (b) Calculation of volatility of each mixture constituent: V i = P i x (ml/m 3 ) where P i = partial pressure of constituent i in kPa at 20 °C and at standard atmospheric pressure. (c) Calculation of the ratio of volatility to LC 50 : R = (d) The values calculated for LC 50 (mixture) and R are then used to determine the packing group of the mixture: Packing group I: R 10 and LC 50 (mixture) 1 000 ml/m 3 ; Packing group II: R ≥ 1 and LC 50 (mixture) 3 000 ml/m 3 , if the mixture does not meet the criteria for packing group I; Packing group III: R 1/5 and LC 50 (mixture) 5 000 ml/m 3 , if the mixture does not meet the criteria of packing groups I or II. 2.2.61.1.9.2 In the absence of LC 50 data on the toxic constituent substances, the mixture may be assigned to a group based on the following simplified threshold toxicity tests. When these threshold tests are used, the most restrictive group shall be determined and used for carrying the mixture. 2.2.61.1.9.3 A mixture is assigned to packing group I only if it meets both of the following criteria: (a) A sample of the liquid mixture is vaporized and diluted with air to create a test atmosphere of 1 000 ml/m 3 vaporized mixture in air. Ten albino rats (5 male and 5 female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for 1 hour and observed for 14 days. If five or more of the animals die within the 14 day observation period, the mixture is presumed to have an LC 50 equal to or less than 1 000 ml/m 3 ; (b) A sample of vapour in equilibrium with the liquid mixture is diluted with 9 equal volumes of air to form a test atmosphere. Ten albino rats (5 male and 5 female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for 1 hour and observed for 14 days. If five or more of the animals die within the 14 day observation period, the mixture is presumed to have a volatility equal to or greater than 10 times the mixture LC 50 . 2.2.61.1.9.4 A mixture is assigned to packing group II only if it meets both of the following criteria, and does not meet the criteria for packing group I: (a) A sample of the liquid mixture is vaporized and diluted with air to create a test atmosphere of 3 000 ml/m 3 vaporized mixture in air. Ten albino rats (5 male and 5 female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for 1 hour and observed for 14 days. If five or more of the animals die within the 14 day observation period, the mixture is presumed to have an LC 50 equal to or less than 3 000 ml/m 3 ; (b) A sample of the vapour in equilibrium with the liquid mixture is used to form a test atmosphere. Ten albino rats (5 male and 5 female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for 1 hour and observed for 14 days. If five or more of the animals die within the 14 day observation period, the mixture is presumed to have a volatility equal to or greater than the mixture LC 50 . 2.2.61.1.9.5 A mixture is assigned to packing group III only if it meets both of the following criteria, and does not meet the criteria for packing groups I or II: (a) A sample of the liquid mixture is vaporized and diluted with air to create a test atmosphere of 5 000 ml/m 3 vaporized mixture in air. Ten albino rats (5 male and 5 female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for 1 hour and observed for 14 days. If five or more of the animals die within the 14 day observation period, the mixture is presumed to have an LC 50 equal to or less than 5 000 ml/m 3 ; (b) The vapour concentration (volatility) of the liquid mixture is measured and if the vapour concentration is equal to or greater than 1 000 ml/m 3 , the mixture is presumed to have a volatility equal to or greater than 1/5 the mixture LC 50 . Methods for determining oral and dermal toxicity of mixtures 2.2.61.1.10 When classifying and assigning the appropriate packing group to mixtures in Class 6.1 in accordance with the oral and dermal toxicity criteria (see 2.2.61.1.3), it is necessary to determine the acute LD 50 of the mixture. 2.2.61.1.10.1 If a mixture contains only one active substance, and the LD 50 of that constituent is known, in the absence of reliable acute oral and dermal toxicity data on the actual mixture to be carried, the oral or dermal LD 50 may be obtained by the following method: 2.2.61.1.10.2 If a mixture contains more than one active constituent, there are three possible approaches that may be used to determine the oral or dermal LD 50 of the mixture. The preferred method is to obtain reliable acute oral and dermal toxicity data on the actual mixture to be carried. If reliable, accurate data are not available, then either of the following methods may be performed: (a) Classify the formulation according to the most hazardous constituent of the mixture as if that constituent were present in the same concentration as the total concentration of all active constituents; or (b) Apply the formula: where: C = the percentage concentration of constituent A, B, ..., Z in the mixture; T = the oral LD 50 values of constituent A, B, ... Z; T M = the oral LD 50 value of the mixture. NOTE: This formula can also be used for dermal toxicities, provided that this information is available on the same species for all constituents. The use of this formula does not take into account any potentiation or protective phenomena. Classification of pesticides 2.2.61.1.11 All active pesticide substances and their preparations for which the LC 50 and/or LD 50 values are known and which are classified in Class 6.1 shall be classified under appropriate packing groups in accordance with the criteria given in 2.2.61.1.6 to 2.2.61.1.9. Substances and preparations which are characterized by subsidiary hazards shall be classified according to the precedence of hazard Table in 2.1.3.10 with the assignment of appropriate packing groups. 2.2.61.1.11.1 If the oral or dermal LD 50 value for a pesticide preparation is not known, but the LD 50 value of its active substance(s) is known, the LD 50 value for the preparation may be obtained by applying the procedures in 2.2.61.1.10. NOTE: LD 50 toxicity data for a number of common pesticides may be obtained from the most current edition of the document "The WHO Recommended Classification of Pesticides by Hazard and Guidelines to Classification" available from the International Programme on Chemical Safety, World Health Organisation (WHO), 1211 Geneva 27, Switzerland. While that document may be used as a source of LD 50 data for pesticides, its classification system shall not be used for purposes of transport classification of, or assignment of packing groups to, pesticides, which shall be in accordance with the requirements of RID . 2.2.61.1.11.2 The proper shipping name used in the carriage of the pesticide shall be selected on the basis of the active ingredient, of the physical state of the pesticide and any subsidiary hazards it may exhibit (see 3.1.2). 2.2.61.1.12 If substances of Class 6.1, as a result of admixtures, come into categories of hazard different from those to which the substances mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 belong, these mixtures or solutions shall be assigned to the entries to which they belong on the basis of their actual degree of danger. NOTE: For the classification of solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes), see also 2.1.3. 2.2.61.1.13 On the basis of the criteria of 2.2.61.1.6 to 2.2.61.1.11, it may also be determined whether the nature of a solution or mixture mentioned by name or containing a substance mentioned by name is such that the solution or mixture is not subject to the requirements for this Class. 2.2.61.1.14 Substances, solutions and mixtures, with the exception of substances and preparations used as pesticides, which are not classified as acute toxic category 1, 2 or 3 according to Regulation (EC) No 1272/2008 , may be considered as substances not belonging to Class 6.1. 2.2.61.2 Substances not accepted for carriage 2.2.61.2.1 Chemically unstable substances of Class 6.1 shall not be accepted for carriage unless the necessary precautions have been taken to prevent the possibility of a dangerous decomposition or polymerization under normal conditions of carriage. For the precautions necessary to prevent polymerization, see special provision 386 of Chapter 3.3. To this end particular care shall be taken to ensure that receptacles and tanks do not contain any substances liable to promote these reactions. If temperature control is required to prevent polymerization of a substance (i.e. for a substance in a packaging or IBC with an SAPT of 50 °C or less, or in a tank with an SAPT of 45 °C or less), the substance shall not be accepted for carriage. 2.2.61.2.2 The following substances and mixtures shall not be accepted for carriage: – Hydrogen cyanide, anhydrous or in solution, which do not meet the descriptions of UN Nos. 1051, 1613, 1614 and 3294; – Metal carbonyls, having a flash point below 23 °C, other than UN Nos. 1259 NICKEL CARBONYL and 1994 IRON PENTACARBONYL; – 2,3,7,8-TETRACHLORODIBENZO-P-DIOXINE (TCDD) in concentrations considered highly toxic in accordance with the criteria in 2.2.61.1.7; – UN No. 2249 DICHLORODIMETHYL ETHER, SYMMETRICAL; – Preparations of phosphides without additives inhibiting the emission of toxic flammable gases. The following substances shall not be accepted for carriage by rail: – Barium azide, dry or with less than 50% water or alcohols; – UN 0135 MERCURY FULMINATE , WETTED . 2.2.61.3 List of collective entries Subsidiary hazard Classification code UN Name of the substance or article No. Toxic substances 1583 CHLOROPICRIN MIXTURE, N.O.S. 1602 DYE, LIQUID, TOXIC, N.O.S., or 1602 DYE INTERMEDIATE, LIQUID, TOXIC, N.O.S. 1693 TEAR GAS SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, N.O.S. 1851 MEDICINE, LIQUID, TOXIC, N.O.S. 2206 ISOCYANATES, TOXIC, N.O.S. or 2206 ISOCYANATE SOLUTION, TOXIC, N.O.S. 3140 ALKALOIDS, LIQUID, N.O.S. or 3140 ALKALOID SALTS, LI QUID, N.O.S. 3142 DISINFECTANT, LIQUID, TOXIC, N.O.S. 3144 NICOTINE COMPOUND, LIQUID, N.O.S. or 3144 NICOTINE PRE PARATION, LIQUID, N.O.S. liquid (a) T1 3172 TOXINS, EXTRACTED FROM LIVING SOURCES, LIQUID, N.O.S. 3276 NITRILES, LIQUID, TOXIC, N.O.S. 3278 ORGANOPHOSPHORUS COMPOUND, LIQUID, TOXIC, N.O.S. 3381 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, N.O.S. with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 200 ml/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC 50 3382 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, N.O.S. with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 1 000 ml/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC 50 2810 TOXIC LIQUID, ORGANIC, N.O.S. Without subsidiary hazard organic Without organic subsidiary hazard (cont'd) 1544 ALKALOIDS, SOLID, N.O.S. or 1544 ALKALOID SALTS, SOLID, N.O.S. (cont'd) 1601 DISINFECTANT, SOLID, TOXIC, N.O.S. 1655 NICOTINE COMPOUND, SOLID, N.O.S., or 1655 NICOTINE PRE PARATION, SOLID, N.O.S. solid (a),(b) T2 3143 DYE, SOLID, TOXIC, N.O.S. or 3143 DYE INTERMEDIATE, SO LID, TOXIC, N.O.S. 3249 MEDICINE, SOLID, TOXIC, N.O.S. 3439 NITRILES, SOLID, TOXIC , N.O.S. 3448 TEAR GAS SUBSTANCE, SOLID, N.O.S. 3462 TOXINS, EXTRACTED FROM LIVING SOURCES, SOLID, N.O.S. 3464 ORGANOPHOSPHORUS COMPOUND, SOLID, TOXIC , N.O.S. 2811 TOXIC SOLID, ORGANIC, N.O.S. 2026 PHENYLMERCURIC COMPOUND, N.O.S. 2788 ORGANOTIN COMPOUND, LIQUID, N.O.S. 3146 ORGANOTIN COMPOUND, SOLID, N.O.S. 3280 ORGANOARSENIC COMPOUND, LIQUID, N.O.S. organometallic (c),(d) T3 3281 METAL CARBONYLS, LIQUID, N.O.S. 3465 ORGANOARSENIC COMPOUND, SOLID, N.O.S. 3466 METAL CARBONYLS, SOLID, N.O.S. 3282 ORGANOMETALLIC COMPOUND, LIQUID, TOXIC , N.O.S. 3467 ORGANOMETALLIC COMPOUND, SOLID, TOXIC , N.O.S. 1556 ARSENIC COMPOUND, LIQUID, N.O.S., inorganic including: Arsenates, n.o.s.; Arsenites, n.o.s.; and Arsenic sulphides, n.o.s. 1935 CYANIDE SOLUTION, N.O.S. 2024 MERCURY COMPOUND, LIQUID, N.O.S. 3141 ANTIMONY COMPOUND, INORGANIC, LIQUID, N.O.S. liquid (e) T4 3381 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, N.O.S. with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 200 ml/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC 50 3382 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, N.O.S. with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 1 000 ml/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC 50 3440 SELENIUM COMPOUND, LIQUID, N.O.S. 3287 TOXIC LIQUID, INORGANIC, N.O.S. inorganic 1549 ANTIMONY COMPOUND, INORGANIC, SOLID, N.O.S. 1557 ARSENIC COMPOUND, SOLID, N.O.S., including: Arsenates, n.o.s.; Arsenites, n.o.s.; and Arsenic sulphides, n.o.s. 1564 BARIUM COMPOUND, N.O.S. 1566 BERYLLIUM COMPOUND, N.O.S. 1588 CYANIDES, INORGANIC, SOLID, N.O.S. 1707 THALLIUM COMPOUND, N.O.S. 2025 MERCURY COMPOUND, SOLID, N.O.S. solid (f)(g) T5 2291 LEAD COMPOUND, SOLUBLE, N.O.S. 2570 CADMIUM COMPOUND 2630 SELENATES or 2630 SELENITES 2856 FLUOROSILICATES, N.O.S. 3283 SELENIUM COMPOUND, SOLID, N.O.S. 3284 TELLURIUM COMPOUND, N.O.S. 3285 VANADIUM COMPOUND, N.O.S. 3288 TOXIC SOLID, INORGANIC, N.O.S. Without 2992 CARBAMATE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC subsidiary 2994 ARSENICAL PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC hazard 2996 ORGANOCHLORINE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC (cont'd) 2998 TRIAZINE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 3006 THIOCARBAMATE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 3010 COPPER BASED PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 3012 MERCURY BASED PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC liquid (h) T6 3014 SUBSTITUTED NITROPHENOL PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 3016 BIPYRIDILIUM PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 3018 ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 3020 ORGANOTIN PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 3026 COUMARIN DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 3348 PHENOXYACETIC ACID DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 3352 PYRETHROID PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC 2902 PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, N.O.S. pesti- cides 2757 CARBAMATE PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 2759 ARSENICAL PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 2761 ORGANOCHLORINE PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 2763 TRIAZINE PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 2771 THIOCARBAMATE PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 2775 COPPER BASED PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 2777 MERCURY BASED PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 2779 SUBSTITUTED NITROPHENOL PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC solid (h) T7 2781 BIPYRIDILIUM PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 2783 ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 2786 ORGANOTIN PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 3027 COUMARIN DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 3048 ALUMINIUM PHOSPHIDE PESTICIDE 3345 PHENOXYACETIC ACID DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 3349 PYRETHROID PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC 2588 PESTICIDE, SOLID, TOXIC, N.O.S. samples T8 3315 CHEMICAL SAMPLE, TOXIC other toxic substances (i) T9 3243 SOLIDS CONTAINING TOXIC LIQUID, N.O.S. articles T10 3546 ARTICLES CONTAINING TOXIC SUBSTANCE, N.O.S. 3071 MERCAPTANS, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. or 3071 MERCAPTAN MIXTURE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 3080 ISOCYANATES, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. or 3080 ISOCY ANATE SOLUTI ON, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 3275 NITRILES, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. liquid (j),(k) TF1 3279 ORGANOPHOSPHORUS COMPOUND, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 3383 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 200 ml/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC 50 3384 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 1 000 ml/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC 50 Flammable 2929 TOXIC LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, ORGANIC, N.O.S. TF Flammable TF ( cont’d ) 2991 CARBAMATE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE 2993 ARSENICAL PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE 2995 ORGANOCHLORINE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAM MABLE 2997 TRIAZINE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE 3005 THIOCARBAMATE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAM MABLE 3009 COPPER BASED PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMA BLE 3011 MERCURY BASED PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMA BLE pesticides (flash-point not TF2 3013 SUBSTITUTED NITROPHENOL PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TO XIC, FLAMMABLE less than 23 °C) 3015 BIPYRIDILIUM PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMA BLE 3017 ORGANOPHOSPHORUS PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLA MMABLE 3019 ORGANOTIN PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE 3025 COUMARIN DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE 3347 PHENOXYACETIC ACID DERIVATIVE PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE 3351 PYRETHROID PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE 2903 PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 1700 TEAR GAS CANDLES solid TF3 2930 TOXIC SOLID, FLAMMABLE, ORGANIC, N.O.S. 3535 TOXIC SOLID, FLAMMABLE, INORGANIC, N.O.S. Solid, self-heating (c) TS 3124 TOXIC SOLID, SELF-HEATING, N.O.S. 3385 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, WATER-REACTIVE, N.O.S. with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 200 ml/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC 50 Water- reactive (d) TW liquid TW1 3386 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, WATER-REACTIVE, N.O.S. with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 1 000 ml/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC 50 3123 TOXIC LIQUID, WATER REACTIVE, N.O.S. solid (l) TW2 3125 TOXIC SOLID, WATER REACTIVE, N.O.S. 3387 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 200 ml/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC 50 Oxidizing (m) TO liquid TO1 3388 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 1 000 ml/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC 50 3122 TOXIC LIQUID, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. solid TO2 3086 TOXIC SOLID, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 3277 CHLOROFORMATES, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 3361 CHLOROSILANES, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 3389 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 200 ml/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC 50 liquid TC1 3390 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 1 000 ml/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC 50 2927 TOXIC LIQUID, CORROSIVE, ORGANIC, N.O.S. organic solid TC2 2928 TOXIC SOLID, CORROSIVE, ORGANIC, N.O.S. Corrosive (n) TC 3389 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID , CORROSIVE, N.O.S. with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 200 ml/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC 50 liquid TC3 3390 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 1 000 ml/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC 50 inorganic 3289 TOXIC LIQUID, CORROSIVE, INORGANIC, N.O.S. solid TC4 3290 TOXIC SOLID, CORROSIVE, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 2742 CHLOROFORMATES, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 3362 CHLOROSILANES, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 3488 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 200 ml/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC 50 Flammable, corrosive TFC 3489 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 1000 ml/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC 50 flammable, water-reactive TFW 3490 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, WATER-REACTIVE, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 200 ml/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC 50 3491 TOXIC BY INHALATION LIQUID, WATER-REACTIVE, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 1000 ml/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 10 LC 50 Footnotes (a) Substances and preparations containing alkaloids or nicotine used as pesticides shall be classified under UN No. 2588 PESTICIDES, SOLID, TOXIC, N.O.S., UN No. 2902 PESTICIDES, LIQUID, TOXIC, N.O.S. or UN No. 2903 PESTICIDES, LIQUID, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. (b) Active substances and triturations or mixtures of substances intended for laboratories and experiments and for the manufacture of pharmaceutical products with other substances shall be classified according to their toxicity (see 2.2.61.1.7 to 2.2.61.1.11). (c) Self-heating substances, slightly toxic and spontaneously combustible organometallic compounds, are substances of Class 4.2. (d) Water-reactive substances, slightly toxic, and water-reactive organometallic compounds, are substances of Class 4.3. (e) Mercury fulminate, wetted with not less than 20% water, or mixture of alcohol and water by mass is a substance of Class 1, UN No. 0135 and shall not be accepted for carriage by rail (see 2.2.61.2.2). (f) Ferricyanides, ferrocyanides, alkaline thiocyanates and ammonium thiocyanates are not subject to the provisions of RID . (g) Lead salts and lead pigments which, when mixed in a ratio of 1:1000 with 0.07M hydrochloric acid and stirred for one hour at a temperature of 23 °C ± 2 °C, exhibit a solubility of 5% or less, are not subject to the provisions of RID . (h) Articles impregnated with this pesticide, such as fibreboard plates, paper strips, cotton-wool balls, sheets of plastics material, in hermetically closed wrappings, are not subject to the provisions of RID. (i) Mixtures of solids which are not subject to the provisions of RID and of toxic liquids may be carried under UN No. 3243 without first applying the classification criteria of Class 6.1, provided there is no free liquid visible at the time the substance is loaded or at the time the packaging, wagon or container is closed. Each packaging shall correspond to a design type that has passed a leakproofness test at the packing group II level. This entry shall not be used for solids containing a packing group I liquid. (j) Highly toxic and toxic flammable liquids having a flash-point below 23 °C are substances of Class 3 except those which are highly toxic by inhalation, as defined in 2.2.61.1.4 to 2.2.61.1.9. Liquids which are highly toxic by inhalation are indicated as " toxic by inhalation" in their proper shipping name in Column (2) or by special provision 354 in Column (6) of Table A of Chapter 3.2. (k) Flammable liquids, slightly toxic, with the exception of substances and preparations used as pesticides, having a flash-point between 23 °C and 60 °C inclusive, are substances of Class 3. (l) Metal phosphides assigned to UN Nos. 1360, 1397, 1432, 1714, 2011 and 2013 are substances of Class 4.3. (m) Oxidizing substances, slightly toxic, are substances of Class 5.1. (n) Substances slightly toxic and slightly corrosive, are substances of Class 8. 2.2.62 Class 6.2: Infectious substances 2.2.62.1 Criteria 2.2.62.1.1 The heading of Class 6.2 covers infectious substances. For the purposes of RID, infectious substances are substances which are known or are reasonably expected to contain pathogens. Pathogens are defined as microorganisms (including bacteria, viruses, parasites, fungi) and other agents such as prions, which can cause disease in humans or animals. NOTE 1: Genetically modified microorganisms and organisms, biological products, diagnostic specimens and intentionally infected live animals shall be assigned to this Class if they meet the conditions for this Class. The carriage of unintentionally or naturally infected live animals is subject only to the relevant rules and regulations of the respective countries of origin, transit and destination . 2: Toxins from plant, animal or bacterial sources which do not contain any infectious substances or organisms or which are not contained in them are substances of Class 6.1, UN No. 3172 or 3462. 2.2.62.1.2 Substances of Class 6.2 are subdivided as follows: I1 Infectious substances affecting humans; I2 Infectious substances affecting animals only; I3 Clinical waste; I4 Biological substances. Definitions 2.2.62.1.3 For the purposes of RID: " Biological products" are those products derived from living organisms which are manufactured and distributed in accordance with the requirements of appropriate national authorities, which may have special licensing requirements, and are used either for prevention, treatment, or diagnosis of disease in humans or animals, or for development, experimental or investigational purposes related thereto. They include, but are not limited to, finished or unfinished products such as vaccines; " Cultures " are the result of a process by which pathogens are intentionally propagated. This definition does not include human or animal patient specimens as defined in this paragraph; Medical or clinical wastes" are wastes derived from the veterinary treatment of animals, the medical treatment of humans or from bio-research; "Patient specimens" are those , collected directly from humans or animals, including, but not limited to, excreta, secreta, blood and its components, tissue and tissue fluid swabs, and body parts being carried for purposes such as research, diagnosis, investigational activities, disease treatment and prevention. Classification 2.2.62.1.4 Infectious substances shall be classified in Class 6.2 and assigned to UN Nos. 2814, 2900, 3291, 3373 or 3549, as appropriate. Infectious substances are divided into the following categories: 2.2.62.1.4.1 Category A : An infectious substance which is carried in a form that, when exposure to it occurs, is capable of causing permanent disability, life-threatening or fatal disease in otherwise healthy humans or animals. Indicative examples of substances that meet these criteria are given in the table in this paragraph. NOTE: An exposure occurs when an infectious substance is released outside of the protective packaging, resulting in physical contact with humans or animals. (a) Infectious substances meeting these criteria which cause disease in humans or both in humans and animals shall be assigned to UN No. 2814. Infectious substances which cause disease only in animals shall be assigned to UN No. 2900; (b) Assignment to UN No. 2814 or UN No. 2900 shall be based on the known medical history and symptoms of the source human or animal, endemic local conditions, or professional judgement concerning individual circumstances of the source human or animal. NOTE 1: The proper shipping name for UN No. 2814 is "INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCE, AFFECTING HUMANS". The proper shipping name for UN No. 2900 is "INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCE, AFFECTING ANIMALS only". 2: The following table is not exhaustive. Infectious substances, including new or emerging pathogens, which do not appear in the table but which meet the same criteria shall be assigned to Category A. In addition, if there is doubt as to whether or not a substance meets the criteria it shall be included in Category A. 3: In the following table, the microorganisms written in italics are bacteria or fungi. Indicative examples of infectious substances included in Category A in any form unless otherwise indicated (see 2.2.62.1.4.1) UN Number and name Microorganism UN No. 2814 Infectious substances affect ing humans Bacillus anthracis (cultures only) Brucella abortus (cultures only) Brucella melitensis (cultures only) Brucella suis (cultures only) Burkholderia mallei – Pseudomonas mallei – Glanders (cultures only) Burkholderia pseudomallei – Pseudomonas pseudomallei (cultures only) Chlamydia psittaci – avian strains (cultures only) Clostridium botulinum (cultures only) Coccidioides immitis (cultures only) Coxiella burnetii (cultures only) Crimean-Congo haemorrhagic fever virus Dengue virus (cultures only) Eastern equine encephalitis virus (cultures only) Escherichia coli , verotoxigenic (cultures only) a Ebola virus Flexal virus Francisella tularensis (cultures only) Guanarito virus Hantaan virus Hantavirus causing haemorrhagic fever with renal syndrome Hendra virus Hepatitis B virus (cultures only) Herpes B virus (cultures only) Human immunodeficiency virus (cultures only) Highly pathogenic avian influenza virus (cultures only) Japanese Encephalitis virus (cultures only) Junin virus Kyasanur Forest disease virus Lassa virus Machupo virus Marburg virus Monkeypox virus Mycobacterium tuberculosis (cultures only) a Nipah virus Omsk haemorrhagic fever virus Poliovirus (cultures only) Rabies virus (cultures only) Rickettsia prowazekii (cultures only) Rickettsia rickettsii (cultures only) Rift Valley fever virus (cultures only) Russian spring-summer encephalitis virus (cultures only) Sabia virus Shigella dysenteriae type 1 (cultures only) a Tick-borne encephalitis virus (cultures only) Variola virus Venezuelan equine encephalitis virus (cultures only) West Nile virus (cultures only) Yellow fever virus (cultures only) Yersinia pestis (cultures only) UN Number and name Microorganism UN No. 2900 Infectious substances affecting animals only African swine fever virus (cultures only) Avian paramyxovirus Type 1 – Velogenic Newcastle disease virus (cultures only) Classical swine fever virus (cultures only) Foot and mouth disease virus (cultures only) Lumpy skin disease virus (cultures only) Mycoplasma mycoides – Contagious bovine pleuropneumonia (cultures only) Peste des petits ruminants virus (cultures only) Rinderpest virus (cultures only) Sheep-pox virus (cultures only) Goatpox virus (cultures only) Swine vesicular disease virus (cultures only) Vesicular stomatitis virus (cultures only) a Nevertheless, when the cultures are intended for diagnostic or clinical purposes, they may be classified as infectious substances of Category B. 2.2.62.1.4.2 Category B : An infectious substance which does not meet the criteria for inclusion in Category A. Infectious substances in Category B shall be assigned to UN No. 3373. NOTE: The proper shipping name of UN No. 3373 is " BIOLOGICAL SUBSTANCE, CATEGORY B ". 2.2.62.1.5 Exemptions 2.2.62.1.5.1 Substances which do not contain infectious substances or substances which are unlikely to cause disease in humans or animals are not subject to the provisions of RID unless they meet the criteria for inclusion in another class. 2.2.62.1.5.2 Substances containing microorganisms which are non-pathogenic to humans or animals are not subject to RID unless they meet the criteria for inclusion in another class. 2.2.62.1.5.3 Substances in a form that any present pathogens have been neutralized or inactivated such that they no longer pose a health risk are not subject to RID unless they meet the criteria for inclusion in another class. NOTE: Medical equipment which has been drained of free liquid is deemed to meet the requirements of this paragraph and is not subject to the provisions of RID. 2.2.62.1.5.4 Substances where the concentration of pathogens is at a level naturally encountered (including foodstuff and water samples) and which are not considered to pose a significant risk of infection are not subject to RID unless they meet the criteria for inclusion in another class. 2.2.62.1.5.5 Dried blood spots, collected by applying a drop of blood onto absorbent material, are not subject to RID. 2.2.62.1.5.6 Faecal occult blood screening samples are not subject to RID. 2.2.62.1.5.7 Blood or blood components which have been collected for the purposes of transfusion or for the preparation of blood products to be used for transfusion or transplantation and any tissues or organs intended for use in transplantation as well as samples drawn in connection with such purposes are not subject to RID. 2.2.62.1.5.8 Human or animal specimens for which there is minimal likelihood that pathogens are present are not subject to RID if the specimen is carried in a packaging which will prevent any leakage and which is marked with the words "EXEMPT HUMAN SPECIMEN" or "EXEMPT ANIMAL SPECIMEN", as appropriate. The packaging is deemed to comply with the above requirements if it meets the following conditions: (a) The packaging consists of three components: (i) a leak-proof primary receptacle(s); (ii) a leak-proof secondary packaging; and (iii) an outer packaging of adequate strength for its capacity, mass and intended use, and with at least one surface having minimum dimensions of 100 mm x 100 mm; (b) For liquids, absorbent material in sufficient quantity to absorb the entire contents is placed between the primary receptacle(s) and the secondary packaging so that, during carriage, any release or leak of a liquid substance will not reach the outer packaging and will not compromise the integrity of the cushioning material; (c) When multiple fragile primary receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging, they are either individually wrapped or separated to prevent contact between them. NOTE 1: An element of professional judgment is required to determine if a substance is exempt under this paragraph. That judgment should be based on the known medical history, symptoms and individual circumstances of the source, human or animal, and endemic local conditions. Examples of specimens which may be carried under this paragraph include – the blood or urine tests to monitor cholesterol levels, blood glucose levels, hormone levels, or prostate specific antibodies (PSA); – those required to monitor organ function such as heart, liver or kidney function for humans or animals with non-infectious diseases, or for therapeutic drug monitoring; – those conducted for insurance or employment purposes and are intended to determine the presence of drugs or alcohol; – pregnancy test; – biopsies to detect cancer; and – antibody detection in humans or animals in the absence of any concern for infection (e.g. evaluation of vaccine induced immunity, diagnosis of autoimmune disease, etc.) . 2: For air transport, packagings for specimens exempted under this paragraph shall meet the conditions in (a) to (c). 2.2.62.1.5.9 Except for: (a) Medical waste (UN Nos. 3291 and 3549 ); (b) Medical devices or equipment contaminated with or containing infectious substances in Category A (UN No. 2814 or UN No. 2900); and (c) Medical devices or equipment contaminated with or containing other dangerous goods that meet the definition of another class, medical devices or equipment potentially contaminated with or containing infectious substances which are being carried for disinfection, cleaning, sterilization, repair, or equipment evaluation are not subject to the provisions of RID other than those of this paragraph if packed in packagings designed and constructed in such a way that, under normal conditions of carriage, they cannot break, be punctured or leak their contents. Packagings shall be designed to meet the construction requirements listed in 6.1.4 or 6.6.4. These packagings shall meet the general packing requirements of 4.1.1.1 and 4.1.1.2 and be capable of retaining the medical devices and equipment when dropped from a height of 1.2 m. The packagings shall be marked "USED MEDICAL DEVICE" or "USED MEDICAL EQUIPMENT". When using overpacks, these shall be marked in the same way, except when the inscription remains visible. 2.2.62.1.6 (Reserved) 2.2.62.1.7 (Reserved) 2.2.62.1.8 (Reserved) 2.2.62.1.9 Biological products For the purposes of RID, biological products are divided into the following groups: (a) those which are manufactured and packaged in accordance with the requirements of appropriate national authorities and carried for the purposes of final packaging or distribution, and use for personal health care by medical professionals or individuals. Substances in this group are not subject to the provisions of RID; (b) those which do not fall under paragraph (a) and are known or reasonably believed to contain infectious substances and which meet the criteria for inclusion in Category A or Category B. Substances in this group shall be assigned to UN Nos. 2814, 2900 or 3373, as appropriate. NOTE: Some licensed biological products may present a biohazard only in certain parts of the world. In that case, competent authorities may require these biological products to be in compliance with local requirements for infectious substances or may impose other restrictions. 2.2.62.1.10 Genetically modified microorganisms and organisms Genetically modified microorganisms not meeting the definition of infectious substance shall be classified according to section 2.2.9. 2.2.62.1.11 Medical or clinical wastes 2.2.62.1.11.1 Medical or clinical waste containing: (a) Category A infectious substances shall be assigned to UN No. 2814, UN No. 2900 or UN No. 3549, as appropriate. Solid medical waste containing Category A infectious substances generated from the medical treatment of humans or veterinary treatment of animals may be assigned to UN No. 3549. The UN No. 3549 entry shall not be used for waste from bio-research or liquid waste; (b) Category B infectious substances shall be assigned to UN No. 3291. NOTE 1 : The proper shipping name for UN No. 3549 is "MEDICAL WASTE, CATEGORY A, AFFECTING HUMANS, solid" or "MEDICAL WASTE, CATEGORY A, AFFECTING ANIMALS only, solid". 2: Medical or clinical wastes assigned to number 18 01 03 (Wastes from human or animal health care and/or related research – wastes from natal care, diagnosis, treatment or prevention of disease in humans – wastes whose collection and disposal is subject to special requirements in order to prevent infection) or 18 02 02 (Wastes from human or animal health care and/or related research – wastes from research, diagnosis, treatment or prevention of disease involving animals – wastes whose collection and disposal is subject to special requirements in order to prevent infection) according to the list of wastes annexed to the Commission Decision 2000/532/EC as amended, shall be classified according to the provisions set out in this paragraph, based on the medical or veterinary diagnosis concerning the patient or the animal. 2.2.62.1.11.2 Medical or clinical wastes which are reasonably believed to have a low probability of containing infectious substances shall be assigned to UN No. 3291. For the assignment, international, regional or national waste catalogues may be taken into account. NOTE 1: The proper shipping name for UN No. 3291 is "CLINICAL WASTE, UNSPECIFIED, N.O.S." or "(BIO) MEDICAL WASTE, N.O.S". or "REGULATED MEDICAL WASTE, N.O.S.". 2: Notwithstanding the classification criteria set out above, medical or clinical wastes assigned to number 18 01 04 (Wastes from human or animal health care and/or related research – wastes from natal care, diagnosis, treatment or prevention of disease in humans – wastes whose collection and disposal is not subject to special requirements in order to prevent infection) or 18 02 03 (Wastes from human or animal health care and/or related research – wastes from research, diagnosis, treatment or prevention of disease involving animals – wastes whose collection and disposal is not subject to special requirements in order to prevent infection) according to the list of wastes annexed to the Commission Decision 2000/532/EC NOTEREF _Ref128363392 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 5 as amended, are not subject to the provisions of RID. 2.2.62.1.11.3 Decontaminated medical or clinical wastes which previously contained infectious substances are not subject to the provisions of RID unless they meet the criteria for inclusion in another class. 2.2.62.1.11.4 (Deleted) 2.2.62.1.12 Infected animals 2.2.62.1.12.1 Unless an infectious substance cannot be consigned by any other means, live animals shall not be used to consign such a substance. A live animal which has been intentionally infected and is known or suspected to contain an infectious substance shall only be carried under terms and conditions approved by the competent authority. NOTE: The approval of the competent authorities shall be issued on the basis of the relevant rules for the carriage of live animals, taking into consideration dangerous goods aspects. The authorities that are competent to lay down these conditions and rules for approval shall be regulated at national level. If there is no approval by a competent authority of an RID Contracting State, the competent authority of an RID Contracting State may recognize an approval issued by the competent authority of a country that is not an RID Contracting State. Rules for the carriage of livestock are, for example, contained in Council Regulation (EC) No 1/2005 of 22 December 2004 on the protection of animals during transport (Official Journal of the European Union No L 3 of 5 January 2005) as amended. 2. 2.62.1.12.2 (Deleted) 2.2.62.2 Substances not accepted for carriage Live vertebrate or invertebrate animals shall not be used to carry an infectious agent unless the agent cannot be carried by other means or unless this carriage has been approved by the competent authority (see 2.2.62.1.12.1). 2.2.62.3 List of collective entries Classification code UN Name of the substance or article No. Infectious substances Effects on hu mans I1 2814 INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCE, AFFECTING HUMANS Effects on ani mals only I2 2900 INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCE, AFFECTING ANIMALS only Clinical waste I3 3549 MEDICAL WASTE, CATEGORY A, AFFECTING HUMANS, solid or 3549 MEDICAL WASTE, CATEGORY A, AFFECTING ANIMALS only, solid 3291 CLINICAL WASTE, UNSPECIFIED, N.O.S. or 3291 (BIO)MEDICAL WASTE, N.O.S. or 3291 REGULATED MEDICAL WASTE, N.O.S. Biological substances I4 3373 BIOLOGICAL SUBSTANCE, CATEGORY B 2.2.7 Class 7: Radioactive material 2.2.7.1 Definitions 2.2.7.1.1 Radioactive material means any material containing radionuclides where both the activity concentration and the total activity in the consignment exceed the values specified in 2.2.7.2.2.1 to 2.2.7.2.2.6. 2.2.7.1.2 Contamination Contamination means the presence of a radioactive substance on a surface in quantities in excess of 0.4 Bq/cm 2 for beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters, or 0.04 Bq/cm 2 for all other alpha emitters. Non fixed contamination means contamination that can be removed from a surface during routine conditions of carriage. Fixed contamination means contamination other than non fixed contamination. 2.2.7.1.3 Definitions of specific terms A 1 and A 2 A 1 means the activity value of special form radioactive material which is listed in Table 2.2.7.2.2.1 or derived in 2.2.7.2.2.2 and is used to determine the activity limits for the requirements of RID. A 2 means the activity value of radioactive material, other than special form radioactive material, which is listed in Table 2.2.7.2.2.1 or derived in 2.2.7.2.2.2 and is used to determine the activity limits for the requirements of RID. Fissile nuclides means uranium-233, uranium-235, plutonium-239 and plutonium-241. Fissile material means a material containing any of the fissile nuclides. Excluded from the definition of fissile material are the following: (a) Natural uranium or depleted uranium which is unirradiated; (b) Natural uranium or depleted uranium which has been irradiated in thermal reactors only; (c) Material with fissile nuclides less than a total of 0.25 g; (d) Any combination of (a), (b) and/or (c). These exclusions are only valid if there is no other material with fissile nuclides in the package or in the consignment if shipped unpackaged. Low dispersible radioactive material means either a solid radioactive material or a solid radioactive material in a sealed capsule, that has limited dispersibility and is not in powder form. Low specific activity (LSA) material means radioactive material which by its nature has a limited specific activity, or radioactive material for which limits of estimated average specific activity apply. External shielding materials surrounding the LSA material shall not be considered in determining the estimated average specific activity. Low toxicity alpha emitters are: natural uranium; depleted uranium; natural thorium; uranium-235 or uranium-238; thorium-232; thorium-228 and thorium-230 when contained in ores or physical and chemical concentrates; or alpha emitters with a half-life of less than 10 days. Special form radioactive material means either: (a) An indispersible solid radioactive material; or (b) A sealed capsule containing radioactive material. Specific activity of a radionuclide means the activity per unit mass of that nuclide. The specific activity of a material shall mean the activity per unit mass of the material in which the radionuclides are essentially uniformly distributed. Surface contaminated object (SCO) means a solid object which is not itself radioactive but which has radioactive material distributed on its surface. Unirradiated thorium means thorium containing not more than 10 7 g of uranium 233 per gram of thorium 232. Unirradiated uranium means uranium containing not more than 2 × 10 3 Bq of plutonium per gram of uranium 235, not more than 9 × 10 6 Bq of fission products per gram of uranium 235 and not more than 5 × 10 -3 g of uranium-236 per gram of uranium-235. Uranium – natural, depleted, enriched means the following: Natural uranium means uranium (which may be chemically separated) containing the naturally occurring distribution of uranium isotopes (approximately 99.28% uranium 238, and 0.72% uranium 235 by mass). Depleted uranium means uranium containing a lesser mass percentage of uranium 235 than in natural uranium. Enriched uranium means uranium containing a greater mass percentage of uranium 235 than 0.72%. In all cases , a very small mass percentage of uranium 234 is present. 2.2.7.2 Classification 2.2.7.2.1 General provisions 2.2.7.2.1.1 Radioactive material shall be assigned to one of the UN numbers specified in Table 2.2.7.2.1.1, in accordance with 2.2.7.2.4 and 2.2.7.2.5, taking into account the material characteristics determined in 2.2.7.2.3. Table 2.2.7.2.1.1: Assignment of UN numbers UN No. Proper shipping name and description a Excepted packages (1.7.1.5) UN 2908 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – EMPTY PACKAGING UN 2909 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – ARTICLES MANUFACTURED FROM NATURAL URANIUM or DEPLETED URANIUM or NATURAL THORIUM UN 2910 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – LIMITED QUANTITY OF MATERIAL UN 2911 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – INSTRUMENTS or ARTICLES UN 3507 URANIUM HEXAFLUORIDE, RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE less than 0.1 kg per package, non-fissile or fissile-excepted b,c Low specific activity radioactive material (2.2.7.2.3.1) UN 2912 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-I), non-fissile or fissile-excepted b UN 3321 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-II), non fissile or fissile-excepted b UN 3322 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-III), non fissile or fissile-excepted b UN 3324 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-II), FISSILE UN 3325 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-III), FISSILE Surface contaminated objects (2.2.7.2.3.2) UN 2913 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, SURFACE CONTAMINATED OBJECTS (SCO-I, SCO-II or SCO-III), non-fissile or fissile-excepted b UN 3326 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, SURFACE CONTAMINATED OBJECTS (SCO-I or SCO-II), FISSILE Type A packages (2.2.7.2.4.4) UN 2915 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL , TYPE A PACKAGE, non-special form, non-fissile or fissile-excepted b UN 3327 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE A PACKAGE, FISSILE, non-special form UN 3332 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE A PACKAGE, SPECIAL FORM, non fissile or fissile-excepted b UN 3333 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE A PACKAGE, SPECIAL FORM, FISSILE Type B(U) packages (2.2.7.2.4.6) UN 2916 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE B(U) PACKAGE, non-fissile or fissile-excepted b UN 3328 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE B(U) PACKAGE, FISSILE Type B(M) packages (2.2.7.2.4.6) UN 2917 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE B(M) PACKAGE, non-fissile or fissile-excepted b UN 3329 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE B(M) PACKAGE, FISSILE Type C packages (2.2.7.2.4.6) UN 3323 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE C PACKAGE, non fissile or fissile-excepted b UN 3330 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE C PACKAGE, FISSILE Special arrangement (2.2.7.2.5) UN 2919 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TRANSPORTED UNDER SPECIAL ARRANGEMENT, non-fissile or fissile-excepted b UN 3331 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TRANSPORTED UNDER SPECIAL ARRANGEMENT, FISSILE Uranium hexafluoride (2.2.7.2.4.5) UN 2977 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, URANIUM HEXAFLUORIDE, FISSILE UN 2978 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL , URANIUM HEXAFLUORIDE, non-fissile or fissile-excepted b UN 3507 URANIUM HEXAFLUORIDE, RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE less than 0.1 kg per package, non-fissile or fissile-excepted b,c a The proper shipping name is found in the column "proper shipping name and description" and is restricted to that part shown in capital letters. In the cases of UN Nos. 2909, 2911, 2913 and 3326, where alternative proper shipping names are separated by the word "or" only the relevant proper shipping name shall be used. b The term "fissile-excepted" refers only to material excepted under 2.2.7.2.3.5. c For UN No. 3507, see also special provision 369 in Chapter 3.3. 2.2.7.2.2 Determination of basic radionuclide values 2.2.7.2.2.1 The following basic values for individual radionuclides are given in Table 2.2.7.2.2.1: (a) A 1 and A 2 in TBq; (b) Activity concentration limits for exempt material in Bq/g; and (c) Activity limits for exempt consignments in Bq. Table 2.2.7.2.2.1: Basic radionuclides values for individual radionuclides Radionuclide (atomic number) A 1 (TBq) A 2 (TBq) Activity concentration limit for exempt material (Bq/g) Activity limit for an exempt consignment (Bq) Actinium (89) Ac-225 (a) 8 × 10 -1 6 × 10 -3 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 Ac-227 (a) 9 × 10 -1 9 × 10 -5 1 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 Ac-228 6 × 10 -1 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Silver (47) Ag-105 2 × 10 0 2 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Ag-108m (a) 7 × 10 -1 7 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 (b) 1 × 10 6 (b) Ag-110m (a) 4 × 10 -1 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Ag-111 2 × 10 0 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 6 Aluminium (13) Al-26 1 × 10 -1 1 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 Americium (95) Am-241 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 -3 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 4 Am-242m (a) 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 -3 1 × 10 0 (b) 1 × 10 4 (b) Am-243 (a) 5 × 10 0 1 × 10 -3 1 × 10 0 (b) 1 × 10 3 (b) Argon (18) Ar-37 4 × 10 1 4 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 1 × 10 8 Ar-39 4 × 10 1 2 × 10 1 1 × 10 7 1 × 10 4 Ar-41 3 × 10 -1 3 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 9 Arsenic (33) As-72 3 × 10 -1 3 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 As-73 4 × 10 1 4 × 10 1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 7 As-74 1 × 10 0 9 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 As-76 3 × 10 -1 3 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 5 As-77 2 × 10 1 7 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 6 Astatine (85) At-211 (a) 2 × 10 1 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 7 Gold (79) Au-193 7 × 10 0 2 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 7 Au-194 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Au-195 1 × 10 1 6 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 7 Au-198 1 × 10 0 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Au-199 1 × 10 1 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Barium (56) Ba-131 (a) 2 × 10 0 2 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Ba-133 3 × 10 0 3 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Ba-133m 2 × 10 1 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Ba-135m 2 × 10 1 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Ba-140 (a) 5 × 10 -1 3 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 (b) 1 × 10 5 (b) Beryllium (4) Be-7 2 × 10 1 2 × 10 1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 7 Be-10 4 × 10 1 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 6 Bismuth (83) Bi-205 7 × 10 -1 7 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Bi-206 3 × 10 -1 3 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 Bi-207 7 × 10 -1 7 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Bi-210 1 × 10 0 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 6 Bi-210m (a) 6 × 10 -1 2 × 10 -2 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 Bi-212 (a) 7 × 10 -1 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 (b) 1 × 10 5 (b) Berkelium (97) Bk-247 8 × 10 0 8 × 10 -4 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 4 Bk-249 (a) 4 × 10 1 3 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 6 Bromine (35) Br-76 4 × 10 -1 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 Br-77 3 × 10 0 3 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Br-82 4 × 10 -1 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Carbon (6) C-11 1 × 10 0 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 C-14 4 × 10 1 3 × 10 0 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 7 Calcium (20) Ca-41 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 10 5 1 × 10 7 Ca-45 4 × 10 1 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 7 Ca-47 (a) 3 × 10 0 3 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Cadmium (48) Cd-109 3 × 10 1 2 × 10 0 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 6 Cd-113m 4 × 10 1 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 6 Cd-115 (a) 3 × 10 0 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Cd-115m 5 × 10 -1 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 6 Cerium (58) Ce-139 7 × 10 0 2 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Ce-141 2 × 10 1 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 7 Ce-143 9 × 10 -1 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Ce-144 (a) 2 × 10 -1 2 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 (b) 1 × 10 5 (b) Californium (98) Cf-248 4 × 10 1 6 × 10 -3 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 Cf-249 3 × 10 0 8 × 10 -4 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 3 Cf-250 2 × 10 1 2 × 10 -3 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 Cf-251 7 × 10 0 7 × 10 -4 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 3 Cf-252 1 × 10 -1 3 × 10 -3 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 Cf-253 (a) 4 × 10 1 4 × 10 -2 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 5 Cf-254 1 × 10 -3 1 × 10 -3 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 3 Chlorine (17) Cl-36 1 × 10 1 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 6 Cl-38 2 × 10 -1 2 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 Curium (96) Cm-240 4 × 10 1 2 × 10 -2 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 5 Cm-241 2 × 10 0 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Cm-242 4 × 10 1 1 × 10 -2 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 5 Cm-243 9 × 10 0 1 × 10 -3 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 4 Cm-244 2 × 10 1 2 × 10 -3 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 Cm-245 9 × 10 0 9 × 10 -4 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 3 Cm-246 9 × 10 0 9 × 10 -4 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 3 Cm-247 (a) 3 × 10 0 1 × 10 -3 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 4 Cm-248 2 × 10 -2 3 × 10 -4 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 3 Cobalt (27) Co-55 5 × 10 -1 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Co-56 3 × 10 -1 3 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 Co-57 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Co-58 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Co-58m 4 × 10 1 4 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 7 Co-60 4 × 10 -1 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 Chromium (24) Cr-51 3 × 10 1 3 × 10 1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 7 Caesium (55) Cs-129 4 × 10 0 4 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 5 Cs-131 3 × 10 1 3 × 10 1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 6 Cs-132 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 Cs-134 7 × 10 -1 7 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 Cs-134m 4 × 10 1 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 5 Cs-135 4 × 10 1 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 7 Cs-136 5 × 10 -1 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 Cs-137 (a) 2 × 10 0 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 (b) 1 × 10 4 (b) Copper (29) Cu-64 6 × 10 0 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Cu-67 1 × 10 1 7 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Dysprosium (66) Dy-159 2 × 10 1 2 × 10 1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 7 Dy-165 9 × 10 -1 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 6 Dy-166 (a) 9 × 10 -1 3 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 6 Erbium (68) Er-169 4 × 10 1 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 7 Er-171 8 × 10 -1 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Europium (63) Eu-147 2 × 10 0 2 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Eu-148 5 × 10 -1 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Eu-149 2 × 10 1 2 × 10 1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 7 Eu-150 (short lived) 2 × 10 0 7 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 6 Eu-150 (long lived) 7 × 10 -1 7 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Eu-152 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Eu-152m 8 × 10 -1 8 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Eu-154 9 × 10 -1 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Eu-155 2 × 10 1 3 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 7 Eu-156 7 × 10 -1 7 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Fluorine (9) F-18 1 × 10 0 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Iron (26) Fe-52 (a) 3 × 10 -1 3 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Fe-55 4 × 10 1 4 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 6 Fe-59 9 × 10 -1 9 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Fe-60 (a) 4 × 10 1 2 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 5 Gallium (31) Ga-67 7 × 10 0 3 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Ga-68 5 × 10 -1 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 Ga-72 4 × 10 -1 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 Gadolinium (64) Gd-146 (a) 5 × 10 -1 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Gd-148 2 × 10 1 2 × 10 -3 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 Gd-153 1 × 10 1 9 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 7 Gd-159 3 × 10 0 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 6 Germanium (32) Ge-68 (a) 5 × 10 -1 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 Ge-69 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Ge-71 4 × 10 1 4 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 8 Ge-77 3 × 10 -1 3 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 Hafnium (72) Hf-172 (a) 6 × 10 -1 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Hf-175 3 × 10 0 3 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Hf-181 2 × 10 0 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Hf-182 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Mercury (80) Hg-194 (a) 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Hg-195m (a) 3 × 10 0 7 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Hg-197 2 × 10 1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 7 Hg-197m 1 × 10 1 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Hg-203 5 × 10 0 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 5 Holmium (67) Ho-166 4 × 10 -1 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 5 Ho-166m 6 × 10 -1 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Iodine (53) I-123 6 × 10 0 3 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 7 I-124 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 I-125 2 × 10 1 3 × 10 0 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 6 I-126 2 × 10 0 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 I-129 Unlimited Unlimited 1 ×10 2 1 × 10 5 I-131 3 × 10 0 7 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 I-132 4 × 10 -1 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 I-133 7 × 10 -1 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 I-134 3 × 10 -1 3 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 I-135 (a) 6 × 10 -1 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Indium (49) In-111 3 × 10 0 3 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 In-113m 4 × 10 0 2 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 In-114m (a) 1 × 10 1 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 In-115m 7 × 10 0 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Iridium (77) Ir-189 (a) 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 7 Ir-190 7 × 10 -1 7 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Ir-192 1 × 10 0 (c) 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 Ir-193m 4 × 10 1 4 × 10 0 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 7 Ir-194 3 × 10 -1 3 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 5 Potassium (19) K-40 9 × 10 -1 9 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 K-42 2 × 10 -1 2 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 K-43 7 × 10 -1 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Krypton (36) Kr-79 4 x 10 0 2 x 10 0 1 x 10 3 1 x 10 5 Kr-81 4 × 10 1 4 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 7 Kr-85 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 1 × 10 4 Kr-85m 8 × 10 0 3 × 10 0 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 10 Kr-87 2 × 10 -1 2 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 9 Lanthanum (57) La-137 3 × 10 1 6 × 10 0 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 7 La-140 4 × 10 -1 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 Lutetium (71) Lu-172 6 × 10 -1 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Lu-173 8 × 10 0 8 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 7 Lu-174 9 × 10 0 9 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 7 Lu-174m 2 × 10 1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 7 Lu-177 3 × 10 1 7 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 7 Magnesium (12) Mg-28 (a) 3 × 10 -1 3 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 Manganese (25) Mn-52 3 × 10 -1 3 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 Mn-53 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 9 Mn-54 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Mn-56 3 × 10 -1 3 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 Molybdenum (42) Mo-93 4 × 10 1 2 × 10 1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 8 Mo-99 (a) 1 × 10 0 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Nitrogen (7) N-13 9 × 10 -1 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 9 Sodium (11) Na-22 5 × 10 -1 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Na-24 2 × 10 -1 2 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 Niobium (41) Nb-93m 4 × 10 1 3 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 7 Nb-94 7 × 10 -1 7 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Nb-95 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Nb-97 9 × 10 -1 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Neodymium (60) Nd-147 6 × 10 0 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Nd-149 6 × 10 -1 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Nickel (28) Ni-57 6 × 10 -1 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Ni-59 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 8 Ni-63 4 × 10 1 3 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 1 × 10 8 Ni-65 4 × 10 -1 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Neptunium (93) Np-235 4 × 10 1 4 × 10 1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 7 Np-236 (short lived) 2 × 10 1 2 × 10 0 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 7 Np-236 (long lived) 9 × 10 0 2 × 10 -2 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 5 Np-237 2 × 10 1 2 × 10 -3 1 × 10 0 (b) 1 × 10 3 (b) Np-239 7 × 10 0 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 7 Osmium (76) Os-185 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Os-191 1 × 10 1 2 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 7 Os-191m 4 × 10 1 3 × 10 1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 7 Os-193 2 × 10 0 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Os-194 (a) 3 × 10 -1 3 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 5 Phosphorus (15) P-32 5 × 10 -1 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 5 P-33 4 × 10 1 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 5 1 × 10 8 Protactinium (91) Pa-230 (a) 2 × 10 0 7 × 10 -2 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Pa-231 4 × 10 0 4 × 10 -4 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 3 Pa-233 5 × 10 0 7 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 7 Lead (82) Pb-201 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Pb-202 4 × 10 1 2 × 10 1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 6 Pb-203 4 × 10 0 3 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Pb-205 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 7 Pb-210 (a) 1 × 10 0 5 × 10 -2 1 × 10 1 (b) 1 × 10 4 (b) Pb-212 (a) 7 × 10 -1 2 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 (b) 1 × 10 5 (b) Palladium (46) Pd-103 (a) 4 × 10 1 4 × 10 1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 8 Pd-107 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 10 5 1 × 10 8 Pd-109 2 × 10 0 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 6 Promethium (61) Pm-143 3 × 10 0 3 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Pm-144 7 × 10 -1 7 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Pm-145 3 × 10 1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 7 Pm-147 4 × 10 1 2 × 10 0 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 7 Pm-148m (a) 8 × 10 -1 7 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Pm-149 2 × 10 0 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 6 Pm-151 2 × 10 0 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Polonium (84) Po-210 4 × 10 1 2 × 10 -2 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 Praseodymium (59) Pr-142 4 × 10 -1 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 5 Pr-143 3 × 10 0 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 6 Platinum (78) Pt-188 (a) 1 × 10 0 8 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Pt-191 4 × 10 0 3 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Pt-193 4 × 10 1 4 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 7 Pt-193m 4 × 10 1 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 7 Pt-195m 1 × 10 1 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Pt-197 2 × 10 1 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 6 Pt-197m 1 × 10 1 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Plutonium (94) Pu-236 3 × 10 1 3 × 10 -3 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 Pu-237 2 × 10 1 2 × 10 1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 7 Pu-238 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 -3 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 4 Pu-239 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 -3 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 4 Pu-240 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 -3 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 3 Pu-241 (a) 4 × 10 1 6 × 10 -2 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 5 Pu-242 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 -3 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 4 Pu-244 (a) 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 -3 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 4 Radium (88) Ra-223 (a) 4 × 10 -1 7 × 10 -3 1 × 10 2 (b) 1 × 10 5 (b) Ra-224 (a) 4 × 10 -1 2 × 10 -2 1 × 10 1 (b) 1 × 10 5 (b) Ra-225 (a) 2 × 10 -1 4 × 10 -3 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 5 Ra-226 (a) 2 × 10 -1 3 × 10 -3 1 × 10 1 (b) 1 × 10 4 (b) Ra-228 (a) 6 × 10 -1 2 × 10 -2 1 × 10 1 (b) 1 × 10 5 (b) Rubidium (37) Rb-81 2 × 10 0 8 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Rb-83 (a) 2 × 10 0 2 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Rb-84 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Rb-86 5 × 10 -1 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 5 Rb-87 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 7 Rb (nat) Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 7 Rhenium (75) Re-184 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Re-184m 3 × 10 0 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Re-186 2 × 10 0 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 6 Re-187 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 10 6 1 × 10 9 Re-188 4 × 10 -1 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 5 Re-189 (a) 3 × 10 0 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Re (nat) Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 10 6 1 × 10 9 Rhodium (45) Rh-99 2 × 10 0 2 × 10 0 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Rh-101 4 × 10 0 3 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 7 Rh-102 5 × 10 -1 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Rh-102m 2 × 10 0 2 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Rh-103m 4 × 10 1 4 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 8 Rh-105 1 × 10 1 8 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 7 Radon (86) Rn-222 (a) 3 × 10 -1 4 × 10 -3 1 × 10 1 (b) 1 × 10 8 (b) Ruthenium (44) Ru-97 5 × 10 0 5 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 7 Ru-103 (a) 2 × 10 0 2 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Ru-105 1 × 10 0 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Ru-106 (a) 2 × 10 -1 2 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 (b) 1 × 10 5 (b) Sulphur (16) S-35 4 × 10 1 3 × 10 0 1 × 10 5 1 × 10 8 Antimony (51) Sb-122 4 × 10 -1 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 4 Sb-124 6 × 10 -1 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Sb-125 2 × 10 0 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Sb-126 4 × 10 -1 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 Scandium (21) Sc-44 5 × 10 -1 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 Sc-46 5 × 10 -1 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Sc-47 1 × 10 1 7 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Sc-48 3 × 10 -1 3 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 Selenium (34) Se-75 3 × 10 0 3 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Se-79 4 × 10 1 2 × 10 0 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 7 Silicion (14) Si-31 6 × 10 -1 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 6 Si-32 4 × 10 1 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 6 Samarium (62) Sm-145 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 7 Sm-147 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 Sm-151 4 × 10 1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 8 Sm-153 9 × 10 0 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Tin (50) Sn-113 (a) 4 × 10 0 2 × 10 0 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 7 Sn-117m 7 × 10 0 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Sn-119m 4 × 10 1 3 × 10 1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 7 Sn-121m (a) 4 × 10 1 9 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 7 Sn-123 8 × 10 -1 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 6 Sn-125 4 × 10 -1 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 5 Sn-126 (a) 6 × 10 -1 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 Strontium (38) Sr-82 (a) 2 × 10 -1 2 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 Sr-83 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Sr-85 2 × 10 0 2 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Sr-85m 5 × 10 0 5 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 7 Sr-87m 3 × 10 0 3 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Sr-89 6 × 10 -1 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 6 Sr-90 (a) 3 × 10 -1 3 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 (b) 1 × 10 4 (b) Sr-91 (a) 3 × 10 -1 3 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 Sr-92 (a) 1 × 10 0 3 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Tritium (1) T (H-3) 4 × 10 1 4 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 1 × 10 9 Tantalum (73) Ta-178 (long lived) 1 × 10 0 8 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Ta-179 3 × 10 1 3 × 10 1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 7 Ta-182 9 × 10 -1 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 Terbium (65) Tb-149 8 × 10 -1 8 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Tb-157 4 × 10 1 4 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 7 Tb-158 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Tb-160 1 × 10 0 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Tb-161 3 × 10 1 7 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 6 Technetium (43) Tc-95m (a) 2 × 10 0 2 × 10 0 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Tc-96 4 × 10 -1 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Tc-96m (a) 4 × 10 -1 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 7 Tc-97 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 8 Tc-97m 4 × 10 1 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 7 Tc-98 8 × 10 -1 7 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Tc-99 4 × 10 1 9 × 10 -1 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 7 Tc-99m 1 × 10 1 4 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 7 Tellurium (52) Te-121 2 × 10 0 2 × 10 0 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Te-121m 5 × 10 0 3 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Te-123m 8 × 10 0 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 7 Te-125m 2 × 10 1 9 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 7 Te-127 2 × 10 1 7 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 6 Te-127m (a) 2 × 10 1 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 7 Te-129 7 × 10 -1 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Te-129m (a) 8 × 10 -1 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 6 Te-131m (a) 7 × 10 -1 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Te-132 (a) 5 × 10 -1 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 7 Thorium (90) Th-227 1 × 10 1 5 × 10 -3 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 Th-228 (a) 5 × 10 -1 1 × 10 -3 1 × 10 0 (b) 1 × 10 4 (b) Th-229 5 × 10 0 5 × 10 -4 1 × 10 0 (b) 1 × 10 3 (b) Th-230 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 -3 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 4 Th-231 4 × 10 1 2 × 10 -2 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 7 Th-232 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 Th-234 (a) 3 × 10 -1 3 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 (b) 1 × 10 5 (b) Th (nat) Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 10 0 (b) 1 × 10 3 (b) Titanium (22) Ti-44 (a) 5 × 10 -1 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 Thallium (81) Tl-200 9 × 10 -1 9 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Tl-201 1 × 10 1 4 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Tl-202 2 × 10 0 2 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Tl-204 1 × 10 1 7 × 10 -1 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 4 Thulium (69) Tm-167 7 × 10 0 8 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Tm-170 3 × 10 0 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 6 Tm-171 4 × 10 1 4 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 8 Uranium (92) U-230 ( fast lung absorption ) (a)(d) 4 × 10 1 1 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 (b) 1 × 10 5 (b) U-230 ( medium lung absorption ) (a)(e) 4 × 10 1 4 × 10 -3 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 U-230 ( slow lung absorption ) (a)(f) 3 × 10 1 3 × 10 -3 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 U-232 ( fast lung absorption ) (d) 4 × 10 1 1 × 10 -2 1 × 10 0 (b) 1 × 10 3 (b) U-232 ( medium lung absorption ) (e) 4 × 10 1 7 × 10 -3 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 U-232 ( slow lung absorption ) (f) 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 -3 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 U-233 ( fast lung absorption ) (d) 4 × 10 1 9 × 10 -2 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 U-233 ( medium lung absorption ) (e) 4 × 10 1 2 × 10 -2 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 5 U-233 ( slow lung absorption ) (f) 4 × 10 1 6 × 10 -3 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 U-234 ( fast lung absorption ) (d) 4 × 10 1 9 × 10 -2 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 U-234 ( medium lung absorption ) (e) 4 × 10 1 2 × 10 -2 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 5 U-234 ( slow lung absorption ) (f) 4 × 10 1 6 × 10 -3 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 U-235 ( all lung absorption types ) (a)(d)(e)(f) Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 10 1 (b) 1 × 10 4 (b) U-236 ( fast lung absorption ) (d) Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 U-236 ( medium lung absorption ) (e) 4 × 10 1 2 × 10 -2 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 5 U-236 ( slow lung absorption ) (f) 4 × 10 1 6 × 10 -3 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 U-238 ( all lung absorption types ) (d)(e)(f) Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 10 1 (b) 1 × 10 4 (b) U (nat) Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 10 0 (b) 1 × 10 3 (b) U (enriched to 20% or less) (g) Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 3 U (dep) Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 3 Vanadium (23) V-48 4 × 10 -1 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 5 V-49 4 × 10 1 4 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 7 Tungsten (74) W-178 (a) 9 × 10 0 5 × 10 0 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 W-181 3 × 10 1 3 × 10 1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 7 W-185 4 × 10 1 8 × 10 -1 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 7 W-187 2 × 10 0 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 W-188 (a) 4 × 10 -1 3 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 5 Xenon (54) Xe-122 (a) 4 × 10 -1 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 9 Xe-123 2 × 10 0 7 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 9 Xe-127 4 × 10 0 2 × 10 0 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 5 Xe-131m 4 × 10 1 4 × 10 1 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 4 Xe-133 2 × 10 1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 4 Xe-135 3 × 10 0 2 × 10 0 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 10 Yttrium (39) Y-87 (a) 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Y-88 4 × 10 -1 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Y-90 3 × 10 -1 3 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 5 Y-91 6 × 10 -1 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 6 Y-91m 2 × 10 0 2 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Y-92 2 × 10 -1 2 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 5 Y-93 3 × 10 -1 3 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 5 Ytterbium (70) Yb-169 4 × 10 0 1 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 7 Yb-175 3 × 10 1 9 × 10 -1 1 × 10 3 1 × 10 7 Zinc (30) Zn-65 2 × 10 0 2 × 10 0 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Zn-69 3 × 10 0 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 4 1 × 10 6 Zn-69m (a) 3 × 10 0 6 × 10 -1 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Zirconium (40) Zr-88 3 × 10 0 3 × 10 0 1 × 10 2 1 × 10 6 Zr-93 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 10 3 (b) 1 × 10 7 (b) Zr-95 (a) 2 × 10 0 8 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 1 × 10 6 Zr-97 (a) 4 × 10 -1 4 × 10 -1 1 × 10 1 (b) 1 × 10 5 (b) (a) A 1 and/or A 2 values for these parent radionuclides include contributions from their progeny with half-lives less than 10 days, as listed in the following: Mg-28 Al-28 Ar-42 K-42 Ca-47 Sc-47 Ti-44 Sc-44 Fe-52 Mn-52m Fe-60 Co-60m Zn-69m Zn-69 Ge-68 Ga-68 Rb-83 Kr-83m Sr-82 Rb-82 Sr-90 Y-90 Sr-91 Y-91m Sr-92 Y-92 Y-87 Sr-87m Zr-95 Nb-95m Zr-97 Nb-97m, Nb-97 Mo-99 Tc-99m Tc-95m Tc-95 Tc-96m Tc-96 Ru-103 Rh-103m Ru-106 Rh-106 Pd-103 Rh-103m Ag-108m Ag-108 Ag-110m Ag-110 Cd-115 In-115m In-114m In-114 Sn-113 In-113m Sn-121m Sn-121 Sn-126 Sb-126m Te-118 Sb-118 Te-127m Te-127 Te-129m Te-129 Te-131m Te-131 Te-132 I-132 I-135 Xe-135m Xe-122 I-122 Cs-137 Ba-137m Ba-131 Cs-131 Ba-140 La-140 Ce-144 Pr-144m, Pr-144 Pm-148m Pm-148 Gd-146 Eu-146 Dy-166 Ho-166 Hf-172 Lu-172 W-178 Ta-178 W-188 Re-188 Re-189 Os-189m Os-194 Ir-194 Ir-189 Os-189m Pt-188 Ir-188 Hg-194 Au-194 Hg-195m Hg-195 Pb-210 Bi-210 Pb-212 Bi-212, Tl-208, Po-212 Bi-210m Tl-206 Bi-212 Tl-208, Po-212 At-211 Po-211 Rn-222 Po-218, Pb-214, At-218, Bi-214, Po-214 Ra-223 Rn-219, Po-215, Pb-211, Bi-211, Po-211, Tl-207 Ra-224 Rn-220, Po-216, Pb-212, Bi-212, Tl-208, Po-212 Ra-225 Ac-225, Fr-221, At-217, Bi-213, Tl-209, Po-213, Pb-209 Ra-226 Rn-222, Po-218, Pb-214, At-218, Bi-214, Po-214 Ra-228 Ac-228 Ac-225 Fr-221, At-217, Bi-213, Tl-209, Po-213, Pb-209 Ac-227 Fr-223 Th-228 Ra-224, Rn-220, Po-216, Pb-212, Bi-212, Tl-208, Po-212 Th-234 Pa-234m, Pa-234 Pa-230 Ac-226, Th-226, Fr-222, Ra-222, Rn-218, Po-214 U-230 Th-226, Ra-222, Rn-218, Po-214 U-235 Th-231 Pu-241 U-237 Pu-244 U-240, Np-240m Am-242m Am-242, Np-238 Am-243 Np-239 Cm-247 Pu-243 Bk-249 Am-245 Cf-253 Cm-249 (b) Parent nuclides and their progeny included in secular equilibrium are listed in the following (the activity to be taken into account is that of the parent nuclide only): Sr-90 Y-90 Zr-93 Nb-93m Zr-97 Nb-97 Ru-106 Rh-106 Ag-108m Ag-108 Cs-137 Ba-137m Ce-144 Pr-144 Ba-140 La-140 Bi-212 Tl-208 (0.36), Po-212 (0.64) Pb-210 Bi-210, Po-210 Pb-212 Bi-212, Tl-208 (0.36), Po-212 (0.64) Rn-222 Po-218, Pb-214, Bi-214, Po-214 Ra-223 Rn-219, Po-215, Pb-211, Bi-211, Tl-207 Ra-224 Rn-220, Po-216, Pb-212, Bi-212, Tl-208 (0.36), Po-212 (0.64) Ra-226 Rn-222, Po-218, Pb-214, Bi-214, Po-214, Pb-210, Bi-210, Po-210 Ra-228 Ac-228 Th-228 Ra-224, Rn-220, Po-216, Pb212, Bi-212, Tl208 (0.36), Po-212 (0.64) Th-229 Ra-225, Ac-225, Fr-221, At-217, Bi-213, Po-213, Pb-209 Th-nat Ra-228, Ac-228, Th-228, Ra-224, Rn-220, Po-216, Pb-212, Bi-212, Tl-208 (0.36), Po-212 (0.64) Th-234 Pa-234m U-230 Th-226, Ra-222, Rn-218, Po-214 U-232 Th-228, Ra-224, Rn-220, Po-216, Pb-212, Bi-212, Tl-208 (0.36), Po-212 (0.64) U-235 Th-231 U-238 Th-234, Pa-234m U-nat NOTEREF _Ref38045634 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 6 Th-234, Pa-234m, U-234, Th-230, Ra-226, Rn-222, Po-218, Pb-214, Bi-214, Po-214, Pb 210, Bi-210, Po-210 Np-237 Pa-233 Am-242m Am-242 Am-243 Np-239 (c) The quantity may be determined from a measurement of the rate of decay or a measurement of the dose rate at a prescribed distance from the source. (d) These values apply only to compounds of uranium that take the chemical form of UF 6 , UO 2 F 2 and UO 2 (NO 3 ) 2 in both normal and accident conditions of carriage. (e) These values apply only to compounds of uranium that take the chemical form of UO 3 , UF 4 , UCl 4 and hexavalent compounds in both normal and accident conditions of carriage. (f) These values apply to all compounds of uranium other than those specified in (d) and (e) above. (g) These values apply to unirradiated uranium only. 2.2.7.2.2.2 For individual radionuclides: (a) Which are not listed in Table 2.2.7.2.2.1 the determination of the basic radionuclide values referred to in 2.2.7.2.2.1 shall require multilateral approval. For these radionuclides, activity concentration limits for exempt material and activity limits for exempt consignments shall be calculated in accordance with the principles established in "Radiation Protection and Safety of Radiation Sources: International Basic Safety Standards", IAEA Safety Standards Series No. GSR Part 3, IAEA, Vienna (2014) . It is permissible to use an A 2 value calculated using a dose coefficient for the appropriate lung absorption type as recommended by the International Commission on Radiological Protection, if the chemical forms of each radionuclide under both normal and accident conditions of carriage are taken into consideration. Alternatively, the radionuclide values in Table 2.2.7.2.2.2 may be used without obtaining competent authority approval; (b) In instruments or articles in which the radioactive material is enclosed or is included as a component part of the instrument or other manufactured article and which meet 2.2.7.2.4.1.3 (c), alternative basic radionuclide values to those in Table 2.2.7.2.2.1 for the activity limit for an exempt consignment are permitted and shall require multilateral approval. Such alternative activity limits for an exempt consignment shall be calculated in accordance with the principles set out in GSR Part 3 . Table 2.2.7.2.2.2: Basic radionuclide values for unknown radionuclides or mixtures Radioactive contents A 1 A 2 Activity concentration limit for exempt material Activity limit for an exempt consignment (TBq) (TBq) (Bq/g) (Bq) Only beta or gamma emitting nuclides are known to be present 0.1 0.02 1 x 10 1 1 x 10 4 Alpha emitting nuclides but no neutron emitters are known to be present 0.2 9 x 10 -5 1 x 10 -1 1 x 10 3 Neutron emitting nuclides are known to be present or no relevant data are available 0.001 9 x 10 -5 1 x 10 -1 1 x 10 3 2.2.7.2.2.3 In the calculations of A 1 and A 2 for a radionuclide not in Table 2.2.7.2.2.1, a single radioactive decay chain in which the radionuclides are present in their naturally occurring proportions, and in which no progeny nuclide has a half life either longer than 10 days or longer than that of the parent nuclide, shall be considered as a single radionuclide; and the activity to be taken into account and the A 1 or A 2 value to be applied shall be those corresponding to the parent nuclide of that chain. In the case of radioactive decay chains in which any progeny nuclide has a half life either longer than 10 days or greater than that of the parent nuclide, the parent and such progeny nuclides shall be considered as mixtures of different nuclides. 2.2.7.2.2.4 For mixtures of radionuclides, the basic radionuclide values referred to in 2.2.7.2.2.1 may be determined as follows: where f(i) is the fraction of activity or activity concentration of radionuclide i in the mixture; X(i) is the appropriate value of A 1 or A 2 , or the activity concentration limit for exempt material or the activity limit for an exempt consignment as appropriate for the radionuclide i; and X m is the derived value of A 1 or A 2 , or the activity concentration limit for exempt material or the activity limit for an exempt consignment in the case of a mixture. 2.2.7.2.2.5 When the identity of each radionuclide is known but the individual activities of some of the radionuclides are not known, the radionuclides may be grouped and the lowest radionuclide value, as appropriate, for the radionuclides in each group may be used in applying the formulas in 2.2.7.2.2.4 and 2.2.7.2.4.4. Groups may be based on the total alpha activity and the total beta/gamma activity when these are known, using the lowest radionuclide values for the alpha emitters or beta/gamma emitters, respectively. 2.2.7.2.2.6 For individual radionuclides or for mixtures of radionuclides for which relevant data are not available, the values shown in Table 2.2.7.2.2.2 shall be used. 2.2.7.2.3 Determination of other material characteristics 2.2.7.2.3.1 Low specific activity (LSA) material 2.2.7.2.3.1.1 (Reserved) 2.2.7.2.3.1.2 LSA material shall be in one of three groups: (a) LSA I (i) uranium and thorium ores and concentrates of such ores, and other ores containing naturally occurring radionuclides; (ii) natural uranium, depleted uranium, natural thorium or their compounds or mixtures, that are unirradiated and in solid or liquid form ; (iii) radioactive material for which the A 2 value is unlimited. Fissile material may be included only if excepted under 2.2.7.2.3.5; (iv) other radioactive material in which the activity is distributed throughout and the estimated average specific activity does not exceed 30 times the values for activity concentration specified in 2.2.7.2.2.1 to 2.2.7.2.2.6. Fissile material may be included only if excepted under 2.2.7.2.3.5 ; (b) LSA II (i) water with tritium concentration up to 0.8 TBq/l; (ii) other material in which the activity is distributed throughout and the estimated average specific activity does not exceed 10 4 A 2 /g for solids and gases, and 10 5 A 2 /g for liquids; (c) LSA III Solids (e.g. consolidated wastes, activated materials), excluding powders in which: (i) the radioactive material is distributed throughout a solid or a collection of solid objects, or is essentially uniformly distributed in a solid compact binding agent (such as concrete, bitumen and ceramic); (ii) the estimated average specific activity of the solid, excluding any shielding material, does not exceed 2 × 10 3 A 2 /g. 2.2.7.2.3.1.3 (Deleted) 2.2.7.2.3.1.4 (Deleted) 2.2.7.2.3.1.5 (Deleted) 2.2.7.2.3.2 Surface contaminated object (SCO) SCO is classified in one of three groups: (a) SCO I: A solid object on which: (i) the non fixed contamination on the accessible surface averaged over 300 cm 2 (or the area of the surface if less than 300 cm 2 ) does not exceed 4 Bq/cm 2 for beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters, or 0.4 Bq/cm 2 for all other alpha emitters; and (ii) the fixed contamination on the accessible surface averaged over 300 cm 2 (or the area of the surface if less than 300 cm 2 ) does not exceed 4 × 10 4 Bq/cm 2 for beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters, or 4 × 10 3 Bq/cm 2 for all other alpha emitters; and (iii) the non fixed contamination plus the fixed contamination on the inaccessible surface averaged over 300 cm 2 (or the area of the surface if less than 300 cm 2 ) does not exceed 4 × 10 4 Bq/cm 2 for beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters, or 4 × 10 3 Bq/cm 2 for all other alpha emitters; (b) SCO II: A solid object on which either the fixed or non fixed contamination on the surface exceeds the applicable limits specified for SCO I in (a) above and on which: (i) the non fixed contamination on the accessible surface averaged over 300 cm 2 (or the area of the surface if less than 300 cm 2 ) does not exceed 400 Bq/cm 2 for beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters, or 40 Bq/cm 2 for all other alpha emitters; and (ii) the fixed contamination on the accessible surface, averaged over 300 cm 2 (or the area of the surface if less than 300 cm 2 ) does not exceed 8 × 10 5 Bq/cm 2 for beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters, or 8 × 10 4 Bq/cm 2 for all other alpha emitters; and (iii) the non fixed contamination plus the fixed contamination on the inaccessible surface averaged over 300 cm 2 (or the area of the surface if less than 300 cm 2 ) does not exceed 8 × 10 5 Bq/cm 2 for beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters, or 8 × 10 4 Bq/cm 2 for all other alpha emitters. (c) SCO-III: A large solid object which, because of its size, cannot be carried in a type of package described in RID and for which: (i) All openings are sealed to prevent release of radioactive material during conditions defined in 4.1.9.2.4 (e); (ii) The inside of the object is as dry as practicable; (iii) The non-fixed contamination on the external surfaces does not exceed the limits specified in 4.1.9.1.2; and (iv) The non-fixed contamination plus the fixed contamination on the inaccessible surface averaged over 300 cm 2 does not exceed 8 × 10 5 Bq/cm 2 for beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters, or 8 × 10 4 Bq/cm 2 for all other alpha emitters. 2.2.7.2.3.3 Special form radioactive material 2.2.7.2.3.3.1 Special form radioactive material shall have at least one dimension not less than 5 mm. When a sealed capsule constitutes part of the special form radioactive material, the capsule shall be so manufactured that it can be opened only by destroying it. The design for special form radioactive material requires unilateral approval. 2.2.7.2.3.3.2 Special form radioactive material shall be of such a nature or shall be so designed that if it is subjected to the tests specified in 2.2.7.2.3.3.4 to 2.2.7.2.3.3.8, it shall meet the following requirements: (a) It would not break or shatter under the impact, percussion and bending tests 2.2.7.2.3.3.5 (a), (b), (c) and 2.2.7.2.3.3.6 (a) as applicable; (b) It would not melt or disperse in the applicable heat test 2.2.7.2.3.3.5 (d) or 2.2.7.2.3.3.6 (b) as applicable; and (c) The activity in the water from the leaching tests specified in 2.2.7.2.3.3.7 and 2.2.7.2.3.3.8 would not exceed 2 kBq; or alternatively for sealed sources, the leakage rate for the volumetric leakage assessment test specified in ISO 9978:1992 "Radiation Protection – Sealed Radioactive Sources – Leakage Test Methods", would not exceed the applicable acceptance threshold acceptable to the competent authority. 2.2.7.2.3.3.3 Demonstration of compliance with the performance standards in 2.2.7.2.3.3.2 shall be in accordance with 6.4.12.1 and 6.4.12.2. 2.2.7.2.3.3.4 Specimens that comprise or simulate special form radioactive material shall be subjected to the impact test, the percussion test, the bending test, and the heat test specified in 2.2.7.2.3.3.5 or alternative tests as authorized in 2.2.7.2.3.3.6. A different specimen may be used for each of the tests. Following each test, a leaching assessment or volumetric leakage test shall be performed on the specimen by a method no less sensitive than the methods given in 2.2.7.2.3.3.7 for indispersible solid material or 2.2.7.2.3.3.8 for encapsulated material. 2.2.7.2.3.3.5 The relevant test methods are: (a) Impact test: The specimen shall drop onto the target from a height of 9 m. The target shall be as defined in 6.4.14; (b) Percussion test: The specimen shall be placed on a sheet of lead which is supported by a smooth solid surface and struck by the flat face of a mild steel bar so as to cause an impact equivalent to that resulting from a free drop of 1.4 kg from a height of 1 m . The lower part of the bar shall be 25 mm in diameter with the edges rounded off to a radius of (3.0 ± 0.3) mm. The lead, of hardness number 3.5 to 4.5 on the Vickers scale and not more than 25 mm thick, shall cover an area greater than that covered by the specimen. A fresh surface of lead shall be used for each impact. The bar shall strike the specimen so as to cause maximum damage; (c) Bending test: The test shall apply only to long, slender sources with both a minimum length of 10 cm and a length to minimum width ratio of not less than 10. The specimen shall be rigidly clamped in a horizontal position so that one half of its length protrudes from the face of the clamp. The orientation of the specimen shall be such that the specimen will suffer maximum damage when its free end is struck by the flat face of a steel bar. The bar shall strike the specimen so as to cause an impact equivalent to that resulting from a free vertical drop of 1.4 kg from a height of 1 m . The lower part of the bar shall be 25 mm in diameter with the edges rounded off to a radius of (3.0 ± 0.3) mm; (d) Heat test: The specimen shall be heated in air to a temperature of 800 °C and held at that temperature for a period of 10 minutes and shall then be allowed to cool. 2.2.7.2.3.3.6 Specimens that comprise or simulate radioactive material enclosed in a sealed capsule may be excepted from: (a) The tests prescribed in 2.2.7.2.3.3.5 (a) and (b) provided that the specimens are alternatively subjected to the impact test prescribed in ISO 2919:2012 "Radiation Protection – Sealed Radioactive Sources – General requirements and classification": (i) The Class 4 impact test if the mass of the special form radioactive material is less than 200 g; (ii) The Class 5 impact test if the mass of the special form radioactive material is equal to or more than 200 g but is less than 500 g; (b) The test prescribed in 2.2.7.2.3.3.5 (d) provided they are alternatively subjected to the Class 6 temperature test specified in ISO 2919:2012 "Radiation protection – Sealed radioactive sources – General requirements and classification". 2.2.7.2.3.3.7 For specimens which comprise or simulate indispersible solid material, a leaching assessment shall be performed as follows: (a) The specimen shall be immersed for 7 days in water at ambient temperature. The volume of water to be used in the test shall be sufficient to ensure that at the end of the 7 day test period the free volume of the unabsorbed and unreacted water remaining shall be at least 10% of the volume of the solid test sample itself. The water shall have an initial pH of 6–8 and a maximum conductivity of 1 mS/m at 20 °C; (b) The water and the specimen shall then be heated to a temperature of (50 ± 5) °C and maintained at this temperature for 4 hours; (c) The activity of the water shall then be determined; (d) The specimen shall then be kept for at least 7 days in still air at not less than 30 °C and relative humidity not less than 90%; (e) The specimen shall then be immersed in water of the same specification as in (a) above and the water and the specimen heated to (50 ± 5) °C and maintained at this temperature for 4 hours; (f) The activity of the water shall then be determined. 2.2.7.2.3.3.8 For specimens which comprise or simulate radioactive material enclosed in a sealed capsule, either a leaching assessment or a volumetric leakage assessment shall be performed as follows: (a) The leaching assessment shall consist of the following steps: (i) the specimen shall be immersed in water at ambient temperature. The water shall have an initial pH of 6–8 with a maximum conductivity of 1 mS/m at 20 °C; (ii) the water and specimen shall then be heated to a temperature of (50 ± 5) °C and maintained at this temperature for 4 hours; (iii) the activity of the water shall then be determined; (iv) the specimen shall then be kept for at least 7 days in still air at not less than 30 °C and relative humidity of not less than 90%; (v) the process in (i), (ii) and (iii) shall be repeated; (b) The alternative volumetric leakage assessment shall comprise any of the tests prescribed in ISO 9978:1992 "Radiation Protection – Sealed radioactive sources – Leakage test methods", provided that they are acceptable to the competent authority. 2.2.7.2.3.4 Low dispersible radioactive material 2.2.7.2.3.4.1 The design for low dispersible radioactive material shall require multilateral approval. Low dispersible radioactive material shall be such that the total amount of this radioactive material in a package , taking into account the provisions of 6.4.8.14, shall meet the following requirements: (a) The dose rate at 3 m from the unshielded radioactive material does not exceed 10 mSv/h; (b) If subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.20.3 and 6.4.20.4, the airborne release in gaseous and particulate forms of up to 100 μm aerodynamic equivalent diameter would not exceed 100 A 2 . A separate specimen may be used for each test; and (c) If subjected to the test specified in 2.2.7.2.3.4.3 the activity in the water would not exceed 100 A 2 . In the application of this test, the damaging effects of the tests specified in (b) above shall be taken into account. 2.2.7.2.3.4.2 Low dispersible radioactive material shall be tested as follows: A specimen that comprises or simulates low dispersible radioactive material shall be subjected to the enhanced thermal test specified in 6.4.20.3 and the impact test specified in 6.4.20.4. A different specimen may be used for each of the tests. Following each test, the specimen shall be subjected to the leach test specified in 2.2.7.2.3.4.3 . After each test it shall be determined if the applicable requirements of 2.2.7.2.3.4.1 have been met. 2.2.7.2.3.4.3 A solid material sample representing the entire contents of the package shall be immersed for 7 days in water at ambient temperature. The volume of water to be used in the test shall be sufficient to ensure that at the end of the 7-day test period the free volume of the unabsorbed and unreacted water remaining shall be at least 10 % of the volume of the solid test sample itself. The water shall have an initial pH of 6-8 and a maximum conductivity of 1 mS/m at 20 °C. The total activity of the free volume of water shall be measured following the 7-day immersion of the test sample. 2.2.7.2.3.4.4 Demonstration of compliance with the performance standards in 2.2.7.2.3.4.1, 2.2.7.2.3.4.2 and 2.2.7.2.3.4.3 shall be in accordance with 6.4.12.1 and 6.4.12.2. 2.2.7.2.3.5 Fissile material Fissile material and packages containing fissile material shall be classified under the relevant entry as "FISSILE" in accordance with Table 2.2.7.2.1.1 unless excepted by one of the provisions of paragraphs (a) to (f) below and carried subject to the requirements of 7.5.11 CW 33 (4.3). All provisions apply only to material in packages that meets the requirements of 6.4.7.2 unless unpackaged material is specifically allowed in the provision. (a) Uranium enriched in uranium-235 to a maximum of 1% by mass, and with a total plutonium and uranium-233 content not exceeding 1% of the mass of uranium-235, provided that the fissile nuclides are distributed essentially homogeneously throughout the material. In addition, if uranium-235 is present in metallic, oxide or carbide forms, it shall not form a lattice arrangement; (b) Liquid solutions of uranyl nitrate enriched in uranium-235 to a maximum of 2% by mass, with a total plutonium and uranium-233 content not exceeding 0.002% of the mass of uranium, and with a minimum nitrogen to uranium atomic ratio (N/U) of 2; (c) Uranium with a maximum uranium enrichment of 5% by mass uranium-235 provided: (i) There is no more than 3.5 g of uranium-235 per package; (ii) The total plutonium and uranium-233 content does not exceed 1% of the mass of uranium-235 per package; (iii) Carriage of the package is subject to the consignment limit provided in 7.5 .11 CW 33 (4.3) (c); (d) Fissile nuclides with a total mass not greater than 2.0 g per package provided the package is carried subject to the consignment limit provided in 7.5.11 CW 33 (4.3) (d); (e) Fissile nuclides with a total mass not greater than 45 g either packaged or unpackaged subject to the requirements of 7.5.11 CW 33 (4.3) (e); (f) A fissile material that meets the requirements of 7.5.11 CW 33 (4.3) (b), 2.2.7.2.3.6 and 5.1.5.2.1. 2.2.7.2.3.6 Fissile material excepted from classification as "FISSILE" under 2.2.7.2.3.5 (f) shall be subcritical without the need for accumulation control under the following conditions: (a) The conditions of 6.4.11.1 (a); (b) The conditions consistent with the assessment provisions stated in 6.4.11.12 (b) and 6.4.11.13 (b) for packages. 2.2.7.2.4 Classification of packages or unpacked material The quantity of radioactive material in a package shall not exceed the relevant limits for the package type as specified below. 2.2.7.2.4.1 Classification as excepted package 2.2.7.2.4.1.1 A package may be classified as an excepted package if it meets one of the following conditions: (a) It is an empty package having contained radioactive material; (b) It contains instruments or articles not exceeding the activity limits specified in columns (2) and (3) of Table 2.2.7.2.4.1.2; (c) It contains articles manufactured of natural uranium, depleted uranium or natural thorium; (d) It contains radioactive material not exceeding the activity limits specified in column (4) of Table 2.2.7.2.4.1.2; or (e) It contains less than 0.1 kg of uranium hexafluoride not exceeding the activity limits specified in column (4) of Table 2.2.7.2.4.1.2. 2.2.7.2.4.1.2 A package containing radioactive material may be classified as an excepted package, provided that the dose rate at any point on its external surface does not exceed 5 μSv/h. Table 2.2.7.2.4.1.2: Activity limits for excepted packages Physical state of contents Instruments or articles Materials Item limits (a) Package limits (a) Package limits (a) (1) (2) (3) (4) Solids special form 10 -2 A 1 A 1 10 -3 A 1 other form 10 -2 A 2 A 2 10 -3 A 2 Liquids 10 -3 A 2 10 -1 A 2 10 -4 A 2 Gases tritium 2 x 10 -2 A 2 2 x 10 -1 A 2 2 x 10 -2 A 2 special form 10 -3 A 1 10 -2 A 1 10 -3 A 1 other form 10 -3 A 2 10 -2 A 2 10 -3 A 2 (a) For mixtures of radionuclides, see 2.2.7.2.2.4 to 2.2.7.2.2.6 . 2.2.7.2.4.1.3 Radioactive material which is enclosed in or is included as a component part of an instrument or other manufactured article may be classified under UN No. 2911 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – INSTRUMENTS or ARTICLES, provided that: (a) The dose rate at 10 cm from any point on the external surface of any unpackaged instrument or article is not greater than 0.1 mSv/h; (b) Each instrument or manufactured article bears the mark "RADIOACTIVE" on its external surface except for the following: (i) radioluminescent time-pieces or devices; (ii) consumer products that have either received regulatory approval in accordance with 1.7.1.4 (e) or do not individually exceed the activity limit for an exempt consignment in Table 2.2.7.2.2.1 (column 5), provided such products are transported in a package that bears the mark "RADIOACTIVE" on its internal surface in such a manner that a warning of the presence of radioactive material is visible on opening the package; and (iii) other instruments or articles too small to bear the mark "RADIOACTIVE", provided that they are transported in a package that bears the mark "RADIOACTIVE" on its internal surface in such a manner that a warning of the presence of radioactive material is visible on opening the package; (c) The active material is completely enclosed by non-active components (a device performing the sole function of containing radioactive material shall not be considered to be an instrument or manufactured article); (d) The limits specified in columns 2 and 3 of Table 2.2.7.2.4.1.2 are met for each individual item and each package, respectively; (e) (Reserved) ; (f) If the package contains fissile material, one of the provisions of 2.2.7.2.3.5 (a) to (f) applies. 2.2.7.2.4.1.4 Radioactive material in forms other than as specified in 2.2.7.2.4.1.3 and with an activity not exceeding the limits specified in column 4 of Table 2.2.7.2.4.1.2, may be classified under UN No. 2910 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – LIMITED QUANTITY OF MATERIAL, provided that: (a) The package retains its radioactive contents under routine conditions of carriage; (b) The package bears the mark "RADIOACTIVE" on either: (i) An internal surface in such a manner that a warning of the presence of radioactive material is visible on opening the package; or (ii) The outside of the package, where it is impractical to mark an internal surface ; and (c) If the package contains fissile material, one of the provisions of 2.2.7.2.3.5 (a) to (f) applies. 2.2.7.2.4.1.5 Uranium hexafluoride not exceeding the limits specified in Column 4 of Table 2.2.7.2.4.1.2 may be classified under UN 3507 URANIUM HEXAFLUORIDE, RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE, less than 0.1 kg per package, non-fissile or fissile-excepted provided that: (a) The mass of uranium hexafluoride in the package is less than 0.1 kg; (b) The conditions of 2.2.7.2.4.5.2 and 2.2.7.2.4.1.4 (a) and (b) are met. 2.2.7.2.4.1.6 Articles manufactured of natural uranium, depleted uranium or natural thorium and articles in which the sole radioactive material is unirradiated natural uranium, unirradiated depleted uranium or unirradiated natural thorium may be classified under UN No. 2909 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – ARTICLES MANUFACTURED FROM NATURAL URANIUM or DEPLETED URANIUM or NATURAL THORIUM, provided that the outer surface of the uranium or thorium is enclosed in an inactive sheath made of metal or some other substantial material. 2.2.7.2.4.1.7 An empty packaging which had previously contained radioactive material may be classified under UN No. 2908 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – EMPTY PACKAGING, provided that : (a) It is in a well-maintained condition and securely closed; (b) The outer surface of any uranium or thorium in its structure is covered with an inactive sheath made of metal or some other substantial material; (c) The level of internal non-fixed contamination, when averaged over any 300 cm 2 , does not exceed: (i) 400 Bq/cm 2 for beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters; and (ii) 40 Bq/cm 2 for all other alpha emitters; (d) Any labels which may have been displayed on it in conformity with 5.2.2.1.11.1 are no longer visible ; and (e) If the packaging has contained fissile material, one of the provisions of 2.2.7.2.3.5 (a) to (f) or one of the provisions for exclusion in 2.2.7.1.3 applies. 2.2.7.2.4.2 Classification as Low specific activity (LSA) material Radioactive material may only be classified as LSA material if the definition of LSA in 2.2.7.1.3 and the conditions of 2.2.7.2.3.1, 4.1.9.2 and 7.5.11 CW 33 (2) are met . 2.2.7.2.4.3 Classification as Surface contaminated object (SCO) Radioactive material may be classified as SCO if the definition of SCO in 2.2.7.1.3 and the conditions of 2.2.7.2.3.2, 4.1.9.2 and 7.5.11 CW 33 (2) are met . 2.2.7.2.4.4 Classification as Type A package Packages containing radioactive material may be classified as Type A packages, provided that the following conditions are met: Type A packages shall not contain activities greater than either of the following: (a) For special form radioactive material: A1; (b) For all other radioactive material: A 2 . For mixtures of radionuclides whose identities and respective activities are known, the following condition shall apply to the radioactive contents of a Type A package: where B(i) is the activity of radionuclide i as special form radioactive material; A 1 (i) is the A 1 value for radionuclide i; C(j) is the activity of radionuclide j as other than special form radioactive material; A 2 (j) is the A 2 value for radionuclide j. 2.2.7.2.4.5 Classification of uranium hexafluoride 2.2.7.2.4.5.1 Uranium hexafluoride shall only be assigned to: (a) UN No. 2977, RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, URANIUM HEXAFLUORIDE, FISSILE; (b) UN No. 2978, RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, URANIUM HEXAFLUORIDE, non-fissile or fissile-excepted; or (c) UN No. 3507, URANIUM HEXAFLUORIDE, RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE less than 0.1 kg per package, non-fissile or fissile-excepted. 2.2.7.2.4.5.2 The contents of a package containing uranium hexafluoride shall comply with the following requirements: (a) For UN Nos. 2977 and 2978, the mass of uranium hexafluoride shall not be different from that allowed for the package design, and for UN No. 3507, the mass of uranium hexafluoride shall be less than 0.1 kg; (b) The mass of uranium hexafluoride shall not be greater than a value that would lead to an ullage smaller than 5% at the maximum temperature of the package as specified for the plant systems where the package shall be used; and (c) The uranium hexafluoride shall be in solid form and the internal pressure shall not be above atmospheric pressure when presented for carriage. 2.2.7.2.4.6 Classification as Type B(U), Type B(M) or Type C packages 2.2.7.2.4.6.1 Packages not otherwise classified in 2.2.7.2.4 (2.2.7.2.4.1 to 2.2.7.2.4.5) shall be classified in accordance with the competent authority certificate of approval for the package issued by the country of origin of design. 2.2.7.2.4.6.2 The contents of a Type B(U), Type B(M) or Type C package shall be as specified in the certificate of approval. 2.2.7.2.5 Special arrangements Radioactive material shall be classified as transported under special arrangement when it is intended to be carried in accordance with 1.7.4. 2.2.8 Class 8: Corrosive substances 2.2.8.1 Definition, general provisions and criteria 2.2.8.1.1 Corrosive substances are substances which, by chemical action, will cause irreversible damage to the skin, or, in the case of leakage, will materially damage, or even destroy, other goods or the means of transport. The heading of this class also covers other substances which form a corrosive liquid only in the presence of water, or which produce corrosive vapour or mist in the presence of natural moisture of the air. 2.2.8.1.2 For substances and mixtures that are corrosive to skin, general classification provisions are provided in 2.2.8.1.4. Skin corrosion refers to the production of irreversible damage to the skin, namely, visible necrosis through the epidermis and into the dermis occurring after exposure to a substance or mixture. 2.2.8.1.3 Liquids and solids which may become liquid during carriage, which are judged not to be skin corrosive shall still be considered for their potential to cause corrosion to certain metal surfaces in accordance with the criteria in 2.2.8.1.5.3 (c) (ii). 2.2.8.1.4 General classification provisions 2.2.8.1.4.1 Substances and articles of Class 8 are subdivided as follows: C1 - C11 Corrosive substances without subsidiary hazard and articles containing such substances: C1 - C4 Acid substances: C1 Inorganic, liquid; C2 Inorganic, solid; C3 Organic, liquid; C4 Organic, solid; C5 - C8 Basic substances: C5 Inorganic, liquid; C6 Inorganic, solid; C7 Organic, liquid; C8 Organic, solid; C9 - C10 Other corrosive substances: C9 Liquid; C10 Solid; C11 Articles; CF Corrosive substances, flammable: CF1 Liquid; CF2 Solid; CS Corrosive substances, self-heating: CS1 Liquid; CS2 Solid; CW Corrosive substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases: CW1 Liquid; CW2 Solid; CO Corrosive substances, oxidizing: CO1 Liquid; CO2 Solid; CT Corrosive substances, toxic and articles containing such substances: CT1 Liquid; CT2 Solid; CT3 Articles; CFT Corrosive substances, flammable, liquid, toxic; COT Corrosive substances, oxidizing, toxic. 2.2.8.1.4.2 Substances and mixtures of Class 8 are divided among the three packing groups according to their degree of danger in carriage: ( a) Packing group I: very dangerous substances and mixtures; (b) Packing group II: substances and mixtures presenting medium danger; (c) Packing group III: substances and mixtures that present minor danger. 2.2.8.1.4.3 Allocation of substances listed in Table A of Chapter 3.2 to the packing groups in Class 8 has been made on the basis of experience taking into account such additional factors as inhalation risk (see 2.2.8.1.4.5) and reactivity with water (including the formation of dangerous decomposition products). 2.2.8.1.4.4 New substances and mixtures can be assigned to packing groups on the basis of the length of time of contact necessary to produce irreversible damage of intact skin tissue in accordance with the criteria in 2.2.8.1.5. Alternatively, for mixtures, the criteria in 2.2.8.1.6 can be used. 2.2.8.1.4.5 A substance or mixture meeting the criteria of Class 8 having an inhalation toxicity of dusts and mists (LC 50 ) in the range of packing group I, but toxicity through oral ingestion or dermal contact only in the range of packing group III or less, shall be allocated to Class 8 (see 2.2.61.1.7.2). 2.2.8.1.5 Packing group assignment for substances and mixtures 2.2.8.1.5.1 Existing human and animal data including information from single or repeated expo sure shall be the first line of evaluation, as they give information directly relevant to effects on the skin. 2.2.8.1.5.2 In assigning the packing group in accordance with 2.2.8.1.4.4, account shall be taken of human experience in instances of accidental exposure. In the absence of human experience classification shall be based on data obtained from experiments in accordance with OECD Test Guidelines Nos. 404 , 435 , 431 or 430 . A substance or mixture which is determined not to be corrosive in accordance with one of these or non-classified in accordance with OECD Test Guideline No. 439 , may be considered not to be corrosive to skin for the purposes of RID without further testing. If the test results indicate that the substance or mixture is corrosive and not assigned to packing group I, but the test method does not allow discrimination between packing groups II and III, it shall be considered to be packing group II. If the test results indicate that the substance or mixture is corrosive, but the test method does not allow discrimination between packing groups, it shall be assigned to packing group I if no other test results indicate a different packing group. 2.2.8.1.5.3 Packing groups are assigned to corrosive substances in accordance with the following criteria (see Table 2.2.8.1.5.3): (a) Packing group I is assigned to substances that cause irreversible damage of intact skin tissue within an observation period up to 60 minutes starting after the exposure time of three minutes or less; (b) Packing group II is assigned to substances that cause irreversible damage of intact skin tissue within an observation period up to 14 days starting after the exposure time of more than three minutes but not more than 60 minutes; (c) Packing group III is assigned to substances that: (i) Cause irreversible damage of intact skin tissue within an observation period up to 14 days starting after the exposure time of more than 60 minutes but not more than 4 hours; or (ii) Are judged not to cause irreversible damage of intact skin tissue but which exhibit a corrosion rate on either steel or aluminium surfaces exceeding 6.25 mm a year at a test temperature of 55 °C when tested on both materials. For the purposes of testing steel, type S235JR+CR (1.0037 resp. St 37-2), S275J2G3+CR (1.0144 resp. St 44-3), ISO 3574, Unified Numbering System (UNS) G10200 or SAE 1020, and for testing aluminium, non-clad, types 7075–T6 or AZ5GU-T6 shall be used. An acceptable test is prescribed in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, Section 37. NOTE: Where an initial test on either steel or aluminium indicates the substance being tested is corrosive the follow up test on the other metal is not required. Table 2.2.8.1.5.3: Table summarizing the criteria in 2.2.8.1.5.3 Packing group Exposure Observation period Effect I ≤ 3 min ≤ 60 min Irreversible damage of intact skin II > 3 min ≤ 1 h ≤ 14 d Irreversible damage of intact skin III > 1 h ≤ 4 h ≤ 14 d Irreversible damage of intact skin III – – Corrosion rate on either steel or aluminium surfaces exceeding 6.25 mm a year at a test temperature of 55 ºC when tested on both materials 2.2.8.1.6 Alternative packing group assignment methods for mixtures: Step-wise approach 2.2.8.1.6.1 General provisions For mixtures it is necessary to obtain or derive information that allows the criteria to be applied to the mixture for the purpose of classification and assignment of packing groups. The approach to classification and assignment of packing groups is tiered, and is dependent upon the amount of information available for the mixture itself, for similar mixtures and/or for its ingredients. The flow chart of Figure 2.2.8.1.6.1 below outlines the process to be followed. Figure 2.2.8.1.6.1: Step-wise approach to classify and assign packing group of corrosive mixtures 901065 95250 No Sufficient data available on similar mixtures to estimate skin corrosion hazards Available skin corrosion data for all ingredients No Yes Yes Apply bridging principles in 2.2.8. 1.6 .2 Classify and assign packing group Apply calculation method in 2.2.8. 1.6 .3 Classify and assign packing group T est data available on the mixture as a whole Yes Apply criteria in 2.2.8. 1.5 Classify and assign packing group 0 0 No Sufficient data available on similar mixtures to estimate skin corrosion hazards Available skin corrosion data for all ingredients No Yes Yes Apply bridging principles in 2.2.8. 1.6 .2 Classify and assign packing group Apply calculation method in 2.2.8. 1.6 .3 Classify and assign packing group T est data available on the mixture as a whole Yes Apply criteria in 2.2.8. 1.5 Classify and assign packing group 2706370 2540 1838604 97765 2706370 51965 4583430 67205 2706370 7515 4583430 32915 2.2.8.1.6.2 Bridging principles Where a mixture has not been tested to determine its skin corrosion potential, but there are sufficient data on both the individual ingredients and similar tested mixtures to adequately classify and assign a packing group for the mixture, these data will be used in accordance with the following bridging principles. This ensures that the classification process uses the available data to the greatest extent possible in characterizing the hazards of the mixture. (a) Dilution: If a tested mixture is diluted with a diluent which does not meet the criteria for Class 8 and does not affect the packing group of other ingredients, then the new diluted mixture may be assigned to the same packing group as the original tested mixture. NOTE: In certain cases, diluting a mixture or substance may lead to an increase in the corrosive properties. If this is the case, this bridging principle cannot be used. (b) Batching: The skin corrosion potential of a tested production batch of a mixture can be assumed to be substantially equivalent to that of another untested production batch of the same commercial product when produced by or under the control of the same manufacturer, unless there is reason to believe there is significant variation such that the skin corrosion potential of the untested batch has changed. If the latter occurs, a new classification is necessary. (c) Concentration of mixtures of packing group I: If a tested mixture meeting the criteria for inclusion in packing group I is concentrated, the more concentrated untested mixture may be assigned to packing group I without additional testing. (d) Interpolation within one packing group: For three mixtures (A, B and C) with identical ingredients, where mixtures A and B have been tested and are in the same skin corrosion packing group, and where untested mixture C has the same Class 8 ingredients as mixtures A and B but has concentrations of Class 8 ingredients intermediate to the concentrations in mixtures A and B, then mixture C is assumed to be in the same skin corrosion packing group as A and B. (e) Substantially similar mixtures: Given the following: (i) Two mixtures: (A+B) and (C+B); (ii) The concentration of ingredient B is the same in both mixtures; (iii) The concentration of ingredient A in mixture (A+B) equals the concentration of ingredient C in mixture (C+B); (iv) Data on skin corrosion for ingredients A and C are available and substantially equivalent, i.e. they are the same skin corrosion packing group and do not affect the skin corrosion potential of B. If mixture (A+B) or (C+B) is already classified based on test data, then the other mixture may be assigned to the same packing group. 2.2.8.1.6.3 Calculation method based on the classification of the substances 2.2.8.1.6.3.1 Where a mixture has not been tested to determine its skin corrosion potential, nor is sufficient data available on similar mixtures, the corrosive properties of the substances in the mixture shall be considered to classify and assign a packing group. Applying the calculation method is only allowed if there are no synergistic effects that make the mixture more corrosive than the sum of its substances. This restriction applies only if packing group II or III would be assigned to the mixture. 2.2.8.1.6.3.2 When using the calculation method, all Class 8 ingredients present at a concentration of ≥ 1% shall be taken into account, or < 1% if these ingredients are still relevant for classifying the mixture to be corrosive to skin. 2.2.8.1.6.3.3 To determine whether a mixture containing corrosive substances shall be considered a corrosive mixture and to assign a packing group, the calculation method in the flow chart in Figure 2.2.8.1.6.3 shall be applied. For this calculation method, generic concentration limits apply where 1% is used in the first step for the assessment of the packing group I substances, and where 5% is used for the other steps respectively. 2.2.8.1.6.3.4 When a specific concentration limit (SCL) is assigned to a substance following its entry in Table A of Chapter 3.2 or in a special provision, this limit shall be used instead of the generic concentration limits (GCL). 2.2.8.1.6.3.5 For this purpose, the summation formula for each step of the calculation method shall be adapted. This means that, where applicable, the generic concentration limit shall be substituted by the specific concentration limit assigned to the substance(s) (SCL i ), and the adapted formula is a weighted average of the different concentration limits assigned to the different substances in the mixture: , where: PG x i = concentration of substance 1, 2 … i in the mixture, assigned to packing group x (I, II or III) GCL = generic concentration limit SCL i = specific concentration limit assigned to substance i The criterion for a packing group is fulfilled when the result of the calculation is ≥ 1. The generic concentration limits to be used for the evaluation in each step of the calculation method are those found in Figure 2.2.8.1.6.3. Examples for the application of the above formula can be found in the note below. NOTE: Examples for the application of the above formula Example 1: A mixture contains one corrosive substance in a concentration of 5% assigned to packing group I without a specific concentration limit: Calculation for packing group I: → assign to Class 8, packing group I. Example 2: A mixture contains three substances corrosive to skin ; two of them (A and B) have specific concentration limits; for the third one (C) the generic concentration limit applies. The rest of the mixture needs not to be taken into consideration: Substance X in the mixture and its packing group assignment within Class 8 Concentration (conc) in the mixture in % Specific concentration limit (SCL) for packing group I Specific concentration limit (SCL) for packing group II Specific concentration limit (SCL) for packing group III A, assigned to packing group I 3 30% none None B, assigned to packing group I 2 20% 10% None C, assigned to packing group III 10 None None none Calculation for packing group I: The criterion for packing group I is not fulfilled. Calculation for packing group II: The criterion for packing group II is not fulfilled. Calculation for packing group III: The criterion for packing group III is fulfilled, the mixture shall be assigned to Class 8, packing group III. Figure 2.2.8.1.6.3: Calculation method Mixture containing Class 8 substances ∑PG Ii ≥ 1%? Yes Yes No ∑PG Ii ≥ 5%? ∑PG Ii + ∑PG IIi ≥ 5%? ∑PG Ii + ∑PG IIi + ∑PG IIIi ≥ 5%? No Class 8, packing group I Class 8, packing group II Class 8, packing group III Class 8 not applicable Yes No No Yes Yes Mixture containing Class 8 substances ∑PG Ii ≥ 1%? Yes Yes No ∑PG Ii ≥ 5%? ∑PG Ii + ∑PG IIi ≥ 5%? ∑PG Ii + ∑PG IIi + ∑PG IIIi ≥ 5%? No Class 8, packing group I Class 8, packing group II Class 8, packing group III Class 8 not applicable Yes No No Yes Yes 2.2.8.1.7 If substances of Class 8, as a result of admixtures, come into categories of risk different from those to which the substances mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 belong, these mixtures or solutions shall be assigned to the entries to which they belong, on the basis of their actual degree of danger. NOTE: For the classification of solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes), see also 2.1.3. 2.2.8.1.8 On the basis of the criteria set out in paragraph 2.2.8.1.6, it may also be determined whether the nature of a solution or mixture mentioned by name or containing a substance mentioned by name is such that the solution or mixture is not subject to the provisions for this class. NOTE: UN No. 1910 calcium oxide and UN No. 2812 sodium aluminate , listed in the UN Model Regulations, are not subject to the provisions of RID. 2.2.8.2 Substances not accepted for carriage 2.2.8.2.1 Chemically unstable substances of Class 8 shall not be accepted for carriage unless the necessary precautions have been taken to prevent the possibility of a dangerous decomposition or polymerization under normal conditions of carriage. For the precautions necessary to prevent polymerization, see special provision 386 of Chapter 3.3. To this end particular care shall be taken to ensure that receptacles and tanks do not contain any substances liable to promote these reactions. If temperature control is required to prevent polymerization of a substance (i.e. for a substance in a packaging or IBC with an SAPT of 50 °C or less, or in a tank with an SAPT of 45 °C or less), the substance shall not be accepted for carriage. 2.2.8.2.2 The following substances shall not be accepted for carriage: – UN No. 1798 NITROHYDROCHLORIC ACID; – Chemically unstable mixtures of spent sulphuric acid; – Chemically unstable mixtures of nitrating acid or mixtures of residual sulphuric and nitric acids, not denitrated; – Perchloric acid aqueous solution with more than 72% pure acid, by mass, or mixtures of perchloric acid with any liquid other than water. The following substance shall not be accepted for carriage by rail: – Sulphur trioxide, at least 99.95% pure, without inhibitor (non-stabilized). 2.2.8.3 List of collective entries Classification code UN Name of the substance or article No. Corrosive substances without subsidiary hazard and articles containing such substances 2584 ALKYLSULPHONIC ACIDS, LIQUID with more than 5% free sulphuric acid or 2584 ARYLSULPHONIC ACIDS, LIQUID with more than 5% free sulphuric acid liquid 2693 BISULPHITES, AQUEOUS SOLUTION, N.O.S. C1 2837 BISULPHATES, AQUEOUS SOLUTION 3264 CORROSIVE LIQUID, ACIDIC, INORGANIC, N.O.S. inorganic 1740 HYDROGENDIFLUORIDES, SOLID, N.O.S. Acid solid C2 2583 AL KYL SULP HONIC ACIDS, SOLID with more than 5% free sulphuric acid or 2583 ARYLS ULPHONIC ACIDS, SOLID with more than 5% free sulphuric acid 3260 CORROSIVE SOLID, ACIDIC, INORGANIC, N.O.S. 2586 ALKYLSULPHONIC ACIDS, LIQUID with not more than 5% free sulphuric acid or 2586 ARYLSULPHONIC ACIDS, LIQUID with not more than 5% free sulphuric acid liquid 2987 CHLOROSILANES, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. C3 3145 ALKYLPHENOLS, LIQUID, N.O.S. (including C 2 C 12 homologues) 3265 CORROSIVE LIQUID, ACIDIC, ORGANIC, N.O.S. organic 2430 ALKYLPHENOLS, SOLID, N.O.S. (including C 2 C 12 homolo gues) solid C4 2585 ALKYLSULPHONIC ACIDS, SOLID with not more than 5% free sulphuric acid or 2585 ARYLSULPHONIC ACIDS, SOLID with not more than 5% free sulphuric acid 3261 CORROSIVE SOLID, ACIDIC, ORGANIC, N.O.S. 1719 CAUSTIC ALKALI LIQUID, N.O.S. liquid 2797 BATTERY FLUID, ALKALI C5 3266 CORROSIVE LIQUID, BASIC, INORGANIC, N.O.S. inorganic solid C6 3262 CORROSIVE SOLID, BASIC, INORGANIC, N.O.S. Basic 2735 AMINES, LIQUID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. or liquid 2735 POLYAMINES, LIQUID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. C7 3267 CORROSIVE LIQUID, BASIC, ORGANIC, N.O.S. organic 3259 AMINES, SOLID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S., or 3259 POLYAMINES, SOLID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. solid C8 3263 CORROSIVE SOLID, BASIC, ORGANIC, N.O.S. 1903 DISINFECTANT, LIQUID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 2801 DYE, LIQUID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. or 2801 DYE INTERMEDIATE, LIQUID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. liquid C9 3066 PAINT (including paint, enamel, stain, shellac, var nish, polish, liquid filler and lacquer ba se) or 3066 PAINT RELATED MATERIAL (including paint thinning or reducing compound) Other 1760 CORROSIVE LIQUID, N.O.S. corrosive Substances solid (a) C10 3147 DYE, SOLID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. or 3147 DYE INTERMEDIATE, SOLID, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 3244 SOLIDS CONTAINING CORROSIVE LIQUID, N.O.S. 1759 CORROSIVE SOLID, N.O.S. 1774 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CHARGES, corrosive liquid 2028 BOMBS, SMOKE, NON-EXPLOSIVE with corrosive liquid, without initiating device 2794 BATTERIES, WET, FILLED WITH ACID, electric storage Articles C11 2795 BATTERIES, WET, FILLED WITH ALKALI, electric storage 2800 BATTERIES, WET, NON-SPILLABLE, electric storage 3028 BATTERIES, DRY, CONTAINING POTASSIUM HYDROXIDE SOLID, electric storage 3477 FUEL CELL CARTRIDGES containing corrosive substances, or 3477 FUEL CELL CARTRIDGES CONTAINED IN EQUIPMENT, containing corrosive substances, or 3477 FUEL CELL CARTRIDGES PACKED WITH EQUIPMENT, containing corrosive substances 3547 ARTICLES CONTAINING CORROSIVE SUBSTANCE, N.O.S. Subsidiary hazard Classification code UN Name of the substance or article No. Corrosive substances with subsidiary hazard and articles containing such substances 3470 PAINT, CORROSIVE, FLAMMABLE (including paint, lacquer, enamel, stain, shellac, varnish, polish, liquid filler and liquid lacquer base) or 3470 PAINT RELATED MATERIAL, CORROSIVE, FLAMMABLE (including paint thinning and reducing compound) liquid (b) CF1 2734 AMINES, LIQUID, CORROSIVE, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. or 2734 POLYAMI NES, LIQUID, CORROSIVE, FLAMMA BLE, N.O.S. 2986 CHLOROSILANES, CORROSIVE, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. Flammable 2920 CORROSIVE LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. CF solid CF2 2921 CORROSIVE SOLID, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. liquid CS1 3301 CORROSIVE LIQUID, SELF HEATING, N.O.S. Self-heating CS solid CS2 3095 CORROSI VE SOLID, SELF HEATING, N.O.S. liquid (b) CW1 3094 CORROSIVE LIQUID, WATER REACTI VE, N.O.S. Water-reactive CW solid CW2 3096 CORROSIVE SOLID, WATER REACTI VE, N.O.S. Oxidizing liquid CO1 3093 CORROSIVE LIQUID, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. CO solid CO2 3084 CORROSIVE SOLID, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 3471 HYDROGENDIFLUORIDES SOLUTION, N.O.S. liquid (c) CT1 2922 CORROSIVE LIQUID, TOXIC, N.O.S. Toxic (d) solid (e) CT2 2923 CORROSIVE SOLID, TOXIC, N.O.S. CT articles CT3 3506 MERCURY CONTAINED IN MANUFACTURED ARTICLES Flammable, liquid, toxic (d) CFT ( No collective entry with this classification code available; if need be, classification under a collective entry with a classification code to be determined according to table of precedence of hazard in 2.1.3.10.) Oxidizing, toxic (d),(e) COT ( No collective entry with this classification code available; if need be, classification under a collective entry with a classification code to be determined according to table of precedence of hazard in 2.1.3.10. ) Footnotes (a) Mixtures of solids which are not subject to the provisions of RID and of corrosive liquids may be carried under UN No. 3244 without being subject to the classification criteria of Class 8, provided there is no free liquid visible at the time the substance is loaded or at the time the packaging, wagon or container is closed. Each packaging shall correspond to a design type which has passed the leakproofness test for packing group II level. (b) Chlorosilanes which, in contact with water or moist air, emit flammable gases, are substances of Class 4.3. (c) Chloroformates having predominantly toxic properties are substances of Class 6.1. (d) Corrosive substances which are highly toxic by inhalation, as defined in 2.2.61.1.4 to 2.2.61.1.9 are substances of Class 6.1. (e) UN No. 1690 SODIUM FLUORIDE, SOLID, UN No. 1812 POTASSIUM FLUORIDE, SOLID, UN No. 2505 AMMONIUM FLUORIDE, UN No. 2674 SODIUM FLUOROSILICATE, UN No. 2856 FLUOROSILICATES, N.O.S. , UN No. 3415 SODIUM FLUORIDE SOLUTION and UN No. 3422 POTASSIUM FLUORIDE SOLUTION are substances of Class 6.1. 2.2.9 Class 9: Miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles 2.2.9.1 Criteria 2.2.9.1.1 The heading of Class 9 covers substances and articles which, during carriage, present a danger not covered by the heading of other classes. 2.2.9.1.2 The substances and articles of Class 9 are subdivided as follows: M1 Substances which, on inhalation as fine dust, may endanger health; M2 Substances and articles which, in the event of fire, may form dioxins; M3 Substances evolving flammable vapour; M4 Lithium batteries; M5 Life-saving appliances; M6-M8 Environmentally hazardous substances: M6 Pollutant to the aquatic environment, liquid; M7 Pollutant to the aquatic environment, solid; M8 Genetically modified microorganisms and organisms; M9-M10 Elevated temperature substances: M9 Liquid; M10 Solid; M11 Other substances and articles presenting a danger during carriage, but not meeting the definitions of another class. Definitions and classification 2.2.9.1.3 Substances and articles classified in Class 9 are listed in Table A of Chapter 3.2. The assignment of substances and articles not mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 to the relevant entry of that Table or of 2.2.9.3 shall be done in accordance with 2.2.9.1.4 to 2.2.9.1.8, 2.2.9.1.10, 2.2.9.1.11, 2.2.9.1.13 and 2.2.9.1.14 below. Substances which, on inhalation as fine dust, may endanger health 2.2.9.1.4 Substances which, on inhalation as fine dust, may endanger health include asbestos and mixtures containing asbestos. Substances and articles which, in the event of fire, may form dioxins 2.2.9.1.5 Substances and articles which, in the event of fire, may form dioxins include polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) and terphenyls (PCTs) and polyhalogenated biphenyls and terphenyls and mixtures containing these substances, as well as articles such as transformers, condensers and articles containing those substances or mixtures. NOTE: Mixtures with a PCB or PCT content of not more than 50 mg/kg are not subject to the provisions of RID . Substances evolving flammable vapour 2.2.9.1.6 Substances evolving flammable vapour include polymers containing flammable liquids with a flash-point not exceeding 55 °C. Lithium batteries 2.2.9.1.7 Lithium batteries shall meet the following requirements, except when otherwise provided for in RID (e.g. for prototype batteries and small production runs under special provision 310 or damaged batteries under special provision 376). NOTE: For UN 3536 LITHIUM BATTERIES INSTALLED IN CARGO TRANSPORT UNIT, see special provision 389 in Chapter 3.3. Cells and batteries, cells and batteries contained in equipment, or cells and batteries packed with equipment, containing lithium in any form shall be assigned to UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 or 3481 as appropriate. They may be carried under these entries if they meet the following provisions: (a) Each cell or battery is of the type proved to meet the requirements of each test of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 38.3; NOTE: Batteries shall be of a type proved to meet the testing requirements of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, sub-section 38.3, irrespective of whether the cells of which they are composed are of a tested type. (b) Each cell and battery incorporates a safety venting device or is designed to preclude a violent rupture under normal conditions of carriage; (c) Each cell and battery is equipped with an effective means of preventing external short circuits; (d) Each battery containing cells or series of cells connected in parallel is equipped with effective means as necessary to prevent dangerous reverse current flow (e.g., diodes, fuses, etc.); (e) Cells and batteries shall be manufactured under a quality management programme that includes: (i) A description of the organizational structure and responsibilities of personnel with regard to design and product quality; (ii) The relevant inspection and test, quality control, quality assurance, and process operation instructions that will be used; (iii) Process controls that should include relevant activities to prevent and detect internal short circuit failure during manufacture of cells; (iv) Quality records, such as inspection reports, test data, calibration data and certificates. Test data shall be kept and made available to the competent authority upon request; (v) Management reviews to ensure the effective operation of the quality management programme; (vi) A process for control of documents and their revision; (vii) A means for control of cells or batteries that are not conforming to the type tested as mentioned in (a) above; (viii) Training programmes and qualification procedures for relevant personnel; and (ix) Procedures to ensure that there is no damage to the final product. NOTE: In house quality management programmes may be accepted. Third party certification is not required, but the procedures listed in (i) to (ix) above shall be properly recorded and traceable. A copy of the quality management programme shall be made available to the competent authority upon request. (f) Lithium batteries, containing both primary lithium metal cells and rechargeable lithium ion cells, that are not designed to be externally charged (see special provision 387 of Chapter 3.3) shall meet the following conditions: (i) The rechargeable lithium ion cells can only be charged from the primary lithium metal cells; (ii) Overcharge of the rechargeable lithium ion cells is precluded by design; (iii) The battery has been tested as a lithium primary battery; (iv) Component cells of the battery shall be of a type proved to meet the respective testing requirements of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, sub-section 38.3; (g) Except for button cells installed in equipment (including circuit boards), manufacturers and subsequent distributors of cells or batteries manufactured after 30 June 2003 shall make available the test summary as specified in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 38.3, paragraph 38.3.5. Lithium batteries are not subject to the provisions of RID if they meet the requirements of special provision 188 of Chapter 3.3. Life-saving appliances 2.2.9.1.8 Life-saving appliances include life-saving appliances and motor vehicle components which meet the descriptions of special provisions 235 or 296 of Chapter 3.3. 2.2.9.1.9 (Deleted) 2.2.9.1.10 Environmentally hazardous substances (aquatic environment) 2.2.9.1.10.1 General definitions 2.2.9.1.10.1.1 Environmentally hazardous substances include, inter alia, liquid or solid substances pollutant to the aquatic environment and solutions and mixtures of such substances (such as preparations and wastes). For the purposes of 2.2.9.1.10, "s ubstance " means chemical elements and their compounds in the natural state or obtained by any production process, including any additive necessary to preserve the stability of the product and any impurities deriving from the process used, but excluding any solvent which may be separated without affecting the stability of the substance or changing its composition. 2.2.9.1.10.1.2 The aquatic environment may be considered in terms of the aquatic organisms that live in the water, and the aquatic ecosystem of which they are part . The basis, therefore, of the identification of hazard is the aquatic toxicity of the substance or mixture, although this may be modified by further information on the degradation and bioaccumulation behaviour. 2.2.9.1.10.1.3 While the following classification procedure is intended to apply to all substances and mixtures, it is recognised that in some cases, e.g. metals or poorly soluble inorganic compounds, special guidance will be necessary . 2.2.9.1.10.1.4 The following definitions apply for acronyms or terms used in this section: – BCF: Bioconcentration Factor; – BOD: Biochemical Oxygen Demand; – COD: Chemical Oxygen Demand; – GLP: Good Laboratory Practices; – EC x : the concentration associated with x% response; – EC 50 : the effective concentration of substance that causes 50% of the maximum response; – ErC 50 : EC 50 in terms of reduction of growth; – K ow : octanol/water partition coefficient; – LC 50 (50% lethal concentration): the concentration of a substance in water which causes the death of 50% (one half) in a group of test animals; – L(E)C 50 : LC 50 or EC 50 ; – NOEC (No Observed Effect Concentration): the test concentration immediately below the lowest tested concentration with statistically significant adverse effect. The NOEC has no statistically significant adverse effect compared to the control; – OECD Test Guidelines: Test guidelines published by the Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD). 2.2.9.1.10.2 Definitions and data requirements 2.2.9.1.10.2.1 The basic elements for classification of environmentally hazardous substances (aquatic environment) are: (a) Acute aquatic toxicity; (b) Chronic aquatic toxicity; (c) Potential for or actual bioaccumulation; and (d) Degradation (biotic or abiotic) for organic chemicals. 2.2.9.1.10.2.2 While data from internationally harmonised test methods are preferred, in practice, data from national methods may also be used where they are considered as equivalent. In general, it has been agreed that freshwater and marine species toxicity data can be considered as equivalent data and are preferably to be derived using OECD Test Guidelines or equivalent according to the principles of Good Laboratory Practices (GLP). Where such data are not available, classification shall be based on the best available data. 2.2.9.1.10.2.3 Acute aquatic toxicity means the intrinsic property of a substance to be injurious to an organism in a short-term aquatic exposure to that substance. Acute (short-term) hazard , for classification purposes, means the hazard of a chemical caused by its acute toxicity to an organism during short-term aquatic exposure to that chemical. Acute aquatic toxicity shall normally be determined using a fish 96 hour LC 50 (OECD Test Guideline 203 or equivalent), a crustacea species 48 hour EC 50 (OECD Test Guideline 202 or equivalent) and/or an algal species 72 or 96 hour EC 50 (OECD Test Guideline 201 or equivalent). These species are considered as surrogate for all aquatic organisms and data on other species such as Lemna may also be considered if the test methodology is suitable. 2.2.9.1.10.2.4 Chronic aquatic toxicity means the intrinsic property of a substance to cause adverse effects to aquatic organisms during aquatic exposures which are determined in relation to the life-cycle of the organism. Long-term hazard , for classification purposes, means the hazard of a chemical caused by its chronic toxicity following long-term exposure in the aquatic environment. Chronic toxicity data are less available than acute data and the range of testing procedures less standardised. Data generated according to the OECD Test Guidelines 210 (Fish Early Life Stage) or 211 (Daphnia Reproduction) and 201 (Algal Growth Inhibition) may be accepted. Other validated and internationally accepted tests may also be used. The NOECs or other equivalent EC x shall be used. 2.2.9.1.10.2.5 Bioaccumulation means net result of uptake, transformation and elimination of a substance in an organism due to all routes of exposure (i.e. air, water, sediment/soil and food). The potential for bioaccumulation shall normally be determined by using the octanol/water partition coefficient, usually reported as a log K ow determined according to OECD Test Guidelines 107, 117 or 123 . While this represents a potential to bioaccumulate, an experimentally determined Bioconcentration Factor (BCF) provides a better measure and shall be used in preference when available. A BCF shall be determined according to OECD Test Guideline 305. 2.2.9.1.10.2.6 Degradation means the decomposition of organic molecules to smaller molecules and eventually to carbon dioxide, water and salts. Environmental degradation may be biotic or abiotic (e.g. hydrolysis) and the criteria used reflect this fact. Ready biodegradation is most easily defined using the biodegradability tests (A-F) of OECD Test Guideline 301. A pass level in these tests may be considered as indicative of rapid degradation in most environments. These are freshwater tests and thus the use of the results from OECD Test Guideline 306, which is more suitable for marine environments, has also been included. Where such data are not available, a BOD 5 (5 days)/COD ratio 0.5 is considered as indicative of rapid degradation. Abiotic degradation such as hydrolysis, primary degradation, both abiotic and biotic, degradation in non-aquatic media and proven rapid degradation in the environment may all be considered in defining rapid degradability . Substances are considered rapidly degradable in the environment if the following criteria are met: (a) In 28-day ready biodegradation studies, the following levels of degradation are achieved: (i) Tests based on dissolved organic carbon: 70%; (ii) Tests based on oxygen depletion or carbon dioxide generation: 60% of theoretical maxima; These levels of biodegradation shall be achieved within 10 days of the start of degradation which point is taken as the time when 10% of the substance has been degraded, unless the substance is identified as a complex, multi-component substance with structurally similar constituents. In this case, and where there is sufficient justification, the 10-day window condition may be waived and the pass level applied at 28 days ; or (b) In those cases where only BOD and COD data are available, when the ratio of BOD 5 /COD is 0.5; or (c) If other convincing scientific evidence is available to demonstrate that the substance can be degraded (biotically and/or abiotically) in the aquatic environment to a level above 70% within a 28 day period. 2.2.9.1.10.3 Substance classification categories and criteria 2 .2.9.1.10.3.1 Substances shall be classified as "environmentally hazardous substances (aquatic environment)", if they satisfy the criteria for Acute 1, Chronic 1 or Chronic 2, according to Table 2.2.9.1.10.3.1. These criteria describe in detail the classification categories. They are diagrammatically summarized in Table 2.2.9.1.10.3.2. Table 2.2.9.1.10.3.1: Categories for substances hazardous to the aquatic environment (see Note 1) (a) Acute (short-term) aquatic hazard Category Acute 1: (see Note 2) 96 h LC 50 (for fish) 1 mg/l and/or 48 h EC 50 (for crustacea) 1 mg/l and/or 72 or 96 h ErC 50 (for algae or other aquatic plants) 1 mg/l (see Note 3) (b) Long-term aquatic hazard (see also Figure 2.2.9.1.10.3.1) (i) Non-rapidly degradable substances (see Note 4) for which there are adequate chronic toxicity data available Category Chronic 1: (see Note 2) Chronic NOEC or EC x (for fish) 0.1 mg/l and/or Chronic NOEC or EC x (for crustacea) 0.1 mg/l and/or Chronic NOEC or EC x (for algae or other aquatic plants) 0.1 mg/l Category Chronic 2: Chronic NOEC or EC x (for fish) 1 mg/l and/or Chronic NOEC or EC x (for crustacea) 1 mg/l and/or Chronic NOEC or EC x (for algae or other aquatic plants) 1 mg/l (ii) Rapidly degradable substances for which there are adequate chronic toxicity data available Category Chronic 1: (see Note 2) Chronic NOEC or EC x (for fish) 0.01 mg/l and/or Chronic NOEC or EC x (for crustacea) 0.01 mg/l and/or Chronic NOEC or EC x (for algae or other aquatic plants) 0.01 mg/l Category Chronic 2: Chronic NOEC or EC x (for fish) 0.1 mg/l and/or Chronic NOEC or EC x (for crustacea) 0.1 mg/l and/or Chronic NOEC or EC x (for algae or other aquatic plants) 0.1 mg/l (iii) Substances for which adequate chronic toxicity data are not available Category Chronic 1: (see Note 2) 96 h LC 50 (for fish) 1 mg/l and/or 48 h EC 50 (for crustacea) 1 mg/l and/or 72 or 96 h ErC 50 (for algae or other aquatic plants) 1 mg/l (see Note 3) and the substance is not rapidly degradable and/or the experimentally determined BCF is 500 (or, if absent the log K ow 4) (see Notes 4 and 5) . Category Chronic 2: 96 h LC 50 (for fish) > 1 bis 10 mg/l and/or 48 h EC 50 (for crustacea) > 1 bis 10 mg/l and/or 72 or 96 h ErC 50 (for algae or other aquatic plants) > 1 bis 10 mg/l (see Note 3) and the substance is not rapidly degradable and/or the experimentally determined BCF is 500 (or, if absent the log K ow 4 (see Notes 4 and 5) . NOTE 1: The organisms fish, crustacea and algae are tested as surrogate species covering a range of trophic levels and taxa, and the test methods are highly standardized. Data on other organisms may also be considered, however, provided they represent equivalent species and test endpoints. 2: When classifying substances as Acute 1 and/or Chronic 1 it is necessary at the same time to indicate an appropriate M factor (see 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.4 ) to apply the summation method. 3: Where the algal toxicity ErC 50 (= EC 50 (growth rate)) falls more than 100 times below the next most sensitive species and results in a classification based solely on this effect, consideration shall be given to whether this toxicity is representative of the toxicity to aquatic plants. Where it can be shown that this is not the case, professional judgment shall be used in deciding if classification shall be applied. Classification shall be based on the ErC 50 . In circumstances where the basis of the EC 50 is not specified and no ErC 50 is recorded, classification shall be based on the lowest EC 50 available. 4: Lack of rapid degradability is based on either a lack of ready biodegradability or other evidence of lack of rapid degradation. When no useful data on degradability are available, either experimentally determined or estimated data, the substance shall be regarded as not rapidly degradable. 5: Potential to bioaccumulate, based on an experimentally derived BCF 500 or, if absent, a log K ow 4 provided log K ow is an appropriate descriptor for the bioaccumulation potential of the substance. Measured log K ow values take precedence over estimated values and measured BCF values take precedence over log K ow values. Figure 2.2.9.1.10.3.1: Categories for substances long-term hazardous to the aquatic environment Classify according to the criteria given in Table 2.2.9.1.10.3.1(b) (iii) . Are there adequate acute toxicity data available? Are there adequate chronic toxicity data available for one or two trophic levels? Classify according to the criteria given in Table 2.2.9.1.10.3.1 (b) (i) or 2.2.9.1.10.3.1 (b) (ii) depending on info rmation on rapid degradation . Assess both: (a) according to the criteria given in Table 2.2.9.1.10.3.1 (b) (i) or 2.2.9.1.10.3.1 (b) (ii) (depending on info rmation on rapid degradation), and (b) (if for the other trophic level(s) adequate acute toxicity data are available) according to the criteria given in Table 2.2.9.1.10.3.1 (b) (iii), and classify according to the most stringent outcome . Are there a dequate chronic toxicity data available for all three trophic levels? See Note 2 to Table 2.2.9.1.10.3.1 Yes Yes Yes No No Classify according to the criteria given in Table 2.2.9.1.10.3.1(b) (iii) . Are there adequate acute toxicity data available? Are there adequate chronic toxicity data available for one or two trophic levels? Classify according to the criteria given in Table 2.2.9.1.10.3.1 (b) (i) or 2.2.9.1.10.3.1 (b) (ii) depending on info rmation on rapid degradation . Assess both: (a) according to the criteria given in Table 2.2.9.1.10.3.1 (b) (i) or 2.2.9.1.10.3.1 (b) (ii) (depending on info rmation on rapid degradation), and (b) (if for the other trophic level(s) adequate acute toxicity data are available) according to the criteria given in Table 2.2.9.1.10.3.1 (b) (iii), and classify according to the most stringent outcome . Are there a dequate chronic toxicity data available for all three trophic levels? See Note 2 to Table 2.2.9.1.10.3.1 Yes Yes Yes No No 2.2.9.1.10.3.2 The classification scheme in Table 2.2.9.1.10.3.2 below summarizes the classification criteria for substances. Table 2.2.9.1.10.3.2 : Classification scheme for substances hazardous to the aquatic environment Classification categories Acute hazard ( see Note 1 ) Long-term hazard ( see Note 2 ) Adequate chronic toxicity data available Adequate chronic toxicity data not available ( see Note 1 ) Non-rapidly degradable substances ( see Note 3 ) Rapidly degradable substances ( see Note 3 ) Category: Acute 1 Category: Chronic 1 Category: Chronic 1 Category: Chronic 1 L(E)C 50 ≤ 1.00 NOEC or EC x ≤ 0.1 NOEC or EC x ≤ 0.01 L(E)C 50 ≤ 1.00 and lack of rapid degradability and/or BCF ≥ 500 or, if absent log K ow ≥ 4 Category: Chronic 2 Category: Chronic 2 Category: Chronic 2 0.1 < NOEC or EC x ≤ 1 0.01 < NOEC or EC x ≤ 0.1 1.00 < L(E)C 50 ≤ 10.0 and lack of rapid degradability and/or BCF ≥ 500 or, if absent log K ow ≥ 4 NOTE 1: Acute toxicity band based on L(E)C 50 values in mg/l for fish, crustacea and/or algae or other aquatic plants (or Quantitative Structure Activity Relationships (QSAR) estimation if no experimental data ). 2: Substances are classified in the various chronic categories unless there are adequate chronic toxicity data available for all three trophic levels above the water solubility or above 1 mg/l. ("Adequate" means that the data sufficiently cover the endpoint of concern. Generally this would mean measured test data, but in order to avoid unnecessary testing it can on a case by case basis also be estimated data, e.g. (Q)SAR, or for obvious cases expert judgment). 3: Chronic toxicity band based on NOEC or equivalent EC x values in mg/l for fish or crustacea or other recognized measures for chronic toxicity. 2.2.9.1.10.4 Mixtures classification categories and criteria 2.2.9.1.10.4.1 The classification system for mixtures covers the classification categories which are used for substances, meaning categories Acute 1 and Chronic 1 and 2 . In order to make use of all available data for purposes of classifying the aquatic environmental hazards of the mixture, the following assumption is made and is applied where appropriate: The "relevant ingredients" of a mixture are those which are present in a concentration equal to or greater than 0.1% (by mass) for ingredients classified as Acute and/or Chronic 1 and equal to or greater than 1% for other ingredients, unless there is a presumption (e.g. in the case of highly toxic ingredients) that an ingredient present at less than 0.1% can still be relevant for classifying the mixture for aquatic environmental hazards. 2.2.9.1.10.4.2 The approach for classification of aquatic environmental hazards is tiered, and is dependent upon the type of information available for the mixture itself and for its ingredients. Elements of the tiered approach include: (a) Classification based on tested mixtures; (b) Classification based on bridging principles; (c) The use of "summation of classified ingredients" and/or an "additivity formula". Figure 2.2.9.1.10.4.2 below outlines the process to be followed. Figure 2.2.9.1.10.4.2: Tiered approach to classification of mixtures for acute and long-term aquatic environmental hazards Aquatic toxicity test data available on the mixture as a whole Sufficient data available on similar mixtures to estimate hazards Apply bridging principles (2.2.9.1.10.4.4) Classify for acute /long-term hazard (2.2.9.1.10.4.3) Classify for acute/ long-term hazard Either aquatic toxicity or classification data available for all relevant ingredients Apply Summation Method (2.2.9.1.10.4.6.1 to 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.4) using: (a) Percentage of all ingredients classified as "Chronic" (b) Percentage of ingredients classified as "Acute" (c) Percentage of ingredients with acute toxicity data: apply additivity formulas (2.2.9.1.10.4.5.2) and convert the derived L(E)C 50 or EqNOEC m to the appropriate "Acute" or "Chronic" Category Classify for acute/ long-term hazard Use available hazard data of known ingredients Apply Summation Method and additivity formula (2.2.9.1.10.4.6.1 to 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.4) and apply 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.5 Classify for acute/ long-term hazard No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Aquatic toxicity test data available on the mixture as a whole Sufficient data available on similar mixtures to estimate hazards Apply bridging principles (2.2.9.1.10.4.4) Classify for acute /long-term hazard (2.2.9.1.10.4.3) Classify for acute/ long-term hazard Either aquatic toxicity or classification data available for all relevant ingredients Apply Summation Method (2.2.9.1.10.4.6.1 to 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.4) using: (a) Percentage of all ingredients classified as "Chronic" (b) Percentage of ingredients classified as "Acute" (c) Percentage of ingredients with acute toxicity data: apply additivity formulas (2.2.9.1.10.4.5.2) and convert the derived L(E)C 50 or EqNOEC m to the appropriate "Acute" or "Chronic" Category Classify for acute/ long-term hazard Use available hazard data of known ingredients Apply Summation Method and additivity formula (2.2.9.1.10.4.6.1 to 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.4) and apply 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.5 Classify for acute/ long-term hazard No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes 2.2.9.1.10.4.3 Classification of mixtures when toxicity data are available for the complete mixture 2.2.9.1.10.4.3.1 When the mixture as a whole has been tested to determine its aquatic toxicity, this information shall be used for classifying the mixture according to the criteria that have been agreed for substances. The classification is normally based on the data for fish, crustacea and algae/plants (see 2.2.9.1.10.2.3 and 2.2.9.1.10.2.4). When adequate acute or chronic data for the mixture as a whole are lacking, "bridging principles" or "summation method" shall be applied (see 2.2.9.1.10.4.4 to 2.2.9.1.10.4.6 ). 2.2.9.1.10.4.3.2 The long-term hazard classification of mixtures requires additional information on degradability and in certain cases bioaccumulation. There are no degradability and bioaccumulation data for mixtures as a whole. Degradability and bioaccumulation tests for mixtures are not used as they are usually difficult to interpret, and such tests may be meaningful only for single substances. 2.2.9.1.10.4.3.3 Classification for category Acute 1 (a) When there are adequate acute toxicity test data (LC 50 or EC 50 ) available for the mixture as a whole showing L(E)C 50 ≤ 1 mg/l: Classify the mixture as Acute 1 in accordance with Table 2.2.9.1.10.3.1 (a); (b) When there are acute toxicity test data (LC 50 (s) or EC 50 (s) available for the mixture as a whole showing L(E)C 50 (s) > 1 mg/l, or above the water solubility: No need to classify for acute hazard under RID. 2.2.9.1.10.4.3.4 Classification for categories Chronic 1 and 2 (a) When there are adequate chronic toxicity data (EC x or NOEC) available for the mixture as a whole showing EC x or NOEC of the tested mixture ≤ 1mg/l: (i) classify the mixture as Chronic 1 or 2 in accordance with Table 2.2.9.1.10.3.1 (b) (ii) (rapidly degradable) if the available information allows the conclusion that all relevant ingredients of the mixture are rapidly degradable; NOTE: In this situation, when EC x or NOEC of the tested mixture > 0.1 mg/l, there is no need to classify for long-term hazard under RID. (ii) classify the mixture as Chronic 1 or 2 in all other cases in accordance with Table 2.2.9.1.10.3.1 (b) (i) (non-rapidly degradable); (b) When there are adequate chronic toxicity data (EC x or NOEC) available for the mixture as a whole showing EC x (s) or NOEC(s) of the tested mixture > 1mg/l or above the water solubility: No need to classify for long-term hazard under RID. 2.2.9.1.10.4.4 Classification of mixtures when toxicity data are not available for the complete mixture: bridging principles 2.2.9.1.10.4.4.1 Where the mixture itself has not been tested to determine its aquatic environmental hazard, but there are sufficient data on the individual ingredients and similar tested mixtures to adequately characterise the hazards of the mixture, these data shall be used in accordance with the following agreed bridging rules. This ensures that the classification process uses the available data to the greatest extent possible in characterising the hazards of the mixture without the necessity for additional testing in animals. 2.2.9.1.10.4.4.2 Dilution Where a new mixture is formed by diluting a tested mixture or a substance with a diluent which has an equivalent or lower aquatic hazard classification than the least toxic original ingredient and which is not expected to affect the aquatic hazards of other ingredients, then the resulting mixture shall be classified as equivalent to the original tested mixture or substance. Alternatively, the method explained in 2.2.9.1.10.4.5 may be applied. 2.2.9.1.10.4.4.3 Batching The aquatic hazard classification of a tested production batch of a mixture shall be assumed to be substantially equivalent to that of another untested production batch of the same commercial product when produced by or under the control of the same manufacturer, unless there is reason to believe there is significant variation such that the aquatic hazard classification of the untested batch has changed. If the latter occurs, new classification is necessary. 2.2.9.1.10.4.4.4 Concentration of mixtures which are classified with the most severe classification categories (Chronic 1 and Acute 1) If a tested mixture is classified as Chronic 1 and/or Acute 1, and the ingredients of the mixture which are classified as Chronic 1 and/or Acute 1 are further concentrated, the more concentrated untested mixture shall be classified with the same classification category as the original tested mixture without additional testing. 2.2.9.1.10.4.4.5 Interpolation within one toxicity category For three mixtures (A, B and C) with identical ingredients, where mixtures A and B have been tested and are in the same toxicity category, and where untested mixture C has the same toxicologically active ingredients as mixtures A and B but has concentrations of toxicologically active ingredients intermediate to the concentrations in mixtures A and B, then mixture C is assumed to be in the same category as A and B. 2.2.9.1.10.4.4.6 Substantially similar mixtures Given the following: (a) two mixtures: (i) A + B; (ii) C + B; (b) the concentration of ingredient B is essentially the same in both mixtures; (c) the concentration of ingredient A in mixture (i) equals that of ingredient C in mixture (ii); (d) data on aquatic hazards for A and C are available and are substantially equivalent , i.e. they are in the same hazard category and are not expected to affect the aquatic toxicity of B, If mixture (i) or (ii) is already classified based on test data, then the other mixture can be assigned the same hazard category. 2.2.9.1.10.4.5 Classification of mixtures when toxicity data are available for all ingredients or only for some ingredients of the mixture 2.2.9.1.10.4.5.1 The classification of a mixture shall be based on summation of the concentrations of its classified ingredients. The percentage of ingredients classified as "Acute" or "Chronic" will feed straight into the summation method. Details of the summation method are described in 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.1 to 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.4. 2.2.9.1.10.4.5.2 Mixtures may be made of a combination of both ingredients that are classified (as Acute 1 and/or Chronic 1, 2) and those for which adequate toxicity test data are available. When adequate toxicity data are available for more than one ingredient in the mixture, the combined toxicity of those ingredients shall be calculated using the following additivity formulas (a) or (b), depending on the nature of the toxicity data: ( a) Based on acute aquatic toxicity: where: C i = concentration of ingredient i (mass percentage); L(E)C 50i = LC 50 or EC 50 for ingredient i (mg/l); n = number of ingredients, and i is running from 1 to n; L(E)C 50m = L(E)C 50 of the part of the mixture with test data; The calculated toxicity shall be used to assign that portion of the mixture an acute hazard category which is then subsequently used in applying the summation method; (b) Based on chronic aquatic toxicity: where: C i = concentration of ingredient i (mass percentage) covering the rapidly degradable ingredients; C j = concentration of ingredient j (mass percentage) covering the non-rapidly degradable ingredients; NOEC i = NOEC (or other recognized measures for chronic toxicity) for ingredient i covering the rapidly degradable ingredients, in mg/l; NOEC j = NOEC (or other recognized measures for chronic toxicity) for ingredient j covering the non-rapidly degradable ingredients, in mg/l; n = number of ingredients, and i and j are running from 1 to n; EqNOEC m = equivalent NOEC of the part of the mixture with test data; The equivalent toxicity thus reflects the fact that non-rapidly degradable substances are classified one hazard category level more "severe" than rapidly degradable substances. The calculated equivalent toxicity shall be used to assign that portion of the mixture a long-term hazard category, in accordance with the criteria for rapidly degradable substances (Table 2.2.9.1.10.3.1 (b) (ii)), which is then subsequently used in applying the summation method . 2.2.9.1.10.4.5.3 When applying the additivity formula for part of the mixture, it is preferable to calculate the toxicity of this part of the mixture using for each ingredient toxicity values that relate to the same taxonomic group (i.e. fish, crustacea or algae) and then to use the highest toxicity (lowest value) obtained (i.e. use the most sensitive of the three groups ). However, when toxicity data for each ingredient are not available in the same taxonomic group , the toxicity value of each ingredient shall be selected in the same manner that toxicity values are selected for the classification of substances, i.e. the higher toxicity (from the most sensitive test organism) is used. The calculated acute and chronic toxicity shall then be used to classify this part of the mixture as Acute 1 and/or Chronic 1 or 2 using the same criteria described for substances. 2.2.9.1.10.4.5.4 If a mixture is classified in more than one way, the method yielding the more conservative result shall be used. 2.2.9.1.10.4.6 Summation method 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.1 Classification procedure In general a more severe classification for mixtures overrides a less severe classification, e.g. a classification with Chronic 1 overrides a classification with Chronic 2. As a consequence the classification procedure is already completed if the result of the classification is Chronic 1. A more severe classification than Chronic 1 is not possible; therefore, it is not necessary to pursue the classification procedure further. 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.2 Classification for category Acute 1 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.2.1 First, all ingredients classified as Acute 1 are considered. If the sum of the concentrations (in %) of these ingredients is greater than or equal to 25% the whole mixture shall be classified as Acute 1. If the result of the calculation is a classification of the mixture as Acute 1, the classification process is completed. 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.2.2 The classification of mixtures for acute hazards based on this summation of the concentrations of classified ingredients is summarized in Table 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.2.2 below. Table 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.2.2: Classification of a mixture for acute hazards based on summation of the concentrations of classified ingredients Sum of the concentrations (in %) of ingredients classified as: Mixture classified as: Acute 1 M a ≥ 25% Acute 1 a For explanation of the M factor, see 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.4. 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.3 Classification for categories Chronic 1 and 2 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.3.1 First, all ingredients classified as Chronic 1 are considered. If the sum of the concentrations (in %) of these ingredients is greater than or equal to 25% the mixture shall be classified as Chronic 1. If the result of the calculation is a classification of the mixture as Chronic 1 the classification procedure is completed. 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.3.2 In cases where the mixture is not classified as Chronic 1, classification of the mixture as Chronic 2 is considered. A mixture shall be classified as Chronic 2 if 10 times the sum of the concentrations (in %) of all ingredients classified as Chronic 1 plus the sum of the concentrations (in %) of all ingredients classified as Chronic 2 is greater than or equal to 25%. If the result of the calculation is classification of the mixture as Chronic 2, the classification process is completed. 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.3.3 The classification of mixtures for long-term hazards based on this summation of the concentrations of classified ingredients is summarized in Table 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.3.3 below. Table 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.3.3 : Classification of a mixture for long-term hazards based on summation of the concentrations of classified ingredients Sum of the concentrations (in %) of ingredients classified as: Mixture classified as: Chronic 1 M a ≥ 25 % Chronic 1 (M 10 Chronic 1) + Chronic 2 ≥ 25 % Chronic 2 a For explanation of the M factor, see 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.4. 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.4 Mixtures with highly toxic ingredients Acute 1 or Chronic 1 ingredients with acute toxicities well below 1 mg/l and/or chronic toxicities well below 0.1 mg/l (if non-rapidly degradable) and 0.01 mg/l (if rapidly degradable) may influence the toxicity of the mixture and are given increased weight in applying the summation method. When a mixture contains ingredients classified as Acute 1 or Chronic 1, the tiered approach described in 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.2 and 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.3 shall be applied using a weighted sum by multiplying the concentrations of Acute 1 and Chronic 1 ingredients by a factor, instead of merely adding up the percentages. This means that the concentration of "Acute 1" in the left column of Table 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.2.2 and the concentration of "Chronic 1" in the left column of Table 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.3.3 are multiplied by the appropriate multiplying factor. The multiplying factors to be applied to these ingredients are defined using the toxicity value, as summarised in Table 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.4 below. Therefore, in order to classify a mixture containing Acute 1 and/or Chronic 1 ingredients, the classifier needs to be informed of the value of the M factor in order to apply the summation method. Alternatively, the additivity formula (see 2.2.9.1.10.4.5.2) may be used when toxicity data are available for all highly toxic ingredients in the mixture and there is convincing evidence that all other ingredients, including those for which specific and/or chronic acute toxicity data are not available, are of low or no toxicity and do not significantly contribute to the environmental hazard of the mixture. Table 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.4: Multiplying factors for highly toxic ingredients of mixtures Acute toxicity M factor Chronic Toxicity M factor L(E)C 50 value NOEC value NRD a RD b 0.1 < L(E)C 50 1 1 0.01 < NOEC 0.1 1 – 0.01 < L(E)C 50 0.1 10 0.001 < NOEC 0.01 10 1 0.001 < L(E)C 50 0.01 100 0.0001 < NOEC 0.001 100 10 0.0001 < L(E)C 50 0.001 1000 0.00001 < NOEC 0.0001 1000 100 0.00001 < L(E)C 50 0.0001 10000 0.000001 < NOEC 0.00001 10000 1000 (continue in factor 10 intervals) (continue in factor 10 intervals) a Non-rapidly degradable. b Rapidly degradable. 2.2.9.1.10.4.6.5 Classification of mixtures with ingredients without any useable information In the event that no useable information on acute and/or chronic aquatic toxicity is available for one or more relevant ingredients, it is concluded that the mixture cannot be attributed (a) definitive hazard category(ies). In this situation the mixture shall be classified based on the known ingredients only. 2.2.9.1.10.5 Substances or mixtures classified as environmentally hazardous substances (aquatic environment) on the basis of Regulation 1272/2008/EC If data for classification according to the criteria of 2.2.9.1.10.3 and 2.2.9.1.10.4 are not available, a substance or mixture: (a) Shall be classified as an environmentally hazardous substance (aquatic environment) if it has to be assigned category(ies) Aquatic Acute 1, Aquatic Chronic 1 or Aquatic Chronic 2 according to Regulation 1272/2008/EC NOTEREF _Ref265241900 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 17 ; (b) May be regarded as not being an environmentally hazardous substance (aquatic environment) if it does not have to be assigned such a category according to the said Regulation. 2.2.9.1.10.6 Assignment of substances or mixtures classified as environmentally hazardous substances (aquatic environment) according to the provisions in 2.2.9.1.10.3, 2.2.9.1.10.4 or 2.2.9.1.10.5 Substances or mixtures classified as environmentally hazardous substances (aquatic environment) that do not meet the classification criteria of any other class or another substance within Class 9 shall be designated: UN No. 3077 ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, SOLID, N.O.S.; or UN No. 3082 ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, N.O.S. They shall be assigned to packing group III. Genetically modified microorganisms or organisms 2.2.9.1.11 Genetically modified microorganisms (GMMOs) and genetically modified organisms (GMOs) are microorganisms and organisms in which genetic material has been purposely altered through genetic engineering in a way that does not occur naturally. They are assigned to Class 9 (UN No. 3245) if they do not meet the definition of toxic substances or of infectious substances, but are capable of altering animals, plants or microbiological substances in a way not normally the result of natural reproduction. NOTE 1: GMMOs and GMOs which are infectious are substances of Class 6.2, UN Nos. 2814, 2900 or 3373. 2: GMMOs or GMOs are not subject to the provisions of RID when authorized for use by the competent authorities of the countries of origin, transit and destination . 3: Genetically modified live animals which, in accordance with the current state of scientific knowledge, have no known pathogenic effect on humans, animals and plants and are carried in receptacles that are suitable for safely preventing both the escape of the animals and unauthorized access to them, are not subject to the provisions of RID. The provisions specified by the International Air Transport Association (IATA) for air transport "Live Animals Regulations, LAR" can be drawn on as guidelines for suitable receptacles for the transport of live animals. 4: Live animals shall not be used to carry genetically modified microorganisms classified in Class 9 unless the substance can be carried no other way. Genetically modified live animals shall be carried under terms and conditions of the competent authorities of the countries of origin and destination. 2.2.9.1.12 (Reserved) Elevated temperature substances 2.2.9.1.13 Elevated temperature substances include substances which are carried or handed over for carriage in the liquid state at or above 100 °C and, in the case of those with a flash-point, below their flash-point. They also include solids which are carried or handed over for carriage at or above 240 °C. NOTE: Elevated temperature substances may be assigned to Class 9 only if they do not meet the criteria of any other class. Other substances and articles presenting a danger during carriage but not meeting the definitions of another class 2.2.9.1.14 The following other miscellaneous substances not meeting the definitions of another class are assigned to Class 9: Solid ammonia compounds having a flash-point below 60 °C Low hazard dithionites Highly volatile liquids Substances emitting noxious fumes Substances containing allergens Chemical kits and first aid kits Electric double layer capacitors (with an energy storage capacity greater than 0.3 Wh) Vehicles, engines and machinery, internal combustion Articles containing miscellaneous dangerous goods. NOTE: UN No. 1845 CARBON DIOXIDE, SOLID (DRY ICE) , UN No. 2216 FISH MEAL (FISH SCRAP), STABILIZED, UN No. 2807 MAGNETIZED MATERIAL, UN No. 3334 AVIATION REGULATED LIQUID, N.O.S., UN No. 3335 AVIATION REGULATED SOLID, N.O.S. listed in the UN Model Regulations, are not subject to the provisions of RID . Assignment of the packing groups 2.2.9.1.15 When indicated in column (4) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, substances and articles of Class 9 are assigned to one of the following packing groups according to their degree of danger: Packing group II: substances presenting medium danger; Packing group III: substances presenting low danger. 2.2.9.2 Substances and articles not accepted for carriage The following substances and articles shall not be accepted for carriage: – Lithium batteries which do not meet the relevant conditions of special provisions 188, 230, 310, 636 or 670 of Chapter 3.3. – Uncleaned empty containment vessels for articles such as transformers, condensers and hydraulic apparatus containing substances assigned to UN Nos. 2315, 3151, 3152 or 3432. 2.2.9.3 List of entries Classification code UN Name of the substance or article No. Miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles Substances which, on inhalation as fine dust, may M1 2212 ASBESTOS, AMPHIBOLE (amosite, tremolite, actinolite, anthophyllite, crocidolite) endanger health 2590 ASBESTOS, CHRYSOTILE 2315 POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS, LIQUID 3432 POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS, SOLID Substances and articles which, in the event of fire, M2 3151 POLYHALOGENATED BIPHENYLS, LIQUID or 3151 halogenated monomethyldiphenyl methanes, liquid or 3151 POLYHALOGENATED TERPHENYLS, LIQUID may form diox ins 3152 POLYHALOGENATED BIPHENYLS, SOLID or 3152 halogenated monomethyldiphenylmethanes, SOLID or 3152 POLYHALOGENATED TERPHENYLS, SOLID 2211 POLYMERIC BEADS, EXPANDABLE, evolving flammable vapour Substances evolving flammable vapour M3 3314 PLASTICS MOULDING COMPOUND in dough, sheet or ex tru ded rope form evolving flammable vapour 3090 LITHIUM METAL BATTERIES (including lithium alloy batteries) 3091 LITHIUM METAL BATTERIES CONTAINED IN EQUIPMENT (including lithium alloy batteries) or 3091 LITHIUM METAL BATTERIES PACKED WITH EQUIPMENT (including lithium alloy batteries) Lithium batteries M4 3480 LITHIUM ION BATTERIES (including lithium ion polymer batteries) 3481 LITHIUM ION BATTERIES CONTAINED IN EQUIPMENT (including lithium ion polymer batteries) or 3481 LITHIUM ION BATTERIES PACKED WITH EQUIPMENT (including lithium ion polymer batteries) 3536 LITHIUM BATTERIES INSTALLED IN CARGO TRANSPORT UNIT lithium ion batteries or lithium metal batteries 2990 LIFE SAVING APPLIANCES, SELF INFLATING such as aircraft evacuation chutes, aircraft survival kits and maritime life-saving appliances Live-saving appliances M5 3072 LIFE SAVING APPLIANCES NOT SELF INFLATING containing dangerous goods as equipment 3268 SAFETY DEVICES, electrically initiated liquid M6 3082 ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, N.O.S. pollutant to the aquatic environment solid M7 3077 ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, SOLID, N.O.S. Environmentally hazardous substances genetically modified microorganisms and organisms M8 3245 GENETICALLY MODIFIED MICROORGANISMS or 3245 GENETICALLY MODIFIED ORGANISMS liquid M9 3257 ELEVATED TEMPERATURE LIQUID, N.O.S., at or abo ve 100 °C and below its flash-point (including molten metal, molten salts, etc.) Elevated temperature substances solid M10 3258 ELEVATED TEMPERATURE SOLID, N.O.S., at or above 240 °C Other substances and articles presenting a danger during carriage, but not meeting the definitions of another class M11 Only substances and articles listed in Table A of Chapter 3.2 are subject to the provisions for Class 9 under this classification code, as follows: 1841 ACETALDEHYDE AMMONIA 1931 ZINC DITHIONITE (ZINC HYDROSULPHITE) 1941 DIBROMODIFLUOROMETHANE 1990 BENZALDEHYDE 2071 AMMONIUM NITRATE BASED FERTILIZER 2969 CASTOR BEANS or 2969 CASTOR MEAL or 2969 CASTOR POMACE or 2969 CASTOR FLAKE 3166 VEHICLE, FLAMMABLE GAS POWERED or 3166 VEHICLE, FLAMMABLE LIQUID POWERED or 3166 VEHICLE, FUEL CELL, FLAMMABLE GAS POWERED or 3166 VEHICLE, FUEL CELL, FLAMMABLE LIQUID POWERED 3171 BATTERY POWERED VEHICLE or 3171 BATTERY POWERED EQUIPMENT 3316 CHEMICAL KIT or 3316 FIRST AID KIT 3359 FUMIGATED CARGO TRANSPORT UNIT 3499 CAPACITOR, ELECTRIC DOUBLE LAYER (with an energy storage capacity greater than 0.3Wh) 3508 CAPACITOR, ASYMMETRIC (with an energy storage capacity greater than 0.3Wh) 3509 PACKAGINGS, DISCARDED, EMPTY, UNCLEANED 3363 DANGEROUS GOODS IN ARTICLES or 3363 DANGEROUS GOODS IN MACHINERY or 3363 DANGEROUS GOODS IN APPARATUS 3530 ENGINE, INTERNAL COMBUSTION or 3530 MACHINERY, INTERNAL COMBUSTION 3548 ARTICLES CONTAINING MISCELLANEOUS DANGEROUS GOODS N.O.S. Chapter 2.3 Test methods 2.3.0 General Unless otherwise provided for in Chapter 2.2 or in this Chapter, the test methods to be used for the classification of dangerous goods are those described in the Manual of Tests and Criteria. 2.3.1 Exudation test for blasting explosives of Type A 2.3.1.1 Blasting explosives of type A (UN No. 0081) shall, if they contain more than 40% liquid nitric ester, in addition to the testing specified in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, satisfy the following exudation test. 2.3.1.2 The apparatus for testing blasting explosive for exudation (figs. 1 to 3) consists of a hollow bronze cylinder. This cylinder, which is closed at one end by a plate of the same metal, has an internal diameter of 15.7 mm and a depth of 40 mm. It is pierced by 20 holes 0.5 mm in diameter (four sets of five holes) on the circumference. A bronze piston, cylindrically fashioned over a length of 48 mm and having a total length of 52 mm, slides into the vertically placed cylinder. The piston, whose diameter is 15.6 mm, is loaded with a mass of 2 220 g so that a pressure of 120 kPa (1.20 bar) is exerted on the base of the cylinder. 2.3.1.3 A small plug of blasting explosive weighing 5 to 8 g, 30 mm long and 15 mm in diameter, is wrapped in very fine gauze and placed in the cylinder; the piston and its loading mass are then placed on it so that the blasting explosive is subjected to a pressure of 120 kPa (1.20 bar). The time taken for the appearance of the first signs of oily droplets (nitroglycerine) at the outer orifices of the cylinder holes is noted. 2.3.1.4 The blasting explosive is considered satisfactory if the time elapsing before the appearance of the liquid exudations is more than five minutes, the test having been carried out at a temperature of 15 °C to 25 °C. Test of blasting explosive for exudation 3037840 4253230 Fig. 3: Hollow bronze cylinder, closed at one end Plan and cut; dimensions in mm 0 0 Fig. 3: Hollow bronze cylinder, closed at one end Plan and cut; dimensions in mm 66040 4417060 Fig. 2: Cylindrical bronze piston; dimensions in mm 0 0 Fig. 2: Cylindrical bronze piston; dimensions in mm 66040 2517140 Fig. 1: Bell-form charge; mass 2220 g; capable of being suspended from a bronze piston 0 0 Fig. 1: Bell-form charge; mass 2220 g; capable of being suspended from a bronze piston Fig. 1 to 3: (1) 4 series of 5 holes at 0. 5 (2) copper (3) lead plate with centre cone at the inferior face (4) 4 openings, approximately 46 x 56, set at even intervals on the periphery 2.3.2 Tests relating to nitrated cellulose mixtures of Class 1 and Class 4.1 2.3.2.1 In order to determine the criteria of the nitrocellulose, the Bergmann-Junk test or the methyl violet paper test in the Manual of Tests and Criteria Appendix 10 shall be performed (see Chapter 3.3, special provisions 393 and 394). If there is doubt that the ignition temperature of the nitrocellulose is considerably higher than 132 °C in the case of the Bergmann-Junk test or higher than 134.5 °C in the case of the methyl violet paper test, the ignition temperature test described in 2.3.2.5 should be carried out before these tests are performed. If the ignition temperature of nitrocellulose mixtures is higher than 180 °C or the ignition temperature of plasticized nitrocellulose is higher than 170 °C, the Bergmann-Junk test or the methyl violet paper test can be carried out safely. 2.3.2.2 Before undergoing the tests in 2.3.2.5 , the samples shall be dried for not less than 15 hours at the ambient temperature in a vacuum desiccator containing fused and granulated calcium chloride, the sample substance being spread in a thin layer; for this purpose, substances which are neither in powder form nor fibrous shall be ground, or grated, or cut into small pieces. The pressure in the desiccator shall be brought below 6.5 kPa (0.065 bar). 2.3.2.3 Before being dried as prescribed in 2.3.2.2 above, plasticized nitrocellulose shall undergo preliminary drying in a well ventilated oven, with its temperature set at 70 °C, until the loss of mass per quar ter hour is less than 0.3 % of the original mass. 2 .3.2.4 Weakly nitrated nitrocellulose shall first undergo preliminary drying as prescribed in 2.3.2.3 above ; drying shall then be completed by keeping the nitrocellulose for at least 15 hours over concentrated sulphuric acid in a desiccator. 2.3.2. 5 Ignition temperature (see 2.3.2.1) (a) The ignition temperature is determined by heating 0.2 g of substance enclosed in a glass test tube immersed in a Wood's alloy bath. The test tube is placed in the bath when the latter has reached 100 °C. The temperature of the bath is th en progressively increased by 5 °C per minute; (b) The test tubes must have the following dimensions: length 125 mm, internal diameter 15 mm, thickness of wall 0. 5 mm and shall be immersed to a depth of 20 mm; (c) The test shall be repeated three times, the temperature at which ignition of the substance occurs, i.e., slow or rapid combustion, deflagration or detonation, being noted each time; (d) The lowest temperature recorded in the three tests is the ignition temperature. 2.3.3 Tests relating to flammable liquids of Classes 3, 6.1 and 8 2.3.3.1 Determination of flash-point 2.3.3.1.1 The following methods for determining the flash-point of flammable liquids may be used: International standards: ISO 1516 (Determination of flash/no flash – Closed cup equilibrium method) ISO 1523 (Determination of flash point – Closed cup equilibrium method) ISO 2719 (Determination of flash point – Pensky-Martens closed cup method) ISO 13736 (Determination of flash point – Abel closed-cup method) ISO 3679 (Determination of flash point – Rapid equilibrium closed cup method) ISO 3680 (Determination of flash/no flash – Rapid equilibrium closed cup method) National standards: American Society for Testing Materials International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, Pennsylvania, USA 19428-2959: ASTM D3828-07a, Standard Test Methods for Flash Point by Small Scale Closed-Cup Tester ASTM D56-05, Standard Test Method for Flash Point by Tag Closed-Cup Tester ASTM D3278-96(2004)e1, Standard Test Methods for Flash Point of Liquids by Small Scale Closed-Cup Apparatus ASTM D93-08, Standard Test Methods for Flash Point by Pensky-Martens Closed-Cup Tester Association française de normalisation, AFNOR, 11, rue de Pressensé, F-93571 La Plaine Saint-Denis Cedex: French s tandard NF M 07 - 019 French s tandards NF M 07 - 011 / NF T 30 - 050 / NF T 66 - 009 French s tandard NF M 07 - 036 Deutsches Institut für Normung, Burggrafenstraße 6, D-10787 Berlin: Standard DIN 51755 (flash-points below 65 °C) State Committee of the Council of Ministers for Standardization, RUS-113813, GSP, Moscow, M-49 Leninsky Prospect, 9: GOST 12.1.044-84 . 2.3.3.1.2 To determine the flash-point of paints, gums and similar viscous products containing solvents, only apparatus and test methods suitable for determining the flash-point for viscous liquids shall be used, in accordance with the following standards: (a) I nternational s tandard ISO 3679: 1983; (b) International s tandard ISO 3680:1983; (c) International s tandard ISO 1523:1983; (d) International s tandards EN ISO 13736 and EN ISO 2719, Method B. 2.3.3.1.3 The standards listed in 2.3.3.1.1 shall only be used for flash-point ranges which are specified therein. The possibility of chemical reactions between the substance and the sample holder shall be considered when selecting the standard to be used. The apparatus shall, as far as is consistent with safet y, be placed in a draught- free position. For safety, a method utilizing a small sample size, around 2 ml, shall be used for organic peroxides and self-reactive substances (also known as "energetic" substances), or for toxic substances. 2.3.3.1.4 When the f lash-point, determined by a non- equilibrium method is found to be 23 °C ± 2 °C or 60 °C ± 2 °C, it shall be confirmed for each temperature range by an equilibrium method. 2.3.3.1.5 In the event of a dispute as to the classification of a flammable liquid, the classification proposed by the consignor shall be accepted if a check test of the flash point, yields a result not differing by more than 2 °C from the limits (23 °C and 60 °C respectively) stated in 2.2.3.1. If the difference is more than 2 °C, a second check-test shall be carried out, and the lowest figure of the flash-points obtained in either check-test shall be adopted. 2.3.3.2 Determination of initial boiling point The following methods for determining the initial boiling point of flammable liquids may be used: International standards: ISO 3924 (Petroleum products – Determination of boiling range distribution – Gas chromatography method) ISO 4626 (Volatile organic liquids – Determination of boiling range of organic solvents used as raw materials) ISO 3405 (Petroleum products – Determination of distillation characteristics at atmospheric pressure) National standards: American Society for Testing Materials International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, Pennsylvania, USA 19428-2959: ASTM D86-07a, Standard Test Method for Distillation of Petroleum Products at Atmospheric Pressure ASTM D1078-05, Standard Test Method for Distillation Range of Volatile Organic Liquids Further acceptable methods: Method A.2 as described in Part A of the Annex to Commission Regulation (EC) No 440/2008 . 2.3.3. 3 Test for determining peroxide content To determine the peroxide content of a liquid, the procedure is as follows: A quantity p (about 5 g, weighed to the nearest 0.01 g) of the liquid to be titrated is placed in an Erlenmeyer flask; 20 cm 3 of acetic anhydride and about 1 g of powdered solid potassium iodide are added; the flask is shaken and, after 10 minutes, heated for 3 minutes to about 60 °C. When it has been left to cool for 5 minutes, 25 cm 3 of water are added. After this, it is left standing for half an hour, then the liberated iodine is titrated with a decinormal solution of sodium thiosulphate, no indicator being added; complete discoloration indicates the end of the reaction. If n is the number of cm 3 of thiosulphate solution required, the percentage of peroxide (calculated as H 2 O 2 ) present in the sample is obtained by the formula: . 2.3.4 Test for determining fluidity To determine the fluidity of liquid, viscous or pasty substances and mixtures, the following test method shall be used. 2.3.4.1 Test apparatus Commercial penetrometer conforming to ISO 2137:1985, with a guide rod of 47.5 g ± 0.05 g; sieve disc of duralumin with conical bores and a mass of 102.5 g ± 0.05 g (see Figure 1); penetration vessel with an inside diameter of 72 mm to 80 mm for reception of the sample. 2.3.4.2 Test procedure The sample is poured into the penetration vessel not less than half an hour before the measurement. The vessel is then hermetically closed and left standing until the measurement. The sample in the hermetically closed penetration vessel is heated to 35 °C ± 0.5 °C and is placed on the penetrometer table immediately prior to measurement (not more than two minutes). The point S of the sieve disc is then brought into contact with the surface of the liquid and the rate of penetration is measured. 2.3.4.3 Evaluation of test results A substance is pasty if, after the centre S has been brought into contact with the surface of the sample, the penetration indicated by the dial gauge: (a) after a loading time of 5 s ± 0.1 s, is less than 15.0 mm ± 0.3 mm; or (b) after a loading time of 5 s ± 0.1 s, is greater than 15.0 mm ± 0.3 mm, but the additional penetration after another 55 s ± 0.5 s is less than 5.0 mm ± 0.5 mm. NOTE : In the case of samples having a flow point, it is often impossible to produce a steady level surface in the penetration vessel and, hence, to establish satisfactory initial measuring conditions for the contact of the point S. Furthermore, with some samples, the impact of the sieve disc can cause an elastic deformation of the surface and, in the first few seconds, simulate a deeper penetration. In all these cases, it may be appropriate to make the evaluation in paragraph (b) above. Figure 1 Penetrometer 1011555 504825 19.05 50.8 69.9 40 120 ° 16 0 52' 12.7 10.3 12.7 3 7.4 0.02 3.2 ± 0.02 82.6 102.5g 0.05g 3.2 9 0.5 Adjust mass to Press fit S S 0 0 19.05 50.8 69.9 40 120 ° 16 0 52' 12.7 10.3 12.7 3 7.4 0.02 3.2 ± 0.02 82.6 102.5g 0.05g 3.2 9 0.5 Adjust mass to Press fit S S Tolerances not specified are ± 0.1 mm. 2.3. 5 Classification of organometallic substances in classes 4.2 and 4.3 Depending on their properties as determined in accordance with tests N.1 to N.5 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, section 33, organometallic substances may be classified in Class 4.2 or 4.3, as appropriate, in accordance with the flowchart scheme given in Figure 2.3. 5 . NOTE 1 : Depending on their other properties and on the precedence of hazard table (see 2.1.3.10), organometallic substances may have to be classified in other classes as appropriate. 2 : Flammable solutions with organometallic compounds in concentrations which are not liable to spontaneous combustion or, in contact with water, do not emit flammable gases in dangerous quantities, are substances of Class 3 . Figure 2.3. 5 : Flowchart scheme for the classification of organometallic substances in classes 4.2 and 4.3 (a), (b) (a) Test methods N.1 to N.5 can be found in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, Section 33. (b) If applicable and testing is relevant, taking into account reactivity properties, C lass 6.1 and 8 properties should be considered according to the table of precedence of hazards in 2.1.3.10. 4470980 6024931 Yes Yes 4470980 4539031 Yes Yes 2413580 4767631 Yes Yes 1727780 5224831 Yes Yes 1842080 6939331 Yes Yes 927680 7739431 No No 927680 6139231 No No 2413580 6024931 No No 3785180 5224831 No No 4356680 3281731 Yes Yes 3785180 2710231 No No 4013780 2253031 Liquid Liquid 4013780 1452931 Solid Solid 2985080 309931 No No 1727780 881431 Yes Yes 241880 -32969 Organometallic substance/formulation/solution Organometallic substance/formulation/solution 241880 652831 Is the substance pyrophoric? Test N.2 (solid) Test N.3 (liquid) Is the substance pyrophoric? Test N.2 (solid) Test N.3 (liquid) 1039440 307391 2184980 652831 Is the substance water-reactive? Test N.5 Is the substance water-reactive? Test N.5 1847795 1099236 4813880 -32969 Organometallic substance, solid, pyrophoric UN 3391 Organometallic substance, solid, pyrophoric UN 3391 4813880 652831 Organometallic substance, liquid, pyrophoric UN 3392 Organometallic substance, liquid, pyrophoric UN 3392 4813880 1338631 Organometallic substance, solid, pyrophoric, water-reactive UN 3393 Organometallic substance, solid, pyrophoric, water-reactive UN 3393 4813880 2024431 Organometallic substance, liquid, pyrophoric water-reactive UN 3394 Organometallic substance, liquid, pyrophoric water-reactive UN 3394 2982540 519481 4013780 -32969 Solid Solid 4013780 881431 Liquid Liquid 4036005 193091 2982540 1556436 4051880 1638351 241880 4996231 Is the substance water-reactive? Test N.5 Is the substance water-reactive? Test N.5 241880 6596431 Is the substance a self-heating solid? Test N.4 Is the substance a self-heating solid? Test N.4 2070680 4996231 Class 4.3, PG I, II or III. Is the substance a solid? Class 4.3, PG I, II or III. Is the substance a solid? 3099380 4310431 Is the substance self-heating? Test N.4 Is the substance self-heating? Test N.4 3099380 3167431 Is the substance a flammable solid? Test N.1 Is the substance a flammable solid? Test N.1 1047695 1556436 2819345 4765091 1842080 5453431 3670880 4079291 4813880 2710231 Organometallic substance, solid, water-reactive UN 3395 Organometallic substance, solid, water-reactive UN 3395 4813880 3281731 Organometallic substance, solid, water-reactive flammable UN 3396 Organometallic substance, solid, water-reactive flammable UN 3396 3848045 2928036 4585280 3624631 4813880 4424731 Organometallic substance, solid, water-reactive self-heating UN 3397 Organometallic substance, solid, water-reactive self-heating UN 3397 4585280 4767631 2985080 5682031 Does the substance contain a diluent with a flashpoint 60 °C? Does the substance contain a diluent with a flashpoint 60 °C? 2802835 5908091 4813880 5224831 Organometallic substance, liquid, water-reactive UN 3398 Organometallic substance, liquid, water-reactive UN 3398 4813880 5910631 Organometallic substance, liquid, water-reactive flammable UN 3399 Organometallic substance, liquid, water-reactive flammable UN 3399 3782640 5442636 4585280 6253531 4813880 6825031 Organometallic substance, solid, self-heating UN 3400 Organometallic substance, solid, self-heating UN 3400 241880 8196631 Substance does not have to be classified in Class 4.2 or in Class 4.3 Substance does not have to be classified in Class 4.2 or in Class 4.3 1041980 5910631 1041980 7625131 1847795 7116496 3788410 4082415 No 0 0 No 2988310 1910715 Yes 0 0 Yes Part 3 Dangerous goods lists, special provisions and exemptions related to limited and excepted quantities Chapter 3.1 General 3.1.1 Introduction In addition to the provisions referred to or given in the tables of this Part, the general requirements of each Part, Chapter and/or Section are to be observed. These general requirements are not given in the tables. When a general requirement is contradictory to a special provision, the special provision prevails. 3.1.2 Proper shipping name NOTE: For proper shipping names used for the carriage of samples, see 2.1.4.1. 3.1.2.1 The proper shipping name is that portion of the entry most accurately describing the goods in Table A in Chapter 3.2, which is shown in upper case characters (plus any numbers, Greek letters, "sec", " tert ", and the letters "m", "n", "o", "p", which form an integral part of the name). An alternative proper shipping name may be shown in brackets following the main proper shipping name [e.g., ETHANOL (ETHYL ALCOHOL)]. Portions of an entry appearing in lower case need not be considered as part of the proper shipping name. 3.1.2.2 When a combination of several distinct proper shipping names are listed under a single UN number, and these are separated by "and" or "or" in lower case or are punctuated by commas, only the most appropriate shall be shown in the transport document and package marks. Examples illustrating the selection of the proper shipping name for such entries are: (a) UN 1057 LIGHTERS or LIGHTER REFILLS The proper shipping name is the most appropriate of the following possible combinations: LIGHTERS LIGHTER REFILLS; (b) UN 2793 FERROUS METAL BORINGS, SHAVINGS, TURNINGS or CUTTINGS in a form liable to self-heating. The proper shipping name is the most appropriate of the following combinations: FERROUS METAL BORINGS FERROUS METAL SHAVINGS FERROUS METAL TURNINGS FERROUS METAL CUTTINGS. 3.1.2.3 Proper shipping names may be used in the singular or plural as appropriate. In addition, when qualifying words are used as part of the proper shipping name, their sequence on the transport document or package markings is optional. For instance, "DIMETHYLAMINE AQUEOUS SOLUTION" may alternatively be shown "AQUEOUS SOLUTION OF DIMETHYLAMINE". Commercial or military names for goods of Class 1 which contain the proper shipping name supplemented by additional descriptive text may be used. 3.1.2.4 Many substances have an entry for both the liquid and solid state (see definitions for liquid and solid in 1.2.1), or for the solid and solution. These are allocated separate UN numbers which are not necessarily adjacent to each other. 3.1.2.5 Unless it is already included in capital letters in the name indicated in Table A in Chapter 3.2, the qualifying word "MOLTEN" shall be added as part of the proper shipping name when a substance, which is a solid in accordance with the definition in 1.2.1, is offered for carriage in the molten state (e.g. ALKYLPHENOL, SOLID, N.O.S., MOLTEN). 3.1.2.6 Except for self-reactive substances and organic peroxides and unless it is already included in capital letters in the name indicated in Column (2) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, the word "STABILIZED" shall be added as part of the proper shipping name of a substance which without stabilization would be forbidden from carriage in accordance with paragraphs 2.2. x .2 due to it being liable to dangerously react under conditions normally encountered in carriage (e.g.: "TOXIC LIQUID, ORGANIC, N.O.S., STABILIZED"). When temperature control is used to stabilize such substances to prevent the development of any dangerous excess pressure, or the evolution of excessive heat, or when chemical stabilization is used in combination with temperature control, then: (a) For liquids and solids: liquids and solids requiring temperature control shall not be accepted for carriage by rail ; (b) (Reserved) (c ) For gases: the conditions of carriage shall be approved by the competent authority. 3.1.2.7 Hydrates may be carried under the proper shipping name for the anhydrous substance. 3.1.2.8 Generic or "not otherwise specified" ( n.o.s . ) names 3.1.2.8.1 Generic and "not otherwise specified" proper shipping names that are assigned to special provision 274 or 318 in Column (6) of Table A in Chapter 3.2 shall be supplemented with the technical name of the goods unless a national law or international convention prohibits its disclosure if it is a controlled substance. For explosives of Class 1, the dangerous goods description may be supplemented by additional descriptive text to indicate commercial or military names. Technical names shall be entered in brackets immediately following the proper shipping name. An appropriate modifier, such as "contains" or "containing" or other qualifying words such as "mixture", "solution", etc. and the percentage of the technical constituent may also be used. For example: "UN 1993 FLAMMABLE LIQUID, N.O.S. (CONTAINS XYLENE AND BENZENE), 3, II". 3.1.2.8.1.1 The technical name shall be a recognized chemical name or biological name, or other name currently used in scientific and technical handbooks, journals and texts. Trade names shall not be used for this purpose. In the case of pesticides, only ISO common name(s), other name(s) in the World Health Organization (WHO) Recommended Classification of Pesticides by Hazard and Guidelines to Classification, or the name(s) of the active substance(s) may be used. 3.1.2.8.1.2 When a mixture of dangerous goods or articles containing dangerous goods are described by one of the "N.O.S." or "generic" entries to which special provision 274 has been allocated in Column (6) of Table A in Chapter 3.2, not more than the two constituents which most predominantly contribute to the hazard or hazards of the mixture or of the articles need to be shown, excluding controlled substances when their disclosure is prohibited by national law or international convention. If a package containing a mixture is labelled with any subsidiary hazard label, one of the two technical names shown in parentheses shall be the name of the constituent which compels the use of the subsidiary hazard label. NOTE: S ee 5.4.1.2.2. 3.1.2.8.1.3 Examples illustrating the selection of the proper shipping name supplemented with the technical name of goods for such n.o.s . entries are: UN 3394 ORGANOMETALLIC SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, PYROPHORIC, WATER-REACTIVE (trimethylgallium) UN 2902 PESTICIDE, LIQUID, TOXIC, N.O.S. ( drazoxolon ) UN 3540 ARTICLES CONTAINING FLAMMABLE LIQUID, N.O.S. ( pyrrolidine ) . 3.1.2.8.1.4 For UN Nos. 3077 and 3082 only, the technical name may be a name shown in capital letters in column 2 of Table A of Chapter 3.2, provided that this name does not include "N.O.S." and that special provision 274 is not assigned. The name which most appropriately describes the substance or mixture shall be used, e.g.: UN 3082 ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, N.O.S. (PAINT) UN 3082 ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, N.O.S. (PERFUMERY PRODUCTS). 3.1.3 Solutions or mixtures NOTE : Where a substance is specifically mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2, it shall be identified in carriage by the proper shipping name in Column (2) of Table A of Chapter 3.2. Such substances may contain technical impurities (for example those deriving from the production process) or additives for stability or other purposes that do not affect its classification. However, a substance mentioned by name containing technical impurities or additives for stability or other purposes affecting its classification shall be considered a solution or mixture (see 2.1.3.3). 3.1.3.1 A solution or mixture is not subject to RID if the characteristics, properties, form or physical state of the solution or mixture are such that it does not meet the criteria, including human experience criteria, for inclusion in any class. 3.1.3.2 A solution or mixture meeting the classification criteria of RID composed of a single predominant substance mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 and one or more substances not subject to RID or traces of one or more substances mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 , shall be assigned the UN number and proper shipping name of the predominant substance mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 unless: (a) The solution or mixture is mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2; (b) The name and description of the substance mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 specifically indicate that they apply only to the pure substance; (c) The class, classification code, packing group, or physical state of the solution or mixture is different from that of the substance mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2; or (d) The hazard characteristics and properties of the solution or mixture necessitate emergency response measures that are different from those required for the substance mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2. Qualifying words such as "SOLUTION" or "MIXTURE", as appropriate, shall be added as part of the proper shipping name, for example, "ACETONE SOLUTION". In addition, the concentration of the mixture or solution may also be indicated after the basic description of the mixture or solution, for example, "ACETONE 75% SOLUTION". 3.1.3.3 A solution or mixture meeting the classification criteria of RID that is not mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 and that is composed of two or more dangerous goods shall be assigned to an entry that has the proper shipping name, description, class, classification code and packing group that most precisely describe the solution or mixture. Chapter 3.2 Dangerous goods list 3.2.1 Table A: List of dangerous goods in UN number order Explanations As a rule, each row of Table A of this Chapter deals with the substance(s) or article(s) covered by a specific UN number. However, when substances or articles belonging to the same UN number have different chemical properties, physical properties and/or carriage conditions, several consecutive rows may be used for that UN number. Each column of Table A is dedicated to a specific subject as indicated in the explanatory notes below. The intersection of columns and rows (cell) contains information concerning the subject treated in that column, for the substance(s) or article(s) of that row: – The first four cells identify the substance(s) or article(s) belonging to that row (additional information in that respect may be given by the special provisions referred to in Column (6 ); – The following cells give the applicable special provisions, either in the form of complete information or in coded form. The codes cross-refer to detailed information that is to be found in the Part, Chapter, Section and/or Sub-section indicated in the explanatory notes below. An empty cell means either that there is no special provision and that only the general requirements apply, or that the carriage restriction indicated in the explanatory notes is in force. When used in this Table, an alphanumeric code starting with the letters "SP" designates a special provision of Chapter 3.3. The applicable general requirements are not referred to in the corresponding cells. The explanatory notes below indicate for every column the Part(s), Chapter(s), Section(s) and/or Sub-section(s) where these are to be found. Explanatory notes for each column: Column (1) "UN No." Contains the UN number: – of the dangerous substance or article if the substance or article has been assigned its own specific UN number, or – of the generic or n.o.s . entry to which the dangerous substances or articles not mentioned by name shall be assigned in accordance with the criteria ("decision trees") of Part 2. Column (2) " Name and description" Contains, in upper case characters, the name of the substance or article, if the substance or article has been assigned its own specific UN number, or of the generic or n.o.s . entry to which it has been assigned in accordance with the criteria ("decision trees") of Part 2. This name shall be used as the proper shipping name or, when applicable, as part of the proper shipping name (see 3.1.2 for further details on the proper shipping name). A descriptive text in lower case characters is added after the proper shipping name to clarify the scope of the entry if the classification and/or carriage conditions of the substance or article may be different under certain conditions. Column (3a) "Class" Contains the number of the class, whose heading covers the dangerous substance or article. This class number is assigned in accordance with the procedures and criteria of Part 2. Column (3b) "Classification code" Contains the classification code of the dangerous substance or article. – For dangerous substances or articles of Class 1, the code consists of a division number and compatibility group letter, which are assigned in accordance with the procedures and criteria of 2.2.1.1.4. – For dangerous substances or articles of Class 2, the code consists of a number and hazardous property group, which are explained in 2.2.2.1.2 and 2.2.2.1.3. – For dangerous substances or articles of Classes 3, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 6.2 and 9, the codes are explained in 2. 2.x. 1.2 . – For dangerous substances or articles of Class 8, the codes are explained in 2.2.8.1.4.1. – Dangerous substances or articles of Class 7 do not have a classification code. Column (4) "Packing group " Contains the packing group number(s) (I, II or III) assigned to the dangerous substance. These packing group numbers are assigned on the basis of the procedures and criteria of Part 2. Certain articles and substances are not assigned to packing groups. Column (5) "Labels" Contains the model number of the labels/placards (see 5.2.2.2 and 5.3.1.7) that have to be affixed to packages, containers, tank-containers, portable tanks, MEGCs, tank-wagons, wagons with demountable tanks, battery-wagons and wagons. The shunting labels in accordance with models Nos. 13 and 15 (see 5.3.4) indicated in brackets for some substances shall only be affixed in the following cases: – Class 1: on both sides of wagons which comprise a full load – Class 2: on both sides of tank-wagons, battery-wagons, wagons with demountable tanks and wagons carrying tank-containers, MEGCs and portable tanks. However, for substances or articles of Class 7, 7X means label model No.7A, 7B or 7C as appropriate according to the category (see 5.1.5.3.4 and 5.2.2.1.11.1) or placard No. 7D (see 5.3.1.1.3 and 5.3.1.7.2). The general provisions on labelling/placarding ( e.g. number of labels, their location) are to be found in 5.2.2.1 for packages and small containers, and in 5.3.1, for large containers, tank-containers, MEGCs, portable tanks, tank-wagons, wagons with demountable tanks, battery-wagons and wagons. NOTE: Special provisions, indicated in Column (6), may change the above labelling provisions. Column (6) "Special provisions " Contains the numeric codes of special provisions that have to be met. These provisions concern a wide array of subjects, mainly connected with the contents of Columns (1) to (5) ( e.g. carriage prohibitions, exemptions from requirements, explanations concerning the classification of certain forms of the dangerous goods concerned and additional labelling or marking provisions), and are listed in Chapter 3.3 in numerical order. If Column (6) is empty, no special provisions apply to the contents of Columns (1) to (5) for the dangerous goods concerned. Column (7a) "Limited quantities" Provides the maximum quantity per inner packaging or article for carrying dangerous goods as limited quantities in accordance with Chapter 3.4. Column (7b) " Excepted Quantities" Contains an alphanumeric code with the following meaning: – " E0" signifies that no exemption from the provisions of RID exists for the dangerous goods packed in excepted quantities; – All the other alphanumerical codes starting with the letter "E" signify that the provisions of RID are not applicable if the conditions indicated in Chapter 3.5 are fulfilled. Column (8) "Packing instructions " Contains the alphanumeric codes of the applicable packing instructions: – Alphanumeric codes starting with the letter "P", which refers to packing instructions for packagings and receptacles (except IBCs and large packagings ), or "R", which refers to packing instructions for light-gauge metal packagings . These are listed in 4.1.4.1 in numerical order, and specify the packagings and receptacles that are authorized. They also indicate which of the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3, and which of the special packing provisions of 4.1.5, 4.1.6, 4.1.7, 4.1.8 and 4.1.9 have to be met. If Column (8) does not contain a code starting with the letters "P" or "R", the dangerous goods concerned may not be carried in packagings ; – Alphanumeric codes starting with the letters "IBC" refer to packing instructions for IBCs. These are listed in 4.1.4.2 in numerical order, and specify the IBCs that are authorized. They also indicate which of the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3, and which of the special packing provisions of 4.1.5, 4.1.6, 4.1.7, 4.1.8 and 4.1.9 have to be met. If Column (8) does not contain a code starting with the letters "IBC", the dangerous goods concerned may not be carried in IBCs; – Alphanumeric codes starting with the letters "LP" refer to packing instructions for large packagings . These are listed in 4.1.4.3 in numerical order, and specify the large packagings that are authorized. They also indicate which of the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3, and which of the special packing provisions of 4.1.5, 4.1.6, 4.1.7, 4.1.8 and 4.1.9 have to be met. If Column (8) does not contain a code starting with the letters "LP", the dangerous goods concerned cannot be carried in large packagings . NOTE : Special packing provisions, indicated in Column (9a), may change the above packing instructions. Column (9a) "Special packing provisions " Contains the alphanumeric codes of the applicable special packing provisions: – Alphanumeric codes starting with the letters "PP" or "RR" refer to special packing provisions for packagings and receptacles (except IBCs and large packagings ) that have additionally to be met. These are to be found in 4.1.4.1, at the end of the relevant packing instruction (with the letter "P" or " R") referred to in Column (8). If Column (9a) does not contain a code starting with the letters "PP" or "RR", none of the special packing provisions listed at the end of the relevant packing instruction apply; – Alphanumeric codes starting with the letter "B " or the letters "BB" refer to special packing provisions for IBCs that have additionally to be met. These are to be found in 4.1.4.2, at the end of the relevant packing instruction (with the letters "IBC") referred to in Column (8). If Column (9a) does not contain a code starting with the letter "B" or the letters "BB", none of the special packing provisions listed at the end of the relevant packing instruction apply; – Alphanumeric codes starting with the letter "L " or the letters "LL" refer to special packing provisions for large packagings that have additionally to be met. These are to be found in 4.1.4.3, at the end of the relevant packing instruction (with the letters "LP") referred to in Column (8). If Column (9a) does not contain a code starting with the letter "L" or the letters "LL" , none of the special packing provisions listed at the end of the relevant packing instruction apply. Column (9b) "Mixed packing provisions" Contains the alphanumeric codes starting with the letters "MP" of the applicable mixed packing provisions. These are listed in 4.1.10 in numerical order. If Column (9b) does not contain a code starting with the letters "MP", only the general requirements apply (see 4.1.1.5 and 4.1.1.6). Column (10) " Portable tank and bulk container instructions " Contains an alphanumeric code assigned to a portable tank instruction, in accordance with 4.2.5.2.1 to 4.2.5.2.4 and 4.2.5.2.6. This portable tank instruction corresponds to the least stringent provisions that are acceptable for the carriage of the substance in portable tanks. The codes identifying the other portable tank instructions that are also permitted for the carriage of the substance are to be found in 4.2.5.2.5. If no code is given, carriage in portable tanks is not permitted unless a competent authority approval is granted as detailed in 6.7.1.3. The general requirements for the design, construction, equipment, type approval, testing and marking of portable tanks are to be found in Chapter 6.7. The general requirements for the use ( e.g. filling) are to be found in 4.2.1 to 4.2.4. For portable tanks with shells made of fibre -reinforced plastics (FRP) materials, see Chapter 6.9. The indication of an "(M)" means that the substance may be carried in UN MEGCs. NOTE: Special provisions, indicated in Column (11), may change the above requirements. May also contain alphanumeric codes starting with the letters "BK" referring to types of bulk containers described in Chapter 6.11 which may be used for the carriage of bulk goods in accordance with 7.3.1.1 (a) and 7.3.2. Column (11) "Portable tank and bulk container special provisions" Contains the alphanumeric codes of the portable tank special provisions that have additionally to be met. These codes, starting with the letters "TP" refer to special provisions for the construction or use of these portable tanks. They are to be found in 4.2.5.3. NOTE: If technically relevant, these special provisions are not only applicable to the portable tanks specified in column (10), but also to the portable tanks that may be used according to the table in 4.2.5.2.5. Column (12) "Tank codes for RID tanks" Contains an alphanumeric code describing a tank type, in accordance with 4.3.3.1.1 (for gases of Class 2) or 4.3.4.1.1 (for substances of Classes 3 to 9). This tank type corresponds to the least stringent tank provisions that are acceptable for the carriage of the relevant substance in RID tanks. The codes describing the other permitted tank types are to be found in 4.3.3.1.2 (for gases of Class 2) or 4.3.4.1.2 (for substances of Classes 3 to 9). If no code is given, carriage in RID tanks is not permitted. If in this column a tank code for solids (S) and for liquids (L) is indicated, this means that this substance may be offered for carriage in tanks in the solid or the liquid (molten) state. In general this provision is applicable to substances having melting points from 20 °C to 180 °C. If for a solid, only a tank code for liquids (L) is indicated in this column, this means that this substance is only offered for carriage in tanks in the liquid (molten) state. The general requirements for the construction, equipment, type approval, testing and marking that are not indicated in the tank code are to be found in 6.8.1, 6.8.2, 6.8.3 and 6.8.5. The general requirements for the use ( e.g. maximum degree of filling, minimum test pressure) are to be found in 4.3.1 to 4.3.4. The indication of a "(M)" after the tank code means that the substance can also be carried in battery- wagons or MEGCs. The indication of a "(+)" after the tank code means that the alternative use of the tanks is permitted only where this is specified in the certificate of type approval. For vacuum-operated waste tanks, see 4.5.1 and Chapter 6.10. NOTE: Special provisions, indicated in Column (13), may change the above requirements. Column (13) "Special provisions for RID tanks " Contains the alphanumeric codes of the special provisions for RID tanks that have additionally to be met: – Alphanumeric codes starting with the letters "TU" refer to special provisions for the use of these tanks. These are to be found in 4.3.5; – Alphanumeric codes starting with the letters "TC" refer to special provisions for the construction of these tanks. These are to be found in 6.8.4 (a ); – Alphanumeric codes starting with the letters "TE" refer to special provisions concerning the items of equipment of these tanks. These are to be found in 6.8.4 (b ); – Alphanumeric codes starting with the letters "TA" refer to special provisions for the type approval of these tanks. These are to be found in 6.8.4 (c ); – Alphanumeric codes starting with the letters "TT" refer to special provisions for the testing of these tanks. These are to be found in 6.8.4 (d ); – Alphanumeric codes starting with the letters "TM" refer to special provisions for the marking of these tanks. These are to be found in 6.8.4 (e). NOTE: If technically relevant, these special provisions are not only applicable to the tanks specified in column (12), but also to the tanks that may be used according to the hierarchies in 4.3.3.1.2 and 4.3.4.1.2. Column (14) (Reserved) Column (15) "Transport category" Contains a figure indicating the transport category to which the substance or article is assigned for the purposes of exempting transport operations performed by undertakings in connection with their main business (see 1.1.3.1 (c)). When no transport category has been assigned, this is indicated by the mention "–". Column (16) "Special provisions for carriage – Packages" Contains the alphanumeric code(s), starting with letter "W", of the applicable special provisions (if any) for carriage in packages. These are listed in 7.2.4. General provisions concerning the carriage in packages are to be found in Chapters 7.1 and 7.2. NOTE: In addition, special provisions indicated in Column (18), concerning loading, unloading and handling, shall be observed. Column (17) "Special provisions for carriage – Bulk" Contains the alphanumeric code(s), starting with letters "VC", as well as the alphanumeric code(s) starting with letters "AP", of the applicable provisions for carriage in bulk. These are listed in 7.3.3. If no special provision, identified by the code "VC" or a reference to a specific paragraph, explicitly authorizing this mode of carriage is indicated in this column, and no special provision, identified by the code "BK" or a reference to a specific paragraph, explicitly authorizing this mode of carriage is indicated in column (10), carriage in bulk is not permitted. General and additional provisions concerning carriage in bulk are to be found in Chapters 7.1 and 7.3. NOTE: In addition, special provisions indicated in Column (18), concerning loading, unloading and handling, shall be observed. Column (18) "Special provisions for carriage – Loading, unloading and handling" Contains the alphanumeric code(s), starting with letters "CW", of the applicable special provisions for loading, unloading and handling. These are listed in 7.5.11. If no code is given, only the general provisions apply (see 7.5.1 to 7.5.4 and 7.5.8). Column (19) " Colis express (express parcels)" Contains alphanumeric codes beginning with the letters "CE" for the requirements applicable to forwarding as Colis Express (express parcels). These requirements are given in Chapter 7.6. When column 19 does not contain a code, forwarding as Colis Express (express parcels) is not permitted. Column (20) "Hazard identification number" Contains a two or three figure number (preceded in certain cases by the letter "X") for substances and articles of classes 2 to 9, and for substances and articles of Class 1, the classification code (see column (3b)). In the cases described in 5.3.2.1, this number shall appear in the upper half of the orange-coloured plates. The meaning of the hazard identification numbers is explained in 5.3.2.3. 3.2.2 Table B: Alphabetical l ist of d angerous g oods The names of the substances and articles are listed in alphabetical order. Arabic numbers or prefixes such as o-, m-, p-, n-, sec-, tert-, N-, alpha-, beta-, omega-, cis- and trans- are ignored for the purposes of alphabetical listing. However, prefixes Bis- and Iso- are counted as the first part of a name. Column " NHM-Code " ( N omenclature H armonisée M archandises – Harmonized Goods List ) This column contains the NHM Code of the goods in accordance with the harmonized goods list (UIC leaflet 221 ) . The NHM codes consist of eight figures. The codes shown in this Table are limited to six figures, as prescribed in the CIM consignment note. As dangerous goods are assigned to NHM codes in accordance with principles which do not reflect the classification principles of RID, it is not possible in all cases to assign a single NHM code to each RID substance description. This is especially true of collective entries and n.o.s . entries. In these cases, the correct NHM code can only be found if the chemical or technical description of the goods is known. If the correct NHM code can only be given in part, the missing figures are replaced with plus signs ("+"). In cases where there is more than one NHM code to be considered, two relevant NHM codes are shown, the most relevant code being indicated first. The Secretariat of OTIF has assigned the NHM codes with the greatest care. However, it cannot be guaranteed that the content and technical details are entirely free from errors. The info rmation in this column is not legally binding. Chapter 3.3 Special provisions applicable to certain articles or substances 3.3.1 When Column (6) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 indicates that a special provision is relevant to a substance or article, the meaning and requirements of that special provision are as set forth below. Where a special provision includes a requirement for package marking, the provisions of 5.2.1.2 (a) and (b) shall be met. If the required mark is in the form of specific wording indicated in quotation marks, such as "LITHIUM BATTERIES FOR DISPOSAL" , the size of the mark shall be at least 12 mm, unless otherwise indicated in the special provision or elsewhere in RID. 16 Samples of new or existing explosive substances or articles may be carried as directed by the competent authorities (see 2.2.1.1.3) for purposes including: testing, classification, research and development, quality control, or as a commercial sample. Explosive samples which are not wetted or desensitized shall be limited to 10 kg in small packages as specified by the competent authorities. Explosive samples which are wetted or desensitized shall be limited to 25 kg. 23 Even though this substance has a flammability hazard, it only exhibits such hazard under extreme fire conditions in confined areas. 32 This substance is not subject to the requirements of RID when in any other form. 37 This substance is not subject to the requirements of RID when coated. 38 This substance is not subject to the requirements of RID when it contains not more than 0.1% calcium carbide. 39 This substance is not subject to the requirements of RID when it contains less than 30% or not less than 90% silicon. 43 When offered for carriage as pesticides, these substances shall be carried under the relevant pesticide entry and in accordance with the relevant pesticide provisions (see 2.2.61.1.10 to 2.2.61.1.11.2). 45 Antimony sulphides and oxides which contain not more than 0.5% of arsenic calculated on the total mass are not subject to the requirements of RID. 47 Ferricyanides and ferrocyanides are not subject to the requirements of RID. 48 The carriage of this substance, when it contains more than 20% hydrocyanic acid, is prohibited. 59 These substances are not subject to the requirements of RID when they contain not more than 50% magnesium. 60 If the concentration is more than 72%, the carriage of this substance is prohibited. 61 The technical name which shall supplement the proper shipping name shall be the ISO common name (see also ISO 1750:1981 " Pesticides and other agrochemicals - common names ", as amended), other name listed in the WHO " Recommended Classification of Pesticides by Hazard and Guidelines to Classification " or the name of the active substance (see also 3.1.2.8.1 and 3.1.2.8.1.1). 62 This substance is not subject to the requirements of RID when it contains not more than 4% sodium hydroxide. 65 Hydrogen peroxide aqueous solutions with less than 8% hydrogen peroxide are not subject to the requirements of RID. 66 Cinnabar is not subject to the requirements of RID. 103 The carriage of ammonium nitrites and mixtures of an inorganic nitrite with an ammonium salt is prohibited. 105 Nitrocellulose meeting the descriptions of UN No. 2556 or UN No. 2557 may be classified in Class 4.1. 113 The carriage of chemically unstable mixtures is prohibited. 119 Refrigerating machines include machines or other appliances which have been designed for the specific purpose of keeping food or other items at a low temperature in an internal compartment, and air conditioning units. Refrigerating machines and refrigerating machine components are not subject to the provisions of RID if they contain less than 12 kg of gas in Class 2, group A or O according to 2.2.2.1.3, or if they contain less than 12 litres ammonia solution (UN No. 2672). NOTE: For the purposes of carriage, heat pumps may be considered as refrigerating machines. 122 The subsidiary hazards and the UN number (generic entry) for each of the currently assigned organic peroxide formulations are given in 2.2.52.4 , 4.1.4.2 packing instruction IBC 520 and 4.2.5.2.6 portable tank instruction T 23 . 123 (Reserved) 127 Other inert material or inert material mixture may be used, provided this inert material has identical phlegmatizing properties. 131 The phlegmatized substance shall be significantly less sensitive than dry PETN. 135 The dihydrated sodium salt of dichloroisocyanuric acid does not meet the criteria for inclusion in Class 5.1 and is not subject to RID unless meeting the criteria for inclusion in another Class. 138 p Bromobenzyl cyanide is not subject to the requirements of RID. 141 Products which have undergone sufficient heat treatment so that they present no hazard during carriage are not subject to the requirements of RID. 142 Solvent extracted soya bean meal containing not more than 1.5% oil and 11% moisture, which is substantially free of flammable solvent, is not subject to the requirements of RID. 144 An aqueous solution containing not more than 24% alcohol by volume is not subject to the requirements of RID. 145 Alcoholic beverages of packing group III, when carried in receptacles of 250 litres or less, are not subject to the requirements of RID. 152 The classification of this substance will vary with particle size and packaging, but borderlines have not been experimentally determined. Appropriate classifications shall be made in accordance with 2.2.1. 153 This entry applies only if it is demonstrated, on the basis of tests, that the substances when in contact with water are not combustible nor show a tendency to auto ignition and that the mixture of gases evolved is not flammable. 162 (Deleted) 163 A substance mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2 shall not be carried under this entry. Substances carried under this entry may contain 20% or less nitrocellulose provided the nitrocellulose contains not more than 12.6% nitrogen (by dry mass). 168 Asbestos which is immersed or fixed in a natural or artificial binder (such as cement, plastics, asphalt, resins or mineral ore) in such a way that no escape of hazardous quantities of respirable asbestos fibres can occur during carriage is not subject to the requirements of RID. Manufactured articles containing asbestos and not meeting this provision are nevertheless not subject to the requirements of RID when packed so that no escape of hazardous quantities of respirable asbestos fibres can occur during carriage. 169 Phthalic anhydride in the solid state and tetrahydrophthalic anhydrides, with not more than 0.05% maleic anhydride, are not subject to the requirements of RID. Phthalic anhydride molten at a temperature above its flash-point, with not more than 0.05% maleic anhydride, shall be classified under UN No. 3256. 172 Where a radioactive material has (a) subsidiary hazard(s) : (a) The substance shall be allocated to packing group I, II or III, if appropriate, by application of the packing group criteria provided in Part 2 corresponding to the nature of the predominant subsidiary hazard ; (b) Packages shall be labelled with subsidiary hazard labels corresponding to each subsidiary hazard exhibited by the material; corresponding placards shall be affixed to cargo transport units in accordance with the relevant provisions of 5.3.1; (c) For the purposes of documentation and package marking, the proper shipping name shall be supplemented with the name of the constituents which most predominantly contribute to this (these) subsidiary hazard(s) and which shall be enclosed in parenthesis; (d) The dangerous goods transport document shall indicate the label model number(s) corresponding to each subsidiary hazard in parenthesis after the Class number "7" and, where assigned the packing group as required by 5.4.1.1.1 (d). For packing, see also 4.1.9.1.5. 177 Barium sulphate is not subject to the requirements of RID . 178 This designation shall be used only when no other appropriate designation exists in Table A of Chapter 3.2, and only with the approval of the competent authority of the country of origin (see 2.2.1.1.3). 181 Packages containing this type of substance shall bear a label conforming to model No. 1 (see 5.2.2.2.2) unless the competent authority of the country of origin has permitted this label to be dispensed with for the specific packaging employed because test data have proved that the substance in this packaging does not exhibit explosive behaviour (see 5.2.2.1.9). 182 The group of alkali metals includes lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium and caesium. 183 The group of alkaline earth metals includes magnesium, calcium, strontium and barium. 186 (Deleted) 188 C ells and batteries offered for carriage are not subject to other provisions of RID if they meet the following: (a) For a lithium metal or lithium alloy cell, the lithium content is not more than 1 g, and for a lithium ion cell, the Watt-hour rating is not more than 20 Wh ; NOTE: When lithium batteries in conformity with 2.2.9.1.7 (f) are carried in accordance with this special provision, the total lithium content of all lithium metal cells contained in the battery shall not exceed 1.5 g and the total capacity of all lithium ion cells contained in the battery shall not exceed 10 Wh (see special provision 387). (b) For a lithium metal or lithium alloy battery the aggregate lithium content is not more than 2 g, and for a lithium ion battery, the Watt-hour rating is not more than 100 Wh. Lithium ion batteries subject to this provision shall be marked with the Watt-hour rating on the outside case , except those manufactured before 1 January 2009 ; NOTE: When lithium batteries in conformity with 2.2.9.1.7 (f) are carried in accordance with this special provision, the total lithium content of all lithium metal cells contained in the battery shall not exceed 1.5 g and the total capacity of all lithium ion cells contained in the battery shall not exceed 10 Wh (see special provision 387). (c) Each cell or battery meets the provisions of 2.2.9.1.7 (a), (e), (f) if applicable and (g) ; (d) Cells and batteries, except when installed in equipment, shall be packed in inner packagings that completely enclose the cell or battery. Cells and batteries shall be protected so as to prevent short circuits. This includes protection against contact with electrically conductive material within the same packaging that could lead to a short circuit. The inner packagings shall be packed in strong outer packagings which conform to the provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2 and 4.1.1.5; (e) Cells and batteries when installed in equipment shall be protected from damage and short circuit, and the equipment shall be equipped with an effective means of preventing accidental activation. This requirement does not apply to devices which are intentionally active in carriage (radio frequency identification (RFID) transmitters, watches, sensors, etc.) and which are not capable of generating a dangerous evolution of heat. When batteries are installed in equipment, the equipment shall be packed in strong outer packagings constructed of suitable material of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging’s capacity and its intended use unless the battery is afforded equivalent protection by the equipment in which it is contained; (f) Each package shall be marked with the appropriate lithium battery mark, as illustrated in 5.2.1.9. This requirement does not apply to: ( i ) packages containing only button cell batteries installed in equipment (including circuit boards); and (ii) packages containing no more than four cells or two batteries installed in equipment, where there are not more than two packages in the consignment; When packages are placed in an overpack, the lithium battery mark shall either be clearly visible or be reproduced on the outside of the overpack and the overpack shall be marked with the word "OVERPACK". The lettering of the "OVERPACK" mark shall be at least 12 mm high. NOTE: Packages containing lithium batteries packed in conformity with the provisions of Part 4, Chapter 11, packing instructions 965 or 968, Section IB of the ICAO Technical Instructions that bear the mark as shown in 5.2.1.9 (lithium battery mark) and the label shown in 5.2.2.2.2, model No. 9A shall be deemed to meet the provisions of this special provision. ( g ) Except when cells or batteries are installed in equipment, each package shall be capable of withstanding a 1.2 m drop test in any orientation without damage to cells or batteries contained therein, without shifting of the contents so as to allow battery to battery (or cell to cell) contact and without release of contents; and ( h ) Except when cells or batteries are installed in or packed with equipment, packages shall not exceed 30 kg gross mass. As used above and elsewhere in RID, "lithium content" means the mass of lithium in the anode of a lithium metal or lithium alloy cell. As used in this special provision " equipment" means apparatus for which the lithium cells or batteries will provide electrical power for its operation. Separate entries exist for lithium metal batteries and lithium ion batteries to facilitate the carriage of these batteries for specific modes of carriage and to enable the application of different emergency response actions. A single cell battery as defined in Part III, sub-section 38.3.2.3 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria is considered a "cell" and shall be carried according to the requirements for "cells" for the purpose of this special provision. 190 Aerosol dispensers shall be provided with protection against inadvertent discharge. Aerosols with a capacity not exceeding 50 ml containing only non toxic constituents are not subject to the requirements of RID. 191 Receptacles, small, with a capacity not exceeding 50 ml, containing only non-toxic constituents are not subject to the requirements of RID. 193 This entry may only be used for ammonium nitrate based compound fertilizers. They shall be classified in accordance with the procedure as set out in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, Section 39. Fertilizers meeting the criteria for this UN number are not subject to the requirements of RID. 194 The UN number (generic entry) for each of the currently assigned self reactive substances is given in 2.2.41.4. 196 Formulations which in laboratory testing neither detonate in the cavitated state nor deflagrate, which show no effect when heated under confinement and which exhibit no explosive power may be carried under this entry. The formulation must also be thermally stable (i.e. the SADT is 60 °C or higher for a 50 kg package). Formulations not meeting these criteria shall be carried under the provisions of Class 5.2, (see 2.2.52.4). 198 Nitrocellulose solutions containing not more than 20% nitrocellulose may be carried as paint , perfumery products or printing ink, as applicable (see UN Nos. 1210, 1263 , 1266, 3066 , 3469 and 3470 ). 199 Lead compounds which, when mixed in a ratio of 1:1000 with 0.07M hydrochloric acid and stirred for one hour at a temperature of 23 °C ± 2 °C, exhibit a solubility of 5% or less (see ISO 3711:1990 "Lead chromate pigments and lead chromate – molybdate pigments – Specifications and methods of test" ) are considered insoluble and are not subject to the requirements of RID unless they meet the criteria for inclusion in another class. 201 Lighters and lighter refills shall comply with the provisions of the country in which they were filled. They shall be provided with protection against inadvertent discharge. The liquid portion of the gas shall not exceed 85% of the c apacity of the receptacle at 15 °C. The receptacles, including the closures, shall be capable of withstanding an internal pressure of twice the pressure of th e liquefied petroleum gas at 55 °C. The valve mechanisms and ignition devices shall be securely sealed, taped or otherwise fastened or designed to prevent operation or leakage of the contents during carriage. Lighters shall not contain more than 10 g of liquefied petroleum gas. Lighter refills shall not contain more than 65 g of liquefied petroleum gas. NOTE: For waste lighters collected separately see Chapter 3.3, special provision 654. 203 This entry shall not be used for polychlorinated biphenyls, liquid, UN No. 2315 and polychlorinated biphenyls, solid, UN No. 3432 . 204 (Deleted) 205 This entry shall not be used for UN No . 3155 PENTACHLOROPHENOL. 207 P lastics moulding compounds may be made from polystyrene, poly(methyl methacrylate) or other polymeric material. 208 The commercial grade of calcium nitrate fertilizer, when consisting mainly of a double salt (calcium nitrate and ammonium nitrate) containing not more than 10% ammonium nitrate and at least 12% water of crystallization, is not subject to the requirements of RID. 210 Toxins from plant, animal or bacterial sources which contain infectious substances, or toxins that are contained in infectious substances, shall be classified in Class 6.2. 215 This entry only applies to the technically pure substance or to formulations derived from i t having an SADT higher than 75 °C and therefore does not apply to formulations which are self reactive substances (for self-reactive substances, see 2.2.41.4). Homogeneous mixtures containing not more than 35% by mass of azodicarbonamide and at least 65% of inert substance are not subject to the requirements of RID unless criteria of other classes are met. 216 Mixtures of solids which are not subject to the requirements of RID and flammable liquids may be carried under this entry without first applying the classification criteria of Class 4.1, provided there is no free liquid visible at the time the substance is loaded or at the time the packaging or cargo transport unit is closed. Sealed packets and articles containing less than 10 ml of a packing group II or III flammable liquid absorbed into a solid material are not subject to RID provided there is no free liquid in the packet or article . 217 Mixtures of solids which are not subject to the requirements of RID and toxic liquids may be carried under this entry without first applying the classification criteria of Class 6.1, provided there is no free liquid visible at the time the substance is loaded or at the time the packaging or cargo transport unit is closed. This entry shall not be used for solids containing a packing group I liquid. 218 Mixtures of solids which are not subject to the requirements of RID and corrosive liquids may be carried under this entry without first applying the classification criteria of Class 8, provided there is no free liquid visible at the time the substance is loaded or at the time the packaging or cargo transport unit is closed. 219 Genetically modified microorganisms (GMMOs) and genetically modified organisms (GMOs) packed and marked in accordance with packing instruction P 904 of 4.1.4.1 are not subject to any other requirements of RID. If GMMOs or GMOs meet the criteria for inclusion in Class 6.1 or 6.2 (see 2.2.61.1 and 2.2.62.1) the requirements in RID for the carriage of toxic substances or infectious substances apply. 220 Only the technical name of the flammable liquid component of this solution or mixture shall be shown in parentheses immediately following the proper shipping name. 221 Substances included under this entry shall not be of packing group I. 224 Unless it can be demonstrated by testing that the sensitivity of the substance in its frozen state is no greater than in its liquid state, the substance shall remain liquid during normal transport conditions. It shall not f reeze at temperatures above -15 °C. 225 Fire extinguishers under this entry may include installed actuating cartridges (cartridges, power device of classification code 1.4C or 1.4S), without changing the classification of Class 2, group A or O according to 2.2.2.1.3 provided the total quantity of deflagrating (propellant) explosives does not exceed 3.2 g per extinguishing unit. Fire extinguishers shall be manufactured, tested, approved and labelled according to the provisions applied in the country of manufacture. NOTE: "Provisions applied in the country of manufacture" means the provisions applicable in the country of manufacture or those applicable in the country of use. Fire extinguishers under this entry include: (a) portable fire extinguishers for manual handling and operation; NOTE: This entry applies to portable fire extinguishers, even if some components that are necessary for their proper functioning (e.g. hoses and nozzles) are temporarily detached, as long as the safety of the pressurized extinguishing agent containers is not compromised and the fire extinguishers continue to be identified as a portable fire extinguisher. (b) fire extinguishers for installation in aircraft; (c) fire extinguishers mounted on wheels for manual handling; (d) fire extinguishing equipment or machinery mounted on wheels or wheeled platforms or units carried similar to (small) trailers, and (e) fire extinguishers composed of a non-rollable pressure drum and equipment, and handled e.g. by fork lift or crane when loaded or unloaded. NOTE: Pressure receptacles which contain gases for use in the above-mentioned fire extinguishers or for use in stationary fire-fighting installations shall meet the requirements of Chapter 6.2 and all requirements applicable to the relevant dangerous goods when these pressure receptacles are carried separately. 226 Formulations of this substance containing not less than 30% non-volatile, non-flammable phlegmatizer are not subject to the requirements of RID. 227 When phlegmatized with water and inorganic inert material the content of urea nitrate may not exceed 75% by mass and the mixture shall not be capable of being detonated by the Series 1, type (a), test in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part I . 228 Mixtures not meeting the criteria for flammable gases (see 2.2.2.1.5) shall be carried under UN No. 3163. 230 Lithium cells and batteries may be carried under this entry if they meet the provisions of 2.2.9.1.7. 235 This entry applies to articles which contain Class 1 explosive substances and which may also contain dangerous goods of other classes. These articles are used to enhance safety in vehicles, vessels or aircraft – e.g. air bag inflators, air bag modules, seat-belt pretensioners, and pyromechanical devices. 236 Polyester resin kits consist of two components: a base material (either Class 3 or Class 4.1, packing group II or III) and an activator (organic peroxide). The organic peroxide shall be type D, E, or F, not requiring temperature control. The packing group shall be II or III, according to the criteria of either Class 3 or Class 4.1, as appropriate, applied to the base material. The quantity limit shown in column (7a) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 applies to the base material. 237 The membrane filters, including paper separators, coating or backing materials, etc., that are present in carriage, shall not be liable to propagate a detonation as tested by one of the tests described in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part I, Test series 1 (a). In addition the competent authority may determine, on the basis of the results of suitable burning rate tests taking account of the standard tests in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, sub- section 33.2, that nitrocellulose membrane filters in the form in which they are to be carried are not subject to the requirements applicable to flammable solids in Class 4.1. 238 (a) Batteries can be considered as non-spillable , provided that they are capable of withstanding the vibration and pressure differential tests given below, without leakage of battery fluid. Vibration test : The battery is rigidly clamped to the platform of a vibration machine and a simple harmonic motion having an amplitude of 0.8 mm (1.6 mm maximum total excursion) is applied. The fre quency is varied at the rate of 1 Hz/min between the limits of 10 Hz and 55 Hz. The entire range of frequencies and return is traversed in 95 ± 5 minutes for each mounting position (direction of vibration) of the battery. The battery is tested in three mutually perpendicular positions (to include testing with fill openings and vents, if any, in an inverted position) for equal time periods. Pressure differential test: Following the vibration test, the battery is stored for six hours at 24 °C ± 4 °C while subjected to a pressure differential of at least 88 kPa. The battery is tested in three mutually perpendicular positions (to include testing with fill openings and vents, if any, in an inverted position) for at least six hours in each position. (b) Non-spillable batteries are not subject to the requirements of RID if , at a temperature of 55 °C, the electrolyte will not flow from a ruptured or cracked case and there is no free liquid to flow and if, as packaged for carriage, the terminals are protected from short circuit. 239 Batteries or cells shall not contain dangerous substances other than sodium, sulphur or sodium compounds (e.g. sodium polysulphides and sodium tetrachloroaluminate ) . Batteries or cells shall not be offered for carriage at a temperature such that liquid elemental sodium is present in the battery or cell unless approved and under the conditions established by the competent authority of the country of origin. If the country of origin is not a n RID Contracting State , the approval and conditions of carriage shall be recognized by the competent authority of the first RID Contracting State reached by the consignment. Cells shall consist of hermetically sealed metal casings which fully enclose the dangerous substances and which are so constructed and closed as to prevent the release of the dangerous substances under normal conditions of carriage. Batteries shall consist of cells secured within and fully enclosed by a metal casing so constructed and closed as to prevent the release of the dangerous substances under normal conditions of carriage. 240 (Deleted) 241 The formulation shall be prepared so that it remains homogeneous and does not separate during carriage. Formulations with low nitrocellulose contents and not showing dangerous properties when tested for their liability to detonate, deflagrate or explode when heated under defined confinement by tests of Test series 1 (a), 2 (b) and 2 (c) respectively in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part I and not being a flammable solid when t ested in accordance with test N .1 in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 33.2.4 (chips, if necessary, crushed and sieved to a particle size of less than 1.25 mm) are not subject to the requirements of RID. 242 Sulphur is not subject to the requirements of RID when it has been formed to a specific shape (e.g. prills , granules, pellets, pastilles or flakes). 243 Gasoline, motor spirit and petrol for use in spark-ignition engines (e.g. in automobiles, stationary engines and other engines) shall be assigned to this entry regardless of variations in volatility. 244 This entry includes e.g. aluminium dross, aluminium skimmings , spent cathodes, spent potliner , and aluminium salt slags. 247 Alcoholic beverages containing more than 24% alcohol but not more than 70% by volume, when carried as part of the manufacturing process, may be carried in wooden barrels with a capacity of more than 250 litres and not more than 500 litres meeting the general requirements of 4.1.1, as appropriate, on the following conditions: (a) The wooden barrels shall be checked and tightened before filling; (b) Sufficient ullage (not less than 3%) shall be left to allow for the expansion of the liquid; (c) The wooden barrels shall be carried with the bungholes pointing upwards; (d) The wooden barrels shall be carried in containers meeting the requirements of the CSC. Each wooden barrel shall be secured in custom-made cradles and be wedged by appropriate means to prevent it from being displaced in any way during carriage. 249 Ferrocerium, stabilized against corrosion, with a minimum iron content of 10% is not subject to the requirements of RID. 250 This entry may only be used for samples of chemicals taken for analysis in connection with the implementation of the Convention on the Prohibition of the Development, Production, Stockpiling and Use of Chemical Weapons and on their Destruction. The carriage of substances under this entry shall be in accordance with the chain of custody and security procedures specified by the Organisation for the Prohibition of Chemical Weapons. The chemical sample may only be carried providing prior approval has been granted by the competent authority or the Director General of the Organisation for the Prohibition of Chemical Weapons and providing the sample complies with the following provisions: (a) It shall be packed according to packing instruction 623 in the ICAO Technical Instructions; and (b) During carriage, a copy of the document of approval for transport, showing the quantity limitations and the packing provisions shall be attached to the transport document . 251 The entry CHEMICAL KIT or FIRST AID KIT is intended to apply to boxes, cases etc. containing small quantities of various dangerous goods which are used for example for medical, analytical , testing or repair purposes. Such kits shall only contain dangerous goods that are permitted as: (a) Excepted quantities not exceeding the quantity indicated by the code in column (7b) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, provided that the net quantity per inner packaging and net quantity per package are as prescribed in 3.5.1.2 and 3.5.1.3; or; (b) Limited quantities as indicated in column (7a) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, provided that the net quantity per inner packaging does not exceed 250 ml or 250 g. Components shall not react dangerously (see "dangerous reaction" in 1.2.1). The total quantity of dangerous goods in any on e kit shall not exceed either 1 l or 1 kg. For the purposes of completion of the transport document as set out in 5.4.1.1.1, the packing group shown on the document shall be the most stringent packing group assigned to any individual substance in the kit. Where the kit contains only dangerous goods to which no packing group is assigned, no packing group need be indicated on the dangerous goods transport document. Kits which are carried on board wagons for first-aid or operating purposes are not subject to the requirements of RID. Chemical kits and first aid kits containing dangerous goods in inner packagings which do not exceed the quantity limits for limited quantities applicable to individual substances as specified in c olumn (7 a ) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 may be carried in accordance with Chapter 3.4. 252 Provided the ammonium nitrate remains in solution under all conditions of carriage, aqueous solutions of ammonium nitrate, with not more than 0.2% combustible material, in a concentration not exceeding 80%, are not subject to the requirements of RID. 266 This substance, when containing less alcohol, water or phlegmatizer than specified, shall not be carried unless specifically authorized by the competent authority (see 2.2.1.1). 267 Any explosives, blasting, type C containing chlorates shall be segregated from explosives containing ammonium nitrate or other ammonium salts. 270 Aqueous solutions of Class 5.1 inorganic solid nitrate substances are considered as not meeting the criteria of Class 5.1 if the concentration of the substances in solution at the minimum temperature encountered during carriage is not greater than 80% of the saturation limit. 271 Lactose or glucose or similar materials, may be used as a phlegmatizer , provided that the substance contains not less than 90%, by mass, of phlegmatizer. The competent authority may authorize these mixtures to be classified in Class 4.1 on the basis of a test Series 6 (c) of Section 16 of Part I of the Manual of Tests and Criteria on at least three packages as prepared for carriage. Mixtures containing at least 98%, by mass, of phlegmatizer are not subject to the requirements of RID. Packages containing mixtures with not less than 90%, by mass, of phlegmatizer need not bear a label conforming to model No. 6.1. 272 This substance shall not be carried under the provisions of Class 4.1 unless specifically authorized by the competent authority (see UN No. 0143 or UN No. 0150 as appropriate ). 273 Maneb and maneb preparations stabilized against self-heating need not be classified in Class 4.2 when it can be demonstrated by testing that a cubic volume of 1 m 3 of substance does not self-ignite and that the temperature at the centre of the sample does not exceed 200 °C, when the sample is maintained at a temperature of not less than 75 °C ± 2 °C for a period of 24 hours. 274 The provisions of 3.1.2.8 apply. 278 These substances shall not be classified and carried unless authorized by the competent authority on the basis of results from Series 2 tests and a Series 6 (c) test of Part I of the Manual of Tests and Criteria on packages as prepared for carriage (see 2.2.1.1). The competent authority shall assign the packing group on the basis of 2.2.3 criteria and the package type used for the Series 6 (c) test. 279 The substance is assigned to this classification or packing group based on human experience rather than the strict application of classification criteria set out in RID. 280 This entry applies to safety devices for vehicles, vessels or aircraft, e.g. air bag inflators, air bag modules, seat-belt pretensioners, and pyromechanical devices, which contain dangerous goods of Class 1 or of other classes, when carried as component parts and if these articles as presented for carriage have been tested in accordance with Test Series 6 (c) of Part 1 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, with no explosion of the device, no fragmentation of device casing or pressure receptacle, and no projection hazard nor thermal effect which would significantly hinder fire-fighting or emergency response efforts in the immediate vicinity. This entry does not apply to life saving appliances described in special provision 296 (UN Nos. 2990 and 3072). 282 (Deleted) 283 Articles, containing gas, intended to function as shock absorbers, including impact energy-absorbing devices, or pneumatic springs are not subject to the requirements of RID provided: (a) Each article has a gas space capacity not exceeding 1.6 litres and a charge pressure not exceeding 280 bar where the product of the capacity (litres) and charge pressure (bars) does not exceed 80 (i.e. 0.5 litres gas space and 160 bar charge pressure, 1 litre gas space and 80 bar charge pressure, 1.6 litres gas space and 50 bar charge pressure, 0.28 litres gas space and 280 bar charge pressure); (b) Each article has a minimum burst pressure of 4 times the charge pressure at 20 °C for products not exceeding 0.5 litres gas space capacity and 5 times charge pressure for products greater than 0.5 litres gas space capacity; (c) Each article is manufactured from material which will not fragment upon rupture; (d) Each article is manufactured in accordance with a quality assurance standard acceptable to the competent authority; and (e) The design type has been subjected to a fire test demonstrating that the article relieves its pressure by means of a fire degradable seal or other pressure relief device, such that the article will not fragment and that the article does not rocket . See also 1.1.3.2 (d) for equipment used for the operation of the vehicle. 284 An oxygen generator, chemical, containing oxidizing substances shall meet the following conditions: (a) The generator when containing an explosive actuating device shall only be carried under this entry when excluded from Class 1 in accordance with the NOTE under paragraph 2.2.1.1.1 (b); (b) The generator, without its packaging, shall be capable of withstanding a 1.8 m drop test onto a rigid, non-resilient, flat and horizontal surface, in the position most likely to cause damage, without loss of its contents and without actuation; (c) When a generator is equipped with an actuating device, it shall have at least two positive means of preventing unintentional actuation. 286 Nitrocellulose membrane filters covered by this entry, each with a mass not exceeding 0.5 g, are not subject to the requirements of RID when contained individually in an article or a sealed packet. 288 These substances shall not be classified and carried unless authorized by the competent authority on the basis of results from Series 2 tests and a Series 6 (c) test of Part I of the Manual of tests and Criteria on packages as prepared for carriage (see 2.2.1.1). 289 Safety devices, electrically initiated and safety devices, pyrotechnic installed in wagons, vehicles, vessels or aircraft or in completed components such as steering columns, door panels, seats, etc. are not subject to RID. 290 When this radioactive material meets the definitions and criteria of other classes as defined in Part 2, it shall be classified in accordance with the following: (a) Where the substance meets the criteria for dangerous goods in excepted quantities as set out in Chapter 3.5, the packagings shall be in accordance with 3.5.2 and meet the testing requirements of 3.5.3. All other requirements applicable to radioactive material, excepted packages as set out in 1.7.1.5 shall apply without reference to the other class; (b) Where the quantity exceeds the limits specified in 3.5.1.2 the substance shall be classified in accordance with the predominant subsidiary hazard . The transport document shall describe the substance with the UN number and proper shipping name applicable to the other class supplemented with the name applicable to the radioactive excepted package according to Column (2) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, and the substance shall be carried in accordance with the provisions applicable to that UN number. An example of the information shown on the transport document is: "U N 1993 Flammable liquid, n.o.s. (ethanol and toluene mixture), Radioactive material, excepted package – limited quantity of material, 3, PG II". In addition, the requirements of 2.2.7 .2.4.1 shall apply; (c) The provisions of Chapter 3.4 for the carriage of dangerous goods packed in limited quantities shall not apply to substances classified in accordance with sub-paragraph (b); (d) When the substance meets a special provision that exempts this substance from all dangerous goods provisions of the other classes it shall be classified in accordance with the applicable UN number of Class 7 and all requirements specified in 1.7.1.5 shall apply. 291 Flammable liquefied gases shall be contained within refrigerating machine components. These components shall be designed and tested to at least three times the working pressure of the machinery. The refrigerating machines shall be designed and constructed to contain the liquefied gas and preclude the risk of bursting or cracking of the pressure retaining components during normal conditions of carriage. Refrigerating machines and refrigerating-machine components are not subject to the requirements of RID if they contain less than 12 kg of gas. NOTE: For the purposes of carriage, heat pumps may be considered as refrigerating machines. 292 (Deleted) 293 The following definitions apply to matches: (a) Fusee matches are matches the heads of which are prepared with a friction-sensitive igniter composition and a pyrotechnic composition which burns with little or no flame, but with intense heat; (b) Safety matches are matches that are combined with or attached to the box, book or card that can be ignited by friction only on a prepared surface; (c) Strike anywhere matches are matches that can be ignited by friction on a solid surface; (d) Wax Vesta matches are matches that can be ignited by friction either on a prepared surface or on a solid surface. 295 Batteries need not be individually marked and labelled if the pallet bears the appropriate mark and label. 296 These entries apply to life-saving appliances such as life rafts, personal flotation devices and self-inflating slides. UN No. 2990 applies to self-inflating appliances and UN No. 3072 applies to life-saving appliances that are not self-inflating. Life-saving appliances may contain: (a) Signal devices (Class 1) which may include smoke and illumination signal flares packed in packagings that prevent them from being inadvertently activated ; (b) For UN No. 2990 only, cartridges, power device of Division 1.4, compatibility group S, may be contained for purposes of the self-inflating mechanism and provided that the quantity of explosives per appliance does not exceed 3.2 g; (c) Class 2 compressed or liquefied gases, group A or O, according to 2.2.2.1.3; (d) Electric storage batteries (Class 8) and lithium batteries (Class 9); (e) First aid kits or repair kits containing small quantities of dangerous goods (e.g. substances of Class 3, 4.1, 5.2, 8 or 9); or (f) “Strike anywhere” matches packed in packagings that prevent them from being inadvertently activated. Life-saving appliances packed in strong rigid outer packagings with a total maximum gross mass of 40 kg, containing no dangerous goods other than compressed or liquefied gases of Class 2, group A or group O, in receptacles with a capacity not exceeding 120 ml, installed solely for the purpose of the activation of the appliance, are not subject to the requirements of RID. 298 (Deleted) 300 Fish meal, fish scrap and krill meal shall not be loaded if the temperature at the time of loading exceeds 35 °C or 5 °C above the ambient temperature whichever is higher. 301 This entry only applies to articles such as machinery, apparatus or devices containing dangerous goods as a residue or an integral element of the articles . It shall not be used for articles for which a proper shipping name already exists in Table A of Chapter 3.2. Articles carried under this entry shall only contain dangerous goods which are authorized to be carried in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 3.4 (Limited quantities). The quantity of dangerous goods in articles shall not exceed the quantity specified in Column (7a) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 for each item of dangerous goods contained. If the articles contain more than one item of dangerous goods, the individual dangerous goods shall be enclosed to prevent them reacting dangerously with one another during carriage (see 4.1.1.6). When it is required to ensure liquid dangerous goods remain in their intended orientation, orientation arrows shall be displayed on at least two opposite vertical sides with the arrows pointing in the correct direction in accordance with 5.2.1.10. 302 Fumigated cargo transport units containing no other dangerous goods are only subject to the provisions of 5.5.2. 303 Receptacles shall be assigned to the classification code of the gas or mixture of gases contained therein determined in accordance with the provisions of section 2.2.2. 304 This entry may only be used for the transport of non-activated batteries which contain dry potassium hydroxide and which are intended to be activated prior to use by addition of an appropriate amount of water to the individual cells. 305 These substances are not subject to the requirements of RID when in concentrations of not more than 50 mg/kg. 306 This entry may only be used for substances that are too insensitive for acceptance into Class 1 when tested in accordance with Test Series 2 (see Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part I). 307 This entry may only be used for ammonium nitrate based fertilizers. They shall be classified in accordance with the procedure as set out in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, Section 39 subject to the restrictions of 2.2.51.2.2, thirteenth and fourteenth indents. When used in the said Section 39, the term "competent authority" means the competent authority of the country of origin. If the country of origin is not an RID Contracting State, the classification and conditions of carriage shall be recognized by the competent authority of the first RID Contracting State reached by the consignment. 309 This entry applies to non sensitized emulsions, suspensions and gels consisting primarily of a mixture of ammonium nitrate and fuel, intended to produce a Type E blasting explosive only after further processing prior to use. The mixture for emulsions typically has the following composition: 60-85% ammonium nitrate, 5-30% water, 2-8% fuel, 0.5-4% emulsifier agent, 0-10% soluble flame suppressants, and trace additives. Other inorganic nitrate salts may replace part of the ammonium nitrate. The mixture for suspensions and gels typically has the following composition: 60-85% ammonium nitrate, 0-5% sodium or potassium perchlorate, 0-17% hexamine nitrate or monomethylamine nitrate, 5-30% water, 2-15% fuel, 0.5-4% thickening agent, 0-10% soluble flame suppressants, and trace additives. Other inorganic nitrate salts may replace part of the ammonium nitrate. Substances shall satisfy the criteria for classification as an ammonium nitrate emulsion, suspension or gel, intermediate for blasting explosives (ANE) of Test Series 8 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part I, Section 18 and be approved by the competent authority. 310 The testing requirements in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III sub-section 38.3 do not apply to production runs, consisting of not more than 100 cells or batteries, or to pre-production prototypes of cells or batteries when these prototypes are carried for testing when packaged in accordance with packing instruction P 910 of 4.1.4.1 or LP 905 of 4.1.4.3, as applicable . The transport document shall include the following statement: " Carriage in accordance with special provision 310". Damaged or defective cells, batteries, or cells and batteries contained in equipment shall be carried in accordance with special provision 376. Cells, batteries or cells and batteries contained in equipment carried for disposal or recycling may be packaged in accordance with special provision 377 and packing instruction P 909 of 4.1.4.1. 311 Substances shall not be carried under this entry unless approved by the competent authority on the basis of the results of appropriate tests according to Part I of the Manual of Tests and Criteria . Packaging shall ensure that the percentage of diluent does not fall below that stated in the competent authority approval, at any time during carriage. 312 (Deleted) 313 (Deleted) 314 (a) These substances are liable to exothermic decomposition at elevated temperatures. Decomposition can be initiated by heat or by impurities (e.g. powdered metals (iron, manganese, cobalt, magnesium) and their compounds); (b) During the course of carriage, these substances shall be shaded from direct sunlight and all sources of heat and be placed in adequately ventilated areas. 315 This entry shall not be used for Class 6.1 substances which meet the inhalation toxicity criteria for packing group I described in 2.2.61.1.8. 316 This entry applies only to calcium hypochlorite, dry, when carried in non friable tablet form. 317 "Fissile-excepted" applies only to those fissile material and packages containing fissile material which are excepted in accordance with 2.2.7.2.3.5. 318 For the purposes of documentation, the proper shipping name shall be supplemented with the technical name (see 3.1.2.8). When the infectious substances to be carried are unknown, but suspected of meeting the criteria for inclusion in C ategory A and assignment to UN No. 2814 or 2900, the words "suspected C ategory A infectious substance" shall be shown, in parentheses, following the proper shipping name on the transport document . 319 Substances packed and packages marked in accordance with packing instruction P650 are not subject to any other requirements of RID. 320 (Deleted) 321 These storage systems shall always be considered as containing hydrogen. 322 When carried in non-friable tablet form, these goods are assigned to packing group III. 323 (Reserved) 324 This substance needs to be stabilized when in concentrations of not more than 99%. 325 In the case of non-fissile or fissile excepted uranium hexafluoride, the material shall be classified under UN No. 2978. 326 In the case of fissile uranium hexafluoride, the material shall be classified under UN No. 2977. 327 Waste aerosols and waste gas cartridges consigned in accordance with 5.4.1.1.3.1 may be carried under UN Nos. 1950 or 2037, as appropriate, for the purposes of reprocessing or disposal. They need not be protected against movement and inadvertent discharge , provided that measures to prevent dangerous build up of pressure and dangerous atmospheres are addressed. Waste aerosols, other than those leaking or severely deformed, shall be packed in accordance with packing instruction P 207 and special provision PP 87, or packing instruction LP 200 and special packing provision L 2. Waste gas cartridges, other than those leaking or severely deformed, shall be packed in accordance with packing instruction P 003 and special packing provisions PP 17 and PP 96, or packing instruction LP 200 and special packing provision L 2. Leaking or severely deformed aerosols and gas cartridges shall be carried in salvage pressure receptacles or salvage packagings provided appropriate measures are taken to ensure there is no dangerous build up of pressure. NOTE: For maritime carriage, waste aerosols and waste gas cartridges shall not be carried in closed containers. Waste gas cartridges that were filled with non-flammable, non-toxic gases of Class 2, group A or O and have been pierced are not subject to RID. 328 This entry applies to fuel cell cartridges including when contained in equipment or packed with equipment. Fuel cell cartridges installed in or integral to a fuel cell system are regarded as contained in equipment. Fuel cell cartridge means an article that stores fuel for discharge into the fuel cell through (a) valve(s) that control(s) the discharge of fuel into the fuel cell. Fuel cell cartridges, including when contained in equipment, shall be designed and constructed to prevent fuel leakage under normal conditions of carriage. Fuel cell cartridge design types using liquids as fuels shall pass an internal pressure test at a pressure of 100 kPa (gauge) without leakage. Except for fuel cell cartridges containing hydrogen in metal hydride which shall be in compliance with special provision 339, each fuel cell cartridge design type shall be shown to pass a 1.2 meter drop test onto an unyielding surface in the orientation most likely to result in failure of the containment system with no loss of contents. When lithium metal or lithium ion batteries are contained in the fuel cell system, the consignment shall be consigned under this entry and under the appropriate entries for UN 3091 LITHIUM METAL BATTERIES CONTAINED IN EQUIPMENT or UN 3481 LITHIUM ION BATTERIES CONTAINED IN EQUIPMENT. 329 (Reserved) 330 (Deleted) 3 31 (Reserved) 332 Magnesium nitrate hexahydrate is not subject to the requirements of RID. 333 Ethanol and gasoline, motor spirit or petrol mixtures for use in spark-ignition engines (e.g. in automobiles, stationary engines and other engines) shall be assigned to this entry regardless of variations in volatility. 334 A fuel cell cartridge may contain an activator provided it is fitted with two independent means of preventing unintended mixing with the fuel during carriage. 335 Mixtures of solids which are not subject to the requirements of RID and environmentally hazardous liquids or solids shall be classified as UN 3077 and may be carried under this entry provided there is no free liquid visible at the time the substance is loaded or at the time the packaging or cargo transport unit is closed. Each cargo transport unit shall be leakproof when used for carriage in bulk. If free liquid is visible at the time the mixture is loaded or at the time the packaging or cargo transport unit is closed, the mixture shall be classified as UN 3082. Sealed packets and articles containing less than 10 ml of an environmentally hazardous liquid, absorbed into a solid material but with no free liquid in the packet or article, or containing less than 10 g of an environmentally hazardous solid, are not subject to the requirements of RID. 336 A single package of non-combustible solid LSA-II or LSA-III material, if carried by air, shall not contain an activity greater than 3 000 A 2 . 337 Type B(U) and Type B(M) packages, if carried by air, shall not contain activities greater than the following: (a) For low dispersible radioactive material: as authorized for the package design as specified in the certificate of approval; (b) For special form radioactive material: 3 000 A 1 or 100 000 A 2 , whichever is the lower; or (c) For all other radioactive material: 3 000 A 2 . 338 Each fuel cell cartridge carried under this entry and designed to contain a liquefied flammable gas shall: (a) Be capable of withstanding, without leakage or bursting, a pressure of at least two times the equilibrium pressure of the contents at 55 °C; (b) Not contain more than 200 ml liquefied flammable gas, the vapour pressure of which shall not exceed 1 000 kPa at 55 °C; and (c) Pass the hot water bath test prescribed in 6.2.6.3.1. 339 Fuel cell cartridges containing hydrogen in a metal hydride carried under this entry shall have a water capacity less than or equal to 120 ml. The pressure in the fuel cell cartridge shall not exceed 5 MPa at 55 °C. The design type shall withstand, without leaking or bursting, a pressure of twice the design pressure of the cartridge at 55 °C or 200 kPa more than the design pressure of the cartridge at 55 °C, whichever is greater. The pressure at which this test is conducted is referred to in the drop test and the hydrogen cycling test as the "minimum shell burst pressure". Fuel cell cartridges shall be filled in accordance with procedures provided by the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall provide the following information with each fuel cell cartridge: (a) Inspection procedures to be carried out before initial filling and before refilling of the fuel cell cartridge; (b) Safety precautions and potential hazards to be aware of; (c) Method for determining when the rated capacity has been achieved; (d) Minimum and maximum pressure range; (e) Minimum and maximum temperature range; and (f) Any other requirements to be met for initial filling and refilling including the type of equipment to be used for initial filling and refilling. The fuel cell cartridges shall be designed and constructed to prevent fuel leakage under normal conditions of carriage. Each cartridge design type, including cartridges integral to a fuel cell, shall be subjected to and shall pass the following tests: Drop test A 1.8 metre drop test onto an unyielding surface in four different orientations: (a) Vertically, on the end containing the shut-off valve assembly; (b) Vertically, on the end opposite to the shut-off valve assembly; (c) Horizontally, onto a steel apex with a diameter of 38 mm, with the steel apex in the upward position; and (d) At a 45° angle on the end containing the shut-off valve assembly. There shall be no leakage, determined by using a soap bubble solution or other equivalent means on all possible leak locations, when the cartridge is charged to its rated charging pressure. The fuel cell cartridge shall then be hydrostatically pressurized to destruction. The recorded burst pressure shall exceed 85% of the minimum shell burst pressure. Fire test A fuel cell cartridge filled to rated capacity with hydrogen shall be subjected to a fire engulfment test. The cartridge design, which may include a vent feature integral to it, is deemed to have passed the fire test if: (a) The internal pressure vents to zero gauge pressure without rupture of the cartridge; or (b) The cartridge withstands the fire for a minimum of 20 minutes without rupture. Hydrogen cycling test This test is intended to ensure that a fuel cell cartridge design stress limits are not exceeded during use. The fuel cell cartridge shall be cycled from not more than 5% rated hydrogen capacity to not less than 95% rated hydrogen capacity and back to not more than 5% rated hydrogen capacity. The rated charging pressure shall be used for charging and temperatures shall be held within the operating temperature range. The cycling shall be continued for at least 100 cycles. Following the cycling test, the fuel cell cartridge shall be charged and the water volume displaced by the cartridge shall be measured. The cartridge design is deemed to have passed the hydrogen cycling test if the water volume displaced by the cycled cartridge does not exceed the water volume displaced by an uncycled cartridge charged to 95% rated capacity and pressurized to 75% of its minimum shell burst pressure. Production leak test Each fuel cell cartridge shall be tested for leaks at 15 °C ± 5 °C, while pressurized to its rated charging pressure. There shall be no leakage, determined by using a soap bubble solution or other equivalent means on all possible leak locations. Each fuel cell cartridge shall be permanently marked with the following information: (a) The rated charging pressure in MPa; (b) The manufacturer ' s serial number of the fuel cell cartridges or unique identification number; and (c) The date of expiry based on the maximum service life (year in four digits; month in two digits). 340 Chemical kits, first aid kits and polyester resin kits containing dangerous substances in inner packagings which do not exceed the quantity limits for excepted quantities applicable to individual substances as specified in column (7b) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, may be carried in accordance with Chapter 3.5. Class 5.2 substances, although not individually authorized as excepted quantities in column (7b) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, are authorized in such kits and are assigned Code E2 (see 3.5.1.2). 341 (Reserved) 342 Glass inner receptacles (such as ampoules or capsules) intended only for use in sterilization devices, when containing less than 30 ml of ethylene oxide per inner packaging with not more than 300 ml per outer packaging, may be carried in accordance with the provisions in Chapter 3.5, irrespective of the indication of "E0" in column (7b) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 provided that: (a) After filling, each glass inner receptacle has been determined to be leak-tight by placing the glass inner receptacle in a hot water bath at a temperature, and for a period of time, sufficient to ensure that an internal pressure equal to the vapour pressure of ethylene oxide at 55 °C is achieved. Any glass inner receptacle showing evidence of leakage, distortion or other defect under this test shall not be carried under the terms of this special provision; (b) In addition to the packaging required by 3.5.2, each glass inner receptacle is placed in a sealed plastics bag compatible with ethylene oxide and capable of containing the contents in the event of breakage or leakage of the glass inner receptacle; and (c) Each glass inner receptacle is protected by a means of preventing puncture of the plastics bag (e.g. sleeves or cushioning) in the event of damage to the packaging (e.g. by crushing). 343 This entry applies to crude oil containing hydrogen sulphide in sufficient concentration that vapours evolved from the crude oil can present an inhalation hazard. The packing group assigned shall be determined by the flammability hazard and inhalation hazard, in accordance with the degree of danger presented. 344 The provisions of 6.2.6 shall be met. 345 This gas contained in open cryogenic receptacles with a maximum capacity of 1 litre constructed with glass double walls having the space between the inner and outer wall evacuated (vacuum insulated) is not subject to RID provided each receptacle is carried in an outer packaging with suitable cushioning or absorbent materials to protect it from impact damage. 346 Open cryogenic receptacles conforming to the requirements of packing instruction P 203 of 4.1.4.1 and containing no dangerous goods except for UN No. 1977 nitrogen, refrigerated liquid, which is fully absorbed in a porous material are not subject to any other requirements of RID. 347 This entry shall only be used if the results of Test series 6 (d) of Part I of the Manual of Tests and Criteria have demonstrated that any hazardous effects arising from functioning are confined within the package. 348 Batteries manufactured after 31 December 2011 shall be marked with the Watt-hour rating on the outside case. 349 Mixtures of a hypochlorite with an ammonium salt are not to be accepted for carriage. UN No. 1791 hypochlorite solution is a substance of Class 8. 350 Ammonium bromate and its aqueous solutions and mixtures of a bromate with an ammonium salt are not to be accepted for carriage . 351 Ammonium chlorate and its aqueous solutions and mixtures of a chlorate with an ammonium salt are not to be accepted for carriage. 352 Ammonium chlorite and its aqueous solutions and mixtures of a chlorite with an ammonium salt are not to be accepted for carriage. 353 Ammonium permanganate and its aqueous solutions and mixtures of a permanganate with an ammonium salt are not to be accepted for carriage. 354 This substance is toxic by inhalation. 355 Oxygen cylinders for emergency use carried under this entry may include installed actuating cartridges (cartridges, power device of Division 1.4, Compatibility Group C or S), without changing the classification in Class 2 provided the total quantity of deflagrating (propellant) explosives does not exceed 3.2 g per oxygen cylinder. The cylinders with the installed actuating cartridges as prepared for carriage shall have an effective means of preventing inadvertent activation. 356 Metal hydride storage systems intended to be installed in wagons, vehicles, vessels , machinery, engines or aircraft shall be approved by the competent authority of the country of manufacture before acceptance for carriage. The transport document shall include an indication that the package was approved by the competent authority of the country of manufacture or a copy of the competent authority of the country of manufacture NOTEREF _Ref328981270 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 1 approval shall accompany each consignment. 357 Petroleum crude oil containing hydrogen sulphide in sufficient concentration that vapours evolved from the crude oil can present an inhalation hazard shall be consigned under the entry UN 3494 PETROLEUM SOUR CRUDE OIL, FLAMMABLE, TOXIC. 358 Nitroglycerin solution in alcohol with more than 1% but not more than 5% nitroglycerin may be classified in Class 3 and assigned to UN No. 3064 provided all the requirements of packing instruction P 300 of 4.1.4.1 are complied with. 359 Nitroglycerin solution in alcohol with more than 1% but not more than 5% nitroglycerin shall be classified in Class 1 and assigned to UN No. 0144 if not all the requirements of packing instruction P 300 of 4.1.4.1 are complied with. 360 Vehicles only powered by lithium metal batteries or lithium ion batteries shall be assigned to the entry UN 3171 battery-powered vehicle. Lithium batteries installed in cargo transport units, designed only to provide power external to the transport unit shall be assigned to entry UN 3536 LITHIUM BATTERIES INSTALLED IN CARGO TRANSPORT UNIT lithium ion batteries or lithium metal batteries . 361 This entry applies to electric double layer capacitors with an energy storage capacity greater than 0.3 Wh. Capacitors with an energy storage capacity of 0.3 Wh or less are not subject to RID. Energy storage capacity means the energy held by a capacitor, as calculated using the nominal voltage and capacitance. All capacitors to which this entry applies , including capacitors containing an electrolyte that does not meet the classification criteria of any class of dangerous goods, shall meet the following conditions: (a) Capacitors not installed in equipment shall be carried in an uncharged state. Capacitors installed in equipment shall be carried either in an uncharged state or protected against short circuit; (b) Each capacitor shall be protected against a potential short circuit hazard in carriage as follows: ( i ) When a capacitor’s energy storage capacity is less than or equal to 10 Wh or when the energy storage capacity of each capacitor in a module is less than or equal to 10 Wh , the capacitor or module shall be protected against short circuit or be fitted with a metal strap connecting the terminals; and (ii) When the energy storage capacity of a capacitor or a capacitor in a module is more than 10 Wh , the capacitor or module shall be fitted with a metal strap connecting the terminals; (c) Capacitors containing dangerous goods shall be designed to withstand a 95 kPa pressure differential; (d) Capacitors shall be designed and constructed to relieve safely pressure that may build up in use, through a vent or a weak point in the capacitor casing. Any liquid which is released upon venting shall be contained by the packaging or by the equipment in which a capacitor is installed; and (e) Capacitors shall be marked with the energy storage capacity in Wh. Capacitors containing an electrolyte not meeting the classification criteria of any class of dangerous goods, including when installed in equipment, are not subject to other provisions of RID. Capacitors containing an electrolyte meeting the classification criteria of any class of dangerous goods, with an energy storage capacity of 10 Wh or less are not subject to other provisions of RID when they are capable of withstanding a 1.2 metre drop test unpackaged on an unyielding surface without loss of contents. Capacitors containing an electrolyte meeting the classification criteria of any class of dangerous goods that are not installed in equipment and with an energy storage capacity of more than 10 Wh are subject to RID. Capacitors installed in equipment and containing an electrolyte meeting the classification criteria of any class of dangerous goods, are not subject to other provisions of RID provided the equipment is packaged in a strong outer packaging constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging’s intended use and in such a manner as to prevent accidental functioning of capacitors during carriage. Large robust equipment containing capacitors may be offered for carriage unpackaged or on pallets when capacitors are afforded equivalent protection by the equipment in which they are contained. NOTE: Capacitors which by design maintain a terminal voltage (e.g. asymmetrical capacitors) do not belong to this entry. 362 (Reserved) 363 This entry may only be used when the conditions of this special provision are met. No other requirements of RID apply. (a) This entry applies to engines or machinery, powered by fuels classified as dangerous goods via internal combustion systems or fuel cells (e.g. combustion engines, generators, compressors, turbines, heating units, etc.), except vehicle equipment assigned to UN No. 3166 referred to in SP 666. NOTE: This entry does not apply to equipment referred to in 1.1.3.2 (a), (d) and (e), 1.1.3.3 and 1.1.3.7. (b) Engines or machinery which are empty of liquid or gaseous fuels and which do not contain other dangerous goods, are not subject to RID. NOTE 1: An engine or machinery is considered to be empty of liquid fuel when the liquid fuel tank has been drained and the engine or machinery cannot be operated due to a lack of fuel. Engine or machinery components such as fuel lines, fuel filters and injectors do not need to be cleaned, drained or purged to be considered empty of liquid fuels. In addition, the liquid fuel tank does not need to be cleaned or purged. 2: An engine or machinery is considered to be empty of gaseous fuels when the gaseous fuel tanks are empty of liquid (for liquefied gases), the pressure in the tanks does not exceed 2 bar and the fuel shut-off or isolation valve is closed and secured. (c) Engines and machinery containing fuels meeting the classification criteria of Class 3, shall be assigned to the entries UN 3528 ENGINE, INTERNAL COMBUSTION, FLAMMABLE LIQUID POWERED or UN 3528 ENGINE, FUEL CELL, FLAMMABLE LIQUID POWERED or UN 3528 MACHINERY, INTERNAL COMBUSTION, FLAMMABLE LIQUID POWERED or UN 3528 MACHINERY, FUEL CELL, FLAMMABLE LIQUID POWERED, as appropriate. (d) Engines and machinery containing fuels meeting the classification criteria of flammable gases of Class 2, shall be assigned to the entries UN 3529 ENGINE, INTERNAL COMBUSTION, FLAMMABLE GAS POWERED or UN 3529 ENGINE, FUEL CELL, FLAMMABLE GAS POWERED or UN 3529 MACHINERY, INTERNAL COMBUSTION, FLAMMABLE GAS POWERED or UN 3529 MACHINERY, FUEL CELL, FLAMMABLE GAS POWERED, as appropriate. Engines and machinery powered by both a flammable gas and a flammable liquid shall be assigned to the appropriate UN No. 3529 entry. (e) Engines and machinery containing liquid fuels meeting the classification criteria of 2.2.9.1.10 for environmentally hazardous substances and not meeting the classification criteria of any other class shall be assigned to the entries UN 3530 ENGINE, INTERNAL COMBUSTION or UN 3530 MACHINERY, INTERNAL COMBUSTION, as appropriate. (f) Engines or machinery may contain other dangerous goods than fuels (e.g. batteries, fire extinguishers, compressed gas accumulators or safety devices) required for their functioning or safe operation without being subject to any additional requirements for these other dangerous goods, unless otherwise specified in RID. However, lithium batteries shall meet the provisions of 2.2.9.1.7, except as provided for in special provision 667. (g) The engine or machinery, including the means of containment containing dangerous goods, shall be in compliance with the construction requirements specified by the competent authority of the country of manufacture ; (h) Any valves or openings (e.g. venting devices) shall be closed during carriage; ( i ) The engines or machinery shall be oriented to prevent inadvertent leakage of dangerous goods and secured by means capable of restraining the engines or machinery to prevent any movement during carriage which would change the orientation or cause them to be damaged; (j) for UN No. 3528 and UN No. 3530: Where the engine or machinery contains more than 60 l of liquid fuel and has a capacity of more than 450 l but not more than 3 000 l, it shall be labelled on two opposite sides in accordance with 5.2.2. Where the engine or machinery contains more than 60 l of liquid fuel and has a capacity of more than 3 000 l, it shall be placarded on two opposite sides. Placards shall correspond to the labels required in Column (5) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and shall conform to the specifications given in 5.3.1.7. Placards shall be displayed on a background of contrasting colour, or shall have either a dotted or solid outer boundary line. NOTE : On engines and machinery with a capacity of more than 450 l but containing 60 l of liquid fuel or less, labelling and placarding compliant with the above requirements are permitted. (k) for UN No. 3529: Where the fuel tank of the engine or machinery has a water capacity of more than 450 l but not more than 1 000 l, it shall be labelled on two opposite sides in accordance with 5.2.2. Where the fuel tank of the engine or machinery has a water capacity of more than 1 000 l, it shall be placarded on two opposite sides. Placards shall correspond to the labels required in Column (5) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and shall conform to the specifications given in 5.3.1.7. Placards shall be displayed on a background of contrasting colour, or shall have either a dotted or solid outer boundary line. (l) A transport document in accordance with 5.4.1 is required only when the engine or machinery contains more than 1 000 l of liquid fuels, for UN 3528 and UN 3530, or the fuel tank has a water capacity of more than 1 000 l, for UN 3529. This transport document shall contain the following additional statement: " Transport in accordance with special provision 363". (m) The requirements specified in packing instruction P 005 of 4.1.4.1 shall be met. 364 This article may only be carried under the provisions of Chapter 3.4 if, as presented for carriage, the package is capable of passing the test in accordance with Test Series 6 (d) of Part I of the Manual of Tests and Criteria as determined by the competent authority. 365 For manufactured instruments and articles containing mercury, see UN No. 3506. 366 Manufactured instruments and articles containing not more than 1 kg of mercury are not subject to RID . 367 For the purposes of documentation: The proper shipping name "Paint related material" may be used for consignments of packages containing "Paint" and "Paint related material" in the same package; The proper shipping name "Paint related material, corrosive, flammable" may be used for consignments of packages containing "Paint, corrosive, flammable" and "Paint related material, corrosive, flammable" in the same package; The proper shipping name "Paint related material, flammable, corrosive" may be used for consignments of packages containing "Paint, flammable, corrosive" and "Paint related material, flammable, corrosive" in the same package; and The proper shipping name "Printing ink related material" may be used for consignments of packages containing "Printing ink" and "Printing ink related material" in the same package. 368 In the case of non-fissile or fissile-excepted uranium hexafluoride, the material shall be classified under UN No. 3507 or UN No. 2978. 369 In accordance with 2.1.3.5.3 (a), this radioactive material in an excepted package possessing toxic and corrosive properties is classified in Class 6.1 with radioactivity and corrosivity subsidiary hazards . Uranium hexafluoride may be classified under this entry only if the conditions of 2.2.7.2.4.1.2, 2.2.7.2.4.1.5, 2.2.7.2.4.5.2 and, for fissile-excepted material, of 2.2.7.2.3. 5 are met. In addition to the provisions applicable to the carriage of Class 6.1 substances with a corrosivity subsidiary hazard , the provisions of 5.1.3.2, 5.1.5.2.2, 5.1.5.4.1 (b), 7.5.11 CW 33 (3.1), (5.1) to (5.4) and (6) shall apply. No Class 7 label is required to be displayed. 370 This entry only applies to ammonium nitrate that meets one of the following criteria: (a) ammonium nitrate with more than 0.2% combustible substances, including any organic substance calculated as carbon, to the exclusion of any added substance; or (b) ammonium nitrate with not more than 0.2% combustible substances, including any organic substance calculated as carbon, to the exclusion of any added substance, that gives a positive result when tested in accordance with Test Series 2 (see Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part I). See also UN No. 1942. This entry shall not be used for ammonium nitrate for which a proper shipping name already exists in Table A of Chapter 3.2 including ammonium nitrate mixed with fuel oil (ANFO) or any of the commercial grades of ammonium nitrate. 371 (1) This entry also applies to articles, containing a small pressure receptacle with a release device. Such articles shall comply with the following requirements: (a) The water capacity of the pressure receptacle shall not exceed 0.5 litres and the working pressure shall not exceed 25 bar at 15 °C; (b) The minimum burst pressure of the pressure receptacle shall be at least four times the pressure of the gas at 15 °C; (c) Each article shall be manufactured in such a way that unintentional firing or release is avoided under normal conditions of handling, packing, carriage and use. This may be fulfilled by an additional locking device linked to the activator; (d) Each article shall be manufactured in such a way as to prevent hazardous projections of the pressure receptacle or parts of the pressure receptacle; (e) Each pressure receptacle shall be manufactured from material which will not fragment upon rupture; (f) The design type of the article shall be subjected to a fire test. For this test, the provisions of paragraphs 16.6.1.2 except letter g, 16.6.1.3.1 to 16.6.1.3.6, 16.6.1.3.7 (b) and 16.6.1.3.8 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria shall be applied. It shall be demonstrated that the article relieves its pressure by means of a fire degradable seal or other pressure relief device, in such a way that the pressure receptacle will not fragment and that the article or fragments of the article do not rocket more than 10 metres; (g) The design type of the article shall be subjected to the following test. A stimulating mechanism shall be used to initiate one article in the middle of the packaging. There shall be no hazardous effects outside the package such as disruption of the package, metal fragments or a receptacle which passes through the packaging. (2) The manufacturer shall produce technical documentation of the design type, manufacture as well as the tests and their results. The manufacturer shall apply procedures to ensure that articles produced in series are made of good quality, conform to the design type and are able to meet the requirements in (1). The manufacturer shall provide such information to the competent authority on request. 372 This entry applies to asymmetric capacitors with an energy storage capacity greater than 0.3 Wh. Capacitors with an energy storage capacity of 0.3 Wh or less are not subject to RID. Energy storage capacity means the energy stored in a capacitor, as calculated according to the following equation, , using the nominal capacitance (C N ), rated voltage (U R ) and rated lower limit voltage (U L ). All asymmetric capacitors to which this entry applies shall meet the following conditions: ( a) Capacitors or modules shall be protected against short circuit; (b) Capacitors shall be designed and constructed to safely relieve pressure that may build up in use, through a vent or a weak point in the capacitor casing. Any liquid which is released upon venting shall be contained by packaging or by equipment in which a capacitor is installed; (c) Capacitors shall be marked with the energy storage capacity in Wh ; and (d) Capacitors containing an electrolyte meeting the classification criteria of any class of dangerous goods shall be designed to withstand a 95 kPa pressure differential; Capacitors containing an electrolyte not meeting the classification criteria of any class of dangerous goods, including when configured in a module or when installed in equipment are not subject to other provisions of RID. Capacitors containing an electrolyte meeting the classification criteria of any class of dangerous goods, with an energy storage capacity of 20 Wh or less, including when configured in a module, are not subject to other provisions of RID when the capacitors are capable of withstanding a 1.2 metre drop test unpackaged on an unyielding surface without loss of contents. Capacitors containing an electrolyte meeting the classification criteria of any class of dangerous goods that are not installed in equipment and with an energy storage capacity of more than 20 Wh are subject to RID. Capacitors installed in equipment and containing an electrolyte meeting the classification criteria of any class of dangerous goods, are not subject to other provisions of RID provided that the equipment is packaged in a strong outer packaging constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and design, in relation to the packaging’s intended use and in such a manner as to prevent accidental functioning of capacitors during carriage. Large robust equipment containing capacitors may be offered for carriage unpackaged or on pallets when capacitors are afforded equivalent protection by the equipment in which they are contained. NOTE: Notwithstanding the provisions of this special provision, nickel-carbon asymmetric capacitors containing Class 8 alkaline electrolytes shall be carried as UN 2795 BATTERIES, WET, FILLED WITH ALKALI, electric storage. 373 Neutron radiation detectors containing non-pressurized boron trifluoride gas may be carried under this entry provided that the following conditions are met: (a) Each radiation detector shall meet the following conditions. ( i ) The pressure in each detector shall not exceed 105 kPa absolute at 20 °C; (ii) The amount of gas shall not exceed 13 g per detector; (iii) Each detector shall be manufactured under a registered quality assurance programme ; NOTE: ISO 9001 may be used for this purpose. (iv) Each neutron radiation detector shall be of welded metal construction with brazed metal to ceramic feed through assemblies. These detectors shall have a minimum burst pressure of 1800 kPa as demonstrated by design type qualification testing; and (v) Each detector shall be tested to a 1 10 -10 cm 3 /s leaktightness standard before filling . (b) Radiation detectors carried as individual components shall be carried as follows: ( i ) Detectors shall be packed in a sealed intermediate plastics liner with sufficient absorbent or adsorbent material to absorb or adsorb the entire gas contents; (ii) They shall be packed in strong outer packaging. The completed package shall be capable of withstanding a 1.8 m drop test without leakage of gas contents from detectors; (iii) The total amount of gas from all detectors per outer packaging shall not exceed 52 g. (c) Completed neutron radiation detection systems containing detectors meeting the conditions of paragraph (a) shall be carried as follows: ( i ) The detectors shall be contained in a strong sealed outer casing; (ii) The casing shall contain sufficient absorbent or adsorbent material to absorb or adsorb the entire gas contents; (iii) The completed systems shall be packed in strong outer packagings capable of withstanding a 1.8 m drop test without leakage unless a system’s outer casing affords equivalent protection. Packing instruction P 200 of 4.1.4.1 is not applicable. The transport document shall include the following statement: " TRANSPORT in accordance with special provision 373" . Neutron radiation detectors containing not more than 1 g of boron trifluoride, including those with solder glass joints, are not subject to RID provided they meet the requirements in paragraph (a) and are packed in accordance with paragraph (b). Radiation detection systems containing such detectors are not subject to RID provided they are packed in accordance with paragraph (c). 374 (Reserved) 375 These substances when carried in single or combination packagings containing a net quantity per single or inner packaging of 5 l or less for liquids or having a net mass per single or inner packaging of 5 kg or less for solids, are not subject to any other provisions of RID provided the packagings meet the general provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2 and 4.1.1.4 to 4.1.1.8. 376 Lithium ion cells or batteries and lithium metal cells or batteries identified as being damaged or defective such that they do not conform to the type tested according to the applicable provisions of the Manual of Tests and Criteria shall comply with the requirements of this special provision. For the purposes of this special provision, these may include, but are not limited to: – Cells or batteries identified as being defective for safety reasons; – Cells or batteries that have leaked or vented; – Cells or batteries that cannot be diagnosed prior to carriage; or – Cells or batteries that have sustained physical or mechanical damage. NOTE: In assessing a cell or battery as damaged or defective, an assessment or evaluation shall be performed based on safety criteria from the cell, battery or product manufacturer or by a technical expert with knowledge of the cell’s or battery’s safety features. An assessment or evaluation may include, but is not limited to, the following criteria: (a) Acute hazard, such as gas, fire, or electrolyte leaking; (b) The use or misuse of the cell or battery; (c) Signs of physical damage, such as deformation to cell or battery casing, or colours on the casing; (d) External and internal short circuit protection, such as voltage or isolation measures; (e) The condition of the cell or battery safety features; or (f) Damage to any internal safety components, such as the battery management system. Cells and batteries shall be carried according to the provisions applicable to UN No. 3090, UN No. 3091, UN No. 3480 and No. UN 3481, except special provision 230 and as otherwise stated in this special provision. Cells and batteries shall be packed in accordance with packing instructions P 908 of 4.1.4.1 or LP 904 of 4.1.4.3, as applicable. Cells and batteries identified as damaged or defective and liable to rapidly disassemble, dangerously react, produce a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous emission of toxic, corrosive or flammable gases or vapours under normal conditions of carriage shall be packed and carried in accordance with packing instruction P 911 of 4.1.4.1 or LP 906 of 4.1.4.3, as applicable. Alternative packing and/or carriage conditions may be authorized by the competent authority of any RID Contracting State who may also recognize an approval granted by the competent authority of a country which is not an RID Contracting State provided that this approval has been granted in accordance with the procedures applicable according to RID, ADR, ADN, the IMDG Code or the ICAO Technical Instructions. In both cases the cells and batteries are assigned to transport category 0. Packages shall be ma rked "DAMAGED/DEFECTIVE LITHIUM ION BATTERIES" or "DAMAGED/DEFECTIVE LITHIUM METAL BATTERIES", as applicable. The transport document shall include the following statement: "Transport in accordance with special provision 376". If applicable, a copy of the competent authority approval shall accompany the carriage. 377 Lithium ion and lithium metal cells and batteries and equipment containing such cells and batteries carried for disposal or recycling, either packed together with or packed without non-lithium batteries, may be packaged in accordance with packing instruction P 909 of 4.1.4.1. These cells and batteries are not subject to the req uirements of 2.2.9.1.7 (a) to (g ). Packages shall be marked "LITHIUM BATTERIES FOR DISPOSAL" or "LITHIUM BATTERIES FOR RECYCLING". Identified damaged or defective batteries shall be carried in accordance with special provision 376. 378 Radiation detectors containing this gas in non-refillable pressure receptacles not meeting the requirements of Chapter 6.2 and packing instruction P 200 of 4.1.4.1 may be carried under this entry provided: (a) The working pressure in each receptacle does not exceed 50 bar; (b) The receptacle capacity does not exceed 12 litres; (c) Each receptacle has a minimum burst pressure of at least 3 times the working pressure when a relief device is fitted and at least 4 times the working pressure when no relief device is fitted; (d) Each receptacle is manufactured from material which will not fragment upon rupture; (e) Each detector is manufactured under a registered quality assurance programme; NOTE: ISO 9001 may be used for this purpose. (f) Detectors are carried in strong outer packagings . The complete package shall be capable of withstanding a 1.2 metre drop test without breakage of the detector or rupture of the outer packaging. Equipment that includes a detector shall be packed in a strong outer packaging unless the detector is afforded equivalent protection by the equipment in which it is contained; and (g) The transport document includes the following statement: " Transport in accordance with special provision 378". Radiation detectors, including detectors in radiation detection systems, are not subject to any other requirements of RID if the detectors meet the requirements in (a) to (f) above and the capacity of detector receptacles does not exceed 50 ml. 379 Anhydrous ammonia adsorbed or absorbed on a solid contained in ammonia dispensing systems or receptacles intended to form part of such systems are not subject to the other provisions of RID if the following conditions are observed: (a) The adsorption or absorption presents the following properties: ( i ) The pressure at a temperature of 20 °C in the receptacle is less than 0.6 bar; (ii) The pressure at a temperature of 35 °C in the receptacle is less than 1 bar; (iii) The pressure at a temperature of 85 °C in the receptacle is less than 12 bar. (b) The adsorbent or absorbent material shall not have dangerous properties listed in classes 1 to 8; (c) The maximum contents of a receptacle shall be 10 kg of ammonia; and (d) Receptacles containing adsorbed or absorbed ammonia shall meet the following conditions: ( i ) Receptacles shall be made of a material compatible with ammonia as specified in ISO 11114-1:2012 + A1:2017 ; (ii) Receptacles and their means of closure shall be hermetically sealed and able to contain the generated ammonia; (iii) Each receptacle shall be able to withstand the pressure generated at 85 °C with a volumetric expansion no greater than 0.1%; (iv) Each receptacle shall be fitted with a device that allows for gas evacuation once pressure exceeds 15 bar without violent rupture, explosion or projection; and (v) Each receptacle shall be able to withstand a pressure of 20 bar without leakage when the pressure relief device is deactivated. When carried in an ammonia dispenser, the receptacles shall be connected to the dispenser in such a way that the assembly is guaranteed to have the same strength as a single receptacle. The properties of mechanical strength mentioned in this special provision shall be tested using a prototype of a receptacle and/or dispenser filled to nominal capacity, by increasing the temperature until the specified pressures are reached. The test results shall be documented, shall be traceable and shall be communicated to the relevant authorities upon request. 380 (Reserved) 381 (Reserved) 382 Polymeric beads may be made from polystyrene, poly (methyl methacrylate) or other polymeric material. When it can be demonstrated that no flammable vapour, resulting in a flammable atmosphere, is evolved according to test U1 (Test method for substances liable to evolve flammable vapours) of Part III, sub-section 38.4.4 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, polymeric beads, expandable need not be classified under this UN number. This test should only be performed when de-classification of a substance is considered. 383 Table tennis balls manufactured from celluloid are not subject to RID where the net mass of each table tennis ball does not exceed 3.0 g and the total net mass of table tennis balls does not exceed 500 g per package. 384 (Reserved) 385 (Deleted) 386 Substances stabilized by temperature control are not accepted for carriage by rail. When chemical stabilization is employed, the person offering the packaging, IBC or tank for carriage shall ensure that the level of stabilization is sufficient to prevent the substance in the packaging, IBC or tank from dangerous polymerization at a bulk mean temperature of 50 °C, or, in the case of a portable tank, 45 °C. Where chemical stabilization becomes ineffective at lower temperatures within the anticipated duration of carriage, carriage by rail is not permitted. In making this determination factors to be taken into consideration include, but are not limited to, the capacity and geometry of the packaging, IBC or tank and the effect of any insulation present, the temperature of the substance when offered for carriage, the duration of the journey and the ambient temperature conditions typically encountered in the journey (considering also the season of year), the effectiveness and other properties of the stabilizer employed, applicable operational controls imposed by regulation (e.g. requirements to protect from sources of heat, including other cargo carried at a temperature above ambient) and any other relevant factors. 387 Lithium batteries in conformity with 2.2.9.1.7 (f) containing both primary lithium metal cells and rechargeable lithium ion cells shall be assigned to UN Nos. 3090 or 3091 as appropriate. When such batteries are carried in accordance with special provision 188, the total lithium content of all lithium metal cells contained in the battery shall not exceed 1.5 g and the total capacity of all lithium ion cells contained in the battery shall not exceed 10 Wh. 388 UN No. 3166 entries apply to vehicles powered by flammable liquid or gas internal combustion engines or fuel cells. Vehicles powered by a fuel cell engine shall be assigned to the entries UN 3166 VEHICLE, FUEL CELL, FLAMMABLE GAS POWERED or UN 3166 VEHICLE, FUEL CELL, FLAMMABLE LIQUID POWERED, as appropriate. These entries include hybrid electric vehicles powered by both a fuel cell and an internal combustion engine with wet batteries, sodium batteries, lithium metal batteries or lithium ion batteries, carried with the battery( ies ) installed. Other vehicles which contain an internal combustion engine shall be assigned to the entries UN 3166 VEHICLE, FLAMMABLE GAS POWERED or UN 3166 VEHICLE, FLAMMABLE LIQUID POWERED, as appropriate. These entries include hybrid electric vehicles powered by both an internal combustion engine and wet batteries, sodium batteries, lithium metal batteries or lithium ion batteries, carried with the battery( ies ) installed. If a vehicle is powered by a flammable liquid and a flammable gas internal combustion engine, it shall be assigned to UN 3166 VEHICLE, FLAMMABLE GAS POWERED. Entry UN 3171 only applies to vehicles powered by wet batteries, sodium batteries, lithium metal batteries or lithium ion batteries and equipment powered by wet batteries or sodium batteries carried with these batteries installed. For the purpose of this special provision, vehicles are self-propelled apparatus designed to carry one or more persons or goods. Examples of such vehicles are cars, motorcycles, scooters, three- and four-wheeled vehicles or motorcycles, trucks, locomotives, bicycles (pedal cycles with a motor) and other vehicles of this type (e.g. self-balancing vehicles or vehicles not equipped with at least one seating position), wheelchairs, lawn tractors, self-propelled farming and construction equipment, boats and aircraft. This includes vehicles carried in a packaging. In this case some parts of the vehicle may be detached from its frame to fit into the packaging. Examples of equipment are lawnmowers, cleaning machines or model boats and model aircraft. Equipment powered by lithium metal batteries or lithium ion batteries shall be assigned to the entries UN 3091 LITHIUM METAL BATTERIES CONTAINED IN EQUIPMENT or UN 3091 LITHIUM METAL BATTERIES PACKED WITH EQUIPMENT or UN 3481 LITHIUM ION BATTERIES CONTAINED IN EQUIPMENT or UN 3481 LITHIUM ION BATTERIES PACKED WITH EQUIPMENT, as appropriate. Lithium ion batteries or lithium metal batteries installed in a cargo transport unit and designed only to provide power external to the cargo transport unit shall be assigned to the entry UN 3536 LITHIUM BATTERIES INSTALLED IN CARGO TRANSPORT UNIT lithium ion batteries or lithium metal batteries. Dangerous goods, such as batteries, airbags, fire extinguishers, compressed gas accumulators, safety devices and other integral components of the vehicle that are necessary for the operation of the vehicle or for the safety of its operator or passengers, shall be securely installed in the vehicle and are not otherwise subject to RID. However, lithium batteries shall meet the provisions of 2.2.9.1.7 , except as otherwise provided for in special provision 667. Where a lithium battery installed in a vehicle or equipment is damaged or defective, the vehicle or equipment shall be carried in accordance with the conditions defined in special provision 667 (c). 389 This entry only applies to lithium ion batteries or lithium metal batteries installed in a cargo transport unit and designed only to provide power external to the cargo transport unit. The lithium batteries shall meet the provisions of 2.2.9.1.7 (a) to (g) and contain the necessary systems to prevent overcharge and over discharge between the batteries. The batteries shall be securely attached to the interior structure of the cargo transport unit (e.g., by means of placement in racks, cabinets, etc.) in such a manner as to prevent short circuits, accidental operation, and significant movement relative to the cargo transport unit under the shocks, loadings and vibrations normally incident to carriage. Dangerous goods necessary for the safe and proper operation of the cargo transport unit (e.g., fire extinguishing systems and air conditioning systems), shall be properly secured to or installed in the cargo transport unit and are not otherwise subject to RID. Dangerous goods not necessary for the safe and proper operation of the cargo transport unit shall not be carried within the cargo transport unit. The batteries inside the cargo transport unit are not subject to marking or labelling requirements. The cargo transport unit shall bear orange-coloured plates in accordance with 5.3.2.2 and placards in accordance with 5.3.1.1 on two opposing sides. 390 When a package contains a combination of lithium batteries contained in equipment and lithium batteries packed with equipment, the following requirements apply for the purposes of package marking and documentation: (a) the package shall be marked "UN 3091" or "UN 3481", as appropriate. If a package contains both lithium ion batteries and lithium metal batteries packed with and contained in equipment, the package shall be marked as required for both battery types. However, button cell batteries installed in equipment (including circuit boards) need not be considered; (b) the transport document shall indicate "UN 3091 Lithium metal batteries packed with equipment " or "UN 3481 Lithium ion batteries packed with equipment" , as appropriate. If a package contains both lithium metal batteries and lithium ion batteries packed with and contained in equipment, then the transport document shall indicate both "UN 3091 Lithium metal batteries packed with equipment " and "UN 3481 Lithium ion batteries packed with equipment" . 391 (Reserved) 392 For the carriage of fuel gas containment systems designed and approved to be fitted in motor vehicles containing this gas the provisions of 4.1.4.1 and Chapter 6.2 need not be applied when carried for disposal, recycling, repair, inspection, maintenance or from where they are manufactured to a vehicle assembly plant, provided the following conditions are met: (a) The fuel gas containment systems shall meet the requirements of the standards or regulations for fuel tanks for vehicles, as applicable. Examples of applicable standards and regulations are: LPG tanks UN Regulation No. 67 Revision 2 Uniform provisions concerning: I. Approval of specific equipment of vehicles of category M and N using liquefied petroleum gases in their propulsion system; II. Approval of vehicles of category M and N fitted with specific equipment for the use of liquefied petroleum gases in their propulsion system with regard to the installation of such equipment UN Regulation No. 115 Uniform provisions concerning the approval of: I. Specific LPG (liquefied petroleum gases) retrofit systems to be installed in motor vehicles for the use of LPG in their propulsion systems; II Specific CNG (compressed natural gas) retrofit systems to be installed in motor vehicles for the use of CNG in their propulsion system CNG and LNG tanks UN Regulation No. 110 Uniform provisions concerning the approval of: I. Specific components of motor vehicles using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) in their propulsion system II. Vehicles with regard to the installation of specific components of an approved type for the use of compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) in their propulsion system UN Regulation No. 115 Uniform provisions concerning the approval of: I. Specific LPG (liquefied petroleum gases) retrofit systems to be installed in motor vehicles for the use of LPG in their propulsion systems; II Specific CNG (compressed natural gas) retrofit systems to be installed in motor vehicles for the use of CNG in their propulsion system ISO 11439:2013 Gas cylinders – High pressure cylinders for the on-board storage of natural gas as a fuel for automotive vehicles ISO 15500-Series Road vehicles – Compressed natural gas (CNG) fuel system components – several parts as applicable ANSI NGV 2 Compressed natural gas vehicle fuel containers CSA B51 Part 2:2014 Boiler, pressure vessel, and pressure piping code Part 2 Requirements for high-pressure cylinders for on-board storage of fuels for automotive vehicles Hydrogen pressure tanks Global Technical Regulation (GTR) No. 13 Global technical regulation on hydrogen and fuel cell vehicles (ECE/TRANS/180/Add.13) ISO/TS 15869:2009 Gaseous hydrogen and hydrogen blends – Land vehicle fuel tanks Regulation (EC) No. 79/2009 Regulation (EC) No. 79/2009 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 14 January 2009 on type approval of hydrogen-powered motor vehicles, and amending Directive 2007/46/EC Regulation (EU) No. 406/2010 Commission Regulation (EU) No 406/2010 of 26 April 2010 implementing Regulation (EC) No 79/2009 of the European Parliament and of the Council on type-approval of hydrogen-powered motor vehicles UN Regulation No. 134 Uniform provisions concerning the approval of motor vehicles and their components with regard to the safety-related performance of hydrogen-fuelled vehicles (HFCV) CSA B51 Part 2: 2014 Boiler, pressure vessel, and pressure piping code – Part 2: Requirements for high-pressure cylinders for on-board storage of fuels for automotive vehicles Gas tanks designed and constructed in accordance with previous versions of relevant standards or regulations for gas tanks for motor vehicles, which were applicable at the time of the certification of the vehicles for which the gas tanks were designed and constructed may continue to be carried; (b) The fuel gas containment systems shall be leakproof and shall not exhibit any signs of external damage which may affect their safety; NOTE 1: Criteria may be found in standard ISO 11623:2015 Transportable gas cylinders – Periodic inspection and testing of composite gas cylinders (or ISO 19078:2013 Gas cylinders – Inspection of the cylinder installation, and requalification of high pressure cylinders for the on-board storage of natural gas as a fuel for automotive vehicles). 2: If the fuel gas containment systems are not leakproof or are overfilled or if they exhibit damage that could affect their safety (e.g. in case of a safety related recall), they shall only be carried in salvage pressure receptacles in conformity with RID. (c) If a fuel gas containment system is equipped with two valves or more integrated in line, the two valves shall be closed as to be gastight under normal conditions of carriage. If only one valve exists or only one valve works, all openings with the exception of the opening of the pressure relief device shall be closed as to be gastight under normal conditions of carriage; (d) Fuel gas containment systems shall be carried in such a way as to prevent obstruction of the pressure relief device or any damage to the valves and any other pressurised part of the fuel gas containment systems and unintentional release of the gas under normal conditions of carriage. The fuel gas containment system shall be secured in order to prevent slipping, rolling or vertical movement; (e) Valves shall be protected by one of the methods described in 4.1.6.8 (a) to (e); (f) Except for the case of fuel gas containment systems removed for disposal, recycling, repair, inspection or maintenance, they shall be filled with not more than 20% of their nominal filling ratio or nominal working pressure, as applicable; (g) Notwithstanding the provisions of Chapter 5.2, when fuel gas containment systems are consigned in a handling device, marks and labels may be affixed to the handling device; and (h) Notwithstanding the provisions of 5.4.1.1.1 (f) the information on the total quantity of dangerous goods may be replaced by the following information: ( i ) The number of fuel gas containment systems; and (ii) In the case of liquefied gases the total net mass (kg) of gas of each fuel gas containment system and, in the case of compressed gases, the total water capacity (l) of each fuel gas containment syst em followed by the nominal working pressure. Examples for information in the transport document: Example 1: " UN 1971 natural gas, compressed, 2.1, 1 fuel gas containment system of 50 l in total, 200 bar ". Example 2: " UN 1965 hydrocarbon gas mixture, liquefied, n.o.s., 2.1, 3 fuel gas containment systems, each of 15 kg net mass of gas ". 393 The nitrocellulose shall meet the criteria of the Bergmann-Junk test or methyl violet paper test in the Manual of Tests and Criteria Appendix 10. Tests of type 3 (c) need not be applied. 394 The nitrocellulose shall meet the criteria of the Bergmann-Junk test or methyl violet paper test in the Manual of Tests and Criteria Appendix 10. 395 This entry shall only be used for solid medical waste of Category A carried for disposal. 396 Large and robust articles may be carried with connected gas cylinders with the valves open regardless of 4.1.6.5 provided: ( a) The gas cylinders contain nitrogen of UN No. 1066 or compressed gas of UN No. 1956 or compressed air of UN No. 1002; (b) The gas cylinders are connected with the article through pressure regulators and fixed piping in such a way that the pressure of the gas (gauge pressure) in the article does not exceed 35 kPa (0.35 bar); (c) The gas cylinders are properly secured so that they cannot move in relation to the article and are fitted with strong and pressure resistant hoses and pipes; (d) The gas cylinders, pressure regulators, piping and other components are protected from damage and impacts during carriage by wooden crates or other suitable means; (e) The transport document includes the following statement: "Transport in accordance with special provision 396"; (f) Cargo transport units containing articles carried with cylinders with open valves containing a gas presenting a risk of asphyxiation are well ventilated and marked in accordance with 5.5.3.6. 397 Mixtures of nitrogen and oxygen containing not less than 19.5% and not more than 23.5% oxygen by volume may be carried under this entry when no other oxidizing gases are present. A Class 5.1 subsidiary hazard label (model No. 5.1, see 5.2.2.2.2) is not required for any concentrations within this limit. 398 This entry applies to mixtures of butylenes , 1-butylene, cis-2-butylene and trans-2-butylene. For isobutylene, see UN No. 1055. NOTE: For additional information to be added in the transport document, see 5.4.1.2.2 (e) . 3 9 9 – 499 (Reserved) 500 (Deleted) 501 For naphthalene, molten, see UN No. 2304. 502 UN No. 2006 plastics, nitrocellulose-based, self-heating, n.o.s ., and 2002 celluloid scrap are substances of Class 4.2. 503 For phosphorus, white, molten, see UN No. 2447. 504 UN No. 1847 potassium sulphide, hydrated with not less than 30% water of crystallization, UN No. 1849 sodium sulphide, hydrated with not less than 30% water of crystallization and UN No. 2949 sodium hydrosulphide , hydrated with not less than 25% water of crystallization are substances of Class 8. 505 UN No. 2004 magnesium diamide is a substance of Class 4.2. 506 Alkaline earth metals and alkaline earth metal alloys in pyrophoric form are substances of Class 4.2. UN No. 1869 magnesium or magnesium alloys containing more than 50% magnesium as pellets, turnings or ribbons, are substances of Class 4.1. 507 UN No. 3048 aluminium phosphide pesticides, with additives inhibiting the emission of toxic flammable gases are substances of Class 6.1. 508 UN No. 1871 titanium hydride and UN No. 1437 zirconium hydride are substances of Class 4.1. UN No. 2870 aluminium borohydride is a substance of Class 4.2. 509 UN No. 1908 chlorite solution is a substance of Class 8. 510 UN No. 1755 chromic acid solution is a substance of Class 8. 511 UN No. 1625 mercuric nitrate, UN No. 1627 mercurous nitrate and UN No. 2727 thallium nitrate are substances of Class 6.1. Thorium nitrate, solid, uranyl nitrate hexahydrate solution and uranyl nitrate, solid are substances of Class 7. 512 UN No. 1730 antimony pentachloride, liquid, UN No. 1731 anti mony pentachloride solution, UN No. 1732 antimony pentafluoride and UN No. 1733 antimony trichloride are substances of Class 8. 513 UN No. 0224 barium azide , dry or wetted with less than 50% water, by mass, is not permitted for carriage by rail. UN No. 1571 barium azide , wetted with not less than 50% water, by mass, is a substance of Class 4.1. UN No. 1854 barium alloys, pyrophoric, are substances of Class 4.2. UN No. 1445 barium chlorate, solid, UN No. 1446 barium nitrate, UN No. 1447 barium perchlorate, solid, UN No. 1448 barium permanganate, UN No. 1449 barium peroxide, UN No. 2719 barium bromate, UN No. 2741 barium hypoc h lorite with more than 22% available chlorine , UN No. 3405 barium chlorate, solution and UN No. 3406 barium perchlorate, solution, are substances of Class 5.1. UN No. 1565 barium cyanide and UN No. 1884 barium oxide are substances of Class 6.1. 514 UN No. 2464 beryllium nitrate is a substance of Class 5.1. 515 UN No. 1581 chloropicrin and methyl bromide mixture and UN No. 1582 chloropicrin and methyl chloride mixture are substances of Class 2. 516 UN No. 1912 methyl chloride and methylene chloride mixture is a substance of Class 2. 517 UN No. 1690 sodium fluoride , solid , UN No. 1812 potassium fluoride , solid , UN No. 2505 ammonium fluoride , UN No. 2674 sodium fluorosilicate , UN No. 2856 fluorosilicates , n.o.s . , UN No. 3415 sodium fluoride , solution and UN No. 3422 potassium fluoride , solution , are substances of Class 6.1. 518 UN No. 1463 chromium trioxide, anhydrous (chromic acid, solid) is a substance of Class 5.1. 519 UN No. 1048 hydrogen bromide, anhydrous, is a substance of Class 2. 520 UN No. 1050 hydrogen chloride, anhydrous, is a substance of Class 2. 521 Solid chlorites and hypochlorites are substances of Class 5.1. 522 UN No. 1873 perchloric acid aqueous solution with more than 50% but not more than 72% pure acid, by mass are substances of Class 5.1. Perchloric acid solutions containing more than 72% pure acid, by mass, or mixtures of perchloric acid with any liquid other than water, are not to be accepted for carriage. 523 UN No. 1382 anhydrous potassium sulphide and UN No. 1385 anhydrous sodium sulphide and their hydrates with less than 30% water of crystallization, and UN No. 2318 sodium hydrosulphide with less than 25% water of crystallization are substances of Class 4.2. 524 UN No. 2858 finished zirconium products of a thickness of 18 μ m or more are substances of Class 4.1. 525 Solutions of inorganic cyanides with a total cyanide ion content of more than 30% shall be classified in packing group I, solutions with a total cyanide ion content of more than 3% and not more than 30% in packing group II and solutions with a cyanide ion content of more than 0.3% and not more than 3% in packing group III. 526 UN No. 2000 celluloid is assigned to Class 4.1. 527 (Reserved) 528 UN No. 1353 fibres or fabrics impregnated with weakly nitrated cellulose, non - self heating are substances of Class 4.1. 529 UN No. 0135 mercury fulminate , wetted with not less than 20% water, or mixture of alcohol and water, by mass, is not permitted for carriage by rail. Mercurous chloride (calomel) is a substance of Class 6.1 (UN No. 2025 ). 530 UN No. 3293 hydrazine, aqueous solution with not more than 37% hydrazine, by mass, is a substance of Class 6.1. 531 Mixture s having a flash-point below 23 °C and containing more than 55% nitrocellulose, whatever its nitrogen content or containing not more than 55% nitrocellulose with a nitrogen content above 12.6% (by dry mass), are substances of Class 1 (see UN Nos. 0340 or 0342) or of Class 4.1 (UN Nos. 2555, 2556 or 2557) . 532 UN No. 2672 ammonia solution containing not less than 10% but not more than 35% ammonia is a substance of Class 8. 533 UN No. 1198 formaldehyde solutions, flammable are substances of Class 3. Formaldehyde solutions, non-flammable, with less than 25% formaldehyde are not subject to the requirements of RID . 534 While in some climatic conditions, petrol (gasoline) may have a vapour pressure at 50 °C of more than 110 kPa (1.10 bar) but not more than 150 kPa (1.50 bar) it is to continue to be considered as a substance having a vapour pressure at 50 °C of not more than 110 kPa (1.10 bar). 535 UN No. 1469 lead nitrate, UN No. 1470 lead perchlorate , solid and UN No. 3408 lead perchlorate, solution are substances of Class 5.1. 536 For naphthalene, solid, see UN No. 1334. 537 UN No. 2869 titanium trichloride mixture, not pyrophoric, is a substance of Class 8. 538 For sulphur (in the solid state), see UN No. 1350. 539 Solutions of isocyanates having a flash-point of not less than 23 ° C are substances of Class 6.1. 540 UN No. 1326 hafnium powder, wetted, UN No. 1352 titanium powder, wetted or UN No. 1358 zirconium powder, wetted, with not less than 25% water, are substances of Class 4.1. 541 Nitrocellulose mixtures with a water content, alcohol content or plasticizer content lower than the stated limits are substances of Class 1. 542 Talc containing tremolite and/or actinolite is covered by this entry. 543 UN No. 1005 ammonia, anhydrous, UN No. 3318 ammonia solution with more than 50% ammonia and UN No. 2073 ammonia solution, with more than 35% but not more than 50% ammonia, are substances of Class 2. Ammonia solutions with not more than 10% ammonia are not subject to the requirements of RID. 544 UN No . 1032 dimethylamine , anhydrous , UN No . 1036 ethylamine , UN No . 1061 methylamine , anhydrous and UN No . 1083 trimethylamine , anhydrous , are substances of Class 2. 545 UN No. 0401 dipicryl sulphide, wetted with less than 10% water by mass is a substance of Class 1. 546 UN No. 2009 zirconium, dry, finished sheets, strip or coiled wire, in thicknesses of less than 18 μ m, is a substance of Class 4.2. Zirconium, dry, finished sheets, strip or coi led wire, in thicknesses of 254 μ m or more, is not subject to the requirements of RID. 547 UN No. 2210 maneb or UN No. 2210 maneb preparations in self-heating form are substances of Class 4.2. 548 Chlorosilanes which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases, are substances of Class 4.3. 549 Chlorosilanes havin g a flash-point of less than 23 °C and which, in contact with water, do not emit flammable gases are substances of Class 3. Chlorosilanes having a flash point e qual to or greater than 23 °C and which, in contact with water, do not emit flammable gases are substances of Class 8. 550 UN No. 1333 cerium in slabs, rods or ingots is a substance of Class 4.1. 551 Solutions of these isocyanates having a flash-point be low 23 ° C are substances of Class 3. 552 Metals and metal alloys in powdered or other flammable form, liable to spontaneous combustion, are substances of Class 4.2. Metals and metal alloys in powdered or other flammable form which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases are substances of Class 4.3. 553 This mixture of hydrogen peroxide and peroxyacetic acid shall, in laboratory testing (see Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part II, section 20), neither detonate in the cavitated state nor deflagrate at all and shall show no effect when heated under confinement nor any explosive power. The formulation shall be thermally stable (self-accelerating decomposition temperature 60 °C or higher for a 50 kg package), and a liquid compatible with peroxyacetic acid shall be used for desensitization. Formulations not meeting these criteria are to be regarded as substances of Class 5.2 (see Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part II, paragraph 20.4.3 (g)). 554 Metal hydrides which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases are substances of Class 4.3. UN No. 2870 aluminium borohydride or UN No. 2870 aluminium borohydride in devices is a substance of Class 4.2. 555 Dust and powder of metals in non-spontaneously combustible form, non-toxic which nevertheless, in contact with water, emit flammable gases, are substances of Class 4.3. 556 (Deleted) 557 Dust and powder of metals in pyrophoric form are substances of Class 4.2. 558 Metals and metal alloys in pyrophoric form are substances of Class 4.2. Metals and metal alloys which, in contact with water, do not emit flammable gases and are not pyrophoric or self-heating, but which are easily ignited, are substances of Class 4.1. 559 (Deleted) 560 An elevated temperature liquid, n.o.s . at or above 100 °C (including molten metals and molten salts) and, for a substance having a flashpoint, at a temperature below its flashpoint, is a substance of Class 9 (UN No. 3257). 561 Chloroformates having predominantly corrosive properties are substances of Class 8. 562 Spontaneously combustible organometallic compounds are substances of Class 4.2. Water-reactive organometallic compounds, flammable, are substances of Class 4.3. 563 UN No. 1905 selenic acid is a substance of Class 8. 564 UN No. 2443 vanadium oxytrichloride , UN No. 2444 vanadium tetrachloride and UN No. 2475 vanadium trichloride are substances of Class 8. 565 Unspecified wastes resulting from medical/veterinary treatment of humans/animals or from biological research, and which are unlikely to contain substances of Class 6.2 shall be assigned to this entry. Decontaminated clinical wastes or wastes resulting from biological research which previously contained infectious substances are not subject to the requirements of Class 6.2. 566 UN No. 2030 hydrazine aqueous solution, with more than 37% hydrazine , b y mass, is a substance of Class 8. 567 ( Deleted ) 568 Barium azide with a water content lower than the stated limit is a substance of Class 1, UN No. 0224 and is not permitted for carriage by rail. 569–579 (Reserved) 580 (Deleted) 581 This entry covers mixtures of propadiene with 1 to 4% methylacetylene as well as the following mixtures: Mixture Content, % by volume Permitted technical name for purposes of 5.4.1.1 Methylacetylene and propadiene , not more than Propane and propylene, not more than С 4 -saturated hydrocarbons, not less than P 1 63 24 14 "Mixture P 1" P 2 48 50 5 "Mixture P 2" 582 This entry covers, inter alia, mixtures of gases indicated by the letter R ..., with the following properties: Mixture Maximum vapour pressure at 70 °C (MPa) Minimum density at 50 °C (kg/l) Permitted technical name for purposes of 5.4.1.1 F 1 1.3 1.30 " Mixture F 1" F 2 1.9 1.21 " Mixture F 2 " F 3 3.0 1.09 " Mixture F 3 " NOTE 1: Trichlorofluoromethane (refrigerant R 11), 1,1,2-trichloro-1,2,2-trifluoro ethane (refrigerant R 113), 1,1,1-trichloro-2,2,2-trifluoroethane (refrigerant R 113a), 1-chloro-1,2,2-trifluoroethane (refrigerant R 133) and 1-chloro-1,1,2-trifluoroethane (refrigerant R 133b) are not substances of Class 2. They may, however, enter into the composition of mixtures F 1 to F 3. 2: The reference densities correspond to the densities of dichlorofluoromethane (1.30 kg/l), dichloridifluoromethane (1.21 kg/l) and chlorodifluoromethane (1.09 kg/l). 583 This entry covers, inter alia, mixtures of gases with the following properties: Mixture Maximum vapour pressure at 70 °C (MPa) Minimum density at 50 °C (kg/l) Permitted technical name (a) for purposes of 5.4.1.1 A 1.1 0.525 "Mixture A" or "Butane" A 01 1.6 0.516 "Mixture A 01" or "Butane" A 02 1.6 0.505 "Mixture A 02" or "Butane" A 0 1.6 0.495 "Mixture A 0" or "Butane" A 1 2.1 0.485 "Mixture A 1" B 1 2.6 0.474 "Mixture B 1" B 2 2.6 0.463 "Mixture B 2" B 2.6 0.450 "Mixture B" C 3.1 0.440 "Mixture C" or "Propane" (a) For carriage in tanks, the trade names "Butane" or "Propane" may be used only as a complement. 584 This gas is not subject to the requirements of RID when: – it contains not more than 0.5% air in the gaseous state; – it is contained in metal capsules ( sodors , sparklets) free from defects which may impair their strength; – the leakproofness of the closure of the capsule is ensured; – a capsule contains not more than 25 g of this gas; – a capsule contains not more than 0.75 g of this gas per cm 3 of capacity. 585 (Deleted) 586 Hafnium, titanium and zirconium powders shall contain a visible excess of water. Hafnium, titanium and zirconium powders, wetted, mechanically pro duced, of a particle size of 53 μ m and over, or chemically produced, of a particle size of 840 μ m and over, are not subject to the requirements of RID. 587 Barium stearate and barium titanate are not subject to the requirements of RID. 588 Solid hydrated forms of aluminium bromide and aluminium chloride are not subject to the requirements of RID. 589 (Deleted) 590 Ferric chloride hexahydrate is not subject to the requirements of RID. 591 Lead sulphate with not more than 3% free acid is not subject to the requirements of Class 8 of RID. 592 Uncleaned empty packagings (including empty IBCs and large packagings ), empty tank- wagons , empty demountable tanks, empty portable tanks, empty tank-containers and empty small containers which have contained this substance are not subject to the requirements of RID . 593 This gas, when used for cooling goods not fulfilling the criteria of any class, e.g. medical or biological specimens, if contained in double wall receptacles which comply with the provisions of packing instruction P 203, paragraph (6) for open cryogenic receptacles of 4.1.4.1, is not subject to the requirements of RID except as specified in 5.5.3. 594 The following articles, manufactured and filled according to the provisions applied in the country of manufacture, are not subject to the requirements of RID: (a) UN No. 1044 fire extinguishers provided with protection against inadvertent discharge, when: – they are packaged in a strong outer packaging; or – they are large fire extinguishers which meet the requirements of special packing provision PP 91 of packing instruction P 003 in 4.1.4.1; (b) UN No. 3164 articles, pressurized pneumatic or hydraulic, designed to withstand stresses greater than the internal gas pressure by virtue of transmission of force, intrinsic strength or construction, when they are packaged in a strong outer packaging. NOTE: "Provisions applied in the country of manufacture" means the provisions applicable in the country of manufacture or those applicable in the country of use. 596 Cadmium pigments, such as cadmium sulphides, cadmium sulphoselenides and cadmium salts of higher fatty acids (e.g. cadmium stearate), are not subject to the requirements of RID. 597 Acetic acid solutions with not more than 10% pure acid by mass, are not subject to the requirements of RID. 598 The following are not subject to the requirements of RID : (a) New storage batteries when: – they are secured in such a way that they cannot slip, fall or be damaged; – they are provided with carrying devices, unless they are suitably stacked, e.g. on pallets; – there are no dangerous traces of alkalis or acids on the outside; – they are protected against short circuits. (b) Used storage batteries when: – their cases are undamaged; – they are secured in such a way that they cannot leak, slip, fall or be damaged, e.g. by stacking on pallets; – there are no dangerous traces of alkalis or acids on the outside of the articles; – they are protected against short circuits. "Used storage batteries" means storage batteries carried for recycling at the end of their normal service life. 599 (Deleted) 600 Vanadium pentoxide, fused and solidified, is not subject to the requirements of RID. 601 Pharmaceutical products (medicines) ready for use, which are substances manufactured and packaged for retail sale or distribution for personal or household consumption are not subject to the requirements of RID. 602 Phosphorus sulphides which are not free from yellow and white phosphorus are not to be accepted for carriage. 603 Anhydrous hydrogen cyanide not meeting the description for UN No. 1051 or UN No. 1614 is not to be accepted for carriage. Hydrogen cyanide (hydrocyanic acid) containing less than 3% water is stable, if the pH-value is 2.5 ± 0.5 and the liquid is clear and colourless. 604 (Deleted) 605 (Deleted) 606 (Deleted) 607 Mixtures of potassium nitrate and sodium nitrite with an ammonium salt are not to be accepted for carriage. 608 (Deleted) 609 Tetranitromethane not free from combustible impurities is not to be accepted for carriage. 610 The carriage of this substance, when it contains more than 45% hydrogen cyanide is prohibited. 611 Ammonium nitrate containing more than 0.2% combustible substances (including any organic substance calculated as carbon) is not to be accepted for carriage unless it is a constituent of a substance or article of Class 1. 612 (Reserved) 613 Chloric acid solution containing more than 10% chloric acid and mixtures of chloric acid with any liquid other than water is not to be accepted for carriage. 614 2,3,7,8-tetrachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin (TCDD) in concentrations considered highly toxic according to the criteria in 2.2.61.1 is not to be accepted for carriage. 615 (Reserved) 6 16 Substances containing more than 40% liquid nitric esters shall satisfy the exudation test specified in 2.3.1. 617 In addition to the type of explosive, the commercial name of the particular explosive shall be marked on the package. 618 In receptacles containing 1,2-butadiene, the oxygen concentration in the gaseous phase shall not exceed 50 ml/m 3 . 619–622 (Reserved) 623 UN No. 1829 sulphur trioxide shall be inhibited. Sulphur trioxide, at least 99.95% pure, without inhibitor (non-stabilized), shall not be accepted for carriage by rail. Sulphur tr ioxide, at least 99.95% pure may be carried by road without inhibitor in tanks, provided its temperature is maintained at 32.5 °C or above. 625 Packages containing these articles shall be clearly marked as follows: "UN 1950 AEROSOLS" . 626–63 1 (Reserved) 632 Considered to be spontaneously flammable (pyrophoric). 633 Packages and small containers containing this substance shall bear the following mark : " KEEP AWAY FROM ANY SOURCE OF IGNITION ". This mark shall be in an official language of the forwarding country, and also, if that language is not English, French, German or Italian, in English, French, German or Italian, unless any agreements concluded between the countries concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise. 634 (Deleted) 635 Packages containing these articles need not bear a label conforming to model No. 9 unless the article is fully enclosed by packaging, crates or other means that prevent the ready identification of the article. 636 Up to the intermediate processing facility, lithium cells and batteries with a gross mass of not more than 500 g each, lithium ion cells with a Watt-hour rating of not more than 20 Wh , lithium ion batteries with a Watt-hour rating of not more than 100 Wh , lithium metal cells with a lithium content of not more than 1 g and lithium metal batteries with an aggregate lithium content of not more than 2 g, not contained in equipment, collected and handed over for carriage for sorting, disposal or recycling, together with or without other non-lithium cells or batteries , are not subject to the other provisions of RID including special provision 376 and 2.2.9.1.7, if the following conditions are met: (a) The cells and batteries are packed according to packing instruction P 909 of 4.1.4.1 except for the additional requirements 1 and 2; (b) A quality assurance system is in place to ensure that the total amount of lithium cells and batteries per wagon or large container does not exceed 333 kg; NOTE: The total quantity of lithium cells and batteries in the mix may be assessed by means of a statistical method included in the quality assurance system. A copy of the quality assurance records shall be made available to the competent authority upon request. (c) Packages are marked "LITHIUM BATTERIES FOR DISPOSAL" or "LITHIUM BATTERIES FOR RECYCLING" as appropriate. 637 Genetically modified microorganisms and genetically modified organisms are those which are not dangerous for humans and animals, but which could alter animals, plants, microbiological substances and ecosystems in such a way as cannot occur naturally. Genetically modified microorganisms and genetically modified organisms are not subject to the provisions of RID when authorized for use by the competent authorities of the countries of origin, transit and destination. Live vertebrate or invertebrate animals shall not be used to carry these substances classified under this UN number unless the substance can be carried in no other way. 638 Substances related to self-reactive substances (see 2.2.41.1.19). 639 See 2.2.2.3, classification code 2F, UN No. 1965, NOTE 2. 640 The physical and technical characteristics mentioned in column (2) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 determine different tank codes for the carriage of substances of the same packing group in RID tanks. In order to identify these physical and technical characteristics of the product carried in the tank , the following shall be added, to the particulars required in the transport document , only in case of carriage in RID tanks: "Special provision 640X" where "X" is the applicable capital letter appearing after the reference to special provision 640 in column (6) of Table A of Chapter 3.2. These particulars may, however, be dispensed with in the case of carriage in the type of tank which, for substances of a specific packing group of a specific UN number, meets at least the most stringent requirements. 642 Except as authorized under 1.1.4.2, this entry of the UN Model Regulations shall not be used for the carriage of fertilizer ammoniating solutions with free ammonia. Otherwise, for carriage of ammonia solution, see UN Nos. 2073, 2672 and 3318. 643 Stone or aggregate asphalt mixture is not subject to the requirements for Class 9. 644 This substance is admitted for carriage, provided that: – The pH is between 5 and 7 measured in an aqueous solution of 10% of the substance carried; – The solution does not contain more than 93 % ammonium nitrate; – The solution does not contain more than 0.2% combustible material or chlorine compounds in quantities such that the chlorine level exceeds 0.02%. 645 The classification code as mentioned in Column (3b) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 shall be used only with the approval of the competent authority of a n RID Contracting State prior to carriage. The approval shall be given in writing as a classification approval certificate (see 5.4.1.2.1 (g)) and shall be provided with a unique reference. When assignment to a division is made in accordance with the procedure in 2.2.1.1.7.2, the competent authority may require the default classification to be verified on the basis of test data derived from Test Series 6 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part I, Section 16. 646 Carbon made by steam activation process is not subject to the requirements of RID. 647 The carriage of vinegar and acetic acid food grade with not more than 25% pure acid by mass is subject only to the following requirements: (a) Packagings , including IBCs and large packagings , and tanks shall be manufactured from stainless steel or plastic material which is permanently resistant to corrosion of vinegar/acetic acid food grade; (b) Packagings , including IBCs and large packagings , and tanks shall be subjected to a visual inspection by the owner at least once a year. The results of the inspections shall be recorded and the records kept for at least one year. Damaged packagings , including IBCs and large packagings , and tanks shall not be filled; (c) Packagings , including IBCs and large packagings , and tanks shall be filled in a way that no product is spilled or adheres to the outer surface; (d) Seals and closures shall be resistant to vinegar/acetic acid food grade. Packagings , including IBCs and large packagings , and tanks shall be hermetically sealed by the packer or the filler so that under normal conditions of carriage there will be no leakage; (e) Combination packagings with inner packaging made of glass or plastic (see packing instruction P001 in 4.1.4.1) which fulfil the general packing requirements of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.4, 4.1.1.5, 4.1.1.6, 4.1.1.7 and 4.1.1.8 may be used; The other provisions of RID do not apply. 648 Articles impregnated with this pesticide, such as fibreboard plates, paper strips, cotton-wool balls, sheets of plastics material, in hermetically closed wrappings, are not subject to the provisions of RID. 649 (Deleted) 650 Waste consisting of packaging residues, solidified residues and liquid residues of paint may be carried under the conditions of packing group II. In addition to the provisions of UN No. 1263 , packing group II, the waste may also be packed and carried as follows: ( a) The waste may be packed in accordance with packing instruction P002 of 4.1.4.1 or to packing instruction IBC06 of 4.1.4.2; (b) The waste may be packed in flexible IBCs of types 13H3, 13H4 and 13H5 in overpacks with complete walls; (c) Testing of packagings and IBCs indicated under (a) or (b) may be carried out in accordance with the requirements of Chapters 6.1 or 6.5, as appropriate, in relation to solids, at the packing group II performance level. The tests shall be carried out on packagings and IBCs, filled with a representative sample of the waste, as prepared for carriage; (d) Carriage in bulk in sheeted wagons, movable roof wagons, closed containers or sheeted large containers, all with complete walls is allowed. The body of wagons or containers shall be leakproof or rendered leakproof, for example by means of a suitable and sufficiently stout inner lining; (e) If the waste is carried under the conditions of this special provision, the goods shall be declared in accordance with 5.4.1.1.3.1 in the transport document , as follows: "UN 1263 WASTE PAINT, 3, II", or "UN 1263 WASTE PAINT, 3, PG II" . 651 (Reserved) 652 (Reserved) 653 The carriage of this gas in cylinders having a test pressure capacity product of maximum 15.2 MPa · litre (152 bar · litre ) is not subject to the other provisions of RID if the following conditions are met: – The provisions for construction , testing and filling of cylinders are observed; – The cylinders are contained in outer packagings which at least meet the requirements of Part 4 for combination packagings . The general provisions of packing of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2 and 4.1.1.5 to 4.1.1.7 shall be observed; – The cylinders are not packed together with other dangerous goods; – The total gross mass of a package does not exceed 30 kg; and – Each package is clearly and durably marked with "UN 1006" for argon compressed, "UN 1013" for carbon dioxide, "UN 1046" for helium compressed or "UN 1066" for nitrogen, compressed. This mark is displayed within a diamond-shaped area surrounded by a line that measures at least 100 mm by 100 mm. 654 Waste lighters collected separately and consigned in accordance with 5.4.1.1.3.1 may be carried under this entry for the purposes of disposal. They need not be protected against inadvertent discharge , provided that measures are taken to prevent the dangerous build up of pressure and dangerous atmospheres. Waste lighters, other than those leaking or severely deformed, shall be packed in accordance with packing instruction P003. In addition the following provisions shall apply: – only rigid packagings of a maximum capacity of 60 litres shall be used; – the packagings shall be filled with water or any other appropriate protection material to avoid any ignition; – under normal conditions of carriage all ignition devices of the lighters shall fully be covered by the protection material; – the packagings shall be adequately vented to prevent the creation of flammable atmosphere and the build up of pressure; – the packages shall only be carried in ventilated or open wagons or containers. Leaking or severely deformed lighters shall be carried in salvage packagings , provided appropriate measures are taken to ensure there is no dangerous build up of pressure. NOTE: Special provision 201 and special packing provisions PP84 and RR5 of packing instruction P002 in 4.1.4.1 do not apply to waste lighters. 655 Cylinders designed, constructed, approved and marked in accordance with Directive 97/23/EC or Directive 2014/68/EU and used for breathing apparatus may be carried without conforming to Chapter 6.2, provided that they are subject to inspections and tests specified in 6.2.1.6.1 and the interval between tests specified in packing instruction P200 in 4.1.4.1 is not exceeded. The pressure used for the hydraulic pressure test is the pressure marked on the cylinder in accordance with Directive 97/23/EC or Directive 2014/68/EU . 656 (Deleted) 657 This entry shall be used for the technically pure substance only; for mixtures of LPG components, see UN No. 1965 or see UN No. 1075 in conjunction with NOTE 2 in 2.2.2.3. 658 UN No. 1057 LIGHTERS complying with standard EN ISO 9994: 2019 "Lighters – Safety Specification" and UN No. 1057 LIGHTER REFILLS, may be carried subject only to the provisions of 3.4.1 (a) to (g), 3.4.2 (except for the total gross mass of 30 kg), 3.4.3 (except for the total gross mass of 20 kg), 3.4.11 and 3.4.12, first sentence, provided the following conditions are met: (a) The total gross mass of each package is not more than 10 kg; (b) Not more than 100 kg gross mass of such packages is carried in a wagon or large container ; and (c) Each outer packaging is clearly and durably marked with "UN 1057 LIGHTERS" or "UN 1057 LIGHTER REFILLS", as appropriate. 659 Substances to which PP 86 or TP 7 are assigned in Column (9a) and Column (11) of Table A in Chapter 3.2 and therefore require air to be eliminated from the vapour space, shall not be used for carriage under this UN number but shall be carried under their respective UN numbers as listed in Table A of Chapter 3.2. NOTE: See also 2.2.2.1.7. 660 (Deleted) 661 (Deleted) 662 Cylinders not conforming to the provisions of Chapter 6.2 which are used exclusively on board a ship or aircraft, may be carried for the purpose of filling or inspection and subsequent return, provided the cylinders are designed and constructed in accordance with a standard recognized by the competent authority of the country of approval and all the other relevant requirements of RID are met including: (a) The cylinders shall be carried with valve protection in conformity with 4.1.6.8; (b) The cylinders shall be marked and labelled in conformity with 5.2.1 and 5.2.2; and (c) All the relevant filling requirements of packing instruction P 200 of 4.1.4.1 shall be complied with. The transport document shall include the following statement: " Carriage in accordance with special provision 662" . 663 This entry may only be used for packagings , large packagings or IBCs, or parts thereof, which have contained dangerous goods which are carried for disposal, recycling or recovery of their material, other than reconditioning, repair, routine maintenance, remanufacturing or reuse, and which have been emptied to the extent that only residues of dangerous goods adhering to the packaging parts are present when they are handed over for carriage. Scope: Residues present in the packagings , discarded, empty, uncleaned shall only be of dangerous goods of classes 3, 4.1, 5.1, 6.1, 8 or 9. In addition, they shall not be: – Substances assigned to packing group I or that have "0" assigned in Column (7a) of Table A of Chapter 3.2; nor – Substances classified as desensitized explosive substances of Class 3 or Class 4.1; nor – Substances classified as self-reactive substances of Class 4.1; nor – Radioactive material; nor – Asbestos (UN 2212 and UN 2590), polychlorinated biphenyls (UN 2315 and UN 3432) and polyhalogenated biphenyls , halogenated monomethyldiphenylmethanes or polyhalogenated terphenyls (UN 3151 and UN 3152). General provisions: Packagings , discarded, empty, uncleaned with residues presenting a primary or subsidiary hazard of Class 5.1 shall not be loaded in bulk together with packagings , discarded, empty, uncleaned with residues presenting a hazard of other classes. Packagings , discarded, empty, uncleaned with residues presenting a primary or subsidiary hazard of Class 5.1 shall not be packed with other packagings , discarded, empty, uncleaned with residues presenting hazards of other classes in the same outer packaging. Documented sorting procedures shall be implemented on the loading site to ensure compliance with the provisions applicable to this entry. NOTE: All the other provisions of RID apply. 664 (Reserved) 665 When carried in bulk, hard coal, coke and anthracite, meeting the classification criteria of Class 4.2, packing group III may also be carried in open wagons or containers, provided that (a) The coal is conveyed from fresh extraction directly into the wagon or container (without measuring the temperature) or (b) The temperature of the cargo is not higher than 60 °C during or immediately after loading into the wagon or container. Using suitable measuring methods, the filler shall ensure and document that the maximum permissible temperature of the cargo is not exceeded during or immediately after loading the wagons or containers. The consignor shall ensure that the following statement is included in the document accompanying the consignment (such as a bill of lading, cargo manifest or CMR/CIM consignment note): " Carriage in accordance with special provision 665 of RID ". The other provisions of RID do not apply. 666 Vehicles and battery powered equipment, referred to by special provision 388, when carried as a load, as well as any dangerous goods they contain that are necessary for their operation or the operation of their equipment, are not subject to any other provisions of RID, provided the following conditions are met: (a) For liquid fuels, any valves between the engine or equipment and the fuel tank shall be closed during carriage unless it is essential for the equipment to remain operational. Where appropriate, the vehicles shall be loaded upright and secured against falling; (b) For gaseous fuels, the valve between the gas tank and engine shall be closed and the electric contact open unless it is essential for the equipment to remain operational ; (c) Metal hydride storage systems shall be approved by the competent authority of the country of manufacture. If the country of manufacture is not an RID Contracting State the approval shall be recognized by the competent authority of an RID Contracting State; (d) The provisions of (a) and (b) do not apply to vehicles which are empty of liquid or gaseous fuels. NOTE 1: A vehicle is considered to be empty of liquid fuel when the liquid fuel tank has been drained and the vehicle cannot be operated due to a lack of fuel. Vehicle components such as fuel lines, fuel filters and injectors do not need to be cleaned, drained or purged to be considered empty of liquid fuels. In addition, the liquid fuel tank does not need to be cleaned or purged. 2: A vehicle is considered to be empty of gaseous fuels when the gaseous fuel tanks are empty of liquid (for liquefied gases), the pressure in the tanks does not exceed 2 bar and the fuel shut-off or isolation valve is closed and secured. 667 (a) The provisions of 2.2.9.1.7 (a) do not apply when pre-production prototype lithium cells or batteries or lithium cells or batteries of a small production run, consisting of not more than 100 cells or batteries, are installed in the vehicle, engine or machinery ; (b) The provisions of 2.2.9.1.7 do not apply to lithium cells or batteries installed in damaged or defective vehicles, engines or machinery . In such cases the following conditions shall be met: ( i ) If the damage or defect has no significant impact on the safety of the cell or battery, damaged and defective vehicles, engines or machinery , may be carried under the conditions defined in special provisions 363 or 666, as appropriate; (ii) If the damage or defect has a significant impact on the safety of the cell or battery, the lithium cell or battery shall be removed and carried according to special provision 376. However, if it is not possible to safely remove the cell or battery or it is not possible to verify the status of the cell or battery, the vehicle, engine or machinery may be towed or carried as specified in ( i ). (c) The procedures described in (b) also apply to damaged lithium cells or batteries in vehicles, engines, or machinery. 668 Elevated temperature substances for the purpose of applying road markings are not subject to the requirements of RID, provided that the following conditions are met: (a) They do not fulfil the criteria of any class other than Class 9; (b) The temperature of the outer surface of the boiler does not exceed 70 °C; (c) The boiler is closed in such a way that any loss of product is prevented during carriage; (d) The maximum capacity of the boiler is limited to 3 000 l. 669 A trailer fitted with equipment, powered by a liquid or gaseous fuel or an electric energy storage and production system, that is intended for use during carriage operated by this trailer, shall be assigned to UN numbers 3166 or 3171 and be subject to the same conditions as specified for these UN numbers, when carried as a load on a wagon, provided that the total capacity of the tanks containing liquid fuel does not exceed 500 litres. 670 (a) Lithium cells and batteries installed in equipment from private households collected and handed over for carriage for depollution, dismantling, recycling or disposal are not subject to the other provisions of RID including special provision 376 and 2.2.9.1.7 when: ( i ) They are not the main power source for the operation of the equipment in which they are contained; (ii) The equipment in which they are contained does not contain any other lithium cell or battery used as the main power source; and (iii) They are afforded protection by the equipment in which they are contained. Examples for cells and batteries covered by this paragraph are button cells used for data integrity in household appliances (e.g. refrigerators, washing machines, dishwashers) or in other electrical or electronic equipment; (b) Up to the intermediate processing facility lithium cells and batteries contained in equipment from private households not meeting the requirements of (a) collected and handed over for carriage for depollution, dismantling, recycling or disposal are not subject to the other provisions of RID including special provision 376 and 2.2.9.1.7, if the following conditions are met: ( i ) The equipment is packed in accordance with packing instruction P 909 of 4.1.4.1 except for the additional requirements 1 and 2; or it is packed in strong outer packagings , e.g. specially designed collection receptacles, which meet the following requirements: – The packagings shall be constructed of suitable material and be of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use. The packagings need not meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3; – Appropriate measures shall be taken to minimize the damage of the equipment when filling and handling the packaging, e.g. use of rubber mats; and – The packagings shall be constructed and closed so as to prevent any loss of contents during carriage, e.g. by lids, strong inner liners, covers for transport. Openings designed for filling are acceptable if they are constructed so as to prevent loss of content; (ii) A quality assurance system is in place to ensure that the total amount of lithium cells and batteries per wagon or large container unit does not exceed 333 k g; NOTE: The total quantity of lithium cells and batteries in the equipment from private households may be assessed by means of a statistical method included in the quality assurance system. A copy of the quality assurance records shall be made available to the competent authority upon request. (iii) Packages are marked "LITHIUM BATTERIES FOR DISPOSAL" or "LITHIUM BATTERIES FOR RECYCLING" as appropriate. If equipment containing lithium cells or batteries is carried unpackaged or on pallets in accordance with packing instruction P 909 (3) of 4.1.4.1, this mark may alternatively be affixed to the external surface of the wagons or large containers). NOTE: "Equipment from private households" means equipment which comes from private households and equipment which comes from commercial, industrial, institutional and other sources which, because of its nature and quantity, is similar to that from private households. Equipment likely to be used by both private households and users other than private households shall in any event be considered to be equipment from private households. 671 For the purposes of the exemption related to quantities carried per wagon or large container (see 1.1.3.6), the transport category shall be determined in relation to the packing group (see paragraph 3 of special provision 251): – Transport category 3 for kits assigned to packing group III; – Transport category 2 for kits assigned to packing group II; – Tran sport category 1 for kits assigned to packing group I. Kits containing only dangerous goods to which no packing group is assigned shall be allocated to transport category 2 for completion of transport documents and the exemption related to quantities carried per wagon or large container (see 1.1.3.6). 672 Articles such as machinery, apparatus or devices carried under this entry and in conformity with special provision 301 are not subject to any other provision of RID provided they are either: – packed in a strong outer packaging constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging’s capacity and its intended use, and meeting the applicable requirements of 4.1.1.1; or – carried without outer packaging if the article is constructed and designed so that the receptacles containing the dangerous goods are afforded adequate protection. 673 For the carriage of this article the requirements of Chapter 1.10 and 5.3, of Section 5.4.3 and of Chapter 7.2 need not be applied. 674 This special provision applies to periodic inspection and test of over-moulded cylinders as defined in 1.2.1. Over-moulded cylinders subject to 6.2.3.5.3.1 shall be subject to periodic inspection and test in accordance with 6.2.1.6.1, adapted by the following alternative method: – Substitute test required in 6.2.1.6.1 d) by alternative destructive tests; – Perform specific additional destructive tests related to the characteristics of over-moulded cylinders. The procedures and requirements of this alternative method are described below. Alternative method: (a) General The following provisions apply to over-moulded cylinders produced serially and based on welded steel cylinder shells in accordance with EN 1442:2017, EN 14140:2014 + AC:2015 or annex I, parts 1 to 3 to Council Directive 84/527/EEC. The design of the over-moulding shall prevent water from penetrating on to the inner steel cylinder shell . The conversion of the steel cylinder shell to an over-moulded cylinder shall comply with the relevant requirements of EN 1442:2017 and EN 14140:2014 + AC:2015. Over-moulded cylinders shall be equipped with self-closing valves. (b) Basic population A basic population of over-moulded cylinders is defined as the production of cylinders from only one over-moulding manufacturer using new inner steel cylinder shells manufactured by only one manufacturer within one calendar year, based on the same design type, the same materials and production processes. (c) Sub-groups of a basic population Within the above defined basic population, over-moulded cylinders belonging to different owners shall be separated into specific sub-groups, one per owner. If the whole basic population is owned by one owner, the sub-group equals the basic population. (d) Traceability Inner steel cylinder shell marks in accordance with 6.2.3.9 shall be repeated on the over-moulding. In addition, each over-moulded cylinder shall be fitted with an individual resilient electronic identification device. The detailed characteristics of the over-moulded cylinders shall be recorded by the owner in a central database. The database shall be used to: – Identify the specific sub-group; – Make available to inspection bodies, filling centres and competent authorities the specific technical characteristics of the cylinders consisting of at least the following: serial number, steel cylinder shell production batch, over-moulding production batch, date of over-moulding; – Identify the cylinder by linking the electronic device to the database with the serial number; – Check individual cylinder history and determine measures (e.g. filling, sampling, retesting, withdrawal); – Record performed measures including the date and the address of where it was done. The recorded data shall be kept available by the owner of the over-moulded cylinders for the entire life of the sub-group. (e) Sampling for statistical assessment The sampling shall be random among a sub-group as defined in sub-paragraph (c). The size of each sample per sub-group shall be in accordance with the Table in sub-paragraph (g). (f) Test procedure for destructive testing The inspection and test required by 6.2.1.6.1 shall be carried out except (d) which shall be substituted by the following test procedure: – Burst test (according to EN 1442:2017 or EN 14140:2014 + AC:2015). In addition, the following tests shall be performed: – Adhesion test (according to EN 1442:2017 or EN 14140:2014 + AC:2015); – Peeling and Corrosion tests (according to EN ISO 4628-3:2016). Adhesion test, peeling and corrosion tests, and burst test shall be performed on each related sample according to the Table in sub-paragraph (g) and shall be conducted after the first 3 years in service and every 5 years thereafter. (g) Statistical evaluation of test results – Method and minimum requirements The procedure for statistical evaluation according to the related rejection criteria is described in the following. Test interval (years) Type of test Standard Rejection criteria Sampling out of a sub-group After 3 years in service (see (f)) Burst test EN 1442:2017 Burst pressure point of the representative sample must be above the lower limit of tolerance interval on the Sample Performance Chart Ω m ≥ 1 + Ω s × k3(n;p;1-α) a No individual test result shall be less than the test pressure or Q/200 whichever is lower, and with a minimum of 20 per sub-group (Q) Peeling and corrosion EN ISO 4628-3:2016 Max corrosion grade: Ri2 Q/1000 Adhesion of polyurethane ISO 2859-1:1999 + A1:2011 EN 1442:2017 EN 14140:2014 + AC:2015 Adhesion value > 0.5 N/mm 2 See ISO 2859-1:1999 + A1:2011 applied to Q/1000 Every 5 years there after (see (f)) Burst test EN 1442:2017 Burst pressure point of the representative sample must be above the lower limit of tolerance interval on the Sample Performance Chart Ω m ≥ 1 + Ω s × k3(n;p;1-α) a No individual test result shall be less than the test pressure or Q/100 whichever is lower, and with a minimum of 40 per sub-group (Q) Every 5 years there after (see (f)) Peeling and corrosion EN ISO 4628-3:2016 Max corrosion grade: Ri2 Q/1000 Adhesion of polyurethane ISO 2859-1:1999 + A1:2011 EN 1442:2017 EN 14140:2014 + AC:2015 Adhesion value > 0.5 N/mm 2 See ISO 2859-1:1999 + A1:2011 applied to Q/1000 a Burst pressure point (BPP) of the representative sample is used for the evaluation of test results by using a Sample Performance Chart: Step 1: Determination of the burst pressure point (BPP) of a representative sample Each sample is represented by a point whose coordinates are the mean value of burst test results and the standard deviation of burst test results, each normalised to the relevant test pressure. with x = sample mean value; s = sample standard deviation; PH = test pressure Step 2: Plotting on a Sample Performance Chart Each BPP is plotted on a Sample Performance Chart with following axis: – Abscissa: Standard Deviation normalised to test pressure (Ω s ) – Ordinate: Mean value normalised to test pressure (Ω m ) Step 3: Determination of the relevant lower limit of tolerance interval in the Sample Performance Chart Results for burst pressure shall first be checked according to the Joint Test (multidirectional test) using a significance level of α = 0.05 (see paragraph 7 of ISO 5479:1997) to determine whether the distribution of results for each sample is normal or non-normal. – For a normal distribution, the determination of the relevant lower limit of tolerance is given in step 3.1. – For a non-normal distribution, the determination of the relevant lower limit of tolerance is given in step 3.2. Step 3.1: Lower limit of tolerance interval for results following a normal distribution In accordance with the standard ISO 16269-6:2014, and considering that the variance is unknown, the unilateral statistical tolerance interval shall be considered for a confidence level of 95% and a fraction of population equal to 99.9999%. By application in the Sample Performance Chart, the lower limit of tolerance interval is represented by a line of constant survival rate defined by the formula: Ω m = 1 + Ω s × k3(n;p;1- α ) with k3 = factor function of n, p and 1-α; p = proportion of the population selected for the tolerance interval (99.9999%); 1-α = confidence level (95%); n = sample size. The value for k3 dedicated to Normal Distributions shall be taken from the Table at end of Step 3. Step 3.2: Lower limit of tolerance interval for results following a non-normal distribution The unilateral statistical tolerance interval shall be calculated for a confidence level of 95% and a fraction of population equal to 99.9999%. The lower limit of tolerance is represented by a line of constant survival rate defined by the formula given in previous step 3.1, with factors k3 based and calculated on the properties of a Weibull Distribution. The value for k3 dedicated to Weibull Distributions shall be taken from the Table below at end of Step 3. Table for k3 p = 99.9999% and (1- α ) = 0.95 Sample size n Normal distribution k3 Weibull distribution k3 20 6.901 16.021 22 6.765 15.722 24 6.651 15.472 26 6.553 15.258 28 6.468 15.072 30 6.393 14.909 35 6.241 14.578 40 6.123 14.321 45 6.028 14.116 50 5.949 13.947 60 5.827 13.683 70 5.735 13.485 80 5.662 13.329 90 5.603 13.203 100 5.554 13.098 150 5.393 12.754 200 5.300 12.557 250 5.238 12.426 300 5.193 12.330 400 5.131 12.199 500 5.089 12.111 1000 4.988 11.897 ∞ 4.753 11.408 NOTE: If sample size is between two values, the closest lower sample size shall be selected. (h) Measures if the acceptance criteria are not met If a result of the burst test, peeling and corrosion test or adhesion test does not comply with the criteria detailed in the Table in paragraph (g), the affected sub-group of over-moulded cylinders shall be segregated by the owner for further investigations and not be filled or made available for transport and use. In agreement with the competent authority or the Xa-body which issued the design approval, additional tests shall be performed to determine the root cause of the failure. If the root cause cannot be proved to be limited to the affected sub-group of the owner, the competent authority or the Xa-body shall take measures concerning the whole basic population and potentially other years of production. If the root cause can be proved to be limited to a part of the affected sub-group, not affected parts may be authorized by the competent authority to return to service. It shall be proved that no individual over-moulded cylinder returning to service is affected. (i) Filling centre requirements The owner shall make available to the competent authority documentary evidence that the filling centres: – Comply with the provisions of packing instruction P 200 (7) of 4.1.4.1 and that the requirements of the standard on pre-fill inspections referenced in the Table of packing instruction P 200 (11) of 4.1.4.1 are fulfilled and correctly applied; – Have the appropriate means to identify over-moulded cylinders through the electronic identification device; – Have access to the database as defined in (d); – Have the capacity to update the database; – Apply a quality system, according to the standard ISO 9000 (series) or equivalent, certified by an accredited independent body recognized by the competent authority. 675 For packages containing these dangerous goods, mixed loading with substances and articles of Class 1, with the exception of 1.4S, shall be prohibited. 676 For the carriage of packages containing polymerizing substances the provisions of special provision 386 need not be applied, when carried for disposal or recycling provided the following conditions are met: ( a) Before loading an examination has shown that there is no significant deviation between the outside temperature of the package and the ambient temperature; (b) The carriage is effected within a period of not more than 24 hours from that examination; (c) The packages are protected from direct sunlight and from the impact of other sources of heat (e.g. additional loads that are being carried above ambient temperature) during carriage; (d) The ambient temperatures during the carriage are below 45 °C; (e) Wagons and containers are adequately ventilated; (f) The substances are packed in packages with a maximum capacity of 1000 litres. In assessing the substances for carriage under the conditions of this special provision, additional measures to prevent dangerous polymerization may be considered, for example the addition of inhibitors. Chapter 3.4 Dangerous goods packed in limited quantities 3.4.1 This Chapter provides the provisions applicable to the carriage of dangerous goods of certain classes packed in limited quantities. The applicable quantity limit for the inner packaging or article is specified for each substance in Column (7a) of Table A of Chapter 3.2. In addition, the quantity "0" has been indicated in this column for each entry not permitted to be carried in accordance with this Chapter. Limited quantities of dangerous goods packed in such limited quantities, meeting the provisions of this Chapter are not subject to any other provisions of RID except the relevant provisions of: (a) Part 1, Chapters 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.8, 1.9; (b) Part 2; (c) Part 3, Chapters 3.1, 3.2, 3.3 (except special provisions 61, 178, 181, 220, 274, 625, 633 and 650 (e) ); (d) Part 4, paragraphs 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.4 to 4.1.1.8; (e) Part 5, 5.1.2.1 (a) ( i ) and (b), 5.1.2.2, 5.1.2.3, 5.2.1.10, 5.4.2; (f) Part 6, construction requirements of 6.1.4 and paragraphs 6.2.5.1 and 6.2.6.1 to 6.2.6.3; (g) Part 7, Chapter 7.1 and 7.2.1, 7.2.2, 7.5.1 (except 7.5.1.4), 7.5.2.4, 7.5.7 and 7.5.8. 3.4.2 Dangerous goods shall be packed only in inner packagings placed in suitable outer packagings . Intermediate packagings may be used. In addition, for articles of division 1.4, compatibility group S, the provisions of section 4.1.5 shall be fully complied with. The use of inner packagings is not necessary for the carriage of articles such as aerosols or "receptacles, small, containing gas". The total gross mass of the package shall not exceed 30 kg. 3.4.3 Except for articles of division 1.4, compatibility group S shrink-wrapped or stretch-wrapped trays meeting the conditions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2 and 4.1.1.4 to 4.1.1.8 are acceptable as outer packagings for articles or inner packagings containing dangerous goods carried in accordance with this Chapter. Inner packagings that are liable to break or be easily punctured, such as those made of glass, porcelain, stoneware or certain plastics, shall be placed in suitable intermediate packagings meeting the provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2 and 4.1.1.4 to 4.1.1.8, and be so designed that they meet the construction requirements of 6.1.4. The total gross mass of the package shall not exceed 20 kg. 3.4.4 Liquid goods of Class 8, packing group II in glass, porcelain or stoneware inner packagings shall be enclosed in a compatible and rigid intermediate packaging. 3.4.5 (Reserved) 3.4.6 (Reserved) 3.4.7 Marking of packages containing limited quantities 3.4.7.1 Except for air transport, packages containing dangerous goods in limited quantities shall bear the mark shown in Figure 3.4.7.1: Figure 3.4.7.1 Mark for packages containing limited quantities The mark shall be readily visible, legible and able to withstand open weather exposure without a substantial reduction in effectiveness. The mark shall be in the form of a square set at an angle of 45° (diamond-shaped). The top and bottom portions and the surrounding line shall be black. The centre area shall be white or a suitable contrasting background. The minimum dimensions shall be 100 mm 100 mm and the minimum width of the line forming the diamond shall be 2 mm. Where dimensions are not specified, all features shall be in approximate proportion to those shown. 3.4.7.2 If the size of the package so requires, the minimum outer dimensions shown in Figure 3.4.7.1 may be reduced to be not less than 50 mm 50 mm provided the mark remains clearly visible. The minimum width of the line forming the diamond may be reduced to a minimum of 1 mm. 3.4.8 Marking of packages containing limited quantities conforming to Part 3, Chapter 4 of the ICAO Technical Instructions 3.4.8.1 Packages containing dangerous goods packed in conformity with the provisions of Part 3, Chapter 4 of the ICAO Technical Instructions may bear the mark shown in Figure 3.4.8.1 to certify conformity with these provisions: Figure 3.4.8.1 Mark for packages containing limited quantities conforming to Part 3, Chapter 4 of the ICAO Technical Instructions The mark shall be readily visible, legible and able to withstand open weather exposure without a substantial reduction in effectiveness. The mark shall be in the form of a square set at an angle of 45° (diamond-shaped). The top and bottom portions and the surrounding line shall be black. The centre area shall be white or a suitable contrasting background. The minimum dimensions shall be 100 mm 100 mm and the minimum width of the line forming the diamond shall be 2 mm. The symbol "Y" shall be placed in the centre of the mark and shall be clearly visible. Where dimensions are not specified, all features shall be in approximate proportion to those shown. 3.4.8.2 If the size of the package so requires, the minimum outer dimensions shown in Figure 3.4.8.1 may be reduced to be not less than 50 mm 50 mm provided the mark remains clearly visible. The minimum width of the line forming the diamond may be reduced to a minimum of 1 mm. The symbol "Y" shall remain in approximate proportion to that shown in Figure 3.4.8.1. 3.4.9 Packages containing dangerous goods bearing the mark shown in 3.4.8 with or without the additional labels and marks for air transport shall be deemed to meet the provisions of section 3.4.1 as appropriate and of sections 3.4.2 to 3.4.4 and need not bear the mark shown in 3.4.7. 3.4.10 Packages containing dangerous goods in limited quantities bearing the mark shown in 3.4.7 and conforming with the provisions of the ICAO Technical Instructions, including all necessary marks and labels specified in Parts 5 and 6, shall be deemed to meet the provisions of section 3.4.1 as appropriate and of sections 3.4.2 to 3.4.4. 3.4.11 Use of overpacks For an overpack containing dangerous goods packed in limited quantities, the following applies: Unless the marks representative of all dangerous goods in an overpack are visible, the overpack shall be: (a) marked with the word "OVERPACK". The lettering of the "OVERPACK" mark shall be at least 12 mm high. The mark shall be in an official language of the country of origin and also , if that language is not English, French or German, in English, French or German, unless agreements, if any, concluded between the countries concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise; and (b) marked with the marks required by this Chapter. Except for air transport, the other provisions of 5.1.2.1 apply only if other dangerous goods which are not packed in limited quantities are contained in the overpack and only in relation to these other dangerous goods. 3.4.12 In advance of carriage, consignors of dangerous goods packed in limited quantities shall inform the carrier in a traceable form of the total gross mass of such goods to be consigned. Loaders of dangerous goods packed in limited quantities shall observe the provisions of 3.4.13 to 3.4.15 concerning marking. 3.4.13 (a) Wagons carrying dangerous goods packed in limited quanti ties shall be marked in accordance with 3.4.15 on both sides except when the wagon contains other dangerous goods for which placarding in accordance with 5.3.1 is required. In this latter case, the wagon may display the required placards only, or both the placards in accordance with 5.3.1 and the marks in accordance with 3.4.15 . (b) Large containers carrying dangerous goods packed in limited quantities shall be marked in accordance with 3.4.15 on all four sides except when the large container contains other dangerous goods for which placarding in accordance with 5.3.1 is required. In this latter case, the large container may display the required placards only, or both the placards in accordance with 5.3.1 and the marks in accordance with 3.4.15 . If the marks affixed to the large containers are not visible from outside the carrying wagon, the same marks shall also be affixed to both sides of the wagon. 3.4.14 The marks specified in 3.4.13 may be dispensed with, if the total gross mass of the packages containing dangerous goods packed in limited quantities carried does not exceed 8 tonnes per wagon or large container. 3.4.15 The marks specified in 3.4.13 shall be the same as the one required in 3.4.7, except that their minimum dimensions shall be 250 mm 250 mm. These marks shall be removed or covered if no dangerous goods in limited quantities are carried. Chapter 3.5 Dangerous Goods packed in excepted quantities 3.5.1 Excepted quantities 3.5.1.1 Excepted quantities of dangerous goods of certain classes, other than articles, meeting the provisions of this Chapter are not subject to any other provisions of RID except for: (a) The training requirements in Chapter 1.3; (b) The classification procedures and packing group criteria in Part 2; (c) The packaging requirements of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.4 and 4.1.1.6. NOTE: In the case of radioactive material, the requirements for radioactive material in excepted packages in 1.7.1.5 apply. 3.5.1.2 Dangerous goods which may be carried as excepted quantities in accordance with the provisions of this Chapter are shown in column (7b) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 list by means of an alphanumeric code as follows: Code Maximum net quantity per inner packaging ( in grams for solids and ml for liquids and gases) Maximum net quantity per outer packaging ( in grams for solids and ml for liquids and gases, or sum of grams and ml in the case of mixed packing) E0 Not permitted as Excepted Quantity E1 30 1000 E2 30 500 E3 30 300 E4 1 500 E5 1 300 For gases, the volume indicated for inner packagings refers to the water capacity of the inner receptacle and the volume indicated for outer packagings refers to the combined water capacity of all inner packagings within a single outer packaging. 3.5.1.3 Where dangerous goods in excepted quantities for which different codes are assigned are packaged together the total quantity per outer packaging shall be limited to that corresponding to the most restrictive code. 3.5.1.4 Excepted quantities of dangerous goods assigned to codes E 1, E 2, E 4 and E 5 with a maximum net quantity of dangerous goods per inner packaging limited to 1 ml for liquids and gases and 1 g for solids and a maximum net quantity of dangerous goods per outer packaging which does not exceed 100 g for solids or 100 ml for liquids and gases are only subject to: (a) The provisions of 3.5.2, except that an intermediate packaging is not required if the inner packagings are securely packed in an outer packaging with cushioning material in such a way that, under normal conditions of carriage, they cannot break, be punctured, or leak their contents; and for liquids, the outer packaging contains sufficient absorbent material to absorb the entire contents of the inner packagings ; and (b) The provisions of 3.5.3. 3.5.2 Packagings Packagings used for the carriage of dangerous goods in excepted quantities shall be in compliance with the following: (a) There shall be an inner packaging and each inner packaging shall be constructed of plastic (with a minimum thickness of 0.2 mm when used for liquids), or of glass, porcelain, stoneware, earthenware or metal (see also 4.1.1.2) and the closure of each inner packaging shall be held securely in place with wire, tape or other positive means; any receptacle having a neck with moulded screw threads shall have a leak proof threaded type cap. The closure shall be resistant to the contents; (b) Each inner packaging shall be securely packed in an intermediate packaging with cushioning material in such a way that, under normal conditions of carriage, they cannot break, be punctured or leak their contents. For liquid dangerous goods, the intermediate or outer packaging shall contain sufficient absorbent material to absorb the entire contents of the inner packagings . When placed in the intermediate packaging, the absorbent material may be the cushioning material. Dangerous goods shall not react dangerously with cushioning, absorbent material and packaging material or reduce the integrity or function of the materials. Regardless of its orientation, the package shall completely contain the contents in case of breakage or leakage; (c) The intermediate packaging shall be securely packed in a strong, rigid outer packaging (wooden, fibre board or other equally strong material ); (d) Each package type shall be in compliance with the provisions in 3.5.3; (e) Each package shall be of such a size that there is adequate space to apply all necessary marks ; and (f) Overpacks may be used and may also contain packages of dangerous goods or goods not subject to the requirements of RID. 3.5.3 Tests for packages 3.5.3.1 The complete package as prepared for carriage, with inner packagings filled to not less than 95% of their capacity for solids or 98% for liquids, shall be capable of withstanding, as demonstrated by testing which is appropriately documented, without breakage or leakage of any inner packaging and without significant reduction in effectiveness: (a) Drops onto a rigid, non-resilient flat and horizontal surface from a height of 1.8 m: ( i ) Where the sample is in the shape of a box, it shall be dropped in each of the following orientations: – flat on the base; – flat on the top; – flat on the longest side; – flat on the shortest side; – on a corner; (ii) Where the sample is in the shape of a drum, it shall be dropped in each of the following orientations: – diagonally on the top chime, with the centre of gravity directly above the point of impact; – diagonally on the base chime; – flat on the side; NOTE: Each of the above drops may be performed on different but identical packages. (b) A force applied to the top surface for a duration of 24 hours, equivalent to the total weight of identical packages if stacked to a height of 3 m (including the sample). 3.5.3.2 For the purposes of testing, the substances to be carried in the packaging may be replaced by other substances except where this would invalidate the results of the tests. For solids, when another substance is used, it must have the same physical characteristics (mass, grain size, etc.) as the substance to be carried. In the drop tests for liquids, when another substance is used, its relative density (specific gravity) and viscosity should be similar to those of the substance to be carried. 3.5.4 Marking of packages 3.5.4.1 Packages containing excepted quantities of dangerous goods prepared in accordance with this Chapter shall be durably and legibly marked with the mark shown in 3.5.4.2. The first or only label number indicated in column (5) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 for each of the dangerous goods contained in the package shall be shown in the mark. Where the name of the consignor or consignee is not shown elsewhere on the package this information shall be included within the mark. 3.5.4.2 Excepted quantities mark Figure 3.5.4.2 2519680 -2540 M inimum dimension 100 mm Minimum dimension 100 mm 0 0 M inimum dimension 100 mm Minimum dimension 100 mm Excepted quantities mark * The first or only label number indicated in column (5) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 shall be shown in this location. ** The name of the consignor or of the consignee shall be shown in this location if not shown elsewhere on the package. The mark shall be in the form of a square. The hatching and symbol shall be of the same colour, black or red, on white or suitable contrasting background. The minimum dimensions shall be 100 mm 100 mm. Where dimensions are not specified, all features shall be in approximate proportion to those shown. 3.5.4.3 Use of overpacks For an overpack containing dangerous goods packed in excepted quantities, the following applies: Unless the marks representative of all dangerous goods in an overpack are visible, the overpack shall be: (a) marked with the word "OVERPACK". The lettering of the "OVERPACK" mark shall be at least 12 mm high. The mark shall be in an official language of the country of origin and also , if that language is not English, French or German, in English, French or German, unless agreements, if any, concluded between the countries concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise; and (b) marked with the marks required by this Chapter. The other provisions of 5.1.2.1 apply only if other dangerous goods which are not packed in excepted quantities are contained in the overpack and only in relation to these other dangerous goods. 3.5.5 Maximum number of packages in any wagon or container The number of packages in any wagon or container shall not exceed 1 000. 3.5.6 Documentation If a document or documents (such as a bill of lading, air waybill or CMR/CIM consignment note) accompanies(y) dangerous goods in excepted quantities, at least one of these documents shall include the statement " Dangerous Goods in Excepted Quantities " and indicate the number of packages. Part 4 Packing and tank provisions Chapter 4.1 Use of packagings, including intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) and large packagings NOTE: Packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, marked in accordance with 6.1.3, 6.2.2.7, 6.2.2.8, 6.2.2.9, 6.2.2.10, 6.3.4, 6.5.2 or 6.6.3 but which were approved in a country which is not an RID Contracting State may nevertheless be used for carriage under RID. 4.1.1 General requirements for the packing of dangerous goods in packagings, including IBCs and large packagings NOTE: For the packing of goods of Classes 2, 6.2 and 7, the general provisions of this section only apply as indicated in 4.1.8.2 (Class 6.2 , UN Nos. 2814 and 2900 ), 4.1.9.1.5 (Class 7) and in the applicable packing instructions of 4.1.4 ( P 201, P 207 and LP 200 for Class 2 and P 620, P 621, P 622, IBC 620, LP 621 and LP 622 for Class 6.2) . 4.1.1.1 Dangerous goods shall be packed in good quality packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, which shall be strong enough to withstand the shocks and loadings normally encountered during carriage, including transshipment between transport units and between transport units and warehouses as well as any removal from a pallet or overpack for subsequent manual or mechanical handling. Packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, shall be constructed and closed so as to prevent any loss of contents when prepared for transport which might be caused under normal conditions of transport, by vibration, or by changes in temperature, humidity or pressure (resulting from altitude, for example). Packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, shall be closed in accordance with the information provided by the manufacturer. No dangerous residue shall adhere to the outside of packagings, IBCs and large packagings during carriage. These provisions apply, as appropriate, to new, reused, reconditioned or remanufactured packagings and to new, reused, repaired or remanufactured IBCs, and to new , reused or remanufactured large packagings. 4.1.1.2 Parts of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, which are in direct contact with dangerous goods: (a) shall not be affected or significantly weakened by those dangerous goods; (b) shall not cause a dangerous effect e.g. catalysing a reaction or reacting with the dangerous goods; and (c) shall not allow permeation of the dangerous goods that could constitute a danger under normal conditions of carriage. Where necessary, they shall be provided with a suitable inner coating or treatment. NOTE: For chemical compatibility of plastics packagings, including IBCs, made from polyethylene, see 4.1.1.21. 4.1.1.3 Design type 4.1.1.3.1 Unless otherwise provided elsewhere in RID, each packaging, including IBCs and large packagings, except inner packagings, shall conform to a design type successfully tested in accordance with the requirements of 6.1.5, 6.3.5, 6.5.6 or 6.6.5, as applicable. 4.1.1.3.2 Packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, may conform to one or more than one successfully tested design type and may bear more than one mark. 4.1.1.4 When filling packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, with liquids, sufficient ullage (outage) shall be left to ensure that neither leakage nor permanent distortion of the packaging occurs as a result of an expansion of the liquid caused by temperatures likely to occur during transport. Unless specific requirements are prescribed, liquids shall not completely fill a packaging at a temperature of 55 °C. However, sufficient ullage shall be left in an IBC to ensure that at the mean bulk temperature of 50 °C it is not filled to more than 98% of its water capacity. For a filling temperature of 15 °C, the maximum degree of filling shall be determined as follows, unless otherwise provided, either: (a) Boiling point (initial boiling point) of the substance in °C < 60 60 < 100 100 < 200 200 < 300 300 Degree of filling as a percentage of the capacity of the packaging 90 92 94 96 98 or (b) degree of filling = % of the capacity of the packaging In this formula represents the mean coefficient of cubic expansion of the liquid substance between 15 °C and 50 °C; that is to say, for a maximum rise in temperature of 35 °C,   is calculated according to the formula:  = d 15 and d 50 being the relative densities of the liquid at 15 °C and 50 °C and t F the mean temperature of the liquid at the time of filling. 4.1.1.5 Inner packagings shall be packed in an outer packaging in such a way that, under normal conditions of carriage, they cannot break, be punctured or leak their contents into the outer packaging. Inner packagings containing liquids shall be packed with their closures upward and placed within outer packagings consistent with the orientation marks prescribed in 5.2.1.10. Inner packagings that are liable to break or be punctured easily, such as those made of glass, porcelain or stoneware or of certain plastics materials, etc., shall be secured in outer packagings with suitable cushioning material. Any leakage of the contents shall not substantially impair the protective properties of the cushioning material or of the outer packaging. 4.1.1.5.1 Where an outer packaging of a combination packaging or a large packaging has been successfully tested with different types of inner packagings, a variety of such different inner packagings may also be assembled in this outer packaging or large packaging. In addition, provided an equivalent level of performance is maintained, the following variations in inner packagings are allowed without further testing of the package: (a) Inner packagings of equivalent or smaller size may be used provided: (i) the inner packagings are of similar design to the tested inner packagings (e.g. shape round, rectangular, etc.); (ii) the material of construction of the inner packagings (glass, plastics, metal, etc.) offers resistance to impact and stacking forces equal to or greater than that of the originally tested inner packaging; (iii) the inner packagings have the same or smaller openings and the closure is of similar design (e.g. screw cap, friction lid, etc.); (iv) sufficient additional cushioning material is used to take up void spaces and to prevent significant movement of the inner packagings; and (v) inner packagings are oriented within the outer packaging in the same manner as in the tested package. (b) A lesser number of the tested inner packagings, or of the alternative types of inner packagings identified in (a) above, may be used provided sufficient cushioning is added to fill the void space(s) and to prevent significant movement of the inner packagings. 4.1.1.5.2 Use of supplementary packagings within an outer packaging (e.g. an intermediate packaging or a receptacle inside a required inner packaging) additional to what is required by the packing instructions is authorized provided all relevant requirements are met, including those of 4.1.1.3, and, if appropriate, suitable cushioning is used to prevent movement within the packaging. 4.1.1.6 Dangerous goods shall not be packed together in the same outer packaging or in large packagings, with dangerous or other goods if they react dangerously with each other (see definition of “dangerous reaction” in 1.2.1). NOTE: For mixed packing special provisions, see 4.1.10. 4.1.1.7 The closures of packagings containing wetted or diluted substances shall be such that the percentage of liquid (water, solvent or phlegmatizer) does not fall below the prescribed limits during transport. 4.1.1.7.1 Where two or more closure systems are fitted in series on an IBC, that nearest to the substance being carried shall be closed first. 4.1.1.8 Where pressure may develop in a package by the emission of gas from the contents (as a result of temperature increase or other causes), the packaging or IBC may be fitted with a vent provided that the gas emitted will not cause danger on account of its toxicity, its flammability or the quantity released, for example. A venting device shall be fitted if dangerous overpressure may develop due to normal decomposition of substances. The vent shall be so designed that, when the packaging or IBC is in the attitude in which it is intended to be carried, leakages of liquid and the penetration of foreign substances are prevented under normal conditions of carriage. NOTE: Venting of the package is not permitted for air carriage. 4.1.1.8.1 Liquids may only be filled into inner packagings which have an appropriate resistance to internal pressure that may be developed under normal conditions of carriage. 4.1.1.9 New, remanufactured or reused packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, or reconditioned packagings and repaired or routinely maintained IBCs shall be capable of passing the tests prescribed in 6.1.5, 6.3.5, 6.5.6 or 6.6.5, as applicable. Before being filled and handed over for carriage, every packaging, including IBCs and large packagings, shall be inspected to ensure that it is free from corrosion, contamination or other damage and every IBC shall be inspected with regard to the proper functioning of any service equipment. Any packaging which shows signs of reduced strength as compared with the approved design type shall no longer be used or shall be so reconditioned, that it is able to withstand the design type tests. Any IBC which shows signs of reduced strength as compared with the tested design type shall no longer be used or shall be so repaired or routinely maintained that it is able to withstand the design type tests. 4.1.1.10 Liquids shall be filled only into packagings, including IBCs, which have an appropriate resistance to the internal pressure that may develop under normal conditions of carriage. Packagings and IBCs marked with the hydraulic test pressure prescribed in 6.1.3.1 (d) and 6.5.2.2.1, respectively shall be filled only with a liquid having a vapour pressure: (a) such that the total gauge pressure in the packaging or IBC (i.e. the vapour pressure of the filling substance plus the partial pressure of air or other inert gases, less 100 kPa) at 55 °C, determined on the basis of a maximum degree of filling in accordance with 4.1.1.4 and a filling temperature of 15 °C, will not exceed two-thirds of the marked test pressure; or (b) at 50 °C less than four-sevenths of the sum of the marked test pressure plus 100 kPa; or (c) at 55 °C less than two-thirds of the sum of the marked test pressure plus 100 kPa. IBCs intended for the carriage of liquids shall not be used to carry liquids having a vapour pressure of more than 110 kPa (1.1 bar) at 50 °C or 130 kPa (1.3 bar) at 55 °C. Examples of required marked test pressures for packagings, including IBCs, calculated as in 4.1.1.10 (c) UN No Name Class Packing group Vp 55 (kPa) (Vp 55 1,5) (kPa) (Vp 55 1,5) minus 100 (kPa) Required minimum test pressure gauge under 6.1.5.5.4 (c) (kPa) Minimum test pressure (gauge) to be marked on the packaging (kPa) 2056 2247 1593 1155 Tetrahydrofuran n Decane Dichloromethane Diethyl ether 3 3 6.1 3 II III III I 70 1,4 164 199 105 2,1 246 299 5 – 97,9 146 199 100 100 146 199 100 100 150 250 NOTE 1: For pure liquids the vapour pressure at 55 °C (V p55 ) can often be obtained from scientific tables. 2: The table refers to the use of 4.1.1.10 (c) only, which means that the marked test pressure shall exceed 1.5 times the vapour pressure at 55 °C less 100 kPa. When, for example, the test pressure for n-decane is determined according to 6.1.5.5.4 (a), the minimum marked test pressure may be lower. 3: For diethyl ether the required minimum test pressure under 6.1.5.5.5 is 250 kPa. 4.1.1.11 Empty packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, that have contained a dangerous substance are subject to the same requirements as those for a filled packaging, unless adequate measures have been taken to nullify any hazard. NOTE: When such packagings are carried for disposal, recycling or recovery of their material, they may also be carried under UN 3509 provided the conditions of special provision 663 of Chapter 3.3 are met. 4.1.1.12 Every packaging as specified in Chapter 6.1 intended to contain liquids shall successfully undergo a suitable leakproofness test. This test is part of a quality assurance programme as stipulated in 6.1.1.4 which shows the capability of meeting the appropriate test level indicated in 6.1.5.4.3: (a) before it is first used for carriage; (b) after remanufacturing or reconditioning of any packaging, before it is re-used for carriage. For this test the packaging need not have its closures fitted. The inner receptacle of a composite packaging may be tested without the outer packaging, provided the test results are not affected. This test is not required for: – inner packagings of combination packagings or large packagings; – inner receptacles of composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware) marked with the symbol "RID/ADR" in accordance with 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii); – light-gauge metal packagings marked with the symbol "RID/ADR" in accordance with 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii). 4.1.1.13 Packagings, including IBCs, used for solids which may become liquid at temperatures likely to be encountered during carriage shall also be capable of containing the substance in the liquid state. 4.1.1.14 Packagings, including IBCs, used for powdery or granular substances shall be sift-proof or shall be provided with a liner. 4.1.1.15 For plastics drums and jerricans, rigid plastics IBCs and composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacles, unless otherwise approved by the competent authority, the period of use permitted for the carriage of dangerous substances shall be five years from the date of manufacture of the receptacles, except where a shorter period of use is prescribed because of the nature of the substance to be carried. NOTE: For composite IBCs the period of use refers to the date of manufacture of the inner receptacle. 4.1.1.16 Where ice is used as a coolant it shall not affect the integrity of the packaging. 4.1.1.17 (Deleted) 4.1.1.18 Explosives, self-reactive substances and organic peroxides Unless specific provision to the contrary is made in RID , the packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, used for goods of Class 1, self-reactive substances of Class 4.1 and organic peroxides of Class 5.2 shall comply with the provisions for the medium danger group (packing group II). 4.1.1.19 Use of salvage packagings and large salvage packagings 4.1.1.19.1 Damaged, defective, leaking or non-conforming packages, or dangerous goods that have spilled or leaked may be carried in salvage packagings mentioned in 6.1.5.1.11 and in large salvage packagings mentioned in 6.6.5.1.9. This does not prevent the use of a larger size packaging, an IBC of type 11A or a large packaging of appropriate type and performance level and under the conditions of 4.1.1.19.2 and 4.1.1.19.3. 4.1.1.19.2 Appropriate measures shall be taken to prevent excessive movement of the damaged or leaking packages within a salvage packaging or large salvage packaging. When the salvage packaging or large salvage packaging contains liquids, sufficient inert absorbent material shall be added to eliminate the presence of free liquid. 4.1.1.19.3 Appropriate measures shall be taken to ensure that there is no dangerous build up of pressure. 4.1.1.20 Use of salvage pressure receptacles 4.1.1.20.1 In the case of damaged, defective, leaking or non-conforming pressure receptacles, salvage pressure receptacles according to 6.2.3.11 may be used. NOTE: A salvage pressure receptacle may be used as an overpack in accordance with 5.1.2. When used as an overpack, marks shall be in accordance with 5.1.2.1 instead of 5.2.1.3. 4.1.1.20.2 Pressure receptacles shall be placed in salvage pressure receptacles of suitable size. More than one pressure receptacle may be placed in the same salvage pressure receptacle only if the contents are known and do not react dangerously with each other (see 4.1.1.6). In this case the total sum of water capacities of the placed pressure receptacles shall not exceed 3 000 litres. Appropriate measures shall be taken to prevent movement of the pressure receptacles within the salvage pressure receptacle e.g. by partitioning, securing or cushioning. 4.1.1.20.3 A pressure receptacle may only be placed in a salvage pressure receptacle if: (a) The salvage pressure receptacle is in accordance with 6.2.3.11 and a copy of the approval certificate is available; (b) Parts of the salvage pressure receptacle which are, or are likely to be in direct contact with the dangerous goods will not be affected or weakened by those dangerous goods and will not cause a dangerous effect (e.g. catalyzing reaction or reacting with the dangerous goods); and (c) The contents of the contained pressure receptacle(s) are limited in pressure and volume so that if totally discharged into the salvage pressure receptacle, the pressure in the salvage pressure receptacle at 65 °C will not exceed the test pressure of the salvage pressure receptacle (for gases, see packing instruction in P 200 (3) in 4.1.4.1). The reduction of the useable water capacity of the salvage pressure receptacle, e.g. by any contained equipment and cushioning, shall be taken into account. 4.1.1.20.4 The proper shipping name, the UN number preceded by the letters "UN" and label(s) as required for packages in Chapter 5.2 applicable to the dangerous goods inside the contained pressure receptacle(s) shall be applied to the salvage pressure receptacle for carriage. 4.1.1.20.5 Salvage pressure receptacles shall be cleaned, purged and visually inspected internally and externally after each use. They shall be periodically inspected and tested in accordance with 6.2.3.5 at least once every five years. 4.1.1.21 Verification of the chemical compatibility of plastics packagings, including IBCs, by assimilation of filling substances to standard liquids 4.1.1.21.1 Scope For polyethylene packagings as specified in 6.1.5.2.6 and for polyethylene IBCs as specified in 6.5.6.3.5, the chemical compatibility with filling substances may be verified by assimilation to standard liquids following the procedures as set out in 4.1.1.21.3 to 4.1.1.21.5 and using the list in Table 4.1.1.21.6, provided that the particular design types have been tested with these standard liquids in accordance with 6.1.5 or 6.5.6 , taking into account 6.1.6 and that the conditions in 4.1.1.21.2 are met. When assimilation in accordance with this sub-section is not possible, the chemical compatibility needs to be verified by design type testing in accordance with 6.1.5.2.5 or by laboratory tests in accordance with 6.1.5.2.7 for packagings , and in accordance with 6.5.6.3.3 or 6.5.6.3.6 for IBCs , respectively. NOTE: Irrespective of the provisions of this sub-section, the use of packagings, including IBCs, for a specific filling substance is subject to the limitations of Table A of Chapter 3.2, and the packing instructions in Chapter 4.1. 4.1.1.21.2 Conditions The relative densities of the filling substances shall not exceed that used to determine the height for the drop test performed successfully according to 6.1.5.3.5 or 6.5.6.9.4 and the mass for the stacking test performed successfully according to 6.1.5.6 or where necessary according to 6.5.6.6 with the assimilated standard liquid(s). The vapour pressures of the filling substances at 50 °C or 55 °C shall not exceed that used to determine the pressure for the internal pressure (hydraulic) test performed successfully according to 6.1.5.5.4 or 6.5.6.8.4.2 with the assimilated standard liquid(s). In case that filling substances are assimilated to a combination of standard liquids, the corresponding values of the filling substances shall not exceed the minimum values derived from the applied drop heights, stacking masses and internal test pressures. Example: UN 1736 Benzoyl chloride is assimilated to the combination of standard liquids "Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution". It has a vapour pressure of 0.34 kPa at 50 °C and a relative density of approximately 1.2. Design type tests for plastics drums and jerricans were frequently performed at minimum required test levels. In practice this means that the stacking test is commonly performed with stacking loads considering only a relative density of 1.0 for the "Mixture of hydrocarbons" and a relative density of 1.2 for the "Wetting solution" (see definition of standard liquids in 6.1.6). As a consequence chemical compatibility of such tested design types would not be verified for benzoyl chloride by reason of the inadequate test level of the design type with the standard liquid "mixture of hydrocarbons". (Due to the fact that in the majority of cases the applied internal hydraulic test pressure is not less than 100 kPa, the vapour pressure of benzoyl chloride would be covered by such test level according to 4.1.1.10). All components of a filling substance, which may be a solution, mixture or preparation, such as wetting agents in detergents and disinfectants, irrespective of whether dangerous or non-dangerous, shall be included in the assimilation procedure. 4.1.1.21.3 Assimilation procedure The following steps shall be taken to assign filling substances to listed substances or groups of substances in Table 4 .1.1.21.6 (see also scheme in Figure 4.1.1.21 . 1): (a) Classify the filling substance in accordance with the procedures and criteria of Part 2 (determination of the UN number and packing group); (b) If it is included there, go to the UN number in column (1) of Table 4 .1.1.21.6; (c) Select the line that corresponds in terms of packing group, concentration, flashpoint, the presence of non-dangerous components etc. by means of the information given in columns (2a), (2b) and (4), if there is more than one entry for this UN number. If this is not possible, the chemical compatibility shall be verified in accordance with 6.1.5.2.5 or 6.1.5.2.7 for packagings , and in accordance with 6.5.6.3.3 or 6.5.6.3.6 for IBCs (however, in the case of aqueous solutions, see 4.1.1.21.4 ); (d) If the UN number and packing group of the filling substance determined in accordance with (a) is not included in the assimilation list, the chemical compatibility shall be proved in accordance with 6.1.5.2.5 or 6.1.5.2.7 for packagings , and in accordance with 6.5.6.3.3 or 6.5.6.3.6 for IBCs; (e) Apply the "Rule for collective entries", as described in 4.1.1. 21 .5, if this is indicated in column (5) of the selected line; (f) The chemical compatibility of the filling substance may be regarded as verified taking into account 4.1.1.21.1 and 4.1.1.21.2, if a standard liquid or a combination of standard liquids is assimilated in column (5) and the design type is approved for that/those standard liquid(s). Figure 4.1.1.21.1 : Scheme for the assimilation of filling substances to standard liquids 180340 528320 Yes No No Yes Further tests required (see 4.1.1. 21 .1) Classification of the substance according to Part 2 to determine UN number and packing group Are the UN number and packing group included in the assimilation list? Is the substance or group of substances mentioned by name in the assimilation list? Yes No Chemical compatibility may be regarded as verified, if packaging/IBC design type has been tested with indicated standard liquid(s); may be also valid for aqueous solutions Does the assimilation list indicate standard liquid or combination of standard liquids? to be continued with "Rule for collective entries" 0 0 Yes No No Yes Further tests required (see 4.1.1. 21 .1) Classification of the substance according to Part 2 to determine UN number and packing group Are the UN number and packing group included in the assimilation list? Is the substance or group of substances mentioned by name in the assimilation list? Yes No Chemical compatibility may be regarded as verified, if packaging/IBC design type has been tested with indicated standard liquid(s); may be also valid for aqueous solutions Does the assimilation list indicate standard liquid or combination of standard liquids? to be continued with "Rule for collective entries" 4.1.1.21.4 Aqueous solutions Aqueous solutions of substances and groups of substances assimilated to specific standard liquid(s) in accordance with 4.1.1. 21 .3 may also be assimilated to that (those) standard liquid(s) provided the following conditions are met: (a) the aqueous solution can be assigned to the same UN number as the listed substance in accordance with the criteria of 2.1.3.3, and (b) the aqueous solution is not specifically mentioned by name otherwise in the assimilation list in 4.1.1. 21 .6, and (c) no chemical reaction is taking place between the dangerous substance and the solvent water. Example: Aqueous solutions of UN 1120 tert-Butanol: – Pure tert-Butanol itself is assigned to the standard liquid " acetic acid " in the assimilation list. – Aqueous solutions of tert-Butanol can be classified under the entry UN 1120 BUTANOLS in accordance with 2.1.3.3, because the aqueous solution of tert-Butanol does not differ from the entries of the pure substances relating to the class, the packing group(s) and the physical state. Furthermore, the entry "1120 BUTANOLS" is not explicitly limited to the pure substances, and aqueous solutions of these substances are not specifically mentioned by name otherwise in Table A of Chapter 3.2 as well as in the assimilation list. – UN 1120 BUTANOLS do not react with water under normal conditions of carriage. As a consequence, aqueous solutions of UN 1120 tert-Butanol may be assigned to the standard liquid "acetic acid". 4.1.1.21.5 Rule for collective entries For the assimilation of filling substances for which "Rule for collective entries" is indicated in column (5), the following steps shall be taken and conditions be met (see also scheme in Figure 4.1.1. 21 .2): (a) Perform the assimilation procedure for each dangerous component of the solution, mixture or preparation in accordance with 4.1.1. 21 .3 taking into account the conditions in 4.1.1. 21 .2. In the case of generic entries, components may be neglected, that are known to have no damaging effect on high density polyethylene (e.g. solid pigments in UN 1263 PAINT or PAINT RELATED MATERIAL); (b) A solution, mixture or preparation cannot be assimilated to a standard liquid, if: (i) the UN number and packing group of one or more of the dangerous components does not appear in the assimilation list; or (ii) "Rule for collective entries" is indicated in column (5) of the assimilation list for one or more of the dangerous components; or (iii) (with the exception of UN 2059 NITROCELLULOSE SOLUTION, FLAMMABLE) the classification code of one or more of its dangerous components differs from that of the solution, mixture or preparation. (c) If all dangerous components are listed in the assimilation list, and its classification codes are in accordance with the classification code of the solution, mixture or preparation itself, and all dangerous components are assimilated to the same standard liquid or combination of standard liquids in column (5), the chemical compatibility of the solution, mixture or preparation may be regarded as verified taking into account 4.1.1. 21 .1 and 4.1.1. 21 .2; (d) If all dangerous components are listed in the assimilation list and its classification codes are in accordance with the classification code of the solution, mixture or preparation itself, but different standard liquids are indicated in column (5), the chemical compatibility may only be regarded as verified for the following combinations of standard liquids taking into account 4.1.1. 21 .1 and 4.1.1. 21 .2: (i) water/nitric acid 55%; with the exception of inorganic acids with classification code C1, which are assigned to standard liquid "water"; (ii) water/wetting solution; (iii) water/acetic acid; (iv) water/mixture of hydrocarbons; (v) water/n-butyl acetate – n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution. (e) In the context of this rule, chemical compatibility is not regarded as verified for other combinations of standard liquids than those specified in (d) and for all cases specified in (b). In such cases the chemical compatibility shall be verified by other means (see 4.1.1. 21 .3 (d)). Example 1: Mixture of UN 1940 THIOGLYCOLIC ACID (50%) and UN 2531 METHACRYLIC ACID, STABILIZED (50%); classification of the mixture: UN 3265 CORROSIVE LIQUID, ACIDIC, ORGANIC, N.O.S – Both the UN numbers of the components and the UN number of the mixture are included in the assimilation list; – Both the components and the mixture have the same classification code: C3; – UN 1940 THIOGLYCOLIC ACID is assimilated to standard liquid "acetic acid", and UN 2531 METHACRYLIC ACID, STABILIZED is assimilated to standard liquid "n-butyl acetate/n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution". According to paragraph (d) this is not an acceptable combination of standard liquids. The chemical compatibility of the mixture has to be verified by other means. Example 2: Mixture of UN 1793 ISOPROPYL ACID PHOSPHATE (50%) and UN 1803 PHENOLSULPHONIC ACID, LIQUID (50%); classification of the mixture: UN 3265 CORROSIVE LIQUID, ACIDIC, ORGANIC, N.O.S. – Both the UN numbers of the components and the UN number of the mixture are included in the assimilation list; – Both the components and the mixture have the same classification code: C3; – UN 1793 ISOPROPYL ACID PHOSPHATE is assimilated to standard liquid "wetting solution", and UN 1803 PHENOLSULPHONIC ACID, LIQUID is assimilated to standard liquid "water". According to paragraph (d) this is one of the acceptable combinations of standard liquids. As a consequence the chemical compatibility may be regarded as verified for this mixture, provided the packaging design type is approved for the standard liquids "wetting solution" and "water". Figure 4.1.1.21.2: Scheme "Rules for collective entries" 6087745 1818005 0 0 5594350 4698365 Further testing required (see 4.1.1. 21 .1) 0 0 Further testing required (see 4.1.1. 21 .1) 1241425 3887470 0 0 982980 4023995 Yes 0 0 Yes 210820 361315 Single entries, collective entries, solutions, mixtures, preparations with indication "Rule for collective entries" in assimilation list 0 0 Single entries, collective entries, solutions, mixtures, preparations with indication "Rule for collective entries" in assimilation list 1263015 934720 0 0 2338070 3151505 No 0 0 No 2350135 1798955 0 0 627380 1577975 Are entries included in the assimilation list for all components of solution, mixture or preparation? 0 0 Are entries included in the assimilation list for all components of solution, mixture or preparation? 165100 1240790 0 0 2343150 1632585 No 0 0 No 991235 2411730 Yes 0 0 Yes 1257935 2364740 0 0 681355 3109595 Have all components the same classification code as the solution, mixture or preparation? 0 0 Have all components the same classification code as the solution, mixture or preparation? 165100 2763520 0 0 3410585 4663440 Are all components, separately or together, assimilated to one of the combinations of standard liquids below? 0 0 Are all components, separately or together, assimilated to one of the combinations of standard liquids below? 2898775 4358005 0 0 5071110 4779010 No 0 0 No 5086985 4936490 0 0 497840 4752975 Are all components assimilated to the same standard liquid or combination of standard liquids? 0 0 Are all components assimilated to the same standard liquid or combination of standard liquids? 165100 4354195 0 0 3704590 5563870 Yes 0 0 Yes 3982085 5520055 0 0 1241425 5513070 0 0 954405 5566410 Yes 0 0 Yes 147320 5949315 Chemical compatibility may be regarded as proven, if packaging/IBC design type has been tested with indicated standard liquid(s). 0 0 Chemical compatibility may be regarded as proven, if packaging/IBC design type has been tested with indicated standard liquid(s). 3058160 6518910 Acceptable combinations of standard liquids: • water/nitric acid (55%), with the exception of inorganic acids of classification code C1 which are assigned to standard liquid "water"; • water/wetting solution; • water/acetic acid; • water/mixture of hydrocarbons; • water/n-butyl acetate – n-butyl acetate saturated wetting solution 0 0 Acceptable combinations of standard liquids: • water/nitric acid (55%), with the exception of inorganic acids of classification code C1 which are assigned to standard liquid "water"; • water/wetting solution; • water/acetic acid; • water/mixture of hydrocarbons; • water/n-butyl acetate – n-butyl acetate saturated wetting solution 2348865 4770755 No 0 0 No 2346325 4929505 0 0 4.1.1.21.6 Assimilation list In the following table (assimilation list) dangerous substances are listed in the numerical order of their UN numbers. As a rule, each line deals with a dangerous substance, single entry or collective entry covered by a specific UN number. However, several consecutive lines may be used for the same UN number, if substances belonging to the same UN number have different names (e.g. individual isomers of a group of substances), different chemical properties, different physical properties and/or different transport conditions. In such cases the single entry or collective entry within the particular packing group is the last one of such consecutive lines. Columns (1) to (4) of Table 4.1.1. 21 .6, following a structure similar to that of Table A of Chapter 3.2, are used to identify the substance for the purpose of this sub-section. The last column indicates the standard liquid(s) to which the substance can be assimilated. Explanatory notes for each column: Column (1) UN No. Contains the UN number – of the dangerous substance, if the substance has been assigned its own specific UN number, or – of the collective entry to which dangerous substances not listed by name have been assigned in accordance with the criteria ("decision trees") of Part 2. Column (2a) Proper shipping name or technical name Contains the name of the substance, the name of the single entry, which may cover various isomers, or the name of the collective entry itself. The indicated name can deviate from the applicable proper shipping name. Column (2b) Description Contains a descriptive text to clarify the scope of the entry in those cases when the classification, the transport conditions and/or the chemical compatibility of the substance may be variable. Column (3a) Class Contains the number of the class, whose heading covers the dangerous substance. This class number is assigned in accordance with the procedures and criteria of Part 2. Column (3b) Classification code Contains the classification code of the dangerous substance in accordance with the procedures and criteria of Part 2. Column (4) Packing group Contains the packing group number(s) (I, II or III) assigned to the dangerous substance. These packing group numbers are assigned in accordance with the procedures and criteria of Part 2. Certain substances are not assigned to packing groups. Column (5) Standard liquid This column indicates, as definite information, either a standard liquid or a combination of standard liquids to which the substance can be assimilated, or a reference to the rule for collective entries in 4.1.1. 21 .5. Table 4.1.1.21.6: Assimilation list UN No. Proper shipping name or technical name 3.1.2 Description 3.1.2 Class 2.2 Classifi-cation code 2.2 Packing group 2.1.1.3 Standard liquid (1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5) 1090 Acetone 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons Remark: applicable only, if it is proved that the permeability of the substance out of the package intended for carriage has an acceptable level 1093 Acrylonitrile, stabilized 3 FT1 I n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1104 Amyl acetates pure isomers and isomeric mixture 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1105 Pentanols pure isomers and isomeric mixture 3 F1 II/III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1106 Amylamine s pure isomers and isomeric mixture 3 FC II/III Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 1109 Amyl formates pure isomers and isomeric mixture 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1120 Butanols pure isomers and isomeric mixture 3 F1 II/III Acetic acid 1123 Butyl acetates pure isomers and isomeric mixture 3 F1 II/III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1125 n-Butylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 1128 n-Butyl formate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1129 Butyraldehyde 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 1133 Adhesives containing flammable liquid 3 F1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries 1139 Coating solution includes surface treatments or coatings used for industrial or other purposes such as vehicle under coating, drum or barrel lining 3 F1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries 1145 Cyclohexane 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 1146 Cyclopentane 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 1153 Ethylene glycol diethyl ether 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution and mixture of hydrocarbons 1154 Diethylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 1158 Diisopropylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 1160 Dimethylamine aqueous solution 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 1165 Dioxane 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 1170 Ethanol or Ethanol solution aqueous solution 3 F1 II/III Acetic acid 1171 Ethylene glycol monoethyl ether 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution and mixture of hydrocarbons 1172 Ethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution and mixture of hydrocarbons 1173 Ethyl acetate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1177 2-Ethylbutyl acetate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1178 2-Ethylbutyraldehyde 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 1180 Ethyl butyrate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1188 Ethylene glycol monomethyl ether 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution and mixture of hydrocarbons 1189 Ethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution and mixture of hydrocarbons 1190 Ethyl formate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1191 Octyl aldehydes pure isomers and isomeric mixture 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 1192 Ethyl lactate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1195 Ethyl propionate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1197 Extracts, liquid , for flavour or aroma 3 F1 II/III Rule for collective entries 1198 Formaldehyde solution, flammable aqueous solution, flashpoint between 23 °C and 60 °C 3 FC III Acetic acid 1202 Diesel fuel complying with EN 590:2013 + A1:2017 or with a flashpoint not more than 100 °C 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 1202 Gas oil flashpoint not more than 100 °C 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 1202 Heating oil, light extra light 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 1202 Heating oil, light complying with EN 590:2013 + A1:2017 or with a flashpoint not more than 100 °C 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 1203 Motor spirit or gasoline or petrol 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 1206 Heptanes pure isomers and isomeric mixture 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 1207 Hexaldehyde n-Hexaldehyde 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 1208 Hexanes pure isomers and isomeric mixture 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 1210 Printing ink or Printing ink related material flammable, including printing ink thinning or reducing compound 3 F1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries 1212 Isobutanol 3 F1 III Acetic acid 1213 Isobutyl acetate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1214 Isobutylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 1216 Isooctenes pure isomers and isomeric mixture 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 1219 Isopropanol 3 F1 II Acetic acid 1220 Isopropyl acetate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1221 Isopropylamine 3 FC I Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 1223 Kerosene 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 1224 3,3-Dimethyl-2-butanone 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 1224 Ketones, liquid, n.o.s. 3 F1 II/III Rule for collective entries 1230 Methanol 3 FT1 II Acetic acid 1231 Methyl acetate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1233 Methylamyl acetate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1235 Methylamine, aqueous solution 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 1237 Methyl butyrate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1247 Methyl methacrylate monomer, stabilized 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1248 Methyl propionate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1262 Octanes pure isomers and isomeric mixture 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 1263 Paint or Paint related material including paint, lacquer, enamel, stain, shellac, varnish, polish, liquid filler and liquid lacquer base or including paint thinning and reducing compound 3 F1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries 1265 Pentanes n-Pentane 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 1266 Perfumery products with flammable solvents 3 F1 II/III Rule for collective entries 1268 Coal tar naphtha vapour pressure at 50 °C not more than 110 kPa 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 1268 Petroleum distillates, n.o.s. or Petroleum products, n.o.s. 3 F1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries 1274 n-Propanol 3 F1 II/III Acetic acid 1275 Propionaldehyde 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 1276 n-Propyl acetate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1277 Propylamine n-Propylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 1281 Propyl formates pure isomers and isomeric mixture 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1282 Pyridine 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 1286 Rosin oil 3 F1 II/III Rule for collective entries 1287 Rubber solution 3 F1 II/III Rule for collective entries 1296 Triethylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 1297 Trimethylamine, aqueous solution not more than 50% trimethylamine, by mass 3 FC I/II/III Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 1301 Vinyl acetate, stabilized 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1306 Wood preservatives, liquid 3 F1 II/III Rule for collective entries 1547 Aniline 6.1 T1 II Acetic acid 1590 Dichloroanilines, liquid pure isomers and isomeric mixture 6.1 T1 II Acetic acid 1602 Dye, liquid, toxic, n.o.s. or Dye intermediate, liquid, toxic, n.o.s. 6.1 T1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries 1604 Ethylenediamine 8 CF1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 1715 Acetic anhydride 8 CF1 II Acetic acid 1717 Acetyl chloride 3 FC II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1718 Butyl acid phosphate 8 C3 III Wetting solution 1719 Hydrogen sulphide aqueous solution 8 C5 III Acetic acid 1719 Caustic alkali liquid, n.o.s. inorganic 8 C5 II/III Rule for collective entries 1730 Antimony pentachloride, liquid pure 8 C1 II Water 1736 Benzoyl chloride 8 C3 II Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 1750 Chloroacetic acid solution aqueous solution 6.1 TC1 II Acetic acid 1750 Chloroacetic acid solution mixtures of mono- and dichloroacetic acid 6.1 TC1 II Acetic acid 1752 Chloroacetyl chloride 6.1 TC1 I n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1755 Chromic acid solution aqueous solution with not more than 30% chromic acid 8 C1 II/III Nitric acid 1760 Cyanamide aqueous solution with not more than 50% cyanamide 8 C9 II Water 1760 O,O-Diethyl-dithiophosphoric acid 8 C9 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1760 O,O-Diisopropyl-dithiophosphoric acid 8 C9 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1760 O,O-Di-n-propyl-dithiophosphoric acid 8 C9 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1760 Corrosive liquid, n.o.s. flashpoint more than 60 °C 8 C9 I/II/III Rule for collective entries 1761 Cupriethylenediamine solution aqueous solution 8 CT1 II/III Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 1764 Dichloroacetic acid 8 C3 II Acetic acid 1775 Fluoroboric acid aqueous solution with not more than 50% fluoroboric acid 8 C1 II Water 1778 Fluorosilicic acid 8 C1 II Water 1779 Formic acid with more than 85% acid by mass 8 C3 II Acetic acid 1783 Hexamethylenediamine solution aqueous solution 8 C7 II/III Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 1787 Hydriodic acid aqueous solution 8 C1 II/III Water 1788 Hydrobromic acid aqueous solution 8 C1 II/III Water 1789 Hydrochloric acid not more than 38% aqueous solution 8 C1 II/III Water 1790 Hydrofluoric acid with not more than 60% hydrogen fluoride 8 CT1 II Water the permissible period of use: not more than 2 years 1791 Hypochlorite solution aqueous solution, containing wetting agents as customary in trade 8 C9 II/III Nitric acid and wetting solution ( * ) 1791 Hypochlorite solution aqueous solution 8 C9 II/III Nitric acid ( * ) ( * ) For UN 1791: Test to be carried out only with vent. If the test is carried out with nitric acid as the standard liquid, an acid-resistant vent and gasket shall be used. If the test is carried out with hypochlorite solutions themselves, vents and gaskets of the same design type, resistant to hypochlorite (e.g. of silicone rubber) but not resistant to nitric acid, are also permitted. 1793 Isopropyl acid phosphate 8 C3 III Wetting solution 1802 Perchloric acid aqueous solution with not more than 50% acid, by mass 8 CO1 II Water 1803 Phenolsulphonic acid, liquid isomeric mixture 8 C3 II Water 1805 Phosphoric acid, solution 8 C1 III Water 1814 Potassium hydroxide solution aqueous solution 8 C5 II/III Water 1824 Sodium hydroxide solution aqueous solution 8 C5 II/III Water 1830 Sulphuric acid with more than 51% pure acid 8 C1 II Water 1832 Sulphuric acid, spent chemical stable 8 C1 II Water 1833 Sulphurous acid 8 C1 II Water 1835 Tetramethylammonium hydroxide solution aqueous solution, flashpoint more than 60 °C 8 C7 II Water 1840 Zinc chloride solution aqueous solution 8 C1 III Water 1848 Propionic acid with not less than 10% and less than 90% acid by mass 8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1862 Ethyl crotonate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1863 Fuel, aviation, turbine engine 3 F1 I/II/III Mixture of hydrocarbons 1866 Resin solution flammable 3 F1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries 1902 Diisooctyl acid phosphate 8 C3 III Wetting solution 1906 Sludge acid 8 C1 II Nitric acid 1908 Chlorite solution aqueous solution 8 C9 II/III Acetic acid 1914 Butyl propionates 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1915 Cyclohexanone 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 1917 Ethyl acrylate, stabilized 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1919 Methyl acrylate, stabilized 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1920 Nonanes pure isomers and isomeric mixture, flashpoint between 23 °C and 60 °C 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 1935 Cyanide solution, n.o.s. inorganic 6.1 T4 I/II/III Water 1940 Thioglycolic acid 8 C3 II Acetic acid 1986 Alcohols, flammable, toxic, n.o.s. 3 FT1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries 1987 Cyclohexanol technical pure 3 F1 III Acetic acid 1987 Alcohols, n.o.s. 3 F1 II/III Rule for collective entries 1988 Aldehydes, flammable, toxic, n.o.s. 3 FT1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries 1989 Aldehydes, n.o.s. 3 F1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries 1992 2,6-cis-Dimethyl-morpholine 3 FT1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 1992 Flammable liquid, toxic, n.o.s. 3 FT1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries 1993 Propionic acid vinyl ester 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1993 (1-Methoxy-2-propyl) acetate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 1993 Flammable liquid, n.o.s. 3 F1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries 2014 Hydrogen peroxide, aqueous solution with not less than 20% but not more than 60% hydrogen peroxide, stabilized as necessary 5.1 OC1 II Nitric acid 2022 Cresylic acid liquid mixture containing cresols, xylenols and methyl phenols 6.1 TC1 II Acetic acid 2030 Hydrazine aqueous solution with not less than 37% but not more than 64% hydrazine, by mass 8 CT1 II Water 2030 Hydrazine hydrate aqueous solution with 64% hydrazine 8 CT1 II Water 2031 Nitric acid other than red fuming, with not more than 55% pure acid 8 CO1 II Nitric acid 2045 Isobutyraldehyde 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 2050 Diisobutylene isomeric compounds 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 2053 Methyl isobutyl carbinol 3 F1 III Acetic acid 2054 Morpholine 8 CF1 I Mixture of hydrocarbons 2057 Tripropylene 3 F1 II/III Mixture of hydrocarbons 2058 Valeraldehyde pure isomers and isomeric mixture 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 2059 Nitrocellulose solution, flammable 3 D I/II/III Rule for collective entries: Deviating from the general procedure this rule may be applied to solvents of classification code F1 2075 Chloral, anhydrous, stabilized 6.1 T1 II Wetting solution 2076 Cresols, liquid pure isomers and isomeric mixture 6.1 TC1 II Acetic acid 2078 Toluene diisocyanate liquid 6.1 T1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2079 Diethylenetriamine 8 C7 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 2209 Formaldehyde solution aqueous solution with 37% Form-aldehyde, methanol content: 8-10% 8 C9 III Acetic acid 2209 Formaldehyde solution aqueous solution, with not less than 25% formaldehyde 8 C9 III Water 2218 Acrylic acid, stabilized 8 CF1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2227 n-Butyl methacrylate, stabilized 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2235 Chlorobenzyl chlorides, liquid para-Chlorobenzyl chloride 6.1 T2 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 2241 Cycloheptane 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 2242 Cycloheptene 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 2243 Cyclohexyl acetate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2244 Cyclopentanol 3 F1 III Acetic acid 2245 Cyclopentanone 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 2247 n-Decane 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 2248 Di-n-butylamine 8 CF1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 2258 1,2-Propylenediamine 8 CF1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2259 Triethylenetetramine 8 C7 II Water 2260 Tripropylamine 3 FC III Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2263 Dimethylcyclohexanes pure isomers and isomeric mixture 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 2264 N,N-Dimethyl-cyclohexylamine 8 CF1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2265 N,N-Dimethyl-formamide 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2266 Dimethyl-N-propylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2269 3,3 ' -Imino-dipropylamine 8 C7 III Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2270 Ethylamine, aqueous solution with not less than 50% but not more than 70% ethylamine, flashpoint below 23 °C, corrosive or slightly corrosive 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2275 2-Ethylbutanol 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2276 2-Ethylhexylamine 3 FC III Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2277 Ethyl methacrylate, stabilized 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2278 n-Heptene 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 2282 Hexanols pure isomers and isomeric mixture 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2283 Isobutyl methacrylate, stabilized 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2286 Pentamethylheptane 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 2287 Isoheptenes 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 2288 Isohexenes 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 2289 Isophoronediamine 8 C7 III Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2293 4-Methoxy-4-methyl-pentan-2-one 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 2296 Methylcyclohexane 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 2297 Methylcyclohexanone pure isomers and isomeric mixture 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 2298 Methylcyclopentane 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 2302 5-Methylhexan-2-one 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 2308 Nitrosylsulphuric acid, liquid 8 C1 II Water 2309 Octadienes 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 2313 Picolines pure isomers and isomeric mixture 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 2317 Sodium cuprocyanide solution aqueous solution 6.1 T4 I Water 2320 Tetraethylenepentamine 8 C7 III Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2324 Triisobutylene mixture of C12-monoolefines, flashpoint between 23 °C and 60 °C 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 2326 Trimethylcyclohexylamine 8 C7 III Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2327 Trimethylhexamethylenediamines pure isomers and isomeric mixture 8 C7 III Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2330 Undecane 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 2336 Allyl formate 3 FT1 I n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2348 Butyl acrylates, stabilized pure isomers and isomeric mixture 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2357 Cyclohexylamine flashpoint between 23 °C and 60 °C 8 CF1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2361 Diisobutylamine 3 FC III Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2366 Diethyl carbonate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2367 alpha-Methylvaleraldehyde 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 2370 1-Hexene 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 2372 1,2-Di-(dimethylamino)-ethane 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2379 1,3-Dimethylbutylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2383 Dipropylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2385 Ethyl isobutyrate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2393 Isobutyl formate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2394 Isobutyl propionate flashpoint between 23 °C and 60 °C 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2396 Methacrylaldehyde, stabilized 3 FT1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 2400 Methyl isovalerate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2401 Piperidine 8 CF1 I Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2403 Isopropenyl acetate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2405 Isopropyl butyrate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2406 Isopropyl isobutyrate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2409 Isopropyl propionate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2410 1,2,3,6-Tetrahydropyridine 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 2427 Potassium chlorate, aqueous solution 5.1 O1 II/III Water 2428 Sodium chlorate, aqueous solution 5.1 O1 II/III Water 2429 Calcium chlorate, aqueous solution 5.1 O1 II/III Water 2436 Thioacetic acid 3 F1 II Acetic acid 2457 2,3-Dimethylbutane 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 2491 Ethanolamine 8 C7 III Wetting solution 2491 Ethanolamine solution aqueous solution 8 C7 III Wetting solution 2496 Propionic anhydride 8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2524 Ethyl orthoformate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2526 Furfurylamine 3 FC III Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2527 Isobutyl acrylate, stabilized 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2528 Isobutyl isobutyrate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2529 Isobutyric acid 3 FC III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2531 Methacrylic acid, stabilized 8 C3 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2542 Tributylamine 6.1 T1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 2560 2-Methylpentan-2-ol 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2564 Trichloroacetic acid solution aqueous solution 8 C3 II/III Acetic acid 2565 Dicyclohexylamine 8 C7 III Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2571 Ethylsulphuric acid 8 C3 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2571 Alkylsulphuric acids 8 C3 II Rule for collective entries 2580 Aluminium bromide solution aqueous solution 8 C1 III Water 2581 Aluminium chloride solution aqueous solution 8 C1 III Water 2582 Ferric chloride solution aqueous solution 8 C1 III Water 2584 Methane sulphonic acid with more than 5% free sulphuric acid 8 C1 II Water 2584 Alkylsulphonic acids, liquid with more than 5% free sulphuric acid 8 C1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2584 Benzene sulphonic acid with more than 5% free sulphuric acid 8 C1 II Water 2584 Toluene sulphonic acids with more than 5% free sulphuric acid 8 C1 II Water 2584 Arylsulphonic acids, liquid with more than 5% free sulphuric acid 8 C1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2586 Methane sulphonic acid with not more than 5% free sulphuric acid 8 C3 III Water 2586 Alkylsulphonic acids, liquid with not more than 5% free sulphuric acid 8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2586 Benzene sulphonic acid with not more than 5% free sulphuric acid 8 C3 III Water 2586 Toluene sulphonic acids liquid, with not more than 5% free sulphuric acid 8 C3 III Water 2586 Arylsulphonic acids, liquid with not more than 5% free sulphuric acid 8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2610 Triallylamine 3 FC III Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2614 Methallyl alcohol 3 F1 III Acetic acid 2617 Methylcyclohexanols pure isomers and isomeric mixture, flashpoint between 23 °C and 60 °C 3 F1 III Acetic acid 2619 Benzyldimethylamine 8 CF1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2620 Amyl butyrates pure isomers and isomeric mixture, flashpoint between 23 °C and 60 °C 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2622 Glycidaldehyde flashpoint below 23 °C 3 FT1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 2626 Chloric acid, aqueous solution with not more than 10% chloric acid 5.1 O1 II Nitric acid 2656 Quinoline flashpoint more than 60 °C 6.1 T1 III Water 2672 Ammonia solution relative density between 0.880 and 0.957 at 15 °C in water, with more than 10% but not more than 35% ammonia 8 C5 III Water 2683 Ammonium sulphide solution aqueous solution, flashpoint between 23 °C and 60 °C 8 CFT II Acetic acid 2684 3-Diethylaminopropylamine 3 FC III Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2685 N,N-Diethylethylenediamine 8 CF1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2693 Bisulphites, aqueous solution, n.o.s. inorganic 8 C1 III Water 2707 Dimethyldioxanes pure isomers and isomeric mixture 3 F1 II/III Mixture of hydrocarbons 2733 Amines, flammable, corrosive , n.o.s. or Polyamines, flammable, corrosive, n.o.s. 3 FC I/II/III Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2734 Di-sec-butylamine 8 CF1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 2734 Amines, liquid, corrosive, flammable, n.o.s. or Polyamines, liquid, corrosive, flammable, n.o.s. 8 CF1 I/II Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2735 Amines, liquid, corrosive, n.o.s. or Polyamines, liquid, corrosive, n.o.s. 8 C7 I/II/III Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2739 Butyric anhydride 8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2789 Acetic acid, glacial or Acetic acid solution aqueous solution, more than 80% acid, by mass 8 CF1 II Acetic acid 2790 Acetic acid solution aqueous solution, more than 10% but not more than 80% acid, by mass 8 C3 II/III Acetic acid 2796 Sulphuric acid with not more than 51% pure acid 8 C1 II Water 2797 Battery fluid, alkali Potassium/Sodium hydroxide, aqueous solution 8 C5 II Water 2810 2-Chloro-6-fluorobenzyl chloride stabilized 6.1 T1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 2810 2-Phenylethanol 6.1 T1 III Acetic acid 2810 Ethylene glycol monohexyl ether 6.1 T1 III Acetic acid 2810 Toxic liquid, organic, n.o.s. 6.1 T1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries 2815 N-Aminoethylpiperazine 8 CT1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2818 Ammonium polysulphide solution aqueous solution 8 CT1 II/III Acetic acid 2819 Amyl acid phosphate 8 C3 III Wetting solution 2820 Butyric acid n-Butyric acid 8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2821 Phenol solution aqueous solution, toxic, non-alkaline 6.1 T1 II/III Acetic acid 2829 Caproic acid n-Caproic acid 8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2837 Bisulphates, aqueous solution 8 C1 II/III Water 2838 Vinyl butyrate, stabilized 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2841 Di-n-amylamine 3 FT1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2850 Propylene tetramer mixture of C12-monoolefines, flashpoint between 23 °C and 60 °C 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 2873 Dibutylaminoethanol N,N-Di-n-butylaminoethanol 6.1 T1 III Acetic acid 2874 Furfuryl alcohol 6.1 T1 III Acetic acid 2920 O,O-Diethyl-dithiophosphoric acid flashpoint between 23 °C and 60 °C 8 CF1 II n-Butyl acetate/n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2920 O,O-Dimethyl-dithiophosphoric acid flashpoint between 23 °C and 60 °C 8 CF1 II Wetting solution 2920 Hydrogen bromide 33% solution in glacial acetic acid 8 CF1 II Wetting solution 2920 Tetramethylammonium hydroxide aqueous solution, flashpoint between 23 °C and 60 °C 8 CF1 II Water 2920 Corrosive liquid, flammable, n.o.s. 8 CF1 I/II Rule for collective entries 2922 Ammonium sulphide aqueous solution, flashpoint more than 60 °C 8 CT1 II Water 2922 Cresols aqueous alkaline solution, mixture of sodium and potassium cresolate 8 CT1 II Acetic acid 2922 Phenol aqueous alkaline solution, mixture of sodium and potassium phenolate 8 CT1 II Acetic acid 2922 Sodium hydrogen difluoride aqueous solution 8 CT1 III Water 2922 Corrosive liquid, toxic, n.o.s. 8 CT1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries 2924 Flammable liquid, corrosive, n.o.s. slightly corrosive 3 FC I/II/III Rule for collective entries 2927 Toxic liquid, corrosive, organic, n.o.s. 6.1 TC1 I/II Rule for collective entries 2933 Methyl 2-chloropropionate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2934 Isopropyl 2-chloro-propionate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2935 Ethyl 2-chloropropionate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2936 Thiolactic acid 6.1 T1 II Acetic acid 2941 Fluoroanilines pure isomers and isomeric mixture 6.1 T1 III Acetic acid 2943 Tetrahydrofurfurylamine 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 2945 N-Methylbutylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2946 2-Amino-5-diethylaminopentane 6.1 T1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 2947 Isopropyl chloroacetate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 2984 Hydrogen peroxide, aqueous solution with not less than 8% but less than 20% hydrogen peroxide, stabilized as necessary 5.1 O1 III Nitric acid 3056 n-Heptaldehyde 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 3065 Alcoholic beverages with more than 24% alcohol by volume 3 F1 II/III Acetic acid 3066 Paint or Paint related material including paint, lacquer, enamel, stain, shellac, varnish, polish, liquid filler and liquid lacquer base or including paint thinning and reducing compound 8 C9 II/III Rule for collective entries 3079 Methacrylonitrile, stabilized 6.1 TF1 I n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 3082 sec-Alcohol C 6 -C 17 poly (3-6) ethoxylate 9 M6 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution and mixture of hydrocarbons 3082 Alcohol C 12 -C 15 poly (1-3) ethoxylate 9 M6 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution and mixture of hydrocarbons 3082 Alcohol C 13 -C 15 poly (1-6) ethoxylate 9 M6 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution and mixture of hydrocarbons 3082 Aviation turbine fuel JP-5 flashpoint more than 60 °C 9 M6 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 3082 Aviation turbine fuel JP-7 flashpoint more than 60 °C 9 M6 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 3082 Coal tar flashpoint more than 60 °C 9 M6 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 3082 Coal tar naphtha flashpoint more than 60 °C 9 M6 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 3082 Creosote produced of coal tar flashpoint more than 60 °C 9 M6 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 3082 Creosote produced of wood tar flashpoint more than 60 °C 9 M6 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 3082 Cresyl diphenyl phosphate 9 M6 III Wetting solution 3082 Decyl acrylate 9 M6 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution and mixture of hydrocarbons 3082 Diisobutyl phthalate 9 M6 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution and mixture of hydrocarbons 3082 Di-n-butyl phthalate 9 M6 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution and mixture of hydrocarbons 3082 Hydrocarbons liquid, flashpoint more than 60 °C, environmentally hazardous 9 M6 III Rule for collective entries 3082 Isodecyl diphenyl phosphate 9 M6 III Wetting solution 3082 Methylnaphthalenes isomeric mixture, liquid 9 M6 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 3082 Triaryl phosphates n.o.s. 9 M6 III Wetting solution 3082 Tricresyl phosphate with not more than 3% ortho-isomer 9 M6 III Wetting solution 3082 Trixylenyl phosphate 9 M6 III Wetting solution 3082 Zinc alkyl dithiophosphate C3-C14 9 M6 III Wetting solution 3082 Zinc aryl dithiophosphate C7-C16 9 M6 III Wetting solution 3082 Environmentally hazardous substance, liquid, n.o.s. 9 M6 III Rule for collective entries 3099 Oxidizing liquid, toxic, n.o.s. 5.1 OT1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries 3101 3103 3105 3107 3109 3111 3113 3115 3117 3119 Organic Peroxide, Type B, C, D, E or F, liquid or Organic Peroxide, Type B, C, D, E or F, liquid, temperature controlled 5.2 P1 n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution and mixture of hydrocarbons and nitric acid ( ** ) ( ** ) For UN Nos. 3101, 3103, 3105, 3107, 3109, 3111, 3113, 3115, 3117, 3119 (tert-butyl hydroperoxide with more than 40 % peroxide content and peroxyacetic acids are excluded): All organic peroxides in a technically pure form or in solution in solvents which, as far as their compatibility is concerned, are covered by the standard liquid "mixture of hydrocarbons" in this list. Compatibility of vents and gaskets with organic peroxides may be verified, also independently of the design type test, by laboratory tests with nitric acid. Organic peroxides of UN Nos 3111, 3113, 3115, 3117 and 3119 are not accepted for carriage by rail. 3145 Butylphenols liquid, n.o.s. 8 C3 I/II/III Acetic acid 3145 Alkylphenols, liquid, n.o.s. including C2 to C12 homologues 8 C3 I/II/III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 3149 Hydrogen peroxide and peroxyacetic acid mixture, stabilized with UN 2790 acetic acid, UN 2796 sulphuric acid and/or UN 1805 phosphoric acid, water and not more than 5% peroxyacetic acid 5.1 OC1 II Wetting solution and nitric acid 3210 Chlorates, inorganic, aqueous solution, n.o.s. 5.1 O1 II/III Water 3211 Perchlorates, inorganic, aqueous solution, n.o.s. 5.1 O1 II/III Water 3213 Bromates, inorganic, aqueous solution, n.o.s. 5.1 O1 II/III Water 3214 Permanganates, inorganic, aqueous solution, n.o.s. 5.1 O1 II Water 3216 Persulphates, inorganic, aqueous solution, n.o.s. 5.1 O1 III Wetting solution 3218 Nitrates, inorganic, aqueous solution, n.o.s. 5.1 O1 II/III Water 3219 Nitrites, inorganic, aqueous solution, n.o.s. 5.1 O1 II/III Water 3264 Cupric chloride aqueous solution, slightly corrosive 8 C1 III Water 3264 Hydroxylamine sulphate 25% aqueous solution 8 C1 III Water 3264 Phosphorous acid aqueous solution 8 C1 III Water 3264 Corrosive liquid, acidic, inorganic, n.o.s. flashpoint more than 60 °C 8 C1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries; not applicable to mixtures having components of UN Nos.: 1830, 1832, 1906 and 2308 3265 Methoxyacetic acid 8 C3 I n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 3265 Allyl succinic acid anhydride 8 C3 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 3265 Dithioglycolic acid 8 C3 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 3265 Butyl phosphate mixture of mono- and di-butyl phosphate 8 C3 III Wetting solution 3265 Caprylic acid 8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 3265 Isovaleric acid 8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 3265 Pelargonic acid 8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 3265 Pyruvic acid 8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 3265 Valeric acid 8 C3 III Acetic acid 3265 Corrosive liquid, acidic, organic, n.o.s. flashpoint more than 60 °C 8 C3 I/II/III Rule for collective entries 3266 Sodium hydrosulphide aqueous solution 8 C5 II Acetic acid 3266 Sodium sulphide aqueous solution, slightly corrosive 8 C5 III Acetic acid 3266 Corrosive liquid, basic, inorganic, n.o.s. flashpoint more than 60 °C 8 C5 I/II/III Rule for collective entries 3267 2,2 ' -(Butylimino)-bisethanol 8 C7 II Mixture of hydrocarbons and wetting solution 3267 Corrosive liquid, basic, organic, n.o.s. flashpoint more than 60 °C 8 C7 I/II/III Rule for collective entries 3271 Ethylene glycol monobutyl ether flashpoint 60 °C 3 F1 III Acetic acid 3271 Ether, n.o.s. 3 F1 II/III Rule for collective entries 3272 Acrylic acid tert-butyl ester 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 3272 Isobutyl propionate flashpoint below 23 °C 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 3272 Methyl valerate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 3272 Trimethyl ortho-formate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 3272 Ethyl valerate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 3272 Isobutyl isovalerate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 3272 n-Amyl propionate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 3272 n-Butylbutyrate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 3272 Methyl lactate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/ n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution 3272 Ester, n.o.s. 3 F1 II/III Rule for collective entries 3287 Sodium nitrite 40% aqueous solution 6.1 T4 III Water 3287 Toxic liquid, inorganic, n.o.s. 6.1 T4 I/II/III Rule for collective entries 3291 Clinical waste, unspecified, n.o.s. liquid 6.2 I3 Water 3293 Hydrazine, aqueous solution with not more than 37% hydrazine, by mass 6.1 T4 III Water 3295 Heptenes n.o.s. 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 3295 Nonanes flashpoint below 23 °C 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons 3295 Decanes n.o.s. 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 3295 1,2,3-Trimethylbenzene 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons 3295 Hydrocarbons, liquid, n.o.s. 3 F1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries 3405 Barium chlorate, solution aqueous solution 5.1 OT1 II/III Water 3406 Barium perchlorate, solution aqueous solution 5.1 OT1 II/III Water 3408 Lead perchlorate, solution aqueous solution 5.1 OT1 II/III Water 3413 Potassium cyanide, solution aqueous solution 6.1 T4 I/II/III Water 3414 Sodium cyanide, solution aqueous solution 6.1 T4 I/II/III Water 3415 Sodium fluoride, solution aqueous solution 6.1 T4 III Water 3422 Potassium fluoride, solution aqueous solution 6.1 T4 III Water 4.1.2 Additional general provisions for the use of IBCs 4.1.2.1 When IBCs are used for the carriage of liquids with a flashpoint of 60 °C (closed cup) or lower, or of powders liable to dust explosion, measures shall be taken to prevent a dangerous electrostatic discharge. 4.1.2.2 Every metal, rigid plastics and composite IBC, shall be inspected and tested, as relevant, in accordance with 6.5.4.4 or 6.5.4.5 : – before it is put into service; – thereafter at intervals not exceeding two and a half and five years, as appropriate; – after the repair or remanufacture, before it is re-used for carriage. An IBC shall not be filled and offered for carriage after the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection. However, an IBC filled prior to the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection may be carried for a period not to exceed three months beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection. In addition, an IBC may be carried after the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection: (a) after emptying but before cleaning, for purposes of performing the required test or inspection prior to refilling; and (b) unless otherwise approved by the competent authority, for a period not to exceed six months beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection in order to allow the return of dangerous goods or residues for proper disposal or recycling. NOTE: For the particulars in the transport document , see 5.4.1.1.11. 4.1.2.3 IBCs of type 31HZ2 shall be filled to at least 80% of the volume of the outer casing. 4.1.2.4 Except for routine maintenance of metal, rigid plastics, composite and flexible IBCs performed by the owner of the IBC, whose State and name or authorized symbol is durably marked on the IBC, the party performing routine maintenance shall durably mark the IBC near the manufacturer's UN design type mark to show: (a) The State in which the routine maintenance was carried out; and (b) The name or authorized symbol of the party performing the routine maintenance. 4.1.3 General provisions concerning packing instructions 4.1.3.1 Packing instructions applicable to dangerous goods of Classes 1 to 9 are specified in Section 4.1.4. They are subdivided in three sub-sections depending on the type of packagings to which they apply: Sub-section 4.1.4.1 for packagings other than IBCs and large packagings; these packing instructions are designated by an alphanumeric code starting with the letter "P" or "R" for packagings specific to RID and ADR; Sub-section 4.1.4.2 for IBCs; these are designated by an alphanumeric code starting with the letters "IBCs"; Sub-section 4.1.4.3 for large packagings; these are designated by an alphanumeric code starting with the letters "LP". Generally, packing instructions specify that the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 or 4.1.3, as appropriate, are applicable. They may also require compliance with the special provisions of Sections 4.1.5, 4.1.6, 4.1.7, 4.1.8 or 4.1.9 when appropriate. Special packing provisions may also be specified in the packing instruction for individual substances or articles. They are also designated by an alphanumeric code comprising the letters: "PP" for packagings other than IBCs and large packagings, or "RR" for special provisions specific to RID and ADR; "B" for IBCs or "BB" for special packing provisions specific to RID and ADR; "L" for large packagings or "LL" for special packing provisions specific to RID and ADR. Unless otherwise specified, each packaging shall conform to the applicable requirements of Part 6. Generally packing instructions do not provide guidance on compatibility and the user shall not select a packaging without checking that the substance is compatible with the packaging material selected (e.g. glass receptacles are unsuitable for most fluorides). Where glass receptacles are permitted in the packing instructions porcelain, earthenware and stoneware packagings are also allowed. 4.1.3.2 Column (8) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 shows for each article or substance the packing instruction(s) that shall be used. Columns (9a) and (9b) indicate the special packing provisions and the mixed packing provisions (see 4.1.10) applicable to specific substances or articles. 4.1.3.3 Each packing instruction shows, where applicable, the acceptable single and combination packagings. For combination packagings, the acceptable outer packagings, inner packagings and when applicable the maximum quantity permitted in each inner or outer packaging, are shown. Maximum net mass and maximum capacity are as defined in 1.2.1. Where packagings which need not meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3 (e.g. crates, pallets) are authorized in a packing instruction or the special provisions listed in Table A in Chapter 3.2, these packagings are not subject to the mass or volume limits generally applicable to packagings conforming to the requirements of Chapter 6.1, unless otherwise indicated in the relevant packing instruction or special provision. 4.1.3.4 The following packagings shall not be used when the substances being carried are liable to become liquid during carriage: Packagings Drums: 1D and 1G Boxes: 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1 and 4H2 Bags: 5L1, 5L2, 5L3, 5H1, 5H2, 5H3, 5H4, 5M1 and 5M2 Composite packagings: 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG1, 6HG2, 6HD1, 6PC, 6PD1, 6PD2, 6PG1, 6PG2 and 6PH1 Large packagings Flexible plastics: 51H (outer packaging) IBCs For substances of packing group I: All types of IBC For substances of packing groups II and III: Wooden: 11C, 11D and 11F Fibreboard: 11G Flexible: 13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13H5, 13L1, 13L2, 13L3, 13L4, 13M1 and 13M2 Composite: 11HZ2 and 21HZ2 For the purposes of this paragraph, substances and mixtures of substances having a melting point equal to or less than 45 °C shall be treated as solids liable to become liquid during transport. 4.1.3.5 Where the packing instructions in this Chapter authorize the use of a particular type of packaging (e.g. 4G, 1A2), packagings bearing the same packaging identification code followed by the letters "V", "U" or "W" marked in accordance with the requirements of Part 6 (e.g. 4GV, 4GU or 4GW; 1A2V, 1A2U or 1A2W) may also be used under the same conditions and limitations applicable to the use of that type of packaging according to the relevant packing instructions. For example, a combination packaging marked with the packaging code "4GV" may be used whenever a combination packaging marked "4G" is authorized, provided the requirements in the relevant packing instruction regarding types of inner packagings and quantity limitations are respected. 4.1.3.6 Pressure receptacles for liquids and solids 4.1.3.6.1 Unless otherwise indicated in RID, pressure receptacles conforming to: (a) the applicable requirements of Chapter 6.2 or (b) the national or international standards on the design, construction, testing, manufacturing and inspection, as applied by the country in which the pressure receptacles are manufactured, provided that the provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met and that, for metallic cylinders, tubes, pressure drums , bundles of cylinders and salvage pressure receptacles , the construction is such that the minimum burst ratio (burst pressure divided by test pressure) is: (i) 1.50 for refillable pressure receptacles; (ii) 2.00 for non-refillable pressure receptacles; are authorized for the carriage of any liquid or solid substance other than explosives, thermally unstable substances, organic peroxides, self-reactive substances, substances where significant pressure may develop by evolution of chemical reaction and radioactive material (unless permitted in 4.1.9). This sub-section is not applicable to the substances mentioned in 4.1.4.1, packing instruction P200, table 3. 4.1.3.6.2 Every design type of pressure receptacle shall be approved by the competent authority of the country of manufacture or as indicated in Chapter 6.2. 4.1.3.6.3 Unless otherwise indicated, pressure receptacles having a minimum test pressure of 0.6 MPa shall be used. 4.1.3.6.4 Unless otherwise indicated, pressure receptacles may be provided with an emergency pressure relief device designed to avoid bursting in case of overfill or fire accidents. Pressure receptacle valves shall be designed and constructed in such a way that they are inherently able to withstand damage without release of the contents or shall be protected from damage which could cause inadvertent release of the contents of the pressure receptacle, by one of the methods as given in 4.1.6.8 (a) to (e). 4.1.3.6.5 The level of filling shall not exceed 95% of the capacity of the pressure receptacle at 50 °C. Sufficient ullage (outage) shall be left to ensure that the pressure receptacle will not be liquid full at a temperature of 55 °C. 4.1.3.6.6 Unless otherwise indicated pressure receptacles shall be subjected to a periodic inspection and test every 5 years. The periodic inspection shall include an external examination, an internal examination or alternative method as approved by the competent authority, a pressure test or equivalent effective non-destructive testing with the agreement of the competent authority including an inspection of all accessories (e.g. tightness of valves, emergency relief valves or fusible elements). Pressure receptacles shall not be filled after they become due for periodic inspection and test but may be carried after the expiry of the time limit. Pressure receptacle repairs shall meet the requirements of 4.1.6.11. 4.1.3.6.7 Prior to filling, the packer shall perform an inspection of the pressure receptacle and ensure that the pressure receptacle is authorized for the substances to be carried and that the requirements of RID have been met. Shut-off valves shall be closed after filling and remain closed during carriage. The consignor shall verify that the closures and equipment are not leaking. 4.1.3.6.8 Refillable pressure receptacles shall not be filled with a substance different from that previously contained unless the necessary operations for change of service have been performed. 4.1.3.6.9 Marking of pressure receptacles for liquids and solids according to 4.1.3.6 (not conforming to the requirements of Chapter 6.2) shall be in accordance with the requirements of the competent authority of the country of manufacturing. 4.1.3.7 Packagings or IBCs not specifically authorized in the applicable packing instruction shall not be used for the carriage of a substance or article unless specifically allowed under a temporary derogation agreed between RID Contracting States in accordance with 1.5.1. 4.1.3.8 Unpackaged articles other than Class 1 articles 4.1.3.8.1 Where large and robust articles cannot be packaged in accordance with the requirements of Chapters 6.1 or 6.6 and they have to be carried empty, uncleaned and unpackaged, the competent authority of the country of origin may approve such carriage. In doing so the competent authority shall take into account that: (a) Large and robust articles shall be strong enough to withstand the shocks and loadings normally encountered during carriage including transshipment between cargo transport units and between cargo transport units and warehouses, as well as any removal from a pallet for subsequent manual or mechanical handling; (b) All closures and openings shall be sealed so that there can be no loss of contents which might be caused under normal conditions of carriage, by vibration, or by changes in temperature, humidity or pressure (resulting from altitude, for example). No dangerous residue shall adhere to the outside of the large and robust articles; (c) Parts of large and robust articles, which are in direct contact with dangerous goods: (i) shall not be affected or significantly weakened by those dangerous goods; and (ii) shall not cause a dangerous effect e.g. catalysing a reaction or reacting with the dangerous goods; (d) Large and robust articles containing liquids shall be stowed and secured to ensure that neither leakage nor permanent distortion of the article occurs during carriage; (e) They shall be fixed in cradles or crates or other handling devices or to the cargo transport unit in such a way that they will not become loose during normal conditions of carriage. 4.1.3.8.2 Unpackaged articles approved by the competent authority in accordance with the provisions of 4.1.3.8.1 shall be subject to the consignment procedures of Part 5. In addition the consignor of such articles shall ensure that a copy of any such approval is attached to the transport document. NOTE: A large and robust article may include flexible fuel containment systems, military equipment, machinery or equipment containing dangerous goods above the limited quantities according to 3.4.1. 4.1.4 List of packing instructions NOTE: Although the following packing instructions use the same numbering system as used in the IMDG Code and the UN Model Regulations, readers should be aware that some of the details may be different. 4.1.4.1 Packing instructions concerning the use of packagings (except IBCs and large packagings) P 001 PACKING INSTRUCTION (LIQUIDS) P 001 The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Combination packagings Maximum capacity/Net mass (see 4.1.3.3) Inner packagings Outer packagings Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III Glass 10 l Plastics 30 l Metal 40 l Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plastics (1H1, 1H2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) 250 kg 250 kg 250 kg 250 kg 150 kg 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood (4C1, 4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) expanded plastics (4H1) solid plastics (4H2) 250 kg 250 kg 250 kg 150 kg 150 kg 75 kg 75 kg 60 kg 150 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 60 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 60 kg 400 kg Jerricans steel (3A1, 3A2) aluminium (3B1, 3B2) plastics (3H1, 3H2) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg Single packagings Drums steel, non-removable head (1A1) steel, removable head (1A2) aluminium, non-removable head (1B1) aluminium, removable head (1B2) metal other than steel or aluminium, non-removable head (1N1) metal other than steel or aluminium, removable head (1N2) plastics, non-removable head (1H1) plastics, removable head (1H2) 250 l 250 l (a) 250 l 250 l (a) 250 l 250 l (a) 250 l 250 l (a) 450 l 450 l 450 l 450 l 450 l 450 l 450 l 450 l 450 l 450 l 450 l 450 l 450 l 450 l 450 l 450 l Jerricans steel, non-removable head (3A1) steel, removable head (3A2) aluminium, non-removable head (3B1) aluminium, removable head (3B2) plastics, non-removable head (3H1) plastics, removable head (3H2) 60 l 60 l (a) 60 l 60 l (a) 60 l 60 l (a) 60 l 60 l 60 l 60 l 60 l 60 l 60 l 60 l 60 l 60 l 60 l 60 l Single packagings (cont’d) Composite packagings plastics receptacle with outer steel, aluminium or plastics drum (6HA1, 6HB1 , 6HH1 ) plastics receptacle with outer fibre or plywood drum (6HG1, 6HD1) plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium crate or box or plastics receptacle with outer wooden, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2) glass receptacle with outer steel, aluminium, fibreboard, plywood, expanded plastics or solid plastics drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PG1, 6PD1, 6PH1 or 6PH2) or with outer steel or aluminium crate or box or with outer wooden or fibreboard box or with outer wickerwork hamper (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2) 250 l 120 l 60 l 60 l 250 l 250 l 60 l 60 l 250 l 250 l 60 l 60 l Pressure receptacles , provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. Additional requirement For substances of Class 3, packing group III, which give off small quantities of carbon dioxide or nitrogen, the packagings shall be vented. Special packing provisions PP 1 For UN Nos. 1133, 1210, 1263 and 1866 and for adhesives, printing inks, printing ink related materials, paints, paint related materials and resin solutions which are assigned to UN 3082, metal or plastics packagings for substances of packing groups II and III in quantities of 5 litres or less per packaging are not required to meet the performance tests in Chapter 6.1 when carried: (a) in palletized loads, a pallet box or unit load device, e.g. individual packagings placed or stacked and secured by strapping, shrink or stretch-wrapping or other suitable means to a pallet; or (b) as inner packagings of combination packagings with a maximum net mass of 40 kg. PP 2 For UN No. 3065, wooden barrels with a maximum capacity of 250 litres and which do not meet the provisions of Chapter 6.1 may be used. PP 4 For UN No. 1774, packagings shall meet the packing group II performance level. PP 5 For UN No. 1204, packagings shall be so constructed that explosion is not possible by reason of increased internal pressure. Cylinders, tubes and pressure drums shall not be used for these substances. PP 6 (Deleted) PP 10 For UN No. 1791, packing group II, the packaging shall be vented. PP 31 For UN No. 1131, packagings shall be hermetically sealed. PP 33 For UN No. 1308, packing groups I and II, only combination packagings with a maximum gross mass of 75 kg allowed. PP 81 For UN No. 1790 with more than 60% but not more than 85% hydrogen fluoride and UN No. 2031 with more than 55% nitric acid, the permitted use of plastics drums and jerricans as single packagings shall be two years from their date of manufacture. PP 93 For UN No. 3532, packagings shall be designed and constructed to permit the release of gas or vapour to prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the packagings in the event of loss of stabilization. Special packing provision specific to RID and ADR RR 2 For UN No. 1261, removable head packagings are not permitted. (a) Only substances with a viscosity of more than 2 680 mm 2 /s are authorized. P 002 PACKING INSTRUCTION (SOLIDS) P 002 The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Combination packagings Maximum net mass (see 4.1.3.3) Inner packagings Outer packagings Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III Glass 10 kg Plastics (a) 50 kg Metal 50 kg Paper (a),(b),(c) 50 kg Fibre (a),(b),(c) 50 kg (a) These inner packagings shall be sift-proof. (b) These inner packagings shall not be used when the substances being carried may become liquid during carriage (see 4.1.3.4). (c) These inner packagings shall not be used for substances of packing group I. Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plastics (1H1, 1H2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood (4C1) natural wood with sift proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) expanded plastics (4H1) solid plastics (4H2) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 250 kg 250 kg 250 kg 125 kg 125 kg 60 kg 250 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 60 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 60 kg 400 kg Jerricans steel (3A1, 3A2) aluminium (3B1, 3B2) plastics (3H1, 3H2) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg Single packagings Drums steel (1A1 or 1A2 (d) ) aluminium (1B1 or 1B2 (d) ) metal, other than steel or aluminium (1N1 or 1N2 (d ) ) plastics (1H1 or 1H2 (d) ) fibre (1G) (e) plywood (1D) (e) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg Jerricans steel (3A1 or 3A2 (d) ) aluminium (3B1 or 3B2 (d) ) plastics (3H1 or 3H2 (d) ) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg Boxes steel (4A) (e) aluminium (4B) (e) other metal (4N) ( e) natural wood (4C1) (e) plywood (4D) (e) reconstituted wood (4F) (e) natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) (e) fibreboard (4G) (e) solid plastics (4H2) (e) Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg Bags bags (5H3, 5H4, 5L3, 5M2) (e) Not allowed 50 kg 50 kg (d) These packagings shall not be used for substances of packing group I that may become liquid during carriage (see 4.1.3.4). (e) These packagings shall not be used when the substances being carried may become liquid during carriage (see 4.1.3.4). Single packagings (cont’d) Composite packagings plastics receptacle with outer steel, aluminium, plywood, fibre or plastics drum (6HA1, 6HB1, 6HG1 (e) , 6HD1 (e) or 6HH1) plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium crate or box, wooden box, plywood box, fibreboard box or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2 (e) , 6HG2 (e) or 6HH2) glass receptacle with outer steel, aluminium plywood or fibre drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PD1 (e) or 6PG1 (e) ) or with outer steel or aluminium crate or box or with outer wooden, or fibreboard box or with outer wickerwork hamper (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 (e) or 6PD2 (e) ) or with outer expanded plastics or solid plastics packaging (6PH1 or 6PH2 (e) ) 400 kg 75 kg 75 kg 400 kg 75 kg 75 kg 400 kg 75 kg 75 kg (e) These packagings shall not be used when the substances being carried may become liquid during carriage (see 4.1.3.4). Pressure receptacles , provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. Special packing provisions PP 6 (Deleted) PP 7 For UN No. 2000, celluloid may also be transported unpacked on pallets, wrapped in plastic film and secured by appropriate means, such as steel bands as a full load in closed wagons or in closed containers. Each pallet shall not exceed 1 000 kg. PP 8 For UN No. 2002, packagings shall be so constructed that explosion is not possible by reason of increased internal pressure. Cylinders, tubes and pressure drums shall not be used for these substances. PP 9 For UN Nos. 3175, 3243 and 3244, packagings shall conform to a design type that has passed a leakproofness test at the packing group II performance level. For UN No. 3175, the leakproofness test is not required when the liquids are fully absorbed in solid material contained in sealed bags. PP 11 For UN No. 1309, packing group III, and UN No. 1362, 5H1, 5L1 and 5M1 bags are allowed if they are overpacked in plastic bags and are wrapped in shrink or stretch wrap on pallets. PP 12 For UN Nos. 1361, 2213 and UN No. 3077, 5H1, 5L1 and 5M1 bags are allowed when carried in closed wagons or closed containers. PP 13 For articles classified under UN No. 2870, only combination packagings meeting the packing group I performance level are authorized. PP 14 For UN Nos. 2211, 2698 and 3314, packagings are not required to meet the performance tests in Chapter 6.1. PP 15 For UN Nos. 1324 and 2623, packagings shall meet the packing group III performance level. PP 20 For UN No. 2217, any sift-proof, tearproof receptacle may be used. PP 30 For UN No. 2471, paper or fibre inner packagings are not permitted. PP 34 For UN No. 2969 (as whole beans), 5H1, 5L1 and 5M1 bags are permitted. PP 37 For UN Nos. 2590 and 2212, 5M1 bags are permitted. All bags of any type shall be carried in closed wagons or containers or be placed in closed rigid overpacks. PP 38 For UN No. 1309, packing group II, bags are permitted only in closed wagons or closed containers. PP 84 For UN No. 1057, rigid outer packagings meeting the packing group II performance level shall be used. The packagings shall be designed and constructed and arranged to prevent movement, inadvertent ignition of the devices or inadvertent release of flammable gas or liquid. NOTE: For waste lighters collected separately see Chapter 3.3, special provision 654 . PP 92 For UN No. 3531, packagings shall be designed and constructed to permit the release of gas or vapour to prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the packagings in the event of loss of stabilization. Special packing provision specific to RID and ADR RR 5 Notwithstanding special packing provision PP84, only the general provi-sions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2 and 4.1.1.5 to 4.1.1.7 need be complied with if the gross mass of the package is not more than 10 kg. NOTE: For waste lighters collected separately see Chapter 3.3, special provision 654 . P 003 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 003 Dangerous goods shall be placed in suitable outer packagings. The packagings shall meet the provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.4, 4.1.1.8 and 4.1.3 and be so designed that they meet the construction requirements of 6.1.4. Outer packagings constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use, shall be used. Where this packing instruction is used for the transport of articles or inner packagings of combination packagings, the packaging shall be designed and constructed to prevent inadvertent discharge of articles during normal conditions of carriage. Special packing provisions PP 16 For UN No. 2800, batteries shall be protected from short circuits and shall be securely packed in strong outer packagings. NOTE 1: Non-spillable batteries which are an integral part of, and necessary for, the operation of mechanical or electronic equipment shall be securely fastened in the battery holder on the equipment and protected in such a manner as to prevent damage and short circuits. 2: For used batteries (UN No. 2800), see P 801. PP 17 For UN No. 2037, packages shall not exceed 55 kg net mass for fibreboard packagings or 125 kg net mass for other packagings. PP 19 For UN Nos. 1364 and 1365, carriage as bales is authorized. PP 20 For UN Nos. 1363, 1386, 1408 and 2793 any sift-proof, tearproof receptacle may be used. PP 32 UN Nos. 2857 and 3358 and robust articles consigned under UN No. 3164 may be carried unpackaged, in crates or in appropriate overpacks. NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3). PP 87 (Deleted) PP 88 (Deleted) PP 90 For UN No. 3506, sealed inner liners or bags of strong leakproof and puncture resistant material impervious to mercury which will prevent escape of the substance from the package irrespective of the position or the orientation of the package shall be used. PP 91 For UN 1044, large fire extinguishers may also be carried unpackaged provided that the requirements of 4.1.3.8.1 (a) to (e) are met, the valves are protected by one of the methods in accordance with 4.1.6.8 (a) to (d) and other equipment mounted on the fire extinguisher is protected to prevent accidental activation. For the purpose of this special packing provision, "large fire extinguishers" means fire extinguishers as described in indents (c) to (e) of special provision 225 of Chapter 3.3. PP 96 For UN No. 2037 waste gas cartridges carried in accordance with special provision 327 of Chapter 3.3, the packagings shall be adequately ventilated to prevent the creation of dangerous atmospheres and the build-up of pressure. Special packing provisions specific to RID and ADR RR 6 For UN No. 2037, in the case of carriage by full load, metal articles may also be packed as follows: The articles shall be grouped together in units on trays and held in position with an appropriate plastics cover; these units shall be stacked and suitably secured on pallets. RR 9 For UN 3509, packagings are not required to meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3. Packagings meeting the requirements of 6.1.4, made leak tight or fitted with a leak tight and puncture resistant sealed liner or bag, shall be used. When the only residues contained are solids which are not liable to become liquid at temperatures likely to be encountered during carriage, flexible packagings may be used. When liquid residues are present, rigid packagings that provide a means of retention (e.g. absorbent material) shall be used. Before being filled and handed over for carriage, every packaging shall be inspected to ensure that it is free from corrosion, contamination or other damage. Any packaging showing signs of reduced strength shall no longer be used (minor dents and scratches are not considered as reducing the strength of the packaging). Packagings intended for the carriage of packagings, discarded, empty, uncleaned with residues of Class 5.1 shall be so constructed or adapted that the goods cannot come into contact with wood or any other combustible material. P 004 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 004 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3473, 3476, 3477, 3478 and 3479. The following packagings are authorized: (1) For fuel cell cartridges, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.3, 4.1.1.6 and 4.1.3 are met: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F , 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2). Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level. (2) For fuel cell cartridges packed with equipment: strong outer packagings which meet the general provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.6 and 4.1.3 . When fuel cell cartridges are packed with equipment, they shall be packed in inner packagings or placed in the outer packaging with cushioning material or divider(s) so that the fuel cell cartridges are protected against damage that may be caused by the movement or placement of the contents within the outer packaging. The equipment shall be secured against movement within the outer packaging. For the purpose of this packing instruction, "equipment" means apparatus requiring the fuel cell cartridges with which it is packed for its operation. (3) For fuel cell cartridges contained in equipment: strong outer packagings which meet the general provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.6 and 4.1.3. Large robust equipment (see 4.1.3.8) containing fuel cell cartridges may be carried unpackaged. For fuel cell cartridges contained in equipment, the entire system shall be protected against short circuit and inadvertent operation. NOTE: The packagings authorized in (2) and (3) may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3). P 005 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 005 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3528, 3529 and 3530. If the engine or machinery is constructed and designed so that the means of containment containing the dangerous goods affords adequate protection, an outer packaging is not required. Dangerous goods in engines or machinery shall otherwise be packed in outer packagings constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use, and meeting the applicable requirements of 4.1.1.1, or they shall be fixed in such a way that they will not become loose during normal conditions of carriage, e.g. in cradles or crates or other handling devices. NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3). In addition, the manner in which means of containment are contained within the engine or machinery, shall be such that under normal conditions of carriage, damage to the means of containment containing the dangerous goods is prevented; and in the event of damage to the means of containment containing liquid dangerous goods, no leakage of the dangerous goods from the engine or machinery is possible (a leakproof liner may be used to satisfy this requirement). Means of containment containing dangerous goods shall be so installed, secured or cushioned as to prevent their breakage or leakage and so as to control their movement within the engine or machinery during normal conditions of carriage. Cushioning material shall not react dangerously with the content of the means of containment. Any leakage of the contents shall not substantially impair the protective properties of the cushioning material. Additional requirement Other dangerous goods (e.g. batteries, fire extinguishers, compressed gas accumulators or safety devices) required for the functioning or safe operation of the engine or machinery shall be securely mounted in the engine or machine. P 006 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 006 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3537 to 3548. (1) The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met : D rums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2). Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level. (2) In addition, for robust articles the following packagings are authorized: Strong outer packagings constructed of suitable material and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use. The packagings shall meet the provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.8 and 4.1.3 in order to achieve a level of protection that is at least equivalent to that provided by Chapter 6.1. Articles may be carried unpackaged or on pallets when the dangerous goods are afforded equivalent protection by the article in which they are contained. NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3). (3) Additionally, the following conditions shall be met: (a) Receptacles within articles containing liquids or solids shall be constructed of suitable materials and secured in the article in such a way that, under normal conditions of carriage, they cannot break, be punctured or leak their contents into the article itself or the outer packaging; (b) Receptacles containing liquids with closures shall be packed with their closures correctly oriented. The receptacles shall in addition conform to the internal pressure test provisions of 6.1.5.5; (c) Receptacles that are liable to break or be punctured easily, such as those made of glass, porcelain or stoneware or of certain plastics materials shall be properly secured. Any leakage of the contents shall not substantially impair the protective properties of the article or of the outer packaging; (d) Receptacles within articles containing gases shall meet the requirements of Section 4.1.6 and Chapter 6.2 as appropriate or be capable of providing an equivalent level of protection as packing instructions P 200 or P 208; (e) Where there is no receptacle within the article, the article shall fully enclose the dangerous substances and prevent their release under normal conditions of carriage. (4) Articles shall be packed to prevent movement and inadvertent operation during normal conditions of carriage. P 010 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 010 The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Combination packagings Maximum net mass (see 4.1.3.3) Inner packagings Outer packagings Glass 1 l Steel 40 l Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) plastics (1H1, 1H2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg Boxes steel (4A) natural wood (4C1, 4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) expanded plastics (4H1) solid plastics (4H2) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 60 kg 400 kg Single packagings Maximum capacity (see 4.1.3.3) Drums steel, non-removable head (1A1) 450 l Jerricans steel, non-removable head (3A1) 60 l Composite packagings plastics receptacle in steel drums (6HA1) 250 l Steel pressure receptacles , provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. P 099 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 099 Only packagings which are approved for these goods by the competent authority may be used. A copy of the competent authority approval shall accompany each consignment or the transport document shall include an indication that the packaging was approved by the competent authority. P 101 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 101 Only packagings which are approved by the competent authority of the country of origin may be used. If the country of origin is not an RID Contracting State , the packaging shall be approved by the competent authority of the first RID Contracting State reached by the consignment. NOTE: For the information in the transport document, see 5.4.1.2.1(e) P 111 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 111 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags paper, waterproofed plastics textile, rubberized Receptacles wood Sheets plastics textile, rubberized Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, expanded (4H1) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Special packing provision PP 43 For UN No. 0159, inner packagings are not required when metal (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2) or plastics (1H1 or 1H2) drums are used as outer packagings. P 112a PACKING INSTRUCTION (Solid wetted, 1.1D) P 112a The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags paper, multiwall, water resistant plastics textile textile, rubberized woven plastics Receptacles metal plastics wood Bags plastics textile, plastic coated or lined Receptacles metal plastics wood Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, expanded (4H1) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Additional requirement Intermediate packagings are not required if leakproof removable head drums are used as the outer packaging. Special packing provisions PP 26 For UN Nos. 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154, 0219 and 0394, packagings shall be lead free. PP 45 For UN Nos. 0072 and 0226, intermediate packagings are not required. P 112b PACKING INSTRUCTION (Solid dry, other than powder 1.1D) P 112b The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags paper, kraft paper, multiwall, water resistant plastics textile textile, rubberized woven plastics Bags ( for UN No. 0150 only ) plastics textile, plastic coated or lined Bags woven plastics, sift-proof (5H2) woven plastics, water-resistant (5H3) plastics, film (5H4) textile, sift-proof (5L2) textile, water resistant (5L3) paper, multiwall, water resistant (5M2) Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift proof (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, expanded (4H1) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Special packing provisions PP 26 For UN Nos. 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154, 0216, 0219 and 0386, packagings shall be lead free. PP 46 For UN Nos. 0209, bags, sift-proof (5H2) are recommended for flake or prilled TNT in the dry state and a maximum net mass of 30 kg. PP 47 For UN No. 0222, inner packagings are not required when the outer packaging is a bag. P 112c PACKING INSTRUCTION (Solid dry powder 1.1D) P 112c The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags paper, multiwall, water resistant plastics woven plastics Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Bags paper, multiwall, water resistant with inner lining plastics Receptacles metal plastics wood Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Additional requirements 1. Inner packagings are not required if drums are used as the outer packaging. 2. The packaging shall be sift-proof. Special packing provisions PP 26 For UN Nos. 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154, 0216, 0219 and 0386, packagings shall be lead free. PP 46 For UN No. 0209, bags, sift-proof (5H2) are recommended for flake or prilled TNT in the dry state and a maximum net mass of 30 kg. PP 48 For UN No. 0504, metal packagings shall not be used. Packagings of other material with a small amount of metal, for example metal closures or other metal fittings such as those mentioned in 6.1.4, are not considered metal packagings. P 113 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 113 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags paper plastics textile, rubberized Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Additional requirement The packaging shall be sift-proof. Special packing provisions PP 49 For UN Nos. 0094 and 0305, no more than 50 g of substance shall be packed in an inner packaging. PP 50 For UN No. 0027, inner packagings are not necessary when drums are used as outer packagings. PP 51 For UN No. 0028, paper kraft or waxed paper sheets may be used as inner packagings. P 114a PACKING INSTRUCTION (Solid wetted) P 114a The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags plastics textile woven plastics Receptacles metal plastics wood Bags plastics textile, plastic coated or lined Receptacles metal plastics Dividing partitions wood Boxes steel (4A) metal, other than steel or aluminium (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Additional requirement Intermediate packagings are not required if leakproof removable head drums are used as outer packagings. Special packing provisions PP 26 For UN Nos. 0077, 0132, 0234, 0235 and 0236, packagings shall be lead free. PP 43 For UN No. 0342, inner packagings are not required when metal (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2) or plastics (1H1 or 1H2) drums are used as outer packagings. P 114b PACKING INSTRUCTION (Solid dry) P 114b The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags paper, kraft plastics textile, sift-proof woven plastics, sift-proof Receptacles fibreboard metal paper plastics woven plastics, sift-proof wood Not necessary Boxes natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Special packing provisions PP 26 For UN Nos. 0077, 0132, 0234, 0235 and 0236, packagings shall be lead free. PP 48 For UN Nos. 0508 and 0509, metal packagings shall not be used. Packagings of other material with a small amount of metal, for example metal closures or other metal fittings such as those mentioned in 6.1.4, are not considered metal packagings. PP 50 For UN Nos. 0160, 0161 and 0508, inner packagings are not necessary if drums are used as outer packagings. PP 52 For UN Nos. 0160 and 0161, when metal drums ( 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2) are used as outer packagings, metal packagings shall be so constructed that the risk of explosion, by reason of increased internal pressure from internal or external causes is prevented. P 115 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 115 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Receptacles plastics wood Bags plastics in metal receptacles Drums metal Receptacles wood Boxes natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Special packing provisions PP 45 For UN No. 0144, intermediate packagings are not required. PP 53 For UN Nos. 0075, 0143, 0495 and 0497, when boxes are used as outer packagings, inner packagings shall have taped screw cap closures and be not more than 5 litres capacity each. Inner packagings shall be surrounded with non-combustible absorbent cushioning materials. The amount of absorbent cushioning material shall be sufficient to absorb the liquid contents. Metal receptacles shall be cushioned from each other. Net mass of propellant is limited to 30 kg for each package when outer packagings are boxes. PP 54 For UN Nos. 0075, 0143, 0495 and 0497, when drums are used as outer packagings and when intermediate packagings are drums, they shall be surrounded with non-combustible cushioning material in a quantity sufficient to absorb the liquid contents. A composite packaging consisting of a plastics receptacle in a metal drum may be used instead of the inner and intermediate packagings. The net volume of propellant in each package shall not exceed 120 litres. PP 55 For UN No. 0144, absorbent cushioning material shall be inserted. PP 56 For UN No. 0144, metal receptacles may be used as inner packagings. PP 57 For UN Nos. 0075, 0143, 0495 and 0497, bags shall be used as intermediate packagings when boxes are used as outer packagings. PP 58 For UN Nos. 0075, 0143, 0495 and 0497, drums shall be used as intermediate packagings when drums are used as outer packagings. PP 59 For UN No. 0144, fibreboard boxes (4G) may be used as outer packagings. PP 60 For UN No. 0144, aluminium drums (1B1 and 1B2) and metal, other than steel or aluminium, drums (1N1 and 1N2) shall not be used. P 116 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 116 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags paper, water and oil resistant plastics textile, plastic coated or lined woven plastics, sift-proof Receptacles fibreboard, water resistant metal plastics wood, sift-proof Sheets paper, water resistant paper, waxed plastics Not necessary Bags woven plastics (5H1, 5H2, 5H3) paper, multiwall, water resistant (5M2) plastics, film (5H4) textile, sift-proof (5L2) textile, water resistant (5L3) Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Jerricans steel (3A1, 3A2) plastics (3H1, 3H2) Special packing provisions PP 61 For UN Nos. 0082, 0241, 0331 and 0332, inner packagings are not required if leakproof removable head drums are used as outer packagings. PP 62 For UN Nos. 0082, 0241, 0331 and 0332, inner packagings are not required when the explosive is contained in a material impervious to liquid. PP 63 For UN No. 0081, inner packagings are not required when contained in rigid plastic which is impervious to nitric esters. PP 64 For UN No. 0331, inner packagings are not required when bags (5H2), (5H3) or (5H4) are used as outer packagings. PP 65 (Deleted) PP 66 For UN No. 0081, bags shall not be used as outer packagings. P 130 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 130 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Not necessary Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, expanded (4H1) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Special packing provision PP 67 The following applies to UN Nos. 0006, 0009, 0010, 0015, 0016, 0018, 0019, 0034, 0035, 0038, 0039, 0048, 0056, 0137, 0138, 0168, 0169, 0171, 0181, 0182, 0183, 0186, 0221, 0243, 0244, 0245, 0246, 0254, 0280, 0281, 0286, 0287, 0297, 0299, 0300, 0301, 0303, 0321, 0328, 0329, 0344, 0345, 0346, 0347, 0362, 0363, 0370, 0412, 0424, 0425, 0434, 0435, 0436, 0437, 0438, 0451, 0488 , 0502 and 0510 : Large and robust explosives articles, normally intended for military use, without their means of initiation or with their means of initiation containing at least two effective protective features, may be carried unpackaged. When such articles have propelling charges or are self-propelled, their ignition systems shall be protected against stimuli encountered during normal conditions of carriage. A negative result in Test Series 4 on an unpackaged article indicates that the article can be considered for carriage unpackaged. Such unpackaged articles may be fixed to cradles or contained in crates or other suitable handling devices. NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3). P 131 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 131 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags paper plastics Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Reels Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Special packing provision PP 68 For UN Nos. 0029, 0267 and 0455, bags and reels shall not be used as inner packagings. P 132a PACKING INSTRUCTION (Articles consisting of closed metal, plastics or fibreboard casings that contain a detonating explosive, or consisting of plastics-bonded detonating explosives) P 132a The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Not necessary Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) wood, natural, ordinary (4C1) wood, natural, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) P 132b PACKING INSTRUCTION (Articles without closed casings) P 132b The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Sheets paper plastics Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) P 133 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 133 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Trays, fitted with dividing partitions fibreboard plastics wood Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Additional requirement Receptacles are only required as intermediate packagings when the inner packagings are trays. Special packing provision PP 69 For UN Nos. 0043, 0212, 0225, 0268 and 0306, trays shall not be used as inner packagings. P 134 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 134 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags water resistant Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Sheets fibreboard, corrugated Tubes fibreboard Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, expanded (4H1) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) P 135 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 135 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags paper plastics Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Sheets paper plastics Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, expanded (4H1) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) P 136 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 136 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags plastics textile Boxes fibreboard plastics wood Dividing partitions in the outer packagings Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) P 137 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 137 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags plastics Boxes fibreboard wood Tubes fibreboard metal plastics Dividing partitions in the outer packagings Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Special packing provision PP 70 For UN Nos. 0059, 0439, 0440 and 0441, when the shaped charges are packed singly, the conical cavity shall face downwards and the package shall be marked as illustrated in figures 5.2.1.10.1.1 or 5.2.1.10.1.2 . When the shaped charges are packed in pairs, the conical cavities shall face inwards to minimize the jetting effect in the event of accidental initiation. P 138 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 138 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags plastics Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Additional requirement If the ends of the articles are sealed, inner packagings are not necessary. P 139 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 139 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags plastics Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Reels Sheets paper plastics Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Special packing provisions PP 71 For UN Nos. 0065, 0102, 0104, 0289 and 0290, the ends of the detonating cord shall be sealed, for example, by a plug firmly fixed so that the explosive cannot escape. The ends of flexible detonating cord shall be fastened securely. PP 72 For UN Nos. 0065 and 0289, inner packagings are not required when they are in coils. P 140 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 140 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags plastics Receptacles wood Reels Sheets paper, kraft plastics Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Special packing provisions PP 73 For UN No. 0105, no inner packagings are required if the ends are sealed. PP 74 For UN No. 0101, the packaging shall be sift-proof except when the fuse is covered by a paper tube and both ends of the tube are covered with removable caps. PP 75 For UN No. 0101, steel, aluminium or other metal boxes or drums shall not be used. P 141 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 141 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Trays, fitted with dividing partitions plastics wood Dividing partitions in the outer packagings Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) P 142 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 142 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags paper plastics Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Sheets paper Trays, fitted with dividing partitions plastics Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) P 143 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 143 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Bags paper, kraft plastics textile textile, rubberized Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Trays, fitted with dividing partitions plastics wood Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary (4C1) natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Additional requirement Instead of the above inner and outer packagings, composite packagings (6HH2) (plastics receptacle with outer solid plastics box) may be used. Special packing provision PP 76 For UN Nos. 0271, 0272, 0415 and 0491, when metal packagings are used, metal packagings shall be so constructed that the risk of explosion, by reason of increase in internal pressure from internal or external causes is prevented. P 144 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 144 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing provisions of 4.1.5 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Dividing partitions in the outer packagings Not necessary Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood, ordinary with metal liner (4C1) plywood (4D) with metal liner reconstituted wood (4F) with metal liner plastics, expanded (4H1) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plastics (1H1, 1H2) Special packing provision PP 77 For UN Nos. 0248 and 0249, packagings shall be protected against the ingress of water. When water-activated contrivances are transported unpackaged, they shall be provided with at least two independent protective features which prevent the ingress of water. NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3). P 200 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 200 Type of packagings Cylinders, tubes, pressure drums and bundles of cylinders Cylinders, tubes, pressure drums and bundles of cylinders are authorised provided the special packing provisions of 4.1.6 , the provisions listed below under (1) to (9) and, when referred to in the column "Special packing provisions" of Tables 1, 2 or 3, the relevant special packing provisions listed below under (10), are met. General (1) Pressure receptacles shall be so closed and leakproof as to prevent escape of the gases; (2) Pressure receptacles containing toxic substances with an LC 50 less than or equal to 200 ml/m 3 (ppm) as specified in the table shall not be equipped with any pressure relief device. Pressure relief devices shall be fitted on UN pressure receptacles used for the carriage of UN No. 1013 carbon dioxide and UN No. 1070 nitrous oxide. (3) The following three tables cover compressed gases (Table 1), liquefied and dissolved gases (Table 2) and substances not in Class 2 (Table 3). They provide: (a) the UN number, name and description, and the classification code of the substance; (b) the LC 50 for toxic substances; (c) the types of pressure receptacles authorised for the substance, shown by the letter "X"; (d) the maximum test period for periodic inspection of the pressure receptacles; NOTE: For pressure receptacles which make use of composite materials, the maximum test period shall be 5 years. The test period may be extended to that specified in Tables 1 and 2 (i.e. up to 10 years), if approved by the competent authority or body designated by this authority which issued the type approval. (e) the minimum test pressure of the pressure receptacles; (f) t he maximum working pressure of the pressure receptacles for compressed gases (where no value is given, the working pressure shall not exceed two thirds of the test pressure) or the maximum filling ratio(s) dependent on the test pressure(s) for liquefied and dissolved gases; (g) special packing provisions that are specific to a substance. Test pressure, filling ratios and filling requirements (4) The minimum test pressure required for is 1 MPa (10 bar); (5) In no case shall pressure receptacles be filled in excess of the limit permitted in the following requirements: (a) For compressed gases, the working pressure shall be not more than two thirds of the test pressure of the pressure receptacles. Restrictions to this upper limit on working pressure are imposed by special packing provision "o" of paragraph (10). In no case shall the internal pressure at 65 °C exceed the test pressure. (b) For high pressure liquefied gases, the filling ratio shall be such that the settled pressure at 65 °C does not exceed the test pressure of the pressure receptacles. The use of test pressures and filling ratios other than those in the Table is permitted, except where special packing provision "o" of paragraph (10) applies, provided that: (i) the criterion of special packing provision "r" of paragraph (10) is met when applicable; or (ii) the above criterion is met in all other cases. For high pressure liquefied gases and gas mixtures for which relevant data are not available , the maximum filling ratio (FR) shall be determined as follows: FR=8,5× 10 -4 × d g × P h where FR = maximum filling ratio d g = gas density (at 15 °C, 1 bar)(in kg/m 3 ) P h = minimum test pressure (in bar). If the density of the gas is unknown, the maximum filling ratio shall be determined as follows: FR= P h ×MM× 10 -3 R×338 where FR = maximum filling ratio P h = minimum test pressure (in bar) MM = molecular mass (in g/mol) R = 8.31451 × 10 -2 bar.l.mol -1 .K -1 (gas constant). For gas mixtures, the average molecular mass is to be taken, taking into account the volumetric concentrations of the various components. (c) For low pressure liquefied gases, the maximum mass of contents per litre of water capacity shall equal 0.95 times the density of the liquid phase at 50 °C; in addition, the liquid phase shall not fill the pressure receptacle at any temperature up to 60 °C. The test pressure of the pressure receptacle shall be at least equal to the vapour pressure (absolute) of the liquid at 65 °C, minus 100 kPa (1 bar). For low pressure liquefied gases and gas mixtures for which relevant data are not available , the maximum filling ratio shall be determined as follows: FR=(0,0032×BP-0,24)× d l where FR = maximum filling ratio BP = boiling point (in Kelvin) d l = density of the liquid at boiling point (in kg/l). (d) For UN No. 1001 acetylene, dissolved, and UN No. 3374 acetylene, solvent free, see special packing provision "p" of paragraph (10). (e) For liquefied gases charged with compressed gases, both components – the liquefied gas and the compressed gas – have to be taken into consideration in the calculation of the internal pressure in the pressure receptacle. The maximum mass of contents per litre of water capacity shall not exceed 0.95 times the density of the liquid phase at 50 °C; in addition, the liquid phase shall not completely fill the pressure receptacle at any temperature up to 60 °C. When filled, the internal pressure at 65 °C shall not exceed the test pressure of the pressure receptacles. The vapour pressures and volumetric expansions of all substances in the pressure receptacles shall be considered. When experimental data is not available, the following steps shall be carried out: (i) Calculation of the vapour pressure of the liquefied gas and of the partial pressure of the compressed gas at 15 °C (filling temperature); (ii) Calculation of the volumetric expansion of the liquid phase resulting from the heating from 15 °C to 65 °C and calculation of the remaining volume for the gaseous phase; (iii) Calculation of the partial pressure of the compressed gas at 65 °C considering the volumetric expansion of the liquid phase; NOTE: The compressibility factor of the compressed gas at 15 °C and 65 °C shall be considered. (iv) Calculation of the vapour pressure of the liquefied gas at 65 °C; (v) The total pressure is the sum of the vapour pressure of the liquefied gas and the partial pressure of the compressed gas at 65 °C; (vi) Consideration of the solubility of the compressed gas at 65 °C in the liquid phase; The test pressure of the pressure receptacle shall not be less than the calculated total pressure minus 100 kPa (1 bar). If the solubility of the compressed gas in the liquid phase is not known for the calculation, the test pressure can be calculated without taking the gas solubility (sub-paragraph (vi)) into account. (6) Other test pressure and filling ratio may be used provided they satisfy the general requirements outlined in paragraphs (4) and (5) above; (7) (a) The filling of pressure receptacles may only be carried out by specially-equipped centres, with qualified staff using appropriate procedures. The procedures shall include checks: – of the conformity of receptacles and accessories with RID; – of their compatibility with the product to be carried; – of the absence of damage which might affect safety; – of compliance with the degree or pressure of filling, as appropriate; – of marks and identification. (b) LPG to be filled in cylinders shall be of high quality; this is deemed to be fulfilled if the LPG to be filled is in compliance with the limitations on corrosiveness as specified in ISO 9162:1989. Periodic inspections (8) Refillable pressure receptacles shall be subjected to periodic inspections in accordance with the requirements of 6.2.1.6 and 6.2.3.5 respectively. (9) If special provisions for certain substances do not appear in the tables below, periodic inspections shall be carried out: (a) Every 5 years in the case of pressure receptacles intended for the carriage of gases of classification codes 1T, 1TF, 1TO, 1TC, 1TFC, 1TOC, 2T, 2TO, 2TF, 2TC, 2TFC, 2TOC, 4A, 4F and 4TC; (b) Every 5 years in the case of pressure receptacles intended for the carriage of substances from other classes; (c) Every 10 years in the case of pressure receptacles intended for the carriage of gases of classification codes 1A, 1O, 1F, 2A, 2O and 2F. For pressure receptacles which make use of composite materials, the maximum test period shall be 5 years. The test period may be extended to that specified in Tables 1 and 2 (i.e. up to 10 years), if approved by the competent authority or body designated by this authority which issued the type approval. Special packing provisions (10) Material compatibility a: Aluminium alloy pressure receptacles shall not be used. b: Copper valves shall not be used. c: Metal parts in contact with the contents shall not contain more than 65% copper. d: When steel pressure receptacles or composite pressure receptacles with steel liners are used, only those bearing the "H" mark in accordance with 6.2.2.7.4 (p) are permitted. Requirements for toxic substances with an LC 50 less than or equal to 200 ml/m 3 (ppm) k: Valve outlets shall be fitted with pressure retaining gas-tight plugs or caps having threads that match those of the valve outlets and made of material not liable to attack by the contents of the pressure receptacle. Each cylinder within a bundle shall be fitted with an individual valve that shall be closed during carriage. After filling, the manifold shall be evacuated, purged and plugged. Bundles containing UN 1045 Fluorine, compressed, may be constructed with isolation valves on groups of cylinders not exceeding 150 litres total water capacity instead of isolation valves on every cylinder. Cylinders and individual cylinders within a bundle shall have a test pressure greater than or equal to 200 bar and a minimum wall thickness of 3.5 mm for aluminium alloy or 2 mm for steel. Individual cylinders not complying with this requirement shall be carried in a rigid outer packaging that will adequately protect the cylinder and its fittings and meeting the packing group I performance level. Pressure drums shall have a minimum wall thickness as specified by the competent authority. Pressure receptacles shall not be fitted with a pressure relief device. Cylinders and individual cylinders in a bundle shall be limited to a maximum water capacity of 85 litres. Each valve shall be capable of withstanding the test pressure of the pressure receptacle and be connected directly to the pressure receptacle by either a taper thread or other means which meets the requirements of ISO 10692-2:2001. Each valve shall either be of the packless type with non-perforated diaphragm, or be of a type which prevents leakage through or past the packing . Carriage in capsules is not allowed. Each pressure receptacle shall be tested for leakage after filling . Gas specific provisions l: UN No. 1040 ethylene oxide may also be packed in hermetically sealed glass or metal inner packagings suitably cushioned in fibreboard, wooden or metal boxes meeting the packing group I performance level. The maximum quantity permitted in any glass inner packaging is 30 g, and the maximum quantity permitted in any metal inner packaging is 200 g. After filling, each inner packaging shall be determined to be leak-tight by placing the inner packaging in a hot water bath at a temperature, and for a period of time, sufficient to ensure that an internal pressure equal to the vapour pressure of ethylene oxide at 55 °C is achieved. The maximum net mass in any outer packaging shall not exceed 2.5 kg. m: Pressure receptacles shall be filled to a working pressure not exceeding 5 bar. n: Cylinders and individual cylinders in a bundle shall contain not more than 5 kg of the gas. When bundles containing UN 1045 Fluorine, compressed are divided into groups of cylinders in accordance with special packing provision "k" each group shall contain not more than 5 kg of the gas. o: In no case shall the working pressure or filling ratio shown in the tables be exceeded. p: For UN No. 1001 acetylene, dissolved, and UN No. 3374 acetylene, solvent free: cylinders shall be filled with a homogeneous monolithic porous material; the working pressure and the quantity of acetylene shall not exceed the values prescribed in the approval or in ISO 3807-1:2000 , ISO 3807-2:2000 or ISO 3807:2013 , as applicable. For UN No. 1001 acetylene, dissolved: cylinders shall contain a quantity of acetone or suitable solvent as specified in the approval (see ISO 3807-1:2000 , ISO 3807-2:2000 or ISO 3807:2013 , as applicable); cylinders fitted with pressure relief devices or manifolded together shall be carried vertically. Alternatively, for UN No. 1001 acetylene, dissolved: cylinders which are not UN pressure receptacles may be filled with a non monolithic porous material; the working pressure, the quantity of acetylene and the quantity of solvent shall not exceed the values prescribed in the approval. The maximum test period for periodic inspection of the cylinders shall not exceed five years. A test pressure of 52 bar shall be applied only to cylinders fitted with a fusible plug . q: Valve outlets of pressure receptacles for pyrophoric gases or flammable mixtures of gases containing more than 1% of pyrophoric compounds shall be fitted with gas-tight plugs or caps which shall be made of material not liable to attack by the contents of the pressure receptacle. When these pressure receptacles are manifolded in a bundle, each of the pressure receptacles shall be fitted with an individual valve that shall be closed during carriage, and the outlet of the manifold valve shall be fitted with a pressure retaining gas-tight plug or cap. Gas-tight plugs or caps shall have threads that match those of the valve outlets. Carriage in capsules is not allowed. r: The filling ratio of this gas shall be limited such that, if complete decomposition occurs, the pressure does not exceed two thirds of the test pressure of the pressure receptacle. ra: This gas may also be packed in capsules under the following conditions: (a) The mass of gas shall not exceed 150 g per capsule; (b) The capsules shall be free from faults liable to impair the strength; (c) The leakproofness of the closure shall be ensured by an additional device (cap, crown, seal, binding, etc.) capable of preventing any leakage of the closure during carriage; (d) The capsules shall be placed in an outer packaging of sufficient strength. A package shall not weigh more than 75 kg. s: Aluminium alloy pressure receptacles shall be: – Equipped only with brass or stainless steel valves; and – Cleaned for hydrocarbons contamination and not contaminated with oil. UN pressure receptacles shall be cleaned in accordance with ISO 11621:1997. ta: (Reserved) Periodic inspection u: The interval between periodic tests may be extended to 10 years for aluminium alloy pressure receptacles. This derogation may only be applied to UN pressure receptacles when the alloy of the pressure receptacle has been subjected to stress corrosion testing as specified in ISO 7866:2012 + Cor 1:2014 . ua: The interval between periodic tests may be extended to 15 years for alumin ium alloy cylinders and bundles of such cylinders if the provisions of paragraph (13) of this packing instruction are applied. This shall not apply to cylinders made from aluminium alloy AA 6351. For mixtures, this provision "ua" may be applied provided all the individual gases in the mixture have been allocated "ua" in Table 1 or Table 2. v: (1) The interval between inspections for steel cylinders, other than refillable welded steel cylinders for UN Nos. 1011, 1075, 1965, 1969 or 1978, may be extended to 15 years: (a) with the agreement of the competent authority (authorities) of the country (countries) where the periodic inspection and the carriage take place; and (b) in accordance with the requirements of a technical code or a standard recognised by the competent authority. (2) For refillable welded steel cylinders for UN Nos. 1011, 1075, 1965, 1969 or 1978, the interval may be extended to 15 years, if the provisions of paragraph (12) of this packing instruction are applied. va: For seamless steel cylinders which are equipped with residual pressure valves (RPVs) (see note below) that have been designed and tested in accordance with EN ISO 15996:2005 + A1:2007 or EN ISO 15996:2017 and for bundles of seamless steel cylinders equipped with main valve(s) with a residual pressure device, tested in accordance with EN ISO 15996:2005 + A1:2007 or EN ISO 15996:2017 , the interval between periodic tests may be extended to 15 years if the provisions of paragraph (13) of this packing instruction are applied. For mixtures, this provision "va" may be applied provided all the individual gases in the mixture have been allocated "va" in Table 1 or Table 2. NOTE: "Residual Pressure Valve" (RPV) means a closure which incorporates a residual pressure device that prevents ingress of contaminants by maintaining a positive differential between the pressure within the cylinder and the valve outlet. In order to prevent back-flow of fluids into the cylinder from a higher pressure source a "Non-Return Valve" (NRV) function shall either be incorporated into the residual pressure device or be a discrete additional device in the cylinder valve, e.g. a regulator. Requirements for N.O.S. entries and for mixtures z: The construction materials of the pressure receptacles and their accessories shall be compatible with the contents and shall not react to form harmful or dangerous compounds therewith. The test pressure and filling ratio shall be calculated in accordance with the relevant requirements of (5). Toxic substances with an LC 50 less than or equal to 200 ml/m 3 shall not be carried in tubes, pressure drums or MEGCs and shall meet the requirements of special packing provision "k". However, UN 1975 Nitric oxide and dinitrogen tetroxide mixture may be carried in pressure drums. For pressure receptacles containing pyrophoric gases or flammable mixtures of gases containing more than 1% pyrophoric compounds, the requirements of special packing provision "q" shall be met. The necessary steps shall be taken to prevent dangerous reactions (i.e. polymerisation or decomposition) during carriage. If necessary, stabilisation or addition of an inhibitor shall be required. Mixtures containing UN No. 1911 diborane, shall be filled to a pressure such that, if complete decomposition of the diborane occurs, two thirds of the test pressure of the pressure receptacle shall not be exceeded. Mixtures containing UN 2192 germane, other than mixtures of up to 35% germane in hydrogen or nitrogen or up to 28% germane in helium or argon, shall be filled to a pressure such that, if complete decomposition of the germane occurs, two thirds of the test pressure of the pressure receptacle shall not be exceeded. Mixtures of fluorine and nitrogen with a fluorine concentration below 35% by volume may be filled in pressure receptacles up to a maximum allowable working pressure for which the partial pressure of fluorine does not exceed 3.1 MPa (31 bar) absolute. working pressure bar < 31 x f -1 in which x f = fluorine concentration in % by volume/100. Mixtures of fluorine and inert gases with a fluorine concentration below 35% by volume may be filled in pressure receptacles up to a maximum allowable working pressure for which the partial pressure of fluorine does not exceed 3.1 MPa (31 bar) absolute, additionally taking the coefficient of nitrogen equivalency in accordance with ISO 10156:2017 into account when calculating the partial pressure. working pressure bar < 31 x f x f + K k × x k -1 where x f = fluorine concentration in % by volume/100; K k = coefficient of equivalency of an inert gas relative to nitrogen (coefficient of nitrogen equivalency); x k = inert gas concentration in % by volume/100. However, the working pressure for mixtures of fluorine and inert gases shall not exceed 20 MPa (200 bar). The minimum test pressure of pressure receptacles for mixtures of fluorine and inert gases equals 1.5 times the working pressure or 20 MPa (200 bar), with the greater value to be applied. Requirements for substances not in Class 2 ab: Pressure receptacles shall satisfy the following conditions: (i) The pressure test shall include an inspection of the inside of the pressure receptacles and check of accessories; (ii) In addition resistance to corrosion shall be checked every two years by means of suitable instruments (e.g. ultrasound) and the condition of the accessories verified; (iii) Wall thickness shall not be less than 3 mm. ac: Tests and inspections shall be carried out under the supervision of an expert approved by the competent authority. ad: Pressure receptacles shall satisfy the following conditions: (i) Pressure receptacles shall be designed for a design pressure of not less than 2.1 MPa (21 bar) (gauge pressure); (ii) In addition to the marks for refillable receptacles, the pressure receptacles shall bear the following particulars in clearly legible and durable characters: – The UN number and the proper shipping name of the substance according to 3.1.2; – The maximum permitted mass when filled and the tare of the pressure receptacle, including accessories fitted during filling, or the gross mass. (11) The applicable requirements of this packing instruction are considered to have been complied with if the following standards, as relevant, are applied: Applicable requirements Reference Title of document (7) EN 13365:2002 + A1:2005 Transportable gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles for permanent and liquefied gases (excluding acetylene) – Inspection at the time of filling (7) EN ISO 24431:2016 Gas cylinders – Seamless, welded and composite cylinders for compressed and liquefied gases (excluding acetylene) – Inspection at time of filling (7) (a) ISO 10691:2004 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders for liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) – Procedures for checking before, during and after filling (7) (a) ISO 11755:2005 Gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles for compressed and liquefied gases (excluding acetylene) – Inspection at time of filling (7) (a) and (10) p EN ISO 11372:2011 Gas cylinders – Acetylene cylinders – Filling conditions and filling inspection (7) (a) and (10) p EN ISO 13088:2011 Gas cylinders – Acetylene cylinder bundles – Filling conditions and filling inspection (7) EN 1439:2021 LPG equipment and accessories – Procedures for checking transportable refillable LPG cylinders before, during and after filling (7) EN 13952:2017 LPG equipment and accessories – Filling operations for LPG cylinders (7) EN 14794:2005 LPG equipment and accessories – Transportable refillable aluminium cylinders for liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) – Procedure for checking before, during and after filling (12) An interval of 15 years for the periodic inspection of refillable welded steel cylinders may be granted in accordance with special packing provision v (2) of paragraph (10), if the following provisions are applied. 1. General provisions 1.1 For the application of this section, the competent authority shall not delegate its tasks and duties to Xb bodies (inspection bodies of type B) or IS (in-house inspection services) (for the definitions of Xb and IS, see 6.2.3.6.1) . 1.2 The owner of the cylinders shall apply to the competent authority for granting the 15 year interval, and shall demonstrate that the requirements of sub-paragraphs 2, 3 and 4 are met. 1.3 Cylinders manufactured since 1 January 1999 shall have been manufactured in conformity with the following standards: – EN 1442; or – EN 13322-1; or – Annex I, parts 1 to 3 to Council Directive 84/527/EEC a as applicable according to the table in 6.2.4. Other cylinders manufactured before 1 January 2009 in conformity with RID in accordance with a technical code accepted by the national competent authority may be accepted for a 15 year interval, if they are of equivalent safety to the provisions of RID as applicable at the time of application. 1.4 The owner shall submit documentary evidence to the competent authority demonstrating that the cylinders comply with the provisions of sub-paragraph 1.3. The competent authority shall verify that these conditions are met. 1.5 The competent authority shall check whether the provisions of sub-paragraphs 2 and 3 are fulfilled and correctly applied. If all provisions are fulfilled, it shall authorise the 15-year interval for the cylinders. In this authorisation, the type of cylinder (as specified in the type approval) or a group of cylinders (see Note) covered shall be clearly identified. The authorisation shall be delivered to the owner; the competent authority shall keep a copy. The owner shall keep the documents for as long as the cylinders are authorised for a 15 year interval. NOTE: A group of cylinders is defined by the production dates of identical cylinders for a period, during which the applicable provisions of RID and of the technical code accepted by the competent authority have not changed in their technical content. Example: Cylinders of identical design and volume having been manufactured according to the provisions of RID as applicable between 1 January 1985 and 31 December 1988 in combination with a technical code accepted by the competent authority applicable for the same period, form one group in terms of the provisions of this paragraph. 1.6 The competent authority shall monitor the owner of the cylinders for compliance with the provisions of RID and the authorisation given as appropriate, but at least every three years or when changes to the procedures are introduced. 2. Operational provisions 2.1 Cylinders having been granted a 15 year interval for periodic inspection shall only be filled in filling centres applying a documented quality system to ensure that all the provisions of paragraph (7) of this packing instruction and the requirements and responsibilities of EN 1439: 2021 (or until 31 December 2024, EN 1439:2017) and EN 13952:2017 are fulfilled and correctly applied. 2.2 The competent authority shall verify that these requirements are fulfilled and check this as appropriate, but at least every three years or when changes to the procedures are introduced. 2.3 The owner shall provide documentary evidence to the competent authority that the filling centre complies with the provisions of sub-paragraph 2.1. 2.4 If a filling centre is situated in a different RID Contracting State, the owner shall provide additional documentary evidence that the filling centre is monitored accordingly by the competent authority of that RID Contracting State. 2.5 To prevent internal corrosion, only gases of high quality with very low potential contamination shall be filled into the cylinders. This is deemed to be fulfilled, if the gases conform to the limitations on corrosiveness as specified in ISO 9162:1989 . 3. Provisions for qualification and periodic inspection 3.1 Cylinders of a type or group already in use, for which a 15 year interval has been granted and to which the 15 year interval has been applied, shall be subject to a periodic inspection according to 6.2.3.5. NOTE: For the definition of a group of cylinders, see Note to sub-paragraph 1.5. 3.2 If a cylinder with a 15-year interval fails the hydraulic pressure test during a periodic inspection e.g. by bursting or leakage, the owner shall investigate and produce a report on the cause of the failure and if other cylinders (e.g. of the same type or group) are affected. In the latter case, the owner shall inform the competent authority. The competent authority shall then decide on appropriate measures and inform the competent authorities of all other RID Contracting States accordingly. 3.3 If internal corrosion as defined in the standard applied (see sub-paragraph 1.3) has been detected, the cylinder shall be withdrawn from use and shall not be granted any further period for filling and carriage. 3.4 Cylinders having been granted a 15 year interval shall only be fitted with valves designed and manufactured for a minimum 15 year period of use according to EN 13152:2001 + A1:2003 , EN 13153:2001 + A1:2003, EN ISO 14245:2010, EN ISO 14245:2019, EN ISO 14245:2021, EN ISO 15995:2010, EN ISO 15995:2019 or EN ISO 15995:2021 . After a periodic inspection, a new valve shall be fitted to the cylinder, except that manually operated valves, which have been refurbished or inspected according to EN 14912:2022 may be re-fitted, if they are suitable for another 15 year period of use. Refurbishment or inspection shall only be carried out by the manufacturer of the valves or according to his technical instruction by an enterprise qualified for such work and operating under a documented quality system. 4. Marking Cylinders having been granted a 15 year interval for periodic inspection in accordance with this paragraph shall additionally be marked clearly and legibly with "P15Y". This mark shall be removed if the cylinder is no longer authorised for a 15 year interval. NOTE: This mark shall not apply to cylinders subject to the transitional provision in 1.6.2.9, 1.6.2.10 or the provisions of special packing provision v (1) of paragraph (10) of this packing instruction. (13) An interval of 15 years for the periodic inspection of seamless steel and aluminium alloy cylinders and bundles of such cylinders may be granted in accordance with special packing provisions ua or va of paragraph (10), if the following provisions are applied: 1. General provisions 1.1 For the application of this paragraph, the competent authority shall not delegate its tasks and duties to Xb bodies (inspection bodies of type B) or IS (in-house inspection services) (for the definitions of Xb and IS, see 6.2.3.6.1). 1.2 The owner of the cylinders or bundles of cylinders shall apply to the competent authority for granting the 15 year interval, and shall demonstrate that the requirements of sub-paragraphs 2, 3 and 4 are met. 1.3 Cylinders manufactured since 1 January 1999 shall have been manufactured in conformity with one of the following standards: – EN 1964-1 or EN 1964-2; or – EN 1975; or – EN ISO 9809-1 or EN ISO 9809-2; or – EN ISO 7866; or – Annex I, parts 1 to 3 to Council Directive 84/525/EEC b and 84/526/EEC c as applicable at the time of manufacture (see also the Table in 6.2.4.1). Other cylinders manufactured before 1 January 2009 in conformity with RID in accordance with a technical code accepted by the national competent authority may be accepted for a 15 year interval for periodic inspection, if they are of equivalent safety to the provisions of RID as applicable at the time of application. NOTE: This provision is considered to be fulfilled if the cylinder has been reassessed according to the procedure for the reassessment of conformity described in Annex III of Directive 2010/35/EU of 16 June 2010 or Annex IV, Part II, of Directive 1999/36/EC of 29 April 1999. Cylinders and bundles of cylinders marked with the United Nations packaging symbol specified in 6.2.2.7.2 (a) shall not be granted a 15 year interval for periodic inspection. 1.4 Bundles of cylinders shall be constructed such that contact between cylinders along the longitudinal axis of the cylinders does not result in external corrosion. The supports and restraining straps shall be such as to minimise the risk of corrosion to the cylinders. Shock absorbent materials used in supports shall only be allowed if they have been treated to eliminate water absorption. Examples of suitable materials are water resistant belting and rubber. 1.5 The owner shall submit documentary evidence to the competent authority demonstrating that the cylinders comply with the provisions of sub-paragraph 1.3. The competent authority shall verify that these conditions are met. 1.6 The competent authority shall check whether the provisions of sub-paragraphs 2 and 3 are fulfilled and correctly applied. If all provisions are fulfilled, it shall authorise the 15 year interval for periodic inspection for the cylinders or bundles of cylinders. In this authorisation a group of cylinders (see Note below) covered shall be clearly identified. The authorisation shall be delivered to the owner; the competent authority shall keep a copy. The owner shall keep the documents for as long as the cylinders are authorised for a 15 year interval. NOTE: A group of cylinders is defined by the production dates of identical cylinders for a period, during which the applicable provisions of RID and of the technical code accepted by the competent authority have not changed in their technical content. Example: Cylinders of identical design and volume having been manufactured according to the provisions of RID applicable between 1 January 1985 and 31 December 1988 in combination with a technical code accepted by the competent authority applicable for the same period form one group in terms of the provisions of this paragraph. 1.7 The owner shall ensure compliance with the provisions of RID and the authorisation given as appropriate and shall demonstrate this to the competent authority on request but at least every three years or when significant changes to the procedures are introduced. 2. Operational provisions 2.1 Cylinders or bundles of cylinders having been granted a 15 year interval for periodic inspection shall only be filled in filling centres applying a documented and certified quality system to ensure that all the provisions of paragraph (7) of this packing instruction and the requirements and responsibilities of EN ISO 24431:2016 or EN 13365:2002 as applicable are fulfilled and correctly applied. The quality system, according to the ISO 9000 (series) or equivalent, shall be certified by an accredited independent body recognized by the competent authority. This includes procedures for pre- and post-fill inspections and the filling process for cylinders, bundles of cylinders and valves. 2.2 Aluminium alloy cylinders and bundles of such cylinders without RPVs having been granted a 15 year interval for periodic inspection shall be checked prior to every fill in accordance with a documented procedure which shall at least include the following: Open the cylinder valve or the main valve of the bundle of cylinders main valve to check for residual pressure; If gas is emitted, the cylinder or bundle of cylinders may be filled; If no gas is emitted, the internal condition of the cylinder or bundle of cylinders shall be checked for contamination; If no contamination is detected, the cylinder or bundle of cylinders may be filled. If contamination is detected, corrective action shall be carried out. 2.3 Seamless steel cylinders fitted with RPVs and bundles of seamless steel cylinders equipped with main valve(s) with a residual pressure device having been granted a 15 year interval for periodic inspection shall be checked prior to every fill in accordance with a documented procedure which shall at least include the following: Open the cylinder valve or bundle of cylinders main valve to check for residual pressure; If gas is emitted, the cylinder or bundle of cylinders may be filled; If no gas is emitted the functioning of the residual pressure device shall be checked; If the check shows that the residual pressure device has retained pressure the cylinder or bundle of cylinders may be filled; If the check shows that the residual pressure device has not retained pressure, the internal condition of the cylinder or bundle of cylinders shall be checked for contamination: – If no contamination is detected, the cylinder or bundle of cylinders may be filled following repair or replacement of the residual pressure device; – If contamination is detected, corrective action shall be carried out. 2.4 To prevent internal corrosion, only gases of high quality with very low potential contamination shall be filled into cylinders or bundles of cylinders. This is deemed to be fulfilled, if the compatibility of gases/material is acceptable in accordance with EN ISO 11114-1: 2020 and EN ISO 11114-2:2013 , and the gas quality meets the specifications in EN ISO 14175:2008 or, for gases not covered in the standard, a minimum purity of 99.5% by volume and a maximum moisture content of 40 ml/m 3 (ppm). For nitrous oxide the values shall be a minimum purity of 98% by volume and a maximum moisture content of 70 ml/m 3 (ppm). 2.5 The owner shall ensure that the requirements of 2.1 to 2.4 are fulfilled and provide documentary evidence of this to the competent authority on request, but at least every three years or when significant changes to the procedures are introduced. 2.6 If a filling centre is situated in a different RID Contracting State, the owner shall provide to the competent authority, on request, additional documentary evidence that the filling centre is monitored accordingly by the competent authority of that RID Contracting State. See also 1.2. 3. Provisions for qualification and periodic inspection 3.1 Cylinders and bundles of cylinders already in use, for which the conditions of sub-paragraph 2 have been met from the date of the last periodic inspection to the satisfaction of the competent authority, may have their inspection period extended to 15 years from the date of the last periodic inspection. Otherwise the change of test period from ten to fifteen years shall be made at the time of periodic inspection. The periodic inspection report shall indicate that this cylinder or bundle of cylinders shall be fitted with a residual pressure device as appropriate. Other documentary evidence may be accepted by the competent authority. 3.2 If a cylinder with a 15 year interval fails the pressure test by bursting or leakage or if a severe defect is detected by a non-destructive test (NDT) during a periodic inspection the owner shall investigate and produce a report on the cause of the failure and if other cylinders (e.g. of the same type or group) are affected. In the latter case, the owner shall inform the competent authority. The competent authority shall then decide on appropriate measures and inform the competent authorities of all other RID Contracting States accordingly. 3.3 If internal corrosion and other defects as defined in the periodic inspection standards referenced in 6.2.4 have been detected, the cylinder shall be withdrawn from use and shall not be granted any further period for filling and carriage. 3.4 Cylinders or bundles of cylinders having been granted a 15 year interval for periodic inspection shall only be fitted with valves designed and tested according to EN 849 or EN ISO 10297 as applicable at the time of manufacture (see also the Table in 6.2.4.1). After a periodic inspection a new valve shall be fitted, except that valves which have been refurbished or inspected according to EN ISO 22434:2022 may be re-fitted. 4. Marking Cylinders and bundles of cylinders having been granted a 15 year interval for periodic inspection in accordance with this paragraph shall have the date (year) of the next periodic inspection as required in section 5.2.1.6 (c) and at the same time additionally be marked clearly and legibly with "P15Y". This mark shall be removed if the cylinder or bundle of cylinders is no longer authorised for a 15 year interval for periodic inspection. a Council directive on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to welded unalloyed steel gas cylinders, published in the Official Journal of the European Communities No. L 300 of 19 November 1984. b Council directive on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to seamless, steel gas cylinders, published in the Official Journal of the European Communities No. L 300 of 19.11.1984. c Council Directive on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to seamless, unalloyed aluminium and aluminium alloy gas cylinders, published in the Official Journal of the European Communities No. L 300 of 19.11.1984. Table 1: Compressed gases UN No. Name and description Classification code LC 50 ml/m 3 Cylinders Tubes Pressure drums Bundles of cylinders Test period, years (a) Test pressure, bar (b) Maximum working pressure, bar (b) Special packing provisions 1002 AIR, COMPRESSED 1 A X X X X 10 ua, va 1006 ARGON, COMPRESSED 1 A X X X X 10 ua, va 1016 CARBON MONOXIDE, COMPRESSED 1 TF 3760 X X X X 5 u 1023 COAL GAS, COMPRESSED 1 TF X X X X 5 1045 FLUORINE, COMPRESSED 1 TOC 185 X X 5 200 30 a, k, n, o 1046 HELIUM, COMPRESSED 1 A X X X X 10 ua, va 1049 HYDROGEN, COMPRESSED 1 F X X X X 10 d, ua, va 1056 KRYPTON, COMPRESSED 1 A X X X X 10 ua, va 1065 NEON, COMPRESSED 1 A X X X X 10 ua, va 1066 NITROGEN, COMPRESSED 1 A X X X X 10 ua, va 1071 OIL GAS, COMPRESSED 1 TF X X X X 5 1072 OXYGEN, COMPRESSED 1 O X X X X 10 s, ua, va 1612 HEXAETHYL TETRAPHOSPHATE AND COMPRESSED GAS MIXTURE 1 T X X X X 5 z 1660 NITRIC OXIDE, COMPRESSED 1 TOC 115 x x 5 225 33 k, o 1953 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 1 TF 5000 X X X X 5 z 1954 COMPRESSED GAS, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S 1 F X X X X 10 z, ua, va 1955 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, N.O.S. 1 T 5000 X X X X 5 z 1956 COMPRESSED GAS, N.O.S. 1 A X X X X 10 z, ua, va 1957 DEUTERIUM, COMPRESSED 1 F X X X X 10 d, ua, va 1964 HYDROCARBON GAS MIXTURE, COMPRESSED, N.O.S. 1 F X X X X 10 z, ua, va 1971 1971 METHANE, COMPRESSED or NATURAL GAS, COMPRESSED with high methane content 1 F X X X X 10 ua, va 2034 HYDROGEN AND METHANE MIXTURE, COMPRESSED 1 F X X X X 10 d, ua, va 2190 OXYGEN DIFLUORIDE, COMPRESSED 1 TOC 2,6 X X 5 200 30 a, k, n, o 3156 COMPRESSED GAS, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 1 O X X X X 10 z, ua, va 3303 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 1 TO 5000 X X X X 5 z 3304 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 1 TC 5000 X X X X 5 z 3305 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 1 TFC 5000 X X X X 5 z 3306 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 1 TOC 5000 X X X X 5 z (a) Not applicable for pressure receptacles made of composite materials. (b) Where the entries are blank, the working pressure shall not exceed two thirds of the test pressure . Table 2: Liquefied gases and dissolved gases UN No. Name and description Classification code LC 50 ml/m 3 Cylinders Tubes Pressure drums Bundles of cylinders Test period, years (a) Test pressure, bar Filling ratio Special packing provisions 1001 ACETYLENE, DISSOLVED 4 F X X 10 60 c, p 1005 AMMONIA, ANHYDROUS 2 TC 4000 X X X X 5 29 0.54 b, ra 1008 BORON TRIFLUORIDE 2 TC 864 X X X X 5 225 300 0.715 0.86 a a 1009 BROMOTRIFLUOROMETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 13B1) 2 A X X X X 10 42 120 250 1.13 1.44 1.60 ra ra ra 1010 1010 1010 BUTADIENES, STABILIZED (1,2-butadiene) or BUTADIENES, STABILIZED (1,3-butadiene) or BUTADIENES AND HYDROCARBON MIXTURE, STABILIZED 2 F 2 F 2 F X X X X X X X X X X X X 10 10 10 10 10 10 0.59 0.55 0.50 ra ra ra, v, z 1011 BUTANE 2 F X X X X 10 10 0.52 ra, v 1012 1012 1012 1012 BUTYLENE (Butylenes mixture) or BUTYLENE (1-Butylene) or BUTYLENE (cis-2-Butylene) or BUTYLENE (trans-2-Butylene) 2 F 2 F 2 F 2 F X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0.50 0.53 0.55 0.54 ra, z 1013 CARBON DIOXIDE 2 A X X X X 10 190 250 0.68 0.76 ra, ua, va ra, ua, va 1017 CHLORINE 2 TOC 293 X X X X 5 22 1.25 a, ra 1018 CHLORODIFLUOROMETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 22) 2 A X X X X 10 27 1.03 ra 1020 CHLOROPENTAFLUOROETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 115) 2 A X X X X 10 25 1.05 ra 1021 1-CHLORO-1,2,2,2-TETRAFLUOROETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 124) 2 A X X X X 10 11 1.20 1022 CHLOROTRIFLUOROMETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 13) 2 A X X X X 10 100 120 190 250 0.83 0.90 1.04 1.11 ra ra ra ra 1026 CYANOGEN 2 TF 350 X X X X 5 100 0.70 ra, u 1027 CYCLOPROPANE 2 F X X X X 10 18 0.55 ra 1028 DICHLORODIFLUOROMETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 12) 2 A X X X X 10 16 1.15 ra 1029 DICHLOROFLUOROMETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 21) 2 A X X X X 10 10 1.23 ra 1030 1,1-DIFLUOROETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 152a) 2 F X X X X 10 16 0.79 ra 1032 DIMETHYLAMINE, ANHYDROUS 2 F X X X X 10 10 0.59 b, ra 1033 DIMETHYL ETHER 2 F X X X X 10 18 0.58 ra 1035 ETHANE 2 F X X X X 10 95 120 300 0.25 0.30 0.40 ra ra ra 1036 ETHYLAMINE 2 F X X X X 10 10 0.61 b, ra 1037 ETHYL CHLORIDE 2 F X X X X 10 10 0.80 a, ra 1039 ETHYL METHYL ETHER 2 F X X X X 10 10 0.64 ra 1040 1040 ETHYLENE OXIDE, or ETHYLENE OXIDE WITH NITROGEN up to a total pressure of 1MPa (10 bar) at 50 °C 2 TF 2900 X X X X 5 15 0.78 l, ra 1041 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND CARBON DIOXIDE MIXTURE with more than 9% but not more than 87% ethylene oxide 2 F X X X X 10 190 250 0.66 0.75 ra ra 1043 FERTILIZER AMMONIATING SOLUTION with free ammonia CARRIAGE PROHIBITED 1048 HYDROGEN BROMIDE, ANHYDROUS 2 TC 2860 X X X X 5 60 1.51 a, d, ra 1050 HYDROGEN CHLORIDE, ANHYDROUS 2 TC 2810 X X X X 5 100 120 150 200 0.30 0.56 0.67 0.74 a, d, ra a, d, ra a, d, ra a, d, ra 1053 HYDROGEN SULPHIDE 2 TF 712 X X X X 5 48 0.67 d, ra, u 1055 ISOBUTYLENE 2 F X X X X 10 10 0.52 ra 1058 LIQUEFIED GASES, non-flammable, charged with nitrogen, carbon dioxide or air 2 A X X X X 10 ra , z 1060 METHYLACETYLENE AND PROPADIENE MIXTURE, STABILIZED Propadiene with 1% to 4% methylacetylene Mixture P1 Mixture P2 2 F X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 10 10 10 10 22 30 24 0.52 0.49 0.47 c, ra, z c, ra c, ra c, ra 1061 METHYLAMINE, ANHYDROUS 2 F X X X X 10 13 0.58 b, ra 1062 METHYL BROMIDE with not more than 2% chloropicrin 2 T 850 X X X X 5 10 1.51 a 1063 METHYL CHLORIDE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 40) 2 F X X X X 10 17 0.81 a, ra 1064 METHYL MERCAPTAN 2 TF 1350 X X X X 5 10 0.78 d, ra, u 1067 DINITROGEN TETROXIDE (NITROGEN DIOXIDE) 2 TOC 115 X X X 5 10 1.30 k 1069 NITROSYL CHLORIDE 2 TC 35 X X 5 13 1.10 k, ra 1070 NITROUS OXIDE 2 O X X X X 10 180 225 250 0.68 0.74 0.75 ua, va ua, va ua, va 1075 PETROLEUM GASES, LIQUEFIED 2 F X X X X 10 v, z 1076 PHOSGENE 2 TC 5 X X X 5 20 1.23 a, k, ra 1077 PROPYLENE 2 F X X X X 10 27 0.43 ra 1078 REFRIGERANT GAS, N.O.S. Mixture F 1 Mixture F 2 Mixture F 3 2 A X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 10 10 10 10 12 18 29 1.23 1.15 1.03 ra, z 1079 SULPHUR DIOXIDE 2 TC 2520 X X X X 5 12 1.23 ra 1080 SULPHUR HEXAFLUORIDE 2 A X X X X 10 70 140 160 1.06 1.34 1.38 ra, ua, va ra, ua, va ra, ua, va 1081 TETRAFLUOROETHYLENE, STABILIZED 2 F X X X X 10 200 m, o, ra 1082 TRIFLUOROCHLOROETHYLENE, STABILIZED (REFRIGERANT GAS R 1113) 2 TF 2000 X X X X 5 19 1.13 ra, u 1083 TRIMETHYLAMINE, ANHYDROUS 2 F X X X X 10 10 0.56 b, ra 1085 VINYL BROMIDE, STABILIZED 2 F X X X X 10 10 1.37 a, ra 1086 VINYL CHLORIDE, STABILIZED 2 F X X X X 10 12 0.81 a, ra 1087 VINYL METHYL ETHER, STABILIZED 2 F X X X X 10 10 0.67 ra 1581 CHLOROPICRIN AND METHYL BROMIDE MIXTURE with more than 2% chloropicrin 2 T 850 X X X X 5 10 1.51 a 1582 CHLOROPICRIN AND METHYL CHLORIDE MIXTURE 2 T (d) X x X X 5 17 0.81 a 1589 CYANOGEN CHLORIDE, STABILIZED 2 TC 80 X X 5 20 1.03 k 1741 BORON TRICHLORIDE 2 TC 2541 X X X X 5 10 1.19 a, ra 1749 CHLORINE TRIFLUORIDE 2 TOC 299 X X X X 5 30 1.40 a 1858 HEXAFLUOROPROPYLENE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 1216) 2 A X X X X 10 22 1.11 ra 1859 SILICON TETRAFLUORIDE 2 TC 922 X X X X 5 200 300 0.74 1.10 a a 1860 VINYL FLUORIDE, STABILIZED 2 F X X X X 10 250 0.64 a, ra 1911 DIBORANE 2 TF 80 X X 5 250 0.07 d, k, o 1912 METHYL CHLORIDE AND METHYLENE CHLORIDE MIXTURE 2 F X X X X 10 17 0.81 a, ra 1952 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND CARBON DIOXIDE MIXTURE with not more than 9% ethylene oxide 2 A X X X X 10 190 250 0.66 0.75 ra ra 1958 1,2-DICHLORO-1,1,2,2-TETRAFLUOROETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 114) 2 A X X X X 10 10 1.30 ra 1959 1,1-DIFLUOROETHYLENE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 1132a) 2 F X X X X 10 250 0.77 ra 1962 ETHYLENE 2 F X X X X 10 225 300 0.34 0.38 1965 HYDROCARBON GAS MIXTURE, LIQUEFIED,N.O.S Mixture A Mixture A 01 Mixture A 02 Mixture A 0 Mixture A 1 Mixture B 1 Mixture B 2 Mixture B Mixture C 2 F X X X X 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 15 15 15 20 25 25 25 30 (b) 0.50 0.49 0.48 0.47 0.46 0.45 0.44 0.43 0.42 ra, v, z 1967 INSECTICIDE GAS, TOXIC, N.O.S. 2 T X X X X 5 z 1968 INSECTICIDE GAS, N.O.S. 2 A X X X X 10 ra, z 1969 ISOBUTANE 2 F X X X X 10 10 0.49 ra, v 1973 CHLORODIFLUOROMETHANE AND CHLOROPENTAFLUOROETHANE MIXTURE with fixed boiling point, with approximately 49% chlorodifluoromethane (REFRIGERANT GAS R 502) 2 A X X X X 10 31 1.01 ra 1974 CHLORODIFLUOROBROMOMETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 12B1) 2 A X X X X 10 10 1.61 ra 1975 NITRIC OXIDE AND DINITROGEN TETROXIDE MIXTURE (NITRIC OXIDE AND NITROGEN DIOXIDE MIXTURE) 2 TOC 115 X X X 5 k, z 1976 OCTAFLUOROCYCLOBUTANE (REFRIGERANT GAS RC 318) 2 A X X X X 10 11 1.32 ra 1978 PROPANE 2 F X X X X 10 23 0.43 ra, v 1982 TETRAFLUOROMETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 14) 2 A X X X X 10 200 300 0.71 0.90 1983 1-CHLORO-2,2,2-TRIFLUOROETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 133a) 2 A X X X X 10 10 1.18 ra 1984 TRIFLUOROMETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 23) 2 A X X X X 10 190 250 0.88 0.96 ra ra 2035 1,1,1-TRIFLUOROETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 143a) 2 F X X X X 10 35 0.73 ra 2036 XENON 2 A X X X X 10 130 1.28 2044 2,2-DIMETHYLPROPANE 2 F X X X X 10 10 0.53 ra 2073 AMMONIA SOLUTION, relative density less than 0.880 at 15 °C in water, with more than 35% but not more than 40% ammonia with more than 40% but not more than 50% ammonia 4 A X X X X X X X X 5 5 10 12 0.80 0.77 b b 2188 ARSINE 2 TF 178 X X 5 42 1.10 d, k 2189 DICHLOROSILANE 2 TFC 314 X X X X 5 10 0.90 a a 200 1.08 2191 SULPHURYL FLUORIDE 2 T 3020 X X X X 5 50 1.10 u 2192 GERMANE (c) 2 TF 620 X X X X 5 250 0.064 d, q, r, ra 2193 HEXAFLUOROETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 116) 2 A X X X X 10 200 1.13 2194 SELENIUM HEXAFLUORIDE 2 TC 50 X X 5 36 1.46 k, ra 2195 TELLURIUM HEXAFLUORIDE 2 TC 25 X X 5 20 1.00 k, ra 2196 TUNGSTEN HEXAFLUORIDE 2 TC 218 X X X X 5 10 3.08 a, ra 2197 HYDROGEN IODIDE, ANHYDROUS 2 TC 2860 X X X X 5 23 2.25 a, d, ra 2198 PHOSPHORUS PENTAFLUORIDE 2 TC 261 X X X X 5 200 300 0.90 1.25 2199 PHOSPHINE (c) 2 TF 20 X X 5 225 250 0.30 0.45 d, k, q d, k, q 2200 PROPADIENE, STABILIZED 2 F X X X X 10 22 0.50 ra 2202 HYDROGEN SELENIDE, ANHYDROUS 2 TF 51 X X 5 31 1.60 k 2203 SILANE (c) 2 F X X X X 10 225 250 0.32 0.36 q q 2204 CARBONYL SULPHIDE 2 TF 1700 X X X X 5 30 0.87 ra, u 2417 CARBONYL FLUORIDE 2 TC 360 X X X X 5 200 300 0.47 0.70 2418 SULPHUR TETRAFLUORIDE 2 TC 40 X X 5 30 0.91 a, k, ra 2419 BROMOTRIFLUORO-ETHYLENE 2 F X X X X 10 10 1.19 ra 2420 HEXAFLUOROACETONE 2 TC 470 X X X X 5 22 1.08 ra 2421 NITROGEN TRIOXIDE 2 TOC CARRIAGE PROHIBITED 2422 OCTAFLUOROBUT-2-ENE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 1318) 2 A X X X X 10 12 1.34 ra 2424 OCTAFLUOROPROPANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 218) 2 A X X X X 10 25 1.04 ra 2451 NITROGEN TRIFLUORIDE 2 O X X X X 10 200 0.50 2452 ETHYLACETYLENE, STABILIZED 2 F X X X X 10 10 0.57 c, ra 2453 ETHYL FLUORIDE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 161) 2 F X X X X 10 30 0.57 ra 2454 METHYL FLUORIDE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 41) 2 F X X X X 10 300 0.63 ra 2455 METHYL NITRITE 2 A CARRIAGE PROHIBITED 2517 1-CHLORO-1,1-DIFLUOROETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 142b) 2 F X X X X 10 10 0.99 ra 2534 METHYLCHLOROSILANE 2 TFC 2810 X X X X 5 ra, z 2548 CHLORINE PENTAFLUORIDE 2 TOC 122 X X 5 13 1.49 a, k 2599 CHLOROTRIFLUORO-METHANE AND TRIFLUOROMETHANE AZEOTROPIC MIXTURE with approximately 60% chlorotrifluoromethane (REFRIGERANT GAS R 503) 2 A X X X X 10 31 42 100 0.12 0.17 0.64 ra ra ra 2601 CYCLOBUTANE 2 F X X X X 10 10 0.63 ra 2602 DICHLORODIFLUORO-METHANE AND DIFLUOROETHANE AZEOTROPIC MIXTURE with approximately 74% dichlorodifluoromethane (REFRIGERANT GAS R 500) 2 A X X X X 10 22 1.01 ra 2676 STIBINE 2 TF 178 X X 5 200 0.49 k, r, ra 2901 BROMINE CHLORIDE 2 TOC 290 X X X X 5 10 1.50 a 3057 TRIFLUOROACETYL CHLORIDE 2 TC 10 X X X 5 17 1.17 k, ra 3070 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND DICHLORODIFLUOROMETHANE MIXTURE with not more than 12,5% ethylene oxide 2 A X X X X 10 18 1.09 ra 3083 PERCHLORYL FLUORIDE 2 TO 770 X X X X 5 33 1.21 u 3153 PERFLUORO(METHYL VINYL ETHER) 2 F X X X X 10 20 0.75 ra 3154 PERFLUORO(ETHYL VINYL ETHER) 2 F X X X X 10 10 0.98 ra 3157 LIQUEFIED GAS, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 2 O X X X X 10 z 3159 1,1,1,2-TETRAFLUOROETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 134a) 2 A X X X X 10 18 1.05 ra 3160 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 2 TF 5000 X X X X 5 ra, z 3161 LIQUEFIED GAS, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 2 F X X X X 10 ra, z 3162 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, N.O.S. 2 T 5000 X X X X 5 z 3163 LIQUEFIED GAS, N.O.S. 2 A X X X X 10 ra, z 3220 PENTAFLUOROETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 125) 2 A X X X X 10 49 35 0.95 0.87 ra ra 3252 DIFLUOROMETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 32) 2 F X X X X 10 48 0.78 ra 3296 HEPTAFLUOROPROPANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 227) 2 A X X X X 10 13 1.21 ra 3297 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND CHLOROTETRAFLUOROETHANE MIXTURE with not more than 8.8% ethylene oxide 2 A X X X X 10 10 1.16 ra 3298 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND PENTAFLUOROETHANE MIXTURE with not more than 7.9% ethylene oxide 2 A X X X X 10 26 1.02 ra 3299 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND TETRAFLUOROETHANE MIXTURE with not more than 5.6% ethylene oxide 2 A X X X X 10 17 1.03 ra 3300 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND CARBON DIOXIDE MIXTURE with more than 87% ethylene oxide 2 TF > 2900 X X X X 5 28 0.73 ra 3307 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 2 TO 5000 X X X X 5 z 3308 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 2 TC 5000 X X X X 5 ra, z 3309 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 2 TFC 5000 X X X X 5 ra, z 3310 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 2 TOC 5000 X X X X 5 z 3318 AMMONIA SOLUTION, relative density less than 0.880 at 15 °C in water, with more than 50% ammonia 4 TC X X X X 5 b 3337 REFRIGERANT GAS R 404A (Pentafluoroethane, 1,1,1-trifluoroethane, and 1,1,1,2-tetrafluoroethane zeotropic mixture with approximately 44% pentafluoroethane and 52% 1,1,1-trifluoroethane) 2 A X X X X 10 36 0.82 ra 3338 REFRIGERANT GAS R 407A (Difluoromethane, pentafluoroethane, and 1,1,1,2-tetrafluoroethane zeotropic mixture with approximately 20% difluoromethane and 40% pentafluoroethane) 2 A X X X X 10 32 0.94 ra 3339 REFRIGERANT GAS R 407B (Difluoromethane, pentafluoroethane, and 1,1,1,2-tetrafluoroethane zeotropic mixture with approximately 10% difluoromethane and 70% pentafluoroethane) 2 A X X X X 10 33 0.93 ra 3340 REFRIGERANT GAS R 407C (Difluoromethane, pentafluoroethane, and 1,1,1,2-tetrafluoroethane zeotropic mixture with approximately 23% difluoromethane and 25% pentafluoroethane) 2 A X X X X 10 30 0.95 ra 3354 INSECTICIDE GAS, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S 2 F X X X X 10 ra, z 3355 INSECTICIDE GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 2 TF X X X X 5 ra, z 3374 ACETYLENE, SOLVENT FREE 2 F X X 5 60 c, p (a) Not applicable for pressure receptacles made of composite materials. (b) For mixtures of UN No. 1965, the maximum permissible filling mass per litre of capacity is as follows: Maximum permissible mass of contents per litre of capacity Commercial propane - Commercial butane 0,50 A 0,49 A 01 0,48 A 02 0,47 A 0 0,46 A 1 0,45 B 1 0,44 B 2 0,43 B 0,42 C 0,440 0,450 0,463 0,474 0,485 0,495 0,505 0,516 0,525 Density at 50 °C in kg/l (c) Considered as pyrophoric. (d) Considered to be toxic. The LC 50 value still to be determined. Table 3: Substances not in class 2 UN No. Name and description Class Classification Code LC 50 ml/m 3 Cylinders Tubes Pressure drums Bundles of cylinders Test period, years (a) Test pressure, bar Filling ratio Special packing provisions 1051 HYDROGEN CYANIDE, STABILIZED containing less than 3% water 6.1 TF1 40 X X 5 100 0.55 k 1052 HYDROGEN FLUORIDE, ANHYDROUS 8 CT1 1307 X X X 5 10 0.84 a, ab,ac 1745 BROMINE PENTAFLUORIDE 5.1 OTC 25 X X X 5 10 (b ) k,ab,ad, 1746 BROMINE TRIFLUORIDE 5.1 otc 50 X X X 5 10 (b ) k,ab,ad 2495 IODINE PENTAFLUORIDE 5.1 OTC 120 X X X 5 10 (b ) k,ab,ad (a) Not applicable for pressure receptacles made of composite materials. (b) A minimum ullage of 8% by volume is required. P 201 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 201 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3167, 3168 and 3169. The following packagings are authorized: (1) Cylinders and gas receptacles conforming to the construction, testing and filling requirements approved by the competent authority. (2) The following combination packagings provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Outer packagings: Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F , 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2). Inner packagings: (a) For non-toxic gases, hermetically sealed inner packagings of glass or metal with a maximum capacity of 5 litres per package; (b) For toxic gases, hermetically sealed inner packagings of glass or metal with a maximum capacity of 1 litre per package. Packagings shall conform to the packing group III performance level. P 202 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 202 (Reserved) P 203 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 203 This instruction applies to Class 2 refrigerated liquefied gases. Requirements for closed cryogenic receptacles (1) The special packing provisions of 4.1.6 shall be met. (2) The requirements of Chapter 6.2 shall be met. (3) The closed cryogenic receptacles shall be so insulated that they do not become coated with frost. (4) Test pressure Refrigerated liquids shall be filled in closed cryogenic receptacles with the following minimum test pressures: (a) For closed cryogenic receptacles with vacuum insulation, the test pressure shall not be less than 1.3 times the sum of the maximum internal pressure of the filled receptacle, including during filling and discharge, plus 100 kPa (1 bar); (b) For other closed cryogenic receptacles, the test pressure shall be not less than 1.3 times the maximum internal pressure of the filled receptacle, taking into account the pressure developed during filling and discharge. (5) Degree of filling For non-flammable, non-toxic refrigerated liquefied gases (classification codes 3 A and 3 O) the volume of liquid phase at the filling temperature and at a pressure of 100 kPa (1 bar) shall not exceed 98% of the water capacity of the pressure receptacle. For flammable refrigerated liquefied gases (classification code 3 F) the degree of filling shall remain below the level at which, if the contents were raised to the temperature at which the vapour pressure equalled the opening pressure of the relief valve, the volume of the liquid phase would reach 98% of the water capacity at that temperature. (6) Pressure-relief devices Closed cryogenic receptacles shall be fitted with at least one pressure-relief device. (7) Compatibility Materials used to ensure the leakproofness of the joints or for the maintenance of the closures shall be compatible with the contents. In the case of receptacles intended for the carriage of oxidizing gases (classification code 3 O), these materials shall not react with these gases in a dangerous manner. (8) Periodic inspection (a) The periodic inspection and test frequencies of pressure relief valves in accordanc e with 6.2.1.6.3 shall not exceed five years. (b) The periodic inspection and test frequencies of non-UN closed cryogenic receptacles in accordance with 6.2.3.5.2 shall not exceed 10 years. Requirements for open cryogenic receptacles Only the following non oxidizing refrigerated liquefied gases of classification code 3 A may be carried in open cryogenic receptacles: UN Nos. 1913, 1951, 1963, 1970, 1977, 2591, 3136 and 3158. Open cryogenic receptacles shall be constructed to meet the following requirements: (1) The receptacles shall be designed, manufactured, tested and equipped in such a way as to withstand all conditions, including fatigue, to which they will be subjected during their normal use and during normal conditions of carriage. (2) The capacity shall be not more than 450 litres. (3) The receptacle shall have a double wall construction with the space between the inner and outer wall being evacuated (vacuum insulation). The insulation shall prevent the formation of hoar frost on the exterior of the receptacle. (4) The materials of construction shall have suitable mechanical properties at the service temperature. (5) Materials which are in direct contact with the dangerous goods shall not be affected or weakened by the dangerous goods intended to be carried and shall not cause a dangerous effect, e.g. catalysing a reaction or reacting with the dangerous goods. (6) Receptacles of glass double wall construction shall have an outer packaging with suitable cushioning or absorbent materials which withstand the pressures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of carriage. (7) The receptacle shall be designed to remain in an upright position during carriage, e.g. have a base whose smaller horizontal dimension is greater than the height of the centre of gravity when filled to capacity or be mounted on gimbals. (8) The openings of the receptacles shall be fitted with devices allowing gases to escape, preventing any splashing out of liquid, and so configured that they remain in place during carriage. (9) Open cryogenic receptacles shall bear the following marks permanently affixed e.g. by stamping, engraving or etching: – The manufacturer’s name and address; – The model number or name; – The serial or batch number; – The UN number and proper shipping name of gases for which the receptacle is intended; – The capacity of the receptacle in litres. P 204 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 204 (Deleted) P 205 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 205 This instruction applies to UN No. 3468. (1) For metal hydride storage systems, the special packing provisions of 4.1.6 shall be met. (2) Only pressure receptacles not exceeding 150 litres in water capacity and having a maximum developed pressure not exceeding 25 MPa are covered by this packing instruction. (3) Metal hydride storage systems meeting the applicable requirements for the construction and testing of pressure receptacles containing gas of Chapter 6.2 are authorised for the carriage of hydrogen only. (4) When steel pressure receptacles or composite pressure receptacles with steel liners are used, only those bearing the "H" mark, in accordance with 6.2.2.9.2 (j) shall be used. (5) Metal hydride storage systems shall meet the service conditions, design criteria, rated capacity, type tests, batch tests, routine tests, test pressure, rated charging pressure and provisions for pressure relief devices for transportable metal hydride storage systems specified in ISO 16111:2008 or ISO 16111:2018 (Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed in reversible metal hydride) and their conformity and approval shall be assessed in accordance with 6.2.2.5. (6) Metal hydride storage systems shall be filled with hydrogen at a pressure not exceeding the rated charging pressure shown in the permanent mark on the system as specified by ISO 16111:2008 or ISO 16111:2018 . (7) The periodic test requirements for a metal hydride storage system shall be in accordance with ISO 16111:2008 or ISO 16111:2018 and carried out in accordance with 6.2.2.6, and the interval between periodic inspections shall not exceed five years. See 6.2.2.4 to determine which standard is applicable at the time of periodic inspection and test. P 206 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 206 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3500, 3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505. Unless otherwise indicated in RID, cylinders and pressure drums conforming to the applicable requirements of Chapter 6.2 are authorized. (1) The special packing provisions of 4.1.6 shall be met. (2) The maximum test period for periodic inspection shall be 5 years. (3) Cylinders and pressure drums shall be so filled that at 50 °C the non-gaseous phase does not exceed 95% of their water capacity and they are not completely filled at 60 °C. When filled, the internal pressure at 65 °C shall not exceed the test pressure of the cylinders and pressure drums. The vapour pressures and volumetric expansion of all substances in the cylinders and pressure drums shall be taken into account. For liquids charged with a compressed gas both components – the liquid and the compressed gas – have to be taken into consideration in the calculation of the internal pressure in the pressure receptacle. When experimental data is not available, the following steps shall be carried out: (a) Calculation of the vapour pressure of the liquid and of the partial pressure of the compressed gas at 15 °C (filling temperature); (b) Calculation of the volumetric expansion of the liquid phase resulting from the heating from 15 °C to 65 °C and calculation of the remaining volume for the gaseous phase; (c) Calculation of the partial pressure of the compressed gas at 65 °C considering the volumetric expansion of the liquid phase; NOTE: The compressibility factor of the compressed gas at 15 °C and 65 °C shall be considered. (d) Calculation of the vapour pressure of the liquid at 65 °C; (e) The total pressure is the sum of the vapour pressure of the liquid and the partial pressure of the compressed gas at 65 °C; (f) Consideration of the solubility of the compressed gas at 65 °C in the liquid phase. The test pressure of the cylinders or pressure drums shall not be less than the calculated total pressure minus 100 kPa (1 bar). If the solubility of the compressed gas in the liquid phase is not known for the calculation, the test pressure can be calculated without taking the gas solubility (sub-paragraph (f)) into account. (4) The minimum test pressure shall be in accordance with packing instruction P 200 for the propellant but shall not be less than 20 bar. Additional requirement C ylinders and pressure drums shall not be offered for carriage when connected with spray application equipment such as a hose and wand assembly. Special packing provisions PP 89 For UN Nos. 3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505, notwithstanding 4.1.6.9 (b), non-refillable cylinders used may have a water capacity not exceeding 1 000 litres divided by the test pressure expressed in bars provided capacity and pressure restrictions of the construction standard comply with ISO 11118:1999, which limits the maximum capacity to 50 litres. PP 97 For fire extinguishing agents assigned to UN No. 3500 the maximum test period for periodic inspection shall be 10 years. They may be carried in tubes of a maximum water capacity of 450 litres conforming to the applicable requirements of Chapter 6.2. P 207 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 207 This instruction applies to UN No. 1950. The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (a) Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2). Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level. (b) Rigid outer packagings with a maximum net mass as follows: Fibreboard 55 kg Other than fibreboard 125 kg The provisions of 4.1.1.3 need not be met. The packagings shall be designed and constructed to prevent excessive movement of the aerosols and inadvertent discharge during normal conditions of carriage. Special packing provision PP 87 For UN 1950 waste aerosols carried in accordance with special provision 327, the packagings shall have a means of retaining any free liquid that might escape during carriage, e.g. absorbent material. The packagings shall be adequately ventilated to prevent the creation of dangerous atmospheres and the build-up of pressure. Special packing provision specific to RID and ADR RR 6 For UN 1950, in the case of carriage by full load, metal articles may also be packed as follows: The articles shall be grouped together in units on trays and held in position with an appropriate plastics cover; these units shall be stacked and suitably secured on pallets. P 208 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 208 This instruction applies to Class 2 adsorbed gases. (1) The following packagings are authorized provided the general packing requirements of 4.1.6.1 are met: Cylinders specified in Chapter 6.2 and in accordance with ISO 11513:2011, ISO 11513:2019, ISO 9809-1:2010 or ISO 9809-1:2019. (2) The pressure of each filled cylinder shall be less than 101.3 kPa at 20 °C and less than 300 kPa at 50 °C. (3) The minimum test pressure of the cylinder shall be 21 bar. (4) The minimum burst pressure of the cylinder shall be 94.5 bar. (5) The internal pressure at 65 °C of the filled cylinder shall not exceed the test pressure of the cylinder. (6) The adsorbent material shall be compatible with the cylinder and shall not form harmful or dangerous compounds with the gas to be adsorbed. The gas in combination with the adsorbent material shall not affect or weaken the cylinder or cause a dangerous reaction (e.g. a catalyzing reaction). (7) The quality of the adsorbent material shall be verified at the time of each fill to ensure that the pressure and chemical stability requirements of this packing instruction are met each time an adsorbed gas package is offered for carriage. (8) The adsorbent material shall not meet the criteria of any of the classes in RID. (9) Requirements for cylinders and closures containing toxic gases with an LC 50 less than or equal to 200 ml/m 3 (ppm) (see Table 1) shall be as follows: (a) Valve outlets shall be fitted with pressure retaining gas-tight plugs or caps having threads matching those of the valve outlets. (b) Each valve shall either be of the packless type with non-perforated diaphragm, or be of a type which prevents leakage through or past the packing. (c) Each cylinder and closure shall be tested for leakage after filling. (d) Each valve shall be capable of withstanding the test pressure of the cylinder and be directly connected to the cylinder by either a taper-thread or other means which meets the requirements of ISO 10692-2:2001. (e) Cylinders and valves shall not be fitted with a pressure relief device. (10) Valve outlets for cylinders containing pyrophoric gases shall be fitted with gas-tight plugs or caps having threads matching those of the valve outlets. (11) The filling procedure shall be in accordance with Annex A of ISO 11513:2011 (applicable until 31 December 2024) or Annex A of ISO 11513:2019 . (12) The maximum period for periodic inspections shall be 5 years. (13) Special packing provisions that are specific to a substance (see Table 1). Material compatibility a: Aluminium alloy cylinders shall not be used. d: When steel cylinders are used, only those bearing the "H" mark in accordance with 6.2.2.7.4 (p) are permitted. Gas specific provisions r: The filling of this gas shall be limited such that, if complete decomposition occurs, the pressure does not exceed two thirds of the test pressure of the cylinder. Material compatibility for n.o.s. adsorbed gas entries z: The construction materials of the cylinders and their accessories shall be compatible with the contents and shall not react to form harmful or dangerous compounds therewith. Table 1: Adsorbed gases UN No. Name and description Classification code LC 50 ml/m 3 Special packing provisions 3510 ADSORBED GAS, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 9F z 3511 ADSORBED GAS, N.O.S. 9A z 3512 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, N.O.S. 9T ≤ 5000 z 3513 ADSORBED GAS, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 9O z 3514 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 9TF ≤ 5000 z 3515 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 9TO ≤ 5000 z 3516 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 9TC ≤ 5000 z 3517 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 9TFC ≤ 5000 z 3518 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 9TOC ≤ 5000 z 3519 BORON TRIFLUORIDE, ADSORBED 9TC 387 a 3520 CHLORINE, ADSORBED 9TOC 293 a 3521 SILICON TETRAFLUORIDE, ADSORBED 9TC 450 a 3522 ARSINE, ADSORBED 9TF 20 d 3523 GERMANE, ADSORBED 9TF 620 d, r 3524 PHOSPHORUS PENTAFLUORIDE, ADSORBED 9TC 190 3525 PHOSPHINE, ADSORBED 9TF 20 d 3526 HYDROGEN SELENIDE, ADSORBED 9TF 2 P 209 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 209 This packing instruction applies to UN No. 3150 devices, small, hydrocarbon gas powered or hydrocarbon gas refills for small devices (1) The special packing provisions of 4.1.6 when applicable shall be met. (2) The articles shall comply with the provisions of the country in which they were filled. (3) The devices and refills shall be packed in outer packagings conforming to 6.1.4 tested and approved in accordance with Chapter 6.1 for packing group II. P 300 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 300 This instruction applies to UN No. 3064. The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Combination packagings consisting of inner metal cans of not more than 1 litre capacity each and outer wooden boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F) containing not more than 5 litres of solution. Additional requirements 1. Metal cans shall be completely surrounded with absorbent cushioning material. 2. Wooden boxes shall be completely lined with suitable material impervious to water and nitroglycerin. P 301 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 301 This instruction applies to UN No. 3165. The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Aluminium pressure receptacle made from tubing and having welded heads. Primary containment of the fuel within this receptacle shall consist of a welded aluminium bladder having a maximum internal volume of 46 litres. The outer receptacle shall have a minimum design gauge pressure of 1 275 kPa and a minimum burst gauge pressure of 2 755 kPa. Each receptacle shall be leak checked during manufacture and before dispatch and shall be found leakproof. The complete inner unit shall be securely packed in non combustible cushioning material, such as vermiculite, in a strong outer tightly closed metal packaging which will adequately protect all fittings. Maximum quantity of fuel per primary containment and package is 42 litres; (2) Aluminium pressure receptacle . Primary containment of the fuel within this receptacle shall consist of a welded vapour tight fuel compartment with an elastomeric bladder having a maximum internal volume of 46 litres. The pressure receptacle shall have a minimum design gauge pressure of 2 860 kPa and a minimum burst gauge pressure of 5 170 kPa. Each receptacle shall be leak checked during manufacture and before dispatch and shall be securely packed in non combustible cushioning material such as vermiculite, in a strong outer tightly closed metal packaging which will adequately protect all fittings. Maximum quantity of fuel per primary containment and package is 42 litres. P 302 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 302 This instruction applies to UN No. 3269. The following combination packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Outer packagings: Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F , 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2). Inner packagings: The activator (organic peroxide) shall have a maximum quantity of 125 ml per inner packaging if liquid, and 500 g per inner packaging if solid. The base material and the activator shall each be separately packed in inner packagings. The components may be placed in the same outer packaging provided that they will not interact dangerously in the event of a leakage. Packagings shall conform to the packing group II or III performance level according to the criteria for Class 3 applied to the base material. P 400 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 400 The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. They shall be made of steel and shall be subjected to an initial test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10 bar, gauge pressure). During carriage, the liquid shall be under a layer of inert gas with a gauge pressure of not less than 20 kPa (0.2 bar) ; (2) Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F or 4G), drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1D or 1G) or jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1 or 3B2) enclosing hermetically sealed metal cans with inner packagings of glass or metal, with a capacity of not more than 1 litre each, having closures with gaskets. Inner packagings shall have threaded closures or closures physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during carriage. Inner packagings shall be cushioned on all sides with dry, absorbent, non-combustible material in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents. Inner packagings shall not be filled to more than 90% of their capacity. Outer packagings shall have a maximum net mass of 125 kg; (3) Steel, aluminium or metal drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2) , jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1 or 3B2) or boxes (4A, 4B or 4N) with a maximum net mass of 150 kg each with hermetically sealed inner metal cans not more than 4 litre capacity each, with closures fitted with gaskets. Inner packagings shall have threaded closures or closures physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during carriage. Inner packagings shall be cushioned on all sides with dry, absorbent, non-combustible material in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents. Each layer of inner packagings shall be separated by a dividing partition in addition to cushioning material. Inner packagings shall not be filled to more than 90% of their capacity. Special packing provision PP 86 For UN Nos. 3392 and 3394, air shall be eliminated from the vapour space by nitrogen or other means. P 401 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 401 The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. They shall be made of steel and subjected to an initial test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 0.6 MPa (6 bar, gauge pressure). During carriage, the liquid shall be under a layer of inert gas with a gauge pressure of not less than 20 kPa (0.2 bar) ; (2) Combination packagings: Outer packagings: Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F , 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2). Inner packagings: Glass, metal or plastics which have threaded closures with a maximum capacity of 1 litre. Each inner packaging shall be surrounded by inert cushioning and absorbent material in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents. The maximum net mass per outer packaging shall not exceed 30 kg. Special packing provision specific to RID and ADR RR 7 For UN Nos. 1183, 1242, 1295 and 2988, the pressure receptacles shall however be subjected to the tests every five years. P 402 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 402 The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. They shall be made of steel and subjected to an initial test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 0.6 MPa (6 bar, gauge pressure). During carriage, the liquid shall be under a layer of inert gas with a gauge pressure of not less than 20 kPa (0.2 bar) ; (2) Combination packagings: Outer packagings: Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F , 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2). Inner packagings with a maximum net mass as follows: Glass 10 kg Metal or plastics 15 kg. Each inner packaging shall be fitted with threaded closures. Each inner packaging shall be surrounded by inert cushioning and absorbent material in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents. The maximum net mass per outer packaging shall not exceed 125 kg. (3) Steel drums (1A1) with a maximum capacity of 250 litres; (4) Composite packagings consisting of a plastics receptacle with outer steel drum or aluminium (6HA1 or 6HB1) with a maximum capacity of 250 litres. Special packing provision specific to RID and ADR RR 4 For UN No. 3130, the openings of receptacles shall be tightly closed by means of two devices in series, one of which shall be screwed or secured in an equivalent manner. RR 7 For UN No. 3129, the pressure receptacles shall however be subjected to the tests every five years. RR 8 For UN Nos. 1389, 1391, 1411, 1421, 1928, 3129, 3130, 3148 and 3482, the pressure receptacles shall however be subjected to an initial test and to periodic tests at a pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10 bar). P 403 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 403 The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Combination packagings Maximum net mass Inner packagings Outer packagings Glass 2 kg Plastics 15 kg Metal 20 kg Inner packagings shall be hermetically sealed (e.g. by taping or by threaded closures). Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plastics (1H1, 1H2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood (4C1) natural wood with sift proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) expanded plastics (4H1) solid plastics (4H2) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 250 kg 250 kg 250 kg 125 kg 125 kg 60 kg 250 kg Jerricans steel (3A1, 3A2) aluminium (3B1, 3B2) plastics (3H1, 3H2) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg Single packagings Maximum net mass Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) metal other than steel or aluminium (1N1, 1N2) plastics (1H1, 1H2) 250 kg 250 kg 250 kg 250 kg Jerricans steel (3A1, 3A2) aluminium (3B1, 3B2) plastics (3H1, 3H2) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg Composite packagings plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium drums (6HA1 or 6HB1) plastics receptacle with outer fibre, plastics or plywood drums (6HG1, 6HH1 or 6HD1) plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium crate or box or with outer wooden, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics boxes (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2) 250 kg 75 kg 75 kg Pressure receptacles , provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met . Additional requirement Packagings shall be hermetically sealed. Special packing provision PP 83 (Deleted) P 404 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 404 This instruction applies to pyrophoric solids: UN Nos.: 1383, 1854, 1855, 2008, 2441, 2545, 2546, 2846 , 2881, 3200, 3391 and 3393 . The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Combination packagings Outer packagings: (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2) Inner packagings: Metal receptacles with a maximum net mass of 15 kg each. Inner packagings shall be hermetically sealed; Glass receptacles, with a maximum net mass of 1 kg each, having closures with gaskets, cushioned on all sides and contained in hermetically sealed metal cans. Inner packagings shall have threaded closures or closures physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during carriage. Outer packagings shall have a maximum net mass of 125 kg. (2) Metal packagings : (1A1, 1A2, 1B1 , 1B2 , 1N1, 1N2, 3A1, 3A2, 3B1 and 3B2) Maximum gross mass : 150 kg (3) Composite packagings : Plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium drum (6HA1 or 6HB1) Maximum gross mass : 150 kg Pressure receptacles , provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met . Special packing provision PP 86 For UN Nos. 3391 and 3393, air shall be eliminated from the vapour space by nitrogen or other means. P 405 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 405 This instruction applies to UN No. 1381. The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) For UN No. 1381, phosphorus, wet : (a) Combination packagings Outer packagings : (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F) Maximum net mass : 75 kg Inner packagings : (i) hermetically sealed metal cans, with a maximum net mass of 15kg; or (ii) glass inner packagings cushioned on all sides with dry, absorbent, non-combustible material in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents with a maximum net mass of 2 kg; or (b) Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2); maximum net mass: 400 kg Jerricans (3A1 or 3B1) ; maximum net mass : 120 kg. These packagings shall be capable of passing the leakproofness test specified in 6.1.5.4 at the packing group II performance level; (2) For UN No. 1381, dry phosphorus: (a) When fused, drums (1A2, 1B2 or 1N2) with a maximum net mass of 400 kg; or (b) In projectiles or hard cased articles when carried without Class 1 components: as specified by the competent authority. P 406 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 406 The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Combination packagings outer packagings : (4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2, 1G, 1D, 1H1, 1H2, 3H1 or 3H2 ) inner packagings : water-resistant packagings; (2) Plastics, plywood or fibreboard drums (1H2, 1D or 1G) or boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G and 4H2) with a water resistant inner bag, plastics film lining or water resistant coating; (3) Metal drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2), plastics drums (1H1 or 1H2), metal jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1 or 3B2), plastics jerricans (3H1 or 3H2), plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium drums (6HA1 or 6HB1), plastics receptacle with outer fibre, plastics or plywood drums (6HG1, 6HH1 or 6HD1), ), plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium crate or box or with outer wooden, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics boxes (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2). Additional requirements 1. Packagings shall be designed and constructed to prevent the loss of water or alcohol content or the content of the phlegmatizer. 2. Packagings shall be so constructed and closed so as to avoid an explosive overpressure or pressure build-up of more than 300 kPa (3 bar). Special packing provisions PP 24 UN Nos. 2852, 3364, 3365, 3366, 3367, 3368 and 3369 shall not be carried in quantities of more than 500 g per package. PP 25 For UN No. 1347, the quantity carried shall not exceed 15 kg per package. PP 26 For UN Nos. 1310, 1320, 1321, 1322, 1344, 1347, 1348, 1349, 1517, 2907, 3317 and 3376 packagings shall be lead free. PP 48 For UN No. 3474, metal packagings shall not be used. Packagings of other material with a small amount of metal, for example metal closures or other metal fittings such as those mentioned in 6.1.4, are not considered metal packagings. PP 78 UN No. 3370 shall not be carried in quantities of more than 11.5 kg per package. PP 80 For UN No. 2907 packagings shall meet the packing group II performance level. Packagings meeting the test criteria of packing group I shall not be used. P 407 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 407 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 1331, 1944, 1945 and 2254. The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Outer packagings: Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F , 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2). Inner packagings: Matches shall be tightly packed in securely closed inner packagings to prevent accidental ignition under normal conditions of carriage. The maximum gross mass of the package shall not exceed 45 kg except for fibreboard boxes which shall not exceed 30 kg . Packagings shall conform to the packing group III performance level. Special packing provision PP 27 UN No. 1331, Strike anywhere matches shall not be packed in the same outer packaging with any other dangerous goods other than safety matches or wax Vesta matches, which shall be packed in separate inner packagings. Inner packagings shall not contain more than 700 strike-anywhere matches. P 408 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 408 This instruction applies to UN No. 3292. The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) For cells: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2). There shall be sufficient cushioning material to prevent contact between cells and between cells and the internal surfaces of the outer packaging and to ensure that no dangerous movement of the cells within the outer packaging occurs in carriage. Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level. (2) Batteries may be carried unpacked or in protective enclosures (e.g. fully enclosed or wooden slatted crates). The terminals shall not support the weight of other batteries or materials packed with the batteries. Packagings need not meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3. NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3). Additional requirement Cells and batteries shall be protected against short circuit and shall be isolated in such a manner as to prevent short circuits. P 409 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 409 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 2956, 3242 and 3251. The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Fibre drum (1G) which may be fitted with a liner or coating; maximum net mass: 50 kg; (2) Combination packagings: Fibreboard box (4G) with a single inner plastic bag; maximum net mass: 50 kg; (3) Combination packagings: Fibreboard box (4G) or fibre drum (1G) with plastics inner packagings each containing a maximum of 5 kg; maximum net mass: 25 kg. P 410 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 410 The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Combination packagings Maximum net mass Inner packagings Outer packagings Packing group II Packing group III Glass 10 kg Plastics (a) 30 kg Metal 40 kg Paper (a),(b) 10 kg Fibre (a),(b) 10 kg (a) These packagings shall be sift-proof. (b) These inner packagings shall not be used when the substances being carried may become liquid during carriage. Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plastics (1H1, 1H2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) (a) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood (4C1) natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) (a) expanded plastics (4H1) solid plastics (4H2) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 60 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 60 kg 400 kg Jerricans steel (3A1, 3A2) aluminium (3B1, 3B2) plastics (3H1, 3H2) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg Single packagings Drums steel (1A1 or 1A2) aluminium (1B1 or 1B2) metal other than steel or aluminium (1N1 or 1N2) plastics (1H1 or 1H2) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg Jerricans steel (3A1 or 3A2) aluminium (3B1 or 3B2) plastics (3H1 or 3H2) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg Boxes steel (4A) (c) aluminium (4B) (c) other metal (4N) (c) natural wood (4C1) (c) plywood (4D) (c) reconstituted wood (4F) (c) natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) (c) fibreboard (4G) (c) solid plastics (4H2) (c) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg Bags Bags (5H3, 5H4, 5L3, 5M2) (c),(d) 50 kg 50 kg (c) These packagings shall not be used when the substances being carried may become liquid during carriage. (d) For packing group II substances, these packagings may only be used when carried in a closed wagon or container. Composite packagings plastics receptacle with outer steel, aluminium, plywood, fibre or plastics drum (6HA1, 6HB1, 6HG1, 6HD1 or 6HH1) plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium crate or box, or outer wooden, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2) glass receptacle with outer steel, aluminium, plywood or fibre drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PD1 or 6PG1) or outer steel or aluminium crate or box or with outer wooden or fibreboard box or with outer wickerwork hamper (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2) or with outer expanded or solid plastics packaging (6PH1 or 6PH2) 400 kg 75 kg 75 kg 400 kg 75 kg 75 kg Pressure receptacles , provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met . Special packing provisions PP 39 For UN No. 1378, for metal packagings a venting device is required. PP 40 For UN Nos. 1326, 1352, 1358, 1395, 1396, 1436, 1437, 1871, 2805 and 3182, packing group II, bags are not allowed. PP 83 (Deleted) P 411 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 411 This instruction applies to UN No. 3270. The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F , 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2); provided that explosion is not possible by reason of increased internal pressure. The maximum net mass shall not exceed 30 kg. P 412 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 412 This instruction applies to UN No. 3527. The following combination packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Outer packagings: Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2). (2) Inner packagings: (a) The activator (organic peroxide) shall have a maximum quantity of 125 ml per inner packaging if liquid, and 500 g per inner packaging if solid. (b) The base material and the activator shall each be separately packed in inner packagings. The components may be placed in the same outer packaging provided that they will not interact dangerously in the event of a leakage. Packagings shall conform to the packing group II or III performance level according to the criteria for Class 4.1 applied to the base material. P 500 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 500 This instruction applies to UN No. 3356. The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F , 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2). Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level. The generator(s) shall be carried in a package which meets the following requirements when one generator in the package is actuated: (a) Other generators in the package will not be actuated; (b) Packaging material will not ignite; and (c) The outside surface temperature of the completed package shall not exceed 100 °C. P 501 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 501 This instruction applies to UN No. 2015. The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Combination packagings Inner packaging maximum capacity Outer packaging maximum net mass (1) Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4H2) or drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D) or jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2) with glass, plastics or metal inner packagings (2) Fibreboard box (4G) or fibre drum (1G) with plastics or metal inner packagings each in a plastics bag 5 l 2 l 125 kg 50 kg Single packagings Maximum capacity Drums steel (1A1) aluminium (1B1) metal other than steel or aluminium (1N1) plastics (1H1) 250 l 250 l 250 l 250 l Jerricans steel (3A1) aluminium (3B1) plastics (3H1) 60 l 60 l 60 l Composite packagings plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium drum (6HA1, 6HB1) plastics receptacle with outer fibre, plastics or plywood drum (6HG1, 6HH1, 6HD1) plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium crate or box or plastics receptacle with outer wooden, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2) glass receptacle with outer steel, aluminium, fibre or plywood drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PD1 or 6PG1) or with outer steel, aluminium, wooden or fibreboard box or with outer wickerwork hamper (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2) or with outer expanded or solid plastics packaging (6PH1 or 6PH2) 250 l 250 l 60 l 60 l Additional requirements 1. Packagings shall have a maximum filling degree of 90%. 2. Packagings shall be vented. P 502 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 502 The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Combination packagings Maximum net mass Inner packagings Outer packagings Glass 5 l Metal 5 l Plastics 5 l Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) 125 kg 125 kg 125 kg 125 kg 125 kg 125 kg Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood (4C1) natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) expanded plastics (4H1) solid plastics (4H2) 125 kg 125 kg 125 kg 125 kg 125 kg 125 kg 125 kg 125 kg 60 kg 125 kg Single packagings Maximum capacity Drums steel (1A1) aluminium (1B1) plastics (1H1) 250 l 250 l 250 l Jerricans steel (3A1) aluminium (3B1) plastics (3H1) 60 l 60 l 60 l Composite packagings plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium drum (6HA1 or 6HB1) plastics receptacle with outer fibre, plastics or plywood drum (6HG1, 6HH1 or 6HD1) plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium crate or box or plastics receptacle with outer wooden, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2) glass receptacle with outer steel, aluminium, fibre or plywood drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PG1 or 6PD1) or with outer steel, aluminium, wooden or fibreboard box or with outer wickerwork hamper (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2) or with outer expanded or solid plastics packaging (6PH1 or 6PH2) 250 l 250 l 60 l 60 l Special packing provision PP 28 For UN No. 1873, parts of packagings which are in direct contact with perchloric acid shall be constructed of glass or plastics. P 503 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 503 The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Combination packagings Maximum net mass Inner packagings Outer packagings Glass 5 kg Metal 5 kg Plastics 5 kg Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) aluminium (1B1, 1B2) other metal (1N1, 1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H1, 1H2) 125 kg 125 kg 125 kg 125 kg 125 kg 125 kg Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) natural wood (4C1) natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) expanded plastics (4H1) solid plastics (4H2) 125 kg 125 kg 125 kg 125 kg 125 kg 125 kg 125 kg 40 kg 60 kg 125 kg Single packagings Metal drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2) ) with a maximum net mass of 250 kg. Fibreboard (1G) or plywood drums (1D) fitted with inner liners with a maximum net mass of 200 kg. P 504 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 504 The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Combination packagings Maximum net mass (1) Glass receptacles with a maximum capacity of 5 litres in 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2 outer packagings (2) Plastics receptacles with a maximum capacity of 30 litres in 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2 outer packagings (3) Metal receptacles with a maximum capacity of 40 litres in 1G, 4F or 4G outer packagings (4) Metal receptacles with a maximum capacity of 40 litres in 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4H2 outer packagings 75 kg 75 kg 125 kg 225 kg Single packagings Maximum capacity Drums steel, non-removable head (1A1) steel, removable head (1A2) aluminium, non-removable head (1B1) aluminium, removable head (1B2) metal other than steel or aluminium, non-removable head (1N1) metal other than steel or aluminium, removable head (1N2) plastics, non-removable head (1H1) plastics, removable head (1H2) 250 l 250 l 250 l 250 l 250 l 250 l 250 l 250 l Jerricans steel, non-removable head (3A1) steel, removable head (3A2) aluminium, non-removable head (3B1) aluminium, removable head (3B2) plastics, non-removable head (3H1) plastics, removable head (3H2) 60 l 60 l 60 l 60 l 60 l 60 l Composite packagings plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium drum (6HA1 or 6HB1) plastics receptacle with outer fibre, plastics or plywood drum (6HG1, 6HH1 or 6HD1) plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium crate or box or plastics receptacle with outer wooden, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2) glass receptacle with outer steel, aluminium, fibre or plywood drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PG1 or 6PD1) or with outer steel, aluminium, wooden or fibreboard box or with outer wickerwork hamper (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2) or with outer expanded or solid plastics packaging (6PH1 or 6PH2) 250 l 120 l 60 l 60 l Special packing provision PP 10 For UN Nos. 2014, 2984 and 3149, the packaging shall be vented. P 505 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 505 This instruction applies to UN No. 3375. The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Combination packagings Inner packaging maximum capacity Outer packaging maximum net mass Boxes (4B, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4G, 4H2) or drums (1B2, 1G, 1N2, 1H2, 1D) or jerricans (3B2, 3H2) with glass, plastics or metal inner packagings 5 l 125 kg Single packagings Maximum capacity Drums aluminium (1B1, 1B2) plastics (1H1, 1H2) 250 l 250 l Jerricans aluminium (3B1, 3B2) plastics (3H1, 3H2) 60 l 60 l Composite packagings plastics receptacle with outer aluminium drum (6HB1) plastics receptacle with outer fibre, plastics or plywood drum (6HG1, 6HH1, 6HD1) plastics receptacle with outer aluminium crate or box or plastics receptacle with outer wooden, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box (6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2) glass receptacle with outer aluminium, fibre or plywood drum (6PB1, 6PG1, 6PD1) or with outer expanded or solid plastics plastics receptacles (6PH1 or 6PH2) or with outer aluminium crate or box or with outer wooden or fibreboard box or with outer wickerwork hamper (6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2) 250 l 250 l 60 l 60 l P 520 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 520 This instruction applies to organic peroxides of Class 5.2 and self-reactive substances of Class 4.1. The packagings listed below are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 and special provisions of 4.1.7.1 are met. The packing methods are designated OP1 to OP8. The packing methods appropriate for the individual currently assigned organic peroxides and self-reactive substances are listed in 2.2.41.4 and 2.2.52.4. The quantities specified for each packing method are the maximum quantities authorized per package. The following packagings are authorized: (1) Combination packagings with outer packagings comprising boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1 and 4H2), drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1G, 1H1, 1H2 and 1D) , jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1 and 3H2) ; (2) Single packagings consisting of drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1G, 1H1, 1H2 and 1D) and jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1 and 3H2); (3) Composite packagings with plastics inner receptacles (6HA1, 6HA2, 6HB1, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD1, 6HD2, 6HG1, 6HG2, 6HH1 and 6HH2). Maximum quantity per packaging/package (a) for packing methods OP1 to OP8 Packing Method Maximum Quantity OP1 OP2 (a) OP3 OP4 (a) OP5 OP6 OP7 OP8 Maximum mass (kg) for solids and for combination packagings (liquid and solid) 0,5 0,5 / 10 5 5 / 25 25 50 50 400 (b) Maximum contents in litres for liquids (c) 0,5 - 5 - 30 60 60 225 (d) (a) If two values are given, the first applies to the maximum net mass per inner packaging and the second to the maximum net mass of the complete package. (b) 60 kg for jerricans / 200 kg for boxes and, for solids, 400 kg in combination packagings with outer packagings comprising boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1 and 4H2) and with inner packagings of plastics or fibre with a maximum net mass of 25 kg. (c) Viscous substances shall be treated as solids when they do not meet the criteria provided in the definition for "liquids" presented in 1.2.1. (d) 60 litres for jerricans. Additional requirements 1. Metal packagings, including inner packagings of combination packagings and outer packagings of combination or composite packagings may only be used for packing methods OP7 and OP8. 2. In combination packagings, glass receptacles may only be used as inner packagings with maximum contents of 0.5 kg for solids or 0.5 litre for liquids. 3. In combination packagings, cushioning materials shall not be readily combustible. 4. The packaging of an organic peroxide or self-reactive substance required to bear an "EXPLOSIVE" subsidiary hazard label (model No.1, see 5.2.2.2.2) shall also comply with the provisions given in 4.1.5.10 and 4.1.5.11. Special packing provisions PP 21 For certain self-reactive substances of types B or C, UN Nos. 3221, 3222, 3223 and 3224, a smaller packaging than that allowed by packing methods OP5 or OP6 respectively shall be used (see 4.1.7 and 2.2.41.4). PP 22 UN No. 3241, 2-Bromo-2-nitropropane-1, 3-diol, shall be packed in accordance with packing method OP6. PP 94 Very small amounts of energetic samples of 2.1.4.3 may be carried under UN No. 3223 or UN No. 3224, as appropriate, provided that: 1. Only combination packagings with outer packagings comprising boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1 and 4H2) are used; 2. The samples are carried in microtiter plates or multi-titer plates made of plastics, glass, porcelain or stoneware as inner packaging; 3. The maximum amount per individual inner cavity does not exceed 0.01 g for solids or 0.01 ml for liquids; 4. The maximum net quantity per outer packaging is 20 g for solids or 20 ml for liquids, or in the case of mixed packing the sum of grams and millilitres does not exceed 20; and 5. When dry ice or liquid nitrogen is optionally used as a coolant for quality control measures, the requirements of 5.5.3 are complied with. Interior supports shall be provided to secure the inner packagings in their original position. The inner and outer packagings shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant used as well as the temperatures and the pressures which co uld result if refrigeration were lost. PP 95 Small amounts of energetic samples of 2.1.4.3 may be carried under UN No. 3223 or UN No. 3224, as appropriate, provided that: 1. The outer packaging consists only of corrugated fibreboard of type 4G having minimum dimensions of 60 cm (length) by 40.5 cm (width) by 30 cm (height) and minimum wall thickness of 1.3 cm; 2. The individual substance is contained in an inner packaging of glass or plastics of maximum capacity 30 ml placed in an expandable polyethylene foam matrix of at least 130 mm thickness having a density of 18 ± 1 g/l; 3. Within the foam carrier, inner packagings are segregated from each other by a minimum distance of 40 mm and from the wall of the outer packaging by a minimum distance of 70 mm. The package may contain up to two layers of such foam matrices, each carrying up to 28 inner packagings; 4. The maximum content of each inner packaging does not exceed 1 g for solids or 1 ml for liquids; 5. The maximum net quantity per outer packaging is 56 g for solids or 56 ml for liquids, or in the case of mixed packing the sum of grams and millilitres does not exceed 56; and 6. When dry ice or liquid nitrogen is optionally used as a coolant for quality control measures, the requirements of 5.5.3 are complied with. Interior supports shall be provided to secure the inner packagings in their original position. The inner and outer packagings shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant used as well as the temperatures and the pressures which could result if refrigeration were lost. P 600 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 600 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 1700, 2016 and 2017. The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Outer packagings (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2) meeting the packing group II performance level. The articles shall be individually packaged and separated from each other using partitions, dividers, inner packagings or cushioning material to prevent inadvertent discharge during normal conditions of carriage. Maximum net mass: 75 kg P 601 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 601 The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met and the packagings are hermetically sealed: (1) Combination packagings with a maximum gross mass of 15 kg, consisting of – one or more glass inner packaging(s) with a maximum quantity of 1 litre each and filled to not more than 90% of their capacity; the closure(s) of which shall be physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening by impact or vibration during carriage, individually placed in – metal receptacles together with cushioning and absorbent material sufficient to absorb the entire contents of the glass inner packaging(s), further packed in – 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings; (2) Combination packagings consisting of metal or plastics inner packagings not exceeding 5 litres in capacity individually packed with absorbent material sufficient to absorb the contents and inert cushioning material in 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2 , 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings with a maximum gross mass of 75 kg. Inner packagings shall not be filled to more than 90% of their capacity. The closure of each inner packaging shall be physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during carriage; (3) Packagings consisting of: Outer packagings: Steel or plastics drums (1A1, 1A2, 1H1 or 1H2), tested in accordance with the test requirements in 6.1.5 at a mass corresponding to the mass of the assembled package either as a packaging intended to contain inner packagings, or as a single packaging intended to contain solids or liquids, and marked accordingly ; Inner packagings: Drums and composite packagings (1A1, 1B1, 1N1, 1H1 or 6HA1) meeting the requirements of Chapter 6.1 for single packagings, subject to the following conditions: (a) The hydraulic pressure test shall be conducted at a pressure of at least 0.3 MPa (gauge pressure); (b) The design and production leakproofness tests shall be conducted at a test pressure of 30 kPa; (c) They shall be isolated from the outer drum by the use of inert shock-mitigating cushioning material which surrounds the inner packaging on all sides; (d) Their capacity shall not exceed 125 litres; (e) Closures shall be of a screw cap type that are: (i) physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during carriage; and (ii) provided with a cap seal; (f) The outer and inner packagings shall be subjected periodically to a leakproofness test according to (b) at intervals of not more than two and a half years; (g) The complete packaging shall be visually inspected to the satisfaction of the competent authority at least every 3 years; (h) The outer and inner packaging shall bear in clearly legible and durable characters: (i) the date (month, year) of the initial test and the latest periodic test and inspection; (ii) The stamp of the expert who carried out the test and inspection; (4) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. They shall be subjected to an initial test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10 bar) (gauge pressure). Pressure receptacles may not be equipped with any pressure relief device. Each pressure receptacle containing a toxic by inhalation liquid with an LC 50 less than or equal to 200 ml/m 3 (ppm) shall be closed with a plug or valve conforming to the following: (a) Each plug or valve shall have a taper-threaded connection directly to the pressure receptacle and be capable of withstanding the test pressure of the pressure receptacle without damage or leakage; (b) Each valve shall be of the packless type with non-perforated diaphragm, except that, for corrosive substances, a valve may be of the packed type with an assembly made gas-tight by means of a seal cap with gasket joint attached to the valve body or the pressure receptacle to prevent loss of substance through or past the packing; (c) Each valve outlet shall be sealed by a threaded cap or threaded solid plug and inert gasket material; (d) The materials of construction for the pressure receptacle, valves, plugs, outlet caps, luting and gaskets shall be compatible with each other and with the contents. Each pressure receptacle with a wall thickness at any point of less than 2.0 mm and each pressure receptacle which does not have fitted valve protection shall be carried in an outer packaging. Pressure receptacles shall not be manifolded or interconnected. Special packing provision PP 82 (Deleted) Special packing provision specific to RID and ADR RR 3 (Deleted) RR 7 For UN No. 1251, the pressure receptacles shall however be subjected to the tests every five years. RR 10 UN No. 1614, when completely absorbed by an inert porous material, shall be packed in metal receptacles of a capacity of not more than 7.5 litres, placed in wooden cases in such a manner that they cannot come into contact with one another. The receptacles shall be entirely filled with the porous material which shall not shake down or form dangerous spaces even after prolonged use or under impact, even at temperatures of up to 50 °C. P 602 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 602 The following packagings are authorised provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met and the packagings are hermetically sealed: (1) Combination packagings with a maximum gross mass of 15 kg, consisting of – one or more glass inner packaging(s) with a maximum quantity of 1 litre each and filled to not more than 90% of their capacity; the closure(s) of which shall be physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening by impact or vibration during carriage, individually placed in – metal receptacles together with cushioning and absorbent material sufficient to absorb the entire contents of the glass inner packaging(s), further packed in – 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2 , 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings; (2) Combination packagings consisting of metal or plastics inner packagings individually packed with absorbent material sufficient to absorb the entire contents and inert cushioning material in 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2 , 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings with a maximum gross mass of 75 kg. Inner packagings shall not be filled to more than 90% of their capacity. The closure of each inner packaging shall be physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during carriage. Inner packagings shall not exceed 5 litres in capacity; (3) Drums and composite packagings (1A1, 1B1, 1N1, 1H1, 6HA1 or 6HH1), subject to the following conditions: a) The hydraulic pressure test shall be conducted at a pressure of at least 0.3 MPa (gauge pressure); b) The design and production leakproofness tests shall be conducted at a test pressure of 30 kPa; and c) Closures shall be of a screw cap type that are: (i) physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during carriage; and (ii) provided with a cap seal; (4) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. They shall be subjected to an initial test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10 bar) (gauge pressure). Pressure receptacles may not be equipped with any pressure relief device. Each pressure receptacle containing a toxic by inhalation liquid with an LC 50 less than or equal to 200 ml/m 3 (ppm) shall be closed with a plug or valve conforming to the following: (a) Each plug or valve shall have a taper-threaded connection directly to the pressure receptacle and be capable of withstanding the test pressure of the pressure receptacle without damage or leakage; (b) Each valve shall be of the packless type with non-perforated diaphragm, except that, for corrosive substances, a valve may be of the packed type with an assembly made gas-tight by means of a seal cap with gasket joint attached to the valve body or the pressure receptacle to prevent loss of substance through or past the packing; (c) Each valve outlet shall be sealed by a threaded cap or threaded solid plug and inert gasket material; (d) The materials of construction for the pressure receptacle, valves, plugs, outlet caps, luting and gaskets shall be compatible with each other and with the contents. Each pressure receptacle with a wall thickness at any point of less than 2.0 mm and each pressure receptacle which does not have fitted valve protection shall be carried in an outer packaging. Pressure receptacles shall not be manifolded or interconnected. P 603 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 603 This instruction applies to UN 3507. The following packagings are authorized provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 and the special packing provisions of 4.1.9.1.2, 4.1.9.1.4 and 4.1.9.1.7 are met: Packagings consisting of: (a) Metal or plastics primary receptacle(s); in (b) Leakproof rigid secondary packaging(s); in (c) A rigid outer packaging: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2). Additional requirements 1. Primary inner receptacles shall be packed in secondary packagings in a way that, under normal conditions of carriage, they cannot break, be punctured or leak their contents into the secondary packaging. Secondary packagings shall be secured in outer packagings with suitable cushioning material to prevent movement. If multiple primary receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging, they shall be either individually wrapped or separated so as to prevent contact between them. 2. The contents shall comply with the provisions of 2.2.7.2.4.5.2. 3. The provisions of 6.4.4 shall be met. Special packing provision In the case of fissile-excepted material, limits specified in 2.2.7.2.3.5 shall be met. P 620 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 620 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 2814 and 2900. The following packagings are authorized provided the special packing provisions of 4.1.8 are met: Packagings meeting the requirements of Chapter 6.3 and approved accordingly consisting of: (a) Inner packagings comprising: (i) leakproof primary receptacle(s); (ii) a leakproof secondary packaging; (iii) other than for solid infectious substances, an absorbent material in sufficient quantity to absorb the entire contents placed between the primary receptacle(s) and the secondary packaging; if multiple primary receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging, they shall be either individually wrapped or separated so as to prevent contact between them; (b) A rigid outer packaging: Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F , 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2). The smallest external dimension shall be not less than 100 mm. Additional requirements 1. Inner packagings containing infectious substances shall not be consolidated with inner packagings containing unrelated types of goods. Complete packages may be overpacked in accordance with the provisions of 1.2.1 and 5.1.2; such an overpack may contain dry ice. 2. Other than for exceptional consignments, e.g. whole organs which require special packaging, the following additional requirements shall apply: (a) Substances consigned at ambient temperatures or at a higher temperature: Primary receptacles shall be of glass, metal or plastics. Positive means of ensuring a leakproof seal shall be provided, e.g. a heat seal, a skirted stopper or a metal crimp seal. If screw caps are used, they shall be secured by positive means, e.g., tape, paraffin sealing tape or manufactured locking closure; (b) Substances consigned refrigerated or frozen: Ice, dry ice or other refrigerant shall be placed around the secondary packaging(s) or alternatively in an overpack with one or more complete packages marked in accordance with 6.3.3. Interior supports shall be provided to secure secondary packaging(s) or packages in position after the ice or dry ice has dissipated. If ice is used, the outer packaging or overpack shall be leakproof. If dry ice is used, the outer packaging or overpack shall permit the release of carbon dioxide gas. The primary receptacle and the secondary packaging shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant used; (c) Substances consigned in liquid nitrogen: Plastics primary receptacles capable of withstanding very low temperature shall be used. The secondary packaging shall also be capable of withstanding very low temperatures, and in most cases will need to be fitted over the primary receptacle individually. Provisions for the carriage of liquid nitrogen shall also be fulfilled. The primary receptacle and the secondary packaging shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the liquid nitrogen. (d) Lyophilised substances may also be carried in primary receptacles that are flame sealed glass ampoules or rubber stoppered glass vials fitted with metal seals. 3. Whatever the intended temperature of the consignment, the primary receptacle or the secondary packaging shall be capable of withstanding without leakage an internal pressure producing a pressure differential of not less than 95 kPa. This primary receptacle or secondary packaging shall also be capable of withstanding temperatures in the range -40 °C to +55 °C. 4. Other dangerous goods shall not be packed in the same packaging as Class 6.2 infectious substances unless they are necessary for maintaining the viability, stabilizing or preventing degradation or neutralizing the hazards of the infectious substances. A quantity of 30 ml or less of dangerous goods included in Classes 3, 8 or 9 may be packed in each primary receptacle containing infectious substances. These small quantities of dangerous goods of Classes 3, 8 or 9 are not subject to any additional requirements of RID when packed in accordance with this packing instruction. 5. Alternative packagings for the carriage of animal material may be authorized by the competent authority of the country of origin (a) in accordance with the provisions of 4.1.8.7. (a) If the country of origin is not an RID Contracting State , the competent authority of the first RID Contracting State reached by the consignment. P 621 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 621 This instruction applies to UN No. 3291 . The following packagings are authorized provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 except 4.1.1.15 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Provided that there is sufficient absorbent material to absorb the entire amount of liquid present and the packaging is capable of retaining liquids: Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G) Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F , 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2) . Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level for solids. (2) For packages containing larger quantities of liquid: Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2); Composites (6HA1, 6HB1, 6HG1, 6HH1, 6HD1, 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, 6HH2, 6PA1, 6PB1, 6PG1, 6PD1, 6PH1, 6PH2, 6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2). Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level for liquids. Additional req uirement Packagings intended to contain sharp objects such as broken glass and needles shall be resistant to puncture and retain liquids under the performance test conditions in Chapter 6.1. P 622 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 622 This instruction applies to waste of UN No. 3549 carried for disposal. The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings metal plastics metal plastics Boxes steel (4A) aluminium (4B) other metal (4N) plywood (4D) fibreboard (4G) plastics, solid (4H2) Drums steel (1A2) aluminium (1B2) other metal (1N2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) plastics (1H2) Jerricans steel (3A2) aluminium (3B2) plastics (3H2) The outer packaging shall conform to the packing group I performance level for solids. Additional requirements: 1. Fragile articles shall be contained in either a rigid inner packaging or a rigid intermediate packaging. 2. Inner packagings containing sharp objects such as broken glass and needles shall be rigid and resistant to puncture. 3. The inner packaging, the intermediate packaging, and the outer packaging shall be capable of retaining liquids. Outer packagings that are not capable of retaining liquids by design shall be fitted with a liner or suitable measure of retaining liquids. 4. The inner packaging and/or the intermediate packaging may be flexible. When flexible packagings are used, they shall be capable of passing the impact resistance test of at least 165 g according to ISO 7765-1:1988 "Plastics film and sheeting – Determination of impact resistance by the free-falling dart method – Part 1: Staircase methods" and the tear resistance test of at least 480 g in both parallel and perpendicular planes with respect to the length of the bag in accordance with ISO 6383-2:1983 "Plastics – Film and sheeting – Determination of tear resistance – Part 2: Elmendorf method". The maximum net mass of each flexible inner packaging shall be 30 kg. 5. Each flexible intermediate packaging shall contain only one inner packaging. 6. Inner packagings containing a small amount of free liquid may be included in intermediate packaging provided that there is sufficient absorbent or solidifying material in the inner or intermediate packaging to absorb or solidify all the liquid content present. Suitable absorbent material which withstands the temperatures and vibrations liable to occur under normal conditions of carriage shall be used. 7. Intermediate packagings shall be secured in outer packagings with suitable cushioning and/or absorbent material. P 650 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 650 This packing instruction applies to UN No. 3373. (1) The packaging shall be of good quality, strong enough to withstand the shocks and loadings normally encountered during carriage, including transhipment between cargo transport units and between cargo transport units and warehouses as well as any removal from a pallet or overpack for subsequent manual or mechanical handling. Packagings shall be constructed and closed to prevent any loss of contents that might be caused under normal conditions of carriage by vibration or by changes in temperature, humidity or pressure. (2) The packaging shall consist of at least three components: (a) a primary receptacle; (b) a secondary packaging; and (c) an outer packaging of which either the secondary or the outer packaging shall be rigid. (3) Primary receptacles shall be packed in secondary packagings in such a way that, under normal conditions of carriage, they cannot break, be punctured or leak their contents into the secondary packaging. Secondary packagings shall be secured in outer packagings with suitable cushioning material. Any leakage of the contents shall not compromise the integrity of the cushioning material or of the outer packaging. (4) For carriage, the mark illustrated below shall be displayed on the external surface of the outer packaging on a background of a contrasting colour and shall be clearly visible and legible. The mark shall be in the form of a square set at an angle of 45° (diamond-shaped) with minimum dimensions of 50 mm by 50 mm; the width of the line shall be at least 2 mm and the letters and numbers shall be at least 6 mm high. The proper shipping name "BIOLOGICAL SUBSTANCE, CATEGORY B" in letters at least 6 mm high shall be marked on the outer packaging adjacent to the diamond-shaped mark. (5) At least one surface of the outer packaging shall have a minimum dimension of 100 mm x 100 mm. (6) The completed package shall be capable of successfully passing the drop test in 6.3.5.3 as specified in 6.3.5.2 at a height of 1.2 m. Following the appropriate drop sequence, there shall be no leakage from the primary receptacle(s) which shall remain protected by absorbent material, when required, in the secondary packaging. (7) For liquid substances: (a) The primary receptacle(s) shall be leakproof; (b) The secondary packaging shall be leakproof; (c) If multiple fragile primary receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging, they shall be either individually wrapped or separated to prevent contact between them; (d) Absorbent material shall be placed between the primary receptacle(s) and the secondary packaging. The absorbent material shall be in quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents of the primary receptacle(s) so that any release of the liquid substance will not compromise the integrity of the cushioning material or of the outer packaging; (e) The primary receptacle or the secondary packaging shall be capable of withstanding, without leakage, an internal pressure of 95 kPa (0.95 bar). (8) For solid substances: (a) The primary receptacle(s) shall be siftproof; (b) The secondary packaging shall be siftproof ; (c) If multiple fragile primary receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging, they shall be either individually wrapped or separated to prevent contact between them; (d) If there is any doubt as to whether or not residual liquid may be present in the primary receptacle during carriage then a packaging suitable for liquids, including absorbent materials, shall be used . (9) Refrigerated or frozen specimens: ice, dry ice and liquid nitrogen (a) When dry ice or liquid nitrogen is used as a coolant, the requirements of 5.5.3 shall apply. When used, ice shall be placed outside the secondary packagings or in the outer packaging or an overpack. Interior supports shall be provided to secure the secondary packagings in the original position. If ice is used, the outside packaging or overpack shall be leakproof. (b) The primary receptacle and the secondary packaging shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant used as well as the temperatures and the pressures which could result if refrigeration were lost. (10) When packages are placed in an overpack, the package marks required by this packing instruction shall either be clearly visible or be reproduced on the outside of the overpack. (11) Infectious substances assigned to UN No. 3373 which are packed, and packages which are marked in accordance with this packing instruction are not subject to any other requirement in RID. (12) Clear instructions on filling and closing such packages shall be provided by packaging manufacturers and subsequent distributors to the consignor or to the person who prepares the package (e.g. patient) to enable the package to be correctly prepared for carriage. (13) Other dangerous goods shall not be packed in the same packaging as Class 6.2 infectious substances unless they are necessary for maintaining the viability, stabilizing or preventing degradation or neutralizing the hazards of the infectious substances. A quantity of 30 ml or less of dangerous goods included in Classes 3, 8 or 9 may be packed in each primary receptacle containing infectious substances. When these small quantities of dangerous goods are packed with infectious substances in accordance with this packing instruction no other requirements of RID need be met. (14) If any substance has leaked and has been spilled in a cargo transport unit , it may not be reused until after it has been thoroughly cleaned and, if necessary, disinfected or decontaminated. Any other goods and articles carried in the same cargo transport unit shall be examined for possible contamination. Additional requirement Alternative packagings for the carriage of animal material may be authorized by the competent authority of the country of origin (a) in accordance with the provisions of 4.1.8.7. (a) If the country of origin is not an RID Contracting State , the competent authority of the first RID Contracting State reached by the consignment. P 800 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 800 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 2803 and 2809. The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met; or (2) Steel flasks or bottles with threaded closures with a capacity not exceeding 3 litres, or (3) Combination packagings which conform to the following requirements: (a) Inner packagings shall comprise glass, metal or rigid plastics intended to contain liquids with a maximum net mass of 15 kg each; (b) The inner packagings shall be packed with sufficient cushioning material to prevent breakage; (c) Either the inner packagings or the outer packagings shall have inner liners or bags of strong leakproof and puncture resistant material impervious to the contents and completely surrounding the contents to prevent it from escaping from the package irrespective of its position or orientation; (d) The following outer packagings and maximum net masses are authorized: Outer packaging Maximum net mass Drums steel (1A1, 1A2) metal, other than steel or aluminium (1N1, 1N2) plastics (1H1, 1H2) plywood (1D) fibre (1G) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg Boxes steel (4A) metal, other than steel or aluminium (4N) natural wood (4C1) natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F) fibreboard (4G) expanded plastics (4H1) solid plastics (4H2) 400 kg 400 kg 250 kg 250 kg 250 kg 125 kg 125 kg 60 kg 125 kg Special packing provision PP 41 For UN No. 2803, when it is necessary to carry gallium at low temperatures in order to maintain it in a completely solid state, the above packagings may be overpack ed in a strong, water resistant outer packaging which contains dry ice or other means of refrigeration. If a refrigerant is used, all of the above materials used in the packaging of gallium shall be chemically and physically resistant to the refrigerant and shall have impact resistance at the low temperatures of the refrigerant employed. If dry ice is used, the outer packaging shall permit the release of carbon dioxide gas. P 801 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 801 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 2794, 2795 and 3028 and used batteries of UN No. 2800 . The following packagings are authorized, provided that the provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.6 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Rigid outer packagings, wooden slatted crates or pallets . Additionally, the following conditions shall be met: (a) Battery stacks shall be in tiers separated by a layer of electrically non-conductive material; (b) Battery terminals shall not support the weight of other superimposed elements; (c) Batteries shall be packaged or secured to prevent inadvertent movement; (d) Batteries shall not leak under normal conditions of carriage or appropriate measures shall be taken to prevent the release of electrolyte from the package (e.g. individually packaging batteries or other equally effective methods); and (e) Batteries shall be protected against short circuits. (2) Stainless steel or plastics bins may also be used to carry used batteries. Additionally, the following conditions shall be met: (a) The bins shall be resistant to the electrolyte that was contained in the batteries; (b) The bins shall not be filled to a height greater than the height of their sides; (c) The outside of the bins shall be free of residues of electrolyte contained in the batteries; (d) Under normal conditions of carriage, no electrolyte shall leak from the bins; (e) Measures shall be taken to ensure that filled bins cannot lose their content; (f) Measures shall be taken to prevent short circuits (e.g. batteries are discharged, individual protection of the battery terminals, etc.); and (g) The bins shall be either: (i) covered; or (ii) carried in closed or sheeted wagons or containers. NOTE: The packagings authorized in (1) and (2) may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3). P 801a PACKING INSTRUCTION P 801a (Deleted) P 802 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 802 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Combination packagings Outer packagings: 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2; maximum net mass : 75 kg; Inner packagings : glass or plastics; maximum capacity: 10 litres; (2) Combination packagings Outer packagings: 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2; maximum net mass : 125 kg; Inner packagings : metal; maximum capacity: 40 litres; (3) Composite packagings: Glass receptacle with outer steel, aluminium or plywood drum (6PA1, 6PB1 or 6PD1) or with outer steel, aluminium or wooden box or with outer wickerwork hamper (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC or 6PD2) or with outer solid plastics packaging (6PH2); maximum capacity: 60 litres; (4) S teel drums (1A1) with a maximum capacity of 250 litres; (5) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. P 803 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 803 This instruction applies to UN No. 2028. The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); (2) Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2). Maximum net mass: 75 kg. The articles shall be individually packaged and separated from each other using partitions, dividers, inner packagings or cushioning material to prevent inadvertent discharge during normal conditions of carriage. P 804 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 804 This instruction applies to UN No. 1744. The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met and the packagings are hermetically sealed: (1) Combination packagings with a maximum gross mass of 25 kg, consisting of – one or more glass inner packaging(s) with a maximum capacity of 1.3 litres each and filled to not more than 90% of their capacity; the closure(s) of which shall be physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening by impact or vibration during carriage, individually placed in – metal or rigid plastics receptacles together with cushioning and absorbent material sufficient to absorb the entire contents of the glass inner packaging(s), further packed in – 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings. (2) Combination packagings consisting of metal or polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) inner packagings, not exceeding 5 litres in capacity individually packed with absorbent material sufficient to absorb the contents and inert cushioning material in 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings with a maximum gross mass of 75 kg. Inner packagings shall not be filled to more than 90% of their capacity. The closure of each inner packaging shall be physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during carriage; (3) Packagings consisting of: Outer packagings: Steel or plastics drums (1A1, 1A2, 1H1 or 1H2) tested in accordance with the test requirements in 6.1.5 at a mass corresponding to the mass of the assembled package either as a packaging intended to contain inner packagings, or as a single packaging intended to contain solids or liquids, and marked accordingly; Inner packagings: Drums and composite packagings (1A1, 1B1, 1N1, 1H1 or 6HA1) meeting the requirements of Chapter 6.1 for single packagings, subject to the following conditions: (a) The hydraulic pressure test shall be conducted at a pressure of at least 300 kPa (3 bar) (gauge pressure); (b) The design and production leakproofness tests shall be conducted at a test pressure of 30 kPa (0.3 bar); (c) They shall be isolated from the outer drum by the use of inert shock-mitigating cushioning material which surrounds the inner packaging on all sides; (d) Their capacity shall not exceed 125 litres; (e) Closures shall be of a screw type that are: (i) Physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during carriage; (ii) Provided with a cap seal; (f) The outer and inner packagings shall be subjected periodically to an internal inspection and leakproofness test according to (b) at intervals of not more than two and a half years; and (g) The outer and inner packagings shall bear in clearly legible and durable characters: (i) the date (month, year) of the initial test and the latest periodic test and inspection of the inner packaging; and (ii) the name or authorized symbol of the expert who carried out the tests and inspections; (4) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. (a) They shall be subjected to an initial test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10 bar) (gauge pressure); (b) They shall be subjected periodically to an internal inspection and leakproofness test at intervals of not more than two and a half years; (c) They may not be equipped with any pressure relief device; (d) Each pressure receptacle shall be closed with a plug or valve(s) fitted with a secondary closure device; and (e) The materials of construction for the pressure receptacle, valves, plugs, outlet caps, luting and gaskets shall be compatible with each other and with the contents. P 900 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 900 (Reserved) P 901 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 901 This instruction applies to UN No. 3316. The following combination packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F , 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2). Packagings shall conform to the performance level consistent with the packing group assigned to the kit as a whole (see special provision 251 of Chapter 3.3). Where the kit contains only dangerous goods to which no packing group is assigned, packagings shall meet the packing group II performance level. Maximum quantity of dangerous goods per outer packaging: 10 kg excluding the mass of any carbon dioxide, solid (dry ice) used as a refrigerant. Additional requirement Dangerous goods in kits shall be packed in inner packagings which shall be protected from other materials in the kit. P 902 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 902 This instruction applies to UN No. 3268. Packaged a rticles: The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F , 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2). Packagings shall conform to the packing group III performance level. The packagings shall be designed and constructed so as to prevent movement of the articles and inadvertent operation during normal conditions of carriage. Unpackaged art icles: The articles may also be carried unpackaged in dedicated handling devices or cargo transport units when moved to, from, or between where they are manufactured and an assembly plant including intermediate handling locations. Additional requirement Any pressure receptacle shall be in accordance with the requirements of the competent authority for the substance(s) contained therein. P 903 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 903 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481. For the purpose of this packing instruction, "equipment" means apparatus for which the lithium cells or batteries will provide electrical power for its operation. The following packagings are authorized provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) For cells and batteries: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2). Cells or batteries shall be packed in packagings so that the cells or batteries are protected against damage that may be caused by the movement or placement of the cells or batteries within the packaging. Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level. (2) In addition for a cell or a battery with a gross mass of 12 kg or more employing a strong, impact resistant outer casing: (a) Strong outer packagings; (b) Protective enclosures (e.g., fully enclosed or wooden slatted crates); or (c) Pallets or other handling devices. Cells or batteries shall be secured to prevent inadvertent movement, and the terminals shall not support the weight of other superimposed elements. Packagings need not meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3. (3) For cells or batteries packed with equipment: Packagings conforming to the requirements in paragraph (1) of this packing instruction, then placed with the equipment in an outer packaging; or Packagings that completely enclose the cells or batteries, then placed with equipment in a packaging conforming to the requirements in paragraph (1) of this packing instruction. The equipment shall be secured against movement within the outer packaging. (4) For cells or batteries contained in equipment: Strong outer packagings constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use. They shall be constructed in such a manner as to prevent accidental operation during carriage. Packagings need not meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3. Large equipment can be offered for carriage unpackaged or on pallets when the cells or batteries are afforded equivalent protection by the equipment in which they are contained. When intentionally active, devices such as radio frequency identification (RFID) tags, watches and temperature loggers, which are not capable of generating a dangerous evolution of heat, may be carried in strong outer packagings. NOTE: For carriage in a transport chain including air carriage, these devices, when active, shall meet defined standards for electromagnetic radiation to ensure that the operation of the devices does not interfere with aircraft systems. (5) For packagings containing both cells or batteries packed with equipment and contained in equipment: (a) For cells and batteries, packagings that completely enclose the cells or batteries, then placed with equipment in a packaging conforming to the requirements in paragraph (1) of this packing instruction; or (b) Packagings conforming to the requirements in paragraph (1) of this packing instruction, then placed with the equipment in a strong outer packaging constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use. The outer packaging shall be constructed in such a manner as to prevent accidental operation during carriage and need not meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3. The equipment shall be secured against movement within the outer packaging. When intentionally active, devices such as radio frequency identification (RFID) tags, watches and temperature loggers, which are not capable of generating a dangerous evolution of heat, may be carried in strong outer packagings. NOTE: For carriage in a transport chain including air carriage, these devices, when active, shall meet defined standards for electromagnetic radiation to ensure that the operation of the devices does not interfere with aircraft systems. NOTE: The packagings authorized in (2), (4) and (5) may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3). Additional requirement Cells or batteries shall be protected against short circuit. P 903a PACKING INSTRUCTION P 903a (Deleted) P 903b PACKING INSTRUCTION P 903b (Deleted) P 904 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 904 This instruction applies to UN No. 3245. The following packagings are authorized: (1) Packagings meeting the provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.4, 4.1.1.8 and 4.1.3 and so designed that they meet the construction requirements of 6.1.4. Outer packagings constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use, shall be used. Where this packing instruction is used for the carriage of inner packagings of combination packagings the packaging shall be designed and constructed to prevent inadvertent discharge during normal conditions of carriage. (2) Packagings, which need not conform to the packaging test requirements of Part 6, but conforming to the following: (a) An inner packaging comprising: (i) primary receptacle(s) and a secondary packaging, the primary receptacle(s) or the secondary packaging shall be leakproof for liquids or siftproof for solids; (ii) for liquids, absorbent material placed between the primary receptacle(s) and the secondary packaging. The absorbent material shall be in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents of the primary receptacle(s) so that any release of the liquid substance will not compromise the integrity of the cushioning material or of the outer packaging; (iii) if multiple fragile primary receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging they shall be individually wrapped or separated to prevent contact between them; (b) An outer packaging shall be strong enough for its capacity, mass and intended use, and with a smallest external dimension of at least 100 mm. For carriage, the mark illustrated below shall be displayed on the external surface of the outer packaging on a background of a contrasting colour and shall be clearly visible and legible. The mark shall be in the form of a square set at an angle of 45° (diamond-shaped) with each side having a length of at least 50 mm; the width of the line shall be at least 2 mm and the letters and numbers shall be at least 6 mm high. Additional requirement Ice, dry ice and liquid nitrogen When dry ice or liquid nitrogen is used as a coolant, the requirements of 5.5.3 shall apply. When used, ice shall be placed outside the secondary packagings or in the outer packaging or an overpack. Interior supports shall be provided to secure the secondary packaging in the original position. If ice is used, the outside packaging or overpack shall be leakproof. P 905 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 905 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 2990 and 3072. Any suitable packaging is authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met, except that packagings need not conform to the requirements of Part 6. NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3). When the life saving appliances are constructed to incorporate or are contained in rigid outer weatherproof casings (such as for lifeboats), they may be carried unpackaged. Additional requirements 1. All dangerous substances and articles contained as equipment within the appliances shall be secured to prevent inadvertent movement and in addition: (a) Signal devices of Class 1 shall be packed in plastics or fibreboard inner packagings; (b) Non-flammable, non-toxic gases shall be contained in cylinders as specified by the competent authority, which may be connected to the appliance; (c) Electric storage batteries (Class 8) and lithium batteries (Class 9) shall be disconnected or electrically isolated and secured to prevent any spillage of liquid; and (d) Small quantities of other dangerous substances (for example in Classes 3, 4.1 and 5.2) shall be packed in strong inner packagings. 2. Preparation for transport and packaging shall include provisions to prevent any accidental inflation of the appliance. P 906 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 906 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 2315, 3151, 3152 and 3432. The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) For liquids and solids containing or contaminated with PCBs, polyhalogenated biphenyls, polyhalogenated terphenyls or halogenated monomethyldiphenylmethanes: Packagings in accordance with packing instructions P 001 or P 002, as appropriate. (2) For transformers and condensers and other articles: (a) Packagings in accordance with packing instructions P 001 or P 002. The articles shall be secured with suitable cushioning material to prevent inadvertent movement during normal conditions of carriage ; or (b) Leakproof packagings which are capable of containing, in addition to the articles , at least 1.25 times the volume of the liquid PCBs, polyhalogenated biphenyls, polyhalogenated terphenyls or halogenated monomethyldiphenylmethanes present in them . There shall be sufficient absorbent material in the packagings to absorb at least 1.1 times the volume of liquid which is contained in the articles . In general, transformers and condensers shall be carried in leakproof metal packagings which are capable of holding, in addition to the transformers and condensers, at least 1.25 times the volume of the liquid present in them. NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3). Notwithstanding the above, liquids and solids not packaged in accordance with packing instructions P 001 and P 002 and unpackaged transformers and condensers may be carried in cargo transport units fitted with a leakproof metal tray to a height of at least 800 mm, containing sufficient inert absorbent material to absorb at least 1.1 times the volume of any free liquid. NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3). Additional requirement Adequate provisions shall be taken to seal the transformers and condensers to prevent leakage during normal conditions of carriage. P 907 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 907 This instruction applies to articles, such as machinery, apparatus or devices of UN No. 3363. If the article is constructed and designed so that the receptacles containing the dangerous goods are afforded adequate protection, an outer packaging is not required. Dangerous goods in an article shall otherwise be packed in outer packagings constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use, and meeting the applicable requirements of 4.1.1.1. Receptacles containing dangerous goods shall conform to the general provisions in 4.1.1, except that 4.1.1.3, 4.1.1.4, 4.1.1.12 and 4.1.1.14 do not apply. For non-flammable, non-toxic gases, the inner cylinder or receptacle, its contents and filling ratio shall be to the satisfaction of the competent authority of the country in which the cylinder or receptacle is filled. In addition, the manner in which receptacles are contained within the article , shall be such that under normal conditions of carriage, damage to receptacles containing the dangerous goods is unlikely; and in the event of damage to receptacles containing solid or liquid dangerous goods, no leakage of the dangerous goods from the article is possible (a leakproof liner may be used to satisfy this requirement). Receptacles containing dangerous goods shall be so installed, secured or cushioned as to prevent their breakage or leakage and so as to control their movement within the article during normal conditions of carriage. Cushioning material shall not react dangerously with the content of the receptacles. Any leakage of the contents shall not substantially impair the protective properties of the cushioning material. NOTE : The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3). P 908 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 908 This instruction applies to damaged or defective lithium ion cells and batteries and damaged or defective lithium metal cells and batteries, including those contained in equipment, of UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481. The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: For cells and batteries and equipment containing cells and batteries: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2). Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level. 1. Each damaged or defective cell or battery or equipment containing such cells or batteries shall be individually packed in inner packaging and placed inside an outer packaging. The inner packaging or outer packaging shall be leak-proof to prevent the potential release of electrolyte. 2. Each inner packaging shall be surrounded by sufficient non-combustible and electrically non-conductive thermal insulation material to protect against a dangerous evolution of heat. 3. Sealed packagings shall be fitted with a venting device when appropriate. 4. Appropriate measures shall be taken to minimize the effects of vibrations and shocks, prevent movement of the cells or batteries within the package that may lead to further damage and a dangerous condition during carriage. Cushioning material that is non-combustible and electrically non-conductive may also be used to meet this requirement. 5. Non combustibility shall be assessed according to a standard recognized in the country where the packaging is designed or manufactured. For leaking cells or batteries, sufficient inert absorbent material shall be added to the inner or outer packaging to absorb any release of electrolyte. A cell or battery with a net mass of more than 30 kg shall be limited to one cell or battery per outer packaging. Additional requirement Cells or batteries shall be protected against short circuit. P 909 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 909 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481 carried for disposal or recycling, either packed together with or packed without non-lithium batteries. (1) Cells and batteries shall be packed in accordance with the following: (a) The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3, are met: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2); and Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2). (b) Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level. (c) Metal packagings shall be fitted with a electrically non-conductive lining material (e.g. plastics) of adequate strength for the intended use. (2) However, lithium ion cells with a Watt-hour rating of not more than 20 Wh, lithium ion batteries with a Watt-hour rating of not more than 100 Wh, lithium metal cells with a lithium content of not more than 1 g and lithium metal batteries with an aggregate lithium content of not more than 2 g may be packed in accordance with the following: (a) In strong outer packaging up to 30 kg gross mass meeting the general provisions of 4.1.1, except 4.1.1.3, and 4.1.3. (b) Metal packagings shall be fitted with a electrically non-conductive lining material (e.g. plastics) of adequate strength for the intended use. (3) For cells or batteries contained in equipment, strong outer packagings constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use, may be used. Packagings need not meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3. Equipment may also be offered for carriage unpackaged or on pallets when the cells or batteries are afforded equivalent protection by the equipment in which they are contained. (4) In addition, for cells or batteries with a gross mass of 12 kg or more employing a strong, impact resistant outer casing, strong outer packagings constructed of suitable material and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging's capacity and its intended use, may be used. Packagings need not meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3. NOTE: The packagings authorized in (3) and (4) may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3). Additional requirements 1. Cells and batteries shall be designed or packed to prevent short circuits and the dangerous evolution of heat. 2. P rotection against short circuits and the dangerous evolution of heat includes, but is not limited to: – individual protection of the battery terminals, – inner packaging to prevent contact between cells and batteries, – batteries with recessed terminals designed to protect against short circuits, or – the use of a electrically non-conductive and non-combustible cushioning material to fill empty space between the cells or batteries in the packaging. 3. Cells and batteries shall be secured within the outer packaging to prevent excessive movement during carriage (e.g. by using a non-combustible and electrically non-conductive cushioning material or through the use of a tightly closed plastics bag). P 910 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 910 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481 production runs consisting of not more than 100 cells or batteries and to pre-production prototypes of cells or batteries when these prototypes are carried for testing. The following packagings are authorized provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) For cells and batteries, including when packed with equipment: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2). Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level and shall meet the following requirements: (a) Batteries and cells, including equipment, of different sizes, shapes or masses shall be packaged in an outer packaging of a tested design type listed above provided the total gross mass of the package does not exceed the gross mass for which the design type has been tested; (b) Each cell or battery shall be individually packed in an inner packaging and placed inside an outer packaging; (c) Each inner packaging shall be completely surrounded by sufficient non-combustible and electrically non-conductive thermal insulation material to protect against a dangerous evolution of heat; (d) Appropriate measures shall be taken to minimize the effects of vibration and shocks and prevent movement of the cells or batteries within the package that may lead to damage and a dangerous condition during carriage. Cushioning material that is non-combustible and electrically non-conductive may be used to meet this requirement; (e) Non-combustibility shall be assessed according to a standard recognized in the country where the packaging is designed or manufactured; (f) A cell or battery with a net mass of more than 30 kg shall be limited to one cell or battery per outer packaging. (2) For c ells and batteries contained in equipment: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2). Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level and shall meet the following requirements: (a) Equipment of different sizes, shapes or masses shall be packaged in an outer packaging of a tested design type listed above provided the total gross mass of the package does not exceed the gross mass for which the design type has been tested; (b) The equipment shall be constructed or packaged in such a manner as to prevent accidental operation during carriage; (c) Appropriate measures shall be taken to minimize the effects of vibration and shocks and prevent movement of the equipment within the package that may lead to damage and a dangerous condition during carriage. When cushioning material is used to meet this requirement it shall be non-combustible and electrically non-conductive; and (d) Non-combustibility shall be assessed according to a standard recognized in the country where the packaging is designed or manufactured. (3) The equipment or the batteries may be carried unpackaged under conditions specified by the competent authority of any RID Contracting State, which may also recognize an approval granted by the competent authority of a country which is not an RID Contracting State, provided that this approval has been granted in accordance with the procedures applicable according to RID, ADR, ADN, the IMDG Code or the ICAO Technical Instructions . Additional conditions that may be considered in the approval process include, but are not limited to: (a) The equipment or the battery shall be strong enough to withstand the shocks and loadings normally encountered during carriage, including trans-shipment between cargo transport units and between cargo transport units and warehouses as well as any removal from a pallet for subsequent manual or mechanical handling; and (b) The equipment or the battery shall be fixed in cradles or crates or other handling devices in such a way that it will not become loose during normal conditions of carriage. NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3). Additional requirements The cells and batteries shall be protected against short circuit; Protection against short circuits includes, but is not limited to, – individual protection of the battery terminals, – inner packaging to prevent contact between cells and batteries, – batteries with recessed terminals designed to protect against short circuits, or – the use of a electrically non-conductive and non-combustible cushioning material to fill empty space between the cells or batteries in the packaging. P 911 PACKING INSTRUCTION P 911 This instruction applies to damaged or defective cells and batteries of UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481 liable to rapidly disassemble, dangerously react, produce a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous emission of toxic, corrosive or flammable gases or vapours under normal conditions of carriage. The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: For cells and batteries and equipment containing cells and batteries: Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G); Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2); Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2). The packagings shall conform to the packing group I performance level. (1) The packaging shall be capable of meeting the following additional performance requirements in case of rapid disassembly, dangerous reaction, production of a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous emission of toxic, corrosive or flammable gases or vapours of the cells or batteries: (a) The outside surface temperature of the completed package shall not have a temperature of more than 100 °C. A momentary spike in temperature up to 200 °C is acceptable; (b) No flame shall occur outside the package; (c) No projectiles shall exit the package; (d) The structural integrity of the package shall be maintained; and (e) The packagings shall have a gas management system (e.g. filter system, air circulation, containment for gas, gas tight packaging etc.), as appropriate. (2) The additional packaging performance requirements shall be verified by a test as specified by the competent authority of any RID Contracting State who may also recognize a test specified by the competent authority of a country which is not an RID Contracting State provided that this test has been specified in accordance with the procedures applicable according to RID, ADR, ADN, the IMDG Code or the ICAO Technical Instructions a . A verification report shall be available on request. As a minimum requirement, the cell or battery name, the cell or battery number, the mass, type, energy content of the cells or batteries, the packaging identification and the test data according to the verification method as specified by the competent authority shall be listed in the verification report. (3) When dry ice or liquid nitrogen is used as a coolant, the requirements of section 5.5.3 shall apply. The inner packaging and outer packaging shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant used as well as the temperatures and the pressures which could result if refrigeration were lost. Additional requirement Cells or batteries shall be protected against short circuit. a The following criteria, as relevant, may be considered to assess the performance of the packaging: (a) The assessment shall be done under a quality management system (as described e.g. in section 2.2.9.1.7 (e)) allowing for the traceability of tests results, reference data and characterization models used; (b) The list of hazards expected in case of thermal run-away for the cell or battery type, in the condition it is carried (e.g. usage of an inner packaging, state of charge (SOC), use of sufficient non-combustible, electrically non-conductive and absorbent cushioning material etc.), shall be clearly identified and quantified; the reference list of possible hazards for lithium cells or batteries (rapidly disassemble, dangerously react, produce a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous emission of toxic, corrosive or flammable gases or vapours) can be used for this purpose. The quantification of these hazards shall rely on available scientific literature; (c) The mitigating effects of the packaging shall be identified and characterized, based on the nature of the protections provided and the construction material properties. A list of technical characteristics and drawings shall be used to support this assessment (Density (kg·m 3 , specific heat capacity (J · kg -1 · K -1 ), heating value (kJ·kg -1 ), thermal conductivity (W · m -1 · K -1 ), melting temperature and flammability temperature (K), heat transfer coefficient of the outer packaging (W · m -2 · K -1 ), …); (d) The test and any supporting calculations shall assess the result of a thermal run-away of the cell or battery inside the packaging in the normal conditions of carriage; (e) In case the SOC of the cell or battery is not known, the assessment used, shall be done with the highest possible SOC corresponding to the cell or battery use conditions; (f) The surrounding conditions in which the packaging may be used and carried shall be described (including for possible consequences of gas or smoke emissions on the environment, such as ventilation or other methods) according to the gas management system of the packaging; (g) The tests or the model calculation shall consider the worst case scenario for the thermal run-away triggering and propagation inside the cell or battery; this scenario includes the worst possible failure in the normal carriage condition, the maximum heat and flame emissions for the possible propagation of the reaction; (h) These scenarios shall be assessed over a period of time long enough to allow all the possible consequences to occur (e.g. 24 hours). (i) In the case of multiple batteries and multiple items of equipment containing batteries, additional requirements such as the maximum number of batteries and items of equipment, the total maximum energy content of the batteries, and the configuration inside the package, including separations and protections of the parts, shall be considered. R 001 PACKING INSTRUCTION R 001 The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Light-gauge metal packagings Maximum capacity / maximum net mass Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III steel, non-removable head (0A1) steel, removable head (0A2) (a) Not allowed Not allowed 40 l / 50 kg 40 l / 50 kg 40 l / 50 kg 40 l / 50 kg (a) Not allowed for UN No. 1261 Nitromethane NOTE 1 : This instruction applies to solids and liquids (provided the design type is tested and marked appropriately). 2 : For Class 3, packing group II, these packagings may be used only for substances with no subsidiary hazard and a vapour pressure of not more than 110 kPa at 50 °C and for slightly toxic pesticides. 4.1.4.2 Packing instructions concerning the use of IBCs IBC 01 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC 01 The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met: Metal (31A, 31B and 31N). Special packing provision specific to RID and ADR BB 1 For UN No. 3130, the openings of receptacles for this substance shall be tightly closed by means of two devices in series, one of which shall be screwed or secured in an equivalent manner. IBC 02 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC 02 The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Metal (31A, 31B and 31N); (2) Rigid plastics (31H1 and 31H2); (3) Composite (31HZ1). Special packing provisions B 5 For UN Nos. 1791, 2014, 2984 and 3149, IBCs shall be provided with a device to allow venting during carriage. The inlet to the venting device shall be sited in the vapour space of the IBC under maximum filling conditions during carriage. B 7 For UN Nos. 1222 and 1865, IBCs with a capacity greater than 450 litres are not permitted due to the substance’s potential for explosion when carried in large volumes. B 8 The pure form of this substance shall not be transported in IBCs since it is known to have a vapour pressure of more than 110 kPa at 50 °C or 130 kPa at 55 °C. B 15 For UN No. 2031 with more than 55% nitric acid, the permitted use of rigid plastics IBCs and of rigid plastics inner receptacles of composite IBCs with a rigid plastics inner receptacle shall be two years from their date of manufacture. B 16 For UN No. 3375, IBCs of type 31A and 31N are not allowed without competent authority approval. Special packing provisions specific to RID and ADR BB 2 For UN No.1203, notwithstanding special provision 534 (see 3.3.1), IBCs shall only be used when the actual vapour pressure is not more than 110 kPa at 50 °C, or 130 kPa at 55 °C. BB 4 For UN Nos. 1133, 1139, 1197, 1210, 1263, 1266, 1286, 1287, 1306, 1866, 1993 and 1999, assigned to packing group III in accordance with 2.2.3.1.4, IBCs with a capacity greater than 450 litres are not permitted. IBC 03 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC 03 The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Metal (31A, 31B and 31N); (2) Rigid plastics (31H1 and 31H2); (3) Composite (31HZ1, 31HA2, 31HB2, 31HN2, 31HD2 and 31HH2). Special packing provision B 8 The pure form of this substance shall not be carried in IBCs since it is known to have a vapour pressure of more than 110 kPa at 50 °C or 130 kPa at 55 °C. B 19 For UN No. 3532, IBCs shall be designed and constructed to permit the release of gas or vapour to prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the IBCs in the event of loss of stabilization. IBC 04 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC 04 The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met: Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B , 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N ). IBC 05 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC 05 The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B , 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N ); (2) Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1 , 21H2, 31H1 and 31H2 ); (3) Composite (11HZ1 , 21HZ1 and 31HZ1 ). IBC 06 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC 06 The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B , 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N ); (2) Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1 , 21H2, 31H1 and 31H2 ); (3) Composite (11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1 , 21HZ2 and 31HZ1 ). Additional requirement Where the solid may become liquid during carriage see 4.1.3.4. Special packing provisions B 12 For UN No. 2907, IBCs shall meet the packing group II performance level. IBCs meeting the test criteria of packing group I shall not be used. IBC 07 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC 07 The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B , 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N ); (2) Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1 , 21H2, 31H1 and 31H2 ); (3) Composite (11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1 , 21HZ2 and 31HZ1 ); (4) Wooden (11C, 11D and 11F). Additional requirements 1. Where the solid may become liquid during carriage see 4.1.3.4. 2. Liners of wooden IBCs shall be siftproof. Special packing provision B 18 For UN No. 3531, IBCs shall be designed and constructed to permit the release of gas or vapour to prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the IBCs in the event of loss of stabilization. B 20 UN No. 3550 may be carried in flexible IBCs (13H3 or 13H4) with siftproof liners to prevent any egress of dust during carriage. IBC 08 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC 08 The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B , 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N ); (2) Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1 , 21H2, 31H1 and 31H2 ); (3) Composite (11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1, 21HZ2 and 31HZ1 ); (4) Fibreboard (11G); (5) Wooden (11C, 11D and 11F); (6) Flexible (13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13H5, 13L1, 13L2, 13L3, 13L4, 13M1 and 13M2). Additional requirement Where the solid may become liquid during carriage see 4.1.3.4. Special packing provisions B 3 Flexible IBCs shall be sift-proof and water-resistant or shall be fitted with a sift-proof and water-restistant liner. B 4 Flexible, fibreboard or wooden IBCs shall be sift proof and water resistant or shall be fitted with a sift proof and water resistant liner. B 6 For UN Nos. 1363, 1364, 1365, 1386, 1408, 1841, 2211, 2217, 2793 and 3314, IBCs are not required to meet the IBC testing requirements of Chapter 6.5. B 13 NOTE: For UN Nos. 1748, 2208, 2880, 3485, 3486 and 3487, carriage by sea in IBCs is prohibited according to the IMDG Code. Special packing provision specific to RID and ADR BB 3 For UN 3509, IBCs are not required to meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3. IBCs meeting the requirements of 6.5.5, made leak tight or fitted with a leak tight and puncture resistant sealed liner or bag, shall be used. When the only residues are solids which are not liable to become liquid at temperatures likely to be encountered during carriage, flexible IBCs may be used. When liquid residues are present, rigid IBCs that provide a means of retention (e.g. absorbent material) shall be used. Before being filled and handed over for carriage, every IBC shall be inspected to ensure that it is free from corrosion, contamination or other damage. Any IBC showing signs of reduced strength shall no longer be used (minor dents and scratches are not considered as reducing the strength of the IBC). IBCs intended for the carriage of packagings, discarded, empty, uncleaned with residues of Class 5.1 shall be so constructed or adapted that the goods cannot come into contact with wood or any other combustible material. IBC 99 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC 99 Only IBCs which are approved for these goods by the competent authority may be used. A copy of the competent authority approval shall accompany each consignment or the transport document shall include an indication that the packaging was approved by the competent authority. IBC 100 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC 100 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 0082, 0222, 0241, 0331 and 0332. The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 and special provisions of 4.1.5 are met: (1) Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N); (2) Flexible (13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13L2, 13L3, 13L4 and 13M2); (3) Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1, 21H2, 31H1 and 31H2); (4) Composite (11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1, 21HZ2, 31HZ1 and 31HZ2). Additional requirements 1. IBCs shall only be used for free flowing substances. 2. Flexible IBCs shall only be used for solids. Special packing provisions B 3 For UN No. 0222, flexible IBCs shall be sift-proof and water resistant or shall be fitted with a sift-proof and water resistant liner. B 9 For UN No. 0082, this packing instruction may only be used when the substances are mixtures of ammonium nitrate or other inorganic nitrates with other combustible substances which are not explosive ingredients. Such explosives shall not contain nitroglycerin, similar liquid organic nitrates, or chlorates. Metal IBCs are not authorized. B 10 For UN No. 0241, this packing instruction may only be used for substances which consist of water as an essential ingredient and high proportions of ammonium nitrate or other oxidizing substances some or all of which are in solution. The other constituents may include hydrocarbons or aluminium powder, but shall not include nitro-derivatives such as trinitrotoluene. Metal IBCs are not authorized. B 17 For UN No. 0222, metal IBCs are not authorized. IBC 520 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC 520 This instruction applies to organic peroxides and self-reactive substances of type F. The IBCs listed below are authorized for the formulations listed, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 and special provisions of 4.1.7.2 are met. The formulations not listed in 2.2.41.4 or in 2.2.52.4 but listed below may also be carried packed in accordance with packing method OP8 of packing instruction P 520 of 4.1.4.1. For formulations not listed below, only IBCs which are approved by the competent authority may be used (see 4.1.7.2.2). UN No. Organic peroxide Type of IBC Maximum quantity (litres/kg) 3109 ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE F, LIQUID tert- Butyl cumyl peroxide 31HA1 1000 tert-BUTYL HYDROPEROXIDE, not more than 72% with water 31A 31HA1 1250 1000 tert-BUTYL PEROXYACETATE, not more than 32% in diluent type A 31A 31HA1 1250 1000 tert- Butyl peroxybenzoate , not more than 32% in diluent type A 31A 1250 tert-BUTYL PEROXY-3,5,5-TRIMETHYLHEXANOATE, not more than 37% in diluent type A 31A 31HA1 1250 1000 CUMYL HYDROPEROXIDE, not more than 90% in diluent type A 31HA1 1250 DIBENZOYL PEROXIDE, not more than 42% as a stable dispersion in water 31H1 1000 DI-tert-BUTYL PEROXIDE, not more than 52% in diluent type A 31A 31HA1 1250 1000 1,1-Di-( tert- Butylperoxy)cyclohexane, not more than 37% in diluent type A 31A 1250 1,1-DI-(tert- Butylperoxy)Cyclohexane , not more than 42% in diluent type A 31H1 1000 2,5- Dimethyl -2,5- di (tert- butylperoxy)hexane , not more than 52% in diluent type A 31HA1 1000 DILAUROYL PEROXIDE, not more than 42%, stable dispersion, in water 31HA1 1000 ISOPROPYL CUMYL HYDROPEROXIDE, not more than 72% in diluent type A 31HA1 1250 p-MENTHYL HYDROPEROXIDE, not more than 72% in diluent type A 31HA1 1250 PEROXYACETIC ACID, STABILIZED, not more than 17% 31H1 31H2 31HA1 31A 1500 1500 1500 1500 3,6,9-Triethyl-3,6,9-trimethyl-1,4,7-triperoxonane, not more than 27% in diluent type A 31HA1 1000 3110 ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE F, SOLID DICUMYL PEROXIDE 31A 31H1 31HA1 2000 Additional requirements 1. IBCs shall be provided with a device to allow venting during carriage. The inlet to the pressure-relief device shall be sited in the vapour space of the IBC under maximum filling conditions during carriage. 2. To prevent explosive rupture of metal IBCs or composite IBCs with complete metal casing, the emergency relief devices shall be designed to vent all the decomposition products and vapours evolved during self-accelerating decomposition or during a period of not less than one hour of fire engulfment as calculated by the formula in 4.2.1.13.8 or in special provision TE 12 of 6.8.4. IBC 620 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC 620 This instruction applies to UN No. 3291. The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 , except 4.1.1.15 , 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met: Rigid, leakproof IBCs conforming to the packing group II performance level. Additional requirements 1. There shall be sufficient absorbent material to absorb the entire amount of liquid present in the IBC. 2. IBCs shall be capable of retaining liquids. 3. IBCs intended to contain sharp objects such as broken glass and needles shall be resistant to puncture. 4.1.4.3 Packing instructions concerning the use of large packagings LP 01 PACKING INSTRUCTION (LIQUIDS) LP 01 The following large packagings are authorized provided the general provision of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Inner packagings Large outer packagings Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III Glass 10 litre Plastics 30 litre Metal 40 litre Steel (50A) Aluminium (50B) Metal other than steel or aluminium (50N) Rigid plastics (50H) Natural wood (50C) Plywood (50D) Reconstituted wood (50F) Rigid fibreboard (50G) Not allowed Not allowed Maximum capacity: 3 m 3 LP 02 PACKING INSTRUCTION (SOLIDS) LP 02 The following large packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Inner packagings Large outer packagings Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III Glass 10 kg Plastics (b) 50 kg Metal 50 kg Paper (a),(b) 50 kg Fibre (a),(b) 50 kg Steel (50A) Aluminium (50B) Metal other than steel or aluminium (50N) Rigid plastics (50H) Natural wood (50C) Plywood (50D) Reconstituted wood (50F) Rigid fibreboard (50G) Flexible plastics (51H) (c) Not allowed Not allowed Maximum capacity: 3 m 3 (a) These inner packagings shall not be used when the substances being carried may become liquid during carriage. (b) These inner packagings shall be sift-proof. (c) To be used with flexible inner packagings only. Special packing provisions L 2 (Deleted) L 3 NOTE: For UN Nos. 2208 and 3486, carriage by sea in large packagings is prohibited. Special packing provision specific to RID and ADR LL 1 For UN 3509, large packagings are not required to meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3. Large packagings meeting the requirements of 6.6.4, made leak tight or fitted with a leak tight and puncture resistant sealed liner or bag, shall be used. When the only residues are solids which are not liable to become liquid at temperatures likely to be encountered during carriage, flexible large packagings may be used. When liquid residues are present, rigid large packagings that provide a means of retention (e.g. absorbent material) shall be used. Before being filled and handed over for carriage, every large packaging shall be inspected to ensure that it is free from corrosion, contamination or other damage. Any large packaging showing signs of reduced strength shall no longer be used (minor dents and scratches are not considered as reducing the strength of the large packaging). Large packagings intended for the carriage of packagings, discarded, empty, uncleaned with residues of Class 5.1 shall be so constructed or adapted that the goods cannot come into contact with wood or any other combustible material. LP 03 packing instruction LP 03 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3537 to 3548. (1) The following large packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met : Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group II performance level made of : steel (50A); aluminium (50B); metal other than steel or aluminium (50N); rigid plastics (50H); natural wood (50C); plywood (50D); reconstituted wood (50F); rigid fibreboard (50G). (2) Additionally, the following conditions shall be met: (a) Receptacles within articles containing liquids or solids shall be constructed of suitable materials and secured in the article in such a way that, under normal conditions of carriage, they cannot break, be punctured or leak their contents into the article itself or the outer packaging; (b) Receptacles containing liquids with closures shall be packed with their closures correctly oriented. The receptacles shall in addition conform to the internal pressure test provisions of 6.1.5.5 ; (c) Receptacles that are liable to break or be punctured easily, such as those made of glass, porcelain or stoneware or of certain plastics materials shall be properly secured. Any leakage of the contents shall not substantially impair the protective properties of the article or of the outer packaging ; (d) Receptacles within articles containing gases shall meet the requirements of Section 4.1.6 and Chapter 6.2 as appropriate or be capable of providing an equivalent level of protection as packing instructions P 200 or P 208 ; and (e) Where there is no receptacle within the article, the article shall fully enclose the dangerous substances and prevent their release under normal conditions of carriage . (3) Articles shall be packed to prevent movement and inadvertent operation during normal conditions of carriage. LP 99 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP 99 Only large packagings which are approved for these goods by the competent authority may be used. A copy of the competent authority approval shall accompany each consignment or the transport document shall include an indication that the packaging was approved by the competent authority. LP 101 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP 101 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 and special provisions of 4.1.5 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Large outer packagings Not necessary Not necessary Steel (50A) Aluminium (50B) Metal other than steel or aluminium (50N) Rigid plastics (50H) Natural wood (50C) Plywood (50D) Reconstituted wood (50F) Rigid fibreboard (50G) Special packing provision L 1 For UN Nos. 0006, 0009, 0010, 0015, 0016, 0018, 0019, 0034, 0035, 0038, 0039, 0048, 0056, 0137, 0138, 0168, 0169, 0171, 0181, 0182, 0183, 0186, 0221, 0243, 0244, 0245, 0246, 0254, 0280, 0281, 0286, 0287, 0297, 0299, 0300, 0301, 0303, 0321, 0328, 0329, 0344, 0345, 0346, 0347, 0362, 0363, 0370, 0412, 0424, 0425, 0434, 0435, 0436, 0437, 0438, 0451, 0488 , 0502 and 0510 : Large and robust explosives articles, normally intended for military use, without their means of initiation or with their means of initiation containing at least two effective protective features, may be carried unpackaged. When such articles have propelling charges or are self-propelled, their ignition systems shall be protected against stimuli encountered during normal conditions of carriage. A negative result in Test Series 4 on an unpackaged article indicates that the article can be considered for carriage unpackaged. Such unpackaged articles may be fixed to cradles or contained in crates or other suitable handling devices. LP 102 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP 102 The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 and special provisions of 4.1.5 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Large outer packagings Bags water resistant Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Sheets fibreboard, corrugated Tubes fibreboard Not necessary Steel (50A) Aluminium (50B) Metal other than steel o r aluminium (50N) Rigid plastics (50H) Natural wood (50C) Plywood (50D) Reconstituted wood (50F) Rigd fibreboard (50G) LP 200 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP 200 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 1950 and 2037 . The following large packagings are authorized for aerosols and gas cartridges , provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group II performance level, made of: steel (50A); aluminium (50B); metal other than steel or aluminium (50N); rigid plastics (50H); natural wood (50C); plywood (50D); reconstituted wood (50F); rigid fibreboard (50G). Special packing provision L 2 The large packagings shall be designed and constructed to prevent dangerous movement and inadvertent discharge during normal conditions of carriage. For waste aerosols carried in accordance with special provision 327, the large packagings shall have a means of retaining any free liquid that might escape during carriage, e.g. absorbent material. For waste aerosols and waste gas cartridges carried in accordance with special provision 327, the large packagings shall be adequately ventilated to prevent the creation of dangerous atmospheres and the build-up of pressure. LP 621 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP 621 This instruction applies to UN No. 3291. The following large packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) For clinical waste placed in inner packagings: Rigid, leakproof large packagings conforming to the requirements of Chapter 6.6 for solids, at the packing group II performance level, provided there is sufficient absorbent material to absorb the entire amount of liquid present and the large packaging is capable of retaining liquids; (2) For packages containing larger quantities of liquid: Large rigid packagings conforming to the requirements of Chapter 6.6, at the packing group II performance level, for liquids. Additional requirement Large packagings intended to contain sharp objects such as broken glass and needles shall be resistant to puncture and retain liquids under the performance test conditions in Chapter 6.6. LP 622 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP 622 This instruction applies to waste of UN No. 3549 carried for disposal. The following large packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings metal plastics metal plastics steel (50A) aluminium (50B) metal other than steel or aluminium (50N) plywood (50D) rigid fibreboard (50G) rigid plastics (50H) The outer packaging shall conform to the packing group I performance level for solids. Additional requirements: 1. Fragile articles shall be contained in either a rigid inner packaging or a rigid intermediate packaging. 2. Inner packagings containing sharp objects such as broken glass and needles shall be rigid and resistant to puncture. 3. The inner packaging, the intermediate packaging and the outer packaging shall be capable of retaining liquids. Outer packagings that are not capable of retaining liquids by design shall be fitted with a liner or suitable measure of retaining liquids. 4. The inner packaging and/or the intermediate packaging may be flexible. When flexible packagings are used, they shall be capable of passing the impact resistance test of at least 165 g according to ISO 7765-1:1988 "Plastics film and sheeting – Determination of impact resistance by the free-falling dart method – Part 1: Staircase methods" and the tear resistance test of at least 480 g in both parallel and perpendicular planes with respect to the length of the bag in accordance with ISO 6383-2:1983 "Plastics – Film and sheeting – Determination of tear resistance – Part 2: Elmendorf method". The maximum net mass of each flexible inner packaging shall be 30 kg. 5. Each flexible intermediate packaging shall contain only one inner packaging. 6. Inner packagings containing a small amount of free liquid may be included in intermediate packaging provided that there is sufficient absorbent or solidifying material in the inner or intermediate packaging to absorb or solidify all the liquid content present. Suitable absorbent material which withstands the temperatures and vibrations liable to occur under normal conditions of carriage shall be used. 7. Intermediate packagings shall be secured in outer packagings with suitable cushioning and/or absorbent material. LP 902 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP 902 This instruction applies to UN No. 3268. Packaged articles: The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met : Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group III performance level, made of: steel (50A); aluminium (50B); metal other than steel or aluminium (50N); rigid plastics (50H); natural wood (50C); plywood (50D); reconstituted wood (50F); rigid fibreboard (50G). The packagings shall be designed and constructed to prevent movement of the articles and inadvertent operation during normal conditions of carriage. Unpackaged articles: The articles may also be carried unpackaged in dedicated handling devices or cargo transport units when moved to, from, or between where they are manufactured and an assembly plant including intermediate handling locations. Additional requirement Any pressure receptacle shall be in accordance with the requirements of the competent authority for the substance(s) contained in the pressure receptacle(s). LP 903 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP 903 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481. The following large packagings are authorized for a single battery and for a single item of equipment containing batteries, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group II performance level, made of: steel (50A); aluminium (50B); metal other than steel or aluminium (50N); rigid plastics (50H); natural wood (50C); plywood (50D); reconstituted wood (50F); rigid fibreboard (50G). The battery or the equipment shall be packed so that the battery or the equipment is protected against damage that may be caused by its movement or placement within the large packaging. Additional requirement B atteries shall be protected against short circuit. LP 904 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP 904 This instruction applies to single damaged or defective batteries and to single items of equipment containing damaged or defective cells and batteries of UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481. The following large packagings are authorized for a single damaged or defective battery and for a single item of equipment containing damaged or defective cells and batteries, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: For batteries and equipment containing cells and batteries: Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group II performance level, made of: steel (50A) aluminium (50B) metal other than steel or aluminium (50N) rigid plastics (50H) plywood (50D) 1. The damaged or defective battery or equipment containing such cells or batteries shall be individually packed in an inner packaging and placed inside an outer packaging. The inner packaging or outer packaging shall be leak-proof to prevent the potential release of electrolyte. 2. The inner packaging shall be surrounded by sufficient non-combustible and electrically non-conductive thermal insulation material to protect against a dangerous evolution of heat. 3. S ealed packagings shall be fitted with a venting device when appropriate. 4. Appropriate measures shall be taken to minimize the effects of vibrations and shocks, prevent movement of the battery or the equipment within the package that may lead to further damage and a dangerous condition during carriage. Cushioning material that is non-combustible and electrically non-conductive may also be used to meet this requirement. 5. Non combustibility shall be assessed according to a standard recognized in the country where the packaging is designed or manufactured. For leaking cells and batteries, sufficient inert absorbent material shall be added to the inner or outer packaging to absorb any release of electrolyte. Additional requirement Cells and batteries shall be protected against short circuit . LP 905 packing instruction LP 905 This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481 production runs consisting of not more than 100 cells or batteries and to pre-production prototypes of cells or batteries when these prototypes are carried for testing. The following large packagings are authorized for a single battery and for a single item of equipment containing cells or batteries, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: (1) For a single battery: Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group II performance level, made of: steel (50A); aluminium (50B); metal other than steel or aluminium (50N); rigid plastics (50H); natural wood (50C); plywood (50D); reconstituted wood (50F); rigid fibreboard (50G). Large packagings shall also meet the following requirements: (a) A battery of different size, shape or mass may be packed in an outer packaging of a tested design type listed above provided the total gross mass of the package does not exceed the gross mass for which the design type has been tested; (b) The battery shall be packed in an inner packaging and placed inside the outer packaging; (c) The inner packaging shall be completely surrounded by sufficient non-combustible and electrically non-conductive thermal insulation material to protect against a dangerous evolution of heat; (d) Appropriate measures shall be taken to minimize the effects of vibration and shocks and prevent movement of the battery within the package that may lead to damage and a dangerous condition during carriage. When cushioning material is used to meet this requirement it shall be non-combustible and electrically non-conductive; and (e) Non-combustibility shall be assessed according to a standard recognized in the country where the large packaging is designed or manufactured. (2) For a single item of equipment containing cells or batteries: Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group II performance level, made of: steel (50A); aluminium (50B); metal other than steel or aluminium (50N); rigid plastics (50H); natural wood (50C); plywood (50D); reconstituted wood (50F); rigid fibreboard (50G). Large packagings shall also meet the following requirements: (a) A single item of equipment of different size, shape or mass may be packed in an outer packaging of a tested design type listed above provided the total gross mass of the package does not exceed the gross mass for which the design type has been tested ; (b) The equipment shall be constructed or packed in such a manner as to prevent accidental operation during carriage; (c) Appropriate measures shall be taken to minimize the effects of vibration and shocks and prevent movement of the equipment within the package that may lead to damage and a dangerous condition during carriage. When cushioning material is used to meet this requirement, it shall be non-combustible and electrically non-conductive; and (d) Non-combustibility shall be assessed according to a standard recognized in the country where the large packaging is designed or manufactured. Additional requirement Cells and batteries shall be protected against short circuit. L P 906 packing instruction LP 906 This instruction applies to damaged or defective batteries of UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481 liable to rapidly disassemble, dangerously react, produce a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous emission of toxic, corrosive or flammable gases or vapours under normal conditions of carriage . The following large packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met: For batteries and items of equipment containing batteries: Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group I performance level, made of: steel (50A); aluminium (50B); metal other than steel or aluminium (50N); rigid plastics (50H); plywood (50D); rigid fibreboard (50G) (1) The large packaging shall be capable of meeting the following additional performance requirements in case of rapid disassembly, dangerous reaction, production of a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous emission of toxic, corrosive or flammable gases or vapours of the battery: (a) The outside surface temperature of the completed package shall not have a temperature of more than 100 °C. A momentary spike in temperature up to 200 °C is acceptable; (b) No flame shall occur outside the package; (c) No projectiles shall exit the package; (d) The structural integrity of the package shall be maintained; and (e) The large packagings shall have a gas management system (e.g. filter system, air circulation, containment for gas, gas tight packaging etc.), as appropriate. (2) The additional large packaging performance requirements shall be verified by a test as specified by the competent authority of any RID Contracting State who may also recognize a test specified by the competent authority of a country which is not an RID Contracting State provided that this test has been specified in accordance with the procedures applicable according to RID, ADR, ADN, the IMDG Code or the ICAO Technical Instructions a . A verification report shall be made available on request. As a minimum requirement, the name of the batteries, their type as defined in Section 38.3.2.3 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, the maximum number of batteries, the total mass of batteries, the total energy content of the batteries, the large packaging identification and the test data according to the verification method as specified by the competent authority shall be listed in the verification report. A set of specific instructions describing the way to use the package shall also be part of the verification report. (3) When dry ice or liquid nitrogen is used as a coolant, the requirements of section 5.5.3 shall apply. The inner packaging and outer packaging shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant used as well as the temperatures and the pressures which could result if refrigeration were lost. (4) The specific instructions for use of the package shall be made available by the packaging manufacturers and subsequent distributors to the consignor. They shall include at least the identification of the batteries and items of equipment that may be contained inside the packaging, the maximum number of batteries contained in the package and the maximum total of the batteries’ energy content, as well as the configuration inside the package, including the separations and protections used during the performance verification test. Additional requirement Batteries shall be protected against short circuit. a The following criteria, as relevant, may be considered to assess the performance of the large packaging: (a) The assessment shall be done under a quality management system (as described e.g. in section 2.2.9.1.7 (e)) allowing for the traceability of tests results, reference data and characterization models used; (b) The list of hazards expected in case of thermal run-away for the battery type, in the condition it is carried (e.g. usage of an inner packaging, state of charge (SOC), use of sufficient non-combustible, electrically non-conductive and absorbent cushioning material etc.), shall be clearly identified and quantified; the reference list of possible hazards for lithium batteries (rapidly disassemble, dangerously react, produce a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous emission of toxic, corrosive or flammable gases or vapours) can be used for this purpose. The quantification of these hazards shall rely on available scientific literature; (c) The mitigating effects of the large packaging shall be identified and characterized, based on the nature of the protections provided and the construction material properties. A list of technical characteristics and drawings shall be used to support this assessment (Density (kg · m -3 ), specific heat capacity (J ·kg -1 ·K -1 ) , heating value (kJ·kg -1 ) , thermal conductivity (W·m -1 ·K -1 ) , melting temperature and flammability temperature (K), heat transfer coefficient of the outer packaging (W·m -2 ·K -1 ) , …); (d) The test and any supporting calculations shall assess the result of a thermal run-away of the battery inside the large packaging in the normal conditions of carriage; (e) In case the SOC of the battery is not known, the assessment used, shall be done with the highest possible SOC corresponding to the battery use conditions; (f) The surrounding conditions in which the large packaging may be used and carried shall be described (including for possible consequences of gas or smoke emissions on the environment, such as ventilation or other methods) according to the gas management system of the large packaging; (g) The tests or the model calculation shall consider the worst case scenario for the thermal run-away triggering and propagation inside the battery; this scenario includes the worst possible failure in the normal carriage condition, the maximum heat and flame emissions for the possible propagation of the reaction; (h) These scenarios shall be assessed over a period of time long enough to allow all the possible consequences to occur (e.g. 24 hours). (i) In the case of multiple batteries and multiple items of equipment containing batteries, additional requirements such as the maximum number of batteries and items of equipment, the total maximum energy content of the batteries, and the configuration inside the package, including separations and protections of the parts, shall be considered. 4.1.4.4 (Deleted) 4.1.5 Special packing provisions for goods of Class 1 4.1.5.1 The general provisions of Section 4.1.1 shall be met. 4.1.5.2 All packagings for Class 1 goods shall be so designed and constructed that: (a) They will protect the explosives, prevent them escaping and cause no increase in the risk of unintended ignition or initiation when subjected to normal conditions of carriage including foreseeable changes in temperature, humidity and pressure; (b) The complete package can be handled safely in normal conditions of carriage; and (c) The packages will withstand any loading imposed on them by foreseeable stacking to which they will be subject during carriage so that they do not add to the risk presented by the explosives, the containment function of the packagings is not harmed, and they are not distorted in a way or to an extent which will reduce their strength or cause instability of a stack. 4.1.5.3 All explosive substances and articles, as prepared for carriage, shall have been classified in accordance with the procedures detailed in 2.2.1. 4.1.5.4 Class 1 goods shall be packed in accordance with the appropriate packing instruction shown in Column (8) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, as detailed in 4.1.4. 4.1.5.5 Unless otherwise specified in RID, packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, shall conform to the requirements of chapters 6.1, 6.5 or 6.6, as appropriate, and shall meet their test requirements for packing group II. 4.1.5.6 The closure device of packagings containing liquid explosives shall ensure a double protection against leakage. 4.1.5.7 The closure device of metal drums shall include a suitable gasket; if a closure device includes a screw-thread, the ingress of explosive substances into the screw-thread shall be prevented. 4.1.5.8 Packagings for water soluble substances shall be water resistant. Packagings for desensitized or phlegmatized substances shall be closed to prevent changes in concentration during carriage. 4.1.5.9 (Reserved) 4.1.5.10 Nails, staples and other closure devices made of metal without protective covering shall not penetrate to the inside of the outer packaging unless the inner packaging adequately protects the explosives against contact with the metal. 4.1.5.11 Inner packagings, fittings and cushioning materials and the placing of explosive substances or articles in packages shall be accomplished in a manner which prevents the explosive substances or articles from becoming loose in the outer packaging under normal conditions of carriage. Metallic components of articles shall be prevented from making contact with metal packagings. Articles containing explosive substances not enclosed in an outer casing shall be separated from each other in order to prevent friction and impact. Padding, trays, partitioning in the inner or outer packaging, mouldings or receptacles may be used for this purpose. 4.1.5.12 Packagings shall be made of materials compatible with, and impermeable to, the explosives contained in the package, so that neither interaction between the explosives and the packaging materials, nor leakage, causes the explosive to become unsafe to carriage, or the hazard division or compatibility group to change. 4.1.5.13 The ingress of explosive substances into the recesses of seamed metal packagings shall be prevented. 4.1.5.14 Plastics packagings shall not be liable to generate or accumulate sufficient static electricity so that a discharge could cause the packaged explosive substances or articles to initiate, ignite or function. 4.1.5.15 Large and robust explosives articles, normally intended for military use, without their means of initiation or with their means of initiation containing at least two effective protective features, may be carried unpackaged. When such articles have propelling charges or are self-propelled, their ignition systems shall be protected against stimuli encountered during normal conditions of carriage. A negative result in Test Series 4 on an unpackaged article indicates that the article can be considered for carriage unpackaged. Such unpackaged articles may be fixed to cradles or contained in crates or other suitable handling, storage or launching devices in such a way that they will not become loose during normal conditions of carriage. Where such large explosive articles are as part of their operational safety and suitability tests subjected to test regimes that meet the intentions of RID and such tests have been successfully undertaken, the competent authority may approve such articles to be carried in accordance with RID . 4.1.5.16 Explosive substances shall not be packed in inner or outer packagings where the differences in internal and external pressures, due to thermal or other effects, could cause an explosion or rupture of the package. 4.1.5.17 Whenever loose explosive substances or the explosive substance of an uncased or partly cased article may come into contact with the inner surface of metal packagings (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 4A, 4B, 4N and metal receptacles), the metal packaging shall be provided with an inner liner or coating (see 4.1.1.2). 4.1.5.18 Packing instruction P101 may be used for any explosive provided the packaging has been approved by a competent authority regardless of whether the packaging complies with the packing instruction assignment in Column (8) of Table A of Chapter 3.2. 4.1.6 Special packing provisions for goods of Class 2 and goods of other classes assigned to packing instruction P200 4.1.6.1 This section provides general requirements applicable to the use of pressure receptacles and open cryogenic receptacles for the carriage of Class 2 substances and goods of other classes assigned to packing instruction P200 (e.g. UN 1051 hydrogen cyanide, stabilized). Pressure receptacles shall be constructed and closed so as to prevent any loss of contents which might be caused under normal conditions of carriage, including by vibration, or by changes in temperature, humidity or pressure (resulting from change in altitude, for example). 4.1.6.2 Parts of pressure receptacles and open cryogenic receptacles which are in direct contact with dangerous goods shall not be affected or weakened by those dangerous goods and shall not cause a dangerous effect (e.g. catalysing a reaction or reacting with the dangerous goods). 4.1.6.3 Pressure receptacles, including their closures and open cryogenic receptacles, shall be selected to contain a gas or a mixture of gases according to the requirements of 6.2.1.2 and the requirements of the relevant packing instructions of 4.1.4.1. This sub-section also applies to pressure receptacles which are elements of MEGCs and battery-wagons. 4.1.6.4 A change of use of a refillable pressure receptacle shall include emptying, purging and evacuation operations to the extent necessary for safe operation (see also table of standards at the end of this section). In addition, a pressure receptacle that previously contained a Class 8 corrosive substance or a substance of another class with a corrosive subsidiary hazard shall not be authorized for the carriage of a Class 2 substance unless the necessary inspection and testing as specified in 6.2.1.6 and 6.2.3.5 respectively have been performed. 4.1.6.5 Prior to filling, the packer shall perform an inspection of the pressure receptacle or open cryogenic receptacle and ensure that the pressure receptacle or open cryogenic receptacle is authorized for the substance and, in case of a chemical under pressure, for the propellant to be carried and that the requirements have been met. Shut-off valves shall be closed after filling and remain closed during carriage. The consignor shall verify that the closures and equipment are not leaking. NOTE : Shut-off valves fitted to individual cylinders in bundles may be open during carriage, unless the substance carried is subject to special packing provision "k" or "q" in packing instruction P200. 4.1.6.6 Pressure receptacles and open cryogenic receptacles shall be filled according to the working pressures, filling ratios and provisions specified in the appropriate packing instruction for the specific substance being filled and taking into account the lowest pressure rating of any component . Service equipment having a pressure rating lower than other components shall nevertheless comply with 6.2.1.3.1. Reactive gases and gas mixtures shall be filled to a pressure such that if complete decomposition of the gas occurs, the working pressure of the pressure receptacle shall not be exceeded. 4.1.6.7 Pressure receptacles, including their closures, shall conform to the design, construction, inspection and testing requirements detailed in Chapter 6.2. When outer packagings are prescribed, the pressure receptacles and open cryogenic receptacles shall be firmly secured therein. Unless otherwise specified in the detailed packing instructions, one or more inner packagings may be enclosed in one outer packaging. 4.1.6.8 Valves and other components which are to remain connected to the valve during carriage (e.g. handling devices or adaptors) shall be designed and constructed in such a way that they are inherently able to withstand damage without release of the contents or shall be protected from damage which could cause inadvertent release of the contents of the pressure receptacle, by one of the following methods (see also table of standards at the end of this section): (a) Valves are placed inside the neck of the pressure receptacle and protected by a threaded plug or cap; (b) Valves are protected by caps or guards. Caps shall possess vent-holes of sufficient cross-sectional area to evacuate the gas if leakage occurs at the valves; (c) Valves are protected by shrouds or permanent protective attachments; (d) Pressure receptacles are carried in frames, (e.g. cylinders in bundles); or (e) Pressure receptacles are carried in protective boxes. For UN pressure receptacles the packaging as prepared for carriage shall be capable of meeting the drop test specified in 6.1.5.3 at the packing group I performance level. 4.1.6.9 Non-refillable pressure receptacles shall: (a) be carried in an outer packaging, such as a box or crate, or in shrink-wrapped or stretch-wrapped trays; (b) be of a water capacity less than or equal to 1.25 litres when filled with flammable or toxic gas; (c) not be used for toxic gases with an LC 50 less than or equal to 200 ml/m 3 ; and (d) not be repaired after being put into service. 4.1.6.10 Refillable pressure receptacles, other than closed cryogenic receptacles, shall be periodically inspected according to the provisions of 6.2.1.6, or 6.2.3.5.1 for non UN receptacles, and packing instruction P 200 , P 205, P 206 or P 208 as applicable. Pressure relief valves for closed cryogenic receptacles shall be subject to periodic inspections and tests according to the provisions of 6.2.1.6.3 and packing instruction P 203. Pressure receptacles shall not be filled after they become due for periodic inspection but may be carried after the expiry of the time-limit for purposes of performing inspection or disposal, including the intermediate carriage operations. 4.1.6.11 Repairs shall be consistent with the fabrication and testing requirements of the applicable design and construction standards and are only permitted as indicated in the relevant periodic inspection standards specified in C hapter 6.2. Pressure receptacles, other than the jacket of closed cryogenic receptacles, shall not be subjected to repairs of any of the following: (a) weld cracks or other weld defects; (b) cracks in walls; (c) leaks or defects in the material of the wall, head or bottom. 4.1.6.12 Pressure receptacles shall not be offered for filling: (a) when damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the pressure receptacle or its service equipment may be affected; (b) unless the pressure receptacle and its service equipment has been examined and found to be in good working order; and (c) unless the required certification, retest, and filling marks are legible. 4.1.6.13 Filled pressure receptacles shall not be offered for carriage : (a) when leaking; (b) when damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the pressure receptacle or its service equipment may be affected; (c) unless the pressure receptacle and its service equipment has been examined and found to be in good working order; and (d) unless the required certification, retest, and filling marks are legible. 4.1.6.14 Owners shall, on the basis of a reasoned request from the competent authority, provide it with all the information necessary to demonstrate the conformity of the pressure receptacle in a language easily understood by the competent authority. They shall cooperate with that authority, at its request, on any action taken to eliminate non-conformity of the pressure receptacles which they own. 4.1.6.15 For UN pressure receptacles, the ISO standards and EN ISO standards listed in Table 4.1.6.15.1, except EN ISO 14245 and EN ISO 15995, shall be applied. For information on which standard shall be used at the time of manufacturing the equipment, see 6.2.2.3. For other pressure receptacles, the requirements of section 4.1.6 are considered to have been complied with if the standards in Table 4.1.6.15.1, as relevant, are applied. For information on which standards shall be used for the manufacture of valves with inherent protection, see 6.2.4.1. For information on the applicability of standards for manufacturing valve protection caps and valve guards, see Table 4.1.6.15.2. Table 4.1.6.15.1: Standards for UN and non-UN pressure receptacles Applicable paragraphs Reference Document title 4.1.6.2 EN ISO 11114-1:2020 Gas cylinders – Compatibility of cylinder and valve materials with gas contents – Part 1: Metallic materials EN ISO 11114-2:2013 Gas cylinders – Compatibility of cylinder and valve materials with gas contents – Part 2: Non-metallic materials 4.1.6.4 ISO 11621:1997 or EN ISO 11621:2005 Gas cylinders – Procedures for change of gas service 4.1.6.8 Valves with inherent protection Clause 4.6.2 of EN ISO 10297:2006 or clause 5.5.2 of EN ISO 10297:2014 or clause 5.5.2 of EN ISO 10297:2014 + A1:2017 Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Specification and type testing Clause 5.3.8 of EN 13152:2001 + A1:2003 Testing and specifications of LPG cylinder valves – Self-closing Clause 5.3.7 of EN 13153:2001 + A1:2003 Specifications and testing of LPG cylinder valves – Manually operated Clause 5.9 EN ISO 14245:2010, clause 5 . 9 EN ISO 14245:2019 or clause 5 . 9 of EN ISO 14245:2021 Gas cylinders – Specifications and testing of LPG cylinder valves – Self-closing Clause 5.10 of EN ISO 15995:2010 , clause 5.9 of EN ISO 15995:2019 or clause 5.9 of EN ISO 15995:2021 Gas cylinders – Specifications and testing of LPG cylinder valves – Manually operated Clause 5.4.2 of EN ISO 17879:2017 Gas cylinders – Self-closing cylinder valves - Specification and type testing Clause 7.4 of EN 12205:2001 or clause 9.2.5 of EN ISO 11118:2015 or clause 9.2.5 of EN ISO 11118:2015 + A1:2020 Gas cylinders – Non-refillable metallic gas cylinders – Specification and test methods 4.1.6.8 (b) ISO 11117:1998 or EN ISO 11117:2008 + Cor 1:2009 or EN ISO 11117:2019 Gas cylinders – Valve protection caps and guards – Design, construction and tests EN 962:1996 + A2:2000 Transportable gas cylinders – Valve protection caps and valve guards for industrial and medical gas cylinders – Design, construction and tests 4.1.6.8 (c) Requirements for shrouds and permanent protection attachments used as valve protection under 4.1.6.8 (c) are given in the relevant pressure receptacle shell design standards (see 6.2.2.3 for UN pressure receptacles and 6.2.4.1 for non-UN pressure receptacles). 4.1.6.8 (b) and (c) ISO 16111:2008 or ISO 16111:2018 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed in reversible metal hydride Table 4.1.6.15.2: Manufacturing dates applicable to valve protection caps and guards fitted to non-UN pressure receptacles Reference Title of document Applicable for manufacture ISO 11117:1998 Gas cylinders – Valve protection caps and valve guards for industrial and medical gas cylinders – Design construction and tests Until 31 December 2014 EN ISO 11117:2008 + Cor 1:2009 Gas cylinders – Valve protection caps and valve guards – Design, construction and tests Until 31 December 20 2 4 EN ISO 11117:2019 Gas cylinders – Valve protection caps and guards – Design, construction and tests Until further notice EN 962:1996 + A2:2000 Transportable gas cylinders – Valve protection caps and valve guards for industrial and medical gas cylinders – Design, construction and tests Until 31 December 2014 4.1.7 Special packing provisions for organic peroxides of Class 5.2 and self-reactive substances of Class 4.1 4.1.7.0.1 For organic peroxides, all receptacles shall be "effectively closed". Where significant internal pressure may develop in a package by the evolution of a gas, a vent may be fitted, provided the gas emitted will not cause danger, otherwise the degree of filling shall be limited. Any venting device shall be so constructed that liquid will not escape when the package is in an upright position and it shall be able to prevent ingress of impurities. The outer packaging, if any, shall be so designed as not to interfere with the operation of the venting device. 4.1.7.1 Use of packagings (except IBCs) 4.1.7.1.1 Packagings for organic peroxides and self-reactive substances shall conform to the requirements of Chapter 6.1 and shall meet its test requirements for packing group II. 4.1.7.1.2 The packing methods for organic peroxides and self reactive substances are listed in packing instruction 520 and are designated OP1 to OP8. The quantities specified for each packing method are the maximum quantities authorized per package. 4.1.7.1.3 The packing methods appropriate for the individual currently assigned organic peroxides and self-reactive substances are listed in 2.2.41.4 and 2.2.52.4. 4.1.7.1.4 For new organic peroxides, new self-reactive substances or new formulations of currently assigned organic peroxides or self-reactive substances, the following procedure shall be used to assign the appropriate packing method: (a) ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE B or SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE, TYPE B: Packing method OP5 shall be assigned, provided that the organic peroxide (or self-reactive substance) satisfies the criteria of 20.4.3 (b) (resp. 20.4.2 (b)) of the Manual of Tests and Criteria in a packaging authorized by the packing method. If the organic peroxide (or self-reactive substance) can only satisfy these criteria in a smaller packaging than those authorized by packing method OP5 (viz. one of the packagings listed for OP1 to OP4), then the corresponding packing method with the lower OP number is assigned; (b) ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE C or SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE, TYPE C: Packing method OP6 shall be assigned, provided that the organic peroxide (or self-reactive substance) satisfies the criteria of 20.4.3 (c) (resp. 20.4.2 (c)) of the Manual of Tests and Criteria in a packaging authorized by the packing method. If the organic peroxide (or self-reactive substance) can only satisfy these criteria in a smaller packaging than those authorized by packing method OP6 then the corresponding packing method with the lower OP number is assigned; (c) ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE D or SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE, TYPE D: Packing method OP7 shall be assigned to this type of organic peroxide or self-reactive substance; (d) ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE E or SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE, TYPE E: Packing method OP8 shall be assigned to this type of organic peroxide or self-reactive substance; (e) ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE F or SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE, TYPE F: Packing method OP8 shall be assigned to this type of organic peroxide or self-reactive substance. 4.1.7.2 Use of intermediate bulk containers 4.1.7.2.1 The currently assigned organic peroxides specifically listed in packing instruction IBC520 may be carried in IBCs in accordance with this packing instruction. IBCs shall conform to the requirements of Chapter 6.5 and shall meet its test requirements for packing group II. 4.1.7.2.2 Other organic peroxides and self-reactive substances of type F may be carried in IBCs under conditions established by the competent authority of the country of origin when, on the basis of the appropriate tests, that competent authority is satisfied that such carriage may be safely conducted. The tests undertaken shall include those necessary: (a) To prove that the organic peroxide (or self-reactive substance) complies with the principles for classification given in 20.4.3 (f) [resp. 20.4.2 (f)] of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, exit box F of Figure 20.1 (b) of the Manual; (b) To prove the compatibility of all materials normally in contact with the substance during carriage; (c) (Reserved) (d) To design, when applicable, pressure and emergency relief devices; and (e) To determine if any special provisions are necessary for safe carriage of the substance. If the country of origin is not an RID Contracting State , the classification and transport conditions shall be recognized by the competent authority of the first RID Contracting State reached by the consignment. 4.1.7.2.3 Emergencies to be taken into account are self-accelerating decomposition and fire engulfment. To prevent explosive rupture of metal or composite IBCs with a complete metal casing, the emergency-relief devices shall be designed to vent all the decomposition products and vapours evolved during self-accelerating decomposition or during a period of not less than one hour of complete fire engulfment calculated by the equations given in 4.2.1.13.8. 4.1.8 Special packing provisions for infectious substances of Class 6.2 4.1.8.1 Consignors of infectious substances shall ensure that packages are prepared in such a manner that they arrive at their destination in good condition and present no hazard to persons or animals during carriage. 4.1.8.2 The definitions in 1.2.1 and the general requirements of 4.1.1.1 to 4.1.1.17 , except 4.1.1.10 to 4.1.1.12 and 4.1.1.15 apply to infectious substances packages. However, liquids shall only be filled into packagings which have an appropriate resistance to the internal pressure that may develop under normal conditions of carriage. 4.1.8.3 An itemized list of contents shall be enclosed between the secondary packaging and the outer packaging. When the infectious substances to be carried are unknown, but suspected of meeting the criteria for inclusion in Category A, the words "suspected Category A infectious substance" shall be shown, in parenthesis, following the proper shipping name on the document inside the outer packaging. 4.1.8.4 Before an empty packaging is returned to the consignor, or sent elsewhere, it shall be disinfected or sterilized to nullify any hazard and any label or mark indicating that it had contained an infectious substance shall be removed or obliterated. 4.1.8.5 Provided an equivalent level of performance is maintained, the following variations in the primary receptacles placed within a secondary packaging are allowed without the need for further testing of the completed packaging: (a) Primary receptacles of equivalent or smaller size as compared to the tested primary receptacles may be used provided: (i) the primary receptacles are of similar design to the primary receptacle tested (e.g. shape: round, rectangular, etc.); (ii) the material of construction of the primary receptacles (e.g. glass, plastics, metal) offers resistance to impact and stacking forces equivalent to or better than that of the primary receptacles originally tested; (iii) the primary receptacles have the same or smaller openings and the closure is of equivalent design (e.g. screw cap, friction lid, etc.); (iv) sufficient additional cushioning material is used to take up empty spaces and to prevent significant movement of the primary receptacles; and (v) primary receptacles are oriented within the secondary packagings in the same manner as in the tested package. (b) A lesser number of the tested primary receptacles, or of the alternative types of primary receptacles identified in (a) above, may be used provided sufficient cushioning is added to fill the void space(s) and to prevent significant movement of the primary receptacles. 4.1.8.6 Paragraphs 4.1.8.1 to 4.1.8.5 only apply to infectious substances of Category A (UN Nos. 2814 and 2900). They do not apply to UN No. 3373 BIOLOGICAL SUBSTANCE, CATEGORY B (see packing instruction P650 of 4.1.4.1), nor to UN No. 3291 CLINICAL WASTE, UNSPECIFIED, N.O.S. or (BIO) MEDICAL WASTE, N.O.S. or REGULATED MEDICAL WASTE, N.O.S. 4.1.8.7 For the carriage of animal material, packagings or IBCs not specifically authorized in the applicable packing instruction shall not be used for the carriage of a substance or article unless specifically approved by the competent authority of the country of origin 3 and provided: (a) The alternative packaging complies with the general requirements of this Part; (b) When the packing instruction indicated in column (8) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 so specifies, the alternative packaging meets the requirements of Part 6; (c) The competent authority of the country of origin determines that the alternative packaging provides at least the same level of safety as if the substance were packed in accordance with a method specified in the particular packing instruction indicated in column (8) of Table A of Chapter 3.2; and (d) A copy of the competent authority approval accompanies each consignment or the transport document includes an indication that alternative packaging was approved by the competent authority. 4.1.9 Special packing provisions for radioactive material 4.1.9.1 General 4.1.9.1.1 Radioactive material, packagings and packages shall meet the requirements of Chapter 6.4. The quantity of radioactive material in a package shall not exceed the limits specified in 2.2.7.2.2, 2.2.7.2.4.1, 2.2.7.2.4.4, 2.2.7.2.4.5, 2.2.7.2.4.6, special provision 336 of Chapter 3.3 and 4.1.9.3 . The types of packages for radioactive materials covered by RID, are: (a) Excepted package (see 1.7.1.5); (b) Industrial package Type 1 (Type IP-1 package); (c) Industrial package Type 2 (Type IP-2 package); (d) Industrial package Type 3 (Type IP-3 package); (e) Type A package; (f) Type B(U) package; (g) Type B(M) package; (h) Type C package. Packages containing fissile material or uranium hexafluoride are subject to additional requirements. 4.1.9.1.2 The non fixed contamination on the external surfaces of any package shall be kept as low as practicable and, under routine conditions of transport, shall not exceed the following limits: (a) 4 Bq/cm 2 for beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters; and (b) 0.4 Bq/cm 2 for all other alpha emitters. These limits are applicable when averaged over any area of 300 cm 2 of any part of the surface. 4.1.9.1.3 A package shall not contain any items other than those that are necessary for the use of the radioactive material. The interaction between these items and the package under the conditions of carriage applicable to the design, shall not reduce the safety of the package. 4.1.9.1.4 Except as provided in 7.5.11, CW 33, the level of non fixed contamination on the external and internal surfaces of overpacks, containers and wagons shall not exceed the limits specified in 4.1.9.1.2. This requirement does not apply to the internal surfaces of containers being used as packagings, either loaded or empty. 4.1.9.1.5 For radioactive material having other dangerous properties the package design shall take into account those properties. Radioactive material with a subsidiary hazard , packaged in packages that do not require competent authority approval, shall be carried in packagings, IBCs, tanks or bulk containers fully complying with the requirements of the relevant chapters of Part 6 as appropriate, as well as applicable requirements of chapters 4.1, 4.2 or 4.3 for that subsidiary hazard . 4.1.9.1.6 Before a packaging is first used to carry radioactive material, it shall be confirmed that it has been manufactured in conformity with the design specifications to ensure compliance with the relevant provisions of RID and any applicable certificate of approval. The following requirements shall also be fulfilled, if applicable: (a) If the design pressure of the containment system exceeds 35 kPa (gauge), it shall be ensured that the containment system of each packaging conforms to the approved design requirements relating to the capability of that system to maintain its integrity under that pressure; (b) For each packaging intended for use as a Type B(U), Type B(M) or Type C package and for each packaging intended to contain fissile material , it shall be ensured that the effectiveness of its shielding and containment and, where necessary, the heat transfer characteristics and the effectiveness of the confinement system, are within the limits applicable to or specified for the approved design; (c) For each packaging intended to contain fissile material, it shall be ensured that the effectiveness of the criticality safety features is within the limits applicable to or specified for the design and in particular where, in order to comply with the requirements of 6.4.11.1 neutron poisons are specifically included, checks shall be performed to confirm the presence and distribution of those neutron poisons. 4.1.9.1.7 Before each shipment of any package, it shall be ensured that the package contains neither: ( a) Radionuclides different from those specified for the package design; nor (b) Contents in a form, or physical or chemical state different from those specified for the package design. 4.1.9.1.8 Before each shipment of any package, it shall be ensured that all the requirements specified in the relevant provisions of RID and in the applicable certificates of approval have been fulfilled. The following requirements shall also be fulfilled, if applicable: (a) It shall be ensured that lifting attachments which do not meet the requirements of 6.4.2.2 have been removed or otherwise rendered incapable of being used for lifting the package, in accordance with 6.4.2.3; (b) Each Type B(U), Type B(M) and Type C package shall be held until equilibrium conditions have been approached closely enough to demonstrate compliance with the requirements for temperature and pressure unless an exemption from these requirements has received unilateral approval; (c) For each Type B(U), Type B(M) and Type C package, it shall be ensured by inspection and/or appropriate tests that all closures, valves and other openings of the containment system through which the radioactive contents might escape are properly closed and, where appropriate, sealed in the manner for which the demonstrations of compliance with the requirements of 6.4.8.8 and 6.4.10.3 were made; (d) For packages containing fissile material the measurement specified in 6.4.11.5 (b) and the tests to demonstrate closure of each package as specified in 6.4.11.8 shall be performed; (e) For packages intended to be used for shipment after storage, it shall be ensured that all packaging components and radioactive contents have been maintained during storage in a manner such that all the requirements specified in the relevant provisions of RID and in the applicable certificates of approval have been fulfilled. 4.1.9.1.9 The consignor shall also have a copy of any instructions with regard to the proper closing of the package and any preparation for shipment before making any shipment under the terms of the certificates. 4.1.9.1.10 Except for consignments under exclusive use, the transport index of any package or overpack shall not exceed 10, nor shall the criticality safety index of any package or overpack exceed 50. 4.1.9.1.11 Except for packages or overpacks carried under exclusive use under the conditions specified in 7.5.11, CW 33 (3.5) (a), the maximum dose rate at any point on any external surface of a package or overpack shall not exceed 2 mSv/h. 4.1.9.1.12 The maximum dose rate at any point on any external surface of a package or overpack under exclusive use shall not exceed 10 mSv/h. 4.1.9.2 Requirements and controls for carriage of LSA material and SCO 4.1.9.2.1 The quantity of LSA material or SCO in a single Type IP-1 package, Type IP-2 package, Type IP-3 package, or object or collection of objects, whichever is appropriate, shall be so restricted that the external dose rate at 3 m from the unshielded material or object or collection of objects does not exceed 10 mSv/h. 4.1.9.2.2 For LSA material and SCO which are or contain fissile material, which is not excepted under 2.2.7.2.3.5, the applicable requirements of 7.5.11, CW 33 (4.1) and (4.2) shall be met. 4.1.9.2.3 For LSA material and SCO which are or contain fissile material, the applicable requirements of 6.4.11.1 shall be met. 4.1.9.2.4 LSA material and SCO in groups LSA I, SCO I and SCO-III may be carried unpackaged under the following conditions: (a) All unpackaged material other than ores containing only naturally occurring radionuclides shall be carried in such a manner that under routine conditions of carriage there will be no escape of the radioactive contents from the wagon nor will there be any loss of shielding; (b) Each wagon shall be under exclusive use, except when only carrying SCO I on which the contamination on the accessible and the inaccessible surfaces is not greater than ten times the corresponding level according to the definition of "contamination" in 2.2.7.1.2; (c) For SCO I where it is suspected that non fixed contamination exists on inaccessible surfaces in excess of the values specified in 2.2.7.2.3.2 (a) (i), measures shall be taken to ensure that the radioactive material is not released into the wagon ; (d) Unpackaged fissile material shall meet the requirements of 2.2.7.2.3.5 (e) ; and (e) For SCO-III: (i) Carriage shall be under exclusive use; (ii) Stacking shall not be permitted; (iii) All activities associated with the shipment, including radiation protection, emergency response and any special precautions or special administrative or operational controls that are to be employed during carriage shall be described in a transport plan. The transport plan shall demonstrate that the overall level of safety in carriage is at least equivalent to that which would be provided if the requirements of 6.4.7.14 (only for the test specified in 6.4.15.6, preceded by the tests specified in 6.4.15.2 and 6.4.15.3) had been met; (iv) The requirements of 6.4.5.1 and 6.4.5.2 for a Type IP-2 package shall be satisfied, except that the maximum damage referred to in 6.4.15.4 may be determined based on provisions in the transport plan, and the requirements of 6.4.15.5 are not applicable; (v) The object and any shielding are secured to the conveyance in accordance with 6.4.2.1; (vi) The shipment shall be subject to multilateral approval. 4.1.9.2.5 LSA material and SCO, except as otherwise specified in 4.1.9.2.4, shall be packaged in accordance with the table below: Table 4.1.9.2.5: Industrial package requirements for LSA material and SCO Radioactive contents Industrial package type Exclusive use Not under exclusive use LSA-I Solid (a) Liquid Type IP-1 Type IP-1 Type IP-1 Type IP-2 LSA-II Solid Liquid and gas Type IP-2 Type IP-2 Type IP-2 Type IP-3 LSA-III Type IP-2 Type IP-3 SCO-I (a) Type IP-1 Type IP-1 SCO-II Type IP-2 Type IP-2 (a) Under the conditions specified in 4.1.9.2.4, LSA-I material and SCO-I may be carried unpackaged. 4.1.9.3 Packages containing fissile material The contents of packages containing fissile material shall be as specified for the package design either directly in RID or in the certificate of approval. 4.1.10 Special provisions for mixed packing 4.1.10.1 When mixed packing is permitted in accordance with the provisions of this section, different dangerous goods or dangerous goods and other goods may be packed together in combination packagings conforming to 6.1.4.21, provided that they do not react dangerously with one another and that all other relevant provisions of this Chapter are complied with. NOTE 1: See also 4.1.1.5 and 4.1.1.6. 2: For radioactive material , see 4.1.9. 4.1.10.2 Except for packages containing Class 1 goods only or Class 7 goods only, if wooden or fibreboard boxes are used as outer packagings, a package containing different goods packed together shall not weigh more than 100 kg. 4.1.10.3 Unless otherwise prescribed by a special provision applicable according to 4.1.10.4, dangerous goods of the same class and the same classification code may be packed together. 4.1.10.4 When indicated for a given entry in Column (9b) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, the following special provisions shall apply to the mixed packing of the goods assigned to that entry with other goods in the same package. MP 1 May only be packed together with goods of the same type within the same compatibility group. MP 2 Shall not be packed together with other goods. MP 3 Mixed packing of UN No. 1873 with UN No. 1802 is permitted. MP 4 Shall not be packed together with goods of other classes or with goods which are not subject to the requirements of RID . However, if this organic peroxide is a hardener or compound system for Class 3 substances, mixed packing is permitted with these substances of Class 3. MP 5 UN No. 2814 and UN No. 2900 may be packed together in a combination packaging in conformity with packing instruction P 620. They shall not be packed together with other goods; this does not apply to UN No. 3373 Biological substance, Category B packed in accordance with packing instruction P 650 or to substances added as coolants, e.g. ice, dry ice or refrigerated liquid nitrogen. MP 6 Shall not be packed together with other goods. This does not apply to substances added as coolants, e.g. ice, dry ice or refrigerated liquid nitrogen. MP 7 May – in quantities not exceeding 5 litres per inner packaging – be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21: – with goods of the same class covered by other classification codes when mixed packing is also permitted for these; or – with goods which are not subject to the requirements of RID, provided they do not react dangerously with one another. MP 8 May – in quantities not exceeding 3 litres per inner packaging – be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21: – with goods of the same class covered by other classification codes when mixed packing is also permitted for these; or – with goods which are not subject to the requirements of RID, provided they do not react dangerously with one another. MP 9 May be packed together in an outer packaging for combination packagings in accordance with 6.1.4.21: – with other goods of Class 2; – with goods of other classes, when the mixed packing is also permitted for these; or – with goods which are not subject to the requirements of RID, provided they do not react dangerously with one another. MP 10 May – in quantities not exceeding 5 kg per inner packaging – be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21: – with goods of the same class covered by other classification codes or with goods of other classes, when mixed packing is also permitted for these; or – with goods which are not subject to the requirements of RID, provided they do not react dangerously with one another. MP 11 May – in quantities not exceeding 5 kg per inner packaging – be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21: – with goods of the same class covered by other classification codes or with goods of other classes (except substances of packing group I or II of Class 5.1) when mixed packing is also permitted for these; or – with goods which are not subject to the requirements of RID, provided they do not react dangerously with one another. MP 12 May – in quantities not exceeding 5 kg per inner packaging – be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21: – with goods of the same class covered by other classification codes or with goods of other classes (except substances of packing group I or II of Class 5.1) when mixed packing is also permitted for these; or – with goods which are not subject to the requirements of RID, provided they do not react dangerously with one another. Packages shall not weigh more than 45 kg. If fibreboard boxes are used as outer packagings however, a package shall not weigh more than 27 kg. MP 13 May – in quantities not exceeding 3 kg per inner packaging and per package – be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21: – with goods of the same class covered by other classification codes or with goods of other classes, when mixed packing is also permitted for these; or – with goods which are not subject to the requirements of RID, provided they do not react dangerously with one another. MP 14 May – in quantities not exceeding 6 kg per inner packaging – be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21: – with goods of the same class covered by other classification codes or with goods of other classes, when mixed packing is also permitted for these; or – with goods which are not subject to the requirements of RID, provided they do not react dangerously with one another. MP 15 May – in quantities not exceeding 3 litres per inner packaging – be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21: – with goods of the same class covered by other classification codes or with goods of other classes, when mixed packing is also permitted for these; or – with goods which are not subject to the requirements of RID, provided they do not react dangerously with one another. MP 16 (Reserved) MP 17 May – in quantities not exceeding 0.5 litre per inner packaging and 1 litre per package – be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21: – with goods of other classes, except Class 7, when mixed packing is also permitted for these; or – with goods which are not subject to the requirements of RID, provided they do not react dangerously with one another. MP 18 May – in quantities not exceeding 0.5 kg per inner packaging and 1 kg per package – be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21: – with goods of other classes, except Class 7, when mixed packing is also permitted for these; or – with goods which are not subject to the requirements of RID, provided they do not react dangerously with one another. MP 19 May – in quantities not exceeding 5 litres per inner packaging – be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21: – with goods of the same class covered by other classification codes or with goods of other classes, when mixed packing is also permitted for these; or – with goods which are not subject to the requirements of RID, provided they do not react dangerously with one another. MP 20 May be packed together with substances covered by the same UN number. Shall not be packed together with goods of Class 1 having different UN numbers , except if provided for by special provision MP 24. Shall not be packed together with goods of other classes or with goods which are not subject to the requirements of RID. MP 21 May be packed together with articles covered by the same UN number. Shall not be packed together with goods of Class 1 having different UN numbers, except for (a) their own means of initiation, provided that (i) the means of initiation will not function under normal conditions of carriage; or (ii) such means have at least two effective protective features which prevent explosion of an article in the event of accidental functioning of the means of initiation; or (iii) when such means do not have two effective protective features (i.e. means of initiation assigned to compatibility group B), in the opinion of the competent authority of the country of origin the accidental functioning of the means of initiation does not cause the explosion of an article under normal conditions of carriage; (b) articles of compatibility groups C, D and E. Shall not be packed together with goods of other classes or with goods which are not subject to the requirements of RID. When goods are packed together in accordance with this special provision, account shall be taken of a possible amendment of the classification of packages in accordance with 2.2.1.1. For the description of the goods in the transport document , see 5.4.1.2.1 (b). MP 22 May be packed together with articles covered by the same UN number. Shall not be packed together with goods of Class 1 having different UN numbers, except (a) With their own means of initiation, provided that the means of initiation will not function under normal conditions of carriage; or (b) With articles of compatibility groups C, D and E; or (c) If provided for by special provision MP 24. Shall not be packed together with goods of other classes or with goods which are not subject to the requirements of RID . When goods are packed together in accordance with this special provision, account shall be taken of a possible amendment of the classification of packages in accordance with 2.2.1.1. For the description of the goods in the transport document , see 5.4.1.2.1 (b). MP 23 May be packed together with articles covered by the same UN number. Shall not be packed together with goods of Class 1 having different UN numbers, except (a) With their own means of initiation, provided that the means of initiation will not function under normal conditions of carriage; or (b) If provided for by special provision MP 24. Shall not be packed together with goods of other classes or with goods which are not subject to the requirements of RID . When goods are packed together in accordance with this special provision, account shall be taken of a possible amendment of the classification of packages in accordance with 2.2.1.1. For the description of the goods in the transport document , see 5.4.1.2.1 (b). MP 24 May be packed together with goods with the UN numbers shown in the table below, under the following conditions: – if a letter A is indicated in the table, the goods with those UN numbers may be included in the same package without any special limitation of mass; – if a letter B is indicated in the table, the goods with those UN numbers may be included in the same package up to a total mass of 50 kg of explosive substances. When goods are packed together in accordance with this special provision, account shall be taken of a possible amendment of the classification of packages in accordance with 2.2.1.1. For the description of the goods in the transport document , see 5.4.1.2.1 (b). UN No. 0012 0014 0027 0028 0044 0054 0160 0161 0186 0191 0194 0195 0197 0238 0240 0312 0333 0334 0335 0336 0337 0373 0405 0428 0429 0430 0431 0432 0505 0506 0507 0509 0012 A 0014 A 0027 B B B B B 0028 B B B B B 0044 B B B B B 0054 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 0160 B B B B B 0161 B B B B B 0186 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 0191 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 0194 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 0195 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 0197 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 0238 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 0240 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 0312 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 0333 A A A A 0334 A A A A 0335 A A A A 0336 A A A A 0337 A A A A 0373 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 0405 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 0428 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 0429 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 0430 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 0431 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 0432 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 0505 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 0506 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 0507 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 0509 B B B B B Chapter 4.2 Use of portable tanks and UN multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) NOTE 1: For tank-wagons , demountable tanks , tank-containers and tank swap bodies, with shells made of metallic materials, and battery- wagons and multiple element gas containers (MEGCs), see Chapter 4.3; for vacuum-operated waste tanks, see Chapter 4.5. 2: Portable tanks and UN MEGCs marked in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 6.7, but which were approved in a State that is not an RID Contracting State , may nevertheless be used for carriage under RID. 4.2.1 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for the carriage of substances of Classes 1 and 3 to 9 4.2.1.1 This section provides general provisions applicable to the use of portable tanks for the carriage of substances of Classes 1, 3, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 6.2, 7, 8 and 9. In addition to these general provisions, portable tanks shall conform to the design, construction, inspection and testing requirements detailed in 6.7.2. Substances shall be carried in portable tanks conforming to the applicable portable tank instruction identified in Column (10) of the Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.2.6 (T1 to T23) and the portable tank special provisions assigned to each substance in Column (11) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.3. 4.2.1.2 During carriage, portable tanks shall be adequately protected against damage to the shell and service equipment resulting from lateral and longitudinal impact and overturning. If the shell and service equipment are so constructed as to withstand impact or overturning it need not be protected in this way. Examples of such protection are given in 6.7.2.17.5. 4.2.1.3 Certain substances are chemically unstable. They are accepted for carriage only when the necessary steps have been taken to prevent their dangerous decomposition, transformation or polymerization during carriage. To this end, care shall in particular be taken to ensure that shells do not contain any substances liable to promote these reactions. 4.2.1.4 The temperature of the outer surface of the shell excluding openings and their closures or of the thermal insulation shall not exceed 70 °C during carriage. When necessary, the shell shall be thermally insulated. 4.2.1.5 Empty portable tanks not cleaned and not gas free shall comply with the same provisions as portable tanks filled with the previous substance. 4.2.1.6 Substances shall not be carried in the same or in adjoining compartments of shells when they may react dangerously with each other (see definition for "dangerous reaction" in 1.2.1). 4.2.1.7 The design approval certificate, the test report and the certificate showing the results of the initial inspection and test for each portable tank issued by the competent authority or its authorized body shall be retained by the authority or body and the owner. Owners shall be able to provide this documentation upon the request of any competent authority. 4.2.1.8 Unless the name of the substance(s) being carried appears on the metal plate described in 6.7.2.20.2 a copy of the certificate specified in 6.7.2.18.1 shall be made available upon the request of a competent authority or its authorized body and readily provided by the consignor, consignee or agent, as appropriate. 4.2.1.9 Degree of filling 4.2.1.9.1 Prior to filling, the filler shall ensure that the appropriate portable tank is used and that the portable tank is not filled with substances which in contact with the materials of the shell, gaskets, service equipment and any protective linings, are likely to react dangerously with them to form dangerous products or appreciably weaken these materials. The consignor may need to consult the manufacturer of the substance in conjunction with the competent authority for guidance on the compatibility of the substance with the portable tank materials. 4.2.1.9.1.1 Portable tanks shall not be filled above the extent provided in 4.2.1.9.2 to 4.2.1.9.6. The applicability of 4.2.1.9.2, 4.2.1.9.3 or 4.2.1.9.5.1 to individual substances is specified in the applicable portable tank instruction or special provisions in 4.2.5.2.6 or 4.2.5.3 and Column (10) or (11) of Table A of Chapter 3.2. 4.2.1.9.2 The maximum degree of filling (in %) for general use is determined by the formula: Degree of filling . 4.2.1.9.3 The maximum degree of filling (in %) for liquids of Class 6.1 and Class 8, in packing groups I and II, and liquids with an absolute vapour pressure of more than 175 kPa (1.75 bar) at 65 °C, is determined by the formula: Degree of filling . 4.2.1.9.4 In these formulae, is the mean coefficient of cubical expansion of the liquid between the mean temperature of the liquid during filling (t f ) and the maximum mean bulk temperature during carriage (t r ) (both in °C). For liquids carried under ambient conditions could be calculated by the formula: in which d 15 and d 50 are the densities of the liquid at 15 °C and 50 °C, respectively. 4.2.1.9.4.1 The maximum mean bulk temperature (t r ) shall be taken as 50 °C except that, for journeys under temperate or extreme climatic conditions, the competent authorities concerned may agree to a lower or require a higher temperature, as appropriate. 4.2.1.9.5 The provisions of 4.2.1.9.2 to 4.2.1.9.4.1 do not apply to portable tanks which contain substances maintained at a temperature above 50 °C during carriage (e.g. by means of a heating device). For portable tanks equipped with a heating device, a temperature regulator shall be used to ensure the maximum degree of filling is not more than 95% full at any time during carriage. 4.2.1.9.5.1 The maximum degree of filling (in %) for solids carried above their melting points and for elevated temperature liquids shall be determined by the following formula: Degree of filling in which d f and d r are the densities of the liquid at the mean temperature of the liquid during filling and the maximum mean bulk temperature during carriage respectively. 4.2.1.9.6 Portable tanks shall not be offered for carriage: (a) With a degree of filling, for liquids having a viscosity less than 2 680 mm 2 /s at 20 °C or maximum temperature of the substance during carriage in the case of the heated substance, of more than 20% but less than 80% unless the shells of portable tanks are divided, by partitions or surge plates, into sections of not more than 7 500 litres capacity; (b) With residue of substances previously carried adhering to the outside of the shell or service equipment; (c) When leaking or damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the portable tank or its lifting or securing arrangements may be affected; and (d) Unless the service equipment has been examined and found to be in good working order. 4.2.1.9.7 Forklift pockets of portable tanks shall be closed off when the tank is filled. This provision does not apply to portable tanks which according to 6.7.2.17.4 need not be provided with a means of closing off the forklift pockets. 4.2.1.10 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of Class 3 substances in portable tanks 4.2.1.10.1 All portable tanks intended for the carriage of flammable liquids shall be closed and be fitted with relief devices in accordance with 6.7.2.8 to 6.7.2.15. 4.2.1.10.1.1 For portable tanks intended for use only on land, open venting systems may be used if allowed according to Chapter 4.3. 4.2.1.11 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of Classes 4.1, 4.2 or 4.3 substances (other than Class 4.1 self-reactive substances) in portable tanks (Reserved) NOTE: For Class 4.1 self-reactive substances, see 4.2.1.13.1. 4.2.1.12 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of Class 5.1 substances in portable tanks (Reserved) 4.2.1.13 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of Class 5.2 substances and Class 4.1 self-reactive substances in portable tanks 4.2.1.13.1 Each substance shall have been tested and a report submitted to the competent authority of the country of origin for approval. Notification thereof shall be sent to the competent authority of the country of destination. The notification shall contain relevant transport information and the report with test results. The tests undertaken shall include those necessary: (a) To prove the compatibility of all materials normally in contact with the substance during carriage; (b) To provide data for the design of the pressure and emergency relief devices taking into account the design characteristics of the portable tank. Any additional provision necessary for safe carriage of the substance shall be clearly described in the report. 4.2.1.13.2 The following provisions apply to portable tanks intended for the carriage of Type F organic peroxides or Type F self-reactive substances with a Self-Accelerating Decomposition Temperature (SADT) of 55 °C or more. In case of conflict these provisions prevail over those specified in Section 6.7.2. Emergencies to be taken into account are self accelerating decomposition of the substance and fire engulfment as described in 4.2.1.13.8. 4.2.1.13.3 The additional provisions for carriage of organic peroxides or self-reactive substances with a SADT less than 55 °C in portable tanks shall be specified by the competent authority of the country of origin. Notification thereof shall be sent to the competent authority of the country of destination. 4.2.1.13.4 The portable tank shall be designed for a test pressure of at least 0.4 MPa (4 bar). 4.2.1.13.5 Portable tanks shall be fitted with temperature sensing devices. 4.2.1.13.6 Portable tanks shall be fitted with pressure relief devices and emergency relief devices. Vacuum relief devices may also be used. Pressure relief devices shall operate at pressures determined according to both the properties of the substance and the construction characteristics of the portable tank. Fusible elements are not allowed in the shell. 4.2.1.13.7 The pressure relief devices shall consist of spring loaded valves fitted to prevent significant build up within the portable tank of the decomposition products and vapours released at a temperature of 50 °C. The capacity and start to discharge pressure of the relief valves shall be based on the results of the tests specified in 4.2.1.13.1. The start to discharge pressure shall, however, in no case be such that liquid would escape from the valve(s) if the portable tank were overturned. 4.2.1.13.8 The emergency-relief devices may be of the spring-loaded or frangible types, or a combination of the two, designed to vent all the decomposition products and vapours evolved during a period of not less than one hour of complete fire-engulfment as calculated by the following formula: q = 70961·F·A 0,82 where: q = heat absorption [W] A = wetted area [m 2 ] F = insulation factor F = 1 for non-insulated shells, or for isulated shells where: K = heat conductivity of insulation layer [W · m -1 · K -1 ] L = thickness of insulation layer [m] U = K/L = heat transfer coefficient of the insulation [W · m -2 · K -1 ] T = temperature of the substance at relieving conditions [K] The start to discharge pressure of the emergency relief device(s) shall be higher than that specified in 4.2.1.13.7 and based on the results of the tests referred to in 4.2.1.13.1. The emergency relief devices shall be dimensioned in such a way that the maximum pressure in the portable tank never exceeds the test pressure of the tank. NOTE: An example of a method to determine the size of emergency-relief devices is given in Appendix 5 of the "Manual of Tests and Criteria". 4.2.1.13.9 For insulated portable tanks the capacity and setting of emergency relief device(s) shall be determined assuming a loss of insulation from 1% of the surface area. 4.2.1.13.10 Vacuum relief devices and spring loaded valves shall be provided with flame arresters. Due attention shall be paid to the reduction of the relief capacity caused by the flame arrester. 4.2.1.13.11 Service equipment such as valves and external piping shall be so arranged that no substance remains in them after filling the portable tank. 4.2.1.13.12 Portable tanks may be either insulated or protected by a sun shield. If the SADT of the substance in the portable tank is 55 °C or less, or the portable tank is constructed of aluminium, the portable tank shall be completely insulated. The outer surface shall be finished in white or bright metal. 4.2.1.13.13 The degree of filling shall not exceed 90% at 15 C. 4.2.1.13.14 The mark as required in 6.7.2.20.2 shall include the UN number and the technical name with the approved concentration of the substance concerned. 4.2.1.13.15 Organic peroxides and self-reactive substances specifically listed in portable tank instruction T23 in 4.2.5.2.6 may be carried in portable tanks. 4.2.1.14 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of Class 6.1 substances in portable tanks (Reserved) 4.2.1.15 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of Class 6.2 substances in portable tanks (Reserved) 4.2.1.16 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of Class 7 substances in portable tanks 4.2.1.16.1 Portable tanks used for the carriage of radioactive material shall not be used for the carriage of other goods. 4.2.1.16.2 The degree of filling for portable tanks shall not exceed 90% or, alternatively, any other value approved by the competent authority. 4.2.1.17 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of Class 8 substances in portable tanks 4.2.1.17.1 Pressure relief devices of portable tanks used for the carriage of Class 8 substances shall be inspected at intervals not exceeding one year. 4.2.1.18 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of Class 9 substances in portable tanks (Reserved) 4.2.1.19 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of solid substances carried above their melting point 4.2.1.19.1 Solid substances carried or offered for carriage above their melting point which are not assigned a portable tank instruction in column (10) of the Table A of Chapter 3.2 or when the assigned portable tank instruction does not apply to carriage at temperatures above their melting point may be carried in portable tanks provided that the solid substances are classified in classes 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 6.1, 8 or 9 and have no subsidiary hazard other than that of Class 6.1 or Class 8 and are in packing group II or III. 4.2.1.19.2 Unless otherwise indicated in Table A of Chapter 3.2, portable tanks used for the carriage of these solid substances above their melting point shall conform to the provisions of portable tank instruction T4 for solid substances of packing group III or T7 for solid substances of packing group II. A portable tank which affords an equivalent or greater level of safety may be selected according to 4.2.5.2.5. The maximum degree of filling (in %) shall be determined according to 4.2.1.9.5 (TP3). 4.2.2 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for the carriage of non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure 4.2.2.1 This section provides general provisions applicable to the use of portable tanks for the carriage of non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure. 4.2.2.2 Portable tanks shall conform to the design, construction, inspection and testing requirements detailed in 6.7.3. Non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure shall be carried in portable tanks conforming to portable tank instruction T50 as described in 4.2.5.2.6 and any portable tank special provisions assigned to specific non-refrigerated liquefied gases in Column (11) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.3. 4.2.2.3 During carriage, portable tanks shall be adequately protected against damage to the shell and service equipment resulting from lateral and longitudinal impact and overturning. If the shell and service equipment are so constructed as to withstand impact or overturning it need not be protected in this way. Examples of such protection are given in 6.7.3.13.5. 4.2.2.4 Certain non-refrigerated liquefied gases are chemically unstable. They are accepted for carriage only when the necessary steps have been taken to prevent their dangerous decomposition, transformation or polymerization during carriage. To this end, care shall in particular be taken to ensure that portable tanks do not contain any non-refrigerated liquefied gases liable to promote these reactions. 4.2.2.5 Unless the name of the gas(es) being carried appears on the metal plate described in 6.7.3.16.2, a copy of the certificate specified in 6.7.3.14.1 shall be made available upon a competent authority request and readily provided by the consignor, consignee or agent, as appropriate. 4.2.2.6 Empty portable tanks not cleaned and not gas-free shall comply with the same provisions as portable tanks filled with the previous non-refrigerated liquefied gas. 4.2.2.7 Filling 4.2.2.7.1 Prior to filling the portable tank shall be inspected to ensure that it is authorized for the non-refrigerated liquefied gas or the propellant of the chemical under pressure to be carried and that the portable tank is not loaded with non-refrigerated liquefied gases, or with chemicals under pressure which in contact with the materials of the shell, gaskets, service equipment and any protective linings, are likely to react dangerously with them to form dangerous products or appreciably weaken these materials. During filling, the temperature of the non-refrigerated liquefied gas or propellant of chemicals under pressure shall fall within the limits of the design temperature range. 4.2.2.7.2 The maximum mass of non-refrigerated liquefied gas per litre of shell capacity (kg/l) shall not exceed the density of the non-refrigerated liquefied gas at 50 °C multiplied by 0.95. Furthermore, the shell shall not be liquid-full at 60 °C. 4.2.2.7.3 Portable tanks shall not be filled above their maximum permissible gross mass and the maximum permissible load mass specified for each gas to be carried. 4.2.2.8 Portable tanks shall not be offered for carriage: (a) In an ullage condition liable to produce an unacceptable hydraulic force due to surge within the shell; (b) When leaking; (c) When damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the tank or its lifting or securing arrangements may be affected; and (d) Unless the service equipment has been examined and found to be in good working order. 4.2.2.9 Forklift pockets of portable tanks shall be closed off when the tank is filled. This provision does not apply to portable tanks which according to 6.7.3.13.4 need not be provided with a means of closing off the forklift pockets. 4.2.3 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases 4.2.3.1 This section provides general provisions applicable to the use of portable tanks for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases. 4.2.3.2 Portable tanks shall conform to the design, construction, inspection and testing requirements detailed in 6.7.4. Refrigerated liquefied gases shall be carried in portable tanks conforming to portable tank instruction T75 as described in 4.2.5.2.6 and the portable tank special provisions assigned to each substance in Column (11) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.3. 4.2.3.3 During carriage, portable tanks shall be adequately protected against damage to the shell and service equipment resulting from lateral and longitudinal impact and overturning. If the shell and service equipment are so constructed as to withstand impact or overturning it need not be protected in this way. Examples of such protection are provided in 6.7.4.12.5. 4.2.3.4 Unless the name of the gas(es) being carried appears on the metal plate described in 6.7.4.15.2, a copy of the certificate specified in 6.7.4.13.1 shall be made available upon a competent authority request and readily provided by the consignor, consignee or agent, as appropriate. 4.2.3.5 Empty portable tanks not cleaned and not gas free shall comply with the same provisions as portable tanks filled with the previous substance. 4.2.3.6 Filling 4.2.3.6.1 Prior to filling the portable tank shall be inspected to ensure that it is authorized for the refrigerated liquefied gas to be carried and that the portable tank is not loaded with refrigerated liquefied gases which in contact with the materials of the shell, gaskets, service equipment and any protective linings, are likely to react dangerously with them to form dangerous products or appreciably weaken these materials. During filling, the temperature of the refrigerated liquefied gas shall be within the limits of the design temperature range. 4.2.3.6.2 In estimating the initial degree of filling the necessary holding time for the intended journey including any delays which might be encountered shall be taken into consideration. The initial degree of filling of the shell, except as provided for in 4.2.3.6.3 and 4.2.3.6.4, shall be such that if the contents, except helium, were to be raised to a temperature at which the vapour pressure is equal to the maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) the volume occupied by liquid would not exceed 98%. 4.2.3.6.3 Shells intended for the carriage of helium can be filled up to but not above the inlet of the pressure relief device. 4.2.3.6.4 A higher initial degree of filling may be allowed, subject to approval by the competent authority, when the intended duration of carriage is considerably shorter than the holding time. 4.2.3.7 Actual holding time 4.2.3.7.1 The actual holding time shall be calculated for each journey in accordance with a procedure recognized by the competent authority, on the basis of the following: (a) The reference holding time for the refrigerated liquefied gas to be carried (see 6.7.4.2.8.1) (as indicated on the plate referred to in 6.7.4.15.1); (b) The actual filling density; (c) The actual filling pressure; (d) The lowest set pressure of the pressure limiting device(s). 4.2.3.7.2 The actual holding time shall be marked either on the portable tank itself or on a metal plate firmly secured to the portable tank, in accordance with 6.7.4.15.2. 4.2.3.7.3 The date at which the actual holding time ends shall be entered in the transport document (see 5.4.1.2.2 (d)). 4.2.3.8 Portable tanks shall not be offered for carriage: (a) In an ullage condition liable to produce an unacceptable hydraulic force due to surge within the shell; (b) When leaking; (c) When damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the portable tank or its lifting or securing arrangements may be affected; (d) Unless the service equipment has been examined and found to be in good working order; (e) Unless the actual holding time for the refrigerated liquefied gas being carried has been determined in accordance with 4.2.3.7 and the portable tank is marked in accordance with 6.7.4.15.2; and (f) Unless the duration of carriage, after taking into consideration any delays which might be encountered, does not exceed the actual holding time. 4.2.3.9 Forklift pockets of portable tanks shall be closed off when the tank is filled. This provision does not apply to portable tanks which according to 6.7.4.12.4, need not be provided with a means of closing off the forklift pockets. 4.2.4 General provisions for the use of UN multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) 4.2.4.1 This section provides general requirements applicable to the use of multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) for the carriage of non-refrigerated gases referred to in 6.7.5. 4.2.4.2 MEGCs shall conform to the design, construction, inspection and testing requirements detailed in 6.7.5. The elements of MEGCs shall be periodically inspected according to the provisions set out in packing instruction P200 of 4.1.4.1 and in 6.2.1.6 . 4.2.4.3 During carriage, MEGCs shall be protected against damage to the elements and service equipment resulting from lateral and longitudinal impact and overturning. If the elements and service equipment are so constructed as to withstand impact or overturning, they need not be protected in this way. Examples of such protection are given in 6.7.5.10.4. 4.2.4.4 The periodic testing and inspection requirements for MEGCs are specified in 6.7.5.12. MEGCs or their elements shall not be charged or filled after they become due for periodic inspection but may be carried after the expiry of the time limit. 4.2.4.5 Filling 4.2.4.5.1 Prior to filling, the MEGC shall be inspected to ensure that it is authorized for the gas to be carried and that the applicable provisions of RID have been met. 4.2.4.5.2 Elements of MEGCs shall be filled according to the working pressures, filling ratios and filling provisions specified in packing instruction P200 of 4.1.4.1 for the specific gas being filled into each element. In no case shall an MEGC or group of elements be filled as a unit in excess of the lowest working pressure of any given element. 4.2.4.5.3 MEGCs shall not be filled above their maximum permissible gross mass. 4.2.4.5.4 Isolation valves shall be closed after filling and remain closed during carriage. Toxic gases (gases of groups T, TF, TC, TO, TFC and TOC) shall only be carried in MEGCs where each element is equipped with an isolation valve. 4.2.4.5.5 The opening(s) for filling shall be closed by caps or plugs. The leakproofness of the closures and equipment shall be verified by the filler after filling. 4.2.4.5.6 MEGCs shall not be offered for filling: (a) when damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the pressure receptacles or its structural or service equipment may be affected; (b) unless the pressure receptacles and its structural and service equipment has been examined and found to be in good working order; and (c) unless the required certification, retest, and filling marks are legible. 4.2.4.6 Charged MEGCs shall not be offered for carriage; (a) when leaking; (b) when damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the pressure receptacles or its structural or service equipment may be affected; (c) unless the pressure receptacles and its structural and service equipment have been examined and found to be in good working order; and (d) unless the required certification, retest, and filling marks are legible. 4.2.4.7 Empty MEGCs that have not been cleaned and purged shall comply with the same requirements as MEGCs filled with the previous substance. 4.2.5 Portable tank instructions and special provisions 4.2.5.1 General 4.2.5.1.1 This section includes the portable tank instructions and special provisions applicable to dangerous goods authorized to be carried in portable tanks. Each portable tank instruction is identified by an alpha-numeric code (e.g. T1). Column (10) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 indicates the portable tank instruction that shall be used for each substance permitted for carriage in a portable tank. When no portable tank instruction appears in Column (10) for a specific dangerous goods entry then carriage of the substance in portable tanks is not permitted unless a competent authority approval is granted as detailed in 6.7.1.3. Portable tank special provisions are assigned to specific dangerous goods in Column (11) of Table A of Chapter 3.2. Each portable tank special provision is identified by an alpha-numeric code (e.g. TP1). A listing of the portable tank special provisions is provided in 4.2.5.3. NOTE: The gases authorized for carriage in MEGCs are indicated with the letter "(M)" in Column (10) of Table A of Chapter 3.2. 4.2.5.2 Portable tank instructions 4.2.5.2.1 Portable tank instructions apply to dangerous goods of Classes 1 to 9. Portable tank instructions provide specific information relevant to portable tanks provisions applicable to specific substances. These provisions shall be met in addition to the general provisions in this Chapter and the general requirements in Chapter 6.7 or Chapter 6.9 . 4.2.5.2.2 For substances of Classes 1 and 3 to 9, the portable tank instructions indicate the applicable minimum test pressure, the minimum shell thickness, bottom opening requirements and pressure relief requirements. In portable tank instruction T23, self-reactive substances of Class 4.1 and Class 5.2 organic peroxides permitted to be carried in portable tanks are listed. 4.2.5.2.3 Non-refrigerated liquefied gases are assigned to portable tank instruction T50. T50 provides the maximum allowable working pressures, the requirements for the openings below liquid level, pressure-relief requirements and maximum filling density requirements for non-refrigerated liquefied gases permitted for carriage in portable tanks. 4.2.5.2.4 Refrigerated liquefied gases are assigned to portable tank instruction T75. 4.2.5.2.5 Determination of the appropriate portable tank instructions When a specific portable tank instruction is specified in Column (10) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 for a specific dangerous goods entry additional portable tanks which possess higher minimum test pressures, greater shell thicknesses, more stringent bottom opening and pressure-relief device arrangements may be used. The following guidelines apply to determining the appropriate portable tanks which may be used for carriage of particular substances: Portable tank instruction specified Portable tank instructions also permitted T 1 T 2, T 3, T 4, T 5, T 6, T 7, T 8, T 9, T 10, T 11, T 12, T 13, T 14, T 15, T 16, T 17, T 18, T 19, T 20, T 21, T 22 T 2 T 4, T 5, T 7, T 8, T 9, T 10, T 11, T 12, T 13, T 14, T 15, T 16, T 17, T 18, T 19, T 20, T 21, T 22 T 3 T 4, T 5, T 6, T 7, T 8, T 9, T 10, T 11, T 12, T 13, T 14, T 15, T 16, T 17, T 18, T 19, T 20, T 21, T 22 T 4 T 5, T 7, T 8, T 9, T 10, T 11, T 12, T 13, T 14, T 15, T 16, T 17, T 18, T 19, T 20, T 21, T 22 T 5 T 10, T 14, T 19, T 20, T 22 T 6 T 7, T 8, T 9, T 10, T 11, T 12, T 13, T 14, T 15, T 16, T 17, T 18, T 19, T 20, T 21, T 22 T 7 T 8, T 9, T 10, T 11, T 12, T 13, T 14, T 15, T 16, T 17, T 18, T 19, T 20, T 21, T 22 T 8 T 9, T 10, T 13, T 14, T 19, T 20, T 21, T 22 T 9 T 10, T 13, T 14, T 19, T 20, T 21, T 22 T 10 T 14, T 19, T 20, T 22 T 11 T 12, T 13, T 14, T 15, T 16, T 17, T 18, T 19, T 20, T 21, T 22 T 12 T 14, T 16, T 18, T 19, T 20, T 22 T 13 T 14, T 19, T 20, T 21, T 22 T 14 T 19, T 20, T 22 T 15 T 16, T 17, T 18, T 19, T 20, T 21, T 22 T 16 T 18, T 19, T 20, T 22 T 17 T 18, T 19, T 20, T 21, T 22 T 18 T 19, T 20, T 22 T 19 T 20, T 22 T 20 T 22 T 21 T 22 T 22 None T 23 None 4.2.5.2.6 Portable tank instructions Portable tank instructions specify the requirements applicable to a portable tank when used for the carriage of specific substances. Portable tank instructions T1 to T22 specify the applicable minimum test pressure, the minimum shell thickness in mm reference steel for shells made of metallic materials or the minimum FRP shell thickness , and the pressure-relief and bottom-opening requirements. T 1 – T 22 Portable tank instructions T 1 – T 22 These portable tank instructions apply to liquid and solid substances of Class 1 and Classes 3 to 9. The general provisions of Section 4.2.1 and the requirements of Section 6.7.2 shall be met. The instructions for portable tanks with FRP shells apply to substances of classes 1, 3, 5.1, 6.1, 6.2, 8 and 9. Additionally, the requirements of Chapter 6.9 apply. Portable tank instruction Minimum test pressure (bar) Minimum shell thickness (in mm-reference steel for shells made of metallic materials ) (see 6.7.2.4) Pressure-relief requirements (see 6.7.2.8) (a) Bottom opening requirements (see 6.7.2.6) (b) T 1 1,5 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.2 T 2 1,5 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.3 T 3 2,65 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.2 T 4 2,65 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.3 T 5 2,65 See 6.7.2.4.2 See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed T 6 4 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.2 T 7 4 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.3 T 8 4 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal Not allowed T 9 4 6 mm Normal Not allowed T 10 4 6 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed T 11 6 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.3 T 12 6 See 6.7.2.4.2 See 6.7.2.8.3 See 6.7.2.6.3 T 13 6 6 mm Normal Not allowed T 14 6 6 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed T 15 10 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.3 T 16 10 See 6.7.2.4.2 See 6.7.2.8.3 See 6.7.2.6.3 T 17 10 6 mm Normal See 6.7.2.6.3 T 18 10 6 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 See 6.7.2.6.3 T 19 10 6 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed T 20 10 8 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed T 21 10 10 mm Normal Not allowed T 22 10 10 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed (a) When the word "Normal" is indicated, all the requirements of 6.7.2.8 apply except for 6.7.2.8.3. (b) When this column indicates "Not allowed", bottom openings are not permitted when the substance to be carried is a liquid (see 6.7.2.6.1). When the substance to be carried is a solid at all temperatures encountered under normal conditions of carriage, bottom openings conforming to the requirements of 6.7.2.6.2 are authorized. T 23 Portable tank instructions T 23 This portable tank instruction applies to self-reactive substances of Class 4.1 and organic peroxides of Class 5.2. The general provisions of Section 4.2.1 and the requirements of Section 6.7.2 shall be met. The additional provisions specific to self-reactive substances of Class 4.1 and organic peroxides of Class 5.2 in 4.2.1.13 shall also be met. The formulations not listed in 2.2.41.4 or in 2.2.52.4 but listed below may also be carried packed in accordance with packing method OP8 of packing instruction P 520 of 4.1.4.1. UN No. Substance Minimum test pressure (bar) Minimum shell thickness (mm-reference steel) Bottom opening requirements Pressure- relief requirements Degree of filling 3109 ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE F, LIQUID 4 See 6.7.2.4.2 See 6.7.2.6.3 See 6.7.2.8.2, 4.2.1.13.6, 4.2.1.13.7, 4.2.1.13.8 See 4.2.1.13.13 tert Butyl hydroperoxide (a) , not more than 72% with water tert-Butyl hydroperoxide, not more than 56% in diluent type B (b) Cumyl hydroperoxide, not more than 90% in diluent type A Di-tert-butyl peroxide, not more than 32% in diluent type A Isopropyl cumyl hydroperoxide, not more than 72% in diluent type A p Menthyl hydroperoxide, not more than 72% in diluent type A Pinanyl hydroperoxide, not more than 56% in diluent type A 3110 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, SOLID 4 See 6.7.2.4.2 See 6.7.2.6.3 See 6.7.2.8.2, 4.2.1.13.6, 4.2.1.13.7, 4.2.1.13.8 See 4.2.1.13.13 Dicumyl peroxide (c) 3229 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID TYPE F 4 See 6.7.2.4.2 See 6.7.2.6.3 See 6.7.2.8.2, 4.2.1.13.6, 4.2.1.13.7, 4.2.1.13.8 See 4.2.1.13.13 3230 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID TYPE F 4 See 6.7.2.4.2 See 6.7.2.6.3 See 6.7.2.8.2, 4.2.1.13.6, 4.2.1.13.7, 4.2.1.13.8 See 4.2.1.13.13 (a) Provided that steps have been taken to achieve the safety equivalence of 65% tert-Butyl hydroperoxide and 35% water. (b) Diluent type B is tert-Butyl alcohol. (c) Maximum quantity per portable tank: 2000 kg. T 50 Portable tank instructions T 50 This portable tank instruction applies to non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure (UN Nos. 3500, 3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505). The general provisions of Section 4.2.2 and the requirements of Section 6.7.3 shall be met. UN No. Non-refrigerated liquefied gases Max. allowable working pressure (bar) Small; Bare; Sunshield; Insulated (a) Openings below liquid level Pressure- relief requirements (see 6.7.3.7) (b) Maximum filling ratio 1005 Ammonia, anhydrous 29,0 25,7 22,0 19,7 Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 0,53 1009 Bromotrifluoromethane (Refrigerant gas R 13B1) 38,0 34,0 30,0 27,5 Allowed Normal 1,13 1010 Butadienes, stabilized 7,5 7,0 7,0 7,0 Allowed Normal 0,55 1010 Butadienes and hydrocarbon mixture, stabilized See MAWP definition in 6.7.3.1 Allowed Normal see 4.2.2.7 1011 Butan 7,0 7,0 7,0 7,0 Allowed Normal 0,51 1012 Butylene 8,0 7,0 7,0 7,0 Allowed Normal 0,53 1017 Chlorine 19,0 17,0 15,0 13,5 Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1,25 1018 Chlorodifluoromethane (Refrigerant gas R 22) 26,0 24,0 21,0 19,0 Allowed Normal 1,03 1020 Chloropentafluoroethane (Refrigerant gas R 115) 23,0 20,0 18,0 16,0 Allowed Normal 1,06 1021 1 Chloro 1,2,2,2 tetra-fluoroethane (Refrigerant gas R 124) 10,3 9,8 7,9 7,0 Allowed Normal 1,20 1027 CyclopropanE 18,0 16,0 14,5 13,0 Allowed Normal 0,53 1028 Dichlorodifluoromethane (Refrigerant gas R 12) 16,0 15,0 13,0 11,5 Allowed Normal 1,15 1029 Dichlorofluoromethane (Refrigerant gas R 21) 7,0 7,0 7,0 7,0 Allowed Normal 1,23 1030 1,1-Difluoroethane (Refrigerant gas R 152a) 16,0 14,0 12,4 11,0 Allowed Normal 0,79 1032 Dimethylamine, anhydrous 7,0 7,0 7,0 7,0 Allowed Normal 0,59 1033 Dimethyl ether 15,5 13,8 12,0 10,6 Allowed Normal 0,58 1036 EthylaminE 7,0 7,0 7,0 7,0 Allowed Normal 0,61 1037 Ethyl chloridE 7,0 7,0 7,0 7,0 Allowed Normal 0,8 1040 Ethylene oxide with nitrogen up to a total pressure of 1MPa (10 bar) at 50 °C – – – 10,0 Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 0,78 1041 Ethylene oxide and carbon dioxide mixture with more than 9% but not more than 87% ethylene oxide See MAWP definition in 6.7.3.1 Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7 1055 Isobutylene 8,1 7,0 7,0 7,0 Allowed Normal 0,52 1060 Methyllacetylene and propadiene mixture, stabilized 28,0 24,5 22,0 20,0 Allowed Normal 0,43 1061 Methylamine, anhydrous 10,8 9,6 7,8 7,0 Allowed Normal 0,58 1062 Methyl bromide with not more than 2% chloropicrin 7,0 7,0 7,0 7,0 Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1,51 1063 Methyl chloride (Refrigerant gas R 40) 14,5 12,7 11,3 10,0 Allowed Normal 0,81 1064 Methyl mercaptan 7,0 7,0 7,0 7,0 Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 0,78 1067 Dinitrogen tetroxide 7,0 7,0 7,0 7,0 Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1,30 1075 Petroleum gases, liquefied See MAWP definition in 6.7.3.1 Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7 1077 Propylene 28,0 24,5 22,0 20,0 Allowed Normal 0,43 1078 Refrigerant gas, n.o.s. See MAWP definition in 6.7.3.1 Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7 1079 Sulphur dioxide 11,6 10,3 8,5 7,6 Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1,23 1082 Trifluorochloroethylene, stabilized (Refrigerant gas R 1113) 17,0 15,0 13,1 11,6 Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1,13 1083 Trimethylamine, anhydrous 7,0 7,0 7,0 7,0 Allowed Normal 0,56 1085 Vinyl bromide, stabilized 7,0 7,0 7,0 7,0 Allowed Normal 1,37 1086 Vinyl chloride, stabilized 10,6 9,3 8,0 7,0 Allowed Normal 0,81 1087 Vinyl methyl ether, stabilized 7,0 7,0 7,0 7,0 Allowed Normal 0,67 1581 Chloropicrin and methyl bromide mixture with more than 2% chloropicrin 7,0 7,0 7,0 7,0 Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1,51 1582 Chloropicrin and methyl chloride mixture 19,2 16,9 15,1 13,1 Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 0,81 1858 Hexafluoropropylene (Refrigerant gas R 1216) 19,2 16,9 15,1 13,1 Allowed Normal 1,11 1912 Methyl chloride and methylene chloride mixture 15,2 13,0 11,6 10,1 Allowed Normal 0,81 1958 1,2-Dichloro-1,1,2,2-tetrafluoroethane (Refrigerant gas R 114) 7,0 7,0 7,0 7,0 Allowed Normal 1,30 1965 Hydrocarbon gas, mixture liquefied, n.o.s. See MAWP definition in 6.7.3.1 Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7 1969 IsobutanE 8,5 7,5 7,0 7,0 Allowed Normal 0,49 1973 Chlorodifluoromethane and chloropentafluoroethane mixture with fixed boiling point, with approximately 49% chlorodifluoromethane ( Refrigerant gas R 502 ) 28,3 25,3 22,8 20,3 Allowed Normal 1,05 1974 Chlorodifluorobromomethane (Refrigerant gas R 12B1) 7,4 7,0 7,0 7,0 Allowed Normal 1,61 1976 Octafluorocyclobutane (Refrigerant gas RC 318) 8,8 7,8 7,0 7,0 Allowed Normal 1,34 1978 PropanE 22,5 20,4 18,0 16,5 Allowed Normal 0,42 1983 1-Chloro-2,2,2-trifluoroethane (Refrigerant gas R 133a) 7,0 7,0 7,0 7,0 Allowed Normal 1,18 2035 1,1,1-Trifluoroethane (Refrigerant gas R 143a) 31,0 27,5 24,2 21,8 Allowed Normal 0,76 2424 Octafluoropropane (Refrigerant gas R 218) 23,1 20,8 18,6 16,6 Allowed Normal 1,07 2517 1-Chloro-1,1-difluoroethane (Refrigerant gas R 142b) 8,9 7,8 7,0 7,0 Allowed Normal 0,99 2602 Dichlorodifluoromethane and 1,1-difluoroethane azeotropic mixture with approximately 74% dichlorodifluoromethane ( Refrigerant gas R 500 ) 20,0 18,0 16,0 14,5 Allowed Normal 1,01 3057 Trifluoroacetyl chloride 14,6 12,9 11,3 9,9 Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1,17 3070 Ethylene oxide and dichlorodifluoromethane mixture with not more than 12.5% ethylene oxide 14,0 12,0 11,0 9,0 Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1,09 3153 Perfluoro (methyl vinyl ether) 14,3 13,4 11,2 10,2 Allowed Normal 1,14 3159 1,1,1,2 Tetrafluoroethane (Refrigerant gas R 134a) 17,7 15,7 13,8 12,1 Allowed Normal 1,04 3161 Liquefied gas, flammable, n.o.s. See MAWP definition in 6.7.3.1 Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7 3163 Liquefied gas, n.o.s. See MAWP definition in 6.7.3.1 Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7 3220 Pentafluoroethane (Refrigerant gas R 125) 34,4 30,8 27,5 24,5 Allowed Normal 0.87 3252 DIFLUOROMETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 32) 43,0 39,0 34,4 30,5 Allowed Normal 0,78 3296 HEPTAFLUOROPROPANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 227) 16,0 14,0 12,5 11,0 Allowed Normal 1,20 3297 Ethylene oxide and chlorotetrafluoroethane mixture , with not more than 8.8% ethylene oxide 8,1 7,0 7,0 7,0 Allowed Normal 1,16 3298 Ethylene oxide and pentafluoroethane mixture , with not more than 7.9% ethylene oxide 25,9 23,4 20,9 18,6 Allowed Normal 1,02 3299 Ethylene oxide and tetrafluoroethane mixture , with not more than 5.6% ethylene oxide 16,7 14,7 12,9 11,2 Allowed Normal 1,03 3318 Ammonia solution , relative density less than 0.880 at 15 °C in water, with more than 50% ammonia See MAWP definition in 6.7.3.1 Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 See 4.2.2.7 3337 REFRIGERANT GAS R 404A 31,6 28,3 25,3 22,5 Allowed Normal 0,84 3338 REFRIGERANT GAS R 407A 31,3 28,1 25,1 22,4 Allowed Normal 0,95 3339 REFRIGERANT GAS R 407B 33,0 29,6 26,5 23,6 Allowed Normal 0,95 3340 REFRIGERANT GAS R 407C 29,9 26,8 23,9 21,3 Allowed Normal 0,95 3500 Chemical under pressure, n.o.s. See MAWP definition in 6.7.3.1 Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP 4 (c) 3501 Chemical under pressure, flammable, n.o.s. See MAWP definition in 6.7.3.1 Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP 4 (c) 3502 Chemical under pressure, toxic, n.o.s. See MAWP definition in 6.7.3.1 Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP 4 (c) 3503 Chemical under pressure, corrosive, n.o.s. See MAWP definition in 6.7.3.1 Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP 4 (c) 3504 Chemical under pressure, flammable, toxic, n.o.s. See MAWP definition in 6.7.3.1 Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP 4 (c) 3505 Chemical under pressure, flammable, corrosive, n.o.s. See MAWP definition in 6.7.3.1 Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP 4 (c) (a) "Small" means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1.5 m or less; "Bare" means tanks having a shell with a diameter of more than 1.5 m without insulation or sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); "Sunshield" means tanks having a shell with a diameter of more than 1.5 m with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); "Insulated" means tanks having a shell with a diameter of more than 1.5 m with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12); (see definition of "Design reference temperature" in 6.7.3.1). (b) The word "Normal" in the pressure relief requirements column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in 6.7.3.7.3 is not required. (c) For UN Nos. 3500, 3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505, the degree of filling shall be considered instead of the maximum filling ratio. T 75 Portable tank instruction T 75 This portable tank instruction applies to refrigerated liquefied gases. The general provisions of Section 4.2.3 and the requirements of Section 6.7.4 shall be met. 4.2.5.3 Portable tank special provisions Portable tank special provisions are assigned to certain substances to indicate provisions which are in addition to or in lieu of those provided by the portable tank instructions or the requirements in Chapter 6.7. Portable tank special provisions are identified by an alpha numeric code beginning with the letters "TP" (tank provision) and are assigned to specific substances in Column (11) of Table A of Chapter 3.2. The following is a list of the portable tank special provisions: TP 1 The degree of filling prescribed in 4.2.1.9.2 shall not be exceeded. TP 2 The degree of filling prescribed in 4.2.1.9.3 shall not be exceeded. TP 3 The maximum degree of filling (in %) for solids carried above their melting point and for elevated temperature liquids shall be determined in accordance with 4.2.1.9.5. TP 4 The degree of filling shall not exceed 90% or, alternatively, any other value approved by the competent authority (see 4.2.1.16.2). TP 5 The degree of filling prescribed in 4.2.3.6 shall be met. TP 6 To prevent the tank bursting in any event, including fire engulfment, it shall be provided with pressure-relief devices which are adequate in relation to the capacity of the tank and to the nature of the substance carried. The device shall also be compatible with the substance. TP 7 Air shall be eliminated from the vapour space by nitrogen or other means. TP 8 The test pressure may be reduced to 1.5 bar when the flash point of the substances carried is greater than 0 °C. TP 9 A substance under this description shall only be carried in a portable tank under an approval granted by the competent authority. TP 10 A lead lining, not less than 5 mm thick, which shall be tested annually, or another suitable lining material approved by the competent authority is required. A portable tank may be offered for carriage after the date of expiry of the last lining inspection for a period not to exceed three months beyond that date, after emptying but before cleaning, for purposes of performing the next required test or inspection prior to refilling. TP 11 (Reserved) TP 12 (Deleted) TP 13 (Reserved) TP 14 (Reserved) TP 15 (Reserved) TP 16 The tank shall be fitted with a special device to prevent under pressure and excess pressure during normal carriage conditions. This device shall be approved by the competent authority. Pressure relief requirements are as indicated in 6.7.2.8.3 to prevent crystallization of the product in the pressure relief valve. TP 17 Only inorganic non combustible materials shall be used for thermal insulation of the tank. TP 18 Temperature shall be maintained between 18 °C and 40 °C. Portable tanks containing solidified methacrylic acid shall not be reheated during carriage. TP 19 At the time of construction, the minimum shell thickness determined according to 6.7.3.4 shall be increased by 3 mm as a corrosion allowance. Shell thickness shall be verified ultrasonically at intervals midway between periodic hydraulic tests and shall never be lower than the minimum shell thickness determined according to 6.7.3.4. TP 20 This substance shall only be carried in insulated tanks under a nitrogen blanket. TP 21 The shell thickness shall be not less than 8 mm. Tanks shall be hydraulically tested and internally inspected at intervals not exceeding 2.5 years. TP 22 Lubricant for joints or other devices shall be oxygen compatible. TP 23 (Deleted) TP 24 The portable tank may be fitted with a device located under maximum filling conditions in the vapour space of the shell to prevent the build up of excess pressure due to the slow decomposition of the substance carried. This device shall also prevent an unacceptable amount of leakage of liquid in the case of overturning or entry of foreign matter into the tank. This device shall be approved by the competent authority or its authorized body. TP 25 (Reserved) TP 26 When carried under heated conditions, the heating device shall be fitted outside the shell. For UN 3176 this requirement only applies when the substance reacts dangerously with water. TP 27 A portable tank having a minimum test pressure of 4 bar may be used if it is shown that a test pressure of 4 bar or less is acceptable according to the test pressure definition in 6.7.2.1. TP 28 A portable tank having a minimum test pressure of 2.65 bar may be used if it is shown that a test pressure of 2.65 bar or less is acceptable according to the test pressure definition in 6.7.2.1. TP 29 A portable tank having a minimum test pressure of 1.5 bar may be used if it is shown that a test pressure of 1.5 bar or less is acceptable according to the test pressure definition in 6.7.2.1. TP 30 This substance shall be carried in insulated tanks. TP 31 This substance may only be carried in tanks in the solid state. TP 32 For UN Nos. 0331, 0332 and 3375, portable tanks may be used subject to the following conditions: (a) To avoid unnecessary confinement, each portable tank constructed of metal or fibre-reinforced plastics shall be fitted with a pressure-relief device that may be of the reclosing spring - loaded type, a frangible disc or a fusible element. The set to discharge or burst pressure, as applicable, shall not be greater than 2.65 bar for portable tanks with minimum test pressures greater than 4 bar. (b) For UN 3375 only, the suitability for carriage in tanks shall be demonstrated. One method to evaluate this suitability is test 8 (d) in Test Series 8 (see Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part 1, Sub-section 18.7). (c) Substances shall not be allowed to remain in the portable tank for any period that could result in caking. Appropriate measures shall be taken to avoid accumulation and packing of substances in the tank (e.g. cleaning, etc.). TP 33 The portable tank instruction assigned for this substance applies to granular and powdered solids and to solids which are filled and discharged at temperatures above their melting point which are cooled and carried as a solid mass. For solids which are carried above their melting point , see 4.2.1.19. TP 34 Portable tanks need not be subjected to the impact test in 6.7.4.14.1 if the portable tank is marked "NOT FOR RAIL TRANSPORT" on the plate specified in 6.7.4.15.1 and also in letters of at least 10 cm high on both sides of the outer jacket. TP 35 (Deleted) TP 36 Fusible elements in the vapour space may be used on portable tanks. TP 37 (Deleted) TP 38 (Deleted) TP 39 (Deleted) TP 40 Portable tanks shall not be carried when connected with spray application equipment. TP 41 With the agreement of the competent authority, the 2.5 year internal examination may be waived or substituted by other test methods or inspection procedures, provided that the portable tank is dedicated to the carriage of the organometallic substances to which this tank special provision is assigned. However this examination is required when the conditions of 6.7.2.19.7 are met. Chapter 4.3 Use of tank-wagons, demountable tanks, tank-containers and tank swap bodies with shells made of metallic materials, and battery-wagons and multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) NOTE: For portable tanks and UN multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) see Chapter 4.2; for vacuum-operated waste tanks, see Chapter 4.5. 4.3.1 Scope 4.3.1.1 Provisions which take up the whole width of the page apply both to tank-wagons, demountable tanks and battery-wagons, and to tank-containers, tank swap bodies and MEGCs. Provisions contained in a single column apply only to: – tank-wagons , demountable tanks and battery- wagons (left-hand column); – tank-containers, tank swap bodies and MEGCs (right-hand column). 4.3.1.2 These provisions apply to tank-wagons , demountable tanks and battery- wagons tank-containers, tank swap bodies and MEGCs used for the carriage of gaseous, liquid, powdery or granular substances. 4.3.1.3 Section 4.3.2 lists the provisions applicable to tank-wagons , demountable tanks, tank-containers and tank swap bodies, intended for the carriage of substances of all classes, and to battery- wagons and MEGCs intended for the carriage of gases of Class 2. Sections 4.3.3 and 4.3.4 contain special provisions adding to or amending the provisions of Section 4.3.2. 4.3.1.4 For requirements concerning the construction, equipment, type approval, inspections and tests and marking, see Chapter 6.8. 4.3.1.5 For transitional measures concerning the application of this Chapter, see: 1.6.3. 1.6.4. 4.3.2 Provisions applicable to all classes 4.3.2.1 Use 4.3.2.1.1 A substance subject to RID may be carried in tank-wagons , demountable tanks, battery- wagons, tank-containers, tank swap bodies and MEGCs only when provision is made for a tank code according to 4.3.3.1.1 and 4.3.4.1.1 in Column (12) of Table A in Chapter 3.2. 4.3.2.1.2 The required type of tank, battery- wagon and MEGC is given in code form in Column (12) of Table A in Chapter 3.2. The identification codes appearing there are made up of letters or numbers in a given order. The explanations for reading the four parts of the code are given in 4.3.3.1.1 (when the substance to be carried belongs to Class 2) and in 4.3.4.1.1 (when the substance to be carried belongs to Classes 3 to 9) . 4.3.2.1.3 The required type according to 4.3.2.1.2 corresponds to the least stringent construction requirements which are acceptable for the dangerous substance in question unless otherwise prescribed in this Chapter or in Chapter 6.8. It is possible to use tanks corresponding to codes prescribing a higher minimum calculation pressure, or more stringent requirements for filling or discharge openings or for safety valves/devices (see 4.3.3.1.1 for Class 2 and 4.3.4.1.1 for Classes 3 to 9). 4.3.2.1.4 For certain substances, tanks, battery-wagons or MEGCs are subject to additional provisions which are included as special provisions in Column (13) of Table A in Chapter 3.2. 4.3.2.1.5 Tanks, battery-wagons and MEGCs shall not be loaded with any dangerous substances other than those for the carriage of which they have been approved according to 6.8.2.3.2 and which, in contact with the materials of the shell, gaskets, equipment and protective linings, are not liable to react dangerously with them (see "dangerous reaction" in 1.2.1), to form dangerous products or appreciably to weaken these materials . 4.3.2.1.6 Foodstuffs shall not be carried in tanks used for dangerous substances unless the necessary steps have been taken to prevent any harm to public health. 4.3.2.1.7 The tank record shall be retained by the owner or operator, who shall be able to provide this documentation at the request of the competent authority, and who shall ensure that it is available to the entity in charge of maintenance (ECM). The tank record, including the relevant information concerning the activities of the ECM, The tank record shall be maintained throughout the life of the tank and retained for 15 months after the tank is taken out of service. Should a change of owner or operator occur during the life of the tank, the tank record shall be transferred without delay to the new owner or operator. Copies of the tank record or all necessary documents shall be made available to the inspection body for tests and inspections on tanks in accordance with 6.8.2.4.5 or 6.8.3.4. 18 , on the occasion of periodic or exceptional inspections . 4.3.2.2 Degree of filling 4.3.2.2.1 The following degrees of filling shall not be exceeded in tanks intended for the carriage of liquids at ambient temperatures: (a) for flammable substances, environmentally hazardous substances and flammable environmentally hazardous substances, without additional hazards (e.g. toxicity or corrosivity), in tanks with a breather device or with safety valves (even where preceded by a bursting disc): Degree of filling = % of capacity; (b) for toxic or corrosive substances (whether flammable or environmentally hazardous or not) in tanks with a breather device or with safety valves (even where preceded by a bursting disc): Degree of filling = % of capacity; (c) for flammable substances, environmentally hazardous substances and slightly toxic or corrosive substances (whether flammable or environmentally hazardous or not) in hermetically closed tanks without a safety device: Degree of filling = % of capacity; (d) for highly toxic, toxic, highly corrosive or corrosive substances (whether flammable or environmentally hazardous or not) in hermetically closed tanks without a safety device: Degree of filling = % of capacity. 4.3.2.2.2 In these formulae, is the mean coefficient of cubical expansion of the liquid between 15 °C and 50 °C, i.e. for a maximum variation in temperature of 35 °C. a is calculated by the formula: a = where d 15 and d 50 are the relative densities of the liquid at 15 °C and 50 °C respectively and t F is the mean temperature of the liquid during filling. 4.3.2.2.3 The provisions of 4.3.2.2.1 (a) to (d) above shall not apply to tanks whose contents are, by means of a heating device, maintained at a temperature above 50 °C during carriage. In this case the degree of filling at the outset shall be such, and the temperature so regulated, that the tank is not full to more than 95% of its capacity and that the filling temperature is not exceeded, at any time during carriage. 4.3.2.2.4 (Reserved) Shells intended for the carriage of substances in the liquid state or liquefied gases or refrigerated liquefied gases, which are not divided by partitions or surge plates into sections of not more than 7 500 litres capacity, shall be filled to not less than 80% or not more than 20% of their capacity. This provision is not applicable to: – liquids with a kinematic viscosity at 20 °C of at least 2 680 mm 2 /s; – molten substances with a kinematic viscosity at the temperature of filling of at least 2 680 mm 2 /s; – UN 1963 HELIUM, REFRIGERATED, LIQUID and UN 1966 HYDROGEN, REFRIGERATED, LIQUID. 4.3.2.3 Operation 4.3.2.3.1 The thickness of the walls of the shell shall not, throughout its use, fall below the minimum figure prescribed in: 6.8.2.1.17 and 6.8.2.1.18 6.8.2.1.17 to 6.8.2.1.20 4.3.2.3.2 (Reserved) During carriage tank-containers/MEGCs shall be loaded on the carrying wagon in such a way as to be adequately protected by the fittings of the carrying wagon or of the tank-container/MEGC itself against lateral and longitudinal impact and against overturning . If the tank-containers/MEGCs, including the service equipment, are so constructed as to withstand impact or overturning they need not be protected in this way. 4.3.2.3.3 During filling and discharge of tanks, battery- wagons and MEGCs, appropriate measures shall be taken to prevent the release of dangerous quantities of gases and vapours. Tanks, battery-wagons and MEGCs shall be closed so that the contents cannot spill out uncontrolled. The openings of bottom-discharge tanks shall be closed by means of screw-threaded plugs, blank flanges or other equally effective devices. After filling, the filler shall ensure that all the closures of the tanks, battery-wagons and MEGCs are in the closed position and there is no leakage. This also applies to the upper part of the dip tube. 4.3.2.3.4 Where several closure systems are fitted in series, that nearest to the substance being carried shall be closed first. 4.3.2.3.5 No dangerous residue of the filling substance shall adhere to the outside of the tank during carriage. 4.3.2.3.6 Substances which may react dangerously with each other shall not be carried in adjoining compartments of tanks. Substances which may react dangerously with each other may be carried in adjoining compartments of tanks, when these compartments are separated by a partition with a wall thickness equal to or greater than that of the tank itself. They may also be carried separated by an empty space or an empty compartment between loaded compartments. 4.3.2.3.7 Tank-wagons, demountable tanks, battery-wagons, tank-containers, tank swap bodies and MEGCs may not be filled or offered for carriage after the date specified for the inspection required by 6.8.2.4.2, 6.8.2.4.3, 6.8.3.4.6 and 6.8.3.4.12 has expired. However, tank-wagons, demountable tanks, battery-wagons, tank-containers, tank swap bodies and MEGCs filled prior to the date specified for the next inspection may be carried: (a) for a period not to exceed one month after the date specified if the inspection due is a periodic inspection in accordance with 6.8.2.4.2, 6.8.3.4.6 (a) and 6.8.3.4.12 ; (b) unless otherwise approved by the competent authority, for a period not to exceed three months after the expiry of the date specified, if the inspection due is a periodic inspection in accordance with 6.8.2.4.2, 6.8.3.4.6 (a) and 6.8.3.4.12 in order to allow the return of dangerous goods for proper disposal or recycling. Reference to this exemption shall be mentioned in the transport document; (c) for a period not to exceed three months after the date specified, if the inspection due is an intermediate inspection in accordance with 6.8.2.4.3, 6.8.3.4.6 (b) and 6.8.3.4.12. 4.3.2.4 Empty tanks, battery-wagons and MEGCs, uncleaned NOTE: For empty tanks, battery-wagons and MEGCs, uncleaned, special provisions TU 1, TU 2, TU 4, TU 16 and TU 35 of 4.3.5 may apply. 4.3.2.4.1 No dangerous residue of the filling substance shall adhere to the outside of the tank during carriage. 4.3.2.4.2 To be accepted for carriage, empty tanks, battery-wagons and MEGCs, uncleaned, shall be closed in the same manner and be leakproof to the same degree as if they were full. 4.3.2.4.3 Where empty tanks, battery-wagons and MEGCs, uncleaned, are not closed in the same manner and are not leakproof to the same degree as if they were full and where the provisions of RID cannot be complied with, they shall be carried, with due regard to adequate safety, to the nearest suitable place where cleaning or repair can be carried out. Carriage is adequately safe if suitable measures have been taken to ensure equivalent safety commensurate with the provisions of RID and to prevent the uncontrolled release of the dangerous goods. 4.3.2.4.4 Empty tank- wagons , demountable tanks, battery- wagons , tank-containers, tank swap bodies and MEGCs, uncleaned, may also be carried after the expiry of the periods established in 6.8.2.4.2 and 6.8.2.4.3 for undergoing the inspection. 4.3.3 Special provisions applicable to Class 2 4.3.3.1 Coding and hierarchy of tanks 4.3.3.1.1 Coding of tanks, battery-wagons and MEGCs The four parts of the codes (tank codes) given in Column (12) of Table A in Chapter 3.2 have the following meanings: Part Description Tank Code 1 Types of tank, battery- wagons o r MEGC C = tank, battery -wagon or MEGC for compressed gases; P = tank, battery-wagon or MEGC for liquefied gases or dissolved gases; R = tank for refrigerated liquefied gases. 2 Calculation pressure x = value of the minimum relevant test pressure according to the table in 4.3.3.2.5; or 22 = minimum calculation pressure in bar. 3 Openings (see 6.8.2.2 and 6.8.3.2) B = tank with bottom filling or discharge openings with 3 closures; or battery-wagon or MEGC with openings below the surface of the liquid or for compressed gases; C = tank with top filling or discharge openings with 3 closures with only cleaning openings below the surface of the liquid; D = tank with top filling or discharge openings with 3 closures; or battery-wagon or MEGC with no openings below the surface of the liquid. 4 Safety valves/devices N = tank, battery-wagon or MEGC with safety valve according to 6.8.3.2.9 or 6.8.3.2.10 which is not hermetically closed; H = hermetically closed tank, battery-wagon or MEGC (see 1.2.1); NOTE 1: The special provision TU 17 indicated in Column (13) of Table A in Chapter 3.2 for certain gases means that the gas may only be carried in a battery-wagon or MEGC, the elements of which are composed of receptacles. 2: The special provision TU 40 indicated in Column (13) of Table A in Chapter 3.2 for certain gases means that the gas may only be carried in a battery-wagon or an MEGC, the elements of which are composed of seamless receptacles. 3: The pressures indicated on the tank itself or on the panel shall be not less than the value of "X" or the minimum calculation pressure. 4.3.3.1.2 Hierarchy of tanks Tank code Other tank code(s) permitted for the substances under this code C*BN C#BN, C#CN, C#DN, C#BH, C#CH, C#DH C*BH C#BH, C#CH, C#DH C*CN C#CN, C#DN, C#CH, C#DH C*CH C#CH, C#DH C*DN C#DN, C#DH C*DH C#DH P*BN P#BN, P#CN, P#DN, P#BH, P#CH, P#DH P*BH P#BH, P#CH, P#DH P*CN P#CN, P#DN, P#CH, P#DH P*CH P#CH, P#DH P*DN P#DN, P#DH P*DH P#DH R*BN R#BN, R#CN, R#DN R*CN R#CN, R#DN R*DN R#DN The figure represented by "#" shall be equal to or greater than the figure represented by "*". NOTE: This hierarchy does not take any special provisions into account (see 4.3.5 and 6.8.4) for each entry. 4.3.3.2 Filling conditions and test pressures 4.3.3.2.1 The test pressure for tanks intended for the carriage of compressed gases shall be at least 1.5 times the working pressure as defined in 1.2.1 for pressure receptacles. 4.3.3.2.2 The test pressure for tanks intended for the carriage of: – high pressure liquefied gases; and – dissolved gases shall be such that, when the shell is filled to the maximum filling ratio, the pressure reached in the shell by the substance at 55 °C for tanks with thermal insulation or 65 °C for tanks without thermal insulation does not exceed the test pressure. 4.3.3.2.3 The test pressure for tanks intended for the carriage of low pressure liquefied gases will be: (a) If the tank is equipped with thermal insulation, at least equal to the vapour pressure, reduced by 0.1 MPa (1 bar) of the liquid at 60 °C, but not less than 1 MPa (10 bar); (b) If the tank is not equipped with thermal insulation, at least equal to the vapour pressure, reduced by 0.1 MPa (1 bar), of the liquid at 65 °C, but not less than 1 MPa (10 bar). The maximum permissible mass of contents per litre of capacity is calculated as follows: Maximum permissible mass of contents per litre of capacity = 0.95 density of the liquid phase at 50 °C (in kg/l) Moreover the vapour phase shall not disappear below 60 °C. If the shells are not more than 1.5 m in diameter, the values of the test pressure and maximum filling ratio conforming to packing instruction P200 in 4.1.4.1 shall be applicable. 4.3.3.2.4 The test pressure for tanks intended for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases shall be not less than 1.3 times the maximum allowable working pressure and indicated on the tank but not less than 300 kPa (3 bar) (gauge pressure); for tanks with vacuum insulation the test pressure shall be not less than 1.3 times the maximum allowable working pressure increased by 100 kPa (1 bar). 4.3.3.2.5 Table of gases and gas mixtures which may be carried in tank-wagons, battery-wagons , demountable tanks, tank-containers or MEGCs indicating the minimum test pressure for tanks and as far as applicable the filling ratio In the case of gases and gas mixtures classified under n.o.s. entries, the values of the test pressure and the filling ratio shall be prescribed by the inspection body . When tanks for compressed or high pressure liquefied gases have been subjected to a test pressure lower than shown in the table, and the tanks are fitted with thermal insulation, a lower maximum load may be prescribed by the inspection body , provided that the pressure reached in the tank by the substance at 55 °C does not exceed the test pressure stamped on the tank. UN No. Name Classification code Minimum test pressure for tanks Maximum permissible mass of contents per litre of capacity With thermal insulation Without thermal insulation MPa bar MPa bar kg 1001 ACETYLENE, DISSOLVED 4 F only in battery-wagons and MEGCs composed of receptacles 1002 AIR, COMPRESSED 1 A see 4.3.3.2.1 1003 AIR, REFRIGERATED LIQUID 3 O see 4.3.3.2.4 1005 AMMONIA, ANHYDROUS 2 TC 2.6 26 2.9 29 0.53 1006 ARGON, COMPRESSED 1 A see 4.3.3.2.1 1008 BORON TRIFLUORIDE 2 TC 22.5 30 225 300 22.5 30 225 300 0.715 0.86 1009 BROMOTRIFLUOROMETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R13B1) 2 A 12 120 4.2 12 25 42 120 250 1.50 1.13 1.44 1.60 1010 1010 1010 BUTADIENES, STABILIZED (1,2-butadiene) or BUTADIENES, STABILIZED (1,3-butadiene) or BUTADIENES AND HYDROCARBON MIXTURE, STABILIZED 2 F 1 1 1 10 10 10 1 1 1 10 10 10 0.59 0.55 0.50 1011 BUTANE 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.51 1012 1012 1012 1012 BUTYLENE (1-Butylene) or BUTYLENE (trans-2-Butylene) or BUTYLENE (cis-2-Butylene) or BUTYLENE (Butylenes mixture) 2 F 1 1 1 1 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 10 10 10 10 0.53 0.54 0.55 0.50 1013 CARBON DIOXIDE 2 A 19 22.5 190 225 19 25 190 250 0.73 0.78 0.66 0.75 1016 CARBON MONOXIDE, COMPRESSED 1 TF see 4.3.3.2.1 1017 CHLORINE 2 TOC 1.7 17 1.9 19 1.25 1018 CHLORODIFLUOROMETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R22) 2 A 2.4 24 2.6 26 1.03 1020 CHLOROPENTAFLUORO ETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R115) 2 A 2 20 2.3 23 1.08 1021 1-CHLORO-1,2,2,2- TETRAFLUOROETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R124) 2 A 1 10 1.1 11 1.2 1022 CHLOROTRIFLUOROMETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R13) 2 A 12 22.5 120 225 10 12 19 25 100 120 190 250 0.96 1.12 0.83 0.90 1.04 1.10 1023 COAL GAS, COMPRESSED 1 TF see 4.3.3.2.1 1026 CYANOGEN 2 TF 10 100 10 100 0.70 1027 CYCLOPROPANE 2 F 1.6 16 1.8 18 0.53 1028 DICHLORODIFLUOROMETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R12) 2 A 1.5 15 1.6 16 1.15 1029 DICHLOROFLUOROMETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R21) 2 A 1 10 1 10 1.23 1030 1,1-DIFLUOROETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R152A) 2 F 1.4 14 1.6 16 0.79 1032 DIMETHYLAMINE, ANHYDROUS 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.59 1033 DIMETHYL ETHER 2 F 1.4 14 1.6 16 0.58 1035 ETHANE 2 F 12 120 9.5 12 30 95 120 300 0.32 0.25 0.29 0.39 1036 ETHYLAMINE 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.61 1037 ETHYL CHLORIDE 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.8 1038 ETHYLENE, REFRIGERATED LIQUID 3 F see 4.3.3.2.4 1039 ETHYL METHYL ETHER 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.64 1040 ETHYLENE OXIDE WITH NITROGEN up to a total pressure of 1 MPa (10 bar) at 50 °C 2 TF 1.5 15 1.5 15 0.78 1041 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND CARBON DIOXIDE MIXTURE, with more than 9% but not more than 87% ethylene oxide 2 F 2.4 24 2.6 26 0.73 1046 HELIUM, COMPRESSED 1 A see 4.3.3.2.1 1048 HYDROGEN BROMIDE, ANHYDROUS 2 TC 5 50 5.5 55 1.54 1049 HYDROGEN, COMPRESSED 1 F see 4.3.3.2.1 1050 HYDROGEN CHLORIDE, ANHYDROUS 2 TC 12 120 10 12 15 20 100 120 150 200 0.69 0.30 0.56 0.67 0.74 1053 HYDROGEN SULPHIDE 2 TF 4.5 45 5 50 0.67 1055 ISOBUTYLENE 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.52 1056 KRYPTON, COMPRESSED 1 A see 4.3.3.2.1 1058 LIQUEFIED GASES, non flammable, charged with nitrogen, carbon dioxide or air 2 A 1.5 x filling pressure see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3 1060 METHYLACETYLENE AND PROPADIENE MIXTURE, STABILIZED: Mixture P1 Mixture P2 Propadiene with 1% to 4% methylacetylene 2 F see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3 2.5 2.2 2.2 25 22 22 2.8 2.3 2.2 28 23 22 0.49 0.47 0.50 1061 METHYLAMINE, ANHYDROUS 2 F 1 10 1.1 11 0.58 1062 METHYL BROMIDE with not more than 2% chloropicrin 2 T 1 10 1 10 1.51 1063 METHYL CHLORIDE (REFRIGERANT GAS R40) 2 F 1.3 13 1.5 15 0.81 1064 METHYL MERCAPTAN 2 TF 1 10 1 10 0.78 1065 NEON, COMPRESSED 1 A see 4.3.3.2.1 1066 NITROGEN, COMPRESSED 1 A see 4.3.3.2.1 1067 DINITROGEN TETROXIDE (NITROGEN DIOXIDE) 2 TOC only in battery-wagons and MEGCs composed of receptacles 1070 NITROUS OXIDE 2 O 22.5 225 18 22.525 180 225 250 0.78 0.68 0.74 0.75 1071 OIL GAS, COMPRESSED 1 TF see 4.3.3.2.1 1072 OXYGEN, COMPRESSED 1 O see 4.3.3.2.1 1073 OXYGEN, REFRIGERATED LIQUID 3 O see 4.3.3.2.4 1075 Petroleum gases, liquefied 2 F see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3 1076 PHOSGENE 2 TC only in battery-wagons and MEGCs composed of receptacles 1077 PROPYLENE 2 F 2.5 25 2.7 27 0.43 1078 REFRIGERANT GASES, N.O.S. such as: Mixture F1 Mixture F2 Mixture F3 Other mixtures 2 A 1 1.5 2.4 10 15 24 1.1 1.6 2.7 11 16 27 1.23 1.15 1.03 see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3 1079 SULPHUR DIOXIDE 2 TC 1 10 1.2 12 1.23 1080 SULPHUR HEXAFLUORIDE 2 A 12 120 7 14 16 70 140 160 1.34 1.04 1.33 1.37 1081 Tetrafluoroethylene, stabilized 2 F only in battery-wagons and MEGCs composed of seamless receptacles 1082 TRIFLUOROCHLOROETHYLENE, STABILIZED ( Refrigerant gas R 1113) 2 TF 1.5 15 1.7 17 1.13 1083 TRIMETHYLAMINE, ANHYDROUS 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.56 1085 VINYL BROMIDE, STABILIZED 2 F 1 10 1 10 1.37 1086 VINYL CHLORIDE, STABILIZED 2 F 1 10 1.1 11 0.81 1087 VINYL METHYL ETHER, STABILIZED 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.67 1581 CHLOROPICRIN AND METHYL BROMIDE MIXTURE with more than 2% chloropicrin 2 T 1 10 1 10 1.51 1582 CHLOROPICRIN AND METHYL CHLORIDE MIXTURE 2 T 1.3 13 1.5 15 0.81 1612 HEXAETHYL TETRAPHOSPHATE AND COMPRESSED GAS MIXTURE 1 T see 4.3.3.2.1 1749 CHLORINE TRIFLUORIDE 2 TOC 3 30 3 30 1.40 1858 HEXAFLUOROPROPYLENE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 1216) 2A 1.7 17 1.9 19 1.11 1859 SILICON TETRAFLUORIDE 2 TC 20 30 200 300 20 30 200 300 0.74 1.10 1860 VINYL FLUORIDE, STABILIZED 2 F 12 22.5 120 225 25 250 0.58 0.65 0.64 1912 METHYL CHLORIDE AND METHYLENE CHLORIDE MIXTURE 2 F 1.3 13 1.5 15 0.81 1913 NEON, REFRIGERATED LIQUID 3 A see 4.3.3.2.4 1951 ARGON, REFRIGERATED LIQUID 3 A see 4.3.3.2.4 1952 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND CARBON DIOXIDE MIXTURE, with not more than 9% ethylene oxide 2 A 19 25 190 250 19 25 190 250 0.66 0.75 1953 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. (a) 1 TF see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2 1954 COMPRESSED GAS, FLAMMABLE N.O.S. 1 F see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2 1955 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, N.O.S. (a) 1 T see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2 1956 COMPRESSED GAS, N.O.S. 1 A see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2 1957 DEUTERIUM, COMPRESSED 1 F see 4.3.3.2.1 1958 1,2-DICHLORO-1,1,2,2-TETRAFLUOROETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R114) 2 A 1 10 1 10 1.3 1959 1,1-DIFLUOROETHYLENE (REFRIGERANT GAS R1132A) 2 F 12 22.5 120 225 25 250 0.66 0.78 0.77 1961 ETHANE, REFRIGERATED LIQUID 3 F see 4.3.3.2.4 1962 ETHYLENE 2 F 12 22.5 120 225 22.5 30 225 300 0.25 0.36 0.34 0.37 1963 HELIUM, REFRIGERATED LIQUID 3 A see 4.3.3.2.4 1964 HYDROCARBON GAS MIXTURE, COMPRESSED, N.O.S. 1 F see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2 1965 HYDROCARBON GAS MIXTURE, LIQUEFIED, N.O.S. such as: Mixture A Mixture A01 Mixture A02 Mixture A0 Mixture A1 Mixture B1 Mixture B2 Mixture B Mixture C Other mixtures 2 F 1 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.6 2 2 2 2.5 10 12 12 12 16 20 20 20 25 1 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.8 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.7 10 14 14 14 18 23 23 23 27 0.50 0.49 0.48 0.47 0.46 0.45 0.44 0.43 0.42 see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3 1966 HYDROGEN, REFRIGERATED LIQUID 3 F see 4.3.3.2.4 1967 INSECTICIDE GAS, TOXIC, N.O.S. (a) 2 T see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3 1968 INSECTICIDE GAS, N.O.S. 2 A see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3 1969 ISOBUTANE 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.49 1970 KRYPTON, REFRIGERATED LIQUID 3 A see 4.3.3.2.4 1971 1971 METHANE, COMPRESSED or NATURAL GAS, COMPRESSED with high methane content 1 F see 4.3.3.2.1 1972 1972 METHANE, REFRIGERATED LIQUID or NATURAL GAS, REFRIGERATED LIQUID with high methane content 3 F see 4.3.3.2.4 1973 CHLORODIFLUOROMETHANE AND CHLOROPENTAFLUOROETHANE MIXTURE with fixed boiling point, with approximately 49% chlorodifluoromethane (REFRIGERANT GAS R502) 2 A 2.5 25 2.8 28 1.05 1974 CHLORODIFLUOROBROMOMETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R12B1) 2 A 1 10 1 10 1.61 1976 OCTAFLUOROCYCLOBUTANE (REFRIGERANT GAS RC318) 2 A 1 10 1 10 1.34 1977 NITROGEN, REFRIGERATED LIQUID 3 A see 4.3.3.2.4 1978 PROPANE 2 F 2.1 21 2.3 23 0.42 1982 TETRAFLUOROMETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R14) 1 A 20 30 200 300 20 30 200 300 0.62 0.94 1983 1-CHLORO-2,2,2-TRIFLUOROETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R133A) 2 A 1 10 1 10 1.18 1984 TRIFLUOROMETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R23) 2 A 19 25 190 250 19 25 190 250 0.92 0.99 0.87 0.95 2034 HYDROGEN AND METHANE MIXTURE, COMPRESSED 1 F see 4.3.3.2.1 2035 1,1,1-TRIFLUOROETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R143A) 2 F 2.8 28 3.2 32 0.79 2036 XENON 2 A 12 120 13 130 1.30 1.24 2044 2,2-DIMETHYLPROPANE 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.53 2073 AMMONIA SOLUTION, relative density less than 0.880 at 15 °C in water, with more than 35% and not more than 40% ammonia with more than 40% and not more than 50% ammonia 4 A 1 1.2 10 12 1 1.2 10 12 0.80 0.77 2187 CARBON DIOXIDE, REFRIGERATED LIQUID 3 A see 4.3.3.2.4 2189 DICHLOROSILANE 2 TFC 1 10 1 10 0.90 2191 SULFURYL FLUORIDE 2 T 5 50 5 50 1.1 2193 HEXAFLUOROETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R116) 2 A 16 20 160 200 20 200 1.28 1.34 1.10 2197 HYDROGEN IODIDE, ANHYDROUS 2 TC 1.9 19 2.1 21 2.25 2200 PROPADIENE, STABILIZED 2 F 1.8 18 2.0 20 0.50 2201 NITROUS OXIDE, REFRIGERATED LIQUID 3 O see 4.3.3.2.4 2203 SILANE (b) 2 F 22.5 25 225 250 22.5 25 225 250 0.32 0.36 2204 CARBONYL SULPHIDE 2 TF 2.7 27 3.0 30 0.84 2417 CARBONYL FLUORIDE 2 TC 20 30 200 300 20 30 200 300 0.47 0.70 2419 BROMOTRIFLUOROETHYLENE 2 F 1 10 1 10 1.19 2420 HEXAFLUOROACETONE 2 TC 1.6 16 1.8 18 1.08 2422 OCTAFLUOROBUT-2-ENE (REFRIGERANT GAS R1318) 2 A 1 10 1 10 1.34 2424 OCTAFLUOROPROPANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R218) 2 A 2.1 21 2.3 23 1.07 2451 NITROGEN TRIFLUORIDE 2 O 20 30 200 300 20 30 200 300 0.50 0.75 2452 ETHYLACETYLENE, STABILIZED 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.57 2453 ETHYL FLUORIDE (REFRIGERANT GAS R161) 2 F 2.1 21 2.5 25 0.57 2454 METHYL FLUORIDE (REFRIGERANT GAS R41) 2 F 30 300 30 300 0.36 2517 1-CHLORO-1,1-DIFLUOROETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R142B) 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.99 2591 XENON, REFRIGERATED LIQUID 3 A see 4.3.3.2.4 2599 CHLOROTRIFLUOROMETHANE AND TRIFLUOROMETHANE, AZEOTROPIC MIXTURE with approximately 60% chlorotrifluoromethane (REFRIGERANT GAS R503) 2 A 3.1 4.2 10 31 42 100 3.1 4.2 10 31 42 100 0.11 0.21 0.76 0.20 0.66 2601 CYCLOBUTANE 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.63 2602 DICHLORODIFLUOROMETHANE AND DIFLUORO-1,1 ETHANE, AZEOTROPIC MIXTURE with approximately 74% dichlorodifluoromethane (REFRIGERANT GAS R500) 2 A 1.8 18 2 20 1.01 2901 BROMINE CHLORIDE 2 TOC 1 10 1 10 1.50 3057 TRIFLUOROACETYL CHLORIDE 2 TC 1.3 13 1.5 15 1.17 3070 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND DICHLORODIFLUOROMETHANE MIXTURE with not more than 12.5% ethylene oxide 2 A 1.5 15 1.6 16 1.09 3083 PERCHLORYL FLUORIDE 2 TO 2.7 27 3.0 30 1.21 3136 TRIFLUOROMETHANE, REFIGERATED LIQUID 3 A see 4.3.3.2.4 3138 ETHYLENE, ACETYLENE PROPYLENE IN MIXTURE, REFRIGERATED LIQUID, containing at least 71.5% ethylene with not more than 22.5% acetylene and not more than 6% propylene 3 F see 4.3.3.2.4 3153 PERFLUORO(METHYL VINYL ETHER) 2 F 1.4 14 1.5 15 1.14 3154 PERFLUORO(ETHYL VINYL ETHER) 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.98 3156 COMPRESSED GAS, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 1 O see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2 3157 LIQUEFIED GAS, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 2 O see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3 3158 GAS, REFRIGERATED LIQUID, N.O.S. 3 A see 4.3.3.2.4 3159 1,1,1,2-TETRAFLUOROETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R134A) 2 A 1.6 16 1.8 18 1.04 3160 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. (a) 2 TF see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3 3161 LIQUEFIED GAS, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 2 F see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3 3162 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, N.O.S. (a) 2 T see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3 3163 LIQUEFIED GAS, N.O.S. 2 A see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3 3220 PENTAFLUOROETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R125) 2 A 4.1 41 4.9 49 0.95 3252 DIFLUOROMETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R32) 2 F 3.9 39 4.3 43 0.78 3296 HEPTAFLUOROPROPANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R227) 2 A 1.4 14 1.6 16 1.20 3297 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND CHLOROTETRAFLUOROETHANE MIXTURE, with not more than 8.8% ethylene oxide 2 A 1 10 1 10 1.16 3298 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND PENTAFLUOROETHANE MIXTURE, with not more than 7.9% ethylene oxide 2 A 2.4 24 2.6 26 1.02 3299 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND TETRAFLUOROETHANE MIXTURE, with not more than 5.6% ethylene oxide 2 A 1.5 15 1.7 17 1.03 3300 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND CARBON DIOXIDE MIXTURE, with more than 87% ethylene oxide 2 TF 2.8 28 2.8 28 0.73 3303 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. (a) 1 TO see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2 3304 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. (a) 1 TC see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2 3305 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. (a) 1 TFC see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2 3306 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. (a) 1 TOC see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2 3307 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. (a) 2 TO see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3 3308 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. (a) 2 TC see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3 3309 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. (a) 2 TFC see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3 3310 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. (a) 2 TOC see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3 3311 GAS, REFRIGERATED LIQUID, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 3 O see 4.3.3.2.4 3312 GAS, REFRIGERATED LIQUID, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 3 F see 4.3.3.2.4 3318 AMMONIA SOLUTION, relative density less than 0.880 at 15 °C in water, with more than 50% ammonia 4 TC see 4.3.3.2.2 3337 REFRIGERANT GAS R404A 2 A 2.9 29 3.2 32 0.84 3338 REFRIGERANT GAS R407A 2 A 2.8 28 3.2 32 0.95 3339 REFRIGERANT GAS R407B 2 A 3.0 30 3.3 33 0.95 3340 REFRIGERANT GAS R407C 2 A 2.7 27 3.0 30 0.95 3354 INSECTICIDE GAS, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 2 F see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3 3355 INSECTICIDE GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. (a) 2 TF see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3 (a) Allowed if LC 50 equal to or greater than 200 ppm. (b) Considered as pyrophoric. 4.3.3.3 Operation 4.3.3.3.1 When tanks, battery wagons or MEGCs are approved for different gases, the change of use shall include emptying, purging and evacuati on operations to the extent necessary for safe operation. 4.3.3.3.2 (Deleted) 4.3.3.3.3 All the elements of a battery wagons o r MEGC shall contain only one and the same gas. 4.3.3.3.4 When the external overpressure could be greater than the tank resistance to external pressure (e.g. due to low ambient temperatures), adequate measures shall be taken to protect tanks carrying low pressure liquefied gases against the risk of deformation, e.g. by filling them with nitrogen or another inert gas in order to maintain sufficient pressure inside the tank. 4.3.3.4 Provisions for the filling of liquid gas tank-wagons (Reserved) 4.3.3.4.1 Control measures before filling (a) For each gas to be carried, the details on the tank plate (see 6.8.2.5.1 and 6.8.3.5.1 to 6.8.3.5.5) shall be checked to agree with those on the wagon panel (see 6.8.2.5.2, 6.8.3.5.6 and 6.8.3.5.7). Tank-wagons for multiple use shall especially be checked to ensure that if folding panels are used, the correct panels are visible and securely fixed by the means referred to in 6.8.3.5.7 on both sides of the wagon. The load limits on the wagon panel shall not exceed the maximum permissible filling mass on the tank plate. (b) The last load shall be determined, either from particulars in the transport document or by analysis. If necessary, the tank shall be cleaned. (c) The mass of the residue shall be determined (e.g. by weighing) and taken into account in determining the filling quantity so that the tank-wagon is not overfilled or overloaded. (d) The leakproofness of the shell and its items of equipment, and their ability to function, shall be checked. (Reserved) 4.3.3.4.2 Filling procedure For filling, the provisions of the operating instructions of the tank-wagon shall be complied with . (Reserved) 4.3.3.4.3 Control measures after filling (a) After filling, whether the wagon is overfilled or overloaded shall be checked by calibrated checking devices (e.g. by weighing on a calibrated weighbridge). Overfilled or overloaded tank-wagons shall be immediately discharged in a safe manner until the permitted filling quantity is reached. (b) The partial pressure of inert gases in the gas phase shall not exceed 0.2 MPa (2 bar), or the gauge pressure in the gas phase shall not exceed by more than 0.1 MPa (1 bar) the vapour pressure (absolute) of the liquid gas at the temperature of the liquid phase (however, for UN 1040 Ethylene oxide with nitrogen, the maximum allowable total pressure shall be 1 MPa (10 bar) at 50 °C). (c) After filling, bottom-discharge wagons shall be checked to ensure that the internal shut-off devices are closed so as to be leak-proof. (d) Before blank flanges or other equally effective devices are fitted, the vents shall be checked for leakproofness; any leaks shall be stopped by suitable means. (e) Blank flanges or other equally effective devices shall be fitted on the outlet of the vents. These closures shall be equipped with suitable seals. They shall be closed when using all elements provided for in their design types. (f) Lastly, a final visual check of the wagon, its equipment and marks shall be made to ensure that no filling substance is escaping. (Reserved) 4.3.3.5 The actual holding time shall be determined for each journey of a tank carrying a refrigerated liquefied gas on the basis of the following: (a) The reference holding time for the refrigerated liquefied gas to be carried (see 6.8.3.4.10) as indicated on the plate referred to in 6.8.3.5.4; (b) The actual filling density; (c) The actual filling pressure; (d) The lowest set pressure of the pressure limiting device(s); (e) The deterioration of the insulation . NOTE: ISO 21014:2006 "Cryogenic vessels – Cryogenic insulation performance" details methods of determining the insulation performance of cryogenic vessels and provides a method of calculating the holding time. The date at which the actual holding time ends shall be entered in the transport document (see 5.4.1.2.2 (d)). 4.3.3.6 Tanks shall not be offered for carriage: (a) In an ullage condition liable to produce an unacceptable hydraulic force due to surge within the shell; (b) When leaking; (c) When damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the tank or its lifting or securing arrangements may be affected; (d) Unless the service equipment has been examined and found to be in good working order; (e) Unless the actual holding time for the refrigerated liquefied gas being carried has been determined; (f) Unless the duration of carriage, after taking into consideration any delays which might be encountered, does not exceed the actual holding time; (g) Unless the pressure is steady and has been lowered to a level such that the actual holding time may be achieved NOTEREF _Ref458063737 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 4 . 4.3.4 Special provisions applicable to Classes 3 to 9 4.3.4.1 Coding, rationalized approach and hierarchy of tanks 4.3.4.1.1 Coding of tanks The four parts of the codes (tank codes) given in Column (12) of Table A in Chapter 3.2 have the following meanings: Part Description Tank code 1 Types of tank L = tank for substances in the liquid state (liquids or solids handed over for carriage in the molten state); S = tank for substances in the solid state (powdery or granular). 2 Calculation pressure G = minimum calculation pressure according to the general requirements of 6.8.2.1.14; 1.5; 2.65; 4; 10; 15 or 21 = minimum calculation pressure in bar (see 6.8.2.1.14). 3 Openings (see 6.8.2.2.2) A = tank with bottom-filling or bottom- discharge openings with 2 closures; B = tank with bottom-filling or bottom- discharge openings with 3 closures; C = tank with top filling and discharge openings with only cleaning openings below the surface of the liquid; D = tank with top filling and discharge openings with no openings below the surface of the liquid. 4 Safety valves/devices V = tank with a breather device, according to 6.8.2.2.6, but no device protecting against the propagation of a flame; or non-explosion pressure shock resistant tank; F = tank with a breather device, according to 6.8.2.2.6, fitted with a device protecting against the propagation of a flame; or explosion pressure shock resistant tank; N = tank without a breather device according to 6.8.2.2.6 and not hermetically closed; H = hermetically closed tank (see 1.2.1). 4.3.4.1.2 Rationalized approach for assignment of tank codes to groups of substances and hierarchy of tanks NOTE : Certain substances and groups of substances are not included in the rationalized approach, see 4.3.4.1.3 Rationalized approach Tank code Group of permitted substances Class Classification code Packing group Liquids LGAV 3 F2 III 9 M9 III LGBV 4.1 F2 II, III 5.1 O1 III 9 M6 III 9 M11 III and groups of permitted substances for tank code LGAV LGBF 3 F1 II vapour pressure at 50 °C ≤ 1.1 bar 3 F1 III 3 D II vapour pressure at 50 °C ≤ 1.1 bar 3 D III and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV and LGBV L1.5BN 3 F1 II vapour pressure at 50 °C > 1.1 bar 3 F1 III flashpoint < 23 °C, viscous, vapour pressure at 50 °C > 1.1 bar, boiling point > 35 °C 3 D II vapour pressure at 50 °C > 1.1 bar and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV, LGBV and LGBF L4BN 3 F1 I III, boiling point ≤ 35 °C 3 FC III 3 D I 5.1 O1 I, II 5.1 OT1 I 8 C1 II, III 8 C3 II, III 8 C4 II, III 8 C5 II, III 8 C7 II, III 8 C8 II, III 8 C9 II, III 8 C10 II, III 8 CF1 II 8 CF2 II 8 CS1 II 8 CW1 II Tank code Group of permitted substances Class Classification code Packing group L4BN (cont'd) 8 CW2 II 8 CO1 II 8 CO2 II 8 CT1 II, III 8 CT2 II, III 8 CFT II 9 M11 III and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV, LGBV, LGBF and L1.5BN L4BH 3 FT1 II, III 3 FT2 II 3 FC II 3 FTC II 6.1 T1 II, III 6.1 T2 II, III 6.1 T3 II, III 6.1 T4 II, III 6.1 T5 II, III 6.1 T6 II, III 6.1 T7 II, III 6.1 TF1 II 6.1 TF2 II, III 6.1 TF3 II 6.1 TS II 6.1 TW1 II 6.1 TW2 II 6.1 TO1 II 6.1 TO2 II 6.1 TC1 II 6.1 TC2 II 6.1 TC3 II 6.1 TC4 II 6.1 TFC II 6.2 I4 9 M2 II and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV, LGBV, LGBF, L1.5BN and L4BN L4DH 4.2 S1 II,III 4.2 S3 II, III 4.2 ST1 II, III 4.2 ST3 II, III 4.2 SC1 II, III 4.2 SC3 II, III 4.3 W1 II, III 4.3 WF1 II, III 4.3 WT1 II, III 4.3 WC1 II, III Tank code Group of permitted substances Class Classification code Packing group L4DH 8 CT1 II,III (cont'd) and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV, LGBV, LGBF, L1.5BN, L4BN and L4BH L10BH 8 C1 I 8 C3 I 8 C4 I 8 C5 I 8 C7 I 8 C8 I 8 C9 I 8 C10 I 8 CF1 I 8 CF2 I 8 CS1 I 8 CW1 I 8 CW2 I 8 CO1 I 8 CO2 I 8 CT1 I 8 CT2 I 8 COT I and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV, LGBV, LGBF, L1.5BN, L4BN, and L4BH L10CH 3 FT1 I 3 FT2 I 3 FC I 3 FTC I 6.1 a T1 I 6.1 a T2 I 6.1 a T3 I 6.1 a T4 I 6.1 a T5 I 6.1 a T6 I 6.1 a T7 I 6.1 a TF1 I 6.1 a TF2 I 6.1 a TF3 I 6.1 a TS I 6.1 a TW1 I 6.1 a TO1 I 6.1 a TC1 I 6.1 a TC2 I 6.1 a TC3 I 6.1 a TC4 I 6.1 a TFC I 6.1 a TFW I Tank code Group of permitted substances Class Classification code Packing group L10CH (cont'd) and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV, LGBV, LGBF, L1.5BN, L4BN, L4BH, and L10BH a Substances with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 200 ml/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC 50 shall be assigned to tank code L15CH. L10DH 4.3 W1 I 4.3 WF1 I 4.3 WT1 I 4.3 WC1 I 4.3 WFC I 5.1 OTC I 8 CT1 I and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV, LGBV, LGBF, L1.5BN, L4BN, L4BH, L4DH, L10BH and L10CH L15CH 3 FT1 I 6.1 b T1 I 6.1 b T4 I 6.1 b TF1 I 6.1 b TW1 I 6.1 b TO1 I 6.1 b TC1 I 6.1 b TC3 I 6.1 b TFC I 6.1 b TFW I and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV, LGBV, LGBF, L1.5BN, L4BN, L4BH, L10BH and L10CH b Substances with an LC 50 lower than or equal to 200 ml/m 3 and saturated vapour concentration greater than or equal to 500 LC 50 shall be assigned to this tank code. L21DH 4.2 S1 I 4.2 S3 I 4.2 SW I 4.2 ST3 I and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV, LGBV, LGBF, L1.5BN, L4BN, L4BH, L4DH, L10BH, L10CH, L10DH and L15CH Solids SGAV 4.1 F1 III 4.1 F3 III 4.2 S2 II, III 4.2 S4 III 5.1 O2 II, III 8 C2 II, III 8 C4 III 8 C6 III 8 C8 III 8 C10 II, III 8 CT2 III 9 M7 III 9 M11 II, III Tank code Group of permitted substances Class Classification code Packing group SGAN 4.1 F1 II 4.1 F3 II 4.1 FT1 II, III 4.1 FT2 II, III 4.1 FC1 II, III 4.1 FC2 II, III 4.2 S2 II 4.2 S4 II, III 4.2 ST2 II, III 4.2 ST4 II, III 4.2 SC2 II, III 4.2 SC4 II, III 4.3 W2 II, III 4.3 WF2 II 4.3 WS II, III 4.3 WT2 II, III 4.3 WC2 II, III 5.1 O2 II, III 5.1 OT2 II, III 5.1 OC2 II, III 8 C2 II 8 C4 II 8 C6 II 8 C8 II 8 C10 II 8 CF2 II 8 CS2 II 8 CW2 II 8 CO2 II 8 CT2 II 9 M3 III and groups of permitted substances for tank codes SGAV SGAH 6.1 T2 II, III 6.1 T3 II, III 6.1 T5 II, III 6.1 T7 II, III 6.1 T9 II 6.1 TF3 II 6.1 TS II 6.1 TW2 II 6.1 TO2 II 6.1 TC2 II 6.1 TC4 II 9 M1 II, III and groups of permitted substances for tanks codes SGAV and SGAN Tank code Group of permitted substances Class Classification code Packing group S4AH 9 M2 II and groups of permitted substances for tanks codes SGAV, SGAN and SGAH S10AN 8 C2 I 8 C4 I 8 C6 I 8 C8 I 8 C10 I 8 CF2 I 8 CS2 I 8 CW2 I 8 CO2 I 8 CT2 I and groups of permitted substances for tank codes SGAV and SGAN S10AH 6.1 T2 I 6.1 T3 I 6.1 T5 I 6.1 T7 I 6.1 TS I 6.1 TW2 I 6.1 TO2 I 6.1 TC2 I 6.1 TC4 I and groups of permitted substances for tank codes SGAV, SGAN, SGAH and S10AN Hierarchy of tanks Tanks with tank codes different from those indicated in this table or in Table A of Chapter 3.2 may also be used provided that any element (number or letter) of parts 1 to 4 of these tank codes correspond to a level of safety at least equivalent to the corresponding element of the tank code indicated in Table A of Chapter 3.2, according to the following increasing order: Part 1: Types of tanks S L Part 2: Calculation pressure G 1.5 2.65 4 10 15 21 bar Part 3: Openings A B C D Part 4: Safety valves/devices V F N H. For example: – A tank with the tank code L10CN is authorized for the carriage of a substance to which the tank code L4BN has been assigned; – A tank with the tank code L4BN is authorized for the carriage of a substance to which the tank code SGAN has been assigned. NOTE: The hierarchy does not take account of any special provisions for each entry (see 4.3.5 and 6.8.4). 4.3.4.1.3 The following substances and groups of substances in respect of which a "(+)" is given after the tank code in Column (12) of Table A in Chapter 3.2 are subject to special provisions. In that case the alternate use of the tanks for other substances and groups of substances is permitted only where this is specified in the certificate of type approval. Higher value tanks according to the provisions at the end of the table in 4.3.4.1.2 may be used with due regard to the special provisions indicated in Column (13) of Table A in Chapter 3.2. The requirements for these tanks are given by the following tank codes supplemented by the relevant special provisions indicated in column (13) of table A in Chapter 3.2. Class UN No. Name and description Tank code 4.1 2448 Sulphur, molten LGBV 3531 Polymerizing substance, solid, stabilized, n.o.s. SGAN 3532 Polymerizing substance, liquid, stabilized, n.o.s. L4BN 4.2 1381 Phosphorus, white or yellow, dry, under water or in solution L10DH 2447 Phosphorus, white, molten 4.3 1389 Alkali metal amalgam, liquid L10BN 1391 Alkali metal dispersion or Alkaline earth metal dispersion 1392 Alkaline earth metal amalgam, liquid 1415 Lithium 1420 Potassium metal alloys, liquid 1421 Alkali metal alloy, liquid, n.o.s. 1422 Potassium sodium alloys, liquid 1428 Sodium 2257 Potassium 3401 Alkali metal amalgam, solid 3402 Alkaline earth metal amalgam, solid 3403 Potassium metal alloys, solid 3404 Potassium sodium alloys, solid 3482 Alkali metal dispersion, flammable or Alkaline earth metal dispersion, flammable 1407 Caesium L10CH 1423 Rubidium 1402 Calcium carbide, packing group I S2.65AN 5.1 1873 Perchloric acid with more than 50% but not more than 72% acid, by mass L4DN 2015 Hydrogen peroxide, aqueous solution, stabilized with more than 70% hydrogen peroxide L4DV 2014 Hydrogen peroxide, aqueous solution with not less than 20% but not more than 60% hydrogen peroxide L4BV 2015 Hydrogen peroxide, aqueous solution, stabilized with more than 60% hydrogen peroxide and not more than 70% hydrogen peroxide 2426 Ammonium nitrate, liquid (hot concentrated solution) 3149 Hydrogen peroxide and peroxyacetic acid mixture, stabilized 3375 Ammonium nitrate emulsion, suspension or gel, intermediate for blasting explosives, liquid LGAV 3375 Ammonium nitrate emulsion, suspension or gel, intermediate for blasting explosives, solid SGAV 5.2 3109 Organic peroxide, type F, liquid L4BN 3110 Organic peroxide, type F, solid S4AN 6.1 1613 Hydrogen cyanide, aqueous solution l15dh 3294 Hydrogen cyanide solution in alcohol 7 a All substances s pecial tanks Minimum requirement for liquids L2.65CN Minimum requirement for solids S2.65AN 8 1052 Hydrogen fluoride, anhydrous L21DH 1744 Bromine or bromine solution 1790 Hydrofluoric acid with more than 85% hydrogen fluoride 1791 Hypochlorite solution L4BV 1908 Chlorite solution a Notwithstanding the general requirements of this paragraph, tanks used for radioactive material may also be used for the carriage of other goods provided the requirements of 5.1.3.2 are complied with. 4.3.4.1.4 (Reserved) Tank-containers or tank swap bodies intended for the carriage of liquid waste, which are in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 6.10 and are fitted with two closures in accordance with 6.10.3.2, shall be assigned to tank code L4AH. If the tanks in ques tion are equipped for the carriage of liquids and solids alternatively, they shall be assigned to combined codes L4AH and S4AH. 4.3.4.2 General provisions 4.3.4.2.1 Where hot substances are loaded, the temperature of the outer surface of the tank or of the thermal insulation shall not exceed 70 °C during carriage. 4.3.4.2.2 The connecting pipes between the tanks of several independent but interconnected tank-wagons (complete train, for example) shall be empty during carriage. (Reserved) 4.3.4.2.3 When tanks approved for liquefied gases of Class 2 are also approved for liquids of other classes, the orange band in accordance with 5.3.5 shall be covered or made unrecognisable by other means so that it is not visible during the carriage of these liquids. During the carriage of these liquids, the particulars according to 6.8.3.5.6 (b) or (c) shall no longer be visible on the two sides of the tank-wagon or on the panels. (Reserved) 4.3.5 Special provisions When they are shown under an entry in Column (13) of Table of A in Chapter 3.2, the following special provisions apply: TU 1 The tanks shall not be handed over for carriage until the substance has solidified completely and been covered by an inert gas. Uncleaned empty tanks which have contained these substances shall be filled with an inert gas. TU 2 The substance shall be covered by an inert gas. Uncleaned empty tanks which have contained these substances shall be filled with an inert gas. TU 3 The inside of the shell and all parts liable to come into contact with the substance shall be kept clean. No lubricant capable of combining dangerously with the substance shall be used for pumps, valves or other devices. TU 4 During carriage, these substances shall be under a layer of inert gas, the gauge pressure of which shall not be less than 50 kPa (0.5 bar). Uncleaned empty tanks which have contained these substances shall when handed over for carriage be filled with an inert gas at a gauge pressure of at least 50 kPa (0.5 bar). TU 5 (Reserved) TU 6 Not authorized for carriage in tanks, battery wagons and MEGCs when having a LC 50 lower than 200 ppm. TU 7 The materials used to ensure leakproofness of the joints or for the maintenance of the closures shall be compatible with the contents. TU 8 An aluminium alloy tank shall not be used for carriage unless the tank is reserved solely for such carriage and the acetaldehyde is free from acid. TU 9 UN No.1203 PETROL (GASOLINE) with a vapour pressure at 50 °C of more than 110 kPa (1.1 bar) but not above 150 kPa (1.5 bar) may also be carried in tanks designed according to 6.8.2.1.14 (a) and having equipment conforming to 6.8.2.2.6. TU 10 (Reserved) TU 11 During filling, the temperature of this substance shall not exceed 60 °C. A maximum filling temperature of 80 °C is allowed provided that smoulder spots are prevented and that the following conditions are met. After filling, the tanks shall be pressurized (e.g. with compressed air) to check tightness. It shall be ensured that no depressurization takes place during carriage. Before discharge, it shall be checked if pressure in the tanks is still above atmospheric. If this is not the case, an inert gas shall be introduced into the tanks prior to discharge. TU 12 In the event of a change of use, shells and equipment shall be thoroughly cleansed of all residues before and after the carriage of this substance. TU 13 Tanks shall be free from impurities at the time of filling. Service equipment such as valves and external piping shall be emptied after filling or discharging. TU 14 The protective caps of closures shall be locked during carriage. TU 15 Tanks shall not be used for the carriage of foodstuffs, articles of consumption or animal feeds. TU 16 When handed over for carriage, uncleaned empty tanks shall be filled with a protective agent fulfilling one of the following measures: Protective agent Degree of filling of water Additional requirements for carriage at low ambient temperatures Nitrogen a – – Water and nitrogen a – – Water not less than 96 % and not more than 98 % The water shall contain sufficient anti-freeze agent to prevent it from freezing. The anti-freeze agent shall be free from corrosive action and not liable to react with the substance. a The tank shall be filled with nitrogen in such a way that, even after cooling, the pressure at no time falls below atmospheric pressure. The tank shall be closed in such a way that no leakage of gas occurs. An additional entry shall be included in the transport document: " Tank filled with _______ in accordance with special provision TU 16 ." TU 17 Only to be carried in battery wagons or MEGCs the elements of which are composed of receptacles. TU 18 The degree of filling shall remain below the level at which, if the contents were raised to a temperature at which the vapour pressure equalled the opening pressure of the safety valve, the volume of the liquid would reach 95% of the tank’s capacity at that temperature. The provision in 4.3.2.3.4 shall not apply. TU 19 Tanks may be filled to 98% at the filling temperature and pressure. The provision in 4.3.2.3.4 shall not apply. TU 20 (Reserved) TU 21 The substance shall be protected by a protective agent in the following ways: Protective agent A layer of water in the tank Degree of filling of the substance (including water if any) at a temperature of 60° C shall not exceed Additional requirements for carriage at low ambient temperatures Nitrogen a – 96 % – Water and nitrogen a – 98 % The water shall contain sufficient anti-freeze agent to prevent it from freezing. The anti- freeze agent shall be free from corrosive action and not liable to react with the substance. Water not less than 12 cm 98 % a) The remaining space of the tank shall be filled with nitrogen in such a way that, even after cooling, the pressure at no time falls below atmospheric pressure. The tank shall be closed in such a way that no leakage of gas occurs. TU 22 Tanks shall be filled to not more than 90% of their capacity; for liquids, a space of 5% shall remain empty when the liquid is at an average temperature of 50 °C. TU 23 The degree of filling shall not exceed 0.93 kg per litre of capacity, if filling is by mass. If filling is by volume, the degree of filling shall not exceed 85%. TU 24 The degree of filling shall not exceed 0.95 kg per litre of capacity, if filling is by mass. If filling is by volume, the degree of filling shall not exceed 85%. TU 25 The degree of filling shall not exceed 1.14 kg per litre of capacity, if filling is by mass. If filling is by volume, the degree of filling shall not exceed 85%. TU 26 The degree of filling shall not exceed 85%. TU 27 Tanks shall not be filled to more than 98% of their capacity. TU 28 Tanks shall be filled to not more than 95% of their capacity at a reference temperature of 15 °C. TU 29 Tanks shall be filled to not more than 97% of their capacity and the maximum temperature after filling shall not exceed 140 °C. TU 30 Tanks shall be filled as set out in the test report for the type approval of the tank but shall be filled to not more than 90% of their capacity. TU 31 Tanks shall not be filled to more than 1 kg per litre of capacity. TU 32 Tanks shall not be filled to more than 88% of their capacity. TU 33 Tanks shall be filled to not less than 88% and not more than 92% of their capacity or to 2.86 kg per litre of capacity. TU 34 Tanks shall not be filled to more than 0.84 kg per litre of capacity. TU 35 Empty fixed tank- wagons, empty demountable tanks and empty tank-containers, uncleaned, which have contained these substances are not subject to the requirements of RID if adequate measures have been taken to nullify any hazard. TU 36 The degree of filling according to 4.3.2.2, at the reference temperature of 15 °C, shall not exceed 93% of the capacity. TU 37 Carriage in tanks is limited to substances containing pathogens which are unlikely to be a serious hazard, and for which, while capable of causing serious infection on exposure, effective treatment and preventive measures are available and the risk of spread of infection is limited (i.e. moderate individual risk and low community risk). TU 38 Procedure following activation of energy absorption elements When energy absorption elements have undergone plastic deformation in accordance with 6.8.4, special provision TE 22, the tank-wagon or battery-wagon shall, after undergoing an inspection, be removed to a repair workshop immediately. If the loaded tank-wagon or loaded battery-wagon is capable of absorbing the shocks of a collision that might occur in normal conditions of rail transport, e.g. after the energy absorption buffers fitted have been replaced with normal buffers or after the damaged energy absorption elements have been temporarily blocked off, the tank-wagon or battery wagon may, after undergoing an inspection, be moved for the purpose of emptying and finally to a repair workshop. The information that the energy absorption elements are not working shall be made available with the tank-wagon or battery-wagon. (Reserved) TU 39 The suitability of the substance for carriage in tanks shall be demonstrated. The method to evaluate this suitability shall be approved by the competent authority. One method is test 8(d) in Test Series 8 (see Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part 1, sub-section 18.7). Substances shall not be allowed to remain in the tank for any period that could result in caking. Appropriate measures shall be taken to avoid accumulation and packing of substances in the tank (e.g. cleaning etc.). TU 40 Only to be carried in battery-wagons or MEGCs, the elements of which are composed of seamless receptacles. TU 41 (Reserved) TU 42 Tanks with a shell constructed of aluminium alloy, including those with a protective lining, shall only be used if the pH value of the substance is not less than 5.0 and not more than 8.0. TU 43 An empty uncleaned tank may be offered for carriage after the date of expiry of the last inspection of the lining for a period not to exceed three months beyond this date for the purposes of performing the next inspection of the lining prior to refilling (see special provision TT 2 in 6.8.4 (d)). Chapter 4.4 (Deleted) Chapter 4.5 Use of vacuum-operated waste tanks NOTE: For portable tanks and UN multiple elements gas containers (MEGCs), see Chapter 4.2; for tank-wagons , demountable tanks, tank-containers and tank swap bodies, with shells made of metallic materials, and battery -wagons an d multiple elements gas containers (MEGCs) other than UN MEGCs , see Chapter 4.3. 4.5.1 Use 4.5.1.1 Wastes consisting of substances in Classes 3, 4.1, 5.1, 6.1, 6.2, 8 and 9 may be carried in vacuum-operated waste tanks conforming to Chapter 6.10 if their carriage in tank-containers or tank swap bodies is permitted according to Chapter 4.3. Wastes consisting of substances assigned to tank code L4BH in Column (12) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 or to another tank code permitted under the hierarchy in 4.3.4.1.2 may be carried in vacuum-operated waste tanks wit h the letter "A" or "B" in part 3 of the tank code. 4.5.1.2 Non waste substances may be carried in vacuum-operated waste tanks under the same conditions as mentioned under 4.5.1.1. 4.5.2 Operation 4.5.2.1 The requirements of Chapter 4.3 except those of 4.3.2.2.4 and 4.3.2.3.3 apply to the carriage in vacuum-operated waste tanks and are supplemented by the requirements of 4.5.2.2 to 4.5.2. 6 below. 4.5.2.2 For carriage of liquids meeting the flash point criteria of Class 3, vacuum-operated waste tanks shall be filled through filling devices which discharge into the tank at a low level. Measures shall be taken to minimize the production of spray. 4.5.2.3 When discharging flammable liquids with a flash-point below 23 ° C by using air pressure, the maximum working pressure shall be 100 kPa (1 bar). 4.5.2.4 The use of tanks fitted with an internal piston operating as a compartment wall is allowed only when the substances on either side of the wall (piston) do not react dangerously with each other (see 4.3.2.3.6). 4.5.2.5 It shall be ensured that the stationary position of an existing suction boom does not change during normal conditions of transport. 4.5.2.6 When a vacuum pump/exhauster unit which may provide a source of ignition is used to fill or discharge flammable liquids, precautions shall be taken to avoid ignition of the substance or to avoid the propagation of the effects of the ignition outside the tank itself. Part 5 Consignment procedures Chapter 5.1 General provisions 5.1.1 Application and general provisions This Part sets forth the provisions for dangerous goods consignments relative to marking, labelling, and documentation, and, where appropriate, authorization of consignments and advance notifications. 5.1.2 Use of overpacks 5.1.2.1 (a) Unless marks and labels required in Chapter 5.2, except 5.2.1.3 to 5.2.1.6, 5.2.1.7.2 to 5.2.1.7.8 and 5.2.1.10, representative of all dangerous goods in the overpack are visible, the overpack shall be: ( i ) marked with the word "OVERPACK". The lettering of the "OVERPACK" mark shall be at least 12 mm high. The mark shall be in an official language of the country of origin and also , if that language is not English, French or German, in English, French or German, unless agreements, if any, concluded between the countries concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise; and (ii) labelled and marked with the UN number and other marks, as required for packages in Chapter 5.2 except 5.2.1.3 to 5.2.1.6, 5.2.1.7.2 to 5.2.1.7.8 and 5.2.1.10, for each item of dangerous goods contained in the overpack. Each applicable mark or label only needs to be applied once. Labelling of overpacks containing radioactive material shall be in accordance with 5.2.2.1.11. (b) Orientation arrows illustrated in 5.2.1. 10 shall be displayed on two opposite sides of overpacks containing packages which shall be marked in accordance with 5.2.1. 10 .1, unless the mark s remains visible. 5.1.2.2 Each package of dangerous goods contained in an overpack shall comply with all applicable provisions of RID. The intended function of each package shall not be impaired by the overpack. 5.1.2.3 Each package bearing package orientation marks as prescribed in 5.2.1. 10 and which is overpacked or placed in a large packaging shall be oriented in accordance with such marks. 5.1.2. 4 The prohibitions on mixed loading also apply to these overpacks. 5.1.3 Empty uncleaned packagings (including IBCs and large packagings ), tanks, wagons and containers for carriage in bulk 5.1.3.1 Empty uncleaned packagings (including IBCs and large packagings ), tanks (including tank-wagons, battery-wagons, demountable tanks, portable tanks, tank-containers, MEGCs), wagons and containers for carriage in bulk having contained dangerous goods of the different classes other than Class 7, shall be marked and labelled as if they were full. NOTE: For documentation, see Chapter 5.4. 5.1.3.2 Containers, tanks, IBCs, as well as other packagings and overpacks, used for the carriage of radioactive material shall not be used for the storage or carriage of other goods unless decontaminated below the level of 0.4 Bq /cm 2 for beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters and 0.04 Bq /cm 2 for all other alpha emitters. 5.1.4 Mixed packing When two or more dangerous goods are packed within the same outer packaging, the package shall be labelled and marked as required for each substance or article. If the same label is required for different goods, it only needs to be applied once. 5.1.5 General provisions for Class 7 5.1.5.1 Approval of shipments and notification 5.1.5.1.1 General In addition to the approval of package designs described in Chapter 6.4, multilateral shipment approval is also required in certain circumstances (5.1.5. 1 .2 and 5.1.5. 1 .3). In some circumstances it is also necessary to notify competent authorities of a shipment (5.1.5. 1 .4). 5.1.5.1.2 Shipment approvals Multilateral approval shall be required for: (a) the shipment of Type B(M) packages not conforming with the requirements of 6.4.7.5 or designed to allow controlled intermittent venting; (b) the shipment of Type B(M) packages containing radioactive material with an activity greater than 3000 A 1 or 3000 A 2 , as appropriate, or 1000 TBq , whichever is the lower; (c) the shipment of packages containing fissile materials if the sum of the criticality safety indexes of the packages in a single wagon or container exceeds 50 ; and (d) (Reserved) (e) the shipment of SCO-III , except that a competent authority may authorize carriage into or through its country without shipment approval, by a specific provision in its design approval (see 5.1.5. 2 .1). 5.1.5.1.3 Shipment approval by special arrangement A competent authority may approve provisions under which consignments that do not satisfy all the applicable requirements of RID may be carried under special arrangement (see 1.7.4). 5.1.5.1.4 Notifications Notification to competent authorities is required as follows: (a) Before the first shipment of any package requiring competent authority approval, the consignor shall ensure that copies of each applicable competent authority certificate applying to that package design have been submitted to the competent authority of the country of origin of the shipment and to the competent authority of each country through or into which the consignment is to be carried. The consignor is not required to await an acknowledgement from the competent authority, nor is the competent authority required to make such acknowledgement of receipt of the certificate; (b) For each of the following types of shipments: ( i ) Type C packages containing radioactive material with an activity greater than 3000 A 1 or 3000 A 2 , as appropriate, or 1000 TBq , whichever is the lower; (ii) Type B(U) packages containing radioactive material with an activity greater than 3000 A 1 or 3000 A 2 , as appropriate, or 1000 TBq , whichever is the lower; (iii) Type B(M) packages; (iv) Shipment under special arrangement; The consignor shall notify the competent authority of the country of origin of the shipment and the competent authority of each country through or into which the consignment is to be carried. This notification shall be in the possession of each competent authority prior to the commencement of the shipment, and preferably at least 7 days in advance; (c) The consignor is not required to send a separate notification if the required information has been included in the application for approval of shipment (see 6.4.23.2 ) ; (d) The consignment notification shall include: ( i ) sufficient information to enable the identification of the package or packages including all applicable certificate numbers and identification marks; (ii) information on the date of shipment, the expected date of arrival and proposed routeing; (iii) the name(s) of the radioactive material(s) or nuclide(s ); (iv) descriptions of the physical and chemical forms of the radioactive material, or whether it is special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material; and (v) the maximum activity of the radioactive contents during carriage expressed in becquerels ( Bq ) with an appropriate SI prefix symbol (see 1.2.2.1). For fissile material, the mass of fissile material (or of each fissile nuclide for mixtures when appropriate) in grams (g), or multiples thereof, may be used in place of activity. 5.1.5.2 Certificates issued by the competent authority 5.1.5.2.1 Certificates issued by the competent authority are required for the following: (a) Designs for: ( i ) special form radioactive material; (ii) low dispersible radioactive material; (iii) fissile material excepted under 2.2.7.2.3.5 (f ); (i v ) packages containing 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride; (v) packages containing fissile material unless excepted by 2.2.7.2.3.5, 6.4.11.2 or 6.4.11. 3 ; (v i ) Type B(U) packages and Type B(M) packages; (vi i ) Type C packages; (b) Special arrangements; (c) Certain shipments (see 5.1.5. 1 .2 ); (d) Determination of the basic radionuclide values referred to in 2.2.7.2.2.1 for individual radionuclides which are not listed in Table 2.2.7.2.2.1 (see 2.2.7.2.2.2 (a) ); (e) Alternative activity limits for an exempt consignment of instruments or articles (see 2.2.7.2.2.2 (b)). The certificates shall confirm that the applicable requirements are met, and for design approvals shall attribute to the design an identification mark. The certificates of approval for the package design and the shipment may be combined into a single certificate. Certificates and applications for these certificates shall be in accordance with the requirements in 6.4.23. 5.1.5.2.2 The consignor shall be in possession of a copy of each applicable certificate. 5.1.5.2.3 For package designs where it is not required that a competent authority issue a certificate of approval, the consignor shall, on request, make available for inspection by the competent authority, documentary evidence of the compliance of the package design with all the applicable requirements. 5.1.5.3 Determination of transport index (TI) and criticality safety index (CSI) 5.1.5.3.1 The transport index (TI) for a package, overpack or con tainer, or for unpackaged LSA-I , SCO-I or SCO-III , shall be the number derived in accordance with the following procedure: (a) Determine the maximum dose rate in units of millisieverts per hour (mSv/h) at a distance of 1 m from the external surfaces of the package, overpack, container, or unpackaged LSA-I , SCO-I or SCO-III . The value determined shall be multiplied by 100. For uranium and thorium ores and their concentrates, the maximum dose rate at any point 1 m from the external surface of the load may be taken as: 0.4 mSv/h for ores and physical concentrates of uranium and thorium; 0.3 mSv/h for chemical concentrates of thorium; 0.02 mSv/h for chemical concentrates of uranium, other than uranium hexafluoride; (b) For tanks, containers and unpackaged LSA-I , SCO-I and SCO-III , the value determined in step (a) above shall be multiplied by the appropriate factor from Table 5.1.5.3.1; (c) The value obtained in steps (a) and (b) above shall be rounded up to the first decimal place ( e.g. 1.13 becomes 1.2), except that a value of 0.05 or less may be considered as zero and the resulting number is the TI value . Table 5.1.5.3.1: Multiplication factors for tanks, containers and unpackaged LSA-I , SCO-I and SCO-III Size of load (a) Multiplication factor size of load ≤ 1 m 2 1 m 2 < size of load ≤ 5 m 2 5 m 2 < size of load ≤ 20 m 2 20 m 2 < size of load 1 2 3 10 (a) Largest cross-sectional area of the load being measured. 5.1.5.3.2 The TI for each rigid overpack, container or wagon shall be determined as the sum of the TIs of all the packages contained therein. For a shipment from a single consignor, the consignor may determine the TI by direct measurement of dose rate. The TI for a non-rigid overpack shall be determined only as the sum of the TIs of all the packages within the overpack. 5.1.5.3.3 The criticality safety index for each overpack or container shall be determined as the sum of the CSIs of all the packages contained. The same procedure shall be followed for determining the total sum of the CSIs in a consignment or aboard a wagon. 5.1.5.3.4 Packages , overpacks and containers shall be assigned to either category I-WHITE, II- YELLOW or III-YELLOW in accordance with the conditions specified in Table 5.1.5.3.4 and with the following requirements: (a) For a package , overpack or container , both the transport index and the surface dose rate conditions shall be taken into account in determining which is the appropriate category. Where the transport index satisfies the condition for one category but the surface dose rate satisfies the condition for a different category, the package , overpack or container shall be assigned to the higher category. For this purpose, category I-WHITE shall be regarded as the lowest category; (b) The TI shall be determined following the procedures specified in 5.1.5.3.1 and 5.1.5.3.2; (c) If the surface dose rate is greater than 2 mSv/h, the package or overpack shall be carried under exclusive use and under the provisions of 7.5.11, CW 33 (3.5) (a ); (d) A package carried under a special arrangement shall be assigned to category III-YELLOW except under the provisions of 5.1.5.3.5 ; (e) An overpack or container which contains packages carried under special arrangement shall be assigned to category III-YELLOW except under the provisions of 5.1.5.3.5 . Table 5.1.5.3.4: Categories of packages , overpacks and containers Conditions Category Transport index (TI) Maximum dose rate at any point on external surface 0 (a) Not more than 0.005 mSv/h I-WHITE More than 0 but not more than 1 (a) More than 0.005 mSv/h but not more than 0.5 mSv/h II-YELLOW More than 1 but not more than 10 More than 0.5 mSv/h but not more than 2 mSv/h III-YELLOW More than 10 More than 2 mSv/h but not more than 10 mSv/h III- YELLOW (b) (a) If the measured TI is not greater than 0.05, the value quoted may be zero in accordance with 5.1.5.3.1 (c). (b) Shall also be carried under exclusive use except for containers (see Table D in 7.5.11 CW 33 (3.3)) . 5.1.5.3.5 In all cases of international carriage of packages requiring competent authority approval of design or shipment , for which different approval types apply in the different countries concerned by the shipment, the categorization shall be in accordance with the certificate of the country of origin of design. 5.1.5.4 Specific provisions for excepted packages of radioactive material of Class 7 5.1.5.4.1 Excepted packages of radioactive material of Class 7 shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging with: (a) The UN number preceded by the letters "UN "; (b) An identification of either the consignor or consignee, or both; and (c) The permissible gross mass if this exceeds 50 kg. 5.1.5.4.2 The documentation requirements of Chapter 5.4 do not apply to excepted packages of radioactive material of Class 7, except that: (a) The UN number preceded by the letters "UN" and the name and address of the consignor and the consignee and, if relevant, the identification mark for each competent authority certificate of approval (see 5.4.1.2.5.1 (g)) shall be shown on a transport document such as a bill of lading, air waybill or CIM or CMR consignment note; (b) If relevant, the requirements of 5.4.1.2.5.1 (g), 5.4.1.2.5.3 and 5.4.1.2.5.4 shall apply; (c) The requirements of 5.4.2 and 5.4.4 shall apply. 5.1.5.4.3 The requirements of 5.2.1.7.8 and 5.2.2.1.11.5 shall apply if relevant. 5.1.5. 5 Summary of approval and prior notification requirements NOTE 1 : Before first shipment of any package requiring competent authority approval of the design, the consignor shall ensure that a copy of the approval certificate for that design has been submitted to the competent authority of each country en route (see 5.1.5. 1 .4 (a)). 2 : Notification required if contents exceed 3 x 10 3 A 1 , or 3 x 10 3 A 2 , or 1000 TBq ; (see 5.1.5. 1 .4 (b)). 3 : Multilateral approval of shipment required if contents exceed 3 x 10 3 A 1 , or 3 x 10 3 A 2 , or 1000 TBq , or if controlled intermittent venting is allowed (see 5.1.5. 1 ). 4 : See approval and prior notification provisions for the applicable package for carrying this material. Subject UN Number Competent a uthority approval required Consignor required to notify the competent authorities of the country of origin and of the countries en route (a) before each shipment Reference Country of origin Countries en route (a) Calculation of unlisted A 1 and A 2 values – Yes Yes No 2.2.7.2.2.2 (a), 5.1.5.2.1 (d) Excepted packages – package design – shipment 2908, 2909, 2910, 2911 No No No No No No – LSA material (b) and SCO (b) / Industrial packages types 1, 2 or 3, non fissile and fissile excepted – package design – shipment 2912, 2913, 3321, 3322 No No No No No No – Type A packages (b) , non fissile and fissile excepted – package design – shipment 2915, 3332 No No No No No No – Type B(U) packages (b) non fissile and fissile excepted – package design – shipment 2916 Yes No No No See Note 1 See Note 2 5.1.5.1.4 (b), 5.1.5.2.1 (a), 6.4.22.2 Type B(M) packages (b) , non fissile and fissile excepted – package design – shipment 2917 Yes See Note 3 Yes See Note 3 No Yes 5.1.5.1.4 (b), 5.1.5.2.1 (a), 5.1.5. 1 .2, 6.4.22.3 Type C packages (b) , non fissile and fissile excepted – package design – shipment 3323 Yes No No No See Note 1 See Note 2 5.1.5.1.4 (b), 5.1.5.2.1 (a), 6.4.22.2 Packages for fissile material – package design – shipment : sum of criticality safety indexes not more than 50 sum of criticality safety indexes greater than 50 2977, 3324, 3325, 3326, 3327, 3328, 3329, 3330, 3331, 3333 Yes (c) No (d) Yes Yes (c) No (d) Yes No See Note 2 See Note 2 5.1.5.2.1 (a), 5.1.5. 1 .2, 6.4.22.4 Special form radioactive material – design – shipment – See Note 4 Yes See Note 4 No See Note 4 No See Note 4 1.6.6.4 , 5.1.5.2.1 (a), 6.4.22.5 Low dispers i ble radioactive material – design – shipment – See Note 4 Yes See Note 4 No See Note 4 No See Note 4 5.1.5.2.1 (a), 6.4.22. 5 Packages containing 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride – design – shipment – See Note 4 Yes See Note 4 No See Note 4 No See Note 4 5.1.5.2.1 (a), 6.4.22.1 Special Arrangement – shipment 2919, 3331 Yes Yes Yes 1.7.4.2, 5.1.5.2.1 (b), 5.1.5.1.4 (b) Approved packages designs subjected to transitional measures See 1.6.6 See 1.6.6 See Note 1 1.6.6.2, 5.1.5.1.4 (b), 5.1.5.2.1 (a), 5.1.5. 1 .2 , 6.4.22.9 Alternative activity limits for an exempt consignment of instruments or articles – Yes Yes No 5.1.5.2.1 (e), 6.4.22.7 Fissile material excepted in accordance with 2.2.7.2.3.5 (f) – Yes Yes No 5.1.5.2.1 (a) (iii), 6.4.22.6 (a) Countries from, through or into which the consignment is carried. (b) If the radioactive contents are fissile material which is not excepted from the provisions for packages containing fissile material, then the provisions for fissile material packages apply (see 6.4.11). (c) Designs of packages for fissile material may also require approval in respect of one of the other items in the table. (d) Shipments may, however, require approval in respect of one of the other items in the table. Chapter 5.2 Marking and labelling 5.2.1 Marking of packages NOTE 1: For marks related to the construction, testing and approval of packagings , large packagings , pressure receptacles and IBCs, see Part 6. 2: In accordance with the GHS, a GHS pictogram not required by RID should only appear in carriage as part of a complete GHS label and not independently (see GHS 1.4.10.4.4). 5.2.1.1 Unless provided otherwise in RID, the UN number corresponding to the dangerous goods contained, preceded by the letters "UN" shall be clearly and durably marked on each package. The UN number and the letters "UN" shall be at least 12 mm high, except for packages of 30 litres capacity or less or of 30 kg maximum net mass and for cylinders of 60 litres water capacity or less when they shall be at least 6 mm in height and except for packages of 5 litres capacity or less or of 5 kg maximum net mass when they shall be of an appropriate size . In the case of unpackaged articles the mark shall be displayed on the article, on its cradle or on its handling, storage or launching device. 5.2.1.2 All package marks required by this Chapter: (a) shall be readily visible and legible; (b) shall be able to withstand open weather exposure without a substantial reduction in effectiveness. 5.2.1.3 Salvage packagings including large salvage packagings and salvage pressure receptacles shall additionally be marked with the word "SALVAGE". The lettering of the "SALVAGE" mark shall be at least 12 mm high. 5.2.1.4 Intermediate bulk containers of more than 450 litres capacity and large packagings shall be marked on two opposite sides. 5.2.1.5 Additional provisions for goods of Class 1 For goods of Class 1, packages shall, in addition, bear the proper shipping name as determined in accordance with 3.1.2. The mark, which shall be clearly legible and indelible, shall be in one or more languages, one of which shall be French, German or English, unless any agreements concluded between the countries concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise. For military consignments within the meaning of 1.5.2 carried as a full load , packages may be marked with the descriptions prescribed by the competent military authority instead of the proper shipping name. 5.2.1.6 Additional provisions for goods of Class 2 Refillable receptacles shall bear the following particulars in clearly legible and durable characters: (a) the UN number and the proper shipping name of the gas or mixture of gases, as determined in accordance with 3.1.2. In the case of gases classified under an N.O.S. entry, only the technical name of the gas has to be indicated in addition to the UN number. In the case of mixtures, not more than the two constituents which most predominantly contribute to the hazards have to be indicated; (b) for compressed gases filled by mass and for liquefied gases, either the maximum filling mass and the tare of the receptacle with fittings and accessories as fitted at the time of filling, or the gross mass; (c) the date (year) of the next periodic inspection. These particulars can either be engraved or indicated on a durable information disk or label attached on the receptacle or indicated by an adherent and clearly visible mark such as by printing or by any equivalent process. NOTE 1 : See also 6.2. 2 .7. 2 : For non refillable receptacles, see 6.2. 2 .8. 5.2.1.7 Special marking provisions for radioactive material 5.2.1.7.1 Each package shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging with an identification of either the consignor or consignee, or both. Each overpack shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the overpack with an identification of either the consignor or consignee, or both unless these marks of all packages within the overpack are clearly visible. 5.2.1.7.2 For each package, other than excepted packages, the UN number preceded by the letters "UN" and the proper shipping name shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging. The marking of excepted packages shall be as required by 5.1.5.4.1. 5.2.1.7.3 Each package of gross mass exceeding 50 kg shall have its permissible gross mass legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging. 5.2.1.7.4 Each package which conforms to: (a) a Type IP-1 package, a Type IP-2 package or a Type IP-3 package design shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging with "TYPE IP-1", "TYPE IP-2" or "TYPE IP-3" as appropriate; (b) a Type A package design shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging with "TYPE A "; (c) a Type IP-2 package, a Type IP-3 package or a Type A package design shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging with the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic of the country of origin of design and either the name of the manufacturer or other identification of the packaging specified by the competent authority of the country of origin of design. 5.2.1.7.5 Each package which conforms to a design approved under one or more of paragraphs 1.6.6.2.1, 5.1.5.2.1, 6.4.22.1 to 6.4.22.4 and 6.4.23.4 to 6.4.23.7 shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the package with the following information: (a) the identification mark allocated to that design by the competent authority; (b) a serial number to uniquely identify each packaging which conforms to that design; (c) "Type B(U)", "Type B(M)" or "Type C", in the case of a Type B(U), Type B(M) or Type C package design. 5.2.1.7.6 Each package which conforms to a Type B(U), Type B(M) or Type C package design shall have the outside of the outermost receptacle which is resistant to the effects of fire and water plainly marked by embossing, stamping or other means resistant to the effects of fire and water with the trefoil symbol shown in the figure below. Basic trefoil symbol with proportions based on a central circle of radius X. The minimum allowable size of X shall be 4 mm. Any mark on the package made in accordance with the requirements of 5.2.1.7.4 (a) and (b) and 5.2.1.7.5 (c) relating to the package type that does not relate to the UN number and proper shipping name assigned to the consignment shall be removed or covered. 5.2.1.7.7 Where LSA-I or SCO-I material is contained in receptacles or wrapping materials and is carried under exclusi ve use as permitted by 4.1.9.2.4 , the outer surface of these receptacles or wrapping materials may bear the mark "RADIOACTIVE LSA-I" or "RADIOACTIVE SCO-I", as appropriate. 5.2.1.7.8 In all cases of international carriage of packages requiring competent authority approval of design or shipment , for which different approval types apply in the different countries concerned by the shipment, marking shall be in accordance with the certificate of the country of origin of the design. 5.2.1.8 Special marking provisions for environmentally hazardous substances 5.2.1.8.1 Packages containing environmentally hazardous substances meeting the criteria of 2.2.9.1.10 shall be durably marked with the environmentally hazardous substance mark shown in 5.2.1.8.3 with the exception of single packagings and combination packagings where such single packagings or inner packagings of such combination packagings have: – a quantity of 5 l or less for liquids; or – a net mass of 5 kg or less for solids. 5.2.1.8.2 The environmentally hazardous substance mark shall be located adjacent to the marks required by 5.2.1.1. The requirements of 5.2.1.2 and 5.2.1.4 shall be met. 5.2.1.8.3 The environmentally hazardous substance mark shall be as shown in Figure 5.2.1.8.3. Figure 5.2.1.8.3 Environmentally hazardous substance mark The mark shall be in the form of a square set at an angle of 45° (diamond-shaped). The symbol (fish and tree) shall be black on white or suitable contrasting background. The minimum dimensions shall be 100 mm 100 mm and the minimum width of the line forming the diamond shall be 2 mm. If the size of the package so requires, the dimensions/line thickness may be reduced, provided the mark remains clearly visible. Where dimensions are not specified, all features shall be in approximate proportion to those shown. NOTE: The labelling provisions of 5.2.2 apply in addition to any requirement for packages to bear the environmentally hazardous substance mark. 5.2.1.9 Lithium battery mark 5.2.1.9.1 Packages containing lithium cells or batteries prepared in accordance with special provision 188 of Chapter 3.3 shall be marked as shown in Figure 5.2.1.9.2. 5.2.1.9.2 The mark shall indicate the UN number preceded by the letters "UN", i.e. "UN 3090" for lithium metal cells or batteries or "UN 3480" for lithium ion cells or batteries. Where the lithium cells or batteries are contained in, or packed with, equipment, the UN number preceded by the letters “UN”, i.e. "UN 3091" or "UN 3481" as appropriate shall be indicated. Where a package contains lithium cells or batteries assigned to different UN numbers, all applicable UN numbers shall be indicated on one or more marks. Figure 5.2.1.9.2 3194792 1830705 * 0 0 * 4671060 2266315 0 0 4681855 372110 Minimum dimension 100 mm 0 0 Minimum dimension 100 mm 4856480 1903730 0 0 4685665 2263140 0 0 4840605 111760 0 0 4678680 120650 0 0 3068320 1753235 * ** 0 0 * ** 1925320 121920 0 0 2527300 6985 Minimum dimension 100 mm 0 0 Minimum dimension 100 mm 4157345 135255 0 0 1927860 -1905 0 0 Lithium battery mark * Place for UN number(s) The mark shall be in the form of a rectangle or a square with hatched edging. The dimensions shall be a minimum of 1 0 0 mm wide 1 0 0 mm high and the minimum width of the hatching shall be 5 mm. The symbol (group of batteries, one damaged and emitting flame, above the UN number for lithium ion or lithium metal batteries or cells) shall be black on white or suitable contrasting background . The hatching shall be red. If the size of the package so requires, the dimensions may be reduced to not less than 10 0 mm wide 7 0 mm high. Where dimensions are not specified, all features shall be in approximate proportion to those shown. 5.2.1. 10 Orientation arrows 5.2.1. 10 .1 Except as provided in 5.2.1. 10 .2: (a) combination packagings having inner packagings containing liquids; (b) singl e packagings fitted with vents; (c) closed or open cryogenic receptacles intended for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases, and (d) machinery or apparatus containing liquid dangerous goods when it is required to ensure the liquid dangerous goods remain in their intended orientation (see special provision 301 of Chapter 3.3), shall be legibly marked with package orientation arrows which are similar to the illustration shown below or with those meeting the specifications of ISO 780: 1997 . The orientation arrows shall appear on two opposite vertical sides of the package with the arrows pointing in the correct upright direction. They shall be rectangular and of a size that is clearly visible commensurate with the size of the package. Depicting a rectangular border around the arrows is optional. Figure 5.2.1. 10 .1.1 Figure 5.2.1. 10 .1.2 or Two black or red arrows on white or suitable contrasting background. The rectangular border is optional. All features shall be in approximate proportion to those shown. 5.2.1. 10 .2 Orientation arrows are not required on: (a) Outer packagings containing pressure receptacles except closed or open cryogenic receptacles; (b) Outer packagings containing dangerous goods in inner packagings each containing not more than 120 ml, with sufficient absorbent material between the inner and outer packagings to completely absorb the liquid contents; (c) Outer packagings containing Class 6.2 infectious substances in primary receptacles each containing not more than 50 ml; (d) Type IP-2, T ype IP-3, T ype A, T ype B(U), Type B(M) or T ype C packages containing Class 7 radioactive material; (e) Outer packagings containing articles which are leak-tight in all orientations ( e.g. alcohol or mercury in thermometers, aerosols, etc.); or (f) Outer packagings containing dangerous goods in hermetically sealed inner packagings each containing not more than 500 ml. 5.2.1. 10 .3 Arrows for purposes other than indicating proper package orientation shall not be displayed on a package marked in accordance with this sub-section. 5.2.2 Labelling of packages NOTE: For labelling purposes, small containers shall be considered as packages. 5.2.2.1 Labelling provisions 5.2.2.1.1 For each article or substance listed in Table A of Chapter 3.2, the labels shown in Column (5) shall be affixed unless otherwise provided for by a special provision in Column (6). 5.2.2.1.2 Indelebile danger marks corresponding exactly to the prescribed models may be used instead of labels. 5.2.2.1.3 - 5.2.2.1.5 (Reserved) 5.2.2.1.6 Except as provided in 5.2.2.2.1.2, each label shall: (a) be affixed to the same surface of the package, if the dimensions of the package allow; for packages of Class 1 and 7, near the mark indicating the proper shipping name; (b) be so placed on the package that it is not covered or obscured by any part or attachment to the packaging or any other label or mark; and (c) be displayed next to each other when more than one label is required. Where a package is of such an irregular shape or small size that a label cannot be satisfactorily affixed, the label may be attached to the package by a securely affixed tag or other suitable means. 5.2.2.1.7 Intermediate bulk containers of more than 450 litres capacity and large packagings shall be labelled on two opposite sides. 5.2.2.1.8 Special requirements for the labelling of packages containing explosive substances or articles when carried as a military consignment For the carriage of military consignments within the meaning of 1.5.2, as a full load it shall not be necessary for packages to bear the danger labels prescribed in column (5) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, provided that the mixed loading requirements prescribed in 7.5.2 are observed on the basis of the information in the transport document , in accordance with 5.4.1.2.1 (f). 5.2.2.1.9 Special provisions for the labelling of self-reactive substances and organic peroxides (a) The label conforming to model No. 4.1 also implies that the product may be flammable and hence no label conforming to model No. 3 is required. In addition, a label conforming to model No. 1 shall be applied for self-reactive substances Type B, unless the competent authority has permitted this label to be dispensed with for a specific packaging because test data have proven that the self-reactive substance in such a packaging does not exhibit explosive behaviour. (b) The label conforming to model No. 5.2 also implies that the product may be flammable and hence no label conforming to model No. 3 is required. In addition, the following labels shall be applied: ( i ) A label conforming to model No. 1 for organic peroxides type B, unless the competent authority has permitted this label to be dispensed with for a specific packaging because test data have proven that the organic peroxide in such a packaging does not exhibit explosive behaviour; (ii) A label conforming to model No. 8 is required when Packing Group I or II criteria of Class 8 are met. For self-reactive substances and organic peroxides mentioned by name, the labels to be affixed are indicated in the list found in 2.2.41.4 and 2.2.52.4 respectively. 5.2.2.1.10 Special provisions for the labelling of infectious substances packages In addition to the label conforming to model No. 6.2, infectious substances packages shall bear any other label required by the nature of the contents. 5.2.2.1.11 Special provisions for the labelling of radioactive material 5.2.2.1.11.1 Except when enlarged labels are used in accordance with 5.3.1.1.3, each package, overpack and container containing radioactive material shall bear the labels conforming to the applicable models Nos. 7A, 7B or 7C, according to the appropriate category. Labels shall be affixed to two opposite sides on the outside of the package or overpack or on the outside of all four sides of a container or tank. In addition, each package, overpack and container containing fissile material, other than fissile material excepted under the provisions of 2.2.7.2.3.5 shall bear labels conforming to model No.7E; such labels, where applicable, shall be affixed adjacent to the labels conforming to the applicable model Nos. 7A, 7B or 7C. Labels shall not cover the marks specified in 5.2.1. Any labels which do not relate to the contents shall be removed or covered. 5.2.2.1.11.2 Each label conforming to the applicable model No. 7A, 7B or 7C shall be completed with the following information. (a) Contents: ( i ) except for LSA I material, the name(s) of the radionuclide(s) as taken from Table 2.2.7. 2 .2.1, using the symbols prescribed therein. For mixtures of radionuclides, the most restrictive nuclides shall be listed to the extent the space on the line permits. The group of LSA or SCO shall be shown following the name(s) of the radionuclide(s). The terms "LSA II", "LSA III", "SCO I" and "SCO II" shall be used for this purpose; (ii) for LSA I material, only the term "LSA I" is necessary; the name of the radionuclide is not necessary; (b) Activity: The maximum activity of the radioactive contents during carriage expressed in becquerels ( Bq ) with the appropriate SI prefix symbol (see 1.2.2.1). For fissile material, the total mass of fissile nuclides in units of grams (g), or multiples thereof, may be used in place of activity; (c) For overpacks and containers the "contents" and "activity" entries on the label shall bear the information required in (a) and (b) above, respectively, totalled together for the entire contents of the overpack or container except that on labels for overpacks or containers containing mixed loads of packages containing different radionuclides, such entries may read "See transport documents "; (d) Transport index: The number determined in accordance with 5.1.5.3.1 and 5.1.5.3.2 (except for category I-WHITE) . 5.2.2.1.11.3 Each label conforming to the model No. 7E shall be completed with the criticality safety index (CSI) as stated in the certificate of approval applicable in the countries through or into which the consignment is carried and issued by the competent authority or as specified in 6.4.11.2 or 6.4.11.3. 5.2.2.1.11.4 For overpacks and containers, the label conforming to model No. 7E shall bear the sum of the criticality safety indexes of all the packages contained therein. 5.2.2.1.11.5 In all cases of international carriage of packages requiring competent authority approval of design or shipment , for which different approval types apply in the different countries concerned by the shipment, labelling shall be in accordance with the certificate of the country of origin of design. 5.2.2.1.12 Special provisions for the labelling of articles containing dangerous goods carried as UN Nos. 3537, 3538, 3539, 3540, 3541, 3542, 3543, 3544, 3545, 3546, 3547 and 3548 5.2.2.1.12.1 Packages containing articles or articles carried unpackaged shall bear labels according to 5.2.2.1 reflecting the hazards established according to 2.1.5, except that for articles that in addition contain lithium batteries, a lithium battery mark or a label conforming to model No. 9A is not required. 5.2.2.1.12.2 When it is required to ensure articles containing liquid dangerous goods remain in their intended orientation, orientation arrows meeting 5.2.1.10.1 shall be affixed and visible on at least two opposite vertical sides of the package or of the unpackaged article where possible, with the arrows pointing in the correct upright direction. 5.2.2.2 Provisions for labels 5.2.2.2.1 Labels shall satisfy the provisions below and conform, in terms of colour, symbols and general format, to the models shown in 5.2.2.2.2. Corresponding models required for other modes of transport, with minor variations which do not affect the obvious meaning of the label, are also acceptable. NOTE: Where appropriate, labels in 5.2.2.2.2 are shown with a dotted outer boundary as provided for in 5.2.2.2.1.1. This is not required when the label is applied on a background of contrasting colour. 5.2.2.2.1.1 Labels shall be configured as shown in Figure 5.2.2.2.1.1. Figure 5.2.2.2.1.1 3341370 1669415 0 0 3210560 1237615 0 20000 3096260 812165 0 20000 Class /division label * The class or for Classes 4.1, 4.2 and 4.3, the figure "4" or for Classes 6.1 and 6.2, the figure "6", shall be shown in the bottom corner. ** Additional text/numbers/ symbol/ letters shall (if mandatory) or may (if optional) be shown in this bottom half. *** The class symbol or, for divisions 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6, the division number and for Model No 7E the word "FISSILE" shall be shown in this top half. 5.2.2.2.1.1.1 Labels shall be displayed on a background of contrasting colour, or shall have either a dotted or solid outer boundary line. 5.2.2.2.1.1.2 The label shall be in the form of a square set at an angle of 45° (diamond-shaped). The minimum dimensions shall be 100 mm 100 mm. There shall be a line inside the edge forming the diamond which shall be parallel and approximately 5 mm from the outside of that line to the edge of the label. The line inside the edge on the upper half of the label shall be the same colour as the symbol and the line inside the edge on the lower half of the label shall be the same colour as the class or division number in the bottom corner. Where dimensions are not specified, all features shall be in approximate proportion to those shown. 5.2.2.2.1.1.3 If the size of the package so requires the dimensions may be reduced proportionally , provided the symbols and other elements of th e label remain clearly visible. Dimensions for cylinders shall comply with 5.2.2.2.1.2. 5.2.2.2.1.2 Cylinders for Class 2 may, on account of their shape, orientation and securing mechanisms for carriage, bear labels representative of those specified in this section and the environmentally hazardous substance mark when appropriate , which have been reduced in size, according to the dimensions outlined in ISO 7225: 2005 , "Gas cylinders – Precautionary labels", for display on the non cylindrical par t (shoulder) of such cylinders. NOTE: When the diameter of the cylinder is too small to permit the display of the reduced size labels on the non-cylindrical upper part of the cylinder, the reduced sized labels may be displayed on the cylindrical part. Notwithstanding the provisions of 5.2.2.1.6, labels and the environmentally hazardous substance mark (see 5.2.1.8.3) may overlap to the extent provided for by ISO 7225 :2005 . However, in all cases, the primary hazard label and the figures appearing on any label shall remain fully visible and the symbols recognizable. Empty uncleaned pressure receptacles for gases of Class 2 may be carried with obsolete or damaged labels for the purposes of refilling or inspection as appropriate and the application of a new label in conformity with current regulations or for the disposal of the pressure receptacle. 5.2.2.2.1.3 With the exception of labels for Divisions 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6 of Class 1, the upper half of the label shall contain the pictorial symbol and the lower half shall contain: (a) For Classes 1, 2, 3, 5.1, 5.2, 7, 8 and 9, the class number; (b) For Classes 4.1, 4.2 and 4.3, the figure "4 "; (c) For Classes 6.1 and 6.2, the figure "6". However for label model No. 9A, the upper half of the label shall only contain the seven vertical stripes of the symbol and the lower half shall contain the group of batteries of the symbol and the class number. Except for label model No. 9A, t he labels may include text such as the UN number or words describing the hazard ( e.g. "flammable") in accordance with 5.2.2.2.1.5 provided the text does not obscure or detract from the other required label elements. 5.2.2.2.1.4 In addition, except for Divisions 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6, labels for Class 1 shall show in the lower half, above the class number, the division number and the compatibility group letter for the substance or article. Labels for Divisions 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6 shall show in the upper half the division number, and in the lower half the class number and the compatibility group letter. 5.2.2.2.1.5 On labels other than those for material of Class 7, the optional insertion of any text (other than the class number) in the space below the symbol shall be confined to particulars indicating the nature of the hazard and precautions to be taken in handling. 5.2.2.2.1.6 The symbols, text and numbers shall be clearly legible and indelible and shall be shown in black on all labels except for: (a) the Class 8 label, where the text (if any) and class number shall appear in white; (b) labels with entirely green, red or blue backgrounds wh ere they may be shown in white; (c) the Class 5.2 label, where the symbol may be shown in white; and ( d ) labels conforming to model No. 2.1 displayed on cylinders and gas cartridges for liquefied petroleum gases , where they may be shown in the background colour of the receptacle if adequate contrast is provided. 5.2.2.2.1.7 All labels shall be able to withstand open weather exposure without a substantial reduction in effectiveness. 5.2.2.2.2 Specimen labels Label model No . Division or Category Symbol and symbol colour Background Figure in bottom corner (and figure colour) Specimen labels Note Class 1 hazard: Explosive substances or articles 1 Divisions 1.1, 1.2, 1.3 Exploding bomb: black Orange 1 (black) ** Place for division – to be left blank if explosive is the subsidiary hazard * Place for compatibility group – to be left blank if explosive is the subsidiary hazard 1.4 Division 1.4 1.4: black Numerals shall be about 30 mm in height and be about 5 mm thick (for a label measuring 100 mm 100 mm). Orange 1 (black) * Place for compatibility group 1.5 Division 1.5 1.5: black Numerals shall be about 30 mm in height and be about 5 mm thick (for a label measuring 100 mm 100 mm). Orange 1 (black) * Place for compatibility group 1.6 Division 1.6 1.6: black Numerals shall be about 30 mm in height and be about 5 mm thick (for a label measuring 100 mm 100 mm) Orange 1 (black) * Place for compatibility group Label model No . Division or Category Symbol and symbol colour Background Figure in bottom corner (and figure colour) Specimen labels Note Class 2 hazard: Gases 2.1 Flammable gases Flame: black or white ( except as provided for in 5.2.2.2.1.6 (d)) Red 2 ( black or white) (except as provided for in 5.2.2.2.1.6 (d)) – 2.2 Non- flammable , non - toxic gases Gas cylinder: black or white Green 2 ( black or white) – 2.3 Toxic gases Skull and crossbones: black White 2 (black) – Class 3 hazard: Flammable liquids 3 – Flame: black or white Red 3 ( black or white) – Label model No . Division or Category Symbol and symbol colour Background Figure in bottom corner (and figure colour) Specimen labels Note Class 4.1 hazard: Flammable solids, self-reactive substances, polymerizing substances and solid desensitized explosives 4.1 – Flame: black White with 7 vertical red stripes 4 (black) – Class 4.2 hazard: Substances liable to spontaneous combustion 4.2 – Flame: black Upper half white, lower half red 4 (black) – Class 4.3 hazard: Substances which, in contact with water emit flammable gases 4.3 – Flame: black or white Blue 4 ( black or white) – Label model No . Division or Category Symbol and symbol colour Background Figure in bottom corner (and figure colour) Specimen labels Note Class 5.1 hazard: Oxidizing substances 5.1 – Flame over circle: black Yellow 5.1 (black) – Class 5.2 hazard: Organic peroxides 5.2 – Flame: black or white Upper half red, lower half yellow 5.2 (black) – Class 6.1 hazard: Toxic substances 6.1 – Skull and crossbones: black White 6 (black) – Class 6.2 hazard: Infectious substances 6.2 – Three crescents superimposed on a circle: black White 6 (black) The lower half of the label may bear the inscriptions: "INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCE" and " In the case of damage or leakage immediately notify Public Health Authority " in black colour. Label model No . Division or Category Symbol and symbol colour Background Figure in bottom corner (and figure colour) Specimen labels Note Class 7 hazard: Radioactive material 7A Category I – WHITE Trefoil: black White 7 (black) Text (mandatory), black in lower half of label: "RADIOACTIVE" "CONTENTS ..." "ACTIVITY ... "; One red vertical bar shall follow the word: "RADIOACTIVE". 7B Category II – YELLOW Trefoil: black Upper half yellow with white border, lower half white 7 (black) Text (mandatory), black in lower half of label: "RADIOACTIVE" "CONTENTS ..." "ACTIVITY ... "; In a black outlined box: "TRANSPORT INDEX "; Two red vertical bars shall follow the word: "RADIOACTIVE". 7C Category III – YELLOW Trefoil: black Upper half yellow with white border, lower half white 7 ( black Text (mandatory), black in lower half of label: "RADIOACTIVE" "CONTENTS ..." "ACTIVITY ... "; In a black outlined box: "TRANSPORT INDEX". Three red vertical bars shall follow the word: "RADIOACTIVE". 7E Fissile material – White 7 ( black Text (mandatory): black in upper half of label: "FISSILE". In a black outlined box in the lower half of label: "CRITICALITY SAFETY INDEX". Label model No . Division or Category Symbol and symbol colour Background Figure in bottom corner (and figure colour) Specimen labels Note Class 8 hazard: Corrosive substances 8 – Liquids, spilling from two glass vessels and attacking a hand and a metal: black Upper half white, lower half black with white border 8 (white) – Class 9 hazard: Miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles 9 – 7 vertical stripes in upper half: black White 9 underlined (black) – 9A – 7 vertical stripes in upper half: black; battery group, one broken and emitting flame in lower half: black White 9 underlined (black) – Chapter 5.3 Placarding and marking NOTE 1: For placarding and marking of containers, bulk containers, MEGCs, tank-containers and portable tanks for carriage in a transport chain including a maritime journey, see also 1.1.4.2.1. 2: In accordance with the GHS, a GHS pictogram not required by RID should only appear in carriage as part of a complete GHS label and not independently (see GHS 1.4.10.4.4). 5.3.1 Placarding 5.3.1.1 General provisions 5.3.1.1.1 As and when required in this section, placards shall be affixed to the exterior surface of large containers, bulk containers, MEGCs, tank-containers, portable tanks and wagons. Placards shall correspond to the labels required in Column (5) and, where appropriate, Column (6) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 for the dangerous goods contained in the large container, bulk container, MEGC, tank-container, portable tank or wagon and shall conform to the specifications given in 5.3.1.7. Placards shall be displayed on a background of contrasting colour, or shall have either a dotted or solid outer boundary line. The placards shall be weather-resistant and shall ensure durable marking throughout the entire journey. NOTE: For shunting model labels Nos. 13 and 15, see 5.3.4. 5.3.1.1.2 For Class 1, compatibility groups shall not be indicated on placards if the wagon or large container is carrying substances or articles belonging to two or more compatibility groups. Wagons or large containers carrying substances or articles of different divisions shall bear only placards conforming to the model of the most dangerous division in the order: 1.1 (most dangerous), 1.5, 1.2, 1.3, 1.6, 1.4 (least dangerous). When 1.5 D substances are carried with substances or articles of Division 1.2, the wagon or large container shall be placarded as Division 1.1. Placards are not required for the carriage of explosives of Division 1.4, compatibility group S. Wagons and large containers in which packages are loaded to be carried as military consignments, within the meaning of 1.5.2, and which in conformity with 5.2.2.1.8 do not bear danger labels, shall, in the case of wagons, bear on both sides and, in the case of large containers, bear on all four sides, the placards in accordance with column (5) of Table A of Chapter 3.2. 5.3.1.1.3 For Class 7, the primary hazard placard shall conform to model No. 7D as specified in 5.3.1.7.2. This placard is not required for wagons or large containers carrying excepted packages. Where both Class 7 labels and placards would be required to be affixed to wagons, large containers, MEGCs, tank-containers or portable tanks, an enlarged label corresponding to the required label of model No. 7A, 7B or 7C may be displayed instead of placard No.7D to serve both purposes. In that case, the dimensions shall be not less than 250 mm by 250 mm. 5.3.1.1.4 For Class 9 the placard shall correspond to the label model No. 9 as in 5.2.2.2.2; label model No. 9A shall not be used for placarding purposes. 5.3.1.1. 5 Large c ontainers, MEGCs, tank-containers, portable tanks or wagons containing goods of more than one class need not bear a subsidiary hazard placard if the hazard represented by that placard is already indicated by a primary or subsidiary hazard placard. 5.3.1.1. 6 Placards which do not relate to the dangerous goods being carried, or residues thereof, shall be removed or covered. 5.3.1.1. 7 When the placarding is affixed to folding panels, they shall be designed and secured so that they cannot unfold or come loose from the holder during carriage (especially as a result of impacts or unintentional actions). 5.3.1.2 Placarding of large containers, bulk containers, MEGCs, tank-containers and portable tanks The placards shall be affixed to both sides and at each end of the large container, bulk container, MEGC, tank-container or portable tank and to two opposite sides in the case of flexible bulk containers. When the tank-container or portable tank has multiple compartments and carries two or more dangerous goods, the appropriate placards shall be displayed along each side at the position of the relevant compartments and one placard of each model shown on each side at both ends. If all compartments have to bear the same placards, these placards need to be displayed only once along each side and at both ends of the tank-container or portable tank. 5.3.1.3 Placarding of wagons carrying large containers, bulk containers, MEGCs, tank-containers or portable tanks NOTE: For the placarding of carrying wagons used in piggyback transport, see 1.1.4.4. If the placards affixed to the large containers, bulk containers, MEGCs, tank-containers or portable tanks are not visible from outside the carrying wagons, the same placards shall also be affixed to both sides of the wagon. Otherwise, no placard need be affixed on the carrying wagon. 5.3.1.4 Placarding of wagons for carriage in bulk, tank-wagons, battery- wagons and wagons with demountable tanks Placards shall be affixed to both sides. When the tank-wagon or the demountable tank carried on the wagon has multiple compartments and carries two or more dangerous goods, the appropriate placards shall be displayed along each side at the position of the relevant compartments. I f all compartments have to bear the same placards, these placards need be displayed only once along each side. Where more than one placard is required for the same compartment, these placards shall be displayed adjacent to each other. 5.3.1.5 Placarding of wagons carrying packages only Placards shall be affixed to both sides. 5.3.1.6 Placarding of empty tank-wagons, battery-wagons, MEGCs, tank-containers, portable tanks and empty wagons and large containers for carriage in bulk Empty tank-wagons, wagons with demountable tanks, battery-wagons, MEGCs, tank-containers and portable tanks uncleaned and not degassed or decontaminated, and empty wagons and large containers for carriage in bulk, uncleaned or not decontaminated, shall continue to display the placards required for the previous load. 5.3.1.7 Specifications for placards 5.3.1.7.1 Except as provided in 5.3.1.7.2 for the Class 7 placard, and in 5.3.6.2 for the environmentally hazardous substance mark, a placard shall be configured as shown in Figure 5.3.1.7.1. Figure 5.3.1.7.1 Placard (except for Class 7) The placard shall be in the form of a square set at an angle of 45° (diamond-shaped). The minimum dimensions shall be 250 mm 250 mm (to the edge of the placard). The line inside the edge shall be parallel and 12.5 mm from the outside of that line to the edge of the placard. The symbol and line inside the edge shall correspond in colour to the label for the class or division of the dangerous goods in question. The class or division symbol/numeral shall be positioned and sized in proportion to those prescribed in 5.2.2.2 for the corresponding class or division of the dangerous goods in question. The placard shall display the number of the class or division (and for goods in Class 1, the compatibility group letter) of the dangerous goods in question in the manner prescribed in 5.2.2.2 for the corresponding label, in digits not less than 25 mm high. Where dimensions are not specified, all features shall be in approximate proportion to those shown. The deviations specified in 5.2.2.2.1, second sentence, 5.2.2.2.1.3, third sentence and 5.2.2.2.1.5 for danger labels also apply to placards. The requirements of 5.2.2.1.2 shall also apply. 5.3.1.7.2 The Class 7 placard shall be not less than 250 mm by 250 mm with a black line running 5 mm inside the edge and parallel with it and is otherwise as shown below (Model No. 7D). The number "7" shall not be less than 25 mm high. The background colour of the upper half of the placard shall be yellow and of the lower half white, the colour of the trefoil and the printing shall be black. The use of the word "RADIOACTIVE" in the bottom half is optional to allow the use of this placard to display the appropriate UN number for the consignment. Placard for radioactive material of Class 7 (No.7D) Symbol (trefoil): black; Background: upper half yellow with white border, lower half white; The lower half shall show the word "RADIOACTIVE" or alternatively the appropriate UN Number , and the figure "7" in the bottom corner. 5.3.1.7.3 For tank-containers and portable tanks with a capacity of not more than 3 m 3 , placards may be replaced by labels conforming to 5.2.2.2. If these labels are not visible from outside the carrying wagon, placards according to 5.3.1.7.1 shall also be affixed to both sides of the wagon. 5.3.1.7.4 If the size and construction of the wagon are such that the available surface area is insufficient to affix the prescribed placards, their dimensions may be reduced to a minimum of 150 mm by 150 mm. In this case, the other dimensions prescribed for the symbols, lines, figures and letters do not apply. 5.3.2 Orange-coloured plate marking 5.3.2.1 General orange-coloured plate marking provisions NOTE: For the orange-coloured plate marking of carrying wagons used in piggyback transport, see 1.1.4.4. 5.3.2.1.1 A rectangular, orange-coloured plate conforming to 5.3.2.2.1 , and so as to be clearly visible, shall be affixed on each side of a – tank-wagon, – battery-wagon, – wagon with demountable tanks, – tank-container, – MEGC, – portable tank, – wagon for carriage in bulk, – small or large container for carriage in bulk, – wagons and containers carrying packaged radioactive material with a single UN number required to be carried under exclusive use and no other dangerous goods used for the carriage of goods for which a hazard identification number is given in column (20) of Table A of Chapter 3.2. This plate shall also be affixed on both sides of cargo transport units in which lithium batteries are installed (UN 3536). This plate may also be affixed on both sides of full loads made up of packages containing one and the same substance or article . 5.3.2.1.2 These orange-coloured plates shall bear the hazard identification number and the UN number, in accordance with 5.3.2.2.2, prescribed respectively in columns (20) and (1) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 for the substance carried. When a number of different substances are carried in a tank-wagon, battery-wagon, wagon with demountable tank, tank-container, MEGC or portable tank in separate tanks or separate compartments of the same tank, the consignor shall affix the orange-coloured plate as required in 5.3.2.1.1, bearing the appropriate numbers, on each side of the tanks or tank compartments, parallel to the longitudinal axis of the wagon, tank-container or portable tank and so as to be clearly visible. 5.3.2.1.3 (Reserved) 5.3.2.1.4 (Reserved) 5.3.2.1.5 If the orange-coloured plates prescribed in 5.3.2.1.1 affixed to the containers, bulk containers, tank-containers, MEGCs or portable tanks are not clearly visible from outside the carrying wagon, the same plates shall also be affixed to both sides of the wagon. NOTE: This paragraph need not be applied to wagons carrying containers for carriage in bulk, tanks and MEGCs with a maximum capacity of 3 000 litres. 5.3.2.1.6 (Deleted) 5.3.2.1.7 The requirements of 5.3.2.1.1 to 5.3.2.1.5 are also applicable to empty – tank-wagons, – battery-wagons, – wagons with demountable tanks, – tank-containers, – portable tanks and – MEGCs, uncleaned, not degassed or not decontaminated, as well as to empty wagons, large containers and small containers for carriage in bulk, uncleaned or not decontaminated. 5.3.2.1.8 Orange-coloured plates which do not relate to dangerous goods carried, or residues thereof, shall be removed or covered. If plates are covered, the covering shall be total and remain effective after 15 minutes ' engulfment in fire. 5.3.2.2 Specifications for the orange-coloured plates 5.3.2.2.1 The orange-coloured plates may be reflectorized and shall be of 40 cm base and of 30 cm high; they shall have a black border of 15 mm wide. The material used shall be weather-resistant and ensure durable marking. The plate shall not become detached from its mount in the event of 15 minutes ' engulfment in fire. It shall remain affixed irrespective of the orientation of the wagon. The orange-coloured plates may be replaced by a self-adhesive sheet, by paint or by any other equivalent process. This alternative marking shall conform to the specifications set in this sub-section except for the provisions concerning resistance to fire mentioned in 5.3.2.2.1 and 5.3.2.2.2. NOTE: The colour of the orange plates in conditions of normal use should have chromaticity co-ordinates lying within the area on the chromaticity diagram formed by joining the following co-ordinates Chromaticity co-ordinates of points at the corners of the area on the chromaticity diagram x y 0,52 0,38 0,52 0,40 0,578 0,422 0,618 0,38 Luminance factor of non- reflectorized colour: β 0.22, of reflectorized colour: β > 0.12. Reference centre E, standard illuminant C, normal incidence 45°, viewed at 0°. Co-efficient of reflex luminous intensity at an angle of illumination of 5°, viewed at 0.2°: not less than 20 candelas per lux per m 2 . 5.3.2.2.2 The hazard identification number and the UN number shall consist of black digits 100 mm high and of 15 mm stroke thickness. The hazard-identification number shall be inscribed in the upper part of the plate and the UN number in the lower part; they shall be separated by a horizontal black line, 15 mm in stroke width, extending from side to side of the plate at mid-height (see 5.3.2.2.3). The hazard identification number and the UN number shall be indelible and shall remain legible after 15 minutes ' engulfment in fire. Interchangeable numbers and letters on plates presenting the hazard identification number and the UN number shall remain in place during carriage and irrespective of the orientation of the wagon. 5.3.2.2.3 Example of orange-coloured plate with hazard identification number and UN number 673100 5080 10 cm 10 cm 33 40 cm 1088 30 cm 0 0 10 cm 10 cm 33 40 cm 1088 30 cm 4703445 155575 Hazard Identification number (2 or 3 figures preceded where appropriate by the letter "X", see 5.3.2.3) 0 0 Hazard Identification number (2 or 3 figures preceded where appropriate by the letter "X", see 5.3.2.3) 4703445 35560 UN number UN number (4 figures) 0 0 UN number UN number (4 figures) Background orange. Border, horizontal line and figures black, 15 mm thickness. 5.3.2.2.4 The permitted tolerances for dimensions specified in this sub-section are ± 10%. 5.3.2.2.5 When the orange-coloured plate or the alternative marking referred to in 5.3.2.2.1 is affixed to folding panels, they shall be designed and secured so that they cannot unfold or come loose from the holder during carriage (especially as a result of impacts or unintentional actions). 5.3.2.3 Meaning of hazard identification numbers 5.3.2.3.1 For substances of classes 2 to 9 t he hazard identification number consists of two or three figures. In general, the figures indicate the following hazards: 2 Emission of gas due to pressure or to chemical reaction 3 Flammability of liquids (vapours) and gases or self-heating liquid 4 Flammability of solids or self-heating solid 5 Oxidizing (fire-intensifying) effect 6 Toxicity or risk of infection 7 Radioactivity 8 Corrosivity 9 Risk of spontaneous violent reaction NOTE: The risk of spontaneous violent reaction within the meaning of figure 9 include the possibility following from the nature of a substance of a risk of explosion, disintegration and polymerization reaction following the release of considerable heat or flammable and/or toxic gases. Doubling of a figure indicates an intensification of that particular hazard. Where the hazard associated with a substance can be adequately indicated by a single figure, this is followed by zero. The following combinations of figures, however, have a special meaning: 22, 323, 333, 362, 382, 423, 44, 446, 462, 482, 539, 606, 623, 642, 823, 842, 90 and 99, see 5.3.2.3.2 below. If a hazard identification number is prefixed by the letter "X", this indicates that the substance will react dangerously with water. For such substances, water may only be used by approval of experts. For substances and articles of Class 1, the classification code in accordance with column (3b) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 shall be used as the hazard identification number. The classification code consists of: – the division number in accordance with 2.2.1.1.5 and – the compatibility group letter in accordance with 2.2.1.1.6. 5.3.2.3.2 The hazard identification numbers listed in Column (20) of table A of Chapter 3.2 have the following meanings: 20 A sphyxiant gas or gas with no subsidiary hazard 22 R efrigerated liquefied gas, asphyxiant 223 R efrigerated liquefied gas, flammable 225 R efrigerated liquefied gas, oxidizing (fire intensifying) 23 F lammable gas 238 G as, flammable corrosive 239 F lammable gas, which can spontaneously lead to violent reaction 25 O xidizing (fire-intensifying) gas 26 T oxic gas 263 T oxic gas, flammable 265 T oxic gas, oxidizing (fire-intensifying) 268 T oxic gas, corrosive 28 G as, corrosive 285 G as, corrosive, oxidizing 30 – F lammable liquid (flash-point between 23 ° C and 6 0 ° C, inclusive) or – F lammable liquid or solid in the molten state with a flash-point above 6 0 °C, heated to a temperature equal to or above its flash-point, or – S elf-heating liquid 323 F lammable liquid which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases X323 F lammable liquid which reacts dangerously with water, emitting flammable gases 33 H ighly flammable liquid (flash-point below 23 ° C) 333 P yrophoric liquid X333 P yrophoric liquid which reacts dangerously with water NOTEREF _Ref20171643 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 3 336 H ighly flammable liquid, toxic 338 H ighly flammable liquid, corrosive X338 H ighly flammable liquid, corrosive, which reacts dangerously with water NOTEREF _Ref20171643 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 3 339 H ighly flammable liquid which can spontaneously lead to violent reaction 36 F lammable liquid (flash-point between 23 ° C and 60 ° C, inclusive), slightly toxic, or self-heating liquid, toxic 362 F lammable liquid, toxic, which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases X362 F lammable liquid toxic, which reacts dangerously with water, emitting flammable gases NOTEREF _Ref20171643 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 3 368 F lammable liquid, toxic, corrosive 38 F lammable liquid (flash-point between 23 ° C and 6 0 ° C, inclusive), slightly corrosive or self-heating liquid, corrosive 382 F lammable liquid, corrosive, which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases X382 F lammable liquid, corrosive, which reacts dangerously with water, emitting flammable gases NOTEREF _Ref20171643 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 3 39 F lammable liquid, which can spontaneously lead to violent reaction 40 F lammable solid, or self-reactive substance, or self-heating substance , or polymerizing substance 423 Solid which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases, or flammable solid which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases, or self-heating solid which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases X423 Solid which reacts dangerously with water, emitting flammable gases NOTEREF _Ref20171643 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 3 , or flammable solid which reacts dangerously with water, emitting flammable gases NOTEREF _Ref20171643 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 3 , or self-heating solid which reacts dangerously with water, emitting flammable gases NOTEREF _Ref20171643 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 3 43 S pontaneously flammable (pyrophoric) solid X432 Spontaneously flammable (pyrophoric) solid which reacts dangerously with water, emitting flammable gases NOTEREF _Ref20171643 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 3 44 F lammable solid, in the molten state at an elevated temperature 446 F lammable solid, toxic, in the molten state, at an elevated temperature 46 F lammable or self-heating solid, toxic 462 T oxic solid which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases X462 S olid which reacts dangerously with water, emitting toxic gases NOTEREF _Ref20171643 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 3 48 F lammable or self-heating solid, corrosive 482 C orrosive solid which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases X482 S olid which reacts dangerously with water, emitting corrosive gases NOTEREF _Ref20171643 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 3 50 O xidizing (fire-intensifying) substance 539 F lammable organic peroxide 55 S trongly oxidizing (fire-intensifying) substance 556 S trongly oxidizing (fire-intensifying) substance, toxic 558 S trongly oxidizing (fire-intensifying) substance, corrosive 559 S trongly oxidizing (fire-intensifying) substance, which can spontaneously lead to violent reaction 56 O xidizing substance (fire-intensifying), toxic 568 O xidizing substance (fire-intensifying), toxic, corrosive 58 O xidizing substance (fire-intensifying), corrosive 59 O xidizing substance (fire-intensifying) which can spontaneously lead to violent reaction 60 T oxic or slightly toxic substance 606 I nfectious substance 623 T oxic liquid, which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases 63 T oxic substance, flammable (flash-point between 23 ° C and 6 0 ° C, inclusive) 638 T oxic substance, flammable (flash-point between 23 °C and 6 0 ° C, inclusive), corrosive 639 T oxic substance, flammable (flash-point not above 6 0 ° C) which can spontaneously lead to violent reaction 64 T oxic solid, flammable or self-heating 642 T oxic solid, which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases 65 T oxic substance, oxidizing (fire-intensifying) 66 H ighly toxic substance 663 H ighly toxic substance, flam mable (flash-point not above 6 0 ° C) 664 H ighly toxic solid, flammable or self-heating 665 H ighly toxic substance, oxidizing (fire-intensifying) 668 H ighly toxic substance, corrosive X668 highly toxic substance, corrosive, which reacts dangerously with water NOTEREF _Ref20171643 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 3 669 H ighly toxic substance which can spontaneously lead to violent reaction 68 T oxic substance, corrosive 687 Toxic substance, corrosive, radioactive 69 T oxic or slightly toxic substance, which can spontaneously lead to violent reaction 70 R adioactive material 768 Radioactive material, toxic, corrosive 78 R adioactive material, corrosive 80 C orrosive or slightly corrosive substance X80 C orrosive or slightly corrosive substance, which reacts dangerously with water NOTEREF _Ref20171643 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 3 823 C orrosive liquid which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases 83 C orrosive or slightly corrosive substance, flammable (flash-point between 23 ° C and 6 0 ° C, inclusive) X83 C orrosive or slightly corrosive substance, flammable ( flash-point between 23 ° C and 6 0 ° C, inclusive), which reacts dangerously with water NOTEREF _Ref20171643 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 3 836 Corrosive or slightly corrosive substance, flammable (flash-point between 23 °C and 60 °C, inclusive) and toxic 839 C orrosive or slightly corrosive substance, flammable (fl ash-point between 23 °C and 6 0 ° C inclusive) which can spontan eously lead to violent reaction X839 C orrosive or slightly corrosive substance, fl ammable ( flash-point between 23 °C and 6 0 ° C inclusive), which can spontaneously lead to violent reaction and which reacts dangerously with water NOTEREF _Ref20171643 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 3 84 C orrosive solid, flammable or self-heating 842 C orrosive solid which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases 85 C orrosive or slightly corrosive substance, oxidizing (fire-intensifying) 856 C orrosive or slightly corrosive substance, oxidizing (fire-intensifying) and toxic 86 C orrosive or slightly corrosive substance, toxic 87 Corrosive substance, radioactive 88 H ighly corrosive substance X88 H ighly corrosive substance, which reacts dangerously with water NOTEREF _Ref20171643 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 3 883 H ighly corrosive substance, flammable (flash-point between 23 ° C and 6 0 ° C inclusive) 884 H ighly corrosive solid, flammable or self-heating 885 H ighly corrosive substance, oxidizing (fire-intensifying) 886 H ighly corrosive substance, toxic X886 H ighly corrosive substance, toxic, which reacts dangerously with water NOTEREF _Ref20171643 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 3 89 C orrosive or slightly corrosive substance, which can spontaneously lead to violent reaction 90 E nvironmentally hazardous substance; miscellaneous dangerous substances 99 M iscellaneous dangerous substance carried at an elevated temperature. 5.3.3 Elevated temperature substance mark Tank-wagons, tank-containers, portable tanks, special wagons or large containers or specially equipped wagons or large containers containing a substance that is carried or handed over for carriage in a liquid state at or above 100 °C or in a solid state at or above 240 °C shall bear on both sides for wagons, and on both sides and at each end for large containers, tank-containers and portable tanks, the mark shown in Figure 5.3.3. Figure 5.3.3 Mark for carriage at elevated temperature The mark shall be an equilateral triangle. The colour of the mark shall be red. The minimum dimension of the sides shall be 250 mm. For tank-containers and portable tanks with a capacity of not more than 3 000 litres and with an available surface area insufficient to affix the prescribed marks, the minimum dimensions of the sides may be reduced to 100 mm. Where dimensions are not specified, all features shall be in approximate proportion to those shown. The mark shall be weather-resistant and shall ensure durable marking throughout the entire journey. 5.3.4 Shunting labels conforming to Models 13 and 15 5.3.4.1 General provisions The general provisions of 5.3.1.1.1 and 5.3.1.1. 6 and of 5.3.1.3 to 5.3.1.6 shall also apply to the shunting labels conforming to models Nos. 13 and 15. Instead of the shunting labels, indelible shunting marks corresponding exactly to the prescribed models may be affixed. Th e s e may simply consist of the red triangle with a black exclamation mark (at least 100 mm base by 70 mm height). 5.3.4.2 Description of shunting labels conforming to Models 13 and 15 The shunting labels conforming to Models 13 and 15 shall have the shape of a rectangle not smaller than A7 format (74 mm x 105 mm). No. 13 S hunt with care No. 15 L oose shunting or hump shunting forbidden. Shall be accompanied by a motive power unit. Shall not bump, or be bumped by, other wagons. -19685 38100 !!!!!!!!!!! ! 105 mm minimum 74 mm minimum 0 0 !!!!!!!!!!! ! 105 mm minimum 74 mm minimum 85725 -6350 ! 105 mm minimum 74 mm minimum ! ! 0 0 ! 105 mm minimum 74 mm minimum ! ! red triangle with an exclamation mark in black on white background three triangles, red, with black exclamation mark 5.3.5 Orange band Tank wagons intended for the carriage of liquefied, refrigerated liquefied or dissolved gases shall be marked with an unbroken, orange , non-reflectorized band, about 30cm wide, encircling the shell at mid-height. 5.3.6 Environmentally hazardous substance mark 5.3.6.1 When a placard is required to be displayed in accordance with the provisions of 5.3.1, large containers, bulk containers, MEGCs, tank-containers, portable tanks and wagons containing environmentally hazardous substances meeting the criteria of 2.2.9.1.10 shall be marked with the environmentally hazardous substance mark shown in 5.2.1.8.3. This does not apply to the exceptions listed in 5.2.1.8.1. 5.3.6.2 The environmentally hazardous substance mark for large containers, bulk containers, MEGCs, tank-containers, portable tanks and wagons shall be as described in 5.2.1.8.3 and Figure 5.2.1.8.3, except that the minimum dimensions shall be 250 mm 250 mm. For tank-containers and portable tanks with a capacity of not more than 3 000 litres and with an available surface area insufficient to affix the prescribed marks, the minimum dimensions may be reduced to 100 mm 100 mm. The other provisions of section 5.3.1 concerning placards shall apply mutatis mutandis to the mark. Chapter 5.4 Documentation 5.4.0 General 5.4.0.1 Unless otherwise specified, any carriage of goods governed by RID shall be accompanied by the documentation prescribed in this Chapter, as appropriate. 5.4.0.2 The use of electronic data processing (EDP) or electronic data interchange (EDI) techniques as an aid to or instead of paper documentation is permitted, provided that the procedures used for the capture, storage and processing of electronics data meet the legal requirements as regards the evidential value and availability of data during transport in a manner at least equivalent to that of paper documentation. 5.4.0.3 When the dangerous goods transport information is given to the carrier by EDP or EDI techniques, the consignor shall be able to give the information to the carrier as a paper document, with the information in the sequence required by this Chapter. 5.4.1 Dangerous goods transport document and related information 5.4.1.1 General information required in the transport document 5.4.1.1.1 The transport document(s) shall contain the following information for each dangerous substance, material or article offered for carriage: (a) the UN number preceded by the letters "UN"; (b) t he proper shipping name supplemented, when applicable (see 3.1.2.8.1) with the technical name in brackets (see 3.1.2.8.1.1), as determined in accordance with 3.1.2 ; (c) – for substances and articles of Class 1: the classification code given in Column (3 b) of Table A in Chapter 3.2. When, in Column (5) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, label model numbers other than 1, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 13 or 15 are given, these label model numbers, in brackets, shall follow the classification code; – for radioactive material of Class 7: the Class number "7"; NOTE: For radioactive material with a subsidiary hazard , see also special provision 172 in Chapter 3.3 . – for lithium batteries of UN numbers 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481: the Class number "9"; – for other substances and articles : the label model numbers, apart from the shunting label conforming to model number 13, given in Column (5) of Table A in Chapter 3.2 or applicable according to a special provision referred to in Column (6) . When more than one label model numbers are given, the numbers following the first one shall be given in brackets. For substances and articles for which no label model is given in Column (5) of Table A in Chapter 3.2, their class according to Column (3a) shall be given instead; (d) where assigned, the packing group for the substance which may be preceded by the letters "PG" (e.g. "PG II"), or the initials corresponding to the words "Packing Group" in the languages used according to 5.4.1.4.1; NOTE: For radioactive material of Class 7 with subsidiary hazards , see special provision 172 ( d ) in Chapter 3.3. (e) the number and a description of the packages when applicable (see also CIM Article 7 § 1 ( h ) and ( i ) ); UN packaging codes may only be used to supplement the description of the kind of package (e.g. one box (4G)); NOTE: The number, type and capacity of each inner packaging within the outer packaging of a combination packaging is not required to be indicated. (f) the total quantity of each type of dangerous goods bearing a different UN number, proper shipping name or packing group (as a volume or as a gross mass, or as a net mass as appropriate); NOTE 1: (Reserved) 2: For dangerous goods in machinery or equipment specified in RID, the quantity indicated shall be the total quantity of dangerous goods contained therein in kilograms or litres as appropriate. (g) the name and address of the consignor (see also CIM Article 7 § 1 ( b )); (h) the name and address of the consignee(s) (see also CIM Article 7 § 1 ( g )); ( i ) a declaration as required by the terms of any special agreement; (j) when a marking in accordance with 5.3.2.1 is prescribed, the hazard identification number shall also be inscribed before the letters "UN" preceding the UN number (see paragraph (a)). The hazard identification number shall also be shown where full loads made up of packages containing one and the same substance or article are marked in accordance with 5.3.2.1. The location and order in which the elements of information required appear in the transport document is left optional, except that (a), (b), (c) and (d) shall be shown in the order listed above (i.e. (a), (b), (c), (d)) with no information interspersed, except as provided in RID. Examples of such permitted dangerous goods descriptions are: "UN 1098 ALLYL ALCOHOL, 6.1 (3), I" or " UN 1098 ALLYL ALCOHOL, 6.1 (3), PG I" When a marking in accordance with 5.3.2.1 is required, (a), (b), (c), (d), and (j) shall be shown in the sequence (j), (a), (b), (c), (d) with no information interspersed, except as provided in RID. Examples of such permitted dangerous goods descriptions taking account of the marking in accordance with 5.3.2.1 are: “663, UN 1098 ALLYL ALCOHOL, 6.1(3), I” or “663, UN 1098 ALLYL ALCOHOL, 6.1(3), PG I” . 5.4.1.1.2 The information required on a transport document shall be legible. Although upper case is used in Chapter 3.1 and in Table A in Chapter 3.2 to indicate the elements which shall be part of the proper shipping name, and although upper and lower case are used in this Chapter to indicate the information required in the transport document , the use of upper or of lower case for entering the information in the transport document is left optional. 5.4.1.1.3 Special provisions for wastes 5.4.1.1.3.1 If waste containing dangerous goods (other than radioactive wastes) is being carried, the proper shipping name shall be preceded by the word "WASTE", unless this term is part of the proper shipping name, e.g. – "UN 1230 WASTE METHANOL, 3 (6.1), II" or – "UN 1230 WASTE METHANOL, 3 (6.1), PG II" or – "UN 1993 WASTE FLAMMABLE LIQUID, N.O.S. (toluene and ethyl alcohol), 3, II" or – "UN 1993 WASTE FLAMMABLE LIQUID, N.O.S. (toluene and ethyl alcohol), 3, PG II" or when a marking in accordance with 5.3.2.1 is prescribed: – "336, UN 1230 WASTE METHANOL, 3 (6.1), II" or – "336, UN 1230 WASTE METHANOL, 3 (6.1), PG II" . If the provision for waste as set out in 2.1.3.5.5 is applied, the following shall be added to the dangerous goods description required in 5.4.1.1.1 (a) to (d) : "WASTE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 2.1.3.5.5" (e.g. "UN 3264, CORROSIVE LIQUID, ACIDIC, INORGANIC, N.O.S., 8, II, WASTE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 2.1.3.5.5"). The technical name, as prescribed in Chapter 3.3, special provision 274, need not be added. 5.4.1.1.3.2 If it is not possible to measure the exact quantity of the waste at the place of loading, the quantity according to 5.4.1.1.1 (f) may be estimated for the following cases under the following conditions: (a) For packagings , a list of packagings including the type and the nominal volume is added to the transport document; (b) For containers, the estimation is based on their nominal volume and other available information (e.g. type of waste, average density, degree of filling); (c) For vacuum-operated waste tanks, the estimation is justified (e.g. by means of an estimation provided by the consigner or by wagon equipment). Such estimation of the quantity is not allowed for: – Exemptions for which the exact quantity is essential (e.g. 1.1.3.6); – Waste containing substances mentioned in 2.1.3.5.3 or substances of Class 4.3; – Tanks other than vacuum-operated waste tanks. A statement shall be included in the transport document, as follows: "QUANTITY ESTIMATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH 5.4.1.1.3.2". 5.4.1.1.4 (Deleted) 5.4.1.1.5 Special provisions for salvage packagings including large salvage packagings and salvage pressure receptacles When dangerous goods are carried in salvage packagings in accordance with 4.1.1.19, including large salvage packagings , larger size packagings or large packagings of appropriate type and performance level to be used as a salvage packaging, the words " SALVAGE PACKAGING" shall be added after the description of the goods in the transport document. When dangerous goods are carried in salvage pressure receptacles in accordance with 4.1.1.20, the words " SALVAGE PRESSURE RECEPTACLE " shall be added after the description of the goods in the transport document. 5.4.1.1.6 Special provisions for empty means of containment, uncleaned 5.4.1.1.6.1 For empty means of containment, uncleaned, which contain the residue of dangerous goods of classes other than Class 7, the words "EMPTY, UNCLEANED" or "RESIDUE, LAST CONTAINED" shall be indicated before or after the dangerous goods description specified in 5.4.1.1.1 (j) and (a) to (d) . Moreover, 5.4.1.1.1 (f) does not apply. 5.4.1.1.6.2 The special provision of 5.4.1.1.6.1 may be replaced with the provisions of 5.4.1.1.6.2.1 or 5.4.1.1.6.2.2, as appropriate. 5.4.1.1.6.2.1 For empty packagings , uncleaned, which contain the residue of dangerous goods of classes other than Class 7, including empty uncleaned receptacles for gases with a capacity of not more than 1000 litres, the particulars according to 5.4.1.1.1 (a), (b), (c), (d), (e), (f) and (j) are replaced with "EMPTY PACKAGING", "EMPTY RECEPTACLE", "EMPTY IBC" or "EMPTY LARGE PACKAGING", as appropriate, followed by the information of the goods last loaded, as described in 5.4.1.1.1 (c). See e xample as follows : "EMPTY PACKAGING, 6.1 (3)". In addition, in such a case: (a) If the dangerous goods last loaded are goods of Class 2, the information prescribed in 5.4.1.1.1 (c) may be replaced by the number of the class "2"; (b) If the dangerous goods last loaded are goods of classes 3, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 8 or 9, the information of the goods last loaded, as described in 5.4.1.1.1 (c) may be replaced by the words "WITH RESIDUES OF [...]" followed by the class(es) and subsidiary hazard(s) corresponding to the different residues, in the class numbering order. Example: Empty packagings , uncleaned, having contained goods of Class 3 carried together with empty packagings , uncleaned, having contained goods of Class 8 with a Class 6.1 subsidiary hazard may be referred to in the transport document as: "EMPTY PACKAGINGS, WITH RESIDUES OF 3, 6.1, 8". 5.4.1.1.6.2 .2 For empty means of containment other than packagings , uncleaned, which contain the residue of dangerous goods of classes other than Class 7 and for empty uncleaned receptacles for gases with a capacity of more than 1000 litres, the particulars according to 5.4.1.1.1 (a) to (d) and (j) are preceded by "EMPTY TANK - WAGON", "EMPTY TANK - VEHICLE", "EMPTY DEMOUNTABLE TANK", "EMPTY BATTERY-WAGON", "EMPTY BATTERY-VEHICLE", "EMPTY PORTABLE TANK", "EMPTY TANK - CONTAINER", "EMPTY MEGC", "EMPTY WAGON", "EMPTY VEHICLE", "EMPTY CONTAINER" or "EMPTY RECEPTACLE", as appropriate, followed by the words "LAST LOAD:". Moreover, paragraph 5.4.1.1.1 (f) does not apply. See examples as follows: "EMPTY TANK-WAGON, LAST LOAD: 663 UN 1098 ALLYL ALCOHOL, 6.1 (3), I" or "EMPTY TANK-WAGON, LAST LOAD: 663 UN 1098 ALLYL ALCOHOL, 6.1 (3), PG I" . 5.4.1.1.6.2.3 (Reserved) 5.4.1.1.6.3 (a) If empty tanks, battery-wagons, battery-vehicles and MEGCs, uncleaned, are carried to the nearest place where cleaning or repair can be carried out in accordance with the provisions of 4.3.2.4.3, the following additional entry shall be made in the transport document: " Carriage in accordance with 4.3.2.4.3". (b) If empty wagons, road vehicles and containers, uncleaned, are carried to the nearest place where cleaning or repair can be carried out in accordance with the provisions of 7.5.8.1, the following additional entry shall be made in the transport document: " Carriage in accordance with 7.5.8.1". 5.4.1.1.6.4 For the carriage of tank-wagons, demountable tanks, battery-wagons, tank-containers and MEGCs under the conditions of 4.3.2.4.4, the following entry shall be included in the transport document: " Carriage in accordance with 4.3.2.4.4." 5.4.1.1.7 Special provisions for carriage in a transport chain including maritime or air carriage For carriage in accordance with 1.1.4.2.1, a statement shall be included in the transport document , as follows: "Carriage in accordance with 1.1.4.2.1". 5.4.1.1.8 (Reserved) 5.4.1.1.9 Special provisions for piggyback transport NOTE: For the information in the transport document, see 1.1.4.4.5. 5.4.1.1.10 (Reserved) 5.4.1.1.11 Special provisions for the carriage of IBCs, tanks, battery-wagons, portable tanks and MEGCs after the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection For carriage in accordance with 4.1.2.2 (b), 4.3.2.3.7 (b), 6.7.2.19.6 .1 (b), 6.7.3.15.6 .1 (b) or 6.7.4.14.6 .1 (b), a statement to this effect shall be included in the transport document, as follows: "Carriage in accordance with 4.1.2.2 ( b ) " , "CARRIAGE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 4.3.2.3.7 (b)", " Carriage in accordance with 6.7.2.19.6 .1 (b)", " Carriage in accordance with 6.7.3.15.6 .1 (b)" or " Carriage in accordance with 6.7.4.14.6 .1 (b)" as appropriate. 5.4.1.1.12 Special provisions for carriage in accordance with transitional requirements For carriage in accordance with 1.6.1.1, a statement shall be included in the transport document , as follows: "CARRIAGE IN ACCORDANCE WITH R ID IN FORCE BEFORE 1 JANUARY 20 2 3 ". 5.4.1.1.13 (Reserved) 5.4.1.1.14 Special provisions for the carriage of substances carried under elevated temperature If the proper shipping name of a substance which is carried or offered for carriage in a liquid state at a temperature equal to or exceeding 100 °C, or in a solid state at a temperature equal to or exceeding 240 °C, does not convey the elevated temperature condition (for example, by using the term "MOLTEN" or "ELEVATED TEMPERATURE" as part of the proper shipping name), the word "HOT" shall immediately precede the proper shipping name. 5.4.1.1.15 Special provisions for the carriage of substances stabilized by chemical stabilization Unless already part of the proper shipping name the word " STABILIZED" shall be added to the proper shipping name if stabilization is by chemical stabilization alone (see 3.1.2.6). 5.4.1.1.16 (Deleted) 5.4.1.1.17 Special provisions for the carriage of solids in bulk containers conforming to 6.11.4 When solid substances are carried in bulk containers conforming to 6.11.4, the following statement shall be shown in the transport document (see Note at the beginning of 6.11.4): "BULK CONTAINER BK(X) APPROVED BY THE COMPETENT AUTHORITY OF …". 5.4.1.1.18 Special provisions for carriage of environmentally hazardous substances (aquatic environment) When a substance belonging to one of classes 1 to 9 meets the classification criteria of 2.2.9.1.10, the transport document shall bear the additional inscription "ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS" or "MARINE POLLUTANT/ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS" . This additional requirement does not apply to UN Nos. 3077 and 3082 or for the exceptions listed in 5.2.1.8.1. The inscription "MARINE POLLUTANT" (according to 5.4.1.4.3 of the IMDG Code) is acceptable for carriage in a transport chain including maritime carriage. 5.4.1.1.19 Special provisions for carriage of packagings , discarded, empty, uncleaned (UN 3509) For packagings , discarded, empty, uncleaned, the proper shipping name specified in 5.4.1.1.1 (b) shall be complemented with the words "(WITH RESIDUES OF [...])" followed by the class(es) and subsidiary hazard(s) corresponding to the residues, in the class numbering order. Moreover, 5.4.1.1.1 (f) does not apply. Example: Packagings , discarded, empty, uncleaned having contained goods of Class 4.1 packed together with packagings , discarded, empty, uncleaned having contained goods of Class 3 with a Class 6.1 subsidiary hazard should be referred to in the transport document as: "UN 3509 PACKAGINGS, DISCARDED, EMPTY, UNCLEANED (WITH RESIDUES OF 3, 4.1, 6.1), 9". 5.4.1.1.20 Special provisions for the carriage of substances classified in accordance with 2.1.2.8 For carriage in accordance with 2.1.2.8, a statement shall be included in the transport document, as follows: " Classified in accordance with 2.1.2.8 ". 5.4.1.1.21 Additional information in the case of the application of special provisions Where, in accordance with a special provision in Chapter 3.3, additional information is necessary, this additional information shall be included in the transport document. 5.4.1.1.22 (Reserved) 5.4.1.1.23 Special provisions for the carriage of substances carried in molten state When a substance, which is solid in accordance with the definition in 1.2.1, is offered for carriage in the molten state, the qualifying word " MOLTEN " shall be added as part of the proper shipping name, unless it is already part of the proper shipping name (see 3.1.2.5). 5.4.1.1.24 Special provisions for refillable pressure receptacles authorized by the United States of America Department of Transportation For carriage in accordance with 1.1.4.7, a statement shall be included in the transport document, as follows: "CARRIAGE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 1.1.4.7.1" or "CARRIAGE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 1.1.4.7.2", as appropriate. 5.4.1.2 Additional or special information required for certain classes 5.4.1.2.1 Special provisions for Class 1 (a) The transport document shall indicate, in addition to the requirements in 5.4.1.1.1 (f): – the total net mass, in kg, of explosive contents for each substance or article bearing a different UN number; – the total net mass, in kg, of explosive contents NOTEREF _Ref394409635 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 7 for all substances and articles covered by the transport document; (b) For mixed packing of two different goods, the description of the goods in the transport document shall include the UN numbers and names printed in capitals in Columns (1) and (2) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 of both substances or articles. If more than two different goods are contained in the same package in conformity with the mixed packing provisions given in 4.1.10 special provisions MP 1, MP 2 and MP 20 to MP 24, the transport document shall indicate under the description of the goods the UN numbers of all the substances and articles contained in the package, in the form, " Goods of UN Nos ... "; (c) For the carriage of substances and articles assigned to an n.o.s . entry or the entry "0190 SAMPLES, EXPLOSIVE" or packed conforming to packing instruction P 101 of 4.1.4.1, a copy of the competent authority approval with the conditions of carriage shall be attached to the transport document . It shall be drafted in an official language of the forwarding country and also, if that language is not English, French, German or Italian, in English, French, German or Italian, unless any agreements concluded between the countries concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise ; (d) If packages containing substances and articles of compatibility groups B and D are loaded together in the same wagon in accordance with the requirements of 7.5.2.2, a copy of the competent authority approval of the protective compartment or containment system in accordance with 7.5.2.2, foot note (a) under the table, shall be attached to the transport document . It shall be drafted in an official language of the forwarding country and also, if that language is not English, French, German or Italian, in English, French, German or Italian unless any agreements concluded between the countries concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise ; (e) When explosive substances or articles are carried in packagings conforming to packing instruction P 101, the transport document shall bear the inscription " Packaging approved by the competent authority of (indication of the state ( distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic ), on whose behalf the competent authority is acting ) " (see 4.1.4.1, packing instruction P 101); (f) In the case of military consignments within the meaning of 1.5.2, the descriptions prescribed by the competent military authority may be used in place of the descriptions in accordance with Table A of Chapter 3.2. For the carriage of military consignments to which the derogations in accordance with 5.2.1.5, 5.2.2.1.8 and 5.3.1.1.2 and in 7.2.4, special provision W 2, the following shall be entered in the transport document : " Military consignment " . (g) When fireworks of UN Nos. 0333, 0334, 0335, 0336 and 0337 are carried, the transport document shall bear the inscription: " Classification of fireworks by the competent authority of XX with the firework reference XX/YYZZZZ". The classification approval certificate need not be carried with the consignment, but shall be made available by the consignor to the carrier or the competent authorities for control purposes. The classification approval certificate or a copy of it shall be in an official language of the forwarding country, and also, if that language is not German, English, French or Italian, in German, English, French or Italian. NOTE 1: The commercial or technical name of the goods may be entered additionally to the proper shipping name in the transport document . 2: The classification reference(s) shall consist of the RID Contracting State in which the classification code according to special provision 645 of 3.3.1 was approved, indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic (XX) NOTEREF _Ref458427329 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 8 , the competent authority identification (YY) and a unique serial reference (ZZZZ). Examples of such classification references are: GB/HSE123456 D/BAM1234. 5.4.1.2.2 Additional provisions for Class 2 (a) For the carriage of mixtures (see 2.2.2.1.1) in tank -wagons, battery- wagons, wagons with demountable tanks, portable tanks, tank-containers or MEGCs, the composition of the mixture as a percentage of the volume or as a percentage of the mass shall be given. Constituents below 1% need not be indicated (see also 3.1.2.8.1.2) . The composition of the mixture need not be given when the technical names authorized by special provisions 581, 582 or 583 are used to supplement the proper shipping name ; (b) For the carriage of cylinders, tubes, pressure drums, cryogenic receptacles and bundles of cylinders under the conditions of 4.1.6.10, the following entry shall be included in the transport document : "Carriage in accordance with 4.1.6.10" . (c) Where tank - wagons have been refilled without having been previously cleaned out, the transport document shall show, as total weight of goods carried, the sum of the weight of the new load and of the residual load, which will be the same as the gross weight of the tank - wagon, less its registered unladen weight. In addition, the words " Mass of new load ... kg " may also be added. (d) In the case of tank-wagons , tank-containers or portable tanks carrying refrigerated liquefied gases the consignor shall enter in the transport document the date at which the actual holding time ends, in the following format: " End of holding time : ............... (DD/MM/YYYY)". (e) For carriage of UN No. 1012, the transport document shall contain the name of the specific gas carried (see special provision 398 of Chapter 3.3) in brackets after the proper shipping name. 5.4.1.2.3 Additional provisions for self-reactive substances of Class 4.1 and organic peroxides of Class 5.2 5.4.1.2.3.1 (Reserved) 5.4.1.2.3.2 When for certain self reactive substances of Class 4.1 and certain organic peroxides of Class 5.2 the competent authority has permitted the label conforming to model No.1 to be dispensed with for a specific packaging (see 5.2.2.1.9), a statement to this effect shall be included in the transport document , as follows: " The label conforming to model No.1 is not required ". 5.4.1.2.3.3 When organic peroxides and self reactive substances are carried under conditions where approval is required (for organic peroxides see 2.2.52.1.8, 4.1.7.2.2 and special provision TA2 of 6.8.4; for self reactive substances see 2.2.41.1.13 and 4.1.7.2.2, a statement to his effect shall be included in the transport document , e.g. " Carriage in accordance with 2.2.52.1.8 ". A copy of the competent authority approval with the conditions of carriage shall be attached to the transport document. It shall be drafted in an official language of the forwarding country and also, if that language is not English, French, German or Italian, in English, French, German or Italian unless any agreements concluded between the countries concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise. 5.4.1.2.3.4 When a sample of an organic peroxide (see 2.2.52.1.9) or a self reactive substance (see 2.2.41.1.15) is carried, a statement to this effect shall be included in the transport document , e.g. " Carriage in accordance with 2.2.52.1.9 ". 5.4.1.2.3.5 When self-reactive substances type G (see Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part II, paragraph 20.4.2 (g)) are carried, the following statement may be given in the transport document : " Not a self-reactive substance of Class 4.1 ". When organic peroxides type G (see Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part II, paragraph 20.4.3 (g)) are carried, the following statement may be given in the transport document : "Not a substance of Class 5.2". 5.4.1.2.4 Additional provisions for Class 6.2 In addition to the information concerning the consignee (see 5.4.1.1.1 (h)), the name and telephone number of a responsible person shall be indicated. 5.4.1.2.5 Additional provisions for Class 7 5.4.1.2.5.1 The following information shall be inserted in the transport document for each consignment of Class 7 material, as applicable, in the order given and immediately after the information required under 5.4.1.1.1 (a) to (c): (a) The name or symbol of each radionuclide or, for mixtures of radionuclides, an appropriate general description or a list of the most restrictive nuclides; (b) A description of the physical and chemical form of the material, or a notation that the material is special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material. A generic chemical description is acceptable for chemical form . For radioactive material with a subsidiary hazard , see paragraph (c) of special provision 172 of Chapter 3.3 ; (c) The maximum activity of the radioactive contents during carriage expressed in becquerels ( Bq ) with an appropriate SI prefix symbol (see 1.2.2.1). For fissile material, the mass of fissile material (or mass of each fissile nuclide for mixtures when appropriate) in grams (g), or appropriate multiples thereof, may be used in place of activity; (d) The category of the package, overpack or container, as assigned per 5.1.5.3.4, i.e. I-WHITE, II-YELLOW, III-YELLOW; (e) The TI as determined per 5.1.5.3.1 and 5.1.5.3.2 (except for category I-WHITE); (f) For fissile material: ( i ) Shipped under one exception of 2.2.7.2.3.5 (a) to (f), reference to that paragraph; (ii) Shipped under 2.2.7.2.3.5 (c) to (e), the total mass of fissile nuclides; (iii) Contained in a package for which one of 6.4.11.2 (a) to (c) or 6.4.11.3 is applied, reference to that paragraph; (iv) The criticality safety index, where applicable; (g) The identification mark for each competent authority certificate of approval (special form radioactive material, low dispersible radioactive material, fissile material excepted under 2.2.7.2.3.5 (f), special arrangement, package design, or shipment) applicable to the consignment; (h) For consignments of more than one package, the information required in 5.4.1.1.1 and in (a) to (g) above shall be given for each package. For packages in an overpack, container or wagon, a detailed statement of the contents of each package within the overpack, container or wagon and, where appropriate, of each overpack, container or wagon shall be included. If packages are to be removed from the overpack, container or wagon at a point of intermediate unloading, appropriate transport document s shall be made available; ( i ) Where a consignment is required to be shipped under exclusive use, the statement "EXCLUSIVE USE SHIPMENT"; and (j) For LSA-II and LSA-III substances, SCO-I , SCO-II and SCO-III , the total activity of the consignment as a multiple of A 2 . For radioactive material for which the A 2 value is unlimited, the multiple of A 2 shall be zero. 5.4.1.2.5.2 The consignor shall provide in the transport document a statement regarding actions, if any, that are required to be taken by the carrier. The statement shall be in the languages deemed necessary by the carrier or the authorities concerned, and shall include at least the following information: (a) Supplementary requirements for loading, stowage, carriage, handling and unloading of the package, overpack or container including any special stowage provisions for the safe dissipation of heat (see special provision CW33 (3.2) of 7.5.11), or a statement that no such requirements are necessary; (b) Restrictions on the mode of carriage or wagon and any necessary routeing instructions; (c) Emergency arrangements appropriate to the consignment. 5.4.1.2.5.3 In all cases of international carriage of packages requiring competent authority approval of design or shipment , for which different approval types apply in the different countries concerned by the shipment, the UN number and proper shipping name required in 5.4.1.1.1 shall be in accordance with the certificate of the country of origin of design. 5.4.1.2.5. 4 The applicable competent authority certificates need not necessarily accompany the consignment. The consignor shall make them available to the carrier(s) before loading and unloading. 5.4.1.3 (Reserved ) 5.4.1.4 Format and language to be used 5.4.1.4.1 The transport document shall be filled out in one or more languages, one of which shall be English, French or German , unless any agreements concluded between the countries concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise . In addition to the information required in 5.4.1.1 and 5.4.1.2, a cross shall be entered in the appropriate box if the transport document to be used provides for this, for example the consignment note in accordance with CIM or the wagon note in accordance with the General Contract of Use for Wagons (GCU) . 5.4.1.4.2 A separate transport document shall be made out for consignments which, because of the prohibitions in 7.5.2, may not be loaded together in the same wagon or container. In addition to the transport document , for multimodal carriage, the use of documents correspondi ng to the example shown in 5.4.5 is considered advisable . 5.4.1.5 Non-dangerous goods When goods mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2, are not subject to RID because they are considered as non-dangerous according to Part 2, the consignor may enter in the transport document a statement to that effect, e.g.: " Not goods of Class ... " . NOTE: This provision may be used in particular when the consignor considers that, due to the chemical nature of the goods (e.g. solutions and mixtures) carried or to the fact that such goods are deemed dangerous for other regulatory purposes the consignment might be subject to control during the journey. 5.4.2 C ontainer /vehicle packing certificate If the carriage of dangerous goods in a container precedes a voyage by sea, a container/vehicle packing certificate conforming to section 5.4.2 of the IMDG Code shall be provided to the maritime carrier by those responsible for packing the container . The functions of the transport document required under 5.4.1 and of the container/vehicle packing certificate as provided above may be incorporated into a single document (see for example 5.4.5) . If these functions are incorporated into a single document, the inclusion in the transport document of a statement that the loading of the container or vehicle has been carried out in accordance with the applicable modal regulations together with the identification of the person responsible for the container/vehicle packing certificate shall be sufficient. If the carriage of dangerous goods in a vehicle precedes a voyage by sea, a container/vehicle packing certificate conforming to section 5.4.2 of the IMDG Code NOTEREF _Ref458427788 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 11 may also be provided with the transport document NOTEREF _Ref458427806 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 12 . NOTE: For the purposes of this section the term "vehicle" includes wagon. 5.4.3 Instructions in writing 5.4.3.1 As an aid during an emergency situation that may occur during carriage, instructions in writing in the form specified in 5.4.3.4 shall be carried in the driver’s cab and shall be readily available. 5.4.3.2 Before the start of the journey, these instructions shall be provided by the carrier to the driver(s) in (a) language(s) that he (they) can read and understand. The carrier shall ensure that the driver understands the instructions and is capable of carrying them out properly. 5.4.3.3 Before the start of his journey, the driver shall consult the instructions in writing for details on actions to be taken in the event of an accident or incident, taking into account the information on dangerous goods on board provided to him by the carrier. 5.4.3.4 The instructions in writing should correspond to the following four page model as regards their contents. INSTRUCTIONS IN WRITING ACCORDING TO RID Actions in the event of an accident or incident involving or likely to involve dangerous goods In the event of an accident or incident that may occur or arise during carriage, the drivers shall take the following actions where safe and practicable to do so a : – Bring the train/shunting movement to a stop in a suitable place, bearing in mind the type of hazard (e.g. fire, loss of load), the local conditions (e.g. tunnel, built-up area) and possible actions by the emergency services (accessibility, evacuation), if necessary, by agreement with the railway infrastructure manager; – Switch off the locomotive in accordance with the operating instructions; – Avoid sources of ignition, in particular, do not smoke, use electronic cigarettes or similar devices or switch on any electrical equipment; – Observe the additional guidance assigned to the hazards of all concerned goods in the following table. The hazards correspond to the number of the danger label model and the mark assigned to the goods during carriage; – Inform the railway infrastructure manager or the emergency services, giving as much information as possible about the accident or incident and dangerous goods involved, bearing in mind the carrier ' s instructions; – Keep information on the dangerous goods being carried (if necessary, the transport documents) readily available for the emergency services on arrival, or have these made available by means of electronic data interchange (EDI); – When leaving the locomotive, put on the prescribed warning clothing; – If necessary, use other protective equipment; – Move away from the immediate vicinity of the accident or incident, advise other persons to move away and follow the advice of the officers-in-charge (internal and external); – Do not walk into or touch spilled substances and avoid inhalation of fumes, smoke, dusts and vapours by staying up wind; – Remove any contaminated clothing and dispose of it safely. a Specifications contained in railway regulations or railway operations shall be observed. Additional guidance to drivers on the hazard characteristics of dangerous goods by class and on actions subject to prevailing circumstances Danger labels and placards, description of the hazards Hazard characteristics Additional guidance (1) (2) (3) Explosive substances and articles 29845 -3175 0 0 1 1.5 1.6 May have a range of properties and effects such as mass detonation; projection of fragments; intense fire/heat flux; formation of bright light, loud noise or smoke. Sensitive to shocks and/or impacts and/or heat. Take cover but stay away from windows. 528955 247015 0 0 Explosive substances and articles 1.4 Slight risk of explosion and fire. Take cover. Flammable gases 214630 117475 0 0 2.1 Risk of fire. Risk of explosion. May be under pressure. Risk of asphyxiation. May cause burns and/or frostbite. Containments may explode when heated. Take cover. Keep out of low areas. Non- flammable , non- toxic gases 169545 4445 0 0 2.2 Risk of asphyxiation. May be under pressure. May cause frostbite. Containments may explode when heated. Take cover. Keep out of low areas. Toxic gases 511810 -3175 0 0 2.3 Risk of intoxication. May be under pressure. May cause burns and/or frostbite. Containments may explode when heated. Take cover. Keep out of low areas. Flammable liquids 245745 -3810 0 0 3 Risk of fire. Risk of explosion. Containments may explode when heated. Take cover. Keep out of low areas. Flammable solids, self-reactive substances, polymerizing substances and solid desensitized explosives 518795 -5080 0 0 4.1 Risk of fire. Flammable or combustible, may be ignited by heat, sparks or flames. May contain self-reactive substances that are liable to exothermic decomposition in the case of heat supply, contact with other substances (such as acids, heavy-metal compounds or amines), friction or shock. This may result in the evolution of harmful and flammable gases or vapours or self-ignition. Containments may explode when heated. Risk of explosion of desensitized explosives after loss of desensitizer. Substances liable to spontaneous combustion 515620 -6350 0 0 4.2 Risk of fire by spontaneous combustion if packages are damaged or contents spilled. May react vigorously with water. Substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases 226695 -6985 0 0 4.3 Risk of fire and explosion in contact with water. Additional guidance to drivers on the hazard characteristics of dangerous goods by class and on actions subject to prevailing circumstances Danger labels and placards, description of the hazards Hazard characteristics Additional guidance (1) (2) (3) Oxidizing substances 501015 9525 0 0 5.1 Risk of vigorous reaction, ignition and explosion in contact with combustible or flammable substances. Organic peroxides 223520 19050 0 0 5.2 Risk of exothermic decomposition at elevated temperatures, contact with other substances (such as acids, heavy-metal compounds or amines), friction or shock. This may result in the evolution of harmful and flammable gases or vapours or self-ignition. Toxic substances 495300 0 0 0 6.1 Risk of intoxication by inhalation, skin contact or ingestion. Risk to the aquatic environment or the sewage system. Infectious substances 495935 -3175 0 0 6.2 Risk of infection. May cause serious disease in humans or animals. Risk to the aquatic environment or the sewage system. Radioactive material 819150 -3810 0 0 245110 -3175 0 0 7A 7B 259715 2540 0 0 7C 7D Risk of intake and external radiation. Limit time of exposure. Fissile material 504825 110490 0 0 7E Risk of nuclear chain reaction. Corrosive substances 485775 8890 0 0 8 Risk of burns by corrosion. May react vigorously with each other, with water and with other substances. Spilled substance may evolve corrosive vapours. Risk to the aquatic environment or the sewage system. Miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles 212090 116840 0 0 9 9A Risk of burns. Risk of fire. Risk of explosion. Risk to the aquatic environment or the sewage system. NOTE 1: For dangerous goods with multiple risks and for mixed loads, each applicable entry shall be observed. 2: Additional guidance shown in column (3) of the Table may be adapted to reflect the classes of dangerous goods to be carried and their means of transport and, if necessary, to supplement them according to existing national specifications. Additional guidance to drivers on the hazard characteristics of dangerous goods, indicated by marks, and on actions subject to prevailing circumstances Mark Hazard characteristics Additional guidance (1) (2) (3) Environmentally hazardous substances Risk to the aquatic environment or the sewage system. 502285 86995 0 0 Elevated temperature substances Risk of burns by heat. Avoid contact with hot parts of the wagon or container and the spilled substance. Equipment for personal protection to be carried in the driver’s cab The following equipment a shall be carried in the driver’s cab: – portable lighting apparatus; for the driver – suitable warning clothing. a The equipment to be kept available shall, if necessary, be supplemented according to existing national specifications. 5.4.4 Retention of dangerous goods transport information 5.4.4.1 The consignor and the carrier shall retain a copy of the dangerous goods transport document and additional information and documentation as specified in RID, for a minimum period of three months. 5.4.4.2 When the documents are kept electronically or in a computer system, the consignor and the carrier shall be able to reproduce them in a printed form. 5 .4. 5 Example of a multimodal dangerous goods form Example of a form which may be used as a combined dangerous goods declaration and container packing certificate for multimodal carriage of dangerous goods. MULTIMODAL DANGEROUS GOODS FORM ( right edge black hatchings ) 1. Shipper / Consignor / Sender 2. Transport document number 3. Page 1 of ... Pages 4. Shipper’s reference 5. Freight Forwarder’s reference 6. Consignee 7. Carrier (to be completed by the carrier) SHIPPER'S DECLARATION I hereby declare that the contents of this consignment are fully and accurately described below by the proper shipping name, and are classified, packaged, marked and labeled / placarded and are in all respects in proper condition for transport according to the applicable international and national governmental regulations. 8. This shipment is within the limitations prescribed for: (Delete non-applicable) 9. Additional handling information PASSENGER AND CARGO AIRCRAFT CARGO AIRCRAFT ONLY 10. Vessel / flight no. and date 11. Port / place of loading 12. Port / place of discharge 13. Destination 14. Shipping marks * Number and kind of packages; description of goods Gross mass (kg) Net mass Cube (m 3 ) * FOR DANGEROUS GOODS: you must specify: UN No., proper shipping name, hazard class, packing group (where assigned) and any other element of information required under applicable national and international regulations. 15. Container identification No. / vehicle registration No. 16. Seal number (s) 17. Container/vehicle size & type 18. Tare (kg) 19. Total gross mass (including tare) (kg) CONTAINER/VEHICLE PACKING CERTIFICATE I hereby declare that the goods described above have been packed/loaded into the container/vehicle identified above in accordance with the applicable provisions **. MUST BE COMPLETED AND SIGNED FOR ALL CONTAINER/VEHICLE LOADS BY PERSON RESPONSIBLE FOR PACKING/LOADING 21. RECEIVING ORGANISATION RECEIPT Received the above number of packages/containers/trailers in apparent good order and condition unless stated hereon: RECEIVING ORGANISATION REMARKS: 20. Name of company Haulier's name 22. Name of company (OF SHIPPER PREPARING THIS NOTE) Name / Status of declarant Vehicle reg. no. Name / Status of declarant Place and date Signature and date Place and date Signature of declarant DRIVER'S SIGNATURE Signature of declarant ** See 5.4.2. MULTIMODAL DANGEROUS GOODS FORM Continuation Sheet ( right edge black hatchings ) 1. Shipper / Consignor /Sender 2. Transport document number 3. Page 2 of ... Pages 4. Shipper's reference 5. Freight Forwarder's reference 14. Shipping marks * Number and kind of packages; description of goods Gross mass (kg) Net mass Cube (m 3 ) * FOR DANGEROUS GOODS: you must specify: UN No., proper shipping name, hazard class, packing group (where assigned) and any other element of information required under applicable national and international regulations. Chapter 5.5 Special provisions 5.5.1 (Deleted) 5.5.2 Special provisions applicable to fumigated cargo transport units (UN 3359) 5.5.2.1 General 5.5.2.1.1 Fumigated cargo transport units (UN 3359) containing no other dangerous goods are not subject to any provisions of RID other than those of this section. 5.5.2.1.2 When the fumigated cargo transport unit is loaded with dangerous goods in addition to the fumigant, any provision of RID relevant to these goods (including placarding, marking and documentation) applies in addition to the provisions of this section. 5.5.2.1.3 Only cargo transport units that can be closed in such a way that the escape of gas is reduced to a minimum shall be used for the carriage of cargo under fumigation. 5.5.2.2 Training Persons engaged in the handling of fumigated cargo transport units shall be trained commensurate with their responsibilities. 5.5.2.3 Marking and placarding 5.5.2.3.1 A fumigated cargo transport unit shall be marked with a warning mark, as specified in 5.5.2.3.2, affixed at each access point in a location where it will be easily seen by persons opening or entering the cargo transport unit. This mark shall remain on the cargo transport unit until the following provisions are met: (a) The fumigated cargo transport unit has been ventilated to remove harmful concentrations of fumigant gas; and (b) The fumigated goods or materials have been unloaded. 5.5.2.3.2 The fumigation warning mark shall be as shown in Figure 5.5.2.3.2. Figure 5.5.2.3.2 * Insert details as appropriate DANGER THIS UNIT IS UNDER FUMIGATION WITH ( fumigant name* ) APPLIED ON ( date* ) ( time* ) VENTILATED ON ( date* ) DO NOT ENTER Minimum dimension 400 mm Minimum dimension 300 mm * Insert details as appropriate DANGER THIS UNIT IS UNDER FUMIGATION WITH ( fumigant name* ) APPLIED ON ( date* ) ( time* ) VENTILATED ON ( date* ) DO NOT ENTER Minimum dimension 400 mm Minimum dimension 300 mm Fumigation warning mark The mark shall be a rectangle. The minimum dimensions shall be 400 mm wide 300 mm high and the minimum width of the outer line shall be 2 mm. The mark shall be in black print on a white background with lettering not less than 25 mm high. Where dimensions are not specified, all features shall be in approximate proportion to those shown. 5.5.2.3.3 If the fumigated cargo transport unit has been completely ventilated either by opening the doors of the unit or by mechanical ventilation after fumigation, the date of ventilation shall be marked on the fumigation warning mark. 5.5.2.3.4 When the fumigated cargo transport unit has been ventilated and unloaded, the fumigation warning mark shall be removed. 5.5.2.3.5 Placards conforming to model No. 9 (see 5.2.2.2.2) shall not be affixed to a fumigated cargo transport unit except as required for other Class 9 substances or articles packed therein. 5.5.2.4 Documentation 5.5.2.4.1 Documents associated with the carriage of cargo transport units that have been fumigated and have not been completely ventilated before carriage shall include the following information: (a) "UN 3359 fumigated cargo transport unit, 9", or "UN 3359 fumigated cargo transport unit, Class 9"; (b) The date and time of fumigation; and (c) The type and amount of the fumigant used. These particulars shall be drafted in an official language of the forwarding country and also, if the language is not English, French, German or Italian, in English, French, German or Italian, unless agreements, if any, concluded between the countries concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise. 5.5.2.4.2 The document s may be in any form, provided they contain the information required in 5.5.2.4.1. This information shall be easy to identify, legible and durable. 5.5.2.4.3 Instructions for disposal of any residual fumigant including fumigation devices (if used) shall be provided. 5.5.2.4.4 A document is not required when the fumigated cargo transport unit has been completely ventilated and the date of ventilation has been marked on the warning mark (see 5.5.2.3.3 and 5.5.2.3.4). 5.5.3 Special provisions applicable to the carriage of dry ice (UN 1845) and to packages and wagons and containers containing substances presenting a risk of asphyxiation when used for cooling or conditioning purposes (such as dry ice (UN 1845) or nitrogen, refrigerated liquid (UN 1977) or argon, refrigerated liquid (UN 1951) or nitrogen ) NOTE: In the context of this section the term "conditioning" may be used in a broader scope and includes protection. 5.5.3.1 Scope 5.5.3.1.1 This section is not applicable to substances which may be used for cooling or conditioning purposes when carried as a consignment of dangerous goods, except for the carriage of dry ice (UN No. 1845). When they are carried as a consignment, these substances shall be carried under the relevant entry of Table A of Chapter 3.2 in accordance with the associated conditions of carriage. For UN No. 1845, the conditions of carriage specified in this section, except 5.5.3.3.1, apply for all kinds of carriage, as a coolant, conditioner, or as a consignment. For the carriage of UN No. 1845, no other provisions of RID apply. 5.5.3.1.2 This section is not applicable to gases in cooling cycles. 5.5.3.1.3 Dangerous goods used for cooling or conditioning tanks or MEGCs during carriage are not subject to this section. 5.5.3.1.4 Wagons and containers containing substances used for cooling or conditioning purposes include wagons and containers containing substances used for cooling or conditioning purposes inside packages as well as wagons and containers with unpackaged substances used for cooling or conditioning purposes. 5.5.3.1.5 Sub-sections 5.5.3.6 and 5.5.3.7 only apply when there is an actual risk of asphyxiation in the wagon or container. It is for the participants concerned to assess this risk, taking into consideration the hazards presented by the substances being used for cooling or conditioning, the amount of substance to be carried, the duration of the journey, the types of containment to be used and the gas concentration limits given in the Note to 5.5.3.3.3. 5.5.3.2 General 5.5.3.2.1 Wagons and containers in which dry ice (UN 1845) is carried or containing substances used for cooling or conditioning purposes (other than fumigation) during carriage are not subject to any provisions of RID other than those of this section. 5.5.3.2.2 When dangerous goods are loaded in wagons or containers containing substances used for cooling or conditioning purposes any provisions of RID relevant to these dangerous goods apply in addition to the provisions of this section. 5.5.3.2.3 (Reserved) 5.5.3.2.4 Persons engaged in the handling or carriage of wagons and containers in which dry ice (UN 1845) is carried or containing substances used for cooling or conditioning purposes shall be trained commensurate with their responsibilities. 5.5.3.3 Packages containing dry ice (UN 1845) or a coolant or conditioner 5.5.3.3.1 Packaged dangerous goods requiring cooling or conditioning assigned to packing instructions P 203, P 620, P 650, P 800, P 901 or P 904 of 4.1.4.1 shall meet the appropriate requirements of that packing instruction. 5.5.3.3.2 For packaged dangerous goods requiring cooling or conditioning assigned to other packing instructions, the packages shall be capable of withstanding very low temperatures and shall not be affected or significantly weakened by the coolant or conditioner. Packages shall be designed and constructed to permit the release of gas to prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the packaging. The dangerous goods shall be packed in such a way as to prevent movement after the dissipation of any coolant or conditioner. 5.5.3.3.3 Packages containing dry ice (UN 1845) or a coolant or conditioner shall be carried in well ventilated wagons and containers. Marking according to 5.5.3.6 is not required in this case. Ventilation is not required, and marking according to 5.5.3.6 is required, if: – gas exchange between the load compartment and accessible compartments during carriage is prevented; or – the load compartment is insulated, refrigerated or mechanically refrigerated equipment, for example as defined in the Agreement on the International Carriage of Perishable Foodstuffs and on the Special Equipment to be Used for such Carriage (ATP) and separated from accessible compartments during carriage. NOTE: In this context "well ventilated" means there is an atmosphere where the carbon dioxide concentration is below 0.5% by volume and the oxygen concentration is above 19.5% by volume. 5.5.3.4 Marking of packages containing dry ice (UN 1845) or a coolant or conditioner 5.5.3.4.1 Packages containing dry ice (UN 1845) as a consignment shall be marked "CARBON DIOXIDE, SOLID" or "DRY ICE"; packages containing dangerous goods used for cooling or conditioning shall be marked with the name indicated in Column (2) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 of these dangerous goods followed by the words "AS COOLANT" or "AS CONDITIONER" as appropriate in an official language of the country of origin and also, if that language is not English, French, German or Italian, in English, French, German or Italian, unless agreements concluded between the countries concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise. 5.5.3.4.2 The marks shall be durable, legible and placed in such a location and of such a size relative to the package as to be readily visible. 5.5.3.5 Wagons and containers containing unpackaged dry ice 5.5.3.5.1 If dry ice in unpackaged form is used, it shall not come into direct contact with the metal structure of a wagon or container to avoid embrittlement of the metal. Measures shall be taken to provide adequate insulation between the dry ice and the wagon or container by providing a minimum of 30 mm separation (e.g. by using suitable low heat conducting materials such as timber planks, pallets etc). 5.5.3.5.2 Where dry ice is placed around packages, measures shall be taken to ensure that packages remain in the original position during carriage after the dry ice has dissipated. 5.5.3.6 Marking of wagons and containers 5.5.3.6.1 Wagons and containers containing dry ice (UN 1845) or dangerous goods used for cooling or conditioning purposes that are not well ventilated shall be marked with a warning mark, as specified in 5.5.3.6.2, affixed at each access point in a location where it will be easily seen by persons opening or entering the wagon or container. This mark shall remain on the wagon or container until the following provisions are met: (a) The wagon or container has been well ventilated to remove harmful concentrations of dry ice (UN 1845) or coolant or conditioner; and (b) The dry ice (UN 1845) or cooled or conditioned goods have been unloaded. As long as the wagon or container is marked, the necessary precautions have to be taken before entering it. The necessity of ventilating through the cargo doors or other means (e.g. forced ventilation) has to be evaluated and included in training of the involved persons. 5.5.3.6.2 The warning mark shall be as shown in Figure 5.5.3.6.2. Figure 5.5.3.6.2 3193195 3503783 Asphyxiation warning mark for wagons and containers * Insert the name indicated in Column (2) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 or the name of the asphyxiant gas used as the coolant/conditioner . The lettering shall be in capitals, all be on one line and shall be at least 25 mm high. If the length of the proper shipping name is too long to fit in the space provided, the lettering may be reduced to the maximum size possible to fit. For example: "CARBON DIOXIDE, SOLID". Additional information such as "AS COOLANT" or "AS CONDITIONER" may be added. The mark shall be a rectangle. The minimum dimensions shall be 150 mm wide 250 mm high. The word "WARNING" shall be in red or white and be at least 25 mm high. Where dimensions are not specified, all features shall be in approximate proportion to those shown. The word "WARNING" and the words "AS COOLANT" or "AS CONDITIONER", as appropriate, shall be in an official language of the country of origin and also, if that language is not English, French, German or Italian, in English, French, German or Italian, unless agreements concluded between the countries concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise. 5.5.3.7 Documentation 5.5.3.7.1 Documents (such as a bill of lading, cargo manifest or CMR/CIM consignment note) associated with the carriage of wagons or containers containing or having contained dry ice (UN 1845) or substances used for cooling or conditioning purposes and have not been completely ventilated before carriage shall include the following information: (a) The UN number preceded by the letters "UN"; and (b) The name indicated in Column (2) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 followed , where appropriate, by the words "AS COOLANT" or "AS CONDITIONER" in an official language of the country of origin and also, if that language is not English, French, German or Italian, in English, French, German or Italian, unless agreements, if any, concluded between the countries concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise. For example: "UN 1845, CARBON DIOXIDE, SOLID, AS COOLANT". 5.5.3.7.2 The transport document may be in any form, provided it contains the information required in 5.5.3.7.1. This information shall be easy to identify, legible and durable. 5.5.4 Dangerous goods contained in equipment in use or intended for use during carriage, attached to or placed in packages, overpacks, containers or load compartments 5.5.4.1 Dangerous goods (e.g. lithium batteries, fuel cell cartridges) contained in equipment such as data loggers and cargo tracking devices, attached to or placed in packages, overpacks, containers or load compartments are not subject to any provisions of RID other than the following: (a) the equipment shall be in use or intended for use during carriage; (b) the contained dangerous goods (e.g. lithium batteries, fuel cell cartridges) shall meet the applicable construction and test requirements specified in RID; and (c) the equipment shall be capable of withstanding the shocks and loadings normally encountered during carriage. 5.5.4.2 When such equipment containing dangerous goods is carried as a consignment, the relevant entry of Table A of Chapter 3.2 shall be used and all applicable provisions of RID shall apply. Part 6 Requirements for the construction and testing of packagings, intermediate bulk containers (IBCs), large packagings, tanks and bulk containers Chapter 6.1 Requirements for the construction and testing of packagings 6.1.1 General 6.1.1.1 The requirements of this Chapter do not apply to: (a) Packages containing radioactive material of Class 7, unless otherwise provided (see 4.1.9); (b) Packages containing infectious substances of Class 6.2, unless otherwise provided (see Note under the heading of Chapter 6.3 and packing instructions P 621 and P 622 of 4.1.4.1); (c) Pressure receptacles containing gases of Class 2; (d) Packages whose net mass exceeds 400 kg; (e) Packagings for liquids, other than combination packagings, with a capacity exceeding 450 litres. 6.1.1.2 The requirements for packagings in 6.1.4 are based on packagings currently used. In order to take into account progress in science and technology, there is no objection to the use of packagings having specifications different from those in 6.1.4, provided that they are equally effective, acceptable to the competent authority and able to successfully fulfil the requirements described in 6.1.1.3 and 6.1.5. Methods of testing other than those described in this Chapter are acceptable, provided they are equivalent, and are recognized by the competent authority. 6.1.1.3 Every packaging intended to contain liquids shall successfully undergo a suitable leakproofness test. This test is part of a quality assurance programme as stipulated in 6.1.1.4 which shows the capability of meeting the appropriate test level indicated in 6.1.5.4.3: (a) before it is first used for carriage; (b) after remanufacturing or reconditioning, before it is re-used for carriage; For this test, packagings need not have their own closures fitted. The inner receptacle of composite packagings may be tested without the outer packaging provided the test results are not affected. This test is not necessary for: – inner packagings of combination packagings; – inner receptacles of composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware), marked with the symbol "RID/ADR" according to 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii); – light-gauge metal packagings, marked with the symbol "RID/ADR" according to 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii). 6.1.1.4 Packagings shall be manufactured, reconditioned and tested under a quality assurance programme which satisfies the competent authority in order to ensure that each packaging meets the requirements of this Chapter. NOTE: ISO 16106:2020 "Transport packages for dangerous goods – Dangerous goods packagings, intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) and large packagings – Guidelines for the application of ISO 9001" provides acceptable guidance on procedures which may be followed. 6.1.1.5 Manufacturers and subsequent distributors of packagings shall provide information regarding procedures to be followed and a description of the types and dimensions of closures (including required gaskets) and any other components needed to ensure that packages as presented for carriage are capable of passing the applicable performance tests of this Chapter. 6.1.2 Code for designating types of packagings 6.1.2.1 The code consists of: (a) an Arabic numeral indicating the kind of packaging, e.g. drum, jerrican, etc., followed by; (b) a capital letter(s) in Latin characters indicating the nature of the material, e.g. steel, wood, etc., followed where necessary by; (c) an Arabic numeral indicating the category of packaging within the kind to which the packaging belongs. 6.1.2.2 In the case of composite packagings, two capital letters in Latin characters are used in sequence in the second position of the code. The first indicates the material of the inner receptacle and the second that of the outer packaging. 6.1.2.3 In the case of combination packagings only the code number for the outer packaging is used. 6.1.2.4 The letters "T", "V" or "W" may follow the packaging code. The letter "T" signifies a salvage packaging conforming to the requirements of 6.1.5.1.11. The letter "V" signifies a special packaging conforming to the requirements of 6.1.5.1.7. The letter "W" signifies that the packaging, although of the same type indicated by the code, is manufactured to a specification different to that in 6.1.4 and is considered equivalent under the requirements of 6.1.1.2. 6.1.2.5 The following numerals shall be used for the kinds of packaging: 1. Drum 2. (Reserved) 3. Jerrican 4. Box 5. Bag 6. Composite packaging 7. (Reserved) 0. Light-gauge metal packagings 6.1.2.6 The following capital letters shall be used for the types of material: A. Steel (all types and surface treatments) B. Aluminium C. Natural wood D. Plywood F. Reconstituted wood G. Fibreboard H. Plastics material L. Textile M. Paper, multiwall N. Metal (other than steel or aluminium) P. Glass, porcelain or stoneware NOTE: Plastics materials, is taken to include other polymeric materials such as rubber. 6.1.2.7 The following table indicates the codes to be used for designating types of packagings depending on the kind of packagings, the material used for their construction and their category; it also refers to the sub-sections to be consulted for the appropriate requirements: Kind Material Category Code Sub-section 1. Drums A. Steel non-removable head 1A1 6.1.4.1 removable head 1A2 B. Aluminium non-removable head 1B1 6.1.4.2 removable head 1B2 D. Plywood 1D 6.1.4.5 G. Fibre 1G 6.1.4.7 H. Plastics non-removable head 1H1 6.1.4.8 removable head 1H2 N. Metal, other than steel or aluminium non-removable head 1N1 6.1.4.3 removable head 1N2 2. (Reserved) 3. Jerricans A. Steel non-removable head 3A1 6.1.4.4 removable head 3A2 B. Aluminium non-removable head 3B1 6.1.4.4 removable head 3B2 H. Plastics non-removable head 3H1 6.1.4.8 removable head 3H2 4. Boxes A. Steel 4A 6.1.4.14 B. Aluminium 4B 6.1.4.14 C. Natural wood ordinary 4C1 6.1.4.9 with sift-proof walls 4C2 D. Plywood 4D 6.1.4.10 F. Reconstituted wood 4F 6.1.4.11 G. Fibreboard 4G 6.1.4.12 H. Plastics expanded 4H1 6.1.4.13 solid 4H2 N. Metal, other than steel or aluminium 4N 6.1.4.14 5. Bags H. Woven plastics without inner liner or coating 5H1 sift-proof 5H2 6.1.4.16 water resistant 5H3 H. Plastics film 5H4 6.1.4.17 L. Textile without inner liner or coating 5L1 sift-proof 5L2 6.1.4.15 water resistant 5L3 M. Paper multiwall 5M1 6.1.4.18 multiwall, water resistant 5M2 6. Composite packagings H. Plastics receptacle with outer steel drum 6HA1 6.1.4.19 with outer steel crate or box 6HA2 6.1.4.19 with outer aluminium drum 6HB1 6.1.4.19 with outer aluminium crate or box 6HB2 6.1.4.19 with outer wooden box 6HC 6.1.4.19 with outer plywood drum 6HD1 6.1.4.19 with outer plywood box 6HD2 6.1.4.19 with outer fibre drum 6HG1 6.1.4.19 with outer fibreboard box 6HG2 6.1.4.19 with outer plastics drum 6HH1 6.1.4.19 with outer solid plastics box 6HH2 6.1.4.19 P. Glass, porcelain or stoneware receptacle with outer steel drum 6PA1 6.1.4.20 with outer steel crate or box 6PA2 6.1.4.20 with outer aluminium drum 6PB1 6.1.4.20 with outer aluminium crate or box 6PB2 6.1.4.20 with outer wooden box 6PC 6.1.4.20 with outer plywood drum 6PD1 6.1.4.20 with outer wickerwork hamper 6PD2 6.1.4.20 with outer fibre drum 6PG1 6.1.4.20 with outer fibreboard box 6PG2 6.1.4.20 6. Composite packagings (cont'd) P. Glass, porcelain or stoneware receptacle (cont'd) with outer expanded plastics packaging 6PH1 6.1.4.20 with outer solid plastics packaging 6PH2 6.1.4.20 7. (Reserved) 0. Light-gauge metal packagings A. Steel non-removable head 0A1 6.1.4.22 removable head 0A2 6.1.3 Marking NOTE 1 : The marks indicate that the packaging which bears them correspond to a successfully tested design type and that it complies with the requirements of this Chapter which are related to the manufacture, but not to the use, of the packaging. In itself, therefore, the marks do not necessarily confirm that the packaging may be used for any substance: generally the type of packaging (e.g. steel drum), its maximum capacity and/or mass, and any special requirements are specified for each substance in Table A of Chapter 3.2. 2 : The marks are intended to be of assistance to packaging manufacturers, reconditioners, packaging users, carriers and regulatory authorities. In relation to the use of a new packaging, the original marks are a means for its manufacturer(s) to identify the type and to indicate those performance test regulations that have been met. 3 : The marks do not always provide full details of the test levels, etc., and these may need to be taken further into account, e.g. by reference to a test certificate, to test reports or to a register of successfully tested packagings. For example, a packaging having an X or Y mark may be used for substances to which a packing group having a lesser degree of danger has been assigned with the relevant maximum permissible value of the relative density determined by taking into account the factor 1.5 or 2.25 indicated in the packaging test requirements in 6.1.5 as appropriate, i.e. packing group I packaging tested for products of relative density 1.2 could be used as a packing group II packaging for products of relative density 1.8 or a packing group III packaging for products of relative density 2.7, provided of course that all the performance criteria can still be met with the higher relative density product. 6.1.3.1 Each packaging intended for use according to the RID shall bear marks which are durable, legible and placed in a location and of such a size relative to the packaging as to be readily visible. For packages with a gross mass of more than 30 kg, the marks or a duplicate thereof shall appear on the top or on a side of the packaging. Letters, numerals and symbols shall be at least 12 mm high, except for packagings of 30 litres capacity or less or of 30 kg maximum net mass, when they shall be at least 6 mm in height and except for packagings of 5 litres capacity or less or of 5 kg maximum net mass when they shall be of an appropriate size. The marks shall show: (a) (i) The United Nations packaging symbol . This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or an MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.11. This symbol shall not be used for packagings which comply with the simplified conditions of 6.1.1.3, 6.1.5.3.1 (e), 6.1.5.3.5 (c), 6.1.5.4, 6.1.5.5.1 and 6.1.5.6 (see also (ii) below). For embossed metal packagings, the capital letters "UN" may be applied instead of the symbol; or (ii) The symbol "RID/ADR" for composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware) and light-gauge metal packagings conforming to simplified conditions (see 6.1.1.3, 6.1.5.3.1 (e), 6.1.5.3.5 (c), 6.1.5.4, 6.1.5.5.1 and 6.1.5.6); NOTE: Packagings bearing this symbol are approved for rail, road and inland waterways transport operations which are subject to the provisions of RID, ADR and ADN respectively. They are not necessarily accepted for carriage by other modes of transport or for transport operations by road, rail or inland waterways which are governed by other regulations. (b) The code designating the type of packaging according to 6.1.2; (c) A code in two parts: (i) a letter designating the packing group(s) for which the design type has been successfully tested: X for packing groups I, II and III; Y for packing groups II and III; Z for packing group III only; (ii) the relative density, rounded off to the first decimal, for which the design type has been tested for packagings without inner packagings intended to contain liquids; this may be omitted when the relative density does not exceed 1.2. For packagings intended to contain solids or inner packagings, the maximum gross mass in kilograms. For light-gauge metal packagings, marked with the symbol "RID/ADR" according to 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii) intended to contain liquids having a viscosity at 23 °C exceeding 200 mm 2 /s, the maximum gross mass in kg; (d) Either the letter "S" denoting that the packaging is intended for the carriage of solids or inner packagings or, for packagings (other than combination packagings) intended to contain liquids, the hydraulic test pressure which the packaging was shown to withstand in kPa rounded down to the nearest 10 kPa. For light-gauge metal packagings, marked with the symbol "RID/ADR, according to 6.1.3.1(a) (ii) intended to contain liquids having a viscosity at 23 °C exceeding 200 mm 2 /s, the letter "S"; (e) The last two digits of the year during which the packaging was manufactured. Packagings of types 1H and 3H shall also be appropriately marked with the month of manufacture; this may be marked on the packaging in a different place from the remainder of the marks. An appropriate method is: 3269615 313055 0 0 * The last two digits of the year of manufacture may be displayed at that place. In such a case and when the clock is placed adjacent to the UN design type mark, the indication of the year in the mark may be waived. However, when the clock is not placed adjacent to the UN design type mark, the two digits of the year in the mark and in the clock shall be identical. NOTE: Other methods that provide the minimum required information in a durable, visible and legible form are also acceptable. (f) The State authorizing the allocation of the mark, indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic ; (g) The name of the manufacturer or other identification of the packaging specified by the competent authority. 6.1.3.2 In addition to the durable marks prescribed in 6.1.3.1, every new metal drum of a capacity greater than 100 litres shall bear the marks described in 6.1.3.1 (a) to (e) on the bottom, with an indication of the nominal thickness of at least the metal used in the body (in mm, to 0.1 mm), in permanent form (e.g. embossed). When the nominal thickness of either head of a metal drum is thinner than that of the body, the nominal thickness of the top head, body, and bottom head shall be marked on the bottom in permanent form (e.g. embossed), for example "1.0-1.2-1.0" or "0.9-1.0-1.0". Nominal thickness of metal shall be determined according to the appropriate ISO standard, for example ISO 3574:1999 for steel. The marks indicated in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g) shall not be applied in a permanent form except as provided in 6.1.3.5. 6.1.3.3 Every packaging other than those referred to in 6.1.3.2 liable to undergo a reconditioning process shall bear the marks indicated in 6.1.3.1 (a) to (e) in a permanent form. Marks are permanent if they are able to withstand the reconditioning process (e.g. embossed). For packagings other than metal drums of a capacity greater than 100 litres, these permanent marks may replace the corresponding durable marks prescribed in 6.1.3.1. 6.1.3.4 For remanufactured metal drums, if there is no change to the packaging type and no replacement or removal of integral structural components, the required marks need not be permanent. Every other remanufactured metal drum shall bear the marks in 6.1.3.1 (a) to (e) in a permanent form (e.g. embossed) on the top head or side. 6.1.3.5 Metal drums made from materials (e.g. stainless steel) designed to be reused repeatedly may bear the marks indicated in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g) in a permanent form (e.g. embossed). 6.1.3.6 The marks in accordance with 6.1.3.1 are valid for only one design type or series of design types. Different surface treatments may fall within the same design type. A "series of design types" means packagings of the same structural design, wall thickness, material and cross-section, which differ only in their lesser design heights from the design type approved. The closures of receptacles shall be identifiable as those referred to in the test report. 6.1.3.7 Marks shall be applied in the sequence of the sub-paragraphs in 6.1.3.1; each mark required in these sub-paragraphs and when appropriate sub-paragraphs (h) to (j) of 6.1.3.8 shall be clearly separated, e.g. by a slash or space, so as to be easily identifiable. For examples, see 6.1.3.11. Any additional marks authorized by a competent authority shall still enable the other marks required in 6.1.3.1 to be correctly identified. 6.1.3.8 After reconditioning a packaging, the reconditioner shall apply to it, in sequence, durable marks showing: (h) The State in which the reconditioning was carried out, indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic NOTEREF _Ref335245314 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 2 ; (i) The name of the reconditioner or other identification of the packaging specified by the competent authority; (j) The year of reconditioning; the letter "R"; and, for every packaging successfully passing the leakproofness test in 6.1.1.3, the additional letter "L". 6.1.3.9 When, after reconditioning, the marks required by 6.1.3.1 (a) to (d) no longer appear on the top head or the side of a metal drum, the reconditioner also shall apply them in a durable form followed by 6.1.3.8 (h), (i) and (j). These marks shall not identify a greater performance capability than that for which the original design type had been tested and marked. 6.1.3.10 Packagings manufactured with recycled plastics material as defined in 1.2.1 shall be marked "REC". This mark shall be placed near the marks prescribed in 6.1.3.1. 6.1.3.11 Examples for marking NEW packagings 4G/Y145/S/02 NL/VL823 as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (i), (b), (c), (d) and (e) as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g) For a new fibreboard box 1A1/Y1.4/150/98 NL/VL824 as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (i), (b), (c), (d) and (e) as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g) For a new steel drum to contain liquids 1A2/Y150/S/01 NL/VL825 as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (i), (b), (c), (d) and (e) as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g) For a new steel drum to contain solids, or inner packagings 4HW/Y136/S/98 NL/VL826 as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (i), (b), (c), (d) and (e) as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g) For a new plastics box of equivalent specification 1A2/Y/100/01 USA/MM5 as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (i), (b), (c), (d) and (e) as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g) For a remanufactured steel drum to contain liquids RID/ADR/0A1/Y100/89 NL/VL123 as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii), (b), (c), (d) and (e) as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g) For a new light-gauge metal packaging, non-removable head RID/ADR/0A2/Y20/S/04 NL/VL124 as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii), (b), (c), (d) and (e) as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g) For a new light-gauge metal packaging, removable head, intended to contain solids, or liquids with a viscosity at 23 °C exceeding 200 mm 2 /s. 6.1.3.12 Examples for marking RECONDITIONED packagings 1A1/Y1.4/150/97 NL/RB/01 RL as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (i), (b), (c), (d) and (e) as in 6.1.3.8 (h), (i) and (j) 1A2/Y150/S/99 USA/RB/00 R as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (i), (b), (c), (d) and (e) as in 6.1.3.8 (h), (i) and (j) 6.1.3.13 Example for marking SALVAGE packagings 1A2T/Y300/S/01 USA/abc as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (i), (b), (c), (d) and (e) as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g) NOTE: The marking, for which examples are given in 6.1.3.11, 6.1.3.12 and 6.1.3.13 may be applied in a single line or in multiple lines provided the correct sequence is respected. 6.1.3.14 Where a packaging conforms to one or more than one tested packaging design type, including one or more than one tested IBC or large packaging design type, the packaging may bear more than one mark to indicate the relevant performance test requirements that have been met. Where more than one mark appears on a packaging, the marks shall appear in close proximity to one another and each mark shall appear in its entirety. 6.1.3.15 Certification By affixing marks in accordance with 6.1.3.1, it is certified that mass-produced packagings correspond to the approved design type and that the requirements referred to in the approval have been met. 6.1.4 Requirements for packagings 6.1.4.0 General requirements Any permeation of the substance contained in the packaging shall not constitute a danger under normal conditions of carriage. 6.1.4.1 Steel drums 1A1 non-removable head 1A2 removable head 6.1.4.1.1 Body and heads shall be constructed of steel sheet of a suitable type and of adequate thickness in relation to the capacity of the drum and to its intended use. NOTE: In the case of carbon steel drums, "suitable" steels are identified in ISO 3573:1999 "Hot rolled carbon steel sheet of commercial and drawing qualities" and ISO 3574:1999 "Cold-reduced carbon steel sheet of commercial and drawing qualities". For carbon steel drums below 100 litres "suitable" steels in addition to the above standards are also identified in ISO 11949:1995 "Cold-reduced electrolytic tinplate", ISO 11950:1995 "Cold-reduced electrolytic chromium/chromium oxide-coated steel" and ISO 11951:1995 "Cold-reduced blackplate in coil form for the production of tinplate or electrolytic chromium/chromium oxide-coated steel. 6.1.4.1.2 Body seams shall be welded on drums intended to contain more than 40 litres of liquid. Body seams shall be mechanically seamed or welded on drums intended to contain solids or 40 litres or less of liquids. 6.1.4.1.3 Chimes shall be mechanically seamed or welded. Separate reinforcing rings may be applied. 6.1.4.1.4 The body of a drum of a capacity greater than 60 litres shall, in general, have at least two expanded rolling hoops or, alternatively, at least two separate rolling hoops. If there are separate rolling hoops they shall be fitted tightly on the body and so secured that they cannot shift. Rolling hoops shall not be spot welded. 6.1.4.1.5 Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or heads of non-removable head (1A1) drums shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Drums with larger openings are considered to be of the removable head type (1A2). Closures for openings in the bodies and heads of drums shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of carriage. Closure flanges may be mechanically seamed or welded in place. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be used with closures, unless the closure is inherently leakproof. 6.1.4.1.6 Closure devices for removable head (1A2) drums shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and drums will remain leakproof under normal conditions of carriage. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be used with all removable heads. 6.1.4.1.7 If materials used for body, heads, closures and fittings are not in themselves compatible with the contents to be carried, suitable internal protective coatings or treatments shall be applied. These coatings or treatments shall retain their protective properties under normal conditions of carriage. 6.1.4.1.8 Maximum capacity of drum: 450 litres. 6.1.4.1.9 Maximum net mass: 400 kg. 6.1.4.2 Aluminium drums 1B1 non-removable head 1B2 removable head 6.1.4.2.1 Body and heads shall be constructed of aluminium at least 99% pure or of an aluminium base alloy. Material shall be of a suitable type and of adequate thickness in relation to the capacity of the drum and to its intended use. 6.1.4.2.2 All seams shall be welded. Chime seams, if any, shall be reinforced by the application of separate reinforcing rings. 6.1.4.2.3 The body of a drum of a capacity greater than 60 litres shall, in general, have at least two expanded rolling hoops or, alternatively, at least two separate rolling hoops. If there are separate rolling hoops they shall be fitted tightly on the body and so secured that they cannot shift. Rolling hoops shall not be spot welded. 6.1.4.2.4 Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or heads of non-removable head (1B1) drums shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Drums with larger openings are considered to be of the removable head type (1B2). Closures for openings in the bodies and heads of drums shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of carriage. Closure flanges shall be welded in place so that the weld provides a leakproof seam. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be used with closures, unless the closure is inherently leakproof. 6.1.4.2.5 Closure devices for removable head (1B2) drums shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and drums will remain leakproof under normal conditions of carriage. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be used with all removable heads. 6.1.4.2.6 If materials used for body, heads, closures and fittings are not in themselves compatible with the contents to be carried, suitable internal protective coatings or treatments shall be applied. These coatings or treatments shall retain their protective properties under normal conditions of carriage. 6.1.4.2.7 Maximum capacity of drum: 450 litres. 6.1.4.2.8 Maximum net mass: 400 kg. 6.1.4.3 Drums of metal other than aluminium or steel 1N1 non-removable head 1N2 removable head 6.1.4.3.1 The body and heads shall be constructed of a metal or of a metal alloy other than steel or aluminium. Material shall be of a suitable type and of adequate thickness in relation to the capacity of the drum and to its intended use. 6.1.4.3.2 Chime seams, if any, shall be reinforced by the application of separate reinforcing rings. All seams, if any, shall be joined (welded, solded, etc.) in accordance with the technical state of the art for the used metal or metal alloy. 6.1.4.3.3 The body of a drum of a capacity greater than 60 litres shall, in general, have at least two expanded rolling hoops or, alternatively, at least two separate rolling hoops. If there are separate rolling hoops they shall be fitted tightly on the body and so secured that they cannot shift. Rolling hoops shall not be spot welded. 6.1.4.3.4 Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or heads of non-removable head (1N1) drums shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Drums with larger openings are considered to be of the removable head type (1N2). Closures for openings in the bodies and heads of drums shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of carriage. Closure flanges shall be joined in place (welded, solded, etc.) in accordance with the technical state of the art for the used metal or metal alloy so that the seam join is leakproof. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be used with closures, unless the closure is inherently leakproof. 6.1.4.3.5 Closure devices for removable head (1N2) drums shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and drums will remain leakproof under normal conditions of carriage. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be used with all removable heads. 6.1.4.3.6 If materials used for body, heads, closures and fittings are not in themselves compatible with the contents to be carried, suitable internal protective coatings or treatments shall be applied. These coatings or treatments shall retain their protective properties under normal conditions of carriage. 6.1.4.3.7 Maximum capacity of drum: 450 litres. 6.1.4.3.8 Maximum net mass: 400 kg. 6.1.4.4 Steel or aluminium jerricans 3A1 steel, non-removable head 3A2 steel, removable head 3B1 aluminium, non-removable head 3B2 aluminium, removable head 6.1.4.4.1 Body and heads shall be constructed of steel sheet, of aluminium at least 99% pure or of an aluminium base alloy. Material shall be of a suitable type and of adequate thickness in relation to the capacity of the jerrican and to its intended use. 6.1.4.4.2 Chimes of steel jerricans shall be mechanically seamed or welded. Body seams of steel jerricans intended to contain more than 40 litres of liquid shall be welded. Body seams of steel jerricans intended to contain 40 litres or less shall be mechanically seamed or welded. For aluminium jerricans, all seams shall be welded. Chime seams, if any, shall be reinforced by the application of a separate reinforcing ring. 6.1.4.4.3 Openings in non-removable head jerricans (3A1 and 3B1) shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Jerricans with larger openings are considered to be of the removable head type (3A2 and 3B2). Closures shall be so designed that they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of carriage. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be used with closures, unless the closure is inherently leakproof. 6.1.4.4.4 If materials used for body, heads, closures and fittings are not in themselves compatible with the contents to be carried, suitable internal protective coatings or treatments shall be applied. These coatings or treatments shall retain their protective properties under normal conditions of carriage. 6.1.4.4.5 Maximum capacity of jerrican: 60 litres. 6.1.4.4.6 Maximum net mass: 120 kg. 6.1.4.5 Plywood drums 1D 6.1.4.5.1 The wood used shall be well seasoned, commercially dry and free from any defect likely to lessen the effectiveness of the drum for the purpose intended. If a material other than plywood is used for the manufacture of the heads, it shall be of a quality equivalent to the plywood. 6.1.4.5.2 At least two ply plywood shall be used for the body and at least three ply plywood for the heads; the plies shall be firmly glued together by a water resistant adhesive with their grain crosswise. 6.1.4.5.3 The body and heads of the drum and their joins shall be of a design appropriate to the capacity of the drum and to its intended use. 6.1.4.5.4 In order to prevent sifting of the contents, lids shall be lined with kraft paper or some other equivalent material which shall be securely fastened to the lid and extend to the outside along its full circumference. 6.1.4.5.5 Maximum capacity of drum: 250 litres. 6.1.4.5.6 Maximum net mass: 400 kg. 6.1.4.6 (Deleted) 6.1.4.7 Fibre drums 1G 6.1.4.7.1 The body of the drum shall consist of multiple plies of heavy paper or fibreboard (without corrugations) firmly glued or laminated together and may include one or more protective layers of bitumen, waxed kraft paper, metal foil, plastics material, etc. 6.1.4.7.2 Heads shall be of natural wood, fibreboard, metal, plywood, plastics or other suitable material and may include one or more protective layers of bitumen, waxed kraft paper, metal foil, plastics material, etc. 6.1.4.7.3 The body and heads of the drum and their joins shall be of a design appropriate to the capacity of the drum and to its intended use. 6.1.4.7.4 The assembled packaging shall be sufficiently water resistant so as not to delaminate under normal conditions of carriage. 6.1.4.7.5 Maximum capacity of drum: 450 litres. 6.1.4.7.6 Maximum net mass: 400 kg. 6.1.4.8 Plastics drums and jerricans 1H1 drums, non-removable head 1H2 drums, removable head 3H1 jerricans, non-removable head 3H2 jerricans, removable head 6.1.4.8.1 The packaging shall be manufactured from suitable plastics material and be of adequate strength in relation to its capacity and intended use. Except for recycled plastics material as defined in 1.2.1, no used material other than production residues or regrind from the same manufacturing process may be used. The packaging shall be adequately resistant to ageing and to degradation caused either by the substance contained or by ultra-violet radiation. Any permeation of the substance contained in the package, or recycled plastics material used to produce new packaging, shall not constitute a danger under normal conditions of carriage. 6.1.4.8.2 If protection against ultra-violet radiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the packaging. Where use is made of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, retesting may be waived if the carbon black content does not exceed 2% by mass or if the pigment content does not exceed 3% by mass; the content of inhibitors of ultra-violet radiation is not limited. 6.1.4.8.3 Additives serving purposes other than protection against ultra-violet radiation may be included in the composition of the plastics material provided that they do not adversely affect the chemical and physical properties of the material of the packaging. In such circumstances, retesting may be waived. 6.1.4.8.4 The wall thickness at every point of the packaging shall be appropriate to its capacity and intended use, taking into account the stresses to which each point is liable to be exposed. 6.1.4.8.5 Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or heads of non-removable head drums (1H1) and jerricans (3H1) shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Drums and jerricans with larger openings are considered to be of the removable head type (1H2 and 3H2). Closures for openings in the bodies or heads of drums and jerricans shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of carriage. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be used with closures unless the closure is inherently leakproof. 6.1.4.8.6 Closure devices for removable head drums and jerricans (1H2 and 3H2) shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of carriage. Gaskets shall be used with all removable heads unless the drum or jerrican design is such that, where the removable head is properly secured, the drum or jerrican is inherently leakproof. 6.1.4.8.7 The maximum permissible permeability for flammable liquids shall be 0.008 at 23 °C (see 6.1.5.7). 6.1.4.8.8 (Deleted) 6.1.4.8.9 Maximum capacity of drums and jerricans: 1H1, 1H2: 450 litres 3H1, 3H2: 60 litres. 6.1.4.8.10 Maximum net mass: 1H1, 1H2: 400 kg 3H1, 3H2: 120 kg. 6.1.4.9 Boxes of natural wood 4C1 ordinary 4C2 with sift-proof walls 6.1.4.9.1 The wood used shall be well seasoned, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of any part of the box. The strength of the material used and the method of construction shall be appropriate to the capacity and intended use of the box. The tops and bottoms may be made of water resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type. 6.1.4.9.2 Fastenings shall be resistant to vibration experienced under normal conditions of carriage. End grain nailing shall be avoided whenever practicable. Joins which are likely to be highly stressed shall be made using clenched or annular ring nails or equivalent fastenings. 6.1.4.9.3 Box 4C2: each part shall consist of one piece or be equivalent thereto. Parts are considered equivalent to one piece when one of the following methods of glued assembly is used: Lindermann joint, tongue and groove joint, ship lap or rabbet joint or butt joint with at least two corrugated metal fasteners at each joint. 6.1.4.9.4 Maximum net mass: 400 kg. 6.1.4.10 Plywood boxes 4D 6.1.4.10.1 Plywood used shall be at least 3 ply. It shall be made from well seasoned rotary cut, sliced or sawn veneer, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of the box. The strength of the material used and the method of construction shall be appropriate to the capacity and intended use of the box. All adjacent plies shall be glued with water resistant adhesive. Other suitable materials may be used together with plywood in the construction of boxes. Boxes shall be firmly nailed or secured to corner posts or ends or be assembled by equally suitable devices. 6.1.4.10.2 Maximum net mass: 400 kg. 6.1.4.11 Reconstituted wood boxes 4F 6.1.4.11.1 The walls of boxes shall be made of water resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type. The strength of the material used and the method of construction shall be appropriate to the capacity of the boxes and to their intended use. 6.1.4.11.2 Other parts of the boxes may be made of other suitable material. 6.1.4.11.3 Boxes shall be securely assembled by means of suitable devices. 6.1.4.11.4 Maximum net mass: 400 kg. 6.1.4.12 Fibreboard boxes 4G 6.1.4.12.1 Strong and good quality solid or double faced corrugated fibreboard (single or multiwall) shall be used, appropriate to the capacity of the box and to its intended use. The water resistance of the outer surface shall be such that the increase in mass, as determined in a test carried out over a period of 30 minutes by the Cobb method of determining water absorption, is not greater than 155 g/m 2 see ISO 535:1991. It shall have proper bending qualities. Fibreboard shall be cut, creased without scoring, and slotted so as to permit assembly without cracking, surface breaks or undue bending. The fluting of corrugated fibreboard shall be firmly glued to the facings. 6.1.4.12.2 The ends of boxes may have a wooden frame or be entirely of wood or other suitable material. Reinforcements of wooden battens or other suitable material may be used. 6.1.4.12.3 Manufacturing joins in the body of boxes shall be taped, lapped and glued, or lapped and stitched with metal staples. Lapped joins shall have an appropriate overlap. 6.1.4.12.4 Where closing is effected by gluing or taping, a water resistant adhesive shall be used. 6.1.4.12.5 Boxes shall be designed so as to provide a good fit to the contents. 6.1.4.12.6 Maximum net mass: 400 kg. 6.1.4.13 Plastics boxes 4H1 expanded plastics boxes 4H2 solid plastics boxes 6.1.4.13.1 The box shall be manufactured from suitable plastics material and be of adequate strength in relation to its capacity and intended use. Except for recycled plastics material as defined in 1.2.1, no used material other than production residues or regrind from the same manufacturing process may be used. The box shall be adequately resistant to ageing and to degradation caused either by the substance contained or by ultra-violet radiation. 6.1.4.13.2 An expanded plastics box shall comprise two parts made of a moulded expanded plastics material, a bottom section containing cavities for the inner packagings and a top section covering and interlocking with the bottom section. The top and bottom sections shall be designed so that the inner packagings fit snugly. The closure cap for any inner packaging shall not be in contact with the inside of the top section of this box. 6.1.4.13.3 For dispatch, an expanded plastics box shall be closed with a self adhesive tape having sufficient tensile strength to prevent the box from opening. The adhesive tape shall be weather resistant and its adhesive compatible with the expanded plastics material of the box. Other closing devices at least equally effective may be used. 6.1.4.13.4 For solid plastics boxes, protection against ultra-violet radiation, if required, shall be provided by the addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the box. Where use is made of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, retesting may be waived if the carbon black content does not exceed 2% by mass or if the pigment content does not exceed 3% by mass; the content of inhibitors of ultra-violet radiation is not limited. 6.1.4.13.5 Additives serving purposes other than protection against ultra-violet radiation may be included in the composition of the plastics material provided that they do not adversely affect the chemical or physical properties of the material of the box. In such circumstances, retesting may be waived. 6.1.4.13.6 Solid plastics boxes shall have closure devices made of a suitable material of adequate strength and so designed as to prevent the box from unintentional opening. 6.1.4.13.7 (Deleted) 6.1.4.13.8 Maximum net mass: 4H1: 60 kg 4H2: 400 kg. 6.1.4.14 Steel, aluminium or other metal boxes 4A steel boxes 4B aluminium boxes 4N metal, other than steel or aluminium, boxes 6.1.4.14.1 The strength of the metal and the construction of the box shall be appropriate to the capacity of the box and to its intended use. 6.1.4.14.2 Boxes shall be lined with fibreboard or felt packing pieces or shall have an inner liner or coating of suitable material, as required. If a double seamed metal liner is used, steps shall be taken to prevent the ingress of substances, particularly explosives, into the recesses of the seams. 6.1.4.14.3 Closures may be of any suitable type; they shall remain secured under normal conditions of carriage. 6.1.4.14.4 Maximum net mass: 400 kg. 6.1.4.15 Textile bags 5L1 without inner liner or coating 5L2 sift-proof 5L3 water resistant 6.1.4.15.1 The textiles used shall be of good quality. The strength of the fabric and the construction of the bag shall be appropriate to the capacity of the bag and to its intended use. 6.1.4.15.2 Bags, sift-proof, 5L2: the bag shall be made sift-proof, for example by the use of: (a) paper bonded to the inner surface of the bag by a water resistant adhesive such as bitumen; or (b) plastics film bonded to the inner surface of the bag; or (c) one or more inner liners made of paper or plastics material. 6.1.4.15.3 Bags, water resistant, 5L3: to prevent the entry of moisture the bag shall be made waterproof, for example by the use of: (a) separate inner liners of water resistant paper (e.g. waxed kraft paper, tarred paper or plastics-coated kraft paper); or (b) plastics film bonded to the inner surface of the bag; or (c) one or more inner liners made of plastics material. 6.1.4.15.4 Maximum net mass: 50 kg. 6.1.4.16 Woven plastics bags 5H1 without inner liner or coating 5H2 sift-proof 5H3 water resistant 6.1.4.16.1 Bags shall be made from stretched tapes or monofilaments of a suitable plastics material. The strength of the material used and the construction of the bag shall be appropriate to the capacity of the bag and to its intended use. 6.1.4.16.2 If the fabric is woven flat, the bags shall be made by sewing or some other method ensuring closure of the bottom and one side. If the fabric is tubular, the bag shall be closed by sewing, weaving or some other equally strong method of closure. 6.1.4.16.3 Bags, sift-proof, 5H2: the bag shall be made sift-proof, for example by means of: (a) paper or a plastics film bonded to the inner surface of the bag; or (b) one or more separate inner liners made of paper or plastics material. 6.1.4.16.4 Bags, water resistant, 5H3: to prevent the entry of moisture, the bag shall be made waterproof, for example by means of: (a) separate inner liners of water resistant paper (e.g. waxed kraft paper, double-tarred kraft paper or plastics-coated kraft paper); or (b) plastics film bonded to the inner or outer surface of the bag; or (c) one or more inner plastics liners. 6.1.4.16.5 Maximum net mass: 50 kg. 6.1.4.17 Plastics film bags 5H4 6.1.4.17.1 Bags shall be made of a suitable plastics material. The strength of the material used and the construction of the bag shall be appropriate to the capacity of the bag and to its intended use. Joins and closures shall withstand pressures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of carriage. 6.1.4.17.2 Maximum net mass: 50 kg. 6.1.4.18 Paper bags 5M1 multiwall 5M2 multiwall, water resistant 6.1.4.18.1 Bags shall be made of a suitable kraft paper or of an equivalent paper with at least three plies, the middle ply of which may be net-cloth and adhesive bonding to the outer paper plies. The strength of the paper and the construction of the bags shall be appropriate to the capacity of the bag and to its intended use. Joins and closures shall be sift-proof. 6.1.4.18.2 Bags 5M2: to prevent the entry of moisture, a bag of four plies or more shall be made waterproof by the use of either a water resistant ply as one of the two outermost plies or a water resistant barrier made of a suitable protective material between the two outermost plies; a bag of three plies shall be made waterproof by the use of a water resistant ply as the outermost ply. Where there is a danger of the substance contained reacting with moisture or where it is packed damp, a waterproof ply or barrier, such as double-tarred kraft paper, plastics-coated kraft paper, plastics film bonded to the inner surface of the bag, or one or more inner plastics liners, shall also be placed next to the substance. Joins and closures shall be waterproof. 6.1.4.18.3 Maximum net mass: 50 kg. 6.1.4.19 Composite packagings (plastics material) 6HA1 plastics receptacle with outer steel drum 6HA2 plastics receptacle with outer steel crate or box 6HB1 plastics receptacle with outer aluminium drum 6HB2 plastics receptacle with outer aluminium crate or box 6HC plastics receptacle with outer wooden box 6HD1 plastics receptacle with outer plywood drum 6HD2 plastics receptacle with outer plywood box 6HG1 plastics receptacle with outer fibre drum 6HG2 plastics receptacle with outer fibreboard box 6HH1 plastics receptacle with outer plastics drum 6HH2 plastics receptacle with outer solid plastics box 6.1.4.19.1 Inner receptacle 6.1.4.19.1.1 The requirements of 6.1.4.8.1 and 6.1.4.8.4 to 6.1.4.8.7 apply to plastics inner receptacles. 6.1.4.19.1.2 The plastics inner receptacle shall fit snugly inside the outer packaging, which shall be free of any projection that might abrade the plastics material. 6.1.4.19.1.3 Maximum capacity of inner receptacle: 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, 6HG1, 6HH1: 250 litres 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, 6HH2: 60 litres. 6.1.4.19.1.4 Maximum net mass: 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, 6HG1, 6HH1: 400 kg 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, 6HH2: 75 kg. 6.1.4.19.2 Outer packaging 6.1.4.19.2.1 Plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium drum 6HA1 or 6HB1; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.1 or 6.1.4.2, as appropriate, apply to the construction of the outer packaging. 6.1.4.19.2.2 Plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium crate or box 6HA2 or 6HB2; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.14 apply to the construction of the outer packaging. 6.1.4.19.2.3 Plastics receptacle with outer wooden box 6HC; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.9 apply to the construction of the outer packaging. 6.1.4.19.2.4 Plastics receptacle with outer plywood drum 6HD1; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.5 apply to the construction of the outer packaging. 6.1.4.19.2.5 Plastics receptacle with outer plywood box 6HD2; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.10 apply to the construction of the outer packaging. 6.1.4.19.2.6 Plastics receptacle with outer fibre drum 6HG1; the requirements of 6.1.4.7.1 to 6.1.4.7.4 apply to the construction of the outer packaging. 6.1.4.19.2.7 Plastics receptacle with outer fibreboard box 6HG2; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.12 apply to the construction of the outer packaging. 6.1.4.19.2.8 Plastics receptacle with outer plastics drum 6HH1; the requirements of 6.1.4.8.1 to 6.1.4.8.6 apply to the construction of the outer packaging. 6.1.4.19.2.9 Plastics receptacles with outer solid plastics box (including corrugated plastics material) 6HH2; the requirements of 6.1.4.13.1 and 6.1.4.13.4 to 6.1.4.13.6 apply to the construction of the outer packaging. 6.1.4.20 Composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware) 6PA1 receptacle with outer steel drum 6PA2 receptacle with outer steel crate or box 6PB1 receptacle with outer aluminium drum 6PB2 receptacle with outer aluminium crate or box 6PC receptacle with outer wooden box 6PD1 receptacle with outer plywood drum 6PD2 receptacle with outer wickerwork hamper 6PG1 receptacle with outer fibre drum 6PG2 receptacle with outer fibreboard box 6PH1 receptacle with outer expanded plastics packaging 6PH2 receptacle with outer solid plastics packaging 6.1.4.20.1 Inner receptacle 6.1.4.20.1.1 Receptacles shall be of a suitable form (cylindrical or pear-shaped) and be made of good quality material free from any defect that could impair their strength. The walls shall be sufficiently thick at every point and free from internal stresses. 6.1.4.20.1.2 Screw-threaded plastics closures, ground glass stoppers or closures at least equally effective shall be used as closures for receptacles. Any part of the closure likely to come into contact with the contents of the receptacle shall be resistant to those contents. Care shall be taken to ensure that the closures are so fitted as to be leakproof and are suitably secured to prevent any loosening during carriage. If vented closures are necessary, they shall comply with 4.1.1.8. 6.1.4.20.1.3 The receptacle shall be firmly secured in the outer packaging by means of cushioning and/or absorbent materials. 6.1.4.20.1.4 Maximum capacity of receptacle: 60 litres. 6.1.4.20.1.5 Maximum net mass: 75 kg. 6.1.4.20.2 Outer packaging 6.1.4.20.2.1 Receptacle with outer steel drum 6PA1; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.1 apply to the construction of the outer packaging. The removable lid required for this type of packaging may nevertheless be in the form of a cap. 6.1.4.20.2.2 Receptacle with outer steel crate or box 6PA2; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.14 apply to the construction of the outer packaging. For cylindrical receptacles the outer packaging shall, when upright, rise above the receptacle and its closure. If the crate surrounds a pear-shaped receptacle and is of matching shape, the outer packaging shall be fitted with a protective cover (cap). 6.1.4.20.2.3 Receptacle with outer aluminium drum 6PB1; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.2 apply to the construction of the outer packaging. 6.1.4.20.2.4 Receptacle with outer aluminium crate or box 6PB2; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.14 apply to the construction of the outer packaging. 6.1.4.20.2.5 Receptacle with outer wooden box 6PC; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.9 apply to the construction of the outer packaging. 6.1.4.20.2.6 Receptacle with outer plywood drum 6PD1; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.5 apply to the construction of the outer packaging. 6.1.4.20.2.7 Receptacle with outer wickerwork hamper 6PD2. The wickerwork hamper shall be properly made with material of good quality. It shall be fitted with a protective cover (cap) so as to prevent damage to the receptacle. 6.1.4.20.2.8 Receptacle with outer fibre drum 6PG1; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.7.1 to 6.1.4.7.4 apply to the construction of the outer packaging. 6.1.4.20.2.9 Receptacle with outer fibreboard box 6PG2; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.12 apply to the construction of the outer packaging. 6.1.4.20.2.10 Receptacle with outer expanded plastics or solid plastics packaging (6PH1 or 6PH2); the materials of both outer packagings shall meet the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.13. Outer solid plastics packaging shall be manufactured from high density polyethylene or some other comparable plastics material. The removable lid for this type of packaging may nevertheless be in the form of a cap. 6.1.4.21 Combination packagings The relevant requirements of section 6.1.4 for the outer packagings to be used, are applicable. NOTE: For the inner and outer packagings to be used, see the relevant packing instructions in Chapter 4.1. 6.1.4.22 Light-gauge metal packagings 0A1 non-removable-head 0A2 removable-head 6.1.4.22.1 The sheet metal for the body and ends shall be of suitable steel, and of a gauge appropriate to the capacity and intended use of the packaging. 6.1.4.22.2 The joints shall be welded, at least double-seamed by welting or produced by a method ensuring a similar degree of strength and leakproofness. 6.1.4.22.3 Inner coatings of zinc, tin, lacquer, etc. shall be tough and shall adhere to the steel at every point, including the closures. 6.1.4.22.4 Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or heads of non-removable head (0A1) packagings shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Packagings with larger openings shall be considered to be of the removable-head type (0A2). 6.1.4.22.5 The closures of non-removable-head packagings (0A1) shall either be of the screw-threaded type or be capable of being secured by a screwable device or a device at least equally effective. The closures of removable-head packagings (0A2) shall be so designed and fitted that they stay firmly closed and the packagings remain leakproof in normal conditions of carriage. 6.1.4.22.6 Maximum capacity of packagings: 40 litres. 6.1.4.22.7 Maximum net mass: 50 kg. 6.1.5 Test requirements for packagings 6.1.5.1 Performance and frequency of tests 6.1.5.1.1 The design type of each packaging shall be tested as provided in 6.1.5 in accordance with procedures established by the competent authority allowing the allocation of the mark and shall be approved by this competent authority. 6.1.5.1.2 Each packaging design type shall successfully pass the tests prescribed in this Chapter before being used. A packaging design type is defined by the design, size, material and thickness, manner of construction and packing, but may include various surface treatments. It also includes packagings which differ from the design type only in their lesser design height. 6.1.5.1.3 Tests shall be repeated on production samples at intervals established by the competent authority. For such tests on paper or fibreboard packagings, preparation at ambient conditions is considered equivalent to the requirements of 6.1.5.2.3. 6.1.5.1.4 Tests shall also be repeated after each modification which alters the design, material or manner of construction of a packaging. 6.1.5.1.5 The competent authority may permit the selective testing of packagings that differ only in minor respects from a tested type, e.g. smaller sizes of inner packagings or inner packagings of lower net mass; and packagings such as drums, bags and boxes which are produced with small reductions in external dimension(s). 6.1.5.1.6 (Reserved) NOTE: For the conditions for using different inner packagings in an outer packaging and permissible variations in inner packagings, see 4.1.1.5.1. These conditions do not limit the use of inner packagings when applying 6.1.5.1.7. 6.1.5.1.7 Articles or inner packagings of any type for solids or liquids may be assembled and carried without testing in an outer packaging under the following conditions: (a) The outer packaging shall have been successfully tested in accordance with 6.1.5.3 with fragile (e.g. glass) inner packagings containing liquids using the packing group I drop height; (b) The total combined gross mass of inner packagings shall not exceed one half the gross mass of inner packagings used for the drop test in (a) above; (c) The thickness of cushioning material between inner packagings and between inner packagings and the outside of the packaging shall not be reduced below the corresponding thicknesses in the originally tested packaging; and if a single inner packaging was used in the original test, the thicknesses of cushioning between inner packagings shall not be less than the thickness of cushioning between the outside of the packaging and the inner packaging in the original test. If either fewer or smaller inner packagings are used (as compared to the inner packagings used in the drop test), sufficient additional cushioning material shall be used to take up void spaces; (d) The outer packaging shall have passed successfully the stacking test in 6.1.5.6 while empty. The total mass of identical packages shall be based on the combined mass of inner packagings used for the drop test in (a) above; (e) Inner packagings containing liquids shall be completely surrounded with a sufficient quantity of absorbent material to absorb the entire liquid contents of the inner packagings; (f) If the outer packaging is intended to contain inner packagings for liquids and is not leakproof, or is intended to contain inner packagings for solids and is not siftproof, a means of containing any liquid or solid contents in the event of leakage shall be provided in the form of a leakproof liner, plastics bag or other equally efficient means of containment. For packagings containing liquids, the absorbent material required in (e) above shall be placed inside the means of containing the liquid contents; (g) Packagings shall be marked in accordance with 6.1.3 as having been tested to packing group I performance for combination packagings. The marked gross mass in kilograms shall be the sum of the mass of the outer packaging plus one half of the mass of the inner packaging(s) as used for the drop test referred to in (a) above. Such a package mark shall also contain a letter "V" as described in 6.1.2.4. 6.1.5.1.8 The competent authority may at any time require proof, by tests in accordance with this section, that serially-produced packagings meet the requirements of the design type tests. For verification purposes records of such tests shall be maintained. 6.1.5.1.9 If an inner treatment or coating is required for safety reasons, it shall retain its protective properties even after the tests. 6.1.5.1.10 Provided the validity of the test results is not affected and with the approval of the competent authority, several tests may be made on one sample. 6.1.5.1.11 Salvage packagings Salvage packagings (see 1.2.1) shall be tested and marked in accordance with the requirements applicable to packing group II packagings intended for the carriage of solids or inner packagings, except as follows: (a) The test substance used in performing the tests shall be water, and the packagings shall be filled to not less than 98% of their maximum capacity. It is permissible to use additives, such as bags of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total package mass so long as they are placed so that the test results are not affected. Alternatively, in performing the drop test, the drop height may be varied in accordance with 6.1.5.3.5 (b); (b) Packagings shall, in addition, have been successfully subjected to the leakproofness test at 30 kPa, with the results of this test reflected in the test report required by 6.1.5.8; and (c) Packagings shall be marked with the letter "T" as described in 6.1.2.4. 6.1.5.2 Preparation of packagings for testing 6.1.5.2.1 Tests shall be carried out on packagings prepared as for carriage including, with respect to combination packagings, the inner packagings used. Inner or single receptacles or packagings shall be filled to not less than 98% of their maximum capacity for liquids or 95% for solids. For combination packagings other than bags where the inner packaging is designed to carry liquids and solids, separate testing is required for both liquid and solid contents. Bags shall be filled to the maximum mass at which they may be used. The substances or articles to be carried in the packagings may be replaced by other substances or articles except where this would invalidate the results of the tests. For solids, when another substance is used it shall have the same physical characteristics (mass, grain size, etc.) as the substance to be carried. It is permissible to use additives, such as bags of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total package mass, so long as they are placed so that the test results are not affected. 6.1.5.2.2 In the drop tests for liquids, when another substance is used, it shall be of similar relative density and viscosity to those of the substance being carried. Water may also be used for the liquid drop test under the conditions in 6.1.5.3.5. 6.1.5.2.3 Paper or fibreboard packagings shall be conditioned for at least 24 hours in an atmosphere having a controlled temperature and relative humidity (r.h.). There are three options, one of which shall be chosen. The preferred atmosphere is 23 °C ± 2 °C and 50% ± 2% r.h. The two other options are 20 °C ± 2 °C and 65% ± 2% r.h. or 27 °C ± 2 °C and 65% ± 2% r.h. NOTE: Average values shall fall within these limits. Short term fluctuations and measurement limitations may cause individual measurements to vary by up to ± 5% relative humidity without significant impairment of test reproducibility. 6.1.5.2.4 (Reserved) 6.1.5.2.5 To check that their chemical compatibility with the liquids is sufficient, plastics drums and jerricans in accordance with 6.1.4.8 and if necessary composite packagings (plastics material) in accordance with 6.1.4.19 shall be subjected to storage at ambient temperature for six months, during which time the test samples shall be kept filled with the goods they are intended to carry. For the first and last 24 hours of storage, the test samples shall be placed with the closure downwards. However, packagings fitted with a vent shall be so placed on each occasion for five minutes only. After this storage the test samples shall undergo the tests prescribed in 6.1.5.3 to 6.1.5.6. When it is known that the strength properties of the plastics material of the inner receptacles of composite packagings (plastics material) are not significantly altered by the action of the filling substance, it shall not be necessary to check that the chemical compatibility is sufficient. A significant alteration in strength properties means: (a) distinct embrittlement; or (b) a considerable decrease in elasticity, unless related to a not less than proportionate increase in the elongation under load. Where the behaviour of the plastics material has been established by other means, the above compatibility test may be dispensed with. Such procedures shall be at least equivalent to the above compatibility test and be recognized by the competent authority. NOTE: For plastics drums and jerricans and composite packagings (plastics material) made of polyethylene, see also 6.1.5.2.6 below. 6.1.5.2.6 For polyethylene drums and jerricans in accordance with 6.1.4.8 and if necessary, polyethylene composite packagings in accordance with 6.1.4.19, chemical compatibility with filling liquids assimilated in accordance with 4.1.1. 21 may be verified as follows with standard liquids (see 6.1.6). The standard liquids are representative for the processes of deterioration on polyethylene, as there are softening through swelling, cracking under stress, molecular degradation and combinations thereof. The sufficient chemical compatibility of the packagings may be verified by storage of the required test samples for three weeks at 40 °C with the appropriate standard liquid(s); where this standard liquid is water, storage in accordance with this procedure is not required. Storage is not required either for test samples which are used for the stacking test in case of the standard liquids "wetting solution" and "acetic acid". For the first and last 24 hours of storage, the test samples shall be placed with the closure downwards. However, packagings fitted with a vent shall be so placed on each occasion for five minutes only. After this storage, the test samples shall undergo the tests prescribed in 6.1.5.3 to 6.1.5.6. The compatibility test for tert-Butyl hydroperoxide with more than 40% peroxide content and peroxyacetic acids of Class 5.2 shall not be carried out using standard liquids. For these substances, sufficient chemical compatibility of the test samples shall be verified during a storage period of six months at ambient temperature with the substances they are intended to carry. Results of the procedure in accordance with this paragraph from polyethylene packagings can be approved for an equal design type , the internal surface of which is fluorinated. 6.1.5.2.7 For packagings made of polyethylene, as specified in 6.1.5.2.6, which have passed the test in 6.1.5.2.6, filling substances other than those assimilated in accordance with 4.1.1. 21 may also be approved. Such approval shall be based on laboratory tests verifying that the effect of such filling substances on the test specimens is less than that of the appropriate standard liquid(s) taking into account the relevant processes of deterioration. The same conditions as those set out in 4.1.1. 21 .2 shall apply with respect to relative density and vapour pressure. 6.1.5.2.8 Provided that the strength properties of the plastics inner packagings of a combination packaging are not significantly altered by the action of the filling substance, proof of chemical compatibility is not necessary. A significant alteration in strength properties means: (a) distinct embrittlement; (b) a considerable decrease in elasticity, unless related to a not less than proportionate increase in elastic elongation. 6.1.5.3 Drop test 6.1.5.3.1 Number of test samples (per design type and manufacturer) and drop orientation For other than flat drops the centre of gravity shall be vertically over the point of impact. Where more than one orientation is possible for a given drop test, the orientation most likely to result in failure of the packaging shall be used. Packaging No. of test samples Drop orientation (a) Steel drums Aluminium drums Drums of metal other than steel or aluminium Steel jerricans Aluminium jerricans Plywood drums Fibre drums Plastics drums and jerricans Composite packagings which are in the shape of a drum Light-gauge metal packagings Six (three for each drop) First drop (using three samples): packaging shall strike the target diagonally on the chime or, if the packaging has no chime, on a circumferential seam or an edge. Second drop (using the other three samples): the packaging shall strike the target on the weakest part not tested by the first drop, for example a closure or, for some cylindrical drums, the welded longitudinal seam of the drum body. (b) Boxes of natural wood Plywood boxes Reconstituted wood boxes Fibreboard boxes Plastics boxes Steel or aluminium boxes Composite packagings which are in the shape of a box Five (one for each drop) First drop: flat on the bottom Second drop: flat on the top Third drop: flat on the long side Fourth drop: flat on the short side Fifth drop: on a corner (c) Bags – single-ply with a side seam Three (three drops per bag) First drop: flat on a wide face Second drop: flat on a narrow face Third drop: on an end of the bag (d) Bags – single-ply without a side seam, or multi-ply Three (two drops per bag) First drop: flat on a wide face Second drop: on an end of the bag (e) Composite packagings (glass, stoneware or porcelain), marked with the symbol "RID/ADR" according to 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii) and which are in the shape of a drum or box Three (one for each drop) Diagonally on the bottom chime, or, if there is no chime, on a circumferential seam or the bottom edge. 6.1.5.3.2 Special preparation of test samples for the drop test The temperature of the test sample and its contents shall be reduced to –18 °C or lower for the following packagings: (a) plastics drums (see 6.1.4.8); (b) plastics jerricans (see 6.1.4.8); (c) plastics boxes other than expanded plastics boxes (see 6.1.4.13); (d) composite packagings (plastics material) (see 6.1.4.19) and; (e) combination packagings with plastics inner packagings, other than plastics bags intended to contain solids or articles. Where test samples are prepared in this way, the conditioning in 6.1.5.2.3 may be waived. Test liquids shall be kept in the liquid state by the addition of anti-freeze if necessary. 6.1.5.3.3 Removable head packagings for liquids shall not be dropped until at least 24 hours after filling and closing to allow for any possible gasket relaxation. 6.1.5.3.4 Target The target shall be a non-resilient and horizontal surface and shall be: – Integral and massive enough to be immovable; – Flat with a surface kept free from local defects capable of influencing the test results; – Rigid enough to be non-deformable under test conditions and not liable to become damaged by the tests; and – Sufficiently large to ensure that the test package falls entirely upon the surface. 6.1.5.3.5 Drop height For solids and liquids, if the test is performed with the solid or liquid to be carried or with another substance having essentially the same physical characteristics: Packing Group I Packing Group II Packing Group III 1.8 m 1.2 m 0.8 m For liquids in single packagings and for inner packagings of combination packagings, if the test is performed with water: NOTE: The term water includes water/antifreeze solutions with a minimum specific gravity of 0.95 for testing at -18 °C . (a) where the substances to be carried have a relative density not exceeding 1.2: Packing Group I Packing Group II Packing Group III 1.8 m 1.2 m 0.8 m (b) where the substances to be carried have a relative density exceeding 1.2, the drop height shall be calculated on the basis of the relative density (d) of the substance to be carried, rounded up to the first decimal, as follows: Packing Group I Packing Group II Packing Group III d x 1.5 (m) d x 1.0 (m) d x 0.67 (m) (c) for light-gauge metal packagings, marked with symbol "RID/ADR" according to 6.1.3.1(a) (ii) intended for the carriage of substances having a viscosity at 23 °C greater than 200 mm 2 /s (corresponding to a flow time of 30 seconds with an ISO flow cup having a jet orifice of 6 mm diameter in accordance with ISO Standard 2431:1993) (i) if the relative density does not exceed 1.2: Packing Group II Packing Group III 0.6 m 0.4 m (ii) where the substances to be carried have a relative density (d) exceeding 1.2 the drop height shall be calculated on the basis of the relative density (d) of the substance to be carried, rounded up to the first decimal place, as follows: Packing Group II Packing Group III d x 0.5 (m) d x 0.33 (m) 6.1.5.3.6 Criteria for passing the test: 6.1.5.3.6.1 Each packaging containing liquid shall be leakproof when equilibrium has been reached between the internal and external pressures, however for inner packagings of combination packagings and except for inner receptacles of composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware), marked with the symbol "RID/ADR" according to 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii) it is not necessary that the pressures be equalized. 6.1.5.3.6.2 Where a packaging for solids undergoes a drop test and its upper face strikes the target, the test sample passes the test if the entire contents are retained by an inner packaging or inner receptacle (e.g. a plastics bag), even if the closure while retaining its containment function, is no longer sift-proof. 6.1.5.3.6.3 The packaging or outer packaging of a composite or combination packaging shall not exhibit any damage liable to affect safety during carriage. Inner receptacles, inner packagings, or articles shall remain completely within the outer packaging and there shall be no leakage of the filling substance from the inner receptacle(s) or inner packaging(s). 6.1.5.3.6.4 Neither the outermost ply of a bag nor an outer packaging may exhibit any damage liable to affect safety during carriage. 6.1.5.3.6.5 A slight discharge from the closure(s) upon impact is not considered to be a failure of the packaging provided that no further leakage occurs. 6.1.5.3.6.6 No rupture is permitted in packagings for goods of Class 1 which would permit the spillage of loose explosive substances or articles from the outer packaging. 6.1.5.4 Leakproofness test The leakproofness test shall be performed on all design types of packagings intended to contain liquids; however, this test is not required for – inner packagings of combination packagings; – inner receptacles of composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware), marked with the symbol "RID/ADR" according to 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii); – light-gauge metal packagings, marked with the symbol "RID/ADR" according to 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii) intended for substances with a viscosity at 23 °C exceeding 200 mm 2 /s. 6.1.5.4.1 Number of test samples: three test samples per design type and manufacturer. 6.1.5.4.2 Special preparation of test samples for the test:: either vented closures shall be replaced by similar non-vented closures or the vent shall be sealed. 6.1.5.4.3 Test method and pressure to be applied: the packagings including their closures shall be restrained under water for 5 minutes while an internal air pressure is applied, the method of restraint shall not affect the results of the test. The air pressure (gauge) to be applied shall be: Packing Group I Packing Group II Packing Group III Not less than 30 kPa (0.3 bar) Not less than 20 kPa (0.2 bar) Not less than 20 kPa (0.2 bar) Other methods at least equally effective may be used. 6.1.5.4.4 Criterion for passing the test: There shall be no leakage. 6.1.5.5 Internal pressure (hydraulic) test 6.1.5.5.1 Packagings to be tested The internal pressure (hydraulic) test shall be carried out on all design types of metal, plastics and composite packagings intended to contain liquids. This test is not required for: – inner packagings of combination packagings; – inner receptacles of composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware), marked with the symbol "RID/ADR" according to 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii); – light-gauge metal packagings, marked with the symbol "RID/ADR" according to 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii) intended for substances with a viscosity at 23 °C exceeding 200 mm 2 /s. 6.1.5.5.2 Number of test samples: three test samples per design type and manufacturer. 6.1.5.5.3 Special preparation of packagings for testing: Either vented closures shall be replaced by similar non-vented closures or the vent shall be sealed. 6.1.5.5.4 Test method and pressure to be applied: metal packagings and composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware), including their closures, shall be subjected to the test pressure for 5 minutes. Plastics packagings and composite packagings (plastics material) including their closures shall be subjected to the test pressure for 30 minutes. This pressure is the one to be included in the mark required by 6.1.3.1 (d). The manner in which the packagings are supported shall not invalidate the test. The test pressure shall be applied continuously and evenly; it shall be kept constant throughout the test period. The hydraulic pressure (gauge) applied, as determined by any one of the following methods, shall be: (a) not less than the total gauge pressure measured in the packaging (i.e. the vapour pressure of the filling liquid and the partial pressure of the air or other inert gases, minus 100 kPa) at 55 °C, multiplied by a safety factor of 1.5; this total gauge pressure shall be determined on the basis of a maximum degree of filling in accordance with 4.1.1.4 and a filling temperature of l5 °C; or (b) not less than 1.75 times the vapour pressure at 50 °C of the liquid to be carried, minus 100 kPa but with a minimum test pressure of 100 kPa; or (c) not less than 1.5 times the vapour pressure at 55 °C of the liquid to be carried, minus 100 kPa but with a minimum test pressure of 100 kPa. 6.1.5.5.5 In addition, packagings intended to contain liquids of packing group I shall be tested to a minimum test pressure of 250 kPa (gauge) for a test period of 5 or 30 minutes depending upon the material of construction of the packaging. 6.1.5.5.6 Criterion for passing the test: No packaging may leak. 6.1.5.6 Stacking test All design types of packagings other than bags and other than non-stackable composite packagings (glass, porcelain, or stoneware), marked with the symbol "RID/ADR" according to 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii) shall be subjected to a stacking test. 6.1.5.6.1 Number of test samples: three test samples per design type and manufacturer. 6.1.5.6.2 Test method: the test sample shall be subjected to a force applied to the top surface of the test sample equivalent to the total weight of identical packages which might be stacked on it during carriage; where the contents of the test sample are liquids with relative density different from that of the liquid to be carried, the force shall be calculated in relation to the latter. The minimum height of the stack including the test sample shall be 3 metres. The duration of the test shall be 24 hours except that plastics drums, jerricans, and composite packagings 6HH1 and 6HH2 intended for liquids shall be subjected to the stacking test for a period of 28 days at a temperature of not less than 40 °C. For the test in accordance with 6.1.5.2.5, the original filling substance shall be used. For the test in accordance with 6.1.5.2.6, a stacking test shall be carried out with a standard liquid. 6.1.5.6.3 Criteria for passing the test: No test sample shall leak. In composite packagings or combination packagings, there shall be no leakage of the filling substance from the inner receptacle or inner packaging. No test sample shall show any deterioration which could adversely affect transport safety or any distortion liable to reduce its strength or cause instability in stacks of packages. Plastics packagings shall be cooled to ambient temperature before the assessment. 6.1.5.7 Supplementary permeability test for plastics drums and jerricans in accordance with 6.1.4.8 and for composite packagings (plastics material) in accordance with 6.1.4.19 intended for the carriage of liquids having a flash-point 60 °C, other than 6HA1 packagings Polyethylene packagings need be subjected to this test only if they are to be approved for the carriage of benzene, toluene, xylene or mixtures and preparations containing those substances. 6.1.5.7.1 Number of test samples: three packagings per design type and manufacturer. 6.1.5.7.2 Special preparation of the test sample for the test: The test samples are to be pre-stored with the original filling substance in accordance with 6.1.5.2.5, or, for polyethylene packagings, with the standard liquid mixture of hydrocarbons (white spirit) in accordance with 6.1.5.2.6. 6.1.5.7.3 Test method: The test samples filled with the substance for which the packaging is to be approved shall be weighed before and after storage for 28 days at 23 °C and 50% relative atmospheric humidity. For polyethylene packagings, the test may be carried out with the standard liquid mixture of hydrocarbons (white spirit) in place of benzene, toluene or xylene. 6.1.5.7.4 Criterion for passing the test: Permeability shall not exceed 0.008 . 6.1.5.8 Test Report 6.1.5.8.1 A test report containing at least the following particulars shall be drawn up and shall be available to the users of the packaging: 1. Name and address of the test facility; 2. Name and address of applicant (where appropriate); 3. A unique test report identification; 4. Date of the test report; 5. Manufacturer of the packaging; 6. Description of the packaging design type (e.g. dimensions, materials, closures, thickness, etc.), including method of manufacture (e.g. blow moulding) and which may include drawing(s) and/or photograph(s); 7. Maximum capacity; 8. Characteristics of test contents, e.g. viscosity and relative density for liquids and particle size for solids. For plastics packagings subject to the internal pressure test in 6.1.5.5, the temperature of the water used; 9. Test descriptions and results; 10. The test report shall be signed with the name and status of the signatory. 6.1.5.8.2 The test report shall contain statements that the packaging prepared as for carriage was tested in accordance with the appropriate requirements of this section and that the use of other packaging methods or components may render it invalid. A copy of the test report shall be available to the competent authority. 6.1.6 Standard liquids for verifying the chemical compatibility testing of polyethylene packagings, including IBCs, in accordance with 6.1.5.2.6 and 6.5.6.3.5, respectively 6.1.6.1 The following standard liquids shall be used for this plastics material. (a) Wetting Solution for substances causing severe cracking in polyethylene under stress, in particular for all solutions and preparations containing wetting agents. An aqueous solution of 1% of alkyl benzene sulphonate, or an aqueous solution of 5% nonylphenol ethoxylate which has been preliminary stored for at least 14 days at a temperature of 40 °C before being used for the first time for the tests, shall be used. The surface tension of this solution shall be 31 to 35 mN/m at 23 °C. The stacking test shall be carried out on the basis of a relative density of not less than 1.20. A compatibility test with acetic acid is not required if adequate chemical compatibility is proved with a wetting solution. For filling substances causing cracking in polyethylene under stress which is resistant to the wetting solution, adequate chemical compatibility may be proved after preliminary storing for three weeks at 40 °C in accordance with 6.1.5.2.6, but with the original filling matter. (b) Acetic acid for substances and preparations causing cracking in polyethylene under stress, in particular for monocarboxylic acids and monovalent alcohols. Acetic acid in 98 to 100% concentration shall be used. Relative density = 1.05. The stacking test shall be carried out on the basis of a relative density not less than 1.1. In the case of filling substances causing polyethylene to swell more than acetic acid and to such an extent that the polyethylene mass is increased by up to 4%, adequate chemical compatibility may be proved after preliminary storing for three weeks at 40 °C, in accordance with 6.1.5.2.6 but with the original filling matter. (c) Normal butyl acetate/normal butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution for substances and preparations causing polyethylene to swell to such an extent that the polyethylene mass is increased by about 4% and at the same time causing cracking under stress, in particular for phyto-sanitary products, liquid paints and esters. Normal butyl acetate in 98 to 100% concentration shall be used for preliminary storage in accordance with 6.1.5.2.6. For the stacking test in accordance with 6.1.5.6, a test liquid consisting of a 1 to 10% aqueous wetting solution mixed with 2% normal butyl acetate conforming to (a) above shall be used. The stacking test shall be carried out on the basis of a relative density not less than 1.0. In the case of filling substances causing polyethylene to swell more than normal butyl acetate and to such an extent that the polyethylene mass is increased by up to 7.5%, adequate chemical compatibility may be proved after preliminary storing for three weeks at 40 °C, in accordance with 6.1.5.2.6 but with the original filling matter. (d) Mixture of hydrocarbons (white spirit) for substances and preparations causing polyethylene to swell, in particular for hydrocarbons, esters and ketones. A mixture of hydrocarbons having a boiling range 160 °C to 220 °C, relative density 0.78 0.80, flash-point > 50 °C and an aromatic content 16% to 21% shall be used. The stacking test shall be carried out on the basis of a relative density not less than 1.0. In the case of filling substances causing polyethylene to swell to such an extent that the polyethylene mass is increased by more than 7.5%, adequate chemical compatibility may be proved after preliminary storing for three weeks at 40 °C, in accordance with 6.1.5.2.6 but with the original filling matter. (e) Nitric acid for all substances and preparations having an oxidizing effect on polyethylene and causing molecular degradation identical to or less than 55% nitric acid. Nitric acid in a concentration of not less than 55% shall be used. The stacking test shall be carried out on the basis of a relative density of not less than 1.4. In the case of filling substances more strongly oxidizing than 55% nitric acid or causing degradation of the molecular mass proceed in accordance with 6.1.5.2.5. The period of use shall be determined in such cases by observing the degree of damage (e.g. two years for nitric acid in not less than 55% concentration). (f) Water for substances which do not attack polyethylene in any of the cases referred to under (a) to (e), in particular for inorganic acids and lyes, aqueous saline solutions, polyvalent alcohols and organic substances in aqueous solution. The stacking test shall be carried out on the basis of a relative density of not less than 1.2. A design type test with water is not required if adequate chemical compatibility is proved with wetting solution or nitric acid. Chapter 6.2 Requirements for the construction and testing of pressure receptacles, aerosol dispensers, small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) and fuel cell cartridges containing liquefied flammable gas NOTE: Aerosol dispensers, small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) and fuel cell cartridges containing liquefied flammable gas are not subject to the requirements of 6.2.1 to 6.2.5 . 6.2.1 General requirements 6.2.1.1 Design and construction 6.2.1.1.1 Pressure receptacles shall be designed, manufactured, tested and equipped in such a way as to withstand all conditions, including fatigue, to which they will be subjected during normal conditions of carriage and intended use. 6.2.1.1.2 (Reserved) 6.2.1.1.3 In no case shall the minimum wall thickness be less than that specified in the design and construction technical standards. 6.2.1.1.4 For welded pressure receptacles, only metals of weldable quality shall be welded . 6.2.1.1.5 The test pressure of pressure receptacle shells and bundles of cylinders shall be in accordance with packing instruction P 200 of 4.1.4.1, or, for a chemical under pressure, with packing instruction P 206 of 4.1.4.1. The test pressure for closed cryogenic receptacles shall be in accordance with packing instruction P 203 of 4.1.4.1. The test pressure of a metal hydride storage system shall be in accordance with packing instruction P 205 of 4.1.4.1. The test pressure of a cylinder shell for an adsorbed gas shall be in accordance with packing instruction P 208 of 4.1.4.1. 6.2.1.1.6 Cylinders or cylinder shells assembled in bundles shall be structurally supported and held together as a unit. Cylinders or cylinder shells shall be secured in a manner that prevents movement in relation to the structural assembly and movement that would result in the concentration of harmful local stresses. Manifold assemblies (e.g. manifold, valves, and pressure gauges) shall be designed and constructed such that they are protected from impact damage and forces normally encountered in carriage. Manifolds shall have at least the same test pressure as the cylinders. For toxic liquefied gases, each cylinder shell shall have an isolation valve to ensure that each cylinder can be filled separately and that no interchange of cylinder contents can occur during carriage. NOTE: Toxic liquefied gases have the classification codes 2T, 2TF, 2TC, 2TO, 2TFC or 2TOC. 6.2.1.1.7 Contact between dissimilar metals which could result in damage by galvanic action shall be avoided. 6.2.1.1.8 Additional requirements for the construction of closed cryogenic receptacles for refrigerated liquefied gases 6.2.1.1.8.1 The mechanical properties of the metal used shall be established for each pressure receptacle, including the impact strength and the bending coefficient. NOTE : With regard to the impact strength, sub-section 6.8.5.3 gives details of test requirements which may be used. 6.2.1.1.8.2 The pressure receptacles shall be thermally insulated. The thermal insulation shall be protected against impact by means of a jacket. If the space between the inner vessel and the jacket is evacuated of air (vacuum- insulation ), the jacket shall be designed to withstand without permanent deformation an external pressure of at least 100 kPa (1 bar) calculated in accordance with a recognised technical code or a calculated critical collapsing pressure of not less than 200 kPa (2 bar) gauge pressure. If the jacket is so closed as to be gas-tight (e.g. in the case of vacuum-insulation), a device shall be provided to prevent any dangerous pressure from developing in the insulating layer in the event of inadequate gas-tightness of the inner vessel or its service equipment . The device shall prevent moisture from penetrating into the insulation. 6.2.1.1.8.3 Closed cryogenic receptacles intended for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases having a boiling point below –182 °C at atmospheric pressure shall not include materials which may react with oxygen or oxygen enriched atmospheres in a dangerous manner, when located in parts of the thermal insulation where there is a risk of contact with oxygen or with oxygen enriched liquid. 6.2.1.1.8.4 Closed cryogenic receptacles shall be designed and constructed with suitable lifting and securing arrangements. 6.2.1.1.9 Additional requirements for the construction of acetylene cylinders Cylinder shells for UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved, and UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free, shall be filled with a porous material, uniformly distributed, of a type that conforms to the requirements and testing specified by a standard or technical code recognised by the competent authority and which: (a) Is compatible with the cylinder shell and does not form harmful or dangerous compounds either with the acetylene or with the solvent in the case of UN 1001; and (b) Is capable of preventing the spread of decomposition of the acetylene in the porous material. In the case of UN 1001, the solvent shall be compatible with those parts of the cylinder that are in contact with it . 6.2.1.2 Materials 6.2.1.2.1 Construction materials of pressure receptacles which are in direct contact with dangerous goods shall not be affected or weakened by the dangerous goods intended to be carried and shall not cause a dangerous effect e.g. catalysing a reaction or reacting with the dangerous goods. 6.2.1.2.2 Pressure receptacles shall be made of the materials specified in the design and construction technical standards and the applicable packing instruction for the substances intended for carriage in the pressure receptacle. The materials shall be resistant to brittle fracture and to stress corrosion cracking as indicated in the design and construction technical standards. 6.2.1.3 Service equipment 6.2.1.3.1 Service equipment subjected to pressure, excluding porous, absorbent or adsorbent material, pressure relief devices, pressure gauges or indicators , shall be designed and constructed so that the burst pressure is at least 1.5 times the test pressure of the pressure receptacle. 6.2.1.3.2 Service equipment shall be configured or designed to prevent damage and unintended opening that could result in the release of the pressure receptacle contents during normal conditions of handling and carriage. All closures shall be protected in the same manner as is required for valves in 4.1.6.8. Manifold piping leading to shut-off valves shall be sufficiently flexible to protect the shut-off valves and the piping from shearing or releasing the pressure receptacle contents. 6.2.1.3.3 Pressure receptacles which are not capable of being handled manually or rolled, shall be fitted with handling devices (skids, rings, straps) ensuring that they can be safely handled by mechanical means and so arranged as not to impair the strength of, nor cause undue stresses in, the pressure receptacle. 6.2.1.3.4 Individual pressure receptacles shall be equipped with pressure relief devices as specified in packing provision P 200 (2) or P 205 of 4.1.4.1 or in 6.2.1.3.6.4 and 6.2.1.3.6.5. Pressure-relief devices shall be designed to prevent the entry of foreign matter, the leakage of gas and the development of any dangerous excess pressure. When fitted, pressure relief devices on manifolded horizontal pressure receptacles filled with flammable gas shall be arranged to discharge freely to the open air in such a manner as to prevent any impingement of escaping gas upon the pressure receptacle itself under normal conditions of carriage. 6.2.1.3.5 Pressure receptacles whose filling is measured by volume shall be provided with a level indicator. 6.2.1.3.6 Additional requirements for closed cryogenic receptacles 6.2.1.3.6.1 Each filling and discharge opening in a closed cryogenic receptacle used for the carriage of flammable refrigerated liquefied gases shall be fitted with at least two mutually independent shut-off devices in series, the first being a stop-valve, the second being a cap or equivalent device. 6.2.1.3.6.2 For sections of piping which can be closed at both ends and where liquid product can be trapped, a method of automatic pressure-relief shall be provided to prevent excess pressure build-up within the piping. 6.2.1.3.6.3 Each connection on a closed cryogenic receptacle shall be clearly marked to indicate its function (e.g. vapour or liquid phase). 6.2.1.3.6.4 Pressure-relief devices 6.2.1.3.6.4.1 Every closed cryogenic receptacle shall be provided with at least one pressure-relief device. The pressure-relief device shall be of the type that will resist dynamic forces including surge. 6.2.1.3.6.4.2 Closed cryogenic receptacles may, in addition, have a frangible disc in parallel with the spring loaded device(s) in order to meet the requirements of 6.2.1.3.6.5. 6.2.1.3.6.4.3 Connections to pressure-relief devices shall be of sufficient size to enable the required discharge to pass unrestricted to the pressure-relief device. 6.2.1.3.6.4.4 All pressure-relief device inlets shall under maximum filling conditions be situated in the vapour space of the closed cryogenic receptacle and the devices shall be so arranged as to ensure that the escaping vapour is discharged unrestrictedly. 6.2.1.3.6.5 Capacity and setting of pressure-relief devices NOTE: In relation to pressure-relief devices of closed cryogenic receptacles, maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) means the maximum effective gauge pressure permissible at the top of a loaded closed cryogenic receptacle in its operating position including the highest effective pressure during filling and discharge. 6.2.1.3.6.5.1 The pressure-relief device shall open automatically at a pressure not less than the MAWP and be fully open at a pressure equal to 110% of the MAWP. It shall, after discharge, close at a pressure not lower than 10% below the pressure at which discharge starts and shall remain closed at all lower pressures. 6.2.1.3.6.5.2 Frangible discs shall be set to rupture at a nominal pressure which is the lower of either the test pressure or 150% of the MAWP. 6.2.1.3.6.5.3 In the case of the loss of vacuum in a vacuum-insulated closed cryogenic receptacle the combined capacity of all pressure-relief devices installed shall be sufficient so that the pressure (including accumulation) inside the closed cryogenic receptacle does not exceed 120% of the MAWP. 6.2.1.3.6.5.4 The required capacity of the pressure-relief devices shall be calculated in accordance with an established technical code recognized by the competent authority . 6.2.1.4 Approval of pressure receptacles 6.2.1.4.1 The conformity of pressure receptacles shall be assessed at time of manufacture as required by the competent authority. The technical documentation shall include full specifications on design and construction, and full documentation on the manufacturing and testing. 6.2.1.4.2 Quality assurance systems shall conform to the requirements of the competent authority. 6.2.1.4.3 Pressure receptacle shells and the inner vessels of closed cryogenic receptacles shall be inspected, tested and approved by an inspection body. 6.2.1.4.4 For refillable cylinders, pressure drums and tubes the conformity assessment of the shell and the closure(s) may be carried out separately. In these cases, an additional assessment of the final assembly is not required. For bundles of cylinders, the cylinder shells and the valve(s) may be assessed separately, but an additional assessment of the complete assembly is required. For closed cryogenic receptacles, the inner vessels and the closures may be assessed separately, but an additional assessment of the complete assembly is re quired. For acetylene cylinders, conformity assessment shall comprise either: (a) One assessment of conformity covering both the cylinder shell and the contained porous material; or (b) A separate assessment of conformity for the empty cylinder shell and an additional assessment of conformity covering the cylinder shell with the contained porous material . 6.2.1.5 Initial inspection and test 6.2.1.5.1 New pressure receptacles, other than closed cryogenic receptacles, metal hydride storage systems and bundles of cylinders , shall be subjected to testing and inspection during and after manufacture in accordance with the applicable design standards or recognised technical codes including the following: On an adequate sample of pressure receptacle shells : (a) Testing of the mechanical characteristics of the material of construction; (b) Verification of the minimum wall thickness; (c) Verification of the homogeneity of the material for each manufacturing batch; (d) Inspection of the external and internal conditions; (e) Inspection of the threads used to fit closures ; (f) Verification of the conformance with the design standard; For all pressure receptacle shells : (g) A hydraulic pressure test. Pressure receptacle shells shall meet the acceptance criteria specified in the design and construction technical standard or technical code; NOTE: With the agreement of the competent authority, the hydraulic pressure test may be replaced by a test using a gas, where such an operation does not entail any danger. (h) Inspection and assessment of manufacturing defects and either repairing them or rendering the pressure receptacle shells unserviceable. In the case of welded pressure receptacle shells , particular attention shall be paid to the quality of the welds; (i) An inspection of the marks on the pressure receptacle shells ; (j) In addition, cylinder shells intended for the carriage of UN No. 1001 acetylene, dissolved, and UN No. 3374 acetylene, solvent free, shall be inspected to ensure proper installation and condition of the porous material and, if applicable, the quantity of solvent. On an adequate sample of closures: ( k) Verification of materials; (l) Verification of dimensions; (m) Verification of cleanliness; (n) Inspection of completed assembly; (o ) Verification of the presence of marks. For all closures: (p) Testing for leakproofness. 6.2.1.5.2 Closed cryogenic receptacles shall be subjected to testing and inspection during and after manufacture in accordance with the applicable design standards or recognized technical codes including the following: On an adequate sample of inner vessels: (a) Testing of the mechanical characteristics of the material of construction; (b) Verification of the minimum wall thickness; (c) Inspection of the external and internal conditions; (d) Verification of the conformance with the design standard or technical code; (e) Inspection of welds by radiographic, ultrasonic or other suitable non-destructive test method according to the applicable design and construction standard or technical code. For all inner vessels: (f) A hydraulic pressure test. The inner vessel shall meet the acceptance criteria specified in the design and construction technical standard or technical code; NOTE: With the agreement of the competent authority, the hydraulic pressure test may be replaced by a test using a gas, where such an operation does not entail any danger. (g) Inspection and assessment of manufacturing defects and either repairing them or rendering the inner vessel unserviceable; (h) An inspection of the marks. On an adequate sample of closures: ( i) Verification of materials; (j) Verification of dimensions; (k) Verification of cleanliness; (l) Inspection of completed assembly; (m ) Verification of the presence of marks. For all closures: (n) Testing for leakproofness. On an adequate sample of completed closed cryogenic receptacles: (o) Testing the satisfactory operation of service equipment; (p) Verification of the conformance with the design standard or technical code. For all completed closed cryogenic receptacles: (q) Testing for leakproofness. 6.2.1.5.3 For metal hydride storage systems, it shall be verified that the inspections and tests specified in 6.2.1.5.1 (a), (b), (c), (d), (e) if applicable, (f), (g), (h) and (i) have been performed on an adequate sample of the pressure receptacle shells used in the metal hydride storage system. In addition, on an adequate sample of metal hydride storage systems, the inspections and tests specified in 6.2.1.5.1 (c) and (f) shall be performed, as well as 6.2.1.5.1 (e), if applicable, and inspection of the external conditions of the metal hydride storage system. Additionally, all metal hydride storage systems shall undergo the initial inspections and tests specified in 6.2.1.5.1 (h) and (i), as well as a leakproofness test and a test of the satisfactory operation of the service equipment. 6.2.1.5.4 For bundles of cylinders the cylinder shells and closures shall be subjected to initial inspection and tests specified in 6.2.1.5.1. An adequate sample of frames shall be proof load tested to two times the maximum gross weight of the bundles of cylinders. Additionally, all manifolds of bundle of cylinders shall undergo a hydraulic pressure test and all the completed bundles of cylinders shall undergo a leakproofness test. NOTE: With the agreement of the competent authority, the hydraulic pressure test may be replaced by a test using a gas, where such an operation does not entail any danger. 6.2.1.6 Periodic inspection and test 6.2.1.6.1 Refillable pressure receptacles, other than cryogenic receptacles, shall be subjected to periodic inspections and tests by a body authorised by the competent authority, in accordance with the following: (a) Check of the external conditions of the pressure receptacle and verification of the equipment and the external marks; (b) Check of the internal conditions of the pressure receptacle (e.g. internal inspection, verification of minimum wall thickness); (c) Checking of the threads either: (i ) if there is evidence of corrosion; or (ii ) if the closures or other service equipment are removed; (d) A hydraulic pressure test of the pressure receptacle shell and, if necessary, verification of the characteristics of the material by suitable tests; (e) Check of service equipment, if to be reintroduced into service. This check may be carried out separately from the inspection of the pressure receptacle shell; and (f) A leakproofness test of bundles of cylinders after reassembly. NOTE 1: With the agreement of the competent authority, the hydraulic pressure test may be replaced by a test using a gas, where such an operation does not entail any danger. 2: For seamless steel cylinder shells and tube shells the check of 6.2.1.6.1 (b) and hydraulic pressure test of 6.2.1.6.1 (d) may be replaced by a procedure conforming to ISO 16148:2016 "Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes – Acoustic emission examination (AT) and follow-up ultrasonic examination (UT) for periodic inspection and testing". 3: The check of internal conditions of 6.2.1.6.1 (b) and the hydraulic pressure test of 6.2.1.6.1 (d) may be replaced by ultrasonic examination carried out in accordance with ISO 18119:2018 for seamless steel and seamless aluminium alloy cylinder shells . 4: For bundles of cylinders the hydraulic test specified in (d) above shall be carried out on the cylinder shells and on the manifolds. 5: For the periodic inspection and test frequencies, see packing instruction P 200 of 4.1.4.1 or, for a chemical under pressure, packing instruction P 206 of 4.1.4.1. 6.2.1.6.2 Cylinders intended for the carriage of UN No. 1001 acetylene, dissolved and UN No. 3374 acetylene, solvent free, shall be examined only as specified in 6.2.1.6.1 (a), (c) and (e). In addition the condition of the porous material (e.g. cracks, top clearance, loosening, settlement) shall be examined. 6.2.1.6.3 Pressure relief valves for closed cryogenic receptacles shall be subject to periodic inspections and tests. 6.2.1.7 Requirements for manufacturers 6.2.1.7.1 The manufacturer shall be technically able and shall possess all resources required for the satisfactory manufacture of pressure receptacles; this relates in particular to qualified personnel: (a) To supervise the entire manufacturing process; (b) To carry out joining of materials; and (c) To carry out the relevant tests. 6.2.1.7.2 A proficiency test of the manufacturers of pressure receptacle shells and the inner vessels of closed cryogenic receptacle shall in all instances be carried out by an inspection body approved by the competent authority of the country of approval. Proficiency testing of manufacturers of closures shall be carried out if the competent authority requires it. This test shall be carried out either during design type approval or during production inspection and certification. 6.2.1.8 Requirements for inspection bodies 6.2.1.8.1 Inspection bodies shall be independent from manufacturing enterprises and competent to perform the tests, inspections and approvals required. 6.2.2 Requirements for UN pressure receptacles In addition to the general requirements of section 6.2.1, UN pressure receptacles shall comply with the requirements of this section, including the standards, as applicable. Manufacture of new pressure receptacles or service equipment according to any particular standard in 6.2.2.1 and 6.2.2.3 is not permitted after the date shown in the right hand column of the Tables. NOTE 1: UN pressure receptacles constructed according to standards applicable at the date of manufacture may continue in use subject to the periodic inspection provisions of RID. 2. When EN ISO versions of the following ISO standards are available, they may be used to fulfil the requirements of 6.2.2.1, 6.2.2.2, 6.2.2.3 and 6.2.2.4. 6.2.2.1 Design, construction and initial inspection and test 6.2.2.1.1 The following standards apply for the design, construction, and initial inspection and test of refillable UN cylinder shells , except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5: Reference Title Applicable for manufacture ISO 9809-1:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength less than 1 100 MPa NOTE: The note concerning the F factor in section 7.3 of this standard shall not be applied for UN cylinders. Until 31 December 2018 ISO 9809-1:2010 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength less than 1 100 MPa Until 31 December 2026 ISO 9809-1:2019 Gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing of refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes – Part 1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders and tubes with tensile strength less than 1 100 MPa Until further notice ISO 9809-2:2000 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 2: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength greater than or equal to 1 100 MPa Until 31 December 2018 ISO 9809-2:2010 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 2: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength greater than or equal to 1 100 MPa Until 31 December 2026 ISO 9809-2:2019 Gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing of refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes – Part 2: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders and tubes with tensile strength greater than or equal to 1 100 MPa Until further notice ISO 9809-3:2000 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 3: Normalized steel cylinders Until 31 Decem ber 2018 ISO 9809-3:2010 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 3: Normalized steel cylinders Until 31 December 2026 ISO 9809-3:2019 Gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing of refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes – Part 3: Normalized steel cylinders and tubes Until further notice ISO 9809-4:2014 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 4: Stainless steel cylinders with an Rm value of less than 1 100 MPa Until further notice ISO 7866:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless aluminium alloy gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing NOTE: The note concerning the F factor in section 7.2 of this standard shall not be applied for UN cylinders. Aluminium alloy 6351A - T6 or equivalent shall not be authorized. Until 31 December 2020 ISO 7866:2012 + Cor 1:2014 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless aluminium alloy gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing NOTE: Aluminium alloy 6351A or equivalent shall not be used. Until further notice ISO 4706:2008 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders – Test pressure 60 bar and below Until further notice ISO 18172-1:2007 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded stainless steel cylinders – Part 1: Test pressure 6 MPa and below Until further notice ISO 20703:2006 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded aluminium-alloy cylinders – Design, construction and testing Until further notice ISO 11119-1:2002 Gas cylinders of composite construction – Specification and test methods – Part 1: Hoop wrapped composite gas cylinders Until 31 December 2020 ISO 11119-1:2012 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and tubes – Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Hoop wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders and tubes up to 450 l Until further notice ISO 11119-2:2002 Gas cylinders of composite construction – Specification and test methods – Part 2: Fully wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders with load-sharing metal liners Until 31 December 2020 ISO 11119-2:2012 + Amd 1:2014 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and tubes – Design, construction and testing – Part 2: Fully wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders and tubes up to 450 l with load-sharing metal liners Until further notice ISO 11119-3:2002 Gas cylinders of composite construction – Specification and test methods – Part 3: Fully wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders with non-load-sharing metallic or non-metallic liners NOTE: This standard shall not be used for linerless cylinders manufactured from two parts joined together. Until 31 December 2020 ISO 11119 -3:2013 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and tubes – Design, construction and testing – Part 3: Fully wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders and tubes up to 450 l with non-load-sharing metallic or non-metallic liners NOTE: This standard shall not be used for linerless cylinders manufactured from two parts joined together. Until further notice ISO 11119-4:2016 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 4: Fully wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders up to 150 l with load-sharing welded metallic liners Until further notice NOTE 1: In the above referenced standards composite cylinder shells shall be designed for a design life of not less than 15 years . 2: Composite cylinder shells with a design life longer than 15 years shall not be filled after 15 years from the date of manufacture, unless the design has successfully passed a service life test programme. The programme shall be part of the initial design type approval and shall specify inspections and tests to demonstrate that composite cylinder shells manufactured accordingly remain safe to the end of their design life. The service life test programme and the results shall be approved by the competent authority of the country of approval that is responsible for the initial approval of the cylinder design. The service life of a composite cylinder shell shall not be extended beyond its initial approved design life. 6.2.2.1.2 The following standard apply for the design, construction, and initial inspection and test of UN tube shells , except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5: Reference Title Applicable for manufacture ISO 11120:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel tubes for compressed gas transport, of water capacity between 150 l and 3 000 l – Design, construction and testing NOTE: The note concerning the F factor in section 7.1 of this standard shall not be applied for UN tubes. Until 31 December 2022 ISO 11120:2015 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel tubes of water capacity between 150 litres and 3 000 litres – Design, construction and testing Until further notice ISO 11119-1:2012 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and tubes – Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Hoop wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders and tubes up to 450 l Until further notice ISO 11119-2:2012 + Amd 1:2014 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and tubes – Design, construction and testing – Part 2: Fully wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders and tubes up to 450 l with load-sharing metal liners Until further notice ISO 11119-3:2013 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and tubes – Design, construction and testing – Part 3: Fully wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders and tubes up to 450 l with non-load-sharing metallic or non-metallic liners NOTE: This standard shall not be used for linerless tubes manufactured from two parts joined together. Until further notice ISO 11515:2013 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite reinforced tubes of water capacity between 450 l and 3 000 l – Design, construction and testing Until 31 December 2026 ISO 11515:2013 + Amd 1:2018 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite reinforced tubes of water capacity between 450 l and 3000 l – Design, construction and testing Until further notice ISO 9809-1:2019 Gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing of refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes – Part 1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders and tubes with tensile strength less than 1 100 MPa Until further notice ISO 9809-2:2019 Gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing of refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes – Part 2: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders and tubes with tensile strength greater than or equal to 1 100 MPa Until further notice ISO 9809-3:2019 Gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing of refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes – Part 3: Normalized steel cylinders and tubes Until further notice NOTE 1: In the above referenced standards composite tube shells shall be designed for a design life of not less than 15 years. 2: Composite tube shells with a design life longer than 15 years shall not be filled after 15 years from the date of manufacture, unless the design has successfully passed a service life test programme. The programme shall be part of the initial design type approval and shall specify inspections and tests to demonstrate that composite tube shells manufactured accordingly remain safe to the end of their design life. The service life test programme and the results shall be approved by the competent authority of the country of approval that is responsible for the initial approval of the tube design. The service life of a composite tube shell shall not be extended beyond its initial approved design life. 6.2.2.1.3 The following standards apply for the design, construction and initial inspection and test of UN acetylene cylinders, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5: For the cylinder shell: Reference Title Applicable for manufacture ISO 9809-1:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength less than 1 100 MPa NOTE: The note concerning the F factor in section 7.3 of this standard shall not be applied for UN cylinders. Until 31 Decem ber 2018 ISO 9809-1:2010 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength less than 1 100 MPa Until 31 December 2026 SO 9809-1:2019 Gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing of refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes – Part 1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders and tubes with tensile strength less than 1 100 MPa Until further notice ISO 9809-3:2000 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 3: Normalized steel cylinders Until 31 Decem ber 2018 ISO 9809-3:2010 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 3: Normalized steel cylinders Until 31 December 2026 ISO 9809-3:2019 Gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing of refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes – Part 3: Normalized steel cylinders and tubes Until further notice ISO 4706:2008 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders – Test pressure 60 bar and below Until further notice ISO 7866:2012 + Cor 1:2014 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless aluminium alloy gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing NOTE: Aluminium alloy 6351A or equivalent shall not be used. Until further notice For the acetylene cylinder including the porous material: Reference Title Applicable for manufacture ISO 3807-1:2000 Cylinders for acetylene – Basic requirements – Part 1: Cylinders without fusible plugs Until 31 Decem-ber 2020 ISO 3807-2:2000 Cylinders for acetylene – Basic requirements – Part 2: Cylinders with fusible plugs Until 31 Decem-ber 2020 ISO 3807:2013 Gas cylinders – Acetylene cylinders – Basic requirements and type testing Until further notice 6.2.2.1.4 The following standard apply for the design, construction, and initial inspection and test of UN closed cryogenic receptacles, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5: Reference Title Applicable for manufacture ISO 21029-1:2004 Cryogenic vessels – Transportable vacuum insulated vessels of not more than 1 000 l volume – Part 1: Design, fabrication, inspection and tests Until 31 December 2026 ISO 21029-1:2018 + Amd 1:2019 Cryogenic vessels – Transportable vacuum insulated vessels of not more than 1 000 litres volume – Part 1: Design, fabrication, inspection and tests Until further notice 6.2.2.1.5 The following standard applies for the design, construction, and initial inspection and test of UN metal hydride storage systems, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5: Reference Title Applicable for manufacture ISO 16111:2008 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed in reversible metal hydride Until 31 December 2026 ISO 16111:2018 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed in reversible metal hydride Until further notice 6.2.2.1.6 The following standard applies to the design, construction and initial inspection and test of UN bundles of cylinders. Each cylinder in a UN bundle of cylinders shall be a UN cylinder or UN cylinder shell complying with the requirements of 6.2.2. The inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and approval for UN bundles of cylinders shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5. Reference Title Applicable for manufacture ISO 10961:2010 Gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles – Design, manufacture, testing and inspection Until 31 December 2026 ISO 10961:2019 Gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles – Design, manufacture, testing and inspection Until further notice NOTE: Changing one or more cylinders or cylinder shells of the same design type, including the same test pressure, in an existing UN bundle of cylinders does not require a new conformity assessment of the existing bundle. Service equipment of the bundle of cylinders can also be replaced without requiring a new conformity assessment if it complies with the design type approval. 6.2.2.1.7 The following standards apply to the design, construction and initial inspection and test of UN cylinders for adsorbed gases except that the inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5. Reference Title Applicable for manufacture ISO 11513:2011 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders containing materials for sub-atmospheric gas packaging (excluding acetylene) – Design, construction, testing, use and periodic inspection Until 31 December 2026 ISO 11513:2019 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders containing materials for sub-atmospheric gas packaging (excluding acetylene) – Design, construction, testing, use and periodic inspection Until further notice ISO 9809-1:2010 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength less than 1 100 MPa Until 31 December 2026 ISO 9809-1:2019 Gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing of refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes – Part 1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders and tubes with tensile strength less than 1 100 MPa Until further notice 6.2.2.1.8 The following standards apply for the design, construction and initial inspection and test of UN pressure drums, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5: Reference Title Applicable for manufacture ISO 21172-1:2015 Gas cylinders – Welded steel pressure drums up to 3 000 litres capacity for the transport of gases – Design and construction – Part 1: Capacities up to 1 000 litres NOTE: Irrespective of section 6.3.3.4 of this standard, welded steel gas pressure drums with dished ends convex to pressure may be used for the carriage of corrosive substances provided all applicable requirements of RID are met. Until 31 December 2026 ISO 21172-1:2015 + Amd 1:2018 Gas cylinders – Welded steel pressure drums up to 3 000 litres capacity for the transport of gases – Design and construction – Part 1: Capacities up to 1 000 litres Until further notice ISO 4706:2008 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders – Test pressure 60 bar and below Until further notice ISO 18172-1:2007 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded stainless steel cylinders – Part 1: Test pressure 6 MPa and below Until further notice 6.2.2.1.9 The following standards apply to the design, construction and initial inspection and test of non-refillable UN cylinders except that the inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5. Reference Title Applicable for manufacture ISO 11118:1999 Gas cylinders – Non-refillable metallic gas cylinders – Specification and test methods Until 31 December 2020 ISO 13340:2001 Transportable gas cylinders – Cylinder valves for non-refillable cylinders – Specification and prototype testing Until 31 December 2020 ISO 11118:2015 Gas cylinders – Non-refillable metallic gas cylinders – Specification and test methods Until 31 December 2026 ISO 11118:2015 + Amd 1:2019 Gas cylinders – Non-refillable metallic gas cylinders – Specification and test methods Until further notice 6.2.2.2 Materials In addition to the material requirements specified in the design and construction standards, and any restrictions specified in the applicable packing instruction for the gas(es) to be carried (e.g. packing instruction P 200 or P 205 of 4.1.4.1), the following standards apply to material compatibility: Reference Title ISO 11114-1: 2012 + A1:2017 Gas cylinders – Compatibility of cylinder and valve materials with gas contents – Part 1: Metallic materials ISO 11114-2:2013 Gas cylinders – Compatibility of cylinder and valve materials with gas contents – Part 2: Non-metallic materials 6.2.2.3 Closures and their protection The following standards apply to the design, construction, and initial inspection and test of closures and their protection: Reference Title Applicable for manufacture ISO 11117:1998 Gas cylinders – Valve protection caps and valve guards for industrial and medical gas cylinders – Design, construction and tests Until 31 Decem ber 2014 ISO 11117:2008 + Cor 1:2009 Gas cylinders − Valve protection caps and valve guards − Design, construction and tests Until 31 December 2026 ISO 11117:2019 Gas cylinders – Valve protection caps and guards – Design, construction and tests Until fur ther notice ISO 10297:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable gas cylinder valves – Specification and type testing Until 31 Decem ber 2008 ISO 10297:2006 Gas cylinders – Refillable gas cylinder valves – Specification and type testing Until 31 Decem-ber 2020 ISO 10297:2014 Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Specification and type testing Until 31 December 2022 ISO 10297:2014 + A1:2017 Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Specification and type testing Until further notice ISO 14246:2014 Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Manufacturing tests and examination Until 31 December 2024 ISO 14246:2014 + A1:2017 Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Manufacturing tests and examinations Until further notice ISO 17871:2015 Gas cylinders – Quick-release cylinders valves- Specification and type testing NOTE: This standard shall not be used for flammable gases. Until 31 December 2026 ISO 17871:2020 Gas cylinders – Quick-release cylinder valves – Specification and type testing Until fur ther notice ISO 17879:2017 Gas cylinders – Self-closing cylinder valves – Specification and type testing NOTE: This standard shall not be applied to self-closing valves in acetylene cylinders. Until further notice For UN metal hydride storage systems, the requirements specified in the following standard apply to closures and their protection: Reference Title Applicable for manufacture ISO 16111:2008 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed in reversible metal hydride Until 31 December 2026 ISO 16111:2018 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed in reversible metal hydride Until fur ther notice 6.2.2.4 Periodic inspection and test The following standards apply to periodic inspection and testing of UN pressure receptacles: Reference Title Applicable ISO 6406:2005 Periodic inspection and testing of seamless steel gas cylinders Until 31 December 2024 ISO 18119:2018 Gas cylinders – Seamless steel and seamless aluminium-alloy gas cylinders and tubes – Periodic inspection and testing Until fur ther notice ISO 10460:2005 Gas cylinders – Welded carbon-steel gas cylinders – Periodic inspection and testing NOTE: The repair of welds described in clause 12.1 of this standard shall not be permitted. Repairs described in clause 12.2 require the approval of the competent authority which approved the periodic inspection and test body in accordance with 6.2.2.6. Until 31 December 2024 ISO 10460:2018 Gas cylinders – Welded aluminium-alloy, carbon and stainless steel gas cylinders – Periodic inspection and testing Until fur ther notice ISO 10461:2005 + A1:2006 Seamless aluminium–alloy gas cylinders – Periodic inspection and testing Until 31 December 2024 ISO 10462:2013 Gas cylinders – Acetylene cylinders – Periodic inspection and maintenance Until 31 December 2024 ISO 10462:2013 + Amd1:2019 Gas cylinders – Acetylene cylinders – Periodic inspection and maintenance Until fur ther notice ISO 11513:2011 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders containing materials for sub-atmospheric gas packaging (excluding acetylene) – Design, construction, testing, use and periodic inspection Until 31 December 2024 ISO 11513:2019 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders containing materials for sub-atmospheric gas packaging (excluding acetylene) – Design, construction, testing, use and periodic inspection Until fur ther notice ISO 11623 :2015 Gas cylinders – Composite construction – Periodic inspection and testing Until further notice ISO 22434:2006 Transportable gas cylinders – Inspection and maintenance of cylinder valves NOTE: These requirements may be met at times other than at the periodic inspection and test of UN cylinders. Until further notice ISO 20475:2018 Gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles – Periodic inspection and testing Until further notice ISO 23088:2020 Gas cylinders – Periodic inspection and testing of welded steel pressure drums — Capacities up to 1 000 l Until fur ther notice The following standard applies to the periodic inspection and testing of UN metal hydride storage systems : Reference Title Applicable ISO 16111:2008 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed in reversible metal hydride Until 31 December 2024 ISO 16111:2018 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed in reversible metal hydride Until fur ther notice 6.2.2.5 Conformity assessment system and approval for manufacture of pressure receptacles 6.2.2.5.0 Definitions For the purposes of this sub-section: Conformity assessment system means a system for competent authority approval of a manufacturer, by pressure receptacle design type approval, approval of manufacturer's quality system and approval of inspection bodies; Design type means a pressure receptacle design as specified by a particular pressure receptacle standard; Verify means confirm by examination or provision of objective evidence that specified requirements have been fulfilled. NOTE: In this subsection when separate assessment is used, the term pressure receptacle shall refer to pressure receptacle, pressure receptacle shell, inner vessel of the closed cryogenic receptacle or closure, as appropriate. 6.2.2.5.1 The requirements of 6.2.2.5 shall be used for the conformity assessments of pressure receptacles. Paragraph 6.2.1.4.4 gives details of which parts of pressure receptacles may be conformity assessed separately. However, the requirements of 6.2.2.5 may be replaced by requirements specified by the competent authority in the following cases: ( a) Conformity assessment of closures; (b) Conformity assessment of the complete assembly of bundles of cylinders provided the cylinder shells have been conformity assessed in accordance with the requirements of 6.2.2.5; and (c) Conformity assessment of the complete assembly of closed cryogenic receptacles provided the inner vessel has been conformity assessed in accordance with the requirements of 6.2.2.5. 6.2.2.5.2 General requirements Competent authority 6.2.2.5.2.1 The competent authority that approves the pressure receptacle shall approve the conformity assessment system for the purpose of ensuring that pressure receptacles conform to the requirements of RID. In instances where the competent authority that approves a pressure receptacle is not the competent authority in the country of manufacture, the marks of the approval country and the country of manufacture shall be indicated in the pressure receptacle marks (see 6.2.2.7 and 6.2.2.8). The competent authority of the country of approval shall supply, upon request, evidence demonstrating compliance to this conformity assessment system to its counterpart in a country of use. 6.2.2.5.2.2 The competent authority may delegate its functions in this conformity assessment system in whole or in part. 6.2.2.5.2.3 The competent authority shall ensure that a current list of approved inspection bodies and their identity marks and approved manufacturers and their identity marks is available. Inspection body 6.2.2.5.2.4 The inspection body shall be approved by the competent authority for the inspection of pressure receptacles and shall: (a) Have a staff with an organisational structure, capable, trained, competent, and skilled, to satisfactorily perform its technical functions; (b) Have access to suitable and adequate facilities and equipment; (c) Operate in an impartial manner and be free from any influence which could prevent it from doing so; (d) Ensure commercial confidentiality of the commercial and proprietary activities of the manufacturer and other bodies; (e) Maintain clear demarcation between actual inspection body functions and unrelated functions; (f) Operate a documented quality system; (g) Ensure that the tests and inspections specified in the relevant pressure receptacle standard and RID are performed; and (h) Maintain an effective and appropriate report and record system in accordance with 6.2.2.5.6. 6.2.2.5.2.5 The inspection body shall perform design type approval, pressure receptacle production testing and inspection, and certification to verify conformity with the relevant pressure receptacle standard (see 6.2.2.5.4 and 6.2.2.5.5). Manufacturer 6.2.2.5.2.6 The manufacturer shall: (a) Operate a documented quality system in accordance with 6.2.2.5.3; (b) Apply for design type approvals in accordance with 6.2.2.5.4; (c) Select an inspection body from the list of approved inspection bodies maintained by the competent authority in the country of approval; and (d) Maintain records in accordance with 6.2.2.5.6. Testing laboratory 6.2.2.5.2.7 The testing laboratory shall have: (a) Staff with an organisational structure, sufficient in number, competence, and skill; and (b) Suitable and adequate facilities and equipment to perform the tests required by the manufacturing standard to the satisfaction of the inspection body. 6.2.2.5.3 Manufacturer’s quality system 6.2.2.5.3.1 The quality system shall contain all the elements, requirements, and provisions adopted by the manufacturer. It shall be documented in a systematic and orderly manner in the form of written policies, procedures and instructions. The contents shall in particular include adequate descriptions of: (a) The organisational structure and responsibilities of personnel with regard to design and product quality; (b) The design control and design verification techniques, processes, and procedures that will be used when designing the pressure receptacles; (c) The relevant pressure receptacle manufacturing, quality control, quality assurance and process operation instructions that will be used; (d) Quality records, such as inspection reports, test data and calibration data; (e) Management reviews to ensure the effective operation of the quality system arising from the audits in accordance with 6.2.2.5.3.2; (f) The process describing how customer requirements are met; (g) The process for control of documents and their revision; (h) The means for control of non-conforming pressure receptacles, purchased components, in-process and final materials; and (i) Training programmes and qualification procedures for relevant personnel. 6.2.2.5.3.2 Audit of the quality system The quality system shall be initially assessed to determine whether it meets the requirements in 6.2.2.5.3.1 to the satisfaction of the competent authority. The manufacturer shall be notified of the results of the audit. The notification shall contain the conclusions of the audit and any corrective actions required. Periodic audits shall be carried out, to the satisfaction of the competent authority, to ensure that the manufacturer maintains and applies the quality system. Reports of the periodic audits shall be provided to the manufacturer. 6.2.2.5.3.3 Maintenance of the quality system The manufacturer shall maintain the quality system as approved in order that it remains adequate and efficient. The manufacturer shall notify the competent authority that approved the quality system, of any intended changes. The proposed changes shall be evaluated in order to determine whether the amended quality system will still satisfy the requirements in 6.2.2.5.3.1. 6.2.2.5.4 Approval process Initial design type approval 6.2.2.5.4.1 The initial design type approval shall consist of approval of the manufacturer's quality system and approval of the pressure receptacle design to be produced. An application for an initial design type approval shall meet the requirements of 6.2.2.5.4.2 to 6.2.2.5.4.6 and 6.2.2.5.4.9. 6.2.2.5.4.2 A manufacturer desiring to produce pressure receptacles in accordance with a pressure receptacle standard and RID shall apply for, obtain, and retain a design type approval certificate issued by the competent authority in the country of approval for at least one pressure receptacle design type in accordance with the procedure given in 6.2.2.5.4.9. This certificate shall, on request, be submitted to the competent authority of the country of use. 6.2.2.5.4.3 An application shall be made for each manufacturing facility and shall include: (a) The name and registered address of the manufacturer and in addition, if the application is submitted by an authorised representative, its name and address; (b) The address of the manufacturing facility (if different from the above); (c) The name and title of the person(s) responsible for the quality system; (d) The designation of the pressure receptacle and the relevant pressure receptacle standard; (e) Details of any refusal of approval of a similar application by any other competent authority; (f) The identity of the inspection body for design type approval; (g) Documentation on the manufacturing facility as specified under 6.2.2.5.3.1; and (h) The technical documentation required for design type approval, which shall enable verification of the conformity of the pressure receptacles with the requirements of the relevant pressure receptacle design standard. The technical documentation shall cover the design and method of manufacture and shall contain, as far as is relevant for assessment, at least the following: (i) pressure receptacle design standard, design and manufacturing drawings, showing components and subassemblies, if any; (ii) descriptions and explanations necessary for the understanding of the drawings and intended use of the pressure receptacles; (iii) a list of the standards necessary to fully define the manufacturing process; (iv) design calculations and material specifications; and (v) design type approval test reports, describing the results of examinations and tests carried out in accordance with 6.2.2.5.4.9. 6.2.2.5.4.4 An initial audit in accordance with 6.2.2.5.3.2 shall be performed to the satisfaction of the competent authority. 6.2.2.5.4.5 If the manufacturer is denied approval, the competent authority shall provide written detailed reasons for such denial. 6.2.2.5.4.6 Following approval, changes to the information submitted under 6.2.2.5.4.3 relating to the initial approval shall be provided to the competent authority. Subsequent design type approvals 6.2.2.5.4.7 An application for a subsequent design type approval shall meet the requirements of 6.2.2.5.4.8 and 6.2.2.5.4.9, provided a manufacturer is in the possession of an initial design type approval. In such a case, the manufacturer's quality system according to 6.2.2.5.3 shall have been approved during the initial design type approval and shall be applicable for the new design. 6.2.2.5.4.8 The application shall include: (a) The name and address of the manufacturer and in addition, if the application is submitted by an authorised representative, its name and address; (b) Details of any refusal of approval of a similar application by any other competent authority; (c) Evidence that initial design type approval has been granted; and (d) The technical documentation, as described in 6.2.2.5.4.3 (h). Procedure for design type approval 6.2.2.5.4.9 The inspection body shall: (a) Examine the technical documentation to verify that: (i) the design is in accordance with the relevant provisions of the standard, and (ii) the prototype lot has been manufactured in conformity with the technical documentation and is representative of the design; (b) Verify that the production inspections have been carried out as required in accordance with 6.2.2.5.5; (c) As required by the pressure receptacle standard or technical code, carry out or supervise the tests of pressure receptacles as required for design type approval; (d) Perform or have performed the examinations and tests specified in the pressure receptacle standard to determine that: (i) the standard has been applied and fulfilled, and (ii) the procedures adopted by the manufacturer meet the requirements of the standard; and (e) Ensure that the various type approval examinations and tests are correctly and competently carried out. After prototype testing has been carried out with satisfactory results and all applicable requirements of 6.2.2.5.4 have been satisfied, a design type approval certificate shall be issued, which shall include the name and address of the manufacturer, results and conclusions of the examination, and the necessary data for identification of the design type. If it was not possible to evaluate exhaustively the compatibility of the materials of construction with the contents of the pressure receptacle when the certificate was issued, a statement that compatibility assessment was not completed shall be included in the design type approval certificate. If the manufacturer is denied a design type approval, the competent authority shall provide written detailed reasons for such denial. 6.2.2.5.4.10 Modifications to approved design types The manufacturer shall either: (a) Inform the issuing competent authority of modifications to the approved design type, where such modifications do not constitute a new design, as specified in the pressure receptacle standard; or (b) Request a subsequent design type approval where such modifications constitute a new design according to the relevant pressure receptacle standard. This additional approval shall be given in the form of an amendment to the original design type approval certificate. 6.2.2.5.4.11 Upon request, the competent authority shall communicate to any other competent authority, information concerning design type approval, modifications of approvals and withdrawn approvals. 6.2.2.5.5 Production inspection and certification General requirements An inspection body, or its delegate, shall carry out the inspection and certification of each pressure receptacle. The inspection body selected by the manufacturer for inspection and testing during production may be different from the inspection body used for the design type approval testing. Where it can be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the inspection body that the manufacturer has trained competent inspectors, independent of the manufacturing operations, inspection may be performed by those inspectors. In such a case, the manufacturer shall maintain training records of the inspectors. The inspection body shall verify that the inspections by the manufacturer, and tests performed on those pressure receptacles, fully conform to the standard and the requirements of RID. Should non-conformance in conjunction with this inspection and testing be determined, the permission to have inspection performed by the manufacturer’s inspectors may be withdrawn. The manufacturer shall, after approval by the inspection body, make a declaration of conformity with the certified design type. The application of the pressure receptacle certification marks shall be considered a declaration that the pressure receptacle complies with the applicable pressure receptacle standards and the requirements of this conformity assessment system and RID. The inspection body shall affix or delegate the manufacturer to affix the pressure receptacle certification marks and the registered mark of the inspection body to each approved pressure receptacle. A certificate of compliance, signed by the inspection body and the manufacturer, shall be issued before the pressure receptacles are filled. 6.2.2.5.6 Records Design type approval and certificate of compliance records shall be retained by the manufacturer and the inspection body for not less than 20 years. 6.2.2.6 Approval system for periodic inspection and test of pressure receptacles 6.2.2.6.1 Definition For the purposes of this section: Approval system means a system for competent authority approval of a body performing periodic inspection and test of pressure receptacles (hereinafter referred to as "periodic inspection and test body"), including approval of that body’s quality system. 6.2.2.6.2 General requirements Competent authority 6.2.2.6.2.1 The competent authority shall establish an approval system for the purpose of ensuring that the periodic inspection and test of pressure receptacles conform to the requirements of RID. In instances where the competent authority that approves a body performing periodic inspection and test of a pressure receptacle is not the competent authority of the country approving the manufacture of the pressure receptacle, the marks of the approval country of periodic inspection and test shall be indicated in the pressure receptacle marks (see 6.2.2.7). The competent authority of the country of approval for the periodic inspection and test shall supply, upon request, evidence demonstrating compliance to this approval system including the records of the periodic inspection and test to its counterpart in a country of use. The competent authority of the country of approval may terminate the approval certificate referred to in 6.2.2.6.4.1, upon evidence demonstrating non-compliance with the approval system. 6.2.2.6.2.2 The competent authority may delegate its functions in this approval system, in whole or in part. 6.2.2.6.2.3 The competent authority shall ensure that a current list of approved periodic inspection and test bodies and their identity marks is available. Periodic inspection and test body 6.2.2.6.2.4 The periodic inspection and test body shall be approved by the competent authority and shall: (a) Have a staff with an organisational structure, capable, trained, competent, and skilled, to satisfactorily perform its technical functions; (b) Have access to suitable and adequate facilities and equipment; (c) Operate in an impartial manner and be free from any influence which could prevent it from doing so; (d) Ensure commercial confidentiality; (e) Maintain clear demarcation between actual periodic inspection and test body functions and unrelated functions; (f) Operate a documented quality system accordance with 6.2.2.6.3; (g) Apply for approval in accordance with 6.2.2.6.4; (h) Ensure that the periodic inspections and tests are performed in accordance with 6.2.2.6.5; and (i) Maintain an effective and appropriate report and record system in accordance with 6.2.2.6.6. 6.2.2.6.3 Quality system and audit of the periodic inspection and test body 6.2.2.6.3.1 Quality system The quality system shall contain all the elements, requirements, and provisions adopted by the periodic inspection and test body. It shall be documented in a systematic and orderly manner in the form of written policies, procedures, and instructions. The quality system shall include: (a) A description of the organisational structure and responsibilities; (b) The relevant inspection and test, quality control, quality assurance, and process operation instructions that will be used; (c) Quality records, such as inspection reports, test data, calibration data and certificates; (d) Management reviews to ensure the effective operation of the quality system arising from the audits performed in accordance with 6.2.2.6.3.2; (e) A process for control of documents and their revision; (f) A means for control of non-conforming pressure receptacles; and (g) Training programmes and qualification procedures for relevant personnel. 6.2.2.6.3.2 Audit The periodic inspection and test body and its quality system shall be audited in order to determine whether it meets the requirements of RID to the satisfaction of the competent authority. An audit shall be conducted as part of the initial approval process (see 6.2.2.6.4.3). An audit may be required as part of the process to modify an approval (see 6.2.2.6.4.6). Periodic audits shall be conducted, to the satisfaction of the competent authority, to ensure that the periodic inspection and test body continues to meet the requirements of RID. The periodic inspection and test body shall be notified of the results of any audit. The notification shall contain the conclusions of the audit and any corrective actions required. 6.2.2.6.3.3 Maintenance of the quality system The periodic inspection and test body shall maintain the quality system as approved in order that it remains adequate and efficient. The periodic inspection and test body shall notify the competent authority that approved the quality system, of any intended changes, in accordance with the process for modification of an approval in 6.2.2.6.4.6. 6.2.2.6.4 Approval process for periodic inspection and test bodies Initial approval 6.2.2.6.4.1 A body desiring to perform periodic inspection and test of pressure receptacles in accordance with a pressure receptacle standard and RID shall apply for, obtain, and retain an approval certificate issued by the competent authority. This written approval shall, on request, be submitted to the competent authority of a country of use. 6.2.2.6.4.2 An application shall be made for each periodic inspection and test body and shall include: (a) The name and address of the periodic inspection and test body and, if the application is submitted by an authorised representative, its name and address; (b) The address of each facility performing periodic inspection and test; (c) The name and title of the person(s) responsible for the quality system; (d) The designation of the pressure receptacles, the periodic inspection and test methods, and the relevant pressure receptacle standards met by the quality system; (e) Documentation on each facility, the equipment, and the quality system as specified under 6.2.2.6.3.1; (f) The qualifications and training records of the periodic inspection and test personnel; and (g) Details of any refusal of approval of a similar application by any other competent authority. 6.2.2.6.4.3 The competent authority shall: (a) Examine the documentation to verify that the procedures are in accordance with the requirements of the relevant pressure receptacle standards and RID; and (b) Conduct an audit in accordance with 6.2.2.6.3.2 to verify that the inspections and tests are carried out as required by the relevant pressure receptacle standards and RID, to the satisfaction of the competent authority. 6.2.2.6.4.4 After the audit has been carried out with satisfactory results and all applicable requirements of 6.2.2.6.4 have been satisfied, an approval certificate shall be issued. It shall include the name of the periodic inspection and test body, the registered mark, the address of each facility, and the necessary data for identification of its approved activities (e.g. designation of pressure receptacles, periodic inspection and test method and pressure receptacle standards). 6.2.2.6.4.5 If the periodic inspection and test body is denied approval, the competent authority shall provide written detailed reasons for such denial. Modifications to periodic inspection and test body approvals 6.2.2.6.4.6 Following approval, the periodic inspection and test body shall notify the issuing competent authority of any modifications to the information submitted under 6.2.2.6.4.2 relating to the initial approval. The modifications shall be evaluated in order to determine whether the requirements of the relevant pressure receptacle standards and RID will be satisfied. An audit in accordance with 6.2.2.6.3.2 may be required. The competent authority shall accept or reject these modifications in writing, and an amended approval certificate shall be issued as necessary. 6.2.2.6.4.7 Upon request, the competent authority shall communicate to any other competent authority, information concerning initial approvals, modifications of approvals, and withdrawn approvals. 6.2.2.6.5 Periodic inspection and test and certification The application of the periodic inspection and test marks to a pressure receptacle shall be considered a declaration that the pressure receptacle complies with the applicable pressure receptacle standards and the requirements of RID. The periodic inspection and test body shall affix the periodic inspection and test marks, including its registered mark, to each approved pressure receptacle ( see 6.2.2.7.7 ). A record certifying that a pressure receptacle has passed the periodic inspection and test shall be issued by the periodic inspection and test body, before the pressure receptacle is filled. 6.2.2.6.6 Records The periodic inspection and test body shall retain records of pressure receptacle periodic inspection and tests (both passed and failed) including the location of the test facility, for not less than 15 years. The owner of the pressure receptacle shall retain an identical record until the next periodic inspection and test unless the pressure receptacle is permanently removed from service. 6.2.2.7 Marking of refillable UN pressure receptacles NOTE: Marking requirements for UN metal hydride storage systems are given in 6.2.2.9, marking requirements for UN bundles of cylinders are given in 6.2.2.10 and marking requirements for closures are given in 6.2.2.11. 6.2.2.7.1 Refillable UN pressure receptacle shells and closed cryogenic receptacles shall be marked clearly and legibly with certification, operational and manufacturing marks. These marks shall be permanently affixed (e.g. stamped, engraved, or etched). The marks shall be on the shoulder, top end or neck of the pressure receptacle shell or on a permanently affixed component of the pressure receptacle (e.g. welded collar or corrosion resistant plate welded on the outer jacket of a closed cryogenic receptacle). Except for the UN packaging symbol, the minimum size of the marks shall be 5 mm for pressure receptacles with a diameter greater than or equal to 140 mm and 2.5 mm for pressure receptacles with a diameter less than 140 mm. The minimum size of the UN packaging symbol shall be 10 mm for pressure receptacles with a diameter greater than or equal to 140 mm and 5 mm for pressure receptacles with a diameter less than 140 mm. 6.2.2.7.2 The following certification marks shall be applied: (a) The United Nations packaging symbol . This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or an MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.11. This symbol shall not be used for pressure receptacles which only conform to the requirements of 6.2.3 to 6.2.5 (see 6.2.3.9); (b) The technical standard (e.g. ISO 9809-1) used for design, manufacture and testing; NOTE: For acetylene cylinders the standard ISO 3807 shall also be marked. (c) The character(s) identifying the country of approval as indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic ; NOTE: For the purpose of this mark the country of approval means the country of the competent authority that authorized the initial inspection and test of the individual receptacle at the time of manufacture. (d) The identity mark or stamp of the inspection body that is registered with the competent authority of the country authorizing the marking; (e) The date of the initial inspection, the year (four digits) followed by the month (two digits) separated by a slash (i.e. "/"); NOTE: When an acetylene cylinder is conformity assessed in accordance with 6.2.1.4.4 (b) and the inspection bodies for the cylinder shell and the acetylene cylinder are different, their respective marks (d) are required. Only the initial inspection date (e) of the completed acetylene cylinder is required. If the country of approval of the inspection body responsible for the initial inspection and test is different, a second mark (c) shall be applied. 6.2.2.7.3 The following operational marks shall be applied: (f) The test pressure in bar, preceded by the letters "PH" and followed by the letters "BAR"; (g) The mass of the empty pressure receptacle including all permanently attached integral parts (e.g. neck ring, foot ring, etc.) in kilograms, followed by the letters "KG". This mass shall not include the mass of closure(s), valve protection cap or valve guard, any coating, or porous material for acetylene. The mass shall be expressed to three significant figures rounded up to the last digit. For cylinders of less than 1 kg, the mass shall be expressed to two significant figures rounded up to the last digit. In the case of pressure receptacles for UN No. 1001 acetylene, dissolved and UN No. 3374 acetylene, solvent free, at least one decimal shall be shown after the decimal point and two digits for pressure receptacles of less than 1 kg; (h) The minimum guaranteed wall thickness of the pressure receptacle in millimetres followed by the letters "MM". This mark is not required for pressure receptacles with a water capacity less than or equal to 1 litre or for composite cylinders or for closed cryogenic receptacles; (i) In the case of pressure receptacles for compressed gases, UN No. 1001 acetylene, dissolved, and UN No. 3374 acetylene, solvent free, the working pressure in bar, preceded by the letters "PW". In the case of closed cryogenic receptacles, the maximum allowable working pressure preceded by the letters "MAWP"; NOTE: When a cylinder shell is intended for use as an acetylene cylinder (including the porous material), the working pressure mark is not required until the acetylene cylinder is completed. (j) In the case of pressure receptacles for l iquefied gases, refrigerated liquefied gases and dissolved gases , the water capacity in litres expressed to three significant figures rounded down to the last digit, followed by the letter "L". If the value of the minimum or nominal water capacity is an integer, the figures after the decimal point may be neglected; (l) In the case of pressure receptacles for UN No. 3374 acetylene, solvent free, the total of the mass of the empty receptacle, the fittings and accessories not removed during filling, any coating, and the porous material expressed to three significant figures rounded down to the last digit followed by the letters "KG". At least one decimal shall be shown after the decimal point. For pressure receptacles of less than 1 kg, the mass shall be expressed to two significant figures rounded down to the last digit; (k) In the case of cylinders for UN No. 1001 acetylene, dissolved: (i) the tare in kilograms consisting of the total of the mass of the empty cylinder shell, the service equipment (including porous material) not removed during filling, any coating, the solvent and the saturation gas expressed to three significant figures rounded down to the last digit followed by the letters "KG". At least one decimal shall be shown after the decimal point. For pressure receptacles of less than 1 kg, the mass shall be expressed to two significant figures rounded down to the last digit; (ii) the identity of the porous material (e.g.: name or trademark); and (iii) the total mass of the filled acetylene cylinder in kilograms followed by the letters "KG"; ( l ) In the case of cylinders for UN No. 3374 acetylene, solvent free: (i) the tare in kilograms consisting of the total of the mass of the empty cylinder shell, the service equipment (including porous material) not removed during filling and any coating expressed to three significant figures rounded down to the last digit followed by the letters "KG". At least one decimal shall be shown after the decimal point. For pressure receptacles of less than 1 kg, the mass shall be expressed to two significant figures rounded down to the last digit; (ii) the identity of the porous material (e.g.: name or trademark); and (iii) the total mass of the filled acetylene cylinder in kilograms followed by the letters "KG"; 6.2.2.7.4 The following manufacturing marks shall be applied: (m) Identification of the cylinder thread (e.g. 25E). This mark is not required for closed cryogenic receptacles; NOTE: Information on marks that may be used for identifying threads for cylinders is given in ISO/TR 11364 "Gas cylinders – Compilation of national and international valve stem/gas cylinder neck threads and their identification and marking system". (n) The manufacturer's mark registered by the competent authority. When the country of manufacture is not the same as the country of approval, then the manufacturer's mark shall be preceded by the character(s) identifying the country of manufacture as indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic NOTEREF _Ref458675400 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 2 . The country mark and the manufacturer’s mark shall be separated by a space or slash; NOTE: For acetylene cylinders, if the manufacturer of the acetylene cylinder and the manufacturer of the cylinder shell are different, only the mark of the manufacturer of the completed acetylene cylinder is required. (o) The serial number assigned by the manufacturer; (p) In the case of steel pressure receptacles and composite pressure receptacles with steel liner intended for the carriage of gases with a risk of hydrogen embrittlement, the letter "H" showing compatibility of the steel (see ISO 11114-1: 2012 + A1:2017 ); (q) For composite cylinders and tubes having a limited design life, the letters "FINAL" followed by the design life shown as the year (four digits) followed by the month (two digits) separated by a slash (i.e. "/"); (r) For composite cylinders and tubes having a limited design life greater than 15 years and for composite cylinders and tubes having non-limited design life, the letters "SERVICE" followed by the date 15 years from the date of manufacture (initial inspection) shown as the year (four digits) followed by the month (two digits) separated by a slash (i.e. "/"). NOTE: Once the initial design type has passed the service life test programme requirements in accordance with 6.2.2.1.1 Note 2 or 6.2.2.1.2 Note 2, future production no longer requires this initial service life mark. The initial service life mark shall be made unreadable on cylinders and tubes of a design type that has met the service life test programme requirements. 6.2.2.7.5 The above marks shall be placed in three groups: – Manufacturing marks shall be the top grouping and shall appear consecutively in the sequence given in 6.2.2.7.4 except for the marks described in 6.2.2.7.4 (q) and (r) which shall be adjacent to the periodic inspection and test marks of 6.2.2.7.7 . – The operational marks in 6.2.2.7.3 shall be the middle grouping and the test pressure (f) shall be immediately preceded by the working pressure (i) when the latter is required. – Certification marks shall be the bottom grouping and shall appear in the sequence given in 6.2.2.7.2. The following is an example of marking a cylinder. 1303655 39370 0 0 4377690 41910 0 0 (m) (n) (o) (p) 25E D MF 765432 H 1743075 44450 0 0 (i) (f) (g) (j) (h) PW200 PH300BAR 62.1KG 50L 5.8MM 1555115 73025 0 0 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) ISO 9809-1 F IB 2000/12 1381125 127635 0 0 6.2.2.7.6 Other marks are allowed in areas other than the side wall, provided they are made in low stress areas and are not of a size and depth that will create harmful stress concentrations. In the case of closed cryogenic receptacles, such marks may be on a separate plate attached to the outer jacket. Such marks shall not conflict with required marks. 6.2.2.7.7 In addition to the preceding marks, each refillable pressure receptacle that meets the periodic inspection and test requirements of 6.2.2.4 shall be marked indicating: (a) The character(s) identifying the country authorizing the body performing the periodic inspection and test as indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic . This mark is not required if this body is approved by the competent authority of the country approving manufacture; (b) The registered mark of the body authorised by the competent authority for performing periodic inspection and test; (c) The date of the periodic inspection and test, the year (two digits) followed by the month (two digits) separated by a slash (i.e. "/" ). Four digits may be used to indicate the year. The above marks shall appear consecutively in the sequence given. 6.2.2.7.8 The marks in accordance with 6.2.2.7.7 may be engraved on a metallic ring affixed to the cylinder or pressure drum when the valve is installed, and which is removable only by disconnecting the valve from the cylinder or pressure drum. 6.2.2.7.9 (Deleted) 6.2.2.8 Marking of non-refillable UN cylinders 6.2.2.8.1 Non-refillable UN cylinders shall be marked clearly and legibly with certification and gas or cylinder specific marks. These marks shall be permanently affixed (e.g. stencilled, stamped, engraved, or etched) on the cylinder . Except when stencilled, the marks shall be on the shoulder, top end or neck of the cylinder shell or on a permanently affixed component of the cylinder (e.g. welded collar). Except for the UN packaging symbol and the "DO NOT REFILL" mark, the minimum size of the marks shall be 5 mm for cylinders with a diameter greater than or equal to 140 mm and 2.5 mm for cylinders with a diameter less than 140 mm. The minimum size of the UN packaging symbol shall be 10 mm for cylinders with a diameter greater than or equal to 140 mm and 5 mm for cylinders with a diameter less than 140 mm. The minimum size of the "DO NOT REFILL" mark shall be 5 mm. 6.2.2.8.2 The marks listed in 6.2.2.7.2 to 6.2.2.7.4 shall be applied with the exception of (g), (h) and (m). The serial number (o) may be replaced by the batch number. In addition, the words "DO NOT REFILL" in letters of at least 5 mm in height are required. 6.2.2.8.3 The requirements of 6.2.2.7.5 shall apply. NOTE: Non-refillable cylinders may, on account of their size, substitute a label for these permanent marks . 6.2.2.8.4 Other marks are allowed provided they are made in low stress areas other than the side wall and are not of a size and depth that will create harmful stress concentrations. Such marks shall not conflict with required marks. 6.2.2.9 Marking of UN metal hydride storage systems 6.2.2.9.1 UN metal hydride storage systems shall be marked clearly and legibly with the marks listed below. These marks shall be permanently affixed (e.g. stamped, engraved, or etched) on the metal hydride storage system. The marks shall be on the shoulder, top end or neck of the metal hydride storage system or on a permanently affixed component of the metal hydride storage system. Except for the United Nations packaging symbol, the minimum size of the marks shall be 5 mm for metal hydride storage systems with a smallest overall dimension greater than or equal to 140 mm and 2.5 mm for metal hydride storage systems with a smallest overall dimension less than 140 mm. The minimum size of the United Nations packaging symbol shall be 10 mm for metal hydride storage systems with a smallest overall dimension greater than or equal to 140 mm and 5 mm for metal hydride storage systems with a smallest overall dimension less than 140 mm. 6.2.2.9.2 The following marks shall be applied: (a) The United Nations packaging symbol ; This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or an MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.11; (b) "ISO 16111" (the technical standard used for design, manufacture and testing); (c) The character(s) identifying the country of approval as indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic ; NOTE: For the purpose of this mark the country of approval means the country of the competent authority that authorized the initial inspection and test of the individual system at the time of manufacture. (d) The identity mark or stamp of the inspection body that is registered with the competent authority of the country authorizing the marking; (e) The date of the initial inspection, the year (four digits) followed by the month (two digits) separated by a slash (i.e. "/"); (f) The test pressure of the receptacle in bar, preceded by the letters "PH" and followed by the letters "BAR"; (g) The rated charging pressure of the metal hydride storage system in bar, preceded by the letters "RCP" and followed by the letters "BAR"; (h) The manufacturer's mark registered by the competent authority. When the country of manufacture is not the same as the country of approval, then the manufacturer's mark shall be preceded by the character(s) identifying the country of manufacture as indicated by the distinguishing signs of motor vehicles in international traffic NOTEREF _Ref330192555 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 6 . The country mark and the manufacturer’s mark shall be separated by a space or slash; (i) The serial number assigned by the manufacturer; (j) In the case of steel receptacles and composite receptacles with steel liner, the letter "H" showing compatibility of the steel (see ISO 11114-1: 2012 + A1:2017 ); and, (k) In the case of metal hydride storage systems having limited life, the date of expiry, denoted by the letters "FINAL" followed by the year (four digits) followed by the month (two digits) separated by a slash (i.e. "/"). The certification marks specified in (a) to (e) above shall appear consecutively in the sequence given. The test pressure (f) shall be immediately preceded by the rated charging pressure (g). The manufacturing marks specified in (h) to (k) above shall appear consecutively in the sequence given. 6.2.2.9.3 Other marks are allowed in areas other than the side wall, provided they are made in low stress areas and are not of a size and depth that will create harmful stress concentrations. Such marks shall not conflict with required marks. 6.2.2.9.4 In addition to the preceding marks, each metal hydride storage system that meets the periodic inspection and test requirements of 6.2.2.4 shall be marked indicating: (a) The character(s) identifying the country authorizing the body performing the periodic inspection and test, as indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic NOTEREF _Ref458676468 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 4 . This mark is not required if this body is approved by the competent authority of the country approving manufacture; (b) The registered mark of the body authorised by the competent authority for performing periodic inspection and test; (c) The date of the periodic inspection and test, the year (two digits) followed by the month (two digits) separated by a slash (i.e. "/"). Four digits may be used to indicate the year. The above marks shall appear consecutively in the sequence given. 6.2.2.10 Marking of UN bundles of cylinders 6.2.2.10.1 Individual cylinders in a bundle of cylinder shells shall be marked in accordance with 6.2.2.7. Individual closures in a bundle of cylinders shall be marked in accordance with 6.2.2.11. 6.2.2.10.2 Refillable UN bundles of cylinders shall be marked clearly and legibly with certification, operational, and manufacturing marks. These marks shall be permanently affixed (e.g. stamped, engraved, or etched) on a plate permanently attached to the frame of the bundle of cylinders. Except for the UN packaging symbol, the minimum size of the marks shall be 5 mm. The minimum size of the UN packaging symbol shall be 10 mm. 6.2.2.10.3 The following marks shall be applied: ( a) The certification marks specified in 6.2.2.7.2 (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e); (b) The operational marks specified in 6.2.2.7.3 (f), (i), (j) and the total of the mass of the frame of the bundle and all permanently attached parts (cylinder shells and service equipment) . Bundles intended for the carriage of UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved and UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free shall bear the tare as specified in clause B.4.2 of ISO 10961:2010; and (c) The manufacturing marks specified in 6.2.2.7.4 (n), (o) and, where applicable, (p). 6.2.2.10.4 The marks shall be placed in three groups: (a) The manufacturing marks shall be the top grouping and shall appear consecutively in the sequence given in 6.2.2.10.3 (c); (b) The operational marks in 6.2.2.10.3 (b) shall be the middle grouping and the operational mark specified in 6.2.2.7.3 (f) shall be immediately preceded by the operational mark specified in 6.2.2.7.3 (i) when the latter is required; (c) Certification marks shall be the bottom grouping and shall appear in the sequence given in 6.2.2.10.3 (a). 6.2.2.11 Marking of closures for refillable UN pressure receptacles For closures the following permanent marks shall be applied clearly and legibly, (e.g. stamped, engraved or etched): (a) Manufacturer’s identification mark; (b) Design standard or design standard designation; (c) Date of manufacture (year and month or year and week) and (d ) The identity mark of the inspection body responsible for the initial inspection and test, if applicable. The valve test pressure shall be marked when it is less than the test pressure which is indicated by the rating of the valve filling connection. 6.2.2.12 Equivalent procedures for conformity assessment and periodic inspection and test For UN pressure receptacles the requirements of 6.2.2.5 and 6.2.2.6 are considered to have been complied with when the following procedures are applied: Procedure Relevant body Type examination and type approval certificate issue (1.8.7.2) a Xa Supervision of manufacture (1.8.7.3) and initial inspection and tests (1.8.7.4) Xa or IS Periodic inspection (1.8.7.6) Xa or Xb or IS a When an inspection body is designated by the competent authority to issue the type approval certificate, the type examination shall be performed by that inspection body. Each procedure as defined in the table shall be performed by a single relevant body as indicated in the table. For separate conformity assessments (e.g. cylinder shell and closure) see 6.2.1.4.4. Xa means the competent authority or inspection body conforming to 1.8.6.3 and accredited according to EN ISO/IEC 17020:2012 (except clause 8.1.3) type A. Xb means inspection body conforming to 1.8.6.3 and accredited according to EN ISO/IEC 17020:2012 (except clause 8.1.3) type B, working exclusively for the owner or the duty holder responsible for the pressure receptacles. IS means an in-house inspection service of the manufacturer or an enterprise with a testing facility under the surveillance of an inspection body conforming to 1.8.6.3 and accredited according to EN ISO/IEC 17020:2012 (except clause 8.1.3) type A. The in-house inspection service shall be independent from design process, manufacturing operations, repair and maintenance. If an in-house inspection service has been used for the initial inspection and tests, the mark specified in 6.2.2.7.2 (d) shall be supplemented with the mark of the in-house inspection service. If an in-house inspection service has carried out the periodic inspection, the mark specified in 6.2.2.7.7 (b) shall be supplemented with the mark of the in-house inspection service. 6.2.3 General requirements for non-UN pressure receptacles 6.2.3.1 Design and construction 6.2.3.1.1 Pressure receptacles and their closures not designed, constructed, inspected, tested and approved according to the requirements of 6.2.2 shall be designed, constructed, inspected, tested and approved in accordance with the general requirements of 6.2.1 as supplemented or modified by the requirements of this section and those of 6.2.4 or 6.2.5. 6.2.3.1.2 Whenever possible the wall thickness shall be determined by calculation, accompanied, if needed, by experimental stress analysis. Otherwise the wall thickness may be determined by experimental means. Appropriate design calculations for the pressure receptacles or pressure receptacle shells including all permanently attached parts (e.g. neck ring, foot ring, etc.) shall be used to ensure the safety of the pressure receptacles concerned. The minimum wall thickness to withstand pressure shall be calculated in particular with regard to: – the calculation pressures, which shall not be less than the test pressure; – the calculation temperatures allowing for appropriate safety margins; – the maximum stresses and peak stress concentrations where necessary; – factors inherent to the properties of the material. 6.2.3.1.3 For welded pressure receptacles, only metals of weldable quality whose adequate impact strength at an ambient temperature of –20 °C can be guaranteed shall be used. 6.2.3.1.4 For closed cryogenic receptacles, the impact strength to be established as required by 6.2.1.1.8.1 shall be tested as laid down in 6.8.5.3. 6.2.3.1.5 Acetylene cylinders shall not be fitted with fusible plugs or any other pressure relief devices. 6.2.3.2 (Reserved) 6.2.3.3 Service equipment 6.2.3.3.1 Service equipment shall comply with 6.2.1.3. 6.2.3.3.2 Pressure drums may be provided with openings for filling and discharge and with other openings intended for level gauges, pressure gauges or relief devices. The number of openings shall be kept to a minimum consistent with safe operations. Pressure drums may also be provided with an inspection opening, which shall be closed by an effective closure. 6.2.3.3.3 If cylinders are fitted with a device to prevent rolling, this device shall not be integral with the valve cap; 6.2.3.3.4 Pressure drums which are capable of being rolled shall be equipped with rolling hoops or be otherwise protected against damage due to rolling (e.g. by corrosion resistant metal sprayed on to the pressure receptacle surface); 6.2.3.3.5 Bundles of cylinders shall be fitted with appropriate devices ensuring that they can be handled and carried safely; 6.2.3.3.6 If level gauges, pressure gauges or relief devices are installed, they shall be protected in the same way as is required for valves in 4.1.6.8. 6.2.3.4 Initial inspection and test 6.2.3.4.1 New pressure receptacles shall be subjected to testing and inspection during and after manufacture in accordance with the requirements of 6.2.1.5. 6.2.3.4.2 Specific provisions applying to aluminium alloy pressure receptacle shells (a) In addition to the initial inspection required by 6.2.1.5.1, it is necessary to test for possible intercrystalline corrosion of the inside wall of the pressure receptacle shells where use is made of an aluminium alloy containing copper, or where use is made of an aluminium alloy containing magnesium and manganese and the magnesium content is greater than 3.5% or the manganese content lower than 0.5%; (b) In the case of an aluminium/copper alloy the test shall be carried out by the manufacturer at the time of approval of a new alloy by the competent authority; it shall thereafter be repeated in the course of production, for each pour of the alloy; (c) In the case of an aluminium/magnesium alloy the test shall be carried out by the manufacturer at the time of approval of a new alloy and of the manufacturing process by the competent authority. The test shall be repeated whenever a change is made in the composition of the alloy or in the manufacturing process. 6.2.3.5 Periodic inspection and test 6.2.3.5.1 Periodic inspection and test shall be in accordance with 6.2.1.6 . NOTE 1: With the agreement of the competent authority of the country that issued the type approval, the hydraulic pressure test of each welded steel cylinder shell intended for the carriage of gases of UN No. 1965, hydrocarbon gas mixture liquefied, n.o.s., with a capacity below 6.5 l may be replaced by another test ensuring an equivalent level of safety. 2: For seamless steel cylinder shells and tube shells the check of 6.2.1.6.1 (b) and the hydraulic pressure test of 6.2.1.6.1 (d) may be replaced by a procedure conforming to EN ISO 16148:2016 + A1:2020 "Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes – Acoustic emission examination (AT) and follow-up ultrasonic examination (UT) for periodic inspection and testing". 3: The check of 6.2.1.6.1 (b) and the hydraulic pressure test of 6.2.1.6.1 (d) may be replaced by ultrasonic examination carried out in accordance with EN ISO 18119:2018 + A1:2021 for cylinder shells and tube shells of seamless steel or seamless aluminium alloy. Notwithstanding clause B.1 of this standard, all cylinder shells and tube shells whose wall thickness is less than the minimum design wall thickness shall be rejected. 6.2.3.5.2 Closed cryogenic receptacles shall be subject to periodic inspections and tests in accordance with the periodicity defined in packing instruction P 203 (8) (b) of 4.1.4.1, in accordance with the following: ( a) Check of the external condition of the pressure receptacle and verification of the service equipment and the external marks; (b) The leakproofness test. 6.2.3.5.3 General provisions for the substitution of dedicated check(s) for periodic inspection and test required in 6.2.3.5.1 6.2.3.5.3.1 This paragraph only applies to types of pressure receptacles designed and manufactured in accordance with the standards referred to in 6.2.4.1 or a technical code in accordance with 6.2.5, and for which the inherent properties of the design prevent the checks (b) or (d) for periodic inspection and test required in 6.2.1.6.1 to be applied or the results to be interpreted. For such pressure receptacles, these check(s) shall be replaced by alternative method(s) related to the characteristics of the specific design specified under 6.2.3.5.4, and detailed in a special provision of Chapter 3.3 or a standard referenced in 6.2.4.2. The alternative methods shall specify which checks and tests according to 6.2.1.6.1 (b) and (d) are to be substituted. The alternative method(s) in combination with the remaining checks according to 6.2.1.6.1 (a) to (e) shall ensure a level of safety at least equivalent to the safety level for pressure receptacles of a similar size and use which are periodically inspected and tested in compliance with 6.2.3.5.1. The alternative method(s) shall moreover detail all the following elements: – A description of the relevant types of pressure receptacles; – The procedure for the test(s); – The specifications of the acceptance criteria; – A description of the measures to be taken in case of rejection of pressure receptacles. 6.2.3.5.3.2 Non-destructive testing as an alternative method The check(s) identified in 6.2.3.5.3.1 shall be supplemented or replaced by one (or more) non-destructive test method(s) to be performed on each individual pressure receptacle. 6.2.3.5.3.3 Destructive testing as an alternative method If no non-destructive test method leads to an equivalent level of safety, the check(s) identified in 6.2.3.5.3.1, with exception of the check of the internal conditions mentioned in 6.2.1.6.1 (b), shall be supplemented or replaced by one (or more) destructive test method(s) in combination with its statistical evaluation. In addition to the elements described above, the detailed method for destructive testing shall document the following elements: – A description of the relevant basic population of pressure receptacles; – A procedure for the random sampling of individual pressure receptacles to be tested; – A procedure for the statistical evaluation of the test results including rejection criteria; – A specification for the periodicity of destructive sample tests; – A description of the measures to be taken if acceptance criteria are met but a safety relevant degradation of material properties is observed, which shall be used for the determination of the end of service life; – A statistical assessment of the level of safety achieved by the alternative method. 6.2.3.5.4 Over-moulded cylinders subject to 6.2.3.5.3.1 shall be subject to periodic inspection and test in accordance with special provision 674 of Chapter 3.3. 6.2.3.6 Approval of pressure receptacles 6.2.3.6.1 The procedures for conformity assessment and periodic inspection of section 1.8.7 shall be performed by the relevant body according to the following table. Procedure Relevant body Type examination and type approval certificate issue (1.8.7.2) a Xa Supervision of manufacture (1.8.7.3) and initial inspection and tests (1.8.7.4) Xa or IS Periodic inspection (1.8.7.6) Xa or Xb or IS a The type approval certificate shall be issued by the inspection body that performed the type examination. Each procedure as defined in the table shall be performed by a single relevant body as indicated in the table. For separate conformity assessments (e.g. cylinder shell and closure) see 6.2.1.4.4. For non-refillable pressure receptacles, separate type approval certificates for either the cylinder shell or the closure shall not be issued. Xa means the competent authority or inspection body conforming to 1.8.6.3 and accredited according to EN ISO/IEC 17020:2012 (except clause 8.1.3) type A. Xb means inspection body conforming to 1.8.6.3 and accredited according to EN ISO/IEC 17020:2012 (except clause 8.1.3) type B, working exclusively for the owner or the duty holder responsible for the pressure receptacles. IS means an in-house inspection service of the manufacturer or an enterprise with a testing facility under the surveillance of an inspection body conforming to 1.8.6.3 and accredited according to EN ISO/IEC 17020:2012 (except clause 8.1.3) type A. The in-house inspection service shall be independent from design process, manufacturing operations, repair and maintenance. If an in-house inspection service has been used for the initial inspection and tests, the mark specified in 6.2.2.7.2 (d) shall be supplemented with the mark of the in-house inspection service. If an in-house inspection service has carried out the periodic inspection, the mark specified in 6.2.2.7.7 (b) shall be supplemented with the mark of the in-house inspection service. 6.2.3.6.2 If the country of approval is not an RID Contracting State or a Contracting Party to ADR, the competent authority mentioned in 6.2.1.7.2 shall be the competent authority of an RID Contracting State or a Contracting Party to ADR. 6.2.3.7 Requirements for manufacturers 6.2.3.7.1 The relevant requirements of 1.8.7 shall be met. 6.2.3.8 Requirements for inspection bodies The requirements of 1.8.6.3 shall be met. 6.2.3.9 Marking of refillable pressure receptacles 6.2.3.9.1 Marking shall be in accordance with sub-section 6.2.2.7 with the following variations. 6.2.3.9.2 The United Nations packaging symbol specified in 6.2.2.7.2 (a) and the provisions of 6.2.2.7.4 (q) and (r) shall not be applied. 6.2.3.9.3 The requirements of 6.2.2.7.3 (j) shall be replaced by the following: (j) The water capacity of the pressure receptacle in litres followed by the letter "L". In the case of pressure receptacles for liquefied gases the water capacity in litres shall be expressed to three significant figures rounded down to the last digit. If the value of the minimum or nominal water capacity is an integer, the figures after the decimal point may be neglected. The requirements of 6.2.2.7.4 (n) shall be replaced by the following: (n) The manufacturer’s mark. When the country of manufacture is not the same as the country of approval, then the manufacturer's mark shall be preceded by the character(s) identifying the country of manufacture as indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic . The country mark and the manufacturer’s mark shall be separated by a space or slash. 6.2.3.9.4 The marks specified in 6.2.2.7.3 (g) and (h) and 6.2.2.7.4 (m) are not required for pressure receptacles for UN No. 1965 hydrocarbon gas mixture, liquefied, n.o.s. 6.2.3.9.5 When marking the date required by 6.2.2.7.7 (c), the month need not be indicated for gases for which the interval between periodic inspections is 10 years or more (see packing instructions P 200 and P 203 of 4.1.4.1). 6.2.3.9.6 The marks in accordance with 6.2.2.7.7 may be engraved on a ring of an appropriate material affixed to the cylinder or pressure drum when the valve is installed and which is removable only by disconnecting the valve from the cylinder or pressure drum . 6.2.3.9.7 Marking of bundles of cylinders 6.2.3.9.7.1 Individual cylinders in a bundle of cylinders shall be marked in accordance with 6.2.3.9.1 to 6.2.3.9.6. 6.2.3.9.7.2 Marking of bundles of cylinders shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.10.2 and 6.2.2.10.3, except that the United Nations packaging symbol specified in 6.2.2.7.2 (a) shall not be applied. 6.2.3.9.7.3 In addition to the preceding marks, each bundle of cylinders that meets the periodic inspection and test requirements of 6.2.4.2 shall be marked indicating: (a) The character(s) identifying the country authorizing the body performing the periodic inspection and test, as indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic NOTEREF _Ref99264626 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 5 . This mark is not required if this body is approved by the competent authority of the country approving manufacture; (b) The registered mark of the body authorised by the competent authority for performing periodic inspection and test; (c) The date of the periodic inspection and test, the year (two digits) followed by the month (two digits) separated by a slash (i.e. "/"). Four digits may be used to indicate the year. The above marks shall appear consecutively in the sequence given either on the plate specified in 6.2.2.10.2 or on a separate plate permanently attached to the frame of the bundle of cylinders. 6.2.3.9.8 Marking of closures for refillable pressure receptacles 6.2.3.9.8.1 Marking shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.11. 6.2.3.10 Marking of non-refillable cylinders 6.2.3.10.1 Marking shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.8, except that the United Nations packaging symbol specified in 6.2.2.7.2 (a) shall not be applied. 6.2.3.11 Salvage pressure receptacles 6.2.3.11.1 To permit the safe handling and disposal of the pressure receptacles carried within the salvage pressure receptacle, the design may include equipment not otherwise used for cylinders or pressure drums such as flat heads, quick opening devices and openings in the cylindrical part. 6.2.3.11.2 Instructions on the safe handling and use of the salvage pressure receptacle shall be clearly shown in the documentation for the application to the competent authority of the country of approval and shall form part of the approval certificate. In the approval certificate, the pressure receptacles authorized to be carried in a salvage pressure receptacle shall be indicated. A list of the materials of construction of all parts likely to be in contact with the dangerous goods shall also be included. 6.2.3.11.3 A copy of the approval certificate shall be delivered by the manufacturer to the owner of a salvage pressure receptacle. 6.2.3.11.4 The marking of salvage pressure receptacles according to 6.2.3 shall be determined by the competent authority of the country of approval taking into account suitable marking provisions of 6.2.3.9 as appropriate. The marking shall include the water capacity and test pressure of the salvage pressure receptacle. 6.2.4 Requirements for non-UN pressure receptacles designed, constructed and tested according to referenced standards NOTE: Persons or bodies identified in standards as having responsibilities in accordance with RID shall meet the requirements of RID. 6.2.4.1 Design, construction and initial inspection and test Since 1 January 2009 the use of the referenced standards has been mandatory. Exceptions are dealt with in 6.2.5. Type approval certificates shall be issued in accordance with 1.8.7. For the issuance of a type approval certificate, one standard applicable according to the indication in column (4) shall be chosen from the table below. If more than one standard may be applied, only one of them shall be chosen. Column (3) shows the paragraphs of Chapter 6.2 to which the standard conforms. Column (5) gives the latest date when existing type approvals shall be withdrawn according to 1.8.7.2.2.2; if no date is shown the type approval remains valid until it expires. Standards shall be applied in accordance with 1.1.5. They shall be applied in full unless otherwise specified in the table below. The scope of application of each standard is defined in the scope clause of the standard unless otherwise specified in the table below. NOTE: The words "cylinder", "tube" and "pressure drum" when used in these standards shall be understood to exclude closures except in the case of non-refillable cylinders. Reference Title of document Requirements the standard complies with Applicable for new type approvals or for renewals Latest date for with drawal of existing type approvals (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) for design and construction of pressure receptacles or pressure receptacle shells Annex I, Parts 1 to 3 to 84/525/EEC Council directive on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to seamless steel gas cylinders, published in the Official Journal of the European Communities No. L 300 of 19.11.1984. NOTE : Notwithstanding the repeal of the directives 84/525/EEC, 84/526/EEC and 84/527/EEC as published in the Official Journal of the European Communities No. L 300 of 19 November1984 the annexes of these directives remain applicable as standards for design, construction and initial inspection and test for gas cylinders. These annexes may be found at: https://eur-lex.europa.eu/oj/direct-access.html . 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice Annex I, Parts 1 to 3 to 84/526/EEC Council directive on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to seamless, unalloyed aluminium and aluminium alloy gas cylinders, published in the Official Journal of the European Communities No. L 300 of 19.11.1984. NOTE : Notwithstanding the repeal of the directives 84/525/EEC, 84/526/EEC and 84/527/EEC as published in the Official Journal of the European Communities No. L 300 of 19 November1984 the annexes of these directives remain applicable as standards for design, construction and initial inspection and test for gas cylinders. These annexes may be found at: https://eur-lex.europa.eu/oj/direct-access.html . 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice Annex I, Parts 1 to 3 to 84/527/EEC Council directive on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to welded unalloyed steel gas cylinders, published in the Official Journal of the European Communities No. L 300 of 19.11.1984. NOTE : Notwithstanding the repeal of the directives 84/525/EEC, 84/526/EEC and 84/527/EEC as published in the Official Journal of the European Communities No. L 300 of 19 November1984 the annexes of these directives remain applicable as standards for design, construction and initial inspection and test for gas cylinders. These annexes may be found at: https://eur-lex.europa.eu/oj/direct-access.html . 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN 1442:1998 + AC:1999 Transportable refillable welded steel cylinders for liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) – Design and construction 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 July 2001 and 30 June 2007 31 December 2012 EN 1442:1998 + A2:2005 Transportable refillable welded steel cylinders for liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) – Design and construction 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January 2007 and 31 December 2010 EN 1442:2006 + A1:2008 Transportable refillable welded steel cylinders for liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) – Design and construction 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January 2009 and 31 December 2020 EN 1442:2017 LPG equipment and accessories – Transportable refillable welded steel cylinders for LPG – Design and construction 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN 1800:1998 + AC:1999 Transportable gas cylinders - Acetylene cylinders – Basic requirements and definitions 6.2.1.1.9 Between 1 July 2001 and 31 December 2010 EN 1800:2006 Transportable gas cylinders – Acetylene cylinders – Basic requirements, definitions and type testing 6.2.1.1.9 Between 1 January 2009 and 31 December 2016 EN ISO 3807:2013 Gas cylinders – Acetylene cylinders – Basic requirements and type testing NOTE: Fusible plugs shall not be fitted. 6.2.1.1.9 Until further notice EN 1964-1:1999 Transportable gas cylinders – Specifications for the design and construction of refillable transportable seamless steel gas cylinders of capacity from 0.5 litres up to 150 litres – Part 1: Cylinders made of seamless steel with a Rm value of less than 1 100 MPa 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until 31 December 2014 EN 1975:1999 (except Annex G) Transportable gas cylinders – Specifications for the design and construction of refillable transportable seamless aluminium and aluminium alloy gas cylinders of capacity from 0.5 litres up to 150 litres 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until 30 June 2005 EN 1975:1999 + A1:2003 Transportable gas cylinders – Specifications for the design and construction of refillable transportable seamless aluminium and aluminium alloy gas cylinders of capacity from 0.5 litres up to 150 litres 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January 2009 and 31 December 2016 EN ISO 7866:2012 + AC:2014 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless aluminium alloy gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January 2015 and 31 December 2024 EN ISO 7866:2012 + A1:2020 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless aluminium alloy gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN ISO 11120:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel tubes for compressed gas transport of water capacity between 150 litres and 3 000 litres – Design, construction and testing 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 July 2001 and 30 June 2015 31 December 2015 for tubes marked with the letter "H" in accordance with 6.2.2.7.4 (p) EN ISO 11120:1999 + A1:2013 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel tubes for compressed gas transport of water capacity between 150 litres and 3 000 litres – Design, construction and testing 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January 2015 and 31 December 2020 EN ISO 11120:2015 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel tubes of water capacity between 150 litres and 3000 litres – Design, construction and testing 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN 1964-3:2000 Transportable gas cylinders – Specifications for the design and construction of refillable transportable seamless steel gas cylinders of capacity from 0.5 litre up to 150 litres – Part 3: Cylinders made of seamless stainless steel with an Rm value of less than 1 100 MPa 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN 12862:2000 Transportable gas cylinders – Specifications for the design and construction of refillable transportable welded aluminium alloy gas cylinders 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN 1251-2:2000 Cryogenic vessels – Transportable, vacuum insulated, of not more than 1 000 litres volume – Part 2: Design, fabrication, inspection and testing NOTE: Standards EN 1252-1:1998 and EN 1626 referenced in this standard are also applicable to closed cryogenic receptacles for the carriage of UN No. 1972 (METHANE, REFRIGERATED LIQUID or NATURAL GAS, REFRIGERATED LIQUID). 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN 12257:2002 Transportable gas cylinders – Seamless, hoop wrapped composite cylinders 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN 12807:2001 (except Annex A) Transportable refillable brazed steel cylinders for liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) – Design and construction 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January 2005 and 31 December 2010 31 December 2012 EN 12807:2008 Transportable refillable brazed steel cylinders for liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) – Design and construction 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January 2009 and 31 December 2022 EN 12807:2019 LPG equipment and accessories – Transportable refillable brazed steel cylinders for liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) – Design and construction 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN 1964-2:2001 Transportable gas cylinders – Specification for the design and construction of refillable transportable seamless steel gas cylinders of water capacities from 0.5 litre up to and including 150 litre – Part 2: Cylinders made of seamless steel with an Rm value of 1 100 MPa and above 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until 31 December 2014 EN ISO 9809-1:2010 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength less than 1100 MPa 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January 2013 and 31 December 2022 EN ISO 9809-1:2019 Gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing of refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes – Part 1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders and tubes with tensile strength less than 1100 MPa 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN ISO 9809-2:2010 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 2: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength greater than or equal to 1100 MPa 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January 2013 and 31 December 2022 EN ISO 9809-2:2019 Gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing of refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes – Part 2: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders and tubes with tensile strength greater than or equal to 1100 MPa 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN ISO 9809-3:2010 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing – Part 3: Normalized steel cylinders 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January 2013 and 31 December 2022 EN ISO 9809-3:2019 Gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing of refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes – Part 3: Normalized steel cylinders and tubes 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN 13293:2002 Transportable gas cylinders – Specification for the design and construction of refillable transportable seamless normalised carbon manganese steel gas cylinders of water capacity up to 0.5 litre for compressed, liquefied and dissolved gases and up to 1 litre for carbon dioxide 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN 13322-1:2003 Transportable gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel gas cylinders – Design and construction – Part 1: Welded steel 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until 30 June 2007 EN 13322-1:2003 + A1:2006 Transportable gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel gas cylinders – Design and construction – Part 1: Welded steel 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN 13322-2:2003 Transportable gas cylinders – Refillable welded stainless steel gas cylinders – Design and construction – Part 2: Welded stainless steel 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until 30 June 2007 EN 13322-2:2003 + A1:2006 Transportable gas cylinders – Refillable welded stainless steel gas cylinders – Design and construction – Part 2: Welded stainless steel 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN 12245:2002 Transportable gas cylinders – Fully wrapped composite cylinders NOTE: This standard shall not be used for gases classified as LPG . 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until 31 December 2014 31 December 2019, for cylinders and tubes without a liner, manufactured in two parts joined together ; 31 December 2023, for cylinders for LPG EN 12245:2009 + A1:2011 Transportable gas cylinders – Fully wrapped composite cylinders NOTE 1: This standard shall not be used for cylinders and tubes without a liner, manufactured from two parts joined together. 2: This standard shall not be used for gases classified as LPG. 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January 2013 and 31 December 2024 31 December 2019, for cylinders and tubes without a liner, manufactured in two parts joined together ; 31 December 2023, for cylinders for LPG EN 12245:2022 Transportable gas cylinders – Fully wrapped composite cylinders NOTE: This standard shall not be used for gases classified as LPG. 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN 12205:2001 Transportable gas cylinders – Non refillable metallic gas cylinders 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January 2005 and 31 December 2017 31 December 2018 EN ISO 11118 :2015 Gas cylinders – Non-refillable metallic gas cylinders – Specification and test methods 6.2.3.1, 6.2.3.3 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January 2017 and 31 December 2024 EN ISO 11118:2015 + A1:2020 Gas cylinders – Non-refillable metallic gas cylinders – Specification and test methods 6.2.3.1, 6.2.3.3 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN 13110:2002 Transportable refillable welded aluminium cylinders for liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) – Design and construction 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until 31 December 2014 EN 13110:2012 LPG equipment and accessories – Transportable refillable welded aluminium cylinders for liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) – Design and construction 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN 14427:2004 Transportable refillable fully wrapped composite cylinders for liquefied petroleum gases – Design and construction NOTE: This standard applies only to cylinders equipped with pressure relief valves. 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January 2005 and 30 June 2007 EN 14427:2004 + A1:2005 Transportable refillable composite cylinders for LPG – Design and construction NOTE 1: This standard applies only to cylinders equipped with pressure relief valves. 2: In 5.2.9.2.1 and 5.2.9.3.1, both cylinders shall be subject to a burst test when they show damage equal to or worse than the rejection criteria. 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January 2007 and 31 December 2016 31 December 2023, for cylinders without a liner, manufactured from two parts joined together EN 14427:2014 LPG Equipment and accessories – Transportable refillable fully wrapped composite cylinders for LPG – Design and construction NOTE: This standard shall not be used for cylinders without a liner, manufactured from two parts joined together. 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January 2015 and 31 December 2024 31 December 2023, for cylinders without a liner, manufactured from two parts joined together EN 14427:2022 LPG equipment and accessories – Transportable refillable composite cylinders for LPG – Design and construction 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN 14208:2004 Transportable gas cylinders – Specification for welded pressure drums up to 1000 litres capacity for the transport of gases – Design and construction 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN 14140:2003 Transportable refillable welded steel cylinders for Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG) – Alternative design and construction 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January 2005 and 31 December 2010 EN 14140:2003 + A1:2006 LPG equipment and accessories – Transportable refillable welded steel cylinders for LPG – Alternative design and construction 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January 2009 and 31 December 2018 EN 14140 :2014 +AC:2015 LPG Equipment and accessories – Transportable refillable welded steel cylinders for LPG – Alternative design and construction 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN 13769:2003 Transportable gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles – Design, manufacture, identification and testing 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until 30 June 2007 EN 13769:2003 + A1:2005 Transportable gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles – Design, manufacture, identification and testing 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until 31 December 2014 EN ISO 10961:2012 Gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles – Design, manufacture, testing and inspection 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January 2013 and 31 December 2022 EN ISO 10961:2019 Gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles – Design, manufacture, testing and inspection 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN 14638-1:2006 Transportable gas cylinders – Refillable welded receptacles of a capacity not exceeding 150 litres – Part 1 Welded austenitic stainless steel cylinders made to a design justified by experimental methods 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN 14638-3:2010 + AC:2012 Transportable gas cylinders – Refillable welded receptacles of a capacity not exceeding 150 litres – Part 3: Welded carbon steel cylinders made to a design justified by experimental methods 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN 14893:2006 + AC:2007 LPG equipment and accessories – Transportable LPG welded steel pressure drums with a capacity between 150 and 1 000 litres 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January 2009 and 31 December 2016 EN 14893:2014 LPG equipment and accessories – Transportable LPG welded steel pressure drums with a capacity between 150 and 1 000 litres 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN 17339:2020 Transportable gas cylinders – Fully wrapped carbon composite cylinders and tubes for hydrogen 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Until further notice for design and construction of closures EN 849:1996 (except Annex A) Transportable gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Specification and type testing 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Until 30 June 2003 31 December 2014 EN 849:1996 + A2:2001 Transportable gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Specification and type testing 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Until 30 June 2007 31 December 2016 EN ISO 10297:2006 Transportable gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Specification and type testing 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Between 1 January 2009 and 31 December 2018 EN ISO 10297:2014 Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Specification and type testing 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Between 1 January 2015 and 31 December 2020 EN ISO 10297:2014 + A1:2017 Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Specification and type testing 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Until further notice EN ISO 14245:2010 Gas cylinders – Specifications and testing of LPG cylinder valves – Self-closing 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Between 1 January 2013 and 31 December 2022 EN ISO 14245:2019 Gas cylinders – Specifications and testing of LPG cylinder valves – Self-closing 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Between 1 January 2021 and 31 December 2024 EN ISO 14245:2021 Gas cylinders – Specifications and testing of LPG cylinder valves – Self-closing 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Until further notice EN 13152:2001 Specifications and testing of LPG – Cylinder valves – Self closing 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Between 1 January 2005 and 31 December 2010 EN 13152:2001 + A1:2003 Specifications and testing of LPG – Cylinder valves – Self closing 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Between 1 January 2009 and 31 December 2014 EN ISO 15995:2010 Gas cylinders – Specifications and testing of LPG cylinder valves – Manually operated 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Between 1 January 2013 and 31 December 2022 EN ISO 15995:2019 Gas cylinders – Specifications and testing of LPG cylinder valves – Manually operated 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Between 1 January 2021 and 31 December 2024 EN ISO 15995:2021 Gas cylinders – Specifications and testing of LPG cylinder valves – Manually operated 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Until further notice EN 13153:2001 Specifications and testing of LPG – Cylinder valves – Manually operated 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Between 1 January 2005 and 31 December 2010 EN 13153:2001 + A1:2003 Specifications and testing of LPG – Cylinder valves – Manually operated 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Between 1 January 2009 and 31 December 2014 EN ISO 13340:2001 Transportable gas cylinders – Cylinder valves for non-refillable cylinders – Specification and prototype testing 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Between 1 January 2011 and 31 December 2017 31 December 2018 EN 13648-1:2008 Cryogenic vessels – Safety devices for protection against excessive pressure – Part 1: Safety valves for cryogenic service 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN 1626:2008 (except valve category B) Cryogenic vessels – Valves for cryogenic service NOTE: This standard is also applicable to valves for the carriage of UN No 1972 (METHANE, REFRIGERATED LIQUID or NATURAL GAS, REFRIGERATED LIQUID). 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN 13175 :2014 LPG Equipment and accessories – Specification and testing for Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG) pressure vessel valves and fittings 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Between 1 January 2017 and 31 December 2022 EN 13175:2019 (except clause 6.1.6) LPG Equipment and accessories – Specification and testing for Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG) pressure vessel valves and fittings 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Between 1 January 2021 and 31 December 2024 EN 13175:2019 + A1:2020 LPG Equipment and accessories – Specification and testing for Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG) pressure vessel valves and fittings 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Until further notice EN ISO 17871:2015 Gas cylinders – Quick- release cylinder valves – Specification and type testing 6.2.3.1, 6.2.3.3 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January 2017 and 31 December 2021 EN ISO 17871:2015 + A1:2018 Gas cylinders – Quick-release cylinder valves – Specification and type testing 6.2.3.1, 6.2.3.3 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January 2019 and 31 December 2024 EN ISO 17871:2020 Gas cylinders – Quick-release cylinder valves – Specification and type testing 6.2.3.1, 6.2.3.3 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN 13953:2015 LPG equipment and accessories – Pressure relief valves for transportable refillable cylinders for Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG) NOTE: The final sentence of the scope shall not apply. 6.2.3.1, 6.2.3.3 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January 2017 and 31 December 2024 EN 13953:2020 LPG Equipment and accessories – Pressure relief valves for transportable refillable cylinders for Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG) 6.2.3.1, 6.2.3.3 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN ISO 14246: 2014 Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Manufacturing tests and examinations 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January 2015 and 31 December 2020 EN ISO 14246:2014 + A1:2017 Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Manufacturing tests and examinations 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January 2019 and 31 December 2024 EN ISO 14246:2022 Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Manufacturing tests and examinations 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN ISO 17879:2017 Gas cylinders – Self-closing cylinder valves – Specification and type testing 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN 14129:2014 (except the note in clause 3.11) LPG Equipment and accessories – Pressure relief valves for LPG pressure vessels NOTE: This standard is applicable to pressure drums. 6.2.3.1, 6.2.3.3 and 6.2.3.4 Until further notice EN ISO 23826:2021 Gas cylinders – Ball valves – Specification and testing 6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Mandatorily from 1 January 2025 6.2.4.2 Periodic inspection and test The standards referenced in the table below shall be applied for the periodic inspection and test of pressure receptacles as indicated in column (3) to meet the requirements of 6.2.3.5. The standards shall be applied in accordance with 1.1.5. The use of a referenced standard is mandatory. When a pressure receptacle is constructed in accordance with the provisions of 6.2.5 the procedure for periodic inspection if specified in the type approval shall be followed. Standards shall be applied in full unless otherwise specified in the table below. If more than one standard is referenced for the application of the same requirements, only one of them shall be applied. The scope of application of each standard is defined in the scope clause of the standard unless otherwise specified in the Table below. Reference Title of document Applicable (1) (2) (3) EN 1251-3:2000 Cryogenic vessels – Transportable, vacuum insulated, of not more than 1 000 litres volume – Part 3: Operational requirements Until 31 December 2024 EN ISO 21029-2:2015 Cryogenic vessels – Transportable vacuum insulated vessels of not more than 1 000 litres volume – Part 2: Operational requirements NOTE: Notwithstanding clause 14 of this standard, pressure relief valves shall be periodically inspected and tested at intervals not exceeding 5 years. Mandatorily from 1 January 2025 EN ISO 18119:2018 Gas cylinders – Seamless steel and seamless aluminium-alloy gas cylinders and tubes – Periodic inspection and testing NOTE: Notwithstanding clause B.1 of this standard, all cylinders and tubes whose wall thickness is less than the minimum design wall thickness shall be rejected. Until 31 December 2024 EN ISO 18119:2018 + A1:2021 Gas cylinders – Seamless steel and seamless aluminium-alloy gas cylinders and tubes – Periodic inspection and testing NOTE: Notwithstanding clause B.1 of this standard, all cylinders and tubes whose wall thickness is less than the minimum design wall thickness shall be rejected. Mandatorily from 1 January 2025 EN ISO 10462:2013 + A1:2019 Gas cylinders – Acetylene cylinders – Periodic inspection and maintenance – Amendment 1 Until further notice EN ISO 10460:2018 Gas cylinders – Welded aluminium-alloy, carbon and stainless steel gas cylinders – Periodic inspection and testing Until further notice EN ISO 11623:2015 Gas cylinders – Composite construction – Periodic inspection and testing Until further notice EN ISO 22434:2011 Transportable gas cylinders – Inspection and maintenance of cylinder valves Until 31 December 2024 EN ISO 22434:2022 Gas cylinders – Inspection and maintenance of valves Mandatorily from 1 January 2025 EN 14876:2007 Transportable gas cylinders – Periodic inspection and testing of welded steel pressure drums Until 31 December 2024 EN ISO 23088:2020 Gas cylinders – Periodic inspection and testing of welded steel pressure drums – Capacities up to 1 000 l Mandatorily from 1 January 2025 EN 14912 :2015 LPG equipment and accessories – Inspection and maintenance of LPG cylinder valves at time of periodic inspection of cylinders Until 31 December 2024 EN 14912:2022 LPG equipment and accessories – Inspection and maintenance of LPG cylinder valves at time of periodic inspection of cylinders Mandatorily from 1 January 2025 EN 1440:2016 + A1:2018 + A2:2020 (except Annex C) LPG equipment and accessories – Transportable refillable traditional welded and brazed steel Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG) cylinders – Periodic inspection Until further notice EN 16728:2016 + A1:2018 + A2:2020 LPG equipment and accessories – Transportable refillable LPG cylinders other than traditional welded and brazed steel cylinders – Periodic inspection Until further notice EN 15888:2014 Transportable gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles – Periodic inspection and testing Until 31 December 2024 EN ISO 20475:2020 Gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles – Periodic inspection and testing Mandatorily from 1 January 2025 6.2.5 Requirements for non-UN pressure receptacles not designed, constructed and tested according to referenced standards To reflect scientific and technical progress or where no standard is referenced in 6.2.2 or 6.2.4, or to deal with specific aspects not addressed in a standard referenced in 6.2.2 or 6.2.4, the competent authority may recognize the use of a technical code providing the same level of safety. In the type approval the issuing body shall specify the procedure for periodic inspections if the standards referenced in 6.2.2 or 6.2.4 are not applicable or shall not be applied. As soon as a standard newly referenced in 6.2.2 or 6.2.4 can be applied, the competent authority shall withdraw its recognition of the relevant technical code. A transitional period ending no later than the date of entry into force of the next edition of RID may be applied. The competent authority shall transmit to the secretariat of OTIF a list of the technical codes that it recognises and shall update the list if it changes . The list should include the following details: name and date of the code, purpose of the code and details of where it may be obtained. The secretariat shall make this information publicly available on its website. A standard which has been adopted for reference in a future edition of the RID may be approved by the competent authority for use without notifying the secretariat of OTIF. The requirements of 6.2.1, 6.2.3 and the following requirements however shall be met. NOTE: For this section, the references to technical standards in 6.2.1 shall be considered as references to technical codes. 6.2.5.1 Materials The following provisions contain examples of materials that may be used to comply with the requirements for materials in 6.2.1.2: (a) Carbon steel for compressed, liquefied, refrigerated liquefied gases and dissolved gases as well as for substances not in Class 2 listed in Table 3 of packing instruction P 200 of 4.1.4.1; (b) Alloy steel (special steels), nickel, nickel alloy (such as monel) for compressed, liquefied, refrigerated liquefied gases and dissolved gases as well as for substances not in Class 2 listed in Table 3 of packing instruction P 200 of 4.1.4.1; (c) Copper for: (i) gases of classification codes 1A, 1O, 1F and 1TF, whose filling pressure referred to a temperature of 15 °C does not exceed 2 MPa (20 bar); (ii) gases of classification code 2A and also UN No. 1033 dimethyl ether; UN No. 1037 ethyl chloride; UN No. 1063 methyl chloride; UN No. 1079 sulphur dioxide; UN No. 1085 vinyl bromide; UN No. 1086 vinyl chloride; and UN No. 3300 ethylene oxide and carbon dioxide mixture with more than 87% ethylene oxide; (iii) gases of classification codes 3A, 3O and 3F; (d) Aluminium alloy: see special requirement "a" of packing instruction P 200 (10) of 4.1.4.1; (e) Composite material for compressed, liquefied, refrigerated liquefied gases and dissolved gases; (f) Synthetic materials for refrigerated liquefied gases; and (g) Glass for the refrigerated liquefied gases of classification code 3A other than UN No. 2187 carbon dioxide, refrigerated, liquid or mixtures thereof, and gases of classification code 3O. 6.2.5.2 Service equipment (Reserved) 6.2.5.3 Metal cylinders, tubes, pressure drums and bundles of cylinders At the test pressure, the stress in the metal at the most severely stressed point of the pressure receptacle shell shall not exceed 77% of the guaranteed minimum yield stress (Re). "Yield stress" means the stress at which a permanent elongation of 2 per thousand (i.e. 0.2%) or, for austenitic steels, 1% of the gauge length on the test piece, has been produced. NOTE : In the case of sheet metal the axis of the tensile test piece shall be at right angles to the direction of rolling. The permanent elongation at fracture, shall be measured on a test piece of circular cross section in which the gauge length "l" is equal to five times the diameter "d" (l = 5d); if test pieces of rectangular cross section are used, the gauge length "l" shall be calculated by the formula: l = 5.65 where F 0 indicates the initial cross sectional area of the test piece. Pressure receptacles shall be made of suitable materials which shall be resistant to brittle fracture and to stress corrosion cracking between –20 °C and +50 °C. Welds shall be skilfully made and shall afford the fullest safety. 6.2.5.4 Additional provisions relating to aluminium alloy pressure receptacles for compressed gases, liquefied gases, dissolved gases and non pressurized gases subject to special requirements (gas samples) as well as articles containing gas under pressure other than aerosol dispensers and small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) 6.2.5.4.1 The materials of aluminium alloy pressure receptacle shells which are to be accepted shall satisfy the following requirements: A B C D Tensile strength, Rm, in MPa (= N/mm 2 ) 49 to 186 196 to 372 196 to 372 343 to 490 Yield stress, Re, in MPa (= N/mm 2 ) (permanent set = 0.2%) 10 to 167 59 to 314 137 to 334 206 to 412 Permanent elongation at fracture (l = 5d) in per cent 12 to 40 12 to 30 12 to 30 11 to 16 Bend test (diameter of former d = n e, where e is the thickness of the test piece) n = 5 (Rm ≤ 98) n = 6 (Rm > 98) n = 6 (Rm ≤ 325) n = 7 (Rm > 325) n = 6 (Rm ≤ 325) n = 7 (Rm > 325) n = 7 (Rm ≤ 392) n = 8 (Rm > 392) Aluminium Association Series Number (a) 1000 5000 6000 2000 (a) See "Aluminium Standards and Data", Fifth edition, January 1976, published by the Aluminium Association, 750 Third Avenue, New York. The actual properties will depend on the composition of the alloy concerned and on the final treatment of the pressure receptacle shell , but whatever alloy is used the thickness of the pressure receptacle shell shall be calculated by one of the following formulae: e = or e = where e = minimum thickness of pressure receptacle wall, in mm; P MPa = test pressure, in MPa P bar = test pressure, in bar D = nominal external diameter of the pressure receptacle, in mm and Re = guaranteed minimum proof stress with 0.2% proof stress, in MPa (=N/mm 2 ) In addition, the value of the minimum guaranteed proof stress (Re) introduced into the formula is in no case to be greater than 0.85 times the guaranteed minimum tensile strength (Rm), whatever the type of alloy used. NOTE 1: The above characteristics are based on previous experience with the following materials used for pressure receptacles: Column A: Aluminium, unalloyed, 99.5% pure; Column B: Alloys of aluminium and magnesium; Column C: Alloys of aluminium, silicon and magnesium, such as ISO/R209 Al Si Mg (Aluminium Association 6351); Column D: Alloys of aluminium, copper and magnesium. 2: The permanent elongation at fracture is measured by means of test- pieces of circular cross-section in which the gauge length "l" is equal to five times the diameter "d" (l= 5d); if test pieces of rectangular section are used the gauge length shall be calculated by the formula: l = 5.65 EQ \R (F 0 ) where F o is the initial cross section area of the test piece. 3: (a) The bend test (see diagram) shall be carried out on specimens obtained by cutting into two equal parts of width 3e, but in no case less than 25 mm, an annular section of a cylinder. The specimens shall not be machined elsewhere than on the edges; (b) The bend test shall be carried out between a mandrel of diameter (d) and two circular supports separated by a distance of (d + 3e). During the test the inner faces shall be separated by a distance not greater than the diameter of the mandrel; (c) The specimen shall not exhibit cracks when it has been bent inwards around the mandrel until the inner faces are separated by a distance not greater than the diameter of the mandrel; (d) The ratio (n) between the diameter of the mandrel and the thickness of the specimen shall conform to the values given in the Table. Diagram of bend test 6.2.5.4.2 A lower minimum elongation value is acceptable on condition that an additional test approved by the competent authority of the country in which the pressure receptacles are made proves that safety of carriage is ensured to the same extent as in the case of pressure receptacles constructed to comply with the characteristics given in the Table in 6.2.5.4.1 (see also EN ISO 7866:2012 + A1:2020). 6.2.5.4.3 The wall thickness of the pressure receptacles at the thinnest point shall be the following: – where the diameter of the pressure receptacle is less than 50 mm: not less than 1.5 mm; – where the diameter of the pressure receptacle is from 50 to 150 mm: not less than 2 mm; and – where the diameter of the pressure receptacle is more than 150 mm: not less than 3 mm. 6.2.5.4.4 The ends of the pressure receptacles shall have a semicircular, elliptical or "basket handle" section; they shall afford the same degree of safety as the body of the pressure receptacle. 6.2.5.5 Pressure receptacles in composite materials For cylinders, tubes, pressure drums and bundles of cylinders which make use of composite materials, the construction shall be such that a minimum burst ratio (burst pressure divided by test pressure) is: – 1.67 for hoop wrapped pressure receptacles; – 2.00 for fully wrapped pressure receptacles. 6.2.5.6 Closed cryogenic receptacles The following requirements apply to the construction of closed cryogenic receptacles for refrigerated liquefied gases: 6.2.5.6.1 If non-metallic materials are used, they shall resist brittle fracture at the lowest working temperature of the pressure receptacle and its fittings. 6.2.5.6.2 The pressure relief devices shall be so constructed as to work perfectly even at their lowest working temperature. Their reliability of functioning at that temperature shall be established and checked by testing each device or a sample of devices of the same type of construction. 6.2.5.6.3 The vents and pressure relief devices of pressure receptacles shall be so designed as to prevent the liquid from splashing out. 6.2.6 General requirements for aerosol dispensers, small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) and fuel cell cartridges containing liquefied flammable gas 6.2.6.1 Design and construction 6.2.6.1.1 Aerosol dispensers (UN No.1950 aerosols) containing only a gas or a mixture of gases, and small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) (UN No. 2037), shall be made of metal. This requirement shall not apply to aerosols and small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) with a maximum capacity of 100 ml for UN No. 1011 butane. Other aerosol dispensers (UN No.1950 aerosols) shall be made of metal, synthetic material or glass. Receptacles made of metal and having an outside diameter of not less than 40 mm shall have a concave bottom. 6.2.6.1.2 The capacity of receptacles made of metal shall not exceed 1 000 ml; that of receptacles made of synthetic material or of glass shall not exceed 500 ml. 6.2.6.1.3 Each model of receptacles (aerosol dispensers or cartridges) shall, before being put into service, satisfy a hydraulic pressure test carried out in conformity with 6.2.6.2. 6.2.6.1.4 The release valves and dispersal devices of aerosol dispensers (UN No.1950 aerosols) and the valves of UN No. 2037 small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) shall ensure that the receptacles are so closed as to be leakproof and shall be protected against accidental opening. Valves and dispersal devices which close only by the action of the internal pressure are not to be accepted. 6.2.6.1.5 The internal pressure of aerosol dispensers at 50 °C shall not exceed 1.2 MPa (12 bar) when using flammable liquefied gases, 1.32 MPa (13.2 bar) when using non-flammable liquefied gases, and 1.5 MPa (15 bar) when using non-flammable compressed or dissolved gases. In case of a mixture of several gases, the stricter limit shall apply. They shall be so filled that at 50 °C the liquid phase does not exceed 95% of their capacity. Small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) shall meet the test pressure and filling requirements of packing instruction P 200 of 4.1.4.1. In addition, the product of test pressure and water capacity shall not exceed 30 bar litres for liquefied gases or 54 bar litres for compressed gases and the test pressure shall not exceed 250 bar for liquefied gases or 450 bar for compressed gases. 6.2.6.2 Hydraulic pressure test 6.2.6.2.1 The internal pressure to be applied (test pressure) shall be 1.5 times the internal pressure at 50 °C, with a minimum pressure of 1 MPa (10 bar). 6.2.6.2.2 The hydraulic pressure tests shall be carried out on at least five empty receptacles of each model: (a) until the prescribed test pressure is reached, by which time no leakage or visible permanent deformation shall have occurred; and (b) until leakage or bursting occurs; the dished end, if any, shall yield first and the receptacle shall not leak or burst until a pressure 1.2 times the test pressure has been reached or passed. 6.2.6.3 Tightness (leakproofness) test Each filled aerosol dispenser or gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge shall be subjected to a test in a hot water bath in accordance with 6.2.6.3.1 or an approved water bath alternative in accordance with 6.2.6.3.2. 6.2.6.3.1 Hot water bath test 6.2.6.3.1.1 The temperature of the water bath and the duration of the test shall be such that the internal pressure reaches that which would be reached at 55 °C (50 °C if the liquid phase does not exceed 95% of the capacity of the aerosol dispenser, gas cartridge or the fuel cell cartridge at 50 °C). If the contents are sensitive to heat or if the aerosol dispensers, gas cartridges or the fuel cell cartridges are made of plastics material which softens at this test temperature, the temperature of the bath shall be set at between 20 °C and 30 °C but, in addition, one aerosol dispenser, gas cartridge or the fuel cell cartridge in 2 000 shall be tested at the higher temperature. 6.2.6.3.1.2 No leakage or permanent deformation of an aerosol dispenser, gas cartridge or the fuel cell cartridge may occur, except that a plastic aerosol dispenser, gas cartridge or the fuel cell cartridge may be deformed through softening provided that it does not leak. 6.2.6.3.2 Alternative methods With the approval of the competent authority alternative methods that provide an equivalent level of safety may be used provided that the requirements of 6.2.6.3.2.1 and, as appropriate, 6.2.6.3.2.2 or 6.2.6.3.2.3 are met. 6.2.6.3.2.1 Quality system Aerosol dispenser, gas cartridge or the fuel cell cartridge fillers and component manufacturers shall have a quality system. The quality system shall implement procedures to ensure that all aerosol dispensers, gas cartridges or the fuel cell cartridges that leak or that are deformed are rejected and not offered for transport. The quality system shall include: (a) A description of the organizational structure and responsibilities; (b) The relevant inspection and test, quality control, quality assurance, and process operation instructions that will be used; (c) Quality records, such as inspection reports, test data, calibration data and certificates; (d) Management reviews to ensure the effective operation of the quality system; (e) A process for control of documents and their revision; (f) A means for control of non-conforming aerosol dispensers, gas cartridges or the fuel cell cartridges; (g) Training programmes and qualification procedures for relevant personnel; and (h) Procedures to ensure that there is no damage to the final product. An initial audit and periodic audits shall be conducted to the satisfaction of the competent authority. These audits shall ensure the approved system is and remains adequate and efficient. Any proposed changes to the approved system shall be notified to the competent authority in advance. 6.2.6.3.2.2 Aerosol dispensers 6.2.6.3.2.2.1 Pressure and leak testing of aerosol dispensers before filling Each empty aerosol dispenser shall be subjected to a pressure equal to or in excess of the maximum expected in the filled aerosol dispensers at 55 °C (50 °C if the liquid phase does not exceed 95% of the capacity of the receptacle at 50 °C). This shall be at least two-thirds of the design pressure of the aerosol dispenser. If any aerosol dispenser shows evidence of leakage at a rate equal to or greater than 3.3 × 10 -2 mbar·l·s -1 at the test pressure, distortion or other defect, it shall be rejected. 6.2.6.3.2.2.2 Testing of the aerosol dispensers after filling Prior to filling the filler shall ensure that the crimping equipment is set appropriately and the specified propellant is used. Each filled aerosol dispenser shall be weighed and leak tested. The leak detection equipment shall be sufficiently sensitive to detect at least a leak rate of 2.0 × 10 -3 mbar·l·s -1 at 20 °C. Any filled aerosol dispenser that shows evidence of leakage, deformation or excessive mass shall be rejected. 6.2.6.3.2.3 Gas cartridges and fuel cell cartridges 6.2.6.3.2.3.1 Pressure testing of gas cartridges and fuel cell cartridges Each gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge shall be subjected to a test pressure equal to or in excess of the maximum expected in the filled receptacle at 55 °C (50 °C if the liquid phase does not exceed 95% of the capacity of the receptacle at 50 °C). This test pressure shall be that specified for the gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge and shall not be less than two thirds the design pressure of the gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge. If any gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge shows evidence of leakage at a rate equal to or greater than 3.3 × 10 -2 mbar·l·s -1 at the test pressure or distortion or any other defect, it shall be rejected. 6.2.6.3.2.3.2 Leak testing gas cartridges and fuel cell cartridges Prior to filling and sealing, the filler shall ensure that the closures (if any), and the associated sealing equipment are closed appropriately and the specified gas is used. Each filled gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge shall be checked for the correct mass of gas and shall be leak tested. The leak detection equipment shall be sufficiently sensitive to detect at least a leak rate of 2.0 × 10 -3 mbar·l·s -1 at 20 °C. Any gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge that has gas masses not in conformity with the declared mass limits or shows evidence of leakage or deformation, shall be rejected. 6.2.6.3.3 With the approval of the competent authority, aerosols and receptacles, small, are not subject to 6.2.6.3.1 and 6.2.6.3.2, if they are required to be sterile but may be adversely affected by water bath testing, provided: (a) They contain a non-flammable gas and either (i) contain other substances that are constituent parts of pharmaceutical products for medical, veterinary or similar purposes; (ii) contain other substances used in the production process for pharmaceutical products; or (iii) are used in medical, veterinary or similar applications; (b) An equivalent level of safety is achieved by the manufacturer's use of alternative methods for leak detection and pressure resistance, such as helium detection and water bathing a statistical sample of at least 1 in 2000 from each production batch; and (c) For pharmaceutical products according to (a) (i) and (iii) above, they are manufactured under the authority of a national health administration. If required by the competent authority, the principles of Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP) established by the World Health Organization (WHO) shall be followed. 6.2.6.4 Reference to standards The requirements of this section are deemed to be met if the following standards are complied with: – for aerosol dispensers (UN No. 1950 aerosols): Annex to Council Directive 75/324/EEC as amended and applicable at the date of manufacture; – for UN No. 2037, small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) containing UN No. 1965, hydrocarbon gas mixture n.o.s, liquefied: EN 417: 2012 Non-refillable metallic gas cartridges for liquefied petroleum gases, with or without a valve, for use with portable appliances – Construction, inspection, testing and marking; – for UN No. 2037 small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) containing non-toxic, non-flammable compressed or liquefied gases: EN 16509:2014 Transportable gas cylinders – Non-refillable, small transportable, steel cylinders of capacities up to and including 120 ml containing compressed or liquefied gases (compact cylinders) – Design, construction, filling and testing. In addition to the marks required by this standard the gas cartridge shall be marked "UN 2037/EN 16509". Chapter 6.3 Requirements for the construction and testing of packagings for class 6.2 infectious substances of category A (UN Nos. 2814 and 2900) NOTE: The requirements of this Chapter don't apply to packagings used for the carriage of Class 6.2 substances according to packing instruction P621 of 4.1.4.1. 6.3.1 General 6.3.1.1 The requirements of this Chapter apply to packagings intended for the carriage of infectious substances of Category A , UN Nos. 2814 and 2900 . 6.3.2 Requirements for packagings 6.3.2.1 The requirements for packagings in this section are based on packagings, as specified in 6.1.4, currently used. In order to take into account progress in science and technology, there is no objection to the use of packagings having specifications different from those in this Chapter, provided that they are equally effective, acceptable to the competent authority and able to successfully fulfil the requirements described in 6.3.5. Methods of testing other than those described in RID are acceptable, provided they are equivalent, and are recognized by the competent authority. 6.3.2.2 Packagings shall be manufactured and tested under a quality assurance programme which satisfies the competent authority in order to ensure that each packaging meets the requirements of this Chapter. NOTE: ISO 16106: 2020 "Transport packages for dangerous goods – Dangerous goods packagings, intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) and large packagings – Guidelines for the application of ISO 9001" provides acceptable guidance on procedures which may be followed. 6.3.2.3 Manufacturers and subsequent distributors of packagings shall provide information regarding procedures to be followed and a description of the types and dimensions of closures (including required gaskets) and any other components needed to ensure that packages as presented for carriage are capable of passing the applicable performance tests of this Chapter. 6.3.3 Code for designating types of packagings 6.3.3.1 The codes for designating types of packagings are set out in 6.1.2.7. 6.3.3.2 The letters "U" or "W" may follow the packaging code. The letter "U" signifies a special packaging conforming to the requirements of 6.3.5.1.6. The letter "W" signifies that the packaging, although, of the same type indicated by the code is manufactured to a specification different from that in 6.1.4 and is considered equivalent under the requirements of 6.3.2.1. 6.3.4 Marking NOTE 1: The marks indicate that the packaging which bears them corresponds to a successfully tested design type and that it complies with the requirements of this Chapter which are related to the manufacture, but not to the use, of the packaging. 2: The marks are intended to be of assistance to packaging manufacturers, reconditioners, packaging users, carriers and regulatory authorities. 3: The marks do not always provide full details of the test levels, etc., and these may need to be taken further into account, e.g. by reference to a test certificate, to test reports or to a register of successfully tested packagings. 6.3.4.1 Each packaging intended for use according to RID shall bear marks which are durable, legible and placed in a location and of such a size relative to the packaging as to be readily visible. For packages with a gross mass of more than 30 kg, the marks or a duplicate thereof shall appear on the top or on a side of the packaging. Letters, numerals and symbols shall be at least 12 mm high, except for packagings of 30 litres capacity or less or of 30 kg maximum net mass, when they shall be at least 6 mm in height and except for packagings of 5 litres capacity or less or of 5 kg maximum net mass when they shall be of an appropriate size. 6.3.4.2 A packaging that meets the requirements of this section and of 6.3.5 shall be marked with: (a) the United Nations packaging symbol . This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or an MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.11; (b) the code designating the type of packaging according to the requirements of 6.1.2; (c) the text "CLASS 6.2"; (d) the last two digits of the year of manufacture of the packaging; (e) the state authorizing the allocation of the mark, indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic ; (f) the name of the manufacturer or other identification of the packaging specified by the competent authority; (g) for packagings meeting the requirements of 6.3.5.1.6, the letter "U", inserted immediately following the mark required in (b) above. 6.3.4.3 Marks shall be applied in the sequence shown in 6.3.4.2 (a) to (g); each mark required in these sub-paragraphs shall be clearly separated, e.g. by a slash or space, so as to be easily identifiable. For examples, see 6.3.4.4. Any additional marks authorized by a competent authority shall still enable the marks required in 6.3.4.1 to be correctly identified. 6.3.4.4 Example of marking: 4G/ CLASS 6.2/06/ S/SP-9989-ERIKSSON as in 6.3.4.2 (a), (b), (c) and (d) as in 6.3.4.2 (e) and (f) 6.3.5 Test requirements for packagings 6.3.5.1 Performance and frequency of tests 6.3.5.1.1 The design type of each packaging shall be tested as provided in this section in accordance with procedures established by the competent authority allowing the allocation of the mark and shall be approved by this competent authority. 6.3.5.1.2 Each packaging design type shall successfully pass the tests prescribed in this Chapter before being used. A packaging design type is defined by the design, size, material and thickness, manner of construction and packing, but may include various surface treatments. It also includes packagings which differ from the design type only in their lesser design height. 6.3.5.1.3 Tests shall be repeated on production samples at intervals established by the competent authority. 6.3.5.1.4 Tests shall also be repeated after each modification which alters the design, material or manner of construction of a packaging. 6.3.5.1.5 The competent authority may permit the selective testing of packagings that differ only in minor respects from a tested type, e.g. smaller sizes or lower net mass of primary receptacles ; and packagings such as drums and boxes which are produced with small reductions in external dimension(s). 6.3.5.1.6 Primary receptacles of any type may be assembled within an secondary packaging and carried without testing in the rigid outer packaging under the following conditions: (a) The rigid outer packaging shall have been successfully tested in accordance with 6.3.5.2.2 with fragile (e.g. glass) primary receptacles; (b) The total combined gross mass of primary receptacles shall not exceed one half the gross mass of primary receptacles used for the drop test in (a) above; (c) The thickness of cushioning between primary receptacles and between primary receptacles and the outside of the secondary packaging shall not be reduced below the corresponding thicknesses in the originally tested packaging; and if a single primary receptacle was used in the original test, the thickness of cushioning between primary receptacles shall not be less than the thickness of cushioning between the outside of the secondary packaging and the primary receptacle in the original test. When either fewer or smaller primary receptacles are used (as compared to the primary receptacles used in the drop test), sufficient additional cushioning material shall be used to take up the void spaces; (d) The rigid outer packaging shall have successfully passed the stacking test in 6.1.5.6 while empty. The total mass of identical packages shall be based on the combined mass of packagings used in the drop test in (a) above; (e) For primary receptacles containing liquids, an adequate quantity of absorbent material to absorb the entire liquid content of the primary receptacles shall be present; (f) If the rigid outer packaging is intended to contain primary receptacles for liquids and is not leakproof, or is intended to contain primary receptacles for solids and is not siftproof, a means of containing any liquid or solid contents in the event of leakage shall be provided in the form of a leakproof liner, plastics bag or other equally effective means of containment; (g) In addition to the marks prescribed in 6.3.4.2 (a) to (f), packagings shall be marked in accordance with 6.3.4.2 (g). 6.3.5.1.7 The competent authority may at any time require proof, by tests in accordance with this section, that serially-produced packagings meet the requirements of the design type tests. 6.3.5.1.8 Provided the validity of the test results is not affected and with the approval of the competent authority, several tests may be made on one sample. 6.3.5.2 Preparation of packagings for testing 6.3.5.2.1 Samples of each packaging shall be prepared as for carriage, except that a liquid or solid infectious substance shall be replaced by water or, where conditioning at –18 °C is specified, by water/antifreeze. Each primary receptacle shall be filled to not less than 98 % of its capacity . NOTE: The term water includes water/antifreeze solution with a minimum specific gravity of 0.95 for testing at –18 °C. 6.3.5.2.2 Tests and number of samples required Tests required for packaging types Type of packaging (a) Tests required Rigid outer packaging Primary receptacle Water spray 6.3.5.3.5.1 Cold conditioning 6.3.5.3.5.2 Drop 6.3.5.3 Additional drop 6.3.5.3.5.3 Puncture 6.3.5.4 Stack 6.1.5.6 Plastics Other No. of samples No. of samples No. of samples No. of samples No. of samples No. of samples Fibreboard box X 5 5 10 Required on one sample when the packaging is intended to contain dry ice. 2 Required on three samples when testing a "U"-marked packaging as defined in 6.3.5.1.6 for specific provisions. X 5 0 5 2 Fibreboard drum X 3 3 6 2 X 3 0 3 2 Plastics box X 0 5 5 2 X 0 5 5 2 Plastics drum/ jerrican X 0 3 3 2 X 0 3 3 2 Boxes of other material X 0 5 5 2 X 0 0 5 2 Drums/jerricans of other material X 0 3 3 2 X 0 0 3 2 (a) "Type of packaging" categorizes packagings for test purposes according to the kind of packaging and its material characteristics. NOTE 1: In instances where a primary receptacle is made of two or more materials, the material most liable to damage determines the appropriate test. 2: The material of the secondary packagings are not taken into consideration when selecting the test or conditioning for the test. Explanation for use of the Table: If the packaging to be tested consists of a fibreboard outer box with a plastics primary receptacle, five samples must undergo the water spray test (see 6.3.5.3. 5 .1) prior to dropping and another five must be conditioned to –18 °C (see 6.3.5.3. 5 .2) prior to dropping. If the packaging is to contain dry ice then one further single sample shall be dropped in accordance with 6.3.5.3. 5 .3. Packagings prepared as for carriage shall be subjected to the tests in 6.3.5.3 and 6.3.5.4. For outer packagings, the headings in the Table relate to fibreboard or similar materials whose performance may be rapidly affected by moisture; plastics which may embrittle at low temperature; and other materials such as metal whose performance is not affected by moisture or temperature. 6.3.5.3 Drop test 6.3.5.3.1 Drop height and target Samples shall be subjected to free-fall drops from a height of 9 m onto a non-resilient, horizontal, flat, massive and rigid surface in conformity with 6.1.5.3.4. 6.3.5.3.2 Number of test samples and drop orientation 6.3.5.3.2.1 Where the samples are in the shape of a box, five shall be dropped one in each of the following orientations: (a) flat on the base; (b) flat on the top; (c) flat on the longest side; (d) flat on the shortest side; (e) on a corner. 6.3.5.3.2.2 Where the samples are in the shape of a drum or a jerrican , three shall be dropped one in each of the following orientations: (a) diagonally on the top edge , with the centre of gravity directly above the point of impact; (b) diagonally on the base edge ; (c) flat on the body or side. 6.3.5.3.3 While the sample shall be released in the required orientation, it is accepted that for aerodynamic reasons the impact may not take place in that orientation. 6.3.5.3.4 Following the appropriate drop sequence, there shall be no leakage from the primary receptacle(s) which shall remain protected by cushioning/absorbent material in the secondary packaging. 6.3.5.3.5 Special preparation of test sample for the drop test 6.3.5.3.5.1 Fibreboard – Water spray test Fibreboard outer packagings: The sample shall be subjected to a water spray that simulates exposure to rainfall of approximately 5 cm per hour for at least one hour. It shall then be subjected to the test described in 6.3.5.3.1. 6.3.5.3.5.2 Plastics material – Cold conditioning Plastics primary receptacles or outer packagings: The temperature of the test sample and its contents shall be reduced to –18 °C or lower for a period of at least 24 hours and within 15 minutes of removal from that atmosphere the test sample shall be subjected to the test described in 6.3.5.3.1. Where the sample contains dry ice, the conditioning period shall be reduced to 4 hours. 6.3.5.3.5.3 Packagings intended to contain dry ice – Additional drop test Where the packaging is intended to contain dry ice, a test additional to that specified in 6.3.5.3.1 and, when appropriate, in 6.3.5.3.5.1 or 6.3.5.3.5.2 shall be carried out. One sample shall be stored so that all the dry ice dissipates and then that sample shall be dropped in one of the orientations described in 6.3.5.3.2.1 or in 6.3.5.3.2.2, as appropriate, which shall be that most likely to result in failure of the packaging. 6.3.5.4 Puncture test 6.3.5.4.1 Packagings with a gross mass of 7 kg or less Samples shall be placed on a level hard surface. A cylindrical steel rod with a mass of at least 7 kg, a diameter of 38 mm and whose impact end edges have a radius not exceeding 6 mm (see Figure 6.3.5.4.2) , shall be dropped in a vertical free fall from a height of 1 m, measured from the impact end to the impact surface of the sample. One sample shall be placed on its base. A second sample shall be placed in an orientation perpendicular to that used for the first. In each instance the steel rod shall be aimed to impact the primary receptacle. Following each impact, penetration of the secondary packaging is acceptable, provided that there is no leakage from the primary receptacle(s). 6.3.5.4.2 Packagings with a gross mass exceeding 7 kg Samples shall be dropped on to the end of a cylindrical steel rod. The rod shall be set vertically in a level hard surface. It shall have a diameter of 38 mm and the edges of its upper end shall have a radius not exceeding 6 mm (see Figure 6.3.5.4.2) . The rod shall protrude from the surface a distance at least equal to that between the centre of the primary receptacle(s) and the outer surface of the outer packaging with a minimum of 200 mm. One sample shall be dropped with its top face lowermost in a vertical free fall from a height of 1 m, measured from the top of the steel rod. A second sample shall be dropped from the same height in an orientation perpendicular to that used for the first. In each instance, the packaging shall be so orientated that the steel rod would be capable of penetrating the primary receptacle(s). Following each impact, penetration of the secondary packaging is acceptable, provided that there is no leakage from the primary receptacle(s). Figure 6.3.5.4.2 6.3.5.5 Test report 6.3.5.5.1 A written test report containing at least the following particulars shall be drawn up and shall be available to the users of the packaging: 1. Name and address of the test facility; 2. Name and address of applicant (where appropriate); 3. A unique test report identification; 4. Date of the test and of the report; 5. Manufacturer of the packaging; 6. Description of the packaging design type (e.g. dimensions, materials, closures, thickness, etc.), including method of manufacture (e.g. blow moulding) and which may include drawing(s) and/or photograph(s); 7. Maximum capacity; 8. Test contents; 9. Test descriptions and results; 10. The test report shall be signed with the name and status of the signatory. 6.3.5.5.2 The test report shall contain statements that the packaging prepared as for carriage was tested in accordance with the appropriate requirements of this Chapter and that the use of other packaging methods or components may render it invalid. A copy of the test report shall be available to the competent authority. Chapter 6.4 Requirements for the construction, testing and approval of packages for radioactive material and for the approval of such material 6.4.1 (Reserved) 6.4.2 General requirements 6.4.2.1 The package shall be so designed in relation to its mass, volume and shape that it can be easily and safely carried. In addition, the package shall be so designed that it can be properly secured in or on the wagon during carriage. 6.4.2.2 The design shall be such that any lifting attachments on the package will not fail when used in the intended manner and that, if failure of the attachments should occur, the ability of the package to meet other requirements of RID would not be impaired. The design shall take account of appropriate safety factors to cover snatch lifting. 6.4.2.3 Attachments and any other features on the outer surface of the package which could be used to lift it shall be designed either to support its mass in accordance with the requirements of 6.4.2.2 or shall be removable or otherwise rendered incapable of being used during carriage. 6.4.2.4 As far as practicable, the packaging shall be so designed that the external surfaces are free from protruding features and can be easily decontaminated. 6.4.2.5 As far as practicable, the outer layer of the package shall be so designed as to prevent the collection and the retention of water. 6.4.2.6 Any features added to the package at the time of carriage which are not part of the package shall not reduce its safety. 6.4.2.7 The package shall be capable of withstanding the effects of any acceleration, vibration or vibration resonance which may arise under routine conditions of carriage without any deterioration in the effectiveness of the closing devices on the various receptacles or in the integrity of the package as a whole. In particular, nuts, bolts and other securing devices shall be so designed as to prevent them from becoming loose or being released unintentionally, even after repeated use. 6.4.2.8 The design of the package shall take into account ageing mechanisms. 6.4.2.9 The materials of the packaging and any components or structures shall be physically and chemically compatible with each other and with the radioactive contents. Account shall be taken of their behaviour under irradiation. 6.4.2.10 All valves through which the radioactive contents could escape shall be protected against unauthorized operation. 6.4.2.11 The design of the package shall take into account ambient temperatures and pressures that are likely to be encountered in routine conditions of carriage. 6.4.2.12 A package shall be so designed that it provides sufficient shielding to ensure that, under routine conditions of carriage and with the maximum radioactive contents that the package is designed to contain, the dose rate at any point on the external surface of the package would not exceed the values specified in 2.2.7.2.4.1.2, 4.1.9.1.11 and 4.1.9.1.12, as applicable, with account taken of 7.5.11 CW 33 (3.3) (b) and (3.5). 6.4.2.13 For radioactive material having other dangerous properties the package design shall take into account those properties; see 2.1.3.5.3 and 4.1.9.1.5. 6.4.2.14 Manufacturers and subsequent distributors of packagings shall provide information regarding procedures to be followed and a description of the types and dimensions of closures (including required gaskets) and any other components needed to ensure that packages as presented for carriage are capable of passing the applicable performance tests of this Chapter. 6.4.3 (Reserved) 6.4.4 Requirements for excepted packages An excepted package shall be designed to meet the requirements specified in 6.4.2.1 to 6.4.2.13 and, in addition, the requirements of 6.4.7.2 if it contains fissile material allowed by one of the provisions of 2.2.7.2.3.5 (a) to (f). 6.4.5 Requirements for industrial packages 6.4.5.1 Type IP-1, Type IP-2 and Type IP-3 package shall meet the requirements specified in 6.4.2 and 6.4.7.2. 6.4.5.2 A Type IP-2 package shall , if it were subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.15.4 and 6.4.15.5, prevent: (a) loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and (b) more than a 20% increase in the maximum dose rate at any external surface of the package. 6.4.5.3 A Type IP-3 package shall meet all the requirements specified in 6.4.7.2 to 6.4.7.15. 6.4.5.4 Alternative requirements for Type IP-2 and Type IP-3 packages 6.4.5.4.1 Packages may be used as Type IP-2 package provided that: (a) They satisfy the requirements of 6.4.5.1; (b) They are designed to satisfy the requirements prescribed for packing group I or II in Chapter 6.1 ; and (c) When subjected to the tests required for packing groups I or II in Chapter 6.1, they would prevent: (i) loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and (ii) more than a 20% increase in the maximum dose rate at any external surface of the package. 6.4.5.4.2 Portable tanks may also be used as Type IP-2 or Type IP-3 package , provided that: (a) They satisfy the requirements of 6.4.5.1; (b) They are designed to satisfy the requirements prescribed in Chapter 6.7 and are capable of withstanding a test pressure of 265 kPa; and (c) They are designed so that any additional shielding which is provided shall be capable of withstanding the static and dynamic stresses resulting from handling and routine conditions of carriage and of preventing an increase of more than 20% in the maximum dose rate at any external surface of the portable tanks. 6.4.5.4.3 Tanks, other than portable tanks, may also be used as Type IP-2 or Type IP-3 package for carrying LSA I and LSA II as prescribed in Table 4.1.9.2.5, provided that: (a) They satisfy the requirements of 6.4.5.1; (b) They are designed to satisfy the requirements prescribed in Chapter 6.8; and (c) They are designed so that any additional shielding which is provided shall be capable of withstanding the static and dynamic stresses resulting from handling and routine conditions of carriage and of preventing more than a 20% increase in the maximum dose rate at any external surface of the tanks. 6.4.5.4.4 Containers with the characteristics of a permanent enclosure may also be used as Type IP-2 or Type IP-3 package , provided that: (a) The radioactive contents are restricted to solid materials; (b) They satisfy the requirements of 6.4.5.1; and (c) They are designed to conform to ISO 1496-1:1990: "Series 1 Containers – Specifications and Testing – Part 1: General Cargo Containers" and subsequent amendments 1:1993, 2:1998, 3:2005, 4:2006 and 5:2006, excluding dimensions and ratings. They shall be designed such that if subjected to the tests prescribed in that document and the accelerations occurring during routine conditions of carriage they would prevent: (i) loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and (ii) more than a 20% increase in the maximum dose rate at any external surface of the containers. 6.4.5.4.5 Metal intermediate bulk containers may also be used as Type IP-2 or Type IP-3 package, provided that: (a) They satisfy the requirements of 6.4.5.1; and (b) They are designed to satisfy the requirements prescribed in Chapter 6.5 for packing group I or II, and if they were subjected to the tests prescribed in that Chapter, but with the drop test conducted in the most damaging orientation, they would prevent: (i) loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and (ii) more than a 20% increase in the maximum dose rate at any external surface of the intermediate bulk container . 6.4.6 Requirements for packages containing uranium hexafluoride 6.4.6.1 Packages designed to contain uranium hexafluoride shall meet the requirements which pertain to the radioactive and fissile properties of the material prescribed elsewhere in RID. Except as allowed in 6.4.6.4, uranium hexafluoride in quantities of 0.1 kg or more shall also be packaged and carried in accordance with the provisions of ISO 7195:2005 "Nuclear Energy – Packaging of uranium hexafluoride (UF 6 ) for transport" , and the requirements of 6.4.6.2 and 6.4.6.3. 6.4.6.2 Each package designed to contain 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride shall be designed so that the package would meet the following requirements: (a) Withstand without leakage and without unacceptable stress, as specified in ISO 7195: 2005 , the structural test as specified in 6.4.21.5 except as allowed in 6.4.6.4; (b) Withstand without loss or dispersal of the uranium hexafluoride the free drop test specified in 6.4.15.4; and (c) Withstand without rupture of the containment system the thermal test specified in 6.4.17.3 except as allowed in 6.4.6.4. 6.4.6.3 Packages designed to contain 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride shall not be provided with pressure relief devices. 6.4.6.4 Subject to multilateral approval, packages designed to contain 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride may be carried if the packages are designed: (a) to international or national standards other than ISO 7195: 2005 provided an equivalent level of safety is maintained; and/or (b) to withstand without leakage and without unacceptable stress a test pressure of less than 2.76 MPa as specified in 6.4.21.5; and/or (c) to contain 9 000 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride and the packages do not meet the requirement of 6.4.6.2 (c). In all other respects the requirements specified in 6.4.6.1 to 6.4.6.3 shall be satisfied. 6.4.7 Requirements for Type A packages 6.4.7.1 Type A packages shall be designed to meet the general requirements of 6.4.2 and of 6.4.7.2 to 6.4.7.17. 6.4.7.2 The smallest overall external dimension of the package shall not be less than 10 cm. 6.4.7.3 The outside of the package shall incorporate a feature such as a seal, which is not readily breakable and which, while intact, will be evidence that it has not been opened. 6.4.7.4 Any tie down attachments on the package shall be so designed that, under normal and accident conditions of carriage, the forces in those attachments shall not impair the ability of the package to meet the requirements of RID. 6.4.7.5 The design of the package shall take into account temperatures ranging from –40 C to +70 C for the components of the packaging. Attention shall be given to freezing temperatures for liquids and to the potential degradation of packaging materials within the given temperature range. 6.4.7.6 The design and manufacturing techniques shall be in accordance with national or international standards, or other requirements, acceptable to the competent authority. 6.4.7.7 The design shall include a containment system securely closed by a positive fastening device which cannot be opened unintentionally or by a pressure which may arise within the package. 6.4.7.8 Special form radioactive material may be considered as a component of the containment system. 6.4.7.9 If the containment system forms a separate unit of the package, the containment system shall be capable of being securely closed by a positive fastening device which is independent of any other part of the packaging. 6.4.7.10 The design of any component of the containment system shall take into account, where applicable, the radiolytic decomposition of liquids and other vulnerable materials and the generation of gas by chemical reaction and radiolysis. 6.4.7.11 The containment system shall retain its radioactive contents under a reduction of ambient pressure to 60 kPa. 6.4.7.12 All valves, other than pressure relief valves, shall be provided with an enclosure to retain any leakage from the valve. 6.4.7.13 A radiation shield which encloses a component of the package specified as a part of the containment system shall be so designed as to prevent the unintentional release of that component from the shield. Where the radiation shield and such component within it form a separate unit, the radiation shield shall be capable of being securely closed by a positive fastening device which is independent of any other packaging structure. 6.4.7.14 A package shall be so designed that if it were subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.15, it would prevent: (a) loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and (b) more than a 20% increase in the maximum dose rate at any external surface of the package. 6.4.7.15 The design of a package intended for liquid radioactive material shall make provision for ullage to accommodate variations in the temperature of the contents, dynamic effects and filling dynamics. Type A packages to contain liquids 6.4.7.16 A Type A package designed to contain liquid radioactive material shall, in addition: (a) Be adequate to meet the conditions specified in 6.4.7.14 (a) above if the package is subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.16; and (b) Either (i) be provided with sufficient absorbent material to absorb twice the volume of the liquid contents. Such absorbent material shall be suitably positioned so as to contact the liquid in the event of leakage; or (ii) be provided with a containment system composed of primary inner and secondary outer containment components designed to enclose the liquid contents completely and ensure their retention , within the secondary outer containment components, even if the primary inner components leak. Type A packages to contain gas 6.4.7.17 A Type A package designed for gases shall prevent loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents if the package were subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.16, except for a Type A package designed for tritium gas or for noble gases. 6.4.8 Requirements for Type B(U) packages 6.4.8.1 Type B(U) packages shall be designed to meet the requirements specified in 6.4.2, and of 6.4.7.2 to 6.4.7.15, except as specified in 6.4.7.14 (a), and, in addition, the requirements specified in 6.4.8.2 to 6.4.8.15. 6.4.8.2 A package shall be so designed that, under the ambient conditions specified in 6.4.8.5 and 6.4.8.6 heat generated within the package by the radioactive contents shall not, under normal conditions of carriage, as demonstrated by the tests in 6.4.15, adversely affect the package in such a way that it would fail to meet the applicable requirements for containment and shielding if left unattended for a period of one week. Particular attention shall be paid to the effects of heat, which may cause one or more of the following: (a) Alteration of the arrangement, the geometrical form or the physical state of the radioactive contents or, if the radioactive material is enclosed in a can or receptacle (for example, clad fuel elements), cause the can, receptacle or radioactive material to deform or melt; (b) Lessening of the efficiency of the packaging through differential thermal expansion or cracking or melting of the radiation shielding material; (c) Acceleration of corrosion when combined with moisture. 6.4.8.3 A package shall be so designed that, under the ambient condition specified in 6.4.8.5 and in the absence of insolation, the temperature of the accessible surfaces of a package shall not exceed 50 °C, unless the package is carried under exclusive use. 6.4.8.4 The maximum temperature of any surface readily accessible during carriage of a package under exclusive use shall not exceed 85 C in the absence of insolation under the ambient conditions specified in 6.4.8.5. Account may be taken of barriers or screens intended to give protection to persons without the need for the barriers or screens being subject to any test. 6.4.8.5 The ambient temperature shall be assumed to be 38 C. 6.4.8.6 The solar insolation conditions shall be assumed to be as specified in Table 6.4.8.6. Table 6.4.8.6: Insolation data Case Form and location of surface Insulation for 12 hours per day (W/m 2 ) 1 Flat surfaces carried horizontally-downward facing 0 2 Flat surfaces carried horizontally-upward facing 800 3 Surfaces carried vertically 200 (a) 4 Other downward facing (not horizontal) surfaces 200 (a) 5 All other surfaces 400 (a) (a) Alternatively, a sine function may be used, with an absorption coefficient adopted and the effects of possible reflection from neighbouring objects neglected. 6.4.8.7 A package which includes thermal protection for the purpose of satisfying the requirements of the thermal test specified in 6.4.17.3 shall be so designed that such protection will remain effective if the package is subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.15 and 6.4.17.2 (a) and (b) or 6.4.17.2 (b) and (c), as appropriate. Any such protection on the exterior of the package shall not be rendered ineffective by ripping, cutting, skidding, abrasion or rough handling. 6.4.8.8 A package shall be so designed that, if it were subjected to: (a) The tests specified in 6.4.15, it would restrict the loss of radioactive contents to not more than 10 6 A 2 per hour; and (b) The tests specified in 6.4.17.1, 6.4.17.2 (b), 6.4.17.3, and 6.4.17.4 and either the test in (i) 6.4.17.2 (c), when the package has a mass not greater than 500 kg, an overall density not greater than 1 000 kg/m 3 based on the external dimensions, and radioactive contents greater than 1 000 A 2 not as special form radioactive material, or (ii) 6.4.17.2 (a), for all other packages, it would meet the following requirements: – retain sufficient shielding to ensure that the dose rate at 1 m from the surface of the package would not exceed 10 mSv/h with the maximum radioactive contents which the package is designed to contain; and – restrict the accumulated loss of radioactive contents in a period of one week to not more than 10 A 2 for krypton 85 and not more than A 2 for all other radionuclides. Where mixtures of different radionuclides are present, the provisions of 2.2.7.2.2.4 to 2.2.7.2.2.6 shall apply except that for krypton 85 an effective A 2 (i) value equal to 10 A 2 may be used. For case (a) above, the assessment shall take into account the external non-fixed contamination limits of 4.1.9.1.2. 6.4.8.9 A package for radioactive contents with activity greater than 10 5 A 2 shall be so designed that if it were subjected to the enhanced water immersion test specified in 6.4.18, there would be no rupture of the containment system. 6.4.8.10 Compliance with the permitted activity release limits shall depend neither upon filters nor upon a mechanical cooling system. 6.4.8.11 A package shall not include a pressure relief system from the containment system which would allow the release of radioactive material to the environment under the conditions of the tests specified in 6.4.15 and 6.4.17. 6.4.8.12 A package shall be so designed that if it were at the maximum normal operating pressure and it were subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.15 and 6.4.17, the level of strains in the containment system would not attain values which would adversely affect the package in such a way that it would fail to meet the applicable requirements. 6.4.8.13 A package shall not have a maximum normal operating pressure in excess of a gauge pressure of 700 kPa. 6.4.8.14 A package containing low dispersible radioactive material shall be so designed that any features added to the low dispersible radioactive material that are not part of it, or any internal components of the packaging shall not adversely affect the performance of the low dispersible radioactive material. 6.4.8.15 A package shall be designed for an ambient temperature range from –40 C to +38 C. 6.4.9 Requirements for Type B(M) packages 6.4.9.1 Type B(M) packages shall meet the requirements for Type B(U) packages specified in 6.4.8.1, except that for packages to be carried solely within a specified country or solely between specified countries, conditions other than those given in 6.4.7.5, 6.4.8.4 to 6.4.8.6, and 6.4.8.9 to 6.4.8.15 above may be assumed with the approval of the competent authorities of these countries. The requirements for Type B(U) packages specified in 6.4.8.4 and 6.4.8.9 to 6.4.8.15 shall be met as far as practicable. 6.4.9.2 Intermittent venting of Type B(M) packages may be permitted during carriage, provided that the operational controls for venting are acceptable to the relevant competent authorities. 6.4.10 Requirements for Type C packages 6.4.10.1 Type C packages shall be designed to meet the requirements specified in 6.4.2 and of 6.4.7.2 to 6.4.7.15, except as specified in 6.4.7.14 (a), and of the requirements specified in 6.4.8.2 to 6.4.8.6, 6.4.8.10 to 6.4.8.15, and, in addition, of 6.4.10.2 to 6.4.10.4. 6.4.10.2 A package shall be capable of meeting the assessment criteria prescribed for tests in 6.4.8.8 (b) and 6.4.8.12 after burial in an environment defined by a thermal conductivity of 0.33 W · m -1 · K -1 and a temperature of 38 °C in the steady state. Initial conditions for the assessment shall assume that any thermal insulation of the package remains intact, the package is at the maximum normal operating pressure and the ambient temperature is 38 °C. 6.4.10.3 A package shall be so designed that, if it were at the maximum normal operating pressure and subjected to: (a) The tests specified in 6.4.15, it would restrict the loss of radioactive contents to not more than 10 -6 A 2 per hour; and (b) The test sequences in 6.4.20.1, ( i) it would retain sufficient shielding to ensure that the dose rate at 1 m from the surface of the package would not exceed 10 mSv/h with the maximum radioactive contents which the package is designed to contain; and (ii) it would restrict the accumulated loss of radioactive contents in a period of 1 week to not more than 10 A 2 for krypton-85 and not more than A 2 for all other radionuclides. Where mixtures of different radionuclides are present, the provisions of 2.2.7.2.2.4 to 2.2.7.2.2.6 shall apply except that for krypton 85 an effective A 2 (i) value equal to 10 A 2 may be used. For case (a) above, the assessment shall take into account the external contamination limits of 4.1.9.1.2. 6.4.10.4 A package shall be so designed that there will be no rupture of the containment system following performance of the enhanced water immersion test specified in 6.4.18. 6.4.11 Requirements for packages containing fissile material 6.4.11.1 Fissile material shall be carried so as to: (a) Maintain sub-criticality during routine, normal and accident conditions of carriage; in particular, the following contingencies shall be considered: (i) water leaking into or out of packages; (ii) the loss of efficiency of built in neutron absorbers or moderators; (iii) rearrangement of the contents either within the package or as a result of loss from the package; (iv) reduction of spaces within or between packages; (v) packages becoming immersed in water or buried in snow; and (vi) temperature changes; and (b) Meet the requirements: (i) of 6.4.7.2 except for unpackaged material when specifically allowed by 2.2.7.2.3.5 (e); (ii) prescribed elsewhere in RID which pertain to the radioactive properties of the material; (iii) of 6.4.7.3 unless the material is excepted by 2.2.7.2.3.5; (iv) of 6.4.11.4 to 6.4.11.14, unless the material is excepted by 2.2.7.2.3.5, 6.4.11.2 or 6.4.11.3. 6.4.11.2 Packages containing fissile material that meet the provisions of subparagraph (d) and one of the provisions of (a) to (c) below are excepted from the requirements of 6.4.11.4 to 6.4.11.14. (a) Packages containing fissile material in any form provided that: (i) The smallest external dimension of the package is not less than 10 cm; (ii) The criticality safety index of the package is calculated using the following formula: * Plutonium may be of any isotopic composition provided that the amount of Pu-241 is less than that of Pu-240 in the package where the values of Z are taken from Table 6.4.11.2; (iii) The CSI of any package does not exceed 10; (b) Packages containing fissile material in any form provided that: (i) The smallest external dimension of the package is not less than 30 cm; (ii) The package, after being subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.15.1 to 6.4.15.6: – Retains its fissile material contents; – Preserves the minimum overall outside dimensions of the package to at least 30 cm; – Prevents the entry of a 10 cm cube; (iii) The criticality safety index of the package is calculated using the following formula: * Plutonium may be of any isotopic composition provided that the amount of Pu-241 is less than that of Pu-240 in the package where the values of Z are taken from Table 6.4.11.2; (iv) The criticality safety index of any package does not exceed 10; (c) Packages containing fissile material in any form provided that: (i) The smallest external dimension of the package is not less than 10 cm; (ii) The package, after being subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.15.1 to 6.4.15.6: – Retains its fissile material contents; – Preserves the minimum overall outside dimensions of the package to at least 10 cm; – Prevents the entry of a 10 cm cube; (iii) The CSI of the package is calculated using the following formula: * Plutonium may be of any isotopic composition provided that the amount of Pu-241 is less than that of Pu-240 in the package; (iv) The total mass of fissile nuclides in any package does not exceed 15 g; (d) The total mass of beryllium, hydrogenous material enriched in deuterium, graphite and other allotropic forms of carbon in an individual package shall not be greater than the mass of fissile nuclides in the package except where the total concentration of these materials does not exceed 1 g in any 1 000 g of material. Beryllium incorporated in copper alloys up to 4% in weight of the alloy does not need to be considered. Table 6.4.11.2 – Values of Z for calculation of criticality safety index in accordance with 6.4.11.2 Enrichment a Z Uranium enriched up to 1.5% 2200 Uranium enriched up to 5% 850 Uranium enriched up to 10% 660 Uranium enriched up to 20% 580 Uranium enriched up to 100% 450 a If a package contains uranium with varying enrichments of U-235, then the value corresponding to the highest enrichment shall be used for Z. 6.4.11.3 Packages containing not more than 1 000 g of plutonium are excepted from the application of 6.4.11.4 to 6.4.11.14 provided that: (a) Not more than 20% of the plutonium by mass is fissile nuclides; (b) The criticality safety index of the package is calculated using the following formula: ; (c) If uranium is present with the plutonium, the mass of uranium shall be no more than 1% of the mass of the plutonium. 6.4.11.4 Where the chemical or physical form, isotopic composition, mass or concentration, moderation ratio or density, or geometric configuration is not known, the assessments of 6.4.11.8 to 6.4.11.13 shall be performed assuming that each parameter that is not known has the value which gives the maximum neutron multiplication consistent with the known conditions and parameters in these assessments. 6.4.11.5 For irradiated nuclear fuel the assessments of 6.4.11.8 to 6.4.11.13 shall be based on an isotopic composition demonstrated to provide either: (a) The maximum neutron multiplication during the irradiation history; or (b) A conservative estimate of the neutron multiplication for the package assessments. After irradiation but prior to shipment, a measurement shall be performed to confirm the conservatism of the isotopic composition. 6.4.11.6 The package, after being subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.15, shall: (a) Preserve the minimum overall outside dimensions of the package to at least 10 cm; and (b) Prevent the entry of a 10 cm cube. 6.4.11.7 The package shall be designed for an ambient temperature range of –40 C to +38 C unless the competent authority specifies otherwise in the certificate of approval for the package design. 6.4.11.8 For a package in isolation, it shall be assumed that water can leak into or out of all void spaces of the package, including those within the containment system. However, if the design incorporates special features to prevent such leakage of water into or out of certain void spaces, even as a result of error, absence of leakage may be assumed in respect of those void spaces. Special features shall include either of the following: (a) Multiple high standard water barriers, not less than two of which would remain watertight if the package were subject to the tests prescribed in 6.4.11.13 (b), a high degree of quality control in the manufacture, maintenance and repair of packagings and tests to demonstrate the closure of each package before each shipment; or (b) For packages containing uranium hexafluoride only, with maximum enrichment of 5 mass percent uranium-235: (i) packages where, following the tests prescribed in 6.4.11.13 (b), there is no physical contact between the valve or the plug and any other component of the packaging other than at its original point of attachment and where, in addition, following the test prescribed in 6.4.17.3 the valves and the plug remain leaktight; and (ii) a high degree of quality control in the manufacture, maintenance and repair of packagings coupled with tests to demonstrate closure of each package before each shipment. 6.4.11.9 It shall be assumed that the confinement system is closely reflected by at least 20 cm of water or such greater reflection as may additionally be provided by the surrounding material of the packaging. However, when it can be demonstrated that the confinement system remains within the packaging following the tests prescribed in 6.4.11.13 (b), close reflection of the package by at least 20 cm of water may be assumed in 6.4.11.10 (c). 6.4.11.10 The package shall be subcritical under the conditions of 6.4.11.8 and 6.4.11.9 with the package conditions that result in the maximum neutron multiplication consistent with: (a) Routine conditions of carriage (incident free); (b) The tests specified in 6.4.11.12 (b); (c) The tests specified in 6.4.11.13 (b). 6.4.11.11 (Reserved) 6.4.11.12 For normal conditions of carriage a number "N" shall be derived, such that five times "N" packages shall be subcritical for the arrangement and package conditions that provide the maximum neutron multiplication consistent with the following: (a) There shall not be anything between the packages, and the package arrangement shall be reflected on all sides by at least 20 cm of water; and (b) The state of the packages shall be their assessed or demonstrated condition if they had been subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.15. 6.4.11.13 For accident conditions of carriage a number "N" shall be derived, such that two times "N" packages shall be subcritical for the arrangement and package conditions that provide the maximum neutron multiplication consistent with the following: (a) Hydrogenous moderation between packages, and the package arrangement reflected on all sides by at least 20 cm of water; and (b) The tests specified in 6.4.15 followed by whichever of the following is the more limiting: (i) the tests specified in 6.4.17.2 (b) and, either 6.4.17.2 (c) for packages having a mass not greater than 500 kg and an overall density not greater than 1 000 kg/m 3 based on the external dimensions, or 6.4.17.2 (a) for all other packages; followed by the test specified in 6.4.17.3 and completed by the tests specified in 6.4.19.1 to 6.4.19.3; or (ii) the test specified in 6.4.17.4; and (c) Where any part of the fissile material escapes from the containment system following the tests specified in 6.4.11.13 (b), it shall be assumed that fissile material escapes from each package in the array and all of the fissile material shall be arranged in the configuration and moderation that results in the maximum neutron multiplication with close reflection by at least 20 cm of water. 6.4.11.14 The criticality safety index (CSI) for packages containing fissile material shall be obtained by dividing the number 50 by the smaller of the two values of "N" derived in 6.4.11.12 and 6.4.11.13 (i.e. CSI = 50/N). The value of the criticality safety index may be zero, provided that an unlimited number of packages is subcritical (i.e. N is effectively equal to infinity in both cases). 6.4.12 Test procedures and demonstration of compliance 6.4.12.1 Demonstration of compliance with the performance standards required in 2.2.7.2.3.3.1, 2.2.7.2.3.3.2, 2.2.7.2.3.4.1, 2.2.7.2.3.4.2 , 2.2.7.2.3.4.3 and 6.4.2 to 6.4.11 must be accomplished by any of the methods listed below or by a combination thereof: (a) Performance of tests with specimens representing special form radioactive material, or low dispersible radioactive material or with prototypes or samples of the packaging, where the contents of the specimen or the packaging for the tests shall simulate as closely as practicable the expected range of radioactive contents and the specimen or packaging to be tested shall be prepared as presented for carriage; (b) Reference to previous satisfactory demonstrations of a sufficiently similar nature; (c) Performance of tests with models of appropriate scale incorporating those features which are significant with respect to the item under investigation when engineering experience has shown results of such tests to be suitable for design purposes. When a scale model is used, the need for adjusting certain test parameters, such as penetrator diameter or compressive load, shall be taken into account; (d) Calculation, or reasoned argument, when the calculation procedures and parameters are generally agreed to be reliable or conservative. 6.4.12.2 After the specimen, prototype or sample has been subjected to the tests, appropriate methods of assessment shall be used to assure that the requirements for the test procedures have been fulfilled in compliance with the performance and acceptance standards prescribed in 2.2.7.2.3.3.1, 2.2.7.2.3.3.2, 2.2.7.2.3.4.1, 2.2.7.2.3.4.2 , 2.2.7.2.3.4.3 and 6.4.2 to 6.4.11. 6.4.12.3 All specimens shall be inspected before testing in order to identify and record faults or damage including the following: (a) Divergence from the design; (b) Defects in manufacture; (c) Corrosion or other deterioration; and (d) Distortion of features. The containment system of the package shall be clearly specified. The external features of the specimen shall be clearly identified so that reference may be made simply and clearly to any part of such specimen. 6.4.13 Testing the integrity of the containment system and shielding and evaluating criticality safety After each test or group of tests or sequence of the applicable tests, as appropriate, specified in 6.4.15 to 6.4.21: (a) Faults and damage shall be identified and recorded; (b) It shall be determined whether the integrity of the containment system and shielding has been retained to the extent required in 6.4.2 to 6.4.11 for the package under test; and (c) For packages containing fissile material, it shall be determined whether the assumptions and conditions used in the assessments required by 6.4.11.1 to 6.4.11.14 for one or more packages are valid. 6.4.14 Target for drop tests The target for the drop tests specified in 2.2.7.2.3.3.5 (a), 6.4.15.4, 6.4.16 (a), 6.4.17.2 and 6.4.20.2 shall be a flat, horizontal surface of such a character that any increase in its resistance to displacement or deformation upon impact by the specimen would not significantly increase the damage to the specimen. 6.4.15 Tests for demonstrating ability to withstand normal conditions of carriage 6.4.15.1 The tests are: the water spray test, the free drop test, the stacking test and the penetration test. Specimens of the package shall be subjected to the free drop test, the stacking test and the penetration test, preceded in each case by the water spray test. One specimen may be used for all the tests, provided that the requirements of 6.4.15.2 are fulfilled. 6.4.15.2 The time interval between the conclusion of the water spray test and the succeeding test shall be such that the water has soaked in to the maximum extent, without appreciable drying of the exterior of the specimen. In the absence of any evidence to the contrary, this interval shall be taken to be two hours if the water spray is applied from four directions simultaneously. No time interval shall elapse, however, if the water spray is applied from each of the four directions consecutively. 6.4.15.3 Water spray test: The specimen shall be subjected to a water spray test that simulates exposure to rainfall of approximately 5 cm per hour for at least one hour. 6.4.15.4 Free drop test: The specimen shall drop onto the target so as to suffer maximum damage in respect of the safety features to be tested. (a) The height of the drop, measured from the lowest point of the specimen to the upper surface of the target, shall be not less than the distance specified in Table 6.4.15.4 for the applicable mass. The target shall be as defined in 6.4.14; (b) For rectangular fibreboard or wood packages not exceeding a mass of 50 kg, a separate specimen shall be subjected to a free drop onto each corner from a height of 0.3 m; (c) For cylindrical fibreboard packages not exceeding a mass of 100 kg, a separate specimen shall be subjected to a free drop onto each of the quarters of each rim from a height of 0.3 m. Table 6.4.15.4: Free drop distance for testing packages to normal conditions of carriage Package mass (kg) Free drop distance (m) Package mass < 5000 1,2 5000 Package mass < 10000 0,9 10000 Package mass < 15000 0,6 15000 Package mass 0,3 6.4.15.5 Stacking test: Unless the shape of the packaging effectively prevents stacking, the specimen shall be subjected, for a period of 24 h, to a compressive load equal to the greater of the following: (a) The equivalent of 5 times the maximum weight of the package; and (b) The equivalent of 13 kPa multiplied by the vertically projected area of the package. The load shall be applied uniformly to two opposite sides of the specimen, one of which shall be the base on which the package would typically rest. 6.4.15.6 Penetration test: The specimen shall be placed on a rigid, flat, horizontal surface which will not move significantly while the test is being carried out. (a) A bar of 3.2 cm in diameter with a hemispherical end and a mass of 6 kg shall be dropped and directed to fall, with its longitudinal axis vertical, onto the centre of the weakest part of the specimen, so that, if it penetrates sufficiently far, it will hit the containment system. The bar shall not be significantly deformed by the test performance; (b) The height of the drop of the bar, measured from its lower end to the intended point of impact on the upper surface of the specimen, shall be 1 m. 6.4.16 Additional tests for Type A packages designed for liquids and gases A specimen or separate specimens shall be subjected to each of the following tests unless it can be demonstrated that one test is more severe for the specimen in question than the other, in which case one specimen shall be subjected to the more severe test. (a) Free drop test: The specimen shall drop onto the target so as to suffer the maximum damage in respect of containment. The height of the drop measured from the lowest part of the specimen to the upper surface of the target shall be 9 m. The target shall be as defined in 6.4.14; (b) Penetration test: The specimen shall be subjected to the test specified in 6.4.15.6 except that the height of drop shall be increased to 1.7 m from the 1 m specified in 6.4.15.6 (b). 6.4.17 Tests for demonstrating ability to withstand accident conditions in carriage 6.4.17.1 The specimen shall be subjected to the cumulative effects of the tests specified in 6.4.17.2 and 6.4.17.3, in that order. Following these tests, either this specimen or a separate specimen shall be subjected to the effect(s) of the water immersion test(s) as specified in 6.4.17.4 and, if applicable, 6.4.18. 6.4.17.2 Mechanical test: The mechanical test consists of three different drop tests. Each specimen shall be subjected to the applicable drops as specified in 6.4.8.8 or 6.4.11.13. The order in which the specimen is subjected to the drops shall be such that, on completion of the mechanical test, the specimen shall have suffered such damage as will lead to the maximum damage in the thermal test which follows. (a) For drop I, the specimen shall drop onto the target so as to suffer the maximum damage, and the height of the drop measured from the lowest point of the specimen to the upper surface of the target shall be 9 m. The target shall be as defined in 6.4.14; (b) For drop II, the specimen shall drop onto a bar rigidly mounted perpendicularly on the target so as to suffer the maximum damage. The height of the drop measured from the intended point of impact of the specimen to the upper surface of the bar shall be 1 m. The bar shall be of solid mild steel of circular cross-section, (15.0 cm ± 0.5 cm) in diameter and 20 cm long unless a longer bar would cause greater damage, in which case a bar of sufficient length to cause maximum damage shall be used. The upper end of the bar shall be flat and horizontal with its edge rounded off to a radius of not more than 6 mm. The target on which the bar is mounted shall be as described in 6.4.14; (c) For drop III, the specimen shall be subjected to a dynamic crush test by positioning the specimen on the target so as to suffer maximum damage by the drop of a 500 kg mass from 9 m onto the specimen. The mass shall consist of a solid mild steel plate 1 m by 1 m and shall fall in a horizontal attitude. The lower face of the steel plate shall have its edges and corners rounded off to a radius of not more than 6 mm. The height of the drop shall be measured from the underside of the plate to the highest point of the specimen. The target on which the specimen rests shall be as defined in 6.4.14. 6.4.17.3 Thermal test: The specimen shall be in thermal equilibrium under conditions of an ambient temperature of 38 C, subject to the solar insolation conditions specified in Table 6.4.8.6 and subject to the design maximum rate of internal heat generation within the package from the radioactive contents. Alternatively, any of these parameters are allowed to have different values prior to and during the test, providing due account is taken of them in the subsequent assessment of package response. The thermal test shall then consist of: (a) Exposure of a specimen for a period of 30 minutes to a thermal environment which provides a heat flux at least equivalent to that of a hydrocarbon fuel/air fire in sufficiently quiescent ambient conditions to give a minimum average flame emissivity coefficient of 0.9 and an average temperature of at least 800 C, fully engulfing the specimen, with a surface absorptivity coefficient of 0.8 or that value which the package may be demonstrated to possess if exposed to the fire specified, followed by, (b) Exposure of the specimen to an ambient temperature of 38 C, subject to the solar insolation conditions specified in Table 6.4.8.6 and subject to the design maximum rate of internal heat generation within the package by the radioactive contents for a sufficient period to ensure that temperatures in the specimen are decreasing in all parts of the specimen and/or are approaching initial steady state conditions. Alternatively, any of these parameters are allowed to have different values following cessation of heating, providing due account is taken of them in the subsequent assessment of package response. During and following the test the specimen shall not be artificially cooled and any combustion of materials of the specimen shall be permitted to proceed naturally. 6.4.17.4 Water immersion test: The specimen shall be immersed under a head of water of at least 15 m for a period of not less than eight hours in the attitude which will lead to maximum damage. For demonstration purposes, an external gauge pressure of at least 150 kPa shall be considered to meet these conditions. 6.4.18 Enhanced water immersion test for Type B(U) and Type B(M) packages containing more than 10 5 A 2 and Type C packages Enhanced water immersion test: The specimen shall be immersed under a head of water of at least 200 m for a period of not less than one hour. For demonstration purposes, an external gauge pressure of at least 2 MPa shall be considered to meet these conditions. 6.4.19 Water leakage test for packages containing fissile material 6.4.19.1 Packages for which water in-leakage or out-leakage to the extent which results in greatest reactivity has been assumed for purposes of assessment under 6.4.11.8 to 6.4.11.13 shall be excepted from the test. 6.4.19.2 Before the specimen is subjected to the water leakage test specified below, it shall be subjected to the tests in 6.4.17.2 (b), and either 6.4.17.2 (a) or (c) as required by 6.4.11.13, and the test specified in 6.4.17.3. 6.4.19.3 The specimen shall be immersed under a head of water of at least 0.9 m for a period of not less than 8 hours and in the attitude for which maximum leakage is expected. 6.4.20 Tests for Type C packages 6.4.20.1 Specimens shall be subjected to the effects of each of the following test sequences in the orders specified: (a) The tests specified in 6.4.17.2 (a), 6.4.17.2 (c), 6.4.20.2 and 6.4.20.3; and (b) The test specified in 6.4.20.4. Separate specimens are allowed to be used for each of the sequences (a) and (b). 6.4.20.2 Puncture/tearing test: The specimen shall be subjected to the damaging effects of a vertical solid probe made of mild steel. The orientation of the package specimen and the impact point on the package surface shall be such as to cause maximum damage at the conclusion of the test sequence specified in 6.4.20.1 (a). (a) The specimen, representing a package having a mass less than 250 kg, shall be placed on a target and subjected to a probe having a mass of 250 kg falling from a height of 3 m above the intended impact point. For this test the probe shall be a 20 cm diameter cylindrical bar with the striking end forming a frustum of a right circular cone with the following dimensions: 30 cm height and 2.5 cm in diameter at the top with its edge rounded off to a radius of not more than 6 mm . The target on which the specimen is placed shall be as specified in 6.4.14; (b) For packages having a mass of 250 kg or more, the base of the probe shall be placed on a target and the specimen dropped onto the probe. The height of the drop, measured from the point of impact with the specimen to the upper surface of the probe shall be 3 m. For this test the probe shall have the same properties and dimensions as specified in (a) above, except that the length and mass of the probe shall be such as to incur maximum damage to the specimen. The target on which the base of the probe is placed shall be as specified in 6.4.14. 6.4.20.3 Enhanced thermal test: The conditions for this test shall be as specified in 6.4.17.3, except that the exposure to the thermal environment shall be for a period of 60 minutes. 6.4.20.4 Impact test: The specimen shall be subject to an impact on a target at a velocity of not less than 90 m/s, at such an orientation as to suffer maximum damage. The target shall be as defined in 6.4.14 , except that the target surface may be at any orientation as long as the surface is normal to the specimen path. 6.4.21 Inspections for packagings designed to contain 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride 6.4.21.1 Every manufactured packaging and its service and structural equipment shall, either jointly or separately, undergo an inspection initially before being put into service and periodically thereafter. These inspections shall be performed and certified by agreement with the competent authority. 6.4.21.2 The initial inspection shall consist of a check of the design characteristics, a structural test, a leakproofness test, a water capacity test and a check of satisfactory operation of the service equipment. 6.4.21.3 The periodic inspections shall consist of a visual examination, a structural test, a leakproofness test and a check of satisfactory operation of the service equipment. The maximum intervals for periodic inspections shall be five years. Packagings which have not been inspected within this five-year period shall be examined before carriage in accordance with a programme approved by the competent authority. They shall not be refilled before completion of the full programme for periodic inspections. 6.4.21.4 The check of design characteristics shall demonstrate compliance with the design type specifications and the manufacturing programme. 6.4.21.5 For the initial structural test, packagings designed to contain 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexaflouride shall be tested hydraulically at an internal pressure of at least 1.38 MPa but, when the test pressure is less than 2.76 MPa, the design shall require multilateral approval. For retesting packagings, any other equivalent non-destructive testing may be applied subject to multilateral approval. 6.4.21.6 The leakproofness test shall be performed in accordance with a procedure which is capable of indicating leakages in the containment system with a sensitivity of 0.1 Pa ·l /s (10 -6 bar · l/s) . 6.4.21.7 The water capacity of the packagings shall be established with an accuracy of 0.25% at a reference temperature of 15 °C. The volume shall be stated on the plate described in 6.4.21.8. 6.4.21.8 A plate made of non-corroding metal shall be durably attached to every packaging in a readily accessible place. The method of attaching the plate must not impair the strength of the packaging. The following particulars, at least, shall be marked on the plate by stamping or by any other equivalent method: – Approval number; – Manufacturer's serial number; – Maximum working pressure (gauge pressure); – Test pressure (gauge pressure); – Contents: uranium hexafluoride; – Capacity in litres; – Maximum permissible filling mass of uranium hexafluoride; – Tare mass; – Date (month, year) of the initial test and the most recent periodic test; – Stamp of the expert who performed the tests. 6.4.22 Approvals of package designs and materials 6.4.22.1 The approval of designs for packages containing 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride requires that: (a) Each design that meets the requirements of 6.4.6.4 shall require multilateral approval; (b) Each design that meets the requirements of 6.4.6.1 to 6.4.6.3 shall require unilateral approval by the competent authority of the country of origin of the design, unless multilateral approval is otherwise required by RID. 6.4.22.2 Each Type B(U) and Type C package design shall require unilateral approval, except that: (a) A package design for fissile material, which is also subject to 6.4.22.4, 6.4.23.7, and 5.1.5.2.1 shall require multilateral approval; and (b) A Type B(U) package design for low dispersible radioactive material shall require multilateral approval. 6.4.22.3 Each Type B(M) package design, including those for fissile material which are also subject to the requirements of 6.4.22.4, 6.4.23.7, and 5.1.5.2.1 and those for low dispersible radioactive material, shall require multilateral approval. 6.4.22.4 Each package design for fissile material which is not excepted by any of the paragraphs 2.2.7.2.3.5 (a) to (f), 6.4.11.2 and 6.4.11.3 shall require multilateral approval. 6.4.22.5 The design for special form radioactive material shall require unilateral approval. The design for low dispersible radioactive material shall require multilateral approval (see also 6.4.23.8). 6.4.22.6 The design for a fissile material excepted from "FISSILE" classification in accordance with 2.2.7.2.3.5 (f) shall require multilateral approval. 6.4.22.7 Alternative activity limits for an exempt consignment of instruments or articles in accordance with 2.2.7.2.2.2 (b) shall require multilateral approval. 6.4.22.8 Any design that requires unilateral approval originating in an RID Contracting State shall be approved by the competent authority of this country; if the country where the package design has been designed is not an RID Contracting State, carriage is possible on condition that: (a) a certificate has been supplied by this country, proving that the package design satisfies the technical requirements of RID, and that this certificate is validated by a competent authority of an RID Contracting State; (b) if no certificate and no existing package design approval by an RID Contracting State has been supplied, the package design is approved by the competent authority of an RID Contracting State. 6.4.22.9 For designs approved under the transitional measures see 1.6.6. 6.4.23 Applications and approvals for radioactive material carriage 6.4.23.1 (Reserved) 6.4.23.2 Applications for approval of shipment 6.4.23.2.1 An application for approval of shipment shall include: (a) The period of time, related to the shipment, for which the approval is sought; (b) The actual radioactive contents, the expected modes of carriage, the type of wagon, and the probable or proposed route; and (c) The details of how the precautions and administrative or operational controls, referred to in the certificate of approval for the package design, if applicable, issued under 5.1.5.2.1 (a) (v), (vi) or (vii), are to be put into effect. 6.4.23.2.2 An application for approval of SCO-III shipments shall include: (a) A statement of the respects in which, and of the reasons why, the consignment is considered SCO-III; (b) Justification for choosing SCO-III by demonstrating that: (i) No suitable packaging currently exists; (ii) Designing and/or constructing a packaging or segmenting the object is not practically, technically or economically feasible; (iii) No other viable alternative exists; (c) A detailed description of the proposed radioactive contents with reference to their physical and chemical states and the nature of the radiation emitted; (d) A detailed statement of the design of the SCO-III, including complete engineering drawings and schedules of materials and methods of manufacture; (e) All information necessary to satisfy the competent authority that the requirements of 4.1.9.2.4 (e) and the requirements of 7.5.11, CW 33 (2), if applicable, are satisfied; (f) A transport plan; (g) A specification of the applicable management system as required in 1.7.3. 6.4.23.3 An application for approval of shipments under special arrangement shall include all the information necessary to satisfy the competent authority that the overall level of safety in carriage is at least equivalent to that which would be provided if all the applicable requirements of RID had been met. The application shall also include: (a) A statement of the respects in which, and of the reasons why, the shipment cannot be made in full accordance with the applicable requirements of RID; and (b) A statement of any special precautions or special administrative or operational controls which are to be employed during carriage to compensate for the failure to meet the applicable requirements of RID. 6.4.23.4 An application for approval of Type B(U) or Type C package design shall include: (a) A detailed description of the proposed radioactive contents with reference to their physical and chemical states and the nature of the radiation emitted; (b) A detailed statement of the design, including complete engineering drawings and schedules of materials and methods of manufacture; (c) A statement of the tests which have been done and their results, or evidence based on calculative methods or other evidence that the design is adequate to meet the applicable requirements; (d) The proposed operating and maintenance instructions for the use of the packaging; (e) If the package is designed to have a maximum normal operating pressure in excess of 100 kPa gauge, a specification of the materials of manufacture of the containment system, the samples to be taken, and the tests to be made; (f) If the package is to be used for shipment after storage, a justification of considerations to ageing mechanisms in the safety analysis and within the proposed operating and maintenance instructions; (g) Where the proposed radioactive contents are irradiated nuclear fuel, a statement and a justification of any assumption in the safety analysis relating to the characteristics of the fuel and a description of any pre shipment measurement as required by 6.4.11.5 (b); (h) Any special stowage provisions necessary to ensure the safe dissipation of heat from the package considering the various modes of carriage to be used and type of wagon or container; (i) A reproducible illustration, not larger than 21 cm by 30 cm, showing the make up of the package; (j) A specification of the applicable management system as required in 1.7.3 ; and (k) For packages which are to be used for shipment after storage, a gap analysis programme describing a systematic procedure for a periodic evaluation of changes of applicable regulations, changes in technical knowledge and changes of the state of the package design during storage. 6.4.23.5 An application for approval of a Type B(M) package design shall include, in addition to the general information required in 6.4.23.4 for Type B(U) packages: (a) A list of the requirements specified in 6.4.7.5, 6.4.8.4 to 6.4.8.6 and 6.4.8.9 to 6.4.8.15 with which the package does not conform; (b) Any proposed supplementary operational controls to be applied during carriage not regularly provided for in RID, but which are necessary to ensure the safety of the package or to compensate for the deficiencies listed in (a) above; (c) A statement relative to any restrictions on the mode of carriage and to any special loading, carriage, unloading or handling procedures; and (d) A statement of the range of ambient conditions (temperature, solar radiation) which are expected to be encountered during carriage and which have been taken into account in the design. 6.4.23.6 The application for approval of designs for packages containing 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride shall include all information necessary to satisfy the competent authority that the design meets the applicable requirements of 6.4.6.1, and a description of the applicable management system as required in 1.7.3. 6.4.23.7 An application for a fissile package approval shall include all information necessary to satisfy the competent authority that the design meets the applicable requirements of 6.4.11.1, and a specification of the applicable management system as required by 1.7.3. 6.4.23.8 An application for approval of design for special form radioactive material and design for low dispersible radioactive material shall include: (a) A detailed description of the radioactive material or, if a capsule, the contents; particular reference shall be made to both physical and chemical states; (b) A detailed statement of the design of any capsule to be used; (c) A statement of the tests which have been done and their results, or evidence based on calculations to show that the radioactive material is capable of meeting the performance standards, or other evidence that the special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material meets the applicable requirements of RID; (d) A specification of the applicable management system as required in 1.7.3; and (e) Any proposed pre-shipment actions for use in the consignment of special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material. 6.4.23.9 An application for approval of design for fissile material excepted from "FISSILE" classification in accordance with Table 2.2.7.2.1.1, under 2.2.7.2.3.5 (f) shall include: ( a) A detailed description of the material; particular reference shall be made to both physical and chemical states; (b) A statement of the tests that have been carried out and their results, or evidence based on calculation methods to show that the material is capable of meeting the requirements specified in 2.2.7.2.3.6; (c) A specification of the applicable management system as required in 1.7.3; (d) A statement of specific actions to be taken prior to shipment. 6.4.23.10 An application for approval of alternative activity limits for an exempt consignment of instruments or articles shall include: (a) An identification and detailed description of the instrument or article, its intended uses and the radionuclide(s) incorporated; (b) The maximum activity of the radionuclide(s) in the instrument or article; (c) Maximum external dose rates arising from the instrument or article; (d) The chemical and physical forms of the radionuclide(s) contained in the instrument or article; (e) Details of the construction and design of the instrument or article, particularly as related to the containment and shielding of the radionuclide in routine, normal and accident conditions of carriage; (f) The applicable management system, including the quality testing and verification procedures to be applied to radioactive sources, components and finished products to ensure that the maximum specified activity of radioactive material or the maximum dose rates specified for the instrument or article are not exceeded, and that the instruments or articles are constructed according to the design specifications; (g) The maximum number of instruments or articles expected to be shipped per consignment and annually; (h) Dose assessments in accordance with the principles and methodologies set out in the Radiation Protection and Safety of Radiation Sources: International Basic Safety Standards, IAEA Safety Standards Series No. GSR Part 3, IAEA, Vienna (2014) , including individual doses to transport workers and members of the public and, if appropriate, collective doses arising from routine, normal and accident conditions of carriage, based on representative carriage scenarios the consignments are subject to. 6.4.23.11 Each certificate of approval issued by a competent authority shall be assigned an identification mark. The identification mark shall be of the following generalized type: VRI/Number/Type Code (a) Except as provided in 6.4.23.12 (b), VRI represents the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic of the country issuing the certificate; (b) The number shall be assigned by the competent authority, and shall be unique and specific with regard to the particular design or shipment or alternative activity limit for exempt consignment. The identification mark of the approval of shipment shall be clearly related to the identification mark of the approval of design; (c) The following type codes shall be used in the order listed to indicate the types of certificate of approval issued: AF Type A package design for fissile material B(U) Type B(U) package design [B(U) F if for fissile material] B(M) Type B(M) package design [B(M) F if for fissile material] C Type C package design (CF if for fissile material) IF Industrial package design for fissile material S Special form radioactive material LD Low dispersible radioactive material FE Fissile material complying with the requirements of 2.2.7.2.3.6 T Shipment X Special arrangement AL Alternative activity limits for an exempt consignment of instruments or articles In the case of package designs for non-fissile or fissile excepted uranium hexafluoride, where none of the above codes apply, then the following type codes shall be used: H(U) Unilateral approval H(M) Multilateral approval. 6.4.23.12 These identification marks shall be applied as follows: (a) Each certificate and each package shall bear the appropriate identification mark, comprising the symbols prescribed in 6.4.23.11 (a), (b) and (c) above, except that, for packages, only the applicable design type codes shall appear following the second stroke, that is, the "T" or "X" shall not appear in the identification mark on the package. Where the approval of design and the approval of shipment are combined, the applicable type codes do not need to be repeated. For example: A/132/B(M)F: A Type B(M) package design approved for fissile material, requiring multilateral approval, for which the competent authority of Austria has assigned the design number 132 (to be marked on both the package and on the certificate of approval for the package design); A/132/B(M)FT: The approval of shipment issued for a package bearing the identification mark elaborated above (to be marked on the certificate only); A/137/X: An approval of special arrangement issued by the competent authority of Austria, to which the number 137 has been assigned (to be marked on the certificate only); A/139/IF: An industrial package design for fissile material approved by the competent authority of Austria, to which package design number 139 has been assigned (to be marked on both the package and on the certificate of approval for the package design); and A/145/H(U): A package design for fissile excepted uranium hexafluoride approved by the competent authority of Austria, to which package design number 145 has been assigned (to be marked on both the package and on the certificate of approval for the package design); (b) Where multilateral approval is effected by validation according to 6.4.23.20, only the identification mark issued by the country of origin of the design or shipment shall be used. Where multilateral approval is effected by issue of certificates by successive countries, each certificate shall bear the appropriate identification mark and the package whose design was so approved shall bear all appropriate identification marks. For example: A/132/B(M)F CH/28/B(M)F would be the identification mark of a package which was originally approved by Austria and was subsequently approved, by separate certificate, by Switzerland. Additional identification marks would be tabulated in a similar manner on the package; (c) The revision of a certificate shall be indicated by a parenthetical expression following the identification mark on the certificate. For example, A/132/B(M)F (Rev.2) would indicate revision 2 of the Austrian certificate of approval for the package design; or A/132/B(M)F (Rev.0) would indicate the original issuance of the Austrian certificate of approval for the package design. For original issuances, the parenthetical entry is optional and other words such as "original issuance" may also be used in place of "Rev.0". Certificate revision numbers may only be issued by the country issuing the original certificate of approval; (d) Additional symbols (as may be necessitated by national regulations) may be added in brackets to the end of the identification mark; for example, A/132/B(M)F (SP503); (e) It is not necessary to alter the identification mark on the packaging each time that a revision to the design certificate is made. Such re marking shall be required only in those cases where the revision to the package design certificate involves a change in the letter type codes for the package design following the second stroke. 6.4.23.13 Each certificate of approval issued by a competent authority for special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material shall include the following information: (a) Type of certificate; (b) The competent authority identification mark; (c) The issue date and an expiry date; (d) List of applicable national and international regulations, including the edition of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material under which the special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material is approved; (e) The identification of the special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material; (f) A description of the special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material; (g) Design specifications for the special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material which may include references to drawings; (h) A specification of the radioactive contents which includes the activities involved and which may include the physical and chemical form; (i) A specification of the applicable management system as required in 1.7.3; (j) Reference to information provided by the applicant relating to specific actions to be taken prior to shipment; (k) If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, reference to the identity of the applicant; (l) Signature and identification of the certifying official. 6.4.23.14 Each certificate of approval issued by a competent authority for material excepted from classification as "FISSILE" shall include the following information: (a) Type of certificate; (b) The competent authority identification mark; (c) The issue date and an expiry date; (d) List of applicable national and international regulations, including the edition of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material under which the exception is approved; ( e) A description of the excepted material; (f) Limiting specifications for the excepted material; (g) A specification of the applicable management system as required in 1.7.3; (h) Reference to information provided by the applicant relating to specific actions to be taken prior to shipment; (i) If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, reference to the identity of the applicant; (j) Signature and identification of the certifying official; (k) Reference to documentation that demonstrates compliance with 2.2.7.2.3.6. 6.4.23.15 Each certificate of approval issued by a competent authority for a special arrangement shall include the following information: (a) Type of certificate; (b) The competent authority identification mark; (c) The issue date and an expiry date; (d) Mode(s) of carriage; (e) Any restrictions on the modes of carriage, type of wagon, container, and any necessary routeing instructions; (f) List of applicable national and international regulations, including the edition of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material under which the special arrangement is approved; (g) The following statement: "This certificate does not relieve the consignor from compliance with any requirement of the government of any country through or into which the package will be carried."; (h) References to certificates for alternative radioactive contents, other competent authority validation, or additional technical data or information, as deemed appropriate by the competent authority; (i) Description of the packaging by a reference to the drawings or a specification of the design. If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, a reproducible illustration, not larger than 21 cm by 30 cm, showing the make up of the package shall also be provided, accompanied by a brief description of the packaging, including materials of manufacture, gross mass, general outside dimensions and appearance; (j) A specification of the authorized radioactive contents, including any restrictions on the radioactive contents which might not be obvious from the nature of the packaging. This shall include the physical and chemical forms, the activities involved (including those of the various isotopes, if appropriate), mass in grams (for fissile material or for each fissile nuclide when appropriate) , and whether special form radioactive material, low dispersible radioactive material or fissile material excepted under 2.2.7.2.3.5 (f) if applicable; (k) Additionally, for packages containing fissile material: (i) a detailed description of the authorized radioactive contents; (ii) the value of the criticality safety index; (iii) reference to the documentation that demonstrates the criticality safety of the package; (iv) any special features, on the basis of which the absence of water from certain void spaces has been assumed in the criticality assessment; (v) any allowance (based on 6.4.11.5 (b)) for a change in neutron multiplication assumed in the criticality assessment as a result of actual irradiation experience; and (vi) the ambient temperature range for which the special arrangement has been approved; (l) A detailed listing of any supplementary operational controls required for preparation, loading, carriage, unloading and handling of the consignment, including any special stowage provisions for the safe dissipation of heat; (m) If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, reasons for the special arrangement; (n) Description of the compensatory measures to be applied as a result of the shipment being under special arrangement; (o) Reference to information provided by the applicant relating to the use of the packaging or specific actions to be taken prior to the shipment; (p) A statement regarding the ambient conditions assumed for purposes of design if these are not in accordance with those specified in 6.4.8.5, 6.4.8.6 and 6.4.8.15, as applicable; (q) Any emergency arrangements deemed necessary by the competent authority; (r) A specification of the applicable management system as required in 1.7.3; (s) If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, reference to the identity of the applicant and to the identity of the carrier; (t) Signature and identification of the certifying official. 6.4.23.16 Each certificate of approval for a shipment issued by a competent authority shall include the following information: (a) Type of certificate; (b) The competent authority identification mark(s); (c) The issue date and an expiry date; (d) List of applicable national and international regulations, including the edition of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material under which the shipment is approved; (e) Any restrictions on the modes of carriage, type of wagon, container, and any necessary routeing instructions; (f) The following statement: "This certificate does not relieve the consignor from compliance with any requirement of the government of any country through or into which the package will be carried."; (g) A detailed listing of any supplementary operational controls required for preparation, loading, carriage, unloading and handling of the consignment, including any special stowage provisions for the safe dissipation of heat or maintenance of criticality safety; (h) Reference to information provided by the applicant relating to specific actions to be taken prior to shipment; (i) Reference to the applicable certificate(s) of approval of design; (j) A specification of the actual radioactive contents, including any restrictions on the radioactive contents which might not be obvious from the nature of the packaging. This shall include the physical and chemical forms, the total activities involved (including those of the various isotopes, if appropriate), mass in grams (for fissile material or for each fissile nuclide when appropriate) , and whether special form radioactive material, low dispersible radioactive material or fissile material excepted under 2.2.7.2.3.5 (f) if applicable; (k) Any emergency arrangements deemed necessary by the competent authority; (l) A specification of the applicable management system as required in 1.7.3; (m) If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, reference to the identity of the applicant; (n) Signature and identification of the certifying official. 6.4.23.17 Each certificate of approval of the design of a package issued by a competent authority shall include the following information: (a) Type of certificate; (b) The competent authority identification mark; (c) The issue date and an expiry date; (d) Any restriction on the modes of carriage, if appropriate; (e) List of applicable national and international regulations, including the edition of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material under which the design is approved; (f) The following statement; "This certificate does not relieve the consignor from compliance with any requirement of the government of any country through or into which the package will be carried."; (g) References to certificates for alternative radioactive contents, other competent authority validation, or additional technical data or information, as deemed appropriate by the competent authority; (h) A statement authorizing shipment where approval of shipment is required under 5.1.5.1.2, if deemed appropriate; (i) Identification of the packaging; (j) Description of the packaging by a reference to the drawings or specification of the design. If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, a reproducible illustration, not larger than 21 cm by 30 cm, showing the make up of the package shall also be provided, accompanied by a brief description of the packaging, including materials of manufacture, gross mass, general outside dimensions and appearance; (k) Specification of the design by reference to the drawings; (l) A specification of the authorized radioactive content, including any restrictions on the radioactive contents which might not be obvious from the nature of the packaging. This shall include the physical and chemical forms, the activities involved (including those of the various isotopes, if appropriate), mass in grams (for fissile material the total mass of fissile nuclides or the mass for each fissile nuclide, when appropriate) and whether special form radioactive material, low dispersible radioactive material or fissile material excepted under 2.2.7.2.3.5 (f), if applicable; (m) A description of the containment system; (n) For package designs containing fissile material which require multilateral approval of the package design in accordance with 6.4.22.4: (i) a detailed description of the authorized radioactive contents; (ii) a description of the confinement system; (iii) the value of the criticality safety index; (iv) reference to the documentation that demonstrates the criticality safety of the package; (v) any special features, on the basis of which the absence of water from certain void spaces has been assumed in the criticality assessment; (vi) any allowance (based on 6.4.11.5 (b)) for a change in neutron multiplication assumed in the criticality assessment as a result of actual irradiation experience; and (vii) the ambient temperature range for which the package design has been approved; (o) For Type B(M) packages, a statement specifying those requirements of 6.4.7.5, 6.4.8.4, 6.4.8.5, 6.4.8.6 and 6.4.8.9 to 6.4.8.15 with which the package does not conform and any amplifying information which may be useful to other competent authorities; (p) For package designs subject to the transitional provisions in 1.6.6.2.1, a statement specifying those requirements of RID applicable as from 1 January 2021 with which the package does not conform; (q) For packages containing more than 0.1 kg of uranium hexafluoride, a statement specifying those provisions of 6.4.6.4 which apply if any and any amplifying information which may be useful to other competent authorities; (r) A detailed listing of any supplementary operational controls required for preparation, loading, carriage, unloading and handling of the consignment, including any special stowage provisions for the safe dissipation of heat; (s) Reference to information provided by the applicant relating to the use of the packaging or specific actions to be taken prior to shipment; (t) A statement regarding the ambient conditions assumed for purposes of design if these are not in accordance with those specified in 6.4.8.5, 6.4.8.6 and 6.4.8.15, as applicable; (u) A specification of the applicable management system as required in 1.7.3; (v) Any emergency arrangements deemed necessary by the competent authority; (w) If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, reference to the identity of the applicant; (x) Signature and identification of the certifying official. 6.4.23.18 Each certificate issued by a competent authority for alternative activity limits for an exempt consignment of instruments or articles according to 5.1.5.2.1 (d) shall include the following information: (a) Type of certificate; (b) The competent authority identification mark; (c) The issue date and an expiry date; (d) List of applicable national and international regulations, including the edition of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material under which the exemption is approved; ( e) The identification of the instrument or article; (f) A description of the instrument or article; (g) Design specifications for the instrument or article; (h) A specification of the radionuclide(s), the approved alternative activity limit(s) for the exempt consignment(s) of the instrument(s) or article(s); (i) Reference to documentation that demonstrates compliance with 2.2.7.2.2.2 (b); (j) If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, reference to the identity of the applicant; (k) Signature and identification of the certifying official. 6.4.23.19 The competent authority shall be informed of the serial number of each packaging manufactured to a design approved by them under 1.6.6.2.1, 1.6.6.2.2, 6.4.22.2, 6.4.22.3 and 6.4.22.4 . 6.4.23.20 Multilateral approval may be by validation of the original certificate issued by the competent authority of the country of origin of the design or shipment. Such validation may take the form of an endorsement on the original certificate or the issuance of a separate endorsement, annex, supplement, etc., by the competent authority of the country through or into which the shipment is made. Chapter 6.5 Requirements for the construction and testing of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) 6.5.1 General requirements 6.5.1.1 Scope 6.5.1.1.1 The requirements of this Chapter apply to intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) the use of which is expressly authorized for the carriage of certain dangerous goods according to the packing instructions indicated in Column (8) of Table A in Chapter 3.2. Portable tanks and tank-containers which meet the requirements of Chapter 6.7 or 6.8 respectively are not considered to be IBCs. IBCs which meet the requirements of this Chapter are not considered to be containers for the purposes of RID. The letters IBC only will be used in the rest of the text to refer to intermediate bulk containers. 6.5.1.1.2 The requirements for IBCs in 6.5.3 are based on IBCs currently in use. In order to take into account progress in science and technology, there is no objection to the use of IBCs having specifications different from those in 6.5.3 and 6.5.5, provided that they are equally effective, acceptable to the competent authority and able to successfully fulfil the requirements described in 6.5.4 and 6.5.6. Methods of inspection and testing other than those described in RID are acceptable, provided they are equivalent, and are recognized by the competent authority. 6.5.1.1.3 The construction, equipment, testing, marking and operation of IBCs shall be subject to acceptance by the competent authority of the country in which the IBCs are approved. NOTE: Parties performing inspections and tests in other countries, after the IBC has been put into service, need not be accepted by the competent authority of the country in which the IBC has been approved, but the inspections and tests have to be performed according to the rules specified in the IBC’s approval. 6.5.1.1.4 Manufacturers and subsequent distributors of IBCs shall provide information regarding procedures to be followed and a description of the types and dimensions of closures (including required gaskets) and any other components needed to ensure that IBCs as presented for carriage are capable of passing the applicable performance tests of this Chapter. 6.5.1.2 (Reserved) 6.5.1.3 (Reserved) 6.5.1.4 Designatory code system for IBCs 6.5.1.4.1 The code shall consist of two Arabic numerals as specified in (a), followed by a capital letter(s) specified in (b), followed, when specified in an individual section, by an Arabic numeral indicating the category of IBC. (a) Type For solids, filled or discharged For liquids by gravity under pressure of more than 10 kPa (0.1 bar) Rigid Flexible 11 13 21 – 31 – (b) Materials A. Steel (all types and surface treatments) B. Aluminium C. Natural wood D. Plywood F. Reconstituted wood G. Fibreboard H. Plastics material L. Textile M. Paper, multiwall N. Metal (other than steel or aluminium). 6.5.1.4.2 For composite IBCs, two capital letters in Latin characters shall be used in sequence in the second position of the code. The first shall indicate the material of the inner receptacle of the IBC and the second that of the outer packaging of the IBC. 6.5.1.4.3 The following types and codes of IBC are assigned: Material Category Code Sub-section Metal 6.5.5.1 A. Steel for solids, filled or discharged by gravity for solids, filled or discharged under pressure for liquids 11A 21A 31A B. Aluminium for solids, filled or discharged by gravity for solids, filled or discharged under pressure for liquids 11B 21B 31B N. Other than steel or aluminium for solids, filled or discharged by gravity for solids, filled or discharged under pressure for liquids 11N 21N 31N Flexible 6.5.5.2 H. Plastics woven plastics without coating or liner woven plastics, coated woven plastics with liner woven plastics, coated and with liner plastics film 13H1 13H2 13H3 13H4 13H5 L. Textile without coating or liner coated with liner coated and with liner 13L1 13L2 13L3 13L4 M. Paper multiwall multiwall, water resistant 13M1 13M2 H. Rigid plastics for solids, filled or discharged by gravity, fitted with structural equipment for solids, filled or discharged by gravity, freestanding for solids, filled or discharged under pressure, fitted with structural equipment for solids, filled or discharged under pressure, freestanding for liquids, fitted with structural equipment for liquids, freestanding 11H1 11H2 21H1 21H2 31H1 31H2 6.5.5.3 HZ. Composite with plastics inner receptacle a for solids, filled or discharged by gravity, with rigid plastics inner receptacle for solids, filled or discharged by gravity, with flexible plastics inner receptacle for solids, filled or discharged under pressure, with rigid plastics inner receptacle for solids, filled or discharged under pressure, with flexible plastics inner receptacle for liquids, with rigid plastics inner receptacle for liquids, with flexible plastics inner receptacle 11HZ1 11HZ2 21HZ1 21HZ2 31HZ1 31HZ2 6.5.5.4 G. Fibreboard for solids, filled or discharged by gravity 11G 6.5.5.5 Wooden 6.5.5.6 C. Natural wood for solids, filled or discharged by gravity with inner liner 11C D. Plywood for solids, filled or discharged by gravity, with inner liner 11D F. Reconstituted wood for solids, filled or discharged by gravity, with inner liner 11F a The code shall be completed by replacing the letter Z by a capital letter in accordance with 6.5.1.4.1 (b) to indicate the nature of the material used for the outer casing. 6.5.1.4.4 The letter "W" may follow the IBC code. The letter "W" signifies that the IBC, although of the same type indicated by the code, is manufactured to a specification different from those in 6.5.5 and is considered equivalent in accordance with the requirements in 6.5.1.1.2. 6.5.2 Marking 6.5.2.1 Primary marking 6.5.2.1.1 Each IBC manufactured and intended for use according to RID shall bear marks which are durable, legible and placed in a location so as to be readily visible. Letters, numerals and symbols shall be at least 12 mm high and shall show: (a) The United Nations packaging symbol: . This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or an MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.11. For metal IBCs on which the marks are stamped or embossed, the capital letters "UN" may be applied instead of the symbol; (b) The code designating the type of IBC according to 6.5.1.4; (c) A capital letter designating the packing group(s) for which the design type has been approved: (i) X for packing groups I, II and III (IBCs for solids only); (ii) Y for packing groups II and III; (iii) Z for packing group III only; (d) The month and year (last two digits) of manufacture; (e) The State authorizing the allocation of the mark; indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic ; (f) The name or symbol of the manufacturer and other identification of the IBC as specified by the competent authority; (g) The stacking test load in kg. For IBCs not designed for stacking, the figure "0" shall be shown; (h) The maximum permissible gross mass in kg. The primary marks required above shall be applied in the sequence of the subparagraphs above. The marks required by 6.5.2.2 and any further mark authorized by a competent authority shall still enable the primary marks to be correctly identified. Each mark applied in accordance with (a) to (h) and with 6.5.2.2 shall be clearly separated, e.g. by a slash or space, so as to be easily identifiable. 6.5.2.1.2 IBCs manufactured from recycled plastics material as defined in 1.2.1 shall be marked "REC". For rigid IBCs this mark shall be placed near the marks prescribed in 6.5.2.1.1. For the inner receptacle of composite IBCs, this mark shall be placed near the marks prescribed in 6.5.2.2.4. 6.5.2.1.3 Examples of marking for various types of IBC in accordance with 6.5.2.1.1 (a) to (h) above: 11A/Y/0299 NL/Mulder 007/5500/1500 For a metal IBC for solids discharged by gravity and made from steel / for packing groups II and III / manufactured in February 1999 / authorized by the Netherlands / manufactured by Mulder and of a design type to which the competent authority has allocated serial number 007 / the stacking test load in kg / the maximum permissible gross mass in kg. 13H3/Z/0301 F/Meunier 1713/0/1500 For a flexible IBC for solids discharged for instance by gravity and made from woven plastics with a liner/not designed to be stacked. 31H1/Y/0499 GB/9099/10800/1200 For a rigid plastics IBC for liquids made from plastics with structural equipment withstanding the stack load. 31HA1/Y/0501 D/Müller/1683/10800/1200 For a composite IBC for liquids with a rigid plastics inner receptacle and a steel outer casing. 11C/X/0102 S/Aurigny/9876/3000/910 For a wooden IBC for solids with an inner liner authorized for packing groups I, II and III solids. 6.5.2.1.4 Where an IBC conforms to one or more than one tested IBC design type, including one or more than one tested packaging or large packaging design type, the IBC may bear more than one mark to indicate the relevant performance test requirements that have been met. Where more than one mark appears on an IBC, the marks shall appear in close proximity to one another and each mark shall appear in its entirety. 6.5.2.2 Additional marking 6.5.2.2.1 Each IBC shall bear the marks required in 6.5.2.1 and, in addition, the following information which may appear on a corrosion-resistant plate permanently attached in a place readily accessible for inspection: Category of IBC Additional marks Metal Rigid plastics Composite Fibreboard Wooden Capacity in litres at 20 °C (a) x x x Tare mass in kg (a) x x x x x Test (gauge) pressure, in kPa or bar (a) , if applicable x x Maximum filling / discharge pressure in kPa or bar (a) , if applicable x x x Body material and its minimum thickness in mm x Date of last leakproofness test, if applicable (month and year) x x x Date of last inspection (month and year) x x x Serial number of the manufacturer x (a) The unit used shall be indicated. 6.5.2.2.2 The maximum permitted stacking load applicable shall be displayed on a symbol as shown in Figure 6.5.2.2.2.1 or Figure 6.5.2.2.2.2. The symbol shall be durable and clearly visible. Figure 6.5.2.2.2.1 Figure 6.5.2.2.2.2 IBCs capable of being stacked IBCs NOT capable of being stacked The minimum dimensions shall be 100 mm 100 mm. The letters and numbers indicating the mass shall be at least 12 mm high. The area within the printer’s marks indicated by the dimensional arrows shall be square. Where dimensions are not specified, all features shall be in approximate proportion to those shown. The mass marked above the symbol shall not exceed the load imposed during the design type test (see 6.5.6.6.4) divided by 1.8. 6.5.2.2.3 In addition to the marks required in 6.5.2.1, flexible IBCs may bear a pictogram indicating recommended lifting methods. 6.5.2.2.4 Inner receptacles that are of composite IBC design type shall be identified by the application of the marks indicated in 6.5.2.1.1 (b), (c), (d) where this date is that of the manufacture of the plastics inner receptacle, (e) and (f). The UN packaging symbol shall not be applied. The marks shall be applied in the sequence shown in 6.5.2.1.1. They shall be durable, legible and placed in a location so as to be readily accessible for inspection after assembling the inner receptacle in the outer casing. When the marks on the inner receptacle are not readily accessible for inspection due to the design of the outer casing, a duplicate of the required marks on the inner receptacle shall be placed on the outer casing preceded by the wording "Inner receptacle". This duplicate shall be durable, legible and placed in a location so as to be readily accessible for inspection. The date of the manufacture of the plastics inner receptacle may alternatively be marked on the inner receptacle adjacent to the remainder of the marks. In such a case, the date may be waived from the remainder of the marks. An example of an appropriate marking method is: NOTE 1: Other methods that provide the minimum required information in a durable, visible and legible form are also acceptable. 2: The date of manufacture of the inner receptacle may be different from the marked date of manufacture (see 6.5.2.1), repair (see 6.5.4.5.3) or remanufacture (see 6.5.2.4) of the composite IBC. 6.5.2.2.5 Where a composite IBCs is designed in such a manner that the outer casing is intended to be dismantled for carriage when empty (such as for return of the IBC for reuse to the original consignor), each of the parts intended to be detached when so dismantled shall be marked with the month and year of manufacture and the name or symbol of the manufacturer and other identification of the IBC as specified by the competent authority (see 6.5.2.1.1 (f)). 6.5.2.3 Conformity to design type The marks indicate that IBCs correspond to a successfully tested design type and that the requirements referred to in the certificate have been met. 6.5.2.4 Marking of remanufactured composite IBCs (31HZ1) The marks specified in 6.5.2.1.1 and 6.5.2.2 shall be removed from the original IBC or made permanently illegible and new marks shall be applied to an IBC remanufactured in accordance with RID. 6.5.3 Construction requirements 6.5.3.1 General requirements 6.5.3.1.1 IBCs shall be resistant to or adequately protected from deterioration due to the external environment. 6.5.3.1.2 IBCs shall be so constructed and closed that none of the contents can escape under normal conditions of carriage including the effect of vibration, or by changes in temperature, humidity or pressure. 6.5.3.1.3 IBCs and their closures shall be constructed of materials compatible with their contents, or be protected internally, so that they are not liable: (a) To be attacked by the contents so as to make their use dangerous; (b) To cause the contents to react or decompose, or form harmful or dangerous compounds with the IBCs. 6.5.3.1.4 Gaskets, where used, shall be made of materials not subject to attack by the contents of the IBCs. 6.5.3.1.5 All service equipment shall be so positioned or protected as to minimize the risk of escape of the contents owing to damage during handling and carriage. 6.5.3.1.6 IBCs, their attachments and their service and structural equipment shall be designed to withstand, without loss of contents, the internal pressure of the contents and the stresses of normal handling and carriage. IBCs intended for stacking shall be designed for stacking. Any lifting or securing features of IBCs shall be of sufficient strength to withstand the normal conditions of handling and carriage without gross distortion or failure and shall be so positioned that no undue stress is caused in any part of the IBC. 6.5.3.1.7 Where an IBC consists of a body within a framework it shall be so constructed that: (a) The body does not chafe or rub against the framework so as to cause material damage to the body; (b) The body is retained within the framework at all times; (c) The items of equipment are fixed in such a way that they cannot be damaged if the connections between body and frame allow relative expansion or movement. 6.5.3.1.8 Where a bottom discharge valve is fitted, it shall be capable of being made secure in the closed position and the whole discharge system shall be suitably protected from damage. Valves having lever closures shall be able to be secured against accidental opening and the open or closed position shall be readily apparent. For IBCs containing liquids, a secondary means of sealing the discharge aperture shall also be provided, e.g. a blank flange or equivalent device. 6.5.4 Testing, certification and inspection 6.5.4.1 Quality assurance: the IBCs shall be manufactured , remanufactured, repaired and tested under a quality assurance programme which satisfies the competent authority, in order to ensure that each manufactured , remanufactured or repaired IBC meets the requirements of this Chapter. NOTE: ISO 16106: 2020 "Transport packages for dangerous goods – Dangerous goods packagings, intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) and large packagings – Guidelines for the application of ISO 9001" provides acceptable guidance on procedures which may be followed. 6.5.4.2 Test requirements: IBCs shall be subject to design type tests and, if applicable, to initial and periodic inspections and tests in accordance with 6.5.4.4. 6.5.4.3 Certification: in respect of each design type of IBC a certificate and mark (as in 6.5.2) shall be issued attesting that the design type, including its equipment, meets the test requirements. 6.5.4.4 Inspection and testing NOTE: See also 6.5.4.5 for tests and inspections on repaired IBCs. 6.5.4.4.1 Every metal, rigid plastics and composite IBC shall be inspected to the satisfaction of the competent authority (a) before it is put into service (including after remanufactured) , and thereafter at intervals not exceeding five years, with regard to: (i) conformity to design type including marks; (ii) internal and external condition; (iii) proper functioning of service equipment. Thermal insulation, if any, need be removed only to the extent necessary for a proper examination of the body of the IBC. (b) at intervals of not more than two and a half years, with regard to: (i) external condition; (ii) proper functioning of service equipment. Thermal insulation, if any, need be removed only to the extent necessary for a proper examination of the body of the IBC. Each IBC shall correspond in all respects to its design type. 6.5.4.4.2 Every metal, rigid plastics and composite IBC for liquids, or for solids which are filled or discharged under pressure, shall undergo a suitable leakproofness test. This test is part of a quality assurance programme as stipulated in 6.5.4.1 which shows the capability of meeting the appropriate test level indicated in 6.5.6.7.3: (a) before it is first used for carriage; (b) at intervals of not more than two and a half years. For this test the IBC shall be fitted with the primary bottom closure. The inner receptacle of a composite IBC may be tested without the outer casing, provided that the test results are not affected. 6.5.4.4.3 A report of each inspection and test shall be kept by the owner of the IBC at least until the next inspection or test. The report shall include the results of the inspection and test and shall identify the party performing the inspection and test (see also the marking requirements in 6.5.2.2.1). 6.5.4.4.4 The competent authority may at any time require proof, by tests in accordance with this Chapter, that IBCs meet the requirements of the design type tests. 6.5.4.5 Repaired IBCs 6.5.4.5.1 When an IBC is impaired as a result of impact (e.g. accident) or any other cause, it shall be repaired or otherwise maintained (see definition of "Routine maintenance of IBCs" in 1.2.1), so as to conform to the design type. The bodies of rigid plastics IBCs and the inner receptacles of composite IBCs that are impaired shall be replaced. 6.5.4.5.2 In addition to any other testing and inspection requirements in RID, an IBC shall be subjected to the full testing and inspection requirements set out in 6.5.4.4, and the required reports shall be prepared, whenever it is repaired. 6.5.4.5.3 The party performing the tests and inspections after the repair shall durably mark the IBC near the manufacturer's UN design type marks to show: (a) the State in which the tests and inspections were carried out; (b) the name or authorized symbol of the party performing the tests and inspections; and (c) the date (month, year) of the tests and inspections. 6.5.4.5.4 Test and inspections performed in accordance with 6.5.4.5.2 may be considered to satisfy the requirements for the two and a half and five year periodic tests and inspections. 6.5.5 Specific requirements for IBCs 6.5.5.1 Specific requirements for metal IBCs 6.5.5.1.1 These requirements apply to metal IBCs intended for the carriage of solids and liquids. There are three categories of metal IBCs: (a) those for solids which are filled or discharged by gravity (11A, 11B, 11N); (b) those for solids which are filled or discharged at a gauge pressure greater than 10 kPa (0.1 bar) (21A, 21B, 21N); and (c) those for liquids (31A, 31B, 31N). 6.5.5.1.2 Bodies shall be made of suitable ductile metal in which the weldability has been fully demonstrated. Welds shall be skilfully made and afford complete safety. Low-temperature performance of the material shall be taken into account when appropriate. 6.5.5.1.3 Care shall be taken to avoid damage by galvanic action due to the juxtaposition of dissimilar metals. 6.5.5.1.4 Aluminium IBCs intended for the carriage of flammable liquids shall have no movable parts, such as covers, closures, etc., made of unprotected steel liable to rust, which might cause a dangerous reaction by coming into frictional or percussive contact with the aluminium. 6.5.5.1.5 Metal IBCs shall be made of metals which meet the following requirements: (a) for steel the elongation at fracture, in %, shall not be less than with an absolute minimum of 20%; where Rm = guaranteed minimum tensile strength of the steel to be used, in N/mm 2 ; (b) for aluminium and its alloy the elongation at fracture, in %, shall not be less than with an absolute minimum of 8%. Specimens used to determine the elongation at fracture shall be taken transversely to the direction of rolling and be so secured that: L 0 = 5d or L 0 = 5,65 EQ \R (A) , where: L 0 = gauge length of the specimen before the test d = diameter A = cross-sectional area of test specimen. 6.5.5.1.6 Minimum wall thickness Metal IBCs with a capacity of more than 1500 litres shall comply with the following minimum wall thickness requirement: (a) for a reference steel having a product of Rm x A 0 = 10 000, the wall thickness shall not be less than: Wall thickness ( T ) in mm Types 11A, 11B, 11N Types 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B, 31N Unprotected Protected Unprotected Protected T = C/2000 + 1.5 T = C/2000 + 1.0 T = C/1000 + 1.0 T = C/2000 + 1.5 where: A 0 = minimum elongation (as a percentage) of the reference steel to be used on fracture under tensile stress (see 6.5.5.1.5); C = capacity in litres; (b) for metals other than the reference steel described in (a), the minimum wall thickness is given by the following equivalence formula: e 1 = where: e 1 = required equivalent wall thickness of the metal to be used (in mm); e 0 = required minimum wall thickness for the reference steel (in mm); Rm 1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength of the metal to be used (in N/mm 2 ) (see (c)); A 1 = minimum elongation (as a percentage) of the metal to be used on fracture under tensile stress (see 6.5.5.1.5). However, in no case shall the wall thickness be less than 1.5 mm. (c) For purposes of the calculation described in (b), the guaranteed minimum tensile strength of the metal to be used (Rm 1 ) shall be the minimum value according to national or international material standards. However, for austenitic steels, the specified value for Rm according to the material standards may be increased by up to 15% when a greater value is attested in the material inspection certificate. When no material standard exists for the material in question, the value of Rm shall be the minimum value attested in the material inspection certificate. 6.5.5.1.7 Pressure-relief requirements: IBCs for liquids shall be capable of releasing a sufficient amount of vapour in the event of fire engulfment to ensure that no rupture of the body will occur. This can be achieved by conventional pressure relief devices or by other constructional means. The start-to-discharge pressure shall not be higher than 65 kPa (0.65 bar) and no lower than the total gauge pressure experienced in the IBC (i.e. the vapour pressure of the filling substance plus the partial pressure of the air or other inert gases, minus 100 kPa (1 bar)) at 55 °C, determined on the basis of a maximum degree of filling as defined in 4.1.1.4. The required relief devices shall be fitted in the vapour space. 6.5.5.2 Specific requirements for flexible IBCs 6.5.5.2.1 These requirements apply to flexible IBCs of the following types: 13H1 woven plastics without coating or liner 13H2 woven plastics, coated 13H3 woven plastics with liner 13H4 woven plastics, coated and with liner 13H5 plastics film 13L1 textile without coating or liner 13L2 textile, coated 13L3 textile with liner 13L4 textile, coated and with liner 13M1 paper, multiwall 13M2 paper, multiwall, water resistant Flexible IBCs are intended for the carriage of solids only. 6.5.5.2.2 Bodies shall be manufactured from suitable materials. The strength of the material and the construction of the flexible IBC shall be appropriate to its capacity and its intended use. 6.5.5.2.3 All materials used in the construction of flexible IBCs of types 13M1 and 13M2 shall, after complete immersion in water for not less than 24 hours, retain at least 85% of the tensile strength as measured originally on the material conditioned to equilibrium at 67% relative humidity or less. 6.5.5.2.4 Seams shall be formed by stitching, heat sealing, gluing or any equivalent method. All stitched seam-ends shall be secured. 6.5.5.2.5 Flexible IBCs shall provide adequate resistance to ageing and to degradation caused by ultraviolet radiation or the climatic conditions, or by the substance contained, thereby rendering them appropriate to their intended use. 6.5.5.2.6 For flexible plastics IBCs where protection against ultraviolet radiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the body. Where use is made of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, re-testing may be waived if changes in the carbon black content, the pigment content or the inhibitor content do not adversely affect the physical properties of the material of construction. 6.5.5.2.7 Additives may be incorporated into the material of the body to improve the resistance to ageing or to serve other purposes, provided that these do not adversely affect the physical or chemical properties of the material. 6.5.5.2.8 No material recovered from used receptacles shall be used in the manufacture of IBC bodies. Production residues or scrap from the same manufacturing process may, however, be used. Component parts such as fittings and pallet bases may also be used provided such components have not in any way been damaged in previous use. 6.5.5.2.9 When filled, the ratio of height to width shall be not more than 2:1. 6.5.5.2.10 The liner shall be made of a suitable material. The strength of the material used and the construction of the liner shall be appropriate to the capacity of the IBC and the intended use. Joins and closures shall be siftproof and capable of withstanding pressures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of handling and carriage. 6.5.5.3 Specific requirements for rigid plastics IBCs 6.5.5.3.1 These requirements apply to rigid plastics IBCs for the carriage of solids or liquids. Rigid plastics IBCs are of the following types: 11H1 fitted with structural equipment designed to withstand the whole load when IBCs are stacked, for solids which are filled or discharged by gravity 11H2 freestanding, for solids which are filled or discharged by gravity 21H1 fitted with structural equipment designed to withstand the whole load when IBCs are stacked, for solids which are filled or discharged under pressure 21H2 freestanding, for solids which are filled or discharged under pressure 31H1 fitted with structural equipment designed to withstand the whole load when IBCs are stacked, for liquids 31H2 freestanding, for liquids. 6.5.5.3.2 The body shall be manufactured from suitable plastics material of known specifications and be of adequate strength in relation to its capacity and its intended use. Except for recycled plastics material as defined in 1.2.1, no used material other than production residues or regrind from the same manufacturing process may be used. The material shall be adequately resistant to ageing and to degradation caused by the substance contained or, where relevant, by ultraviolet radiation. Low temperature performance shall be taken into account when appropriate. Any permeation of the substance contained shall not constitute a danger under normal conditions of carriage. 6.5.5.3.3 Where protection against ultraviolet radiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the body. Where use is made of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, re-testing may be waived if changes in the carbon black content, the pigment content or the inhibitor content do not adversely affect the physical properties of the material of construction. 6.5.5.3.4 Additives may be incorporated in the material of the body to improve the resistance to ageing or to serve other purposes, provided that these do not adversely affect the physical or chemical properties of the material. 6.5.5.4 Specific requirements for composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacles 6.5.5.4.1 These requirements apply to composite IBCs for the carriage of solids and liquids of the following types: 11HZ1 Composite IBCs with a rigid plastics inner receptacle, for solids filled or discharged by gravity 11HZ2 Composite IBCs with a flexible plastics inner receptacle, for solids filled or discharged by gravity 21HZ1 Composite IBCs with a rigid plastics inner receptacle, for solids filled or discharged under pressure 21HZ2 Composite IBCs with a flexible plastics inner receptacle, for solids filled or discharged under pressure 31HZ1 Composite IBCs with a rigid plastics inner receptacle, for liquids 31HZ2 Composite IBCs with a flexible plastics inner receptacle, for liquids. This code shall be completed by replacing the letter Z by a capital letter in accordance with 6.5.1.4.1 (b) to indicate the nature of the material used for the outer casing. 6.5.5.4.2 The inner receptacle is not intended to perform a containment function without its outer casing. A "rigid" inner receptacle is a receptacle which retains its general shape when empty without closures in place and without benefit of the outer casing. Any inner receptacle that is not "rigid" is considered to be "flexible". 6.5.5.4.3 The outer casing normally consists of rigid material formed so as to protect the inner receptacle from physical damage during handling and carriage but is not intended to perform the containment function. It includes the base pallet where appropriate. 6.5.5.4.4 A composite IBC with a fully enclosing outer casing shall be so designed that the integrity of the inner receptacle may be readily assessed following the leakproofness and hydraulic pressure tests. 6.5.5.4.5 IBCs of type 31HZ2 shall be limited to a capacity of not more than 1 250 litres. 6.5.5.4.6 The inner receptacle shall be manufactured from suitable plastics material of known specifications and be of adequate strength in relation to its capacity and its intended use. Except for recycled plastics material as defined in 1.2.1, no used material other than production residues or regrind from the same manufacturing process may be used. The material shall be adequately resistant to ageing and to degradation caused by the substance contained or, where relevant, by ultraviolet radiation. Low temperature performance shall be taken into account when appropriate. Any permeation of the substance contained shall not constitute a danger under normal conditions of carriage. 6.5.5.4.7 Where protection against ultraviolet radiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the inner receptacle. Where use is made of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors, other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, retesting may be waived if changes in carbon black content, the pigment content or the inhibitor content do not adversely affect the physical properties of the material of construction. 6.5.5.4.8 Additives may be incorporated in the material of the inner receptacle to improve the resistance to ageing or to serve other purposes, provided that these do not adversely affect the physical or chemical properties of the material. 6.5.5.4.9 The inner receptacle of IBCs type 31HZ2 shall consist of at least three plies of film. 6.5.5.4.10 The strength of the material and the construction of the outer casing shall be appropriate to the capacity of the composite IBC and its intended use. 6.5.5.4.11 The outer casing shall be free of any projection that might damage the inner receptacle. 6.5.5.4.12 Metal outer casings shall be constructed of a suitable metal of adequate thickness. 6.5.5.4.13 Outer casings of natural wood shall be of well seasoned wood, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of any part of the casing. The tops and bottoms may be made of water resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type. 6.5.5.4.14 Outer casings of plywood shall be made of well seasoned rotary cut, sliced or sawn veneer, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of the casing. All adjacent plies shall be glued with water resistant adhesive. Other suitable materials may be used with plywood for the construction of casings. Casings shall be firmly nailed or secured to corner posts or ends or be assembled by equally suitable devices. 6.5.5.4.15 The walls of outer casings of reconstituted wood shall be made of water resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type. Other parts of the casings may be made of other suitable material. 6.5.5.4.16 For fibreboard outer casings, strong and good quality solid or double-faced corrugated fibreboard (single or multiwall) shall be used appropriate to the capacity of the casing and to its intended use. The water resistance of the outer surface shall be such that the increase in mass, as determined in a test carried out over 30 minutes by the Cobb method of determining water absorption, is not greater than 155 g/m 2 (see ISO 535:1991). It shall have proper bending qualities. Fibreboard shall be cut, creased without scoring, and slotted so as to permit assembly without cracking, surface breaks or undue bending. The fluting of corrugated fibreboard shall be firmly glued to the facings. 6.5.5.4.17 The ends of fibreboard outer casings may have a wooden frame or be entirely of wood. Reinforcements of wooden battens may be used. 6.5.5.4.18 Manufacturing joins in the fibreboard outer casing shall be taped, lapped and glued, or lapped and stitched with metal staples. Lapped joins shall have an appropriate overlap. Where closing is effected by gluing or taping, a water resistant adhesive shall be used. 6.5.5.4.19 Where the outer casing is of plastics material, the relevant requirements of 6.5.5.4.6 to 6.5.5.4.8 apply, on the understanding that, in this case, the requirements applicable to the inner receptacle are applicable to the outer casing of composite IBCs. 6.5.5.4.20 The outer casing of an IBC type 31HZ2 shall enclose the inner receptacle on all sides. 6.5.5.4.21 Any integral pallet base forming part of an IBC or any detachable pallet shall be suitable for mechanical handling with the IBC filled to its maximum permissible gross mass. 6.5.5.4.22 The pallet or integral base shall be designed so as to avoid any protrusion of the base of the IBC that might be liable to damage in handling. 6.5.5.4.23 The outer casing shall be secured to any detachable pallet to ensure stability in handling and carriage. Where a detachable pallet is used, its top surface shall be free from sharp protrusions that might damage the IBC. 6.5.5.4.24 Strengthening devices such as timber supports to increase stacking performance may be used but shall be external to the inner receptacle. 6.5.5.4.25 Where IBCs are intended for stacking, the bearing surface shall be such as to distribute the load in a safe manner. Such IBCs shall be designed so that the load is not supported by the inner receptacle. 6.5.5.5 Specific requirements for fibreboard IBCs 6.5.5.5.1 These requirements apply to fibreboard IBCs for the carriage of solids which are filled or discharged by gravity. Fibreboard IBCs are of the following type: 11G. 6.5.5.5.2 Fibreboard IBCs shall not incorporate top lifting devices. 6.5.5.5.3 The body shall be made of strong and good quality solid or double-faced corrugated fibreboard (single or multiwall), appropriate to the capacity of the IBC and to its intended use. The water resistance of the outer surface shall be such that the increase in mass, as determined in a test carried out over a period of 30 minutes by the Cobb method of determining water absorption, is not greater than 155 g/m 2 (see ISO 535:1991). It shall have proper bending qualities. Fibreboard shall be cut, creased without scoring, and slotted so as to permit assembly without cracking, surface breaks or undue bending. The fluting or corrugated fibreboard shall be firmly glued to the facings. 6.5.5.5.4 The walls, including top and bottom, shall have a minimum puncture resistance of 15 J measured according to ISO 3036:1975. 6.5.5.5.5 Manufacturing joins in the body of IBCs shall be made with an appropriate overlap and shall be taped, glued, stitched with metal staples or fastened by other means at least equally effective. Where joins are effected by gluing or taping, a water resistant adhesive shall be used. Metal staples shall pass completely through all pieces to be fastened and be formed or protected so that any inner liner cannot be abraded or punctured by them. 6.5.5.5.6 The liner shall be made of a suitable material. The strength of the material used and the construction of the liner shall be appropriate to the capacity of the IBC and the intended use. Joins and closures shall be siftproof and capable of withstanding pressures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of handling and carriage. 6.5.5.5.7 Any integral pallet base forming part of an IBC or any detachable pallet shall be suitable for mechanical handling with the IBC filled to its maximum permissible gross mass. 6.5.5.5.8 The pallet or integral base shall be designed so as to avoid any protrusion of the base of the IBC that might be liable to damage in handling. 6.5.5.5.9 The body shall be secured to any detachable pallet to ensure stability in handling and carriage. Where a detachable pallet is used, its top surface shall be free from sharp protrusions that might damage the IBC. 6.5.5.5.10 Strengthening devices such as timber supports to increase stacking performance may be used but shall be external to the liner. 6.5.5.5.11 Where IBCs are intended for stacking, the bearing surface shall be such as to distribute the load in a safe manner. 6.5.5.6 Specific requirements for wooden IBCs 6.5.5.6.1 These requirements apply to wooden IBCs for the carriage of solids which are filled or discharged by gravity. Wooden IBCs are of the following types: 11C Natural wood with inner liner 11D Plywood with inner liner 11F Reconstituted wood with inner liner. 6.5.5.6.2 Wooden IBCs shall not incorporate top lifting devices. 6.5.5.6.3 The strength of the materials used and the method of construction of the body shall be appropriate to the capacity and intended use of the IBC. 6.5.5.6.4 Natural wood shall be well seasoned, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of any part of the IBC. Each part of the IBC shall consist of one piece or be equivalent thereto. Parts are considered equivalent to one piece when a suitable method of glued assembly is used (as for instance Lindermann joint, tongue and groove joint, ship lap or rabbet joint); or butt joint with at least two corrugated metal fasteners at each joint, or when other methods at least equally effective are used. 6.5.5.6.5 Bodies of plywood shall be at least 3-ply. They shall be made of well seasoned rotary cut, sliced or sawn veneer, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of the body. All adjacent plies shall be glued with water resistant adhesive. Other suitable materials may be used with plywood for the construction of the body. 6.5.5.6.6 Bodies of reconstituted wood shall be made of water resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type. 6.5.5.6.7 IBCs shall be firmly nailed or secured to corner posts or ends or be assembled by equally suitable devices. 6.5.5.6.8 The liner shall be made of a suitable material. The strength of the material used and the construction of the liner shall be appropriate to the capacity of the IBC and the intended use. Joins and closures shall be siftproof and capable of withstanding pressures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of handling and carriage. 6.5.5.6.9 Any integral pallet base forming part of an IBC or any detachable pallet shall be suitable for mechanical handling with the IBC filled to its maximum permissible gross mass. 6.5.5.6.10 The pallet or integral base shall be designed so as to avoid any protrusion of the base of the IBC that might be liable to damage in handling. 6.5.5.6.11 The body shall be secured to any detachable pallet to ensure stability in handling and carriage. Where a detachable pallet is used, its top surface shall be free from sharp protrusions that might damage the IBC. 6.5.5.6.12 Strengthening devices such as timber supports to increase stacking performance may be used but shall be external to the liner. 6.5.5.6.13 Where IBCs are intended for stacking, the bearing surface shall be such as to distribute the load in a safe manner. 6.5.6 Test requirements for IBCs 6.5.6.1 Performance and frequency of tests 6.5.6.1.1 Each IBC design type shall successfully pass the tests prescribed in this Chapter before being used and being approved by the competent authority allowing the allocation of the mark. An IBC design type is defined by the design, size, material and thickness, manner of construction and means of filling and discharging but may include various surface treatments. It also includes IBCs which differ from the design type only in their lesser external dimensions. 6.5.6.1.2 Tests shall be carried out on IBCs prepared for carriage. IBCs shall be filled as indicated in the relevant sections. The substances to be carried in the IBCs may be replaced by other substances except where this would invalidate the results of the tests. For solids, when another substance is used it shall have the same physical characteristics (mass, grain size, etc.) as the substance to be carried. It is permissible to use additives, such as bags of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total package mass, so long as they are placed so that the test results are not affected. 6.5.6.2 Design type tests 6.5.6.2.1 One IBC of each design type, size, wall thickness and manner of construction shall be submitted to the tests listed in the order shown in 6.5.6.3.7 and as set out in 6.5.6.4 to 6.5.6.13. These design type tests shall be carried out as required by the competent authority. 6.5.6.2.2 To prove sufficient chemical compatibility with the contained goods or standard liquids in accordance with 6.5.6.3.3 or 6.5.6.3.5 for rigid plastics IBCs of type 31H2 and for composite IBCs of types 31HH1 and 31HH2, a second IBC may be used when the IBCs are designed to be stacked. In such case both IBCs shall be subjected to a preliminary storage. 6.5.6.2.3 The competent authority may permit the selective testing of IBCs which differ only in minor respects from a tested type, e.g. with small reductions in external dimensions. 6.5.6.2.4 If detachable pallets are used in the tests, the test report issued in accordance with 6.5.6.14 shall include a technical description of the pallets used. 6.5.6.3 Preparation of IBCs for testing 6.5.6.3.1 Paper and fibreboard IBCs and composite IBCs with fibreboard outer casings shall be conditioned for at least 24 hours in an atmosphere having a controlled temperature and relative humidity (r.h.). There are three options, one of which shall be chosen. The preferred atmosphere is 23 °C 2 °C and 50% 2% r.h. The two other options are 20 °C 2 °C and 65% 2% r.h.; or 27 °C 2 °C and 65% 2% r.h. NOTE: Average values shall fall within these limits. Short-term fluctuations and measurement limitations may cause individual measurements to vary by up to 5% relative humidity without significant impairment of test reproducibility. 6.5.6.3.2 Additional steps shall be taken to ascertain that the plastics material used in the manufacture of rigid plastics IBCs (types 31H1 and 31H2) and composite IBCs (types 31HZ1 and 31HZ2) complies respectively with the requirements in 6.5.5.3.2 to 6.5.5.3.4 and 6.5.5.4.6 to 6.5.5.4.8. 6.5.6.3.3 To prove there is sufficient chemical compatibility with the contained goods, the sample IBC shall be subjected to a preliminary storage for six months, during which the samples shall remain filled with the substances they are intended to contain or with substances which are known to have at least as severe a stress-cracking, weakening or molecular degradation influence on the plastics materials in question, and after which the samples shall be submitted to the applicable tests listed in the table in 6.5.6.3.7 . 6.5.6.3.4 Where the satisfactory behaviour of the plastics material has been established by other means, the above compatibility test may be dispensed with. Such procedures shall be at least equivalent to the above compatibility test and recognized by the competent authority. 6.5.6.3.5 For polyethylene rigid plastics IBCs (types 31H1 and 31H2) in accordance with 6.5.5.3 and composite IBCs with polyethylene inner receptacle (types 31HZ1 and 31HZ2) in accordance with 6.5.5.4, chemical compatibility with filling liquids assimilated in accordance with 4.1.1.21 may be verified as follows with standard liquids (see 6.1.6). The standard liquids are representative for the processes of deterioration on polyethylene, as there are softening through swelling, cracking under stress, molecular degradation and combinations thereof. The sufficient chemical compatibility of the IBCs may be verified by storage of the required test samples for three weeks at 40 °C with the appropriate standard liquid(s); where this standard liquid is water, storage in accordance with this procedure is not required. Storage is not required either for test samples which are used for the stacking test in case of the standard liquids wetting solution and acetic acid. After this storage, the test samples shall undergo the tests prescribed in 6.5.6.4 to 6.5.6.9. The compatibility test for tert-Butyl hydroperoxide with more than 40% peroxide content and peroxyacetic acids of Class 5.2 shall not be carried out using standard liquids. For these substances, sufficient chemical compatibility of the test samples shall be verified during a storage period of six months at ambient temperature with the substances they are intended to carry. Results of the procedure in accordance with this paragraph from polyethylene IBCs can be approved for an equal design type, the internal surface of which is fluorinated. 6.5.6.3.6 For IBC design types, made of polyethylene, as specified in 6.5.6.3.5, which have passed the test in 6.5.6.3.5, the chemical compatibility with filling substances may also be verified by laboratory tests proving that the effect of such filling substances on the test specimens is less than that of the appropriate standard liquid(s) taking into account the relevant processes of deterioration. The same conditions as those set out in 4.1.1. 21 .2 shall apply with respect to relative density and vapour pressure. 6.5.6.3.7 Design type tests required and sequential order Type of IBC Vibration (f) Bottom lift Top lift (a) Stacking (b) Leak- proofness Hydraulic pressure Drop Tear Topple Righting (c) Metal: 11A, 11B, 11N – 1st (a) 2nd 3rd – – 4th (e) – – – 21A, 21B, 21N – 1st (a) 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th (e) – – – 31A, 31B, 31N 1st 2nd (a) 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th (e) – – – Flexible (d) – – x (c) x – – x x x x Rigid plastics: 11H1, 11H2 – 1st (a) 2nd 3rd – – 4th – – – 21H1, 21H2 – 1st (a) 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th – – – Type of IBC Vibration (f) Bottom lift Top lift (a) Stacking (b) Leak- proofness Hydraulic pressure Drop Tear Topple Righting (c) 31H1, 31H2 1st 2nd (a) 3rd 4th (g) 5th 6th 7th – – – Composite: 11HZ1, 11HZ2 – 1st (a) 2nd 3rd – – 4th (e) – – – 21HZ1, 21HZ2 – 1st (a) 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th (e) – – – 31HZ1, 31HZ2 1st 2nd (a) 3rd 4th (g) 5th 6th 7th (e) – – – Fibreboard – 1st – 2nd – – 3rd – – – Wooden – 1st – 2nd – – 3rd – – – (a) When IBCs are designed for this method of handling. (b) When IBCs are designed to be stacked. (c) When IBCs are designed to be lifted from the top or the side. (d) Required test indicated by x; an IBC which has passed one test may be used for other tests, in any order. (e) Another IBC of the same design may be used for the drop test. (f) Another IBC of the same design may be used for the vibration test. (g) The second IBC in accordance with 6.5.6.2.2 can be used out of the sequential order direct after the preliminary storage. 6.5.6.4 Bottom lift test 6.5.6.4.1 Applicability For all fibreboard and wooden IBCs, and for all types of IBC which are fitted with means of lifting from the base, as a design type test. 6.5.6.4.2 Preparation of the IBC for test The IBC shall be filled. A load shall be added and evenly distributed. The mass of the filled IBC and the load shall be 1.25 times the maximum permissible gross mass. 6.5.6.4.3 Method of testing The IBC shall be raised and lowered twice by a lift truck with the forks centrally positioned and spaced at three quarters of the dimension of the side of entry (unless the points of entry are fixed). The forks shall penetrate to three quarters of the direction of entry. The test shall be repeated from each possible direction of entry. 6.5.6.4.4 Criteria for passing the test No permanent deformation which renders the IBC, including the base pallet, if any, unsafe for carriage and no loss of contents. 6.5.6.5 Top lift test 6.5.6.5.1 Applicability For all types of IBC which are designed to be lifted from the top and for flexible IBCs designed to be lifted from the top or the side, as a design type test. 6.5.6.5.2 Preparation of the IBC for test Metal, rigid plastics and composite IBCs shall be filled. A load shall be added and evenly distributed. The mass of the filled IBC and the load shall be twice the maximum permissible gross mass. Flexible IBCs shall be filled with a representative material and then shall be loaded to six times their maximum permissible gross mass, the load being evenly distributed. 6.5.6.5.3 Methods of testing Metal and flexible IBCs shall be lifted in the manner for which they are designed until clear of the floor and maintained in that position for a period of five minutes. Rigid plastics and composite IBCs shall be lifted: (a) by each pair of diagonally opposite lifting devices, so that the hoisting forces are applied vertically, for a period of five minutes; and (b) by each pair of diagonally opposite lifting devices, so that the hoisting forces are applied toward the centre at 45º to the vertical, for a period of five minutes. 6.5.6.5.4 Other methods of top lift testing and preparation at least equally effective may be used for flexible IBCs. 6.5.6.5.5 Criteria for passing the test (a) Metal, rigid plastics and composite IBCs: the IBC remains safe for normal conditions of carriage, there is no observable permanent deformation of the IBC, including the base pallet, if any, and no loss of contents; (b) Flexible IBCs: no damage to the IBC or its lifting devices which renders the IBC unsafe for carriage or handling and no loss of contents. 6.5.6.6 Stacking test 6.5.6.6.1 Applicability For all types of IBC which are designed to be stacked on each other, as a design type test. 6.5.6.6.2 Preparation of the IBC for test The IBC shall be filled to its maximum permissible gross mass. If the specific gravity of the product being used for testing makes this impracticable, the IBC shall additionally be loaded so that it is tested at its maximum permissible gross mass the load being evenly distributed. 6.5.6.6.3 Method of testing (a) The IBC shall be placed on its base on level hard ground and subjected to a uniformly distributed superimposed test load (see 6.5.6.6.4). For rigid plastics IBCs of type 31H2 and composite IBCs of types 31HH1 and 31HH2, a stacking test shall be carried out with the original filling substance or a standard liquid (see 6.1.6) in accordance with 6.5.6.3.3 or 6.5.6.3.5 using the second IBC in accordance with 6.5.6.2.2 after the preliminary storage. IBCs shall be subjected to the test load for a period of at least: (i) 5 minutes, for metal IBCs; (ii) 28 days at 40 ºC, for rigid plastics IBCs of types 11H2, 21H2 and 31H2 and for composite IBCs with outer casings of plastics material which bear the stacking load (i.e., types 11HH1, 11HH2, 21HH1, 21HH2, 31HH1 and 31HH2); (iii) 24 hours, for all other types of IBCs; (b) The load shall be applied by one of the following methods: (i) one or more IBCs of the same type filled to the maximum permissible gross mass stacked on the test IBC; (ii) appropriate weights loaded on to either a flat plate or a reproduction of the base of the IBC, which is stacked on the test IBC. 6.5.6.6.4 Calculation of superimposed test load The load to be placed on the IBC shall be 1.8 times the combined maximum permissible gross mass of the number of similar IBCs that may be stacked on top of the IBC during carriage. 6.5.6.6.5 Criteria for passing the test (a) All types of IBCs other than flexible IBCs: no permanent deformation which renders the IBC including the base pallet, if any, unsafe for carriage and no loss of contents. (b) Flexible IBCs: no deterioration of the body which renders the IBC unsafe for carriage and no loss of contents. 6.5.6.7 Leakproofness test 6.5.6.7.1 Applicability For those types of IBC used for liquids or for solids filled or discharged under pressure, as a design type test and periodic test. 6.5.6.7.2 Preparation of the IBC for test The test shall be carried out before the fitting of any thermal insulation equipment. Vented closures shall either be replaced by similar non-vented closures or the vent shall be sealed. 6.5.6.7.3 Method of testing and pressure to be applied The test shall be carried out for a period of at least 10 minutes using air at a gauge pressure of not less than 20 kPa (0.2 bar). The air tightness of the IBC shall be determined by a suitable method such as by air-pressure differential test or by immersing the IBC in water or, for metal IBCs, by coating the seams and joints with a soap solution. In the case of immersing a correction factor shall be applied for the hydrostatic pressure. 6.5.6.7.4 Criterion for passing the test No leakage of air. 6.5.6.8 Internal pressure (hydraulic) test 6.5.6.8.1 Applicability For those types of IBCs used for liquids or for solids filled or discharged under pressure, as a design type test. 6.5.6.8.2 Preparation of the IBC for test The test shall be carried out before the fitting of any thermal insulation equipment. Pressure-relief devices shall be removed and their apertures plugged, or shall be rendered inoperative. 6.5.6.8.3 Method of testing The test shall be carried out for a period of at least 10 minutes applying a hydraulic pressure not less than that indicated in 6.5.6.8.4. The IBCs shall not be mechanically restrained during the test. 6.5.6.8.4 Pressures to be applied 6.5.6.8.4.1 Metal IBCs: (a) For IBCs of types 21A, 21B and 21N, for packing group I solids, a 250 kPa (2.5 bar) gauge pressure; (b) For IBCs of types 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N, for packing groups II or III substances, a 200 kPa (2 bar) gauge pressure; (c) In addition, for IBCs of types 31A, 31B and 31N, a 65kPa (0.65 bar) gauge pressure. This test shall be performed before the 200 kPa (2 bar) test. 6.5.6.8.4.2 Rigid plastics and composite IBCs: (a) For IBCs of types 21H1, 2lH2, 21HZ1 and 21HZ2: 75 kPa (0.75 bar) (gauge); (b) For IBCs of types 31H1, 31H2, 31HZ1 and 31HZ2: whichever is the greater of two values, the first as determined by one of the following methods: (i) the total gauge pressure measured in the IBC (i.e. the vapour pressure of the filling substance and the partial pressure of the air or other inert gases, minus 100 kPa) at 55 °C multiplied by a safety factor of 1.5; this total gauge pressure shall be determined on the basis of a maximum degree of filling in accordance with 4.1.1.4 and a filling temperature of 15 °C; (ii) 1.75 times the vapour pressure at 50 °C of the substance to be carried minus 100 kPa, but with a minimum test pressure of 100 kPa; (iii) 1.5 times the vapour pressure at 55 °C of the substance to be carried minus 100 kPa, but with a minimum test pressure of 100 kPa; and the second as determined by the following method: (iv) twice the static pressure of the substance to be carried, with a minimum of twice the static pressure of water; 6.5.6.8.5 Criteria for passing the test(s): (a) For IBCs of types 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N, when subjected to the test pressure specified in 6.5.6.8.4.1 (a) or (b): no leakage; (b) For IBCs of types 31A, 31B and 31N, when subjected to the test pressure specified in 6.5.6.8.4.1 (c): no permanent deformation which renders the IBC unsafe for carriage and no leakage; (c) For rigid plastics and composite IBCs: no permanent deformation which would render the IBC unsafe for carriage and no leakage. 6.5.6.9 Drop test 6.5.6.9.1 Applicability For all types of IBCs, as a design type test. 6.5.6.9.2 Preparation of the IBC for test (a) Metal IBCs: the IBC shall be filled to not less than 95% of its maximum capacity for solids or 98% of its maximum capacity for liquids. Pressure - relief devices shall be removed and their apertures plugged, or shall be rendered inoperative; (b) Flexible IBCs: the IBC shall be filled to the maximum permissible gross mass, the contents being evenly distributed ; (c) Rigid plastics and composite IBCs: the IBC shall be filled to not less than 95% of its maximum capacity for solids or 98% of its maximum capacity for liquids. Arrangements provided for pressure relief may be removed and plugged or rendered inoperative. Testing of IBCs shall be carried out when the temperature of the test sample and its contents has been reduced to minus 18 °C or lower. Where test samples of composite IBCs are prepared in this way the conditioning specified in 6.5.6.3.1 may be waived. Test liquids shall be kept in the liquid state, if necessary by the addition of anti-freeze. This conditioning may be disregarded if the materials in question are of sufficient ductility and tensile strength at low temperatures; (d) Fibreboard and wooden IBCs: The IBC shall be filled to not less than 95% of its maximum capacity. 6.5.6.9.3 Method of testing The IBC shall be dropped on its base onto a non-resilient, horizontal, flat, massive and rigid surface in conformity with the requirements of 6.1.5.3.4, in such a manner as to ensure that the point of impact is that part of the base of the IBC considered to be the most vulnerable. IBCs of 0.45 m 3 or less capacity shall also be dropped: (a) Metal IBCs: on the most vulnerable part other than the part of the base tested in the first drop; (b) Flexible IBCs: on the most vulnerable side; (c) Rigid plastics, composite, fibreboard and wooden IBCs: flat on a side, flat on the top and on a corner. The same IBC or a different IBC of the same design may be used for each drop. 6.5.6.9.4 Drop height For solids and liquids, if the test is performed with the solid or liquid to be carried or with another substance having essentially the same physical characteristics: Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III 1.8 m 1.2 m 0.8 m For liquids if the test is performed with water: (a) Where the substances to be carried have a relative density not exceeding 1.2: Packing group II Packing group III 1.2 m 0.8 m (b) Where the substances to be carried have a relative density exceeding 1.2, the drop heights shall be calculated on the basis of the relative density (d) of the substance to be carried rounded up to the first decimal as follows: Packing group II Packing group III d x 1.0 m d x 0.67 m 6.5.6.9.5 Criteria for passing the test(s): (a) Metal IBCs: no loss of contents; (b) Flexible IBCs: no loss of contents. A slight discharge, e.g. from closures or stitch holes, upon impact shall not be considered to be a failure of the IBC provided that no further leakage occurs after the IBC has been raised clear of the ground; (c) Rigid plastics, composite, fibreboard and wooden IBCs: no loss of contents. A slight discharge from a closure upon impact shall not be considered to be a failure of the IBC provided that no further leakage occurs; (d) All IBCs: no damage which renders the IBC unsafe to be carried for salvage or for disposal, and no loss of contents. In addition, the IBC shall be capable of being lifted by an appropriate means until clear of the floor for five minutes. NOTE: The criteria in (d) apply to design types for IBCs manufactured as from 1 January 2011. 6.5.6.10 Tear test 6.5.6.10.1 Applicability For all types of flexible IBCs, as a design type test. 6.5.6.10.2 Preparation of the IBC for test The IBC shall be filled to not less than 95% of its capacity and to its maximum permissible gross mass, the contents being evenly distributed. 6.5.6.10.3 Method of testing Once the IBC is placed on the ground, a 100 mm knife score, completely penetrating the wall of a wide face, is made at a 45° angle to the principal axis of the IBC, halfway between the bottom surface and the top level of the contents. The IBC shall then be subjected to a uniformly distributed superimposed load equivalent to twice the maximum permissible gross mass. The load shall be applied for at least five minutes. An IBC which is designed to be lifted from the top or the side shall then, after removal of the superimposed load, be lifted clear of the floor and maintained in that position for a period of five minutes. 6.5.6.10.4 Criteria for passing the test The cut shall not propagate more than 25% of its original length. 6.5.6.11 Topple test 6.5.6.11.1 Applicability For all types of flexible IBC, as a design type test. 6.5.6.11.2 Preparation of the IBC for test The IBC shall be filled to not less than 95% of its capacity and to its maximum permissible gross mass, the contents being evenly distributed. 6.5.6.11.3 Method of testing The IBC shall be caused to topple on to any part of its top on to a rigid, non-resilient, smooth, flat and horizontal surface. 6.5.6.11.4 Topple height Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III 1.8 m 1.2 m 0.8 m 6.5.6.11.5 Criteria for passing the test No loss of contents. A slight discharge, e.g. from closures or stitch holes, upon impact shall not be considered to be a failure of the IBC provided that no further leakage occurs. 6.5.6.12 Righting test 6.5.6.12.1 Applicability For all flexible IBCs designed to be lifted from the top or side, as a design type test. 6.5.6.12.2 Preparation of the IBC for test The IBC shall be filled to not less than 95% of its capacity and to its maximum permissible gross mass, the contents being evenly distributed. 6.5.6.12.3 Method of testing The IBC, lying on its side, shall be lifted at a speed of at least 0.1 m/s to upright position, clear of the floor, by one lifting device or by two lifting devices when four are provided. 6.5.6.12.4 Criteria for passing the test No damage to the IBC or its lifting devices which renders the IBC unsafe for carriage or handling. 6.5.6.13 Vibration test 6.5.6.13.1 Applicability For all IBCs used for liquids, as a design type test. NOTE: This test applies to design types for IBCs manufactured after 31 December 2010 (see also 1.6.1.14). 6.5.6.13.2 Preparation of the IBC for test A sample IBC shall be selected at random and shall be fitted and closed as for carriage. The IBC shall be filled with water to not less than 98% of its maximum capacity. 6.5.6.13.3 Test method and duration 6.5.6.13.3.1 The IBC shall be placed in the center of the test machine platform with a vertical sinusoidal, double amplitude (peak-to peak displacement) of 25 mm ± 5%. If necessary, restraining devices shall be attached to the platform to prevent the spec imen from moving horizontally off the platform without restricting vertical movement. 6.5.6.13.3.2 The test shall be conducted for one hour at a frequency that causes part of the base of the IBC to be momentarily raised from the vibrating platform for part of each cycle to such a degree that a metal shim can be completely inserted intermittently at, at least, one point between the base of the IBC and the test platform. The frequency may need to be adjusted after the initial set point to prevent the packaging from going into resonance. Nevertheless, the test frequency shall continue to allow placement of the metal shim under the IBC as described in this paragraph. The continuing ability to insert the metal shim is essential to passing the test. The metal shim used for this test shall be at least 1.6 mm thick, 50 mm wide, and be of sufficient length to be inserted between the IBC and the test platform a minimum of 100 mm to perform the test. 6.5.6.13.4 Criteria for passing the test No leakage or rupture shall be observed. In addition, no breakage or failure of structural components, such as broken welds or failed fastenings, shall be observed. 6.5.6.14 Test report 6.5.6.14.1 A test report containing at least the following particulars shall be drawn up and shall be made available to the users of the IBC: 1. Name and address of the test facility; 2. Name and address of applicant (where appropriate); 3. A unique test report identification; 4. Date of the test report; 5. Manufacturer of the IBC; 6. Description of the IBC design type (e.g. dimensions, materials, closures, thickness, etc.) including method of manufacture (e.g. blow moulding) and which may include drawing(s) and/or photograph(s); 7. Maximum capacity; 8. Characteristics of test contents, e.g. viscosity and relative density for liquids and particle size for solids. For rigid plastics and composite IBCs subject to the hydraulic pressure test in 6.5.6.8, the temperature of the water used; 9. Test descriptions and results; 10. The test report shall be signed with the name and status of the signatory. 6.5.6.14.2 The test report shall contain statements that the IBC prepared as for carriage was tested in accordance with the appropriate requirements of this Chapter and that the use of other packaging methods or components may render it invalid. A copy of the test report shall be available to the competent authority. Chapter 6.6 Requirements for the construction and testing of large packagings 6.6.1 General 6.6.1.1 The requirements of this Chapter do not apply to: (a) packagings for Class 2, except large packagings for articles, including aerosols; (b) packagings for Class 6.2, except large packagings for clinical waste of UN No. 3291; (c) Class 7 packages containing radioactive material. 6.6.1.2 Large packagings shall be manufactured , tested and remanufactured under a quality assurance programme which satisfies the competent authority in order to ensure that each manufactured or remanufactured large packaging meets the requirements of this Chapter. NOTE: ISO 16106: 2020 "Transport packages for dangerous goods – Dangerous goods packagings, intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) and large packagings – Guidelines for the application of ISO 9001" provides acceptable guidance on procedures which may be followed. 6.6.1.3 The specific requirements for large packagings in 6.6.4 are based on large packagings currently used. In order to take into account progress in science and technology, there is no objection to the use of large packagings having specifications different from those in 6.6.4 provided they are equally effective, acceptable to the competent authority and able to successfully fulfil the requirements described in 6.6.5. Methods of testing other than those described in RID are acceptable provided they are equivalent and are recognized by the competent authority. 6.6.1.4 Manufacturers and subsequent distributors of packagings shall provide information regarding procedures to be followed and a description of the types and dimensions of closures (including required gaskets) and any other components needed to ensure that packages as presented for carriage are capable of passing the applicable performance tests of this Chapter. 6.6.2 Code for designating types of large packagings 6.6.2.1 The code used for large packagings consist of: (a) Two Arabic numerals: 50 for rigid large packagings; or 51 for flexible large packagings; and (b) A capital letter in Latin character indicating the nature of the material, e.g. wood, steel etc. The capital letters used shall be those shown in 6.1.2.6. 6.6.2.2 The letters "T" or "W" may follow the Large Packaging code. The letter "T" signifies a large salvage packaging conforming to the requirements of 6.6.5.1.9. The letter "W" signifies that the large packaging, although of the same type indicated by the code, is manufactured to a specification different from those in 6.6.4 and is considered equivalent in accordance with the requirements in 6.6.1.3. 6.6.3 Marking 6.6.3.1 Primary marking Each large packaging manufactured and intended for use in accordance with the provisions of RID shall bear marks which are durable, legible and placed in a location so as to be readily visible. Letters, numerals and symbols shall be at least 12 mm high and shall show: (a) The United Nations packaging symbol . This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or an MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.11. For metal large packagings on which the marks are stamped or embossed, the capital letters "UN" may be applied instead of the symbol; (b) The number "50" designating a large rigid packaging or "51" for flexible large packagings, followed by the material type in accordance with 6.5.1.4.1 (b); (c) A capital letter designating the packing group(s) for which the design type has been approved: X for packing groups I, II and III Y for packing groups II and III Z for packing group III only; (d) The month and year (last two digits) of manufacture; (e) The State authorizing the allocation of the mark; indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic ; (f) The name or symbol of the manufacturer and other identification of the large packagings as specified by the competent authority; (g) The stacking test load in kg. For large packagings not designed for stacking the figure "0" shall be shown; (h) The maximum permissible gross mass in kilograms. The primary mark required above shall be applied in the sequence of the sub-paragraphs. Each mark applied in accordance with (a) to (h) shall be clearly separated, e.g. by a slash or space, so as to be easily identifiable. 6.6.3.2 Examples of marking 50A/X/0501/N/PQRS 2500/1000 For a large steel packaging suitable for stacking ; stacking load : 2500 kg; maximum gross mass : 1000 kg 50AT/Y/ 05/01 /B/PQRS 2500/1000 For a large steel salvage packaging suitable for stacking; stacking load: 2 500 kg; maximum gross mass: 1 000 kg 50H/Y/0402/D/ABCD 987 0/800 For a large plastics packaging not suitable for stacking ; maximum gross mass : 800 kg 51H/Z/0601/S/1999 0/500 For a large flexible packaging not suitable for stacking ; maximum gross mass : 500 kg 6.6.3.3 The maximum permitted stacking load applicable shall be displayed on a symbol as shown in Figure 6.6.3.3.1 or Figure 6.6.3.3.2. The symbol shall be durable and clearly visible. Figure 6.6.3.3.1 Figure 6.6.3.3.2 Large packagings capable of being stacked Large packagings NOT capable of being stacked The minimum dimensions shall be 100 mm 100 mm. The letters and numbers indicating the mass shall be at least 12 mm high. The area within the printer’s marks indicated by the dimensional arrows shall be square. Where dimensions are not specified, all features shall be in approximate proportion to those shown. The mass marked above the symbol shall not exceed the load imposed during the design type test (see 6.6.5.3.3.4) divided by 1.8. 6.6.3.4 Where a large packaging conforms to one or more than one tested large packaging design type, including one or more than one tested packaging or IBC design type, the large packaging may bear more than one mark to indicate the relevant performance test requirements that have been met. Where more than one mark appears on a large packaging, the marks shall appear in close proximity to one another and each mark shall appear in its entirety. 6.6.4 Specific requirements for large packagings 6.6.4.1 S pecific requirements for metal large packagings 50A steel 50B aluminium 50N metal (other than steel or aluminium) 6.6.4.1.1 The large packaging shall be made of suitable ductile metal in which the weldability has been fully demonstrated. Welds shall be skilfully made and afford complete safety. Low-temperature performance shall be taken into account when appropriate. 6.6.4.1.2 Care shall be taken to avoid damage by galvanic action due to the juxtaposition of dissimilar metals. 6.6.4.2 S pecific requirements for flexible material large packagings 51H flexible plastics 51M flexible paper 6.6.4.2.1 The large packaging shall be manufactured from suitable materials. The strength of the material and the construction of the flexible large packagings shall be appropriate to its capacity and its intended use. 6.6.4.2.2 All materials used in the construction of flexible large packagings of types 51M shall, after complete immersion in water for not less than 24 hours, retain at least 85% of the tensile strength as measured originally on the material conditioned to equilibrium at 67% relative humidity or less. 6.6.4.2.3 Seams shall be formed by stitching, heat sealing, glueing or any equivalent method. All stitched seam ends shall be secured. 6.6.4.2.4 Flexible large packagings shall provide adequate resistance to ageing and to degradation caused by ultraviolet radiation or the climatic conditions, or by the substance contained, thereby rendering them appropriate to their intended use. 6.6.4.2.5 For plastics flexible large packagings where protection against ultraviolet radiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the large packaging. Where use is made of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, re testing may be waived if changes in the carbon black content, the pigment content or the inhibitor content do not adversely affect the physical properties of the material of construction. 6.6.4.2.6 Additives may be incorporated into the material of the large packaging to improve the resistance to ageing or to serve other purposes, provided that these do not adversely affect the physical or chemical properties of the material. 6.6.4.2.7 When filled, the ratio of height to width shall be not more than 2:1. 6.6.4.3 S pecific requirements for plastics large packagings 50H rigid plastics 6.6.4.3.1 The large packaging shall be manufactured from suitable plastics material of known specifications and be of adequate strength in relation to its capacity and its intended use. The material shall be adequately resistant to ageing and to degradation caused by the substance contained or, where relevant, by ultraviolet radiation. Low temperature performance shall be taken into account when appropriate. Any permeation of the substance contained shall not constitute a danger under normal conditions of carriage. 6.6.4.3.2 Where protection against ultraviolet radiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the outer packaging. Where use is made of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, re testing may be waived if changes in the carbon black content, the pigment content or the inhibitor content do not adversely affect the physical properties of the material of construction. 6.6.4.3.3 Additives may be incorporated in the material of the large packaging to improve the resistance to ageing or to serve other purposes, provided that these do not adversely affect the physical or chemical properties of the material. 6.6.4.4 Specific requirements for fibreboard large packagings 50G rigid fibreboard 6.6.4.4.1 Strong and good quality solid or double faced corrugated fibreboard (single or multiwall) shall be used, appropriate to the capacity of the large packagings and to their intended use. The water resistance of the outer surface shall be such that the increase in mass, as determined in a test carried out over a period of 30 minutes by the Cobb method of determining water absorption, is not greater than 155 g/m 2 – see ISO 535:1991. It shall have proper bending qualities. Fibreboard shall be cut, creased without scoring, and slotted so as to permit assembly without cracking, surface breaks or undue bending. The fluting or corrugated fibreboard shall be firmly glued to the facings. 6.6.4.4.2 The walls, including top and bottom, shall have a minimum puncture resistance of 15 J measured according to ISO 3036:1975. 6.6.4.4.3 Manufacturing joins in the outer packaging of large packagings shall be made with an appropriate overlap and shall be taped, glued, stitched with metal staples or fastened by other means at least equally effective. Where joins are effected by gluing or taping, a water resistant adhesive shall be used. Metal staples shall pass completely through all pieces to be fastened and be formed or protected so that any inner liner cannot be abraded or punctured by them. 6.6.4.4.4 Any integral pallet base forming part of a large packaging or any detachable pallet shall be suitable for mechanical handling with the large packaging filled to its maximum permissible gross mass. 6.6.4.4.5 The pallet or integral base shall be designed so as to avoid any protrusion of the base of the large packaging that might be liable to damage in handling. 6.6.4.4.6 The body shall be secured to any detachable pallet to ensure stability in handling and carriage. Where a detachable pallet is used, its top surface shall be free from sharp protrusions that might damage the large packaging. 6.6.4.4.7 Strengthening devices such as timber supports to increase stacking performance may be used but shall be external to the liner. 6.6.4.4.8 Where large packagings are intended for stacking, the bearing surface shall be such as to distribute the load in a safe manner. 6.6.4.5 S pecific requirements for wooden large packagings 50C natural wood 50D plywood 50F reconstituted wood 6.6.4.5.1 The strength of the materials used and the method of construction shall be appropriate to the capacity and intended use of the large packagings. 6.6.4.5.2 Natural wood shall be well seasoned, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of any part of the large packagings. Each part of the large packagings shall consist of one piece or be equivalent thereto. Parts are considered equivalent to one piece when a suitable method of glued assembly is used as for instance Lindermann joint, tongue and groove joint, ship lap or rabbet joint; or butt joint with at least two corrugated metal fasteners at each joint, or when other methods at least equally effective are used. 6.6.4.5.3 Large packagings of plywood shall be at least 3 ply. They shall be made of well seasoned rotary cut, sliced or sawn veneer, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of the large packaging. All adjacent plies shall be glued with water resistant adhesive. Other suitable materials may be used with plywood for the construction of the large packaging. 6.6.4.5.4 Large packagings of reconstituted wood shall be made of water resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type. 6.6.4.5.5 Large packagings shall be firmly nailed or secured to corner posts or ends or be assembled by equally suitable devices. 6.6.4.5.6 Any integral pallet base forming part of a large packaging or any detachable pallet shall be suitable for mechanical handling with the large packaging filled to its maximum permissible gross mass. 6.6.4.5.7 The pallet or integral base shall be designed so as to avoid any protrusion of the base of the large packaging that might be liable to damage in handling. 6.6.4.5.8 The body shall be secured to any detachable pallet to ensure stability in handling and carriage. Where a detachable pallet is used, its top surface shall be free from sharp protrusions that might damage the large packaging. 6.6.4.5.9 Strengthening devices such as timber supports to increase stacking performance may be used but shall be external to the liner. 6.6.4.5.10 Where large packagings are intended for stacking, the bearing surface shall be such as to distribute the load in a safe manner. 6.6.5 Test requirements for large packagings 6.6.5.1 Performance and frequency of test 6.6.5.1.1 The design type of each large packaging shall be tested as provided in 6.6.5.3 in accordance with procedures established by the competent authority allowing the allocation of the mark and shall be approved by this competent authority . 6.6.5.1.2 Each large packaging design type shall successfully pass the tests prescribed in this Chapter before being used. A large packaging design type is defined by the design, size, material and thickness, manner of construction and packing, but may include various surface treatments. It also includes large packagings which differ from the design type only in their lesser design height. 6.6.5.1.3 Tests shall be repeated on production samples at intervals established by the competent authority. For such tests on fibreboard large packagings, preparation at ambient conditions is considered equivalent to the provisions of 6.6.5.2.4. 6.6.5.1.4 Tests shall also be repeated after each modification which alters the design, material or manner of construction of large packagings. 6.6.5.1.5 The competent authority may permit the selective testing of large packagings that differ only in minor respects from a tested type, e.g. smaller sizes of inner packagings or inner packagings of lower net mass; and large packagings which are produced with small reductions in external dimension(s). 6.6.5.1.6 (Reserved) NOTE: For the conditions for assembling different inner packagings in a large packaging and permissible variations in inner packagings, see 4.1.1.5.1. 6.6.5.1.7 The competent authority may at any time require proof, by tests in accordance with this section, that serially-produced large packagings meet the requirements of the design type tests. 6.6.5.1.8 Provided the validity of the test results is not affected and with the approval of the competent authority, several tests may be made on one sample. 6.6.5.1.9 Large salvage packagings Large salvage packagings shall be tested and marked in accordance with the provisions applicable to packing group II large packagings intended for the carriage of solids or inner packagings, except as follows: (a) The test substance used in performing the tests shall be water, and the large salvage packagings shall be filled to not less than 98% of their maximum capacity. It is permissible to use additives, such as bags of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total package mass so long as they are placed so that the test results are not affected. Alternatively, in performing the drop test, the drop height may be varied in accordance with 6.6.5.3.4.4.2 (b); (b) Large salvage packagings shall, in addition, have been successfully subjected to the leakproofness test at 30 kPa, with the results of this test reflected in the test report required by 6.6.5.4; and (c) Large salvage packagings shall be marked with the letter "T" as described in 6.6.2.2. 6.6.5.2 Preparation for testing 6.6.5.2.1 Tests shall be carried out on large packagings prepared as for carriage including the inner packagings or articles used. Inner packagings shall be filled to not less than 98% of their maximum capacity for liquids or 95% for solids. For large packagings where the inner packagings are designed to carry liquids and solids, separate testing is required for both liquid and solid contents. The substances in the inner packagings or the articles to be carried in the large packagings may be replaced by other material or articles except where this would invalidate the results of the tests. When other inner packagings or articles are used they shall have the same physical characteristics (mass, etc) as the inner packagings or articles to be carried. It is permissible to use additives, such as bags of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total package mass, so long as they are placed so that the test results are not affected. 6.6.5.2.2 In the drop tests for liquids, when another substance is used, it shall be of similar relative density and viscosity to those of the substance being carried. Water may also be used for the liquid drop test under the conditions in 6.6.5.3.4.4. 6.6.5.2.3 Large packagings made of plastics materials and large packagings containing inner packagings of plastic materials - other than bags intended to contain solids or articles - shall be drop tested when the temperature of the test sample and its contents has been reduced to –18 °C or lower. This conditioning may be disregarded if the materials in question are of sufficient ductility and tensile strength at low temperatures. Where test sample are prepared in this way, the conditioning in 6.6.5.2.4 may be waived. Test liquids shall be kept in the liquid state by the addition of anti-freeze if necessary. 6.6.5.2.4 Large packagings of fibreboard shall be conditioned for at least 24 hours in an atmosphere having a controlled temperature and relative humidity (r.h.). There are three options, one of which shall be chosen. The preferred atmosphere is 23 °C ± 2 °C and 50% ± 2% r.h. The two other options are: 20 °C ± 2 °C and 65% ± 2% r.h.; or 27 °C ± 2 °C and 65% ± 2% r.h. NOTE: Average values shall fall within these limits. Short term fluctuations and measurement limitations may cause individual measurements to vary by up to ± 5% relative humidity without significant impairment of test reproducibility. 6.6.5.3 Test requirements 6.6.5.3.1 Bottom lift test 6.6.5.3.1.1 Applicability For all types of large packagings which are fitted with means of lifting from the base, as a design type test. 6.6.5.3.1.2 Preparation of large packaging for test The large packaging shall be loaded to 1.25 times its maximum permissible gross mass, the load being evenly distributed. 6.6.5.3.1.3 Method of testing The large packaging shall be raised and lowered twice by a lift truck with the forks centrally positioned and spaced at three quarters of the dimension of the side of entry (unless the points of entry are fixed). The forks shall penetrate to three quarters of the direction of entry. The test shall be repeated from each possible direction of entry. 6.6.5.3.1.4 Criteria for passing the test No permanent deformation which renders the large packaging unsafe for carriage and no loss of contents. 6.6.5.3.2 Top lift test 6.6.5.3.2.1 Applicability For types of large packagings which are intended to be lifted from the top and fitted with means of lifting, as a design type test. 6.6.5.3.2.2 Preparation of large packaging for test The large packaging shall be loaded to twice its maximum permissible gross mass. A flexible large packaging shall be loaded to six times its maximum permissible gross mass, the load being evenly distributed. 6.6.5.3.2.3 Method of testing The large packaging shall be lifted in the manner for which it is designed until clear of the floor and maintained in that position for a period of five minutes. 6.6.5.3.2.4 Criteria for passing the test (a) Metal and rigid plastics large packagings: no permanent deformation which renders the large packaging, including the base pallet, if any, unsafe for carriage and no loss of contents. (b) Flexible large packagings: no damage to the large packaging or its lifting devices which renders the large packaging unsafe for carriage or handling and no loss of contents. 6.6.5.3.3 Stacking test 6.6.5.3.3.1 Applicability For all types of large packagings which are designed to be stacked on each other, as a design type test. 6.6.5.3.3.2 Preparation of large packaging for test The large packaging shall be filled to its maximum permissible gross mass. 6.6.5.3.3.3 Method of testing The large packaging shall be placed on its base on level hard ground and subjected to a uniformly distributed superimposed test load (see 6.6.5.3.3.4) for a period of at least five minutes, large packagings of wood, fibreboard and plastics materials for a period of 24 h. 6.6.5.3.3.4 Calculation of superimposed test load The load to be placed on the large packagings shall be 1.8 times the combined maximum permissible gross mass of the number of similar large packagings that may be stacked on top of the large packagings during carriage. 6.6.5.3.3.5 Criteria for passing the test (a) All types of large packaging other than flexible large packagings: no permanent deformation which renders the large packaging including the base pallet, if any, unsafe for carriage and no loss of contents. (b) Flexible large packagings: no deterioration of the body which renders the large packaging unsafe for carriage and no loss of contents. 6.6.5.3.4 Drop test 6.6.5.3.4.1 Applicability For all types of large packagings as a design type test. 6.6.5.3.4.2 Preparation of large packaging for testing The large packaging shall be filled in accordance with 6.6.5.2.1 6.6.5.3.4.3 Method of testing The large packaging shall be dropped onto a non resilient, horizontal, flat, massive and rigid surface in conformity with the requirements of 6.1.5.3.4, in such a manner as to ensure that the point of impact is that part of the base of the large packaging considered to be the most vulnerable. 6.6.5.3.4.4 Drop height NOTE: Large packagings for substances and articles of Class 1 shall be tested at the packing group II performance level. 6.6.5.3.4.4.1 For inner packagings containing solid or liquid substances or articles, if the test is performed with the solid, liquid or articles to be carried, or with another substance or article having essentially the same characteristics: Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III 1.8 m 1.2 m 0.8 m 6.6.5.3.4.4.2 For inner packagings containing liquids if the test is performed with water: (a) Where the substances to be carried have a relative density not exceeding 1.2: Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III 1.8 m 1.2 m 0.8 m (b) Where the substances to be carried have a relative density exceeding 1.2, the drop height shall be calculated on the basis of the relative density (d) of the substance to be carried, rounded up to the first decimal, as follows: Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III d 1.5 (m) d 1.0 (m) d 0.67 (m) 6.6.5.3.4.5 Criteria for passing the test 6.6.5.3.4.5.1 The large packaging shall not exhibit any damage liable to affect safety during carriage. There shall be no leakage of the filling substance from inner packaging(s) or article(s). 6.6.5.3.4.5.2 No rupture is permitted in large packagings for articles of Class 1 which would permit the spillage of loose explosive substances or articles from the large packaging. 6.6.5.3.4.5.3 Where a large packaging undergoes a drop test, the sample passes the test if the entire contents are retained even if the closure is no longer sift-proof. 6.6.5.4 Certification and test report 6.6.5.4.1 In respect of each design type of large packaging a certificate and mark (as in 6.6.3) shall be issued attesting that the design type including its equipment meets the test requirements. 6.6.5.4.2 A test report containing at least the following particulars shall be drawn up and shall be made available to the users of the large packaging: 1. Name and address of the test facility; 2. Name and address of applicant (where appropriate); 3. A unique test report identification; 4. Date of the test report; 5. Manufacturer of the large packaging; 6. Description of the large packaging design type (e.g. dimensions, materials, closures, thickness, etc) and/or photograph(s); 7. Maximum capacity/maximum permissible gross mass; 8. Characteristics of test contents, e.g. types and descriptions of inner packagings or articles used; 9. Test descriptions and results; 10. The test report shall be signed with the name and status of the signatory. 6.6.5.4.3 The test report shall contain statements that the large packaging prepared as for carriage was tested in accordance with the appropriate provisions of this Chapter and that the use of other packaging methods or components may render it invalid. A copy of the test report shall be available to the competent authority. Chapter 6.7 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks and UN multiple element gas containers (MEGCs) NOTE 1: For tank-wagons, demountable tanks and tank-containers and tank swap bodies, with shells made of metallic materials, and battery-wagons and multiple element gas containers (MEGCs ), other than UN MEGCs see Chapter 6.8; for vacuum-operated waste tanks, see Chapter 6.10. 2: The requirements of this Chapter also apply to portable tanks with shells made of fibre-reinforced plastics (FRP) to the extent indicated in Chapter 6.9. 6.7.1 Application and general requirements 6.7.1.1 The requirements of this Chapter apply to portable tanks intended for the carriage of dangerous goods, and to MEGCs intended for the carriage of non-refrigerated gases of Class 2, by all modes of carriage. In addition to the requirements of this Chapter, unless otherwise specified, the applicable requirements of the International Convention for Safe Containers (CSC) 1972, as amended, shall be fulfilled by any multimodal portable tank or MEGC which meets the definition of a "container" within the terms of that Convention. Additional requirements may apply to offshore portable tanks or MEGCs that are handled in open seas. 6.7.1.2 In recognition of scientific and technological advances, the technical requirements of this Chapter may be varied by alternative arrangements. These alternative arrangements shall offer a level of safety not less than that given by the requirements of this Chapter with respect to the compatibility with substances carried and the ability of the portable tank or MEGC to withstand impact, loading and fire conditions. For international carriage, alternative arrangement portable tanks or MEGCs shall be approved by the applicable competent authorities. 6.7.1.3 When a substance is not assigned a portable tank instruction (T1 to T23, T50 or T75) in Column (10) of Table A of in Chapter 3.2, interim approval for carriage may be issued by the competent authority of the country of origin. The approval shall be included in the documentation of the consignment and contain as a minimum the information normally provided in the portable tank instructions and the conditions under which the substance shall be carried. 6.7.2 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks intended for the carriage of substances of Class 1 and Classes 3 to 9 6.7.2.1 Definitions For the purposes of this section: Alternative arrangement means an approval granted by the competent authority for a portable tank or MEGC that has been designed, constructed or tested to technical requirements or testing methods other than those specified in this Chapter: Design pressure means the pressure to be used in calculations required by a recognized pressure vessel code. The design pressure shall be not less than the highest of the following pressures: (a) The maximum effective gauge pressure allowed in the shell during filling or discharge; or (b) The sum of: (i) the absolute vapour pressure (in bar) of the substance at 65 °C, minus 1 bar; (ii) the partial pressure (in bar) of air or other gases in the ullage space being determined by a maximum ullage temperature of 65 °C and a liquid expansion due to an increase in mean bulk temperature of t r - t f (t f = filling temperature usually 15 °C; t r = maximum mean bulk temperature, 50 °C); and (iii) a head pressure determined on the basis of the static forces specified in 6.7.2.2.12, but not less than 0.35 bar; or (c) Two thirds of the minimum test pressure specified in the applicable portable tank instruction in 4.2.5.2.6; Design temperature range for the shell shall be –40 °C to 50 °C for substances carried under ambient conditions. For the other substances handled under elevated temperature conditions the design temperature shall be not less than the maximum temperature of the substance during filling, discharge or carriage. More severe design temperatures shall be considered for portable tanks subjected to severe climatic conditions; Fine grain steel means steel which has a ferritic grain size of 6 or finer when determined in accordance with ASTM E 112-96 or as defined in EN 10028-3, Part 3; Fusible element means a non-reclosable pressure relief device that is thermally actuated; Leakproofness test means a test using gas subjecting the shell and its service equipment to an effective internal pressure of not less than 25% of the MAWP; Maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) means a pressure that shall be not less than the highest of the following pressures measured at the top of the shell while in operating position: (a) The maximum effective gauge pressure allowed in the shell during filling or discharge; or (b) The maximum effective gauge pressure to which the shell is designed which shall be not less than the sum of: (i) the absolute vapour pressure (in bar) of the substance at 65 °C, minus 1 bar; and (ii) the partial pressure (in bar) of air or other gases in the ullage space being determined by a maximum ullage temperature of 65 °C and a liquid expansion due to an increase in mean bulk temperature of t r t f (t f = filling temperature, usually 15 °C; t r = maximum mean bulk temperature, 50 °C); Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) means the sum of the tare mass of the portable tank and the heaviest load authorized for carriage; Mild steel means a steel with a guaranteed minimum tensile strength of 360 N/mm 2 to 440 N/mm 2 and a guaranteed minimum elongation at fracture conforming to 6.7.2.3.3.3; Offshore portable tank means a portable tank specially designed for repeated use for carriage to, from and between offshore facilities. An offshore portable tank is designed and constructed in accordance with the guidelines for the approval of containers handled in open seas specified by the International Maritime Organization in document MSC/Circ.860; Portable tank means a multimodal tank used for the carriage of substances of Class 1 and Classes 3 to 9. The portable tank includes a shell fitted with service equipment and structural equipment necessary for the carriage of dangerous substances. The portable tank shall be capable of being filled and discharged without the removal of its structural equipment. It shall possess stabilizing members external to the shell, and shall be capable of being lifted when full. It shall be designed primarily to be loaded onto a road vehicle, wagon or sea-going or inland navigation vessel and shall be equipped with skids, mountings or accessories to facilitate mechanical handling. Tank vehicles, tank-wagons, non metallic tanks and intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) are not considered to fall within the definition for portable tanks; Reference steel means a steel with a tensile strength of 370 N/mm 2 and an elongation at fracture of 27%; Service equipment means measuring instruments and filling, discharge, venting, safety, heating, cooling and insulating devices; Shell means the part of the portable tank which retains the substance intended for carriage (tank proper), including openings and their closures, but does not include service equipment or external structural equipment; Structural equipment means the reinforcing, fastening, protective and stabilizing members external to the shell; Test pressure means the maximum gauge pressure at the top of the shell during the hydraulic pressure test equal to not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. The minimum test pressure for portable tanks intended for specific substances is specified in the applicable portable tank instruction in 4.2.5.2.6. 6.7.2.2 General design and construction requirements 6.7.2.2.1 Shells shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the requirements of a pressure vessel code recognized by the competent authority. Shells shall be made of metallic materials suitable for forming. The materials shall in principle conform to national or international material standards. For welded shells only a material whose weldability has been fully demonstrated shall be used. Welds shall be skilfully made and afford complete safety. When the manufacturing process or the materials make it necessary, the shells shall be suitably heat-treated to guarantee adequate toughness in the weld and in the heat affected zones. In choosing the material, the design temperature range shall be taken into account with respect to risk of brittle fracture, to stress corrosion cracking and to resistance to impact. When fine grain steel is used, the guaranteed value of the yield strength shall be not more than 460 N/mm 2 and the guaranteed value of the upper limit of the tensile strength shall be not more than 725 N/mm 2 according to the material specification. Aluminium may only be used as a construction material when indicated in a portable tank special provision assigned to a specific substance in Column (11) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 or when approved by the competent authority. When aluminium is authorized, it shall be insulated to prevent significant loss of physical properties when subjected to a heat load of 110 kW/m 2 for a period of not less than 30 minutes. The insulation shall remain effective at all temperatures less than 649 °C and shall be jacketed with a material with a melting point of not less than 700 °C. Portable tank materials shall be suitable for the external environment in which they may be carried. 6.7.2.2.2 Portable tank shells, fittings, and pipework shall be constructed from materials which are: (a) Substantially immune to attack by the substance(s) intended to be carried; or (b) Properly passivated or neutralized by chemical reaction; or (c) Lined with corrosion resistant material directly bonded to the shell or attached by equivalent means. 6.7.2.2.3 Gaskets shall be made of materials not subject to attack by the substance(s) intended to be carried. 6.7.2.2.4 When shells are lined, the lining shall be substantially immune to attack by the substance(s) intended to be carried, homogeneous, non porous, free from perforations, sufficiently elastic and compatible with the thermal expansion characteristics of the shell. The lining of every shell, shell fittings and piping shall be continuous, and shall extend around the face of any flange. Where external fittings are welded to the tank, the lining shall be continuous through the fitting and around the face of external flanges. 6.7.2.2.5 Joints and seams in the lining shall be made by fusing the material together or by other equally effective means. 6.7.2.2.6 Contact between dissimilar metals which could result in damage by galvanic action shall be avoided. 6.7.2.2.7 The materials of the portable tank, including any devices, gaskets, linings and accessories, shall not adversely affect the substance(s) intended to be carried in the portable tank. 6.7.2.2.8 Portable tanks shall be designed and constructed with supports to provide a secure base during carriage and with suitable lifting and tie down attachments. 6.7.2.2.9 Portable tanks shall be designed to withstand, without loss of contents, at least the internal pressure due to the contents, and the static, dynamic and thermal loads during normal conditions of handling and carriage. The design shall demonstrate that the effects of fatigue, caused by repeated application of these loads through the expected life of the portable tank, have been taken into account. 6.7.2.2.9.1 For portable tanks that are intended for use offshore, the dynamic stresses imposed by handling in open seas shall be taken into account. 6.7.2.2.10 A shell which is to be equipped with a vacuum-relief device shall be designed to withstand, without permanent deformation, an external pressure of not less than 0.21 bar above the internal pressure. The vacuum-relief device shall be set to relieve at a vacuum setting not greater than minus (–)0.21 bar unless the shell is designed for a higher external over pressure, in which case the vacuum-relief pressure of the device to be fitted shall be not greater than the tank design vacuum pressure. A shell used for the carriage of solid substances (powdery or granular) of packing groups II or III only, which do not liquefy during carriage, may be designed for a lower external pressure, subject to the approval of the competent authority. In this case, the vacuum valve shall be set to relieve at this lower pressure. A shell that is not to be fitted with a vacuum-relief device shall be designed to withstand, without permanent deformation an external pressure of not less than 0.4 bar above the internal pressure. 6.7.2.2.11 Vacuum-relief devices used on portable tanks intended for the carriage of substances meeting the flash-point criteria of Class 3, including elevated temperature substances carried at or above their flash-point, shall prevent the immediate passage of flame into the shell, or the portable tank shall have a shell capable of withstanding, without leakage an internal explosion resulting from the passage of flame into the shell. 6.7.2.2.12 Portable tanks and their fastenings shall, under the maximum permissible load, be capable of absorbing the following separately applied static forces: (a) In the direction of travel: twice the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g) ; (b) Horizontally at right angles to the direction of travel: the MPGM (when the direction of travel is not clearly determined, the forces shall be equal to twice the MPGM) multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g) NOTEREF _Ref80763511 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 1 ; (c) Vertically upwards: the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g) NOTEREF _Ref80763511 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 1 ; and (d) Vertically downwards: twice the MPGM (total loading including the effect of gravity) multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g) NOTEREF _Ref80763511 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 1 . 6.7.2.2.13 Under each of the forces in 6.7.2.2.12, the safety factor to be observed shall be as follows: (a) For metals having a clearly defined yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in relation to the guaranteed yield strength; or (b) For metals with no clearly defined yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in relation to the guaranteed 0.2% proof strength and, for austenitic steels, the 1% proof strength. 6.7.2.2.14 The values of yield strength or proof strength shall be the values according to national or international material standards. When austenitic steels are used, the specified minimum values of yield strength or proof strength according to the material standards may be increased by up to 15% when these greater values are attested in the material inspection certificate. When no material standard exists for the metal in question, the value of yield strength or proof strength used shall be approved by the competent authority. 6.7.2.2.15 Portable tanks shall be capable of being electrically earthed when intended for the carriage of substances meeting the flash-point criteria of Class 3 including elevated temperature substances carried at or above their flash-point. Measures shall be taken to prevent dangerous electrostatic discharge. 6.7.2.2.16 When required for certain substances by the applicable portable tank instruction indicated in Column (10) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.2.6 or by a portable tank special provision indicated in Column (11) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.3, portable tanks shall be provided with additional protection, which may take the form of additional shell thickness or a higher test pressure, the additional shell thickness or higher test pressure being determined in the light of the inherent risks associated with the carriage of the substances concerned. 6.7.2.2.17 Thermal insulation directly in contact with the shell intended for substances carried at elevated temperature shall have an ignition temperature at least 50 °C higher than the maximum design temperature of the tank. 6.7.2.3 Design criteria 6.7.2.3.1 Shells shall be of a design capable of being stress-analysed mathematically or experimentally by resistance strain gauges, or by other methods approved by the competent authority. 6.7.2.3.2 Shells shall be designed and constructed to withstand a hydraulic test pressure not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. Specific requirements are laid down for certain substances in the applicable portable tank instruction indicated in Column (10) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.2.6 or by a portable tank special provision indicated in Column (11) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.3. Attention is drawn to the minimum shell thickness requirements specified in 6.7.2.4.1 to 6.7.2.4.10. 6.7.2.3.3 For metals exhibiting a clearly defined yield point or characterized by a guaranteed proof strength (0.2% proof strength, generally, or 1% proof strength for austenitic steels) the primary membrane stress (sigma) in the shell shall not exceed 0.75 Re or 0.50 Rm, whichever is lower, at the test pressure, where: Re = yield strength in N/mm 2 , or 0.2% proof strength or, for austenitic steels, 1% proof strength; Rm = minimum tensile strength in N/mm 2 . 6.7.2.3.3.1 The values of Re and Rm to be used shall be the specified minimum values according to national or international material standards. When austenitic steels are used, the specified minimum values for Re and Rm according to the material standards may be increased by up to 15% when greater values are attested in the material inspection certificate. When no material standard exists for the metal in question, the values of Re and Rm used shall be approved by the competent authority or its authorized body. 6.7.2.3.3.2 Steels which have a Re/Rm ratio of more than 0.85 are not allowed for the construction of welded shells. The values of Re and Rm to be used in determining this ratio shall be the values specified in the material inspection certificate. 6.7.2.3.3.3 Steels used in the construction of shells shall have an elongation at fracture, in %, of not less than 10 000/Rm with an absolute minimum of 16% for fine grain steels and 20% for other steels. Aluminium and aluminium alloys used in the construction of shells shall have an elongation at fracture, in %, of not less than 10 000/6Rm with an absolute minimum of 12%. 6.7.2.3.3.4 For the purpose of determining actual values for materials, it shall be noted that for sheet metal, the axis of the tensile test specimen shall be at right angles (transversely) to the direction of rolling. The permanent elongation at fracture shall be measured on test specimens of rectangular cross sections in accordance with ISO 6892:1998 using a 50 mm gauge length. 6.7.2.4 Minimum shell thickness 6.7.2.4.1 The minimum shell thickness shall be the greater thickness based on: (a) The minimum thickness determined in accordance with the requirements of 6.7.2.4.2 to 6.7.2.4.10; (b) The minimum thickness determined in accordance with the recognized pressure vessel code including the requirements in 6.7.2.3; and (c) The minimum thickness specified in the applicable portable tank instruction indicated in Column (10) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.2.6 or by a portable tank special provision indicated in Column (11) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.3. 6.7.2.4.2 The cylindrical portions, ends (heads) and manhole covers of shells not more than 1.80 m in diameter shall be not less than 5 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used. Shells more than 1.80 m in diameter shall be not less than 6 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used, except that for powdered or granular solid substances of packing group II or III the minimum thickness requirement may be reduced to not less than 5 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used. 6.7.2.4.3 When additional protection against shell damage is provided, portable tanks with test pressures less than 2.65 bar may have the minimum shell thickness reduced, in proportion to the protection provided, as approved by the competent authority. However, shells not more than 1.80 m in diameter shall be not less than 3 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used. Shells more than 1.80 m in diameter shall be not less than 4 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used. 6.7.2.4.4 The cylindrical portions, ends (heads) and manhole covers of all shells shall be not less than 3 mm thick regardless of the material of construction. 6.7.2.4.5 The additional protection referred to in 6.7.2.4.3 may be provided by overall external structural protection, such as suitable "sandwich" construction with the outer sheathing (jacket) secured to the shell, double wall construction or by enclosing the shell in a complete framework with longitudinal and transverse structural members. 6.7.2.4.6 The equivalent thickness of a metal other than the thickness prescribed for the reference steel in 6.7.2.4.2 shall be determined using the following formula: e 1 = where: e 1 = required equivalent thickness (in mm) of the metal to be used; e 0 = minimum thickness (in mm) of the reference steel specified in the applicable portable tank instruction indicated in Column (10) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.2.6 or by a portable tank special provision indicated in Column (11) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.3; Rm 1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength (in N/mm 2 ) of the metal to be used (see 6.7.2.3.3); A 1 = guaranteed minimum elongation at fracture (in %) of the metal to be used according to national or international standards. 6.7.2.4.7 When in the applicable portable tank instruction in 4.2.5.2.6, a minimum thickness of 8 mm or 10 mm is specified, it shall be noted that these thicknesses are based on the properties of the reference steel and a shell diameter of 1.80 m. When a metal other than mild steel (see 6.7.2.1) is used or the shell has a diameter of more than 1.80 m, the thickness shall be determined using the following formula: e 1 = where: e 1 = required equivalent thickness (in mm) of the metal to be used; e 0 = minimum thickness (in mm) of the reference steel specified in the applicable portable tank instruction indicated in Column (10) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.2.6 or by a portable tank special provision indicated in Column (11) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.3; d 1 = diameter of the shell (in m), but not less than 1.80 m; Rm 1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength (in N/mm 2 ) of the metal to be used (see 6.7.2.3.3); A 1 = guaranteed minimum elongation at fracture (in %) of the metal to be used according to national or international standards. 6.7.2.4.8 In no case shall the wall thickness be less than that prescribed in 6.7.2.4.2, 6.7.2.4.3 and 6.7.2.4.4. All parts of the shell shall have a minimum thickness as determined by 6.7.2.4.2 to 6.7.2.4.4. This thickness shall be exclusive of any corrosion allowance. 6.7.2.4.9 When mild steel is used (see 6.7.2.1), calculation using the formula in 6.7.2.4.6 is not required. 6.7.2.4.10 There shall be no sudden change of plate thickness at the attachment of the ends (heads) to the cylindrical portion of the shell. 6.7.2.5 Service equipment 6.7.2.5.1 Service equipment shall be so arranged as to be protected against the risk of being wrenched off or damaged during handling and carriage. When the connection between the frame and the shell allows relative movement between the sub-assemblies, the equipment shall be so fastened as to permit such movement without risk of damage to working parts. The external discharge fittings (pipe sockets, shut-off devices), the internal stop-valve and its seating shall be protected against the danger of being wrenched off by external forces (for example using shear sections). The filling and discharge devices (including flanges or threaded plugs) and any protective caps shall be capable of being secured against unintended opening. 6.7.2.5.2 All openings in the shell, intended for filling or discharging the portable tank shall be fitted with a manually operated stop-valve located as close to the shell as reasonably practicable. Other openings, except for openings leading to venting or pressure relief devices, shall be equipped with either a stop valve or another suitable means of closure located as close to the shell as reasonably practicable. 6.7.2.5.3 All portable tanks shall be fitted with a manhole or other inspection openings of a suitable size to allow for internal inspection and adequate access for maintenance and repair of the interior. Compartmented portable tanks shall have a manhole or other inspection openings for each compartment. 6.7.2.5.4 As far as reasonably practicable, external fittings shall be grouped together. For insulated portable tanks, top fittings shall be surrounded by a spill collection reservoir with suitable drains. 6.7.2.5.5 Each connection to a portable tank shall be clearly marked to indicate its function. 6.7.2.5.6 Each stop valve or other means of closure shall be designed and constructed to a rated pressure not less than the MAWP of the shell taking into account the temperatures expected during carriage. All stop valves with screwed spindles shall close by a clockwise motion of the handwheel. For other stop valves the position (open and closed) and direction of closure shall be clearly indicated. All stop valves shall be designed to prevent unintentional opening. 6.7.2.5.7 No moving parts, such as covers, components of closures, etc., shall be made of unprotected corrodible steel when they are liable to come into frictional or percussive contact with aluminium portable tanks intended for the carriage of substances meeting the flash-point criteria of Class 3 including elevated temperature substances carried at or above their flash-point. 6.7.2.5.8 Piping shall be designed, constructed and installed so as to avoid the risk of damage due to thermal expansion and contraction, mechanical shock and vibration. All piping shall be of a suitable metallic material. Welded pipe joints shall be used wherever possible. 6.7.2.5.9 Joints in copper tubing shall be brazed or have an equally strong metal union. The melting point of brazing materials shall be no lower than 525 °C. The joints shall not decrease the strength of the tubing as may happen when cutting threads. 6.7.2.5.10 The burst pressure of all piping and pipe fittings shall be not less than the highest of four times the MAWP of the shell or four times the pressure to which it may be subjected in service by the action of a pump or other device (except pressure-relief devices). 6.7.2.5.11 Ductile metals shall be used in the construction of valves and accessories. 6.7.2.5.12 The heating system shall be designed or controlled so that a substance cannot reach a temperature at which the pressure in the tank exceeds its MAWP or causes other hazards (e.g. dangerous thermal decomposition). 6.7.2.5.13 The heating system shall be designed or controlled so that power for internal heating elements shall not be available unless the heating elements are completely submerged. The temperature at the surface of the heating elements for internal heating equipment, or the temperature at the shell for external heating equipment shall, in no case, exceed 80% of the autoignition temperature (in °C) of the substance carried. 6.7.2.5.14 If an electrical heating system is installed inside the tank, it shall be equipped with an earth leakage circuit breaker with a releasing current of less than 100 mA. 6.7.2.5.15 Electrical switch cabinets mounted to tanks shall not have a direct connection to the tank interior and shall provide protection of at least the equivalent of type IP 56 according to IEC 144 or IEC 529. 6.7.2.6 Bottom openings 6.7.2.6.1 Certain substances shall not be carried in portable tanks with bottom openings. When the applicable portable tank instruction identified in Column (10) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.2.6 indicates that bottom openings are prohibited there shall be no openings below the liquid level of the shell when it is filled to its maximum permissible filling limit. When an existing opening is closed it shall be accomplished by internally and externally welding one plate to the shell. 6.7.2.6.2 Bottom discharge outlets for portable tanks carrying certain solid, crystallizable or highly viscous substances shall be equipped with not less than two serially fitted and mutually independent shut-off devices. The design of the equipment shall be to the satisfaction of the competent authority or its authorized body and shall include: (a) An external stop-valve, fitted as close to the shell as reasonably practicable, and so designed as to prevent any unintended opening through impact or other inadvertent act; and (b) A liquid tight closure at the end of the discharge pipe, which may be a bolted blank flange or a screw cap. 6.7.2.6.3 Every bottom discharge outlet, except as provided in 6.7.2.6.2, shall be equipped with three serially fitted and mutually independent shut off devices. The design of the equipment shall be to the satisfaction of the competent authority or its authorized body and include: (a) A self-closing internal stop-valve, that is a stop-valve within the shell or within a welded flange or its companion flange, such that: (i) The control devices for the operation of the valve are designed so as to prevent any unintended opening through impact or other inadvertent act; (ii) The valve may be operable from above or below; (iii) If possible, the setting of the valve (open or closed) shall be capable of being verified from the ground; (iv) Except for portable tanks having a capacity of not more than 1 000 litres, it shall be possible to close the valve from an accessible position of the portable tank that is remote from the valve itself; and (v) The valve shall continue to be effective in the event of damage to the external device for controlling the operation of the valve; (b) An external stop-valve fitted as close to the shell as reasonably practicable; and (c) A liquid tight closure at the end of the discharge pipe, which may be a bolted blank flange or a screw cap. 6.7.2.6.4 For a lined shell, the internal stop-valve required by 6.7.2.6.3 (a) may be replaced by an additional external stop-valve. The manufacturer shall satisfy the requirements of the competent authority or its authorized body. 6.7.2.7 Safety-relief devices 6.7.2.7.1 All portable tanks shall be fitted with at least one pressure-relief device. All relief devices shall be designed, constructed and marked to the satisfaction of the competent authority or its authorized body. 6.7.2.8 Pressure-relief devices 6.7.2.8.1 Every portable tank with a capacity not less than 1 900 litres and every independent compartment of a portable tank with a similar capacity, shall be provided with one or more pressure-relief devices of the spring loaded type and may in addition have a frangible disc or fusible element in parallel with the spring loaded devices except when prohibited by reference to 6.7.2.8.3 in the applicable portable tank instruction in 4.2.5.2.6. The pressure-relief devices shall have sufficient capacity to prevent rupture of the shell due to over pressurization or vacuum resulting from filling, discharging, or from heating of the contents. 6.7.2.8.2 Pressure relief devices shall be designed to prevent the entry of foreign matter, the leakage of liquid and the development of any dangerous excess pressure. 6.7.2.8.3 When required for certain substances by the applicable portable tank instruction indicated in Column (10) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.2.6, portable tanks shall have a pressure-relief device approved by the competent authority. Unless a portable tank in dedicated service is fitted with an approved relief device constructed of materials compatible with the substance carried, the relief device shall comprise a frangible disc preceding a spring-loaded pressure-relief device. When a frangible disc is inserted in series with the required pressure-relief device, the space between the frangible disc and the pressure-relief device shall be provided with a pressure gauge or suitable tell-tale indicator for the detection of disc rupture, pinholing, or leakage which could cause a malfunction of the pressure-relief system. The frangible disc shall rupture at a nominal pressure 10% above the start to discharge pressure of the relief device. 6.7.2.8.4 Every portable tank with a capacity less than 1 900 litres shall be fitted with a pressure-relief device which may be a frangible disc when this disc complies with the requirements of 6.7.2.11.1. When no spring-loaded pressure-relief device is used, the frangible disc shall be set to rupture at a nominal pressure equal to the test pressure. In addition, fusible elements conforming to 6.7.2.10.1 may also be used. 6.7.2.8.5 When the shell is fitted for pressure discharge, the inlet line shall be provided with a suitable pressure-relief device set to operate at a pressure not higher than the MAWP of the shell, and a stop-valve shall be fitted as close to the shell as reasonably practicable. 6.7.2.9 Setting of pressure-relief devices 6.7.2.9.1 It shall be noted that the pressure-relief devices shall operate only in conditions of excessive rise in temperature, since the shell shall not be subject to undue fluctuations of pressure during normal conditions of carriage (see 6.7.2.12.2). 6.7.2.9.2 The required pressure-relief device shall be set to start-to-discharge at a nominal pressure of five-sixths of the test pressure for shells having a test pressure of not more than 4.5 bar and 110% of two-thirds of the test pressure for shells having a test pressure of more than 4.5 bar. After discharge the device shall close at a pressure not more than 10% below the pressure at which the discharge starts. The device shall remain closed at all lower pressures. This requirement does not prevent the use of vacuum-relief or combination pressure-relief and vacuum-relief devices. 6.7.2.10 Fusible elements 6.7.2.10.1 Fusible elements shall operate at a temperature between 100 °C and 149 °C on condition that the pressure in the shell at the fusing temperature will be not more than the test pressure. They shall be placed at the top of the shell with their inlets in the vapour space and when used for transport safety purposes, they shall not be shielded from external heat. Fusible elements shall not be used on portable tanks with a test pressure which exceeds 2.65 bar unless specified by special provision TP 36 in Column (11) of Table A of Chapter 3.2. Fusible elements used on portable tanks intended for the carriage of elevated temperature substances shall be designed to operate at a temperature higher than the maximum temperature that will be experienced during carriage and shall be to the satisfaction of the competent authority or its authorized body. 6.7.2.11 Frangible discs 6.7.2.11.1 Except as specified in 6.7.2.8.3, frangible discs shall be set to rupture at a nominal pressure equal to the test pressure throughout the design temperature range. Particular attention shall be given to the requirements of 6.7.2.5.1 and 6.7.2.8.3 if frangible discs are used. 6.7.2.11.2 Frangible discs shall be appropriate for the vacuum pressures which may be produced in the portable tank. 6.7.2.12 Capacity of pressure-relief devices 6.7.2.12.1 The spring-loaded pressure-relief device required by 6.7.2.8.1 shall have a minimum cross sectional flow area equivalent to an orifice of 31.75 mm diameter. Vacuum-relief devices, when used, shall have a cross sectional flow area not less than 284 mm 2 . 6.7.2.12.2 The combined delivery capacity of the pressure relief system (taking into account the reduction of the flow when the portable tank is fitted with frangible-discs preceding spring-loaded pressure-relief devices or when the spring-loaded pressure-relief devices are provided with a device to prevent the passage of the flame), in condition of complete fire engulfment of the portable tank shall be sufficient to limit the pressure in the shell to 20% above the start-to-discharge pressure of the pressure limiting device. Emergency pressure-relief devices may be used to achieve the full relief capacity prescribed. These devices may be fusible, spring loaded or frangible disc components, or a combination of spring-loaded and frangible disc devices. The total required capacity of the relief devices may be determined using the formula in 6.7.2.12.2.1 or the table in 6.7.2.12.2.3. 6.7.2.12.2.1 To determine the total required capacity of the relief devices, which shall be regarded as being the sum of the individual capacities of all the contributing devices, the following formula shall be used: where: Q = minimum required rate of discharge in cubic metres of air per second (m 3 /s) at standard conditions: 1 bar and 0 °C (273 K); F = is a coefficient with the following value: for uninsulated shells: F = 1; for insulated shells: F = U(649 - t)/13.6 but in no case is less than 0.25 where: U = heat transfer coefficient of the insulation, in kW·m -2 ·K -1 , at 38 °C; t = actual temperature of the substance during filling (in °C); when this temperature is unknown, let t = 15 °C; The value of F given above for insulated shells may be taken provided that the insulation is in accordance with 6.7.2.12.2.4; A = total external surface area of shell in m 2 ; Z = the gas compressibility factor in the accumulating condition (when this factor is unknown, let Z =1.0); T = absolute temperature in Kelvin (°C + 273) above the pressure-relief devices in the accumulating condition; L = the latent heat of vaporization of the liquid, in kJ/kg, in the accumulating condition; M = molecular mass of the discharged gas; C = a constant which is derived from one of the following formulae as a function of the ratio k of specific heats: where: c p is the specific heat at constant pressure; and c v is the specific heat at constant volume. When k > 1: When k = 1 or k is unknown: where e is the mathematical constant 2.7183. C may also be taken from the following table: k C k C k C 1.00 1.02 1.04 1.06 1.08 1.10 1.12 1.14 1.16 1.18 1.20 1.22 1.24 0.607 0.611 0.615 0.620 0.624 0.628 0.633 0.637 0.641 0.645 0.649 0.652 0.656 1.26 1.28 1.30 1.32 1.34 1.36 1.38 1.40 1.42 1.44 1.46 1.48 1.50 0.660 0.664 0.667 0.671 0.674 0.678 0.681 0.685 0.688 0.691 0.695 0.698 0.701 1.52 1.54 1.56 1.58 1.60 1.62 1.64 1.66 1.68 1.70 2.00 2.20 0.704 0.707 0.710 0.713 0.716 0.719 0.722 0.725 0.728 0.731 0.770 0.793 6.7.2.12.2.2 As an alternative to the formula above, shells designed for the carriage of liquids may have their relief devices sized in accordance with the table in 6.7.2.12.2.3. This table assumes an insulation value of F = 1 and shall be adjusted accordingly when the shell is insulated. Other values used in determining this table are: M = 86.7 T = 394 K L = 334.94 kJ/kg C = 0.607 Z = 1 6.7.2.12.2.3 Minimum required rate of discharge, Q, in cubic metres per air per second at 1 bar and 0 °C (273 K) A Exposed area (square metres) Q (Cubic metres of air per second) A Exposed area (square metres) Q (Cubic metres of air per second) 2 0.230 37.5 2.539 3 0.320 40 2.677 4 0.405 42.5 2.814 5 0.487 45 2.949 6 0.565 47.5 3.082 7 0.641 50 3.215 8 0.715 52.5 3.346 9 0.788 55 3.476 10 0.859 57.5 3.605 12 0.998 60 3.733 14 1.132 62.5 3.860 16 1.263 65 3.987 18 1.391 67.5 4.112 20 1.517 70 4.236 22.5 1.670 75 4.483 25 1.821 80 4.726 27.5 1.969 85 4.967 30 2.115 90 5.206 32.5 2.258 95 5.442 35 2.400 100 5.676 6.7.2.12.2.4 Insulation systems, used for the purpose of reducing venting capacity, shall be approved by the competent authority or its authorized body. In all cases, insulation systems approved for this purpose shall: (a) Remain effective at all temperatures up to 649 °C; and (b) Be jacketed with a material having a melting point of 700 °C or greater. 6.7.2.13 Marking of pressure-relief devices 6.7.2.13.1 Every pressure-relief device shall be clearly and permanently marked with the following particulars: (a) The pressure (in bar or kPa) or temperature (in °C) at which it is set to discharge; (b) The allowable tolerance at the discharge pressure for spring-loaded devices; (c) The reference temperature corresponding to the rated pressure for frangible discs; (d) The allowable temperature tolerance for fusible elements; (e) The rated flow capacity of the spring-loaded pressure relief devices, frangible discs or fusible elements in standard cubic metres of air per second (m 3 /s); and (f) The cross sectional flow areas of the spring loaded pressure-relief devices, frangible discs and fusible elements in mm 2 . When practicable, the following information shall also be shown: (g) The manufacturer’s name and relevant catalogue number of the device. 6.7.2.13.2 The rated flow capacity marked on the spring-loaded pressure-relief devices shall be determined according to ISO 4126-1:2004 and ISO 4126-7:2004. 6.7.2.14 Connections to pressure-relief devices 6.7.2.14.1 Connections to pressure-relief devices shall be of sufficient size to enable the required discharge to pass unrestricted to the safety device. No stop-valve shall be installed between the shell and the pressure-relief devices except where duplicate devices are provided for maintenance or other reasons and the stop-valves serving the devices actually in use are locked open or the stop-valves are interlocked so that at least one of the duplicate devices is always in use. There shall be no obstruction in an opening leading to a vent or pressure-relief device which might restrict or cut-off the flow from the shell to that device. Vents or pipes from the pressure-relief device outlets, when used, shall deliver the relieved vapour or liquid to the atmosphere in conditions of minimum back-pressure on the relieving devices. 6.7.2.15 Siting of pressure-relief devices 6.7.2.15.1 Each pressure-relief device inlet shall be situated on top of the shell in a position as near the longitudinal and transverse centre of the shell as reasonably practicable. All pressure-relief device inlets shall under maximum filling conditions be situated in the vapour space of the shell and the devices shall be so arranged as to ensure the escaping vapour is discharged unrestrictedly. For flammable substances, the escaping vapour shall be directed away from the shell in such a manner that it cannot impinge upon the shell. Protective devices which deflect the flow of vapour are permissible provided the required relief-device capacity is not reduced. 6.7.2.15.2 Arrangements shall be made to prevent access to the pressure-relief devices by unauthorized persons and to protect the devices from damage caused by the portable tank overturning. 6.7.2.16 Gauging devices 6.7.2.16.1 Glass level-gauges and gauges made of other fragile material, which are in direct communication with the contents of the tank shall not be used. 6.7.2.17 Portable tank supports, frameworks, lifting and tie-down attachments 6.7.2.17.1 Portable tanks shall be designed and constructed with a support structure to provide a secure base during carriage. The forces specified in 6.7.2.2.12 and the safety factor specified in 6.7.2.2.13 shall be considered in this aspect of the design. Skids, frameworks, cradles or other similar structures are acceptable. 6.7.2.17.2 The combined stresses caused by portable tank mountings (e.g. cradles, framework, etc.) and portable tank lifting and tie-down attachments shall not cause excessive stress in any portion of the shell. Permanent lifting and tie-down attachments shall be fitted to all portable tanks. Preferably they shall be fitted to the portable tank supports but may be secured to reinforcing plates located on the shell at the points of support. 6.7.2.17.3 In the design of supports and frameworks the effects of environmental corrosion shall be taken into account. 6.7.2.17.4 Forklift pockets shall be capable of being closed off. The means of closing forklift pockets shall be a permanent part of the framework or permanently attached to the framework. Single compartment portable tanks with a length less than 3.65 m need not have closed off forklift pockets provided that: (a) The shell including all the fittings are well protected from being hit by the forklift blades; and (b) The distance between the centres of the forklift pockets is at least half of the maximum length of the portable tank. 6.7.2.17.5 When portable tanks are not protected during carriage, according to 4.2.1.2, the shells and service equipment shall be protected against damage to the shell and service equipment resulting from lateral or longitudinal impact or overturning. External fittings shall be protected so as to preclude the release of the shell contents upon impact or overturning of the portable tank on its fittings. Examples of protection include: (a) Protection against lateral impact which may consist of longitudinal bars protecting the shell on both sides at the level of the median line; (b) Protection of the portable tank against overturning which may consist of reinforcement rings or bars fixed across the frame; (c) Protection against rear impact which may consist of a bumper or frame; (d) Protection of the shell against damage from impact or overturning by use of an ISO frame in accordance with ISO 1496-3:1995. 6.7.2.18 Design approval 6.7.2.18.1 The competent authority or its authorized body shall issue a design approval certificate for any new design of a portable tank. This certificate shall attest that a portable tank has been surveyed by that authority, is suitable for its intended purpose and meets the requirements of this Chapter and where appropriate, the provisions for substances provided in Chapter 4.2 and in Table A of Chapter 3.2. When a series of portable tanks are manufactured without change in the design, the certificate shall be valid for the entire series. The certificate shall refer to the prototype test report, the substances or group of substances allowed to be carried, the materials of construction of the shell and lining (when applicable) and an approval number. The approval number shall consist of the distinguishing sign or mark of the State in whose territory the approval was granted, indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic , and a registration number. Any alternative arrangements according to 6.7.1.2 shall be indicated on the certificate. A design approval may serve for the approval of smaller portable tanks made of materials of the same kind and thickness, by the same fabrication techniques and with identical supports, equivalent closures and other appurtenances. 6.7.2.18.2 The prototype test report for the design approval shall include at least the following: (a) The results of the applicable framework test specified in ISO 1496-3:1995; (b) The results of the initial inspection and test according to 6.7.2.19.3; and (c) The results of the impact test in 6.7.2.19.1, when applicable. 6.7.2.19 Inspection and testing 6.7.2.19.1 Portable tanks meeting the definition of container in the International Convention for Safe Containers (CSC), 1972, as amended, shall not be used unless they are successfully qualified by subjecting a representative prototype of each design to the Dynamic, Longitudinal Impact Test prescribed in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part IV, Section 41. 6.7.2.19.2 The shell and items of equipment of each portable tank shall be inspected and tested before being put into service for the first time (initial inspection and test) and thereafter at not more than five-year intervals (5 year periodic inspection and test) with an intermediate periodic inspection and test (2.5 year periodic inspection and test) midway between the 5 year periodic inspections and tests. The 2.5 year inspection and test may be performed within 3 months of the specified date. An exceptional inspection and test shall be performed regardless of the date of the last periodic inspection and test when necessary according to 6.7.2.19.7. 6.7.2.19.3 The initial inspection and test of a portable tank shall include a check of the design characteristics, an internal and external examination of the portable tank and its fittings with due regard to the substances to be carried, and a pressure test. Before the portable tank is placed into service, a leakproofness test and a check of the satisfactory operation of all service equipment shall also be performed. When the shell and its fittings have been pressure-tested separately, they shall be subjected together after assembly to a leakproofness test. 6.7.2.19.4 The 5-year periodic inspection and test shall include an internal and external examination and, as a general rule, a hydraulic pressure test. For tanks only used for the carriage of solid substances, other than toxic or corrosive substances that do not liquefy during carriage, the hydraulic pressure test may be replaced by a suitable pressure test at 1.5 times the MAWP, subject to competent authority approval. Sheathing, thermal insulation and the like shall be removed only to the extent required for reliable appraisal of the condition of the portable tank. When the shell and equipment have been pressure-tested separately, they shall be subjected together after assembly to a leakproofness test. 6.7.2.19.5 The intermediate 2.5 year periodic inspection and test shall at least include an internal and external examination of the portable tank and its fittings with due regard to the substances intended to be carried, a leakproofness test and a check of the satisfactory operation of all service equipment. Sheathing, thermal insulation and the like shall be removed only to the extent required for reliable appraisal of the condition of the portable tank. For portable tanks intended for the carriage of a single substance, the 2.5 year internal examination may be waived or substituted by other test methods or inspection procedures specified by the competent authority or its authorized body. 6.7.2.19.6 Inspection and test of portable tanks and filling after the date of expiry of the last periodic inspection and test 6.7.2.19.6.1 A portable tank may not be filled and offered for carriage after the date of expiry of the last 5 year or 2.5 year periodic inspection and test as required by 6.7.2.19.2. However, a portable tank filled prior to the date of expiry of the last periodic inspection and test may be carried for a period not to exceed three months beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection. In addition, a portable tank may be carried after the date of expiry of the last periodic test and inspection: (a) After emptying but before cleaning, for purposes of performing the next required test or inspection prior to refilling; and (b) Unless otherwise approved by the competent authority, for a period not to exceed six months beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection, in order to allow the return of dangerous goods for proper disposal or recycling. Reference to this exemption shall be mentioned in the transport document. 6.7.2.19.6.2 Except as provided for in 6.7.2.19.6.1, portable tanks which have missed the timeframe for their scheduled 5 year or 2.5-year periodic inspection and test may only be filled and offered for carriage if a new 5-year periodic inspection and test is performed according to 6.7.2.19.4. 6.7.2.19.7 The exceptional inspection and test is necessary when the portable tank shows evidence of damaged or corroded areas, or leakage, or other conditions that indicate a deficiency that could affect the integrity of the portable tank. The extent of the exceptional inspection and test shall depend on the amount of damage or deterioration of the portable tank. It shall include at least the 2.5 year inspection and test according to 6.7.2.19.5. 6.7.2.19.8 The internal and external examinations shall ensure that: (a) The shell is inspected for pitting, corrosion, or abrasions, dents, distortions, defects in welds or any other conditions, including leakage, that might render the portable tank unsafe for carriage. The wall thickness shall be verified by appropriate measurement if this inspection indicates a reduction of wall thickness; (b) The piping, valves, heating/cooling system, and gaskets are inspected for corroded areas, defects, or any other conditions, including leakage, that might render the portable tank unsafe for filling, discharge or carriage; (c) Devices for tightening manhole covers are operative and there is no leakage at manhole covers or gaskets; (d) Missing or loose bolts or nuts on any flanged connection or blank flange are replaced or tightened; (e) All emergency devices and valves are free from corrosion, distortion and any damage or defect that could prevent their normal operation. Remote closure devices and self-closing stop valves shall be operated to demonstrate proper operation; (f) Linings, if any, are inspected in accordance with criteria outlined by the lining manufacturer; (g) Required marks on the portable tank are legible and in accordance with the applicable requirements; and (h) The framework, supports and arrangements for lifting the portable tank are in a satisfactory condition. 6.7.2.19.9 The inspections and tests in 6.7.2.19.1, 6.7.2.19.3, 6.7.2.19.4, 6.7.2.19.5 and 6.7.2.19.7 shall be performed or witnessed by an expert approved by the competent authority or its authorized body. When the pressure test is a part of the inspection and test, the test pressure shall be the one indicated on the data plate of the portable tank. While under pressure, the portable tank shall be inspected for any leaks in the shell, piping or equipment. 6.7.2.19.10 In all cases when cutting, burning or welding operations on the shell have been effected, that work shall be to the approval of the competent authority or its authorized body taking into account the pressure vessel code used for the construction of the shell. A pressure test to the original test pressure shall be performed after the work is completed. 6.7.2.19.11 When evidence of any unsafe condition is discovered, the portable tank shall not be returned to service until it has been corrected and the test is repeated and passed. 6.7.2.20 Marking 6.7.2.20.1 Every portable tank shall be fitted with a corrosion resistant metal plate permanently attached to the portable tank in a conspicuous place readily accessible for inspection. When for reasons of portable tank arrangements the plate cannot be permanently attached to the shell, the shell shall be marked with at least the information required by the pressure vessel code. As a minimum, at least the following information shall be marked on the plate by stamping or by any other similar method: (a) Owner information (i) Owner’s registration number; (b) Manufacturing information (i) Country of manufacture; (ii) Year of manufacture; (iii) Manufacturer’s name or mark; (iv) Manufacturer’s serial number; (c) Approval information (i) The United Nations packaging symbol ; This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or an MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.11; (ii) Approval country; (iii) Authorized body for the design approval; (iv) Design approval number; (v) Letters "AA", if the design was approved under alternative arrangements (see 6.7.1.2); (vi) Pressure vessel code to which the shell is designed; (d) Pressures (i) MAWP (in bar gauge or kPa gauge) ; (ii) Test pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge) NOTEREF _Ref254677287 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 3 ; (iii) Initial pressure test date (month and year); (iv) Identification mark of the initial pressure test witness; (v) External design pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge) NOTEREF _Ref254677287 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 3 ; (vi) MAWP for heating/cooling system (in bar gauge or kPa gauge) NOTEREF _Ref254677287 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 3 (when applicable); (e) Temperatures (i) Design temperature range (in °C) NOTEREF _Ref254677287 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 3 ; (f) Materials (i) Shell material(s) and material standard reference(s); (ii) Equivalent thickness in reference steel (in mm) NOTEREF _Ref254677287 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 3 ; (iii) Lining material (when applicable); (g) Capacity (i) Tank water capacity at 20 °C (in litres) NOTEREF _Ref254677287 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 3 ; This indication is to be followed by the symbol "S" when the shell is divided by surge plates into sections of not more than 7 500 litres capacity; (ii) Water capacity of each compartment at 20 °C (in litres) NOTEREF _Ref254677287 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 3 (when applicable, for multi-compartment tanks). This indication is to be followed by the symbol "S" when the compartment is divided by surge plates into sections of not more than 7 500 litres capacity; (h) Periodic inspections and tests (i) Type of the most recent periodic test (2.5-year, 5-year or exceptional); (ii) Date of the most recent periodic test (month and year); (iii) Test pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge) NOTEREF _Ref254677287 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 3 of the most recent periodic test (if applicable); (iv) Identification mark of the authorized body who performed or witnessed the most recent test. Figure 6.7.2.20.1: Example of a plate for marking Owner’s registration number MANUFACTURING INFORMATION Country of manufacture Year of manufacture Manufacturer Manufacturer’s serial number APPROVAL INFORMATION Approval country Authorized body for design approval Design approval number "AA" (if applicable) Shell design code (pressure vessel code) PRESSURES MAWP bar or kPa Test pressure bar or kPa Initial pressure test date: (mm/yyyy) Witness stamp: External design pressure bar or kPa MAWP for heating/cooling system ( when applicable) bar or kPa TEMPERATURES Design temperature range °C to °C MATERIALS Shell material(s) and material standard reference(s) Equivalent thickness in reference steel mm Lining material (when applicable) CAPACITY Tank water capacity at 20 °C litres "S" (if applicable) Water capacity of compartment ___ at 20 °C (when applicable, for multi-compartment tanks) litres "S" (if applicable) PERIODIC INSPECTIONS / TESTS Test type Test date Witness stamp and test pressure a Test type Test date Witness stamp and test pressure a (mm/yyyy) bar or kPa (mm/yyyy) bar or kPa a Test pressure if applicable. 6.7.2.20.2 The following particulars shall be durably marked either on the portable tank itself or on a metal plate firmly secured to the portable tank: Name of the operator Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) ___________ kg Unladen (tare) mass ___________ kg Portable tank instruction in accordance with 4.2.5.2.6 NOTE: For the identification of the substances being carried, see also Part 5. 6.7.2.20.3 If a portable tank is designed and approved for handling in open seas, the words "OFFSHORE PORTABLE TANK" shall be marked on the identification plate. 6.7.3 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks intended for the carriage of non-refrigerated liquefied gases NOTE: These requirements also apply to portable tanks intended for the carriage of chemicals under pressure (UN Nos. 3500, 3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505). 6.7.3.1 Definitions For the purposes of this section: Alternative arrangement means an approval granted by the competent authority for a portable tank or MEGC that has been designed, constructed or tested to technical requirements or testing methods other than those specified in this Chapter; Design pressure means the pressure to be used in calculations required by a recognized pressure vessel code. The design pressure shall be not less than the highest of the following pressures: (a) The maximum effective gauge pressure allowed in the shell during filling or discharge; or (b) The sum of: (i) the maximum effective gauge pressure to which the shell is designed as defined in (b) of the MAWP definition (see above); and (ii) a head pressure determined on the basis of the static forces specified in 6.7.3.2.9, but not less than 0.35 bar; Design reference temperature means the temperature at which the vapour pressure of the contents is determined for the purpose of calculating the MAWP. The design reference temperature shall be less than the critical temperature of the non-refrigerated liquefied gas or liquefied gas propellants of chemicals under pressure intended to be carried to ensure that the gas at all times is liquefied. This value for each portable tank type is as follows: (a) Shell with a diameter of 1.5 metres or less: 65 °C; (b) Shell with a diameter of more than 1.5 metres: (i) without insulation or sun shield: 60 °C; (ii) with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12): 55 °C; and (iii) with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12) : 50 °C; Design temperature range for the shell shall be –40 °C to 50 °C for non-refrigerated liquefied gases carried under ambient conditions. More severe design temperatures shall be considered for portable tanks subjected to severe climatic conditions; Filling density means the average mass of non-refrigerated liquefied gas per litre of shell capacity (kg/l). The filling density is given in portable tank instruction T50 in 4.2.5.2.6; Leakproofness test means a test using gas subjecting the shell and its service equipment to an effective internal pressure of not less than 25% of the MAWP; Maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) means a pressure that shall be not less than the highest of the following pressures measured at the top of the shell while in operating position, but in no case less than 7 bar: (a) The maximum effective gauge pressure allowed in the shell during filling or discharge; or (b) The maximum effective gauge pressure to which the shell is designed, which shall be: (i) for a non-refrigerated liquefied gas listed in the portable tank instruction T50 in 4.2.5.2.6, the MAWP (in bar) given in T50 portable tank instruction for that gas; (ii) for other non-refrigerated liquefied gases, not less than the sum of: – the absolute vapour pressure (in bar) of the non-refrigerated liquefied gas at the design reference temperature minus 1 bar; and – the partial pressure (in bar) of air or other gases in the ullage space being determined by the design reference temperature and the liquid phase expansion due to an increase of the mean bulk temperature of t r -t f (t f = filling temperature, usually 15 °C, t r = maximum mean bulk temperature, 50 °C); (iii) for chemicals under pressure, the MAWP (in bar) given in T 50 portable tank instruction for the liquefied gas portion of the propellants listed in T 50 in 4.2.5.2.6; Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) means the sum of the tare mass of the portable tank and the heaviest load authorized for carriage; Mild steel means a steel with a guaranteed minimum tensile strength of 360 N/mm 2 to 440 N/mm 2 and a guaranteed minimum elongation at fracture conforming to 6.7.3.3.3.3; Portable tank means a multimodal tank having a capacity of more than 450 litres used for the carriage of non-refrigerated liquefied gases of Class 2. The portable tank includes a shell fitted with service equipment and structural equipment necessary for the carriage of gases. The portable tank shall be capable of being filled and discharged without the removal of its structural equipment. It shall possess stabilizing members external to the shell, and shall be capable of being lifted when full. It shall be designed primarily to be loaded onto a road vehicle, wagon or sea-going or inland navigation vessel and shall be equipped with skids, mountings or accessories to facilitate mechanical handling. Tank-vehicles, tank-wagons, non-metallic tanks, intermediate bulk containers (IBCs), gas cylinders and large receptacles are not considered to fall within the definition for portable tanks; Reference steel means a steel with a tensile strength of 370 N/mm 2 and an elongation at fracture of 27%; Service equipment means measuring instruments and filling, discharge, venting, safety and insulating devices; Shell means the part of the portable tank which retains the non-refrigerated liquefied gas intended for carriage (tank proper), including openings and their closures, but does not include service equipment or external structural equipment; Structural equipment means the reinforcing, fastening, protective and stabilizing members external to the shell; Test pressure means the maximum gauge pressure at the top of the shell during the pressure test. 6.7.3.2 General design and construction requirements 6.7.3.2.1 Shells shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the requirements of a pressure vessel code recognized by the competent authority. Shells shall be made of steel suitable for forming. The materials shall in principle conform to national or international material standards. For welded shells, only a material whose weldability has been fully demonstrated shall be used. Welds shall be skilfully made and afford complete safety. When the manufacturing process or the materials make it necessary, the shells shall be suitability heat-treated to guarantee adequate toughness in the weld and in the heat affected zones. In choosing the material the design temperature range shall be taken into account with respect to risk of brittle fracture, to stress corrosion cracking and to resistance to impact. When fine grain steel is used, the guaranteed value of the yield strength shall be not more than 460 N/mm 2 and the guaranteed value of the upper limit of the tensile strength shall be not more than 725 N/mm 2 according to the material specification. Portable tank materials shall be suitable for the external environment in which they may be carried. 6.7.3.2.2 Portable tank shells, fittings and pipework shall be constructed of materials which are: (a) Substantially immune to attack by the non-refrigerated liquefied gas(es) intended to be carried; or (b) Properly passivated or neutralized by chemical reaction. 6.7.3.2.3 Gaskets shall be made of materials compatible with the non-refrigerated liquefied gas(es) intended to be carried. 6.7.3.2.4 Contact between dissimilar metals which could result in damage by galvanic action shall be avoided. 6.7.3.2.5 The materials of the portable tank, including any devices, gaskets, and accessories, shall not adversely affect the non-refrigerated liquefied gas(es) intended for carriage in the portable tank. 6.7.3.2.6 Portable tanks shall be designed and constructed with supports to provide a secure base during carriage and with suitable lifting and tie-down attachments. 6.7.3.2.7 Portable tanks shall be designed to withstand, without loss of contents, at least the internal pressure due to the contents, and the static, dynamic and thermal loads during normal conditions of handling and carriage. The design shall demonstrate that the effects of fatigue, caused by repeated application of these loads through the expected life of the portable tank, have been taken into account. 6.7.3.2.8 Shells shall be designed to withstand an external pressure of at least 0.4 bar (gauge pressure) above the internal pressure without permanent deformation. When the shell is to be subjected to a significant vacuum before filling or during discharge it shall be designed to withstand an external pressure of at least 0.9 bar (gauge pressure) above the internal pressure and shall be proven at that pressure. 6.7.3.2.9 Portable tanks and their fastenings shall, under the maximum permissible load, be capable of absorbing the following separately applied static forces: (a) In the direction of travel: twice the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g) ; (b) Horizontally at right angles to the direction of travel: the MPGM (when the direction of travel is not clearly determined, the forces shall be equal to twice the MPGM) multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g) NOTEREF _Ref80763736 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 5 ; (c) Vertically upwards: the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g) NOTEREF _Ref80763736 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 5 ; and (d) Vertically downwards: twice the MPGM (total loading including the effect of gravity) multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g) NOTEREF _Ref80763736 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 5 . 6.7.3.2.10 Under each of the forces in 6.7.3.2.9, the safety factor to be observed shall be as follows: (a) For steels having a clearly defined yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in relation to the guaranteed yield strength; or (b) For steels with no clearly defined yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in relation to the guaranteed 0.2% proof strength and, for austenitic steels, the 1% proof strength. 6.7.3.2.11 The values of yield strength or proof strength shall be the values according to national or international material standards. When austenitic steels are used, the specified minimum values of yield strength and proof strength according to the material standards may be increased by up to 15% when these greater values are attested in the material inspection certificate. When no material standard exists for the steel in question, the value of yield strength or proof strength used shall be approved by the competent authority. 6.7.3.2.12 When the shells intended for the carriage of non-refrigerated liquefied gases are equipped with thermal insulation, the thermal insulation systems shall satisfy the following requirements: (a) It shall consist of a shield covering not less than the upper third but not more than the upper half of the surface of the shell and separated from the shell by an air space about 40 mm across; (b) It shall consist of a complete cladding of adequate thickness of insulating materials protected so as to prevent the ingress of moisture and damage under normal conditions of carriage and so as to provide a heat transfer coefficient of not more than 0.67 (W · m 2 · K 1 ); (c) When the protective covering is so closed as to be gas-tight, a device shall be provided to prevent any dangerous pressure from developing in the insulating layer in the event of inadequate gas tightness of the shell or of its items of equipment; and (d) The thermal insulation shall not inhibit access to the fittings and discharge devices. 6.7.3.2.13 Portable tanks intended for the carriage of flammable non-refrigerated liquefied gases shall be capable of being electrically earthed. 6.7.3.3 Design criteria 6.7.3.3.1 Shells shall be of a circular cross section. 6.7.3.3.2 Shells shall be designed and constructed to withstand a test pressure not less than 1.3 times the design pressure. The shell design shall take into account the minimum MAWP values provided in portable tank instruction T50 in 4.2.5.2.6 for each non-refrigerated liquefied gas intended for carriage. Attention is drawn to the minimum shell thickness requirements for these shells specified in 6.7.3.4. 6.7.3.3.3 For steels exhibiting a clearly defined yield point or characterized by a guaranteed proof strength (0.2% proof strength, generally, or 1% proof strength for austenitic steels) the primary membrane stress (sigma) in the shell shall not exceed 0.75 Re or 0.50 Rm, whichever is lower, at the test pressure, where: Re = yield strength in N/mm 2 , or 0.2% proof strength or, for austenitic steels, 1% proof stress; Rm = minimum tensile strength in N/mm 2 . 6.7.3.3.3.1 The values of Re and Rm to be used shall be the specified minimum values according to national or international material standards. When austenitic steels are used, the specified minimum values for Re and Rm according to the material standards may be increased by up to 15% when these greater values are attested in the material inspection certificate. When no material standard exists for the steel in question, the values of Re and Rm used shall be approved by the competent authority or its authorized body. 6.7.3.3.3.2 Steels which have a Re/Rm ratio of more than 0.85 are not allowed for the construction of welded shells. The values of Re and Rm to be used in determining this ratio shall be the values specified in the material inspection certificate. 6.7.3.3.3.3 Steels used in the construction of shells shall have an elongation at fracture, in %, of not less than 10 000/Rm with an absolute minimum of 16% for fine grain steels and 20% for other steels. 6.7.3.3.3.4 For the purpose of determining actual values for materials, it shall be noted that for sheet metal, the axis of the tensile test specimen shall be at right angles (transversely) to the direction of rolling. The permanent elongation at fracture shall be measured on test specimens of rectangular cross sections in accordance with ISO 6892:1998 using a 50 mm gauge length. 6.7.3.4 Minimum shell thickness 6.7.3.4.1 The minimum shell thickness shall be the greater thickness based on: (a) The minimum thickness determined in accordance with the requirements in 6.7.3.4; and (b) The minimum thickness determined in accordance with the recognized pressure vessel code including the requirements in 6.7.3.3. In addition, any relevant portable tank special provision indicated in Column (11) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.3 shall be taken into account. 6.7.3.4.2 The cylindrical portions, ends (heads) and manhole covers of shells of not more than 1.80 m in diameter shall be not less than 5 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the steel to be used. Shells of more than 1.80 m in diameter shall be not less than 6 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the steel to be used. 6.7.3.4.3 The cylindrical portions, ends (heads) and manhole covers of all shells shall be not less than 4 mm thick regardless of the material of construction. 6.7.3.4.4 The equivalent thickness of a steel other than the thickness prescribed for the reference steel in 6.7.3.4.2 shall be determined using the following formula: e 1 = where: e 1 = required equivalent thickness (in mm) of the steel to be used; e 0 = minimum thickness (in mm) for the reference steel specified in 6.7.3.4.2; Rm 1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength (in N/mm 2 ) of the steel to be used (see 6.7.3.3.3); A 1 = guaranteed minimum elongation at fracture (in %) of the steel to be used according to national or international standards. 6.7.3.4.5 In no case shall the wall thickness be less than that prescribed in 6.7.3.4.1 to 6.7.3.4.3. All parts of the shell shall have a minimum thickness as determined by 6.7.3.4.1 to 6.7.3.4.3. This thickness shall be exclusive of any corrosion allowance. 6.7.3.4.6 When mild steel is used (see 6.7.3.1), calculation using the formula in 6.7.3.4.4 is not required. 6.7.3.4.7 There shall be no sudden change of plate thickness at the attachment of the ends (heads) to the cylindrical portion of the shell. 6.7.3.5 Service equipment 6.7.3.5.1 Service equipment shall be so arranged as to be protected against the risk of being wrenched off or damaged during handling and carriage. When the connection between the frame and the shell allows relative movement between the sub-assemblies, the equipment shall be so fastened as to permit such movement without risk of damage to working parts. The external discharge fittings (pipe sockets, shut-off devices), the internal stop-valve and its seating shall be protected against the danger of being wrenched off by external forces (for example using shear sections). The filling and discharge devices (including flanges or threaded plugs) and any protective caps shall be capable of being secured against unintended opening. 6.7.3.5.2 All openings with a diameter of more than 1.5 mm in shells of portable tanks, except openings for pressure-relief devices, inspection openings and closed bleed holes, shall be fitted with at least three mutually independent shut-off devices in series, the first being an internal stop-valve, excess flow valve or equivalent device, the second being an external stop-valve and the third being a blank flange or equivalent device. 6.7.3.5.2.1 When a portable tank is fitted with an excess flow valve, the excess flow valve shall be so fitted that its seating is inside the shell or inside a welded flange or, when fitted externally, its mountings shall be designed so that in the event of impact its effectiveness shall be maintained. The excess flow valves shall be selected and fitted so as to close automatically when the rated flow specified by the manufacturer is reached. Connections and accessories leading to or from such a valve shall have a capacity for a flow more than the rated flow of the excess flow valve. 6.7.3.5.3 For filling and discharge openings, the first shut-off device shall be an internal stop-valve and the second shall be a stop-valve placed in an accessible position on each discharge and filling pipe. 6.7.3.5.4 For filling and discharge bottom openings of portable tanks intended for the carriage of flammable and/or toxic non-refrigerated liquefied gases or chemicals under pressure the internal stop-valve shall be a quick closing safety device which closes automatically in the event of unintended movement of the portable tank during filling or discharge or fire engulfment. Except for portable tanks having a capacity of not more than 1 000 litres, it shall be possible to operate this device by remote control. 6.7.3.5.5 In addition to filling, discharge and gas pressure equalizing orifices, shells may have openings in which gauges, thermometers and manometers can be fitted. Connections for such instruments shall be made by suitable welded nozzles or pockets and not be screwed connections through the shell. 6.7.3.5.6 All portable tanks shall be fitted with manholes or other inspection openings of suitable size to allow for internal inspection and adequate access for maintenance and repair of the interior. 6.7.3.5.7 External fittings shall be grouped together so far as reasonably practicable. 6.7.3.5.8 Each connection on a portable tank shall be clearly marked to indicate its function. 6.7.3.5.9 Each stop-valve or other means of closure shall be designed and constructed to a rated pressure not less than the MAWP of the shell taking into account the temperatures expected during carriage. All stop-valves with a screwed spindle shall close by a clockwise motion of the handwheel. For other stop-valves the position (open and closed) and direction of closure shall be clearly indicated. All stop-valves shall be designed to prevent unintentional opening. 6.7.3.5.10 Piping shall be designed, constructed and installed so as to avoid the risk of damage due to thermal expansion and contraction, mechanical shock and vibration. All piping shall be of suitable metallic material. Welded pipe joints shall be used wherever possible. 6.7.3.5.11 Joints in copper tubing shall be brazed or have an equally strong metal union. The melting point of brazing materials shall be no lower than 525 °C. The joints shall not decrease the strength of tubing as may happen when cutting threads. 6.7.3.5.12 The burst pressure of all piping and pipe fittings shall be not less than the highest of four times the MAWP of the shell or four times the pressure to which it may be subjected in service by the action of a pump or other device (except pressure-relief devices). 6.7.3.5.13 Ductile metals shall be used in the construction of valves and accessories. 6.7.3.6 Bottom openings 6.7.3.6.1 Certain non-refrigerated liquefied gases shall not be carried in portable tanks with bottom openings when portable tank instruction T50 in 4.2.5.2.6 indicates that bottom openings are not allowed. There shall be no openings below the liquid level of the shell when it is filled to its maximum permissible filling limit. 6.7.3.7 Pressure-relief devices 6.7.3.7.1 Portable tanks shall be provided with one or more spring-loaded pressure-relief devices. The pressure-relief devices shall open automatically at a pressure not less than the MAWP and be fully open at a pressure equal to 110% of the MAWP. These devices shall, after discharge, close at a pressure not lower than 10% below the pressure at which discharge starts and shall remain closed at all lower pressures. The pressure-relief devices shall be of a type that will resist dynamic forces including liquid surge. Frangible discs not in series with a spring-loaded pressure-relief device are not permitted. 6.7.3.7.2 Pressure-relief devices shall be designed to prevent the entry of foreign matter, the leakage of gas and the development of any dangerous excess pressure. 6.7.3.7.3 Portable tanks intended for the carriage of certain non-refrigerated liquefied gases identified in portable tank instruction T50 in 4.2.5.2.6 shall have a pressure-relief device approved by the competent authority. Unless a portable tank in dedicated service is fitted with an approved relief device constructed of materials compatible with the load, such device shall comprise a frangible disc preceding a spring-loaded device. The space between the frangible disc and the device shall be provided with a pressure gauge or a suitable tell-tale indicator. This arrangement permits the detection of disc rupture, pinholing or leakage which could cause a malfunction of the pressure-relief device. The frangible discs shall rupture at a nominal pressure 10% above the start-to-discharge pressure of the relief device. 6.7.3.7.4 In the case of multi-purpose portable tanks, the pressure-relief devices shall open at a pressure indicated in 6.7.3.7.1 for the gas having the highest maximum allowable pressure of the gases allowed to be carried in the portable tank. 6.7.3.8 Capacity of relief devices 6.7.3.8.1 The combined delivery capacity of the relief devices shall be sufficient that, in the event of total fire engulfment, the pressure (including accumulation) inside the shell does not exceed 120% of the MAWP. Spring-loaded relief devices shall be used to achieve the full relief capacity prescribed. In the case of multi-purpose tanks, the combined delivery capacity of the pressure-relief devices shall be taken for the gas which requires the highest delivery capacity of the gases allowed to be carried in portable tanks. 6.7.3.8.1.1 To determine the total required capacity of the relief devices, which shall be regarded as being the sum of the individual capacities of the several devices, the following formula shall be used: where: Q = minimum required rate of discharge in cubic metres of air per second (m 3 /s) at standard conditions: 1 bar and 0 °C (273 K); F = is a coefficient with the following value: for uninsulated shells: F = 1; for insulated shells: F = U(649-t)/13.6 but in no case is less than 0.25 where: U = heat transfer coefficient of the insulation, in kW·m -2 ·K -1 , at 38 °C; t = actual temperature of the non-refrigerated liquefied gas during filling (°C); when this temperature is unknown, let t=15 °C; The value of F given above for insulated shells may be taken provided that the insulation is in accordance with 6.7.3.8.1.2; A = total external surface area of shell in square metres; Z = the gas compressibility factor in the accumulating condition (when this factor is unknown, let Z =1.0); T = absolute temperature in Kelvin (°C + 273) above the pressure relief devices in the accumulating condition; L = the latent heat of vaporization of the liquid, in kJ/kg, in the accumulating condition; M = molecular mass of the discharged gas; C = a constant which is derived from one of the following formulae as a function of the ratio k of specific heats where c p is the specific heat at constant pressure; and c v is the specific heat at constant volume. when k >1: when k = 1 or k is unknown: where e is the mathematical constant 2.7183. C may also be taken from the following table: k C k C k C 1.00 1.02 1.04 1.06 1.08 1.10 1.12 1.14 1.16 1.18 1.20 1.22 1.24 0.607 0.611 0.615 0.620 0.624 0.628 0.633 0.637 0.641 0.645 0.649 0.652 0.656 1.26 1.28 1.30 1.32 1.34 1.36 1.38 1.40 1.42 1.44 1.46 1.48 1.50 0.660 0.664 0.667 0.671 0.674 0.678 0.681 0.685 0.688 0.691 0.695 0.698 0.701 1.52 1.54 1.56 1.58 1.60 1.62 1.64 1.66 1.68 1.70 2.00 2.20 0.704 0.707 0.710 0.713 0.716 0.719 0.722 0.725 0.728 0.731 0.770 0.793 NOTE: This formula applies only to non-refrigerated liquefied gases which have critical temperatures well above the temperature at the accumulating condition. For gases which have critical temperatures near or below the temperature at the accumulating condition, the calculation of the pressure-relief device delivery capacity shall consider further thermodynamic properties of the gas (see, e.g. CGA S-1.2-2003 Pressure Relief Device Standards – Part 2 – Cargo and Portable Tanks for Compressed Gases). 6.7.3.8.1.2 Insulation systems, used for the purpose of reducing the venting capacity, shall be approved by the competent authority or its authorized body. In all cases, insulation systems approved for this purpose shall: (a) Remain effective at all temperatures up to 649 °C; and (b) Be jacketed with a material having a melting point of 700 °C or greater. 6.7.3.9 Marking of pressure-relief devices 6.7.3.9.1 Every pressure-relief device shall be plainly and permanently marked with the following particulars: (a) The pressure (in bar or kPa) at which it is set to discharge; (b) The allowable tolerance at the discharge pressure for spring-loaded devices; (c) The reference temperature corresponding to the rated pressure for frangible discs; (d) The rated flow capacity of the device in standard cubic metres of air per second (m 3 /s); and (e) The cross sectional flow areas of the spring loaded pressure-relief devices and frangible discs in mm 2 . When practicable, the following information shall also be shown: (f) The manufacturer's name and relevant catalogue number of the device. 6.7.3.9.2 The rated flow capacity marked on the pressure-relief devices shall be determined according to ISO 4126-1:2004 and ISO 4126-7:2004. 6.7.3.10 Connections to pressure-relief devices 6.7.3.10.1 Connections to pressure-relief devices shall be of sufficient size to enable the required discharge to pass unrestricted to the safety device. No stop-valve shall be installed between the shell and the pressure-relief devices except when duplicate devices are provided for maintenance or other reasons and the stop-valves serving the devices actually in use are locked open or the stop-valves are interlocked so that at least one of the duplicate devices is always operable and capable of meeting the requirements of 6.7.3.8. There shall be no obstruction in an opening leading to a vent or pressure-relief device which might restrict or cut-off the flow from the shell to that device. Vents from the pressure-relief devices, when used, shall deliver the relieved vapour or liquid to the atmosphere in conditions of minimum back-pressure on the relieving device. 6.7.3.11 Siting of pressure-relief devices 6.7.3.11.1 Each pressure-relief device inlet shall be situated on top of the shell in a position as near the longitudinal and transverse centre of the shell as reasonably practicable. All pressure relief device inlets shall under maximum filling conditions be situated in the vapour space of the shell and the devices shall be so arranged as to ensure that the escaping vapour is discharged unrestrictedly. For flammable non-refrigerated liquefied gases, the escaping vapour shall be directed away from the shell in such a manner that it cannot impinge upon the shell. Protective devices which deflect the flow of vapour are permissible provided the required relief-device capacity is not reduced. 6.7.3.11.2 Arrangements shall be made to prevent access to the pressure-relief devices by unauthorized persons and to protect the devices from damage caused by the portable tank overturning. 6.7.3.12 Gauging devices 6.7.3.12.1 Unless a portable tank is intended to be filled by weight it shall be equipped with one or more gauging devices. Glass level-gauges and gauges made of other fragile material, which are in direct communication with the contents of the shell shall not be used. 6.7.3.13 Portable tank supports, frameworks, lifting and tie-down attachments 6.7.3.13.1 Portable tanks shall be designed and constructed with a support structure to provide a secure base during carriage. The forces specified in 6.7.3.2.9 and the safety factor specified in 6.7.3.2.10 shall be considered in this aspect of the design. Skids, frameworks, cradles or other similar structures are acceptable. 6.7.3.13.2 The combined stresses caused by portable tank mountings (e.g. cradles, frameworks, etc.) and portable tank lifting and tie-down attachments shall not cause excessive stress in any portion of the shell. Permanent lifting and tie-down attachments shall be fitted to all portable tanks. Preferably they shall be fitted to the portable tank supports but may be secured to reinforcing plates located on the shell at the points of support. 6.7.3.13.3 In the design of supports and frameworks the effects of environmental corrosion shall be taken into account. 6.7.3.13.4 Forklift pockets shall be capable of being closed off. The means of closing forklift pockets shall be a permanent part of the framework or permanently attached to the framework. Single compartment portable tanks with a length less than 3.65 m need not have closed off forklift pockets provided that: (a) The shell and all the fittings are well protected from being hit by the forklift blades; and (b) The distance between the centres of the forklift pockets is at least half of the maximum length of the portable tank. 6.7.3.13.5 When portable tanks are not protected during carriage, according to 4.2.2.3, the shells and service equipment shall be protected against damage to the shell and service equipment resulting from lateral or longitudinal impact or overturning. External fittings shall be protected so as to preclude the release of the shell contents upon impact or overturning of the portable tank on its fittings. Examples of protection include: (a) Protection against lateral impact which may consist of longitudinal bars protecting the shell on both sides at the level of the median line; (b) Protection of the portable tank against overturning which may consist of reinforcement rings or bars fixed across the frame; (c) Protection against rear impact which may consist of a bumper or frame; (d) Protection of the shell against damage from impact or overturning by use of an ISO frame in accordance with ISO 1496-3:1995. 6.7.3.14 Design approval 6.7.3.14.1 The competent authority or its authorized body shall issue a design approval certificate for any new design of a portable tank. This certificate shall attest that a portable tank has been surveyed by that authority, is suitable for its intended purpose and meets the requirements of this Chapter and where appropriate the provisions for gases provided in portable tank instruction T 50 in 4.2.5.2.6. When a series of portable tanks are manufactured without change in the design, the certificate shall be valid for the entire series. The certificate shall refer to the prototype test report, the gases allowed to be carried, the materials of construction of the shell and an approval number. The approval number shall consist of the distinguishing sign or mark of the State in whose territory the approval was granted, indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic , and a registration number. Any alternative arrangements according to 6.7.1.2 shall be indicated on the certificate. A design approval may serve for the approval of smaller portable tanks made of materials of the same kind and thickness, by the same fabrication techniques and with identical supports, equivalent closures and other appurtenances. 6.7.3.14.2 The prototype test report for the design approval shall include at least the following: (a) The results of the applicable framework test specified in ISO 1496-3:1995; (b) The results of the initial inspection and test in 6.7.3.15.3; and (c) The results of the impact test in 6.7.3.15.1, when applicable. 6.7.3.15 Inspection and testing 6.7.3.15.1 Portable tanks meeting the definition of container in the International Convention for Safe Containers (CSC), 1972, as amended, shall not be used unless they are successfully qualified by subjecting a representative prototype of each design to the Dynamic, Longitudinal Impact Test prescribed in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part IV, Section 41. 6.7.3.15.2 The shell and items of equipment of each portable tank shall be inspected and tested before being put into service for the first time (initial inspection and test) and thereafter at not more than five-year intervals (5 year periodic inspection and test) with an intermediate periodic inspection and test (2.5 year periodic inspection and test) midway between the 5 year periodic inspections and tests. The 2.5 year inspection and test may be performed within 3 months of the specified date. An exceptional inspection and test shall be performed regardless of the last periodic inspection and test when necessary according to 6.7.3.15.7. 6.7.3.15.3 The initial inspection and test of a portable tank shall include a check of the design characteristics, an internal and external examination of the portable tank and its fittings with due regard to the non-refrigerated liquefied gases to be carried, and a pressure test referring to the test pressures according to 6.7.3.3.2. The pressure test may be performed as a hydraulic test or by using another liquid or gas with the agreement of the competent authority or its authorized body. Before the portable tank is placed into service, a leakproofness test and a test of the satisfactory operation of all service equipment shall also be performed. When the shell and its fittings have been pressure-tested separately, they shall be subjected together after assembly to a leakproofness test. All welds subject to full stress level in the shell shall be inspected during the initial test by radiographic, ultrasonic, or another suitable non-destructive test method. This does not apply to the jacket. 6.7.3.15.4 The 5 year periodic inspection and test shall include an internal and external examination and, as a general rule, a hydraulic pressure test. Sheathing, thermal insulation and the like shall be removed only to the extent required for reliable appraisal of the condition of the portable tank. When the shell and equipment have been pressure-tested separately, they shall be subjected together after assembly to a leakproofness test. 6.7.3.15.5 The intermediate 2.5 year periodic inspection and test shall at least include an internal and external examination of the portable tank and its fittings with due regard to the non-refrigerated liquefied gases intended to be carried, a leakproofness test and a check of the satisfactory operation of all service equipment. Sheathing thermal insulation and the like shall be removed only to the extent required for reliable appraisal of the condition of the portable tank. For portable tanks intended for the carriage of a single non-refrigerated liquefied gas, the 2.5 year internal examination may be waived or substituted by other test methods or inspection procedures specified by the competent authority or its authorized body. 6.7.3.15.6 Inspection and test of portable tanks and filling after the date of expiry of the last periodic inspection and test 6.7.3.15.6.1 A portable tank may not be filled and offered for carriage after the date of expiry of the last 5 year or 2.5 year periodic inspection and test as required by 6.7.3.15.2. However a portable tank filled prior to the date of expiry of the last periodic inspection and test may be carried for a period not to exceed three months beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection. In addition, a portable tank may be carried after the date of expiry of the last periodic test and inspection: (a) After emptying but before cleaning, for purposes of performing the next required test or inspection prior to refilling; and (b) Unless otherwise approved by the competent authority, for a period not to exceed six months beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection, in order to allow the return of dangerous goods for proper disposal or recycling. Reference to this exemption shall be mentioned in the transport document. 6.7.3.15.6.2 Except as provided for in 6.7.3.15.6.1, portable tanks which have missed the timeframe for their scheduled 5 year or 2.5-year periodic inspection and test may only be filled and offered for carriage if a new 5-year periodic inspection and test is performed according to 6.7.3.15.4. 6.7.3.15.7 The exceptional inspection and test is necessary when the portable tank shows evidence of damaged or corroded areas, or leakage, or other conditions that indicate a deficiency that could affect the integrity of the portable tank. The extent of the exceptional inspection and test shall depend on the amount of damage or deterioration of the portable tank. It shall include at least the 2.5 year inspection and test according to 6.7.3.15.5. 6.7.3.15.8 The internal and external examinations shall ensure that: (a) The shell is inspected for pitting, corrosion, or abrasions, dents, distortions, defects in welds or any other conditions, including leakage, that might render the portable tank unsafe for carriage. The wall thickness shall be verified by appropriate measurement if this inspection indicates a reduction of wall thickness; (b) The piping, valves, and gaskets are inspected for corroded areas, defects, or any other conditions, including leakage, that might render the portable tank unsafe for filling, discharge or carriage; (c) Devices for tightening manhole covers are operative and there is no leakage at manhole covers or gaskets; (d) Missing or loose bolts or nuts on any flanged connection or blank flange are replaced or tightened; (e) All emergency devices and valves are free from corrosion, distortion and any damage or defect that could prevent their normal operation. Remote closure devices and self-closing stop-valves shall be operated to demonstrate proper operation; (f) Required marks on the portable tank are legible and in accordance with the applicable requirements; and (g) The framework, the supports and the arrangements for lifting the portable tank are in satisfactory condition. 6.7.3.15.9 The inspections and tests in 6.7.3.15.1, 6.7.3.15.3, 6.7.3.15.4, 6.7.3.15.5 and 6.7.3.15.7 shall be performed or witnessed by an expert approved by the competent authority or its authorized body. When the pressure test is a part of the inspection and test, the test pressure shall be the one indicated on the data plate of the portable tank. While under pressure, the portable tank shall be inspected for any leaks in the shell, piping or equipment. 6.7.3.15.10 In all cases when cutting, burning or welding operations on the shell have been effected, that work shall be to the approval of the competent authority or its authorized body taking into account the pressure vessel code used for the construction of the shell. A pressure test to the original test pressure shall be performed after the work is completed. 6.7.3.15.11 When evidence of any unsafe condition is discovered, the portable tank shall not be returned to service until it has been corrected and the pressure test is repeated and passed. 6.7.3.16 Marking 6.7.3.16.1 Every portable tank shall be fitted with a corrosion resistant metal plate permanently attached to the portable tank in a conspicuous place readily accessible for inspection. When for reasons of portable tank arrangements the plate cannot be permanently attached to the shell, the shell shall be marked with at least the information required by the pressure vessel code. As a minimum, at least the following information shall be marked on the plate by stamping or by any other similar method: (a) Owner information (i) Owner’s registration number; (b) Manufacturing information (i) Country of manufacture; (ii) Year of manufacture; (iii) Manufacturer’s name or mark; (iv) Manufacturer’s serial number; (c) Approval information (i) The United Nations packaging symbol ; This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk container, a portable tank or an MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.11; (ii) Approval country; (iii) Authorized body for the design approval; (iv) Design approval number; (v) Letters "AA", if the design was approved under alternative arrangements (see 6.7.1.2); (vi) Pressure vessel code to which the shell is designed; (d) Pressures (i) MAWP (in bar gauge or kPa gauge) ; (ii) Test pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge) NOTEREF _Ref254685468 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 7 ; (iii) Initial pressure test date (month and year); (iv) Identification mark of the initial pressure test witness; (v) External design pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge) NOTEREF _Ref254685468 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 7 ; (e) Temperatures (i) Design temperature range (in °C) NOTEREF _Ref254685468 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 7 ; (ii) Design reference temperature (in °C) NOTEREF _Ref254685468 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 7 ; (f) Materials (i) Shell material(s) and material standard reference(s); (ii) Equivalent thickness in reference steel (in mm) NOTEREF _Ref254685468 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 7 ; (g) Capacity (i) Tank water capacity at 20 °C (in litres) NOTEREF _Ref254685468 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 7 ; (h) Periodic inspections and tests (i) Type of the most recent periodic test (2.5-year, 5-year or exceptional); (ii) Date of the most recent periodic test (month and year); (iii) Test pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge) NOTEREF _Ref254685468 \h \* MERGEFORMAT 7 of the most recent periodic test (if applicable); (iv) Identification mark of the authorized body who performed or witnessed the most recent test. Figure 6.7.3.16.1: Example of a plate for marking Owner’s registration number MANUFACTURING INFORMATION Country of manufacture Year of manufacture Manufacturer Manufacturer’s serial number APPROVAL INFORMATION Approval country Authorized body for design approval Design approval number "AA" (if applicable) Shell design code (pressure vessel code) PRESSURES MAWP bar or kPa Test pressure bar or kPa Initial pressure test date: (mm/yyyy) Witness stamp: External design pressure bar or kPa TEMPERATURES Design temperature range °C to °C Design reference temperature °C MATERIALS Shell material(s) and material standard reference(s) Equivalent thickness in reference steel mm CAPACITY Tank water capacity at 20 °C litres PERIODIC INSPECTIONS / TESTS Test type Test date Witness stamp and test pressure a Test type Test date Witness stamp and test pressure a (mm/yyyy) bar or kPa (mm/yyyy) bar or kPa a Test pressure if applicable. 6.7.3.16.2 The following information shall be durably marked either on the portable tank itself or on a metal plate firmly secured to the portable tank: Name of the operator Name of non-refrigerated liquefied gas(es) permitted for carriage Maximum permissible load mass for each non-refrigerated liquefied gas permitted ________ kg Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) __________ kg Unladen (tare) mass _________ kg Portable tank instruction in accordance with 4.2.5.2.6 NOTE: For the identification of the non-refrigerated liquefied gases being carried, see also Part 5. 6.7.3.16.3 If a portable tank is designed and approved for handling in open seas, the words "OFFSHORE PORTABLE TANK" shall be marked on the identification plate. 6.7.4 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks intended for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases 6.7.4.1 Definitions For the purposes of this section: Alternative arrangement means an approval granted by the competent authority for a portable tank or MEGC that has been designed, constructed or tested to technical requirements or testing methods other than those specified in this Chapter; Holding time means the time that will elapse from the establishment of the initial filling condition until the pressure has risen due to heat influx to the lowest set pressure of the pressure limiting device(s); Jacket means the outer insulation cover or cladding which may be part of the insulation system; Leakproofness test means a test using gas subjecting the shell and its service equipment, to an effective internal pressure not less than 90% of the MAWP; Maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) means the maximum effective gauge pressure permissible at the top of the shell of a loaded portable tank in its operating position including the highest effective pressure during filling and discharge; Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) means the sum of the tare mass of the portable tank and the heaviest load authorized for carriage; Minimum design temperature m eans the temperature which is used for the design and construction of the shell not higher than the lowest (coldest) temperature (service temperature) of the contents during normal conditions of filling, discharge and carriage; Portable tank means a thermally insulated multimodal tank having a capacity of more than 450 litres fitted with service equipment and structural equipment necessary for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases. The portable tank shall be capable of being filled and discharged without the removal of its structural equipment. It shall possess stabilizing members external to the tank, and shall be capable of being lifted when full. It shall be designed primarily to be loaded onto a road vehicle, wagon or sea-going or inland navigation vessel and shall be equipped with skids, mountings or accessories to facilitate mechanical handling. Tank-vehicles, tank-wagons, non-metallic tanks, intermediate bulk containers (IBCs), gas cylinders and large receptacles are not considered to fall within the definition for portable tanks; Reference steel means a steel with a tensile strength of 370 N/mm 2 and an elongation at fracture of 27%; Service equipment means measuring instruments and filling, discharge, venting, safety, pressurizing, cooling and thermal insulation devices; Shell means the part of the portable tank which retains the refrigerated liquefied gas intended for carriage, including openings and their closures, but does not include service equipment or external structural equipment; Structural equipment means the reinforcing, fastening, protective and stabilizing members external to the shell; Tank means a construction which normally consists of either: (a) A jacket and one or more inner shells where the space between the shell(s) and the jacket is exhausted of air (vacuum insulation) and may incorporate a thermal insulation system; or (b) A jacket and an inner shell with an intermediate layer of solid thermally insulating material (e.g. solid foam); Test pressure means the maximum gauge pressure at the top of the shell during the pressure test. 6.7.4.2 General design and construction requirements 6.7.4.2.1 Shells shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the requirements of a pressure vessel code recognized by the competent authority. Shells and jackets shall be made of metallic materials suitable for forming. Jackets shall be made of steel. Non-metallic materials may be used for the attachments and supports between the shell and jacket, provided their material properties at the minimum design temperature are proven to be sufficient. The materials shall in principle conform to national or international material standards. For welded shells and jackets only materials whose weldability has been fully demonstrated shall be used. Welds shall be skilfully made and afford complete safety. When the manufacturing process or the materials make it necessary, the shell shall be suitably heat treated to guarantee adequate toughness in the weld and in the heat affected zones. In choosing the material, the minimum design temperature shall be taken into account with respect to risk of brittle fracture, to hydrogen embrittlement, to stress corrosion cracking and to resistance to impact. When fine grain steel is used, the guaranteed value of the yield strength shall be not more than 460 N/mm 2 and the guaranteed value of the upper limit of the tensile strength shall be not more than 725 N/mm 2 in accordance with the material specifications. Portable tank materials shall be suitable for the external environment in which they may be carried. 6.7.4.2.2 Any part of a portable tank, including fittings, gaskets and pipe-work, which can be expected normally to come into contact with the refrigerated liquefied gas carried shall be compatible with that refrigerated liquefied gas. 6.7.4.2.3 Contact between dissimilar metals which could result in damage by galvanic action shall be avoided. 6.7.4.2.4 The thermal insulation system shall include a complete covering of the shell(s) with effective insulating materials. External insulation shall be protected by a jacket so as to prevent the ingress of moisture and other damage under normal carriage conditions. 6.7.4.2.5 When a jacket is so closed as to be gas-tight, a device shall be provided to prevent any dangerous pressure from developing in the insulation space. 6.7.4.2.6 Portable tanks intended for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases having a boiling point below minus (–)182 °C at atmospheric pressure shall not include materials which may react with oxygen or oxygen enriched atmospheres in a dangerous manner, when located in parts of the thermal insulation when there is a risk of contact with oxygen or with oxygen enriched fluid. 6.7.4.2.7 Insulating materials shall not deteriorate unduly in service. 6.7.4.2.8 A reference holding time shall be determined for each refrigerated liquefied gas intended for carriage in a portable tank. 6.7.4.2.8.1 The reference holding time shall be determined by a method recognized by the competent authority on the basis of the following: (a) The effectiveness of the insulation system, determined in accordance with 6.7.4.2.8.2; (b) The lowest set pressure of the pressure limiting device(s); (c) The initial filling conditions; (d) An assumed ambient temperature of 30 °C; (e) The physical properties of the individual refrigerated liquefied gas intended to be carried. 6.7.4.2.8.2 The effectiveness of the insulation system (heat influx in watts) shall be determined by type testing the portable tank in accordance with a procedure recognized by the competent authority. This test shall consist of either: (a) A constant pressure test (for example at atmospheric pressure) when the loss of refrigerated liquefied gas is measured over a period of time; or (b) A closed system test when the rise in pressure in the shell is measured over a period of time. When performing the constant pressure test, variations in atmospheric pressure shall be taken into account. When performing either tests corrections shall be made for any variation of the ambient temperature from the assumed ambient temperature reference value of 30 °C. NOTE: For the determination of the actual holding time before each journey, refer to 4.2.3.7. 6.7.4.2.9 The jacket of a vacuum-insulated double-wall tank shall have either an external design pressure not less than 100 kPa (1 bar) (gauge pressure) calculated in accordance with a recognized technical code or a calculated critical collapsing pressure of not less than 200 kPa (2 bar) (gauge pressure). Internal and external reinforcements may be included in calculating the ability of the jacket to resist the external pressure. 6.7.4.2.10 Portable tanks shall be designed and constructed with supports to provide a secure base during carriage and with suitable lifting and tie-down attachments. 6.7.4.2.11 Portable tanks shall be designed to withstand, without loss of contents, at least the internal pressure due to the contents, and the static, dynamic and thermal loads during normal conditions of handling and carriage. The design shall demonstrate that the effects of fatigue, caused by repeated application of these loads through the expected life of the portable tank, have been take